JP7829867B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines") and revolving-type gaming machines (commonly referred to as "slot machines").

Conventionally, as seen in, for example, Patent Document 1, there are known gaming machines that feature a special game where a large number of prizes can be won when a player hits a winning combination.

In other words, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the starting slot. If a game ball has entered the starting slot, a determination process is performed to determine whether or not a win has occurred. At this time, a special symbol is displayed on a predetermined display for a predetermined variation time. When the predetermined variation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped in a display mode indicating a win, and the opening and closing member of the large prize slot is operated, thereby providing the player with a special game in which they can win many prizes.

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-006393

Conventional gaming machines like these require improvements to enhance the enjoyment of the game .

This invention was made in view of these circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the decline in the enjoyment of gaming.

Means 1: A first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by the player,
A determination means for making a determination,
A reward granting means that can grant a reward to a player based on the determination obtained by the determination means,
A first operation- related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display which is an operation instruction for the first operating means ,
A second operation- related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is an operation instruction for the second operating means ,
Equipped with ,
In a gaming machine in which, when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is shown, multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means may occur, and when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means may occur,
If the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception will occur and the second operation-related display will be displayed. If the second operation-related display is then hidden, there will be no new situation where, within a predetermined time or less after the second operation-related display is hidden, the situation will be reverted to one where, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception will occur and the second operation-related display will be displayed.
If the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception occur and the first operation-related display is displayed, then the first operation-related display may be hidden within a predetermined time or less after the first operation-related display is hidden, in which case the situation will be renewed in which multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception occur and the first operation-related display is displayed when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state.
When the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception occur and the first operation-related display is displayed, and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, there is a first post-reception change that can occur at time intervals of a specific time or less as one of the multiple post-reception changes that can occur in response to the operation reception of the first operating means,
When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception occur and the second operation-related display is displayed, and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception changes that can occur multiple times in response to the operation reception to the second operating means include a second post-reception change that can occur at time intervals of less than or equal to the specified time, and a third post-reception change that can occur at time intervals longer than the specified time.
moreover,
Even when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state without the first operation-related display being shown, the first post-reception change may occur multiple times as a post-reception change in response to an operation being received by the first operation means. The interval at which the first post-reception change occurs when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state without the first operation-related display being shown is the same as when the first post-reception change occurs multiple times when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is shown.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.

This invention can help suppress the decline in the enjoyment of playing games.

This is a front view of a pachinko machine, which is one embodiment of the design. This is a right-side view of a pachinko machine. This is a left side view of a pachinko machine. This is a rear view of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine from the front right. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine, seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine from the back. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine from the front, with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is a disassembled perspective view of a pachinko machine, showing it from the front after it has been separated into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. This is a disassembled perspective view of a pachinko machine, showing it from the rear after it has been separated into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. This is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. This is a right side view of the outer frame. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the back. This is a disassembled perspective view of the outer frame, seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) in disassembled form. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the state in which the upper hinge member on the main frame side of the main frame has been removed from the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the state in which the upper hinge member on the main frame side has been attached to the outer upper hinge member. This is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the locking member in the outer frame. This is a front view of the door frame of a pachinko machine. This is a right-side view of the door frame. This is a left side view of the door frame. This is a rear view of the door frame. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the front right. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the back. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 19. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in Figure 19. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in Figure 19. This is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the door frame, showing it from the rear after being separated into its main components. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit, seen from the rear. This is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the door frame base unit, showing each main component separately from the rear. (a) is a front view of the effect control unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect control unit. (a) is a perspective view of the production control unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the production control unit from the rear. This is an explanatory diagram of the performance control unit, viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the control buttons extends. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in Figure 34(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in Figure 34(b). (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F in Figure 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of section A in (a). This is an exploded perspective view of the production control unit, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the production control unit, showing it broken down into its main components and viewed from the rear. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the control button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the control button as seen from the rear. This is a disassembled perspective view of the decorative circuit board unit of the performance control unit, taken from the front. This is an explanatory diagram showing the state when the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance control unit in Figure 37. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the control button that is to be hidden by the first button decoration, button frame, etc., in a view of the performance control unit from the direction in which the central axis of the control button extends, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the control button that is to be hidden by the first button decoration, button frame, etc., in a cross-sectional view of the performance control unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the external appearance of the performance control unit as seen from the front in a perspective view, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the external appearance of the performance control unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the control buttons extends. (a) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame seen from the rear. This is a disassembled perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame, seen from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame, seen from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line L-L in Figure 47(a). (a) is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame seen from the rear. This is a disassembled perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame, seen from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame, seen from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in Figure 51(a). (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line N-N in Figure 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in Figure 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit from the rear. This is a disassembled perspective view of the door frame top unit, seen from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the door frame top unit, seen from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in Figure 56. This is a front view of the game board. This is a disassembled perspective view of the game board, broken down into its main components and viewed from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the game board, showing its main components separated and viewed from the rear. This is a front view of the game board, excluding the front and back units. Figure 63 is a disassembled perspective view of the game board, seen from the front. Figure 63 is a disassembled perspective view of the game board, seen from the rear. This is an explanatory diagram showing a close-up of the function display unit from the front, with the game board installed in the pachinko machine. This is an exploded perspective view of a game panel with a different configuration from that shown in Figure 63, along with its front components, circuit board holder, and main control unit, viewed from the front. Figure 67 is an exploded perspective view taken from the rear. This is a block diagram of the main control board, the dispensing control board, and the peripheral control boards. This is a block diagram, a continuation of Figure 69. This is a schematic diagram of the various detection signals input and output to the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board, which relays the electrical connections between the payout control board, which constitutes the main board, the CR unit, and the rate display board. This is a block diagram, a continuation of Figure 69. This is a schematic diagram of a peripheral control MPU. This is a block diagram of the area around the sound source-integrated VDP in the liquid crystal and sound control unit. This is a block diagram of the power supply system for a pachinko machine. This is a block diagram, a continuation of Figure 75. This is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board. This is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. This is a circuit diagram showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control boards. This is a circuit diagram showing the circuitry of the payout control unit. This is a circuit diagram showing the payout control input circuit. This is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of Figure 81. This is a circuit diagram showing the drive circuit for the dispensing motor. This is a circuit diagram showing the input/output circuit of the CR unit. This is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. This diagram shows the arrangement of the output terminals on the external terminal board. This is a circuit diagram showing the liquid crystal module circuit that draws the display area of the upper tray-side liquid crystal display device. This table shows examples of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the dispensing control board. This table shows examples of various commands transmitted from the main control board to peripheral control boards. This is a table showing the sequence of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control boards in Figure 89. This table shows examples of various commands received by the main control board from the payout control board. This flowchart shows an example of the processing that occurs when the main control side power is turned on. This flowchart shows the continuation of the power-on processing on the main control side, as shown in Figure 92. This flowchart shows an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. This flowchart shows an example of the processing that occurs when the peripheral control unit is powered on. A flowchart showing an example of V-blank interrupt processing in the peripheral control unit. This flowchart shows an example of the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing. This flowchart shows an example of interrupt processing for receiving commands from the peripheral control unit. This flowchart shows an example of the interrupt processing for a power outage warning signal in the peripheral control unit. This flowchart shows an example of the process for creating a LOCKN signal history. This flowchart shows an example of a connection failure detection process. This flowchart shows an example of the connection recovery process. This timing chart explains the timing for outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for the upper-side LCD. This flowchart shows the procedure for controlling special symbols and special electric features (step S114). This flowchart shows the procedure for the first start port passage process (step S5232). This flowchart shows the procedure for the second start port passage process (step S5234). This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern processing (step S5238). This flowchart shows the procedure for the normal processing of the first special pattern (step S5280). This flowchart shows the procedure for determining a jackpot (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing the jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing the symbol determination tables. This flowchart shows the procedure for setting the first special symbol stop symbol (step S5281). This flowchart shows the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283). This flowchart shows the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S5284). This flowchart shows the procedure for the control process of the regular symbols and regular electric gimmicks (step S116). This flowchart shows the procedure for the gate passage process (step S5402). This flowchart shows the procedure for normal processing of a normal pattern (step S5403). This figure shows the determination table T1 for the effect pattern (effect variation) that is referenced in the effect symbol variation start process when the game is in a normal play state. This figure shows an example of a sound definition table. This figure shows the notification content, notification method, notification duration, and conditions for termination of the notification (cancellation conditions) for each type of notification sound exemplified in Figure 119. This is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword animation control unit. This is a right-side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword animation control unit. This figure shows an example of a selection table for performance patterns in a performance mode in which a sword-drawing performance can be executed. (A) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform a sword-drawing preparation transition performance according to the type of variation pattern, and (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform the main sword-drawing performance. This is a state transition diagram illustrating the drawing motion of a sword ornament when the aura component is attached to the sword part (blade part) itself, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first drawing state, and (C) the second drawing state. This is a longitudinal cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura component. This is a state transition diagram illustrating the drawing motion of a sword ornament when an aura component is provided on the scabbard, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first drawing state, and (C) the second drawing state. This is a longitudinal cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura component. This diagram illustrates the screen transitions of the display device and the operation transitions of the sword ornament during the Princess Reach animation. This diagram illustrates the screen transitions of the display device and the operation transitions of the sword ornament during the Princess Reach animation. This diagram illustrates the screen transitions of the display device and the operation transitions of the sword ornament during the Princess Reach animation. This diagram illustrates the screen transitions of the display device, the state transitions of the control buttons, and the movement transitions of the sword ornament in a reach animation, including the operation animations of the control buttons used in multiple ways. This diagram illustrates the screen transitions of the display device, the state transitions of the control buttons, and the movement transitions of the sword ornament in a reach animation, including the operation animations of the control buttons used in multiple ways. This diagram illustrates the screen transitions of the display device, the state transitions of the control buttons, and the movement transitions of the sword ornament in a reach animation, including the operation animations of the control buttons used in multiple ways. This diagram illustrates the screen transitions of the display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the movement transitions of the sword ornament during the reach animation. This diagram illustrates the screen transitions of the display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the movement transitions of the sword ornament during the reach animation. This diagram illustrates the screen transitions of the display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the movement transitions of the sword ornament during the reach animation. This diagram illustrates the screen transitions of the display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the movement transitions of the sword ornament during the reach animation. This diagram illustrates the screen transitions of the display device, the state transitions of the operation buttons, and the movement transitions of the sword ornament during the reach animation. This diagram illustrates the form of the sword ornaments used in simulated combo effects. This figure shows an example of a reach animation transition in which, based on the variation animation (reach animation) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board, the peripheral control board determines by lottery that either the operation button or the sword ornament will be made operationally active during the reach animation, and the pre-operation suggestion animation of the first suggestion pattern is executed. This figure shows an example of a reach animation transition in which, based on the variation animation (reach animation) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board, the peripheral control board determines by lottery that either the operation button or the sword ornament will be made operationally active during the reach animation, and the pre-operation suggestion animation of the first suggestion pattern is executed. This figure shows an example of a reach animation transition where, similar to the first suggestion pattern described above, if it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is operational during the reach animation, the pre-operation suggestion animation of the second suggestion pattern is executed. This diagram illustrates a step-up pattern of pre-operation suggestion animation where, despite the second suggestion pattern being performed as a pre-operation suggestion animation, the sword ornament does not become operable, the operation button becomes operable initially, and then the sword ornament becomes operable. This figure shows an example of an integrated model image. This figure shows an example of how the integrated replica image is displayed from the start to the end of the validity period. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 1A application. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 1A application. This figure shows an example of a variation pattern that generates the first A acceptance state. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 2A category. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 2A category. This figure shows an example of a variation pattern that generates the 2A acceptance state. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 3A slot. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 3A slot. This figure shows an example of a variation pattern that generates the 3A acceptance state. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for 4A. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for 4A. This figure shows an example of a variation pattern that generates the 4A acceptance state. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for item 5A. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for item 5A. This figure shows an example of a variation pattern that generates the 5A acceptance state. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for reception of item 6A. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for reception of item 6A. This figure shows an example of a variation pattern that generates the 6A acceptance state. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the first B category. This figure shows an example of a variation pattern that generates the first B acceptance state. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 2B application. This figure shows an example of a variation pattern that generates the 2B acceptance state. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 3B category. This figure shows an example of a variation pattern that generates the 3B acceptance state. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 4B category. This figure shows an example of a variation pattern that generates the 4B acceptance state. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for item 5B. This figure shows an example of a variation pattern that generates the 5B acceptance state. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 6B category. This figure shows an example of a variation pattern that generates the 6B acceptance state. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 7B category. This figure shows an example of a variation pattern that generates the 7B acceptance state. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 7B category. This is a time chart showing an example of the 1B acceptance status and the 2B acceptance status. This is a time chart showing an example of the 1B acceptance status and the 2B acceptance status. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 3B and 4B reception conditions. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance conditions for the 3B and 5B reception conditions. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance conditions for the 3B and 5B reception conditions. This is a time chart showing an example of the 1B acceptance status and the 6B acceptance status. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance conditions for the 2B and 6B reception conditions. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance conditions for the 3B and 7B reception conditions. This is a time chart showing an example of the 5B acceptance status and the 7B acceptance status. This is a time chart showing an example of the 1B acceptance status and the 6B acceptance status. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance conditions for the 4B and 7B reception conditions. This is a time chart showing an example of the 5B acceptance status and the 7B acceptance status. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 6B category. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 7B category. This is a time chart showing an example of the acceptance status for the 7B category.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1, which is one embodiment of the present invention, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 10. Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine, which is one embodiment of the present invention. Figure 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Figure 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and Figure 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Figure 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the front right, Figure 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the front left, and Figure 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the rear. Figure 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. Figure 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main frame, and outer frame, and Figure 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine from the rear with the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main frame, and outer frame.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) in a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed to close the front of the outer frame 2, a main body frame 4 that can be opened and closed to support the door frame 3 and is also attached to the outer frame 2, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front and is visible to the player through the door frame 3, having a game area 5a where the player puts the game balls.

The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in Figures 9 and 10, comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart vertically and extend horizontally, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed with the same width from front to back. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes a fascia member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the fascia member 50 in a front view and to the left frame member 30. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be opened and closed.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through-hole 111 that penetrates from front to back; a handle unit 300 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111, which can be operated by the player to shoot game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5; a tray unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111; and a control unit attached to the center of the tray unit 320 that allows the player to participate in the game state which changes as game balls are shot into the game area 5a. The system comprises a performance control unit 400 capable of presenting various effects, a left door frame side unit 530 mounted on the left front of the door frame base unit 100, above the plate unit 320 and to the left of the through-hole 111, a right door frame side unit 550 mounted on the right front of the door frame base unit 100, above the plate unit 320 and to the right of the through-hole 111, and a top door frame unit 570 mounted on the upper front of the door frame base unit 100, above the through-hole 111, above the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550.

The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped main frame base 600, which is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5; upper hinge member 620 and lower hinge member 640 attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side of the main frame base 600 in a front view, and rotatably attached to the upper hinge member 60 and lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2, respectively, and rotatably attached to the upper hinge member 140 and lower hinge member 150 on the door frame 3, respectively; a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the main frame base 600 in a front view; and a component attached to the lower front of the main frame base 600. The game board 5 includes a ball launching device 680 for launching game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a locking unit 700 attached to the right side of the main frame base 600 in a front view and locking the space between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit 800 attached to the rear side along the upper and left edges of the main frame base 600 in a front view and dispensing game balls towards the player, a circuit board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a back cover 980 that is openably attached to the rear side of the main frame base 600 and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 600.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 600, a ball tank 802 attached to the upper part of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right, open upwards, for storing game balls supplied from island equipment (not shown), a tank rail 803 attached to the dispensing unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 and extending to the left and right to guide the game balls in the ball tank 802 to the left in a front view, a ball guidance unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the dispensing unit base 801 and guiding the game balls from the tank rail 803 downwards in a meandering manner, and a dispensing control board box 950 attached detachably from the dispensing unit base 801 below the ball guidance unit 820, which houses the game balls guided by the ball guidance unit 820. The system comprises: a dispensing device 830 that dispenses game balls one by one based on instructions from a dispensing control board 951; an upper full-tank ball path unit 850 attached to the rear surface of the dispensing unit base 801, which guides the game balls dispensed by the dispensing device 830 downwards and releases the game balls from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full-tank discharge port 850e depending on the storage state of the game balls in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320; and a lower full-tank ball path unit 860 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801, which has a normal guide path 861 that guides game balls released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full-tank ball path unit 850 forward and leads them from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and a full-tank guide path 862 that guides game balls released from the full-tank discharge port 850e forward and leads them from the front end to the full-tank ball receiving port 274 of the door frame 3.

The main frame 4's circuit board unit 900 comprises: a circuit board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main frame base 600; a speaker unit 920 mounted on the rear side of the main frame base 600, on the left side of the circuit board unit base 910 in a front view, and containing a lower speaker 921 for low frequencies; a power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the rear side of the circuit board unit base 910 in a front view, containing a power supply board; an interface control board box 940 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920, containing an interface control board; and a payout control board box 950 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940, containing a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls.

As shown in Figures 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 comprises a front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that demarcate the outer perimeter of the game area 5a into which the game balls are fired and guide the game balls fired from the ball launching device 680 to the upper part of the game area 5a; and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and demarcating the rear end of the game area 5a.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, with game balls stored in the upper tray 321, when a player rotates the handle 302, the ball launcher 680 launches the game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. When the game balls launched into the game area 5a are received into a prize slot, a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed into the upper tray 321 by the payout device 830, according to the prize slot into which they were received. This dispensing of game balls enhances the player's enjoyment, encouraging them to launch the game balls from the upper tray 321 into the game area 5a, thus allowing the player to enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 16. Figure 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and Figure 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Figure 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame from the front, and Figure 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame from the rear. Figure 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame from the front after it has been disassembled. Figure 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, with the left frame member omitted and viewed from below, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) after it has been disassembled. The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a gaming hall or the like.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart vertically and extend horizontally, and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed with the same front-to-back width. Furthermore, the vertical length of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 is longer than the horizontal length of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20, and the outward-facing sides of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are on the same plane.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes an upper outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the left end of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, a locking member 66 attached to the lower surface of the upper outer frame hinge member 60, and a lower outer frame hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the front view of the fascia board member 50 and the left frame member 30. The upper outer frame hinge member 60 and the lower outer frame hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be opened and closed.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes a fascia board member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20; a fascia board reinforcing member 80 that is attached to the rear side of the fascia board member 50 and has both ends attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively; a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 at a position slightly to the left of the left-right center; and a flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to the upper surface of the fascia board member 50 near the right end. The fascia board reinforcing member 80 is formed from a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes connecting members 85 that connect the upper frame member 10 to the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 to the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 to the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 to the right frame member 40, respectively. The outer frame 2 also includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91, which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 (described later) is engaged.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed from a solid material of a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.). This upper frame member 10 has engagement notches 11 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the left-right center at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, are attached to these engagement notches 11. In addition, the upper frame member 10 has mounting steps 12 on the upper and front surfaces of the left end when viewed from the front, which are recessed from the general surface. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to these mounting steps 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed from a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The length from left to right and the thickness from top to bottom of the lower frame member 20 are the same dimensions as the length from left to right and the thickness from top to bottom of the upper frame member 10, while the width from front to back is longer than the width from front to back of the upper frame member 10. The lower frame member 20 has engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions slightly behind the center in the front-to-back direction at both the left and right ends. The lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the left lower connecting member 85C and the right lower connecting member 85D, which will be described later, are attached to these engagement notches 21.

Furthermore, the lower frame member 20 has front end notches 22 that are recessed from the front to the rear at both the left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-to-back direction from the rear end of the front end notches 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same dimension as the front-to-back width of the upper frame member 10. When assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion of the lower frame member 20 between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the fascia board member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a fixed cross-sectional shape and are formed from extruded metal profiles such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a symmetrical shape when viewed from above. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have inwardly recessed recesses 31 and 41 on their outer sides in the left-right direction, from a position slightly behind the center in the front-rear direction to near the rear end, and protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge out from the side opposite to the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow interior. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protruding portions 32 and 42. The rear lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, are inserted into and attached to the protruding portions 32 and 42.

Furthermore, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have multiple grooves extending vertically on their surfaces. These grooves provide grips for workers when installing or transporting the pachinko machine 1 in gaming halls or other island-type facilities, making it easier to handle, and also enhance the aesthetic appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

[2-4. Skirting board components]
The fascia member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The fascia member 50 includes a rear extension portion 51 that extends in a flat shape to the rear from near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, a left discharge hole 52 that is cut out in a U shape from the left end of the rear extension portion 51 and is large enough for a game ball to pass through, and which penetrates vertically, a right discharge hole 53 that is large enough for a game ball to pass through vertically to the right of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51, a vertical wall portion 54 that extends in a flat shape upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the fascia member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension portion 51, and a return portion 55 that bulges forward from near the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 and is inclined so that the front surface goes towards the rear as it goes upward.

The lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is attached to the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 of the fascia panel member 50, so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The horizontal portion 71 of the lower hinge member 70 (described later) is attached to this surface. The left discharge hole 52 of the fascia panel member 50 is formed in a position that coincides with the discharge hole 74 of the lower hinge member 70 (described later) when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed in a position to the right of the lower hinge member 70 when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Furthermore, the upper surface of the fascia panel member 50 is inclined such that the front end is lower on the right side of the rear extension portion 51. The fascia panel member 50 also includes a left mounting portion 56 for attaching the left sliding member 81 on the upper surface to the right of the rear extension portion 51, and a right mounting portion 57 for attaching the right sliding member 82 near the right end of the upper surface. The lower surface of the main frame 4 rests on the upper surface of the fascia panel member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the fascia panel member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on its front surface. Although not shown in the figure, the box-shaped interior of the fascia panel member 50 is divided into a grid pattern by multiple ribs, increasing its strength and rigidity. Furthermore, the fascia panel member 50 is designed to accommodate the front half of the fascia panel reinforcing member 80 inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 comprises a horizontally extending, flat, rectangular upper fixing portion 61; a flat, forward-extending portion 62 extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61; a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the forward-extending portion 62 toward the left-right center of the forward-extending portion 62 and penetrating vertically; a flat, horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side of the upper fixing portion 61 in a plan view; and a flat, hanging portion 65 extending downward from the edge of the forward-extending portion 62, around the front end, to the part where the bearing groove 63 opens, and continuous with the horizontal fixing portion 64 (see Figure 16(b), etc.).

The upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, with the outer frame 2 assembled, has its upper fixing portion 61 resting on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 and is fixed with screws (not shown). The forward extension portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10. The lateral fixing portion 64 is inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 and is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

The upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side can support the main frame 4 in an openable and closable manner by inserting the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 on the main frame side into the bearing groove 63, in cooperation with the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. This upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side is formed by bending a metal plate through press molding.

[2-6. Locking Members]
As shown in Figure 16, the locking member 66 of the outer frame 2 comprises a strip-shaped locking body 66a that extends front to back with a predetermined width on both sides, an operating part 66b that protrudes to the right from the rear end of the locking body 66a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic part 66c that extends to the left from the rear end of the locking body 66a and then diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole 66d that penetrates vertically near the rear end of the locking body 66a. This locking member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extension 62 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side by mounting screws 67.

The locking member 66 is mounted through a mounting hole 66d, with the rear end of the lock body 66a positioned behind the bearing groove 63 in the forward extension 62 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. Furthermore, when the locking member 66 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can obstruct the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and its right side near the front end extends forward so that it can contact the portion of the outer frame upper hinge member 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see Figure 18).

Furthermore, the tip of the elastic portion 66c, which extends to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a, abuts against the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 of the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side. This lock member 66 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c to rotate its front end to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a abuts against the hanging portion 65 (see Figure 18). In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 63 in front of the lock body 66a, capable of accommodating the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 on the main frame side, which will be described later.

This locking member 66 allows the lock body 66a to be rotated against the biasing force of the elastic part 66c by operating the operating part 66b. By operating the operating part 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in a direction that moves its front end to the left, allowing the lock body 66a to retract from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, thus allowing the bearing groove 63 to be fully open. This makes it possible to insert the upper hinge pin 622 into the bearing groove 63 or to remove the upper hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 comprises a flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped rising portion 72 rising upward from a point on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is further back than the center in the front-to-back direction, a lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and an ejection hole 74 that penetrates the horizontal portion 71 vertically and is sized to allow only one game ball to pass through. This lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is formed by bending a metal plate through press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base when viewed from above. The lower hinge pin 73 on the outer frame is cylindrical, with the upper part above the vertical center narrowing to a frustoconical shape. This lower hinge pin 73 is mounted near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, slightly to the left. The discharge hole 74 is in contact with the central part of the rising portion 72 in the front-to-back direction on the horizontal portion 71, and extends in an inverted U-shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. This discharge hole 74 is formed to be approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the fascia plate member 50.

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side has its horizontal portion 71 resting on the upper surface near the left end of the fascia board member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51. The horizontal portion 71 is fixed to the fascia board reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that penetrate the upper surface of the fascia board member 50. Also, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to the part of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 in front of the protruding portion 32 by screws (not shown). This lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be attached to the main frame 4 in an openable and closable manner by inserting the lower hinge pin 73 of the lower hinge member 640 of the main frame 4 into the lower hinge hole for the main frame (not shown).

Furthermore, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the fascia plate member 50. This allows the game balls on the horizontal section 71 to fall (discharge) to the rear side of the fascia plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when closing the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 will roll towards the rear side where the gap is wider as the main frame 4 is closed, and will be discharged through the discharge hole 74. In this case, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position approximately the same as the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily prevent game balls that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 from rolling further behind the main frame 4 by discharging them through the discharge hole 74, and thus making it less likely for game balls to get stuck at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

[2-8. Connecting Members]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 comprises a horizontally extending, flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side of the horizontal fixing portion 86 as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. This connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 extend downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. In other words, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state where it abuts against the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left-right end of the upper frame member 10. Furthermore, the front lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner sides of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, that are in front of the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, the rear lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, by screws that are inserted into the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed in from the outer sides.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the lower end of the portion of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 that protrudes further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 86. Furthermore, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are further provided with a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. In addition, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface in front of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end faces of the lower frame member 20, respectively.

[2-9. Locking mechanism of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism of the locking member 66 on the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main frame 4 will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18. Figure 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main frame is detached from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the state in which the main frame side upper hinge member is attached to the outer upper hinge member. Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the locking member in the outer frame.

In the outer frame 2, when the locking member 66 is attached to the forward extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts against the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65, thereby closing a portion of the bent bearing groove 63 of the locking body 66a. However, the tip of the locking body 66a does not completely block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. Instead, a space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 that allows the insertion of the upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main frame 4.

In this embodiment, the support mechanism for the upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame, using the outer frame upper hinge member 60 and the locking member 66, is such that in the normal pivotal support state, when the upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the right side surface of the front end of the locking body 66a is close to the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the locking body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are not in contact), the centers of the upper hinge pin 622, located in the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63, and the front end surface of the locking body 66a are diagonally offset and facing each other.

In this normal pivot state, the hinge pin 622 on the upper frame, which pivots the heavy main frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Therefore, there is almost no load from the hinge pin 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. In other words, there is no load on the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Furthermore, because the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operating part 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Also, in the illustration, the center of the arc on the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when a force F is applied to the hinge pin 622 on the main frame in a direction that causes it to withdraw along the inclination of the V-shaped bearing groove 63, and it comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, if this force F is divided into a component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the arc-shaped front end surface (normal to the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) and a component force F2 acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main frame and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63, the direction of component force F1 points toward the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). As a result, no moment acts to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 away from the right-side hanging portion 65, and the state in which the hinge pin 622 is sandwiched between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the inner surface of one side of the bearing groove 63 is maintained.

Therefore, even in the normal pivot state, or when the force of the hinge pin 622 on the main frame is applied to the locking member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the locking member 66 is not constantly subjected to load. This prevents plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, which is integrally formed from synthetic resin, and prevents the hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 on the main frame over a long period of time. Furthermore, even if excessive force is applied and the front end of the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is rotated in a direction that moves to the right, the right side of the front end of the locking body 66a abuts against the hanging portion 65, preventing further rotation, thus preventing the locking member 66 from protruding outside the forward extension portion 62.

Furthermore, even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arc-shaped, by positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where no rotational moment is generated due to the action of the component force F1 described above, or at a position where a rotational moment is generated that causes the front end of the lock member 66 to rotate outward from the forward extension 62, no load is constantly applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, only the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts against the hanging portion 65, so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the forward extension 62.

When supporting the upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 in the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60, the upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. When the upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, it contacts the right side of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66. The lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67, causing the front end of the lock body 66a to move to the left against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. This causes the lock body 66a, which was closing the bearing groove 63, to retract, opening the bearing groove 63 and allowing the upper hinge pin 622 to move to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the upper hinge pin 622 and the locking body 66a of the locking member 66 is released. The biasing force of the elastic part 66c causes the locking member 66 to rotate so that the front end of the locking body 66a moves to the right, and the locking member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the upper hinge pin 622 is housed in the space in front of the front end of the locking body 66a within the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 is held (locked) in a rotatable state at the deepest part of the bearing groove 63.

To remove the upper hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to rotate the locking member 66 so that the front end of the locking body 66a moves to the left, thereby retracting the locking body 66a from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. This creates a state where the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication, allowing the upper hinge pin 622 to be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Anti-theft mechanism and ball-joint prevention mechanism in the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
This invention describes the anti-theft mechanism at the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 and the ball jamming prevention mechanism for preventing game balls from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment.

In its assembled state, the outer frame 2 has the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the fascia panel member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is mounted resting on the left end of the upper surface of the fascia panel member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. This fascia panel member 50 has a vertical wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of its upper surface. As a result, even if someone attempts to insert an illegal tool, such as piano wire, into the rear of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame-side lower hinge member 640, the tip of the illegal tool will abut against the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the fascia panel member 50. This prevents the illegal tool from being inserted any further to the rear, thus preventing illegal activity from being carried out through the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70.

Furthermore, since the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 is equipped with a forward-extending return portion 55, if an unauthorized tool that comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 can cause the tip of the unauthorized tool to bend further forward. This prevents the unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main frame 4, and reliably prevents unauthorized activity from occurring through the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

Incidentally, if the rear end of the upper surface of the fascia panel member 50 is provided with a vertical wall portion 54 extending upward, and a game ball falls onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71) of the outer frame while the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 will not be discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, and there is a risk that the game ball will become trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. In contrast, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame and the rearward extension portion 51 of the fascia panel member 50 are provided with discharge holes 74, a left discharge hole 52, and a right discharge hole 53 through which the game ball can pass. Therefore, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame can be discharged downward through the discharge holes 74, etc., reducing the risk of the game ball becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage to the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side due to game balls getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and to prevent the main frame 4 from not closing properly, creating a gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, which could then be used for fraudulent activities.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 19 to 30. Figure 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 20 is a right side view of the door frame, Figure 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 22 is a rear view of the door frame. Figure 23 is a perspective view of the door frame from the front right, Figure 24 is a perspective view of the door frame from the front left, and Figure 25 is a perspective view of the door frame from the rear. Figure 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 19, Figure 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in Figure 19, and Figure 28 is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 19. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame taken from the front with its main components separated, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame taken from the rear with its main components separated.

As shown in Figures 29 and 30, the door frame 3 comprises a rectangular, frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with an external shape extending vertically when viewed from the front; a handle unit 300 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base unit 100; a plate unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100; a performance control unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320; a left door frame side unit 530 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320; a right door frame side unit 550 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320; and a top door frame unit 570 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left door frame side unit 530 and the right door frame side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, as will be described in detail later, consists of a plate-shaped door frame base 110 with a rectangular (square) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a through-hole 111 that penetrates from front to back; a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110; an upper door frame side hinge member 140 and a lower door frame side hinge member 150 attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left end of the reinforcing unit 130 when viewed from the front and mounted so as to be hinge-rotatable relative to the main frame 4; a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through-hole 111; and the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. The system includes a security cover 200 that covers the section, an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the door frame 3 and main frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and are openable and closable, and the space between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for receiving game balls that were launched by the ball launching device 680 and did not reach the game area 5a, and discharging them into the lower tray 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3, as will be described in detail later, allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302, thereby launching the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, as will be described in detail later, is attached to the lower part of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, with its front surface bulging forward, and the performance operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 includes an upper tray 321 for storing game balls to be played into the game area 5a, a lower tray 322 located below the upper tray 321 and capable of storing game balls supplied from the upper tray 321 and the foul cover unit 270, an upper tray ball release button 327 for removing game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and a ball dispensing button 328 for dispensing game balls to the player within the limits of the cash or prepaid card balance inserted into the ball dispensing machine. It includes a return button 329 for returning cash or prepaid cards minus the amount of game balls dispensed from the ball dispenser, a ball dispensing return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining amount of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball dispenser, a left and right performance selection button 331 and performance selection button 332 that are available for player input when a performance is presented, and a lower tray ball removal button 333 for discharging game balls from the lower tray 322 to the lower tray unit 320.

The door frame 3's performance control unit 400 is mounted on the front of the center of the plate unit 320 in a front view direction. It can be operated by the player by pressing it, and can also display performance images to the player. This performance control unit 400, as will be described in detail later, includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame-side performance display device 460 positioned within the operation button 410 so that it is visible to the player and capable of displaying performance images.

The left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, as detailed below, is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100, above the plate unit 320 and to the left of the through-hole 111, and decorates the left outer side of the through-hole 111 (game area 5a). The left side unit 530 is equipped with a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting light.

The right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, as detailed below, is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100, above the plate unit 320 and to the right of the through-hole 111, and decorates the right outer side of the through-hole 111 (game area 5a). This right side unit 550 protrudes significantly forward from the left side unit 530 of the door frame and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 on both sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 at its front end. The right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached above the left side unit 530 and the right side unit 550 of the door frame, above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100's door frame base 110, and serves to decorate the upper part of the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 570, as will be described in detail later, comprises a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart to the left and right, a top central decorative member 576 protruding forward from the center of the front surface, and top left decorative lens members 579 and top right decorative lens members 580 decorating both sides of the top central decorative member 576. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top central decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of the door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, disassembled into its main components, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, disassembled into its main components.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) on the left side when viewed from the front, so as to close the front of the main frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 attached to the lower front corner of the front, a dish unit 320 to which a performance control unit 400 is attached to the lower front of the through-hole 111, a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the left outer front of the through-hole 111, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right outer front of the through-hole 111, and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper outer front of the through-hole 111.

As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 comprises a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically in a front view and a through-hole 111 penetrating from front to back; a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110; a door frame-side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame-side lower hinge member 150 attached to both the upper and lower ends of the left side of the reinforcing unit 130 in a front view, projecting forward from the door frame base 110 and rotatably attached to the main frame-side upper hinge member 620 and main frame-side lower hinge member 640 of the main frame 4; a door frame left side decorative substrate 160 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through-hole 111 in a front view, with multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface; and a glass unit mounting member 170 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 for detachably mounting the glass unit 190.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base 110; a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through-hole 111; a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; an opening/closing cylinder unit 210 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward; a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110; and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100, although not shown in the illustration, includes a door body relay board for relaying connections between the various decorative circuit boards, ball-feeding solenoid 255, handle rotation detection sensor 307, handle touch sensor 310, single-button operation sensor 312, ball dispensing button 328, return button 329, ball dispensing/return display unit 330, performance selection left button 331, performance selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side performance display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461), upper speaker 573, etc., located on the door frame 3, and the door frame relay board 911 of the circuit board unit 900 in the main frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 has an outer shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, forming a rectangle. The door frame base 110 has a through-hole 111 that penetrates from front to back, and the inner circumference of the through-hole 111, when viewed from the front, is formed as a roughly rectangular shape that extends vertically. The upper edge and both left and right edges that form the inner circumference of the through-hole 111 are close to the outer perimeter of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower edge that forms the inner circumference is located at a height of approximately 1/3 of the height in the vertical direction from the lower end of the door frame base 110. Therefore, the entire door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape by the through-hole 111 that penetrates from front to back. This door frame base 110 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 includes a handle mounting surface 112 formed at the lower right corner of the front view, with its left end slightly protruding forward compared to its right end; a cylinder mounting portion 113 recessed from the rear towards the front near the right end of the front view, between the handle mounting surface 112 and the through-hole 111, where the cylinder mounting plate 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached; a cylinder insertion hole 114 that penetrates the cylinder mounting portion 113 from front to back, through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted; and a ball feeding opening 115 that penetrates the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the left side of the handle mounting surface 112 in the front view, allowing the entry point 251a and ball removal point 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to face forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 110 includes a lower tray passage 116 located slightly to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and extending from front to back at approximately the same height as the handle mounting surface 112, allowing the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 to face forward; an upper tray passage 117 located near the left end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, adjacent to the lower edge of the passage 111, allowing the ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 to face forward; a glass unit mounting portion 118 recessed from the rear to the front along the inner circumference of the passage 111, into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted; and speaker insertion ports 119 located at both upper left and right corners of the door frame base 110, extending from front to back, through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement Unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 31 and 33, etc. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing plate 131 extending left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a middle reinforcing plate 132 extending left and right and attached below the through-hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a left reinforcing plate 133 extending up and down and attached along the left edge of the front view of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, a right reinforcing plate 134 extending up and down and attached along the right edge of the front view of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a locking locking part 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing plate 134, into which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged.

The reinforcement unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, with both the left and right ends of the upper reinforcement sheet metal 131 connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left and right reinforcement sheet metal 133 and right reinforcement sheet metal 134, respectively, with screws. The left end of the middle reinforcement sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the left reinforcement sheet metal 133 with screws. The right end of the middle reinforcement sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcement sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210, which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcement unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, the left reinforcement sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcement sheet metal 134, etc.

The upper reinforcing plate 131, middle reinforcing plate 132, left reinforcing plate 133, right reinforcing plate 134, and locking mechanism 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending metal plates. The middle reinforcing plate 132 has a notch 132a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has sections in the front-to-back direction that are bent in the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and right reinforcing sheet metal 134. These sections enhance strength and rigidity, while also preventing the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as piano wire or screwdrivers from the outside.

[3-1c. Upper hinge component on the door frame side]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33, etc. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 includes a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 attached to the door frame base 110 and having a pair of vertically spaced protruding pieces 141a, a cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrates the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, a disc-shaped flange member 143 attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 142 at a position between the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a lock spring 144 interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is inserted, and which biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, although not shown in the illustration, has a flat mounting piece connecting the rear ends of a pair of protruding pieces 141a, and its side view is formed in a U-shape that opens forward. The mounting piece connecting the pair of protruding pieces 141a is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

The upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame has a portion (upper end) that protrudes above the upper projection piece 141a, which is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame-side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown in the illustration, the portion of the upper hinge pin 142 that protrudes below the lower projection piece 141a is bent horizontally. This bent portion contacts the lower surface of the lower projection piece 141a, restricting the upward movement of the upper hinge pin 142.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer circumference of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted. Its upper end abuts against the flange member 143, and its lower end abuts against the lower protruding piece 141a. This lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a, biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143.

The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side is in a state where the upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144. The horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the upper hinge pin 142 abuts against the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side allows the upper hinge pin 142 to be moved downward as a whole when an operator holds the horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the upper hinge pin 142 and pulls that portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144, thereby allowing the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 to be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 on the door frame side of the upper hinge member 140 can be inserted into or removed from the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 from below. This allows the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 to be inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame upper hinge member 620, thereby supporting the upper left end of the door frame 3 in a hinge-rotatable manner relative to the main frame 4.

Furthermore, the portion of the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side that is supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the upper hinge shaft bracket 141 on the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 of the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, which will be described later. This allows the door frame 3 to rotate smoothly relative to the main frame 4 through the upper hinge member 140 and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side.

[3-1d. Lower hinge component on the door frame side]
The lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side comprises a lower hinge shaft bracket 151 which is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a flat extension piece 151a extending forward, and a cylindrical lower hinge pin 152 (see Figures 21 and 22) which protrudes downward from near the front end of the extension piece 151a on the lower hinge shaft bracket.

The lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat extension piece 151a, and its overall shape in side view is roughly L-shaped. This lower hinge shaft bracket 151 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws using the mounting piece (not shown).

The lower hinge pin 152 of the door frame is formed in a truncated cone shape, with its lower end narrowing as it approaches the bottom. This lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the hinge hole 644 for the door frame of the lower hinge member 640 on the main frame side of the main frame 4 (described later). The lower hinge pin 152 is coaxially positioned with the upper hinge pin 142 of the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side.

This lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side allows the door frame 3 to be supported relative to the main frame 4 in a hinged manner by inserting the lower hinge pin 152 of the lower hinge member 640 on the main frame side into the hinge hole 644 for the door frame.

[3-1e. Decorative circuit board on the left side of the door frame]
The decorative substrate 160 on the left side of the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 and 32. The decorative substrate 160 on the left side of the through-hole 111 in a front view, is attached to the front of the door frame base 110. The decorative substrate 160 on the left side of the door frame comprises an upper decorative substrate 161 that extends vertically from a height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in a front view to a height near the center of the through-hole 111 in the vertical direction, and a lower decorative substrate 162 that extends vertically from a height below the upper decorative substrate 161 to approximately the same height as the lower end of the upper tray passage opening 117.

The upper left-side decorative substrate 161 and the lower left-side decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left-side decorative substrate 160 are each equipped with multiple LEDs 161a and 162a on their front surfaces, capable of emitting light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 (described later) when the door frame 3 is assembled. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on its front, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated.

[3-1f. Glass Unit Mounting Components]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 31(b), etc. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is for attaching and detaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disc-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a rod-shaped projection portion 172 that protrudes from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation.

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119, and at a location outside the glass unit mounting portion 118.

By rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 is positioned outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. This allows for insertion of the glass unit 190 into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and removal of the glass unit 190 from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base portion 171 while the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 abuts against the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, restricting the rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, thereby allowing the glass unit 190 to be attached to the door frame base 110.

The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disc-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, from which a protruding portion 172 extends. Therefore, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. Consequently, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, it stabilizes with the protruding portion 172 protruding downward from the base 171. Furthermore, the glass unit mounting member 170 is designed so that when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotated position where it protrudes downward from the base 171, the protruding portion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Therefore, even if vibrations or other forces act on the glass unit mounting member 170, the entire unit will not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 will not be released automatically.

Furthermore, when removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171. By moving the protruding portion 172 outward from the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, allowing the glass unit 190 to be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1g. Handle mounting component]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 comprises a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 182 extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181, a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 183 that project into the tube portion 181 and extend along the entire axial length of the tube portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer surface of the tube portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the tube portion 181.

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 112 of the door frame base 110 by screws, with the rear surface of the flange portion 182 in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting surface 112.

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. Three protrusions 183 are provided: one on the upper side of the cylindrical portion 181, and the other two on the lower side. These three protrusions 183 are formed in positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can only be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 by aligning the three protrusions 183 with the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301, thereby restricting the rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) relative to the door frame base 110.

Furthermore, since the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, when attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110, the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 becomes tilted so that it extends to the right and forward. This allows the handle unit 300 to be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass Unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 comprises a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner circumference of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and two transparent glass plates 192 that close the inside of the glass frame 191 and have their outer circumferences attached to the glass frame 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end and rear end of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart front to back so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a that extend outward in a flat shape from a position below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a strip-shaped locking piece 191b that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower edge. The mounting pieces 191a of the glass frame 191 are designed to abut against the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b is designed to be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see Figure 26).

The glass unit 190 is attached to the door frame base 110 by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, bringing the front end of the glass frame 191 into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and rotating the glass unit mounting member 170 so that the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 comes into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191.

To remove the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, follow the reverse procedure described above. This makes the glass unit 190 detachable from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security Cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 comprises a flat main body portion 201 with an outer circumference formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection 202 that protrudes a short distance to the rear along the outer edge of the main body portion 201, and a pair of locking pieces 203 that are spaced apart on the left and right, protrude forward of the main body portion 201, and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Furthermore, the upper end of the main body 201 is shaped to follow the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is shaped to follow a portion of the inner rail 1002, the out-guiding section 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the aforementioned component 1000, and is designed so that it does not protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projection 202 is formed along almost the entire circumference of the outer edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow, box-like shape that opens to the rear, due to the main body 201 and the rear projection 202, resulting in high strength and rigidity. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 33, the rear projection 202 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 201, distinct from its outer edge. This rear projection 202, protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 201, is formed to align with a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the rear projection 202 is not formed in the portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game balls (launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 do not come into contact with the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200, and thus do not obstruct the entry of game balls into the game area 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. This allows the security cover 200 to be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the security cover 200 has a front surface of the main body 201 that abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the rear projection 202, excluding the portion that protrudes rearward from the lower edge of the main body 201, is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 has a rear projection 202 that protrudes rearward from the lower edge of the main body 201 that protrudes further rearward than the front surface of the front component 1000, so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if someone attempts to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a from below the front of the game board 5 through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008, thus preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening/Closing Cylinder Unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33, etc. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through-hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and is used in cooperation with the locking unit 700, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 comprises a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 extending forward and backward and having a keyhole 211a on its front surface; a rotation transmission member 212 attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211, which transmits the rotational operation of the key inserted into the keyhole 211a to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700; and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for attaching the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 allows the key (not shown in the illustration) to be rotated by inserting it into the keyhole 211a. With the correct key, the lock can be rotated by a predetermined angle in either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (more specifically, a conical shape with a diameter that increases towards the rear), and has a pair of notches 212a that are cut out from the rear end toward the front at positions opposite each other on the central axis. This rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main frame 4 is inserted from the rear. When the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) is transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700, causing the key cylinder 710 to rotate.

The cylinder mounting plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and its shape in plan view is a convex shape that protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting plate 213 comprises a rectangular, flat front plate portion 213a that extends vertically in a front view, a pair of side plate portions 213b that extend flatly to the rear from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a, and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c that extend flatly from the rear edges of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b in a direction away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 passes through the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 from the rear at a position approximately in the vertical center, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are such that the left mounting plate portion 213c (in front view) is attached to the right end of the central reinforcing plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the right mounting plate portion 213c (in front view) is attached to the right reinforcing plate 134 of the reinforcing unit 130. This connects the central reinforcing plate 132 and the right reinforcing plate 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 via the cylinder mounting plate 213.

When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylinder lock 211 that protrudes forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213. The front end of the cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 from the rear side of the door frame base 110, protruding forward from the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are housed within a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that opens to the rear.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of the Performance Control Unit]
The overall configuration of the performance control unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 34 to 41. Figure 34(a) is a front view of the performance control unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the performance control unit. Figure 35(a) is a perspective view of the performance control unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance control unit from the rear. Figure 36 is an explanatory diagram of the performance control unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the control buttons extends. Figure 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in Figure 34(a), and Figure 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in Figure 34(b). Figure 39(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F in Figure 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). Figure 40 is an exploded perspective view taken from the front with the performance control unit disassembled into its main components, and Figure 41 is an exploded perspective view taken from the rear with the performance control unit disassembled into its main components. The performance control unit 400 is attached to the front of the center of the plate unit 320 in a front view, and can be pressed by the player and can also display performance images to the player.

The performance control unit 400 comprises: an operation button 410 with a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer edge, which can be pressed by the player; a frame-shaped frame unit 415 surrounding the outer edge of the operation button 410 and attached to the performance control unit mounting portion 326a of the tray unit cover 326; a decorative substrate unit 420 positioned behind the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating the outer edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; a base unit 430 attached to the rear of the frame unit 415, with the operation button 410 and the decorative substrate unit 420 mounted on its front; and a door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the base unit 430 so that it can be seen from the player's side through the operation button 410 and capable of displaying performance images.

[3-4a. Operation Buttons]
The operation button 410 of the performance control unit 400 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 42. Figure 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the vertical height of the dish unit 320, and the central part, excluding the outer edge, is made transparent. The operation button 410 comprises a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved shape (part of a sphere) with a circular outer edge and a central part that bulges forward, an annular button frame 412 attached to the front of the outer edge of the button lens 411, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a material that does not easily transmit light.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially uniform thickness throughout. Furthermore, the surface of the button lens 411 is formed to be a smooth, curved surface without any irregularities. The button lens 411 comprises a first button decorative portion 411a, which extends from the back surface in a W-shaped recess in cross-section toward the center (inward) for a predetermined length and is arranged in a circumferential direction, located on the inner circumference side of the button frame 412; and a plurality (six) of second button decorative portions 411b, which extend from the back surface in an arc-shaped recess in cross-section toward the center and are arranged in a circumferential direction within a predetermined angular range, located on the outer circumference side of the first button decorative portion 411a.

As shown in the figure, when assembled to the operation button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 towards the center, with the groups on the left and right sides extending longer towards the center than the groups on the top and bottom sides.

The multiple second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape along the same circumference, with three portions formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorative portions 411b are formed to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that their front sides are substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411, in the areas of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b, exhibits a lens effect due to the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross-sections of the irregularities formed on its back surface, thereby preventing the rear side from being clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape and has multiple (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-to-back direction and extend in an arc shape for a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. Three of the six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, corresponding to the six second button decorative parts 411b of the button lens 411. This button frame 412 has a plated layer on its surface that has a metallic luster.

The button base 413 comprises a roughly cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b projecting outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, multiple (four) guide boss portions 413c that project cylindrically backward from the rear side of the flange portion 413b along the outer circumference of the main body portion 413a and are arranged at roughly equal intervals in the circumferential direction, multiple (three) detection pieces 413d that project in a strip-like shape backward from the rear side of the flange portion 413b along the outer circumference of the main body portion 413a and are arranged in the circumferential direction, multiple (six) base openings 413e that penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction and extend along the outer circumference for a predetermined length and are formed in the circumferential direction, and an inner extension portion 413f that extends cylindrically forward from the front end of the main body portion 413a and whose front end side narrows inward (towards the center) so as to follow the inner surface of the button lens 411.

The outer edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer circumferential surface of the inner extension 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are positioned at the four corners (top, bottom, left, and right) of the main body portion 413a in the circumferential direction. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a, with two on the upper side and one on the lower side. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided in groups of three on each side, corresponding to the second button decorative portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. In the base opening 413e portion of the button base 413, the main body portion 413a and a portion of the inner extension portion 413f are recessed inward from the outer circumference. The inner diameter of the inwardly tapering front end of the inner extension portion 413f approximately matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The operation button 410 has a front surface that curves forward (shape similar to a part of a sphere) and is made of transparent material, allowing the display screen of the door frame side display device 460, which is located at the rear, to be visible from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c that are slidably inserted into the retaining holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and is biased forward by an operation button spring 438 inserted into the retaining holes 431b of the unit base 431. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 in the base unit 430, which causes the front side of its outer edge to abut against the frame unit 415. By pressing against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438, it moves backward until its rear end abuts against the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. This detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440 indicates that the operation button 410 has been operated.

Furthermore, when the performance control unit 400 is assembled, the first button decorative portion 411a, which extends around the entire circumference of the transparent button lens 411 from the inner edge of the button frame 412 toward the center, makes the gap between the inner surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 of the operation button on the base unit 430 less visible to the player.

Furthermore, the operating button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with a button lens 411 and a button frame 412. The button frame 412, attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411, creates a transparent portion of the operating button 410 that allows for rearward visibility, tapering inward from the outer edge. The presence of this button frame 412 also makes the gap between the inner surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operating button of the base unit 430 less visible from the player's side.

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protrudes behind the front of the decorative circuit board unit 420 through the inner circumference of the decorative circuit board unit 420. This prevents light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the left outer decorative circuit board 422 and the right outer decorative circuit board 423 of the decorative circuit board unit 420 from leaking from the outside to the inside of the button base 413. It also prevents light emitted forward from the LEDs mounted on the left inner decorative circuit board 433, the right inner decorative circuit board 434, the upper inner decorative circuit board 435, and the lower inner decorative circuit board 436 of the base unit 430 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the LEDs mounted on the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative substrate unit 420, and on the left interior decorative substrate 433, right interior decorative substrate 434, upper interior decorative substrate 435, and lower interior decorative substrate 436 of the base unit 430, can be prevented from illuminating areas other than those intended for illumination, resulting in aesthetically pleasing illumination decoration.

[3-4b. Frame Unit]
The frame unit 415 of the performance control unit 400 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 41. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the performance control unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320, surrounding the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorating the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed to match the front end side of the performance control unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 comprises a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a, attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320; a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached to the frame body 416 from the rear on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a; and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 from the front above the central opening 416a.

The frame body 416 includes a circular central opening 416a with a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and extending through it from front to back; a plurality (six) of outer peripheral openings 416b extending from both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a, extending in an arc shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a and arranged in a row in the circumferential direction; and a notch 416c cut out to a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. The central opening 416a is formed to be approximately the same size as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. This allows the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to abut against the rear outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are located three on each side of the central opening 416a, and are closed from the rear by the frame side lenses 417. The notch 416c extends through in the front-to-back direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted into it from the front.

Furthermore, the frame body 416 includes a roughly cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the periphery of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and is notched in a portion corresponding to the notch 416c. In the assembled state of the performance operation unit 400, the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, respectively, on the left outer decorative board 422 and the right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, separating the first LEDs 422a, 423a from the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see Figure 38).

Furthermore, the frame body 416 extends outward from the upper left and right sides of its outer circumference and is equipped with a pair of mounting parts 416e that attach to the performance control unit mounting part 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame body 416 (performance control unit 400) is attached to the performance control unit mounting part 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at both the left and right sides of the pair of mounting parts 416e and the notch 416c.

The frame body 416 has a metallic plating layer formed on almost its entire surface, except for a portion the same width as the notch 416c (the side to which the frame top lens 418 is attached) on the opposite side of the central opening 416a.

The frame side lenses 417 close the outer peripheral openings 416b, three on each side of the frame body 416, from the rear. The front surface of the frame side lenses 417 is a smooth, even surface, while the rear surface has multiple irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see Figures 39 and 46). These irregularities refract light, preventing the rear of the frame side lenses 417 from being visible.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a roughly rectangular shape so that it fits into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front. The front surface of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Furthermore, on the rear surface of the frame top lens 418, multiple zigzag-shaped protrusions are arranged in multiple rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a, along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see Figures 37 and 46). These multiple protrusions refract light, preventing the rear side of the frame top lens 418 from being visible.

In the assembled state of the performance operation unit 400, the frame unit 415 has a pair of frame side lenses 417 positioned in front of the second LEDs 422b and 423b on the left and right outer decorative boards 422 and 423, respectively, of the decorative board unit 420. The frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decorative board 437 of the base unit 430, and these lenses are illuminated and decorated by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them.

[3-4c. Decorative circuit board unit]
The decorative circuit board unit 420 of the performance control unit 400 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 39 to 43. Figure 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative circuit board unit of the performance control unit, disassembled and viewed from the front. The decorative circuit board unit 420 is mounted on the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415, as well as providing vibration to the performance control unit 400.

The decorative circuit board unit 420 comprises a C-shaped circuit board base 421 with an open top, a left and right external decorative circuit board 422 and a right external decorative circuit board 423 attached to the left and right front sides of the circuit board base 421, respectively, a vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front of the circuit board base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front of the circuit board base 421 so as to cover the front of the vibration motor 424.

The substrate base 421 is formed such that its inner circumference is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, while its outer circumference is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 and smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left external decorative circuit board 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the circuit board base 421. The left external decorative circuit board 422 has, on its front side, a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the circuit board base 421, and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 422a, along the inner circumference of the circuit board base 421. The right external decorative circuit board 423 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the circuit board base 421. The right external decorative circuit board 423 has, on its front side, a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the circuit board base 421, and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted radially outward from the plurality of first LEDs 423a, along the inner circumference of the circuit board base 421. Both the front and rear surfaces of these left and right external decorative circuit boards 422 and 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to its rotating shaft, and vibration can be generated by rotating this weight 424a.

When assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the decorative circuit board unit 420 has the rear end of the cylindrical main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 inserted inside the circuit board base 421. Furthermore, the decorative circuit board unit 420 has the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the left outer decorative circuit board 422 and the right outer decorative circuit board 423 of the operation button positioned behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b and 423b are positioned behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Also, when assembled to the performance operation unit 400, the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame unit 415 is positioned between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the left outer decorative circuit board 422 and the right outer decorative circuit board 423, and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see Figure 38).

Therefore, the decorative substrate unit 420 can illuminate only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a, respectively, on the left outer decorative substrate 422 and the right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button, and can also illuminate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Furthermore, the decorative circuit board unit 420 can generate vibrations by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, thereby causing the entire performance control unit 400 to vibrate.

[3-4f. Effects of the Performance Control Unit]
The effects and functions of the performance control unit 400 will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 44 to 46. Figure 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the performance control unit in Figure 37. Figure 45(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the operation button that is to be hidden by the first button decoration part and button frame, etc., in a view of the performance control unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the operation button that is to be hidden by the first button decoration part and button frame, etc., in a cross-sectional view of the performance control unit. Figure 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the external appearance of the performance control unit in a perspective view from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the external appearance of the performance control unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends.

The performance control unit 400 of this embodiment can display performance images to the player in accordance with the game state that changes as game balls are played into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Furthermore, it allows the player to participate in and enjoy the performances presented to them by operating the operation buttons 410.

The performance control unit 400 is formed to have a total height approximately the same as the height of the lower part of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Furthermore, the performance control unit 400 is formed to have a total width slightly greater than one-third of the total width of the door frame 3. In a front view, the performance control unit 400 is positioned in the center in the left-right direction, below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110).

The performance control unit 400 is attached to the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415, which is attached to the performance control unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 on the plate unit 320. When the performance control unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the legs 442a of the relay board cover 442 (which forms the bottom surface) and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 on the plate unit 320. In other words, only the upper part of the performance control unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, and it is mounted in a suspended state.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 400 is mounted such that the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the front end inner circumference of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the performance control unit mounting portion 326a. As a result, the central axis CL of the transparent operation buttons 410, which bulge forward in a curved shape (a shape that is part of a roughly spherical surface), is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line, moving upward as it moves forward. Consequently, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play, the player's head is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5 located above the tray unit 320 (performance control unit 400), so the central axis CL of the operation buttons 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when a player shifts their gaze from the game area 5a to the performance control unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 will be visible in a state as close as possible to its frontal view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL), allowing for clear viewing of the operation button 410 and the door frame-side performance display device 460 within the operation button 410.

The performance control unit 400 has four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 that are slidably inserted into four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are biased forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to abut against the area near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415.

In the normal state, the control unit 400 has the central part (towards the central axis CL) of the button frame 412 of the control button 410 protruding forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the control button 410, which bulges forward in a curved shape (a shape resembling a part of a roughly spherical surface), the portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 also protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see Figure 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is approximately 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) protrudes approximately 4 cm forward from the front surface of the frame unit 415 with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410.

Under normal conditions, when a player presses the operation button 410 of the performance control unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 contacts the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, its backward movement is restricted and the operation button 410 stops moving backward. When a player presses the operation button 410, they are pressing the button lens 411, which bulges forward in a curved shape (a shape that is part of a roughly spherical surface).

Compared to the control buttons for effects found in conventional pachinko machines, this operation button 410 has a significantly larger outer diameter, making it highly likely that the area near the periphery, away from the center of the button lens 411, will be pressed. More specifically, while the control buttons for effects in conventional pachinko machines are mounted with their central axis extending approximately parallel to the vertical line, the operation button 410 of the effect control unit 400 in this embodiment is mounted with its central axis CL tilted relative to the vertical line. Therefore, when a player presses the operation button 410 from above, as in conventional pachinko machines, the area pressed will be away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410, as indicated by the white arrow in Figure 44.

By the way, in conventional pachinko machines, the control buttons used for gameplay are formed on a flat surface that players press. If the control button is enlarged while maintaining this flat surface, pressing a part of the button off-center may cause the pressed area to tilt, preventing the button from retracting straight and potentially making it impossible to press.

In contrast, the operation button 410 of the performance control unit 400 in this embodiment has a curved surface (a shape similar to a part of a roughly spherical surface) that bulges forward at the part pressed by the player (button lens 411). Therefore, when the operation button 410 is pressed at a position away from the center, the force is distributed across the entire operation button 410, making it less likely to tilt and allowing the operation button 410 to move straight backward. Consequently, no matter where on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can move backward smoothly without tilting, ensuring reliable detection of the press operation and allowing players to fully enjoy the performance of pressing the operation button 410.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 mounted on the lower front of the base 421 of the decorative circuit board unit 420. As described above, only the upper part of the performance control unit 400 is attached to the performance control unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 so that it can be suspended. Therefore, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration occurs at the part furthest from the mounting point. This allows the entire performance control unit 400 to vibrate significantly (strongly), transmitting the vibration to the player touching the performance control unit 400. Additionally, because the vibration motor 424 is positioned directly below a location that is relatively easy for the player to press (the position indicated by the white arrow in Figure 44), a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player pressing the operation button 410, surprising the player and enhancing their enjoyment of the performance.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and a gap is formed between the lower surface of the legs 442a of the relay board cover 442 which forms the lower surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 is pressed or struck hard downwards, the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance control unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 can bend downwards to absorb the impact until the lower surface of the legs 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. In addition, after the lower surface of the legs 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the performance control unit 400 is restricted, preventing excessive force from being applied to the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance control unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, thereby preventing damage to the performance control unit 400. Therefore, when a player is presented with a performance that requires them to press the operation button 410 of the performance control unit 400, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or struck with strong force, the operation button 410 and the performance control unit 400 will not be damaged. This prevents interruptions to gameplay due to damage, minimizes a decline in the player's enjoyment, and reduces the burden on the arcade by making the equipment less prone to damage.

Furthermore, as described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, which is pressed by the player, is formed in a curved shape (a shape that is part of a roughly spherical surface) that protrudes forward. Compared to a flat shape, this results in higher strength and rigidity, and even if struck forcefully, the impact can be distributed across the entire button lens 411, making it less susceptible to damage.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 46, the control unit 400 has a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an internal decorative member 432 for the control buttons, all made of transparent material. Therefore, the decorative features formed by the indentations and recesses on the back surfaces of these components—such as the first button decorative section 411a, the second button decorative section 411b, the first internal decorative section 432f, and the second internal decorative section 432g—can be seen from the front (player side). Additionally, because the plate thickness changes in the areas where these decorative indentations are formed, light refracts in a complex manner, making it difficult to see the back through these areas.

The performance control unit 400 is equipped with a first button decorative portion 411a that extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center. Therefore, the uneven decoration of this first button decorative portion 411a makes it difficult to see behind the outer peripheral edge of the part that is inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (behind in the direction of the central axis CL), there is a gap between the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button internal decorative member 432. However, the first button decorative portion 411a, which is located in front of this gap, makes it difficult to see the gap on the outer circumference of the operation button internal decorative member 432 from the front side (player side). This prevents deterioration of the appearance of the operation button 410, even when a fixed-position decorative member 432 is provided within the pressable operation button 410. It also prevents players from feeling uncomfortable upon seeing the operation button 410, and allows for the seamless placement of the decorative member 432 within the transparent operation button 410, thereby improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

More specifically, the performance control unit 400 is designed so that the unit base 431 and decorative circuit board unit 420, etc., located outside and behind (inside) the outer circumference of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430, are not visible to the player through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in Figure 45, the cross-hatched area enclosed by the dashed line is hidden from view by the player. In this way, the operation button 410 is equipped with the first button decorative part 411a, the second button decorative part 411b, and the button frame 412, etc., making the outside and inside of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button difficult to see and thus concealing it, thereby improving the appearance of the operation button 410, and consequently, the entire performance control unit 400.

Furthermore, in the performance control unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 on the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a circumferential direction, while the second button decorative portion 432g, formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decorative member 432 located on the inner rear of the operation button 410, extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL and is arranged in concentric circles. Therefore, as shown in Figure 46, the uneven lines of the first button decorative portion 411a and the uneven lines of the second button decorative portion 432g intersect, allowing a geometric decoration to be presented to the player.

Furthermore, because the first button decoration section 411a and the second button interior decoration section 432g are separated in the front-to-back direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends) of the performance control unit 400, the first button decoration section 411a and the second button interior decoration section 432g can present the player with a three-dimensional geometric pattern that gives a sense of depth, allowing them to enjoy the decoration, including the interior of the control button 410.

Furthermore, in the performance control unit 400, since the first button decoration section 411a and the second button interior decoration section 432g are separated in the front-to-back direction, as the player's eye position moves, the degree of overlap between the raised and recessed lines of the first button decoration section 411a and the raised and recessed lines of the second button interior decoration section 432g changes. This allows the player to see a dynamic decoration, thus entertaining them.

Thus, the performance control unit 400, through the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, can present a dynamic and three-dimensional decoration to the player. This strongly attracts the player's attention, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), the operation button interior decorative member 432 is located behind the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436. By illuminating the multiple LEDs mounted on the front of these boards, the operation button interior decorative member 432 inside the operation button 410 can be illuminated. In other words, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated using the left operation button interior decorative board 433, the right operation button interior decorative board 434, the upper operation button interior decorative board 435, and the lower operation button interior decorative board 436. As shown in Figure 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the left, right, upper, and lower interior decorative substrates 433, 434, 435, and 436 of the operation button are positioned inside the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, when viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends. Therefore, light from these LEDs does not leak outside the body portion 413a, allowing for effective illumination and decoration only within the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in the performance control unit 400, the first LED 422a of the left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button and the first LED 423a of the right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button are positioned behind the second button decorative portion 411b, which is visible from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. By illuminating these first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decorative portions 411b of the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated. As shown in Figure 38, the first LED 422a on the left external decorative substrate 422 of the operation button and the first LED 423a on the right external decorative substrate 423 of the operation button are positioned between the cylindrical main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. This prevents light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a from leaking into the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d, allowing only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 to be illuminated effectively.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 400 has the second LED 422b of the left operation button exterior decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the right operation button exterior decoration board 423 positioned behind the frame side lenses 417, which are viewed through the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. By illuminating these second LEDs 422b and 423b, the frame side lenses 417 can be illuminated. The second LED 422b of the left operation button exterior decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the right operation button exterior decoration board 423 are positioned between the cylindrical inner portion 416d and the outer peripheral of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. As a result, light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak inside the inner portion 416d or outside the frame body 416, allowing only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 to be illuminated effectively.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 400 has the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430 positioned behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415. By illuminating the multiple LEDs mounted on the front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437, the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated. From the lower side of the part of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached, a flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward to near the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. This prevents light from the LEDs of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 from leaking to the operation buttons 410 or the frame side lenses 417, allowing only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 to be illuminated effectively.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 47 to 50. Figure 47(a) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 48 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 49 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line L-L in Figure 47(a). The left side unit 530 of the door frame is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100, to the left of the through-hole 111, so as to cover the front sides of the upper decorative substrate 161 and the lower decorative substrate 162 (left side decorative substrate 160) of the left side of the door frame, above the tray unit 320. The left side unit 530 of the door frame is for decorating the left side of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The left side unit 530 of the door frame comprises a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, on the left side of the through-hole 111 in a front view; a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front of the left unit base 531; a translucent left unit decorative lens member (not shown) positioned in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at its front end; and a cylindrical frame-shaped projection extending forward from the front of the left unit decorative lens member and attached to the upper front of the left unit base 531. The unit comprises: a left unit upper decorative base 534 extending vertically; a left unit lower decorative base 535 attached to the front lower part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534 and projecting forward in a frame shape; a transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member; and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the left side unit 530 of the door frame is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side and has multiple openings 531a that penetrate from front to back on the front. As shown in the figure, the multiple openings 531a include circular holes and square-shaped holes extending vertically. The left unit base 531 is mounted on the front left side of the door frame base 110 such that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the left side decorative substrate 160 (upper left side decorative substrate 161 and lower left side decorative substrate 162) face forward through the multiple openings 531a. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that, when assembled with the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned approximately in the vertical center. This left unit base 531 is made of an opaque material.

Furthermore, the left unit base 531 has a left-side reflective vertical wall portion 538 (see Figures 5 and 23) that is erected towards the front from the glass plate 192, which is positioned to cover the through-hole 111. This left-side reflective vertical wall portion 538 has a flat inner surface facing the through-hole 111, which serves as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. This reflective surface can be provided by making the inner surface of the left-side reflective vertical wall portion 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. As will be described later, this left-side reflective vertical wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and constitutes a part (the left side) of the reflective vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed from a transparent material and is divided vertically into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a, which is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion 532b, which is rectangular in front view and corresponds to the rectangular opening 531a. When assembled to the door frame 3, the left side unit 530 of the door frame is formed so that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned directly behind the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a smooth convex lens shape on both its front and rear surfaces. This circular lens portion 532a allows light from the LEDs 161a and 162a located at the rear to be projected forward as a point. The light projected forward from this circular lens portion 532a can illuminate the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member.

The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 comprises a central diffusion reflective portion 532c that is conically recessed backward in the center of the front surface, a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflective portion 532c on the front surface, an input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved shape in the center of the rear surface (immediately behind the central diffusion reflective portion 532c), and a front reflection portion 532f that is inclined to move forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e on the outside of the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface.

The front diffuse lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided circumferentially by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c. More specifically, when the front diffuse lens portion 532d is cut radially, the cross-sectional shape is such that the groove portions are recessed in an arc shape towards the rear, and the peaks between the grooves bulge forward in an arc shape, forming a smooth, wavy front surface. Furthermore, the front diffuse lens portion 532d is formed such that the groove portions and peaks alternate circumferentially, separated by the radially extending lines that divide it circumferentially.

The front reflective portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided circumferentially by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are V-shaped indentations extending from rear to front, with their deepest points forming an arc shape. When the front reflective portion 532f is cut along the radial direction, its cross-sectional shape is a sawtooth pattern, with the peaks between the grooves forming a triangular shape that tapers towards the rear. The front reflective portion 532f is formed so that the grooves and peaks move forward as they move away from the center. Furthermore, the front reflective portion 532f is formed so that the grooves and peaks alternate circumferentially, separated by the radially extending lines that divide it circumferentially. These radially extending lines that divide it circumferentially coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the rectangular lens section 532b is positioned directly behind the input lens section 532e, with the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame's left-side decorative substrate 160 located therein.

The rectangular lens section 532b receives light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a via the input lens section 532e. Because the input lens section 532e bulges backward in a curved shape (convex lens shape), it refracts the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels parallel to the forward direction, guiding almost all of the input light to the conical central diffuse reflecting section 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflecting section 532c is then reflected by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflecting section 532c, diffusing in a direction perpendicular to the axis extending front to back (parallel to the front surface of the decorative substrate 160 on the left side of the door frame), and travels through the rectangular lens section 532b from the center outwards along its front surface. Furthermore, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflector 532c travels from the center outwards (away from the center line of the central diffuse reflector 532c) across the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-back direction.

Light reflected from the center outward through the rectangular lens portion 532b, approximately parallel to the front surface of the decorative substrate 160 on the left side of the door frame, reaches the sawtooth-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f and is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. At this time, since the forward reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that its rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-back direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center (see Figure 50). As a result, the light that is reflected outward across the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-to-back direction at the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c can be sequentially reflected forward by the forward reflecting portion 532f as it moves from the center outward.

The light reflected forward by the forward reflecting section 532f then passes through the front diffusion lens section 532d and is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens section 532b. In this process, because the front diffusion lens section 532d has a wavy cross-section, it can diffuse the light reflected forward by the forward reflecting section 532f in various directions, allowing light to be irradiated almost uniformly forward (to the rear surface of the decorative lens member of the left unit) from the front surface of the rectangular lens section 532b.

In this rectangular lens portion 532b, the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f are constructed by dividing multiple concentric grooves with multiple radially extending lines, and then shifting multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves radially along the dividing lines, so that the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This prevents the light emitted forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b from having a concentric striped pattern of varying intensity, allowing for more uniformly luminous illumination forward. As a result, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated with approximately uniform light emission.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed to follow the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member comprises a circular decorative portion formed in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532, and a polyhedral decorative portion formed in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. The circular decorative portion is formed with a cylindrical portion that is recessed at the front and extends short in the front and rear directions, and has multiple triangular ribs circumferentially around its outer circumference. The polyhedral decorative portion is formed with multiple rows of square pyramidal portions arranged vertically on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and multiple rows of polyhedra consisting of multiple triangles arranged vertically on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. The circular decorative portion and the polyhedral decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and polyhedral decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens component can be seen from the front (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Furthermore, the left unit decorative lens component is illuminated by light: the circular decorative portion is illuminated by light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens component 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is illuminated by light emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens component 532.

The decorative base 534 on the left unit has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, extending vertically, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape extending front to back. The portion forming the lower surface on the outer circumference of the decorative base 534 is inclined to protrude downward from the front end to the rear end, and the lower part of this portion penetrates from front to back. This decorative base 534 on the left unit is formed from an opaque material.

The left unit's lower decorative base 535 has a U-shape when viewed from the front, with an opening at the top. The left unit's lower decorative base 535 slopes from approximately the center of the front end upwards to the rear end, moving backward as it moves upwards. This left unit's lower decorative base 535 is made of an opaque material.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically across the entire height of the left side unit 530 of the door frame. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent in the middle section in the vertical direction, concave towards the rear. It consists of a V-shaped section where the lower part bends backward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, a V-shaped section where the upper part bends backward along the front end of the left unit lower decorative base 535, and a straight section connecting the lower end of the upper V-shaped section and the upper end of the lower V-shaped section.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both its upper and lower ends to the front surfaces of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. This left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent material, allowing the left unit decorative lens member, located at the rear, to be visible from the front.

The decorative member 537 extends briefly vertically and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed from an opaque material.

[3-6. Right side unit of the door frame]
The right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 51 to 55. Figure 51(a) is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame seen from the rear. Figure 52 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame disassembled and seen from the front, and Figure 53 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame disassembled and seen from the rear. Figure 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in Figure 51(a). Figure 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line N-N in Figure 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in Figure 51(a). The right side unit 550 of the door frame is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 comprises a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, on the right side of the through-hole 111 in a front view; a door frame right side decorative substrate 552 attached to the front of the right unit base 551; a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusion lens member 553 attached to the front of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, to the left of the center of the front view of the right unit base 551, and extending in the vertical and front-to-back directions; a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated; and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the right unit left decorative member 554.

Furthermore, the right side unit 550 of the door frame comprises a transparent, flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that extends vertically and horizontally, attached to the front of the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame, to the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in a front view, and to the right side of the front of the right unit base 551 in a front view, and extending in the vertical and horizontal directions; a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 that is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and has decorative elements; and a transparent, flat plate-shaped right unit right cover 558 that is attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557.

Furthermore, the right side unit 550 of the door frame comprises a shallow, box-shaped, opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559, which is positioned between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and extends in the vertical and front-to-back directions with its front and right sides open; and an opaque, flat right unit right light-shielding member 560, which is mounted to the left of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and closes the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559.

Furthermore, the right side unit 550 of the door frame includes a translucent right unit decorative lens member 561 that is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and has a polyhedral decoration at its front end; a frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates from front to back and is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556; a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562; and a plurality of decorative members 564 that are attached to the front side of the right unit cover 563. Although not shown in the diagram, the right side unit 550 of the door frame is mounted so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and is equipped with a connecting cable for connecting the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame top unit relay board 589 of the door frame top unit 570.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, elongated vertically, and extends in a short, rectangular tube shape from front to back, forming a box-like shape with a closed section near the center in the front-to-back direction. This right unit base 551 is made of an opaque material.

Furthermore, the right unit base 551 has a right-side reflective vertical wall section 568 (see Figures 6 and 24) that is erected towards the front from the glass plate 192, which is positioned to cover the through-hole 111. This right-side reflective vertical wall section 568 has a flat inner surface facing the through-hole 111, which serves as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. This reflective surface, similar to the inner surface of the left-side reflective vertical wall section 538, can be provided by making the inner surface of the right-side reflective vertical wall section 568 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. As will be described later, this right-side reflective vertical wall section 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and constitutes a part (right-side portion) of the reflective vertical wall section 33 described above.

The right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. The right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame comprises a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted to the left of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of middle LEDs 552c mounted in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. The left LEDs 552a of the right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame are for illuminating the left decorative member 554 of the right unit via the left diffusion lens member 553 of the right unit. The right LEDs 552b are for illuminating the right decorative member 557 of the right unit via the right diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit. The middle LEDs 552c are for illuminating the decorative lens member 561 of the right unit.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in white on both its front and rear surfaces. The decorative substrate 552 is divided vertically into the upper decorative substrate 552A and the lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown in the diagram, the lower decorative substrate 552B is connected to the door body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper decorative substrate 552A is connected to the lower decorative substrate 552B.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comprises a flat main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 553b projecting a short, flat shape from the rear edge of the main body portion 553a toward the right in a front view, multiple notches 553c formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, with a rectangular cutout extending to the left from the right end of the rear wall portion 553b in a front view, a shallow recess 553d on the left side of the main body portion 553a in a front view capable of accommodating the right unit left decorative member 554, multiple input lens portions 553e projecting rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction, and multiple side reflectors 553f arranged vertically on the right side of the main body portion 553a in a front view such that each input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 553a of the left diffusion lens member 553 of the right unit has a side view shape in which the upper corner of the front end of a vertically extending rectangle is beveled, and the lower edge is inclined to move upward as it extends forward. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 55, the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined relative to the vertical line of the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame, moving to the right in a front view as it extends from the rear end towards the front. The front end of the main body portion 553a, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes significantly further forward than the front end of the left side unit 530 of the door frame.

When assembled to the right side unit 550 of the door frame, the rear wall portion 553b extends approximately to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit's right diffusion lens member 556 abuts against the right end of this rear wall portion 553b.

Multiple notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the central LEDs 552c of the right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame. When assembled to the right-side unit 550 of the door frame, the central LEDs 552c of the right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame face forward from the multiple notches 553c, allowing the central LEDs 552c to effectively illuminate and decorate the right-side unit's decorative lens member 561.

The receiving recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer periphery shape substantially matches the outer shape of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit. This allows the left decorative member 554 of the right unit to be accommodated.

Multiple input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed approximately at the center of each of the six equal vertical divisions when the left diffusion lens member 553 of the right unit is divided vertically. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the input lens portions 553e have a rectangular portion with a vertically extending rectangle protruding rearward, and a portion that curves spherically forward from the rear surface of the rectangular portion. When assembled to the right side unit 550 of the door frame, these input lens portions 553e are positioned directly in front of the left LED 552a on the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame. This allows light from the left LED 552a to be input and widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

Multiple (six) side reflectors 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 553f is formed by multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided circumferentially by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined relative to the surface of the main body portion 553a, while the surface further away from the input lens portion 553e extends perpendicularly to the surface of the main body portion 553a, with the deepest part forming an arc shape. When the side reflector 553f is cut radially from the input lens portion 553e, the cross-sectional shape is formed as a pointed triangle with the peaks between the grooves facing towards the center, and the overall shape is saw-toothed. Furthermore, the side reflector 553f is formed so that the groove portions and peak portions are alternately arranged circumferentially, with the radial lines dividing the multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves circumferentially as the boundary.

This right unit left diffusion lens member 553 receives light irradiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. The light enters the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553a from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. Because the rear end of this input lens portion 553e is curved and recessed toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by this curved surface, spreading outwards and diffusing radially toward the front within the main body 553a, centered around each input lens portion 553e.

The main body 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame, so that as the entire unit moves forward, it moves to the right when viewed from the front. Therefore, light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame, and incident into the main body 553a via the input lens 553e, strikes the flat left surface inside the main body 553a. However, due to the angle of incidence to the left surface of the main body 553a, the direct light from the left LED 552a does not radiate outwards from the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected towards the side reflector 553f on the inner surface of the left surface.

The light that enters the main body 553a from the input lens 553e toward the front strikes the sawtooth-shaped side reflector 553f, is reflected to the left in a front view, and is irradiated outward from the left side of the main body 553a. Although light is also irradiated outward (to the right in a front view) from the right side of the main body 553a (side reflector 553f), since the right unit left light-shielding member 559, which is located on the right side of the main body 553a, is made of a white material, the left side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light-shielding member 559 passes through the main body 553a and is irradiated to the left side. Therefore, from the left side of the main body 553a, light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f within the main body 553a, and light irradiated to the right from the side reflector 553f, reflected to the left by the left surface of the left light-shielding member 559 of the right unit, and passing through the main body 553a, are both irradiated to the left. This allows the left decorative member 554 of the right unit, which is attached to the left side of the main body 553a, to be illuminated with good brightness.

Furthermore, in the side reflective section 553f, multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and then multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted radially along the dividing lines, so that the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This prevents the light irradiated outward (to the left) from the left side of the main body 553a from having a concentric striped pattern of varying intensity, allowing for more uniformly luminous light to be irradiated to the left. As a result, the left decorative member 554 of the right unit, housed in the recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a, can be illuminated and decorated with approximately uniform light emission.

Furthermore, since the left diffusion lens member 553 of the right unit is formed of a transparent material, the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines of the side reflecting portion 553f formed on the opposite side can be seen from the left side of the front view of the main body portion 553a (the side where the housing recess 553d is formed). Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the left decorative member 554 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the left diffusion lens member 553 of the right unit can be seen through that transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the left decorative member 554 can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 553f.

The left decorative member 554 of the right unit is formed in a thin sheet-like shape, and is decorated with the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that aligns with the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5, in a translucent manner. The left cover 555 of the right unit protects the outer surface of the left decorative member 554 when assembled to the right side unit 550 of the door frame.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 556b projecting a short, flat shape from the rear edge of the main body portion 556a to the left in a front view, multiple notches 556c formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, with a rectangular cutout extending to the right from the left end of the rear wall portion 556b in a front view, a shallow recess 556d on the right side of the main body portion 556a in a front view capable of accommodating the right unit right decorative member 557, multiple input lens portions 556e projecting rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a in the vertical direction, and multiple side reflectors 556f arranged in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body portion 556a in a front view such that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit's right diffusion lens member 556 has a side view shape in which the upper corner of the front end of a vertically extending rectangle is beveled, and the lower edge is inclined to move upward as it extends forward. Its external shape is approximately the same as the main body portion 553a of the right unit's left diffusion lens member 553. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 55, the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined relative to the vertical line on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame, moving to the left as it extends forward from the rear end. The front end of the main body portion 556a, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes significantly further forward than the front end of the left side unit 530 of the door frame.

When assembled to the right side unit 550 of the door frame, the rear wall portion 556b extends approximately to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the left diffusion lens member 553 of the right unit abuts against the left end of this rear wall portion 556b.

Multiple notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the central LEDs 552c of the right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame. These multiple notches 556c are formed in positions corresponding to the multiple notches 553c of the left diffusion lens member 553 of the right unit. Therefore, when assembled to the right-side unit 550 of the door frame, a rectangular opening is formed through the front and back by the notches 553c of the left diffusion lens member 553 of the right unit and the notches 556c of the right diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit. The central LEDs 552c of the right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame face forward through this opening, allowing the multiple central LEDs 552c to effectively illuminate and decorate the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The receiving recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer periphery shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. This allows the right decorative member 557 of the right unit to be accommodated.

Multiple input lens portions 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed approximately at the center of each of the six equal vertical divisions when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is divided vertically. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, each input lens portion 556e has a rectangular portion with a vertically extending rectangle protruding rearward, and a portion that curves spherically forward from the rear surface of the rectangular portion. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, these input lens portions 556e are positioned directly in front of the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. This allows light from the right LED 552b to be input and widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

Multiple (six) side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflector 556f is formed by multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided circumferentially by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined relative to the surface of the main body portion 556a, while the surface further away from the input lens portion 556e extends perpendicularly to the surface of the main body portion 556a, with the deepest part forming an arc shape. When the side reflector 556f is cut radially from the input lens portion 556e, the cross-sectional shape is formed as a pointed triangle with the peaks between the grooves facing towards the center, and the overall shape is saw-toothed. Furthermore, the side reflector 556f is formed so that the groove portions and peak portions are alternately arranged circumferentially, with the radial lines dividing the multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves circumferentially as the boundary.

This right unit right diffusion lens member 556 receives light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame, entering the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Since the rear end of this input lens portion 556e is curved and recessed toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by this curved surface, spreading outwards and diffusing radially toward the front within the main body 556a, centered around each input lens portion 556e.

The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame, so that as the entire unit moves forward, it shifts to the left when viewed from the front. Therefore, light emitted from the right LED 552b, mounted on the front surface of the right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame, and incident into the main body 556a via the input lens 556e, strikes the flat right surface inside the main body 556a. However, due to the angle of incidence to the right surface of the main body 556a, the direct light from the right LED 552b does not radiate outwards from the left surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected towards the side reflector 556f on the inner surface of the right surface.

The light that enters the main body 556a from the input lens 556e toward the front strikes the sawtooth-shaped side reflector 556f, is reflected to the right in a front view, and is irradiated outward from the right side of the main body 556a. Although light is also irradiated outward (to the left in a front view) from the right side of the main body 556a (side reflector 556f), the right unit right light-shielding member 560, which is located on the left side of the main body 556a, is made of a white material, so the right side of the right unit right light-shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light-shielding member 560 passes through the main body 556a and is irradiated to the right. Therefore, from the right side of the main body 556a, light reflected to the right by the side reflector 556f within the main body 556a, and light irradiated to the left from the side reflector 556f, reflected to the right by the right surface of the right unit right light-shielding member 560, and passing through the main body 556a, are both irradiated to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557, which is attached to the right side of the main body 556a, can be illuminated with good brightness.

Furthermore, in the side reflective section 556f, multiple concentric grooves are divided by multiple radially extending lines, and then multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted radially along the dividing lines, so that the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction. This prevents the light irradiated outward (to the right) from the right side of the main body 556a from having a concentric striped pattern of varying intensity, allowing for more uniformly luminous light to be irradiated to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557, housed in the receiving recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a, can be illuminated and decorated with approximately uniform light emission.

Furthermore, since the right unit's right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent material, the pattern consisting of multiple concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines on the side reflecting portion 556f formed on the opposite side can be seen from the right side of the main body portion 556a in a front view (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). Therefore, if a transparent portion is formed in the right unit's right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit's right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through that transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit's right decorative member 557 can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet-like shape, and is decorated with the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1, a logo in line with the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5, etc., in a translucent manner. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed approximately symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Furthermore, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same or different.

The left light-shielding member 559 of the right unit is formed in a shape that is substantially the same as the side view shape of the left diffusion lens member 553 and the right diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit when viewed from the side. The left light-shielding member 559 of the right unit is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The left light-shielding member 559 of the right unit comprises a flat main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b projecting a short, flat shape from the rear edge of the main body portion 559a toward the right when viewed from the front, multiple notches 559c formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, with a rectangular cutout extending to the left from the right end of the rear wall portion 559b when viewed from the front, and multiple flat reinforcing portions 559d extending to the right from the right surface of the main body portion 559a and extending from the rear wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body portion 559a of the left light-shielding member 559 of the right unit has a side view shape in which the upper corner of the front end of a vertically extending rectangle is beveled, and the lower edge is inclined to move upward as it extends forward. Its external shape is substantially the same as the main body portions 553a and 556a of the left diffusion lens member 553 and the right diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit.

When assembled to the right side unit 550 of the door frame, the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right of the approximate center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit abuts against the right end of this rear wall portion 559b.

Multiple notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the central LEDs 552c of the right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame. These multiple notches 559c are formed in positions corresponding to the multiple notches 553c and 556c of the left diffusion lens member 553 and the right-side diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit. Therefore, when assembled to the right-side unit 550 of the door frame, the central LEDs 552c of the right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame face forward from the multiple notches 559c, allowing the multiple central LEDs 552c to effectively illuminate and decorate the right-side decorative lens member 561.

The multiple reinforcing sections 559d are arranged in pairs, each pair spaced vertically at approximately the same height as the left-right width. Three such pairs are provided, spaced a predetermined distance apart vertically. Each pair of reinforcing sections 559d is formed behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. These multiple reinforcing sections 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the right side unit 550 of the door frame.

The right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit, when viewed from the side, has a shape where the upper corner of the front end of a vertically extending rectangle is beveled, and the lower edge is inclined upward as it moves forward. It is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body 559a of the left light-shielding member 559 of the right unit. When assembled to the right side unit 550 of the door frame, the right light-shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening of the left light-shielding member 559, which is formed in a shallow box shape and opens to the right.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed from a white material. As shown in Figure 55, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the main body portion 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are positioned close to the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are spaced apart in the left-right direction, forming a space that extends in the vertical and front-back directions with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. Light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the right-side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame is projected onto the rear side of the right-unit decorative lens member 561 through the space formed between the main body 559a of the left light-shielding member 559 of the right unit and the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit.

Furthermore, the left light-shielding member 559 and the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit are formed from an opaque material, preventing interference between the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a, middle LED 552c, and right LED 552b on the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame. This allows the left decorative member 554, the right decorative member 557, and the right decorative lens member 561 of the right unit to be illuminated and decorated only by the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and middle LED 552c, respectively.

Furthermore, the left light-shielding member 559 of the right unit and the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit have their internal spaces divided into four vertically by three sets of reinforcing parts 559d. Therefore, the LEDs 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame, located at the rear of each divided space, prevent light interference between the spaces. This allows the portions of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space to be illuminated and decorated independently. In other words, the front end of the right side unit 550 of the door frame can be divided into multiple (four) vertical regions, each of which can be illuminated and decorated independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that conforms to the front end shapes of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 comprises a circular decorative portion 561a, which is circular in shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b, which extends vertically and has multiple polyhedra formed on it. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed with a cylindrical portion that is recessed on the front and extends short in the front and rear directions, and has multiple triangular ribs circumferentially on its outer circumference. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b is formed with multiple square pyramidal portions arranged vertically on the front of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and multiple polyhedra consisting of multiple triangles arranged vertically on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion.

More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed such that, in the portions located in front of each of the four spaces divided by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light-shielding member 559, the top three portions have one polyfaced decorative portion 561b positioned on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a located in the center in the vertical direction, while the lowest portion has only a polyfaced decorative portion 561b.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be seen from the front (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. This right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated by an LED 552c located in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame, which is positioned at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a cylindrical frame shape that penetrates in the front-to-back direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is shaped to conform to the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit decorative base 562 is made of an opaque material.

The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. This right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent material, allowing the right unit decorative lens member 561, located at the rear, to be visible from the front.

The decorative members 564 extend briefly vertically and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative members 564 are formed from an opaque material. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four sections in the vertical direction.

The right side unit 550 of the door frame, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes significantly forward in a plate-like shape compared to the left side unit 530 of the door frame, and protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The right side unit 550 allows for independent illumination and decoration of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557, which are provided on both the protruding left and right sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561, which is provided at the front end.

The right side unit 550 of the door frame is plate-shaped and protrudes significantly forward. Therefore, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in a gaming hall's island setup, the right side unit 550 acts as a partition between it and the adjacent pachinko machine to its right. This creates the illusion for players of this pachinko machine 1 that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them.

Furthermore, because the right side unit 550 of the door frame protrudes significantly forward, in a gaming hall where pachinko machines 1 are installed in rows, it can be seen from the side along the island equipment, even if not positioned directly in front of the pachinko machine 1. This makes the pachinko machine 1 stand out in a gaming hall where many pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, by illuminating the left decorative member 554 and the right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the right side unit 550 of the door frame, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be announced from a distance, even if not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players.

Furthermore, in the right side unit 550 of the door frame, when a malfunction such as a ball jam or error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the left decorative member 554 of the right unit, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, and the decorative lens member 561 of the right unit on both the left and right sides are illuminated in a specific manner. This allows the staff of the amusement hall to be immediately notified of the malfunction and made aware of it, enabling a quick response to the malfunction. This allows for an early resolution of the interruption of the player's game, and prevents the player from becoming frustrated and losing interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 56 to 59. Figure 56(a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit from the rear. Figure 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in Figure 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a central base 571 mounted in the center in the left-right direction above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, a pair of side bases 572 mounted on both the left and right sides of the central base 571 and also mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 mounted on the front surface of the pair of side bases 572, and a box-shaped structure that extends left and right, with the center in the left-right direction protruding forward and the rear open, and penetrates from front to back at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573. The unit body 271, which is attached to the front of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572, has a pair of openings 574a, and multiple slits 574b (three on each side) that extend from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center, and penetrate in the front-rear direction and spaced apart vertically. The speaker cover 575, made of perforated metal, is positioned in front of each of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear of the unit body 271 to close the pair of openings 574a.

Although not shown in the diagram, each of the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) has an internal space that opens only towards the side where the opening window is provided. Within these internal spaces, there are external periphery light-emitting units 34 (left external periphery light-emitting unit 34a, right external periphery light-emitting unit 34b) that emit light from outside the periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and external periphery light detection units 35 (left external periphery light detection unit 35a, right external periphery light detection unit 35b) that detect light from inside the periphery of the opening window outside that periphery.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 includes a light-transmitting top decorative member 576 attached to the front center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction, a door frame top decorative substrate 577 attached to the rear of the top decorative member 576 with multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface, and multiple (three on each side) transparent flat light guides attached to the front of the unit body 271, each closing multiple slits 574b and extending from near both ends of the top decorative member 576 across the opening 574a to near both ends of the unit body 271. The unit comprises a material 578, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580, respectively, attached to the left and right sides of the top central decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271, and covering the front surfaces of multiple (three) light guide members 578, respectively; and a top central left decorative member 581 and a top central right decorative member 582, respectively, attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front sides of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and extending from the left and right sides of the top central decorative member 576 to near the central end of the opening 574a.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 includes a left door frame top decorative substrate 583 and a right door frame top decorative substrate 584, each mounted on the inner sides of the left and right sides of the unit body 271, with LEDs mounted on portions facing the left and right outer ends of multiple (three) light guide members 578; a pair of substrate bases 585, each mounted at portions through which multiple (three) slits 574b, each formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271, pass; a middle left door frame top decorative substrate 586 and a middle right door frame top decorative substrate 587, each mounted on the front of the pair of substrate bases 585, with multiple LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 271; and a pair of light-shielding members 588, each mounted on the rear side of the unit body 271 in front of the middle left door frame top decorative substrate 586 and the middle right door frame top decorative substrate 587.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 within the unit body 271, a relay board cover 590 mounted on the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589, an upper cover 591 mounted on the unit body 271 to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and a lower cover 592 mounted on the unit body 271 to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends to the left and right when viewed from the front. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that opens to the rear and has multiple indentations on its front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front of each side base 572, respectively. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surfaces of the pair of upper speakers 573 are mounted diagonally so that the side closer to the center of the door frame top unit 570 moves towards the rear. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound across a wide frequency range.

The unit body 271, in front view, is formed in a shape resembling a rectangle extending horizontally, with the lower parts near both ends bulging downwards. In other words, the unit body 271, in front view, is formed in a shape resembling a rectangle extending horizontally, with a trapezoidal notch tapering upwards from the lower edge. In plan view, the unit body 271 is formed by combining a rectangle extending horizontally, a trapezoid projecting forward with its base approximately half the total width (horizontal length) centered on the front edge of the rectangle, and a rectangle projecting shorter forward with the front edge of the trapezoid as its longer side. Therefore, on the front of the unit body 271, both sides of the forward-projecting portion at the horizontal center are located behind (recessed) the line connecting the horizontal ends of the unit body 271 and the horizontal ends of the front protruding portion.

The unit body 271 has openings 574a formed in the front of the unit, extending from the left and right ends to the parts that protrude forward, extending to the outer edges. Furthermore, the unit body 271 has multiple slits 574b formed in the diagonally extending portion of the trapezoidal forward projection on the front of the unit body 271. These slits 574b extend from near the front end of the diagonally extending portion on the front of the unit body 271 to near the openings 574a. Additionally, three slits 574b are formed on each side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction, spaced apart vertically.

Furthermore, the unit body 271 includes an upper opening 574c, which is a rectangular cutout in the center of the upper surface extending from the rear end towards the front, and a lower opening 574d, which is a cutout in the lower surface extending from the rear end towards the front in the left-right direction. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by a lower cover 592.

Furthermore, the unit body 271 includes a top left decorative section 574e and a top right decorative section 574f that extend vertically at both the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative section 574e is formed at approximately the same position in the front-to-back direction as the front surface of the area where the opening 574a is formed. The front surface of the top right decorative section 574f is formed to be located further forward than the front surface of the area where the opening 574a is formed. This unit body 271 is made of an opaque material.

The top decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion that protrudes forward from the center of the front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top decorative member 576, when viewed from the front, is formed in a shape resembling a combination of a roughly square pentagon with its lower side's center in the left-right direction bent downwards, and roughly right-angled triangles formed by connecting the ends of the sides extending outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon to the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top decorative member 576 is inclined so that the front portion of the pentagon moves backward as it is positioned downwards. The entire top decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape and is translucent.

The door frame top decorative substrate 577 is mounted on the rear side of the top decorative member 576 in a state where its front surface is inclined to move backward as it moves downward, so as to align with the front surface of the irregularly shaped pentagonal portion of the top decorative member 576. Multiple LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top decorative substrate 577, and by illuminating these LEDs, the top decorative member 576 can be illuminated.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent material. The light guide member 578 is shaped to conform to the shape of the left and right outer edges of the forward-projecting portion on the front surface of the unit body 271. If we describe the unit body 271 as having end sides closer to both left and right ends and center sides closer to the center, the light guide member 578 is composed of a straight portion 578a that extends straight left and right from the end side toward the center, and an arc portion 578b that extends in a large-radius arc shape from the central end side of the straight portion 578a toward the center, moving forward as it moves toward the center. In the straight portion 578a, the depth in the front-to-back direction is smaller than the height in the up-to-down direction, while in the arc portion 578b, the depth in the front-to-back direction is larger than the height in the up-to-down direction. Furthermore, the light guide member 578 has a constant vertical height in its straight section 578a, while its vertical height in its arc-shaped section 578b decreases towards the center. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight section 578a is positioned directly in front of the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc-shaped section 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front.

The light guide member 578 comprises a diffuse reflecting portion 578c, which consists of sawtooth-shaped irregularities formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and a diffuse input portion 578d, which consists of multiple irregularities formed on the rear side of the arc-shaped portion 578b.

When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the light guide member 578 has its outer ends facing the LEDs 583a and 584a of the left or right decorative substrate 583 or the right decorative substrate 584 of the door frame top, and its diffusion input section 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the middle left decorative substrate 586 or the middle right decorative substrate 587 of the door frame top. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the left or right decorative substrate 583 or the right decorative substrate 584 of the door frame top is incident on the light guide member 578 from its outer ends, the light travels towards the center within the straight section 578a and is sequentially reflected forward from the ends by the diffusion reflector section 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight section 578a, so that light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight section 578a. In front of the light guide member 578, either the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 is positioned, and the portion of these members facing forward of the straight section 578a is illuminated.

Furthermore, when light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 587 is incident on the light guide member 578 through the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the irregularities of the diffusion input portion 578d, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. This allows the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b to be illuminated and decorated.

In this way, the light guide member 578 guides light from the LEDs 583a and 586a of the left decorative substrate 583 and the middle left decorative substrate 586 of the door frame top, or from the LEDs 584a and 587a of the right decorative substrate 584 and the middle right decorative substrate 587 of the door frame top, enabling the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580, which are positioned at the front, to emit light in a good (uniform) manner.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578, which are positioned to the left of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens sections 579a, each independently housing the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens sections 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 are formed in a shape that conforms to the light guide members 578, and cover the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide members 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens section 579a, there are rows of forward-projecting pyramidal pyramidal protrusions arranged from left to right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative section 574e of the unit body 271. In other words, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates almost the entire area to the left of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by LEDs 583a and 586a on the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is mounted on the front of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578, which are located to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens sections 580a, each independently housing the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens sections 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 are formed in a shape that conforms to the light guide members 578, and cover the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide members 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens section 580a, there are rows of forward-projecting pyramidal protrusions and recesses arranged from left to right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative section 574f of the unit body 271. In other words, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates almost the entire area to the right of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. This top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated by LEDs 584a and 587a on the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top center-left decorative member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579, between the left-side opening 574a on the front of the unit body 271 and the top center decorative member 576. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the top center-left decorative member 581 is attached to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579, with its front central portion protruding further forward than the front of the top left decorative lens member 579. This top center-left decorative member 581 is made of an opaque material.

The top center-right decorative member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580, between the right-side opening 574a on the front of the unit body 271 and the top center decorative member 576. When assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the top center-right decorative member 582 is installed to fill the gaps between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580, with its front central portion protruding further forward than the front of the top right decorative lens member 580. This top center-right decorative member 582 is made of an opaque material.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is mounted on the inside of the left side (top left decorative portion 574e) within the unit body 271, with the side on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. The LED 583a is mounted on the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 in a position opposite to the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 mounted on the front left side of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a on the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 can illuminate and decorate the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left-side opening 574a of the unit body 271, via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578.

The right-hand decorative substrate 584 of the door frame is mounted on the inside of the right side (top-right decorative section 574f) within the unit body 271, with the side on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. The LED 584a of the right-hand decorative substrate 584 is mounted opposite the right end surface of the three light guide members 578, which are mounted on the front right side of the unit body 271 (see Figure 59). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the right-hand decorative substrate 584 illuminates the portion of the top-right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right-side opening 574a of the unit body 271, via the straight sections 578a of the three light guide members 578.

A pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion of the unit body 271 in which a plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed to be approximately symmetrical with respect to each other. The substrate base 585 has a side wall that is approximately square in side view, with sides extending vertically and horizontally; a rear wall that is rectangular in front view, extending outward from the rear edge of the side wall at a right angle; an upper wall that is approximately a right triangle, connecting the upper edges of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the front end of the upper edge of the side wall to the middle of the upper edge of the side wall as the hypotenuse; and a lower wall that is approximately a right triangle, connecting the lower edges of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side from the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular prism box with an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 such that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. The door frame top center left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to this board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The decorative base plate 586 for the left center of the door frame top is attached to the base plate 585, which is mounted on the rear left side of the unit body 271, in such a way that it closes the open, box-shaped section from the front. By being mounted on the front surface of the base plate 585, the front surface of the decorative base plate 586 is inclined relative to the horizontally extending surface, so that it moves forward as it approaches the horizontal center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the decorative base plate 586 is approximately parallel to the surface of the section where the three slits 574b are formed, to the left of the horizontal center of the unit body 271.

The decorative substrate 586 on the left center of the door frame has multiple LEDs 586a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b on the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 586a, the decorative substrate 586 can illuminate the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 closest to the top center decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578.

The right-center decorative base plate 587 of the door frame top is attached to the base plate base 585, which is mounted on the rear right side of the unit body 271, from the left-right center. It is attached to the base plate base 585 in such a way that it closes the open, box-shaped section from the front. By being attached to the front surface of the base plate base 585, the front surface of the right-center decorative base plate 587 is inclined relative to the horizontally extending surface, so that it moves forward as it approaches the left-right center of the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface of the right-center decorative base plate 587 is approximately parallel to the surface of the section where the three slits 574b are formed on the right side of the left-right center of the unit body 271.

The decorative substrate 587 on the right center of the door frame top has multiple LEDs 587a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b on the unit body 271. As a result, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the multiple LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b to the right of the center of the unit body 271. By illuminating the multiple LEDs 587a, the decorative substrate 587 can illuminate the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 closest to the top center decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are mounted on the front and rear sides of the unit body 271, at a position between the door frame top left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed from an opaque material, and are approximately symmetrical to each other. The light-shielding members 588 partition the space between the multiple LEDs 586a and 587a on the door frame top left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 587, which are arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. This light-shielding member 588 allows only the LEDs 586a and 587a, located immediately behind each light guide member 578, to guide light forward via the light guide member 578, enabling the decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580 to emit light effectively while remaining independent.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is mounted on the front of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 relays the connections between the pair of upper speakers 573, the door frame top central decorative board 577, the door frame top left decorative board 583, the door frame top right decorative board 584, the door frame top central left decorative board 586, and the door frame top central right decorative board 587, and the door frame base unit 100's door body relay board. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front of this door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered by a relay board cover 590.

This door frame top unit 570 is equipped with a top central decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center in the left-right direction. Furthermore, the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top central decorative member 576 are curved in a way that they appear to be recessed backward. This creates the illusion for the player that only the top central decorative member 576 protrudes significantly forward, thereby strongly attracting the player's attention to the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is formed so that the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, which decorate both sides of the centrally positioned top decorative member 576, extend from both sides of the top decorative member 576 to the top left decorative section 574e and the top right decorative section 574f, which are formed at both ends of the unit body 271. This allows the door frame top unit 570 to decorate the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3.

In this configuration, the door frame top unit 570 is equipped with upper speakers 573, each protected by a speaker cover 575 made of perforated metal, located behind the left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are positioned. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens sections 579a and 580a, which are spaced apart vertically from the top left and right decorative lens members 579 and 580. This allows the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 to be heard clearly by the player, providing a high-quality stereo sound experience.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570, through multiple light guide members 578 provided on the rear sides of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, can guide light from the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, thereby enabling the entire front surface of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 to be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3, including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effects of Door Frames]
The effects of the door frame 3 will now be explained. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the door frame 3 has through-holes 111 that penetrate the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, which are larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in conventional pachinko machines. In line with the enlargement of the through-holes 111, the vertical height of the tray unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 has been reduced, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 has been reduced. As a result, the front of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through-holes 111 (glass unit 190), and it is compatible with game boards 5 with a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is equipped with a performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) located below the through-hole 111, which has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center of the left-right direction of the tray unit 320 that bulges forward. The front surfaces of the lower halves (the parts below the upper tray 321) on both the left and right sides of the performance control unit 400 (the front surfaces of the lower front decorative part 326c of the tray) are formed in a recessed shape that is carved out towards the rear (the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the performance control unit 400 are curved in a concave shape so that they are positioned further back than the straight line connecting the front ends of both the left and right ends of the tray unit 320 and the front ends of both the left and right ends of the performance control unit 400). As a result, the performance control unit 400, which is attached to the front surface in the center of the left-right direction of the tray unit 320, appears to protrude significantly forward, making the performance control unit 400 conspicuous and emphasized to the player, and drawing their attention to it strongly.

The door frame 3 is designed so that the large, hemispherical, transparent control button 410 is tilted upwards and forwards when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that when the player lowers their gaze to the control unit 400, the control button 410 faces their head (face). When the player lowers their gaze to the control unit 400, the control button 410 is almost directly in front of them, making the large, round control button 410 highly visible and increasing anticipation for the effects triggered by it. Furthermore, the effects displayed on the door frame-side effect display device 460, located within the transparent control button 410, are clearly visible, allowing the player to fully enjoy the effects.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a large, forward-protruding, rounded operating button 410, which has approximately the same diameter as the total height of the plate unit 320. Therefore, when operating the operating button 410, it is possible to touch any part of the button with a short hand movement, making "quick pressing" of the operating button 410 relatively easy. Also, because the large-diameter, forward-protruding, rounded operating button 410 is mounted at an angle, it can be operated not only by pressing from above like the operating buttons on conventional pachinko machines, but also from the left, right, or even the front. This user-friendly operating button 410 enhances the enjoyment of the gameplay using the operating button 410.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is mounted with the performance control unit 400 suspended by the plate unit 320, and a vibration motor 424 is provided at the bottom of the performance control unit 400 to generate vibrations. By rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the game state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the top of the operation button 410, surprising the player and enhancing their enjoyment of the performances using the operation button 410.

Furthermore, because the door frame 3 is equipped with a large operation button 410 (performance operation unit 400) that extends across the entire height of the tray unit 320, the lower tray 322 located below the upper tray 321 becomes less conspicuous compared to conventional pachinko machines. This makes it easier for players accustomed to conventional pachinko machines to recognize the difference, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the player's attention.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the performance control unit 400, relative to the lower tray opening 326d which opens to the left of the performance control unit 400 on the front of the tray unit 320. This allows the volume of the lower tray 322 to be larger relative to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, ensuring a sufficient number of game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322. Additionally, because the rear of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the performance control unit 400, when a player places their left hand inside the lower tray 322 or places their fingers on the lower tray opening 326d, their fingertips are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322. This reduces discomfort for the player, preventing a decrease in enjoyment of the game, and also allows the player to tactilely recognize that the volume of the lower tray 322 is larger than the size of the lower tray opening 326d.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are released into the lower tray 322, and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a for removing game balls from the lower tray 322 into a coin box or the like below the tray unit 320, arranged in a straight line from front to back. In a front view, it is positioned to the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d (to the right of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the performance operation unit 400). In other words, because the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are positioned behind the performance operation unit 400, the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a on the tray unit cover 326 (the right outer side of the lower tray opening 326d), and the front end of the lower tray cover 340, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player's side, resulting in a cleaner appearance for the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) and improving the overall look of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in the lower tray 322, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball removal hole 322a positioned below the front (directly in front) of the lower tray ball supply opening 323c. Therefore, when the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is open, game balls released from the upper tray 321, etc., into the lower tray 322 are immediately discharged through the lower tray ball removal hole 322a into the prize box below as soon as they enter the lower tray 322. At this time, the player cannot see the lower tray ball supply opening 323c or the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, and therefore cannot see the flow of game balls from the upper tray 321, etc., through the lower tray 322, and into the prize box. This creates the illusion for the player that the game balls in the upper tray 321, or the game balls dispensed from the payout device 830 when the upper tray 321 is full, are being directly discharged into the coin box. This reduces the inconvenience of the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing the player to concentrate on the game (playing the game balls, viewing the animations, etc.) and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball removal hole 322a positioned slightly to the front left of the lower tray ball supply opening 323c, and the raised wall portion of the lower tray 322 to the right of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. This allows the game balls supplied from the lower tray ball supply opening 323c to the lower tray 322a to be guided directly to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, or indirectly to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a by reflecting off the right-side wall. As a result, when the lower tray ball removal hole 322a remains open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c do not enter the area to the left of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a (lower tray first area A1) in the lower tray 322. Instead, they can be discharged downwards from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the game balls circulating within the lower tray 322 are not visible to the player, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 has a lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326, facing forward towards the lower tray 322, between the performance operation unit mounting section 326a (performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if a player places their hand over the lower tray opening 326d or into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not obstructed by the player's hand. This allows the sound from the lower speaker 921 of the circuit board unit 900 in the main body frame 4 to be output forward effectively, allowing players to enjoy the sound provided by this pachinko machine 1. Additionally, when a player places their hand into or near the lower tray 322, they can tactilely feel the vibrations from the deep bass sound emitted forward from the lower speaker 921 through the lower speaker opening 326e, thus enhancing the player's enjoyment and preventing a decline in their interest.

Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is equipped with a right-side door frame unit 550 that protrudes significantly forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island layout of a gaming hall, the right-side door frame unit 550 can act as a partition between it and the adjacent pachinko machine on the right. This creates the illusion for players of this pachinko machine 1 that they are playing in a private room, allowing them to play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them.

Furthermore, since the front end and both sides of the right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which is plate-shaped and protrudes significantly forward, can be illuminated, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not directly in front of the machine in a gaming hall where the machines are lined up, its presence can be made known from a distance, such as from the side along the island equipment, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 to players.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 includes a top decorative member 576 that protrudes forward from the center in the left-right direction on the upper door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111. The front surfaces of both the left and right sides of the top decorative member 576 are formed in a concave shape, recessed towards the rear (the front surfaces of both sides of the top decorative member 576 on the door frame top unit 570 are positioned further rearward than the straight line connecting the front ends of both sides of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of both sides of the top decorative member 576). This makes the top decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appear to protrude significantly forward, thus making it stand out and emphasized to the player, drawing their attention to it.

Incidentally, in conventional pachinko machines, the upper part of the door frame is equipped with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart on the left and right, making the two upper speakers conspicuous. In contrast, the door frame 3 of this embodiment is equipped with a pair of upper speakers 573 at both the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570, which is mounted above the through-hole 111, and whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of perforated metal. Furthermore, it is equipped with a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that extend from both the left and right sides of the central top decorative member 576, passing in front of the speaker covers 575 to both ends in the left-right direction, and the entire front surface of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated. This allows the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 to be decorated, making the pair of upper speakers 573 less conspicuous. This allows players to immediately recognize that the machine has a distinctly different design from conventional pachinko machines, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, the pair of upper speakers 573 provide players with high-quality stereo sound.

Thus, in this embodiment, the door frame 3, both below and above the through-hole 111, has the performance operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top central decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570, which each protrude significantly forward from the center in the left-right direction. This allows for a unified decorative appearance to be presented to the player, with a prominent imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction. Furthermore, the sophisticated design makes it stand out from other pachinko machines, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the door frame 3 has the top central decorative member 576 and the performance control unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570, which are positioned vertically in the center of the left-right direction, protruding forward, when the top central decorative member 576 and the performance control unit 400 are illuminated, a line of light extending vertically from the center of the front of the door frame 3 can be shown to the player, guiding the player's gaze to the operation buttons 410, etc., of the performance control unit 400, which is positioned in the center of the left-right direction.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail with reference to Figures 60 to 66, etc. Figure 60 is a front view of the game board. Figure 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, disassembled into its main components, and Figure 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear, disassembled into its main components, and Figure 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front and back units, Figure 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board from Figure 63 as seen from the front, disassembled, and Figure 65 is an exploded perspective view of the game board from Figure 63 as seen from the rear, disassembled. Figure 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a magnified front view of the functional display unit when the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. The game board 5 also comprises a front component 1000 that demarcates the outer perimeter of the game area 5a and has a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front; a plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and demarcating the rear end of the game area 5a; a circuit board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100; and a main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the circuit board holder 1200, which has a main control board 1310 that controls the game content performed by driving game balls into the game area 5a. Multiple obstacle pins that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the area within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown in the illustration).

Furthermore, the game board 5 includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is mounted on the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so that it is visible to the player; a peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the game panel 1100; a game board-side performance display device 1600 positioned in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying predetermined performance images; a front unit 2000 mounted on the front of the game panel 1100; and a rear unit 3000 mounted on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The game board-side performance display device 1600 is mounted on the rear side of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear side of the game board-side performance display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 comprises a transparent, flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has a back unit 3000 attached to its rear surface.

The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of general prize slots 2001 that are always open to receive game balls played into the game area 5a, a first start slot 2002 that is always open to receive game balls at a different location within the game area 5a from the plurality of general prize slots 2001, a gate unit 2003 installed at a predetermined location within the game area 5a to detect the passage of game balls, a second start slot 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of a normal lottery drawn when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and a large prize slot 2005 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of either a first special lottery or a second special lottery drawn when a game ball is received into the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 comprises: a start-up unit 2100 mounted directly above the out-up opening 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and having a first start-up opening 2002 and a large prize-winning opening 2005; a lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start-up unit 2100 in a front view and having multiple general prize-winning openings 2001; an upper side unit 2300 mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view; and a frame-shaped center mechanism 2500 mounted approximately in the center of the game area 5a and having a gate section 2003 and a second start-up opening 2004.

The rear unit 3000 includes a box-shaped rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has an open front and a square opening 3010a in its rear wall, and a locking mechanism 3020 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 for detachably attaching the game board side display device 1600.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back left-center decorative unit 3050 mounted at the front end of the back box 3010, slightly above the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front; a back lower rear movable display unit 3100 mounted below the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010, near the rear wall of the back box 3010; a back upper left movable display unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010, on the left side when viewed from the front; a back left movable display unit 3300 mounted on the left side of the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010 when viewed from the front; a back upper-center movable display unit 3400 mounted above the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010, extending from the center in the horizontal direction to the right edge when viewed from the front; and a back lower front movable display unit 3500 mounted below the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010, in front of the back lower rear movable display unit 3100.

[5-1. Front Components]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has an outer shape that is approximately square when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that is approximately circular and penetrates in the front-to-back direction, with the inner circumference of the inner shape defining the outer perimeter of the game area 5a. This front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end slightly to the left of the center in the front view, passing over the upper end of the center in the front view and extending to the upper right diagonally; an inner rail 1002 that is positioned inside the front component 1000, approximately along the outer rail 1001, and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the front view to the upper left diagonally; and an out-guide section 1003 that is formed at the lowest point of the game area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in the front view and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes a right-lower rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out-guiding section 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right edge of the front component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the right-lower rail 1004 along the right edge of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with its upper part curving inward from the front component 1000; and a stopper 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and which comes into contact with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001.

Furthermore, the aforementioned component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and includes a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatable only between a closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and an open position that rotates clockwise in a front view to open the gap between it and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member 1007 is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with anti-theft recesses 1008 that are recessed from the front end to the rear at the outer side of the parts of the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 that extend approximately vertically from the lower ends, the underside of the out guide section 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the rear projection 202 of the anti-theft cover 200 on the door frame 3 is inserted into these anti-theft recesses 1008. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if someone attempts to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a from below the front of the game board 5 through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008, thus preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is equipped with a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that project rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. These positioning protrusions 1009 can be inserted into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, thereby positioning and fixing the inner rail 1002 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is equipped with multiple mounting bosses 1010 that protrude rearward from its rear surface. These multiple mounting bosses 1010 can be inserted into mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, thereby positioning the component relative to the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

Furthermore, the front component 1000 has a notch 1011 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full-tank guide path 862 of the lower full-tank ball path unit 860 face forward, passing through these notches 1011 and 1127.

[5-2. Game Panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 61 and 62, 64 and 65, etc. The game panel 1100 comprises a flat panel plate 1110 made of transparent synthetic resin, the outer circumference of which is formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and to which the back unit 3000 is attached.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed from synthetic resin plates such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or from inorganic plates such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness (8-10 mm) to adequately hold obstacle nails planted on the front and the front unit 2000 attached. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel 1110 has an out recess 1111 formed at the lowest point within the game area 5a, extending upward from its lower end. Furthermore, the panel 1110 has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back, for attaching the front unit 2000.

Furthermore, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes 1113, which are round holes located near the outer circumference and extending in the front-to-back direction, and an elongated hole 1114 located near the outer circumference on the lower left side, which extends in the front-to-back direction and extends in the up-to-down direction. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated hole 1114 are located outside the game area 5a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120. In addition, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engagement portions 1115, which are recessed on the front side, at both ends of the upper edge and both ends of the lower edge. These engagement portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110 and, like the fitting holes 1113 and elongated hole 1114, are located outside the game area 5a and are used for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Furthermore, the panel board 1110 is provided with multiple internal rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing the positioning projections 1009, which protrude from the rear side of the internal rail 1002, into these internal rail fixing holes 1116, the internal rail 1002 can be fixed in the predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to enclose the panel plate 1110, has a roughly rectangular shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (approximately 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 includes a retaining step 1121 that detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front to the rear, and a through-hole 1122 inside the retaining step 1121 that is approximately the same size as the game area 5a and penetrates in the front-to-back direction.

The holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front that is approximately the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110. The front surface of the panel plate 1110 held within the holding step portion 1121 is approximately flush with the front surface of the panel holder 1120. Furthermore, the front inner circumferential surface of the holding step portion 1121 is formed to create a predetermined clearance with the outer circumferential surface of the panel plate 1110. This clearance allows for the absorption of expansion and contraction of the panel plate 1110 due to temperature changes or changes over time.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is positioned to correspond to the fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110, which is held by the retaining step 1121. It extends forward from the front surface of the retaining step 1121 and is equipped with a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is equipped with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 at positions corresponding to the engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, which engage with the engaging step 1115. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is positioned on the upper part of the retaining step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponding to the upper engaging step 1115 on the panel plate 1110. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the retaining step 1121 and elastically engages with the engaging step 1115. The tip of this engaging claw 1124 is sized so that it does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is positioned below the retaining step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. This engaging piece 1125 extends a predetermined distance upward (towards the center) along the front surface of the panel holder 1120, forming a gap between it and the front surface of the retaining step 1121 large enough for the engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted. By engaging the engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with these engaging claws 1124 and engaging piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held in relation to the panel holder 1120.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is equipped with an outlet 1126 that penetrates from front to back at the lowest point within the game area 5a. The lower rear surface of the outlet 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is recessed forward to its lower end, with the same width as the outlet 1126.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 has a notch 1127 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 face forward, passing through these notches 1011 and 1127.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 is provided with multiple mounting holes 1128 that penetrate from front to back, at positions corresponding to the multiple mounting bosses 1010 on the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into these multiple mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned relative to the front component 1000.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 has a square through-hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-to-back direction above the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through this through-hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the outlet opening 1126 of the panel holder 1120 opens behind the outlet guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, game balls that have flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a are guided by the outlet guide portion 1003 to the rear outlet opening 1126 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet opening 1126.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of the Game Panel]
Next, a game panel 1150, which is a different embodiment from the game panel 1100 described above, will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 67 and 68. Figure 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel with a different form from Figure 63, viewed from the front, together with the front components, substrate holder, and main control unit. Figure 68 is an exploded perspective view of Figure 67 viewed from the rear. This game panel 1150 is formed from a wood-based board material such as plywood of a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 has an external shape that is substantially the same as the external shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 has an out-hole 1151 that penetrates in the front-to-back direction at a position corresponding to the out-guiding section 1003 of the front component 1000, located at the lower part of the approximate center in the left-to-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower rear surface of the out-hole 1151 of the game panel 1150 is recessed forward to its lower end, with the same width as the out-hole 1151.

Furthermore, the game panel 1150 has a notch 1152 that extends horizontally in the front-to-back direction and opens downwards on the left side of its lower end when viewed from the front, and has the same shape as the notch 1011 of the previous component 1000. Above the notch 1152, there is a square through-hole 1153 that extends vertically and through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

Furthermore, the game panel 1150 is provided with multiple internal rail fixing holes 1154 that penetrate from front to back, allowing the positioning protrusions 1009 to be fitted into the multiple positioning protrusions 1009 that protrude rearward from the internal rail 1002 of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is also provided with multiple mounting holes 1155 that penetrate from front to back, corresponding to the multiple mounting bosses 1010 on the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into these mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be positioned relative to the front component 1000.

Furthermore, although not shown in the illustration, the game panel 1150, like the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 described above, is provided with multiple openings that penetrate from front to back for mounting the front unit 2000.

When the game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out opening 1151 opens behind the out guide section 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, game balls that have flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a are guided by the out guide section 1003 to the rear out opening 1151 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out opening 1151.

[5-3. Circuit board holder]
Next, the circuit board holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 to 65, etc. The circuit board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally elongated box shape with the top and front open, and the bottom surface is inclined to become lower towards the center in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, the circuit board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000, which is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, from below. As a result, it can receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out opening 1126, and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and discharge them downward from the discharge section 1201 formed on the bottom surface.

[5-4. Main Control Board Unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 to 65, etc. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls the game content and the payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, opening it again requires destroying that sealing mechanism, leaving a trace of the opening and closing. Therefore, by examining these traces, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, thus enhancing the deterrent against unauthorized activity against the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042, including the main control board box 1320, are all made of transparent material to allow for visual inspection from the outside. In other words, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, surface-mount areas with inferior anti-fraud performance are provided, particularly in the payout control board 951 within the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 within the main control board box 1320. Therefore, ensuring such transparency is important for obtaining the various effects related to anti-fraud measures described later.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 64 to 66. As shown in the figures, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 when the game board 5 is assembled into the pachinko machine 1 (see Figure 66). Based on control signals from the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs to display the game status, normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

As shown in Figure 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display unit 1401 consisting of one LED that displays the game status, a normal symbol display unit 1402 consisting of four LEDs that displays the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of game balls through the gate unit 2003, a normal hold display unit 1408 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of hold related to the passage of game balls through the gate unit 2003, a first special symbol display unit 1403 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of game balls into the first start opening 2002, and a function display unit 1400 that displays the acceptance of game balls into the first start opening 2002 It primarily comprises: a first special reserved ball indicator 1404 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserved balls; a second special symbol indicator 1405 consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of game balls into the second start opening 2004; a second special reserved ball indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserved balls related to the acceptance of game balls into the second start opening 2004; and a round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening 2005 when the result of the first or second special lottery is a "jackpot," etc.

This function display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, symbols, etc., by appropriately lighting, extinguishing, and flashing the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral Control Units]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to Figure 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted behind the game board side display device 1600, which is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510, although not shown in the figure, includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light effects, sound effects, and movable effects, and an effect display control unit for controlling the effect images.

[5-7. Game board-side display device]
Next, the game board-side display device 1600 will be described with reference to Figures 61 to 62. The game board-side display device 1600 is positioned in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board-side display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back wall of the back box 3010, approximately in the center. When the game board 5 is assembled, the game board-side display device 1600 can be seen from the front (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center feature 2500. The game board-side display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED backlight, and can display still images and videos.

The game board-side display device 1600 comprises two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side when viewed from the front. With the LCD screen facing forward, the game board-side display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 by inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind the back box 3010 into two fixing grooves 3010c opening on the left inner circumferential surface of the frame-shaped LCD mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 (described later), then moving the right fixing piece 1602 forward, inserting the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and sliding the locking mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table Unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and its rear end passing through the opening 1112 and protruding backward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The front unit 2000 of this embodiment includes: a plurality of general prize slots 2001 that are always open and capable of receiving game balls played into the game area 5a; a first start slot 2002 that is always open and capable of receiving game balls at a different location within the game area 5a from the plurality of general prize slots 2001; a gate unit 2003 that is installed at a predetermined location within the game area 5a and detects the passage of game balls; a second start slot 2004 that can receive game balls according to the result of a normal lottery drawn when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003; and a large prize slot 2005 that can receive game balls according to the result of a first special lottery drawn when a game ball is received into the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004.

Multiple general prize entry points 2001 are located in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first start entry point 2002 is located in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, directly above the out entry point 1126. The gate section 2003 is located in the upper right of the front view within the game area 5a, approximately directly below the stopper section 1006. The second start entry point 2004 is located directly below the gate section 2003, slightly to the right of the front view. The large prize entry point 2005 is located between the first start entry point 2002 and the out entry point 1126.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 comprises: a start-up unit 2100 mounted directly above the out-up opening 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and having a first start-up opening 2002 and a large prize-winning opening 2005; a lower side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start-up unit 2100 in a front view and having multiple general prize-winning openings 2001; an upper side unit 2300 mounted above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view; and a frame-shaped center mechanism 2500 mounted approximately in the center of the game area 5a and having a gate section 2003 and a second start-up opening 2004.

The starter unit 2100 is positioned within the game area 5a, near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction, directly above the out-out opening 1126, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. This starter unit 2100 has a first starter opening 2002 that opens upward, large enough to accept only one game ball at a time, and a large prize opening 2005 that extends left and right, large enough to accept multiple game balls at once (for example, 4 to 6 balls), and is designed to open and close according to the game state.

The lower part of the side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starter unit 2100 within the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower part of the side unit 2200 has multiple general prize slots 2001 that can constantly receive game balls.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front, slightly below the vertical center, above and to the left of the lower side unit 2200 in a front view, within the game area 5a. With the upper side unit 2300 attached to the front of the panel board 1110, the left end of the shelf section is close to the inner rail 1002, allowing game balls flowing down along the inner rail 1002 to be guided to the right (towards the horizontal center of the game area 5a).

The center component 2500 is positioned within the game area 5a, above the start-up unit 2100 and the lower part of the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. It is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center component 2500 is formed in a frame shape, allowing the game board-side display device 1600 and the display units provided in the rear unit 3000, which are located behind the game panel 1100, to be viewed from the front through the frame. The center component 2500 has a gate section 2003 and a second start-up opening 2004.

The frame-shaped center component 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, except for the bottom edge, preventing game balls that have been played into the game area 5a from entering the frame.

The center mechanism 2500 includes a warp entrance 2520 on its outer periphery on the left side when viewed from the front, which is open to allow game balls from within the game area 5a to enter; a warp exit 2522 which is open within the frame and allows game balls that have entered the warp entrance 2520 to be released; and a stage 2530 which rolls the game balls released from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction before releasing them into the game area 5a. A starter unit 2100 is positioned directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, it is received by the first starter opening 2002 with a very high probability.

[5-9. Hidden Unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described with reference to Figures 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The game board side display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is box-shaped with an open front and a square opening 3010a in its rear wall; and a box-shaped performance drive board box 3042, which is mounted on the rear surface of the rear box 3010 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending left and right along the lower edge of the opening 3010a and houses the performance drive board.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back left-center decorative unit 3050 mounted at the front end of the back box 3010, slightly above the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front; a back lower rear movable display unit 3100 mounted below the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010, near the rear wall of the back box 3010; a back upper left movable display unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010, on the left side when viewed from the front; a back left movable display unit 3300 mounted on the left side of the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010 when viewed from the front; a back upper-center movable display unit 3400 mounted above the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010, extending from the center in the horizontal direction to the right edge when viewed from the front; and a back lower front movable display unit 3500 mounted below the opening 3010a inside the back box 3010, in front of the back lower rear movable display unit 3100.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box shape with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-shaped LCD mounting portion 3010b projecting rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at a distance, two fixing grooves 3010c on the left side of the LCD mounting portion 3010b in a rear view, recessed from the inside outward within the frame, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side display device 1600 is inserted, and a notch 3010d on the right side of the LCD mounting portion 3010b in a rear view, in the vertical center, cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010, into which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the game board-side display device 1600. The LCD mounting section 3010b is also formed to be large enough to accommodate the game board-side display device 1600 within its frame. A locking mechanism 3020 is mounted on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear of the back box 3010, allowing it to slide up and down.

Furthermore, the back box 3010 includes a flat, plate-shaped fixing piece 3010e extending outward from its front end. This fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100, with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, and other features formed at appropriate positions for attaching various movable performance units, etc.

The rear unit 3000 can perform illumination effects, movement effects, display effects, etc., by appropriately using the rear lower rear movable effect unit 3100, rear upper left movable effect unit 3200, rear left movable effect unit 3300, rear upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and rear lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. This allows for various effects to entertain the player and helps prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game Details]
Next, the gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 60, etc. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 located in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, causing the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320 to pass between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and be driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, thus starting the game with the game balls. The game balls driven into the upper part of the game area 5a will flow down either to the left or to the right of the center mechanism 2500 depending on the force with which they are driven. The force with which the game balls are driven can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more it is rotated clockwise, the stronger the balls are driven, and it is possible to continuously drive up to 100 game balls per minute, that is, game balls at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Furthermore, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle pins (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement. When the game balls come into contact with the obstacle pins, their flow velocity is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game balls, allowing players to enjoy these movements. In addition to the obstacle pins, windmills (not shown) that rotate upon contact with the game balls are also provided at appropriate positions within the game area 5a.

When a game ball is driven into the upper part of the center mechanism 2500, it enters the area to the left of the highest point on the outer surface of the center mechanism 2500 when viewed from the front. It then flows down the area to the left of the center mechanism 2500, contacting multiple obstacle pins (not shown). As the game ball flows down the area to the left of the center mechanism 2500, it enters the warp entrance 2520, which opens on the outer surface of the center mechanism 2500, and is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll across the stage 2530, moving back and forth before being released forward. When the game balls are released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, they are positioned directly above the first start opening 2002, and are therefore received by the first start opening 2002 with high probability. Once the game balls are received by the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are dispensed from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

When a game ball rolling on stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from anywhere other than the center, it flows down towards the starter unit 2100. Game balls released into the game area 5a from stage 2530 of the center mechanism 2500 may be received by the first starter opening 2002 or the open large prize opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100.

Incidentally, if a game ball that flows down to the left of the center mechanism 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved towards the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300 and may be received by the general prize entry opening 2001 or the first start opening 2002 of the lower side unit 2200. When a game ball is received by the general prize entry opening 2001, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are dispensed from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when a game ball launched into the upper part of the center mechanism 2500 within the game area 5a enters to the right of the highest point on the outer surface of the center mechanism 2500 (i.e., a right-handed shot), it will flow downstream through the area where the gate section 2003 and the second start opening 2004 are located.

Then, when the game ball that was hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the result of the normal lottery is "normal win," the second start opening 2004 remains open for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing the game ball to be received into the second start opening 2004. Once the game ball is received into the second start opening 2004, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 4) are dispensed from the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery conducted when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set between the start of the normal lottery and the indication of the normal lottery result (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal variation time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start opening 2004 opens after the normal variation time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 between the time it passes through and the time the normal lottery result is indicated, the indication of the normal lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the indication of the normal lottery result is suspended until the previous indication of the normal lottery result has finished. Also, the number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four; any results beyond that are discarded without being reserved, even if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003. This prevents an increase in the burden on the arcade due to an accumulation of reserved results.

In this embodiment, when a game ball is received into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 performs a special lottery to generate a favorable game state for the player (for example, "Big Win," "Medium Win," "Small Win," "Probability Change Win," "Time Reduction Win," etc.). The special lottery result is then indicated to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as the special change time). The special lottery results generated when a game ball is received into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "Miss," "Small Win," "2R Big Win," "5R Big Win," "15R Big Win," "Probability Change Win," "Time Reduction Win," "Probability Change Time Reduction Win," and "Probability Change No Time Reduction Win."

If the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) determined by the acceptance of game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 result in a special lottery state that generates a favorable game state, then after the special variation time has elapsed, the large prize opening 2005 will be in a state where it can accept game balls in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. When the large prize opening 2005 is in the open state and a game ball is accepted into the large prize opening 2005, the main control board 1310 and the payout board will dispense a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 or 13) from the payout device 830 into the upper tray 321. Therefore, by allowing game balls to be accepted into the large prize opening 2005 when it is ready to accept them, a large number of game balls can be dispensed, providing enjoyment to the player.

If the special lottery result is a "minor win," the large prize slot 2005 opens to accept game balls for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) and then closes, repeating this opening and closing pattern multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big win," after the large prize slot 2005 opens to accept game balls, if either a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) have been accepted into the large prize slot 2005, it closes to a state where it cannot accept game balls (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round), and repeats this opening and closing pattern a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a "2R jackpot" would result in 2 rounds, a "5R jackpot" in 5 rounds, and a "15R jackpot" in 15 rounds, each repeating to create a favorable game state for the player.

Furthermore, in the case of a "jackpot," there are types of wins that, after the jackpot game ends, change the probability of drawing a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" ("probability-changing win"), or change the display time of the visual effect that suggests the special lottery result ("time-saving win").

In this embodiment, if game balls are received into the first and second starting ports 2002 and 2004, between the start of the special lottery and the indication of the drawn special lottery results, the indication of the special lottery results cannot be started if game balls are received into the first and second starting ports 2002 and 2004. Therefore, the indication of the special lottery results is suspended until the indication of the previously drawn special lottery results is completed. The number of suspended special lottery results is limited to four for both the first and second starting ports 2002 and 2004. Any results exceeding this limit are discarded without being suspended, even if game balls are received into the first and second starting ports 2002 and 2004. This suppresses the increase in the burden on the gaming hall due to the accumulation of suspended results.

The indication of the special lottery result is provided by the function display unit 1400 and the game board-side display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to indicate the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 indicates the special lottery result by repeatedly switching multiple LEDs on and off for a predetermined time, and then indicating the special lottery result based on the combination of the lit LEDs.

Meanwhile, the game board-side display device 1600, based on control signals from the main control board 1310, is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and displays an image indicating the special lottery result. The image indicating the special lottery result on the game board-side display device 1600 displays three rows of symbols arranged horizontally. Each row of symbols is then manipulated, and the manipulated rows are sequentially stopped. The three stopped rows of symbols are then displayed so that their symbols correspond to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is anything other than "miss," after the three rows of symbols stop and each symbol is displayed, a confirmation image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the game board-side display device 1600, and a favorable game state (e.g., minor win game, major win game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

Furthermore, the time indicated by the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time indicated by the game board-side display device 1600 (the time from when the symbol sequence changes until the confirmed image is displayed) are different, with the function display unit 1400 having a longer time setting.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying performance images to indicate the special lottery results from the game board-side performance display device 1600, can also perform illumination, movement, display, etc., depending on the special lottery results, by appropriately using the operation buttons 410 of the performance operation unit 400 on the door frame 3, the door frame-side performance display device 460, various decorative elements of the center mechanism 2500, various decorative elements of the back unit 3000, the back lower rear movable performance unit 3100, the back upper left movable performance unit 3200, the back left movable performance unit 3300, the back upper middle movable performance unit 3400, and the back lower front movable performance unit 3500, etc. This allows for entertaining players through various performances and helps prevent a decline in players' interest in the game.

[Relationship between this embodiment and the present invention]
In this embodiment, the door frame 3 corresponds to the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 corresponds to the main body unit of the present invention, the through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 corresponds to the window portion of the present invention, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 corresponds to the bulging portion of the present invention, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 in the performance operation unit 400 and the second performance operation unit 400A corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit, the main screen 471 and sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the second display device 460A on the door frame side correspond to the second decorative body of the present invention, while the decorative part 432g of the second button inside the decorative member 432 of the operation button, the decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, the decorative member 476 of the sub-screen, and the decorative member 478 of the peripheral edge of the screen unit 470 correspond to the second decorative part of the present invention.

Furthermore, the LEDs mounted on the left interior decorative substrate 433, the right interior decorative substrate 434, the upper interior decorative substrate 435, and the lower interior decorative substrate 436 of the operation button in this embodiment, as well as the LED 477a of the subscreen decorative substrate 477, correspond to the light-emitting elements of the present invention. The door frame side display device 460 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear decorative means of the present invention. The frame unit 415, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 in this embodiment correspond to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 of the performance operation unit 400 (or second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the front of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 is viewed from the outside, the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 432g of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (or the peripheral decorative part 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc. of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second performance display device 460A) overlap, or the first button decorative part 411a and the door frame side performance display device 460 overlap, etc., can be shown to the player a decoration full of unprecedented perspective and decorative appeal, which can strongly attract the player's attention and make the pachinko machine 1 a highly appealing machine that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

Furthermore, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the second display device 460A (screen unit 470) on the door frame side) and the display device 460 on the door frame side are arranged in the direction of movement of the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation. Therefore, when the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it, the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 432g (or the peripheral decorative part 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) move closer together or further apart, so the first button decorative By changing the distance between part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), it becomes possible to change the perspective of the decoration where the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) appear to overlap. This allows the player to change the decoration (intersection pattern) of the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward on the opposite side from the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second display device 460A), a space is formed between the first decorative body and the second decorative body. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative part 411a and the distance from the operation button interior decorative member 432g (or the peripheral decorative part 472a of the screen unit 470, subscreen decorative member) are as follows: The distance to the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, subscreen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) will differ significantly, and even when the button lens 411 is not being moved by operation, as the player's eye position moves, the intersection pattern (degree of overlap) between the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g will change. This allows the player to see a dynamic decoration, strongly attracting their attention.

Furthermore, because the transparent button lens 411 is equipped with a first button decoration section 411a having a radial decoration extending towards the center on its outer edge, the inner decorative member 432 of the operation button (or the second display device 460A on the door frame side) and the door frame side display device 460 can be clearly seen through the central side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration section 411a is not provided. Additionally, the radial decoration of the first button decoration section 411a directs the player's gaze towards the center of the button lens 411, thereby strongly directing the player's attention to the inner decorative member 432 (or the second display device 460A on the door frame side) and the door frame side display device 460 through the center of the transparent button lens 411.

Furthermore, since the internal decorative member 432 of the operation button is equipped with a second internal decorative section 432g having multiple polygonal decorations arranged in concentric circles centered on the center, when viewed from the outside, the decoration of the first internal decorative section 411a of the button lens 411 and the decoration of the second internal decorative section 432g of the operation button internal decorative member 432 intersect with each other. This ensures that the perspective of the decorations by the first internal decorative section 411a and the second internal decorative section 432g is clearly demonstrated, making the decorations by the first internal decorative section 411a and the second internal decorative section 432g stand out and resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players.

Furthermore, the decoration of the second button's internal decorative section 432g of the operation button's internal decorative member 432 has multiple polygonal decorations arranged in concentric circles centered on the center. Therefore, the decoration of the second button's internal decorative section 432g directs the player's gaze and attention to the door frame-side display device 460 visible in the center of the operation button's internal decorative member 432, allowing the player to enjoy the decoration (image) of the door frame-side display device.

Furthermore, by illuminating the LEDs (or the LED 477a on the subscreen decoration board 477) mounted on the left interior decoration board 433, the right interior decoration board 434, the upper interior decoration board 435, and the lower interior decoration board 436 of the operation button, the light can illuminate the interior decoration member 432 (or the subscreen decoration member 476), and the button lens 411 can also be illuminated. Therefore, in addition to the decoration of the first button decoration section 411a and the second interior decoration section 432g (or the subscreen decoration member 476), the player can also be entertained by the illumination. In this case, the second button interior decoration section 432g (or sub-screen decoration member 476) can diffuse the light from each LED (or LED 477a) on the left interior decoration substrate 433, the right interior decoration substrate 434, the upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the lower interior decoration substrate 436 of the operation button. Therefore, the second button interior decoration section 432g is illuminated by the direct light from each LED (or LED 477a) on the left interior decoration substrate 433, the right interior decoration substrate 434, the upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the lower interior decoration substrate 436 of the operation button, whereas the first button decoration section 411a is illuminated by the second button interior decoration section 432g (or sub-screen decoration member 476) As a result of the diffused indirect light, the second button's internal decoration section 432g (sub-screen decoration member 476) is strongly illuminated, while the first button's decoration section 411a is weakly illuminated. Therefore, when the LEDs (or LED 477a) on the left, right, upper, and lower interior decoration boards 433, 434, 435, and 436 of the operation button are illuminated, viewing the first button's decoration section 411a and the second button's internal decoration section 432g (or sub-screen decoration member 476) from the outside presents a more emphasized sense of perspective to the player, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the player's attention.

Furthermore, because the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the second display device 460A on the door frame side) is positioned in the direction of movement of the button lens 411, there is no need to secure space for the button lens 411 to move outside of the outer perimeter of the button lens 411 or the decorative member 432 (or the second display device 460A on the door frame side). This allows the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (or the second display device 460A on the door frame side) to be extended outwards and made as large as possible, making the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (or the second display device 460A on the door frame side) more prominent. Also, as mentioned above, because there is no need to secure space for movement outside the button lens 411, the frame unit 415 can be positioned outside the button lens 411, enhancing the overall decorative appeal of the pachinko machine 1. This results in a more visually appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, because the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, if a player strikes the button lens 411 or applies an impact to a part of its surface, the impact force is more easily distributed across the entire button lens 411 compared to a flat shape. This makes the button lens 411 less prone to breakage (less likely to be damaged). Therefore, it is possible to avoid interruptions to gameplay due to the button lens 411 breaking during gameplay, which could cause frustration and diminish the enjoyment for some players. Additionally, the increased risk of damage to the button lens 411 reduces the burden on the gaming hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the door frame 3 which allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 located within the main frame 4 to be visible from the front through the through-hole 111, the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), which is attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward below the through-hole 111, has an operation button 410 that is circular in shape with an outer diameter in the range of 10 cm to 30 cm and moves (moves forward and backward) when operated by the player, and a transparent button rail for the operation button 410. Because the interior decorative member 432 for the operation buttons and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A), which are visible from the front through the lens 411, and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation buttons 410 are arranged within the frame are attached, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) with the largest possible operation buttons 410 is visible in a position where the game ball storage tray is conspicuous in conventional pachinko machines. As a result, players can recognize at a glance that it is different from conventional pachinko machines, making it a highly appealing pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, the frame unit 415 is equipped with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) adjacent to the frame side lens 417, and the left outer decorative substrate 422 and right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button, which are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) behind the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b, are equipped with first LEDs 422a, 423a for illuminating the second button decorative part 411b and second LEDs 422b, 423b for illuminating the frame side lens 417, and the frame side lens 417 and The frame body 416 is equipped with an inner cylindrical portion 416d that separates it from the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button base 413 is equipped with a main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f that separates the second button decoration portion 411b from the central side of the button lens 411. As a result, the inner cylindrical portion 416d, the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f prevent light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a from illuminating the frame side lens 417 or the central side of the button lens 411, and prevent light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b. This allows the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b to be illuminated independently. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be illuminated clearly, resulting in an aesthetically pleasing illumination effect. Furthermore, by appropriately combining off, on, flashing, brightness, color, etc., for the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b, a variety of lighting patterns can be created. This makes it less likely for players to get bored, entertains them, and helps to prevent a decline in their interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the first LEDs 422a and 423a that illuminate the second button decoration section 411b of the operation button 410, and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that illuminate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are provided on a single operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, and the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are mounted on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be moved as far away from the second button decoration section 411b as possible compared to the case where the substrate is provided on the second button decoration section 411b (operation button 410), and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently diffused and illuminated onto the second button decoration section 411b. Therefore, since the second button decoration section 411b can be uniformly illuminated, the appearance of the illumination of the second button decoration section 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, strongly attracting the player's attention and providing them with enjoyment, thus preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the left and right external decorative circuit boards 422 and 423 of the operation button are mounted on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the wiring connected to the left and right external decorative circuit boards 422 and 423 does not bend or stretch as the operation button 410 moves forward and backward, thus eliminating the risk of wiring breakage due to fatigue. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 (second button decorative section 411b) is moved, the wiring will not break, allowing players to enjoy the movement (operation) of the operation button 410 and the illumination of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative section 411b without any problems, thus preventing a decline in player enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the second button decorative part 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, when viewing the rear operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A) through the transparent button lens 411, the outer edges of the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A) are decorated by the second button decorative part 411b, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, by appropriately illuminating the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, the second button decoration section 411b and the frame side lens 417, which decorate the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 (from which the internal decorative member 432 of the operation button and the door frame side display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A) are visible), can be illuminated in various patterns as described above. This strongly attracts the player's attention to the operation button 410 and the door frame side display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A), allowing them to enjoy the illumination effects, the operation of the operation button 410, and the images displayed by the door frame side display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A), thereby preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410), which has a second button decoration section 411b on its outer edge, is operable by the player, allowing the player to operate the operation button 410 during the execution of player-participation performances allows the player to enjoy operating the operation button 410 (player-participation performances), thereby suppressing a decline in the player's interest in the game. Additionally, by illuminating the second button decoration section 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 during the execution of player-participation performances, the player's attention can be drawn to the operation button 410, encouraging the player to operate the operation button 410 and allowing the player to participate in and enjoy the player-participation performances.

Furthermore, since the operation button 410 is equipped with an opaque main body 413a and an inner extension 413f that allow only the second button decorative part 411b of the operation button 410 to be illuminated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the part of the operation button 410 closer to the center than the second button decorative part 411b is not illuminated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a. This prevents the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A), which are located at the rear, from becoming difficult to see from the front due to the central side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) becoming brighter. Therefore, the second button decoration section 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a good state, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A) can be clearly seen through the transparent button lens 411. This allows players to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, thus preventing a decline in their enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 equipped with the frame side lens 417, the inner cylindrical portion 416d can completely separate the frame side lens 417 from the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 at the rear side of the frame unit 415. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner cylindrical portion 416d closest to the left and right external decorative substrates 422 and 423 of the operation buttons, the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is located closer to the left and right external decorative substrates 422 and 423 than the diffusion range of the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b. Therefore, even if a gap is formed between the inner cylindrical portion 416d and the front surfaces of the left and right external decorative substrates 422 and 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a will not illuminate the frame side lens 417, nor will the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminate the second button decorative portion 411b. Thus, the inner cylindrical portion 416d can reliably block light, and a pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects can be realized.

Furthermore, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f completely separate the space between the second button decoration portion 411b and the central side of the button lens 411 at the rear side of the operation button 410. On the other hand, the end portion (rear end portion) of the main body portion 413a that is closer to the left outer decoration substrate 422 and the right outer decoration substrate 423 of the operation button extends further back than the left outer decoration substrate 422 and the right outer decoration substrate 423 of the operation button. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body portion 413a, and the intrusion of light into the central side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 can be completely blocked. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a and 423a can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative section 411b in a good state, and the rear operational button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A) can be clearly seen through the transparent button lens 411. This allows players to fully enjoy the decorations and illumination effects, thus preventing a decline in their enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration part 411b is positioned in front of the outer portion of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second display device 460A) which is located behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Therefore, the outer parts and rear (back) of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second display device 460A) can be made less visible through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second display device 460A), thus preventing deterioration of the appearance of the operation button 410. Furthermore, when the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminate the second button decoration section 411b, the exterior and rear of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second display device 460A) become relatively darker compared to the brightness of the second button decoration section 411b. This makes it difficult to see the components on the exterior and rear of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second display device 460A). Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, frame unit 415, operation button interior decoration member 432, and door frame side display device 460 (door frame side second display device 460A) can be improved, and a decrease in the player's enjoyment can be suppressed.

Furthermore, because the outer circumference of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decorative part 411b, which is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), and the frame side lens 417 adjacent to the second button decorative part 411b, extend in an arc shape. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, it is possible to show the player various lighting effects, such as light swirling around the outer edge of the operation button 410, light spreading from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410, or light converging from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410. This allows for diverse lighting effects that keep the player engaged and prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, an upper tray 321 is attached to the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3, into which the stored game balls are launched into the game area 5a for use in the game. Additionally, a performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front and below the upper tray 321, forming the remaining space of a predetermined mounting space 326j behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and the remaining space of that mounting space 326j The lower tray body 325 has a portion corresponding to the first lower tray area A1 positioned on the left side of the space, and the lower tray body 325 has a portion corresponding to the second lower tray area A2 extending from that portion into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, so that the lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls is attached. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the lower tray 322 appears small, making it less conspicuous and relatively making the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) more noticeable. Consequently, when viewing the pachinko machine 1 from the front, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is visible in the position where the upper and lower trays were previously visible side-by-side in conventional pachinko machines. This allows players to immediately recognize that it is different from conventional pachinko machines, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts players' attention.

Furthermore, the lower tray 322 is equipped with lower tray covers 340 and 340A in the lower tray body 325, specifically in the lower tray second region A2, which extend upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer circumference, thereby restricting the movement of game balls toward the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. This prevents game balls in the lower tray 322 from contacting the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and prevents game balls supplied into the lower tray 322 or game balls stored in the lower tray 322 from contacting or pressing against the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). Therefore, the game balls will not come into contact with the rear side of the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A), and the rear side of the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) will not be damaged by the game balls. This prevents the interruption of gameplay due to damage to the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A), which would diminish the players' enjoyment, and also reduces the increased burden on the amusement hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, the lower tray 322 is equipped with lower tray covers 340 and 340A in the lower tray body 325, specifically in the lower tray's second region A2, which restrict the movement of game balls towards the remaining space of the mounting space 326j and the main body's vertical wall portion 325b. This prevents game balls from entering (spilling) the remaining space of the mounting space 326j from the lower tray body 325. Therefore, it is possible to prevent players from feeling disappointed or uncomfortable due to game balls entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A cover the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray, even if the game balls supplied into the lower tray 322 bounce and fly up inside the lower tray 322, it is possible to reliably prevent them from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby reliably achieving the above-mentioned effects. Furthermore, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A cover the lower tray body 325's second lower tray area A2, when a player reaches their hand into the lower tray body 325's first lower tray area A1 (lower tray opening 326d) into the lower tray area A2, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A prevent fingertips from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. This prevents injury from fingertips touching the underside of the upper tray 321 or the rear of the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A), thus allowing players to play safely.

Furthermore, because there is a gap between the lower tray covers 340 and 340A and the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A), even if impacts or pressure from game balls come into contact with the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, these are not transmitted from the lower tray covers 340 and 340A to the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A), thus reliably preventing damage to the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A).

Furthermore, in the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray, in the lower tray second region A2, a lower tray ball removal hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c. Therefore, when the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is open, game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball removal hole 322a and be discharged downwards (to the coin box), making it difficult for game balls to reach the front end of the vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. Even if a game ball jumps over the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, as described above, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A prevent the game ball from contacting the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). This prevents damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), reduces interruptions to the game, and suppresses a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, because the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher towards the front, game balls moving towards the front end of the vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 will climb the inclined bottom surface, thereby reducing the speed of the game balls' movement. Therefore, the speed of game balls contacting the lower tray covers 340 and 340A can be slowed, effectively preventing game balls from moving towards the remaining space in the mounting space 326j. Additionally, the impact when game balls contact the lower tray covers 340 and 340A or the vertical wall portion 325b can be reduced, preventing damage to them.

Furthermore, since at least the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are separate components, if the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired simply by replacing the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, thereby reducing the increased burden on the amusement hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game is played by receiving game balls into the general prize entry opening 2001, a dish unit 320 is provided on the dish unit cover 326, which is the most forward-protruding part of the front left-right center, and a performance operation unit 400 and a second performance operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forward-protruding part, and the dish unit cover 326 is provided with a storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) capable of storing game balls, and the storage tray (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) Furthermore, by having a first lower tray area A1 located outside the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) in a front view, and a second lower tray area A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j, which is behind the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) in a front view, the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) can be made more prominent when viewed from the front, while the storage trays (upper tray 321 and lower tray 322) can be made smaller and less conspicuous. Therefore, since the prominent performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) is visible in the area where the upper and lower trays were visible in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to immediately recognize to players that this is a different type of pachinko machine from conventional ones, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract players' attention.

Furthermore, since the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) is mounted in the center of the front surface of the tray unit cover 326, the area of the lower tray 322 that is open on the surface of the tray unit cover 326 becomes smaller. However, because the lower tray body 325 has a first extension 325B, a second extension 325C, and lower tray covers 340 and 340A, which have a second lower tray region A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j that is behind the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) when viewed from the front, game balls can be stored even in the area of the lower tray 322 that is not visible from the front (second lower tray region A2). Therefore, contrary to what can be seen from the front, a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored, allowing players to concentrate on playing without worrying about the remaining number of game balls in the lower tray 322, thus allowing them to enjoy the game and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the lower tray 322 is constructed by attaching (combining) lower tray covers 340, 340A, first extension section 325B, and second extension section 325C, each having a second lower tray area A2, to the lower tray body 325 or body section 325A, which has a first lower tray area A1, multiple lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension section 325B, and the second extension section 325C of different sizes are prepared in advance, and the volume of the lower tray 322 can be optimized by attaching lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension section 325B, and the second extension section 325C of sizes appropriate to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j inside the tray unit cover 326. Furthermore, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension section 325B, and the second extension section 325C, the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j can be adjusted. Since the size of this rear space depends on the amount of rearward protrusion of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), the lower tray 322 can be made compatible with various performance operation units 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) with different rearward protrusion amounts, thereby increasing the versatility of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the lower tray 322 is equipped with a bottom wall portion 325a and a main body vertical wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower tray 322 becomes a container-like shape with a downward recess, ensuring reliable storage of game balls. Also, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A have a cover vertical wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325, various shapes of lower tray covers 340 and 340A can be prepared in advance. By combining (installing) lower tray covers 340 and 340A of shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space at the rear of the mounting space 326j, various configurations can be accommodated, achieving the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, in the lower tray 322, which is composed of the lower tray body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the vertical wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. Therefore, the lower tray body 325 is the part of the lower tray 322 where the game balls are placed. Consequently, the boundary (joint, dividing line PL) between the lower tray body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A is not located in the area where the load of many game balls is applied due to storage. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is borne solely by the lower tray body 325, no force acts to pull the lower tray covers 340 and 340A away from the lower tray body 325, even when many game balls are stored, thus preventing the lower tray covers 340 and 340A from detaching from the lower tray body 325.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game is played in which game balls are received into the general prize pockets 2001, etc., there is an upper tray 321 and a lower tray 322 capable of storing game balls. In addition, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) positioned in the center in the left-right direction makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, difficult to see from the front (player). As a result, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and visually appealing, and it can be made into a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players. Furthermore, the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) makes it difficult to see the game balls moving from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. This prevents the player from noticing the flow of game balls in the lower tray 322, thus preventing distraction and suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) guides the game balls from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. The area between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322, the ball guide section 322c, and the buffer section 322d make it difficult to see the game balls being guided. Therefore, if the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guide means and discharged smoothly (immediately) downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. This creates the illusion for the player that the game balls are being discharged downward from the lower tray 322 (to the coin box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This makes it less likely for players to feel annoyed by the balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing them to concentrate on the game and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) makes more than half of the lower tray 322, including the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, difficult to see from the front, it is probable that the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located behind the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A). In other words, because more than half of the lower tray 322 is routed behind the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A), the actual size (capacity) of the lower tray 322 is larger than the size of the lower tray 322 visible from the front, thus ensuring a sufficient amount of game balls can be stored in the lower tray 322 despite its appearance.

Furthermore, when the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is open, the game balls released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are smoothly guided to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a by guiding means such as the area between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322, the ball guiding section 322c, and the buffer section 322d, and discharged to the lower part of the lower tray 322 (the coin box). This prevents the game balls from circulating within the lower tray 322, making it difficult for the player to see the game balls circulating within the lower tray 322 from the front. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of game balls within the lower tray 322, preventing distractions and suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by leaving the lower tray ball removal hole 322a open, the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can be immediately discharged downwards through the lower tray ball removal hole 322a by the ball guide unit 322c, etc., without the player noticing. This creates the illusion for the player that the game balls are being discharged below the lower tray (to the coin box) without passing through the lower tray 322. This reduces the player's discomfort of the game balls passing through the lower tray 322, allowing them to concentrate on the game and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) makes more than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) of the lower tray 322 difficult to see from the front in a plan view. Therefore, the actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the visible size, ensuring sufficient game ball storage capacity, similar to the lower trays of conventional pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 which bulges forward in a front view below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is played in which game balls are received into the general prize entry opening 2001, etc., is provided with a performance operation unit mounting section 326a for attaching a large performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) that is the same height as the total height of the tray unit cover 326, and the lower front decorative parts 326c of the tray unit cover 326 on both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit mounting section 326a on the front of the tray unit cover 326, which are below approximately the center in the vertical direction, are made to be recessed so as to be scooped out to the rear. As a result, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the performance operation unit mounting section 326a can be made to appear to protrude significantly forward, and the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out. Therefore, in the position where the upper and lower trays were previously visible side-by-side in conventional pachinko machines, the large performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) is prominently displayed. This allows players to immediately recognize that it is different from conventional pachinko machines, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, the lower tray 322 is recessed at the rearward end of the decorative front portion 326c on both the left and right outer sides of the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) on the front of the tray unit cover 326, and a portion of it wraps around to the rear of the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A). This ensures sufficient storage capacity (volume) of game balls in the lower tray 322. As a result, players do not have to worry about the lower tray 322 becoming full of game balls, allowing them to concentrate on the game and enjoy it without a decline in excitement.

Furthermore, because a portion of the lower tray 322 wraps around to the rear of the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A), when a player reaches into the lower tray 322 from the front, it becomes difficult for their fingertips to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 (the front of the tray unit base 323) or the lower tray cover 340, etc. This allows the player to recognize by touch that there is a sufficient amount of game balls stored, and when game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, they can recognize that there are many game balls stored in the lower tray 322, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction, allowing them to enjoy the game and preventing a decline in interest. Furthermore, because the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322 or the lower tray cover 340, it is possible to give the player a similar feeling to the lower tray in conventional pachinko machines. This reduces the sense of unfamiliarity for players accustomed to conventional pachinko machines, thus reassuring the player and preventing a decline in their enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, because the lower tray 322 is formed to widen towards the back, sufficient storage capacity for game balls can be ensured even if the front portion is small. In other words, by making the front end portion of the lower tray 322 smaller, the lower tray 322 can be made less conspicuous on the front surface (front lower decorative portion 326c) of the tray unit cover 326 where the lower tray 322 opens, making the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) more conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to equip the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) while ensuring sufficient storage capacity for game balls in the lower tray 322, thereby increasing its appeal to players and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, because the lower tray cover 340 covers the sides and top of the portion of the lower tray 322 that wraps around to the rear of the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A), it is possible to prevent injuries to the player by preventing their fingertips from touching the inner surface of the tray unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) when the player puts their hand into the lower tray 322, thus allowing the player to play in a safe environment. Additionally, the lower tray cover 340 prevents game balls from entering (spilling) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326.

Furthermore, because the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) is positioned in the center of the front of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) can be made more conspicuous from the player's perspective, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention. Additionally, the decorations provided by the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) can be made more visible, allowing players to enjoy the decorations and effects of the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) and preventing a decline in player interest.

Furthermore, since the lower tray 322 is equipped with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321, and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates vertically, it has the same function as the lower tray in conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, when players who are accustomed to conventional pachinko machines play this pachinko machine 1, they will not be confused by the function of the lower tray 322 and can play in the same way as before, allowing players to concentrate on the game and enjoy playing. In addition, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are located behind the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player's side when viewed from the front, making the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 neat and attractive, and resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3, the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward, has an internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second performance display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the door frame side performance display device 460 capable of presenting performances to the player attached to the internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), and the outer diameter is approximately 15 cm, with the center moving away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround the outer circumference of the internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), and the center is moving away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) An operation button 410 is attached, which has a transparent button lens 411 that bulges outwards from the button lens 411. The outer periphery of the button lens 411 is provided with a first button decorative part 411a, a second button decorative part 411b, and a button frame 412. In addition, a cylindrical button base 413 is provided that protrudes from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450). As a result, the first button decorative part 411a and the button base 413 reduce the visibility of the outer edge or back side (rear side) of the operation button's internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button's internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), thereby improving the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, the appearance of the operation buttons 410, the decorative members 432 inside the operation buttons, and the door frame-side display device 460 (door frame-side second display device 460A) can be further improved, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, the first button decorative part 411a, the second button decorative part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 make it difficult to see the outer edge and back of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). Therefore, even if the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) becomes relatively larger by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, it can be well concealed by the first button decorative part 411a, etc., thus preventing deterioration of appearance while allowing for the realization of a large operation button 410 (button lens 411) with an outer diameter of approximately 15 cm without any problems. Therefore, the operation buttons 410 and the door frame-side display device 460 (door frame-side second display device 460A) can be enlarged, making the pachinko machine 1 more noticeable and attracting the player's attention, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protrudes cylindrically from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side, when the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) is viewed from an oblique angle, the inner wall of the button base 413 can obscure and conceal anything outside the operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), thereby further improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, because the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical) that bulges outward from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the surface near the outer edge of the button lens 411 is inclined with respect to the plane formed by the opening at the front end of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are aligned, that is, a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the operation button 410 moves forward and backward). As a result, light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, by combining the first button decorative part 411a, the second button decorative part 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer edge, the outer edge and back side of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), thus reliably achieving the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 is increased. This allows for larger and easier movement of the internal decorative member 432 and the door frame-side display device 460 (door frame-side second display device 460A) located inside the operation button 410. This makes it easier to incorporate a door frame-side display device 460 (door frame-side second display device 460A) that can better entertain the player, thus realizing a pachinko machine 1 that provides even greater enjoyment for the player.

Furthermore, because the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given an aesthetic (decorative) appearance. This makes the operation button 410 more noticeable in this pachinko machine 1, attracting the player's attention and making it easier for them to choose this pachinko machine 1 to play.

Furthermore, in the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is made opaque. Therefore, the area around the button frame 412 reliably hides the gap between the button lens 411 and the internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) of the operation button, preventing the inner side of the operation button 410 and the internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) from being visible. This reduces the deterioration of the appearance of the operation button 410 and improves its overall appearance.

Furthermore, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 extending inward from its outer edge for a predetermined width around its entire circumference. Working in cooperation with the first button decoration section 411a and the second button decoration section 411b, this makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 and the internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) of the operation button 410. This allows for a larger gap between the main body 413a and the internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), thereby providing more space for the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the second display device 460A on the door frame side to move, enabling smoother operation of these components.

Furthermore, because the outer circumference of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, compared to a polygonal shape, the outer circumference lacks directionality, making it easier to smoothly move the operation button 410. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it can be pressed without problems, ensuring that players can enjoy the interactive gameplay using the operation button 410 and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, because the operation button 410 is enlarged, when a player-participation feature is implemented that requires the player to operate the operation button 410, it becomes easier for the player to touch and press the operation button 410 without having to check its position. This makes it easier for players to participate in player-participation features using the operation button 410, thus keeping players entertained and preventing a decline in their enjoyment.

Furthermore, because the operation button 410 is equipped with a door frame-side display device 460 (door frame-side second display device 460A), by presenting display images according to the game state, the player's attention can be strongly drawn to the door frame-side display device 460 (door frame-side second display device 460A) within the operation button 410. This allows the player to enjoy the effects displayed by the door frame-side display device 460 (door frame-side second display device 460A), and the display images and light effects from the door frame-side display device 460 (door frame-side second display device 460A) can encourage the player to operate the operation button 410. This actively engages the player in participatory effects, preventing a decline in interest. Additionally, the execution of effects within the operation button 410 may lead some players to believe that something good is about to happen, increasing their anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the door frame-side display device 460 (door frame-side second display device 460A) can be seen through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decorative section 411a) of the large operation button 410, players can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of this pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation buttons of conventional pachinko machines. This makes the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players, and it can also increase players' anticipation for the effects using the operation button 410 and the door frame-side display device 460 (door frame-side second display device 460A) within the operation button 410, thereby preventing a decline in player interest.

Although preferred embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. Various improvements and design modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention, as described below.

In other words, although the above embodiment shows the application to a pachinko machine 1 as the gaming machine, it is not limited to this. It may also be applied to pachislot machines or gaming machines that combine a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case as well, the same effects and advantages as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is shown with a first button decorative portion 411a formed on the inner circumference side of the button frame 412. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the button lens 411 may also be made without the first button decorative portion 411a.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows an opaque button frame 412 attached to the outer edge of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, instead of attaching the button frame 412, a decorative portion may be formed around the entire circumference of the button lens 411 in the area corresponding to the button frame 412 to conceal the rear side.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the operation button 410 is shown to have a button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes cylindrically from the outer edge of the button lens 411 toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround the entire outer circumference of the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side second display device 460A. However, it is not limited to this, and at least one protrusion toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) may surround only a portion of the entire outer circumference of the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame side second display device 460A. The shape of this button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer circumference of the button lens 411, or a shape that does not follow the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have decoration (planar decoration by attaching stickers or printing, or three-dimensional decoration by reliefs, etc.) on at least the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. If the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to apply a light-diffusing treatment such as a textured surface, slits, or prism to at least one of the inner or outer walls.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows an example where the lower tray 322 is recessed only from the left outer portion of the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A) on the front surface of the tray unit cover 326, the embodiment is not limited to this. The lower tray 322 may also be recessed from both the left and right sides of the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A), connecting them at the rear of the unit. Alternatively, it may be recessed only from the right outer portion of the performance control unit 400 (second performance control unit 400A), with a portion of it curving around to the rear of the unit.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the shape of the portion of the lower tray 322 on the front surface of the tray unit cover 326 that is recessed towards the rear (the decorative portion 326c at the front of the tray) (the shape of the front end of the lower tray 322) was shown as a curved recess towards the rear. However, it is not limited to this, and the front surface may also be recessed in the shape of a polygonal prism or a polyhedron.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows an example where the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) is attached to the front of the plate unit cover 326, the invention is not limited to this. Other components such as units or panels equipped with "operating devices such as operation dials and touch panels," "rotating bodies with decorative surfaces," "decorative bodies with decorative surfaces and movable devices for moving the decorative bodies," "decorative bodies that three-dimensionally replicate characters, items, logos, and scenes (dioramas) in line with the concept of the gaming machine," or "decorative bodies with characters, items, logos, or predetermined patterns applied by stickers, printing, etc., in line with the concept of the gaming machine," may also be attached. Additionally, the mounting space 326j (performance operation unit mounting section 326a) does not need to be a single component; multiple (two or more) components may be attached. For example, separate components may be attached, such as a component attached to the upper half of the mounting space 326j and a component attached to the lower half of the mounting space 326j.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows a plate unit cover 326 with a forward-facing mounting portion 326a for attaching the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), the invention is not limited to this configuration. A plate unit cover without an opening (for example, a panel-shaped cover) for attaching the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) (the mounting portion 326a) may be used, and a space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed at the rear of the plate unit cover. It is desirable to decorate the front surface of such a plate unit cover with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc., in line with the concept of the gaming machine, by means of stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which an area slightly larger than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) of the lower tray 322 in a plan view is covered by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) as a covering part, making it difficult to see from the front. However, the invention is not limited to this, and an area less than half of the game ball storage area of the lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front, or the entire lower tray 322 may be made difficult to see from the front.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 were shown as being partially provided in an arc shape in the circumferential direction. However, the embodiment is not limited to this, and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be annular in shape extending around the entire circumference.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the decorative part 432g inside the second button of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the performance operation unit 400 was shown as a decoration having multiple polygons arranged in concentric circles centered on the center. However, it is not limited to this, and the decorative part 432g inside the second button may also be a decoration having multiple circles (including ellipses) arranged in concentric circles centered on the center.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the rear members such as the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side display device 460, and the door frame side second display device 460A, which are located on the rear side, are shown to be always visible through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. However, the invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and rear member, which are located front and rear (or top and bottom), may have a variable light-transmitting means that allows the rear side to be seen when predetermined conditions are met. Here, examples of variable light-transmitting means include "a magic mirror, where the rear side becomes visible due to the difference in brightness between the front and rear sides," and "a liquid crystal film, where the rear side becomes visible by becoming transparent or opaque depending on whether the power is turned ON or OFF." Note that the front member and rear member may be relatively movable or not relatively movable.

By providing variable light-transmitting means on at least one of the front and rear members, under normal conditions, only the front member, or both the front and rear members, are visible, allowing the player to see the decorations of the visible members. Under special conditions, by satisfying predetermined conditions, the rear member (the rear member, or the member located behind the rear member), which was not visible under normal conditions, becomes visible, allowing the overlapping decorations of the front and rear members, or the front, rear, and the member behind the rear member, to be displayed. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front and rear members, preventing the player from becoming bored, entertaining them, and suppressing a decline in their interest.

To elaborate further, for example, if the front component has a variable light-transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, darkening the rear side of the front component allows the player to see only the decoration of the front component. Then, by illuminating the space between the front and rear components, or the rear side of the rear component, with light from an LED or other light-emitting element, the conditions for satisfying the variable light-transmitting means in the front component are met, allowing the rear component to be seen through the front component. This enables the player to see the overlapping decorations of both the front and rear components.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light-transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, the surface of the rear member is visible through the front member, allowing the player to see the decorations on both the front and rear members. Furthermore, if the rear side of the rear member is illuminated with light from an LED or other light-emitting element, the conditions for the variable light-transmitting means in the rear member are met, making the rear side visible through the rear member. This allows the player to see the rear component of the rear member (e.g., a display device, character, or other decorative element) through both the front and rear members.

Furthermore, if both the front and rear members have variable light-transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, only the decoration of the front member can be seen by the player. However, if the space between the front and rear members is illuminated with light from an LED or other light-emitting device, the conditions for satisfying the variable light-transmitting means in the front member are met, allowing the surface of the rear member to be seen through the front member, thus allowing the player to see the decorations of both the front and rear members. On the other hand, if the rear side of the rear member is illuminated with light from an LED or other light-emitting device (or if the space between the front and rear members and the rear side of the rear member are illuminated simultaneously with light from an LED or other light-emitting device), the conditions for satisfying the respective variable light-transmitting means in the front and rear members are met, allowing the player to see the rear part of the rear member (e.g., a display device, character, or other decorative element) through both the front and rear members. This allows the visible range to be changed in multiple stages by appropriately selecting the area to be illuminated with light from the light-emitting device, enabling players to enjoy a variety of decorations.

Furthermore, in the specific example above, since the variable light transmission means is similar to a magic mirror, when the rear side is darkened, it appears like a mirror, allowing the player to see sparkling decorations on the surfaces of the front and rear components.

Furthermore, while the variable light transmission means was described as something like a magic mirror in the above example, similar effects can be achieved even if something like a liquid crystal film is used. Moreover, when something like a liquid crystal film is used as the variable light transmission means, it can transmit light even when opaque (it possesses light-transmitting properties). Therefore, by illuminating the space between the front and rear members, or the rear side of the rear member, with light from an LED or other light-emitting element (or providing luminous decoration), it becomes possible to present a wider variety of luminous and decorative effects to the player.

[7. Main control board, dispensing control board, and peripheral control boards]
Next, the control boards that perform various controls on the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to Figures 69 to 74. Figure 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control boards; Figure 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of Figure 69; Figure 71 is a schematic diagram of the various detection signals input and output to the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board that relays the electrical connection between the payout control board, which constitutes the main board, the CR unit, and the rate display board; Figure 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of Figure 69; Figure 73 is a schematic block diagram of the peripheral control MPU; and Figure 74 is a block diagram of the area around the sound source-integrated VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

The pachinko machine 1, as shown in Figure 69, includes a first control unit (MCG) that performs control related to the game, including the generation of a control power supply (e.g., +5V) and the payout of prize balls, and a second control unit (SCG) that performs game-related effects controlled by the first control unit (MCG).

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are distributed among multiple circuit boards. The first control unit (MCG) comprises a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, while the second control unit (SCG) comprises a peripheral control board 1510. In describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first control unit (MCG) will be described first, in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931, and then the second control unit (SCG) (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main Control Board]
Of the first control unit MCG described above, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game mainly comprises, as shown in Figure 69, a main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor that controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on and controls the game operation, a ROM that stores various control programs and various commands, and a RAM that stores data temporarily, etc., a main control input circuit 1310b which receives detection signals from various detection switches, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e which monitors signs of power outage or momentary power interruption of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a includes not only its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), but also a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring its operation (system), and functions for preventing fraud.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code (a code that exists only once in the world) assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a for individual identification. Because this ID code is stored in non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even with external devices. The main control MPU 1310a is designed to retrieve and reference the ID code from the non-volatile RAM.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an") that updates, in hardware, a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state among various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 32767 as the maximum value is predetermined), and the initial value is not fixed (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first uses a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value. Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator described later), it rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without repetition. Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value of 1 within the predetermined numerical range and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without repetition based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs this high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310a as the random number for determining the jackpot.

The main control input circuit 1310b does not have a reset terminal to forcibly reset the information received from the detection signals of the various detection switches at its various input terminals, and therefore does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit that does not receive the system reset signal from the main control system reset, as described later. In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit where various signals based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals are output from its various output terminals, because the information based on that information is not reset by the main control system reset described later.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type with its emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND). It consists of a reset function main control output circuit 1310ca, which has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information of various signals input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a reset function main control output circuit 1310c, which does not have a reset function and does not have a reset terminal. The main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset, described later, is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on the information of various signals input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., are output from its various output terminals, as the information is reset by the main control system reset, described later. In contrast, the main control output circuit 1310c without reset function is configured as a circuit in which no system reset signal from the main control system reset, described later, is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured such that the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc., is not reset by the main control system reset described later. Therefore, signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

As shown in Figure 60, detection signals from the first start port sensor 4002, which detects game balls that enter the first start port 2002; the second start port sensor 4004, which detects game balls that enter the second start port 2004; and the general prize port sensor 4020, which detects game balls that enter the general prize port 2001, as well as signals from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Furthermore, the detection signals from the gate sensor 4003 (shown in Figure 60), which detects game balls passing through the gate section 2003; the count sensor 4005 (shown in Figure 60), which detects game balls entering the large prize slot 2005; and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (shown in Figure 9), which is attached to the back unit 3000 and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports on the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of its main control output circuit 1310ca based on the detection signals from each of these switches. The main control output circuit 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d outputs a drive signal to the start solenoid 2107 and attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, and so on. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a drive signal from the panel relay board 4161 and then, via the function display unit 1400, to the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display 1401, and the round display 1407.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various game-related information (game information) from its predetermined output port terminals to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This allows the main control output circuit 1310ca to output various game-related information (game information) to the payout control board 951. Alternatively, it outputs a signal (power outage clear signal) from its predetermined output port terminals to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, which in turn allows the main control output circuit 1310ca to output a signal (power outage clear signal) to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, non-contact electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005, while contact-type ON/OFF mechanical switches are used for the general prize port sensors 4020, 4020. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and frequently pass through the gate section 2003, resulting in frequent detection of game balls by the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Furthermore, when a jackpot state occurs, which is advantageous to the player, the large prize slot 2005 opens and game balls enter frequently, resulting in frequent detection of game balls by the count sensor 4005. Therefore, a long-life proximity switch is used in the count sensor 4005. In contrast, the general prize slots 2001 and 2201, where game balls do not enter frequently, do not experience frequent detection by the general prize slot sensors 4020 and 4020. Therefore, the general prize slot sensors 4020 and 4020 use mechanical switches with a shorter lifespan than proximity switches.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to dispensing as serial data from its predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb (without reset function), which then transmits various commands as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb to the dispensing control board 951. When the dispensing control board 951 successfully receives the various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (dispensing ACK signal) to the main control board 1310 to indicate this. This signal (dispensing ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port on the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data via the main control input circuit 1310b. The main control input circuit 1310b then receives these commands as serial data at its predetermined serial input port. Upon successful reception of the commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the reset-enabled main control output circuit 1310ca via its predetermined output port. The reset-enabled main control output circuit 1310ca then outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to game performance control and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of its predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb then transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, we will briefly explain the main frequency serial transmission port, which transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control's built-in RAM, the main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the various serial I/O ports of the main control, is connected via the bus 1310ah (see Figure 79). The main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main frequency serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and is mainly composed of a transmit shift register 1310aea, a transmit buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (see Figure 79). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmit buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmit start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. The serial management unit 1310aec then transfers the command set in the transmit buffer register 1310aeb from the transmit buffer register 1310aeb to the transmit shift register 1310aea, and begins transmitting it to the peripheral control board 1510 as main frequency serial data. In this embodiment, the transmit buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting multiple commands in the transmit buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmit start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

Furthermore, the power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double-layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") BC0 (see Figure 75) as a backup power supply to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control's built-in RAM during power-off processing, even when the power is cut off. The various information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) by the main control MPU 1310a when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 (described later) is operated within a predetermined period from power-on. An operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is output from the payout control board 951 and input to a predetermined input port terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. This triggers the main control MPU 1310a to completely erase (clear) the information from the main control's built-in RAM.

[7-2. Dispensing Control Board]
Of the first control unit MCG described above, the payout control board 951, which controls the payout of game balls, etc., includes, as shown in Figure 70, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payouts, an operation switch 954 that serves multiple functions, and an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. The operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, outputs a RAM clear signal based on a detection signal output when it is operated, in order to completely erase the information stored in the RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built into the main control MPU 1310a.

[7-2-1. Dispensing Control Unit]
The payout control unit 952, which performs various controls related to payouts, includes, as shown in Figure 70, a payout control MPU 952a which is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM for storing various control programs and commands, including a payout control program that controls the power-on processing performed when the power is turned on and the payout operation of the game medium that is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, and a RAM for temporarily storing data; a payout control input circuit 952b which receives detection signals from various detection switches related to payouts; a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like; a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830; and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6. In addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in payout control RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in payout control ROM"), the payout control MPU 952a also incorporates a watchdog timer to monitor its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, receives various game-related information (game information) and various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b as serial data, respectively, as main payout serial data reception signals. Furthermore, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error generation command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game balls, or creates a 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to the first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) of the operation switch 954, which acts as an error release unit. These error generation commands and error release navigation commands are then output as serial data in a serial format via the payout control I/O port 952b to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 (command transmission means). Furthermore, if an error occurs in the dispensing operation after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, that is, after the dispensing control unit's main processing or timer interrupt processing has been executed and dispensing control has started, this dispensing control program will clear the error based on the detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and will also stop the output of warning information corresponding to the error (error clearing control means).

Furthermore, this dispensing control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame open command (first main frame open command) when a detection signal (main frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the main frame open switch 619. On the other hand, this dispensing control program also outputs a door frame close command (first door frame close command) when a detection signal (main frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame open switch 618, and outputs a main frame close command (first main frame close command) when a detection signal (main frame close detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the main frame open switch 619.

The payout control input circuit 952b does not have a reset terminal to forcibly reset the information received from the detection signals from the various detection switches at its various input terminals, and therefore lacks a reset function. For this reason, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit that does not receive the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later. In other words, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit where various signals based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to its various input terminals are output from its various output terminals, because the information based on that information is not reset by the payout control system reset described later.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type with its emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND). It consists of a payout control output circuit with a reset function 952ca, which has a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information of various signals input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout control output circuit without a reset function 952cb, which does not have a reset terminal and therefore does not have a reset function. The payout control output circuit with a reset function 952ca is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset, described later, is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit with a reset function 952ca is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on the information of various signals input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., are output from its various output terminals, as the information is reset by the payout control system reset, described later. In contrast, the payout control output circuit without a reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit in which no system reset signal from the payout control system reset, described later, is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured such that the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external circuit board, etc., is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. Therefore, signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The ball depletion detection sensor 827, which detects the depletion of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800, the payout detection sensor 842, which detects game balls released from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840, which detects the rotation of the payout blades 839, are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. For the purposes of the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Furthermore, detection signals from the door frame release switch 618, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame release switch 619, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Furthermore, the detection signal from the full-capacity detection sensor 279, which detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in Figure 1 is full with stored game balls, is first input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the handle relay terminal board 315, the power supply board 931, and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The dispensing control MPU 952a receives various dispensing commands from the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control input circuit 952b in serial data format at the input terminal of its serial input port, and outputs operation signals (detection signals) from the operation switch 954 to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. When the dispensing control MPU 952a successfully receives the various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a signal (dispenser ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, thereby outputting a signal (dispenser ACK signal) to the main control board 1310 from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function.

Furthermore, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function from the output terminal of its serial output port, thereby transmitting various commands as serial data from the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 successfully receives various commands from the dispensing control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main dispensing ACK signal) to the dispensing control board 951 to indicate that it has completed the process. This signal (main dispensing ACK signal) is input to a predetermined input port terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

Furthermore, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The payout control output circuit 952ca then outputs a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, which in turn outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834. Additionally, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 860b from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The payout control output circuit 952ca then outputs a drive signal to the error LED display 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment display that shows the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, shapes, etc. The error LED indicator 860b displays and notifies the following: For example, when the symbol "-" is displayed, it indicates that the system is "normal"; when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, that there is an electrical connection abnormality between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951); when the number "1" is displayed, it indicates that there is a "bulb out" (specifically, that there are no game balls in the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 827); when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that there is a "bulb jam" (specifically, that the payout rotating body and the game balls are jammed near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, making it difficult for the payout rotating body to rotate); and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 84 Based on the detection signal from 2, it notifies that there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 842. When the number "5" is displayed, it notifies that there is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it notifies that it is "full" (specifically, that the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is full with stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that the "CR is not connected" (that an electrical connection has been disconnected anywhere between the payout control board 951 and the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it notifies that it is "in stock (prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

Furthermore, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually dispensed, etc., from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The payout control output circuit 952ca then outputs the number of game balls actually dispensed, etc., to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Furthermore, the payout control board 951 outputs various game-related information (game information) from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via resistors (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is equipped with multiple photocouplers (composed of infrared LEDs and photo ICs, not shown), and transmits the number of game balls and other information (game information, error details related to the payout operation of game balls, or a statement that an error occurred) to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically isolated by multiple photocouplers, preventing abnormal voltages from being applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1, which could cause the hall computer to malfunction or fail. Similarly, abnormal voltages from the hall computer to the main control board 1310 that controls the game and the payout control board 951 that controls payouts, which could cause malfunctions or failures, are also prevented from being applied via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1. The hall computer monitors the players' gameplay by understanding the number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1 and other game information from the pachinko machine 1.

The ball dispensing request signal from the ball dispensing button 328 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 329 are first input to the CR unit 6 via the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be dispensed according to the ball dispensing request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the CR unit input/output circuit 952e. Furthermore, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining balance on the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls dispensed, and outputs a signal to the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the balance display board 365 to display the remaining balance on the game ball dispensing return display unit 330. This signal is then input to the game ball dispensing return display unit 330. Additionally, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the game ball dispensing return display unit 330 receives the voltage supplied from the CR unit 6 via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

Furthermore, the power supply board 931, which supplies various voltages to the dispensing control board 951, is equipped with a capacitor BC1 (see Figure 75) as a backup power supply to supply power to the dispensing control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor BC1 allows the dispensing control MPU 952a to store various information in the dispensing control built-in RAM (dispensing memory unit) during power-off processing, even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, the operation signal is input to a predetermined input port terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. The dispensing control MPU 952a interprets this as a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM, and as a result, the information is completely erased (cleared) from the dispensing control MPU 952a. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for the game ball dispensing device]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6, and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be explained with reference to Figure 71. As shown in Figure 71, the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, as well as the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 (more precisely, the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880, the CR unit 6 and the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). The circuit boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869, the circuit boards of the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the circuit boards of the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880, and the circuit boards of the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by their respective wiring harnesses. In addition, AC 24V, which will be described later, is supplied from the power supply board 931 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC +12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC24V using a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) and supplies it to the payout control board 951 via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 along with the ground LG. At the same time, it supplies it to the frequency display board 365 via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880.

The frequency display panel 365 has a push-button switch, the ball dispensing button 328, mounted on its component surface in a position corresponding to the ball dispensing button 328; a push-button switch, the return button 329, mounted in a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball dispensing unit 360; and a segment display unit, the ball dispensing/return display unit 330, mounted in a position corresponding to the remaining ball dispensing display unit 363 of the ball dispensing unit 360.

The ball dispensing button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the CR unit 6 via the ground LG from the CR unit 6 through the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball dispensing button 328 is pressed, its switch turns ON, and the ball dispensing operation signal TDS from the ball dispensing button 328 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869. Similarly, when the return button 329 is pressed, its switch turns ON, and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input to the CR unit 6 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869.

The ball return display unit 330 consists of three segment displays arranged in a row. The three-digit segment displays are controlled by a so-called dynamic lighting method, in which each of the three digits of the segment display is driven sequentially. Through this lighting control, the ball return display unit 330 displays the remaining balance of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6, or displays errors in the CR unit 6. The ball loan/return display unit 330 receives digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for specifying one digit of the three-digit segment display, and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of seven signals) for specifying the content to be displayed by lighting up the specified one-digit segment display. These signals are input from the CR unit 6 via the game ball/dispensing device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. According to these input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, the one-digit segment display lights up sequentially, and the content displayed by the illumination of these three-digit segment displays can be visually confirmed through the loan remaining display unit 363.

Adjacent to the ball dispensing/returning display unit 330, a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365. A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to this CR unit lamp 365d via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball dispensing available signal TDL through the CR unit lamp 365d and a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 generates the predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 using its built-in voltage generation circuit. When the ball dispensing button 328 and the return button 329 are active and the ball dispensing is possible, the logic of the ball dispensing available signal TDL is controlled to make the CR unit lamp 365d light up, and this light can be seen through the remaining dispensing display unit 363. Furthermore, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball return display unit 330 through a current limiting resistor mounted on the ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869.

When the ball dispensing button 328 is pressed and the ball dispensing operation signal TDS from the ball dispensing button 328 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869, the CR unit 6 outputs a ball dispensing request signal BRDY to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 then outputs a single payout operation start request signal BRQ to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869, in order to dispense a predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, equivalent to 100 yen) in a single payout operation. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a), which receives BRDY and BRQ signals, outputs EXS, a signal indicating the start or end of a payout operation, to the CR unit 6 via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869. It also outputs PRDY, a signal indicating whether a payout operation for dispensing dispensing balls is possible or impossible, to the CR unit 6 via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869. For example, if the hall staff have pre-configured the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are dispensed when the ball dispensing button 328 is pressed, the payout operation will be performed twice consecutively. After 25 balls worth 100 yen are dispensed, another 25 balls worth 100 yen are dispensed, for a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen.

The CR unit 6, upon receiving a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 via the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869, will eject and return the prepaid card from an insertion slot (not shown). The returned prepaid card stores the remaining balance after deducting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls dispensed as a result of pressing the ball dispensing button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG described above will be briefly explained. The power supply board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts AC (24V) supplied from the pachinko island equipment, a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the ball launching device 650 shown in Figure 5 using the launch solenoid 682 and the ball feeding control of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in Figure 1 using the ball feeding solenoid 255.

[7-3-1. Power Supply Control Unit]
The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a that rectifies the 24-volt AC power supplied from the pachinko island equipment when the power switch 934 is operated, a power factor correction circuit 935b that improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a, a smoothing circuit 935c that smooths the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and a power supply creation circuit 935d that creates various DC power supplies for supplying various circuit boards from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c.

[7-3-2. Launch Control Unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255, is mainly composed of a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307, which electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of the game balls launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302; a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 310, which detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 302; and a detection signal from a single-shot button operation sensor 312, which detects whether or not to forcibly stop the launch of game balls according to the player's will, via a handle relay terminal board 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the launch control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal via the payout control board 951 to indicate that this has been done.

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (firing) the game ball towards the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and outputs it to the launch solenoid 682. Simultaneously, it outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal board 315, causing the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 to receive one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and then sends the received game ball to the ball launching device 650.

[7-4. Peripheral Control Board]
In relation to the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG includes, as shown in Figure 72, a peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with a performance display drive board 4450 that performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460 shown in Figure 19; a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460, while also controlling sound such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573; a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second; and a volume adjustment volume 1510a that adjusts the volume of music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating a knob.

[7-4-1. Peripheral Control Unit]
As shown in Figure 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control includes a peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that controls the power-on processing performed when the power is turned on and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on and controls the performance operation, various data, various control data and various schedule data, and various information that continues across the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing that is executed each time a V-blank signal is input from the sound source built into the LCD display control unit 1512a (described later) (for example, the game board The system includes a peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information such as schedule data defining the screen to be drawn on the side display device 1600 and schedule data defining the light emission patterns of various LEDs, etc., for managing such information; a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of when a jackpot game state occurred and information for managing special performance flags); and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can only retain its stored data for a short time, such as the duration of a momentary power outage followed by immediate power restoration. In the event of a prolonged power interruption (a long-term power outage), it loses its data. In contrast, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown, hereinafter referred to as the "SRAM electrolytic capacitor") located on the power supply board 931, allowing it to retain its stored data for approximately 50 hours. Because the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is located on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d no longer receives backup power, and therefore loses its stored data.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is malfunctioning. When this timer expires, a hardware reset is initiated. In other words, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires), a reset will occur. However, if the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within that period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, thus preventing a reset.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. Upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, it transmits game board-side light emission data to the lamp drive board 4170 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to output a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to multiple LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, based on these commands. It also transmits game board-side motor drive data to the motor drive board via a peripheral control output circuit to output a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable parts provided on the game board 5. The system transmits door-side motor drive data to the drive board 4180 and to the door frame 3 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. It also transmits door-side light emission data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Furthermore, detection signals from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401, and detection signals from the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405, are serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This serialized performance operation unit detection data is then input from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the serial I/O port for performance operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (e.g., photosensors) used to detect the original position and movable position of various movable parts on the game board 5 are serialized by a game board-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) on the motor drive board 4180. This serialized movable part detection data is then input from the game board-side serial transmission circuit to the motor drive board's serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input and output of the motor drive board's serial I/O port.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and it diagnoses whether its own system is malfunctioning by using both the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e in combination.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral Control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in Figure 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is composed of a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa at its center, a built-in peripheral control RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af, various peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and a peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as the peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, etc.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to the built-in peripheral control RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while simultaneously reading and writing various data to the various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af, the various peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Furthermore, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while simultaneously reading and writing various data to the peripheral control RAM 1511c and peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It has four channels, DMA0 to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac communicates between the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, which is built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and the input/output devices built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, such as the various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the various peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, via the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform independent data transfer, the system reads and writes to the storage device of the built-in peripheral control RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, while simultaneously reading and writing to input/output devices such as the various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af, the various peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Furthermore, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac independently transmits data between the storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and the input/output devices such as the various peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the various peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, which are built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. To perform data transfer, reading and writing are performed to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h. Simultaneously, reading and writing are performed to input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad is a dedicated controller that controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to handle the exchange of various data between the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and input/output devices such as the peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak.

The peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae include serial I/O ports for the lamp drive board, motor drive board, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, main control board, and serial I/O port for acquiring performance operation unit information.

The built-in peripheral control watchdog timer (WDT) 1511af is a timer that monitors whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a system is malfunctioning. When this timer goes up, a hardware reset is initiated. In other words, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, and does not output a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer goes up), a reset will occur. However, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af within that period, the timer count can be restarted, and therefore a reset will not occur.

The peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals, such as the motor drive latch signal on the game board side and the motor drive light-emitting latch signal on the door side. In addition, it outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and serializes detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable parts provided on the game board 5 using a game board-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It then outputs a movable part information acquisition latch signal for receiving this serialized movable part detection data from the game board-side serial transmission circuit to the motor drive board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-brightness white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp to indicate that the occurrence of a jackpot game state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the various peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag are directly electrically connected, the path between the LED and the various peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag is shortened, thereby enabling noise countermeasures for the LED lighting control, which is of significant importance in gameplay. The LED lighting control is performed in the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. Other LEDs, excluding this one, are controlled in the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing, which will also be described later.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control potentiometer 1510a. The resistance value changes when the knob of the volume control potentiometer 1510a is rotated. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob is converted from an analog value to a digital value, resulting in 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven levels and managed as board volume controls 0 to 6. Board volume control 0 is set to mute, and board volume control 6 is set to maximum volume. The volume increases from board volume control 0 to board volume control 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a, described later) is controlled to produce music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, matching the volume levels set for board volume controls 0 to 6. Thus, music and sound effects are produced by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob.

In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds are also emitted from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 to alert hall staff and others to malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, and to inform players about the content of game performances (for example, to enhance the visual impact of the screen displayed on the game board-side performance display device 1600, or to inform players that there is a high probability of transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to them). However, the notification sounds and alert sounds are designed to be emitted independently of the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume from silent to maximum can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, described later) via a program. Unlike the seven-stage circuit board volume control described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from silent to maximum. This allows, for example, a hall employee to lower the volume by turning the knob on the volume control volume 1510a. While the music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 will be quieter, a loud notification sound (maximum volume in this embodiment) can still be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is engaging in fraudulent activity. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is reduced, the notification sound can prevent hall employees from becoming less aware of malfunctions or fraudulent activity. Furthermore, based on the current circuit board volume set by the volume adjustment via the knob, the volume of advertising sounds can be reduced to avoid interfering with music and sound effects, while conversely, the volume of advertising sounds can be increased to enhance the visual impact of the game board-side display device 1600 in addition to the music and sound effects, or to inform the player that there is a high probability of transitioning to a more advantageous game state.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral Control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b pre-stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, etc. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460, light emission pattern generation schedule data for generating light emission patterns for various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating music and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive patterns for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which screens are drawn on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460. The light emission pattern generation schedule data is composed of light emission data that defines the light emission patterns for various LEDs arranged in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies the output channel number for instructing which of the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (described later) should be used, and the track number for instructing which of the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a should incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electrical drive source schedule data is composed of drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Furthermore, some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are read and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are copied to the various control program copy area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c (described later) at power-up, etc., and then read and executed. Similarly, some of the various data, control data, and schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, while others are copied to the various control data copy area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c (described later) at power-up, etc., and then read.

Furthermore, the peripheral control ROM 1511b includes a brightness correction program as one of the various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. This program corrects the brightness of the game board-side display device 1600 according to its usage time. If the game board-side display device 1600 is equipped with an LED backlight, this brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to the aging of the game board-side display device 1600. It obtains the date and time when the game board-side display device 1600 was first powered on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc., from the RTC control unit 4165's built-in RAM (described later), and corrects this obtained brightness setting information based on the correction information. This correction information is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 in 5% increments within a range of 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board-side display device 1600. For example, if six months have already passed since the game board-side display device 1600 was first powered on, the system obtains corresponding correction information (e.g., 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is set to 75% to light up the backlight of the game board-side display device 1600, the system obtains the information for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 is adjusted and illuminated based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, so that the brightness becomes 80% by adding the correction information of 5%. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time the game board-side display device 1600 was first powered on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Furthermore, when the brightness of the LEDs included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 is illuminated, the brightness of the backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 is adjusted and illuminated based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, so that the brightness becomes 85% by adding the acquired correction information of 10% to this 75%.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral Control RAM]
As shown in Figure 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which is externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, includes a backup management work area 1511ca that exclusively stores information that is subject to backup among the various information that is updated when various control programs are executed; a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store copies of the various information stored in the backup management work area 1511ca; a various control program copy area 1511cd that exclusively stores copies of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b; a various control data copy area 1511ce that exclusively stores copies of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b; and a backup non-managed work area 1511cf that exclusively stores information that is not subject to backup among the various information that is updated when various control programs are executed.

Furthermore, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored after a momentary power outage or blackout), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf, resulting in a zero-clear. However, the backup managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc are zero-cleared when the power-on status command from the main control board 1310 (see Figure 89) instructs the start of the RAM clear animation and the game state (for example, it instructs the start of the animation when the operation switch 954 shown in Figure 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on).

The backup-managed work area 1511ca consists of Bank0 (1fr), which stores performance information (1fr), which is various information updated in the peripheral control steady-state processing executed each time a V-blank signal is input from the sound source-built VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (described later), as a dedicated backup target, and Bank0 (1ms), which stores performance information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs (described later), as a dedicated backup target. To briefly explain the names Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the smallest management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information, and the "0" following "Bank" means that it is the normally used storage area for storing various information that is updated when various control programs are executed. In other words, "Bank0" means that the smallest management unit is the size of the normally used storage area. Furthermore, "Bank1," "Bank2," "Bank3," and "Bank4," which are located in the area spanning from the first backup area 1511cb to the second backup area 1511cc as described later, mean that they have the same storage area size as "Bank0." As will be explained later, when the built-in sound source VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board-side performance display device 1600 and the door frame-side performance display device 460, it outputs a V-blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a indicating that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, each time a V-blank signal is input, in other words, every frame, the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed, hence the notation "(1fr)" is appended to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" respectively (the same meaning is used for performance information (1fr) and performance backup information (1fr) described later). As will be explained later, "(1ms)" is appended to "Bank0," "Bank1," "Bank2," "Bank3," and "Bank4" respectively, because the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs (the same meaning is used for the performance information (1ms) and the performance backup information (1ms) described later).

Bank 0 (1fr) is provided with a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a received command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae, etc. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is a storage area where game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is set. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is a storage area where door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs, etc., provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is set. The received command storage area 1511cac is the main control The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area where various commands transmitted from the circuit board 1310 are received and set. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area where various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, described later) is set. The schedule data storage area 1511cae is a storage area where various schedule data corresponding to the received commands are set based on the commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce is read and set, while other schedule data is read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and set.

Bank0 (1ms) is provided with a transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, a transmission data storage area 1511cag for the motor drive board side, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, a performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and a drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, among others. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is a storage area where door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is set for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is a storage area where game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable parts provided on the game board 5. The movable part information acquisition storage area 1511cah is a storage area where various information such as the original position and movable position of various movable parts provided on the game board 5 is set based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5. The performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai is a storage area where various detection switches provided on the performance operation unit 400 are set. This is a storage area where various information is set, such as the rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the press operation unit 405, based on detection signals from the switches (for example, rotation (direction of rotation) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the press operation unit 405, created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the performance operation unit 400). The drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak is a storage area where various information is set, such as the frequency of malfunctions and the state of malfunctions in the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450, based on the LOCKN signal (described later) output by the performance display drive board 4450 to indicate that the received drawing data from the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal.

Furthermore, the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of Bank0 (1fr), and the motor transmission data storage area 1511caf and motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of Bank0 (1ms) are each divided into two areas: the first area and the second area.

When the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing described later is executed, the first region of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is set with the game board side light emission data SL-DAT. When the next peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed, the second region of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is set with the game board side light emission data SL-DAT. Thus, each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second regions of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the peripheral control unit performs a routine process, and for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa during this routine peripheral control unit process, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT that was set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa during the previous routine peripheral control unit process.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is configured such that when a peripheral control unit-level process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and when the next peripheral control unit-level process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Thus, each time a peripheral control unit-level process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When the peripheral control unit performs a steady-state process, and for example, when the door-side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second region of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab during this steady-state process, the processing proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT that was set in the first region of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab during the previous steady-state process of the peripheral control unit.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is configured such that when the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt process (described later) is executed, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, and when the next peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Thus, each time the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is alternately set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, when the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data storage area 1511caf during this peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, the processing proceeds based on the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT that was set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data storage area 1511caf during the previous peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing.

When the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the motor drive data storage area 1511cag on the motor drive board side is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and when the peripheral control unit's next 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the motor drive data storage area 1511cag on the motor drive board side is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Thus, each time the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the motor drive data storage area 1511cag on the motor drive board side is alternately set in the first and second areas of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, when the motor drive data SM-DAT from the game board side is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag during this peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, the processing proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT that was set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag during the previous peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Next, we will describe the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, which are dedicated storage areas for copies of various information, specifically performance information, stored in the backup-managed work area 1511ca. The first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc are managed with two pairs, each consisting of two banks, forming one page. The performance information (1fr), which is stored in Bank0 (1fr), the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1fr) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Similarly, the performance information (1ms), which is stored in Bank0 (1ms), the normally used memory area, is copied as performance backup information (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac each time the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. Page consistency is ensured by checking whether the contents of the two banks constituting that page match.

Specifically, in backup area 1511cb, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are treated as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are treated as another pair, with a total of two pairs being managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), the normally used memory area, are rapidly copied to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), the normally used memory area, are rapidly copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The consistency of these pages is checked by whether the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match, and also by whether the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

Furthermore, in backup area 2, 1511cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are treated as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are treated as another pair, with a total of two pairs being managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), the normally used memory area, are rapidly copied to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The contents stored in Bank0 (1ms), the normally used memory area, are rapidly copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The consistency of these pages is checked by whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match, and also by whether the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511cb is an area for managing two pairs of data as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) forming one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) forming another pair. The second backup area 1511cc is an area for managing two pairs of data as one page, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) forming one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) forming another pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is stored in the normally used memory area Bank0 (1fr), is copied at high speed as performance backup information (1fr) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Similarly, the performance information (1ms), which is stored in the normally used memory area Bank0 (1ms), is copied at high speed as performance backup information (1ms) to the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. The program that performs these high-speed copies by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is common to all systems. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and performance information (1ms) are managed using a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral Control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is provided with a backup management work area 1511da that exclusively stores information that is subject to backup among the various information that is updated when various control programs are executed, and a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc that exclusively store copies of the various information stored in the backup management work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are not zeroed out even when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (including when power is restored after a momentary power outage or blackout) and a power-on state command (see Figure 89) from the main control board 1310 instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in Figure 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on). In this respect, it is completely different from the fact that the backup-managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cb, and backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above are zeroed out. Also, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time, a screen for setting mode is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d can be cleared one by one (for example, the history of when a jackpot game state occurred), while the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in setting mode. In this respect as well, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

The backup-managed work area 1511da consists of Bank0 (SRAM), which is dedicated to storing various types of information that continue across days, such as performance information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of when a jackpot game state occurred, or information for managing special performance flags), as backup targets. To briefly explain the name Bank0 (SRAM), "Bank," as mentioned above, is the smallest management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, and the "0" following "Bank" means that it is the normally used storage area for storing various types of information that are updated when various control programs are executed. In other words, "Bank0" means that the smallest management unit is the size of the normally used storage area. Furthermore, "Bank1," "Bank2," "Bank3," and "Bank4," which are provided in the area spanning from the first backup area 1511db to the second backup area 1511dc described later, mean that they have the same size of storage area as "Bank0." The designation "(SRAM)" is applied to "Bank0," "Bank1," "Bank2," "Bank3," and "Bank4" respectively, because the various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is the target of the backup. (The same meaning is used for the performance information (SRAM) and the performance backup information (SRAM) described later.)

Next, we will describe the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, which are dedicated storage areas for copies of the performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup-managed work area 1511da. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed with two banks forming one pair, and this pair is managed as one page. The performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), the normally used storage area, is copied at high speed to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac as performance backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The consistency of a page is ensured by whether the contents of the two banks constituting that page match.

Specifically, the backup area 1511db is managed as a pair consisting of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM), with each pair representing one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), the normally used storage area, are rapidly copied to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac each time the peripheral control unit performs a steady-state process for each frame. The consistency of these pages is ensured by checking whether the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Furthermore, the backup second area 1511dc is managed with Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as a pair, with each pair representing one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), the normally used storage area, are rapidly copied to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed for each frame. The consistency of these pages is checked by whether the contents of Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) match.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as a pair, with each pair being treated as one page. The second backup area 1511dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as a pair, with each pair being treated as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid Crystal Display Control Unit]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which controls the drawing of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460, and controls the sound such as music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, has a built-in sound source (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source") for controlling the sound such as music and sound effects, as shown in Figure 72, and also has a built-in sound source VDP (Video Display) for controlling the drawing of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460. 1512a (abbreviation for Processor), 1512b LCD and sound control ROM that stores various character data for the screens displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460, as well as various sound data such as music and sound effects, 1512c audio data transmission IC that transmits serialized music and sound effects as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and a door frame side display transmitter that transmits serialized drawing data to the door frame side display device 460 to a display drive board 4450 located near the bottom of the door frame side display device 460, which is mounted on the right side of the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 and housed inside the tray unit 320. The system includes a transmitter IC 1512d, a differential circuit 1512e that differentializes the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal, and a forced switching circuit 1512f that receives a signal from the differential circuit 1512e in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and when a signal from the differential circuit 1512e is received, connects the circuit to transmit this signal, while when no signal is received from the differential circuit 1512e, connects the circuit to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The LCD and sound control ROM 1512b stores sprite data used for displaying screens and images described later, such as ring-shaped display data used for displaying ring-shaped display objects (ring-shaped display objects), operation menu background image data used for displaying the operation menu background image described later, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying the volume adjustment screen including the volume scale described later, volume setting icon image data used for displaying the volume adjustment icon described later, as well as main frame back image data used for displaying a main frame back image that allows the player to see the position of each part on the back of the main frame 4, service mode screen image data used for displaying the service mode screen, rest timer setting screen image data used for displaying the rest timer setting screen, and rest screen image data used for displaying the rest screen. The LCD and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying suggestion displays that prompt the player to operate the press operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the performance operation unit 400.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in this schedule data storage area 1511cae is then stored in the peripheral control ROM 1 of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of 511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, triggered by the input of a V-blank signal (described later), the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the next screen data following the first screen data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and outputs it to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data arranged chronologically in this screen generation schedule data to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a one by one, starting from the first screen data, each time a V-blank signal is input.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control control unit 1511, and sets it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in this schedule data storage area 1511cae is then used by the peripheral control R of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the OM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, upon input of a V-blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the next sound command data following the first sound command data from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 and outputs it to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data, which is arranged chronologically in the sound generation schedule data, one by one from the first sound command data each time a V-blank signal is input, to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

[7-4-2a. DVD with built-in sound source]
In addition to the built-in sound source mentioned above, the built-in VDP 1512a also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") that, when screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, extracts the game board side character data and the upper tray side character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side display device 1600 and the door frame side display device 460, as shown in Figure 74. The built-in sound source VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board-side performance display device 1600 from channel CH1 to the game board-side performance display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) drawing data for the door frame-side performance display device 460 from channel CH2 to the door frame-side performance display device 460 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, thereby synchronizing the game board-side performance display device 1600 and the door frame-side performance display device 460.

The drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board-side performance display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame-side performance display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450, which is located near the bottom of the door frame-side performance display device 460 mounted on the right side of the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 and housed inside the tray unit 320. Thus, as described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board-side performance display device 1600. Since the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board-side performance display device 1600 are mounted on the game board 5, the length of the wiring required from channel CH1 to the game board-side performance display device 1600 is short. However, as described above, the drawing data output from channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame-side performance display device 460 via the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the game board 5, while the performance display drive board 4450 is housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, the length of the wiring required from channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 is extremely long compared to channel CH1, making it extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is significantly longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d employs a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" from THine Electronics Co., Ltd., making it less susceptible to noise interference.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 consists of three video signals (red, green, and blue) and three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization, vertical synchronization, and clock). These are serialized by the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 4610d and transmitted to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed within the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. These serialized signals are then restored to parallel signals on the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame-side effect display device 460.

Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460 to the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a, the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a extracts character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays the drawing data for one screen (one frame) on the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460. The data is generated on the built-in VRAM. Of this generated drawing data, image data for the game board-side display device 1600 is output to the game board-side display device 1600 via channel CH1, while image data for the door frame-side display device 460 is output (transmitted) to the door frame-side display device 460 via channel CH2 through a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a display drive board 4450 housed within the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. In other words, "screen data for one screen (one frame)" refers to the data used to generate the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460 on the built-in VRAM.

Furthermore, the built-in sound source VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board-side display device 1600, and outputs (transmits) image data for the door frame-side display device 460 from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 to the door frame-side display device 460. At this time, it outputs a V-blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a indicating that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, so the interval at which the V-blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a peripheral control V-blank signal interrupt process, described later, upon receiving this V-blank signal. The interval at which the V-blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460. Furthermore, the interval at which the V-blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a are mounted.

Furthermore, the built-in sound source VDP1512a employs a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer system" involves storing the rendering data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460 in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM), and then outputting this rendering data for one screen (one frame) stored in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460.

Furthermore, when the built-in sound source VDP 1512a receives the aforementioned sound command data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, it extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as shown in Figure 74, and controls the built-in sound source. This incorporates the sound data, such as music and sound effects, into tracks according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number. The music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 are then serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

Furthermore, the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is incorporated. Multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the VDP 1512a incorporate not only sound data for performance sounds such as music and sound effects, and sub-volume values for adjusting their volume, but also sound data for notification sounds used to inform hall staff of malfunctions or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, and sub-volume values for adjusting their volume. Specifically, for performance sounds, the circuit board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub-volume value. For notification sounds, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value, completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment volume 1510a knob. The sub-volume value for performance sounds can be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400, which will take you to the setting mode described later.

Furthermore, the sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. For the multiple output channels of the built-in sound source of the VDP1512a, the sound data of the effect sound embedded in the track being used, along with a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound embedded in the track being used, are combined. The volume of this combined effect sound is then amplified to the master volume value, which corresponds to the actual volume emitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. This amplified effect sound is then serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized sound effect is at its maximum volume, it is amplified up to the master volume value so that the volume emitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes the maximum permissible volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated into the track to be used from among multiple tracks, and the circuit board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, which is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated into the track to be used, are combined, and the volume of this combined sound effect is amplified up to the master volume value which is the actual volume emitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified sound effect is serialized as audio data and transmitted by the audio data transmission IC 1512 The signal is output to c, and for the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated into the track being used, and the maximum volume (which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, which is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated into the track being used) are combined. This combined notification sound volume is then amplified to the master volume value, which is the actual volume emitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. This amplified notification sound is then serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

To briefly explain the control mechanism for playing an alert sound to notify hall staff of a malfunction or fraudulent activity in the pachinko machine 1 when the performance sound is playing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, first, the sub-volume value of the track containing the performance sound is forcibly set to mute. Then, the sound data of the track containing the performance sound, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track containing the alert sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the alert sound are combined. The combined volume of the performance sound and the alert sound are amplified to the master volume value, which corresponds to the actual volume played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Finally, the amplified performance sound and alert sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the only sound that actually flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is the maximum volume notification sound. At this time, the performance sound is muted and therefore does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, although the performance sound continues to progress according to the sound generation schedule data described above. In this embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the performance sound, which has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that was previously forcibly muted, is reset to a sub-volume value by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, if the system has entered setting mode and adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400, it is set to the adjusted sub-volume value of the performance sound), and flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

Thus, when the performance sound is playing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and an alert sound is played to notify hall staff of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the performance sound is muted and the alert sound plays from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, since the muted performance sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alert sound stops playing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 after a predetermined period has elapsed, the performance sound does not start playing again from where the alert sound began, but rather from where it left off, according to the sound generation schedule data up to the point when the alert sound began and the predetermined period had elapsed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid Crystal and Sound Control ROM]
As shown in Figure 74, the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b pre-stores character data for the game board side to be drawn on the display area of the game board side performance display device 1600, and character data for the upper tray side to be drawn on the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, as well as various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and announcement sounds.

[7-4-2c. Audio Data Transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives serialized audio data from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, it transmits the right audio data as differential serial data, treating it as a positive and negative signal, to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Simultaneously, it transmits the left audio data as differential serial data, treating it as a positive and negative signal, to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882. As a result, music and sound effects tailored to various effects are played back in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

Furthermore, the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data for both the left and right channels, connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. For example, even if the positive and negative signals of the left audio data are affected by noise, the noise components on the positive signal and the noise components on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to create a single left audio data. During this process, the noise components cancel each other out, thus eliminating the noise. Therefore, noise countermeasures can be implemented.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side effect transmitter IC]
As shown in Figure 74, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a. As described above, channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data consists of three video signals: a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. The red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, since the red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, the upper 6 bits of each video signal are input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The lower 2 bits contain extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, so although they are output from the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a, the lower 2 bits containing this weak color information are disabled.

When the three video signals (red, green, and blue) and three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization, vertical synchronization, and clock signal), which are the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the built-in sound source VDP1512a, are input to the door frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d, the door frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d serializes these three video signals and the three synchronization signals into differential serial signals (serial data) using the "V-by-One (registered trademark)" method developed by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. It then transmits these various signals via a single differential pair cable from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and finally to the effect display drive board 4450 housed within the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, the drawing data output from channel CH1 of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board-side display device 1600. Therefore, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH1 to the game board-side display device 1600 (first path) is short. However, the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a is output (transmitted) from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame-side display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the display drive board 4450 housed within the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. Therefore, the length of the wiring required for the path from channel CH2 to the door frame-side display device 460 (second path) is significantly longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, making it extremely susceptible to noise interference.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the main frame 4 shown in Figure 1 so as to be able to open and close, it is necessary to run various wires along the open side of the main frame 4 on the closed side, which is opposite the locking unit 700 shown in Figure 5, to electrically connect various circuit boards on the main frame 4 side and various circuit boards on the door frame 3 side. For example, this includes a peripheral control board 1510 on the game board 5 mounted on the main frame 4 to a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 on the door frame 3. However, on the closed side of the main frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, there is a full-capacity branching unit 770 that can guide the game balls dispensed by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and when the upper tray 321 is full of game balls, it can branch off and guide the dispensed game balls to the lower tray 322 side.
Furthermore, below the main frame 4, there is a payout unit 800, shown in Figure 5, which is a unitized assembly of the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 6, which is powered by the pachinko island equipment. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards on the main frame 4 side and the various boards on the door frame 3 side are routed in the vicinity of the payout device 830, the full-tank branching unit 770, the power supply board 931, etc., and are therefore subjected to noise not only from the operation of the payout motor 834 on the payout device 830, but also from electrostatic discharge caused by the game balls and noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Therefore, for channel CH2, where the length of the wiring for transmitting drawing data is significantly longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d, provided on the peripheral control board 1510, employs a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" from THine Electronics Co., Ltd., making it less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a differential single-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d, provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0, described later, provided on the display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, that is, between the transmitter and receiver. However, this differential single-pair cable is not simply a parallel cable with two wires running parallel to each other, but a twisted-pair cable. This twisted-pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair cable.

Here, we will briefly explain the case where parallel wires are used as the differential one-pair cable electrically connecting the transmitter and receiver. While the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the built-in sound source VDP1512a, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 employs a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" from THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, even with such a hardware configuration alone, noise from electrostatic discharge of game balls, noise entering the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., can affect the serial data on the parallel wires. When this noise is affected, it is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which is located on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. As a result, the serial data is received by the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state, and the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a is received by the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0 as a distorted data different from the normal data. This causes a problem in the display area of the door frame-side performance display device 460, where a so-called static-like image is displayed, making it impossible to recognize what the image is.

Therefore, in this embodiment, for channel CH2 of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely long compared to channel CH1 of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" from THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise. In addition to this hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable is used as a differential one-pair cable to electrically connect the transmitter and receiver, which can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side even if the serial data using the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring. As a result, even if the serial data in the twisted pair cable is affected by noise from electrostatic discharge of the game balls or noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the noise is canceled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. Therefore, the drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a is reliably received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side performance display device 460. This ensures that the image generated by the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is reliably displayed on the door frame side performance display device 460. By canceling (removing) noise, it is possible to prevent the display of images that are completely unrecognizable, such as static-like images, on the door frame-side display device 460, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play due to the effects of noise.

In this embodiment, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are interposed between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, which is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which will be described later, provided on the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but rather assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main frame 4. Therefore, after the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the main frame 4, various wirings such as harnesses and twisted cables from various boards on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 on the main frame 4 side, thereby electrically connecting the various boards on the main frame 4 side and the various boards on the door frame 3 side. With this configuration, after opening the door frame 3 from the main frame 4 and disconnecting various wiring, the door frame 3 can be removed from the main frame 4 to perform maintenance on both the main frame 4 and the door frame 3. Furthermore, if a problem with the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' can be installed on the main frame 4 in place of the faulty door frame 3. By electrically connecting the various wiring from the circuit boards on the door frame 3' side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 on the main frame 4 side, the circuit boards on the main frame 4 side and the circuit boards on the door frame 3' side can be electrically connected.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs a differential communication method called "V-by-One®" from THine Electronics Co., Ltd., making it less susceptible to noise. In addition to this hardware configuration, a twisted pair cable is used as the differential one-pair cable electrically connecting the transmitter and receiver, which can cancel (remove) noise on the receiving side even if the serial data using the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring. Specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, while the power supply wiring and other wiring that transmits various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 have a mixture of wiring patterns for video transmission, which transmits differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, as well as wiring patterns for power supply and various other signals. For this reason, the aforementioned video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, separated by a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver crosses multiple relay terminal boards, namely the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, a problem arises where some of the signals transmitting differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are reflected as noise or the output level of the signals decreases between the input and output of the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards. Therefore, in this embodiment, the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these multiple relay terminal boards are impedance-matched.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables. In contrast, the power supply wiring and other wiring transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. Of the twisted pair cables, one wire is colored red and the other gray. Similarly, of the harnesses, the power supply wiring is colored red and the other wires are colored gray. Note that the power supply wiring may be colored yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to the forced switching circuit 1512f, a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. In addition to the signal output from the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f also receives LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is differentially converted into positive and negative signals by the differential circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side display device 460 to check whether there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d, which is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0, which is provided on the display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, during the period when the startup screen is displayed on the game board side display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or during the period when the game board side display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while in a waiting state for customers. The forced switching circuit 1512f is configured to transmit the two signals when the differential circuit 1512e receives two signals that have been differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal, while it is configured to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the differential circuit 1512e does not receive two signals that have been differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, when two signals, a positive signal and a negative signal, are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit these two signals, so the two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, when two signals, a positive signal and a negative signal, are not input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, so the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the performance display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, during the period when the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while the machine is in a waiting state for customers.

The display drive board 4450, housed within the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, primarily consists of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that, upon receiving serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 via the door frame-side display receiver ICSDIC0 (described later), restores the serialized signals into parallel signals and outputs them to the door frame-side display device 460.

The door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. If it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described later) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Based on the input LOCKN signal, if a predetermined condition is met, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the built-in sound source VDP 1512a to generate an image to indicate this, and outputs it to the game board-side performance display device 1600, displaying it in the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600 for notification.

Furthermore, when the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal (described later) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a response signal to the transmission of LOCKN signal output request data, determines that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver when a LOCKN signal is input, and that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, when a LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and that there is a problem with the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It then controls the built-in sound source VDP 1512a to output a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred with the upper tray side LCD display. Please call a staff member.") to the game board side performance display device 1600, and also controls the built-in sound source VDP 1512a to output a notification sound (for example, "A problem has occurred with the upper tray side LCD display.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, causing the notification sound to play from the speaker installed in the door frame 3. This allows for notification through a notification image displayed in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 and a notification sound repeatedly played from a speaker or similar device installed in the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for illumination decoration on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative circuit boards on the game board 5 may be illuminated.

[7-4-3. RTC Control Unit]
The RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is configured around the RTC 4165a, as shown in Figure 72. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds the calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is powered by a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a power supply for driving and a backup power supply for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is powered by the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1), without any power being supplied from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and maintain calendar information and time information by receiving power from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar and time information from the RTC-integrated RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets it in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Based on this acquired calendar and time information, the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460 can then display various effects. For example, on December 25th, a screen displaying a Christmas tree and reindeer might be displayed on the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, a screen displaying a New Year's countdown might be displayed on the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460. The calendar and time information is set at the factory.

Furthermore, the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa stores not only calendar and time information, but also, if the game board-side display device 1600 is equipped with an LED backlight, the LED brightness setting information. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, if the game board-side display device 1600 is equipped with an LED backlight, retrieves the brightness setting information from the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the backlight brightness using PWM control. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 in 5% increments within a range of 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlights of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460.

Furthermore, the RTC-integrated RAM 4165aa stores not only calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, but also input date and time information, which is the date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) when the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information were first stored in the RTC-integrated RAM 4165aa.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the backlights of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460 by either turning them ON or OFF, or only turning them ON, if the backlights are of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp type.

Various information, such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information, stored in the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa, is set on the gaming machine manufacturer's production line. On the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as display tests of the game board-side display device 1600, the input date and time information is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second entered on the production line, as the date and time when the game board-side display device 1600 was first powered on.

Thus, the RTC-integrated RAM 4165aa can store and retain information that needs to be maintained independently of the pachinko machine 1's model information (for example, the probability of a jackpot occurring in low-probability or high-probability states), such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information when the game board-side display device 1600 is equipped with an LED backlight, and input date and time information.

Furthermore, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright or too dim depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on the brightness of the backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 set on the manufacturing date. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400, it is possible to switch to setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. Within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 will display a screen for setting mode on the game board-side display device 1600. In addition, during the period when the game board-side display device 1600 is demonstrating while the machine is in a waiting state, operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 will display a screen for setting mode on the game board-side display device 1600. By operating the dial control section 401 and the press control section 405 of the performance control unit 400 according to the settings screen, users can reset calendar information and time information, or adjust the brightness of the backlight of the game board-side performance display device 1600 to a desired brightness. This adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board-side performance display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the brightness correction program described above to correct for the decrease in brightness of the game board-side display device 1600 due to aging, if the game board-side display device 1600 is equipped with an LED backlight. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 to identify the date and time when the game board-side display device 1600 was first powered on. It then obtains calendar information specifying the year, month, and day, and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second to determine the current date and time. Finally, it obtains brightness setting information, which includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 in 5% increments within a range of 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board-side display device 1600. This obtained brightness setting information is then corrected based on correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed since the game board-side display device 1600 was first powered on, based on the date and time when the game board-side display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Furthermore, when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the game board-side display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, so that the brightness becomes 80% by adding the acquired correction information of 5% to this 75%. The backlight brightness is adjusted and turned on. If 12 months have already passed since the initial power-on of the game board-side display device 1600, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Furthermore, when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, so that the brightness becomes 85% (75% + 10% from the acquired correction information).

Alternatively, the current date and time can be determined by directly obtaining calendar information specifying the year, month, and day, and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, from the RTC-integrated RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Alternatively, in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing described later, the current date and time can be determined by obtaining the current calendar information set in the calendar information storage section and updated by the peripheral control board 1510 system, and the current time information set in the time information storage section and updated by the peripheral control board 1510 system, from the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c.

[834. Volume control]
As described above, the volume control potentiometer 1510a allows the volume of music, sound effects, etc., played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 to be adjusted by rotating the knob. As described above, the resistance value of the volume control potentiometer 1510a is variable when the knob is rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob from an analog value to a digital value, converting it into 1024 values from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024 values are divided into seven and managed as board potentiometers 0 to 6. Board potentiometer 0 is set to mute, and board potentiometer 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board potentiometer 0 to board potentiometer 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VMP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled to produce music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, so that the volume is set to the volume level set to board volume 0 to 6.

As described above, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the knob. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds are also played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 to alert hall staff, etc., to malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, and to inform players about game performance (for example, to enhance the visual impact of the screen displayed on the game board-side performance display device 1600, or to inform players that there is a high probability of transitioning to a game state advantageous to them). However, the notification sounds and alert sounds are played independently of the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the knob, and the volume from muted to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) via a program.

Unlike the seven-stage volume control on the circuit board described above, the volume adjusted by this program can smoothly transition from silent to maximum volume. This means that, for example, even if a hall employee turns the knob on the volume control 1510a to lower the volume, while the music and sound effects from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 will be quieter, a loud (maximum volume in this embodiment) notification sound can still be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is engaging in fraudulent activity. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is reduced, the notification sound can prevent hall employees from becoming less aware of malfunctions or fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, based on the current circuit board volume set by the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertisement sound can be reduced to avoid interfering with the music and sound effects. Alternatively, the volume of the advertisement sound can be increased to enhance the visual impact of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460, in addition to the music and sound effects, and to inform the player that there is a high probability of transitioning to a more advantageous game state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the volume of music and sound effects can also be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 and the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 to switch to a setting mode. After the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the dial operation section 401 and the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode will be displayed on the game board-side performance display device 1600. Furthermore, during the period when the game board-side performance display device 1600 is demonstrating while the machine is in a waiting state, if the dial operation section 401 and the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 are operated, a screen for performing the setting mode will be displayed on the game board-side performance display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume. Specifically, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control knob 1510a is converted from an analog value to a digital value by the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak. A predetermined value is then added to or subtracted from this converted value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400, thereby increasing or decreasing the value of the circuit board volume. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track containing sound data for performance sounds such as music and sound effects among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, and is reflected in the adjustment of the performance sound volume. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification and announcement sounds mentioned above.

Thus, in this embodiment, there are two methods for adjusting the volume of music and sound effects: one is to directly rotate the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a; the other is to increase or decrease the value of the circuit board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in response to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, the main body frame 4 must always be kept open from the outer frame 2. In that case, only the hall staff can rotate the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, the volume adjusted by the hall staff may feel too quiet to the player, making it difficult to hear the music and sound effects, or it may feel too loud, making the music and sound effects annoying. Therefore, if the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or if the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the machine is in a waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board-side performance display device 1600, a screen for setting mode will be displayed on the game board-side performance display device 1600, and the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume by operating the dial operation section 401 or the press operation section 405 of the performance operation unit 400 according to this setting mode screen. This allows players to adjust the volume of music and sound effects to their desired level. If the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too low and the music or sound effects are difficult to hear, the player can increase the volume to their desired level by operating the dial control unit 401 or the press control unit 405 of the performance control unit 400. Conversely, if the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too high and the music or sound effects are too loud, the player can decrease the volume to their desired level by operating the dial control unit 401 or the press control unit 405 of the performance control unit 400.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the pachinko machine 1 remains in a state where no game is being played for a predetermined period of time, and the machine is in a waiting state, and the demonstration by the game board-side display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times), the volume adjusted by the player who was previously seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing is canceled, and the volume is reset. In this volume reset, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall staff, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall staff by directly turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. This allows the player who previously sat in front of the pachinko machine 1 to adjust the volume to a level that was too low, making it difficult to hear the music and sound effects. Conversely, if the player who sat in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time finds the volume too high, they can adjust the volume to a desired level by operating the dial control 401 or the press control 405 on the performance control unit 400.

[8. Power System]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to Figures 75 and 76. Figure 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a block diagram that continues from Figure 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be explained, followed by the power supply supplied to each control board, etc. Note that the ground (GND) of the various boards and the ground (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are on the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of this power cord is plugged into the power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in Figure 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that generates various DC voltages from the 24-volt AC (24V) supplied from the pachinko machine equipment and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The launch control unit 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in Figure 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in Figure 1.

The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. AC24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 via the power supply board 931, and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. This synchronous rectifier circuit 935a rectifies the AC24V supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. This power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create DC+37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the ripple from the supplied +37V, smooths the +37V, and supplies it to the firing control circuit 953a and power supply generation circuit 935d of the firing control unit 953, respectively.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) embedded in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 supplies backup power to the RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) embedded in the dispensing control MPU 952a of the dispensing control unit 952 of the dispensing control board 951.

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as the drive power source to adjust the drive current for launching (firing) the game ball towards the game area 5a shown in Figure 1 with a launch strength (firing strength) corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 302, and outputs this to the launch solenoid 682. Simultaneously, it outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250, thereby controlling the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 to receive one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and sending the received game ball to the ball launching device 650.

The power supply generation circuit 935d generates DC +5V (DC +5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC +12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC +24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") from the +37V supplied by the smoothing circuit 935c, and supplies them to the dispensing control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system supplied with +5V is the +5V power line, the power supply system supplied with +12V is the +12V power line, and the power supply system supplied with +24V is the +24V power line.

The +5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the dispensing control board 951, as described later. The +5V supplied to the dispensing control board 951 is applied to the power terminals of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control filter circuit 951a, and also to the power terminals of the dispensing control built-in RAM via diode PD0. The +12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. This +5V generation circuit 1310g generates the +5V control reference voltage for the main control MPU 1310a from the +12V from the dispensing control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power terminals of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and also to the power terminals of the main control built-in RAM via diode MD0.

The negative terminal of capacitor BC1 on the power supply board 931 is grounded to ground (GND), while the positive terminal of capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM on the payout control board 951, and also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode PD0 on the payout control board 951. In other words, the +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d on the power supply board 931 flows towards the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and also flows towards the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC1, which are in the forward direction due to diode PD0. In this way, capacitor BC1 can be charged by being supplied with +5V through an electrical connection method in which the +5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d on the power supply board 931 goes to the payout control board 951, and then returns from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. As a result, if the +5V generated by the power supply circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the dispensing control board 951, the charge stored in capacitor BC1 is supplied to the dispensing control board 951 as dispensing VBB. Therefore, although the diode PD0 prevents current from flowing to the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a, thus preventing the MPU 952a from operating, dispensing VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the built-in RAM, allowing the stored data to be retained.

The negative terminal of capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 931 is grounded to GND, while the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM on the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode MD0 on the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g flows towards the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and also flows towards the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM, which is forward via diode MD0, and towards the positive terminal of capacitor BC0. In this way, capacitor BC0 can be charged by being supplied with +5V through this electrical connection method, where the +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and then to the power supply board 931 from the payout control board 951. As a result, if the +12V generated by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g is unable to create +5V, the charge stored in capacitor BC0 is supplied as main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, although the diode MD0 prevents current from flowing to the power terminals of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power terminals of the main control's built-in RAM, thus maintaining the stored contents. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the main control's built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, we will provide an overview of the voltages supplied to each control board, followed by a description of the voltages primarily supplied to the dispensing control board, and then to the main control board.

The three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931, are supplied to the dispensing control board 951, as shown in Figure 75. Of these three voltages, +12V and +24V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 951. Furthermore, the three voltages, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931, are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and via this frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, they are supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

The three voltages supplied to the peripheral control board 1510—+5V, +12V, and +24V—are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180, respectively, as shown in Figure 76(a). The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as lighting signals, flashing signals, and gradation lighting signals to the various decorative boards of the game board 5, while the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs drive signals to the electrical drive sources of the game board 5, such as motors and solenoids.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generation circuit 1510b that generates 3.3V DC (DC +3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from the +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board-side display device 1600. Additionally, the +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board-side display device 1600.

In contrast, the three voltages supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882—+5V, +12V, and +24V—are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in Figure 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a +9V generation circuit 194a that creates DC +9V (hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from the +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with the +9V created by the +9V generation circuit 194a, a total of four voltages—+5V, +12V, and +24V—supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the various decorative boards of the door frame 3.

Furthermore, the +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is supplied to the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from the +12V. The +3.3V generated by the upper tray side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the LCD module circuit 4450V shown in Figure 74, as well as to the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y and the door frame side display device 460. The voltage generated by the upper tray side LCD module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the dispensing control board]
As shown in Figure 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a in addition to the payout control MPU 952a. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. The +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. This external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs signals to a hall computer installed in the amusement hall that convey the number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1. The hall computer monitors the player's gameplay by obtaining information such as the number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1 and game information from the external communication circuit 784a. The +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used in any way by the payout control board 951, but is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in Figure 75, the main control board 1310 includes, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like. The +5V generation circuit 1310g receives +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951 and generates +5V, which is the control reference voltage for the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is applied becomes the +5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the +5V power line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are configured so that they are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V power line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 931 via diode MD0, and also to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a. The +12V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the +24V from the dispensing control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e receives +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951 and monitors for signs of power outages or momentary interruptions in these +12V and +24V power supplies. When the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of power outages or momentary interruptions in the +12V and +24V power supplies, it outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. The power outage warning signal is input to the main control board 1310 and then to the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. The power outage warning signal is also input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the power outage warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, as shown in Figure 76(b). This signal is then input to the door frame decoration boards, etc., via the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

In this embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to both the +12V power line and the +24V power line. This allows for more accurate detection of signs of power outages or momentary power interruptions compared to monitoring only one of the power lines (either the +12V or +24V).

[9. Circuitry of the main control board]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 69 will be explained with reference to Figures 77 to 79. Figure 77 is a circuit diagram showing the main control board, Figure 78 is a circuit diagram showing the power failure monitoring circuit, and Figure 79 is a circuit diagram showing the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in Figure 75 will be explained, followed by the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, various input/output signals to the main control MPU, and the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, all created on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310, as shown in Figures 69 and 75, consists of the main control MPU 1310a, main control input circuit 1310b, main control output circuit 1310c, main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, +5V generation circuit 1310g, and main control filter circuit 1310h. In addition, as peripheral circuits, as shown in Figure 77, it mainly consists of a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 (24 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal.

[9-1. Main Control Filter Circuit]
As shown in Figure 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h is mainly composed of the main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit with excellent attenuation characteristics due to magnetic shielding with ferrite. A +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g is applied to terminal 1 of the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, its terminal 2 is grounded to ground (GND), and a +5V with noise components removed is output from terminal 3. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), so the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed and the voltage is smoothed.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is further smoothed and ripple removed by electrically connecting the other ends of capacitor MC1 and electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), each having one end grounded to ground (GND). This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal (power terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0), the VDD terminal (power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a), and so on. Furthermore, in the event of a power outage or momentary interruption that cuts off power from the pachinko machine equipment, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) from the time of the power outage or momentary interruption.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC3, one end of which is grounded (GND). The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripple. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded (GND).

Furthermore, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3, as well as to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. The cathode terminal of diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is also electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC4, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode MD0 and the other end of capacitor MC4, and is also electrically connected to the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 75 via resistor MR0. In other words, the +5V, which has had noise components removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is also applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 via diode MD0. As a result, as described above, if the +12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 75 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g is unable to generate +5V, the charge stored in capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Therefore, although the diode MD0 prevents current from flowing to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control's built-in RAM, thus retaining the stored contents.

[9-2. Main Control System Reset]
The +5V, smoothed by the removal of noise components by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, as shown in Figure 77. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 reaches a threshold (for example, 4.25V), it outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and to the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, respectively. The output terminal is an open collector output type, with one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC6 which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor MC6 removes ripple and smooths the signal. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold voltage, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR1, setting the logic to HI. This logic is input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, respectively. Conversely, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold voltage, the logic becomes LOW. This logic is also input to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, respectively. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca are negative logic inputs, a reset occurs in both the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca when the voltage input to the power supply terminal falls below the threshold voltage. Furthermore, the power terminal is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC7, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the power terminal is smoothed and ripple removed. The ground terminal is also grounded (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main Control Crystal Oscillator]
The +5V, which has had noise components removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in Figure 77. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripple. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the output frequency selection terminals A, B, C, and ST, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24MHz clock signal from the output terminal F by applying +5V to these A, B, C, and ST terminals, respectively.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24MHz clock signal is input to it. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the earth (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the divided frequency from the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-4. Main Control Input Circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is a circuit that receives detection signals from the general prize slot sensors 4020, 4020, the first start slot sensor 4002, the second start slot sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003, as shown in Figure 69, as well as operation signals (RAM clear signals) from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951, as shown in Figure 70. Since the circuit configuration for receiving detection signals from each switch is the same, here we will describe the circuit that receives the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM (built-in payout control RAM) built into the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the RAM (built-in main control RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, or to clear an error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. It has the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, and the function of clearing an error after the power is turned on (after the period for which it functions as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after the predetermined period from the time the power is turned on has elapsed). The main control board 1310 does not have the error clearing function that the payout control board 951 has, so when an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, it is judged as a RAM clear signal to clear the built-in main control RAM and processes the clearing of the built-in main control RAM.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the main control board 1310 receives an operation signal with a logic value of LOW from the payout control board 951. Conversely, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the main control board 1310 receives an operation signal with a logic value of HI from the payout control board 951 (a detailed explanation of this point will be given later).

During a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, the transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the dispensing control board 951 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR2, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, as shown in Figure 77, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR0 via resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to resistor MR3, the base terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR4, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and one of them (MIC10A) shapes and outputs the signal waveform without inverting its logic).

The circuit outputting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the dispensing control board 951 is configured as an open-collector output type with its emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND). The transmission line carrying the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled down to ground (GND) and input to the main control board 1310 with a LOW logic signal. Conversely, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal from the dispensing control board 951 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and input to the main control board 1310 with a HI logic signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal with a logic value of LOW is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning off transistor MTR0 and thus the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is raised to +5V by resistor MR5, and the operation signal from operation switch 954, with a logic value of HI, is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that a HI logic value for the operation signal from operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 does not instruct a RAM clear (erasing information stored in the main control's built-in RAM).

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the pull-up resistor MR2 pulls the operation signal up to +12V, resulting in a logic value of HIGH. This signal is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning transistor MTR0 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled down to ground (GND), and the operation signal from operation switch 954, now with a logic value of LOW, is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from operation switch 954 input to input terminal PA0 is LOW, it instructs to perform a RAM clear, which erases the information stored in the main control's built-in RAM.

Furthermore, the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the dispensing control board 951. In other words, between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951, a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of +5V, is used to improve signal reliability in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general prize slot sensor 4020, the first start slot sensor 4002, and the second start slot sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistors. On the other hand, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general prize slot sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in Figure 69, are not directly input to the main control board 1310. Therefore, similar to the operation signal from the operation switch 954, they are pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistors.

[9-5. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in Figure 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and both +12V and +24V are input to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power outages or momentary interruptions of +12V and +24V, and when it detects signs of a power outage or momentary interruption, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a, as well as to the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, we will first explain the configuration of the power outage monitoring circuit, followed by the monitoring of +24V power outages or momentary interruptions, the monitoring of +12V power outages or momentary interruptions, and the output of the power outage warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of the power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in Figure 78, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e mainly consists of a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open-collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a +5V voltage is applied. The current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495V is set), which serves as the comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is smoothed by the capacitor MC20, which removes ripple (the AC component superimposed on the voltage). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits. One (MIC21A) is used to compare a +24V monitoring voltage V1 with a reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare a +12V monitoring voltage V2 with a reference voltage Vref. The positive terminal (terminal 3) of MIC21A has the +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to it, and the negative terminal (terminal 2) of MIC21A has the reference voltage Vref applied to it. The positive terminal (terminal 5) of MIC21B has the +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to it, and the negative terminal (terminal 6) of MIC21B has the reference voltage Vref applied to it. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 is equipped with two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC21, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V applied to the Vcc terminal of comparator MIC21 is smoothed by capacitor MC21, removing ripple, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of comparator MIC21, is grounded to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of +24V power outages or momentary power interruptions]
As described above, monitoring of a +24V power outage or momentary interruption is performed by the MIC21A of comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in Figure 78, terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR21, one end of which is electrically connected to the +24V power line, and to the other end of resistor MR22, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). In addition, the other ends of resistors MR21 and MR22 are electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC23, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by capacitor MC23. The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are set so that when the +24V power is interrupted or the voltage starts to drop from +24V and reaches a preset power outage detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment), the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

The output terminal 1 of comparator MIC21A, terminal MIC21A, is an open-collector output. One end is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. The other end of capacitor MC24, which is grounded to ground (GND), is electrically connected to the PR terminal, the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref. The voltage applied to terminal 1, the output terminal of comparator MIC21A, is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic state of HIGH is input to terminal PR, the preset terminal of type D flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes less than the reference voltage Vref. The voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to ground (GND), and a signal with a LOW logic is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of +12V power outage or momentary power interruption]
As described above, monitoring of a +12V power outage or momentary interruption is performed by the MIC21B of comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in Figure 78, terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR24, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and to the other end of resistor MR25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). In addition, the other ends of resistors MR24 and MR25 are electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by capacitor MC25. The values of resistors MR24 and MR25 are set so that when the +12V power is interrupted or the voltage starts to drop from +12V and reaches a preset power outage detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment), the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

The MIC21B output terminal, terminal 7, of comparator MIC21 is an open-collector output and is electrically connected to the MIC21A output terminal, terminal 1. Therefore, it is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23 (one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line), and also electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24 (one end of which is grounded to GND), thereby electrically connected to the PR terminal, the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24, as described above, acts as a low-pass filter.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref. The voltage applied to terminal 7, the output terminal of comparator MIC21B, is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23, and the resulting HIGH signal is input to terminal PR, the preset terminal of type D flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes less than the reference voltage Vref. The voltage applied to terminal 7, the output terminal of comparator MIC21B, is pulled down to ground (GND), and a signal with a LOW logic signal is input to terminal PR, the preset terminal of type D flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power outage warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the D-input terminal 1D terminal based on the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal 1CK terminal. This stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and the inverted value of the stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal negative logic 1Q terminal. Furthermore, when a signal with a logic of LOW is input to the clear terminal CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and outputs a signal with the logic of the signal input to the preset terminal PR terminal inverted from the output terminal 1Q terminal (at this time, the signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q inverted, i.e., a signal with the same logic as the signal input to the preset terminal PR terminal, is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a signal with a logic of HI is input to the clear terminal CLR terminal, the latch state is set. Furthermore, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is set to a latch state by inputting a signal with a logic of HIGH to the clear terminal CLR terminal, and a signal with a logic of LOW is input to the preset terminal PR terminal, it maintains a state in which it outputs a signal with a logic of HIGH from the output terminal 1Q (at this time, it maintains a state in which it outputs a signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q inverted from the negative logic 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has its D input terminal, terminal 1D, and clock input terminal, terminal 1CK, both connected to ground (GND). Therefore, there is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal, terminal 1CK, and the circuit is configured so that the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal, terminal 1D, is not stored and output from the output terminal, terminal 1Q. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives, as described above, a signal from terminal 1, which is the output terminal of comparator MIC21A that monitors for +24V power outages or momentary power interruptions, and a signal from terminal 7, which is the output terminal of comparator MIC21B that monitors for +12V power outages or momentary power interruptions, at the preset terminal PR terminal, and outputs a signal from the output terminal, terminal 1Q, based on these signals. Furthermore, the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND). The +5V applied to the Vcc terminal, the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is smoothed by capacitor MC22, its ripple is removed. The GND terminal, the ground terminal, is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the output terminal 1Q, is electrically unconnected to the outside.

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a via the reset-enabled main control output circuit 1310ca to its clear terminal, CLR terminal. This power outage clear signal is output during the main control power-on processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a (described later), and is stopped after a predetermined time. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the reset-enabled main control output circuit 1310ca with its logic set to LOW. When the power outage clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases its latch state. At this time, it inverts the logic input to the preset terminal, PR terminal, and outputs it from the output terminal, 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a stops, its logic becomes HIGH via the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is configured to set a latch state when no power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state when the logic is LOW input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The signal output from the 1Q terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal. Furthermore, the 1Q terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function. The signal output from the 1Q terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is output from the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to the payout control board 951 as a payout power outage warning signal, and also to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b, which electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, is as shown in Figure 78. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 via resistor MR27. The base terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to resistor MR27, and also to the other end of resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of main control MPU1310a via non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and one of them (MIC23A) shapes and outputs the signal waveform without inverting its logic).

The circuit, consisting of resistors MR27 and MR28, and transistor MTR20, is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR20 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. Conversely, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 is raised to +5V, turning transistor MTR20 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both conditions are met—that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, and that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—a signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic of LOW and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR20, causing transistor MTR20 to turn OFF. This increases the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 to +5V via resistor MR29, and a power outage warning signal with a logic of HIGH is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

On the other hand, when either of the following conditions is met—that the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, or that the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—a signal with a LOW logic signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a HI logic signal and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the MTR20 ON. This pulls the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 down to ground (GND), and a power outage warning signal with a LOW logic signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23.

Furthermore, the main control output circuit 1310cb, which does not have a reset function and outputs the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type, as shown in Figure 78. Terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via resistor MR30. In addition to being electrically connected to resistor MR30, the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR31, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is grounded to GND, and the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22 via resistor MR33. The base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR34, one end of which is grounded to GND. The emitter terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22 is grounded to GND, and the collector terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to GND, and is also electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness). Furthermore, the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the dispensing control board 951 via wiring (harness). This connection then electrically connects to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and also to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a shown in Figure 70, in the dispensing control input circuit 952b of the dispensing control unit 952 shown in Figure 70.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is the preceding switch circuit, while the circuit consisting of resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is the succeeding switch circuit, which is switched ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning MTR21 OFF and the preceding switch circuit OFF. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, is raised to +5V by resistor MR32, turning MTR22 ON and the subsequent switch circuit ON. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 is raised to +5V, turning transistor MTR21 ON and the preceding switch circuit ON. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, is lowered to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR22 OFF and the subsequent switch circuit OFF.

When both conditions are met—that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, and that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—a signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic of LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 OFF. Consequently, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is raised to +5V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22, turning the subsequent transistor MTR22 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND) via the wiring harness at the dispensing control board 951, and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a LOW logic signal is input to the dispensing control board 951.

On the other hand, when either of the following conditions is met—that the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, or that the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—a signal with a logic of LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic of HI and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 ON. Consequently, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22, turning the subsequent transistor MTR22 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and a payout power outage warning signal with a logic state of HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Furthermore, the main control output circuit 1310cb, which outputs a signal from the 1Q terminal, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type, as shown in Figure 78. The 1Q terminal, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). Furthermore, when the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power line in the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 72, and also electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 72.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR35 and MR36, and transistor MTR23, is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. Conversely, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 is raised to +5V, turning transistor MTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both conditions are met—that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, and that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—a signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic of LOW and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR23, causing transistor MTR23 to turn OFF. Consequently, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power outage warning signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the following conditions is met—that the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, or that the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—a signal with a LOW logic signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a HI logic signal and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the MTR23 ON. This causes the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 to be pulled down to ground (GND) via the wiring (harness) at the peripheral control board 1510, inputting a peripheral power outage warning signal with a LOW logic signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thus, the main control input circuit 1310b, which transmits the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, which outputs the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, each have one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 are... While the logic of the other components is identical, the main control output circuit 1310cb, which outputs the signal from terminal 1Q (the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22) to the payout control board 951 as a payout power outage warning signal, has two transistors, one in the pre-stage and one in the post-stage. The logic of the payout power outage warning signal is the inverse of the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510, and is therefore different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the peripheral power outage warning signal.

Furthermore, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 in the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. In contrast, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to the other end of a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to a +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 on the payout control board 951. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 in the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to a +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510. This is because, between the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, both transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are mounted on the main control board 1310. Therefore, power outage warnings are issued using a power outage warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) based on the control reference voltage of +5V of the main control MPU 1310a. However, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, power outage warnings are issued using a power outage warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) based on a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of +5V of the main control MPU 1310a, payout control MPU 952a, and peripheral control MPU 1511a, namely +12V, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards.

[9-6. Various Input/Output Signals to the Main Control MPU]
Next, the various input and output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be explained with reference to Figure 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives serial data from the dispensing control board 951 shown in Figure 69 as a dispensing serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. On the other hand, the TXA and TXB terminals, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, transmit the serial data to be sent to the dispensing control board 951 from the TXA terminal as a main dispensing serial data transmission signal to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function transmits the main dispensing serial data transmission signal to the dispensing control board 951. From the TXB terminal, transmit the serial data to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 69 as a main frequency serial data transmission signal to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function transmits the main frequency serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the operation signals (RAM clear signals) described above, each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a receives other signals, such as the main payout ACK signal from the payout control board 951 indicating successful reception of the main payout serial data reception signal described above, which is input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Similarly, detection signals from various switches, such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in Figure 69, are also input via the main control input circuit 1310b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payout ACK signal indicating the successful reception of the main payout serial data reception signal mentioned above is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and the main payout ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951, or, as shown in Figure 69, a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the start port solenoid 2107, and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs the main control solenoid drive circuit 131 The system outputs a drive signal to the starter solenoid 2107 via 0d, outputs drive signals to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function for various indicators such as the first special symbol indicator 1403 shown in Figure 69, and then outputs drive signals from the main control output circuit 1310ca to the various indicators. It also outputs various game-related information (game information) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and then outputs various game-related information (game information) from the main control output circuit 1310ca to the payout control board 951, and so on.

[9-7. Communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control boards]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Figure 79. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 75 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage for the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. The main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a (+5V), in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 utilizes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function as a communication interface circuit. This communication interface circuit primarily consists of resistors MR50, MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. In contrast, the peripheral control board 1510 primarily consists of a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (which incorporates an infrared LED and a photo IC) as its communication interface circuit.

+12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of diode MD50 on the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The cathode terminal of diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC50 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF)), whose negative terminal is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC50, the cathode terminal of diode MD50 is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of photocoupler AIC10 on peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness).
As a result, if, for example, a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 can continue to be applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510.

Thus, in the event of a power outage or momentary interruption, the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is configured to receive a +5V charge from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470μF in this embodiment) shown in Figure 77. Therefore, the main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae, built into the main control MPU 1310a, can transfer the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec, and then complete the transmission of the main frequency serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the reliability of the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is enhanced by using a voltage of +12V, which is higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a (+5V), in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510. Thus, the main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae, built into the main control MPU 1310a, transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec. When the transmission shift register 1310aea transmits this as main frequency serial data, a main frequency serial data transmission signal with a logic of HIGH is transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 using +12V.

In this embodiment, the transmit buffer register 1310aeb of the main frequency serial transmit port 1310ae, which is built into the main control MPU 1310a, has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. Since one packet consists of 3 bytes of data, the transmit buffer register 1310aeb can store data for up to 10 packets. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the transfer bitrate of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). Resistor AR10 on the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor used to limit the current flowing to the infrared LED built into photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal, which outputs the main frequency serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in Figure 77, is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR50, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 via resistor MR51. The base terminal of transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to resistor MR51, and also to the other end of resistor MR52, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit consisting of resistors MR51 and MR52 and transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning transistor MTR50 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, no forward current flows to the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, causing photocoupler AIC10 to turn OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is raised to +5V by resistor MR50, turning transistor MTR50 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, a forward current flows to the built-in infrared LED of photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 1510, causing photocoupler AIC10 to turn ON.

+5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of diode AD10 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor AC10, whose negative terminal is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by a pull-up resistor AR11 which is electrically connected to the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and this signal is input as the main frequency serial data transmission signal to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

As a result, as described above, if, for example, a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and the +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can continue to be applied as +5V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs, the application of +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 allows the main frequency serial data transmission signal sent from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 to complete the transmission of the data set in the transmit buffer register 1310aeb of the main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a. This ensures that the main frequency serial data transmission signal, i.e., the main frequency serial data, is reliably received by the peripheral control board 1510 without interruption or loss during transmission.

When the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HIGH, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR50 is pulled down to ground (GND), turning off transistor MTR50 and thus turning off photocoupler AIC10. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor AR11, and the main frequency serial data transmission signal with a HIGH logic is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of peripheral control MPU 1511a. On the other hand, when the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR 50 is raised to +5V by resistor MR50, causing transistor MTR 50 to turn ON, which in turn turns on photocoupler AIC 10. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC 10 is lowered to ground (GND), resulting in a main frequency serial data transmission signal with a LOW logic being input to the serial I/O port input terminal for the main control board of peripheral control MPU 1511a. Thus, the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of photocoupler AIC 10 is the same as the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thus, in this embodiment, measures are taken to address the situation when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop in the +5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, +5V, is applied, and the +12V power supply line to which the communication voltage, +12V, applied via diode MD50, is applied. In other words, with respect to the main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae built into the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which serves as the first auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel. As a result, even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply, is applied, thereby maintaining the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. The circuit is composed of resistors MR50, MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cb, which functions as a communication interface circuit and lacks a reset function, the +12V applied to the +12V power line is applied to the anode terminal of diode MD50 as the communication voltage. The cathode terminal of diode MD50 and the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC50, a second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel. Therefore, even if a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and the communication voltage applied from the +12V power line via diode MD50 drops, the communication voltage from the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied, maintaining the applied communication voltage. This prevents interruption and loss of commands being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, ensuring that the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the transmitted commands. Consequently, command loss immediately after a power outage or momentary power interruption can be eliminated.

Furthermore, to enable the transmission of multiple commands set in the transmit buffer register 1310aeb of the main frequency serial transmit port 1310ae, which is built into the main control MPU 1310a, to the peripheral control board 1510 as main frequency serial data via the reset-less main control output circuit 1310cb, which functions as a communication interface circuit composed of resistors MR50, MR51, MR52, and transistor MTR50, the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h is set to 470μF, and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220μF. As a result, even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs while transmitting from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmit buffer register 1310aeb can all be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 via the reset-less main control output circuit 1310cb, which functions as an interface circuit, as main frequency serial data. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the multiple commands set in the transmit buffer register 1310aeb without interruption or loss.

[10. Circuit of the dispensing control board]
Next, the circuits of the dispensing control board 951 shown in Figure 70 will be explained with reference to Figures 80 to 85. Figure 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuits of the dispensing control unit, Figure 81 is a circuit diagram showing the dispensing control input circuit, Figure 82 is a circuit diagram continuing from Figure 81, Figure 83 is a circuit diagram showing the dispensing motor drive circuit, Figure 84 is a circuit diagram showing the CR unit input/output circuit, and Figure 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. First, the dispensing control filter circuit will be explained, followed by the circuit of the dispensing control unit, and then the various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board.

[10-1. Dispensing Control Filter Circuit]
As shown in Figure 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit with excellent attenuation characteristics due to magnetic shielding with ferrite. Terminal 1 of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is to which +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 75 is applied, and is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC0, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by capacitor PC0, which removes ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage). Terminal 2 of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and terminal 3 of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which noise components have been removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is electrically connected to the other ends of capacitor PC1 and electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). This further smooths the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 by removing ripple. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal (power terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0), and the VDD terminal (power terminal of the payout control MPU 952a), as described later. Furthermore, in the event of a power outage or momentary interruption that cuts off power from the pachinko machine equipment, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a for approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary interruption occurs.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor PC3, one end of which is grounded (GND). The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by capacitor PC3, which removes ripple. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded (GND).

Furthermore, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3, as well as to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. The cathode terminal of diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (built-in payout control RAM) built into the payout control MPU 952a, and is also electrically connected to the other end of capacitor PC4, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The VBB terminal of this built-in payout control RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode PD0 and the other end of capacitor PC4, and is also electrically connected to the positive terminal of capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 75 via resistor PR0. In other words, the +5V, which has had noise components removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and is also applied to the VBB terminal of the built-in payout control RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC1 via diode PD0. As a result, as described above, if the +5V generated by the power supply circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge stored in capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the diode PD0 prevents current from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and thus the MPU 952a does not operate, payout VBB is applied to the VBB terminal of the built-in payout control RAM, allowing the stored data to be retained. Thus, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, the backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to the built-in payout control RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of the dispensing control unit]
The dispensing control unit 952 consists of a dispensing control MPU 952a, a dispensing control input circuit 952b, a dispensing control output circuit 952c, a dispensing motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e. In addition, as peripheral circuits, as shown in Figure 80, it mainly consists of a dispensing control system reset PIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a dispensing control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal. Here, we will first explain the dispensing control system reset, followed by the dispensing control crystal oscillator, dispensing control input circuit, dispensing motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the dispensing control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payout Control System Reset]
The +5V, smoothed by the removal of noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the power terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in Figure 80. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit can be set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. Specifically, when the +5V input to the power terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 reaches a threshold (for example, 4.25V), it outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and to the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, respectively. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC6, which is grounded to ground (GND). This capacitor PC6 acts as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold voltage, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1, setting the logic to HI. This logic is input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively. Conversely, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is less than the threshold voltage, the logic becomes LOW. This logic is also input to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, a reset is applied to both the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca when the voltage input to the power supply terminal falls below the threshold voltage. Furthermore, the power terminal is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor PC7, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the power terminal is smoothed by removing ripple. The ground terminal is also grounded (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout Control Crystal Oscillator]
The +5V, which has had noise components removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a, is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in Figure 80. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripple. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. When +5V is applied to its OE terminal, the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8MHz clock signal from its output terminal, the OUT terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing Control Input Circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 952b includes the door frame release switch 618 shown in Figure 70, the main frame release switch 619, the circuit to which the dispensing power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 75 is input, the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Figure 70, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, and the circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame release switch is input will be explained, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame release switch is input, the circuit to which the dispensing power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input, and the circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 and the various detection switches shown in Figure 70, such as the bulb failure detection sensor 827, the dispensing detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840, all have open collector output terminals, the circuit configurations to which detection signals from these various detection switches are input are almost identical. Therefore, this section will describe the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame release switch 618 is of the normally closed type (NC), and as shown in Figure 1, the switch is ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4, and the switch is OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4. Terminal 2 of the door frame release switch 618 is grounded to GND, while terminal 1 of the door frame release switch 618 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR20 via resistor PR21. The base terminal of transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR22, one end of which is grounded to GND. Furthermore, terminal 1 of the door frame release switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, as well as to the other end of capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a via non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 is equipped with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it). When transistor PTR20 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR20 changes, and that signal is input to input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a as a door release signal.

Furthermore, terminal 1 of the door frame release switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR20 via resistor PR21, and is also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR21 via resistor PR24. The base terminal of transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on the external terminal board 784, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. When transistor PTR21 is switched ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 changes, and this signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer frame door opening information output signal.

Furthermore, terminal 1 of the door frame release switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR20 via resistor PR21, and is also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR21 via resistor PR24, and is also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 via resistor PR26. The base terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR27, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 69 via wiring (harness). Furthermore, when the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 69, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. When transistor PTR22 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 changes, and this signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of the pull-up resistor PR20 and capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit. It is configured to absorb voltage fluctuations from the door frame release switch 618 caused by the fluttering phenomenon where the contacts constituting the door frame release switch 618 repeatedly turn ON/OFF for short periods when the door frame 3 is released from the main frame 4, or when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4.

The circuits consisting of resistors PR21 and PR22 and transistor PTR20, the circuits consisting of resistors PR24 and PR25 and transistor PTR21, and the circuits consisting of resistors PR26 and PR27 and transistor PTR22 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the door frame open switch 618.

When door frame 3 is detached from main frame 4, the door frame detachment switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR 20 is pulled down to ground (GND), causing transistor PTR 20 to turn OFF and the switch circuit to turn OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR 20 is raised to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR23, and a door frame detachment signal with logic HIGH is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when door frame 3 is detached from main frame 4, the door frame detachment switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR 21 is pulled down to ground (GND), causing transistor PTR 21 to turn OFF and the switch circuit to turn OFF.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled up to +12V via the wiring (harness) by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784, and the logic becomes HIG, and the outer frame door open information output signal is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND), which turns off transistor PTR22 and also turns off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled up to +12V via the wiring (harness) by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310, and the logic becomes HIG, and the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR 20 is raised to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20, causing transistor PTR 20 to turn ON, and the switch circuit also turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR 20 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a door frame release signal with a LOW logic is input to input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a. Also, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame release switch 618 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR 21 is raised to +5V, causing transistor PTR 21 to turn ON, and the switch circuit also turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND), and the outer frame door open information output signal, with a logic of LOW, is input to the external terminal board 784. Furthermore, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is OFF. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR22 is raised to +5V, turning transistor PTR22 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND), and the main frame door open signal, with a logic of LOW, is input to the main control board 1310.

Thus, when the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned ON, sending a door frame open signal with a logic value of HI to input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, sending an outer frame door open information output signal with a logic value of HI to the external terminal board 784, and sending a main frame door open signal with a logic value of HI to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned OFF, sending a door frame open signal with a logic value of LOW to input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 952a, sending an outer frame door open information output signal with a logic value of LOW to the external terminal board 784, and sending a main frame door open signal with a logic value of LOW to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3(b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame release switch is input]
The main frame release switch 619 is of the normally closed type (NC), and as shown in Figure 1, the switch is ON (conductive) when the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, and the switch is OFF (disconnected) when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. Terminal 2 of the main frame release switch 619 is grounded to GND, while terminal 1 of the main frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR28, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR23 via resistor PR29. The base terminal of transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR30, one end of which is grounded to GND. Furthermore, terminal 1 of the main frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, as well as to the other end of capacitor PC21, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor PTR21 as described above, as well as to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on the external terminal board 784, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. When transistor PTR23 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 changes, and this signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer frame door release information output signal.

Furthermore, terminal 1 of the main frame release switch 619 is pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR23 via resistor PR29. It is also pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 via resistor PR31. The base terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to resistor PR31 and also to the other end of resistor PR32, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of transistor PTR22 as described above, as well as to the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 69 via wiring (harness). Furthermore, when the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 69, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. When transistor PTR24 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 changes, and this signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door open signal.

The circuit consisting of the pull-up resistor PR28 and capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit. It is configured to absorb voltage fluctuations from the main frame release switch 619 caused by the fluttering phenomenon where the contacts constituting the main frame release switch 619 repeatedly turn ON/OFF for short periods when the main frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, or when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR29 and PR30 and transistor PTR23, and the circuit consisting of resistors PR31 and PR32 and transistor PTR24, are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the main frame release switch 619.

When the main frame 4 is detached from the outer frame 2, the main frame release switch 619 is ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR 23 is pulled down to ground (GND), causing transistor PTR 23 to turn OFF and the switch circuit to turn OFF. Consequently, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR 23 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer frame door open information output signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is detached from the outer frame 2, the main frame release switch 619 is ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR 24 is pulled down to ground (GND), causing transistor PTR 24 to turn OFF and the switch circuit to turn OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a main frame door open signal with a logic state of HIGH is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame release switch 619 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28, turning transistor PTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND) at the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and an outer frame door open information output signal with a logic of LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Also, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame release switch 619 is OFF, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR28, turning transistor PTR24 ON and the switch circuit ON as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR24 is pulled down to ground (GND) via the wiring harness at the main control board 1310, and a main frame door open signal with a LOW logic signal is input to the main control board 1310.

Thus, when the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned ON, and an outer frame door open information output signal with a logic value of HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal with a logic value of HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame open switch 619 is turned OFF, and an outer frame door open information output signal with a logic value of LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door open signal with a logic value of LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, as described above, even if the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4, or the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, or both of these states, a main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 69 cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or open from the outer frame 2 based on the main frame door open signal. However, if a player is playing normally and the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 are open, It is possible to determine that a state that does not normally occur has occurred. Furthermore, since the external terminal board 784 receives an outer frame door open information output signal, this signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. While the hall computer cannot determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4 or whether the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, it can determine that a state has occurred where the door frame 3 and/or the main frame 4 are open—a state that does not normally occur during gameplay.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, by employing normally closed switches for the door frame release switch 618 and the main frame release switch 619, even if the door frame release switch 618 short-circuits for some reason and the switch turns ON (conducts), the door frame 3 will remain open from the main frame 4. Similarly, even if the main frame release switch 619 short-circuits for some reason and the switch turns ON (conducts), the main frame 4 will remain open from the outer frame 2. Thus, by employing normally closed switches for the door frame release switch 618 and the main frame release switch 619, the main frame door release signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and the outer frame door release information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

Furthermore, if the door frame release switch 618 and the main frame release switch 619 are replaced from normally closed switches to normally open switches (door frame release switch 618' and main frame release switch 619'), the door frame release switch 618' will be ON (conductive) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main frame 4, and OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is open from the main frame 4. The main frame release switch 619' will be ON (conductive) when the main frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and OFF (disconnected) when the main frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. As a result, even if the door frame release switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch turns OFF, the door frame 3 will remain open from the main frame 4. Similarly, even if the main frame release switch 619' is disconnected for some reason and the switch turns OFF, the main frame 4 will remain open from the outer frame 2. Thus, even if normally open switches are used for the door frame release switch 618' and the main frame release switch 619', the main frame door release signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a disconnection, and the outer frame door release information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3(c). Circuit to which a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line that transmits the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 via resistor PR41. The base terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR42, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and one of them (PIC40A) shapes and outputs the signal waveform without inverting its logic). When transistor PTR40 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 changes, and this signal is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power outage warning signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR41 and PR42, and transistor PTR40, is a switch circuit that turns ON/OFF in response to a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e located on the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power outages or momentary interruptions in two types of voltages, +12V and +24V, from the power supply board 931. When it detects signs of a power outage or momentary interruption, it outputs a power outage warning signal to the payout control board 951 as a power outage warning via the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function. The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power outages or momentary interruptions in the +12V and +24V voltages. As described above, when both conditions are met—that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—the power applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND) on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW, indicating a payout power outage warning. While the signal is input to the payout control board 951, if either of the following conditions is met—that the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, or that the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to +12V via the wiring (harness) by the aforementioned pull-up resistor PR40, thereby inputting a payout power outage warning signal with a logic state of HI (high) to the payout control board 951.

When both conditions are met—that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, and that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—that is, when there are no signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and +24V voltages, a payout power outage warning signal with a logic value of LOW is input to the payout control board 951. This pulls the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 down to ground (GND), turning transistor PTR40 OFF. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is then raised to +5V by resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power outage warning signal with a logic value of HI is input from the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either of the following conditions is met—that the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, or that the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—that is, when there is an indication of a power outage or momentary interruption of the +12V and/or +24V voltages, a payout power outage warning signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the payout control board 951. This power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e causes the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 to be pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, turning transistor PTR40 ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is then pulled down to ground (GND). As a result, a payout power outage warning signal with a logic of LOW at the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

Thus, when there is an indication of a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V and/or +24V voltage, a payout power outage warning signal with a logic of HI is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Conversely, when there is no indication of a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V and +24V voltage, a payout power outage warning signal with a logic of LOW is input to input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V and/or +24V voltage, a power outage warning signal with a logic of HI is input to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Conversely, when there is no sign of a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V and +24V voltage, a power outage warning signal is input to input terminal PA1 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the logic of the payout power outage warning signal input to the payout control MPU 952a based on the power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e and the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are identical.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, which is provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in Figure 1, is input to the dispensing control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in Figure 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 6. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type with its emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND). On the dispensing control board 951, it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR44a, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and also electrically connected to terminal 1 of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit with excellent attenuation characteristics due to magnetic shielding with ferrite.

The second terminal of the PIC50 three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor is grounded (GND), and the third terminal of the PIC50 three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor is electrically connected to the first terminal of the PIC50 three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor via resistor PR44b, and also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR41 via resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is filtered by the PIC50 three-terminal filter for the full tank detection sensor to remove noise components before being input to the base terminal of transistor PTR41. In addition to being electrically connected to resistor PR45, the base terminal of transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the other end of capacitor PC40, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND). Capacitor PC40 acts as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and one of them (PIC40B) shapes and outputs the signal waveform without inverting its logic). When transistor PTR41 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR41 changes, and this signal is input as a full signal to input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR45 and PR46, and transistor PTR41, is a switch circuit that turns ON/OFF based on the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full-capacity detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-capacity detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a signal with a logic of HI is input to the payout control board 951. On the other hand, when the storage space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-capacity detection sensor 279 is pulled down to ground (GND) in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and a signal with a logic of LOW is input to the payout control board 951.

When the storage space is not full with stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-capacity detection sensor 279 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor 44a on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. This signal, with its logic set to HIGH, is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41, causing the transistor PTR 41 to turn ON, and the switch circuit to turn ON as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 41 is pulled down to ground (GND), and the full-capacity signal, with its logic set to LOW, is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the storage space is full with stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-capacity detection sensor 279 is pulled down to ground (GND) on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. This signal, with a logic of LOW, is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41, causing the transistor PTR 41 to turn OFF and the switch circuit to turn OFF as well. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 41 is raised to +5V by the resistor PR47, and the full-capacity signal with a logic of HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to a switch circuit consisting of resistors PR45 and PR46, and transistor PTR41, via a three-terminal filter PIC 50 for the full tank detection sensor. However, as shown in Figure 70, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the bulb failure detection sensor 827 and the dispensing detection sensor 842 are directly input to each switch circuit without going through a T-type filter circuit like the three-terminal filter PIC 50 for the full tank detection sensor. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is located on the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, the transmission path for the detection signal is extremely long compared to the bulb failure detection sensor 827 and dispensing detection sensor 842, which are located on the dispensing device 830 attached to the main frame 4, making it extremely susceptible to noise.

The full-capacity detection sensor 279 detects whether the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. Based on the detection signal from the full-capacity detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a determines that the storage space is full of stored game balls and forcibly stops the drive control of the payout motor 834, thereby stopping the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full-capacity detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a may forcibly stop the drive control of the payout motor 834 and stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body, even if the storage space is not full of stored game balls. Alternatively, even if the storage space is full of stored game balls, if the payout motor 834 is driven and the payout rotating body is rotated to continue paying out game balls, the system may fill the prize ball passage upstream with game balls, causing the payout rotating body itself to become unable to rotate, resulting in an abnormal load on the payout motor 834. This can lead to the payout motor 834 becoming overloaded, overheating, and failing, or the mechanism that transmits the rotation of the payout motor 834's shaft to the rotational motion of the payout rotating body may fail. Therefore, in this embodiment, to prevent such problems, the circuit configuration is designed so that the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered by the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor to remove noise components.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which an operation signal from an operation switch is input]
Terminals 1 and 2, which are output terminals of the control switch 954, are grounded to GND. Terminals 3 and 4, which are output terminals of the control switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via resistor PR49. In addition to being electrically connected to resistor PR49, the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR50, one end of which is grounded to GND. Furthermore, terminal 4, which is output terminal of the control switch 954, is electrically connected to pull-up resistor PR48, and electrically connected to the other end of capacitor PC41, one end of which is grounded to GND. The emitter terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is grounded to GND, and the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via resistor PR52. The base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded to GND. The emitter terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it). When the preceding and succeeding transistors PTR42 and PTR43 are turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 changes, and that signal is input as an RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

Furthermore, terminals 3 and 4, which are output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via resistor PR49. In addition, they are pulled up to +5V by pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR44 via resistor PR55. The base terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to resistor PR55, and also to the other end of resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). Furthermore, when the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line, in the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figure 77. When transistor PTR44 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 changes, and this signal is input as a RAM clear signal to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

The circuit consisting of the pull-up resistor PR48 and capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit. It is configured to absorb voltage fluctuations from the operating switch 954 caused by the fluttering phenomenon where the contacts constituting the operating switch 954 repeatedly turn ON/OFF for short periods when the operating switch 954 is pressed.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR49 and PR50 and transistor PTR42 is the front-stage switch circuit; the circuit consisting of resistors PR52 and PR53 and transistor PTR43 is the rear-stage switch circuit; and the circuit consisting of resistors PR55 and PR56 and transistor PTR44 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM (built-in payout control RAM) built into the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the RAM (built-in main control RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, or to clear an error when an error is reported after power-on. It has a function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and a function to clear errors after power-on (after the period for which the RAM clear function is performed has elapsed, i.e., after the predetermined period from power-on has elapsed). The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal when performing the RAM clear function within a predetermined period from power-on, and an error clear signal when performing the error clearing function after power-on (after the predetermined period from power-on has elapsed).

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the pull-up resistor PR48 pulls up terminals 3 and 4, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, to +5V, and the operation signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42, turning on the preceding transistor PTR42 and the preceding switch circuit. The voltage applied to the base of the subsequent transistor PTR43, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR43, is pulled down to ground (GND), turning off the subsequent transistor PTR43 and the subsequent switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled up to +5V by resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal with a logic of HIGH is input to input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a determines that, within a predetermined period from power-on, if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI, it does not instruct a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control's built-in RAM. Furthermore, it determines that, after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is HI, it does not instruct an error clearing operation.

Furthermore, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the pull-up resistor PR48 pulls up terminals 3 and 4, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, to +5V, and the operation signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the base terminal of transistor PTR44, turning transistor PTR44 ON and the switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is pulled down to ground (GND) on the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal with a logic of LOW is input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic of LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, as described above, as shown in Figure 77, this RAM clear signal with a logic of LOW is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, turning transistor MTR0 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is raised to +5V by resistor MR5, and a RAM clear signal with a logic of HIGH is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to input terminal PA0 is HIGH, it does not instruct the system to perform a RAM clear, which erases the information stored in the main control's built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal, whose logic has become LOW, is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42, turning the preceding transistor PTR42 OFF and the preceding switch circuit OFF. The voltage applied to the base of the subsequent transistor PTR43, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42, is raised to +5V by the resistor PR51, turning the subsequent transistor PTR43 ON and the subsequent switch circuit ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal, whose logic has become LOW, is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a determines that if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from power-on, it instructs to perform a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the built-in RAM of the payout control. It also determines that if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to input terminal PA3 is LOW after power-on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from power-on), it instructs to perform an error clear.

Furthermore, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, terminals 3 and 4, are pulled down to ground (GND) by the pull-up resistor PR48, resulting in an operation signal with a LOW logic being input to the base terminal of transistor PTR44, which turns off transistor PTR44 and also turns off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR44 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and a RAM clear signal with a HI logic is input to the main control board 1310. When a RAM clear signal with a logic value of HI is input to the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from power-on, the main control MPU 1310a, as described above, inputs this HI RAM clear signal to the base terminal of transistor MTR0, as shown in Figure 77, causing transistor MTR0 to turn ON and the switch circuit to turn ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled down to ground (GND), and a RAM clear signal with a logic value of LOW is input to input terminal PA0 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that a LOW RAM clear signal input to input terminal PA0 instructs it to perform a RAM clear, which erases the information stored in the main control's built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing Motor Drive Circuit]
Next, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 834 of the dispensing device 830 shown in Figure 5 will be described. As shown in Figure 83, the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d mainly consists of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive IC PIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied to them, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is grounded to ground (GND). A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and then output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. The power output terminals of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD 60, and are also electrically connected to the power terminals of the dispensing motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da, +12V or +5V is supplied as the motor drive voltage to terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive IC PIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD 60, and also supplied to the dispensing motor 834.

The drive IC PIC60 is equipped with four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, terminals 6 and 7, which are the emitter terminals of the drive IC PIC60, are grounded to GND, respectively. The discharge motor drive signals are input to terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, which are the base terminals of the drive IC PIC60, via resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminals 2, 4, 9, and 11, correspond to the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12, respectively. When the dispensing motor drive signal is input to terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 of the drive ICPIC60 via resistors PR60 to PR63, it outputs a drive pulse, which is an excitation signal, to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 834. This dispensing motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, it is output via resistors PR60 to PR63 to the base terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 of the drive IC PIC60, respectively. These drive pulses are generated by switching the excitation current flowing through each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) of the dispensing motor 834, causing the dispensing motor 834 to rotate. When the drive pulses (excitation signals) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) are interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the voltage rating of the drive IC PIC60, the drive IC PIC60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection measure, a circuit configuration was adopted in which the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected before terminals 3 and 10, which are the cathode terminals of the drive IC PIC60.

[10-2-5. CR Unit Input/Output Circuit]
Next, the CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting and outputting various signals to and from the CR unit 6 shown in Figure 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives, as described above, the BRDY signal, which is a request for a ball to be dispensed, and the BRQ signal, which is a request to start one payout operation, from the CR unit 6 via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869. It also receives a predetermined voltage VL (+12V) and ground LG, which are created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in Figure 71. Meanwhile, the payout control board 951 outputs the EXS signal, which indicates that one payout operation has started or finished, and the PRDY signal, which indicates that a payout operation to dispense a ball is possible or impossible, via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869. The input/output circuit that inputs and outputs these various signals is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which have infrared LEDs and phototransistors built in), as shown in Figure 84.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to ground LG from the CR unit 6. Resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns ON, while when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns OFF. The emitter terminal of the PIC70 photocoupler is grounded (GND). The collector terminal of the PIC70 photocoupler is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR70 transistor via resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR71 transistor via resistor PR72. The collector terminal of the PIC70 photocoupler is electrically connected to resistor PR71, and also electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to resistor PR71, as well as to the other end of resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in Figure 80 via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting its logic). When transistor PTR70 is switched ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR70 changes, and this signal is input as CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to resistor PR72, and also to the other end of resistor PR76, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), it is also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) on the power supply board 931, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. When transistor PTR71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 changes, and this signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR71 and PR74, and transistor PTR70, is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the ON/OFF state of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns OFF. The pull-up resistor PR73 pulls the voltage up to +5V, turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR70 is pulled down to ground (GND), and the CR connection signal 1, with its logic set to LOW, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70, the photocoupler PIC 70 turns ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to ground (GND), causing the transistor PTR 70 to turn OFF, and the switch circuit also turns OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is raised to +5V by the pull-up resistor PTR 75, and the CR connection signal 1, with its logic set to HIGH, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

The circuit consisting of resistors PR72 and PR76, and transistor PTR71, is also a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the ON/OFF state of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 turns OFF. The pull-up resistor PR73 pulls the voltage up to +5V, turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR71 is pulled down to ground (GND) via the wiring (harness) on the power supply board 931, and a CR connection signal with a LOW logic signal is input to the power supply board 931.

On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70, the photocoupler PIC 70 turns ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor PTR 71 is pulled down to ground (GND), causing transistor PTR 71 to turn OFF, and the switch circuit also turns OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR 71 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor on the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and a CR connection signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the power supply board 931.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via resistor PR77. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is input to BRDY from the CR unit 6. Resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON. Conversely, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 turns OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and one of them (PIC80B) outputs the signal waveform without inverting its logic). When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and this signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled down to ground (GND), and the BRDY signal with a LOW logic is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 turns OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal with a HI logic is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the PIC71 photocoupler is identical to the logic of the BRDY signal from the CR unit 6.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminals of photocoupler PIC70 and photocoupler PIC71, as well as to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC72 via resistor PR79. The cathode terminal of photocoupler PIC72 is input to BRQ from the CR unit 6. Resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the infrared LED built into photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, photocoupler PIC72 turns ON. Conversely, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, photocoupler PIC72 turns OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and one of them (PIC80C) shapes and outputs the signal waveform without inverting its logic). When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and this signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72, and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled down to ground (GND), and the BRQ signal with a LOW logic is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72, and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 turns OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal with a HI logic is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the PIC72 photocoupler is identical to the logic of the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6.

The EXS signal, which indicates the start or end of a dispensing operation, is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and is input from the dispensing control output circuit 952cb to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. Resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the infrared LED built into the photocoupler PIC73. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to ground LG from the CR unit 6. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL within the CR unit 6 via the game ball dispensing device connection terminal board 869 by a pull-up resistor PR83, and is electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and this signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 turns ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to ground (GND), and the EXS signal with a LOW logic is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via resistor PR82, and the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 turns OFF. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the EXS signal with a HI logic is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

The PRDY signal, which indicates whether a dispensing operation for dispensing a ball from a predetermined output terminal of the dispensing control MPU 952a is possible or impossible, is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR84. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line. Resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the infrared LED built into the photocoupler PIC74. When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to ground LG from the CR unit 6. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL within the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 and a terminal board 869 for the game ball dispensing device, and is electrically connected to its built-in control unit. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from its collector terminal changes, and this signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control unit of the CR unit 6.

When +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to ground (GND), and the PRDY signal with a LOW logic is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via resistor PR85, and the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 turns OFF. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the PRDY signal with a HI logic is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a via the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function.

[10-2-6. Various Input/Output Signals to the Dispensing Control MPU]
Next, we will explain the various input and output signals that are input and output from the input and output terminals of the various input and output ports of the dispensing control MPU 952a.

As shown in Figure 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main dispensing serial data reception signal via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. Meanwhile, the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a, transmits the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 as a dispensing main serial data transmission signal to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb (without reset function), which then transmits the dispensing main serial data transmission signal to the main control board 1310.

Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 952a receives, in addition to the aforementioned RWMCL signal, dispensing power outage warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.). Furthermore, for example, the main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310, which indicates the successful reception of the aforementioned main serial data reception signal, is input via the dispensing control input circuit 952b. Similarly, detection signals from the bulb failure detection sensor 827, dispensing detection sensor 842, rotation detection sensor 840, etc., as shown in Figure 70, are also input via the dispensing control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, the EXS signal and PRDY signal are output from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 952a to the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, and the EXS signal and PRDY signal are output from the dispensing control output circuit 952cb to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, or the voltage switching signal is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da, or the dispensing motor drive signal is output to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the dispensing control output In addition to outputting a dispensing motor drive signal from the power circuit 952ca to the dispensing motor 834 via the dispensing motor drive circuit 952d, other methods include, for example, outputting a main ACK signal indicating successful reception of the main dispensing serial data reception signal to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and then outputting the main ACK signal from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca to the main control board 1310; or outputting a drive signal for the error LED indicator 860b shown in Figure 70 to the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and then outputting the drive signal from the dispensing control output circuit 952ca to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals to the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, the various input and output signals between the dispensing control board 951 and the main control board 1310, and the various output signals from the dispensing control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be explained with reference to Figure 85.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with the main control board]
The dispensing control board 951 exchanges various input and output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in Figure 85(a), the dispensing control board 951 outputs the above-mentioned dispensing serial data transmission signal, dispensing ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc., to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in addition to the main payout serial data reception signal, main payout ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal) mentioned above, the payout control board 951 receives game information signals related to gameplay, such as the main prize ball count information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal, and the 2-round jackpot information output signal, as well as payout power outage warning signals. These signals are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to the external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in Figure 85(b), in addition to the outer frame door opening information output signal mentioned above, it outputs game information signals to the external terminal board 784, including a prize ball count information output signal that is output each time the number of game balls actually dispensed as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls, a main prize ball count information output signal, a jackpot information output signal consisting of a 15-round jackpot information output signal and a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability variation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time reduction information output signal, and a start-out entry information output signal. These output signals are pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistors of the external terminal board 784. In other words, the external terminal board 784 receives two signals from the payout control board 951: an outer frame door opening information output signal and a prize ball count information output signal. Eight signals from the main control board 1310 are output via (passed through) the payout control board 951: a main prize ball count information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a probability variation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time-saving information output signal, and a start-up slot prize entry information output signal.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a gaming hall (not shown), which monitors the players' gameplay. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as a single jackpot information output signal, the hall computer calculates the total number of jackpots for pachinko machine 1 as the sum of the number of jackpots with 2 rounds (number of 2-round jackpots) and the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of 15-round jackpots). Therefore, the hall computer cannot determine the number of 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots from this combined total, and thus cannot determine whether the actual number of jackpots occurring on pachinko machine 1 is higher for 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots. Furthermore, a data counter (not shown) is located above the pachinko machine 1. Some players may use the data counter's display, such as the number of times a jackpot has occurred, as a reference when deciding whether or not to continue playing.

However, the number of times a jackpot has occurred displayed on the data counter may actually be biased towards the number of 2-round jackpots. Therefore, even after a player starts playing, they might only experience 2-round jackpots, with 15-round jackpots being rare. Thus, while the number of times a jackpot has occurred displayed on the data counter can create a sense of anticipation in players, it can also unnecessarily fuel their gambling instincts.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by outputting separate 15-round jackpot information output signals and 2-round jackpot information output signals to the hall computer, the hall computer can accurately determine the number of 2-round jackpots and the number of 15-round jackpots. Thus, the hall computer can determine whether the jackpots occurring more frequently in the pachinko machine 1 are 2-round jackpots or 15-round jackpots. Furthermore, the data counter can display the number of 15-round jackpots and 2-round jackpots separately, or only the number of 15-round jackpots, as the number of jackpot game states, thus avoiding unnecessarily stimulating the player's gambling instincts.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for the period from when a 2-round jackpot occurs until it ends, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also output to the hall computer for the period from when a 15-round jackpot occurs until it ends. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in this embodiment, another method is also possible, for example, where when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. In this case, both the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal are output to the hall computer for the same predetermined period.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784, which outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the amusement arcade (hall), will be explained with reference to Figure 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base, which is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and its rear side is covered by the external terminal board cover 786. Figure 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal board 784 outputs the following signals to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 when they are input from the payout control board 951: the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the prize ball count information output signal, the main prize ball count information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal, the probability variation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time reduction information output signal, and the start gate entry information output signal.

To briefly explain these various signals, the outer frame door open information output signal is a signal that indicates a state has occurred that does not normally occur during gameplay, such as the door frame 3 and/or main frame 4 shown in Figure 1 being open; the prize ball count information output signal is a signal that indicates this whenever the number of game balls actually dispensed as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in Figure 5 reaches 10; the main prize ball count information output signal is a signal that indicates this whenever the number of game balls scheduled to be dispensed as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various prize slots such as the first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, general prize slots 2001, 2201, and large prize slot 2005 shown in Figure 8 reaches 10; the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates a 15-round jackpot has occurred; and the 2-round jackpot The first information output signal indicates that a 2-round jackpot has occurred. The second information output signal indicates that a probability variation has occurred. The third information output signal indicates that a probability variation has occurred. The fourth information output signal indicates that the special symbol display has ended (stopped) on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Figure 10. The fifth information output signal indicates that the normal symbol display has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Figure 10. The fifth information output signal indicates that a time-saving state has occurred. The fifth information output signal indicates that a game ball has entered the first start gate 2002 or the second start gate 2004 shown in Figure 8.

As shown in Figure 86, the external terminal board 784 has output terminals PT1 to PT10 arranged horizontally in a single row. Output terminal PT1 is white and outputs a prize ball count information output signal. As described above, the prize ball count information output signal is a signal that indicates when the number of game balls actually dispensed as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in Figure 5 reaches 10. In this embodiment, it is output from output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball count information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can understand that the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 has dispensed 10 game balls as prize balls each time the prize ball count information output signal is input, and can also count the number of game balls dispensed to understand the total number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2, colored green, outputs an outer frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer frame door open information output signal indicates that a condition not normally encountered during gameplay has occurred, namely, that the door frame 3 and/or main body frame 4 shown in Figure 1 are open. In this embodiment, the output terminal PT2 is configured to output the signal while the door frame 3 and/or main body frame 4 are open. When the outer frame door open information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that the door frame 3 and/or main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 are open while the outer frame door open information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT3 is gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the display of the special symbol fluctuations in the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Figure 10 has ended (stopped). In this embodiment, the output terminal PT3 is output for 0.128 seconds when the display of the special symbol fluctuations in the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 ends (stops). When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can recognize that the special symbol display has finished (stopped) on the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the pachinko machine 1's function display unit 1400. The hall computer can also count the number of times this has happened and determine the total number of times the special symbol has been displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the pachinko machine 1's function display unit 1400.

The output terminal PT4, colored yellow, outputs a starting port entry information output signal. As described above, the starting port entry information output signal is a signal that indicates when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 shown in Figure 8. In this embodiment, the output terminal PT4 outputs the signal for 0.128 seconds each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. When the starting port entry information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting port entry information output signal is input. Furthermore, by counting the number of times the starting port entry information output signal has been input, the hall computer can determine the total number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal indicates that a 15-round jackpot has occurred. In this embodiment, the output terminal PT5 is output while a 15-round jackpot is occurring. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is being input. Furthermore, by counting the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal has been input, the hall computer can determine the total number of times a 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6, colored pink, outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal indicates that a 2-round jackpot has occurred. In this embodiment, the signal is output from output terminal PT6 while a 2-round jackpot is occurring. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can determine that a 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is being input. Furthermore, by counting the number of times the 2-round jackpot information output signal has been input, the hall computer can determine the total number of times a 2-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal that indicates that the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Figure 10 has ended (stopped). In this embodiment, the output terminal PT7 is output for 0.128 seconds when the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 ends (stops). When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can understand that the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the pachinko machine 1 has ended (stopped) when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, and can also count the number of times the normal symbol has been displayed on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time-saving information output signal. As mentioned above, the time-saving information output signal indicates that a time-saving state is occurring. In this embodiment, it is output from output terminal PT8 while the time-saving state is active. When the time-saving information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can recognize that a time-saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 and can count the number of times the time-saving information output signal has been input to determine the total number of times the time-saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9, colored orange, outputs a probability variation information output signal. As described above, this signal indicates that a probability variation is occurring. In this embodiment, the output terminal PT9 outputs this signal while a probability variation is occurring. When the probability variation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can recognize that a probability variation is occurring in the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, it can count the number of times the probability variation information output signal has been received to determine the total number of times a probability variation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs the main prize ball count information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball count information output signal is a signal that indicates when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, based on the game balls that have entered the various prize slots shown in Figure 8, such as the first start slot 2002, the second start slot 2004, the general prize slots 2001, 2201, and the large prize slot 2005. In this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. When the main prize ball count information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer can understand that the pachinko machine 1 is scheduled to pay out 10 game balls as prize balls each time the main prize ball count information output signal is input, and can also count the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out to understand the total number of game balls that the pachinko machine 1 is scheduled to pay out. Furthermore, for example, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the number of game balls that have entered various prize slots such as the first starting slot 2002, the second starting slot 2004, the general prize slots 2001, 2201, and the large prize slot 2005 reaches 20 or more, and the main prize ball count information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball count information output signal is output with an interval of 0.128 seconds between outputs to prevent it from becoming a single continuous signal for 0.256 seconds (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times).

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals that are output on the dispensing control board 951 side, while output terminals PT3 to PT10 are arranged so that various signals that are output on the main control board 1310 side are output via (passed through) the dispensing control board 951. Each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 is color-coded, and by electrically connecting wiring with connectors of the same color to each of the output terminals PT1 to PT10, it is possible to prevent other wiring from being mistakenly electrically connected. Furthermore, to prevent the various signals output from the payout control board 951 from being mixed with the various signals output from the main control board 1310, output terminals PT1 and PT2 for transmitting the various signals output from the payout control board 951 to the hall computer are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting the various signals output from the main control board 1310 to the hall computer are arranged in a row from the left center to the right side of the external terminal board 784. In this respect as well, it is possible to prevent the wiring for transmitting the various signals output from the payout control board 951 to the hall computer from being mistakenly electrically connected to the wiring for transmitting the various signals output from the main control board 1310 to the hall computer.

In this embodiment, the payout control board 951 outputs a prize ball count information output signal, and the main prize ball count information output signal, which is output from the main control board 1310, are each transmitted from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. This is because, for example, if, due to some trouble with the pachinko island equipment, the prize ball tank 720 shown in Figure 1 is no longer supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and a 15-round jackpot occurs on the pachinko machine 1 when the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 is running low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for dispensing as prize balls will be insufficient, making it impossible to dispense the balls (also, for example, if a ball jam or jam occurs in the dispensing device 830, the game balls cannot be dispensed unless this is resolved). Consequently, the payout control board 951 outputs a prize ball count information signal, as described above. This signal is issued each time the number of game balls actually dispensed as prize balls by the payout motor 834 (shown in Figure 5) reaches 10. Therefore, when game balls can no longer be dispensed, the payout control board 951 is unable to output the prize ball count information signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. When game balls are not dispensed, the player calls a hall employee. The hall employee, for example, checks the hose-like supply nozzle used to supply game balls from the pachinko machine to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the location of the jam (or, for example, identify the location of any jams or ball jams occurring within the payout device 830). By resolving the jam, the game balls can be dispensed again.

However, even when hall staff are working, the game continues to run via the main control board 1310. Therefore, after a 15-round jackpot ends, when the hall staff resumes dispensing game balls, the payout control board 951 will dispense the undispensed game balls one after another. Even though a 15-round jackpot has ended and no further jackpots are occurring, the payout control board 951 will output a prize ball count information output signal via the external terminal board 784 every time the number of game balls actually dispensed by the payout motor 834 reaches 10. This results in an extremely large number of game balls being dispensed even when no further jackpots are occurring, leading to a problem where the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1.

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and whether or not the balls are actually paid out as prize balls, that is, as a signal separate from the prize ball count information output signal output by the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310 outputs a main prize ball count information output signal as a signal to indicate that the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, based on the game balls that have entered the various prize slots shown in Figure 8, such as the first start slot 2002, the second start slot 2004, the general prize slots 2001, 2201, and the large prize slot 2005, and transmits this signal to the hall computer via the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784. This ensures that even if the aforementioned problems occur (such as ball jams in the supply nozzle, or ball jams or jamming within the payout device 830), the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls scheduled to be dispensed in that state can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately understand the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be dispensed in that state.

[12. Circuitry of the display driver board]
Next, the circuit of the performance display drive board 4450, which draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, will be described with reference to Figure 87. As described above, the performance display drive board 4450 is located near the bottom of the door frame side performance display device 460, which is attached to the right side of the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is housed inside the tray unit 320. It mainly consists of a liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460. Figure 87 is a circuit diagram showing the liquid crystal module circuit that draws the display area of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid Crystal Module Circuit]
As shown in Figure 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0.

The LCD module circuit 450V receives serial signals (serial data) using the differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" from THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74, as positive and negative signals. These signals are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively. The common mode choke coil SDL0 separates noise from the positive and negative signals. The noise-separated positive and negative signals are input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminator, preventing the positive and negative signals from reflecting off the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively, thus preventing distortion of the serial signal.

The door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 reconstructs the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals into three video signals (red, green, and blue) and three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization, vertical synchronization, and clock) (i.e., reconstructs them into the parallel signals before serialization). Note that, as mentioned above, although the red, green, and blue video signals output from channel CH2 of the built-in sound source VDP1512a are each 8 bits, the red, green, and blue video signals that can be input to the door frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, totaling 18 bits. Therefore, the signals used are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The LCD module circuit 450V receives signals from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, and also receives two signals, a positive signal and a negative signal, which are differential signals (LOCKN signal output request data) output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and are differential signals (positive and negative) (LOCKN signal output request data) of the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. The forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to transmit these two signals when the differential circuit 1512e receives the two differential signals (positive and negative), and to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the differential circuit 1512e does not receive the two differential signals (positive and negative). As a result, when two signals, differentiated into a positive and a negative signal, are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit these two signals. Therefore, these two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed within the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Conversely, when two signals, differentiated into a positive and a negative signal, are not input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected to transmit the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. Therefore, the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed within the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the differential circuit 1512e does not receive the two differential signals, a positive signal and a negative signal, the forced switching circuit 1512f receives the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the serial signal (serial data) using the differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" from THine Electronics Co., Ltd., as a positive signal and a negative signal, via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. The signal is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and then to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. Meanwhile, when two signals, differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e, are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and then to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. When the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 receives two signals, differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e, it determines that this is a request for a LOCKN signal output and outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal (described later) to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side performance display device 460 to check whether there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, during the period when the startup screen is displayed on the game board side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or during the period when the game board side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while in a waiting state for customers. In this embodiment, the LOCKN signal output request data is differentially converted into positive and negative signals by the differential circuit 1512e, but its data format is completely different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd., as described above. For this reason, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and considers it to be abnormal data, and outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in this embodiment, by utilizing the function of the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which outputs a LOCKN signal when it determines that the received data is abnormal, and by outputting a LOCKN signal output request data with a different data format structure from the signal output by the door frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to confirm whether the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD, VDDO, LVDSVDD, PLLVVDD, and PDWN terminals of the door frame-side display receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied with +3.3V generated by the upper tray-side LCD module power supply circuit 4450x shown in Figure 76. The GND, GNDO, LVDSGND, PLLGND, EDGE, OE, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the door frame-side display receiver ICSDIC0 are also grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit. A capacitor, SDC0, is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for the digital circuit. This capacitor removes high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line supplied to the VDD terminal.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output. Capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between this terminal and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground for the TTL output. This connection removes high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line supplied to the VDDO terminal.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input. Capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between this terminal and the LVDSGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the LVDS input. This connection removes high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit. Capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between this terminal and the PLLGND terminal, which serves as the ground for the PLL circuit. This connection removes high-frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line supplied to the PLLVDD terminal.

The PDWN terminal indicates that the logic becomes HIGH and normal operation is performed when +3.3V is supplied (applied), while conversely, it indicates that the logic becomes LOW and power down is performed when the +3.3V supply is stopped. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage in the +3.3V power line supplied via resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal is used to specify whether the transmission of various signals output from the various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, and D0 to D17 terminals), which are based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal (described later), should be on a rising edge (logic transition from LOW to HI) or a falling edge (logic transition from HI to LOW). In this embodiment, as described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. Incidentally, connecting the EDGE terminal to +3.3V allows you to specify the rising edge.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to allow output from the various output terminals described later (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, D0 to D17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminal). In this embodiment, as described above, the OE terminal is always in an output-enabled state by grounding it. Incidentally, connecting the OE terminal to +3.3V will disable output.

The MODE0 and MODE1 terminals are terminals for selecting the operating mode, and the operating mode can be selected by grounding both of them. There are two operating modes: Normal Mode and Shakehand Mode. In Normal Mode, the door frame-side display receiver ICSDIC0 operates normally by restoring a parallel signal consisting of three video signals (18-bit video signals)—red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal—and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals)—horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal—based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. In handshake mode, the system outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 on the effect display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver. This handshake mode is automatically switched on.

For example, based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0 reconstructs a parallel signal consisting of three video signals (18-bit video signals)—a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal—and three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signals)—a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. If, for any reason, this reconstruction is abnormal and difficult to display on the door frame-side performance display device 460, the receiver automatically switches from normal mode to shakehand mode and outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is then input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d to inform the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d that a predetermined condition has been met, based on the input LOCKN signal. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d transmits a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC 0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and then the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC 0 on the performance display drive board 4450. When such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC 0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is pre-stored in the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Alternatively, the INIT terminal of the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 on the effect display drive board 4450 may be electrically connected directly via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

The LOCKN terminal, as described above, is a terminal that outputs a message requesting the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, which is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which is provided on the effect display drive board 4450. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2 on the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is then input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1511 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510.

The SYNC0 and SYNC2 terminals output three synchronization signals: a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ and RXIN- terminals, respectively. In this embodiment, since the restored three synchronization signals (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal) are not used, the SYNC0 and SYNC2 terminals are unconnected.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal indicating whether the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal (described later) and the data output from terminals D0 to D17 (data output terminals) are valid or invalid. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame-side display device 460 via the damping resistor SDR3.

The CLKOUT terminal outputs the clock signal DCLK generated by the PLL circuit built into the door frame-side display receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame-side display device 460 via the damping resistor SDR4.

Terminals D0 to D17 are data output terminals that output three video signals (18-bit video signals): a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. From the 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5, blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each of these B0 to B5 signal lines is input to the door frame side display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0, which is a damping resistor. From the 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11, green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each of these G0 to G5 signal lines is input to the door frame side display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1, which is a damping resistor. The six-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 output red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK. Each of these red video signal lines R0 to R5 is input to the door frame-side display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2, which acts as a damping resistor.

Furthermore, the grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the performance display drive board 4450, and the door frame side performance display device 460 are electrically connected and share the same ground.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained with reference to Figures 88 to 91. Figure 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, Figure 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, Figure 90 is a table showing the continuation of the various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in Figure 89, and Figure 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives. First, the prize ball commands, which are payout-related commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be explained, followed by the various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and then the various commands from the payout control board that the main control board receives.

[13-1. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the dispensing control board]
When the main control board 1310 receives detection signals from various prize-winning switches, such as the general prize-winning sensors 4020, 4020, the first start-up sensor 4002, the second start-up sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in Figure 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits a prize-winning command to the payout control board to dispense a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls based on these detection signals. This prize-winning command is a command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (a device that communicates with the pachinko machine 1 and drives the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to pay out game balls as loaned balls into the storage trays, the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322) are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in Figure 88(a), the prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number), with command 10H specifying 1 prize ball, command 11H specifying 2 prize balls, ..., and command 1EH specifying 15 prize balls. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to drive and dispense game balls according to the specified number of prize balls.

Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 and the ball dispensing machine (a device that directly dispenses game balls as dispensed balls into storage trays, the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322) are installed adjacent to each other in the game hall, and the pachinko machine 1 and the ball dispensing machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "general machine"), as shown in Figure 88(b), the prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 20H to 2EH. Command 20H specifies one prize ball, command 21H specifies two prize balls, ..., and command 2EH specifies fifteen prize balls. The payout control board 951 controls the dispensing of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 according to this specified number of prize balls.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 88(c), command 30H is provided as a common command for both CR machines and general machines, and this command 30H is specified as a self-check. After sending a command, if the transmitting side does not receive an ACK signal from the receiving side for a predetermined period to confirm receipt of the command, it sends command 30H to check whether or not an ACK signal is received, thereby confirming the connection status. In the case of a CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection status with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to peripheral control boards]
Next, we will explain the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands with a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in Figures 89 and 90, they consist of a status that indicates the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a mode that indicates the variation of the performance with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

The various commands are categorized as follows, as shown in Figures 89 and 90: Special Feature 1 Synchronization Performance Related, Special Feature 2 Synchronization Performance Related, Big Win Related, Power On, Normal Feature Synchronization Performance Related, Normal Electric Performance Related, Notification Display, Status Display, and Others.

[13-2-1. Special Feature 1 Synchronization Performance Related]
The synchronization effects related to Special Feature 1 are based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in Figure 69. As shown in Figure 89, these effects are divided into commands related to the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Figure 69, with names such as Special Feature 1 Synchronization Effects Start, Special Symbol 1 Specification, Special Feature 1 Synchronization Effects End, and Variable State Specification. These various commands are assigned "A*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The Special Symbol 1 Synchronization Performance Start command instructs the start of the Special Symbol Synchronization Performance with the performance pattern specified by the mode; the Special Symbol 1 Specification command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot; the Special Symbol 1 Synchronization Performance End command instructs the end of the Special Symbol 1 Synchronization Performance; and the Variable State Specification command instructs the probability and time-saving state. The probability and time-saving states consist of a low-probability time-saving state, which indicates a low-probability state that is also a time-saving state; a high-probability time-saving state, which indicates a high-probability state that is also a time-saving state; a low-probability non-time-saving state, which indicates a low-probability state that is not a time-saving state; and a high-probability non-time-saving state, which indicates a high-probability state that is not a time-saving state (the low-probability non-time-saving state is set as the normal game state). Here, the high-probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than in the low-probability state (normal game state), and the time-saving state is, for example, a state in which the time for which the normal symbols are displayed by the normal symbol display unit 1402 shown in Figure 10 is shortened compared to the non-time-saving state (normal game state), and the display stops with a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, thereby increasing the number of times the normal lottery result is displayed in the normal lottery described later within a predetermined time compared to the non-time-saving state, and furthermore, the pair of movable pieces shown in Figure 8 are opened and closed. By extending the duration of this action compared to the non-time-saving state (normal game state), the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls into the second starting port 2004 shown in Figure 8 is increased, thereby allowing players to obtain opportunities to draw special symbols without reducing their number of balls. (In other words, compared to the non-time-saving state, the decision of whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces is made more frequently, and when the pair of movable pieces are opened and closed, the duration of this operation is extended, thereby increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of game balls into the second starting port 2004.)

The timing for sending these various commands is as follows: the Special Symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is sent when Special Symbol 1 starts to move; the Special Symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the Special Symbol 1 synchronization effect starts; the Special Symbol 1 synchronization effect end command is sent when the Special Symbol 1 movement time has elapsed (when Special Symbol 1 is confirmed); and the movement state designation command is sent immediately after the Special Symbol win/loss information is designated. These various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

[13-2-2. Special Feature 2 Synchronization Performance Related]
The synchronization effects for Special Feature 2 are based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in Figure 69. As shown in Figure 89, these effects are divided into commands related to the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Figure 69, with the names Special Feature 2 Synchronization Effects Start, Special Symbol 2 Designation, and Special Feature 2 Synchronization Effects End. These various commands are assigned "B*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The Special Symbol 2 Synchronization Performance Start command instructs the start of the Special Symbol Synchronization Performance with the performance pattern specified by the mode. The Special Symbol 2 Specification command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The Special Symbol 2 Synchronization Performance End command instructs the end of the Special Symbol 2 Synchronization Performance.

The timing for sending these various commands is as follows: the command to start the special symbol 2 synchronization effect is sent when the special symbol 2 starts to change; the command to specify the special symbol 2 is sent immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 synchronization effect; and the command to end the special symbol 2 synchronization effect is sent when the special symbol 2 change time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-3. Related to Big Wins]
The "Big Win Related" category, as shown in Figure 89, consists of commands named Big Win Opening, Big Win Entrance 1 Opening Nth Time Display, Big Win Entrance 1 Closing Display, Big Win Entrance 1 Count Display, Big Win Ending, Big Win Symbol Display, Small Win Opening, Small Win Opening Display, Small Win Count Display, and Small Win Ending. Each of these commands is assigned the status "C*H" and the mode "**H" (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) (where "*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The "Big Win Opening Command" instructs the start of the big win opening; the "Big Prize Port 1 Open Nth Time Display Command" instructs the start of the opening of Big Prize Port 1 during rounds 1 to 16 (during or the start of the Nth round of opening of Big Prize Port 2005 of the Start Port Unit 2100, as shown in Figure 8); the "Big Prize Port 1 Closure Display Command" instructs the start of the closure of Big Prize Port 1 between rounds (during or the start of the closure of Big Prize Port 2005 of the Start Port Unit 2100 between rounds); the "Big Prize Port 1 Count Display Command" indicates that the number of game balls has been counted from 0 to 10 (the number of game balls that entered Big Prize Port 2005, as detected by the count sensor 4005, as shown in Figure 69); the "Big Win Ending Command" instructs the start of the big win ending; and the "Big Win Symbol Display Command" instructs the display of big win symbol information.

Furthermore, the minor win opening command instructs the start of the minor win opening; the minor win opening display command instructs the start of minor win opening (during a minor win, the opening or start of opening of the main prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100); the minor win count display command instructs the minor win main prize opening entry animation (an animation that occurs when a game ball that has entered the main prize opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during a minor win); and the minor win ending command instructs the start of the minor win ending.

The timing for sending these various commands is as follows: The jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening; the command to display the Nth time the big prize slot 1 is open is sent when the big prize slot 1 is opened in rounds 1 to 16 (when the big prize slot 2005 of the start gate unit 2100 is opened for the Nth round); and the command to display the closing of the big prize slot 1 is sent when the big prize slot 1 is closed (when the closing of the big prize slot 2005 of the start gate unit 2100 begins). The count display command is transmitted when the large prize opening 1 is opened and when the count to the large prize opening 1 changes (when the large prize opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 is opened, and when a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005). The jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is transmitted when the large prize opening is opened (when the large prize opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 is opened).

Furthermore, the minor win opening command is sent at the start of the minor win opening; the minor win opening display command is sent when the minor win opens (when the main prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100 opens during a minor win); the minor win count display command is sent when a ball enters the main prize opening during a minor win (when a game ball that has entered the main prize opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during a minor win); and the minor win ending command is sent at the start of the minor win ending. These various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-4. Power on]
The power-on category consists of commands named "Power-on State" and "Power-on Main Control Return Destination," as shown in Figure 89. These various commands are assigned "D*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear animation and the game state. The power-on state command consists of information indicating when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in Figure 70 is operated to perform a RAM clear when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power interruption), information indicating which state (probability and time reduction state) to return to from the low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state, low probability non-time reduction state, and high probability non-time reduction state described above, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine identifies, for example, which copyright it is based on when creating so-called Max type, Middle type, and Sweet type machines, and what kind of game specifications it has (for example, in addition to game specifications where, once a probability change occurs, the state continues until the next jackpot occurs, or game specifications where the number of special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) before a probability change occurs (so-called ST machine)). In other words, the information in the pachinko machine's model code mainly consists of a series code to identify the type of machine (Max type, Middle type, or Sweet type), a copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and a game specification code to identify the game specifications (for example, in addition to game specifications where, once a probability change occurs, the state continues until the next jackpot occurs, or game specifications where the number of special symbol changes is limited before a probability change occurs (ST machine)).

The power-on main control return destination command indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command primarily consists of information indicating the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 shown in Figure 69, and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 also shown in Figure 69.

The power-on status command and the power-on main control restore destination command are transmitted when the main control board is powered on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption, the main control side power-on processing described later is executed, and the power-on status command and the power-on main control restore destination command are transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-5. Related to the synchronized direction of the general plan]
The functions related to the regular symbol synchronization effect are based on detection signals from the gate sensor 4003 shown in Figure 69. As shown in Figure 89, these functions consist of commands related to the regular symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Figure 69, with names such as "start regular symbol synchronization effect,""specify regular symbol,""end regular symbol synchronization effect," and "specify state during variation." These various commands are assigned "E*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The "Normal Symbol Synchronization Performance Start Command" instructs the start of the normal symbol synchronization performance with the performance pattern specified by the mode. The "Normal Symbol Specification Command" specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The "Normal Symbol Synchronization Performance End Command" instructs the end of the normal symbol synchronization performance. The "Variation State Specification Command" specifies the probability and time-saving state. The probability and time-saving states consist of, as described above, a low-probability time-saving state (indicating a low probability state with a time-saving state), a high-probability time-saving state (indicating a high probability state with a time-saving state), a low-probability non-time-saving state (indicating a low probability state without a time-saving state), and a high-probability non-time-saving state (indicating a high probability state without a time-saving state). (The normal game state is set to the low-probability non-time-saving state).

The timing for sending these various commands is as follows: the command to start the normal symbol synchronization effect is sent when the normal symbol 1 starts to change; the command to specify the normal symbol is sent immediately after the normal symbol synchronization effect starts; the command to end the normal symbol synchronization effect is sent when the normal symbol change time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed); and the command to specify the change state is sent immediately after specifying the normal symbol win/loss information. These various commands are actually sent in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-6. Related to standard electric performance effects]
The normal electric payout effects relate to a pair of movable pieces shown in Figure 8, which are opened and closed by the drive of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in Figure 69. As shown in Figure 89, these functions are comprised of commands named "Normal Payout Opening,""Normal Electric Release Display," and "Normal Payout Ending." These various commands are assigned "F*H" as the status and "**H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The "Normal Diagram Opening Command" indicates the start of the normal diagram opening; the "Normal Electricity Release Indication Command" indicates the start of normal electricity release (when the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by the drive of the start port solenoid 2107, or when they are expanding); and the "Normal Diagram Ending Command" indicates the start of the normal diagram ending.

The transmission timing for these various commands is as follows: the normal opening command is transmitted at the start of normal opening; the normal power release indicator command is transmitted at normal power release (when the pair of movable pieces expand in the left and right directions by the drive of the start port solenoid 2107); and the normal ending command is transmitted at the start of normal ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-7. Notification Display]
As shown in Figure 90, the notification display categories consist of commands named "winning abnormality display,""connection abnormality display,""disconnection/short circuit abnormality display,""magnetic detection switch abnormality display,""dooropen," and "door closed." Each of these commands is assigned "6*H" as its status and "**H" as its mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The prize entry abnormality display command instructs the start of prize entry abnormality notification when a game ball enters the large prize entry slot outside of a jackpot (when a game ball enters the large prize entry slot 2005 of the start slot unit 2100 and the count sensor 4005 detects it, even though it is not a jackpot). The connection abnormality display command instructs the start of connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, for example. The disconnection/short circuit abnormality display command instructs the start of disconnection/short circuit abnormality display when there is a disconnection or short circuit in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the first start slot sensor 4002, the second start slot sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command instructs the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in Figure 69.

Furthermore, the door open command, based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 input via the dispensing control board 951 as shown in Figure 70, instructs a door open notification when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4. The door frame close command, based on the detection signal from the same door frame open switch 618, instructs the end of the door open notification when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4. Conversely, the main frame open command, based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main frame open switch 619 input via the dispensing control board 951 as shown in Figure 70, instructs a main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. The main frame close command, based on the detection signal from the same main frame open switch 619, instructs the end of the main frame open notification when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2.

The timing for sending these various commands is as follows: The prize entry abnormality display command is sent when a prize is entered into the big prize slot other than during a big win (when the condition device is activated); the connection abnormality display command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when a command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951; the open circuit/short circuit abnormality display command is sent when any of the first start port sensor 4002, second start port sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, etc., is open circuit or short circuit; and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is sent when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. In addition, the door open command is sent when door open is detected (when the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618); and the door frame closed command is sent when door closed is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main frame open command is sent when the main frame open state is detected (based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2), and the main frame close command is sent when the main frame closed state is detected (based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 619, when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2). These commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-8. Status Display]
As shown in Figure 90, the status display is divided into three categories: Frame Status 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), Error Clear Navigation command (corresponding to the error clear command), and Frame Status 2 command. Each of these commands is assigned "7*H" as its status and "**H" as its mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame status 2 command are each commands with a memory capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951. A detailed explanation of these will be provided later. When the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a receives the frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, it sets "7*H" as the status, as shown in Figure 90, and sets the received command as the mode. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds the additional information "7*H" to these received commands, thereby formatting them into commands with a memory capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted Frame State 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the Frame State changes, and during error clearing navigation. The error clearing navigation command is sent during error clearing navigation. The Frame State 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the Frame State changes. These formatted Frame State 1, Error Clearing Navigation, and Frame State 2 commands are actually sent during the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 of the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-9. Test-related]
The test-related section consists of various commands named "test," as shown in Figure 90. These test commands are assigned the status "8*H" and the mode "**H" (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) (the "*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs the peripheral control board 1510 to perform various tests (for example, tests on various boards such as the peripheral control unit 1511, liquid crystal display control unit 1512, lamp drive board 4170, motor drive board 4180, and frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in Figure 72).

The test command is sent when the main control board power is turned on and when the RAM is cleared, as well as at other times. Specifically, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when power is restored from a power outage or momentary interruption, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is executed, and the test command is sent in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-10. Others]
Other categories, as shown in Figure 90, consist of commands named "Starting slot entry,""Shortened variation operation end specification,""High probability end specification,""Special symbol 1 memory,""Special symbol 2 memory,""Normal symbol memory,""Special symbol 1 memory pre-read effect," and "Special symbol 2 memory pre-read effect." Each of these commands is assigned "9*H" as its status and "**H" as its mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number, which is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The Start-Up Gate Prize Command instructs the start of the start-up gate prize animation, specifically the start of the animation when a game ball enters the first start-up gate 2002 based on a detection signal from the first start-up gate sensor 4002, and the start of the animation when a game ball enters the second start-up gate 2004 based on a detection signal from the second start-up gate sensor 4004. The Variable Shortening Operation End Designation Command instructs a state transition from the Variable Shortening Operation state to the Variable Shortening Non-Operation state, and also indicates a high probability end. The specified command instructs a state transition from a high probability state to a low probability state, the Special Symbol 1 memory command conveys 0 to 4 Special Symbol 1 reserves (the number of balls that have entered the first start port 2002 shown in Figure 8 and have not yet been used to display the variation of the special symbol on the first Special Symbol Display 1403 of the function display unit 1400), and the Special Symbol 2 memory command conveys 0 to 4 Special Symbol 2 reserves (the number of balls that have entered the second start port 2004 shown in Figure 8 and have not yet been used to display the variation of the special symbol on the second Special Symbol Display 1403 of the function display unit 1400). The special symbol display unit 1405 communicates the number of balls (reserved) that have not yet been used for displaying the variation of the special symbol. The normal symbol memory command communicates 0 to 4 reserved normal symbol 1 balls (the number of balls (reserved) that have not yet been used for displaying the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after the game balls have passed through the gate section 2003 shown in Figure 8). The special symbol 1 memory pre-read performance command communicates that the reserved special symbol 1 is specially displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The command for the special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect instructs the start of a pre-reading effect that announces a preview of the display result by the first special symbol display unit 1403 based on the special symbol 1 hold, before it is used for displaying the special symbol variation. The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command instructs the start of a pre-reading effect that announces a preview of the display result by the second special symbol display unit 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold, before it is used for displaying the special symbol variation on the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400, before it is used for displaying the special symbol variation.

The timing for transmitting these various commands is as follows: The start-up slot entry command is transmitted primarily by voice from the lower speaker 921 shown in Figure 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in Figure 2 when a game ball enters the start-up slot (when a game ball enters the first start-up slot 2002 based on a detection signal from the first start-up slot sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the second start-up slot 2004 based on a detection signal from the second start-up slot sensor 4004) to notify the player of this fact. The variation shortening operation end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after variation confirmation, when a specified number of variation shortenings have been consumed (after the period of losing has elapsed). The fixed command is sent at the end of the stop period after the high probability rounds have been completed and the variation has been confirmed in the case of "high probability N rounds" (after the period of losing has passed), and the special symbol 1 memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation changes (when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there are still reserved balls that have not yet been used to display the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 1403 of the function display unit 1400, and when more game balls enter the first start port 2002 and the number of reserved balls increases, or when the number of reserved balls is used to display the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the number of reserved balls decreases), and the special symbol The Pattern 2 memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls changes when Special Symbol 2 is activated (when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and there are still reserved balls that have not yet been used to display the variation of the special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and then when more game balls enter the second start port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases, or when the number of reserved balls decreases after being used to display the variation of the special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 1405). The Normal Symbol memory command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls changes when Normal Symbol 1 is activated (when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the Normal Symbol display unit 1 of the function display unit 1400 changes The following commands are transmitted when there are still unused reserved balls in 402 for the display of the regular symbols, and when a game ball passes through gate 2003 and the number of reserved balls increases, or when the number of reserved balls is used for the display of the regular symbols on the regular symbol display unit 1402 and the number of reserved balls decreases. The special symbol 1 memory pre-read performance command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation increases (when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the number of reserved balls increases), and the special symbol 2 memory pre-read performance command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation increases (when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

Incidentally, as mentioned above, the start-up slot entry command is transmitted primarily by voice from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 to notify the player of the start-up slot entry (when a game ball enters the first start-up slot 2002 based on a detection signal from the first start-up slot sensor 4002, or when a game ball enters the second start-up slot 2004 based on a detection signal from the second start-up slot sensor 4004). However, how the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 72 utilizes the start-up slot entry command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to notifying the player by voice from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573, it is also used to monitor for fraudulent activity. In contrast, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up slot entry command and does not notify the player by voice from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the dispensing control board received by the main control board]
Next, we will explain the various commands received by the main control board 1310 from the payout control board 951.

As shown in Figure 91, the various commands from the payout control board 951 are categorized into commands named Frame State 1, Error Clear Navigator, and Frame State 2, with priority set in the order of Frame State 1, Error Clear Navigator, and Frame State 2.

The Frame State 1 command (corresponding to the error command) includes options for: out of bulbs, full, 50 or more in stock, connection error, and CR not connected. For out of bulbs, bit 0 (B0, where "B" represents bit) is set to value 1; for full, bit 1 (B1) is set to value 1; for 50 or more in stock, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1; for connection error, bit 3 (B3) is set to value 1; and for CR not connected, bit 4 (B4) is set to value 1. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 1 command are set to value 1 for B5, value 0 for B6, and value 0 for B7.

The error clearing navigation command (equivalent to the error clearing command) includes options for ball jamming, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. For ball jamming, bit 2 (B2) is set to value 1; for payout detection sensor error, bit 3 (B3) is set to value 1; and for retry error, bit 4 (B4) is set to value 1. Here, "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 shown in Figure 70. "Retry error" indicates that inconsistent payouts of game balls have been repeatedly performed due to the retry operation. Bits (B0), (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error clearing navigation command are set to values 0 for B0, 0 for B1, 0 for B5, 1 for B6, and 0 for B7.

The Frame State 2 command includes a "Ball Removal" option, in which case bit 0 (B0) is set to value 1. Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command are set as follows: B1: value 0, B2: value 0, B3: value 0, B4: value 0, B5: value 1, B6: value 1, and B7: value 0.

The timing of sending these various commands is as follows: the frame status 1 command is sent when power is restored, when the frame status changes, and during error clearing navigation; the error clearing navigation command is sent during error clearing navigation; and the frame status 2 command is sent when power is restored and when the frame status changes. These various commands are actually sent during the command transmission process in step S558 of the main processing of the payout control unit during the power-on processing of the payout control unit, which will be described later.

[14. Various control processes of the main control board]
Next, the various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 69, in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1, will be explained with reference to Figures 92 to 94. Figure 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Figure 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on process in Figure 92, and Figure 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. First, the various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process.

[14-1. Various Random Numbers]
The various random numbers used in game control include a random number for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, a random number for determining whether or not to generate a reach (missed reach) when a jackpot game state is not generated, a random number for determining the variation display pattern of the special symbols that are displayed by the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405 as shown in Figure 69, and a random number for determining the variation display pattern of the special symbols that are displayed when a jackpot game state is generated. Random numbers for determining the winning symbols derived and displayed by the device 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are provided, as are random numbers for determining the initial value of the winning symbols derived and displayed by the device 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, random numbers for determining the initial value of the winning symbols derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when a minor win game state is generated, and random numbers for determining the initial value of the minor win symbols are provided. In addition to these random numbers, there are also random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece shown in Figure 8, random numbers for determining the initial value of the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for determining the random number for which the random number is displayed on the random number display unit 1402 shown in Figure 69.

Of the various random numbers used in this game control system, the random number used for determining jackpots is updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the random number used for determining a jackpot is directly updated by hardware using a main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, which is built into the main control MPU 1310a shown in Figure 69. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first uses a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value, and then rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in Figure 77). Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value of 1 within the predetermined numerical range and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control's built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs this high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining the value as the random number for determining the jackpot.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number used for determining whether a symbol wins is normal is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. This range from the minimum to the maximum value is incremented by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process (described later) occurs. This counter counts up from the random number used to determine the initial value for normal symbol win determination towards the maximum value, and then from the minimum value towards the random number used to determine the initial value for normal symbol win determination. Once the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum to the maximum value of the random number used to determine whether a symbol wins is normal, the random number used to determine the initial value for normal symbol win determination is updated. This method of updating the counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The random number used to determine the initial value for normal symbol win determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value of 1 from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number used to determine whether a symbol wins is normal.

In this embodiment, if the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in Figure 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or if the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in Figure 69, which is treated as a numerical value during the main control side power-on processing described later, does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (power-off), the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, and the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol wins is set by the main control MPU 1310a shown in Figure 69 retrieving an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining normal symbol wins based on this retrieved ID code, and then executing an initial value derivation process to set this derived fixed value. In other words, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol wins is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. Thus, the value set for the initial random number used to determine the winning combination is derived using an ID code. This prevents analysis through a two-stage security measure: firstly, the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a stores the ID code in a non-volatile RAM built into the MPU 1310a, preventing the ID code from being overwritten even with external devices; and secondly, when the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared, the initial value derivation process is executed, deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code.

Here, we will explain the advantages of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using this extracted ID code as a random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol wins. For example, even if someone trying to illegally obtain game balls dispensed as prize balls somehow obtains and disassembles the game board 5, illegally obtains the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins matches the normal symbol win determination value, that ID code will be completely different from the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' of other game boards 5' because it has a unique code attached to identify the individual. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing when the value of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins matches the normal symbol win determination value will also be completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1'. Therefore, even if a momentary power outage is generated at predetermined intervals determined by the disassembly and analysis, and game balls are passed through the gate section 2003 shown in Figure 8 at those predetermined intervals, it is not possible to create a game state in which the movable piece shown in Figure 8 can be opened and closed, allowing game balls to be received into the second start opening 2004.

[14-2. Processing when the main control side power is turned on]
First, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address by default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address pushed onto the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) currently in use, or the address pushed onto the stack to temporarily store the return address of the main routine when a subroutine finishes and returns to the main routine. The stack pointer advances each time something is pushed onto the stack.

The main control program described above then performs the power-on processing on the main control side, as shown in Figures 92 and 93, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Once this power-on processing on the main control side begins, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, sets the RAM access permission (step S10). This setting of RAM access permission allows updates to be performed on the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and startup setting of the built-in main control WDT1310af shown in Figure 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value for the built-in main control WDT1310af, which monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU1310a is operating normally, the timer setting value is set in the watchdock timer control register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU1310a, and the built-in main control WDT1310af is started, and timing begins until the main control MPU1310a is reset. When the built-in main control WDT1310af starts up, timing begins using the built-in main control WDT1310af. If the timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU1310a before the time being measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the built-in main control WDT1310af will forcibly reset the main control MPU1310a. Conversely, when the built-in main control WDT1310af starts up and timing begins, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time being measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the timing by the built-in main control WDT1310af is cleared and timing starts again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timing set by the built-in main control WDT1310af until the time set by the timer value is reached, and then restarting the timing, it is possible to monitor whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU1310a is functioning correctly.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power outage clearing process (step S14). In this power outage clearing process, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, shown in Figure 78, first begins outputting a power outage clearing signal. This power outage monitoring circuit 1310e consists of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21 compares the voltage between +24V and the reference voltage, or between +12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. If no power outage or momentary power interruption occurs, the logic of this comparison result becomes HIG and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Conversely, if a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power clearing process, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e first starts outputting a power outage clear signal, which in turn starts outputting the power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22. This power outage clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the reset-function-equipped main control output circuit 1310ca, with its logic set to LOW, from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22. Until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal, the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22, is inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, the output terminal, allowing the signal from the 1Q terminal to be monitored.

Next, in the power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time of power-on until it reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power outage or momentary power interruption (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily suspended) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, from the time of power-on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process to wait after power-on until the voltage becomes higher than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). The determination of whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is made based on the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 described above, as the power outage warning signal.

If, after power-on, the voltage stabilizes above the power outage warning voltage, but no power outage warning signal is received, the main control program stops outputting a power outage clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Here, the power outage clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the reset-function-equipped main control output circuit 1310ca, with its logic set to HI from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to a latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state where its preset terminal, PR terminal, has its logic set to LOW, it outputs a power outage warning signal from its output terminal, 1Q terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program prepares the system to perform a RAM clear process, which initializes the built-in RAM (game memory unit) of the main control unit for a predetermined period of time from the time of power-on (game-side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in Figure 70 has been operated (step S16). This determination is made by the main control program based on whether an error clear navigation command (first error clear command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 has been input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 has not been operated if the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, as it does not instruct the system to perform a RAM clear. Conversely, if the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it determines that the system has been operated as it instructs the system to perform a RAM clear.

In step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20). That is, the main control program makes it possible to perform a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM (i.e., the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit)) built into the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined period of time from the time the power is turned on (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase game information related to the game, such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls, stored in the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG, set in steps S18 and S20, is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time processing (step S22). During this wait time processing, it waits until the system that controls the drawing of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460, as shown in Figure 72, by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510, starts up (boots). In this embodiment, a waiting time (boot timer) of 2.5 seconds (s) is set until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when there is a power outage or momentary power interruption, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. If the determination in step S24 indicates that a power outage warning signal has been input, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af that was started in step S12, and the timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and it becomes impossible to start timing again, thus forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Subsequently, the main control program, under the control of the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a, performs this main control side power-on processing again. A detailed explanation of why the determination in step S24 follows the wait time processing in step S22 will be provided later.

If no power outage warning signal is received in step S24, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is valued at 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 when game information is erased and to 0 when game information is not erased. If the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is valued at 0 in step S26, that is, when game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as numerical values and summing them up.

Following step S28, the main control program determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is valued at 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is a flag indicating whether game backup information, such as game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, was stored in the main control's built-in RAM during the main control side power-off processing described later. It is set to value 1 when the main control side power-off processing is completed successfully, and to value 0 when the main control side power-off processing is not completed successfully. A detailed explanation of the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection during the inspection process of the main control board 1310's manufacturing line, will be provided later.

In step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is valued at 1, meaning the main control power outage processing has been successfully completed, the main control program sets the working area of the main control's built-in RAM as the power restoration state (step S34). This setting involves reading the power restoration information from the ROM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control's built-in ROM) and setting this power restoration information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM. This allows the program to read game information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this game information in a predetermined storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state of power being turned on after a power outage, but also the state after power is restored following a power outage or momentary interruption, and the state after the main control board 1310 is irradiated with high-frequency waves from an illegal means (for example, a high-frequency output device hidden in the sleeve of an illegal perpetrator), causing the main control MPU 1310a to reset and then recover.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various subsequent processes will modify game information, checksum values (sum values), etc. Therefore, if the main control power-off process described later does not complete successfully and the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to a value of 1, the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared, as described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S26 is not valued as 0 (i.e., valued as 1), that is, when game information is to be erased, or if the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30, or if the backup flag BK-FLG in step S32 is not valued as 1 (i.e., valued as 0), that is, when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control program clears the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of a detection signal associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program does this by writing the value 0 to the main control's built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control's built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Furthermore, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates a RAM clear and game information is erased, when the SAM value does not match, or when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code pre-stored in its non-volatile RAM. Based on this retrieved ID code, it performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol win, and sets this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value of the normal symbol win determination, as described above.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the working area of the main control's built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting determines the interrupt period when the main control-side timer interrupt processing, described later, occurs. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs initial serial communication setup (step S44). Here, it sets the communication speed and parity settings in the transmit serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receive channel and transmit channel) for the dispensing control board 951, and the serial input/output ports (receive channel and transmit channel) for the peripheral control board 1510, as well as setting the transmit circuit initialization and transmit permission in the transmit serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control program performs the initialization settings for the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the test signal output port (not shown) used by the gaming machine testing facility to output various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) upon power-on.

Following step S46, the main control program sets up the activation of the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in Figure 69 (step S48). Here, it sets up the system to latch and acquire random numbers from the hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU 1310a in order to update the random numbers used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, among the various random numbers related to the game, using hardware. It also sets the activation of the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an in the hardware random number setting register. With these settings, when the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an is activated, it rapidly extracts other values within a predetermined numerical range without repetition based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in Figure 77). Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value of 1 within the predetermined numerical range and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without repetition based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a obtains a random number (random value) from the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an. The random number (random value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an when this latch signal is input is obtained from the hardware random number latch register built into the main control's built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets this acquired random number as the random number used for determining the jackpot.

Following step S48, the main control program sets the command to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power restoration information set in the main control's built-in RAM's work area in step S34, the program creates a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command, as shown in Figure 89, to indicate that the power has been turned on (restored). These commands are stored as transmission information in the main control's built-in RAM's transmission information storage area. In some cases, the main control's built-in RAM's transmission information storage area may also contain various commands corresponding to game information, which are read from the game backup information during the main control's built-in RAM work area setup in step S34. In such cases, the transmission of the various commands corresponding to the game information is completed first, followed by the transmission of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command. These commands are transmitted during the main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed explanation of the setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 will be provided later.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt enablement settings (step S52). This setting causes the main control timer interrupt processing, described later, to be repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, i.e., every 4ms.

Following step S52, the main control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, that is, when the main control side main processing has started, restricts the execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the receipt of an error clearing navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program, using the concept of time sharing, executes the RAM clear process triggered by the input of an error clearing navigation command for a predetermined time from power-on as described above (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the elapsed time, restricts the execution of the RAM clear process even if the error clearing navigation command is input (game control side normal operation control means), treating the detection signal input in conjunction with the operation of the operation switch 954 as a clearing switch to clear the error notification associated with the error that occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error clearing unit), which was originally intended to clear errors that occurred during the payout operation, can instead function for a predetermined period of time from power-on as an operation unit to perform a RAM clear process to initiate the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM, which will be described later as the payout storage unit), or, after the predetermined period has elapsed, as an operation unit to clear errors that occurred during the payout operation of the game balls.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when there is a power outage or momentary power interruption, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

If no power outage warning signal is received in step S54, the main control program performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). This non-win/lose random number update process updates the random numbers used for reach determination, the random numbers used for the variable display pattern, the random numbers used for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbols, and the random numbers used for determining the initial value of the minor jackpot symbols, as described above. In this way, the non-win/lose random number update process updates random numbers that are not related to win/lose determination (jackpot determination) using software. Note that the random numbers used for determining the normal symbol win, the random numbers used for determining the initial value of the normal symbol win, and the random numbers used for the normal symbol variable display pattern, as described above, are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

Following step S56, the program returns to step S54. The main control program determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been received. If no such signal is received, it performs a non-winning/losing random number update process in step S56, and then repeats steps S54 through S56. This process from steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main control side main process."

On the other hand, when a power outage warning signal is received in step S54, the main control program disables interrupts (step S58). This setting prevents the main control timer interrupt processing described later, preventing writing to the main control's built-in RAM and protecting against overwriting of game information.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the one performed in step S14, where the power outage clear signal was initiated, is performed. This allows the main control program to release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program stops the drive signals output to the start solenoid 2107, attacker solenoid 2108, first special symbol indicator 1403, second special symbol indicator 1405, first special reserved number indicator 1404, second special reserved number indicator 1406, normal symbol indicator 1402, normal symbol memory indicator 1188, status indicator 1401, round indicator 1407, etc., as shown in Figure 69 (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG values, as numerical values and summing them up.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets a RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition prevents access to the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit), thereby preventing updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game memory unit).

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control's built-in WDT 1310af, which was activated in step S12. This clears the timing performed by the main control's built-in WDT 1310af, preventing it from restarting timing. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT 1310af. Subsequently, the main control program, under the control of the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a, performs this main control power-on processing again. The processing from steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as the "main control power-off processing."

Pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) resets in the event of a power outage or momentary power interruption, and then performs the power-on processing on the main control side upon restoration of power.

Furthermore, in step S30, the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is checked to determine if it is correct, and then in step S32, it is checked to determine if the main control's power-off process was completed successfully. In this way, the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is checked twice to determine whether or not it was stored through fraudulent activity.

Here, we will explain the point that the determination of whether or not a power outage warning signal is present in step S24 is performed following the wait time processing in step S22. First, we will explain the problems that arise when the determination of whether or not a power outage warning signal is present in step S24 is not performed; that is, when the determination of the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is performed following the wait time processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is configured such that when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko machine is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Figure 77 is applied as +5V for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) from the time the power outage or momentary interruption occurs. In other words, even when the power supply from the pachinko machine is cut off due to a momentary interruption or power outage, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, allowing the main control side power outage processing to be completed within approximately 7 ms after the power supply from the pachinko machine is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power outage processing can be reliably completed when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the pachinko machine is cut off while a player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is running.

However, in an extremely rare phenomenon, during the wait time waiting process in step S22 when power is restored, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side performance display device 1600 and the door frame side performance display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in Figure 72, starts timing a waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until it starts up (boots). If a momentary power outage or blackout occurs just before this waiting time is reached, although the charge stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, within a period of approximately 7ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt enable setting is performed in step S52. As a result, the main control side timer interrupt processing, described later, is performed, and even if the contents of the main control's built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing. Therefore, the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control's power-on processing starts again upon power restoration.

Consequently, when power is restored, the main control power-on process begins, and without any momentary power outage or blackout, the wait time processing in step S22 is completed. Then, in step S30, the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM in step S28 is compared with the value stored in the main control's built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout occurred. Since the checksum values will not match, the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even without an explicit indication from a hall employee that the operation switch 954 should be operated to clear the RAM, the information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared).

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time processing in step S22, a process is provided as step 24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination in step S24, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af that was started in step S12, and the timing by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and it is no longer possible to start timing again, thereby forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time processing in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a, as described above. Therefore, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process called step 24 is provided to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when the determination in step S24 determines that the power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process in step S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24. As long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated, which forces the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to be reset and the main control board 1310 to be restarted. As a result, the game cannot proceed, the game information cannot be updated, and the checksum calculation result does not change. As a result, when the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310 restarts, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the value of the checksum calculated and stored in step S64. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control's built-in RAM immediately before the power outage or interruption occurs is not initialized. Thus, when power is restored, the game information immediately before the power outage or interruption occurs is prevented from being initialized.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process is provided as step 24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input (i.e., if it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 will not be cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process in step S22), even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control board 1310a's main control MPU 1310a is in progress, the power supply to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Figure 77, and the game information due to the progress of the game is maintained. Because the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a can complete the backup processing for storing the information, which is performed in steps S58 to S68, and the main control side power outage processing, which is performed in an infinite loop, when the main control MPU 1310a restarts, it will determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup processing (i.e., the value of the checksum calculated and stored in step S64). Therefore, the game information stored in the main control's built-in RAM immediately before the power outage or interruption occurs will not be initialized. In other words, the game information will be restored to what it was immediately before the power outage or interruption occurred, and the main control board 1310 can be started up.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time processing in step S22, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT 1310af, allowing the main control side power outage processing to start again without updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM at all. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time processing in step S22, the main control side power outage processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period during momentary power outage or blackout" of approximately 7 ms by hardware, as before. In other words, in this embodiment, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs while the main control side power-on processing is being performed during power restoration, and the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Figure 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) from the time the blackout or momentary power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the approximately 7 ms "momentary power outage or power supply securing period" provided by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 hardware, then step 24 immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22... The system then determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the system returns to the determination in step S24. As long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated. This sets the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af that was activated in step S12. This clears the timing performed by the main control built-in WDT 1310af and prevents it from starting timing again, thus forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. This system employs a mechanism where the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT 1310af via software, thereby preventing progress to steps after step S24 (specifically, the control flow where interrupt initial setup is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control-side timer interrupt processing described later). This prevents the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) from being updated. In this way, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power from the pachinko machine equipment is cut off, the system is configured in two parts: one part handled by software to ensure that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) remain completely unchanged, and another part handled by hardware to ensure that the main control-side power outage processing is completed reliably and the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) remain completely unchanged. This configuration ensures that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are reliably prevented from being altered.

Next, we will explain how the reservation setting of commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in Figure 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in order to convey that the power has been turned on (power restored). This power-on main control return destination command mainly consists of information that indicates the driving state of the start solenoid 2107 and information that indicates the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in Figure 69, as described above. This section will first explain the problems that arise when the power-on main control return command does not include information indicating the driving state of the starter solenoid 2107 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in Figure 69. In other words, the problems that arise when the power-on main control return command does not have a scheduled command setting for when the power is turned on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is displaying a screen showing the jackpot game state (for example, a screen showing the jackpot game animation) on the display area of the game board-side animation display device 1600 shown in Figure 8, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs while the main control board 1310 is driving the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the large prize slot 2005 shown in Figure 8 by the opening/closing member 2107, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 will be restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout occurred, based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM during the setting of the work area of the main control's built-in RAM in step S34. This will cause the attacker solenoid 2108 to start driving, and the large prize slot 2005 will transition from being closed by the opening/closing member 2107 to being open.

However, in the event of a momentary power outage or blackout, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover upon power restoration. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 upon power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a game state and a jackpot game state is generated, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover by displaying the screen on the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 upon power restoration, but it cannot display which round of the jackpot game state is currently in. In other words, even if, for example, a game ball enters the large prize slot 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in Figure 69, and the main control board 1310 transmits a large prize slot 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 indicating the number of game balls that entered the large prize slot 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives this command, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of game balls that entered the large prize slot 2005 on the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state, but it cannot display which round of the jackpot game state (i.e., which round it is) at all.

In this situation, for example, when the fourth round (the fourth time) of a jackpot game ends, the main control board 1310 sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 indicating that the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 should be stopped and the jackpot opening 2005 should transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member 2107 (i.e., the start of the closure of the jackpot opening 2005 between rounds at the start gate unit 2100). When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (the fifth time) of a jackpot game, it sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 indicating that the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 should be started and the jackpot opening 2005 should transition from an open state to an open state by the opening/closing member 2107 (i.e., the start of the opening of the jackpot opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to display the screen indicating the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600.

Furthermore, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is displaying a screen on the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 indicating that the game state is advantageous to the player, with the game ball ready to be received into the second start port 2004 (for example, a screen indicating that the movable pieces are expanded), and the main control board 1310 is driving the start port solenoid 2107 to expand the pair of movable pieces shown in Figure 8 in the left-right direction, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310, based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM in step S34, is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout. This causes the start port solenoid 2107 to start driving, transitioning the pair of movable pieces from a nearly vertical position to a state where they are expanded in the left-right direction.

However, in the event of a momentary power outage or blackout, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover upon power restoration. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 upon power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a game state where game balls can be accepted into the second start port 2004, creating a game state that is advantageous to the player, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is restored afterward, even if the peripheral control board 1510 can resume operation by displaying a screen in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 that indicates that the game state is in a game state where game balls can be accepted into the second start port 2004, creating a game state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, players seated in front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the momentary power outage or blackout and forget that, upon power restoration, the machine was in a state where game balls could be received into the second start port 2004, just before the outage or blackout occurred. In such cases, even though the machine has returned to a state where game balls can be received into the second start port 2004, the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 does not show a screen instructing the player to play (i.e., a screen instructing the player to insert game balls into the second start port 2004), leading to the problem that players are unsure of what to do.

Thus, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem in that the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, players seated in front of the pachinko machine might mistakenly believe the machine was broken when a momentary power outage or blackout occurred and then power was restored, as the machine's system appeared to freeze.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including not only power-on but also power restoration after a power outage or momentary interruption), in order to transmit a power-on status command and a power-on main control restore destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command and the power-on main control restore destination command, which are categorized as power-on as shown in Figure 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted in the main control-side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs during the 4th round of the jackpot game state and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 will initiate the operation of the attacker solenoid 2108 as the return destination, informing the peripheral control board 1510 that the jackpot opening 2005 will transition from a closed state to an open state by the opening/closing member 2107. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen in the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600 that identifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (i.e., a screen that shows which round it is), but it can display a screen that indicates that it is in the jackpot game state and that the attacker solenoid 2108 has started to drive and the large prize slot 2005 is open by the opening/closing member 2107 (for example, "It's a jackpot. The large prize slot is open. Insert the game ball into the large prize slot"). A message such as "Please play the game." is displayed on the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, instructing the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play by inserting game balls into the large prize slot 2005 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above example, when the game state is such that game balls can be received into the second start slot 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 will return to the following state. The peripheral control board 1510 then displays a screen on the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 indicating that the start port solenoid 2107 has been driven and the pair of movable pieces have been expanded in the left and right directions (for example, a screen that conveys the message to the player, "The movable pieces are being expanded. Please play the game by inserting the game ball into the lower start port."), instructing the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to insert the game ball into the second start port 2004 after power is restored. This allows the main control board 1310 to precisely instruct the peripheral control board 1510 on its recovery destination when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored. Therefore, the game can be quickly restored to the state it was in immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout after power is restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, the player seated in front of the pachinko machine may not mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine has malfunctioned because the system appears to be frozen.

Next, we will explain the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the judgment in step S30 in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the backup processing described above, which consists of the processing in steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power-off processing consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, the checksum values will not match in the comparison judgment in step S30, and the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM will inevitably be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the command to be sent when the power is turned on is reserved in step S50, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are categorized as power-on as shown in Figure 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. This results in only these two commands being stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Then, in the main control-side timer interrupt processing described later, the power-on status command is sent first, followed by the power-on main control return destination command. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the power-on status command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as mentioned above, the power-on status command consists of information indicating when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in Figure 70 is operated to perform a RAM clear when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), information indicating which state (probability and time reduction state) to return to from the low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state, low probability non-time reduction state, and high probability non-time reduction state, and information indicating the pachinko machine model code. Here, we will explain the problems that arise when the power-on status command does not include information indicating the pachinko machine model code.

As mentioned above, the model code for a pachinko machine (more precisely, the main control board 1310) allows for the identification of which copyrighted work it is based on, and what kind of game specifications it has (for example, in addition to game specifications where, once a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, there are also game specifications where the number of special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) before a probability change occurs (a so-called ST machine)).

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, when producing the main control board 1310, there are cases where main control boards 1310 for multiple types of copyrighted works are mixed together.
As a result, workers on the manufacturing line may not know which of the copyrights for multiple works (for example, the copyrights for movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F) the main control board 1310 is flowing down the manufacturing line for, or they may mistakenly believe that the main control board 1310 is flowing down the manufacturing line for another copyright (for example, the copyright for manga F) when it is actually flowing down the manufacturing line for one copyright (for example, the copyright for movie D). Therefore, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer of pachinko machines 1, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of copyrighted works are mixed together, the workers on the production line cannot confirm which copyrighted work the main control board 1310 manufactured on the production line belongs to. Furthermore, even for the same copyrighted work, they cannot confirm which machine type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) or what kind of game specifications (a game specification in which, once a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or an ST machine). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer of pachinko machines 1, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of copyrighted works are mixed together, the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of copyrighted works will remain mixed together and be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes installed a main control board 1310 that did not correspond to the game board 5 in relation to the copyright of the work. As a result, this led to a problem of reduced production efficiency of the game boards 5.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 powers on (including not only power-on but also power restoration after a power outage or momentary interruption), in order to send a power-on status command containing information indicating the pachinko machine's model code to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command, as shown in Figure 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted in the main control-side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of the manufacturing line, the workers on the production line of the Pachinko machine 1 can power on the main control board 1310, and the inspection device will, based on the information indicating the model code of the Pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, configure the information indicating the model code of the Pachinko machine, which consists of a series code to identify which of the above-mentioned Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type is the model type, a copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and game specifications (for example, if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs). In addition to the game specifications, a game specification code is used to identify game specifications (such as ST machines) in which probability fluctuations occur with a limited number of special symbol variations. By visually inspecting the detailed machine information displayed on the inspection monitor based on this code, it is possible to determine which copyright the main control board 1310 belongs to. Furthermore, even for the same copyright, it is possible to determine which machine type it is (max type, middle type, or sweet type) and what kind of game specifications it has (such as game specifications where, once a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or an ST machine). This allows the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 to accurately identify the model type, copyright, and game specifications of each main control board 1310 by visually inspecting the inspection monitor, even if multiple main control boards 1310 for different copyrighted works are mixed together on the manufacturing line. This enables them to separate the main control boards 1310 according to their copyright and send them to the subsequent game board assembly line. The workers on the game board assembly line can then reliably install the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5, preventing a decrease in production efficiency caused by installing a main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5. Therefore, this contributes to improving the production efficiency of the game boards 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt processing is repeated at the interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figures 92 and 93.

When the main control timer interrupt processing begins, the main control board 1310, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, performs a register bank switch as shown in Figure 94 (step S100). The main control MPU 1310a's general-purpose memory elements (general-purpose registers) have two register banks: a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing during the main control power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt processing routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt processing routine, a register bank switch occurs from the first register bank, which is used in the main control main processing during the main control power-on processing, to the second register bank. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack when the main control timer interrupt processing routine begins.

Following step S100, the main control program performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). This timer subtraction process manages time for various purposes, including the time during which the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process described later, the time during which the normal symbol indicator 1402 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric mechanism control process described later, and the ACK signal input determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal has been input, indicating that the payout control board 951 has successfully received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). Specifically, when the variation time of the variable display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, each time this timer subtraction process is performed, 4 ms is subtracted from the variation time, and the variation time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured when the result of this subtraction becomes 0.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input detection time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input detection time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input detection time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. These various times and the ACK signal input detection time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program detects, for example, the following: detection signals from the general prize slot sensors 4020, 4020 shown in Figure 69 that detect game balls that have entered the general prize slots 2001, 2201 shown in Figure 8; detection signals from the count sensor 4005 shown in Figure 69 that detect game balls that have entered the large prize slot 2005 shown in Figure 8; detection signals from the first start slot sensor 4002 shown in Figure 69 that detect game balls that have entered the first start slot 2002 shown in Figure 8; and detection signals from the second start slot 2004 shown in Figure 8. The system reads the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in Figure 69, the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in Figure 69 that detects game balls that have passed through the gate section 2003 shown in Figure 8, the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in Figure 69 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, and the payout control board 951 which indicates that the payout control board 951 has successfully received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later, and stores these as input information in the input information storage area. Additionally, when the system reads the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects game balls that have entered the first start port 2002, and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects game balls that have entered the second start port 2004, the system stores the corresponding start port prize command, categorized as "other" as shown in Figure 90, as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In other words, when a detection signal is received from the first start port sensor 4002, the corresponding start port entry command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. Similarly, when a detection signal is received from the second start port sensor 4004, the corresponding start port entry command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general prize slot sensors 4020, 4020 that detect game balls that enter the general prize slots 2001, 2201, the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that enter the large prize slot 2005, the detection signal from the first start slot sensor 4002 that detects game balls that enter the first start slot 2002, the detection signal from the second start slot sensor 4004 that detects game balls that enter the second start slot 2004, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects game balls that pass through the gate section 2003 are read first as the first reading when this switch input processing is started, and then read again as the second reading after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. Then, the results read in this second reading are compared with the results read in the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any results that are the same among these comparison results. For results that are not identical, the data is read a third time, and the result of this third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is then determined again whether any of these results are identical. For results that are not identical, the data is read a fourth time, and the result of this fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is then determined again whether any of these results are identical. For results that are not identical, it is treated as if no game ball entered the game.

Thus, in the switch input processing, the main control program performs two sets of double readings: a double reading comparing the detection signals from the general prize slot sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first start slot sensor 4002, the second start slot sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 over the first to third readings, and another double reading comparing them over the second to fourth readings. This avoids false detections due to chattering, noise, and other factors, thereby increasing the reliability of the detection signals from the general prize slot sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first start slot sensor 4002, the second start slot sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003.

Following step S104, the main control program performs a win/loss random number update process (step S106). In this win/loss random number update process, the random numbers for the jackpot symbols and the random numbers for the minor jackpot symbols, as described above, are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial values of the jackpot symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values of the minor jackpot symbols, which are updated in the non-win/loss random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in Figure 93, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial values of the jackpot symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values of the minor jackpot symbols are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further increase their randomness. In contrast, since the random numbers for the jackpot symbols and the random numbers for the minor jackpot symbols are random numbers related to the win/loss determination (jackpot determination), their respective counters are incremented only each time this win/loss random number update process is performed. Furthermore, the random numbers used for determining whether a regular symbol wins, and the random numbers used to determine the initial value for determining whether a regular symbol wins, are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number used for determining whether a regular symbol wins is, as described above, an initial value update type counter. It is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum to the maximum value, and this range from minimum to maximum is incremented by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is executed. The counter counts up from the initial random number used to determine whether a regular symbol wins towards the maximum value, and then from the minimum value towards the initial random number used to determine whether a regular symbol wins. Once the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum to the maximum value of the random number used to determine whether a regular symbol wins, the initial random number used to determine whether a jackpot is determined is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The initial random number used to determine whether a regular symbol wins towards the maximum value can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that selects a value of 1 from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number used to determine whether a regular symbol wins.

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the initial values of the jackpot symbols and the minor jackpot symbols are updated in the non-win/lose random number update process at step S56 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in Figure 93, and in the win/lose random number update process at step S106 of the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. However, if the processing time of this routine becomes inconsistent each time an interrupt timer occurs, and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs, resulting in a random number of executions of the non-win/lose random number update process at step S56, then the random numbers for determining the initial values of the jackpot symbols and the minor jackpot symbols may be updated only at the non-win/lose random number update process at step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the program reads input information from the input information storage area described above and creates a prize ball command as shown in Figure 88 for dispensing game balls based on this input information. If the number of game balls to be dispensed as prize balls reaches 10, the program sets the output of the main prize ball count information output signal to indicate this and stores it in the output information storage area as output information. The program also creates a self-check command as shown in Figure 88 to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 951. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then transmitted to the dispensing control board 951 as main dispensing serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize slot 2005 shown in Figure 8, a prize ball command is created to dispense 15 prize balls. At the same time, since the number of game balls to be dispensed as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball count information output signal is set to indicate this, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. The prize ball command is then sent to the payout control board 951. If the payout control board 951 does not receive a payout ACK signal within a predetermined time to indicate that it has successfully received this prize ball command, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 and sent to the payout control board 951. Furthermore, when creating a prize ball command to dispense 15 balls as prize balls, if the number of game balls to be dispensed as prize balls exceeds 10, the number of balls exceeding 10 will be added to the number of balls that will be dispensed as prize balls in the next prize ball control process. The input information will be read from the aforementioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls to be dispensed as prize balls will be added. When the number of game balls reaches this added number, the output of the main prize ball count information output signal will be set to indicate this, and the output information will be stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). On the dispensing control board 951, the dispensing control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, frame state 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame state 2 command) which are categorized into the status displays shown in Figure 91. On the other hand, as will be described later, the dispensing control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the dispensing operation, or outputs an error clear navigation command based on the detection signal from the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program successfully receives these various commands as payer serial data, it stores information to inform the payout control board 951 of this fact as output information in the output information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. The main control program also formats the commands that were successfully received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands categorized as status display in Figure 90 (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame status 2 command)) and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Here, the frame status 1 command corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error clear navigation command corresponds to the first error clear command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). This fraud detection processing checks for abnormal conditions related to prize balls. For example, it reads input information from the input information storage area described above. If a detection signal is received from the count sensor 4005 when the game is not in a jackpot state (e.g., when a game ball enters the jackpot opening 2005), it creates a prize ball abnormality display command, which is categorized as an abnormal condition as shown in Figure 90, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an shown in Figure 69. The random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hardware random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random value is set as the random number for determining a jackpot. Then, a random number for determining a jackpot (i.e., a random number obtained from a hardware random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) is used to determine whether it matches a jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state ("special lottery")), or the value of a counter that updates the random number for jackpot symbols is taken out and it is determined whether or not it matches a probability variation jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (determining whether or not to generate a probability variation). Here, "probability variation" means that the probability of winning a jackpot changes to a high probability (probability variation) which is set higher than the normal state (low probability). In this embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range) is set from 32668 to 32767 for low probability and is read from the normal state determination table, while the range is set from 31768 to 32767 for high probability and is read from the probability variation state determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing of step S114, when determining whether the random number for jackpot determination (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hardware random number latch register built into the main control's built-in main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM, the determination is made based on whether the random number for jackpot determination (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hardware random number latch register built into the main control's built-in main control MPU 1310a) falls within the jackpot determination range.

If these determination results are from the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the synchronization performance of Special Figure 1 shown in Figure 89 are created. On the other hand, if the lottery result is from the second start port sensor 4004, various commands related to the synchronization performance of Special Figure 2 shown in Figure 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. At the same time, the output of a lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set to light up the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol, and this is stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above. Furthermore, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands categorized as jackpot-related as shown in Figure 89 (jackpot opening command, command to display the Nth time the jackpot opening 1 has been opened, command to display the jackpot closing 1, command to display the jackpot count 1, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the output of a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 to open and close the opening/closing member 2107 shown in Figure 8 is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the number of times (rounds) the jackpot opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is set to 2. When this is the case, the output of a signal to illuminate the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in Figure 10 is set to light up, and this information is stored in the output information storage area. When there are 15 rounds, the output of a signal to illuminate the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in Figure 10 is set to light up, and this information is stored in the output information storage area. Alternatively, the output of a signal to illuminate the status indicator 1401 is set to light up in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not a probability change has occurred, and this information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs control processing for both the regular symbols and the regular electric prize mechanism (step S116). In this control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and gate entry processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate entry processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 was input to the input terminal. Based on this determination, if a detection signal was input to the input terminal, the value of the counter used to update the random number for determining the regular symbol win is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

This gate information storage area has four sections, from section 0 to section 3. Gate information is stored in the order of section 0, section 1, section 2, and then section 3. For example, if gate information is stored in sections 0 to 2 of the gate information storage, and a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in section 3 of the gate information storage.

The gate information stored in section 0 of the gate information memory is set in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM. Once this gate information is set, the gate information in section 1 of the gate information memory is shifted to section 0, the gate information in section 2 is shifted to section 1, and the gate information in section 3 is shifted to section 2, freeing up section 3. For example, if gate information is stored in sections 1 and 2, the gate information in section 1 is shifted to section 0, and the gate information in section 2 is shifted to section 1, freeing up sections 2 and 3. When gate information is stored in sections 1 through 3, the total number of stored gate information points is used to determine the number of reserved balls, and the output of the illumination signal for the normal symbol memory display 1188 is set based on the gate information described above. This signal is then stored as output information in the output information memory area described above.

Following the gate entry process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM is read, and a random number value for determining whether a normal symbol win occurs is extracted from this read gate information. It is then determined whether or not this value matches the normal symbol win determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (this is called "normal lottery"). Based on this determination result (the result of the normal lottery), it is decided whether or not to open and close the movable piece. If the decision is made to open and close the piece, the pair of movable pieces will expand in the left and right directions, creating a game state in which a game ball can be received into the second start opening 2004, resulting in a game state that is advantageous to the player. Based on this decision, the corresponding variation display pattern for the regular symbols is determined using the random number for the variation display pattern of the regular symbols described above. Various commands categorized as "regular symbol synchronization related" as shown in Figure 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. At the same time, the output of a lighting signal to the regular symbol display unit 1402 is set to light up the regular symbol display unit 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the regular symbols, and this is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Furthermore, for example, if the extracted random number for determining a normal symbol win matches the normal symbol win determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric performance effects shown in Figure 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. Additionally, the output of a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 to open and close the movable piece is set and stored as output information in the aforementioned output information storage area. On the other hand, if the extracted random number for determining a normal symbol win does not match the normal symbol win determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. Various commands categorized as normal symbol synchronization performance effects shown in Figure 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the aforementioned transmission information storage area. Additionally, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set to light up the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern and stored as output information in the aforementioned output information storage area.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951 when it has successfully received various commands from the payout control board 951 via the output terminals of predetermined output ports of the main control MPU 1310a based on output information. It also outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108, which opens and closes the opening/closing member 2107 of the large prize winning slot 2005, and a drive signal to the start slot solenoid 2107, which opens and closes the movable piece, when a jackpot is in play. In addition, it outputs various game-related information (game information) signals to the payout control board 951, such as the main prize ball count information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal, the 2-round jackpot information output signal, the probability variation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time-saving information output signal, and the start slot winning information output signal.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main frequency serial data. This transmitted information stores various commands categorized as follows, created by the main control timer interrupt processing routine: various commands categorized as related to special feature 1 synchronization effects, various commands categorized as related to special feature 2 synchronization effects, various commands categorized as related to jackpots (for example, a jackpot 1 count display command corresponding to the jackpot count command based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see Figure 69) when a game ball that has entered the jackpot 2005 (see Figure 8) is detected), various commands categorized as power on, various commands categorized as related to normal animation synchronization effects, various commands categorized as related to normal electric performance effects, various commands categorized as notification displays (door open command, door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, etc.) as shown in Figure 90, various commands categorized as status displays (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame status 2 command), various commands categorized as tests, and various commands categorized as others. The main frequency serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main-period serial data consists of a status indicating the command type (with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits)), a mode indicating the variation of the effect (also with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits)), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values. This sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main frequency serial data. As described above, in the event of a power outage or momentary interruption, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in Figure 77 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main frequency serial transmission port 1310ae, built into the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in Figure 79, can transfer the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in its transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea via the serial management unit 1310aec, and then complete the transmission of the main frequency serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea. When a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power is restored, in the command reservation setting for power-on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 93, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command, which are categorized as power-on as shown in Figure 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Therefore, as main frequency serial data, the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on status command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in that order, followed by the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on main control return destination command. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, various commands corresponding to game information may also be stored, which are read from the game backup information during the setting of the main control's built-in RAM's work area in step S34 of the main control side power-on processing. In such cases, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information is completed, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame status 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal's receiving port, it transmits a frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame status 1 command received from the payout control board 951, in the form shown in Figure 91, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a frame status 1 command in the form shown in Figure 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error clearing navigation command (first error clearing command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the RXA terminal's receiving port, it transmits an error clearing navigation command (second error clearing command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error clearing navigation command received from the dispensing control board 951, in the form shown in Figure 91, to the peripheral control board 1510 as an error clearing navigation command in the form shown in Figure 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main frame open command (first main frame open command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal's receiving port, it transmits a main frame open command (second main frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main frame command transmission means, second main frame transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main frame open command received from the payout control board 951, in the form shown in Figure 91, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame open command in the form shown in Figure 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main frame close command (first main frame close command) from the payout control board 951 via the RXA terminal's receiving port, it transmits a main frame close command (second main frame close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (main frame command transmission means, second main frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program receives the main frame closing command from the dispensing control board 951, in the form shown in Figure 91, and transfers it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a main frame closing command in the form shown in Figure 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door open command (first door open command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door open command (second door frame open command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program forwards the door frame close command, which is in the form shown in Figure 91 and received from the dispensing control board 951, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door close command, which is in the form shown in Figure 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door close command (first door close command) from the dispensing control board 951 via the receiving port of the RXA terminal, it transmits a door close command (second door close command) to the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control unit) (door frame command transmission means, second door frame command transmission means). In this case, the main control program receives the door closing command from the dispensing control board 951 in the form shown in Figure 91 and transfers it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a door closing command in the form shown in Figure 90. A door closing command in the form shown in Figure 90 is transferred to the peripheral control board 1510 from the form shown in Figure 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the built-in main control WDT 1310af shown in Figure 69 (step S122), and terminates this routine. The clearing of the built-in main control WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timing performed by the built-in main control WDT 1310af. Then, by restarting the timing performed by the built-in main control WDT 1310af, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT 1310af.

Furthermore, as described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the backup process described above to store game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is in progress. In addition, when power is restored, the main control board 1310 can output a power-on main control return destination command, as shown in Figure 89, to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and attacker solenoid 2108, which are electrical drive sources, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off by the port output processing in step S118 of this routine, based on the game information from which the backup process was executed, as the destination for the return of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the main control side power-on processing step S50 in Figure 93, the main control board 1310 reserves a command to be sent when power is turned on, and in the setting of the main control built-in RAM work area in step S34 of the same processing, based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, it creates a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on in Figure 89, and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing step S120 of this routine, it transmits the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on status command to the peripheral control board 1510 as main frequency serial data, and then transmits the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 in the same order. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the destination of the game's progress as restored by the main control board 1310 upon power restoration, based on the main control board 1310's power-on restoration command, within the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600. This allows the game to quickly return to the state it was in immediately before the power outage or interruption when a power interruption or outage occurs while a player is playing. Furthermore, the destination of the game's progress as restored by the main control board 1310 is displayed within the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600 to inform the player, preventing them from mistakenly believing the pachinko machine 1 has malfunctioned due to a frozen state. Therefore, by quickly restoring the game to the state it was in immediately before the power interruption or interruption, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing the machine has malfunctioned.

Furthermore, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 92. As a result, in the setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 of the same process, when the setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on is performed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on as shown in Figure 89, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Thus, only the two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 of this routine, the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on state command are transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process as main peripheral serial data, followed by the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process displays detailed machine information on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the pachinko machine's model code included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. Specifically, it displays detailed machine information based on the series code (which identifies the machine type from the aforementioned Max type, Middle type, and Sweet type), the copyright code (which identifies the copyright of the work), and the game specification code (for example, in addition to a game specification where, once a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot occurs, there is also a game specification where a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol variations (ST machine)).

[16-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Processing when the peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the power-on processing for the peripheral control unit will be explained with reference to Figure 95. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Figure 72 performs the power-on processing for the peripheral control unit as shown in Figure 95. When this power-on processing for the peripheral control unit begins, the performance control program performs an initial setup process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setup process, the performance control program performs a process to initialize the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, and a process to set the wait timer after reset. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process to initialize itself, but the time required for this initialization process of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), so the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is in a state where interrupts are enabled, and can receive various commands, such as commands related to the control of game performances and commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1, which are output from the main control board 1310, as shown in Figures 89 and 90, during the peripheral control command reception interrupt processing described later.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73, the performance backup information (1fr) backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb is compared, and the performance backup information (1ms) backed up in Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) is compared, and the performance backup information (1fr) backed up in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the second backup area 1511cc is compared, and the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) is compared The system compares the performance backup information (1ms). If the compared values match, the performance backup information (1fr) stored in Bank1 (1fr) is copied back to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used memory area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73, and the performance backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) is copied back to Bank0 (1ms), respectively, resulting in a hot start. However, if the compared values do not match (i.e., there is a mismatch), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the normally used memory areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, resulting in a cold start.

Furthermore, in the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in Figure 73 is also compared with the performance backup information (SRAM) stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in its backup first area 1511db, and the performance backup information (SRAM) stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in its backup second area 1511dc. If the compared contents match, the performance backup information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in Figure 73, is copied back to Bank0 (SRAM), and a hot start is performed. On the other hand, if the compared contents do not match (i.e., there is a mismatch), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and a cold start is performed. Following such a hot or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73, thereby zeroing it out. After this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af shown in Figure 73 and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e shown in Figure 72, preventing the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1000, the performance control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the year, month, and day, and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in Figure 72. These are then set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73 as the current calendar information in the calendar information storage unit, and set in the time information storage unit as the current time information. In addition, the current time information acquisition process also performs brightness setting processing for the liquid crystal display device. In this liquid crystal display device brightness setting processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and adjusts the brightness of the backlight of the game board side performance display device 1600 to match the brightness of the LEDs included in this acquired brightness setting information, and then lights up. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 in 5% increments within a range of 100% to 70%, and the currently set brightness of the LED backlight of the game board-side display device 1600.

In the brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device, specifically, when the brightness of the LEDs included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. When the brightness of the LEDs included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 and the backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board-side display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. In this brightness setting process for the liquid crystal display device, no correction similar to the brightness correction program described above, which corrects the brightness of the game board-side display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board-side display device 1600, is performed at all. This is to prevent the LED brightness from being corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display is executed, by incorporating a correction program similar to the brightness correction program into the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar and time information from the RTC's built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once, upon power-on. Furthermore, after performing this current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1002, the performance control program sets the value of the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0 (step S1006). This V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the system is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In step S1006, the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value of VB-FLG to 0. Furthermore, after setting the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG of the peripheral control MPU 1511a to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1006, the performance control program determines whether the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is valued at 1 (step S1008). If the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not valued at 1 (i.e., valued at 0), the program returns to step S1008 and repeatedly determines whether the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is valued at 1. By repeating this determination, the program enters a waiting state until the peripheral control unit can perform its regular processing. Furthermore, after determining whether the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is valued at 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

When the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is valued at 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit is executing steady-state processing, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is first set to value 1 (step S1009). This steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to value 1 when the peripheral control unit is executing steady-state processing, and to value 0 when the peripheral control unit has completed its processing.

Following step S1009, the performance control program performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). This 1ms interrupt timer activation process activates the 1ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt process (described later). It also initializes the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN by setting its value to 1, which counts the number of times the 1ms interrupt timer has been activated and the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated during the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the performance control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the performance control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in Figure 72. Here, continuous transmission to the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73. When this continuous transmission to the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board begins, the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73, is set with the game board side light emission data SL-DAT, created in the lamp data creation process described later, for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8.

As shown in Figure 73, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board as the request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. It then transfers and writes the first byte of the game board-side light emission data SL-DAT, stored at the beginning address of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa, to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board's serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the lamp drive board's serial I/O port transfers the data from this written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and begins transmitting the data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time, synchronized with the game board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK.

Each time a transmit interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, triggered by this (in this embodiment, triggered when one byte of data written to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register becomes empty with no more data), if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining game board-side light-emitting data stored in the lamp drive board-side transmit data storage area 1511caa The SL-DAT data is transferred one byte at a time to the transmit buffer register of the lamp drive board's serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. The lamp drive board's serial I/O port then transfers the data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register. Synchronized with the game board's light-emitting clock signal SL-CLK, it begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time, performing continuous transmission via the lamp drive board's serial I/O port.

Furthermore, during the lamp data output processing, the performance control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in Figure 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform continuous transmission to the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. When this continuous transmission to the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs begins, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the multiple LEDs on the various decoration boards provided on the door frame 3 is created and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73, by the lamp data creation process described later.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. It then transfers and writes the first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT, stored at the beginning address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, to the transmit buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the data from this written transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time, synchronized with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK.

Each time a transmit interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, triggered by this (in this embodiment, triggered when one byte of data written to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register becomes empty as there is no more data left in it), and if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side light-emitting data stored in the transmit data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs The STL-DAT data is transferred one byte at a time to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port then transfers the data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, and, in synchronization with the door-side illumination clock signal STL-CLK, begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time, thus performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs.

Following step S1012, the performance control program performs a performance operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, based on the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73, where various information such as the operation of the operation button 410 is acquired based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the performance operation unit 400 during the performance operation unit information acquisition process described later in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the program monitors whether the operation of the operation button 410 has been operated and appropriately determines whether or not to reflect the operation status of the operation button 410 in the game performance.

Following step S1014, the performance control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the built-in sound source VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a in the display data creation processing described later, from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in Figure 74 to the game board-side performance display device 1600 and the door frame-side performance display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board-side performance display device 1600 and the door frame-side performance display device 460. Note that in the display data output processing, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board-side performance display device 1600 and the door frame-side performance display device 460 is canceled. This prevents processing delays, although it does result in so-called frame drops. However, the system prioritizes synchronization between the effects produced by the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 (shown in Figure 8) and the multiple LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 (produced by the lamp data output processing in step S1012) and the effects produced by the lower speaker 921 (shown in Figure 5) and the upper speaker 573 (shown in Figure 2) (produced by the sound data output processing described later), which are synchronized with the various effects, such as music and sound effects.

Following step S1016, the performance control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the performance control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data of sound data such as music and sound effects set in the built-in sound source VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described later, or outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data of sound data such as notification sounds and announcement sounds in addition to music and sound effects. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives serialized audio data from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, it transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals, and transmits the left audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. This allows for stereo playback of music and sound effects tailored to various effects from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, as well as stereo playback of notification and alert sounds.

Following step S1018, the performance control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, the program updates a pointer to instruct which screen data, from the first screen data in the time-series arrangement of screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, should be output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a.

Furthermore, during the scheduler update process, the pointer is updated to indicate which of the light emission data points, arranged in a time series to constitute the light emission pattern generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, should be used for each type of LED's light emission pattern.

Furthermore, during the scheduler update process, the pointer is updated to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. This is done from the sound command data that instructs sound data such as music, sound effects, and notification sounds, which are arranged in a time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae.

Furthermore, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the first drive data to be output, among the drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series that constitute the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series that constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is executed repeatedly each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, as described later. In this motor and solenoid drive processing, which is executed repeatedly each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the time series, and the pointer is updated each time the process is executed. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the updated pointer during motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated during the scheduler update process. Therefore, even if the pointer in motor and solenoid drive processing inadvertently points to a different drive data than the one it was originally supposed to point to, the scheduler update process will forcibly update it to point to the originally intended drive data.

Following step S1020, the performance control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the performance control program analyzes the various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means), which will be described later, based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, as well as the various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 (command analysis means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the performance control program extracts screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data, etc., from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Furthermore, the performance control program analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing is, for example, a start-out entry command to instruct the start of the start-out entry performance, a normal symbol memory command to identify the number of normal symbols held (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization performance start command to instruct the start of the symbol synchronization performance, a symbol memory command output when the number of start-out held symbols changes, a large prize-out 1 count display command (large prize-out count command) output each time a game ball is accepted into the large prize-out 2005, or a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command, full error occurrence command) indicating fullness as shown in Figure 90 (command analysis means), and recognizes what game state is currently being played. In addition, after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, this performance control program analyzes whether the command received in this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a main frame open command, a main frame close command, a door open command, or a door frame close command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511c of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. In the received command analysis processing, the performance control program analyzes the various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511c. The various commands include, as shown in Figure 89, commands related to the synchronization of special feature 1, commands related to the synchronization of special feature 2, commands related to big wins, commands related to power on, commands related to the synchronization of normal feature, commands related to normal electric feature effects, commands shown in Figure 90, commands related to notification displays, commands related to status displays such as the aforementioned door frame open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, and main body frame close command, as well as the error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the second error clearing command) and frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), commands related to testing, and other commands.

Following step S1022, the performance control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands categorized as notification displays as shown in Figure 90, the performance control program extracts the screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set to abnormal display modes for executing various abnormal notifications, from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormal notification is performed in order of priority, as registered in advance, and after that abnormality is resolved, it automatically transitions to the remaining abnormal notifications. This allows for simultaneous monitoring of multiple anomalies, without losing information about the initial anomaly if another anomaly occurs after the first one has occurred but before the first one is resolved.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, if the command analyzed by the performance control program in the aforementioned received command analysis process (step S1022) is one of the various commands categorized as shown in the status display in Figure 90, such as an error clear navigation command (second error clear command), the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled in a manner different from the normal performance mode associated with the performance operation. For example, a visual warning is issued to the outside using the game board-side performance display device 1600 (performance device), the door frame-side performance display device 460 (performance device), and lamps (performance device), or an audible warning is issued to the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, if a malicious player attempts to input an error clear navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 while the game is in progress, the pachinko machine 1 will issue a warning to the outside, thus deterring fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 that could affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the performance control program performs RTC acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the performance control program updates the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information stored in the time information storage unit, which were acquired in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. This RTC acquisition information update processing updates the time information (hours, minutes, seconds) stored in the time information storage unit, and based on this updated time information, the calendar information (year, month, day) stored in the calendar information storage unit is updated.

Following step S1026, the performance control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation processing, the performance control program extracts the game board-side light emission data SL-DAT from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, based on the light emission data indicated by the pointer, which is arranged in a time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, to output lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8, after the pointer has been updated in the scheduler update processing of step S1020. The data is extracted and created, and then set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. Additionally, door-side light emission data STL-DAT, for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and then set in the frame decorative drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73.

Following step S1028, the performance control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the performance control program extracts the screen data indicated by the pointer from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, based on the screen data arranged in a time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data, after the pointer was updated in the scheduler update processing of step S1020. This data is then output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the built-in sound source VDP 1512a extracts character data from the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b based on this input screen data, creates sprite data, and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board-side performance display device 1600 and the door frame-side performance display device 460 on its built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the performance control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the performance control program, after updating the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, extracts the sound command data indicated by that pointer from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511, and outputs it to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. When the built-in sound source VDP 1512a receives sound command data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, it extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the LCD and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source, incorporating the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and setting the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs a steady-state process), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in Figure 73 is activated. This converter converts the voltage, which is divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment knob 1510a, into 1024 values ranging from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, these 1024 values are divided into seven levels and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume. The volume increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source built into the VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled to achieve the volume set for board volumes 0 to 6. The sound data is then serialized as audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, causing music and sound effects to play from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

Furthermore, the notification and alert sounds are designed to play independently of volume adjustments based on the rotation of the knob. The volume can be adjusted from silent to maximum volume by controlling the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 via a program. Unlike the seven-stage circuit board volume control described above, the volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from silent to maximum volume. For example, even if a hall employee rotates the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the music and sound effects played from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573 will be quieter, but a notification sound set to high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played when there is a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is engaging in fraudulent activity. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is reduced, the notification sound can prevent hall employees from becoming less aware of malfunctions or fraudulent activity by players. Furthermore, based on the current circuit board volume set by the rotation of the knob, the volume of the advertisement sound can be reduced to avoid interfering with the music and sound effects. Alternatively, the volume of the advertisement sound can be increased to enhance the visual impact of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460, in addition to the music and sound effects, and to inform the player that there is a high probability of transitioning to a more advantageous game state.

Following step S1032, the performance control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the performance control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally connected peripheral control RAM 1511c (as shown in Figure 73) to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and also copies the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (as shown in Figure 73) to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively, and backs them up.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c, for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in Figure 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed, the following are backed up: the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the received command storage area 1511cac, and RTC information acquisition, all contained in Bank0 (1 fr) which is the backup target. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac rapidly copies the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in the memory area 1511cad and the schedule data memory area 1511cae, as performance backup information (1fr) to Bank 1 (1fr) and Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and then rapidly copies it to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 specifies to the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. The contents stored from the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied sequentially in predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments. All data in Bank1 (1fr) of area 1511cb is copied sequentially starting from the beginning address. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, in response to a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. The data from the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) is then copied sequentially, one byte at a time (for example, one byte), starting from the beginning address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies to the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. The contents from the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied sequentially, one byte at a time, starting from the beginning address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, in response to a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) should be copied to Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc. The contents from the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are then copied sequentially, one byte at a time (for example, one byte), starting from the beginning address of Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc.

Furthermore, during the backup process, for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in Figure 73—that is, each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed—the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac rapidly copies the content of the performance information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the backup target, as performance backup information (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and then rapidly copies it to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 specifies to the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. The contents from the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied sequentially in predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments. The entire contents of Bank1 (SRAM) in rear 1511db are copied sequentially starting from the beginning address. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, in response to a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) be copied to Bank2 (SRAM) in backup area 1511db. The contents from the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are then copied sequentially, one byte at a time (e.g., 1 byte), starting from the beginning address of Bank2 (SRAM) in backup area 1511db.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, in response to a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) be copied to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. The contents from the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are then copied sequentially, one byte at a time, starting from the beginning address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, in response to a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) should be copied to Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc. The contents from the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are then copied sequentially, one byte at a time (for example, 1 byte), starting from the beginning address of Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc.

Following step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). This WDT clear process outputs a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

Following step S1036, the performance control program sets the value of the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 to indicate the completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit (step S1038), returns to step S1006, initializes the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG by setting the value to 0, and repeatedly performs the determination in step S1008 until the value of the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing described later. In other words, in step S1008, the program waits until the value of the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1, and if it is determined in step S1008 that the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed, and the program returns to step S1006. Thus, if it is determined in step S1008 that the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing from steps S1009 to S1038 is called "peripheral control unit steady-state processing".

This peripheral control unit steady-state processing begins in step S1009 when the performance control program sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 1, indicating that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is in progress. In step S1010, it performs the 1ms interrupt timer activation process, and then proceeds through steps S1012, S1014, ..., and S1036. Finally, in step S1038, it completes by setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0, indicating that the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is complete. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed in step S1008 when the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is valued at 1. As mentioned above, this V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt process, which will be executed later, triggered by the input of a V-blank signal from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a indicating that the system is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps, as described above. Therefore, the interval at which the V-blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral Control Unit V Blank Signal Interrupt Processing]
Next, we will describe the peripheral control V-blank signal interrupt processing, which is executed when a V-blank signal, indicating that the peripheral control unit 1511 is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is input from the sound source-integrated VDD 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, as shown in Figure 72. When this peripheral control V-blank signal interrupt processing starts, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is valued at 0, as shown in Figure 96 (step S1045). As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 of the peripheral control power-on processing in Figure 95 is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control steady-state processing has been completed.

If the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not valued at 0 (i.e., valued at 1) in step S1045, meaning that the peripheral control unit is currently performing steady-state processing, this routine terminates. On the other hand, if the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is valued at 0 in step S1045, meaning that the peripheral control unit has completed its steady-state processing, the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to value 1 (step S1050), and this routine terminates. As described above, the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag used to determine whether or not to perform steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit. It is set to value 1 when the peripheral control unit is performing steady-state processing and to value 0 when it is not.

In this embodiment, step S1045 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is valued at 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing has been completed. If the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing has been completed, step S1050 sets the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to value 1. This is because, if a V-blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is in progress and the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to value 1, the determination in step S1008 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95 will cause the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing to be executed. This would forcibly cancel the currently running peripheral control unit's steady-state processing midway and start the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing from the beginning. To prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95 is performed. In step S1009 of the time processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the value of 1 is set to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG, thereby informing the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing routine that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is currently being executed. Furthermore, in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) shown in Figure 95, the value of 0 is set to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG, thereby informing the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing routine that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. Therefore, step S1045 of the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing routine determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In other words, this is a procedure to handle cases where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed between the input of one V-blank signal and the input of the next V-blank signal, resulting in a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing fails to complete within approximately 33.3 ms, the system will wait until the next V-blank signal is input, as determined in step S1008 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 95. In other words, the time required to execute the failed peripheral control unit steady-state processing becomes approximately 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, described later, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in Figure 95, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady-state processing. However, if there is a failed peripheral control unit steady-state processing as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times instead of 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady-state processing fails, consistency is maintained between the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady-state processing and the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably maintained.

[16-1-3. Peripheral Control Unit 1ms Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control steady-state processing in the peripheral control power-on processing shown in Figure 95. When this peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Figure 72 determines whether the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is less than 33, as shown in Figure 97 (step S1100). As described above, this number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 of the peripheral control steady-state processing in the peripheral control power-on processing shown in Figure 95, and the peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above. Therefore, the interval at which the V-blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed repeatedly every approximately 33.3 ms. Therefore, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, followed by the second, ..., and then the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt.

In step S1100, if the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is not less than 33, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing starts, this routine terminates immediately. If the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V-blank signal, in this embodiment, although the priority of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is set higher than that of the peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V-blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V-blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing. Then, upon generation of the V-blank signal, the 1ms interrupt timer is reactivated in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing. Following this, the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing begins again due to the occurrence of the first 1ms timer interrupt.

On the other hand, if the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN in step S1100 is less than 33, the value of 1 is added to the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN (incremented, step S1102). This addition of 1 to the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN increases the number of times the 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing routine is executed in step S1010 of the peripheral control steady-state processing in the peripheral control power-on processing shown in Figure 95, by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and motor drive board 4180 are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, based on the drive data of the motors and solenoids of the electrical drive sources, such as motors and solenoids, arranged in a time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c, as shown in Figure 73. The pointer is also updated to the next drive data defined in the time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, the motor and solenoid drive processing performs continuous DMA serial transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 is used to perform continuous transmission to the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is initiated, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the performance operation unit 400 is extracted and created from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control control unit 1511, based on the drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series that constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. It then transfers and writes the first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT, stored at the starting address of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, to the transmit buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port transfers the data from this written transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register and begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time, synchronized with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK.

Each time a transmit interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, triggered by this (in this embodiment, triggered when one byte of data written to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register becomes empty as there is no more data left in it), and if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data stored in the transmit data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor The STM-DAT data is transferred one byte at a time to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. The serial I/O port then transfers the data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register, and, in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time, thus performing continuous transmission via the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor.

Furthermore, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing is performed to the motor drive board 4180. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 is used to perform continuous transmission to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board. When continuous transmission from the serial I/O port for this motor drive board is initiated, the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts and creates SM-DAT, which is used to output drive signals to motors and solenoids for moving various movable parts on the game board 5 shown in Figure 8, from the drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series that constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which is attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This SM-DAT is extracted from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control control unit 1511, and is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of data from the motor drive board's serial I/O port as a request factor for the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. It then transfers and writes the first byte of the game board's motor drive data SM-DAT, stored at the beginning address of the motor drive board's transmission data storage area 1511cag, to the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board's serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. As a result, the motor drive board's serial I/O port transfers the data from this written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and begins transmitting the data from the transmission shift register one bit at a time, synchronized with the game board's motor drive clock signal SM-CLK.

Each time a transmit interrupt request occurs for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, triggered by this (in this embodiment, triggered when one byte of data written to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the transmit buffer register becomes empty because there is no more data left in it), and if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining motor drive data on the game board side stored in the motor drive board side transmit data storage area 1511cag The SM-DAT data is transferred one byte at a time to the transmit buffer register of the motor drive board's serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. The motor drive board's serial I/O port then transfers the data from the transmit buffer register to the transmit shift register. Synchronized with the game board's motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, it begins transmitting one byte of data from the transmit shift register one bit at a time, performing continuous transmission via the motor drive board's serial I/O port.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals have been input from the various detection switches provided on the game board 5. This creates history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (e.g., original position history information, movable position history information, etc.), and this information is set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which is externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in Figure 73. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, movable position, etc., of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be obtained.

Following step S1106, the performance operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). This performance operation unit information acquisition process determines whether detection signals have been input from various detection switches provided on the performance operation unit 400. This creates history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation history information of the operation button 410), and sets it in the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which is externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in Figure 73. The operation status of the operation button 410 can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in this performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition processing, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Figure 87 is created and set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511c of the peripheral control RAM 1511c which is attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as shown in Figure 73. As described above, the LOCKN signal is a signal output by the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame-side performance transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal. Specifically, it is a signal output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame-side performance transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver. The frequency and occurrence of malfunctions in the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display drive board 4450 can be obtained from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, thereby obtaining the drawing state of the door frame-side performance display device 460.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine terminates. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally connected peripheral control RAM 1511c, as shown in Figure 73, are copied to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, are copied to the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively, and backed up.

Specifically, in the backup process, with respect to the peripheral control RAM 1511c, each time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in Figure 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing routine is executed, the following are backed up: the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage included in Bank0 (1ms), which is the backup target. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac rapidly copies the performance information (1 ms) stored in area 1511cah and the performance operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai as performance backup information (1 ms) to Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of backup area 1511cb, and then rapidly copies it to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) of backup area 2511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 specifies to the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) be copied to Bank1 (1ms) of backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored from the beginning address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are copied sequentially in predetermined byte units (for example, 1 byte) to backup area 1. All data in Bank1 (1ms) of area 1511cb is copied sequentially starting from the beginning address. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, in response to a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) be copied to Bank2 (1ms) of backup area 1511cb. The data from the beginning address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms) is then copied sequentially, one byte at a time, starting from the beginning address of Bank2 (1ms) of backup area 1511cb.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies to the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) be copied to Bank3 (1ms) of backup area 2 1511cc. The contents from the beginning address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are copied sequentially, one byte at a time, starting from the beginning address of Bank3 (1ms) of backup area 2 1511cc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, in response to a request from the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, specifies that the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) be copied to Bank4 (1ms) in the backup second area 1511cc. The contents from the beginning address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are then copied sequentially, one byte at a time (for example, 1 byte), starting from the beginning address of Bank4 (1ms) in the backup second area 1511cc.

Thus, in the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, various processing related to the performance described in steps S1104 to S1108 is executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the performance. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing during the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 95, various processing related to the performance described in steps S1012 to S1032 is executed within a period of approximately 33.3ms as the progress of the performance. In the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, if the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN in step S1100 is not less than 33, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing starts, the routine terminates immediately. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V-blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd interrupt is forcibly canceled. After the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing due to the V-blank signal, the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing starts anew due to the first 1ms timer interrupt. In other words, consistency is maintained between the progress of the performance controlled by the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing and the progress of the performance controlled by the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control. Therefore, the progress of the performance can be reliably synchronized.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the interval at which the V-blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460. The interval may also vary slightly depending on the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a are mounted. In this embodiment, since the V-blank signal is the signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V-blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit's V-blank interrupt processing. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V-blank signal is output changes slightly, the time lag caused by this slight change in the V-blank signal output interval can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt.

[16-1-4. Peripheral Control Unit Command Reception Interrupt Processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, which receives various commands from the main control board 1310, will be explained. As shown in Figure 72, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it uses this as a trigger to receive 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main frequency serial data into a receive buffer using the serial I/O port for the main control board built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Once this reception is complete, an interrupt occurs, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main frequency serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet, with the status assigned as the first byte, the mode assigned as the second byte, and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and adding them up as the third byte.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing starts, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in Figure 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which one byte (8 bits) of information from the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if it is within the period in which one byte (8 bits) of information from the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the 1 byte of information received from the receive buffer of the main control board's built-in serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the receive counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This receive counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times data has been retrieved from the receive buffer. The value is 1 when the status (the first byte of the main frequency serial data) is retrieved from the receive buffer, the value is 2 when the mode (the second byte of the main frequency serial data) is retrieved from the receive buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value (the third byte of the main frequency serial data) is retrieved from the receive buffer. The receive counter SRXC is initially set to 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is valued at 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). This determination checks whether the status (the first byte of the main frequency serial data), the mode (the second byte of the main frequency serial data), and the sum value (the third byte of the main frequency serial data) have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

If, in step S1206, the receive counter SRXC is not valued at 3, that is, if the first byte of the main frequency serial data (status), followed by the second byte (mode) and then the third byte (sum value) have not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer, a one-byte receive period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine terminates. Setting the one-byte receive period timer in step S1208 sets a period during which the second byte of the main frequency serial data (mode) or the third byte (sum value) can be received.

On the other hand, when the receive counter SRXC is valued at 3 in step S1206, that is, when the status (the first byte of the main frequency serial data), the mode (the second byte of the main frequency serial data), and the sum value (the third byte of the main frequency serial data) are sequentially retrieved from the receive buffer, the receive counter SRXC is initialized to 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation involves treating the status (the first byte of the main frequency serial data) and the mode (the second byte of the main frequency serial data), which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, as numerical values and calculating their sum (sum value).

Following step S1212, step S1214 determines whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already extracted from the receive buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. The sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already extracted from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310, and therefore should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they discharge electrostatically and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is in an environment that is easily affected by noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 considers the status assigned as the first byte of the received main frequency serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main frequency serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the peripheral control MPU 1511a to determine whether the main frequency serial data has been altered to something different from the normal data due to noise interference between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510.

In step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main frequency serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main frequency serial data are stored in the receive command storage area 1511c of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which is externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as shown in Figure 73 (step S1216), and this routine ends. This receive command storage area 1511c is used as a ring buffer, and the status assigned as the first byte of the main frequency serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main frequency serial data are stored in the peripheral control unit receive ring buffer of the receive command storage area 1511c. This "peripheral control receiver ring buffer" is a buffer used in such a way that the beginning and end of the buffer are connected. It stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end, it returns to the beginning and stores the data again. Furthermore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores data in the peripheral control receiver ring buffer in step S1216, it associates the status assigned as the first byte of the received main frequency serial data with the mode assigned as the second byte, and discards the sum value assigned as the third byte.

On the other hand, if the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the period for receiving one byte (8 bits) of information from the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 has exceeded the time limit, or if, in step S1214, the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, then this routine terminates.

[16-1-5. Peripheral Control Unit Power Outage Warning Signal Interrupt Processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is executed when a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310, as shown in Figure 75. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Figure 72 first starts a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320) and determines whether or not a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1302). If the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has not been input, this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, if a power outage warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). This determination checks whether 2 microseconds have elapsed since the timer started in step S1320. If 2 microseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether a power outage warning signal is input. If no power outage warning signal is input, the routine terminates. If a power outage warning signal is input, the process returns to step S1304 to determine whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, the determination in step S1304 checks whether the power outage warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the start of this routine, the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing.

In step S1304, the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing routine is initiated. If the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). This power saving processing sequentially performs actions such as turning off the backlights of the game board-side display device 1600 and the door frame-side display device 460, turning off the excitation of motors and solenoids on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By reducing the overall power consumption of the pachinko machine 1 system, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, a command reception waiting process is performed (step S1308). This command reception waiting process assumes that the main control board 1310 is transmitting various commands, and waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the transmitted commands. Upon receiving a command, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is initiated, and the received command is stored in the received command storage area 1511c (peripheral control unit receive ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which is externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in Figure 73.

Following step S1308, the command backup process is performed (step S1310). In this command backup process, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac rapidly copies the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac, which is included in Bank0 (1fr) of the backup target work area 1511ca (as shown in Figure 73), to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and then rapidly copies them to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in Figure 73 specifies to the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. The contents stored from the beginning address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are copied sequentially in predetermined byte units (for example, 1 byte) to the backup first area 1. The entire contents of the receive command storage area in Bank1 (1fr) of 511cb are copied sequentially, starting from the beginning address. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies to the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents of the receive command storage area 1511cac in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the receive command storage area in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. The contents from the beginning address of the receive command storage area 1511cac in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the receive command storage area 1511cac in Bank0 (1fr) are copied sequentially, one byte at a time (for example, one byte), starting from the beginning address of the receive command storage area in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

Next, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies to the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511c included in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. The contents stored from the beginning address of the received command storage area 1511c included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511c included in Bank0 (1fr) are copied sequentially, one byte at a time, starting from the beginning address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies to the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac that the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511c in Bank0 (1fr) be copied to the received command storage area in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. The contents from the beginning address of the received command storage area 1511c in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511c in Bank0 (1fr) are copied sequentially, one byte at a time, starting from the beginning address of the received command storage area in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) has been input (step S1312). If a power outage warning signal has been input, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in Figure 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in Figure 72, preventing the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset.

On the other hand, if no power outage warning signal is input in step S1312, or if the process returns to step S1312 after step S1314, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal is input. In other words, the determination of whether or not a power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is input is continued indefinitely. By continuing this determination indefinitely, when no power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) is input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is unable to output a clear signal to the built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af and the external peripheral control WDT 1511e, resulting in a reset of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Conversely, when a power outage warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. Note that if the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Figure 95 will start again.

Thus, if the input of the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314, preventing the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset just before a power outage occurs. Conversely, if the input of the power outage warning signal does not continue in the infinite loop and is canceled as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, and the output of the clear signal is interrupted for both the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit's power outage warning signal interrupt processing routine is incorrectly started due to noise, and the noise persists for more than 2 microseconds, passing the judgment in step S1302, if the power outage warning signal (peripheral power outage warning signal) input does not continue in an infinite loop and is canceled as determined in step S1312, the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed, causing a reset of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, the system can automatically respond to such noise by resetting and recovering.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, we will explain the LOCKN signal history creation process, which is executed as part of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 97. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, a history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Figure 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is output by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74 is abnormal. Specifically, it is a signal output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Figure 72 reads the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511c of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which is externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in Figure 73, as shown in Figure 100 (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information, LOCKN-HIST, has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0; "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 is stored as LOCKN signal detection history information, LOCKN-HIST, in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 (step S1502). This determination is made when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has determined that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data and has requested the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has determined that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (it is normal data) and has not requested the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

If a LOCKN signal is received from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process is performed on the LOCKN signal detection history information (step S1504). In this shift process, when a LOCKN signal is received from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN-HIST information read in step S1500 is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 towards the most significant bit B7, in the following order: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST was shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 1 (step S1506), and this routine terminates.

On the other hand, if there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, a shift process is performed on the LOCKN signal detection history information (step S1508). This shift process for the LOCKN signal detection history information is the same as the shift process in step S1504. If there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN-HIST information read in step S1500 is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 towards the most significant bit B7, in the following order: most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST was shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 0 (step S1510), and this routine terminates.

Thus, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the least significant bit B0 is set to a value of 1 or 0. Therefore, a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection Failure Detection Process]
Next, we will explain the connection failure determination process, which is executed as one of the warning processes in step S1024 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 95. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450 shown in Figure 87, it is determined whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure detection process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Figure 72 reads the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511c of the peripheral control RAM 1511c which is externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in Figure 73 (step S1520). As described above, this LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. As described above, this LOCKN signal is output by the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame-side performance transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal. Specifically, it is a signal output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the door frame-side performance transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination checks whether the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in Figure 72, and in this embodiment, it is "00001111B" (where "B" represents a bit), with the upper four bits B7 to B4 having a value of 0 and the lower four bits B3 to B0 having a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, if the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, it is determined that there is no problem with the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 on the effect display drive board 4450, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S1522, if the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower four bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, and the value of 1 is added to (incremented in step S1524). This communication check counter CC-CNT counts up (accumulates) the number of times that it has been determined in the determination in step S1522 that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, each time this routine is executed. Furthermore, while the communication check counter CC-CNT is reset to a value of 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is not reset by momentary power outages or blackouts. Instead, upon power restoration, it is restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is less than the cumulative count limit CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is less than the cumulative count limit CC-LMT, it is determined that the cumulative number of times a malfunction has been detected in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count limit CC-LMT. Conversely, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not less than (greater than) the cumulative count limit CC-LMT, it is determined that the cumulative number of times a malfunction has been detected in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count limit CC-LMT.

In step S1526, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is less than the cumulative count limit CC-LMT, that is, if the cumulative number of times it has been determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative count limit CC-LMT, the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1526, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not less than (greater than) the cumulative count limit CC-LMT, that is, if the cumulative number of times it has been determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative count limit CC-LMT, the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates whether the cumulative number of times a connection problem has been detected between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count limit CC-LMT, thus confirming a definite connection problem between the transmitter and receiver. It is set to a value of 1 when a connection problem is definitely occurring, and to a value of 0 when the cumulative number of detected connection problems has not reached the cumulative count limit CC-LMT. Note that while the communication error flag CC-FLG is reset to a value of 0 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, it is not reset by momentary power outages or blackouts; instead, upon power restoration, it is restored to the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout.

[16-1-8. Connection Recovery Process]
Next, we will explain the connection recovery process, which is executed as part of the warning process in step S1024 of the peripheral control steady-state processing in the peripheral control power-on processing shown in Figure 95. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in Figure 101, and outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (recover) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, while also notifying the user if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in Figure 72 determines, as shown in Figure 102, whether the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73 during the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Figure 95 (step S1540). In this determination, the scheduler update process determines whether the pointer has been updated in order to instruct which screen data to output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a from the screen data arranged in a time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the performance is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated. On the other hand, when the performance has been completed according to the screen generation schedule data and all pointer updates have been completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is not being activated. Furthermore, this determination allows the system to determine, based on screen generation schedule data, whether the period during which the startup screen of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board-side display device 1600 upon power-up, or the period during which the game board-side display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while in a customer-waiting state, is currently active. If the period during which the startup screen of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board-side display device 1600 upon power-up, or the period during which the game board-side display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while in a customer-waiting state, the system proceeds to step S1542 described later. Conversely, if the period during which the startup screen of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board-side display device 1600, or the period during which the game board-side display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while in a customer-waiting state, is not active (i.e., the machine is simply in a customer-waiting state), the routine terminates immediately.

In step S1540, if the animation is progressing according to the screen generation schedule data, that is, if the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the routine is terminated. However, in step S1540, if the animation is completed according to the screen generation schedule data and all pointer updates have been completed, that is, if the screen generation schedule data is not being activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step S1542). As described above, each time the connection failure determination process shown in Figure 101 is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it has been determined in the determination in step S1522 of the said process that there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side animation transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side animation receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the animation display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This determination checks whether there was at least one instance where a problem was detected in the connection between the transmitter and receiver.

In step S1542, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, meaning that the number of times a connection problem between the transmitter and receiver has been determined has not occurred, this routine terminates. However, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT in step S1542 is not 0, meaning that the number of times a connection problem between the transmitter and receiver has been determined has occurred at least once, then it is determined whether the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication error flag CC-FLG indicates whether the cumulative number of times a connection problem between the transmitter and receiver has been determined has reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, and whether a connection problem between the transmitter and receiver is definitely occurring. It is set to a value of 1 when a connection problem between the transmitter and receiver is definitely occurring, and to a value of 0 when the cumulative number of times a connection problem between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT.

If, in step S1544, the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, if the cumulative number of times it has been determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, then the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is pre-stored in the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It restores the connection between the door frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, if the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG in step S1544 is not 0 (it is 1), that is, if there is definitely a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, a communication error display process is performed (step S1548), and this routine ends. In this communication error display process, in order to convey that there is definitely a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, a process is performed to draw on the display area of the game board side display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in Figure 8. For example, the message "A problem has occurred with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call a staff member." is displayed on the display area of the game board side display device 1600. Furthermore, in the communication error display processing, during the period when the startup screen is displayed on the game board-side performance display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and during the period when the game board-side performance display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while in a waiting state for customers, in order to check whether there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, a LOCKN signal output request data is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as an operation check request for the door frame side performance display device 460, and the door frame side performance receiver I As a response to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data by CSDIC0, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. If this LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver, and therefore a malfunction has occurred in the door frame-side display device 460. This is communicated by displaying a notification image (e.g., "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray-side LCD display device. Please call a staff member.") in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, and simultaneously playing a notification sound (e.g., "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray-side LCD display device.") repeatedly from a speaker or similar device installed in the door frame 3. At this time, all LEDs for illumination decoration on the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 may also be illuminated.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, which is located on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in Figure 74, will be explained using the timing chart in Figure 103.

First, to briefly explain the decorative patterns that are displayed in the display area of the game board side display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in Figure 8, the display of the decorative patterns is executed by the peripheral control steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit, such as the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 95, and the first special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the first start port 2002 shown in Figure 8, or as shown in Figure 8, by the main control side main processing of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 93 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 94, etc., by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in Figure 69. When the result of the second special lottery, which is determined by the acceptance of game balls into the second starting opening 2004, is a "jackpot," the number of repetitions (rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 2005 shown in Figure 8 will be 1 to 15 rounds in total. In each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), when game balls enter the large prize opening 2005 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), that round is completed. For each game ball that enters the large prize opening 2005, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are dispensed.

The first special lottery result, determined by the acceptance of a game ball into the first start port 2002, or the second special lottery result, determined by the acceptance of a game ball into the second start port 2004, is determined by a command from the main control board 1310. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, causing the display of the left decorative pattern on the left side of the display area of the game board side display device 1600, the central decorative pattern in the center, and the right decorative pattern on the right side to begin changing. After a predetermined time has elapsed, the changing display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern stops, allowing the player to recognize the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. At this time, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can also be confirmed on the first special pattern display unit 1403 or the second special pattern display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Figure 66. When the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner, they become semi-transparent to the extent that the background image is visible. The left decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner as if a reel is rotating, moving from the upper left to the lower left of the display area, the center decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a fixed manner, they become opaque so that the background image at the position corresponding to the fixed left, center, and right decorative patterns becomes difficult to see. As described above, the first or second special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in Figure 66, which is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped, is synchronized with the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600.

When the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving a game ball into the first start port 2002, or the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving a game ball into the second start port 2004, it controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on this received command, so that as shown in Figure 103, the display of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern starts to change in the display area of the game board side display device 1600 shown in Figure 8 (timing K0), in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control steady-state processing of the peripheral control power-on processing shown in Figure 95, the time system that constitutes the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73 The pointer is updated to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in a column, should be output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Therefore, during the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effects are progressing according to the screen generation schedule data. While the screen generation schedule data is running, that is, from the start to the stop display of the left, center, and right decorative patterns, even if the connection recovery process shown in Figure 102 is executed in the warning process at step S1024 of the peripheral control steady-state processing in the peripheral control power-on processing shown in Figure 95, the routine is forcibly terminated based on the judgment at step S1540 of this connection recovery process.

As a result, during the period from when the display of the left decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern starts and stops on the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined at least once that there is a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the SYNC pattern output processing in step S1546 of the connection recovery process is not performed, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. The system is designed not to perform connection recovery processing, nor to perform the communication error display processing in step S1548 of the connection recovery process. For example, the message "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side LCD display device. Please call a staff member." is not displayed in the display area of the game board side display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is disabled, and the door frame side display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d.

When the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 starts and stops displaying the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 95, the display is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in Figure 73, and all pointer updates are completed. In other words, in the scheduler update process, the screen generation schedule data is not activated, and while the screen generation schedule data is not activated, the determination in step S1540 of the connection recovery process shown in Figure 102, which is executed as one of the warning processes of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 95, proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, the transmitter If it has never been determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine terminates. However, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, meaning that there has been at least one instance where it has been determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1544. If the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, meaning that the cumulative number of times it has been determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative limit value CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546, where the SYNC pattern output process described above is performed and the routine terminates. However, if the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1), meaning that there is definitely a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548, where the communication error display process described above is performed and the routine terminates. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in the display area of the game board side display device 1600, if there is even one instance of a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, and the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative limit value CC-LMT, then the SYNC pattern output processing will always be performed, so that the connection between the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver While performing a process to restore the connection, if the cumulative number of times a connection problem has been detected between the transmitter and receiver reaches the cumulative limit CC-LMT (i.e., a connection problem has definitely occurred between the transmitter and receiver), a communication error display process is always performed. For example, a message such as "A problem has occurred with the upper tray side LCD display. Please call a staff member." is displayed in the display area of the game board side display device 1600 to notify the user, and the LOCKN signal from the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is activated.

During the interval between the start and stop of the variable display of the left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, and the start of the variable display of the left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern again, the left decorative pattern, central decorative pattern, and right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped state in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600. Therefore, as described above, the LOCKN signal from the door frame-side display receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame-side display transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is activated. This occurs when there is even one instance of a malfunction in the connection between the door frame-side display transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame-side display receiver ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times a connection problem has been detected has not reached the cumulative count limit CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to restore the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, i.e., the connection between the transmitter and receiver. On the other hand, when the cumulative number of times a connection problem has been detected between the transmitter and receiver has reached the cumulative count limit CC-LMT (i.e., a connection problem has definitely occurred between the transmitter and receiver), the communication error display process is always performed to display a message, for example, "A problem has occurred with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call a staff member," in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

When the display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern starts again (timing K2), as described above, the screen generation schedule data is being activated, so even if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, even if it has been determined at least once that there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 (i.e., the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the SYNC pattern output in step S1546 of the connection recovery process will not be displayed. The system is designed not to perform any power processing or connection restoration processing between the transmitter and receiver. Furthermore, it does not perform the communication error display processing in step S1548 of the connection restoration process. For example, the message "A malfunction has occurred in the upper tray side LCD display. Please call a staff member." is not displayed in the display area of the game board side display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d is abnormal, is disabled. The door frame side display device 460 then displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side display receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side display transmitter IC1512d.

Thus, during the interval period from when the display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern starts and stops in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 until the display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern starts again, the LOCKN signal from the door frame-side display receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame-side display transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal, is activated. On the other hand, during the period from when the display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern starts and stops in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, the LOCKN signal from the door frame-side display receiver ICSDIC0, which indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame-side display transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal, is deactivated. This is because the combination of the left, center, and right decorative symbols displayed in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 is the information of greatest interest to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state, which grants benefits to the player, will occur, when the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, even if the image of the performance drawn in the display area of the door frame-side display device 460 becomes distorted due to noise or other factors and cannot be drawn correctly until the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a fixed position, the performance is not interrupted midway to recover to a state where it can be drawn correctly. Instead, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a fixed position in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, thereby completing the drawing of the information of greatest interest to the player.

In this respect, this differs significantly from the case where the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period when the startup screen of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side display device 1600 when the power is turned on, or during the period when the game board side display device 1600 is performing a demonstration while waiting for customers. This LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a during the period when the startup screen is displayed on the game board-side display device 1600 upon power-on of the pachinko machine 1, or during the period when the machine is in a waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board-side display device 1600. It is transmitted as a request to confirm the operation of the door frame-side display device 460 to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the door frame-side display transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame-side display receiver ICSDIC0 on the display drive board 4450, i.e., between the transmitter and receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentially converted into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the two signals differentially converted into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. When the forced switching circuit 1512f is input with the two signals differentially converted into a positive signal and a negative signal by the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to transmit these two signals, and these two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the LCD module circuit 4450V on the display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is determined to be abnormal data because, as described above, its data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side display transmitter IC 1512d. Therefore, the LOCKN signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can determine that there is no problem with the display drive board 4450, assuming that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver, when a LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of LOCKN signal output request data. On the other hand, when a LOCKN signal is not input, it determines that there is a problem with the display drive board 4450, assuming there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver. It then controls the built-in sound source VDP 1512a to output a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred with the upper tray side LCD display. Please call a staff member.") to the game board side display display 1600, and also controls the built-in sound source VDP 1512a to output a notification sound (for example, "A problem has occurred with the upper tray side LCD display.") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, causing the notification sound to play from a speaker or the like installed in the door frame 3. This allows for notification through a notification image displayed in the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 and a notification sound repeatedly played from a speaker or similar device installed in the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for illumination decoration on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative circuit boards on the game board 5 may be illuminated.

Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits serial data, which is a LOCKN signal output request data, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 so that it can receive the LOCKN signal output request data. Upon receiving the LOCKN signal output request data, the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 outputs a LOCKN signal as a response signal from its LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Therefore, when a LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and thus the door frame side performance display device 460 is functioning correctly. Conversely, when a LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and therefore the door frame side performance display device 460 is functioning correctly. Furthermore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that a malfunction has occurred in the door frame-side display device 460, it can perform the communication error display process in step S1548 of the connection recovery process shown in Figure 102 as a notification process. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a detects a malfunction in the door frame-side display device 460, it can notify the hall staff of this fact by performing a notification process. Therefore, hall staff can easily check whether a malfunction has occurred in the door frame-side display device 460 before a player starts playing, and this check requires minimal effort. Consequently, malfunctions in the door frame-side display device 460 can be detected without much effort.

Furthermore, as described above, the LOCKN signal is a signal output by the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450 when it determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal. Specifically, it confirms (recovers) the connection between the door frame side performance transmitter IC1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 on the performance display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Since this signal is output to request the transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for the purpose of ), the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can output a LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 to indicate that a communication problem has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, resulting in abnormal drawing data, when it is unable to properly receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, upon receiving the LOCKN signal, outputs a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d indicating that it will start transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, thereby resolving the communication problem between the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect malfunctions in the door frame-side display device 460 caused by communication problems between image communications at an early stage, and can then instruct the door frame-side display transmitter IC 1512d to resolve these malfunctions. Therefore, by detecting and resolving malfunctions in the door frame-side display device 460, a decline in the player's motivation to play can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0, which receives images transmitted from the door frame-side performance transmitter IC1512d and outputs them to the door frame-side performance display device 460, can output a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure signal indicating that a communication failure has occurred between the door frame-side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame-side performance transmitter IC1512d, to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control control microprocessor 1511. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, which receives the LOCKN signal, controls the sound source-integrated VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to generate a message indicating that a communication failure has occurred, which is an image of the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call a staff member. The generated image can then be displayed in the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600 for notification. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect malfunctions in the door frame-side display device 460 caused by communication problems between image communications at an early stage, and notify the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 of this, allowing the player to inform the hall staff, or directly notify hall staff who happen to be passing by the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, hall staff can begin work to resolve the malfunction at an early stage after it occurs. Consequently, early detection and resolution of malfunctions in the door frame-side display device 460 can suppress a decline in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can repeatedly output a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, which is equipped on the peripheral control board 1510, if a malfunction occurs even once in the connection between the transmitter and receiver, that is, between the transmitter and receiver, during the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period), and the cumulative number of times it has been determined that a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, then it can repeatedly output a connection confirmation signal to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, which is used to activate the LOCKN signal and resolve the communication malfunction in image communication, until the cumulative number of such signals reaches the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can continuously output a connection confirmation signal only during the period when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is not executing game progression by starting and stopping the first or second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Therefore, communication problems can be resolved.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, during the period from timing K1 to timing K2 (interval period), if there is even one instance of a malfunction in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, and if the cumulative number of times it has been determined that there is a malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, then activates the LOCKN signal and signals that it will start transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to resolve the communication malfunction in image communication. When the confirmation signal is repeatedly output to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number of outputs reaches the cumulative count upper limit CC-LMT, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game and restarts the game, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped. When the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input to the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d, it stops transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0 and can output the image generated by the sound source built into the VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to the door frame side performance receiver ICSDIC0. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 will continue to output a connection confirmation signal, which is a malfunction resolution signal, only during the period when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is not executing the game by starting and stopping the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and not executing the game. This will lead to the resolution of the communication malfunction. Even if the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during periods when the display is stopped and the game is not progressing, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 to change the first or second special symbol game and restart the game, the distortion (image distortion) of the progressing effects on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be resolved each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 restarts and finishes the game (each time the interval period from timing K1 to timing K2 is reached).

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main control board 1310 (Figure 69) and a payout control board 951 (Figure 70). The main control board 1310 has a game control microprocessor, the main control MPU 1310a (Figure 69), which controls the progress of the game based on the game balls launched by the ball launching device 650 toward the game area 5a (partially formed on the game board 5) entering the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, which are start areas provided in the game area 5a. The payout control board 951 has a payout control microprocessor, the payout control MPU 952a (Figure 70), which controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands (Figures 88(a) and 88(b)), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is equipped with at least built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM). The main control built-in RAM is designed to store game-related information even after the power is cut off.

The payout control microprocessor, the payout control MPU 952a, includes at least built-in RAM (built-in payout control RAM). The built-in payout control RAM is designed to store payout-related information even after power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is further equipped with an operation switch 954 shown in Figure 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated during the period from power-on to the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 92, it outputs a RAM clear signal shown in Figure 77 to the main control microprocessor, the main control MPU 1310a, to erase the game-related information stored in the main control's built-in RAM. When the operation switch 954 is operated during the period from power-on to the payout control unit power-on processing, it outputs an RWMCL signal shown in Figure 82 to the payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal to erase the payout-related information stored in the payout control's built-in RAM. This system combines two functions: a RAM clear function that outputs to the payout control MPU 952a, and an error clearing function that, when operated after the period from power-on to the time the determination process in step S16 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 92 is performed (or the period from power-on to the time the payout control unit power-on processing is performed), outputs the RWMCL signal shown in Figure 82 to the payout control microprocessor (payout control MPU 952a) as an error clearing signal to clear an error that occurred with respect to the payout device 830, instead of outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor.

Thus, the operation switch 954, when operated during the period from power-on to the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 92, outputs the RAM clear signal shown in Figure 77 to the main control MPU 1310a, which is the game control microprocessor, to erase the game-related information stored in the main control's built-in RAM. Furthermore, when operated during the period from power-on to the payout control unit power-on processing, it outputs the RWMCLR signal shown in Figure 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal to erase the payout-related information stored in the payout control's built-in RAM. Since the system also incorporates an error clearing function, which, when operated after the period from power-on to the time the determination process in step S16 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 92 is performed (or the period from power-on to the time the payout control unit power-on processing is performed), outputs the RWMCL signal shown in Figure 82 to the payout control microprocessor (payout control MPU 952a) as an error clearing signal to clear an error that occurred with respect to the payout device 830, instead of outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a (game control microprocessor), it also has an error clearing function. Therefore, two different functions, a RAM clearing function and an error clearing function, can be provided in the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of a single operation switch 954. Thus, it is possible to provide both a RAM clearing function and an error clearing function while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input section of the panel relay board 4161 is a circuit that receives detection signals from various detection sensors arranged on the game board, such as the general prize entry sensor 4020, the first start entry sensor 4002, the second start entry sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, etc. Since the circuit configuration for receiving detection signals from each detection sensor is the same, here we will use the magnetic detection sensor 4024 as an example of a detection sensor and describe the circuit for receiving detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024.

In gaming machines, there is a persistent problem of unethical gambling practices where players manipulate the flow of game balls by bringing magnets (such as permanent magnets or electromagnets) close to the balls that have been launched into the game area, thereby attempting to gain unfair profits.

To detect such fraudulent gaming activities and deter them through light-emitting means, audible alarms, etc., a magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided, corresponding to a predetermined location in the gaming area.

The following summarizes the control mechanisms related to game progression and presentation in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of these processes. The peripheral control board 1510, based on the control signals (control commands) output by the main control board 1310, controls the display mode of the performance display device 1600 (display images such as patterns, various background images, text, and characters), as well as the display mode and operation mode of various components contributing to the performance (such as the performance operation unit 400 and movable components).

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs special symbol processing each time an interrupt occurs. This special control processing first performs the first and second start slot entry processing. This processing determines whether a game ball has entered the start slot, and if it has, it increases the number of reserved special symbols by one.

When the first and second starting gate entry processes are complete, if the processing flag is 0, the variation start process is executed. This variation start process, provided the number of held balls is 1 or more, processes the pending jackpot determinations, stores the results of these jackpot determinations (win/loss, type, etc.), and then updates the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, when the first and second starting gate entry processes are completed, if the processing flag is 1, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, based on the stored jackpot determination results and the current game state, the variation pattern (such as the variation time from the start of the variation display to the stop display) and the stopped symbols (such as the jackpot symbol and the losing symbol) of the special symbols (identification symbols) displayed on the first or second special symbol display are determined and set. After this, the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, when the first and second starting gate entry processes are completed, if the processing flag is 2, the variation process is executed. During this variation process, the variation time determined and set in the variation pattern setting process is monitored by a timer, and based on a timeout, the variation display of the special symbols on the first or second special symbol display is stopped. After this, if the result of the jackpot judgment stored in the variation start process is a jackpot, the processing selection flag is updated to "3". If the result of the jackpot judgment stored in the variation start process is not a jackpot (miss), the processing selection flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt process will restart from the variation start process.

On the other hand, when the first and second starting gate entry processes are completed, if the processing flag is 3, the jackpot game process is executed. In this jackpot game process, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated to set the type of jackpot game (e.g., number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won. Based on this, the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled. Furthermore, when the jackpot game ends, a process is performed to stop the operation of the condition device. If the type of jackpot won is a special type, the game state flag is updated to indicate that the game is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, and then the processing flag is updated to "0". In other words, in this case, the next interrupt process will restart from the variation start process.

Furthermore, multiple types of variation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbols, and when this information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, it can determine the type of performance pattern that appears on the performance display device 1600. In this embodiment, the multiple types of variation patterns can be classified into variation patterns for jackpots, variation patterns for losing reaches, and variation patterns for losing reaches. Jackpot variations are variations that occur when the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance that goes through a reach performance and then develops so that the variation display of the decorative symbols ultimately displays a confirmed jackpot symbol. Losing reach variations are variations that occur when the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss and it is determined to perform a reach based on the reach random number judgment, and the performance display device 1600 executes a performance that goes through a reach performance and then develops so that the variation display of the decorative symbols ultimately displays a confirmed losing symbol. A losing spin occurs when the jackpot judgment is a losing spin, and the reach judgment based on the reach random number does not determine whether a reach should occur. The display device 1600 executes a sequence of changes in the decorative symbols that, without going through a reach sequence, ultimately displays a losing symbol. Furthermore, the spin pattern is defined in a way that allows identification of whether it is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information, such as the results of the jackpot determination, from the main control board 1310 and references this information to enable the appearance of these decorative symbol variation patterns. Furthermore, based on the acquired game information, the peripheral control board 1510 not only displays the decorative symbol variation patterns on the performance display device 1600, but also performs controls such as changing the performance display related to the expectation level (background and hold images), changing the behavior (display and movement) of the performance operation unit 400, and operating movable members such as the rear-down movable performance unit 3100.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. Figure 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process (Figure 94: Step S114).

Now, assuming the main control program has transitioned to the special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing (Figure 94: step S114), the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a first performs the first start-out port passage processing, such as obtaining a random number for first jackpot determination from the random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, as shown in Figure 104 (step S5232), provided that the detection signal from the first start-out port sensor 4002 is ON (a ball has entered the first start-out port 2002). Furthermore, if the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 is ON (indicating a ball has entered the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number (random number for determining the second jackpot) for the second special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol hold memory area of the main control's built-in RAM. This process of passing through the second start port is then executed (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether the "Big Win Execution" flag, which indicates that the game is controlled to be in a big win state, is set (step S5235). If the "Big Win Execution" flag is set, the big win control process (step S5240a) is executed to control the game state to be in a big win state.

Furthermore, in the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in Figure 110,
- When the result of the judgment process regarding the display pattern when the first special symbol stops changing indicates either "8R probability variation jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the system controls the 8R jackpot game state by repeating an opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times, in which the large prize slot 2005 is kept open for a long period of time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005 and then closed.
- When the result of the judgment process regarding the display pattern when the second special symbol stops changing indicates a "16R probability variation jackpot", the system controls the 16R jackpot game state by repeating an opening and closing pattern (round game) 16 times, which involves keeping the large prize slot 2005 open for a long period of time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or closing it when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005.
- When the result of the judgment process regarding the display pattern when the second special symbol stops changing indicates a pattern that suggests "8R probability variation jackpot B", the system controls the 8R jackpot game state by repeating an opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times, in which the large prize slot 2005 is kept open for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005 and then closed.
- When the result of the judgment process regarding the display pattern when the second special symbol stops changing indicates a "2R regular jackpot", the system controls the 2R jackpot game state by repeating an opening and closing pattern (round game) twice, in which the large prize entry opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) and then closed.

In other words, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the above-mentioned time-saving control is performed, playing to the right is more advantageous to the player than playing to the left, and when the above-mentioned time-saving control is not performed, playing to the left is more advantageous to the player than playing to the right. In this regard, in the left-handed playing state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of game balls into the first start port 2002, only a long-playing jackpot state of up to 8 rounds (approximately 1000 game balls can be obtained) will occur.

In contrast, in the right-handed shooting state, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port 2004, there is approximately a 50% probability (distribution rate of winning symbols) of a jackpot game state with a long 16-round opening (approximately 2000 game balls can be won). Because the expected value of prize balls that can be won when a jackpot is won is higher, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be won when the game is controlled to switch to the right-handed shooting state than when it is in the left-handed shooting state.

Furthermore, in the jackpot control process, before initiating the opening control of the large prize entry point 2005, processes such as starting the operation of the condition device, resetting the spin count counter (described later), and so on are performed.

Furthermore, in the jackpot control process, after controlling the opening of the large prize entry point 2005, the high-probability flag and time-saving flag are set according to the type of jackpot that triggered the jackpot game, as shown in Figure 110.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state. It is used in the jackpot determination process shown in Figure 109, described later. It is set when the jackpot game state ends based on a jackpot that controls the probability variation after the jackpot game state (8R probability variation jackpot A, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B). It is reset when the next jackpot occurs, either in the first special symbol stop process shown in Figure 114 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

The time-saving flag is a flag that indicates that time-saving control is in operation (low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state). As shown in Figure 110, it is set when the jackpot game state (8R probability variation jackpot A, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) that triggers time-saving control (high-probability time-saving state) after the jackpot game state ends. It is reset when the next jackpot occurs by the first special symbol stop process shown in Figure 114 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown), which will be described later. Alternatively, when the low-probability time-saving state occurs and the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are consumed 100 times without a jackpot being won, it is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in Figure 114 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown), which will be described later.

The variation count counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of special symbols since the variation count counter was reset. It is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in Figure 112, which will be described later. It is updated (for example, counted up) when variations of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) occur, and is reset when a jackpot game state based on at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) is started.

Furthermore, if the "Big Win Execution" flag is not set (NO in step S5235), the next step, S5236, determines whether the "Small Win Execution" flag, indicating that the game is controlled to a small win state, is set. If the "Small Win Execution" flag is set, the small win control process (step S5240b) is executed to control the small win state. In the small win control process, the large prize entry point 2005 is opened for a specific time (e.g., 1.8 seconds).

Here, in the minor win control process (step S5240b), unlike the major win control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of the major prize entry point 2005 is performed, the setting processes for the high probability flag, time reduction flag, time reduction count counter, etc., are not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in Figure 110(a), a minor win is not determined during the major win judgment.

Furthermore, if the flag indicating that a minor win is in progress is not set (NO in step S5236), and provided that the value of the second special symbol reserve counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining the second big win stored in the second special symbol reserve memory area, is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process processing, including the lottery processing related to the display mode when the first special symbol's display stops, is executed (step S5238).

In contrast, if the value of the second special symbol reserve counter, which indicates the number of random numbers for determining the second jackpot stored in the second special symbol reserve memory area, is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol process, including the lottery process related to the display mode when the display of the second special symbol stops changing, is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played in a way that prevents the lottery for the second special symbol in reserve from being interrupted (as long as the value of the second special symbol reserve counter is not "0"), the lottery for the random numbers used to determine the second jackpot will continue uninterrupted, regardless of the reserve status of the lottery for the first special symbol (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state), the player can continuously perform the lottery (determination process) for the random number used to determine the second jackpot without interruption, simply by maintaining the practice of shooting the game balls to the right of the center mechanism 2500 (right-handed shooting).

Furthermore, the execution of the special symbol game (symbol variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is not limited to being executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol). For example, the execution of the special symbol game may be initiated in the order in which the game ball enters (passes through) the first start gate 2002 or the second start gate 2004 and a start prize is awarded. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a table that stores data that can identify the order in which start prizes were awarded, and to determine from this stored data whether to start the execution of the special symbol game using the first or second special symbol.

Figure 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first start port passage process (step S5232) described above.

Now, in the process of step S5231 described above, if the first start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and it is determined that a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, then, as shown in Figure 105, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5241, first obtains the random numbers for each of the first special symbols (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, and random numbers for variable display patterns) from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 retrieves the counter value from the main control's built-in RAM using the first special symbol hold count counter, and determines whether the number of holds for the first special symbol is its maximum value (upper limit) of "4" based on this counter value (step S5242). If, in step S5242, it is determined that the number of holds for the first special symbol is not its maximum value, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed to set the variable display of the first special symbol (the determination process for the first special symbol) to a new hold state.

Specifically, first, as the process in step S5243, the first special reserve counter is incremented (by 1). Next, as the process in step S5244, each random number obtained in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol reserve storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserve counter.

Next, the first special symbol pre-reading process is executed to perform the pre-reading effect on the first special symbol, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the pre-reading effect on the first special symbol is an effect that hints at the judgment result (or the expected value thereof) of the first special symbol before the display of the variation of the first special symbol begins. In this first special symbol pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information necessary to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the content of the effect (information regarding the win/loss for pre-reading judgment, information regarding the symbol type for pre-reading judgment, information regarding the variation pattern number for pre-reading judgment, etc.) and stores it in the corresponding memory area as information to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the judgment result of the first special symbol itself, information regarding the stopping symbol of the special symbol may be included in the command as information that hints at the type of big win game. For example, information at a stage before the final decision is made, such as the SP reach group and normal reach group among the variation patterns, and the hidden probability win group and small win group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if, in step S5242, it is determined that the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol has reached its maximum value, the variation display of the first special symbol will not be newly reserved. That is, by terminating the process without executing steps S5243 to S5245, the variation display of the first special symbol will not be newly placed into a reserved state.

Figure 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second start port passage process (step S5234) described above.

Now, in the process of step S5233 described above, if the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and it is determined that a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, then, as shown in Figure 106, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5251, first obtains the random numbers for the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, random number for second jackpot symbol, random number for second variation display pattern) from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 retrieves the counter value from the main control's built-in RAM using the second special symbol hold count counter, and determines whether the number of holds for the second special symbol is its maximum value of "4" based on this counter value (step S5252). If, in step S5252, it is determined that the number of holds for the second special symbol is not its maximum value, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed to set the variable display control (lottery for the second special symbol) for the second special symbol to a new hold state.

Specifically, first, as the process in step S5253, the second special reserve counter is incremented (by 1). Next, as the process in step S5254, each random number obtained in step S5251 is stored in the second special symbol reserve storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserve counter.

Next, the second special symbol pre-reading process is executed to perform the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol, and the process ends (step S5255). As will be described later, the second special symbol pre-reading effect is an effect that hints at the judgment result (or the expected probability thereof) of the second special symbol before the display of the second special symbol's variation begins. In this second special symbol pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information necessary to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the content of the effect (win/loss information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.), and stores it in the corresponding memory area as information to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the judgment result of the second special symbol itself, information regarding the stopping symbols of the special symbols may be included in the command as information that hints at the type of jackpot game. For example, information at a stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group and normal reach group among the variation patterns, or the hidden probability win group and minor win group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as a pre-reading command.

On the other hand, if, in step S5252, it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols has reached its maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by terminating the process without executing steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly placed into a reserved state.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 2002, and the number of reserved special symbols changes, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command (first reserved number specification command 0-4) to indicate the number of reserved special symbols and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510. Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, and the number of reserved special symbols changes, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command (second reserved number specification command 0-4) to indicate the number of reserved special symbols and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). Note that the first special symbol process, executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process, and the second special symbol process, executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process, are the same program module, differing only in the random numbers and tables used for determination. Therefore, only the first special symbol process, executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process, will be explained here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special symbol's normal processing (step S5280) involves reading a random number for determining the jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control's built-in RAM, and then performing a lottery process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol stops, based on the read random number for determining the jackpot.

2. First Special Symbol Stop Symbol Setting Process (Step S5281): Based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the first special symbol's fluctuation control is stopped, the process of determining the mode when the first special symbol's fluctuation control is stopped is performed.

3. First variation pattern setting process (step S5282) is performed based on a random number for the variation display pattern, including a lottery process for determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the variation pattern of the performance display executed on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600 in accordance with the special symbol.

4. First Special Symbol Fluctuation Processing (Step S5283): Waiting until the fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 stops.

5. First Special Symbol Stop Processing (Step S5284): Stopping the display of the first special symbol so that the display mode of the first special symbol at the time of stopping the control of the first special symbol, determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode at the time of stopping the control of the first special symbol, is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403.

Furthermore, the initial value of the first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the normal processing of the first special symbol (step S5280) should be performed.

Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the first special pattern (step S5280) described above.

When the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag indicates that the normal processing of the first special symbol should be performed, as shown in Figure 108, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines, as the process of step S5301, whether or not there is a change display for the first special symbol that is in a reserved state, based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter. If it is determined that there is a change display for the first special symbol that is in a reserved state, then as the process of step S5302, the main control MPU 1310a reads from the main control MPU built-in RAM the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the random number for first jackpot determination, the random number for first reach determination, the random number for first jackpot symbol, and the random number for first change display pattern) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control built-in RAM. Next, in steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserve counter is counted down, and the random numbers related to the display pattern when the variation display of the first special symbol stops (for example, the random number for first jackpot determination, the random number for first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot symbol, and the random number for the first variation display pattern) stored in each memory area of the first special symbol reserve memory area of the main control's built-in RAM are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol hold memory area has four memory areas (first special symbol hold memory area a to first special symbol hold memory area d), and random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start entry into the first start opening 2002 are stored sequentially from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start entry occurs while random numbers are stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) memory area. When the start condition for the variation display based on the random numbers stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out, and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4) memory area. As a result, the order in which the hold of the variation display of the first special symbol occurred is stored in a way that can be identified, and the hold of the variation display is released sequentially starting from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). Similarly, the second special symbol hold memory area has four memory areas (second special symbol hold memory area a to second special symbol hold memory area d), and stores random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a start entry into the second start opening 2004, starting from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start entry occurs while random numbers are stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) memory area. When the start condition for the variation display based on the random numbers stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read, and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the hold of the second special symbol variation display occurred to be identified and stored, and the hold of the variation display is released in order, starting from the earliest hold (the first hold to occur).

Then, as part of step S5305, a jackpot determination process is performed based on the random number for determining the first jackpot, which was read out above. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) to transition to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process terminates.

Figure 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305) described above.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current game state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), selects the high-probability jackpot determination table shown in Figure 110(A) (step S5312). If the current game state is a low-probability state (step S5311), selects the low-probability jackpot determination table shown in Figure 110(A) (step S5313). The selected jackpot determination table is then compared with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in Figure 110(A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the built-in ROM of the main control and includes a low-probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is low probability (low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state) and a high-probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state) for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). In the low-probability jackpot determination table, which is referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that a jackpot has been won, and the 65,332 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that a jackpot has been won, with each of the 65,536 types of first jackpot determination random numbers associated with each other (low probability jackpot probability; approximately "1 in 321"). In contrast, in the second special symbol process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing, the low-probability jackpot determination table, which is referenced for comparison with the second special symbol's jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number), associates the 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers so that they match the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot win, and the 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers so that they match the loss determination value indicating a loss (low-probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 321).

Furthermore, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, the 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are associated such that they match the jackpot determination value, and the 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value (high-probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 32). In contrast, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing, the 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are associated such that they match the jackpot determination value indicating a jackpot has been won, and the 63496 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the loss determination value indicating a loss (high-probability jackpot probability: approximately 1 in 32). Furthermore, the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number may have different jackpot determination values (the number of jackpot determination values may be the same, but the jackpot probability may be the same; or the number of jackpot determination values may be different, resulting in different jackpot probabilities). In this case, it is sufficient to make the jackpot determination values in at least one of the jackpot determination tables (low probability) and high probability) different (both may be different).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, after comparing the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, determines that a jackpot has been won (step S5315). If this determination is correct, it sets a jackpot flag indicating that the spin has resulted in a jackpot (step S5316), and terminates the jackpot determination process.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S5315 that a jackpot has not been won, a determination is made based on the selected jackpot determination table to see if the random number read out matches the minor win determination value, which indicates that a minor win has been won (step S5317). However, as mentioned above, in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol (process processing of the second special symbol) in this example, a random number read out that matches the minor win determination value will never be read (minor win probability: 0 out of 65536), so in step S5317, it is determined that a minor win has not been won (it is determined to be a loss).

On the other hand, if step S5317 determines that it is a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the random number used for reach determination read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination tables (not shown) are stored in the built-in ROM of the main control unit and include: a reach determination table for high-probability non-time-saving states used when the game state is high-probability non-time-saving states; a reach determination table for high-probability time-saving states used when the game state is high-probability time-saving states; and a reach determination table for low-probability states used when the game state is low-probability states (low-probability non-time-saving states).

Here, in the reach determination table during the high-probability time-saving state, the random numbers for reach determination are associated such that one type of random number for reach determination matches the reach determination value indicating a reach, and the 71 types of random numbers for reach determination match the reach determination value indicating a non-reach. However, in the reach determination table during the high-probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the speed of gameplay during the time-saving state, all 72 types of random numbers for reach determination may be made to match the reach determination value indicating a non-reach, and never match the reach determination value indicating a reach.

Furthermore, in the low-probability state's reach determination table, five types of random numbers for reach determination, including the same random numbers used in the reach determination table during the high-probability time-saving state, are associated with a reach determination value that indicates a reach, while 67 types of random numbers for reach determination are associated with a reach determination value that indicates a non-reach. Thus, in this embodiment, during the low-probability state, the reach determination value indicating a reach is higher than during the high-probability time-saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table for the high-probability non-time-saving state, five types of random numbers for reach determination, including the same random numbers used in the reach determination tables for the high-probability and low-probability states, are associated such that they match the reach determination value indicating a reach, while 67 types of random numbers for reach determination match the reach determination value indicating no reach. Thus, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating a reach is the same as in the low-probability non-time-saving state during the high-probability non-time-saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, after comparing the selected reach determination table with the random number for reach determination read in step S5302 (step S5319), determines that the result is a miss (YES in step S5120). If it does so, it sets a reach flag indicating that the change is a reach and terminates processing (step S5121).

Figure 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) described above.

When the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in Figure 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol's display stops, that is, the result of the above-mentioned jackpot determination process (step S5305). The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in Figure 110(B) and compares the random number for the first jackpot symbol read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol with the selected symbol determination table to determine the jackpot symbol as the state at which the variation control of the first special symbol stops (the symbol at which the first special symbol stops) (step S5332).

As shown in Figure 110(B), the symbol determination table for the first special symbol stores random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (in this case, a total of 200 random numbers for the first jackpot symbol) associated with each judgment result (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 110(C), the symbol determination table for the second special symbol stores random numbers for the second jackpot symbol (in this case, a total of 200 random numbers for the second jackpot symbol) associated with each judgment result (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the associated judgment result corresponding to the acquired random number for the jackpot symbol. In this example, the symbol determination table is set so that the type of jackpot determined based on the first random number for the jackpot symbol is different from the type of jackpot determined based on the second random number for the jackpot symbol. More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between a jackpot that triggers a transition to a high-probability state and a regular jackpot that does not trigger a transition to a high-probability state is the same. However, the expected value of game balls obtainable from a jackpot determined based on the second random number for the jackpot symbol is greater than the expected value of game balls obtainable from a jackpot determined based on the first random number for the jackpot symbol.

The specific gameplay and presentation details for each type of jackpot can be summarized briefly as follows:
1. After a winning combination of symbols appears on the display device 1600, the large prize slot 2103 is kept open for a long period of time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2103, the opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times to control the game to an 8R jackpot game state in which game balls can easily enter the large prize slot 2103. After this 8R jackpot game state, the game is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next jackpot game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, a battle performance (battle victory performance) in which a specific character wins is performed, and in the high-probability time-saving state, the game is controlled to a performance mode that is shown on the display device 1600 as being relatively advantageous, resulting in an 8R probability variation jackpot A.

2. After a winning combination of symbols appears on the display device 1600, the large prize slot 2103 is kept open for an extended period (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize slot 2103. This opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times, controlling the game to an 8R jackpot state where game balls can easily enter the large prize slot 2103. After this 8R jackpot state, the game is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the special symbol display is completed 100 times (or until a jackpot is won within the period until 100 displays are completed). During the execution period of the 8R jackpot state, a battle sequence in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat sequence) is performed. In the low-probability time-saving state, the game is controlled to an 8R normal jackpot state, which is indicated by the display device 1600 as being relatively unfavorable.

3. After a winning combination of symbols appears on the display device 1600, the large prize slot 2103 is kept open for an extended period (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2103. This opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated 16 times, controlling the game to a 16R jackpot state where game balls can easily enter the large prize slot 2103. After this 16R jackpot state, the game is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next jackpot state occurs. During the execution period of the 16R jackpot state, an additional challenge performance is held where a performance (success performance) is shown regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (becomes 16 rounds). After a predetermined period has elapsed since being controlled to the high-probability time-saving state, the game is controlled to a performance mode indicated on the display device 1600 as being relatively advantageous, resulting in a 16R probability variation jackpot.

4. After a winning combination of symbols appears on the display device 1600, the large prize slot 2103 is kept open for an extended period (e.g., 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large prize slot 2103. This opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times, controlling the game to an 8R jackpot state where game balls can easily enter the large prize slot 2103. After this 8R jackpot state, the game is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next jackpot state occurs. During the execution period of the 8R jackpot state, an additional challenge sequence is performed where a sequence (failure sequence) is shown regarding whether the number of rounds exceeds eight (becomes sixteen). After a predetermined period has elapsed since being controlled to the high-probability time-saving state, the game is controlled to an 8R probability variation jackpot B, where the display device 1600 indicates a relatively advantageous state.

5. After a winning combination of symbols appears on the display device 1600, the large prize slot 2103 is briefly opened (for example, 0.6 seconds) and then closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2103. This opening/closing pattern (round game) is repeated twice, controlling the game to a 2R jackpot state where it is difficult for game balls to enter the large prize slot 2103. After this 2R jackpot state, the game is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the special symbol variation display is completed 100 times (or until a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are completed). During the execution period of the 2R jackpot state, a battle sequence in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat sequence) is performed. In the low-probability time-saving state, the game is controlled to a 2R normal jackpot mode, which is indicated by the display device 1600 as being relatively unfavorable.

In the left-handed shooting state described above, the game ball does not pass through the gate section 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second start opening 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed shooting state, no game balls enter the second start opening 2004, and only game balls enter the first start opening 2002. Unless there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol, only the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 1403 is executed, and a jackpot related to the first special symbol (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) occurs. Similarly, in the right-handed shooting state described above, no game balls enter the first start opening 2002. Therefore, in the right-hand shooting state, only game balls will enter the second starting opening 2004. Unless there are reserved balls for the first special symbol, only the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol indicator 1186 will be executed, resulting in a jackpot related to the second special symbol (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot).

Furthermore, while a jackpot related to the first special symbol results in approximately 1000 game balls being dispensed after repeating the opening and closing pattern of the large prize slot 2103 for a maximum of 8 times (for example, 28.5 seconds), a jackpot related to the second special symbol allows for the dispensing of approximately 2000 game balls after repeating the opening and closing pattern of the large prize slot 2103 for a maximum of 16 times (for example, 28.5 seconds).

Furthermore, in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, if an 8R probability variation jackpot A is determined, the jackpot symbol will be set to the 8R probability variation jackpot A symbol. If an 8R normal jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol will be set to the 8R normal jackpot symbol. Also, although not shown in the diagram, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, if a 16R probability variation jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol will be set to the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol. If an 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the jackpot symbol will be set to the 8R probability variation jackpot B symbol. If a 2R normal jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbol will be set to the 2R normal jackpot symbol.

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then determines in step S5333 whether or not the minor jackpot flag is set. If, as a result, the minor jackpot flag is set in the process corresponding to step S5333 within the second special symbol process (step S5239), then the mode of the second special symbol's movement when it stops is determined to be a minor jackpot symbol (a specific symbol stopping mode) (step S5334), and then the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the minor win flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the state of the special symbol when it stops moving to a losing symbol (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337.

After the determination process for the stopping symbols has been completed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a judgment result notification command corresponding to each lottery result so that the lottery result (indicating one of the following: type of jackpot, minor win, missed reach, or miss (this may also indicate the form of the stopping symbols of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, as the process in step S5338, the process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (displaying the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in a variation and stopping them in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol (in some cases, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variation synchronized manner with the same symbol and stopped simultaneously)). For example, if a type other than a 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned. In contrast, if a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, it determines a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as any of the other symbols). Furthermore, if a missed reach is identified, the winning combination is determined to be a losing combination with a reach (a combination where the left and right decorative symbols are the same number from "0" to "9" and the middle decorative symbol is different; a missed reach combination). If a loss is identified, the winning combination is determined to be a losing combination without a reach (a combination where at least the left and right decorative symbols are different). The resulting stopped symbols are displayed on the display device 1600 when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game performance).

In any case, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to display a special display for the winning animation (special display mode) before the jackpot game begins, and to display a special display for the jackpot game after the jackpot game has started, when a win is achieved as a result of the game progressing.

Figure 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282) described above.

When the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in Figure 112, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5342) if the jackpot flag is set (step S5341), selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for jackpots if the minor jackpot flag is set (step S5343), selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for minor jackpots if the minor jackpot flag is set (step S5344), selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for reach if the reach flag is set (step S5345), and selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for misses if none of the jackpot, minor jackpot, or reach flags are set, i.e., if it is a normal miss (a miss without executing a reach animation), selects a variation pattern table (not shown) for misses (step S5347).

Then, by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol, the variation pattern to be executed is determined (step S5348). A variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 to start the determined variation pattern, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 begins (step S5349). Furthermore, once the main control MPU 1310a determines the variation pattern, it sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S5350). Finally, when the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283) (step S5355), this process ends. As a result, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 for the determined variation time, and the performance control is performed on the performance display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

Furthermore, the variation pattern table in this example has multiple variations for each determination result based on the random numbers used for jackpot determination (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number) and the random numbers used for jackpot symbols (first jackpot symbol random number, second jackpot symbol random number). In addition, each variation pattern set in the variation pattern table stores multiple variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for controlling the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), with each variation time associated with the first variation display pattern random number. However, the main control MPU 1310a compares a selected variation pattern table from among several variation pattern tables corresponding to the judgment results based on the random numbers for jackpot determination and the random numbers for jackpot symbols, with the variation display pattern random numbers read in step S5302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol. By obtaining the variation time information associated with the read variation display pattern random numbers from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. This enables the judgment processing regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The variation pattern tables are stored in the main control's built-in ROM.

However, as mentioned above, since no minor wins occur in this example, the minor win pattern table is not used. While minor wins do not occur in this example, it is possible to configure the game to include minor wins.

Furthermore, in this example's reel-reach pattern table, the type of reel-reach animation to be executed is determined by comparing a judgment value indicating which reel-reach animation to execute with a random number for the reel-reach display pattern. For example, in a non-time-saving state, 164 of the 241 random numbers for the reel-reach display pattern are set as judgment values (0-163) indicating the execution of one of the normal reel-reach animations, 59 random numbers for the reel-reach display pattern are set as judgment values (164-222) indicating the execution of one of the super reel-reach animations with a low probability of winning, and 18 random numbers for the reel-reach display pattern are set as judgment values (223-240) indicating the execution of one of the super reel-reach animations with a high probability of winning.

Furthermore, a Super Reach (SP)演出 (SP演出) has a higher probability of resulting in a jackpot than a Normal Reach演出. For players hoping for a jackpot, the execution of a Super Reach演出 increases their expectation of achieving a jackpot. In other words, such Super Reach演出 has the highest selection rate in the jackpot variation pattern table, thus increasing the player's expectation of achieving a jackpot even if a loss is ultimately displayed. However, in practice, to sufficiently increase the player's expectation of achieving a jackpot, it is necessary for high-probability pre-announcement演出 (pre-announcement演出), which is determined separately from the variation pattern, to appear (combine) during the Super Reach演出.

Furthermore, in the losing spin pattern table, which is provided in conjunction with the random numbers for determining the first jackpot and the random numbers for the first jackpot symbol and is used to determine the spin time of the first special symbol, a spin time of 12 seconds is set for both the non-shortened spin state and the shortened spin state. On the other hand, in the losing spin pattern table, which is provided in conjunction with the random numbers for determining the second jackpot and the random numbers for the second symbol and is used to determine the spin time of the second special symbol, a spin time of 0.1 seconds to 12 seconds can be set for the shortened spin state, and a spin time of 12 seconds is set for the non-shortened spin state. In this way, the spin time of the first special symbol is the same in both the shortened spin state and the non-shortened spin state, and in the shortened spin state, while the spin of the first special symbol is occurring, it encourages the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 2004 and ensures that the player has time to enter the game ball into the second start opening 2004.

Furthermore, if 0.1 seconds is selected for the variation time when the second special symbol fails, it will be suppressed that each game ball, which is launched into the game area 5a at 0.6-second intervals during a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state), will be ejected without being subjected to the lottery process.

In other words, the game balls shot to the right are supplied to the area directly above the gate section 2003. Then, when the machine is in a time-saving state (such as a high-probability time-saving state), if the game balls are received by the gate section 2003 from this area, a win as a regular symbol is obtained (for example, with a winning probability of 100%), and the movable piece involved in opening and closing the second start opening 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). This allows for control to be implemented so that, even in situations where game balls can be continuously received by the second start opening 2004 (a time-saving state where almost all game balls shot to the right of the center mechanism 2500 can be received by the second start opening 2004), the lottery for the second special symbol is successively processed with a high jackpot probability of approximately 1/32 (the probability in the high-probability state) each time game balls are received.

In this example, since game balls are launched at 0.6-second intervals when the player is operating the handle 302, in time-saving states (such as high-probability time-saving states), game balls are often received by the second start port 2004 at 0.6-second intervals. In this regard, as mentioned above, the variation pattern table for when the second special symbol fails based on the entry of game balls into the second start port 2004 can be set to an extremely short 0.1 seconds as the variation time in time-saving states (such as high-probability time-saving states). That is, in this case, when a miss is obtained, the symbol variation ends in less time than the game ball launch interval (0.6 seconds) (0.1 seconds). Therefore, even if game balls launched at 0.6-second intervals are successively received by the second start port 2004, it is suppressed that these game balls are discharged without being used for the lottery process.

Figure 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283) described above.

When the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in Figure 113, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first decrements the variation timer, which is set to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern lottery process (step S5282), by 1 as the process of step S5371. Then, when it is determined that the variation time timer becomes 0, i.e., that the lottery-determined variation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated to proceed to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), this process terminates.

Furthermore, if the variable time timer has not reached 0 despite the variable timer being decremented by 1 (step S5371), the processes in steps S5371 and S5372 will be executed each time the timer interrupt process occurs, until the variable time timer reaches 0 (until the time when the symbols should be stopped).

Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S5284) described above.

When the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in Figure 114, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, and simultaneously sets a stop display command as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, instructing the performance display device 1600 to display the derived display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol (step S5382).

Furthermore, when the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command to indicate the start of the jackpot game state (step S5387), and sets the waiting time until the start of the jackpot game state (the time for displaying that the jackpot game state has started, etc.) in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, it sets a jackpot execution flag to indicate that the jackpot game state is in progress, resets the high probability flag if it is set, resets the time reduction flag if it is set (step S5389), resets the number of fluctuations counter, and terminates this process when the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5394). In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the process in step S5235 will determine that the jackpot execution flag is set, and the jackpot game state will be executed in the jackpot control process (step S5240a) described above.

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and each command is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R probability variation jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation jackpot command, 8R probability variation jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) is set according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation jackpot command, 8R probability variation jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command). As a result, the jackpot game state effects (battle effects and bonus challenge effects) corresponding to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot start command are executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp/LED, and each speaker, etc.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5386 that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), then it is first determined whether or not the game is in a low-probability time-saving state (step S5390). If the game is in a low-probability time-saving state, it is then determined whether or not the number of special symbol variations played since the game entered the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (100 times in this case) (step S5391). That is, when the number of special symbol variations played since the game entered the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit (100 times), the condition for ending the low-probability time-saving state is met, and the time-saving function is stopped, transitioning to the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) (step S5392).

After the processing related to the time-saving function has been performed, it is determined whether or not the minor win flag is set (step S5393). If it is determined that the minor win flag is set (YES in step S5393), a minor win start command is set to indicate that the minor win game state will start (step S5394), and the waiting time until the start of the minor win game state (the time for displaying that the minor win game state will start, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, a minor win execution flag is set to indicate that the minor win game state is in progress (step S5396), and when the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the initial value of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5394), this process ends. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined in the processing of step S5236 that the minor win execution flag is set, and the minor win game state will be executed in the minor win control processing (step S5240b) described above. Incidentally, unlike when a big win is achieved, the game state does not change when a minor win occurs.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the jackpot flag nor the minor jackpot flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is considered a loss, and without performing any processing related to jackpots or minor jackpots, the process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated to its initial value, the first special symbol normal processing (step S5394). In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it will be determined that neither the jackpot execution flag nor the minor jackpot execution flag is set (steps S5235, S236), and processing related to the progress of a new game (lottery or symbol control) will be performed according to the status of the held symbols (steps S5237-S5239).

Figure 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the control process of the standard symbols and standard electric features (step S116) described above.

Now, in step S5401, if the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is ON and it is determined that a game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, then, as shown in Figure 115, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 will, as the process in step S5402, first perform gate section passage processing, such as obtaining a normal random number for a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold memory area of the RAM.

Next, in the normal symbol processing, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed depending on the normal symbol processing flag.

1. Ordinary random numbers stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are read, and based on the read ordinary random numbers, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode when the variation control of the ordinary symbols stops (Step S5403).
2. A process to determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbols displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402, based on the ordinary symbol variation random number, is performed (step S5404).
3. Ordinary symbol variation processing (step S5405) which waits until the variation display of the ordinary symbols on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 stops.
4. A normal symbol stop process (step S5406) that stops the display of the normal symbols so that the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped, determined based on the result of a lottery process regarding the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402.
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the state when the control of the regular symbols stops indicates a "regular symbol win", the regular electric mechanism opening process (step S5407) is executed to control the movable piece to open, enabling the acceptance of game balls into the second start opening 2004.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the above-mentioned normal symbol processing (step S5403) should be performed.

Figure 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate passage process (step S5402) described above.

Now, in the process of step S5401 described above, if the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is ON and it is determined that a game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, then, as shown in Figure 116, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, in the process of step S5411, first obtains the counter value from the normal hold count counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it determines whether the number of normal symbols held is its maximum value of "4".

In step S5411, if it is determined that the number of reserved regular symbols is not at its maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed to set the regular symbol variation display control to a reserved state. Specifically, in step S5412, the regular symbol reservation counter is incremented (by 1). Next, in step S5413, the regular random number and the regular symbol variation random number are obtained from the random number counter. Then, in step S5414, each of the obtained random numbers is stored in the regular symbol reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, corresponding to the counter value obtained by the regular symbol reservation counter.

However, if, during the process in step S5411, it is determined that the number of reserved regular symbols has reached its maximum value, the variable display control for the regular symbols will not be newly reserved. In other words, by not executing steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control for the regular symbols will not be newly placed into a reserved state.

Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the standard pattern (step S5403) described above.

When the above-mentioned normal pattern process flag indicates that the normal pattern normal processing should be performed, as shown in Figure 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines, as the process of step S5421, whether or not there is a variable display control for the normal pattern in the pending state based on the counter value of the normal pending number counter. If it is determined that there is a variable display control for the normal pattern in the pending state, then as the process of step S5422, the main control MPU 1310a reads from the RAM the random number stored in the earliest memory area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the normal pattern (for example, normal random number, normal pattern variable random number) stored in the normal pattern pending memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Next, in steps S5423 and S5424, the normal hold counter is counted down, and the random numbers (normal random numbers, normal symbol variation random numbers) related to the display mode when the variation display of the normal symbols stops, stored in each memory area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the normal symbol hold memory area has four memory areas, numbered 1 to 4. Random numbers extracted in response to the passage of a game ball through the gate unit 2003 are stored sequentially starting from the first (earliest) memory area. When a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 while a random number is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) memory area. When the start condition for the variation display based on the random number stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read, and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4) memory area. This allows for the identification and storage of the order in which the normal symbol variation display control holds occurred, and the variation display control holds are released sequentially, starting from the earliest (most frequently occurring) hold.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal symbol win determination table (not shown) for the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state) if the current game state is a time-saving state (step S5426). If the current game state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), it selects a normal symbol win determination table (not shown) for the non-time-saving state (step S5427). The selected normal symbol win determination table is then compared with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5428).

The normal ball win determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a and includes a normal ball win determination table for when the game state is in time-saving mode (high probability time-saving mode) and a normal ball win determination table for when the game state is not in time-saving mode (low probability non-time-saving mode, high probability non-time-saving mode). In the normal ball win determination table for when the game state is in time-saving mode, which is referenced for comparison with normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers are associated with each other in such a way that they match the normal ball win determination value, which indicates that a normal ball win has been achieved, and do not match the normal ball loss determination value, which indicates that a normal ball loss has been achieved. In this way, in time-saving mode, when a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a normal ball win is always achieved, and the movable piece is opened to allow the game ball to be received into the second start opening 2004. It's also acceptable to set the normal random number generation to match the normal random number generation hit threshold, rather than all 255 types.

Furthermore, in the normal random number win determination table during non-time-saving mode, which is referenced for comparison with normal random numbers, none of the 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal random number win determination value, which indicates that a normal random number win has been achieved. Instead, each of the normal random numbers is associated with a normal random number miss determination value, which indicates that a normal random number miss has been achieved. Thus, during non-time-saving mode, even if a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, a normal random number win will not be achieved, and therefore the movable piece 2106 will not be opened to allow the game ball to be received into the second start opening 2004. However, as mentioned above, it is also possible to allow winning with a regular symbol even in the non-time-saving state. In this case, the winning probability may be lower than in the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and when the result of the regular symbol lottery is a win, the movable piece of the second start opening 2004 may be opened for a shorter time than in the time-saving state, for example, for 2 seconds, to allow the game ball to be received into the second start opening 2004, and then moved forward again to prevent the game ball from being received into the second start opening 2004.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if it determines that it is a regular symbol win based on the comparison between the selected regular symbol win determination table and the regular random number read in step S5422 of the regular symbol normal processing (step S5429), sets a regular symbol win flag indicating that the variation has been awarded a regular symbol win (step S5430), and then determines the regular symbol win symbol as the mode at which the variation control of the regular symbol stops (the regular symbol that stops) (step S5431). On the other hand, if it determines that it is a loss based on the comparison between the selected regular symbol win determination table and the regular random number read in step S5422 of the regular symbol normal processing, it determines the regular symbol loss symbol as the mode at which the variation control of the regular symbol stops (the regular symbol that stops) (step S5432). Then, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated (step S5433) to initiate the process to determine the normal symbol variation time (step S5404), this process terminates.

Furthermore, while the main control MPU 1310a is performing this control, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby understanding the game status at each stage within the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing (received command analysis processing (step S1022)), and enabling the execution of effects corresponding to that game status.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether a starting win has occurred. If so, it performs control related to the hold display and pre-announcement effects corresponding to the starting win. Then, based on the determined game status, it updates the process flag to execute one of the following: waiting for a variation pattern specification command, starting the variation of the effect symbols, processing during the variation of the effect symbols, stopping the variation of the effect symbols, displaying a jackpot, processing during jackpot gameplay, or processing the jackpot ending effect.

Waiting for Variation Pattern Specification Command: While waiting for a variation pattern command related to the variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the system controls the effects (such as demo effects) when the symbols are not in a variation state and no control related to a jackpot is being performed. Upon receiving a variation pattern command related to the variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process.

The process for initiating symbol variation is as follows: Based on variation pattern commands, various effects (such as effect patterns and pre-announcement effects) during the symbol variation period are determined, and the variation of decorative symbols is controlled to begin based on the determined effects. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation process. Note that many of the variation patterns (effect patterns) that stop on a winning symbol are prepared in pairs with variation patterns (effect patterns) that stop on a losing symbol, and when these function as the same variation pattern (effect pattern), effects are provided depending on whether a winning symbol or a losing symbol appears. Therefore, when describing the variation patterns (presentation patterns) below, unless otherwise specified, "predetermined variation patterns" or "specific variation patterns" refer to both "predetermined variation patterns (specific variation patterns) that stop on a winning symbol" and "predetermined variation patterns (specific variation patterns) that stop on a losing symbol." In both cases, the presentation progresses in the same manner, leading to a branching point where either a winning symbol or a losing symbol appears.

Processing during symbol change: This process controls the start of various effects determined in the symbol change start process, and when the change time ends, it updates the value of the process flag to a value corresponding to the symbol change stop process.
Symbol variation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command instructing all symbols to stop (symbol confirmation command), the variation of decorative symbols is stopped and the display result (stopped symbols) is derived and displayed. If the decorative symbols stop at a winning symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the winning display processing. If the decorative symbols stop at a losing symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern specification command reception waiting processing.

Jackpot display processing: This controls the visual effects (such as the display effect that notifies the jackpot on the display device 1600) during the period from when the decorative symbols stop on the jackpot symbols until the jackpot game begins. After this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the jackpot game.

Jackpot Game Processing: This controls various effects during the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the process flag value is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot ending effect processing.

Jackpot Ending Animation Processing: The animation display device 1600 controls the animations (such as display animations that inform the player that the jackpot game state has ended) during the period between the end of the jackpot game state and the start of the variation-allowed state. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern specification command reception waiting process.

Figure 118 shows the determination table T1 of the effect patterns (effect variations) that are referenced in the effect symbol variation start process when the game is in a normal play state.
As shown in Figure 118, in the determination table T1, each of the variation numbers 1 to 22, indicated by the variation pattern command, is associated with a corresponding performance pattern (variation performance). Therefore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a, it determines the performance pattern (variation performance) associated with the variation pattern command based on the determination table T1, and controls the system to start the variation of the decorative symbols based on the determined performance pattern (variation performance).

Furthermore, the performance patterns (variable performances) do not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation numbers indicated by the variation pattern command. For example, multiple performance patterns (variable performances) may be associated with a single variation number indicated by the variation pattern command, and one of these performance patterns (variable performances) may be determined based on the performance lottery or game status. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment also allows multiple performance patterns to be associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

Furthermore, as will be discussed later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after determining the performance pattern (variation performance), performs a notification lottery (notification performance determination process) based on the jackpot judgment result, symbol type, and variation pattern. It also controls the notification performance that was selected in the notification lottery to appear at a predetermined timing during the determined performance pattern (variation performance) (processing during performance symbol variation). This allows for the combination of multiple performance contents, and the appearance patterns of these elements suggest the likelihood of a jackpot symbol appearing.

Traditionally, such combined effects have included the appearance and execution of multiple instances of the same specific pre-announcement effect (for example, a timer effect) while a single effect pattern (a variation effect) is running, with the expectation that this would maintain the enjoyment of the game. However, since pre-announcement effects can only be combined when the probability of a winning symbol appearing is high, the frequency of multiple timer effects running while a single effect pattern (a variation effect) is running is naturally low, making it difficult to sufficiently enhance the enjoyment of the game.

As will be explained later, a "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect that appears during the execution of an effect pattern (variable effect). This effect is executed as a countdown display, showing a count from a first predetermined value (e.g., "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (e.g., "0 seconds") leading up to the timing of the predetermined effect, or as a waiting display (e.g., preparing) before the countdown display begins. In other words, in this case, if the timer effect starts with a countdown display from the first predetermined value (e.g., countdown), it is guaranteed that some kind of effect will occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Alternatively, if the timer effect targets an effect that produces either a relatively unfavorable effect (an effect with low expectation) or a favorable effect (an effect with high expectation) for the player (e.g., a conversation予告 or cut-in A, B), it is guaranteed that a favorable effect result will occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the case of a timer effect (especially a timer effect on the pre-announcement side executed as a result of a pre-announcement lottery), it is desirable to keep the identity of the effect being targeted a secret, at least at the time the countdown display begins. Furthermore, the "target of the timer effect" refers to the effect that appears when the countdown display from a first predetermined value (e.g., a countdown) reaches a second predetermined value (e.g., "0 seconds"). In the timer effect, the countdown display is performed in preparation for the timing of the occurrence of this target effect.

In this embodiment, the "timer effect" displays the elapsed time since the count started to two decimal places, accurately showing the number of seconds. However, it is not necessary to execute the effect as such a timer effect; any counting effect that displays a count up or count down is acceptable, and it does not need to accurately show the elapsed time (seconds, etc.) since the count started.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (preview-side timer effect) which is an effect that appears only when the preview lottery is won, the timer effect (variation-side timer effect) which is pre-built as an effect of the effect pattern (variation effect) determined based on the judgment table T1 can also be executed. In other words, in this case, the count effect display is executed not only as the preview-side timer effect, which is executed as "an effect of the preview effect that functions to increase the probability of winning a jackpot for the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command," but also as "an effect of the effect pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command." This makes it possible to display the count effect (timer effect) without unnecessarily increasing the probability of winning a jackpot from the probability shown by the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command (increasing the probability of winning by fulfilling the condition of "winning the preview lottery"). For example, if the probability of winning a jackpot when a specific animation pattern determined based on a variation pattern command appears is "20%", then if the timer animation on the preview side is also executed, the probability of winning a jackpot will increase due to the combined animation function, for example, to "40%", which would necessitate a lower frequency of appearance. However, if the variation-side timer animation is executed as part of the animation content of the specific animation pattern itself, it is possible to execute the timer animation while maintaining a jackpot probability of "20%" (it can appear simply by selecting a specific variation pattern), thus maintaining a suitable frequency of appearance.

Furthermore, in the judgment table T1, the probability of winning a jackpot when a performance pattern (variation performance) appears differs depending on the variation number (and furthermore, the performance pattern), and generally, the probability of winning a jackpot tends to increase as the variation number increases. For example, in the performance patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), a variation-side timer performance is executed with "conversation予告" as the target of the performance content, but the appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6) > variation number 9 (10) > variation number 17 (18), while the probability of winning a jackpot when it appears is set to be variation number 5 (6) < variation number 9 (10) < variation number 17 (18). Furthermore, for the sake of explanation, only the judgment table referenced during normal gameplay will be detailed here. However, the judgment tables referenced during low-probability and high-probability time-saving states also include performance patterns (count fluctuation patterns) in which the variable timer performance can be executed as part of the performance content itself, and these can appear with a different probability than in normal gameplay.

Furthermore, in the judgment table T1, while variation numbers 3 to 6 are all the same in that the same normal reach animation is performed, variation numbers 5 and 6 differ from variation numbers 3 and 4 in that a variation-side timer animation targeting the dialogue予告 (dialogue announcement) may be performed. Also, while variation numbers 7 to 14 are all the same in that the same character reach animation is performed, variation numbers 9 and 10 have a variation-side timer animation targeting the dialogue予告 (dialogue announcement), variation numbers 11 and 12 have a variation-side timer animation targeting cut-in A, and variation numbers 13 and 14 differ in that both the dialogue announcement and cut-in A are performed, and a variation-side timer animation targeting them may also be performed. Furthermore, while variations 15 through 22 all feature the same SP reach animation, variations 17 and 18 differ in that they execute a timer animation targeting the dialogue予告 (dialogue announcement), variations 19 and 20 execute a timer animation targeting cut-in B, and variations 21 and 22 may execute both the dialogue announcement and cut-in B, as well as a timer animation targeting both. It should be noted that the probability of a big win is higher when the timer animation targeting cut-ins A and B is executed than when the timer animation targeting the dialogue announcement is executed, and even higher when the timer animation targeting both the dialogue announcement and cut-ins A and B is executed.

Furthermore, a "conversation予告" (conversation announcement) is an effect that can appear relatively early after the execution of a performance pattern (the variation of decorative symbols), and often results in a relatively low level of expectation. In contrast, cut-ins A and B are effects that can appear relatively later after the execution of a performance pattern (the variation of decorative symbols), and often result in a relatively high level of expectation (or, at least, always result in a relatively high level of expectation). Therefore, the appearance rate (probability of execution) of "conversation announcements" is set to be higher than other effects with higher expectations (such as cut-ins A and B, or the later-described actions A and B of the mechanical parts). Also, the "cut-ins" that appear as part of the variation performance are executed in a way that corresponds to cut-in A, which appears as part of the announcement effect, in character reaches, whereas in SP reaches, they are executed in a way that corresponds to cut-in B, not cut-in A, which appears as part of the announcement effect.

Furthermore, in the judgment table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in Figure 118, the performance content (performance pattern) is assigned as a variable-side timer performance to multiple variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22). Then, when the variation pattern is a predetermined type such as a shortened variation or a normal reach performance with low expectation (for example, variation numbers 1-6), the count performance display as a notification-side timer performance is prevented from being awarded (increasing the premium level), thereby suitably ensuring an increase in expectation when the notification-side timer performance appears. However, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a variable-side timer performance (count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22), the proportion of the variation pattern corresponding to the predetermined type (for example, variation numbers 1-6) is lower compared to cases where it is not such a count variation pattern.

Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) are available for the variable timer effect to be executed. However, only 2 of these variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) (which can be set to 0) fall under the predetermined categories (variation numbers 1-6, etc.), so the matching ratio is "2/14". In contrast, 8 variation patterns (variation numbers 1-4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are available for the variable timer effect not to be executed. Of these, 4 variation patterns (variation numbers 1-4) fall under the predetermined categories (variation numbers 1-6, etc.), so the matching ratio is "4/8".

In this configuration, when the content of a variation pattern is such that it can perform a count display (variation-side timer display) (count variation pattern), the proportion of times it is judged that the count display (preview-side timer display) cannot be performed as part of the preview display is lower than when the variation pattern does not perform a variation-side timer display. Therefore, it becomes possible to encourage the appearance of multiple count displays within a single display pattern (variation display) without unnecessarily increasing the expectation level and lowering the frequency of appearance.

As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the performance pattern (variation performance) determined in the performance symbol variation start process is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22), the appearance rate of the notification-side timer performance differs depending on which count variation pattern is selected. For example, as shown in Figure 118, when the performance patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the notification-side timer performance does not appear at all; when the performance patterns corresponding to variation numbers 9-14 are executed, the notification-side timer performance can appear with a moderate probability; and when the performance patterns corresponding to variation numbers 17-22 are executed, the notification-side timer performance can appear with a high probability.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned timer-based notification effect may also appear with a low probability when the performance patterns corresponding to variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed. Also, even when any of the performance patterns corresponding to variation numbers 15 to 22, which have a high probability of triggering the above-mentioned timer-based notification effect, are executed, in reality, the performance pattern that results in a jackpot has a higher probability of triggering the above-mentioned timer-based notification effect than the losing pattern, and variation number 22 has an even higher probability of triggering it than variation number 16.

In this configuration, the proportion of the count display being executed as part of the予告演出 (preview timer effect) differs depending on whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (e.g., variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (e.g., variation number 22). Therefore, even among the above-mentioned count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22), where the proportion of multiple count displays appearing within a single effect pattern (variation effect) is high, it becomes possible to further increase the proportion of multiple count displays appearing depending on the type of pattern, thus maintaining a favorable level of enjoyment in the game.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even for performance patterns that display the same type of reach (e.g., character reach, SP reach), the proportion of appearances of the notification-side timer performance within the execution period of the performance pattern (the proportion of times the notification lottery determines that the notification-side timer performance will be executed) is higher in performance patterns that include the variable-side timer performance as part of the performance content (e.g., variable numbers 17-22) compared to performance patterns that do not include the variable-side timer performance as part of the performance content (e.g., variable numbers 15, 16). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to make two timer performances (variable-side timer performance and notification-side timer performance) appear within a single performance pattern by requiring only the expected value of one notification-side timer performance to be won in the notification lottery. Consequently, the opportunity for a double timer performance can be realized without unnecessarily increasing the expected value of the jackpot.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even when the performance pattern (variation performance) determined in the performance symbol variation start processing is a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22), the display of the count (form and color of the count numbers, etc.) differs between the variation-side timer performance (variation-side count performance display) where "conversation予告" is the performance target and the variation-side timer performance (variation-side count performance display) where "cut-in" is the performance target. That is, in this case, even when performance patterns with the same reach performance content (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) are executed, by checking the display of the count in the variation-side timer performance (variation-side count performance display), combined with the fact that "the appearance rate of the announcement-side timer performance differs depending on which count variation pattern is being used," it becomes possible to recognize and anticipate the likelihood of the announcement-side timer performance appearing.

Furthermore, regarding the form of the count display that appears in the preview-side timer effect (preview-side count display), regardless of whether the target of the effect is the same (conversation preview, cut-in), it may be different from (or at least different from) the form of the count display that appears in the variation-side timer effect (variation-side count display) (conversation preview, cut-in), or it may be the same as (or at least the same as) the form of the count display that appears in the variation-side timer effect (variation-side count display), or it may be the same as the form of the same effect (or at least the same as one of them).

However, regarding the count display executed as a pre-announcement timer effect (pre-announcement count display), it is beneficial to ensure that it is executed in a common manner regardless of the type of effect being shown, thereby making the player aware that a pre-announcement timer effect with a relatively high expectation level is appearing and increasing their sense of anticipation. In this sense, it is more desirable that the pre-announcement timer effect differs from any of the count display modes (conversation pre-announcement, cut-in) that appear in the variable-side timer effect (variable-side count display). For the common manner of the pre-announcement timer effect (pre-announcement count display) mentioned above, multiple modes with different levels of expectation (e.g., blue count, red count, etc.) may be provided, and one of these may be executed.

Furthermore, to more effectively recognize that the pre-announcement timer effect is being executed, it is desirable to make the counting speed (for example, the speed at which the numbers change during count-up or count-down) different between the count display when the pre-announcement timer effect is being executed and when the variable timer effect is being executed. In such a configuration, even during the period when the count display is progressing after the timer effect has started, players can focus on the counting speed of the timer effect, fostering interest in whether the relatively less promising variable timer effect or the relatively more promising pre-announcement timer effect is being executed. This effectively maintains the enjoyment of the game during the timer consumption period.

Furthermore, in the variable timer effect, depending on the effect target (conversation予告, cut-in), the count display can be varied depending on whether it is a cut-in (a speed relatively close to (or the same as) the count speed of the preview timer effect, or a speed relatively different from the preview timer effect (conversation予告). This will add interest by making it more difficult to determine whether the preview timer effect is running or not. Also, while the variable timer effect (or preview timer effect) displays the count by repeatedly showing and erasing the count numbers, the preview timer effect (or variable timer effect) may display the count by continuously showing the count numbers.

With this configuration, when the count display for the variable timer effect and the count display for the notification timer effect are executed simultaneously, it becomes easy to determine whether or not the notification timer effect is running, which is expected to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In this regard, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment sets up multiple selectable animation patterns for the variable timer animation (count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22), where the start or end timing of the count display (total count or time required to consume all counts) differs. When a variable pattern corresponding to the variable timer animation is acquired, one of the above multiple animation patterns is determined based on a random number for the animation, thereby differentiating the ease of simultaneous execution of the variable timer animation count display and the予告 (pre-announcement) timer animation count display (for example, overlapping is more likely when the total count is larger). This adds an element of interest by making it easier to determine whether or not the pre-announcement timer animation is running.

In this embodiment, multiple performance patterns with different start or end timings for the count display (total count or time required to consume all counts) are prepared for a single variation pattern (the target of the timer performance and the content of the reach performance are the same). However, it is also possible to prepare multiple variation patterns that are different from each other, with different start or end timings for the count display (total count or time required to consume all counts) (however, the type of performance targeted by the timer performance and the type of reach performance executed as the content of the variation pattern are the same for each performance pattern), and establish a one-to-one correspondence.

Furthermore, by making the displayed count (total count) different for the variable timer effect and the pre-announcement timer effect, or by making the selection rate for the same specific count display different for the variable timer effect and the pre-announcement timer effect, it becomes possible to vary the difficulty in determining whether or not the pre-announcement timer effect is running, thereby adding interest.

Furthermore, if the timer effect on the pre-announcement side is displayed as a countdown, while the timer effect on the reel side is displayed as a countup, it will be possible to definitively determine whether or not the pre-announcement timer effect is running, which is expected to significantly improve the enjoyment of the game. Also, if the timer effect on the pre-announcement side is displayed as a countdown, while the timer effect on the reel side targeting specific effects (e.g., dialogue pre-announcements) is displayed as a countup, and the timer effect on the reel side targeting effects other than specific effects (e.g., cut-ins) is displayed as a countdown, the difficulty in determining whether or not the pre-announcement timer effect is running will vary depending on the effect, adding to the game's appeal.

Furthermore, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a in this embodiment controls the variable timer effect and the予告 (preview) timer effect so that they either use the same effect as their target or use different effects as their target. When the variable timer effect and the preview timer effect use the same effect (for example, a conversation preview), the probability of a jackpot being lower is set to be higher compared to when they use different effects. Even when the variable timer effect and the preview timer effect use the same effect (for example, a conversation preview), the end timing of each count display is made different.

In other words, in this case, even if the same animation (e.g., a conversation予告) is the target of both the variable timer animation and the予告 timer animation, one of them will reach a predetermined value and end first, while the other's count display will continue. Therefore, at this point, it appears as if different animations are being presented (the timer animation is being executed in a manner that is relatively more promising). Subsequently, the other count display, which had been continuing, will also reach a predetermined value and end in a manner that clearly indicates it is also presenting the same animation (e.g., a conversation予告). Therefore, even if the first timer animation to end reveals that the conversation予告, which is relatively less promising, is the target, the expectation that a different animation that may appear later is being presented (the timer animation is being executed in a manner that is relatively more promising) is maintained, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the same effect (for example, a conversation予告) is used for both the variable timer effect and the予告 timer effect, it is desirable to display separate count completion indicators (for example, "Count Success!", "Chance UP!", etc.) when the variable timer effect reaches a predetermined value and when the予告 timer effect reaches a predetermined value.

More specifically, the "Conversation Announcement" sequence, which is executed as either a variation-side or announcement-side effect, is used as the target for both the variation-side timer effect and the announcement-side timer effect within a single effect pattern. In this case, the count display for the variation-side timer effect and the count display for the announcement-side timer effect will progress simultaneously. However, the variation-side timer effect's count display progresses in accordance with specific variation-side effects that occur as a variation-side effect related to the "Conversation Announcement" (such as "Count Success!" or effects that coincide with the appearance of the Conversation Announcement), while the announcement-side timer effect's count display progresses in accordance with specific announcement-side effects that occur as an announcement-side effect related to the "Conversation Announcement" (such as "Chance UP!" or a timer end display that appears at the start of the Conversation Announcement (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect)). This results in separate count end displays appearing at different timings.

Incidentally, the dialogue announcement and cut-in effects are required to be executed whenever they are targeted by the variable timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, since dialogue announcements and cut-ins can be executed in multiple forms with varying levels of expectation, when they are targeted by the variable timer effect, they must appear in the form with the relatively highest expectation when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, it is desirable to pre-incorporate the effects targeted by the variable timer effect as part of the effect content of the above-mentioned effect pattern (variation effect), so that the variable timer effect and the effect targeted by it (the form with the relatively highest expectation) can appear simply by executing that effect pattern. However, alternatively, it is also possible to control the system so that when the variable timer effect is executed, the effect targeted by it (the form with the relatively highest expectation) is always selected in the announcement lottery.

Furthermore, if the dialogue preview and cut-in effects are not included in the variable timer effect, the preview lottery described below will determine not only whether or not to include them as preview effects, but also in what form (relatively high or low expectation) they should appear. Based on the result of this determination, control over their appearance will be implemented.

The following summarizes the process for determining the performance pattern using Figure 118.
In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives commands such as the variation pattern command and the symbol type command from the main control MPU 1310a, it first refers to a judgment table corresponding to the current game state based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command and the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command. For example, if the performance pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it becomes possible to introduce a bias (expected value) in the probability of a bonus round or the number of rounds in a jackpot game state when a particular performance pattern appears.

Next, if multiple performance patterns (such as multiple performance patterns with different start or end timings for the count display that appears in the variable timer performance) are available as corresponding performance patterns for the variable number, one of the multiple performance patterns with different start or end timings for the count display will be selected based on whether or not a jackpot is determined. In this case, if a jackpot is determined, the performance pattern is set so that the probability of the count display starting or ending later increases. This creates a tendency for the jackpot symbols to appear more frequently as the start or end timing of the count display becomes later.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selects a performance pattern from among multiple performance patterns that is set so that the variable-side timer performance does not appear, even if a count fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22) is acquired when special performance conditions are met.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the performance pattern that appears during the symbol variation (the performance from the start to the stop of the decorative symbol variation) is selected, it determines what kind of additional (combined) pre-announcement performances to execute within the execution period of the selected performance pattern (pre-announcement lottery).

Figure 119 shows an example of a sound definition table when implementing a process to output various notification sounds (dispensing notification sounds and abnormal notification sounds), excluding special effects sounds, only on a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) out of a finite number of available channels, using a fixed-channel sound control method. This sound definition table manages the definitions for playback priority, initial left/right pan values, initial up/down pan values, initial volume value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting for each sound name. For the sake of explanation, only the definitions for notification sounds 1-7 are shown here; the definitions for other notification sounds and special effects sounds are omitted. Note that, in addition to the fixed-channel definition method, it is also possible to use an automatic channel definition method for each channel other than channel X to which the notification sound is assigned.

Priority is a parameter used to determine which of multiple notification sounds to assign to channel X for output when each of the output conditions is met. Notification sounds with a higher priority value will be assigned to channel X and output regardless of the assignment status of notification sounds with lower priority values. As will be explained later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound that was assigned to channel X first will take precedence, and will be assigned to channel X and output after the output of that notification sound has finished.

The initial left/right pan setting represents the initial sound image localization position of the left and right speakers, which are the combination of the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left/right pan setting during sound playback, a difference in volume is created between the left and right speakers, allowing the sound image to be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, setting it to "0x00" indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) will output sound. For example, setting it to "0x80" means that the volume difference between the left and right speakers, which are the combination of the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R, will be 0, and the sound image will be localized in the center between the left and right speakers. For example, setting it to "0xFF" indicates that output will only come from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value for vertical panning represents the initial sound image localization position of the upper and lower speakers, such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). By dynamically changing the vertical panning setting during sound playback, a difference in volume is created between the upper and lower speakers, allowing the sound image to be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. For example, setting it to "0x00" indicates that only the pair of upper speakers 573 will output sound. Setting it to "0x80" means that the volume difference between the upper and lower speakers (composed of these combinations) becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center between the upper and lower speakers. For example, setting it to "0xFF" indicates that only the pair of lower speakers 921 will output sound.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback and can be set within a range, for example, from "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier used to distinguish each sound as described above. The playback type setting indicates whether the target sound is played repeatedly in loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the diagram) or played once in 1-shot playback (corresponding to "1-SHOT" in the diagram). The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is played in mono or stereo.

Figure 120 is a table showing the notification content, notification manner, notification duration, and conditions for termination (release conditions) for each type of notification sound exemplified in Figure 119. In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, a finite notification duration is set for each notification sound. This is a measure to effectively utilize a single channel X by keeping it as an idle channel as possible and saving subsequent notification sound output.

As shown in Figure 120, notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) indicates that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 has detected magnetism (a state in which there is a high probability that fraudulent activity using magnets is being performed). The notification method involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Beep beep, magnetism detected," a display within the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 (for example, "Magnetic field detected"), and illumination of various lamps (light-emitting devices) installed on the door frame 3 and game board 5. Regarding the notification time, the loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound "Beep beep, magnetism detected" terminates 60 seconds after detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (equivalent to 6 repetitions of the notification sound), while the display within the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 and the illumination of the various lamps continue until the release condition, "power re-energized," is met.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly), notification sound 2 (vibration anomaly), which notifies that vibration has been detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (a state in which there is a high probability that fraudulent activity such as hitting is taking place), and notification sound 3 (big prize anomaly), which notifies that detection has been made by the count sensor 4005 (first big prize sensor or second big prize sensor) even though the machine is not in a big prize game state (a state in which the big prize slot is open) (a state in which there is a high probability that fraudulent activity is taking place, such as forcibly opening a closed big prize slot to allow game balls to enter), are all considered to belong to the first notification group when there is a high probability that some kind of fraudulent activity has taken place. For the notification sounds belonging to this first notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and release conditions are all set to be the same.

For example, in the case of notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), the notification method involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Buzz buzz, vibration detected," a display within the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600 (for example, "vibration detected"), and the illumination of various lamps (lighting devices) installed on the door frame 3 and game board 5. The notification time is 60 seconds (equivalent to 6 repetitions of the notification sound) from the time of detection by the vibration sensor 2405, after which the loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound ends. However, the display within the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600 and the illumination of the various lamps will continue until the release condition, "power restart," is met. Furthermore, in the case of notification sound 3 (anomaly in a big win), the notification method involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Beep beep, an anomaly in a big win has been detected," a display within the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Anomaly in a big win has been detected"), and the illumination of various lamps (light-emitting devices) installed on the door frame 3 and game board 5. The notification time is 60 seconds (equivalent to 6 repetitions of the notification sound) from the time of detection by the count sensor 4005, after which the loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound ends. However, the display within the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600 and the illumination of the various lamps continue until the release condition, "power restart," is met.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, the display within the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 employs different display modes for each of the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. However, the illumination of the various lamps (light-emitting devices) installed on the door frame 3 and game board 5 employs the same illumination mode (it is not necessary to illuminate all of the lamps) for each of the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. Furthermore, the notification sounds subject to loop processing employ a combination of sequential output of an alarm sound, such as "buzz buzz," used in any of the notification sounds 1 to 3, which serves to indicate that the notification belongs to the first notification group (a state where fraudulent activity is highly likely to have occurred), and a message sound (unique sound) that serves to indicate individual identification of which notification content it is. The alarm sound consists of a monotonous tone to convey a warning meaning in tense fraudulent situations, while the message sound should preferably consist of a variety of sounds to clearly distinguish it from other notification sounds.

In other words, when notifying about events belonging to the first notification group (a state where fraudulent activity is highly likely to have occurred), it is more important to expedite the initial response of the hall to the fraudulent activity than to identify which notification type it is. In this regard, with the above configuration, since it is possible to recognize that the event belongs to the first notification group (a state where fraudulent activity is highly likely to have occurred) simply by outputting a "buzzing" sound or a unique lighting pattern of various lamps (lighting devices) for the first notification group, it is expected that the initial response of the hall to the fraudulent activity will be expedited. Furthermore, since a message sound indicating the notification type is output following the "buzzing" sound, and this is displayed within the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, it is expected that the hall's response after the initial action will also be carried out smoothly.

On the other hand, notification sound 4 (door open) is used to notify that the door frame 3 has been detected as open relative to the main frame 4 by the door frame open switch 618 (meaning that while there is a possibility of fraudulent activity by opening the door, there is also a possibility that the door has been opened due to an abnormal response measure taken by the hall). The notification method involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong," a display within the display area of the game board-side performance display device 1600 (for example, "Door is open"), and the illumination of various lamps (lighting devices) installed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Furthermore, regarding the notification time, the loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong" terminates 30 seconds after detection by the door frame release switch 618 (equivalent to three repetitions of the notification sound). However, the display within the display area of the game board-side display device 1600, and the illumination of various lamps, continue until the release condition, "door closure detection (detection that the door frame 3 has closed relative to the main frame 4 by the door frame release switch 618)," is met.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound 5 (frame opening), which notifies that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 by the main frame opening switch 619 (a state in which there is a possibility of fraudulent activity by opening the main frame, but there is also a possibility that the main frame has been opened due to abnormal response measures taken by the hall), is considered to belong to the second notification group, which is for situations where there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has occurred and this cannot be ruled out. For the notification sounds belonging to this second notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and release conditions are all set to be the same.

For example, in the case of notification sound 5 (frame opening), the notification method involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "frame is open, ding-dong, ding-dong," a display within the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 (for example, "frame is open"), and illumination of various lamps (light-emitting devices) installed on the door frame 3 and game board 5. The notification time is 30 seconds (equivalent to three repetitions of the notification sound) from the time of detection by the main frame opening switch 619, after which the loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound ends. However, the display within the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 and the illumination of the various lamps continue until the release condition, "frame closure detection (detection that the main frame 4 has closed relative to the outer frame 2 by the main frame opening switch 619)," is met.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, the display within the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 employs different display modes for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. However, the illumination of the various lamps (light-emitting devices) installed on the door frame 3 and game board 5 employs the same illumination mode (it is not necessary to illuminate all of the lamps) for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. However, the illumination mode of the lamps (light-emitting devices) when belonging to the second notification group differs from the illumination mode of the lamps (light-emitting devices) when belonging to the first notification group. Furthermore, the notification sounds subject to loop processing employ a combination of sequential output of a message sound (unique sound) that serves to indicate individual identification of the notification content, and an alarm sound, such as "ping-pong ping-pong," used in both notification sounds 4 and 5, which serves to indicate that it belongs to the second notification group (a state where there is a moderate possibility of fraudulent activity).

In other words, when notifying those belonging to the second notification group (a state where there is a moderate possibility of fraudulent activity), it is important to ensure that the system does not cause offense to those playing fairly, while also allowing the hall to take appropriate action to address the abnormal situation relatively quickly. In this regard, the above configuration first outputs a message sound indicating the type of notification, similar to the case of those belonging to the third notification group described later. This is expected to reduce the likelihood of those playing fairly feeling offense. On the other hand, to further reduce the likelihood of those playing fairly feeling offense, a different alarm sound, such as "ping-pong ping-pong," is output following the message sound, and various lamps are illuminated in a different pattern than those in the first notification group (though not output for those belonging to the third notification group), which is expected to expedite the hall's response to the abnormal situation to some extent.

On the other hand, notification sound 6 (left-handed play guidance) indicates that, despite being in a non-time-saving state, the gate sensor 4003 has detected that a game ball has passed through the gate section 2003 located in the area to the right of the center mechanism 2500 within the game area 5a (indicating that the game is being played in a manner detrimental to the player, and that it should be corrected to the proper manner (left-handed play)). The notification consists of a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed play," and a display within the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed play"). Furthermore, both the loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound "Please return to left-handed play" and the display within the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 terminate 20 seconds (equivalent to two repetitions of the notification sound) from the time of detection by the gate sensor 4003 in a non-time-saving state.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-hand play guidance), the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), which notifies that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls as detected by the full-tank detection sensor 279 (a state where game balls should be removed from the lower tray 322), is considered to belong to the third notification group, which is used when game guidance should be provided to ensure proper gameplay, even though the possibility of fraudulent activity is low. Therefore, the notification patterns, notification times, and release conditions for the notification sounds belonging to this third notification group are all set to be the same.

For example, in notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), the notification method involves a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please remove the balls from the lower tray," and a display within the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 (for example, "Please remove the balls from the lower tray"). Furthermore, both the loop process that repeatedly outputs the notification sound "Please remove the balls from the lower tray" and the display within the display area of the game board-side display device 1600 are terminated 20 seconds after detection by the full-tank detection sensor 279 (equivalent to two repetitions of the notification sound).

However, regarding notification sounds 6 (left-hand play guidance) and 7 (ball removal guidance), if the gate sensor 4003 and the full tank detection sensor 279 are still detecting something 20 seconds after detection has been completed, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-hand play guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance)) will be executed again from the beginning.

In this embodiment, the third notification group outputs only message sounds 6 and 7. More precisely, after, for example, a 5-second message sound is output, 5 seconds of silent data is assigned to channel X, and a corresponding sound is output (silence output). A loop process is then performed to repeat a 10-second notification sound, which consists of the message sound and the silent data. Since both notification sounds 6 and 7 output the same amount of silent data, they function as a unique notification method different from the first and second notification groups. This allows the hall staff to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group simply by checking the silent data portion, rather than the message sound portion which may be difficult to hear in the noisy hall. Regarding the silent data, it is desirable to prepare it in advance as a single sound data (10 seconds of sound data) including the message sound, and to perform the loop process while this is assigned to channel X.

Incidentally, while silent periods may exist within the notification sounds used in the first and second notification groups (such as between the alarm sound and the message sound), these are only very short periods intended to create a "pause" and are fundamentally different from the relatively longer silent periods (third notification group) mentioned above, which serve a group identification function.

With this configuration, alarm sounds such as "buzz" or "ping-pong" are not emitted. Instead, only message sounds are repeatedly emitted with predetermined silent intervals in between. This allows for game guidance to be provided without causing discomfort to the player.

In the examples shown in Figures 119 and 120, the same priority was set for notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. However, it is also possible to set different priorities for notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. Furthermore, while loop playback, which repeatedly plays the target sound, was adopted as the playback type setting, this is not necessarily limited to this; 1-shot playback, which plays the target sound once, may also be adopted. Additionally, for the "buzz buzz" sound commonly used in the first notification group and the "ping pong ping pong" sound commonly used in the second notification group, each notification sound may be prepared separately as a single sound data linked to the message sound, or they may be prepared as separate sound data from the message sound, and then combined into a single sound data before being assigned to the channel.

[Gaming machine equipped with multiple performance control units]
Incidentally, as previously described, a gaming machine equipped with a performance operation unit 400 on the plate unit 320 that can be pressed by the player and can also display performance images to the player, will be described below with reference to Figures 121 to 143, and will describe a gaming machine that can further increase the player's motivation to operate. Note that the performance control of the performance operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

Figure 121 is a front view of the gaming machine equipped with the sword effect operation unit 5000. Figure 122 is a right side view of the gaming machine equipped with the sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, we describe the sword effect operation unit 5000 installed in the door frame 3 of the aforementioned gaming machine 1. Components similar to those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and explanations are omitted where appropriate.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is installed on the front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword effect operation unit 5000 comprises a sword part 5010 having a blade part 5011, a handle part 5012, and a guard part 5013 sandwiched between the blade part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and a scabbard part 5020 capable of housing the blade part 5011 of the sword part 5010.

The sword ornament 5001 is mounted on the door frame 3 so that the scabbard portion 5020 is movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The sword portion 5010 is also mounted so that it is movable in the drawing and sheathing directions. Normally, the sword portion 5010 is in a sheathed state with the blade portion 5011 housed in the scabbard portion 5020. During a drawing animation, the drawing motion brings the sword portion 5011 into a drawn state, making it visible to the player. Once in the drawn state, the sword portion 5010 functions as a means of returning to the sheathed state in response to a sheathing operation by the player.

Here, referring to Figure 123, we will explain the opportunities for executing a sword-drawing animation involving the movement of the sword animation operation unit 5000 (sword ornament 5001). Figure 123 shows an example of a selection table for animation patterns in an animation mode in which a sword-drawing animation can be executed. (A) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform a sword-drawing preparation transition animation according to the type of variation pattern, and (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to perform the main sword-drawing animation.

The performance patterns described here include patterns where the sword drawing performance is performed after the sword drawing preparation transition performance, patterns where the sword drawing performance is performed without any prior sword drawing preparation transition performance, patterns where the sword drawing performance is not performed despite prior sword drawing preparation transition performance, and patterns where neither the sword drawing preparation transition performance nor the sword drawing performance is performed. Furthermore, the form of the sword ornament 5001 in the sword drawing performance has two patterns: a form with an aura component and a form without an aura component.

As shown in Figure 123(A), the execution of the sword-drawing preparation transition sequence is determined by a lottery based on the type of variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the multiple types of variation patterns are classified into variation patterns for big wins, variation patterns for small wins, and variation patterns for losses. The probability of executing the sword-drawing preparation transition sequence increases with the variation pattern that results in a more favorable outcome for the player. Specifically, the sword-drawing preparation transition sequence is executed with a 50% probability for big win variation patterns, a 30% probability for small win variation patterns, and a 20% probability for loss variation patterns. Note that for loss variation patterns, the probability of executing the sword-drawing preparation transition sequence may be changed depending on whether a reach sequence occurs, so that the probability of execution is higher when a reach sequence occurs compared to when it does not.

Next, as shown in Figure 123(B), the execution of the main sword-drawing animation is determined by a lottery based on the type of variation pattern and whether or not the sword-drawing preparation transition animation is performed. Even if the variation pattern type is the same, if the sword-drawing preparation transition animation is performed, the probability of the main sword-drawing animation being performed is set to be higher than if the sword-drawing preparation transition animation is not performed. Furthermore, the probability of the main sword-drawing animation being performed is set to be higher for variation patterns that result in a more favorable outcome for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, the probability of the main sword-drawing animation being performed is higher if the sword-drawing preparation transition animation is performed. Specifically, if the sword-drawing preparation transition animation is performed in a variation pattern for losing, the probability of the main sword-drawing animation being performed is higher than if the sword-drawing preparation transition animation is not performed in a variation pattern for minor wins. Note that in the case of a variation pattern for big wins, the main sword-drawing animation is always performed regardless of whether or not the sword-drawing preparation transition animation is performed.

Furthermore, when the sword-drawing animation is to be performed, a sword-drawing preparation transition animation is performed beforehand. The probability of the sword-drawing animation with the aura component being performed increases with the outcome of the variation pattern, which is more favorable to the player. Note that the sword-drawing animation with the aura component will not be selected in the case of a variation pattern for minor wins.

(State transitions due to the drawing motion of the sword ornament and the movement of the aura component)
Next, with reference to Figures 124 to 127, the drawing motion of the sword ornament 5001 in the drawing motion (preparation transition motion and main drawing motion) will be explained. Furthermore, the operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be explained for the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011) itself, which can accept the player's sheathing operation, and the sword part 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (Figures 124 and 125), and for the case where the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath part 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011), and the sword part 5010 combines with the member on the door frame 3 side (aura member 5035) to become an integrated ornament (Figures 126 and 127).

Figure 124 is a state transition diagram illustrating the drawing operation of the sword ornament 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) itself, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first drawing state, and (C) the second drawing state. Figure 125 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that Figure 125 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view with the blade portion 5011 removed from the sheath portion 5020 to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easier to understand.

In its normal state, the sword ornament 5001 is in a sheathed state, as shown in Figure 124(A), with the blade 5011 housed in the scabbard 5020. After the sword-drawing transition in the sword-drawing preparation sequence, the sword ornament 5001 enters a first drawn state, as shown in Figure 124(B), where only the habaki 5011a (the part of the blade that fits around the handle) is removed from the scabbard 5020 and visible to the player. Then, after the sword-drawing sequence in the main sword-drawing sequence, the sword ornament 5001 enters a second drawn state, as shown in Figure 124(C), where the blade 5011 is further removed from the scabbard 5020, making most of it visible to the player. At this point, the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state can function as an operating means capable of receiving a sheathing operation from the player.

The aura member 5030, provided on the blade portion 5011, is configured to operate independently of the drawing motion of the blade portion 5011. When the sword ornament 5001 is in the form with the aura member, the aura member 5030 moves as far as possible (maximum movement) from a closed state (Figure 125(A)) to an open state (Figure 125(B)) inside the sheath portion 5020 when the blade portion 5011 moves from a sheathed state (Figure 124(A)) to a first drawing state (Figure 124(B)), thereby deforming the blade portion 5011. For this reason, the player can still see the aura member 5030 even during the process of the blade portion 5011 changing from the first drawing state to the second drawing state (Figure 124(C)), which has been deformed by the aura member 5030. As will be described later, the aura component 5030 is positioned below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even at maximum movement; therefore, the player cannot see the aura component 5030 in the first drawn sword state.

In its normal state (closed state), the aura member 5030 is enclosed within the blade portion 5011, as shown in Figure 125(A). The aura member 5030 is located below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 and comprises a right aura member 5031, a left aura member 5032, and a pinion 5033 that meshes with the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031 and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. The aura member 5030 is rotated by a driving means (not shown) through a pinion 5033, which rotates counterclockwise in a front view. This rotational force is converted into linear motion of the rack 5031a to the right and the rack 5032a to the left. As shown in Figure 125(B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 stop in a position (open state) where they protrude outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011.

Furthermore, below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED substrate 5011c with multiple LEDs is enclosed on the blade axis 5011b. When these LEDs emit light, it becomes possible to illuminate and decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030).

Here, regarding the timing of the aura member 5030's operation, an example is shown where the aura member 5030 changes from a closed state to an open state when the sword ornament 5001 (sword portion 5010) moves from the sheathed state to the first drawn state, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the operation of the aura member 5030, after which the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first drawn state to the second drawn state. However, this is not limited to this example. The aura member 5030 may begin its operation (deformation) after the sword ornament 5001 has reached the second drawn state. It is sufficient that the sword ornament 5001, having reached the second drawn state, is in the final form based on the set performance pattern (not limited to the form achieved through maximum operation, but also including forms where the operation stops midway) before it functions as an operating means.

Figure 126 is a state transition diagram illustrating the drawing operation of the sword ornament 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the scabbard portion 5020, showing (A) the sheathed state, (B) the first drawing state, and (C) the second drawing state. Figure 127 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that Figure 127 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view with the blade portion 5011 removed from the scabbard portion 5020 to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easier to understand. Here, components similar to those in Figures 125 and 126 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and explanations are omitted as appropriate.

As shown in Figures 126(A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) moves in the vertical direction, in contrast to the aura member 5030 provided on the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) itself, which moves in the horizontal direction. Furthermore, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011. When the sword ornament 5001 is in the form with the aura member, the aura member 5035 operates in accordance with the change in the state of the blade portion 5011 (sheathed state ⇔ first unsheathed state ⇔ second unsheathed state) while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sheathed state. This allows the blade portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) to combine with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) to appear as a single, integrated decorative object.

In its normal state (fully housed state), the aura member 5035 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, as shown in Figure 127(A). The aura member 5035 is provided such that its upper end is below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the fully housed state, and it has a hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 that surrounds the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011, a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow portion of the enclosure aura member 5036, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The enclosure aura member 5036 is rotated by a drive mechanism (not shown) which rotates the right pinion 5037a counterclockwise in a front view and the left pinion 5037b clockwise in a front view. As both pinions mesh, the rotational force is converted into upward linear motion of the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b. As shown in Figure 127(B), the enclosure aura member 5036 stops at a position where it combines with the blade portion 5011 to form the second drawn-sword state. At this point, the aura member 5035 is in a fully extended state, with the enclosure aura member 5036 moving to its upper limit (maximum operation).

Furthermore, although not shown in the illustration, the blade portion 5011 contains an LED substrate with multiple LEDs, making it possible to illuminate and decorate both the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035.

Here, the operation timing of the aura member 5035 is shown as an example in which it combines with the blade portion 5011 while maintaining its relative positional relationship in accordance with the state change of the sword ornament 5001 (sheathed state ⇔ first unsheathed state ⇔ second unsheathed state), but it is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start its operation (combination) after the sword ornament 5001 has entered the second unsheathed state. It is sufficient that the sword ornament 5001, having entered the second unsheathed state, can reach the final form based on the set performance pattern (not limited to the fully appearing state achieved by maximum operation, but also including the aura member-attached form achieved by stopping the operation midway). Furthermore, the aura member 5035 should combine with the blade portion 5011 in a way that it is not visible to the player when transitioning from the sheathed state to the first unsheathed state.

(Another performance pattern using the sword ornament 5001 1)
Next, with reference to Figures 128 to 130, other reach effects using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. Figures 128 to 130 illustrate the screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the main differences from the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 are as follows. First, the sheathed sword ornament 5001 functions as an operating means and detects the player's draw-out operation. Second, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn-out state can move to the center of the front of the effect display device 1600.

When the fluctuating symbols form a "reach" state, the display area of the performance display device 1600 shows the fluctuating display of the three decorative symbols in a "reach" state (Figure 128 (A1)), and the starting image of the Princess Reach is displayed (Figure 128 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the performance display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind component) that can be moved vertically is provided. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the performance display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and a portion of the blind is stationary above the display area, visible to the player (initial state). Also, at this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in a sheathed state.

In the Princess Reach sequence, an image of the princess moving behind a curtain is displayed (Figure 128 (A3)), followed by an image suggesting an operation sequence (Figure 128 (B1)). Then, the operation sequence for the sword ornament 5001 begins, and the operation validity period for accepting operations on the sword ornament 5001 starts. Simultaneously, the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays an operation prompting image and a gauge indicating the operation validity period, urging the player to draw the sword ornament 5001 (Figure 129 (B2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY may be moved in small increments vertically between the display of the operation prompting image and the display of the operation validity period gauge. When the player's draw-the-sword operation is detected, the sequence is performed according to a pre-set development pattern or ending pattern.

The player's draw-the-sword operation refers to the action of the player grasping the handle 5012 of the sheathed sword ornament 5001 and lifting the blade 5010 upwards to draw the blade 5011 out of the scabbard 5020. When the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sheathed state to the second draw-the-sword state, the player's draw-the-sword operation is detected, and a detection notification action is performed to inform the player of the detection. The detection notification action can be any action that the player can perceive through the grasped handle 5012, such as vertical movement or vibration of the blade 5010 (or handle 5012), separate from their own draw-the-sword operation. Furthermore, the detection notification action is performed for a certain period after the operation is detected, allowing the player to visually confirm the action even after releasing their hand from the handle 5012. Therefore, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, reducing unnecessary contact with the sword ornament 5001 (such as grasping it again to confirm detection) and preventing malfunction or damage to the movable parts.

In this scenario, the aura component 5030 (5035) does not appear when the player draws their sword. However, depending on the expected level, the aura component 5030 (5035) may appear in a way that is visible to the player when they draw their sword.

When the ending pattern is performed, if the player's sword-drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY remains stationary above the display area of the performance display device 1600 (initial state) without overlapping the display area, and a screen indicating the end of the operation performance by the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (Figure 129 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern stops and is displayed in the losing pattern "767" (Figure 129 (C2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sheathed state at the timing when the stop result in Figure 129 (C2) is reported, but it is not limited to this, and may be returned to the sheathed state at the timing when the detection notification operation ends.

On the other hand, when a development pattern is performed, if the player's sword-drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is moved to a position where it overlaps with the display area of the performance display device 1600, with only the lower hold display area visible (fully fallen state) (Figure 129 (D1)). Next, the princess's shadow is projected onto the display area of the performance display device 1600. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the second drawn-sword state (Figure 129 (D2)). Note that multiple patterns of the princess's shadow projected onto the display area of the performance display device 1600 may be provided. For example, by varying the color and size of the shadow, and the comments displayed afterward, the expected outcome of the Princess Reach lottery (such as the probability of winning or the game's profit when winning) may be suggested.

Then, after the sword ornament 5001 enters the second drawn state due to the player's sword-drawing operation, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the princess's shadow was projected onto the display area of the performance display device 1600, the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state moves to the center of the front left-right direction of the display area of the performance display device 1600 by the movement of the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (Figure 129 (D3)). When the sword ornament 5001 reaches the center of the front display area of the performance display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully fallen state to the initial state, and an image of the princess surprised by the removal of the curtain is displayed on the display area of the performance display device 1600, which now has a clear view (Figure 130 (D4)). Subsequently, the sword ornament 5001 returns to the position where the original sword-drawing operation was performed. In the display area of the performance display device 1600, if the result of this variation is a win, an image of the smiling princess announcing the win is displayed (Figure 130 (E1) (E2)). If it is a loss, an image of the sad princess announcing the loss is displayed (Figure 130 (F1) (F2)).

Furthermore, when a player's draw-the-sword operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed as described above. However, if the sword ornament 5001 cannot move because the player is holding it when the movable animation is performed, when it moves to the center of the front left-right direction of the display area of the performance display device 1600, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" will be made. The animation itself will proceed even if the player does not stop holding the sword ornament 5001, but if the sword ornament 5001 is held in the position where the player operated it at the timing of the left-right movable animation of the sword ornament 5001 (Figure 129 (D3)), it will cause a delay in the left-right movable animation. However, since the animations performed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the falling movable animation of the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind gimmick) are configured to proceed regardless of whether or not the left-right movable animation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed, the progress of the game will not be stagnant. Furthermore, the sword ornament 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a left-right movement effect when the player releases their grip on the sword ornament 5001, or it may be configured not to perform a movement effect.

Thus, in the Princess Reach演出 (Hime Reach演出), the player's drawing operation (up and down movement) of the sword ornament 5001 causes a specific decorative member SDY, which indicates the operation of the sword ornament 5001 (operation effective), to fall and move. Furthermore, the sword ornament 5001 itself, which was operated outside the display area of the performance display device 1600, can be moved forward (to the left of the operation position) by the movement of the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3. In other words, based on the player's drawing operation, the sword ornament 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the drawing operation occurred, thereby increasing the value of the player's operation and suppressing a decline in the player's motivation to operate. Also, since a single operating means is configured to operate in progressively different ways (up and down during operation, and left and right after operation) based on the player's operation, it is possible to provide performances using multiple modes of movement, increasing the value of the operating means compared to conventional operating means with only one mode of movement. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the left-right movement of the sword ornament 5001 was performed for the purpose of creating an integrated performance with the performance image displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind accessory), by displacing it from an operating position outside the display area of the performance display device 1600 to an operating position in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, but this is not limited to this. For example, after performing a sword-drawing operation with the sword ornament 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600, the left-right movement performance may be performed by moving the sword ornament 5001 to the left (left edge of the frame) so that it is outside the display area of the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, since the player's operation of the sword ornament 5001 in this example involves an up-and-down motion (a drawing motion where the sword portion 5011 is pulled upwards from below), it is desirable that the movement of the sword ornament 5001 performed after the operation be in a direction different from the direction of the player's operation (in this case, up and down) (e.g., left and right, as in this example).

Furthermore, when a player's sword-drawing operation is detected, a detection notification is performed via the operating unit (sword part 5010) operated by the player, allowing the player to accurately determine when to end the operation. The detection notification is also performed in a way that allows the player to visually confirm it for a certain period, thus discouraging unnecessary contact such as touching the operating unit again to confirm the detection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, which could delay the subsequent movement of the sword ornament 5001 or damage the movable part due to unnecessary contact. Moreover, if the movement cannot be performed due to contact with the sword ornament 5001 even after the detection notification, a warning such as an announcement is given to the player to release their hand. Since the operating means that was required to be operated during the operation validity period is prohibited from being touched even after the detection notification ends, the operational value of the operating means is enhanced.

(Another performance pattern using sword ornament 5001 2)
Next, with reference to Figures 131 to 133, other reach effects using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. Figures 131 to 133 are diagrams illustrating the screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, the state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and the operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in reach effects that include operation effects of the operation buttons 410 used in multiple ways. Here, we will describe a pattern in which an expectation indication effect is performed as an operation effect of the operation buttons 410, indicating the likelihood that the current fluctuation will result in a jackpot (Figures (A) (B) → N), and a pattern in which an operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 is indicated and developed as an operation effect of the operation buttons 410 (Figures (A) (B) → M).

In this reach animation, when the display area of the animation display device 1600 shows the three decorative symbols in a reach state (Figure 131(A)), an operation validity period for accepting a press of the operation button 410 begins, and an operation prompt animation is performed to encourage the player to press the operation button 410 (Figure 131(B)). The display area of the animation display device 1600 displays an image of the operation means to be operated (operation button 410) and the operation validity period, and the operation button 410 is illuminated. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains its sheathed state. Then, when the player's press of the operation button 410 is detected, an animation is performed according to a pre-set animation pattern.

First, in the pattern where an expectation indication effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's press of the operation button 410 is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Figure 131 (N1)), followed by an image indicating the probability of a big win (Figure 132 (N2)). Then, the result of the current spin display (big win, miss) is announced (Figure 132 (N3) or (N4)). Note that a pre-announcement effect may be performed instead of the expectation indication effect for the currently running spin display. For example, instead of the image indicating the expectation level (Figure 132 (N2)), a character that changes the hold display shown in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may appear.

Furthermore, in the pattern where the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is suggested and unfolded by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing of the operation button 410 is detected, an effect image suggesting that an operation requiring the sheathing of the sword ornament 5001 will be performed is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Figure 131 (M1)). Next, the start image of the operation of the sword ornament 5001 (here, the title "Draw Sword Chance" and the operation instruction message "Please sheathe your sword") are displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, and the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in the form with the aura member attached, in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum movement of the aura member 5030 (Figure 133 (M2)). Next, after the second drawing state has been reached and a predetermined period has elapsed, and the effective operation period for the sword ornament 5001 has begun, the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is moved in small increments vertically in its initial state, and the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays an operation prompt image encouraging the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001, along with a gauge indicating the effective operation period (Figure 133 (M3)). Then, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, a performance based on the results of the current display variation is executed.

If the result of this variation display is a jackpot, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is moved to a fully fallen state from its initial state (Figure 133 (M4)). Then, when the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) returns to its initial state, the display area of the performance display device 1600, which has been cleared of overlap with the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism), displays an image announcing a jackpot (decorative symbol stopping pattern "777" and the message "Excellent!") (Figure 133 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of this variation display is a loss, when the player's sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) only stops its small, intermittent movement from its initial state, and the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays an image announcing a loss (decorative symbol stopping pattern "767") (Figure 133 (M6)).

Thus, pressing the operation button 410 enables a variety of effects, such as suggesting the level of expectation or developing the operation effects of other operating means (sword ornament 5001), making it impossible for the player to predict the subsequent developments at the time of pressing the operation button 410. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in operating the operation button 410 and suppress the decline in motivation to operate and the decrease in game enjoyment that can occur when the effects after operation are monotonous.

Furthermore, in the series of reach sequences, the player is required to perform different actions (pressing the button 410 and sheathing the sword ornament 5001) based on the first action (pressing the button 410). Therefore, this increases the player's interest in participating in the game and prevents a decline in gameplay enjoyment that could result from monotonous and unvaried operations.

In this example, the operation button 410 is designated as the first operational opportunity, and the second operational opportunity (sheathing the sword ornament 5001) is granted based on the pressing of the operation button 410. However, this is not limited to this configuration. Sheathing the sword ornament 5001 may also be designated as the first operational opportunity. In this case, it is preferable to target the sword ornament 5001 as the operational means for the second operational opportunity, rather than the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower expected value than the sword ornament 5001 in the first instance.

(Another performance pattern 3 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to Figures 134 to 138, other reach effects using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be explained. Figures 134 to 138 are diagrams illustrating the screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, the state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and the operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in reach effects. Here, we will explain a pattern in which a jackpot is achieved when a specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 (in the figures (A), (B1), (B2) → O), and a pattern in which, even if the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) does not move based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 and is displayed in a losing state, a re-change occurs from the losing state symbol display and the player is given another opportunity to operate (in the figures (A), (B1), (B2) → (P1) to (P4) → Q if an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given / R if an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is given).

In this reach animation, when the display area of the animation display device 1600 shows the three decorative symbols in a reach state (Figure 134(A)), first, an image of the start of the operation animation for the operation button 410 (here, the message "Move the movable part with one press of the button") is displayed (Figure 134(B)), then the operation validity period for accepting the press operation of the operation button 410 begins, and an operation promotion animation is performed to encourage the press operation of the operation button 410 (Figure 134(C)). The display area of the animation display device 1600 displays an image of the operation means to be operated (operation button 410), the number of operations, and the operation validity period, and the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains its sheathed state. When the player's press operation of the operation button 410 is detected, an animation is performed according to a pre-set animation pattern. Note that the press operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one press (1 time), but can also be repeated (multiple times). Furthermore, to make it easier for the player to understand which object (movable part) is being manipulated, the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) may be initially configured to move slightly up and down during the effective period of operation of the operation button 410. Also, if the sword ornament 5001 is to be manipulated later, the sword ornament 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state at this point.

In the pattern where a jackpot is triggered by the movement of the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism), when the player's press of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is moved to a fully fallen state from its initial state (Figure 135 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative element SDY is returned to its initial state, the display area of the performance display device 1600, which has been cleared of overlap with the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism), displays an image announcing the jackpot (decorative pattern stopping pattern "777", "Excellent!" message) (Figure 135 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be made to vibrate.

In patterns where the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is not movable, when the player's operation button 410 is detected pressing, only the small, rapid movements of the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) stop; it does not fall. Then, on the display area of the performance display device 1600, a losing pattern ("767") is displayed in the center of the screen, swaying (Figure 136 (P1). Afterward, depending on the set performance pattern, the pattern either continues with the decorative element remaining in the losing pattern ("767") (Figure 136 (P2)), or a revival pattern occurs where the reach state is restored.

In the revival pattern, the display area of the performance display device 1600 transitions from the oscillating display of the losing decorative symbol in Figure 136 (P1) to a revival start image (an image of a samurai saying "Not yet") indicating that the fluctuation display is not yet over (Figure 136 (P3)). The decorative symbol then returns to a reach state and is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the screen. At the same time, an operation activation suggestion image (the face of an allied samurai with his eyes closed) is displayed in the center of the screen, indicating that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is activated (Figure 136 (P4)). As time passes, the eyes of the displayed samurai are enlarged, and the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is moved in small increments up and down in its initial state (Figure 136 (P5)). This increases the player's anticipation for the performance using the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism). Furthermore, at this time, the operation button 410 may be illuminated in a high-speed flashing pattern, or the sword ornament 5001 may be changed from a sheathed state to a first unsheathed state and moved up and down. Then, according to the set performance pattern, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 functions as an effective operating means, and a specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind) is performed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001. Note that the patterns in which the operation button 410 is operated are set to have a lower expectation level than the patterns in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operating means, the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays an image of a samurai with sweat beading on his forehead (operation button confirmation image), which was previously displayed as an operation validity indication image, and the operation button 410 is illuminated (Figure 137 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind accessory) continues to move in small increments and the operation button 410 remains illuminated, the operation validity period for the operation button 410 begins, and an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage pressing the operation button 410 (Figure 137 (R2)). The display area of the performance display device 1600 displays the image of the operating means to be operated (operation button 410), the number of operations, and the operation validity period. Here, the operation button 410 stops illuminating after the required number of operations.

Then, if the result of the fluctuation display is a jackpot, when the player's press of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) moves to drop from its initial state to a fully fallen state (Figure 137 (R3)). At this time, the decorative pattern that was displayed in the upper right of the display area of the performance display device 1600 is stopped and displayed in the lower right of the screen so that it can be seen by the player. Note that, as described above (Figure 133 (M4)), the appearance of the decorative pattern may be made difficult for the player to understand at this point. Next, the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) returns to its initial state from the fully fallen state, and an image announcing a jackpot (the stopped appearance of the decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) and the message "Excellent!") are displayed in the center of the display area of the performance display device 1600, from which the overlap with the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) has been removed (Figure 137 (R4)).

On the other hand, if the result of the fluctuation display is a miss, when the player's operation button 410 is detected pressing, the small-scale movement of the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) stops, and the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays the missing pattern ("767") in the center of the screen (Figure 137 (R5)).

When the sword ornament 5001 is used as the means of operation, an image of a samurai with his eyes closed, whose gaze becomes sharper, is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (sword ornament confirmation image), and the sword ornament 5001 is changed from a sheathed state to a second drawn state with an aura component (Figure 138 (Q1)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 may be illuminated. The player can understand that the sword ornament 5001 is operational and not the operation button 410 by the image in the display area, but at this point, the form of the sword ornament 5001, such as whether or not it is in the form with an aura component, can be determined by actually looking at the sword ornament 5001. Next, as the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind component) moves in small increments, and after a predetermined period has elapsed since the second drawing state, and the effective operation period for the sword ornament 5001 begins, the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays an operation prompting image to encourage the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001, along with a gauge indicating the effective operation period (Figure 138 (Q2)).

If the result of this variation display is a jackpot, and the player's sheathing operation is detected, the same sequence of events as in Figures 137 (R3) and (R4) will be followed (Figures 138 (Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display is a loss, and the player's sheathing operation is detected, the same sequence of events as in Figure 137 (R5) will be followed (Figure 138 (Q5)).

In this way, the level of expectation is indicated according to the falling state of the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) which is executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. This provides a more impactful indication of expectation than image-based indications, thus suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, even if the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) does not fall based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given another opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Since the level of expectation can also be indicated by the operating means to which the player is given another opportunity, a decline in the enjoyment of the game, which could be a concern due to monotonous and unvaried operation sequences, can be suppressed.

Figures 128 to 138 above show three examples of reach animation patterns using the sword ornament 5001, but various animation patterns can be combined. This allows for a wide variety of animations to be provided, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

(Form of sword ornaments)
Referring to Figure 139, the form of the sword ornament 5001 in this example will be described. Up until now, two forms of the sword ornament 5001 have been provided: a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member. Here, however, two more forms are provided in which the blade part 5010 is deformed by the movement of the handle part 5012.

Figure 139 illustrates the form of the sword ornament 5001 used in the pseudo-consecutive spinning effect. The sword ornament 5001 here is designed to allow for two-stage form changes through deformation of the handle portion 5012, and is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that is installed inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 and appears visible to the player from the left and right sides of the sheath portion 5020. The aura member 5040 is installed inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3, similar to the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation is similar to the aura member 5030 described above, moving in the left-right direction. Figures 139(A) to (D) show the types (stage changes) of the form of the sword ornament 5001 in the sheathed state, showing, in order, stage 0 form to stage 3 form. The sword ornament 5001 takes on one of the forms from stage 0 to stage 3 depending on the effect.

As shown in Figure 139(A), Stage 0 is the normal state, similar to Figures 124(A) and 126(A) described above, and represents the initial state in which no movement is required of any of the components. As shown in Figure 139(B), Stage 1 is the state in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side of the sheath 5012 due to the movement of the aura member 5040 from Stage 0. As shown in Figure 139(C), Stage 2 is the state in which the handle 5012 expands and moves so as to be divided into two halves from the center, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from within. As shown in Figure 139(D), Stage 3 is the state in which, in Stage 2, the second decorative part 5012b moves upward from inside the handle 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative part 5012a. Here, Stages 1 to 3 allow for changes in form without putting the sword ornament 5001 into a second drawn-sword state. Furthermore, since the sword portion 5010, which can receive input from the player, and the non-moving sheath portion 5020 work together to form an integrated decorative unit, a more impressive control mechanism can be provided.

(Pre-operation suggestion presentation using specific decorative component SDY)
Next, referring to Figures 140 to 143, we will explain the pre-operation suggestion animation that is performed before the operation validity period in which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 becomes operationally active during the reach animation. In the pre-operation suggestion animation, the operation of a specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind prop) can suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 will become operationally active among multiple operating means. Specifically, as suggestion patterns for the pre-operation suggestion animation using the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind prop), there is a first suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind prop) is in its initial position, and a second suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind prop) has moved from its initial position to the suggestion position. When the sword ornament 5001 (which is set to have a higher probability of winning than the operation button 410) becomes operationally active, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, if the first suggestion pattern (Figure 140(B)) is performed before operation, in which the operation valid period is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind accessory) in its initial position, there is a 30% probability that the sword ornament 5001 will become operational, and a 70% probability that the operation button 410 will become operational. In contrast, if the second suggestion pattern (Figure 142(AA1)) is performed before operation, in which the operation valid period is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind accessory) moved to the suggested position, there is a 70% probability (including the step-up pattern) that the sword ornament 5001 will become operational, and a 30% probability that the operation button 410 will become operational. The following describes examples of transitions in the pre-operation suggestion patterns of the first and second suggestion patterns, depending on the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind accessory).

(First suggestion pattern)
Figures 140 and 141 show an example of a reach animation transition in which, based on a variation animation (reach animation) of a variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310, if the peripheral control board 1510 determines that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 will be made operationally active during the reach animation, the pre-operation suggestion animation of the first suggestion pattern is executed. In this reach animation, when the three decorative symbols in the display area of the animation display device 1600 enter a reach state (Figure 140(A)), the pre-operation suggestion animation of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operational validity period for either the operation means of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001, which has been predetermined to be made operationally active by the peripheral control board 1510, begins. As a specific example of the first suggestion pattern, an operation suggestion image (a rotating aura) indicating that the operation means is operationally active is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 before the operation validity period begins (Figure 140(B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind accessory) maintains its initial position. Furthermore, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001.

Then, with the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) maintained in its initial position, an operation validity period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is predetermined to be operationally valid. In this example, when operation button 5001 is deemed operationally valid, the first suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as a pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period is generated while the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is in its initial position, it becomes possible to suggest to the player that operation button 410 is operationally valid at a higher rate than sword ornament 5001.

When the operation button 410 becomes operational, as shown in Figure 140(C), the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) maintains its initial position while an operational validity period for the operation button 410 is generated. Simultaneously, the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays an operation-prompting image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operational validity period, which is used for the operation-prompting effect. At this time, the operation button 410 is illuminated to allow the player to easily recognize the target of operation. Furthermore, when the sword ornament 5001 becomes operational, a pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although at a lower rate than with the operation button 410. In that case, as shown in Figure 140(D), the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) maintains its initial position while an operational validity period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated. Simultaneously, the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays an operation-prompting image prompting the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operational validity period, which is used for the operation-prompting effect. Furthermore, at this time, the sword ornament 5001 changes state from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state (form with aura component), allowing the player to sheathe the sword.

In Figure 140(C) or (D) above, when an operation is detected on an active operating means (operating button 410 or sword ornament 5001), if the result of the current variation display is a jackpot, the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is moved to drop from its initial state to a fully fallen state (Figure 141(CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is returned to its initial state, an image announcing a jackpot (decorative pattern stopping pattern "777", "Excellent!" message) is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, which has been freed from the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) (Figure 141(CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of this fluctuation display is a miss, the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind element) remains in its initial state and does not move, and an image indicating a miss (decorative pattern stop mode "767") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Figure 141 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
Figure 142 is a diagram showing an example of a reach animation transition in which, similar to the first suggestion pattern described above, the pre-operation suggestion animation of the second suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 will be activated during the reach animation. Figure 143 is a diagram showing a step-up pattern of the pre-operation suggestion animation in which, despite the second suggestion pattern being performed as the pre-operation suggestion animation, the sword ornament 5001 is not activated, the operation button 410 is activated first, and then the sword ornament 5001 is activated.

As shown in Figure 142 (AA1), the pre-operation indication effect of the second indication pattern is executed before the operation validity period begins for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001, which have been predetermined to be activated by a lottery on the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, the second indication pattern's effect involves displaying an operation indication image (a rotating aura) in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation validity period begins, indicating that the operation means is becoming operational. The operation indication image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first indication pattern. However, in the second indication pattern, along with the display of the operation indication image, the specific ornamental member SDY (bamboo blind accessory) moves from its initial position to a slightly lowered state (indication position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front. The specific ornamental member SDY (bamboo blind accessory) then moves in small increments vertically between the initial position and the indication position. At this time, there is no change to the operation button 410 or the sword ornament.

Then, with the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) moved to the indicated position, an operation validity period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is predetermined to be operationally valid. In this example, when the sword ornament 5001 is operationally valid, the second indication pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first indication pattern as a pre-operation indication effect. In other words, when the operation validity period is generated with the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) in the indicated position, it becomes possible to indicate to the player that the sword ornament 5001 is operationally valid at a higher rate than the operation button 410.

When the sword ornament 5001 becomes operational, as shown in Figure 142 (AA3), the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is in the indicated position, and an operational validity period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated. At the same time, the display area of the performance display device 1600 displays an operational prompting image prompting the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operational validity period, and an operational prompting performance is performed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 changes state from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state (aura-equipped form), and the player is able to sheathe it. In addition, even when the operation button 410 becomes operational, there is a small percentage of cases where the pre-operation suggestion performance is executed in the second suggestion pattern. At that time, as shown in Figure 142 (AA2), the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is in the indicated position, and an effective operation period for the operation button 410 is generated. Simultaneously, an operation promotion effect is performed on the display area of the performance display device 1600, displaying an operation promotion image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the effective operation period. In the second indication pattern, when the player's operation is detected during the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is moved from the indicated position to its initial state. Alternatively, the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) may be moved from the indicated position to either its fully lowered state or its initial state without being returned to the initial state.

Then, when an operation is detected on an active operating means (operating button 410 or sword ornament 5001) as shown in Figure 142 (AA2) or (AA3), if the result of this variation display is a jackpot, the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is moved to drop from its initial state to a fully fallen state, similar to Figure 140 (C) or (D). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is returned to its initial state, an image announcing a jackpot (decorative pattern stopping pattern "777", "magnificent" message) is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, which has been freed from the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) (Figure 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of this fluctuation display is a miss, the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind element) remains in its initial state and does not move, and an image indicating a miss (decorative pattern stop pattern "767") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 (Figure 141 (CC3)). The performance transitions after the operation prompting performance are the same as the performance transitions after the operation prompting performance in the first suggestion pattern.

Furthermore, the operation pattern of the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) in the second suggestion pattern may not be limited to a pattern that operates at the suggestion position; multiple operation patterns may be provided. For example, if multiple operation patterns are provided so that the sword ornament 5001 becomes operationally effective at different rates, the player's interest in the operation can be increased, thereby enhancing the appeal of the pre-operation suggestion and operation promotion effects using the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism).

(Step-up pattern)
When the specific decorative component SDY (bamboo blind accessory) is moved to the indicated position, a pre-operation indication performance of the second indication pattern is performed to generate an operation validity period, and when the sword ornament 5001 becomes operationally active, in addition to the basic pattern which follows the performance transitions of Figure 142 (AA1) → (AA3) described above until the sword ornament 5001 becomes operationally active, a step-up pattern is provided in which the operation button 410 becomes operationally active first, and then the sword ornament 5001 becomes operationally active.

As shown in Figures 143 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation indication of the step-up pattern is executed before the operation validity period for the sword ornament 5001, which has been predetermined to be operationally valid by a lottery conducted by the peripheral control board 1510, occurs. That is, it is executed before the operation promotion animation for the sword ornament 5001 shown in Figure 142 (AA3) is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, an operation suggestion image (rotation of the aura) similar to that shown in Figure 142 (AA1) is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is moved in small increments (Figure 143 (BB1)). Next, with the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) moved to the suggested position, an operation validity period for the operation button 410 is generated. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated, and an operation promotion effect is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, showing an operation promotion image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period (Figure 143 (BB2)). Here, even if the player presses the operation button 410 during the operation validity period, the result notification shown in Figure 141 is not performed, and a switching suggestion image (mostly a blackout image) is displayed, suggesting a switch to an operation means that is currently active (Figure 143 (BB3)). The switching indication image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the operation validity period for the operation button 410 ends. Subsequently, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second unsheathed state (aura-equipped form), and a switching notification image ("Sword Drawing Chance" and "Please sheathe your sword") is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, indicating that the active operation means has switched from the operation button 410 to the sword ornament 5001 (Figure 143 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is in the indicated position. Then, when the operation validity period for the sword ornament 5001 is triggered, the sword ornament 5001 operation promotion performance shown in Figure 142 (AA3) is performed. The performance transitions after the operation promotion performance are the same as those after the operation promotion performance in the second indication pattern described above (Figure 141).

Furthermore, in the case of Figure 143 (BB2) mentioned above, the button operation 410 may be displayed only as an image without enabling operation (no operation prompting animation). The goal is to initially direct the player's attention to the button operation 410 before instructing them to operate the sword ornament 5001. Also, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when the second suggestion pattern is reached, but also when the first suggestion pattern is reached.

Thus, in this example of the pre-operation suggestion presentation, the position of a specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind component) can be changed before the effective period for one of the multiple operating means becomes active, and the position of this element suggests which operating means will be active. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (Figure 140(B)) where the effective period for the operating means occurs when the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind component) is in its initial position, there is a high probability that the operation button 410 will be active. In the second suggestion pattern (Figure 142(AA1)) where the effective period for the operating means occurs when the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind component) is in the suggestion position, there is a high probability that the sword ornament 5001 will be active. Therefore, players will focus on the state of the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind component) to determine which operating means will be active, thus enhancing the interest of the pre-operation suggestion presentation.

Furthermore, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is moved in small increments vertically during the pre-operation suggestion animation. Since the motion animation (fall animation) of the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism) is also used in the result notification after operation of the operating means (Figure 141), the small increments vertical movement in the pre-operation suggestion animation and the fall animation can be presented as a continuous animation, thus suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Note that, as described above, the state of the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism), i.e., the movable body, indicated the expected degree that the operating means would become operational. However, this is not limited to this; the expected degree may also be indicated by displaying a character during the pre-operation suggestion animation. Also, when the operating means that will become operational is determined, in addition to the illumination of the operation button 410 or the change of the sword ornament 5001 to the second drawn sword state, the operating means that will become operational may be moved by vibration or other means.

Furthermore, the second suggestion pattern includes a step-up pattern in which, when the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind component) is in the suggestion position, the operation button 410 becomes operational (or appears to become operational) before the sword ornament 5001 becomes operational. This allows the player to be interested in both operational methods. Also, even if the operation button 410 becomes operational immediately after the pre-operation suggestion animation, the player can have the expectation that the sword ornament 5001 may become operational afterward, thus suppressing a decline in the desire to operate and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion presentation, at the timing when the suggestion image for the operation presentation is displayed before the operation validity period in which any of the multiple operating means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) is deemed to be operationally valid (Figure 140(B)), similar to the second suggestion pattern (Figure 142(AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind prop) may be moved from its initial position to a slightly lowered state (suggestion position) that overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the presentation display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and may be made to move in small increments vertically between the initial position and the suggestion position. Subsequently, when the operation validity period is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind prop) is returned to its initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind prop) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the operation in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that even when the player sees the suggestion image for the operation presentation of the first suggestion pattern, it is possible to make them believe that the pre-operation suggestion presentation of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, even when the pre-operation suggestion animation based on the first suggestion pattern is being performed, it is possible to make the player expect that the sword ornament 5001 will become operationally active. Furthermore, since the player strongly desires that the specific decorative element SDY (bamboo blind mechanism), which operates at the timing of the display of the operation suggestion image, will be in the suggested position when the operational effectiveness period begins, the appeal of the pre-operation suggestion animation can be enhanced.

[Specific Operation-Related Effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, if a specific result is obtained in the performance judgment corresponding to the result of the jackpot judgment, the game board-side performance display device 1600 executes a performance with a specific performance pattern. During the performance period in which the specific performance pattern is executed, a specific performance acceptance period (valid period) can be generated by the player's operation to satisfy the conditions for executing a specific performance. If an operation is performed within the specific performance acceptance period, a specific operation-time performance (such as a performance that suggests the likelihood of receiving a bonus) can be executed based on the fulfillment of the specific performance execution conditions. The likelihood of receiving a bonus suggested as a result of the specific operation-time performance may be 100% or 0%.

Furthermore, as also mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the operation button 410, it is possible to further provide other operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) as operation means used for such operation-time effects (effects that suggest the likelihood of receiving a bonus when operated). In this regard, in certain effect patterns, based on the result of the effect judgment, there are cases where an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is granted (when operating the operation button 410 satisfies the conditions for executing a specific effect), and cases where an opportunity to operate another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) is granted (when operating the other operation means satisfies the conditions for executing a specific effect). When an opportunity to operate another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001) is granted, even if no operation is performed with that opportunity, the mere occurrence of the pre-operation effect that grants the opportunity to operate makes it possible for the player to recognize that the likelihood of receiving a bonus (expected jackpot) is higher than when an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is granted. The expected value of the bonus that is suggested when an opportunity to operate on another operating means (such as the sword ornament 5001) is granted may be 100% or 0%.

With this configuration, when an opportunity to operate another operating means (such as the sword ornament 5001) is provided, the game's enjoyment can be enhanced when the operation-related animation corresponding to the operation of that other operating means (such as the sword ornament 5001) has not yet been performed, and the operation is about to be performed. In other words, in this case, even if the desired animation result (such as an animation result suggesting a high probability of receiving a bonus) does not appear in the operation-related animation corresponding to the operation of the other operating means (such as the sword ornament 5001), or if the operation of the operating means could not be performed within the specific animation acceptance period (valid period), the game's enjoyment can still be enhanced through such operation-related animations.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when an opportunity to operate is provided to any of the multiple operating means (operating buttons 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) having such performance-oriented properties, a common operation-related performance (see, for example, Figure 142 (AA1)) can be executed when providing those operating opportunities.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the performance mode that generates an effective period (performance acceptance period) during which operation of the operation button 410 is enabled (performance acceptance becomes possible) is at least:
Multiple performance modes are provided, including: a first performance mode that generates an effective period (performance acceptance period) during which an operation on the operation button 410 becomes effective (performance acceptance period) after a "specific operation-related performance" that may also appear when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is activated (performance acceptance becomes possible) has been performed, and a second performance mode that generates an effective period (performance acceptance period) during which an operation on the operation button 410 becomes effective (performance acceptance becomes possible) without the "specific operation-related performance" being performed. By executing any of these performance modes, an effective period (performance acceptance period) during which an operation on the operation button 410 becomes effective (performance acceptance becomes possible) is generated.

With this configuration, whether there is a period during which a specific operating means (e.g., the operating button 410) among multiple operating means (e.g., the operating button 410) is available for performance reception, or a period during which a different operating means (e.g., the sword ornament 5001) is available for performance reception, a common (specific) operation-related performance is made available prior to the occurrence of those periods. This adds an element of interest to the game, as players will be uncertain about which of the specific or different operating means will be available for performance reception. By having players perform operations while these performances are running, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

In such common (specific) operation-related effects, a predetermined time elapses after the effect begins, during which an effect acceptance period corresponding to one of the multiple operation means (e.g., operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) occurs. However, it is desirable to keep secret, at least at the time the effect begins, which of these operation means (e.g., operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) corresponds to the effect acceptance period. Furthermore, for each operation-related effect exemplified below, it may be shown (by displaying the effect result) which of the multiple operation means (e.g., operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) will be granted an operation opportunity before the effect acceptance period occurs, or it may be shown (by displaying the effect result) which of the multiple operation means (e.g., operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) will be granted an operation opportunity during the period after the effect acceptance period occurs, including simultaneously with the occurrence of the effect acceptance period. The timing of when the operation-related effects are executed can be changed as appropriate.

[Automatic button animation state]
In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), control to an automatic button performance state (a specific performance state) is possible. When controlled to this automatic button performance state, if a performance reception period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined performance pattern in which a performance reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of a jackpot determination, even if no operation by the player is received during the performance reception period, a process (automatic performance function) is possible that causes the same change to the performance as if an operation by the player had been received during the performance reception period. With such an automatic button performance state, the post-operation performance will occur even if the player does not operate the machine every time a performance reception period occurs, thus suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to forgetting to operate the machine. The automatic performance function may be configured to generate the same performance reception as if an operation had actually occurred when it is activated, and then process accordingly, or it may be configured to generate the same processing as if an operation had been received without generating any performance reception.

In the embodiments of the "automatic performance function" described below, the various operation-related technologies, performances, and settings mentioned above may be used in appropriate combinations or substitutions.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), during the period when the demo screen is displayed and the symbol changes are not yet executed, the automatic button performance state can be set by operating the control means multiple times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the "Various Settings" displayed on the menu screen is selected by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or by a different control means), and the "Various Settings" screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by a different control means), and the "Automatic Button Performance State Setting" displayed on the "Various Settings" screen is selected, setting the machine to the automatic button performance state. Note that the operation may be performed multiple times using only the operation button 410, or multiple operations may be performed using a combination of the operation button 410 and other control means.

In contrast, during the period when the symbol change is in progress, the automatic button performance state can be set with just one operation of the operation button 410. This simplification of operation allows players to set the automatic button performance state while maintaining attention to the progress of the performance during the symbol change. However, some players may want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether the validity period has expired or not. For such players, if the automatic button performance state is set simply by operating the operation button 410, the enjoyment of the game may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button performance state during the period when the symbol change is in progress, it is required to operate the operation button 410 once in a manner that maintains the operation state for a predetermined time (in this case, 2 seconds) (the so-called "long press manner"). This makes it less likely that the automatic button performance state will be mistakenly set even if the operation button 410 is actively operated during the period when the symbol change is in progress, regardless of whether the validity period has expired or not. Furthermore, it is desirable that the automatic button animation state not be set even if the operation is performed by long-pressing, at least during the period when the symbol change is in progress and the animation reception period is occurring.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the method for deactivating the automatic button animation state when it is set requires different operation methods depending on whether the demo screen is displayed in a state where symbol changes are not yet performed, or during a period when symbol changes are being performed.

In other words, during the period when the demo screen is displayed and the symbol changes have not yet occurred, the automatic button animation state can be deactivated by operating the control device multiple times. More specifically, after the first operation of the control button 410 displays the menu screen, a second operation of the control button 410 (or an operation device other than the control button 410) selects "Various Settings" displayed on the menu screen, displaying the "Various Settings" screen. A third operation of the control button 410 (or an operation device other than the control button 410) selects "Deactivate Automatic Button Animation State" displayed on the "Various Settings" screen, thereby deactivating the automatic button animation state.

In contrast, during the period when the symbol change is in progress, the automatic button animation state can be deactivated with just one press of the operation button 410. This simplification of operation allows for the deactivation of the automatic button animation state while maintaining attention to the animation progression during the symbol change. However, unlike when setting the automatic button animation state, the automatic button animation state is deactivated simply by detecting that the operation button 410 is in an operational state (even with a single press), without requiring the operation button 410 to be held in an operational state for a predetermined period of time (i.e., not requiring a long press). In other words, any operation performed on the operation button 410 indicates a desire to perform an operation on that button. Therefore, by deactivating the automatic button animation state at the time of such operation and returning to the normal animation state early, the enjoyment of the game is expected to be favorably maintained.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to include multiple operating means, including the operation button 410. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to include multiple operating means, including the operation button 410. When the machine is in an automatic button performance state set by an operation on the operation button 410, a performance reception period occurs (more precisely, a predetermined performance pattern in which a performance reception period for the sword ornament 5001, etc. is set) in which an opportunity to operate a specific operating means different from the operation button 410 (for example, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) is given based on the result of the jackpot determination. Even if an operation by the player (an operation on the sword ornament 5001) is not received within the performance reception period, the machine is configured to perform a process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change to the performance as if an operation by the player (an operation on the sword ornament 5001) had been received within the performance reception period. With this configuration, when the aforementioned special effect (a specific operation-related effect) is executed, determining whether a period occurs where operation of operation button 410 (among multiple operation means, such as operation button 410 and sword ornament 5001) is available for the effect, or whether a period occurs where operation of another operation means (for example, sword ornament 5001) is available for the effect, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate either operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001 as a result of the effect. Therefore, such specific operation-related effects can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
- When the system is controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), if a first performance reception period occurs in which the first operating means (for example, the operating button 410) among multiple operating means is set as the target of operation, and no operation is performed on the first operating means within the first performance reception period, an automatic process can be executed to produce the same change to the performance as if an operation had been performed on the first operating means (first automatic performance means).
- When the system is controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), if a second performance reception period occurs in which a second operating means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is set as the target of operation among multiple operating means, and no operation is performed on the second operating means within the second performance reception period, an automatic process can be executed to produce the same change in the performance as if an operation had been performed on the second operating means (second automatic performance means).
With the above configuration in place, the system is designed so that, regardless of whether the first-side performance acceptance period or the second-side performance acceptance period occurs, automatic processing by the first automatic performance means or the second automatic performance means can be executed when the same specific time has elapsed since the period began.

With this configuration, when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), regardless of whether the first performance acceptance period (set with the first operation means as the target) or the second performance acceptance period (set with the second operation means as the target) occurs within the symbol variation execution period, the automatic performance function can be activated after the same specific time has elapsed since the occurrence of those periods. This allows for a more enjoyable and worry-free experience of the performance.

However, if a first-side performance reception period occurs, with the first operating means (for example, the operation button 410) set as the target of operation, the performance progression within the symbol variation may be configured such that the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed either when a specific time has elapsed since the first-side performance reception period began, or when a different time has elapsed since the first-side performance reception period began. With such a configuration, while it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means would be executed when a specific time had elapsed since the first-side performance reception period began, the performance reception occurs at a different timing, resulting in the automatic execution of the post-operation performance. This allows the performance to function as a surprise.

Furthermore, when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), the frequency of performance reception periods occurring within the symbol variation period, where the player is given an opportunity to operate the operating means, may be increased compared to when the system is not controlled to that specific performance state (automatic button performance state). In other words, while a higher frequency of performance reception periods may lead to a higher frequency of players forgetting to operate during these periods, the automatic performance function will still execute the post-operation performance even if an operation is forgotten. Therefore, this allows for a higher frequency of performance reception periods while suppressing a decline in game enjoyment due to frequent forgetting. Incidentally, when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), it is desirable that the frequency of performance reception periods for both the first and second operating means increases. However, it is even more desirable that the degree of increase differs between the performance reception periods for the first and second operating means.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
- If the conditions for accepting a performance are met within the performance acceptance period, the post-operation performance can be executed (post-operation performance execution means),
- The system is configured to execute a process that fulfills the conditions for receiving a performance based on the fact that the player has performed an action within the performance acceptance period (player action acceptance means).
- If no action is taken by the player within the performance acceptance period, a process can be executed at a specific timing within that period to satisfy the performance acceptance conditions without requiring any action from the player (automatic performance acceptance means).
However, the system is designed so that specific timings within the performance reception period do not occur until at least half of the set time for the performance reception period has elapsed since the start of the performance reception period. This gives players sufficient time to operate the machine themselves before the automatic performance function takes effect, and also leaves open the option for players to initiate performance reception through their own actions, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game in a suitable manner.

In this case, if the automatic processing by the first automatic processing means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the first side processing acceptance period began, or when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the first side processing acceptance period began, then both the "specific time" and the "time different from the specific time" mentioned above should be set to a time value that is at least half the time set as the first side processing acceptance period.

Here, during the execution period of symbol changes while the system is controlled to the automatic button animation state, an animation reception period for the operation button 410 occurs. If an operation is received for the operation button 410 within this reception period, a process is executed to generate a post-operation animation corresponding to the received animation. However, in addition to generating a post-operation animation corresponding to the received animation, a process to cancel the automatic button animation state may also be performed.

Similarly, if, during the execution period of symbol variation while controlled in the automatic button animation state, an animation reception period occurs for an operation means other than the operation button 410 (such as the sword ornament 5001), and an operation to the sword ornament 5001 is received within this reception period, it is desirable to execute a process that generates a post-operation animation corresponding to the reception and a process that cancels the automatic button animation state. Even in this case, the "post-operation animation corresponding to the reception" will be executed as the same animation as the post-operation animation executed when an animation reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs during a period not controlled in the automatic button animation state, and an operation to the sword ornament 5001 is received within that reception period.

In other words, after being controlled to an automatic button-pressure state (a specific performance state), players may have a desire to return to a performance state where they can advance the performance through their own actions (the normal performance mode) (a desire to end the specific performance state). This desire often arises when a performance acceptance period occurs in which players are given the opportunity to take action. However, it is difficult to perform both the action to end the specific performance state and the action to enable the acceptance of action within the limited time from the start to the end of this performance acceptance period. If this results in the loss of the opportunity to take action, the enjoyment of the game may decrease. In this regard, with the above configuration, when the system is controlled to an automatic button animation state (a specific animation state) and an animation reception period for a specific animation occurs, simply performing an operation on the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 that is provided with an opportunity to operate within that animation reception period (simply by operating it in a single operation manner) will trigger both a process to terminate the automatic button animation state (a specific animation state) and a process to change the animation (a process to execute the animation after the operation). Therefore, even if the player desires to terminate the automatic button animation state (a specific animation state) and advance the animation based on their own actions arises within the animation reception period, a smooth transition between animation states becomes possible.

However, during the period when the demo screen is displayed (when the symbol changes are not yet executed), setting changes related to the automatic button performance state (changing to the automatic button performance state or canceling the automatic button performance state) can be made without requiring any operation on the sword ornament 5001. In other words, the sword ornament 5001 is given fewer opportunities to be operated than the operation button 410 during the period when the symbol changes are being executed, and when an opportunity to operate it is given, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than with the operation button 410. Therefore, it is more desirable to prevent operations on the sword ornament 5001 from being permitted solely for the purpose of changing the setting related to the automatic button performance state (a specific performance state), thereby enhancing the sense of premium when an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given and maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, during the period when the demo screen is displayed in a state where the symbol changes have not yet been executed, the automatic button animation state can be set or canceled by operating one of the multiple operating means other than the sword ornament 5001 (such as the operation button 410 or another operating means) multiple times.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of symbol changes when the machine is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, the setting can be changed to the automatic button effect state without requiring any operation on the sword ornament 5001. That is, as described above, the machine is controlled to the automatic button effect state by pressing the operation button 410 once in a "long press" manner; however, operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted solely for the purpose of changing the setting to the automatic button effect state.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a change in the setting related to the automatic button effect state can occur through an operation on the sword ornament 5001 only when an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs during the execution period of symbol variation while the machine is controlled to the automatic button effect state, and an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received as an effect within that reception period, resulting in the appearance of a corresponding post-operation effect. With this configuration, it becomes possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state through an operation on the sword ornament 5001 without compromising the sense of premium quality when an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is presented.

Furthermore, the multiple operating means provided by the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment may include, in addition to operating means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) that can be targeted by the "automatic performance function that generates an operation-time performance even without operation during the performance reception period" when the machine is in the automatic button performance state, special operating means that are not targeted by the "automatic performance function that generates an operation-time performance even without operation during the performance reception period." That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, a performance reception period occurs during which an opportunity to operate the special operating means is granted. If an operation to the special operating means is received during this performance reception period, the expected probability of a jackpot will be indicated by a post-operation performance corresponding to the performance reception. However, even if the machine is controlled to the automatic button performance state, if no operation to the special operating means is received during the performance reception period, the same post-operation performance as when the performance reception was received will not appear. However, in this case, although the same post-operation performance as when the performance reception was received will not appear, a different performance from the one when the performance reception was received may be displayed.

Furthermore, regarding the setting to an automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operated by long-pressing), it is desirable that this be prohibited not only when an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol change is in operation, but also when an effect acceptance period occurs for an operation means other than the operation button 410 (such as an effect acceptance period in which the expectation level is suggested when the sword ornament 5001 is operated, or an effect acceptance period in which the expectation level is suggested when a special operation means is operated). In other words, if the automatic button animation state is triggered by operating the operation button 410 (by long-pressing it) while within the animation reception period for an operation means other than the operation button 410, the "automatic animation function that triggers an animation even without operation during the animation reception period" may be activated midway through the animation reception period. This could cause the original animation reception (the animation reception when an operation means other than the operation button 410 is operated) to occur without any operation. For players unfamiliar with this automatic button animation state, this could lead to confusion as to whether the animation reception period for the operation button 410 or for an operation means other than the operation button 410 was occurring, potentially reducing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), a pre-announcement effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period. However, the pre-announcement effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when the machine is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) may be executed in a different display manner than the pre-announcement effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when the machine is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In other words, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether the machine is in an effect state in which the automatic effect function can operate within the specific effect reception period, allowing the player to enjoy the effects with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image indicating the remaining time (for example, a "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed during the performance reception period. However, when the performance reception period begins, a different performance image (for example, an image of lightning striking a specific area) may be displayed outside the specific area where the specific image is displayed, at least until the specific image (for example, a "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed (a premonition performance). In other words, when the performance reception period begins, by confirming the movement of a different performance image, the player can be prompted to focus on the area where the "specific image indicating the remaining time," which is currently hidden, will appear. This effectively prevents situations where the specific performance reception period ends before the player can perform the action in time. Moreover, even if the player cannot perform the action in time, the post-action performance will be executed by the automatic performance function, thus effectively maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, the player can perform state setting and desetting of the automatic button performance state. However, as in the following explanatory examples, the machine may be set to the automatic button performance state or de-set depending on the progress of the game and performance based on the result of the jackpot determination. Examples of how the state may be set or de-set depending on the progress of the game and performance include, for example, a control mode in which "the machine is controlled as an automatic button performance state while in a normal game state, but the automatic button performance state is de-set when the machine transitions to a jackpot game state or a high-probability time-saving state," a control mode in which "the automatic button performance state is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation, and a performance pattern is generated that de-sets the state when a predetermined time has elapsed since its occurrence, before the symbol variation in the execution state ends," a control mode in which "the automatic button performance state is generated over a period in which multiple symbol variations are executed," and so on. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 may be constantly controlled to an automatic button animation state. In this case, the automatic button animation state will never be deactivated, and the process of setting or deactivating the "automatic button animation state" itself will cease to exist.

Furthermore, the timing of the aforementioned automatic animation function's activation may be when the remaining time of the animation reception period has expired, or at a predetermined time thereafter, or at an intermediate point (specific timing) while the animation reception period is still ongoing. If the automatic animation function activates when the remaining time of the animation reception period has expired, or at a predetermined time thereafter, the post-operation animation will be executed as if the animation reception had occurred after the animation reception period had ended. Conversely, if the automatic animation function activates at an intermediate point (specific timing) while the animation reception period is still ongoing, the animation reception period will end at the time the automatic animation function activated (specific timing), and the post-operation animation will be executed, just as if an actual operation had occurred.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that post-operation animations will occur even without operation when the system is controlled to the automatic button animation state, it is important to activate the aforementioned automatic animation function during the animation reception period (a specific timing within the animation reception period) to initiate the corresponding post-operation animation. In other words, in this case, if the aforementioned automatic animation function does not activate even when the specific timing within the animation reception period arrives, the player can still trigger the post-operation animation by operating the system themselves after the specific timing arrives. This effectively suppresses anxiety when the system is controlled to the automatic button animation state (for example, "I might mistakenly believe I'm in the automatic button animation state when I'm not, and therefore won't be able to see the post-operation animation," or "The automatic animation function might not work due to some trouble, and I might not be able to see the post-operation animation," etc.).

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment possesses characteristic technologies related to the automatic button animation state. The characteristic technologies related to the automatic button animation state will be described sequentially below. These characteristic technologies may be applied to each of the animation examples described above, or they may be used in appropriate combinations.

Furthermore, in explaining each of the characteristic technologies below, it should be noted that, in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), when a performance acceptance period occurs, which can normally occur even when the system is not controlled in that specific performance state (automatic button performance state), the system will produce the same post-operation performance as if an operation had been performed, even if no operation was performed during that period. However, instead, a specific display performance (a display performance that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot judgment) that can only be executed when the system is controlled in that specific performance state (automatic button performance state) may be prepared, and when a specific validity period related to that specific display performance occurs while it is being performed, the system may produce the same post-operation performance as if an operation had been performed, even if no operation was performed during that specific validity period. With this configuration, the entertainment value is enhanced when the game is controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) (improvement in entertainment value by allowing the occurrence of specific display performances). Furthermore, even when a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) is present, the automatic performance function may not function during other performance acceptance periods set when a specific display performance is not occurring. However, during specific valid periods when a specific display performance is occurring, the automatic performance function functions, saving the player the trouble of operating the game and allowing them to experience a VIP-like feeling. Thus, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be favorably enhanced. It should be noted that the automatic performance function does not necessarily have to be disabled during all other performance acceptance periods set when a specific display performance is not occurring. If the automatic performance function is disabled during at least some performance acceptance periods, it is possible to expect the above-mentioned effects when a specific valid period occurs when a specific display performance is occurring (when a performance acceptance period occurs in which the automatic performance function is guaranteed to function). Furthermore, even if such a specific validity period occurs, it is desirable that, if no player action is taken during the period up to a specific timing, the aforementioned automatic performance function be activated at that specific timing to initiate the corresponding post-action performance.

Furthermore, as specific display effects that may be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect are prepared,
- When the first specific display effect is being executed and the first specific validity period occurs, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific validity period occurred, ending the first specific validity period and generating a corresponding post-operation effect.
- When the second specific display effect is being executed and the second specific validity period occurs, the automatic effect function described above will activate when the second predetermined time, which is longer than the first predetermined time, has elapsed since the second specific validity period began, ending the second specific validity period and generating a corresponding post-operation effect, and further,
- When a third specific display effect is being executed and a third specific validity period occurs, the system may perform the following processes while in a specific effect state: even though the system is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), if no operation is performed before the end of the third specific validity period, the same post-operation effect as when an operation has occurred will not appear. With such a configuration, even if an effect reception period (specific validity period) occurs while the system is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the automatic effect function described above may function after a first predetermined time has elapsed since the effect reception period occurred, or the automatic effect function may not function until a second predetermined time, which is longer than the first predetermined time, has elapsed, or the automatic effect function may not function at all even after the effect reception period has ended. Therefore, even when controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), it becomes necessary to check which type of specific display performance was being performed when the performance reception period (specific valid period) occurs. For example, if the automatic performance function described above does not function even after the first predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to advance the performance with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic performance function described above will function when the second predetermined time has elapsed, or whether the automatic performance function described above will not function at all. The first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period all receive performance reception and generate a post-operation performance when the operating means to be operated (for example, the operation button 410) enters an operating state (when a so-called single operation is performed).

Furthermore, the first, second, and third specific display effects may only be executable when the system is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). By enabling display patterns that would not appear when the system is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) when the system is controlled to that specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the enjoyment of the game while in that state can be suitably maintained. Also, while a first specific display effect (first specific valid period) and a second specific display effect (second specific valid period) may be provided, a third specific display effect (third specific valid period) does not necessarily have to be provided. Additionally, the post-operation effects that occur when an effect is received during the first, second, and third specific valid periods may have different content.

Furthermore, when the aforementioned automatic animation function triggers a post-operation animation, the bar display indicating the remaining time for the animation reception period (a display that changes image (in this case, area) over time) may be kept displayed when the automatic animation function is activated, rather than being hidden when the post-operation animation is triggered, in order to recognize at what point within the animation reception period the automatic animation function was activated (how much time remained in the animation reception period when the animation was received). With such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that continues to be displayed when the automatic animation function is activated, it becomes possible to recognize whether the animation reception period was the first specific valid period (the period when the automatic animation function is activated relatively early after the animation reception period begins, after a first predetermined time has elapsed) or the second specific valid period (the period when the automatic animation function is activated relatively late after the animation reception period begins, after a second predetermined time has elapsed).

In this sense, it is desirable that the probability of winning a jackpot differs between when the first specific valid period (the period during which the automatic performance function operates after a first predetermined time has elapsed since the performance acceptance period began) and when the second specific valid period (the period during which the automatic performance function operates after a second predetermined time has elapsed since the performance acceptance period began) occurs (for example, the second specific valid period being more advantageous). In this case, the first specific display performance and the second specific display performance may not necessarily be executed. However, if the first specific display performance and the second specific display performance are executed, the probability of winning a jackpot will differ between when the first specific display performance appears and when the second specific display performance appears (for example, the second specific display performance being more advantageous). Furthermore, if a post-operation performance occurs due to player operation within the performance acceptance period, the "bar display" may be hidden when the post-operation performance occurs, or, as with the automatic performance function described above, the "bar display" may be displayed when the post-operation performance occurs. The post-operation effects do not necessarily have to be performed as a display change on the effect display device 1600; for example, they may be performed as illumination by lamps provided on the game board 5 or as movement by movable decorative elements.

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned automatic effect function generates a post-operation effect, the player does not have any involvement with the target operating means (e.g., the operation button 410) when the effect is generated automatically. Therefore, from the player's perspective, there is a concern that they will not be able to determine which operating means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Accordingly, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated to generate a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display an image that suggests the target operating means (e.g., an image displaying the target operating means) within the effect acceptance period, and even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated, to not hide the image but to generate the post-operation effect while it is displayed. In this case, the display manner of the image that suggests the target operating means (e.g., color, transparency, etc.) does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, as long as it is possible to recognize which operating means was the target even after the post-operation effect has occurred. In contrast, if a post-operation animation occurs due to player action within the animation reception period, the image suggesting the target of the operation may be hidden while the post-operation animation is active. Alternatively, as with the automatic animation function described above, the image suggesting the target of the operation may be displayed while the post-operation animation is generated. Furthermore, when the automatic animation function is activated within the first specified valid period described above, or within the second specified valid period described above, the image suggesting the target of the operation may always be displayed while the post-operation animation is generated.

Furthermore, if the post-operation animation is triggered while the target suggestion image is displayed in one of several modes with different probability levels of winning, it becomes possible to simultaneously confirm both the mode of the target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation animation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Also, the post-operation animation does not necessarily have to be executed as a display change on the animation display device 1600; for example, it may be executed as illumination by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or as an action by a movable decorative element.

For example, even in a pachinko machine 1 that does not have the automatic performance function described above, if multiple patterns of suggestive images (such as mock images of the operating means) with different jackpot expectations (for example, the proportion of times a post-operation performance is executed in a pattern that only appears when a jackpot is achieved) are prepared, and when an operation is received through an operation by the player, the suggestive image (such as a mock image of the operating means) is displayed in one of the multiple patterns with different expectations at the time the post-operation performance is executed based on that operation received, then both the pattern of the suggestive image and the pattern of the post-operation performance can be confirmed simultaneously, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when creating an effective period for displaying a mock image (performance acceptance period), it is desirable to have two types of effective periods (performance acceptance period): one in which the display area decreases over time (first effective period, triggered by the fulfillment of the first condition), and another in which the display area does not decrease over time (second effective period, triggered by the fulfillment of the second condition), based on the type of effective period (performance acceptance period, etc.). In other words, in an effective period where the display area does not decrease over time, it becomes difficult to recognize how much time remains before operations can be accepted, thus effectively maintaining a sense of tension within the effective period. Note that "not displaying a specific image with a decreasing display area over time" can be achieved, for example, by displaying a gauge image in a manner where the display area decreases over time during the normal period (first effective period), while in the second effective period, either not displaying the gauge image itself, or displaying the gauge image but employing a method where its display area does not decrease over time.

In this regard, when an operation is received during the second validity period (when no display area decreases over time), it is desirable that the mock image remain displayed rather than hidden when the change corresponding to the operation (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. This allows it to be determined that the operation was received while the mock image was displayed (before the end of the validity period), thus eliminating concerns such as "I may have missed the operation request."

In this case, the display state of the imitation image (e.g., color, transparency, etc.) does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the change in response to the operation (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination). The imitation image may be difficult to see due to other images. It is sufficient that the operating means that was the target of the operation can be recognized even when the change in response to the operation (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination) has occurred. However, in order to suitably obtain such effects, it is desirable that, at least at the time the change in response to the operation (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination) is initiated, the display state of the imitation image is maintained in the same manner as it was displayed before the operation was received, and that the imitation image is not difficult to see due to other images. Therefore, if the dummy image was dynamically displayed during the valid period in which operation acceptance is permitted, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when a change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. Conversely, if a change in response to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination) occurs due to an operation by the player within the first valid period, the dummy image may be hidden when the change (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs. Alternatively, as in the case of the second valid period described above, the dummy image may be displayed without being hidden, and the change in response to the operation acceptance (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) may occur while the dummy image is displayed.

However, even during the validity period in which "the display area of a specific image decreases over time" is not shown, it is desirable to display a mock image of the target operating means, and to display this mock image as a moving image that progresses at a specific speed. With such a configuration, although the remaining time is not indicated by a gauge image, it is possible, albeit difficult, to grasp the remaining time for accepting operations based on how much the moving mock image has progressed, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game effectively.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is equipped with a first operating means (e.g., an operating button 410) and a second operating means (e.g., a sword ornament 5001) as operating means. There are cases where an effective period (performance acceptance period) is generated during which operation acceptance is permitted for the first operating means, and cases where an effective period (performance acceptance period) is generated during which operation acceptance is permitted for the second operating means. During the effective period during which operation acceptance is permitted for the first operating means, a first imitation image that imitates the first operating means is displayed, and during the effective period during which operation acceptance is permitted for the second operating means, a second imitation image that imitates the second operating means is displayed. Furthermore, the expected probability of a big win (the proportion of times a post-operation performance that only appears during a big win is executed) suggested when operation acceptance is made differs between the effective period during which operation acceptance is permitted for the first operating means and the effective period during which operation acceptance is permitted for the second operating means. Furthermore, in addition to the valid period during which operation requests are permitted for the first operating means (performance reception period) and the valid period during which operation requests are permitted for the second operating means (performance reception period), other valid periods may also be possible. In this regard, when an operation request is received during the valid period with a higher probability of winning (for example, the valid period during which operation requests are permitted for the second operating means), it is desirable that the mock image (second mock image) remains displayed rather than hidden when the change corresponding to the operation request (at least one of the changes resulting from the post-operation performance, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed.

This allows the player to recognize that the operation was properly received, not only in situations like the one shown in Figure 183(f) above, but also, for example, even if the player is given an opportunity to operate the second operating means (e.g., the sword ornament 5001), but mistakenly operates the first operating means (e.g., the operation button 410), and the operation is performed on the second operating means (e.g., the sword ornament 5001) while the first operating means (e.g., the operation button 410) remains in the operating state (operating), even if the operation is received.

In this case, the display state of the mock-up image (e.g., color, transparency, etc.) does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the change in response to the operation (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination). The mock-up image may be difficult to see due to other images. It is sufficient that the operating means that was the target of the operation can be recognized even when the change in response to the operation (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination) has occurred. However, in order to suitably obtain the above effects, it is desirable that, at least at the time the change in response to the operation (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination) is initiated, the display state of the mock-up image is maintained in the same manner as it was displayed before the operation was received, and that the gauge image is not made difficult to see due to other images. Therefore, if the dummy image was dynamically displayed during the valid period in which operation acceptance is permitted, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display even when a change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes resulting from the post-operation effect, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. Furthermore, in order to ensure that the player recognizes that the effect has been properly accepted, even if a change corresponding to the operation acceptance (such as a display change or lamp illumination) occurs due to the player's operation within the first valid period, it is desirable to keep the dummy image (first dummy image) displayed while the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (such as a display change or lamp illumination) occurs, rather than hiding it when the change (display change or lamp illumination) occurs.

According to this configuration, the system comprises: a determination means for making a determination; an effect means for performing an effect based on the result of the determination by the determination means; a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means obtaining a predetermined result; a specific operation receiving part (an operation button 410 that is displaceable between a normal position and a pressed position) provided to be displaceable between a first position and a second position; a first detection unit capable of detecting a specific action (pressing operation) by the player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving part to the second position; and a second detection unit capable of detecting a special action (e.g., sheathing operation) by the player toward a special operation receiving part (e.g., a sword ornament 5001) different from the specific operation receiving part, and includes a first effect receiving period and a second effect receiving period as an effect reception period (where the type of post-operation effect that occurs when an effect reception is made is different). The system is configured such that, even if the player performs a specific action while the specific operation receiving unit remains in the second position, the second detection unit detects the specific operation receiving unit and performs an action. The system also provides a configuration where, during the first action reception period, a specific image resembling the specific operation receiving unit is displayed, and the second detection unit detects the specific operation receiving unit and performs an action. Furthermore, even if the player performs the specific operation receiving unit from the first position to the second position while the specific operation receiving unit remains in the second position, the second detection unit detects the specific operation receiving unit and performs an action, and based on this action, the post-operation action can be executed.

Furthermore, in this configuration, even if the special action is performed by the player while the specific operation receiving unit remains in the second position, the second detection unit will detect the action and receive the notification. At the point when the post-operation animation is initiated based on this notification, the special image mimicking the special operation receiving unit will not be hidden but will remain displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the post-operation animation is being executed as a correct operation, not an incorrect one.

Furthermore, if the special dummy image is displayed in one of several modes with different probability levels of winning, the post-operation animation will begin in the mode currently displayed. If the animation is received without such an incorrect operation, the dummy image may be kept displayed when the post-operation animation begins, or it may be hidden when the post-operation animation begins.

Incidentally, the second performance reception period, during which an opportunity to operate is granted to a special operation receiving unit, occurs less frequently than the first performance reception period, during which an opportunity to operate is granted to a specific operation receiving unit. This is considered to be one of the causes of operation errors. Therefore, when the second performance reception period, during which an opportunity to operate is granted to a special operation receiving unit, occurs, it is desirable that a reception permission sound is output that indicates that a state where performance reception is permitted has been reached, or that a state where performance reception is permitted will be reached. This will allow the player to recognize that the second performance reception period has occurred, and is expected to reduce the likelihood of operation errors. The "reception permission sound" is a sound that, once output, will always result in a reception permission state (valid period) occurring while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned), or indicates that a reception permission state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that the output has started within the set time frame in which performance reception is permitted, suggesting that the state has become one in which performance reception is permitted, or that the output has started before the set time frame in which performance reception is permitted has begun, and is output as a sound effect such as "ping."

However, even when the first performance reception period occurs, during which an opportunity for operation is granted to a specific operation receiving unit, a reception permission tone indicating that performance reception is permitted, or that a state of permitted performance reception will be reached, may be output. In this case, however, it is desirable that the manner (timbre, etc.) of the reception permission tone differs between the occurrence of the first performance reception period and the occurrence of the second performance reception period. Alternatively, during the first performance reception period, even if performance reception occurs while the reception permission tone is being output, the output of the reception permission tone should not be terminated but should continue. However, during the second performance reception period, if performance reception occurs while the reception permission tone is being output, it is desirable that the output of the reception permission tone be terminated midway through. Both of these configurations may be adopted. Such a configuration makes it easier to determine whether the first or second performance reception period is occurring, and allows for proper determination of whether the operation was performed on a specific operation receiving unit or on a special operation receiving unit.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, there are two cases in which a small gauge validity period (performance acceptance period) is generated, which indicates the remaining time during which operation acceptance is permitted, by first displaying a gauge image with a relatively small display area (small gauge image) and then reducing the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) over time (for example, by eventually reducing the display area to "0"); and second, there are two cases in which a large gauge validity period (performance acceptance period) is generated, which indicates the remaining time during which operation acceptance is permitted, by first displaying a gauge image with a relatively large display area (large gauge image) and then reducing the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) over time (for example, by eventually reducing the display area to "0"). The expected probability of a jackpot (the proportion of instances in which a performance that only appears during a jackpot is executed as a post-operation performance) is different between the small gauge validity period when the small gauge image is displayed and the large gauge validity period when the large gauge image is displayed (for example, the expected probability of a jackpot is higher during the large gauge validity period). Furthermore, in addition to the small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period, other validity periods may also be possible. The small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period may grant opportunities for operation to the same target, or they may grant opportunities for operation to different targets.

In this regard, when an operation is received during the large gauge validity period, it is desirable that the large gauge image remains displayed rather than hidden when the change corresponding to the operation (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. Furthermore, it is desirable that the display of the large gauge image shrinking over time continues even when the change corresponding to the operation (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed. This allows for a sense of security, as the display of the large gauge image makes it appear as if a lot of time remains, while simultaneously creating a sense of unease about whether the operation was properly received after the operation was received, thereby effectively maintaining a sense of tension.

In this case, the display state of the gauge image (e.g., color, transmittance, etc.) does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the change in response to the operation (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination), and the gauge image may be obscured by other images. However, in order to suitably obtain the above-mentioned effects, it is desirable that, at least at the time when the change in response to the operation (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination) is initiated, the display state of the gauge image is maintained in the same manner as it was displayed before the operation was received, and that the gauge image is not obscured by other images. In contrast, during the small gauge validity period, if a change corresponding to the player's operation occurs (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination), the gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden when such change (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) occurs. Alternatively, similar to the large gauge validity period described above, the gauge image (large gauge image) may be displayed, and changes corresponding to the operation (display change, lamp illumination, etc.) may occur while it is displayed.

Furthermore, when the large gauge validity period occurs, it is desirable that a confirmation sound be output to indicate that the system is in a state where performance reception is permitted, or that a state where performance reception will be permitted will be indicated. This will allow the player to recognize that the large gauge validity period has occurred, and will further emphasize the sense of security until the operation reception is completed. The "confirmation sound" is a sound that, once output, indicates that the acceptance state (validity period) will definitely occur during the duration of the output (while the sound data is assigned), or that the acceptance state (validity period) has already occurred. In other words, it is a sound that starts outputting within the set time when performance reception is permitted, indicating that the system is in a state where performance reception is permitted, or that starts outputting before the set time when performance reception is permitted begins, indicating that the system is in a state where performance reception is permitted. For example, it may be output as a performance sound such as "ping."

However, even when a small gauge validity period occurs, a signal tone indicating that a state where performance reception is permitted, or that a state where performance reception will be permitted, may be output. In this case, however, it is desirable that the characteristics (timbre, etc.) of the signal tone differ between the small gauge validity period and the large gauge validity period. Alternatively, during the small gauge validity period, even if performance reception is performed while the signal tone is being output, the signal tone should continue to be output without terminating. However, during the large gauge validity period, if performance reception is performed while the signal tone is being output, it is desirable that the signal tone be terminated midway through. Both of these configurations may be adopted. Such configurations make it easier to determine whether a small gauge validity period or a large gauge validity period is occurring, and allow for proper determination of whether an operation reception occurred during the small gauge validity period or the large gauge validity period.

Large gauge images and small gauge images may differ not only in size but also in their morphology (e.g., images that are not similar).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or below), during the period in which operation reception is permitted, the mock image is dynamically displayed to depict the displacement of the operation reception unit. In this regard, if the mock image is not hidden but remains displayed when a change in response to operation reception (at least one of the changes resulting from post-operation effects, such as a display change or lamp illumination) begins to be executed, the dynamic display of the mock image may also be kept continuous without termination.

Furthermore, the mock images and gauge images may be displayed as a unified mock image, as described later.

In the above-mentioned and subsequent examples of gameplay, "operation reception" may refer not only to detection by mechanical operating means such as buttons, but also to operation reception performed by detecting contact with a specific operation receiving part using a touch sensor, or operation reception performed by non-contact detection of the player's movements in a specific area.

Furthermore, when an effect that generates an effect acceptance period during which an opportunity to operate a means of operation (any of multiple means of operation) is defined as an "operation-based effect," such operation-based effects may be executed in parallel with other specific effects unrelated to it (for example, a movable body effect or a count effect). However, in this case, it is desirable that the above-mentioned automatic effect function be activated more frequently when the "operation-based effect" is executed but the "other specific effects unrelated to it" are not executed, than when the "operation-based effect" and the "other specific effects unrelated to it" are executed in parallel. In other words, when an "operation-related effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to it" are running in parallel, even if the "operation-related effect" is not received and the post-operation effect is not executed, the "another specific effect unrelated to it" is still running, which can help suppress a decline in game enjoyment. However, when an "operation-related effect" is executed but "another specific effect unrelated to it" is not, if the "operation-related effect" is not received and the post-operation effect is not executed, no effect will be executed at all, making a decline in game enjoyment unavoidable. Therefore, when an "operation-related effect" is executed but "another specific effect unrelated to it" is not executed, the automatic effect function described above should be made more active than when both the "operation-related effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to it" are running in parallel, thereby allowing the enjoyment of the game when an operation-related effect occurs to be maintained appropriately. The ratio may be 100%. Incidentally, premonitory effects that occur before the performance reception period begins, and effects in which the target control means is activated, can be said to be executed as "operation-related effects" or effects related thereto. Furthermore, if a "different specific effect" is to occur, for example, before the start of the performance reception period (preferably a premonitory effect), it becomes possible to suggest in advance that the above-mentioned automatic performance function will be more likely to function. In this case, it is desirable that the effect be executed after the end of the performance reception period (preferably a post-operation effect). On the other hand, if a "different specific effect" is to occur, for example, after the start of the performance reception period (preferably a premonitory effect) and be executed before the end of the performance reception period, it becomes possible to provide an effect that creates a sense of tension, as it becomes possible to recognize whether the above-mentioned automatic performance function is more likely to function only immediately beforehand. In this regard, if the "other specific effect" is to be triggered before the start of the effect reception period (preferably the premonition effect), and if this "other specific effect" is performed multiple times within a single symbol variation, it will be executed even when the effect reception period does not occur. This allows for a heightened sense of tension regarding whether the effect reception period will occur, even when the automatic effect function is activated when the "other specific effect" is performed.

Furthermore, when in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), the losing spins corresponding to the jackpot judgment result are sequentially processed until the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive losing spins are executed, and the 1000th losing spin is reached), a performance reception period may occur with a predetermined probability in which an opportunity to operate the operating means (any of the multiple operating means) is granted based on the jackpot judgment result. In addition, even if the performance reception period occurs, if there is no operation by the player, the above-mentioned automatic performance function may or may not be activated. In contrast, when the machine is in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), and the number of losing spins corresponding to the jackpot judgment result is sequentially processed, if the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive losing spins, and the 1000th losing spin), then for the symbol spin (performance pattern) that reaches this specific value, a performance acceptance period is always generated in which an opportunity to operate the operating means (any of the multiple operating means) is given, regardless of the jackpot judgment result. Furthermore, even if the player does not operate during this performance acceptance period, the automatic performance function described above is activated, and the same post-operation performance as if the player had operated during this performance acceptance period is always generated. With such a configuration, when the number of consecutive executions of losing spins reaches a specific value, the pachinko machine itself is implemented as a performance that always activates the automatic performance function even if the player does not operate, as if it feels responsible for having "prompted the player to operate each time a performance acceptance period occurred while losing spins were being executed consecutively, but without achieving any results," thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game appropriately. Furthermore, in this case, when the number of losing spins has been processed sequentially and reached a specific value (for example, the 1000th losing spin), it is desirable to display a special display image that is different from the display image that appeared during the display acceptance period until the number of losing spins was processed sequentially and reached a specific value (for example, up to 999 losing spins) (for example, "Operate it"), such as "If it's too much trouble, I'll operate it for you." Furthermore, even after a specific symbol variation (performance pattern) has been completed, until a specific condition (e.g., the occurrence of a jackpot state) is met, it is desirable that each time a symbol variation is completed, a performance reception period is always generated within that symbol variation (performance pattern), regardless of the jackpot determination result, during which an opportunity to operate the operating means (any of the multiple operating means) is granted. A special display image (e.g., "If it's too much trouble, I'll operate it for you") should also be displayed. Even if the player does not operate during this performance reception period, the aforementioned automatic performance function should be activated to ensure that the post-operation performance corresponding to the performance reception is always generated.

Furthermore, when in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), the system may display the remaining number of spins until the number of losing spins corresponding to the jackpot judgment reaches a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive losing spins, followed by the 1000th losing spin).

Furthermore, when in a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), while the losing spins corresponding to the jackpot judgment result are sequentially processed until the number of executions reaches a specific value, both the performance acceptance period for the first operation means and the performance acceptance period for the second operation means may occur during the symbol spin. However, when the number of executions of the losing spins reaches a specific value, the performance may be advanced in such a way that only one of the performance acceptance period for the first operation means or the performance acceptance period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other does not occur. With such a configuration, since the same operation means is always given an opportunity to operate, it is possible to effectively suppress the possibility of creating expectations based on the occurrence of a performance acceptance period itself. However, considering that this example of a performance is designed to ensure the automatic performance function activates even without player intervention, as if the machine itself felt responsible for the previous failures—for not achieving any results despite prompting the player to take action each time a performance acceptance period occurred during a series of losing spins—it is desirable to avoid creating further excessive expectations by generating a performance acceptance period for the first operating means (e.g., the operation button 410), which has a relatively lower expected value at the time of occurrence, and not generating a performance acceptance period for the second operating means (e.g., the sword ornament 5001).

Furthermore, the first performance reception period, during which an opportunity to operate the first operating means (e.g., the operation button 410) among the multiple operating means is granted, can occur both when the system is not controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) and when it is controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state). However, the second performance reception period, during which an opportunity to operate the second operating means (e.g., the sword ornament 5001) among the multiple operating means, may be configured so that it cannot occur when the system is not controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), but can occur when the system is controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state). Such a configuration enhances the performance aspect when the system is controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), and allows for the optimal maintenance of the game's enjoyment when the system is in that specific performance state (automatic button performance state).

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a performance acceptance period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
- A simulated image of the operating means (an image suggesting the operating means that is to be operated on) is displayed (simulated image display means),
- After the performance reception period has started, if the player performs an action while the mock image is displayed, the post-action performance can be executed based on that action (player action reception means),
- After the performance reception period begins, if a specific timing arrives while the mock image is displayed and no action is taken by the player, the post-action performance can be executed without any action from the player (automatic performance reception mechanism).
However, it is desirable that the mock images be displayed in one of several modes in which the proportion (expected value) of post-operation effects being executed in a "mode favorable to the player" when an effect request is made is different. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to generate post-operation effects while the expected value is recognizable, whether the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation reception means or by the automatic effect reception means.

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned automatic effect function generates a post-operation effect, the player does not have any involvement with the target operating means (for example, the operation button 410) when the post-operation effect is automatically generated. Therefore, from the player's perspective, there is a concern that they will not be able to determine which operating means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Accordingly, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated to generate a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display a mock image (an operating target suggestion image that suggests the operating means to be operated) within the effect acceptance period, and even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated, to generate the post-operation effect while displaying the mock image rather than hiding it. In this case, the display manner of the operating target suggestion image (for example, color and transparency) does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect is generated, as long as it is possible to recognize which operating means was the target even after the post-operation effect has been generated. In contrast, if a post-operation animation occurs due to player action within the animation reception period, the image suggesting the target of the operation may be hidden when the post-operation animation occurs. Alternatively, similar to the case where the automatic animation function described above is activated, the image suggesting the target of the operation may be displayed when the post-operation animation occurs. The post-operation animation may be executed using at least an area of the animation display device 1600 different from the area where the mock image is displayed, or it may be executed as illumination by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or as an action by a movable decorative element.

Furthermore, if the mock image is displayed in one of several variations with different levels of expectation, it will be possible to check the level of expectation (the display variation of the mock image) that was suggested during the performance acceptance period, even when a post-operation performance occurs.

The mock-up image that remains displayed in this manner will be hidden after the post-operation effect occurs. However, it is desirable that the time between the execution of the post-operation effect and the hiding of the mock-up image differs depending on whether the automatic processing by the first automatic processing means is executed when a specific time has elapsed since the first-side effect acceptance period began, or when a time different from the specific time has elapsed since the first-side effect acceptance period began. With this configuration, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect occurred due to automatic processing when a specific time has elapsed or when a time different from the specific time has elapsed, it becomes possible to recognize when the post-operation effect occurred by checking the time between the execution of the post-operation effect and the hiding of the mock-up image.

Furthermore, the probability of winning a jackpot may differ depending on whether the post-operation animation occurs automatically after a specific time has elapsed, or after a different time has elapsed.

Furthermore, when the game is controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state), if a performance reception period occurs during which the player is given an opportunity to perform an action, the game may be configured so that during this reception period, either of two display modes (for example, a low-expectancy display mode indicating a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot, or a high-expectancy display mode indicating a relatively high probability of winning a jackpot) may appear. When the high-expectancy display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, the game will always be recognized (the automatic performance function will always operate) even if no action is performed during the reception period, and the post-action performance corresponding to that recognition will be executed. However, when the low-expectancy display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, the game may progress in such a way that the game may either be recognized (the automatic performance function will operate) and the post-action performance corresponding to that recognition will be executed even if no action is performed during the reception period, or the game may not be recognized (the automatic performance function will not operate) and the post-action performance will not be executed. In other words, if a player forgets to operate the system when a high-expectation display pattern (e.g., a red operation image) appears, a decrease in game enjoyment due to the inability to confirm the post-operation animation is unavoidable. However, if a player forgets to operate the system when a low-expectation display pattern (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, the decrease in game enjoyment is not expected to be as significant. Therefore, while ensuring that the automatic animation function is always activated within the animation reception period when a player forgets to operate the system when a high-expectation display pattern (e.g., a red operation image) appears to avoid a decrease in game enjoyment due to forgetting to operate the system, the automatic animation function is not necessarily activated within the animation reception period when a low-expectation display pattern (e.g., a blue operation image) appears, thereby creating a sense of tension and increasing player participation by encouraging players to avoid forgetting to operate the system. Furthermore, when the system is not controlled to a specific animation state (e.g., automatic button animation state), the low-expectation display pattern (e.g., a blue operation image) may appear, but the high-expectation display pattern (e.g., a red operation image) may not appear. Also, during the animation reception period, any of three or more display patterns may appear.

[Further creative possibilities for displaying mock images]
As explained with reference to Figure 118, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of performing a variation pattern determination to determine which of several variation patterns to execute based on the result of the jackpot determination. When a variation pattern is selected as a result of this variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is capable of performing a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) to determine which of several expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared for the selected variation pattern will be selectively displayed. Depending on the result of this performance determination, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared for the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that none of the multiple expected performances (preview performances, etc.) will be executed.

Then, when such a performance judgment (performance pattern judgment,予告 judgment, etc.) is performed, control is performed to display the performance content corresponding to the result of the performance judgment on the performance display device 1600. As a result, the variation performance using decorative symbols corresponding to the jackpot judgment is executed along with the expectation performance (preview performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and movable part movement (mechanical device performance). As a result, when the variation performance using decorative symbols, along with the expectation performance related to the background depiction and movable part movement, stops on a jackpot symbol, the player is made able to play the jackpot game as a bonus.

In this configuration, the variation in the decorative patterns serves as an effect indicating whether or not a jackpot has been won, while the background depiction and moving parts serve as an effect suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot being won (including 0% and 100%). In other words, players enjoy the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high-expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach animation accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, regardless of the result obtained as an animation determination (such as a pre-announcement determination), once the symbol animation based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when predetermined conditions are met), an operation acceptance animation (valid period) that allows animation reception can be generated. However, as will be described later, the acceptance sound output when the operation acceptance animation is generated is designed to have different characteristics depending on the result of the animation determination, thereby indicating the proportion of post-operation animations that are executed in a highly expected manner and the proportion of jackpot symbols that stop.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) that do not even form a reach state as a result of the variation pattern determination, if a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, an operation acceptance performance (valid period) that allows performance acceptance can be generated when the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when the predetermined conditions are met). However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) will not be generated even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the performance determination. Also, the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that occurs with the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance from the operation acceptance performance (valid period) that occurs when the symbol performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during an SP reach.

Furthermore, regarding variation patterns that trigger an operation acceptance animation (valid period) at a predetermined timing during an SP reach, regardless of the outcome of the pre-announcement animation judgment, it is also possible to include patterns other than the "specific variation patterns" mentioned above. However, it is desirable that variation patterns that trigger an operation acceptance animation (valid period) at a predetermined timing regardless of the outcome of the pre-announcement animation judgment are not included in the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns), or that their selection rate be reduced.

However, the operation reception animation (valid period) that may occur under these conditions only triggers a post-operation animation that, as long as an operation is detected within the set time (valid period), causes a predetermined change (at least one of the following: a display change in the animation display device 1600, a change in the sound of the animation from the speaker, a change in the illumination of the lamp, and an animation action by the movable decorative element) to the animation target. Therefore, the operation reception animation (valid period) itself lacks much in the way of animation, and there are concerns about a decline in the enjoyment of the game until the post-operation animation is executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception display,
As mentioned above, various measures have been taken to enable the generation of at least the following: a low-expectancy unsuppressed reception performance that provides an opportunity to operate while background music (specific type of sound effect) corresponding to a low-expectancy variation pattern (a predetermined variation pattern) is output in an unsuppressed manner during the execution period of a symbol performance (performance pattern) based on that variation pattern (performance pattern); and a high-expectancy suppressed reception performance that provides an opportunity to operate while background music (specific type of sound effect) corresponding to that variation pattern (performance pattern) is output in a suppressed manner or silently, or in a state of no output (such as the playback period in which audible sound is recorded in the sound data has ended, or the channel assignment has ended).

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment further enhances the enjoyment of the game when an operation reception animation (valid period) occurs by displaying the mock image shown in the operation reception animation as an integrated mock image, which is combined with a peripheral decorative image that decorates the periphery of the mock image. It is desirable that such an integrated mock image be displayed in both the operation reception animation (valid period) that occurs when a symbol animation based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during an SP reach, and the operation reception animation (valid period) that occurs with the predetermined variation pattern, and it is also desirable that it be displayed in both low-expectancy non-suppression reception animations and high-expectancy suppression reception animations. Furthermore, for each of the above-mentioned animation examples, it is desirable to implement them by replacing the display mode of the exemplified mock image with one of the integrated mock images described below, in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The following explains how to display a copy image as an "integrated copy image".
First, to reiterate the term "imitation image," in an operation reception presentation, the operating means that are subject to the opportunity to operate are provided with an "operation receiving part" that receives operation by the player, and a "peripheral decoration part" that decorates the periphery of the operation receiving part. In this respect, "imitation image" refers to an image that imitates the "operation receiving part" of such an operating means. The "operation receiving part" is usually provided to be displaced by operation by the player, and the "peripheral decoration part" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the operating means (presentation operation unit 400) exemplified in Figures 39 and 40, the "operation receiving part" corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the "peripheral decoration part" corresponds to the frame unit 415. Also, in the operating means (sword decoration body 5001) exemplified in Figures 124 and 139, the "operation receiving part" corresponds to the sword part 5010, and the "peripheral decoration part" corresponds to the sheath part 5020.

Figure 144 shows an example of an "integrated imitation image" displayed when an operation reception animation (valid period) occurs on an operating means equipped with an "operation receiving section" that receives a "press operation" by a player.

In this explanatory example, for the sake of clarity, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiving part" on the upper surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword ornament 5001. That is, when the handle button 5014 is "pressed" by the player, it is pushed into the handle portion 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means). This detection information is then used for the performance (such as triggering the execution of a post-operation performance). With this configuration, the sword ornament 5001, as an operation unit, is provided with two operation receiving parts: the "handle button 5014" which can move (up and down) relative to the handle portion 5012, and the "handle portion 5012" which can move (up and down) relative to the sheath portion 5020.

Figure 144 illustrates the "integrated mock-up image" that occurs when a specific operation reception animation (valid period) is triggered, granting an opportunity to operate the pattern button 5014 when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. However, in Figure 144 and the examples described below, the "integrated mock-up image" when granting an opportunity to operate the pattern button 5014 may be applied as the "integrated mock-up image" when an operation reception animation (valid period) is triggered for the operation button 410, rather than the pattern button 5014. In other words, in this case, the "mock-up image of the operation button 410" exemplified in each of the above-described animation examples can be replaced with the "integrated mock-up image" described below. In this case, the pattern button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a component.

As shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific operation acceptance animation (valid period) is generated that grants an opportunity to operate the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410), the animation display device 1600 displays the button imitation image BMG, which imitates the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410), as an integrated imitation image IGa to IGd, which is an integrated image of the button imitation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. In the example shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the button imitation image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are not prepared as separate image data, but are displayed only as a single integrated image data (integrated imitation image IGa to IGd). Furthermore, when the integrated imitation image IGa to IGd is displayed, operation prompts such as "Press" and "Down arrow" are also displayed, but for the sake of simplicity, these are omitted here.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, multiple performance modes are provided as post-operation performances to be executed when an operation is accepted during a specific operation acceptance performance (valid period), including a "first performance mode with relatively low expectation" and a "second performance mode with relatively high expectation," and one of these performance modes is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination (performance determination). In this regard, in the examples shown in Figures 144(a) to (d),
- During a specific operation reception animation (valid period), the appearance rate of the "second animation animation, which has a relatively higher expectation level" is higher when the animation shown in Figure 144(b) (integrated mock image IGb) appears compared to when the animation shown in Figure 144(a) (integrated mock image IGa) appears.
- During a specific operation reception animation (valid period), the appearance rate of the "second animation animation, which has a relatively higher expectation level" is higher when the animation shown in Figure 144(c) (integrated mockup image IGc) appears compared to when the animation shown in Figure 144(b) (integrated mockup image IGb) appears.
- In a specific operation reception animation (valid period), the appearance rate of the "second animation animation, which has a relatively higher expectation level," is higher when the animation shown in Figure 144(d) (integrated animation image IGd) appears than when the animation shown in Figure 144(c) (integrated animation image IGc) appears. This relationship is established so that, based on the result of the jackpot judgment (animation judgment), one of the integrated animation images IGa to IGd is displayed.

Regarding the four embodiments shown as integrated mock images IGa to IGd, it is not necessary to prepare all of them. Even preparing at least two embodiments is sufficient to suggest the expected outcome as a post-operation effect within the valid period. Furthermore, it is also possible to prepare additional embodiments different from the above four embodiments (integrated mock images IGa to IGd) and display any of these prepared embodiments.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
- An operating means (sword ornament 5001, performance operation unit 400) having an operating receiving part (handle button 5014 or operating button 410) that is displaced by operation by the player, and a peripheral decorative part (handle part 5012, frame unit 415) provided around its periphery,
- Integrated mock image display means that displays a mock image of the operation receiving part as an integrated mock image IGa to IGd, which is formed by integrating a mock image of the mock image with a peripheral decorative image that decorates the periphery of the mock image,
- The system includes an operation reception execution means that can cause a display change (post-operation effect) when a player performs an operation while an integrated mock-up image is displayed, causing a predetermined displacement in the operation reception part, and the integrated mock-up image can be displayed in any of multiple forms (integrated mock-up images IGa to IGd).

The details of the "integrated model images" shown in Figures 144(a) to (d) will be explained separately for each of their embodiments (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

First, the "integrated mock-up image IGa" shown in Figure 144(a) is composed of a normal button mock-up image BMGa and a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa that decorates its periphery. However, in the "integrated mock-up image IGa," while the normal button mock-up image BMGa is displayed as an image that "mocks the patterned button 5014 (or operation button 410), which is the object to which an operation opportunity is provided," the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa does not mock the peripheral decoration part (pattern part 5012, or frame unit 415) that is actually provided on the periphery of the patterned button 5014 (or operation button 410), which is the object to which an operation opportunity is provided. Instead, it decorates the periphery of the normal button mock-up image BMGa as a virtual decoration in the display effect of the performance display device 1600.

With this configuration, even if multiple operating means are provided, it is easy to recognize which of those operating means is being operated by visually inspecting the normal button imitation image BMGa, which mimics (part of) the operating means being operated. Furthermore, since the normal button imitation image BMGa itself is not an actual peripheral decoration, but rather a large, luxurious image (integrated imitation image IGa) integrated with a desirable peripheral decoration image to enhance decorative and performance aspects, the visual impact when the normal button imitation image BMGa is displayed is increased, and an improvement in the enjoyment of the game is expected. Additionally, there is no need to worry about the cost or installation space required to make the actual peripheral decoration more luxurious, and it becomes possible to achieve a high degree of freedom in performance that is not limited by the shape of the actual peripheral decoration.

In the "integrated mock image IGa" shown in Figure 144(a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is represented as a base for mounting the button (normal button mock image BMGa), and its upper surface is decorated with a predetermined design to warn that it is a high-risk button. As described above, these "bases" and "predetermined decorations" have different shapes and are represented as different decorations than the actual peripheral decoration parts.

In this regard, the "integrated mock image IGa" according to this embodiment provides a display area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG in addition to the normal peripheral decorative image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to Figure 145, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is capable of displaying an area within the display area that decreases over time. More specifically, when no operation is received within the validity period, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a way that decreases over time from a predetermined maximum display area to a predetermined minimum display area (including "0"). That is, in this case, the normal peripheral decorative image SSGa not only serves to indicate the operation means being operated on, but also to indicate the remaining time until the state in which operation acceptance is permitted (validity period) ends.

In the normal peripheral decorative image SSGa shown in Figure 144(a), a partition image KG is provided to demarcate the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas within the normal peripheral decorative image SSGa. The area enclosed by this partition image KG functions as the "display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG." However, the partition image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed; a predetermined range within the normal peripheral decorative image SSGa may be designated as the "display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG."

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 144(a), a predetermined decoration (in this case, a "black and white striped pattern") is applied to the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. A gauge image (in this case, a "gray" gauge image) GG with a predetermined transparency is displayed superimposed on the display area with the predetermined decoration. With this configuration, the predetermined decoration remains visible even in the area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game throughout the entire period from when the gauge image GG is full to when it is empty.

Furthermore, when realizing such a display configuration within the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, in addition to the method of overlaying the gauge image GG with a predetermined transparency onto the display area with predetermined decoration, a method may also be employed in which the color of the display area itself, with its predetermined decoration, changes between the parts with the gauge and the parts without the gauge. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist as standalone image data; the gauge image GG can be represented solely by the color change of the predetermined decoration within the display area.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 144(a), the predetermined decoration (in this case, "black and white stripes") applied within the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is applied in a way that extends across other areas within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. This further enhances the integrated decorative quality of the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself, and is therefore more favorably expected to improve the enjoyment of the game when the "integrated mock-up image IGa" is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 144(a), when a specific operation reception animation (valid period) occurs in the performance display device 1600 where the "integrated mock-up image IGa" is displayed, the target pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is illuminated in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button mock-up image BMGa within the "integrated mock-up image IGa". In other words, as will be described later, the button mock-up image BMG has multiple modes with different levels of expectation, and the normal button mock-up image BMGa is displayed as one of these modes. By adopting this illumination mode, it becomes possible to recognize the mode (level of expectation) of the button mock-up image BMG simply by checking the target pattern button 5014, without having to visually examine the normal button mock-up image BMGa.

Regarding the "button imitation image BMGa (Figure 144(a))," it does not necessarily have to be an exact imitation of the target button 5014 (or operation button 410). The important thing is that it should be displayed with a level of imitation (such as deformation) that allows the user to recognize which operation means is being operated.

In contrast, the "integrated mock-up image IGb" shown in Figure 144(b) is basically the same as the "integrated mock-up image IGa" described above, and is composed of an integrated image consisting of a button mock-up image BMG that mimics the target of operation and a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. However, in this "integrated mock-up image IGb," the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" described above, but the button mock-up image BMG is displayed as a "special button mock-up image BMGb" with a different shape than the "button mock-up image BMGa" described above.

More specifically, in the "integrated mock-up image IGb" shown in Figure 144(b), the special button mock-up image BMGb does not mock the patterned button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the target of operation, and is displayed as an image with a different shape from the "button mock-up image BMGa (Figure 144(a))" that mocks the patterned button 5014 (or operation button 410). However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that it will become difficult to recognize which of the multiple operation means is the target of operation when the "integrated mock-up image IGb" is displayed.

However, as mentioned above, in the "integrated mock-up image IGa," the "button mock-up image BMGa," which is a mock-up of the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the target of operation, is displayed integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa." Therefore, the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" itself naturally comes to have the function of suggesting that the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the target of operation. In this respect, in the "integrated mock-up image IGb," the "special button mock-up image BMGb" is displayed integrated with such a "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa." Therefore, even if the "special button mock-up image BMGb" does not properly mock the target of operation, the "integrated mock-up image IGb" as a whole can suggest that the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is the target of operation. To effectively obtain such effects (the function of indicating the target of operation using the normal peripheral decorative image SSGa), it is important that the "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa" is not displayed when an operation means other than the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) (such as the pattern part 5012) is being operated.

With this configuration, the button-like image BMG, which mimics the control receiver, and the peripheral decoration image SSG, which decorates its periphery, are integrated and displayed as a single, unified image. This allows the button-like image BMG, which is only a part of the integrated image, to be displayed in a more flexible manner, not necessarily constrained by the shape of the control device being operated. This is expected to enhance the enjoyment of the game through more striking visual and decorative elements.

Furthermore, the "Special Button Mock Image BMGb" exemplified in Figure 144(b) is depicted with a more stylish design than the "Button Mock Image BMGa," featuring a streamlined shape, and has the word "DANGER" inscribed on its top. The appearance of this "Special Button Mock Image BMGb," which does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1, is expected to create a sense of premium quality for the player, instinctively conveying a higher level of anticipation than when the "Button Mock Image BMGa" appears.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 144(b), when a specific operation reception animation (valid period) occurs in the performance display device 1600 where the "integrated imitation image IGb" is displayed, the target pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is made to light up in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button imitation image BMGb within the "integrated imitation image IGb". In other words, the target pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) is capable of emitting light in a manner corresponding to the type of button imitation image BMG within the "integrated imitation image IG". This allows the user to recognize the manner (expected value) of the button imitation image BMG simply by checking the target pattern button 5014, without visually inspecting the button imitation image BMG.

On the other hand, the "integrated mock-up image IGc" shown in Figure 144(c) is basically the same as the "integrated mock-up image IGa" described above, and is composed of an integrated image consisting of a button mock-up image BMG that mimics the target of operation and a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. However, in this "integrated mock-up image IGc," the button mock-up image BMG is displayed as the same as the "normal button mock-up image BMGa" described above, but the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" with a different shape than the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" described above.

However, the "special peripheral decorative image SSGb" is the same as the "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa" in the following respects.
- The peripheral decorative part (pattern part 5012 or frame unit 415) that is actually provided on the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) which is the object to which the opportunity to operate is provided is not imitated, and the periphery of the button imitation image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration in the display effect of the performance display device 1600.
A display area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

According to this "integrated mock image IGc (Figure 144(c))", it becomes possible to significantly change the overall shape of the "integrated mock image IGc (Figure 144(c))" without changing the shape of the "button mock image BMG" that indicates which operating means is granted an opportunity to operate, using the "integrated mock image IGa (Figure 144(a))" as a reference. This allows for a high degree of decorative and expressive capability through shape changes without sacrificing the function of indicating the target of operation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Figure 144(c))" is displayed as an image with at least a portion of the same decoration as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Figure 144(a))". Therefore, whether the "integrated mock-up image IGa (Figure 144(a))" or the "integrated mock-up image IGc (Figure 144(c))" appears, it can be indicated that the same post-operation animation is being targeted by a specific operation reception animation (valid period).

In particular, in this embodiment, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Figure 144(c))" has a separate component with special decoration added to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Figure 144(a))," and is displayed as a larger image with an expanded appearance. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is displayed as an advanced version of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa," and it is expected that this will instinctively convey a higher level of anticipation than when the "button mockup image BMGa" appeared.

Furthermore, while the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Figure 144(c))" has a different shape and decoration from the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Figure 144(a))," it does not cause any change to the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself.

In other words, when a portion of such an integrated mock-up image IG is used as the display area of the gauge image GG, it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the display area or the gauge image is "merely part of the decoration" or "a part that has the function of indicating the remaining time." In this regard, with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Figure 144(a))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Figure 144(c))," the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, which plays the important function of "indicating the remaining time," remains unchanged in shape, while the shape of the other parts is changed. This allows for a high degree of decorative and performance flexibility by creating shape changes without sacrificing the function of indicating the remaining time.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 144(c), when a specific operation reception animation (valid period) occurs in the performance display device 1600 in which the "integrated imitation image IGc" is displayed, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the target of operation is made to light up in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button imitation image BMGa within the "integrated imitation image IGc". In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the target of operation is made capable of lighting up in a manner corresponding to the type of button imitation image BMG within the "integrated imitation image IG", so that the manner (expected level) of the button imitation image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the target of operation, without having to visually check the button imitation image BMG. However, when the "integrated mock-up image IGc" is displayed, the normal button mock-up image BMGa may be displayed in a different color (for example, "green") than when the "integrated mock-up image IGc" is displayed. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) will also light up in green.

On the other hand, the "integrated mock-up image IGd" shown in Figure 144(d) is basically the same as the "integrated mock-up image IGa" described above, and is composed of an integrated image of a button mock-up image BMG that mimics the target of operation and a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates its periphery. However, in this "integrated mock-up image IGd," the button mock-up image BMG is displayed as a "special button mock-up image BMGb" with a different shape than the "normal button mock-up image BMGa" described above, and the peripheral decoration image SSG is also displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" with a different shape than the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" described above.

In other words, in "Integrated Model Image IGd (Figure 144(d))", the "Special Button Model Image BMGb" used in "Integrated Model Image IGb (Figure 144(b))" and the "Special Peripheral Decoration Image SSGb" used in "Integrated Model Image IGc (Figure 144(c))" are displayed as an integrated image. With this configuration, the effects achieved by the "special button mock-up image BMGb" with respect to the "integrated mock-up image IGb (Figure 144(b))" and the effects achieved by the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" with respect to the "integrated mock-up image IGc (Figure 144(c))" are both obtained. Furthermore, since both the appearance of the button mock-up image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are changed when using the "integrated mock-up image IGa (Figure 144(a))" as a reference, it is expected that a high level of expectation will be instinctively perceived.

On the other hand, while both the button mock-up image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are modified in their respective forms, the same decorations and shapes appear in certain areas of the peripheral decoration image SSG. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest that the appearance of "integrated mock-up image IGa (Figure 144(a))" and "integrated mock-up image IGd (Figure 144(d))" represent the same post-operation animation targeting a specific operation reception animation (valid period).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 144(d), when a specific operation reception animation (valid period) occurs in the performance display device 1600 in which the "integrated imitation image IGd" is displayed, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the target of operation is made to light up in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button imitation image BMGb within the "integrated imitation image IGd". In other words, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) that is the target of operation is made capable of lighting up in a manner corresponding to the type of button imitation image BMG within the "integrated imitation image IG", so that the manner (expected level) of the button imitation image BMG can be recognized simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the target of operation, without having to visually check the button imitation image BMG. However, the special button image BMGb displayed when the "integrated image IGd" is shown may be displayed in a different color (for example, "rainbow colors") than when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410) will also light up in rainbow colors.

As shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the symbol display based on a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing and a predetermined operation acceptance display (valid period) occurs, an integrated image IG, which is a combination of the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, is displayed. However, when one side of the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one form, the other side can be displayed in one of several forms. For example, when the button image BMG is displayed as "normal button image BMGa", the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as either "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" or "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" (Figures 144(a), (c)). Furthermore, when the button mockup image BMG is displayed as "Special Button Mockup Image BMGb," the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as either "Normal Peripheral Decoration Image SSGa" or "Special Peripheral Decoration Image SSGb" (Figure 144(b), (d)). Also, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as "Normal Peripheral Decoration Image SSGa," the button mockup image BMG can be displayed as either "Normal Button Mockup Image BMGa" or "Special Button Mockup Image BMGb" (Figure 144(a), (b)). Furthermore, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as "Special Peripheral Decoration Image SSGb," the button mockup image BMG can be displayed as either "Normal Button Mockup Image BMGa" or "Special Button Mockup Image BMGb" (Figure 144(a), (b)).

With this configuration, although the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed as a single unit, when the appearance changes, only one side is displayed. Therefore, by looking at the side whose appearance has not changed, it is easy to recognize that the predetermined operation acceptance animation (valid period) is occurring, regardless of the appearance of the other side. Furthermore, by looking at the other side whose appearance has changed, the level of expectation can be appropriately recognized. Alternatively, one side of the button image BMG and peripheral decoration image SSG may remain unchanged, while only the other side can change its appearance.

Furthermore, in the integrated mock-up image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the peripheral decorative image SSG includes the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated mock-up image IG is displayed during the operation acceptance animation (valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is designed to decrease its display area within its display area as time progresses. In this case, the "peripheral decorative image SSG" assumes a remaining time indication function, suggesting the time remaining until the state allowing operation acceptance ends. By displaying this integrated mock-up image IG together with the "button mock-up image BMG," which indicates which operation target is being operated, it becomes possible to grasp the remaining time and the operation target, and even recognize which of multiple modes has appeared. This is expected to effectively maintain the enjoyment of the game while the operation acceptance animation (valid period) is occurring.

Furthermore, in the integrated mock-up image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the peripheral decorative image SSG includes both the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (there are both parts that indicate the remaining time and parts that do not). In other words, the peripheral decorative image SSG is not solely intended to indicate the remaining time of the operation reception animation (validity period). In the areas where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, it is possible to actively adopt display modes aimed at "enhancing the decorative appeal of the button mock-up image BMG." Therefore, while indicating the remaining time, it becomes possible to significantly improve the visual appeal when the important operation reception animation occurs. To obtain such effects, it is more desirable that the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as a larger area than the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Furthermore, in the integrated imitation image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the button imitation image BMG can be displayed in one of several modes when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. In reality, when the peripheral decoration part, the "handle part 5012," is in one mode, the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410), which is the operation receiving part, changes to one of several modes (multiple emission colors). Therefore, when the button imitation image BMG changes, this can be confirmed simply by checking the handle button 5014 (or operation button 410), which is the object of the imitation.

Furthermore, in the integrated mock-up image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), while the button mock-up image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in one of several modes. However, in reality, the peripheral decoration part, "pattern 5012," does not change to any of the multiple modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG is a virtual decoration that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1, and it decorates the periphery of the button mock-up image BMG. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG does not need to match the mode of the peripheral decoration part, "pattern 5012," allowing for a variety of depictions that are desirable for enhancing the visual presentation. Note that the peripheral decoration part, "pattern 5012," may be provided in a way that it cannot change to multiple modes, such as by being non-luminescent.

Furthermore, in the integrated mock-up image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), there are cases where both the button mock-up image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change (Figure 144(d)). However, in practice, it is desirable that both the button mock-up image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change when the peripheral decoration part, the "handle portion 5012," is in one state.

The pattern portion 5012, which is the peripheral decorative part, may exhibit different characteristics depending on whether the peripheral decorative image SSG is a "normal peripheral decorative image SSGa" or a "special peripheral decorative image SSGb". However, while the shape of the peripheral decorative image SSG changes between the two cases, it is desirable that the pattern portion 5012, which is the peripheral decorative part, only exhibits a change in characteristics that does not involve a change in shape (for example, a change in the emission pattern). It is desirable to design the peripheral decorative part as one in which shape change is impossible, in order to highlight the virtual effect function provided by the peripheral decorative image SSG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the button imitation image BMG that imitates the pattern button 5014 (or operation button 410), a pattern imitation image TMG that imitates the pattern part 5012 is also provided as an imitation image, and the form of the peripheral decorative image SSG is made different depending on which of these imitation images is displayed. In other words, in this case, the peripheral decorative images SSGa and SSGb that decorate the periphery of the button imitation image BMG cannot be displayed when a different imitation image from the button imitation image BMG is displayed, so the peripheral decorative images SSGa and SSGb themselves can be expected to have the function of "indicating which operation means is being operated on."

Furthermore, if the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG differs depending on the form of the imitation image (button imitation image BMG, pattern imitation image TMG), it is desirable that the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decoration image also differs. The operation reception animation displaying the button imitation image BMG and the operation reception animation displaying the pattern imitation image TMG may occur at the same timing within the same variation pattern (selected based on the animation judgment), or they may occur at different variation patterns or timings. The peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when the button imitation image BMG is displayed may not be an imitation of the peripheral decoration, while the peripheral decoration image SSG that appears when the pattern imitation image TMG is displayed may be an imitation of the peripheral decoration. However, it is desirable that the set time for the operation reception animation (valid period) may be the same even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG differs.

Furthermore, in the integrated mock-up image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and other areas within the peripheral decoration image SSG are treated with a predetermined decoration (in this case, a "striped pattern") that spans both areas. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed overlapping this predetermined decoration. In other words, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the revealed predetermined decoration expands, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (in this case, a "gray" gauge image) GG with a predetermined transparency is superimposed on a display area that has a predetermined decoration. With this configuration, the predetermined decoration remains visible even in the area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, thus allowing the enjoyment of the game to be suitably maintained throughout the entire period from when the gauge image GG is full to when it is empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed within the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Furthermore, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (or incorporate) the predetermined decoration. In this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the predetermined decoration also decreases, thus encouraging players who dislike the reduction of the predetermined decoration to perform operations earlier.

Furthermore, in the integrated mock-up image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the peripheral decorative image SSG does not mimic the peripheral decorative part (handle part 5012, or frame unit 415) provided on the periphery of the operation receiving part (handle button 5014, or operation button 410) that is the target of operation. Instead, it represents an image of an object that does not have a physical form as a gaming machine component. Therefore, it becomes possible to achieve a higher degree of freedom in decorative and presentation elements, without being constrained by the physical form of the gaming machine component.

Furthermore, in the integrated mock-up image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), at least the peripheral decorative image SSG has multiple shapes, compared to the button mock-up image BMG. In this case, it becomes possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decorative image SSG, which represents an intangible object, without changing the shape of the button mock-up image BMG. This allows for a more visually appealing and decorative display by varying the shape of the integrated mock-up image IG while appropriately indicating which of the multiple operating means is being operated on.

Regarding the peripheral decorative image SSG, it is acceptable to change only the color of the SSG without necessarily altering its shape when the button imitation image BMG is in one state. However, shape changes are permissible only because the peripheral decorative image SSG represents an intangible object and is displayed as an integrated image with the button imitation image BMG. In this sense, changing the shape of the peripheral decorative image SSG has significant technical value.

Furthermore, in the integrated mock-up image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the peripheral decorative image SSG was modified by enlarging its form. As will be discussed later, possible methods for such form modification include increasing the number of objects represented in the image (e.g., the number of decorations), displaying it in one of multiple forms with different contour shapes (e.g., rectangular prism, sphere), or expanding the display area of a predetermined object represented in the image. Also, as will be discussed later, the form change of the peripheral decorative image SSG may be implemented as a premonition effect, gradually changing from a low-expectancy form to a high-expectancy form, and then allowing operation acceptance in the operation acceptance effect while the final changed form is maintained.

Furthermore, in the integrated model image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), regardless of the form in which the peripheral decorative image SSG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decorative image SSG remains unchanged (at least its shape is not altered) and is displayed in the same form. Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral decorative image SSG changes, the function of indicating how much time is remaining can be suitably maintained. While preserving this important function, the degree of expectation can also be suggested by shape changes in areas other than the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Depending on which of the above-mentioned effects is intended to be achieved, the peripheral decorative image SSG does not necessarily have to represent an intangible object; it may be displayed as an image that mimics the peripheral decorative part provided on the periphery of the operating receiver.

Furthermore, the integrated mock-up image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d) can be dynamically displayed during the "valid period in which operation acceptance is permitted," such as during predetermined operation acceptance animations, thereby prompting the player to take action.

However, in this embodiment of the integrated mock-up image IG, although the button mock-up image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed as an integrated unit, only one side of the button mock-up image BMG and peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed dynamically, while the other side is displayed statically. This configuration allows for improved visual appeal when a button animation occurs, thanks to the dynamic expression on one side, while the other side remains stationary. Therefore, when viewed as a whole, the integrated mock-up image IG does not appear to move, thus ensuring optimal visibility.

In the integrated mock-up image IG shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), the button mock-up image BMG is dynamically displayed to depict the displacement of the control receiver, which is provided with an opportunity for operation, within its movable range. The peripheral decorative image SSG is not dynamically displayed. A display area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the side that is not dynamically displayed (peripheral decorative image SSG). When the integrated mock-up image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed in such a way that its display area within its display area decreases over time.

In this way, by ensuring that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included on the side of the integrated mock-up image IG that has optimal visibility (the peripheral decorative image SSG, which is not dynamically displayed), the performance when an important performance such as an operation reception performance occurs is improved by the dynamic display of the button mock-up image BMG, while at the same time, it becomes easy to recognize how much time is left that is allowed for performance reception.

Furthermore, the side of the integrated mock-up image IG that ensures optimal visibility (the peripheral decorative image SSG, which is not dynamically displayed) includes not only the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but also an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. In other words, in this case, when performing an effect that suggests the level of expectation on the side of the integrated mock-up image IG that ensures optimal visibility, performing this effect in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed prevents adverse effects on the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In this system, the peripheral decorative image SSG has multiple forms with different levels of expectation in areas different from the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, as well as in the shape of the peripheral decorative image SSG itself and the button imitation image BMG. One of these forms is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (performance determination). Alternatively, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself, may also be given multiple forms with different levels of expectation, and one of these forms is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination (performance determination).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 144(a) to (d), when the button image BMG is displayed as an integrated image IG, where it is combined with a peripheral decorative image SSG that decorates its periphery, and the peripheral decorative image SSG includes the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, there is a concern that it will become difficult to determine whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is merely a decoration or pattern within the peripheral decorative image SSG, or whether it has a function to indicate the remaining time. Additionally, there is a concern that the game's enjoyment may decrease due to the difficulty in determining how far the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased, as it may become mixed with the decorations and patterns applied to the peripheral decorative image SSG.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the effective period), it is possible to display an image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or an image in which the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially altered, in the display target area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed.

More specifically, a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially altered" is displayed within the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Furthermore, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display position of the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially altered" is also shifted accordingly.

With this configuration, the validity period ends when a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially altered, is displaced to a predetermined position. Therefore, even if the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is not recognizable as merely decorative or as indicating the remaining time, the remaining time can be recognized by checking the position of the "specific image." In this sense, when displaying such a "specific image," it is not necessarily required to display the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Figure 145 shows an example of the display of the integrated mock image IG from the start to the end of the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted.

As shown in Figure 145, if we assume that timing A0, the effective period during which operation acceptance is permitted (a predetermined operation acceptance animation), has arrived within a predetermined variation pattern, the animation display device 1600 will display an integrated mock-up image IG and operation prompt images such as "Press!" and a downward arrow.

In this example, the integrated mock-up image IG is displayed in the form shown in Figure 144(a) (integrated mock-up image IGa). However, based on the result of the performance judgment, it may be displayed in any of the forms shown in Figures 144(b) to (d). Regardless of which form the integrated mock-up image IG is displayed in, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and the display of "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed," will change over time in the manner described below.

As shown in Figure 145(a), when the integrated mock-up image IG is at timing A0 (start timing of the validity period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed across the entire area of its display target region. This full display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG allows for recognition that the validity period has just begun.

In this regard, in the example shown in Figure 145(a), at timing A0, which is the start timing of the validity period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the appearance of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially altered" is not displayed within the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. With this configuration, simply by checking whether or not "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the appearance of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially altered" is displayed, it becomes easy to determine whether a predetermined time has already elapsed since operation acceptance was permitted (i.e., the remaining groin area is decreasing).

However, a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the appearance of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially altered," is first displayed in the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from timing A0 (the start timing of the validity period) until a predetermined time (the time required for the entire specific image to appear) has elapsed, in such a manner that "the display area increases by an amount corresponding to the elapsed time."

For example, in the integrated model image IG at timing A1, a short time after timing A0 (the start of the validity period), as shown in Figure 145(b), the "specific image TG," which is "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the appearance of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed," has appeared to the point where about half of the image is visible, indicating that it is in the stage of increasing its display area as time progresses.

At timings A2 and A3, when a significant amount of time has passed, the integrated model image IG, as shown in Figures 145(c) and (d), has already fully revealed itself. This is because the "specific image TG," which is either a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a "specific image in which the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially altered," is displaced within the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG without increasing its display area.

In other words, as described above, the "specific image TG" is displayed at the end portion or its vicinity within the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, where the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced, and is displayed in such a way that its display position shifts in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (continuing thereafter).

In this embodiment, the "specific image TG" is displayed as an image with a star-shaped mark inside a white rectangular space, at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, the "specific image TG" does not necessarily have to be displayed as a separate image at the position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. For example, it may be displayed in a manner in which the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially altered, such as an image where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG gradually fades over a predetermined length from its end. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" does not inherently function as part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, which indicates that the remaining time has run out by the display area reaching its minimum value (in this case, "0"). Therefore, even when the remaining time runs out (when the validity period ends), at least a portion (or all) of it will not be hidden and will remain displayed.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511), as shown in Figure 145(e), when the integrated mock-up image IG is at timing A4, which is the end of the validity period, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes "0", and approximately half of the display area of the "specific image TG" remains. If no operation is received until this state is reached, the period during which operation reception is permitted ends, and the integrated mock-up image IG is hidden.

However, as stated above, the "specific image TG" does not inherently function as part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, when the integrated model image IG is displayed at timing A4, which marks the end of the validity period, it is most desirable, and may be configured in such a way, for the entire display area of the "specific image TG" to remain visible.

However, it is difficult to achieve a display where the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes exactly "0" at the end of the validity period. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) displays the "specific image TG" in such a way that its display position shifts in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (continuing with it). This makes it possible to make it ambiguous from the player's perspective which part of the displayed area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is actually the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In other words, even though the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the validity period ends and a large portion (more than half, or even all) of its display area remains, from the player's perspective, it appears as if it is part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, whose display area is reduced to its minimum value (in this case, hidden) when the validity period ends. This configuration makes it possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear longer than it actually is, thus making it seem as though more of the validity period remains, and thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game while the operation acceptance animation is being performed.

Furthermore, when the validity period of the operation reception animation ends, at least a portion of the "specific image TG" remains visible. Therefore, even if the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not disappear immediately after the period ends, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" in a way that reduces its display area. This reduces the likelihood of a discrepancy between the timing of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG disappearing and the timing of the validity period ending, thus minimizing any sense of incongruity. In other words, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to act as a buffer capable of absorbing such time discrepancies.

By the way, in the example shown in Figure 145, at timing A0, which is the start of the validity period, a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the appearance of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" is not displayed within the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start of the validity period, a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the appearance of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed" may be displayed within the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

This configuration allows for the active presentation of a specific image, distinct from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially altered, as if it were part of the gauge image GG. This creates the illusion that the validity period is longer than it appears, and is expected to enhance the enjoyment of the game when the validity period expires.

[Acceptance period having at least one of configurations 1A to 40A and configurations 1B to 75B]
As illustrated in Figure 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a variation pattern determination is possible based on the result of a jackpot determination corresponding to the start entry (consumption of reserved balls) to determine which of several variation patterns to execute. When a variation pattern is selected as a result of this variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can perform a performance determination (preview determination, etc.) to selectively display one of several expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared for the selected variation pattern. Depending on the result of this performance determination, it is possible that all of the multiple expected performances (preview performances, etc.) prepared for the selected variation pattern will be executed sequentially, or that none of the multiple expected performances (preview performances, etc.) will be executed.

As described above, once these performance judgments (variation pattern judgment,予告 judgment, etc.) are performed, the performance display device 1600 is controlled to display the performance content corresponding to the result of the performance judgment. This results in the variation performance using decorative symbols, corresponding to the jackpot judgment, being executed along with the expectation performance (preview performance) related to the background depiction (background preview) and movable part movement (mechanical part performance). As a result, when the variation performance using decorative symbols, along with the expectation performance related to the background depiction and movable part movement, stops on a jackpot symbol (a special symbol combination), the player is granted the opportunity to play a jackpot game or transition to a high-probability game state as a bonus.

In this configuration, the variation in the decorative patterns serves as an effect indicating whether or not a jackpot has been won, while the background depiction and moving parts serve as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation (i.e., the percentage, including 0% and 100%) of winning a jackpot. In other words, players enjoy the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high-expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into an SP reach (such as a reach animation accompanied by a background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination, regardless of the result obtained as a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement determination), once the symbol animation based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach (when predetermined conditions are met), a reception permission state (valid period) in which performance reception is permitted can be generated.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) that do not even form a reach state as a result of the variation pattern determination, if a special result is obtained in the performance determination (preview determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, a reception-permitted state (valid period) can be generated when the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when the predetermined conditions are met). However, if a predetermined variation pattern is selected, the reception-permitted state (valid period) will not be generated even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing unless a special result is obtained in the performance determination. Also, the reception-permitted state (valid period) generated by the predetermined variation pattern is executed as a different performance (such as a post-reception display or post-reception output sound) than the reception-permitted state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol performance based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during an SP reach.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when predetermined conditions are met, a state of acceptance is created in which the machine is permitted to accept actions (operations) by the player. When an action (operation) by the player is accepted within this acceptance state, a post-acceptance change (such as a display change, acceptance output sound, or visual effects) can occur according to the type of acceptance state that has been created.

Furthermore, in the acceptance-enabled state, operation-related display modes that can only appear when operation reception to the control unit is permitted (acceptance period) or when such operation reception is permitted (acceptance period) can be displayed. Such operation-related display modes often include, for example, a mock image display representing the object (operation means) that is the target of the player's action (operation), but are not limited to this; any image display that, when displayed, inevitably grants the player an opportunity to operate is acceptable. The "operation-related display (mock image display)" may have multiple modes with different levels of expectation (e.g., multiple color schemes such as white and red), and one of these modes may be selectively displayed.

Furthermore, since the "operation-related display mode" can only appear when the system is in a state where operation reception is permitted (reception acceptance period), or when such operation reception is permitted (reception acceptance period), it is sufficient that, at the very least, the reception acceptance state is guaranteed to occur when the "operation-related display mode" is displayed, or that the system is in an acceptance state at the time of its display. Therefore, it is also possible that the reception acceptance state may end before the "operation-related display mode" disappears while it is displayed. Additionally, multiple types of image displays may be provided as such "operation-related display modes," and both of these image displays may be displayed during the reception acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the acceptance state, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which player actions (operations) are permitted can be shown. Such a remaining time display can be implemented, for example, by decreasing the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time progresses. Multiple modes (e.g., the rate at which the display area of the gauge image decreases, indications of the expected value, indications of the type of operation means, etc.) may be provided for at least one of the frame image and gauge image, and the system may be configured to execute one of these modes. In this case, different expected values (the probability of the winning symbol appearing) may be indicated depending on which mode is executed.

Furthermore, if a reception-acceptance state occurs, a pre-performance (premonition performance) can be executed prior to this, suggesting that the player will be given an opportunity to act (suggesting that a reception-acceptance state will occur). This pre-performance is executed, for example, by displaying a performance on the performance display device 1600 or outputting a corresponding performance sound.

Furthermore, regardless of the outcome of the pre-announcement effect judgment, a variation pattern that generates an acceptance-enabled state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during the SP reach may be included in addition to the "specific variation patterns" described above. Also, regardless of the outcome of the pre-announcement effect judgment, a variation pattern that generates an acceptance-enabled state (valid period) at a predetermined timing before the SP reach occurs may be included.

Furthermore, including the examples mentioned above and those described later, the term "player operation (action)" to be detected is not limited to actions directly performed by the player, such as "operation buttons 410" or "sword ornament 5001" (pressing or drawing the sword), but also includes "player contact actions on specific parts" detected by touch sensors, and "player actions within a specific space" detected by non-contact sensors. Essentially, the "operation means" only needs to have one or more receiving means (operation units) that accept player actions (pressing, drawing, touching, non-contact actions, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, various types of acceptance states (valid periods) are available, differing in the type and presence or absence of post-acceptance displays and post-acceptance output sounds, the audible output status of background music, the number of times operation acceptance is permitted within the acceptance state (valid period), and whether or not the auto-repeated button function or automatic button function is enabled.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment incorporates special performance features between multiple acceptance states, thereby enhancing the performance when an acceptance state occurs and maintaining a suitable sense of tension when an acceptance state occurs. It should be noted that the performance features (configurations) described below do not necessarily have to be all present. For example, even with just one performance feature (any configuration), it is possible to suppress a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Alternatively, several configurations deemed necessary to obtain further effects may be selectively included, or configurations described as applicable (or desirable) to other configurations may be appropriately adopted. Furthermore, the performance features (configurations) described below are merely examples; any configuration that can suppress a decline in the enjoyment of the game related to the acceptance state is sufficient.

[Configuration 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In addition, a message prompting operation on the specific operating means can be displayed. In this regard, there is an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and there is a multiple operation-enabled state in which detection of the operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. In this multiple operation-enabled state, there are cases in which the message display is displayed and cases in which the message display is not displayed. Furthermore, in the type of multiple operation valid state in which the above message display is shown, if it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, and while the post-operation output sound is being output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state, the post-operation output sound in that output state may change as a result of this detection. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension regarding whether to maintain operation on the specific operation means when the message display is shown can be suitably maintained. Note that the "specific operation means" in configuration 1-A is merely a designation used to explain the technical concept of configuration 1-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if, in one of the multiple operation valid states described above, a message is not displayed, and the specific operation means is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if, while the post-operation output sound is being output, it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state, the post-operation output sound in that output state will not change as a result of the detection, but will change independently of the detection (for example, it may be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With such a configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not a change in the post-operation output sound occurs when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, through whether or not a message is displayed, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, especially in the case of a multiple operation enabled state of the type in which no message is displayed, if the specific operation means is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will be done independently of the detection (for example, it will be output for a predetermined output time and then end). In contrast to the above-mentioned multiple operation valid states, if a message is displayed during a multiple operation valid state, and the specific operation means is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, then, while the post-operation output sound is being output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state, the end of the post-operation output sound in that output state may occur either triggered by the detection or without such detection (for example, it may end after being output for a predetermined output time). With such a configuration, when no message is displayed during a multiple operation valid state, it suitably suggests that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state. On the other hand, when a message is displayed during a multiple operation valid state, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, thus suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in order to suitably achieve the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the output sound after operation when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state when a message display is shown in a state where multiple operations are enabled," it is desirable that when one form of message display appears, there are cases where a change occurs in the output sound after operation when the specific operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, and cases where there is no change in the output sound after operation. However, this configuration is not necessarily required. For example, when different forms of message display appear, such as different sizes, colors, or display modes, even if there are cases where a change occurs in the output sound after operation and cases where there is no change in the output sound after operation depending on the form, it can be expected that, compared to the case where no message display is shown at all, it will be difficult for the player to recognize to some extent whether or not a change occurs in the output sound after operation. However, it is desirable (though not a mandatory configuration) that message displays prompting multiple operations are displayed in a form that cannot appear in an operation-enabled state where only one operation is accepted.

[Configuration 2-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, there is a multiple operation-enabled state in which detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. This multiple operation-enabled state includes a type of multiple operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to it is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in an operating state, and a type of multiple operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to it is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in an operating state. Furthermore, in the multiple operation valid state, if the specific operation means is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, then, while the post-operation output sound is being output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state, the post-operation output sound in that output state may change as a result of this detection. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension regarding whether or not to maintain the operating state of the specific operation means can be suitably maintained. Note that the "specific operation means" in this configuration 2-A is merely a designation used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in a type of multiple operation enabled state where simply maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state does not result in multiple output sounds corresponding to that operation, if the specific operation means is detected to be in the operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from the operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in that output state may not be changed as a result of the detection, but rather may change independently of the detection (for example, it may be output for a predetermined output time and then end). With such a configuration, in a multiple operation enabled state, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not a change in the post-operation output sound occurs when the specific operation means changes from the operation state to an unoperated state, through whether or not the so-called auto-repeated function is activated, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, in a type of multiple operation valid state where simply maintaining the specific operation means in an operation state does not result in the output of the corresponding post-operation sound multiple times, if the specific operation means is detected to be in an operation state and the corresponding post-operation sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation sound is being output, the end of the post-operation sound in that output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will be done independently of the detection (for example, it will be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). In contrast to the above-mentioned multiple operation enabled state, in a type of multiple operation enabled state where the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in an operated state, if the specified operation means is detected to be in an operated state and the corresponding post-operation output sound is output, then while the post-operation output sound is being output, if it is detected that the specified operation means has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state, the termination of the post-operation output sound in that output state may occur either triggered by the detection or without such detection (for example, it may terminate after being output for a predetermined output time). With such a configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated function is not activated in the multiple operation enabled state, it suitably suggests that there will be no change in the post-operation output sound when the specified operation means changes from an operated state to an unoperated state. On the other hand, when the so-called auto-repeated function is activated in the multiple operation enabled state, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there will be a change in the post-operation output sound when the specified operation means changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, thus suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

In configuration 2-A, it is assumed that the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, and the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, are both the same "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only case. For example, in the multiple-operation enabled state, if a mock image displaying an operating means that allows multiple operations is displayed, a configuration may be adopted that determines "whether or not there is a change in the output sound after operation" between a multiple-operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled when the operating means corresponding to the mock image display is maintained in an operated state, and a multiple-operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is not enabled when the operating means corresponding to the mock image display is maintained in an operated state.

[Configuration 3-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection, and it is possible to display a mock image that mimics the specific operating means. In this regard, there is an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and a multiple operation-enabled state is provided in which the detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. The mock image display is made possible in the multiple operation-enabled state in which periodic changes appear, and there are cases in which the periodic changes appear in time units of a predetermined time or less, and cases in which the periodic changes appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. Furthermore, in the multiple operation valid state, if the specific operation means is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output in a type of multiple operation valid state where the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, then, while the post-operation output sound is being output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state, the post-operation output sound in that output state may change as a result of this detection. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. Note that the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" in this configuration 3-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 3-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means and time as the "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means and time. Also, they may mean the same "operation means" and "time" as the operation means and time with different names in other configurations. Furthermore, "a time longer than the specified time" may refer to a single time period or multiple different time periods.

In this case, as will be described later, if, among the multiple operation valid states described above, the specific operation means is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output in a multiple operation valid state of the type in which the periodic change of the mock image display occurs in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in that output state may not change as a result of the detection, but may change independently of the detection (for example, it may be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With such a configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, through the length of time required for the periodic change of the mock image display, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, if, among the multiple operation valid states, the specific operation means is detected to be in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output in a multiple operation valid state of the type in which the periodic change of the mock image display occurs in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will be done independently of the detection (for example, it will be output for a predetermined output time and then end). In contrast, in a multiple operation valid state of which the periodic change of the mock image display occurs in time units longer than the predetermined time, if it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, then while the post-operation output sound is being output, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operation state to an unoperated state, the termination of the post-operation output sound in the output state may occur both when triggered by the detection and when not triggered by the detection (for example, when it is output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, when the time required for the periodic change of the mock image display is relatively short in the multiple-operation enabled state, it is suitably suggested that there is no change in the output sound after operation when the specific operating means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state. Conversely, when the time required for the periodic change of the mock image display is relatively long in the multiple-operation enabled state, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after operation when the specific operating means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state, thus suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

In configuration 3-A, it is assumed that the operating means used when the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, and the operating means used when the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, are both the same "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only case. That is, in the state where multiple operations are enabled, whether the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, or whether the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, the operating means corresponding to that mock image display may be used as the target of operation, and a configuration may be adopted that determines "whether or not a change occurs in the output sound after operation."

Furthermore, in configuration 3-A, the "time less than or equal to the predetermined time" may include multiple time periods, or only one time period (for example, the "predetermined time"). Similarly, the "time longer than the predetermined time" may also include multiple time periods, or only one time period.

[Configuration 4-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection, and it is possible to display a mock image that mimics the operating means. In this regard, a mock image operation effective state is provided in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state, and a multiple operation effective state is provided in which the detection of being in the operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and a first operating means and a second operating means are provided as the operating means. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned multiple operation valid states, if at least one type of multiple operation valid state in which a mock image display mimicking the first operation means is displayed, and it is detected that the first operation means is in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, then if it is detected that the first operation means has changed from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in that output state may change as a result of this detection. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when a mock image display mimicking the first operation means is displayed can be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "first operation means" and "second operation means" in this configuration 4-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 4-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means as the "first operation means" and "second operation means" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means. They may also mean the same "operation means" as operation means with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if, among the multiple operation valid states described above, at least one type of multiple operation valid state in which a mock image display mimicking the second operation means is displayed, and the second operation means is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if, while the post-operation output sound is being output, it is detected that the second operation means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state, the post-operation output sound in that output state may not change as a result of the detection, but may change without being triggered by the detection (for example, it may be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With such a configuration, in the multiple operation valid states, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the operation means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, through the type of operation means for which multiple operations are permitted, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, if, among the multiple operation valid states, at least one type of multiple operation valid state in which a mock image display mimicking the second operation means is displayed, the second operation means is detected to be in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if, while the post-operation output sound is being output, it is detected that the second operation means has changed from an operation state to an unoperated state, the end of the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will be done independently of the detection (for example, it will be output for a predetermined output time and then end). On the other hand, in a multiple operation valid state of which at least one type of multiple operation valid state in which a mock image display that mimics the first operation means is displayed, if it is detected that the first operation means is in an operation state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, then while the post-operation output sound is being output, if it is detected that the first operation means has changed from an operation state to an unoperated state, the termination of the post-operation output sound in the output state may be triggered by the detection or not triggered by the detection (for example, it may be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With this configuration, when the second operating means is the target of the simulated image display and the second operating means is operated, it is suitably suggested that there is no change in the output sound after operation when the second operating means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state. Conversely, when the first operating means is the target of the simulated image display and the first operating means is operated, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after operation when the first operating means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

[Configuration 5-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed. In this regard, a multiple-time operation-enabled state is provided, which is an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation change can be initiated when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and the detection of the operating state is permitted multiple times, allowing the post-operation change to be executed multiple times. As one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output. When the specific operating means is detected to be in an operating state in the multiple-time operation-enabled state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, if it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in that output state may either change as a result of the detection or may not change as a result of the detection. This is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when in the multiple-time operation-enabled state. Furthermore, the term "specific operating means" in relation to configuration 5-A is merely a designation used to explain the technical concept of configuration 5-A. Therefore, it may refer to the same operating means as the "specific operating means" in other configurations, or it may refer to a different operating means. It may also refer to the same "operating means" as an operating means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are provided as multiple operation valid states. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operation state, but the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is set to an indefinite time. In the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection cannot be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operation state. In the third multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection can be newly started at regular intervals simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operation state. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state, if it is detected that the specified operation means is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, and while the post-operation output sound is being output, if it is detected that the specified operation means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state, the post-operation output sound in that output state may be terminated upon such detection. In the second multiple operation valid state, if it is detected that the specified operation means is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specified operation means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the output The termination of the post-operation output sound while in operation is not triggered by the detection, but occurs independently of the detection (for example, it is output for a predetermined duration and then terminated). In the third multiple operation valid state, if it is detected that the specific operating means is in operation and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the termination of the post-operation output sound in that output state is not triggered by the detection, but occurs independently of the detection (for example, it is output for a predetermined duration and then terminated). With this configuration, firstly, if simply maintaining the specific operating means in operation does not enable the generation of multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the detection, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that there is no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means changes from an operation state to an unoperated state. In this regard, when a specific operating means is maintained in an operating state, allowing for multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the detection to be generated, there are cases where a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and cases where no change occurs. However, by observing whether or not the post-operation output sound is output at regular intervals while the specific operating means is maintained in an operating state, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, thereby effectively maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

In configuration 5-A, it is assumed that the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, and the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, are both the same operating means, referred to as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily limited to this case. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operating means targeted in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same operating means. However, this is not necessarily limited to this case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state.

[Configuration 6-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed. In this regard, as an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation change can be initiated when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a multiple-time operation-enabled state is provided in which detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, and as one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output, and a first multiple-time operation-enabled state and a second multiple-time operation-enabled state are provided as the multiple-time operation-enabled states. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be performed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in an operating state, and in the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change corresponding to the detection cannot be performed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in an operating state. When the specific operating means is detected to be in an operating state in the multiple operation valid state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, if the specific operating means is detected to have changed from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may either change as a result of the detection or may not change as a result of the detection, thus it is expected that the sense of tension when in the multiple operation valid state can be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "specific operating means,""first multiple operation valid state," and "second multiple operation valid state" in this configuration 6-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 6-A. Therefore, the "specific operating means" and the "first multiple operation valid state" and "second multiple operation valid state" in other configurations may refer to the same operating means or multiple operation valid state, or they may refer to different operating means or multiple operation valid states. Furthermore, the "operating means" and "multiple operation valid state" may refer to the same operating means or multiple operation valid state with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state are provided. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operation state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation change is newly executed in response to the detection is always longer than a specified time. In the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operation state. It is not possible, and the third multiple operation valid state is such that the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is always less than or equal to a specified time, and in the first multiple operation valid state, when it is detected that the specified operation means is in the operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding thereto is output, if the specified operation means changes from the operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, When such a state is detected, the termination of the post-operation output sound in that output state may be triggered by the detection. If, in the second multiple-operation valid state, it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the termination of the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will be done independently of the detection (for example, it will be output for a predetermined amount of time and then terminated). If, in the third multiple-operation valid state, it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the termination of the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will be done independently of the detection (for example, it will be output for a predetermined amount of time and then terminated). With this configuration, firstly, if simply maintaining the specific operating means in an operating state does not allow for multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the detection, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that no change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. In this regard, if simply maintaining the specific operating means in an operating state allows for multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the detection, then when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, there are both cases where a change occurs in the post-operation output sound and cases where there is no change. However, by determining whether the interval between the output of a post-operation output sound while the specific operating means is maintained in an operating state and the subsequent output is longer than a specific time, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, thereby suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

In configuration 6-A, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated button function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state are both the same operating means, referred to as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operating means targeted for operation in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state. Also, the "specific time" in configuration 6-A is merely a designation used to explain the technical concept of configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "specific time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. It may also mean the same "time" as a time with a different name in other configurations. Furthermore, the "times longer than the specified time" in configuration 6-A may be provided in multiple quantities, or only one quantity may be provided. Similarly, the "times less than or equal to the specified time" in configuration 6-A may be provided in multiple quantities, or only one quantity may be provided.

[Configuration 7-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, there is a multiple-use operation valid state in which the detection of the operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, which is an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. Furthermore, in the case of a type of multiple-operation valid state in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specified operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, if the specified operation means is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, then if, while the post-operation output sound is being output, it is detected that the specified operation means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state, the post-operation output sound in that output state can change as a result of this detection, thus it is expected that the sense of tension when the multiple-operation valid state is maintained appropriately. Note that the "specified operation means" in this configuration 7-A is merely a designation used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 7-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specified operation means" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in a type of multiple-operation valid state where the valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, if the specific operating means is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operating means has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in that output state may not change as a result of the detection, but rather change independently of the detection (for example, it may be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). With such a configuration, in a multiple-operation valid state, it becomes possible to suggest whether or not a change in the post-operation output sound occurs when the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, through whether or not the valid state is terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, in a type of multiple-operation valid state where the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, if the specific operation means is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the termination of the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will be triggered independently of the detection. In a multiple-operation valid state of a type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, if the specific operation means is detected to be in an operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding to this is output, and while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, the termination of the post-operation output sound in the output state may occur both when triggered by the detection and when not triggered by the detection (not triggered by the detection). With this configuration, in a type of multiple-operation valid state where the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, it is suitably suggested that there is no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. On the other hand, in a type of multiple-operation valid state where the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, thus suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

In configuration 7-A, it is assumed that the "specific operating means" is the same operating means, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be specified as whether or not the "operating means" is of a type that can terminate when the "operating means" represented as a simulated image display is operated in a multiple-operation valid state. Furthermore, even in a state where multiple operations are enabled, and depending on the outcome of a jackpot determination, the operation may not end before the predetermined termination time, if the operation may end before the predetermined termination time depending on the outcome of a jackpot determination, then such a state of multiple operations is equivalent to the "type of state of multiple operations enabled that can be terminated" described above.

[Configuration 8-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection, and it is possible to display a message prompting operation on the specific operating means. In this regard, there is an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and a multiple operation-enabled state is provided in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and in this multiple operation-enabled state, there are cases in which a message display is displayed and cases in which a message display is not displayed. Furthermore, in the multiple operation enabled states where a message is displayed, if it is detected that a specific operation means is in an operation state, a post-operation output sound may be output, which is "a sound in which the time from when the specific operation means enters the non-operation state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time, when the specific operation means changes from the operation state to a non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output." Therefore, when the post-operation output sound is in the output state and a message is displayed, even if the operation on the specific operation means is terminated, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will have passed since the non-operation state was entered before the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, will end. Note that the "specific operation means" in this configuration 8-A is merely a designation used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 8-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "specific operation means" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operation means. It may also mean the same "operation means" as an operation means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the type of multiple operation enabled state in which no message is displayed, when it is detected that the specified operation means is in operation, the post-operation output sound will only be output if, while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specified operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, and the time from when the specified operation means becomes non-operational until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time but is of an indefinite time). In the type of multiple operation enabled state in which a message is displayed, when the specified operation means is in operation When a certain event is detected, the post-operation output sound may be configured to output either a sound where, if the specified operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specified operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a constant time, or a sound where, if the specified operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specified operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time.

With this configuration, when the system is in a state where multiple operations are enabled, and the post-operation output sound is output but no message is displayed, it becomes difficult to predict how long after the system is deactivated the specific operating means will cease to be output. For example, it can suitably suggest that the performance is of low noteworthy importance in the immediate aftermath of deactivating the specific operating means. Conversely, when the system is in a state where multiple operations are enabled and the post-operation output sound is output and a message is displayed, there are cases where it is possible to predict how long after the system is deactivated the specific operating means will cease to be output, and cases where it is difficult to predict. Therefore, for example, it can suggest that the performance after deactivating the specific operating means may be of noteworthy value, while simultaneously ensuring that the post-operation output sound does not necessarily cease to be output after a certain amount of time has elapsed since deactivating the system. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when deactivating the system.

Furthermore, in order to suitably achieve these effects, it is desirable to have both cases when a message display appears, where the post-operation output sound is output as follows: a sound where, if the specific operating means changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operating means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a constant time; and a sound where, if the specific operating means changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operating means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time. However, this configuration is not necessarily required. For example, if the message display appears in different sizes, colors, or display modes, and one of the sounds is output according to the mode, it can be expected that the above-mentioned effects will be achieved to a certain extent, compared to the case where the message display itself is not displayed at all. However, it is desirable (though not mandatory) that messages prompting multiple operations be displayed in a manner that does not appear when the operation is enabled and only one operation is accepted.

[Configuration 9-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to first detect the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410), and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection. In this regard, an operation-enabled state is provided in which the post-operation output sound can be output when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state. In this state, a multiple operation-enabled state is provided in which detection of the operation state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. Among the multiple operation-enabled states, in the type of multiple operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, if the specific operation means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operation means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time." Therefore, when it is possible to output the post-operation output sound multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operating state, even if the operation on the specific operation means is terminated, it becomes difficult to predict how much time has passed since it entered the unoperated state before the output sound that is being output will end. Furthermore, the term "specific operating means" in relation to configuration 9-A is merely a designation used to explain the technical concept of configuration 9-A. Therefore, it may refer to the same operating means as the "specific operating means" in other configurations, or it may refer to a different operating means. It may also refer to the same "operating means" as an operating means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the type of multiple operation valid state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state, when it is detected that the specified operation means is in the operating state, only the sound that is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time but is of an indeterminate time) is made available as the post-operation output sound when the specified operation means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output. When it is detected that the specified operating means is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound may be configured to output either a sound where, if the specified operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specified operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is a fixed amount of time (a sound processed as a fixed amount of time), or a sound where, if the specified operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specified operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not processed as a fixed amount of time but is indefinite (a sound that is not a fixed amount of time).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated in the multiple-operation enabled state, it becomes difficult to predict how long after the specified operating means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state the post-operation output sound will end. For example, it can suitably suggest that the performance is of low noteworthy quality in the immediate aftermath of switching the specified operating means from the operated state to the non-operated state. Conversely, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated in the multiple-operation enabled state, there are cases where it is possible to predict how long after the specified operating means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state the post-operation output sound will end, and cases where it is difficult to predict. Therefore, for example, it can suggest that the performance after switching the specified operating means from the operated state to the non-operated state may have noteworthy value, while the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operated state was established. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when switching to the non-operated state.

In configuration 9-A, it is assumed that the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, and the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, are both the same "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only case. For example, in the multiple-operation enabled state, if a mock image display that mimics an operating means that allows multiple operations is displayed, the configuration described in configuration 9-A may be adopted for both the type of multiple-operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled when the operating means corresponding to the mock image display is maintained in an operated state, and the type of multiple-operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not enabled when the operating means corresponding to the mock image display is maintained in an operated state.

[Configuration 10-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection, and to display a mock image that mimics the specific operating means. In this regard, there is an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and a multiple-time operation-enabled state is provided in which the detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. The mock image display is made so that periodic changes appear in the multiple-time operation-enabled state, and there are cases in which the periodic changes appear in time units of a predetermined time or less, and cases in which the periodic changes appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. Furthermore, in the multiple operation valid state, specifically the type in which the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, if the specific operation means changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operation means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time." Therefore, when the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, even if the operation on the specific operation means is terminated, it becomes difficult to predict how much time has passed since the unoperated state was entered before the post-operation output sound, which is in output state, will end. Note that the terms "specific operation means" and "predetermined time" in this configuration 10-A are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 10-A. Therefore, the "specific operating means" and "predetermined time" may refer to the same operating means and time as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and time. Furthermore, the "operating means" and "time" may refer to the same operating means and time with different names in other configurations. In addition, "a time longer than the predetermined time" may refer to only one time or multiple different times.

In this case, as will be described later, in the type of multiple operation enabled state in which the periodic changes in the above-mentioned mock image display appear in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, when it is detected that the above-mentioned specific operation means is in an operation state, only the following sounds can be output as the post-operation output sound: "When the above-mentioned specific operation means changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the above-mentioned specific operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time but is of an indefinite time)." In the type of multiple operation enabled state in which the periodic changes in the above-mentioned mock image display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, Furthermore, when it is detected that the specified operating means is in an operating state, the system may output either a sound as the post-operation output sound in which, if the specified operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specified operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a fixed time, or a sound as the post-operation output sound in which, if the specified operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specified operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not treated as a fixed time but is indefinite (a sound that is not a fixed time).

With this configuration, when the time required for the periodic change of the mock image display is relatively short in the multiple-operation enabled state, it becomes difficult to predict how long after the specified operation means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state the post-operation output sound will end. For example, it can suitably suggest that the performance is of low noteworthy quality in the immediate aftermath of switching the specified operation means from the operated state to the non-operated state. Conversely, when the time required for the periodic change of the mock image display is relatively long in the multiple-operation enabled state, there are cases where it is possible to predict how long after the specified operation means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state the post-operation output sound will end, and cases where it is difficult to predict. Therefore, for example, it can suggest that the performance after switching the specified operation means from the operated state to the non-operated state may have noteworthy value, while the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operated state was established. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when switching to the non-operated state.

In configuration 10-A, it is assumed that the operating means used when the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, and the operating means used when the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, are both the same "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only possible configuration. That is, in the state where multiple operations are enabled, the configuration 10-A may be adopted by using the operating means corresponding to the mock image display as the target of operation, regardless of whether the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, or whether the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time.

Furthermore, in configuration 10-A, the "time less than or equal to the predetermined time" may include multiple time periods, or only one time period (for example, the "predetermined time"). Similarly, the "time longer than the predetermined time" may also include multiple time periods, or only one time period.

[Configuration 11-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of the operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection, and it is possible to display a mock image that mimics the operating means. In this regard, a mock image operation effective state is provided in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state, and a multiple operation effective state is provided in which the detection of the operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and a first operation means and a second operation means are provided as the operating means. Furthermore, in the multiple operation valid states of the above, in the type of multiple operation valid state in which at least one imitation image display of the first operation means is displayed, when it is detected that the first operation means is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which, when the first operation means changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the first operation means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time." Therefore, when an imitation image display of the first operation means is displayed as an operation means that allows multiple operations, even if the operation on the first operation means is terminated, it becomes possible to suggest that it is difficult to predict how much time has passed since the unoperated state was entered before the post-operation output sound, which is in output state, will end. Note that the terms "first operation means" and "second operation means" in this configuration 11-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 11-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "first operating means" and "second operating means" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means. It may also mean the same "operating means" as an operating means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which at least one imitation image display of the second operation means is displayed, when it is detected that the second operation means is in an operating state, only the sound that is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indeterminate) is made available as the post-operation output sound, when the second operation means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output. In the multiple operation enabled state of the type in which at least one imitation image display of the first operation means is displayed, it is detected that the first operation means is in an operating state. Furthermore, the post-operation output sound may be configured to include both cases: 1) when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, and the time from the moment the first operating means enters the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is a fixed time (a sound processed as a fixed time); and 2) when the post-operation output sound is output, and the time from the moment the first operating means enters the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indeterminate).

With this configuration, when the second operating means is the target of the simulated image display while the operation is active multiple times, and the second operating means is operated, it becomes difficult to predict how long after the second operating means is in the output state when it is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state the post-operation output sound will end. For example, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the performance is of little note in the immediate aftermath of switching the second operating means from the operated state to the non-operated state. In contrast, when the first operating means is the target of the simulated image display and the first operating means is operated, it is possible to predict, and difficult to predict, how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state when the first operating means is returned from the operated state to the non-operated state, to end. Therefore, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of returning the first operating means from the operated state to the non-operated state may be noteworthy, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, will end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operated state was established. This allows for the appropriate maintenance of the sense of tension when the means is returned to the non-operated state.

[Configuration 12-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection. In this regard, there is an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and there is a multiple operation-enabled state in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. In the multiple operation-enabled state, when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound can be output in the following cases: 、 の

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple operation valid state and a second multiple operation valid state are provided as multiple operation valid states. In the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operation state. At that time, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is set to an indefinite time. However, if the specified operation means changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specified operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is constant. The output can be a sound that corresponds to a certain time (a sound that is processed as a fixed time). In the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated at predetermined intervals simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operation state. However, the post-operation output sound may be output as a sound whose duration is not fixed (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indeterminate) if the specified operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the post-operation output sound is being output.

With this configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state, it becomes difficult to predict how long after the specified operating means is in the output state when it is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state it will cease to produce. For example, it can suitably suggest that the performance is of little noteworthy significance immediately after the specified operating means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state. In contrast, in the first multiple operation valid state, it is possible to predict how long after the specified operating means is in the output state when it is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state it will cease to produce. Therefore, for example, it can suggest that the performance after the specified operating means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state may have noteworthy value.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, especially during the first multiple operation valid state, even though it is a single valid period, the post-operation output sound may be configured to include both cases: when the specific operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is a fixed time (a sound processed as a fixed time); and when the specific operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indeterminate) is output.

With this configuration, in the first multiple-operation valid state among the multiple-operation valid states, it is possible to predict, and difficult to predict, how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state when the specific operating means is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, to end. Therefore, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of changing the specific operating means from the operated state to the non-operated state may be noteworthy, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, to end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operated state was established. This allows for the desirable maintenance of tension when the device is changed to the non-operated state.

In configuration 12-A, it is assumed that the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, and the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, are both the same "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operating means targeted in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a mock image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state.

[Configuration 13-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, there is an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and a multiple-time operation-enabled state is provided in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. In this multiple-time operation-enabled state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in an operating state. In this regard, when multiple operations are enabled, if it is detected that the specified operation means is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound can be either: "a sound that is processed as a constant time (a sound that is processed as a constant time) is output when the specified operation means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, and the time from the moment the specified operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is a constant time (a sound that is not processed as a constant time)" or "a sound that is not a constant time (a sound that is indeterminate and not processed as a constant time) is output when the specified operation means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output." Therefore, for example, it is possible to suggest that there is noteworthy value in the dramatic effect of changing the specified operation means from an operating state to an unoperated state, while the post-operation output sound that is output does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since it was changed to an unoperated state, and it is expected that the sense of tension when changing to an unoperated state will be suitably maintained. Furthermore, the term "specific operating means" in relation to configuration 13-A is merely a designation used to explain the technical concept of configuration 13-A. Therefore, it may refer to the same operating means as the "specific operating means" in other configurations, or it may refer to a different operating means. It may also refer to the same "operating means" as an operating means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, a first multiple operation valid state is prepared as the multiple operation valid state. In this first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in an operating state. However, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than the specified time, and the post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound that is processed as a constant time (a sound that is processed as a constant time) when the specified operation means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output."

Furthermore, as will be described later, a second multiple operation valid state may be provided as one of the multiple operation valid states. In this second multiple operation valid state, simply maintaining the specified operation means in an operation state is not sufficient to generate the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection multiple times. Instead, the post-operation output sound may be output as a sound where, if the specified operation means changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specified operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indeterminate)."

Furthermore, as will be described later, a third multiple operation valid state may be provided as one of the multiple operation valid states. In this third multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in an operated state. In this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is set to be less than or equal to a specific time, and the post-operation output sound may be output as a sound where, if the specified operation means changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specified operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indeterminate)."

In configuration 13-A, it is assumed that the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, and the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, are both the same operating means referred to as the "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operating means targeted for operation in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state. Also, the "specific time" in configuration 13-A is merely a designation used to explain the technical concept of configuration 13-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "specific time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. It may also mean the same "time" as a time with a different name in other configurations. Furthermore, the "times longer than the specified time" in configuration 13-A may be provided in multiple quantities, or only one quantity may be provided. Similarly, the "times less than or equal to the specified time" in configuration 13-A may be provided in multiple quantities, or only one quantity may be provided.

[Configuration 14-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, there is an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and there is a multiple operation valid state in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. Among these multiple operation valid states, in a type of multiple operation valid state in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound is output as follows: When the device is switched from an operating state to an unoperated state, the time from when the specific operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indeterminate) that is output. Therefore, in this type of multiple-operation effective state, it becomes difficult to predict how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is output when the specific operating means is switched from an operating state to an unoperated state, to end. For example, it can suitably suggest that the performance is not noteworthy in situations where the specific operating means has just been switched from an operating state to an unoperated state. Note that the "specific operating means" in this configuration 14-A is merely a designation used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 14-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operating means as the "specific operating means" in other configurations, or it may mean a different operating means. It may also mean the same "operating means" as an operating means with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the type of multiple operation valid state where the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, when the specific operation means is detected to be in an operating state, the post-operation output sound may be configured to output a sound that is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time but is indeterminate) from the moment the specific operation means enters the non-operating state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible, if the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output. With such a configuration, in the type of multiple operation valid state that is not terminated, it becomes difficult to predict how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is output when the specific operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, to terminate. For example, it can suitably suggest that the performance is not noteworthy in situations where the specific operation means has just changed from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, in the type of multiple operation valid state in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specified operation means is in an operating state before the predetermined termination timing arrives, when the detection that the specified operation means is in an operating state is made, the post-operation output sound will only be output if, while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specified operation means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, and the time from the moment the specified operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indeterminate) is detected. In a type of multiple-operation valid state in which the operation valid state can be terminated, when it is detected that the specified operation means is in an operation state, the system may output a post-operation output sound that, when the specified operation means changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, represents a constant time (a sound processed as a constant time); or it may output a post-operation output sound that, when the specified operation means changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, represents a non-constant time (a sound that is not processed as a constant time and is indeterminate)).

With this configuration, in the multiple-operation enabled state of the type that does not terminate, it is difficult to predict how long after the specified operating means is in the output state that it will terminate when it is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state. For example, it is possible to suitably suggest that the immediate situation after switching the specified operating means from the operated state to the non-operated state has little noteworthy dramatic effect. In contrast, in the multiple-operation enabled state of the type that does terminate, there are cases where it is possible to predict how long after the specified operating means is in the output state that it will terminate when it is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state, and cases where it is difficult to predict. For example, it is possible to suggest that the dramatic effect after switching the specified operating means from the operated state to the non-operated state may have noteworthy value, while the post-operation output sound in the output state that it will terminate is not necessarily limited to a certain amount of time after it is switched to the non-operated state. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when switching to the non-operated state.

In configuration 14-A, it is assumed that the "specific operating means" is the same operating means, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be specified as whether or not the "operating means" is of a type that can terminate when the "operating means" represented as a simulated image display is operated in a multiple-operation valid state, and whether or not the "operating means" represented as a simulated image display is operated in a multiple-operation valid state, and whether or not the "operating means" represented as a simulated image display is operated in a multiple-operation valid state, and whether or not the "operating means" represented as a simulated image display is operated in a multiple-operation valid state, and whether or not the "operating means" represented as a simulated image display is operated as a trigger for the termination of the "operating means" in a multiple-operation valid state. Furthermore, even in a state where multiple operations are enabled, and depending on the outcome of a jackpot determination, the operation may not end before the predetermined termination time, if the operation may end before the predetermined termination time depending on the outcome of a jackpot determination, then such a state of multiple operations is equivalent to the "type of state of multiple operations enabled that can be terminated" described above.

[Configuration 15-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a multiple operation-enabled state is provided in which detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. As multiple operation-enabled states, a first multiple operation-enabled state and a second multiple operation-enabled state are provided, each having different conditions for occurrence. Furthermore, in both the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state, it is possible to play the game in such a way that the specific operation means is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state, if the specific operation means changes from an unoperated state to an operated state while it is in a state where it is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change as a result. However, if the specific operation means changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while it is in a state where it is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may not change as a result. In other words, in this case, in the first multiple-operation valid state, even if the specified operating means that is in operation is deactivated, no change occurs in the post-operation output sound that was previously in output state. Therefore, it is expected that users will be able to interrupt operations without hesitation. However, when the specified operating means that is deactivated is activated, a change may occur in the post-operation output sound that was previously in output state. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately provided when reactivating the device. Note that the terms "specified operating means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in this configuration 15-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 15-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operating means or operation valid state as "specified operating means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in other configurations, or they may mean different operating means or operation valid states. Furthermore, they may mean the same "operating means" or "operation valid state" as operating means or operation valid states with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state described above, when the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, there may be cases where both a sound that could cause a change in its output state when the specific operation means is assumed to have changed from a non-operation state to an operation state, and a sound that does not cause a change in its output state, are in an output state. However, when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while both the specific operation means is in an operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state may be kept unchanged regardless of the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound. With this configuration, in the first multiple-operation valid state, even if the specified operating means, which was in the operating state, is deactivated, the post-operation output sound, which was previously in the output state, does not change as a result. Therefore, it is expected that users will feel more comfortable interrupting the operation. However, when the specified operating means, which was previously in the deactivated state, is activated, there are cases where the post-operation output sound changes and cases where it does not. Therefore, while encouraging re-operation, the possibility of a change in the post-operation output sound is also expected to appropriately provide a sense of tension regarding re-operation.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, in the second multiple operation valid state described above, when the specific operation means is in a non-operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the post-operation output sound is a sound that does not cause a change in its output state when the specific operation means is assumed to have temporarily changed from a non-operation state to an operation state (no sound that could cause a change in the output state is output as the post-operation output sound). However, when the specific operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the specific operation means is in an operation state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the post-operation output sound may either change or not change depending on the type of sound being output. With this configuration, in the second multiple-operation enabled state, when the specified operating means, which is in the operating state, is deactivated, there are cases where the post-operation output sound, which was previously in the output state, changes, and cases where it does not change. Therefore, while encouraging interruption of operation, the possibility of a change in the post-operation output sound provides a suitable sense of tension regarding interruption. On the other hand, when the specified operating means, which is deactivated, is deactivated, there is no change in the post-operation output sound, which was previously in the output state. Therefore, it is expected that users will be more willing to resume operation.

In configuration 15-A, it is assumed that the operating means allowing multiple operations in both the first and second multiple operation enabled states are the same "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 16-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection and to display a mock image that mimics the operating means. In this regard, a mock image operation enabled state is provided in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the mock image display, is in an operating state. In this state, a multiple operation enabled state is provided in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. As this multiple operation enabled state, a first multiple operation enabled state and a second multiple operation enabled state are provided, each having different conditions for occurrence. Furthermore, the first multiple operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least one of the operation means displays a mock image that mimics the first operation means, and the game is made possible in such a state that the first operation means is in an operation state and the first operation output sound corresponding to the detection that the first operation means has been operated is in an output state and the first operation means is in an operation state and is not operated. The second multiple operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least one of the operation means displays a mock image that mimics the second operation means, and the second operation output sound corresponding to the detection that the second operation means has been operated is in an output state and the second operation means is in an operation state and is not operated. Assuming that the game can be played in a way that brings the situation into existence, in the first multiple operation valid state described above, if the first operation means is in a non-operated state and the output sound after the first operation is in an output state, and the first operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the output sound after the first operation may change as a result. However, if the first operation means is in an operated state and the output sound after the first operation is in an output state, and the first operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the output state of the output sound after the first operation may not change as a result. This makes it possible to more actively encourage the first operation means, which is in a non-operated state, to be put into an operated state. Note that the terms "first operation means,""second operation means,""first multiple operation valid state," and "second multiple operation valid state" in relation to configuration 16-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 16-A. Therefore, the terms "first operating means,""second operating means,""first multiple operation valid state," and "second multiple operation valid state" in other configurations may mean the same operating means or operation valid state, or they may mean different operating means or operation valid states. Furthermore, the terms "operating means" and "operation valid state" may mean the same operating means or operation valid state with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state, when the first operating means is in a non-operated state and the output sound after the first operation is in an output state, the output sound after the first operation may consist only of a sound that would cause a change in its output state if the first operating means were to temporarily change from a non-operated state to an operated state (it is possible to process a change in the sound that is in an output state). However, if the first operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the first operating means is in an operated state and the output sound after the first operation is in an output state, the output state of the output sound after the first operation may not change as a result (it is not possible to process a change in the sound that is in an output state). With such a configuration, it becomes possible to more actively encourage the first operating means, which is in a non-operated state, to change to an operated state.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, when the second operating means is in a non-operated state and the second side post-operation output sound is in an output state, the second side post-operation output sound is output only if the second operating means were to change from a non-operated state to an operated state (no sound that could cause a change in the output state is output as the second side post-operation output sound). However, when the second operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the second operating means is in an operated state and the second side post-operation output sound is in an output state, the second side post-operation output sound may change or not change depending on the type of sound output as the second side post-operation output sound. With this configuration, when the second multiple-operation valid state occurs, it is expected that the system will more actively encourage the second operating means, which is currently in operation, to be deactivated. However, since there is also a possibility that a sound that does not change as a result of the deactivation state is output, the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 17-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection can be executed, and a mock image display that mimics the operating means can be displayed. In this regard, as an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation change can be initiated when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a multiple-time operation-enabled state is provided in which detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, and as one of the post-operation changes, a post-operation output sound can be output, and as the multiple-time operation-enabled state, a first multiple-time operation-enabled state and a second multiple-time operation-enabled state are provided, each with different occurrence conditions. Furthermore, the second multiple-operation valid state described above can be terminated when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives. However, the first multiple-operation valid state described above is not terminated when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives. Moreover, in the first multiple-operation valid state described above, if the specific operating means changes from an operating state to an operating state while it is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change as a result. However, if the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may not change as a result. This makes it possible to more actively encourage the specific operating means to change from a non-operating state to an operating state. Furthermore, the terms "specific operating means,""first multiple operation effective state," and "second multiple operation effective state" relating to configuration 17-A are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 17-A. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation effective state as those relating to other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation effective states. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation effective state" as those relating to other configurations under different names.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state described above, if the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change as a result. However, if the specific operation means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound will not change as a result. In the state in which the specified operating means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specified operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result. However, if the specified operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the specified operating means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the sound output as the post-operation output sound may change or not change depending on the type of sound being output. With such a configuration, when a "first multiple-operation valid state" occurs that is not terminated by an operation by the player, it becomes possible to more actively encourage the specified operating means, which is in a non-operated state, to change to an operated state. Furthermore, when a "second multiple-operation valid state" occurs that can be terminated by an operation by the player, it is possible to more actively encourage the specified operating means, which is in an operated state, to change to a non-operated state, while also maintaining a sense of tension, as there is a possibility that a sound that does not change as a result of the non-operation state is being output.

In configuration 17-A, it is assumed that the operating means allowing multiple operations in both the first and second multiple operation enabled states are the same "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 18-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, as an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a multiple operation-enabled state is provided in which detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. As multiple operation-enabled states, a first multiple operation-enabled state and a second multiple operation-enabled state are provided, each having different conditions for occurrence. Furthermore, in both the first multiple-operation valid state and the second multiple-operation valid state, it is possible to play the game in a way that creates a situation where the specified operating means is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. When the specified operating means changes from an unoperated state to an operated state while it is in a state where the specified operating means is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when it becomes an operated state until the post-operation output sound ends may be a fixed time or not. This makes the presentation when the operation on the specified operating means ends more complex, and it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "specified operating means,""first multiple-operation valid state," and "second multiple-operation valid state" in this configuration 18-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 18-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operating means or operation valid state as in other configurations, or they may mean different operating means or operation valid states. Furthermore, it may also mean the same "operating means" or "operating state" as other operating means or operating state with different names relating to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state described above, when the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when it changes to an operated state until the post-operation output sound ends may be constant or indefinite depending on the type of post-operation output sound that is in the output state. However, when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while it is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when it changes to a non-operated state until the post-operation output sound ends may be indefinite. With such a configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state described above, it becomes difficult to predict how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is in an output state when the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, to end. For example, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the performance is not noteworthy in the situation immediately after the specific operation means has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. In contrast, when a specific operating means is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state, the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, may either be predictable or difficult to predict in terms of how long it will take for it to end. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of switching the specific operating means back to an operated state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, will not necessarily end after a fixed amount of time has elapsed since the means was switched back to an operated state. This allows for the appropriate maintenance of the sense of tension when switching the means back to an operated state.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, in the second multiple operation valid state described above, if the specific operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the specific operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when it becomes an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is indeterminate. However, if the specific operation means is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the specific operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the time from when it becomes a non-operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends may be constant or indeterminate depending on the type of post-operation output sound that is in the output state. With such a configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state described above, it becomes difficult to predict how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is in an output state when the specific operation means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, to end. For example, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the performance is not noteworthy in situations where the specific operation means has just been changed from a non-operated state to an operated state. In contrast, when a specific operating means is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, may either be predictable or difficult to predict in terms of how long it will take for it to end. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of switching the specific operating means to a non-operating state may have noteworthy value, the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, will not necessarily end after a fixed amount of time has elapsed since the non-operating state was established. This allows for the appropriate maintenance of the sense of tension when switching to a non-operating state.

[Configuration 19-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection, and it is possible to display a mock image that mimics the operating means. In this regard, a mock image operation effective state is provided in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state, and a multiple operation effective state is provided in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. The operating means is provided as a first operating means and a second operating means, and the multiple operation effective states are provided as a first multiple operation effective state and a second multiple operation effective state, each with different conditions for occurrence. Furthermore, the first multiple operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least a mock image display that mimics the first operation means is displayed, and the game is playable in such a state that the first operation means is not in an operation state, and the first operation post-output sound is output in response to the detection that the first operation means has entered an operation state, and the first operation means is not in an operation state. The second multiple operation valid state occurs as an operation valid state in which at least a mock image display that mimics the second operation means is displayed, and the second operation post-output sound is output in response to the detection that the second operation means has entered an operation state, and the second operation means is not in an operation state. The game is designed to allow the player to create a certain situation, and in the first multiple operation valid state described above, when the first operation means changes from the non-operated state to the operated state while the first operation post-output sound is in the output state and the first operation means is in the non-operated state, the time from when it changes to the operated state until the output state of the first operation post-output sound ends is set to a fixed time. Therefore, in the situation where the first operation post-output sound is in the output state and the first operation means is in the non-operated state, it becomes possible to add a showy element to the timing of when the first operation means should be operated, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "first operation means,""second operation means,""first multiple operation valid state," and "second multiple operation valid state" in this configuration 19-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 19-A. Therefore, the "first operating means,""second operating means,""first multiple operation valid state," and "second multiple operation valid state" in other configurations may mean the same operating means or operation valid state, or they may mean different operating means or operation valid states. Furthermore, the "operating means" or "operation valid state" may mean the same operating means or operation valid state with a different name in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if, while in the second multiple operation valid state, the second operation means is in an output state and the second operation means is in a non-operated state, and the second operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when it becomes operated until the output state of the second operation output sound ends may be made indefinite (not treated as a fixed time). With such a configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state, it becomes difficult to predict how long it will take for the output sound, which is in an output state when the second operation means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, to end. For example, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the performance is less noteworthy in situations where the second operation means has just been changed from a non-operated state to an operated state.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, if the first operating means changes from the non-operating state to the operating state while the first post-operation output sound is in the output state and the first operating means is in the non-operating state, the time from when it changes from the operating state to when the output state of the first post-operation output sound ends can be treated as a constant time. However, if the first operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state while the first post-operation output sound is in the output state and the first operating means is in the operating state, the time from when it changes from the non-operating state to when the output state of the first post-operation output sound ends may be made indefinite (not treated as a constant time). With this configuration, in the first multiple-operation effective state, the post-operation output sound, which is output when the first operating means is switched from a non-operated state to an operating state, allows for estimation of how long it will take for the sound to end after entering the operating state. For example, this suitably suggests that there is a noteworthy effect even immediately after switching the first operating means from a non-operated state to an operating state. Conversely, the post-operation output sound, which is output when the first operating means is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, makes it difficult to estimate how long it will take for the sound to end. For example, this suitably suggests that there is little noteworthy effect immediately after switching the first operating means from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in the above-mentioned second multiple operation valid state, if the second operation means changes from the non-operation state to the operation state while the second operation output sound is in the output state and the second operation means is in the non-operation state, the time from when it changes from the operation state to when the output state of the second operation output sound ends is indeterminate. However, if the second operation means changes from the operation state to the non-operation state while the second operation output sound is in the output state and the second operation means is in the operation state, the time from when it changes from the non-operation state to when the output state of the second operation output sound ends may be constant or indeterminate depending on the type of second operation output sound that is in the output state. With this configuration, in the second multiple-operation effective state, when the second operating means is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state, it is difficult to predict how long after the state has been in operation the post-operation output sound will end. For example, it can suitably suggest that the dramatic effect is low immediately after the second operating means is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state. On the other hand, when the second operating means is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state, the post-operation output sound, which is in output state, can sometimes be predicted to end, and sometimes it is difficult to predict. Therefore, for example, it can suggest that the dramatic effect after the second operating means is switched to a non-operated state may be of noteworthy value, while the post-operation output sound, which is in output state, does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the state has been switched to a non-operated state. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when the system is switched to a non-operated state.

[Configuration 20-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection. In this regard, multiple operation valid states are provided, which are states in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. These multiple operation valid states include a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state, and in all of these operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operating means is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is being output. In the first multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state, but the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is set to an indefinite time (not treated as a fixed time), in the second multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state, and in the third multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state. While this is possible, the system is designed to process the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation to be a fixed time. Furthermore, in the multiple operation valid state, if the specific operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operating means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can change as a result. For example, when the specific operating means is changed from a non-operated state back to an operated state, it can be suitably suggested that there is a noteworthy effect even in a short period of time. Note that the terms "specific operating means,""first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state," and "third multiple operation valid state" in this configuration 20-A are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 20-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operating means or operation valid state as "specific operating means,""first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state," and "third multiple operation valid state" in other configurations, or they may mean different operating means or operation valid states. Furthermore, it may also mean the same "operating means" or "operating state" as other operating means or operating state with different names relating to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in an operated state, if the specified operation means changes from an operated state to an operated state while the specified operation means is in an inoperable state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound will not change as a result. In contrast, in the third multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated a fixed time, In the second multiple operation valid state, where the specific operating means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, if the specific operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed as a result. With this configuration, whether the player performs another operation in the second multiple-operation enabled state where the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated, or in the third multiple-operation enabled state where the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated at regular intervals, the output state of the post-operation output sound can change as a result. Therefore, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation where the auto-repeated button press function is being activated. In contrast, in the first multiple-operation enabled state, if the player performs another operation of the specific operation means while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, it becomes clear that the player is not in a situation where the auto-repeated button press function is not activated (second multiple-operation enabled state), i.e., that the player is in a situation where the auto-repeated button press function is being activated. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation where the auto-repeated button press function is being activated by not activating it at regular intervals, a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to this configuration can be suppressed.

In configuration 20-A, it is assumed that the operating means allowing multiple operations in the first, second, and third multiple operation enabled states are all the same operating means, referred to as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 21-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, there is an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and there is a multiple operation-enabled state in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. There is a first multiple operation-enabled state and a second multiple operation-enabled state, and in both of these operation-enabled states, it is possible to play the game in a way that creates a situation in which the specific operating means is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is being output. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, but the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is set to an indefinite time. In the second multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in an operated state, but the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again can be processed as a fixed time. Moreover, in the multiple operation enabled state, when the specific operation means changes from an inoperable state to an operated state while it is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can change as a result. For example, when the specific operation means is changed from an inoperable state back to an operated state, it can be suitably suggested that there is a noteworthy effect even in a short period of time. Furthermore, the terms "specific operating means,""first multiple operation valid state," and "second multiple operation valid state" relating to configuration 21-A are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 21-A. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation valid state as those relating to other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation valid states. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation valid state" as those relating to other configurations under different names.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple-operation valid state in which the interval until the output sound after the above operation is generated is an indefinite time, when the specific operating means changes from an inactive state to an active state while the specific operating means is in an inactive state and the output sound after the operation is in an active state, the output state of the output sound after the operation is not changed as a result. In the second multiple-operation valid state in which the interval until the output sound after the operation is generated is a fixed time, when the specific operating means changes from an inactive state to an active state while the specific operating means is in an inactive state and the output sound after the operation is in an active state, the output state of the sound after the operation may change or not change depending on the type of sound being output. With this configuration, in the first multiple-operation enabled state, where the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated at regular intervals, even if the specific operating means is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result. Combined with the fact that the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is indefinite, it is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether their operation has been properly received. In contrast, in the second multiple-operation enabled state, where the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated at regular intervals, while suggesting that the performance after switching the specific operating means back to an operated state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is in an output state, does not necessarily change as a result of switching it back to an operated state. Therefore, it is expected that the tension when switching it back to an operated state will also be suitably maintained.

In configuration 21-A, it is assumed that the operating means allowing multiple operations in both the first and second multiple operation enabled states are the same "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 22-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection. In this regard, multiple operation valid states are provided, which are states in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. These multiple operation valid states include a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state. In all of these operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operating means is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is being output. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state, but the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated anew is set to an indefinite time. In the second multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state. In the third multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state, but the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated anew is set to a fixed time. As a result, the range of performance possibilities is broadened, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "specified operation means,""first multiple operation enabled state,""second multiple operation enabled state," and "third multiple operation enabled state" in this configuration 22-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 22-A. Therefore, "specific operating means" in other configurations, "first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state," and "third multiple operation valid state" may refer to the same operating means or operation valid state, or they may refer to different operating means or operation valid states. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation valid state" as operating means or operation valid states with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in an operating state, if the specific operating means changes from an operating state to an operating state while the specific operating means is in an operating state, the time from when it changes to an operating state until the post-operation output sound is output is indefinite (not treated as a fixed time), whereas in the third multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated is fixed, the specific operating means is in an operating state. In the state in which the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is outputting, if the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from when it changes to the operating state until the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound ends can be processed as a fixed time rather than an indeterminate time. In the second multiple operation valid state in which the above-mentioned specific operating means is maintained in an operating state but the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above-mentioned detection does not generate multiple times, if the specific operating means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state while the above-mentioned specific operating means is in a non-operating state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is outputting, the time from when it changes to the operating state until the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound ends can be processed as a fixed time. With this configuration, whether the player performs another operation in the second multiple-operation enabled state where the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated, or in the third multiple-operation enabled state where the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated at regular intervals, the time from the player's re-operation until the output state of the post-operation sound ends is constant. Therefore, it is expected that the player will find it difficult to recognize whether or not they are in a situation where the auto-repeated button press function is activated, thus maintaining a suitable sense of tension. In contrast, in the first multiple-operation enabled state, if the player performs another operation of the specific operation means while the post-operation sound is still being output, they will recognize that they are not in a situation where the auto-repeated button press function is not activated (second multiple-operation enabled state), meaning they are in a situation where the auto-repeated button press function is activated. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize whether or not they are in a situation where the auto-repeated button press function is activated by not activating it at regular intervals, the decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to this configuration can be suppressed.

In configuration 22-A, it is assumed that the operating means allowing multiple operations in the first, second, and third multiple operation enabled states are all the same operating means, referred to as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 23-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, there is an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and there is a multiple operation-enabled state in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. There is a first multiple operation-enabled state and a second multiple operation-enabled state, and in both of these operation-enabled states, it is possible to play the game in a way that creates a situation in which the specific operating means is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is being output. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state, but the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated anew is set to an indefinite time. In the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state, but the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated anew is set to a fixed time. This expands the range of performance possibilities and is expected to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game. Note that the terms "specified operation means,""first multiple operation valid state," and "second multiple operation valid state" in this configuration 23-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 23-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means or operation valid state as "specified operation means,""first multiple operation valid state," and "second multiple operation valid state" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means or operation valid states. Furthermore, it may also mean the same "operating means" or "operating state" as other operating means or operating state with different names relating to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple-operation valid state in which the interval until a new output sound after the above operation occurs is an indefinite time, when the specific operating means changes from an indefinite state to an operating state while the specific operating means is in an inactive state and the output sound after the above operation is in an output state, the time from when it changes from an operating state to when the output state of the output sound after the above operation ends may be indefinite. In the second multiple-operation valid state in which the interval until a new output sound after the above operation occurs is a fixed time, when the specific operating means changes from an inactive state to an operating state while the specific operating means is in an inactive state and the output sound after the above operation is in an output state, the time from when it changes from when it changes from an operating state to when the output state of the output sound after the above operation ends may be an indefinite time or a fixed time. With this configuration, in the first multiple-operation enabled state, where the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated at regular intervals, even if the specific operating means is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state again, the time from when it enters the operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is indefinite. Combined with the fact that the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is also indefinite, it is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether their operation has been properly received. In contrast, in the second multiple-operation enabled state, where the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated at regular intervals, while suggesting that the performance after switching the specific operating means back to an operated state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is currently in output state, does not necessarily end at a fixed time after being switched back to an operated state. Therefore, it is expected that the tension when switching back to an operated state will also be suitably maintained.

In configuration 23-A, it is assumed that the operating means allowing multiple operations in both the first and second multiple operation enabled states are the same "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 24-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, a multiple-use operation valid state is provided, in which the detection of the operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. Furthermore, as multiple operation valid states, the following are provided: an indefinite-change multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operating means in the operating state, and the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again can be processed to be an indefinite time; and a constant-change multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operating means in the operating state, and the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again can be processed to be a constant time. The constant-change multiple operation valid state can occur as a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specified operating means is in the operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives. Thus, it becomes possible to suggest the possibility that the state may be terminated based on the detection that the specified operating means is in the operating state through the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again. Furthermore, the terms "specific operating means,""multiple operation effective state with variable changes," and "multiple operation effective state with constant changes" relating to configuration 24-A are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 24-A. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation effective state as those relating to other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation effective states. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation effective state" as those relating to other configurations under different names.

In this case, as will be described later, the above-mentioned variable-change multiple operation valid state can occur as a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, whereas the above-mentioned constant-change multiple operation valid state may occur as a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, and may occur as a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives. With this configuration, if the interval between maintaining the specified operating means in the operating state and the generation of a new post-operation output sound is an indefinite time, it is possible to suitably suggest that the state may be terminated upon detection of the specified operating means being in the operating state. Conversely, if the interval between maintaining the specified operating means in the operating state and the generation of a new post-operation output sound is a fixed time, it becomes difficult to determine whether the state may be terminated upon detection of the specified operating means being in the operating state, or whether the state cannot be terminated upon detection of the specified operating means being in the operating state, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

In configuration 24-A, it is assumed that the operating means allowing multiple operations in both the state where multiple operations of an indefinite change are enabled and the state where multiple operations of a constant change are enabled are the same operating means, referred to as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each state where multiple operations are enabled.

[Configuration 25-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection. In this regard, multiple operation valid states are provided, which are states in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. These multiple operation valid states include a first multiple operation valid state, a second multiple operation valid state, and a third multiple operation valid state, and in all of these operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in such a way that a situation appears in which the specific operating means is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is being output. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in an operated state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than a specified time. In the second multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in an operated state. In the third multiple operation enabled state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in an operated state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always less than or equal to the specified time. In the multiple operation enabled state, if the specified operation means changes from an operated state to an operated state while it is in an inoperable state and the post-operation output sound is being output, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change as a result. This suggests that the performance aspect after the specified operation means is put back into an operated state may be of noteworthy value. Furthermore, the terms "specific operating means,""first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state,""third multiple operation valid state," and "specific time" in relation to configuration 25-A are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 25-A. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation valid state, and time as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation valid states, and times. They may also refer to the same "operating means,""operation valid state," and "time" as those with different names in other configurations. In addition, "time less than or equal to the specific time" includes the "specific time," and there may be only one time for "time longer than the specific time" and "time less than or equal to the specific time," or there may be multiple different time values.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in an operated state, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than a specified time, and in the third multiple operation valid state in which the specified operation means changes from an operated state to an operated state while the specified operation means is in an inoperable state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound is not changed as a result, and the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always less than or equal to the specified time. In the active operation state, if the specific operation means changes from the non-operated state to the operated state while the specified operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed as a result. In the second multiple-operation active state, where the specific operation means is maintained in an operated state but the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not generated multiple times, if the specific operation means changes from the non-operated state to the operated state while the specified operation means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may be changed as a result.

With this configuration, whether the player performs another operation in the second multiple-operation enabled state where the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated, or whether the player performs another operation in the third multiple-operation enabled state where the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated and a new post-operation output starts simply because a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, the post-operation output sound that was in the output state will change in response to the player's re-operation. Therefore, it is expected that the player will find it difficult to recognize whether or not they are in a situation where the auto-repeated button function is activated, thereby effectively maintaining a sense of tension. In contrast, in the first multiple-operation enabled state described above, if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is still being output, it becomes clear that the situation is not one in which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated (second multiple-operation enabled state). That is, it becomes clear that the situation is one in which the auto-repeated button press function is eligible for activation. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated button press function is eligible for activation by ensuring that the auto-repeated button press function is not activated until a certain amount of time has elapsed since the previous post-operation output began, the reduction in the enjoyment of the game due to this configuration can be suppressed.

In configuration 25-A, it is assumed that the operating means allowing multiple operations in the first, second, and third multiple operation enabled states are all the same operating means, referred to as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 26-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, there is an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and there is a multiple operation-enabled state in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. There is a first multiple operation-enabled state and a second multiple operation-enabled state, and in both of these operation-enabled states, it is possible to play the game in a way that creates a situation in which the specific operating means is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is being output. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in an operating state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than a specified time. In the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in an operating state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always less than or equal to the specified time. Moreover, in the multiple operation valid state, if the specified operation means changes from an operating state to an operating state while it is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is being output, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change as a result. This suggests that the performance aspect after the specified operation means is put back into an operating state may be of noteworthy value. Furthermore, the terms "specific operating means,""first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state," and "specific time" in relation to configuration 26-A are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 26-A. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation valid state, and time as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation valid states, and times. They may also refer to the same "operating means,""operation valid state," and "time" as those with different names in other configurations. In addition, "time less than or equal to the specific time" includes the "specific time," and there may be only one time for "time longer than the specific time" and "time less than or equal to the specific time," or there may be multiple different time values.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple-operation valid state in which the interval until the output sound after the above operation is newly generated is always longer than a specific time, when the specific operating means is in a non-operated state and the output sound after the operation is in an output state, and the specific operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the output sound after the operation is not changed as a result. In the second multiple-operation valid state in which the interval until the output sound after the operation is newly generated is always less than or equal to the specific time, when the specific operating means is in a non-operated state and the output sound after the operation is in an output state, and the specific operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the sound after the operation may change or not change depending on the type of sound being output as the output sound after the operation. With this configuration, in the first multiple-operation enabled state, where a new post-operation output is not initiated by the so-called auto-repeated button function unless a certain amount of time has elapsed since the previous post-operation output started, even if the specified operating means is changed from a non-operated state to an operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result. Combined with the fact that the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated unless a certain amount of time has elapsed since the previous post-operation output started, this makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether their operation has been properly received, thus maintaining a desirable sense of tension. In contrast, in the second multiple-operation enabled state, where the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated and a new post-operation output starts simply by elapsed less than a certain amount of time since the previous post-operation output started, while suggesting that the presentation after changing the specified operating means back to an operating state may be noteworthy, the fact that the post-operation output sound, which is currently in an output state, does not necessarily change as a result of changing the operating state again is expected to maintain a desirable sense of tension when changing the operating state again.

In configuration 26-A, it is assumed that the operating means allowing multiple operations in both the first and second multiple operation enabled states are the same "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 27-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection. In this regard, there is an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and there is a multiple operation-enabled state in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. There is a first multiple operation-enabled state, a second multiple operation-enabled state, and a third multiple operation-enabled state, and in all of these operation-enabled states, it is possible to play the game in a way that creates a situation in which the specific operating means is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is being output. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than a specified time. In the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state. In the third multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always less than or equal to the specified time. As a result, the range of performance possibilities is broadened, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "specified operation means,""first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state,""third multiple operation valid state," and "specified time" in relation to this configuration 27-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 27-A. Therefore, "specific operating means,""first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state,""third multiple operation valid state," and "specific time" in other configurations may mean the same operating means, operation valid state, and time, or they may mean different operating means, operation valid states, and time. Furthermore, they may mean the same "operating means,""operation valid state," and "time" as operating means, operation valid state, and time with different names in other configurations. In addition, "time less than or equal to the specific time" includes the "specific time," but "time longer than the specific time" and "time less than or equal to the specific time" may each have only one time or multiple different times.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operating means in an operating state, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than a specific time, whereas in the third multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always less than or equal to the specific time, if the higher-level specific operating means changes from an operating state to an operating state while the specific operating means is in an operating state, the time from when it changes from an operating state to when the post-operation output sound is output is indeterminate (not treated as a fixed time), whereas in the third multiple operation valid state in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always less than or equal to the specific time, if the specific operating means changes from an operating state to an operating state while the specific operating means is in an operating state, the time from when it changes from when it changes from an operating state to when the post-operation output sound is output is indeterminate (not treated as a fixed time), The time until the detection occurs can be treated as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time, and in the second multiple operation valid state in which the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not made to occur multiple times, if the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the specific operation means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from when it changes to an operating state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends can be treated as a fixed time, and in the second multiple operation valid state in which the specific operation means is maintained in an operating state and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not made to occur multiple times, if the specific operation means is in a non-operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the specific operation means changes from a non-operating state to an operating state, the time from when it changes to an operating state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends can be treated as a fixed time. With this configuration, whether the player performs another operation in the second multiple-operation enabled state where the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated, or whether the player performs another operation in the third multiple-operation enabled state where the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated and a new post-operation output starts after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the post-operation output, the time from when the player performs another operation until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is constant in both cases. Therefore, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the player is in a situation where the auto-repeated button press function is activated, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension. In contrast, in the first multiple-operation enabled state described above, if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is still being output, it becomes clear that the situation is not one in which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated (second multiple-operation enabled state). That is, it becomes clear that the situation is one in which the auto-repeated button press function is eligible for activation. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated button press function is eligible for activation by ensuring that the auto-repeated button press function is not activated until a certain amount of time has elapsed since the previous post-operation output began, the reduction in the enjoyment of the game due to this configuration can be suppressed.

In configuration 27-A, it is assumed that the operating means allowing multiple operations in the first, second, and third multiple operation enabled states are all the same operating means, referred to as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 28-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operation button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, there is an operation-enabled state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, and there is a multiple operation-enabled state in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. There is a first multiple operation-enabled state and a second multiple operation-enabled state, and in both of these operation-enabled states, it is possible to play the game in a way that creates a situation in which the specific operating means is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is being output. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than a specified time. In the second multiple operation valid state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in the operating state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always less than or equal to the specified time. As a result, the range of performance possibilities is broadened, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "specified operation means,""first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state," and "specified time" in this configuration 28-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 28-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means, operation valid state, and time as in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means, operation valid state, and time. Furthermore, the terms "operating means,""operatingstate," and "time" may also refer to the same terms as other operating means, operating state, and time with different names relating to other configurations. In addition, "time less than or equal to a specific time" includes the "specific time," and there may be only one time for "time longer than a specific time" and "time less than or equal to a specific time," or there may be multiple different time periods.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple-operation enabled state, where the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated unless a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, when the specific operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operating means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when it changes to an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is made indefinite (not processed as a fixed time). In the second multiple-operation enabled state, where the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated and a new post-operation output starts simply by elapsed less than a certain amount of time since the start of the previous post-operation output, when the specific operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the specific operating means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when it changes to an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends may be either indefinite (not processed as a fixed time) or fixed (can be processed as a fixed time). With this configuration, in the first multiple-operation enabled state, where the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated unless a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, even if the specified operation means is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, the time from when it enters the operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is indefinite. Combined with the fact that the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated unless a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, this makes it difficult to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly received, thus maintaining a desirable sense of tension. In contrast, in the second multiple-operation enabled state, where the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated and a new post-operation output begins after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, while suggesting that the performance after changing the specified operation means back to an operated state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is currently in output state, does not necessarily end after a fixed amount of time has elapsed since it was changed back to an operated state. This is expected to maintain a desirable sense of tension when changing the operation state again.

In configuration 28-A, it is assumed that the operating means allowing multiple operations in both the first and second multiple operation enabled states are the same "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 29-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be output. In this regard, a multiple-use operation valid state is provided, in which the detection of the operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, as an operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state. Furthermore, as the multiple operation valid state, a long-change multiple operation valid state is provided in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operating state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than a specific time, and a short-change multiple operation valid state is provided in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operating state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always less than or equal to the specific time, and the short-change multiple operation valid state can occur as a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means is in the operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, so that it becomes possible to suggest the possibility that the state may be terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means is in the operating state through the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again. Furthermore, the terms "specific operating means,""multiple long-change operation effective state,""multiple short-change operation effective state," and "specific time" in relation to configuration 29-A are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 29-A. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation effective state, and time as those referred to in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation effective states, and times. They may also refer to the same "operating means,""operation effective state," and "time" as those referred to under different names in other configurations. In addition, "time less than or equal to the specific time" includes the "specific time," and there may be only one time value provided for "time longer than the specific time" and "time less than or equal to the specific time," or there may be multiple different time values provided.

In this case, as will be described later, the above-mentioned long-change multiple operation valid state can occur as a type of multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specified operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, and the above-mentioned short-change multiple operation valid state may occur in both cases: one in which the state is not terminated based on the detection that the specified operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, and another in which the state can be terminated based on the detection that the specified operation means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives. With this configuration, although the auto-repeated button press function is enabled, if the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated until a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is possible to suitably suggest that the state may be terminated upon detection that the specified operating means is in an operating state. On the other hand, if the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated and a new post-operation output starts after only a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the state may be terminated upon detection that the specified operating means is in an operating state, or whether the state will not be terminated upon detection that the specified operating means is in an operating state, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

In configuration 29-A, it is assumed that the operating means allowing multiple operations in both the short-change multiple operation enabled state and the long-change multiple operation enabled state are the same operating means, designated as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 30-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection and to display a mock image that mimics the operating means. In this regard, a multiple-operation valid state is provided in which, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound can be started to be output. In this state, the detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times, and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. The mock image display is made possible so that periodic changes appear in the multiple-operation valid state, and the periodic changes may be displayed to appear in time units of a predetermined time or less, or to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. As the multiple-operation valid state, a first multiple-operation valid state, a second multiple-operation valid state, and a third multiple-operation valid state are provided, and in all of these multiple-operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in such a way that a situation appears in which the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is output. In the first multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the display of the mock image are made to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the operation means that is the target of the display of the mock image is maintained in the operation state, so that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times. In the second multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the display of the mock image are made to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, but the operation means that is the target of the display of the mock image is maintained in the operation state, so that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times. In the third multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the display of the mock image are made to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. The following time intervals are made available for display, and the operation means that is the target of the display of the mock image is maintained in an operating state, so that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times. Furthermore, in the multiple operation valid state, if the operation means that is the target of the display of the mock image is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the operation means changes from an operating state to an operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound can change as a result. This suggests that the performance after the operation means that is the target of the display of the mock image is put back into an operating state may have noteworthy value. Note that the terms "first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state,""third multiple operation valid state," and "predetermined time" in this configuration 30-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 30-A. Therefore, the "first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state,""third multiple operation valid state," and "predetermined time" in other configurations may refer to the same operation valid state or time, or they may refer to different operation valid states or times. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation valid state" or "time" as other operation valid states or times with different names in other configurations. In addition, "time less than or equal to the predetermined time" and "time longer than the predetermined time" may each have only one time value, or multiple different time values may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the periodic changes in the display of In the second multiple-operation effective state, where, under conditions where a certain operating means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is outputting, if the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change as a result, and the periodic changes in the mock image display can be displayed in time units longer than the predetermined time, but the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the mock image display in an operated state, then, if the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while the operating means is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is outputting, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change as a result.

With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the operating means that is the target of the mock image display, the first multiple operation valid state is configured to have the same configuration as the second multiple operation valid state in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated, in that the periodic changes in the mock image display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. This makes it difficult to recognize whether it is the target of the auto-repeated button function, thereby maintaining a sense of tension. However, unlike the second multiple operation valid state, if the operation is repeated while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result. Therefore, by indicating whether or not the situation is one in which the auto-repeated button function is activated through such a change during repeated operation, it is expected that a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed. Furthermore, regarding the multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the operating means that is the target of the mock image display, the third multiple operation enabled state is configured such that if an operation is performed again while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change as a result. This configuration is the same as the second multiple operation enabled state in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated, making it difficult to recognize whether the operation is subject to the auto-repeated button function and thus maintaining a sense of tension. However, unlike the second multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the mock image display can be displayed in time units of less than the predetermined time. Therefore, by appropriately suggesting that the situation is subject to the activation of the auto-repeated button function through the length of these periodic changes in the mock image display, it is expected that a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

[Configuration 31-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection and to display a mock image that mimics the operating means. In this regard, a multiple-operation valid state is provided in which, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound can be started to be output. In this state, the detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times, and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. The mock image display is made possible so that periodic changes appear in the multiple-operation valid state, and the periodic changes may be displayed to appear in time units of a predetermined time or less, or to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. A first multiple-operation valid state and a second multiple-operation valid state are provided as the multiple-operation valid state, and in both of these multiple-operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in such a way that a situation appears in which the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is output. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the display of the mock image are made to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is made to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image in an operating state. In the second multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the display of the mock image are made to appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is made to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image in an operating state. Furthermore, in the multiple operation enabled state, if the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change as a result, so it can be suggested that there is a noteworthy value in the performance after the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image is returned to an operating state. Furthermore, the terms "first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state," and "predetermined time" in relation to configuration 31-A are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 31-A. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation valid state or time as "first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state," and "predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation valid states or times. They may also refer to the same "operation valid state" and "time" as other operation valid states or times with different names in other configurations. Additionally, "time less than or equal to the predetermined time" and "time longer than the predetermined time" may each have only one time value, or multiple different time values may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the mock image display are made to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the operation means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operated state, so that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times. If the operation means that is the target of the mock image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the operation means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, this triggers a change in the output state of the post-operation output sound, and in the second multiple operation enabled state The system is configured such that the periodic changes in the display of the mock image occur in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, and the operation means that is the target of the display of the mock image is maintained in an operating state, so that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times. When the operation means that is the target of the display of the mock image is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound is being output, if the operation means changes from an operating state to an operating state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change or not change depending on the type of sound being output as the post-operation output sound. With such a configuration, in the first multiple-operation effective state in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, even if the operation means changes from an operating state to an operating state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result, making it difficult to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly received, and thus it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained. In contrast, in the second multiple-operation effective state, where the periodic changes in the simulated image display occur in time units of less than the predetermined time, while suggesting that the dramatic effect after reactivating the specific operating means may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, is not necessarily changed upon reactivation. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when reactivating the device.

[Configuration 32-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection and to display a mock image that mimics the operating means. In this regard, a mock image operation effective state is provided in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the mock image display, is in an operating state, and a multiple operation effective state is provided in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and the mock image display can be displayed in which periodic changes appear in the multiple operation effective state, and the periodic changes may be displayed in time units of a predetermined time or less, or in which the periodic changes may be displayed in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the multiple operation effective state is provided in a first multiple operation effective state, second multiple operation A first operation-enabled state and a third multiple operation-enabled state are provided, and in all of these multiple operation-enabled states, it is possible to play the game in a way that creates a situation where the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. The multiple operation-enabled states are a first multiple operation-enabled state, a second multiple operation-enabled state and a third multiple operation-enabled state, and in all of these multiple operation-enabled states, it is possible to play the game in a way that creates a situation where the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the mock image display are made to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the operation means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operation state, so that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times. In the second multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the mock image display are made to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, but the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the mock image display in an operation state. In the third multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the mock image display are made to appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means that is the target of the mock image display in an operation state. As a result, the range of performance possibilities is broadened, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained. Furthermore, the terms "first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state,""third multiple operation valid state," and "predetermined time" in relation to configuration 32-A are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 32-A. Therefore, they may mean the same operation valid state and time as "first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state," and "predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation valid states and times. They may also mean the same "operation valid state" and "time" as other operation valid states and times with different names in other configurations. In addition, "time less than or equal to the predetermined time" and "time longer than the predetermined time" may each have only one time value, or multiple different time values may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the periodic changes of the mock image display can be displayed in time units longer than the predetermined time, if the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when it becomes an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is indeterminate (not treated as a fixed time), whereas in the third multiple operation valid state in which the periodic changes of the mock image display can be displayed in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, the mock image display When the operating means that is the target of the display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when it changes to an operated state until the post-operation output sound ends can be treated as a constant time (not an indeterminate time). In the second multiple-operation valid state, where the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection cannot be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display in an operated state, when the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state while it is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, the time from when it changes to an operated state until the post-operation output sound ends can be treated as a constant time (not an indeterminate time).

With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state in which the operation means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operation state, the first multiple operation valid state, like the second multiple operation valid state, is designed so that the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, making it difficult to recognize whether it is the target of the auto-repeated button press function and thus maintaining a sense of tension. However, unlike the second multiple operation valid state, if a reoperation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in output state, the time from when the reoperation is performed until the post-operation output sound ends is made indefinite (not treated as a fixed time). Therefore, by checking the output state of the post-operation output sound during such a reoperation, it is possible to suitably suggest that the situation is one in which the auto-repeated button press function is activated, thereby suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, in the multiple operation enabled state, where the operation means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operation state, allowing for multiple output sounds corresponding to the detection, the third multiple operation enabled state, similar to the second multiple operation enabled state, allows for processing the time from the re-operation to the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound (not an indefinite time) as a fixed time, making it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated button function is active and thus maintaining a sense of tension. However, unlike the second multiple operation enabled state, the periodic changes in the mock image display appear in time units of less than the predetermined time. Therefore, by appropriately suggesting that the situation is one in which the auto-repeated button function is active, it is expected that the decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

[Configuration 33-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection and to display a mock image that mimics the operating means. In this regard, a multiple-operation valid state is provided in which, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound can be started to be output. In this state, the detection of being in an operating state is permitted multiple times, and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. The mock image display is made possible so that periodic changes appear in the multiple-operation valid state, and the periodic changes may be displayed to appear in time units of a predetermined time or less, or to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. A first multiple-operation valid state and a second multiple-operation valid state are provided as the multiple-operation valid state, and in both of these multiple-operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in a way that makes it possible to create a situation in which the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is output. Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation valid state, the periodic changes in the display of the mock image are made to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the operation means that is the target of the display of the mock image is maintained in an operation state, so that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times. In the second multiple-operation valid state, the periodic changes in the display of the mock image are made to appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, and the operation means that is the target of the display of the mock image is maintained in an operation state, so that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times. As a result, the range of performance possibilities is broadened, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "first multiple-operation valid state,""second multiple-operation valid state," and "predetermined time" in this configuration 33-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 33-A. Therefore, the "first multiple operation valid state,""second multiple operation valid state," and "predetermined time" in other configurations may refer to the same operation valid state or time, or they may refer to different operation valid states or times. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation valid state" or "time" as other operation valid states or times with different names in other configurations. Also, "time less than or equal to the predetermined time" and "time longer than the predetermined time" may each have only one time value, or multiple different time values may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, in the first multiple operation valid state in which the periodic changes in the display of periodic changes in the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display of the display In contrast to the previous state where the time is indeterminate (and not treated as a fixed time), in the second multiple-operation valid state where the periodic changes in the mock image display can be displayed in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, if the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and the operating means changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operating means changes to an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends may be treated as a fixed time, or it may be treated as an indeterminate time instead of a fixed time.

With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state, where the operation means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operating state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times. In the first multiple operation valid state, where the periodic changes in the mock image display can be displayed in time units longer than the predetermined time, even if the operation means that is the target of the mock image display is changed from an unoperated state to an operating state again, the time from when it becomes an operating state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is indefinite. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly accepted. In contrast, in the second multiple operation valid state, where the periodic changes in the mock image display can be displayed in time units shorter than the predetermined time, while suggesting the possibility of a new effect appearing after the operation means that is the target of the mock image display is changed back to an operating state, the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, does not necessarily end after a fixed time has elapsed since it was changed back to an operating state. This is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when changing back to an operating state.

[Configuration 34-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection and to display a mock image that mimics the operating means. In this regard, a multiple-use active operation state is provided in which, when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state, the post-operation output sound can be started to be output. In this state, the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times, and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. The mock image display is made possible so that periodic changes appear in the multiple-use active operation state, and there are cases in which the periodic changes appear in time units of a predetermined time or less, and cases in which the periodic changes appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. In the multiple-use active operation state of which the periodic changes of the mock image display appear in time units of a predetermined time or less, when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operating state, the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times in such a way that the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to a certain time, so that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained. Furthermore, the "prescribed time" in relation to configuration 34-A is merely a designation used to explain the technical concept of configuration 34-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "prescribed time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. It may also mean the same "time" as a time with a different name in other configurations. In addition, there may be only one time for "time less than or equal to the prescribed time" and "time longer than the prescribed time," or there may be multiple different times.

In this case, as will be described later, in the multiple operation enabled state, specifically in the type where the periodic change of the mock image display occurs in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in the operating state, (there is no case where the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times simply by maintaining the operating state) the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to a certain time, and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times. In the multiple operation enabled state, the periodic change of the mock image display occurs in time units longer than the predetermined time. In the multiple operation enabled state of the type displayed as shown, when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in the operation state, there may be two cases: one in which the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times (without the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated being a fixed time) and the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated (as an output sound based on other data read based on detection) is indefinite; and another in which the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state.

With this configuration, if the periodic changes in the mock-up display occur in time intervals shorter than the predetermined time, it can suitably suggest that the so-called auto-button function is activated. Furthermore, since the post-reception output sound is emitted at regular intervals when the auto-button function is activated, it becomes easier to feel that the auto-button function is activated, thus suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game. Conversely, if the periodic changes in the mock-up display occur in time intervals longer than the predetermined time, there are cases where the auto-button function is activated and cases where it is not. In addition, even if the auto-button function is activated, the post-reception output sound is only emitted at irregular intervals, making it difficult to recognize that the auto-button function is activated, thus suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

[Configuration 35-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection, and to display a mock image that mimics the operating means. In this regard, a mock image operation effective state is provided in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the mock image display, is in an operating state, and a multiple operation effective state is provided in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and the mock image display can be displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear in the multiple operation effective state, and there are cases in which the periodic changes appear in time units of a predetermined time or less, and cases in which the periodic changes appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the multiple operation effective state In the multiple operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, the operation means that is the target of the display of the mock image is maintained in the operation state, and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is generated multiple times. In this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always less than or equal to a specific time. Therefore, when the periodic changes in the display of the mock image are relatively fast, it can suitably suggest that "there is a situation in which the post-operation output sound can be output continuously at relatively short intervals simply by maintaining the operation means in the operation state." Note that the "predetermined time" and "specific time" in this configuration 35-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 35-A. Therefore, they may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may mean different times. They may also mean the same "time" as a different name for a time in other configurations. Furthermore, there may be only one time for "less than or equal to the predetermined time,""longer than the predetermined time," and "less than or equal to the specific time," or there may be multiple different times.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "multiple operation enabled state of the type in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time," the operation means that is the target of the display of the mock image is maintained in an operation state, and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is made possible multiple times, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always made less than or equal to the specified time. On the other hand, in the "multiple operation enabled state of the type in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time," there are cases in which the operation means that is the target of the display of the mock image is maintained in an operation state, and cases in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not made possible multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state. However, in the case in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is made possible multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state, the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated may be made longer than the specified time. With this configuration, if the periodic changes in the mock-up display occur in time units shorter than the predetermined time, it can suitably suggest that the so-called auto-button function is activated. Furthermore, when the auto-button function is activated, new post-reception output sounds are output one after another in a relatively short time, making it easier to feel that the auto-button function is activated and thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game. Conversely, if the periodic changes in the mock-up display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, there are cases where the auto-button function is activated and cases where it is not. In addition, even if the auto-button function is activated, new post-reception output sounds are not output until a relatively long time has passed, making it difficult to recognize that the auto-button function is activated, thus suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

[Configuration 36-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of the operating means can be detected, and when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state, it is possible to output a post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection and to display a mock image that mimics the operating means. In this regard, a mock image operation enabled state is provided in which the post-operation output sound can be started to be output when it is detected that the operating means, which is the target of the mock image display, is in an operating state, and a multiple operation enabled state is provided in which the detection of being in an operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation output sound can be output multiple times, and the mock image display can be displayed in such a way that periodic changes appear in the multiple operation enabled state, and there are cases in which the periodic changes appear in time units of a predetermined time or less, and cases in which the periodic changes appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and among the multiple operation enabled states, the periodic changes of the mock image display In a multiple-operation enabled state of a type where the transformation appears in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, if the periodic change of the mock image display appears in time units longer than the predetermined time in the multiple-operation enabled state, the state may be terminated when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state, before the predetermined termination timing arrives. Thus, the length of time required for the periodic change of the mock image display can suggest the possibility that the state may be terminated when it is detected that the operating means is in an operating state. Note that the "predetermined time" in this configuration 36-A is merely a designation used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 36-A. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" in other configurations, or it may mean a different time. It may also mean the same "time" as a time with a different name in other configurations. Furthermore, there may be only one time for "time less than or equal to the predetermined time" and "time longer than the predetermined time," or there may be multiple different times.

In this case, as will be described later, if the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units of less than the predetermined time while the multiple operation is enabled state, a situation will occur in which a type of multiple operation is enabled that can be terminated when the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image is detected to be in an operating state before the predetermined termination time arrives (there will be no situation in which a type of multiple operation is enabled that cannot be terminated occurs). If the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time while the multiple operation is enabled state, a situation will occur in which a type of multiple operation is enabled that can be terminated when the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image is detected to be in an operating state before the predetermined termination time arrives, and the state will be terminated when the operating state is detected to be in an operating state. It is also possible to have both situations where a multiple-operation valid state of the type in question occurs but does not terminate. With such a configuration, if the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time in the multiple-operation valid state, it is suitably possible to suggest that the state may terminate upon detection that the operating means, which is the target of the mock image display, is in an operating state. Conversely, if the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time in the multiple-operation valid state, it becomes difficult to determine whether the state may terminate upon detection that the operating means, which is the target of the mock image display, is in an operating state, or whether the state will not terminate upon detection that the operating means, which is the target of the mock image display, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

[Configuration 37-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection of the operating state can be executed. In this regard, a multiple-use operation-enabled state is provided, which is an operation-enabled state in which the detection of the operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, in which the detection of the operating state is allowed multiple times. Furthermore, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state where the specified operation means is maintained in an operating state but the post-operation change in response to the detection of being in an operating state is not performed multiple times, the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, is displayed based on the detection that the specified operation means is in an operating state, but the non-operation display corresponding to when the specified operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not displayed. In contrast, in a specific type of multiple operation valid state where the post-operation change in response to the detection of being in an operating state is not performed multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means in an operating state, the specified operation Based on the detection that the means is in an operating state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes described above, can be displayed. Furthermore, when the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display can be displayed. In a specific type of multiple-operation valid state, the specific operating means is in a non-operating state, and the post-non-operation display corresponding to the detection of this non-operating state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes described above, maintains its output state. This situation can occur through gameplay by the player. As a result, the range of performance possibilities when the specific operating means is kept in an operating state is broadened, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "specific operating means,""predetermined type of multiple-operation valid state," and "specific type of multiple-operation valid state" in relation to configuration 37-A are merely terms used to explain the technical concept of configuration 37-A. Therefore, "specific operating means,""predetermined type of multiple operation valid state," and "specific type of multiple operation valid state" in other configurations may mean the same operating means or operation valid state, or they may mean different operating means or operation valid states. Also, "operating means" and "operation valid state" may mean the same operating means or operation valid state with a different name in other configurations. Furthermore, "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state" means "a multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change in response to the detection of being in the operation state is not possible to execute multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operation state," and multiple such multiple operation valid states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one may be prepared. Similarly, "specific type of multiple operation valid state" means "a multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change in response to the detection of being in the operation state can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operation state," and multiple such multiple operation valid states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, when the specific type of multiple operation is enabled, and the specific operation means is in a non-operational state, and the post-operation display corresponding to the detection of this non-operational state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains its output state, if it is detected that the specific operation means has changed from a non-operational state to an operational state, the post-operation display, which was previously in a displayed state, will change, but the post-operation output sound, which was previously in an output state, will not change and will maintain its output state. With such a configuration, when the specific type of multiple operation is enabled, and the specific operation means is in a non-operational state, and the post-operation display corresponding to the detection of this non-operational state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains its output state, if the player performs another operation while the post-operation changes are being executed, the manner of the previous post-operation changes will be partially continued, while a change will occur in some parts, thus appropriately creating a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In configuration 37-A, it is assumed that in both the predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state and the specific type of multiple operation enabled state, the only operating means that allows multiple operations is the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "operating means that are represented as a simulated image display and allow multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 38-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection of the operating state can be executed. In this regard, a multiple-use operation-enabled state is provided, which is an operation-enabled state in which the detection of the operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, in which the detection of the operating state is allowed multiple times. Furthermore, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the state is not terminated when the specific operation means is detected to be in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operating state. However, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated when the specific operation means is detected to be in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, the specific operation means is operated Based on the detection of being in an operating state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes described above, can be displayed. Furthermore, when the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display can be displayed. In a specific type of multiple-operation valid state, the specific operating means is in a non-operating state, a post-operation display corresponding to the detection of this non-operating state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, maintains its output state. This situation can occur as a result of the player's gameplay. Therefore, when this situation occurs, it is expected to suitably suggest that the specific operating means is in a state where it may be terminated, triggered by the detection that it is in an operating state. Note that the terms "specific operating means,""predetermined type of multiple-operation valid state," and "specific type of multiple-operation valid state" in this configuration 38-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 38-A. Therefore, "specific operating means,""multiple operation valid states of a predetermined type," and "multiple operation valid states of a specific type" in other configurations may mean the same operating means or operation valid states as those in other configurations, or they may mean different operating means or operation valid states. Furthermore, "operating means" and "operation valid states" may mean the same operating means or operation valid states with different names in other configurations. Also, "multiple operation valid states of a predetermined type" means "a multiple operation valid state in which the state is not terminated when the specific operating means is detected to be in the operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives," and multiple such multiple operation valid states with different occurrence conditions may be provided, or only one may be provided. Similarly, "multiple operation valid states of a specific type" means "a multiple operation valid state in which the state can be terminated when the specific operating means is detected to be in the operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives," and multiple such multiple operation valid states with different occurrence conditions may be provided, or only one may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, when the above-mentioned specific type of multiple operation is enabled, and the above-mentioned specific operation means is in a non-operational state, and the post-operation display corresponding to the detection of this non-operational state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains its output state, if it is detected that the above-mentioned specific operation means has changed from a non-operational state to an operational state, the post-operation display, which was previously in a displayed state, may be changed as a result of this detection, but the post-operation output sound, which was previously in an output state, may not be changed and its output state may be maintained. With such a configuration, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, the manner of the post-operation change up to that point is partially continued, while a change is made in part, thus appropriately creating a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In configuration 38-A, it is assumed that in both the predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state and the specific type of multiple operation enabled state, the only operating means that allows multiple operations is the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "operating means that are represented as a simulated image display and allow multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 39-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection of the operating state can be executed. In this regard, a multiple-use operation-enabled state is provided, which is an operation-enabled state in which the detection of the operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, in which the detection of the operating state is allowed multiple times. Furthermore, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be performed multiple times, such that the interval between maintaining the specified operation means in the operation state and the start of outputting the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, is set to a fixed time, the post-operation display, one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specified operation means is in the operation state. However, there are cases in which the non-operation display corresponding to the change of the specified operation means from the operation state to the non-operation state is not displayed. In contrast, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation change can be performed multiple times, such that the interval between maintaining the specified operation means in the operation state and the start of outputting the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, is set to an indefinite time, the post-operation change can be performed multiple times. In the multiple-operation valid state, not only is the post-operation display, one of the post-operation changes, displayed based on the detection that the specified operating means is in an operating state, but a post-operation display corresponding to the detection of the non-operation state is also displayed when it is detected that the specified operating means has changed from an operating state to a non-operation state. Furthermore, in the multiple-operation valid state of a specific type, the specified operating means is in a non-operation state, the post-operation display corresponding to the detection of the non-operation state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, maintains its output state. This situation can occur through gameplay by the player, thus broadening the range of effects when the specified operating means is kept in an operating state, and is expected to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game. Note that the terms "specified operating means,""predetermined type multiple-operation valid state," and "specified type multiple-operation valid state" in this configuration 39-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 39-A. Therefore, the "specific operating means,""predetermined type of multiple operation valid state," and "specific type of multiple operation valid state" in other configurations may mean the same operating means or operation valid state, or they may mean different operating means or operation valid states. Furthermore, the "operating means" and "operation valid state" may mean the same operating means or operation valid state with a different name in other configurations. In addition, "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state" refers to "a multiple operation valid state in which, when the specific operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the above post-operation changes, is newly output is set to a certain time, and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times." However, multiple such multiple operation valid states with different occurrence conditions may be provided, or only one may be provided. Similarly, the "multiple operation enabled state of a specific type" refers to "a multiple operation enabled state in which, when a specific operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval until the start of output of the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is set to an indefinite time, and the post-operation change can be performed multiple times." However, multiple such multiple operation enabled states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one may be prepared.

In this case, as will be described later, when the above-mentioned specific type of multiple operation is enabled, and the above-mentioned specific operation means is in a non-operational state, and the post-operation display corresponding to the detection of this non-operational state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains its output state, if it is detected that the above-mentioned specific operation means has changed from a non-operational state to an operational state, the post-operation display, which was previously in a displayed state, may be changed as a result of this detection, but the post-operation output sound, which was previously in an output state, may not be changed and its output state may be maintained. With such a configuration, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, the manner of the post-operation change up to that point is partially continued, while a change is made in part, thus appropriately creating a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In configuration 39-A, it is assumed that in both the predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state and the specific type of multiple operation enabled state, the only operating means that allows multiple operations is the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "operating means that are represented as a simulated image display and allow multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

[Configuration 40-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the state of a specific operating means (for example, an operating button 410) can be detected, and when it is detected that the specific operating means is in an operating state, a post-operation change corresponding to the detection of the operating state can be executed. In this regard, a multiple-use operation-enabled state is provided, which is an operation-enabled state in which the detection of the operating state is allowed multiple times and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, in which the detection of the operating state is allowed multiple times. Furthermore, in a predetermined type of multiple-operation enabled state in which the post-operation change can be performed multiple times, such that the interval from when the specified operating means is maintained in the operating state until the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, is newly outputted is always less than or equal to a specific time, the post-operation display, one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specified operating means is in the operating state. However, there are cases in which the non-operation display corresponding to the change will not be displayed even if the specified operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operation state. In contrast, in a predetermined type of multiple-operation enabled state in which the post-operation change can be performed multiple times, such that the interval from when the specified operating means is maintained in the operating state until the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, is newly outputted is always longer than the specific time, In the specified type of multiple operation enabled state, not only is the post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, displayed based on the detection that the specified operation means is in an operation state, but a post-operation display corresponding to the detection of the change from an operation state to a non-operation state is also displayed when it is detected that the specified operation means has changed from an operation state to a non-operation state. Furthermore, in the specified type of multiple operation enabled state, a situation can occur through gameplay in which the specified operation means is in a non-operation state, the post-operation display corresponding to the detection of the change from an operation state to a non-operation state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, maintains its output state. This broadens the range of effects when the specified operation means is kept in an operation state, and is expected to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game. Note that the terms "specified operation means,""predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state,""specified type of multiple operation enabled state," and "specified time" in relation to configuration 40-A are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 40-A. Therefore, the "specific operating means,""predetermined type of multiple operation valid state,""specific type of multiple operation valid state," and "specific time" in other configurations may mean the same operating means, operation valid state, and time as those in other configurations, or they may mean different operating means, operation valid states, and time. Furthermore, the "operating means,""operation valid state," and "time" may mean the same operating means, operation valid state, and time with different names in other configurations. In addition, "predetermined type of multiple operation valid state" means "a multiple operation valid state in which, when the specific operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly outputted is always less than or equal to a specific time, and the above post-operation change can be executed multiple times." However, multiple such multiple operation valid states with different occurrence conditions may be prepared, or only one may be prepared. Similarly, the "multiple operation enabled state of a specific type" refers to "a multiple operation enabled state in which, when the specific operating means is maintained in the operation state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly outputted is always longer than the specified time, and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times." However, multiple such multiple operation enabled states with different occurrence conditions may be provided, or only one may be provided. Furthermore, "a time less than or equal to the specified time" includes the "specified time," and for "a time longer than the specified time" and "a time less than or equal to the specified time," only one time may be provided, or multiple different times may be provided.

In this case, as will be described later, when the above-mentioned specific type of multiple operation is enabled, and the above-mentioned specific operation means is in a non-operational state, and the post-operation display corresponding to the detection of this non-operational state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains its output state, if it is detected that the above-mentioned specific operation means has changed from a non-operational state to an operational state, the post-operation display, which was previously in a displayed state, may be changed as a result of this detection, but the post-operation output sound, which was previously in an output state, may not be changed and its output state may be maintained. With such a configuration, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, the manner of the post-operation change up to that point is partially continued, while a change is made in part, thus appropriately creating a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

In configuration 40-A, it is assumed that in both the predetermined type of multiple operation enabled state and the specific type of multiple operation enabled state, the only operating means that allows multiple operations is the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily the only case. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "operating means that are represented as a simulated image display and allow multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Incidentally, some of the above configurations 1-A to 40-A claim to have the effect of "suggesting that the presentation has noteworthy value," but it is not essential that the presentation actually possesses noteworthy value. It is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be maintained simply by providing a presentation that suggests "a valuable presentation may be executed."

[Configuration 1-B]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result has been obtained, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation on the first operating means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the first operating means, a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display that prompts operation on the second operating means, and a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the second operating means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operating means is operated and its operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the first The post-reception change in response to an operation reception to the first operating means can be performed multiple times, and at least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operating means is operated and its operating state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operating means can be performed multiple times, and when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation-related display will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden, and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the interval until a new post-reception change in response to the operation reception appears may be less than or equal to a specific time.
In other words, in this case, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the interval between activation of the "auto rapid-fire function" for the second operation means and the appearance of a new post-reception change is made relatively short. Therefore, it is expected that this will make it easier to recognize whether or not the "auto rapid-fire function" is activated, thereby providing a sense of security. It should be noted that the terms "first operation means,""second operation means,""first operation-related display,""second operation-related display,""first predetermined mode,""first specific mode,""second predetermined mode,""second specific mode,""predeterminedtime," and "specific time" in relation to configuration 1-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 1-B. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means, operation-related display, mode, and time as those in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means, operation-related display, mode, and time. Furthermore, other names for operating means related to other configurations, as well as operation-related indicators, modes, and time, may also be used to mean the same "operating means,""operation-relatedindicators,""modes," and "time."

Here, in realizing the inventions of "Configuration 1-B" and "Configurations 2-B" to "Configuration 8-B" described later, the "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second predetermined mode," and "second specific mode" do not necessarily have technical significance in themselves. Essentially, when the "first operation-related display, which may be in a state where the first operating means is capable of automatic rapid-fire (allowing multiple operations by long-pressing) when it is displayed" is hidden, there is a possibility that the first operation-related display may appear in a different mode within a predetermined time. Conversely, when the "second operation-related display, which may be in a state where the second operating means is capable of automatic rapid-fire (allowing multiple operations by long-pressing) when it is displayed" is hidden, there is no possibility that the second operation-related display may appear in a different mode within a predetermined time.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined mode, even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (a mode different from the first predetermined mode) before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden. Whether the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode or in the first specific mode, in either case, the interval between multiple operation requests being received by the first operation means while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, and the appearance of a new post-reception change corresponding to those requests, may always be set to be less than or equal to a specific time. That is, in this case, when the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated for the first operation means, the interval until a new post-reception change appears is always relatively short, making it easier to recognize whether or not the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated, thus providing a sense of security.

Furthermore, as will be described later, in this case, in particular, when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner, and when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second specific manner, only when it is displayed in the second predetermined manner, the interval between multiple operation requests being received for the second operation means while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and the appearance of a new post-reception change corresponding to such operation requests may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time. In other words, in this case, even when the "auto rapid-fire function" is activated for the second operation means, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined manner, the interval until a new post-reception change appears will always be relatively short, so it is expected that it will be easier to recognize whether or not the "auto rapid-fire function" is activated, thereby providing a sense of security. In contrast, when the second operation-related display is shown in the second specific mode, the interval between changes when the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated for the second operation means may be longer than the specified time (a relatively long interval). Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be appropriately maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when the second operation-related display is shown in the second specific mode and the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, if the post-reception change is executed multiple times, the interval between these changes may not be less than the specified time, but always be longer than the specified time. In other words, in this case, when the second operation-related display is shown in the second specific mode, it is expected that it will be more difficult to recognize whether or not the "auto-repeated button press function" is enabled, thereby more effectively maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, as will be described later, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode, and the second operation means is maintained in the operation state, the interval between multiple executions of post-reception changes may appear as an undetermined time (an indefinite time). For example, this can be achieved by performing a performance judgment on whether or not to trigger a post-reception change each time an operation is received while the second operation means is maintained in the operation state, and triggering the post-reception change only when a special judgment result is obtained. However, this is not the only method for realizing this configuration.

In this case, it is preferable (though not essential) to ensure that the specified time is shorter than the shortest possible time (interval) among the "indefinite time" options, in order to make it more difficult to recognize whether or not the "auto-click function" is enabled.

Furthermore, in realizing "Configuration 1-B," when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner, and multiple operation requests are made to the second operation means, the interval until a new post-reception change in response to such operation requests appears may be less than or equal to a specific time, and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (a fixed time). Also, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in a second specific manner, and multiple operation requests are made to the second operation means, the interval until a new post-reception change in response to such operation requests appears may be longer than a specific time, and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (a fixed time) (an indefinite time). Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined mode or a first specific mode, and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, if multiple operation requests are received for the first operation means, the interval until a new post-reception change corresponding to the operation request appears may be less than or equal to a specific time, and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (a fixed time).

Furthermore, the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated function is activated for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode (the interval until a new change appears after a new input), and the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated function is activated for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode (the interval until a new change appears after a new input), are both set to be less than or equal to a specific time. However, these intervals may be set to be different from each other.

For example, if the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode (the interval until a new change appears after a new input) is set to be longer than the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode (the interval until a new change appears after a new input), then the gap in the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed (the gap between the case of the second predetermined mode and the case of the second specific mode) can be made larger, which is expected to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 1-B, the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

[Configuration 2-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation on the first operating means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the first operating means, a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display that prompts operation on the second operating means, and a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the second operating means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operating means is operated and its operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, In addition, the post-reception change in response to an operation reception to the first operating means may be executed multiple times, at least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operating means is operated and its operating state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-reception change in response to an operation reception to the second operating means may be executed multiple times, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation-related display will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden, and when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the interval until a new post-reception change in response to the operation reception appears may be a certain amount of time.
In other words, in this case, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined manner, the interval between activation of the "auto rapid-fire function" for the second operation means and the appearance of a new post-reception change is set to a certain time. Therefore, it is expected that this will make it easier to recognize whether or not the "auto rapid-fire function" is activated, thereby providing a sense of security.
In other words, in this case, when the "auto rapid-fire function" is activated at regular intervals for the second operating means, it becomes possible to suggest that the second specific mode will not be newly displayed within a predetermined time after the second predetermined mode is hidden. Note that "first operating means,""second operating means,""first operation-related display,""second operation-related display,""first predetermined mode,""first specific mode,""second predetermined mode,""second specific mode," and "predetermined time" in configuration 2-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of configuration 2-B. Therefore, they may mean the same operating means, operation-related display, mode, and time as "first operating means,""second operating means,""first operation-related display,""second operation-related display,""first predetermined mode,""first specific mode,""second predetermined mode,""second specific mode," and "predetermined time" in other configurations, or they may mean different operating means, operation-related display, mode, and time. Furthermore, they may mean the same "operating means,""operation-relateddisplay,""mode," and "time" as operating means, operation-related display, mode, and time with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined mode, even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (a mode different from the first predetermined mode) before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden. Such a configuration is expected to suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game when the first predetermined mode is hidden.

Furthermore, whether the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined manner or in a first specific manner, in either case, the interval between multiple operation requests being received for the first operation means while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, and the appearance of a new post-reception change corresponding to those requests, may always be set to a predetermined time (a fixed time). In other words, in this case, when the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated for the first operation means, the interval until a new post-reception change appears is fixed, making it easier to recognize whether the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated or not, thereby providing a sense of security.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated and its operation state is maintained, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception for the second operation means may always be shorter than the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception for the first operation means when the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined manner and the first operation means is operated and its operation state is maintained.

Furthermore, while the interval between multiple post-reception changes when the second operation means is maintained in the operating state under the second predetermined mode of displaying the second operation-related indicator is constant, the interval between multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which operation is received by the auto-repeated button function) when the second operation means is maintained in the operating state under the second specific mode of displaying the second operation-related indicator may be variable rather than constant. In this case, the second operation-related indicator may either make it easier to recognize that the "auto-repeated button function" is enabled, or make it difficult to recognize that the "auto-repeated button function" is enabled, depending on its display mode. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained through improved presentation.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode and the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, the interval between multiple post-reception changes is an indefinite time, and may appear to be longer than the specified time. In contrast, the interval between multiple post-reception changes when the first operation means is maintained in the operating state (a fixed interval), and the interval between multiple post-reception changes when the second operation means is maintained in the operating state and the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode (a fixed interval), may be designed so that they do not appear to be longer than the specified time. In other words, in this case, the gap in the interval when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated for the second operation means while the second operation-related display is displayed (the gap between the second predetermined mode and the second specific mode) can be made larger, thus potentially maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in implementing configuration 2-B, as well as the configurations described above and below, "a constant interval until a new post-reception change occurs" simply means that a new post-reception change occurs at a predetermined time interval; it does not necessarily have to occur at the same time interval every time. For example, the time between the first post-reception change (when the operating means is put into operation mode) and the second post-reception change (auto-repeated button press function) is set to 0.5 seconds, but thereafter, the post-reception changes (auto-repeated button press function) may be executed at 0.2-second intervals. In this way, "a constant interval until a new post-reception change occurs" can be achieved by including multiple "predetermined time intervals."

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 2-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, nor on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 3-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first operating means and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation on the first operating means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the first operating means, a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display that prompts operation on the second operating means, and the The system includes a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and if the first operating means is operated while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, and the post-reception change in response to the operation received is started, the operation state is maintained thereafter, and the post-reception change in response to the operation received by the first operating means can be executed multiple times, and the second operation At least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are provided as modes for displaying related displays, and if the second operation means is operated while the second operation related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, and the operation state is maintained after the post-reception change in response to the operation reception is initiated, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means may be executed multiple times, and if the second operation related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation related display will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden, and even if the first operation means is operated while the first operation related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operation means may not be initiated, and even if the second operation means is operated while the second operation related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means may not be initiated.

In other words, in this case, while the auto-tap function can be activated when the first operation-related indicator or the second operation-related indicator is displayed, a sense of tension can be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second predetermined mode," "second specific mode," and "predetermined time" in configuration 3-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 3-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means, operation-related indicators, modes, and times as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means, operation-related indicators, modes, and times. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means," "operation-related indicators," "modes," and "times" as other configurations with different names.

In this case, as will be described later, if the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined mode, even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be displayed again in a first specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden. Such a configuration is expected to suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game when the first predetermined mode is hidden.

Furthermore, even if the first operation means is operated while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the first operation means may not be initiated. In other words, in this case, the sense of tension while the first operation-related display is displayed can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in this case, even if the first operation means is operated while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, and the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operation means is not initiated, maintaining the state in which the first operation means is operated (while maintaining this state, if the conditions for allowing operation reception to the first operation means (conditions for the occurrence of an allowable state) are met) may result in a situation where the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operation means is executed multiple times based on the detection of the previously maintained operation state. In other words, in this case, even if the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the auto-repeated button press function can be activated by continuing the operation state of the first operation means, thus allowing for a favorable maintenance of the game's enjoyment.

In this case, even if the operation state is maintained after multiple post-reception changes have occurred in response to an operation received by the first operation means while the first operation-related display is shown in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, it is possible that no further post-reception changes will occur while the first operation-related display is shown (i.e., the so-called auto-repeated function will be disabled). However, even in this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operation state (and while it is maintained, the conditions for allowing operation reception to the first operation means are met), it is possible that post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operation means can be executed again based on the operation state that was maintained up to that point.

Furthermore, if the second operation means is operated while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, but the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operation means does not start, even if the second operation means is kept in the operated state, the system may prevent a situation from occurring where the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operation means is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state. In other words, in this case, with respect to the second operation means, if the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, there is no possibility of operation reception being performed based on the detection of the operation state, even if the operation state is continued. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained in realizing the dramatic effect of the auto-repeated button press function.

[Configuration 4-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display prompting an operation on the first operating means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the first operating means, a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display prompting an operation on the second operating means, and a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the second operating means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, 1. When an operating means is operated and its operating state is maintained, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the first operating means may be executed multiple times. At least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the second operation-related display. When the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the second operating means is operated and its operating state is maintained, and the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operating means may be executed multiple times. When the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation-related display will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden. When the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode, it is possible to output a second operation-related sound related to the operation to the second operating means.

In other words, in this case, even if the second specific mode is not displayed for a long period of time after the second predetermined mode is hidden, when the second specific mode appears, it can suitably suggest that the situation in which the second specific mode is displayed is present. It should be noted that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second predetermined mode," "second specific mode," "predetermined time," and "second operation-related sound" in configuration 4-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 4-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, modes, time, and operation-related sound as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, modes, time, and operation-related sound. Furthermore, other names for operating means related to other configurations, as well as operation-related indicators, modes, time, and operation-related sounds, may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," "modes," "time," and "operation-related sounds."

In this case, as will be described later, if the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined mode, even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be displayed again in a first specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden. Furthermore, in this case, it may be possible to output a first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operation means. Such a configuration is expected to suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game when the first predetermined mode is hidden.

Furthermore, when at least the first operation-related indicator is displayed in a first specific mode, a first operation-related sound related to the operation of the first operating means may be output. In particular, regarding the first operation-related sound, if it is output before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden (if the first operation-related indicator is displayed in the first specific mode before the predetermined time has elapsed), the output state is always maintained for a first hour (a predetermined output time). On the other hand, if it is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden (if the first operation-related indicator is displayed in the first specific mode after the predetermined time has elapsed), the output state may be maintained for a first hour (a predetermined output time), or it may be made inaudible (not output) before the first hour (a predetermined output time) has elapsed. With such a configuration, the dramatic effect will differ depending on how much time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden before the first operation-related sound is output, which is expected to provide a suitable sense of tension. In particular, if the first operation-related sound is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden (or if the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode after the predetermined time has elapsed), the output state may be maintained for the first hour (a predetermined output time), or it may be made inaudible (no output) before the first hour (a predetermined output time) has elapsed. Therefore, it can be expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately provided while maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when at least the second operation-related indicator is displayed in the second specific mode, a second operation-related sound related to the operation on the second operating means may be output. In particular, the output state of this second operation-related sound may be maintained for a second period (a predetermined output time). With such a configuration, although a relatively long time is required from the display of the second operation-related indicator in the second predetermined mode until the second specific mode appears, when the second specific mode appears, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the situation in which the second specific mode is present is being observed.

Furthermore, if the first operation-related sound is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden, there are two possibilities: the output state may be maintained for the first time (a predetermined output time), or it may be made inaudible (non-output) before the first time (a predetermined output time) has elapsed. In either case, it is desirable that the mode (type of sound) of the first operation-related sound remain the same (for example, a special mode).

Furthermore, if an operation is received by the first operating means while the first operation-related sound is being output in a special manner after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden, it is desirable that the post-reception change in response to the operation be performed in the same manner (same change) whether the output state of the first operation-related sound is maintained for a first time (a predetermined output time) or whether it is made inaudible (non-output) before the first time (a predetermined output time) has elapsed.

[Configuration 5-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation on the first operating means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the first operating means, a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display that prompts operation on the second operating means, and a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the second operating means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operating means is operated and its operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the first operating means The post-reception change in response to an operation reception for a stage can be executed multiple times, and at least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operation means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-reception change in response to an operation reception for the second operation means can be executed multiple times, and when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation-related display will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden, and when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode after the predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden, the display state can be maintained for the second display time, so that it can suitably suggest that the situation is such that the second specific mode is displayed.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second predetermined mode," "second specific mode," "predetermined time," and "second display time" in relation to configuration 5-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 5-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, modes, and times as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, modes, and times. They may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," "modes," and "times" as other operating means, operation-related indicators, modes, and times with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined mode, even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be displayed again in a first specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden. Furthermore, in this case, it may be possible to output a first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operation means. Such a configuration is expected to suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game when the first predetermined mode is hidden.

In this case, in particular, if the first specific mode (first operation-related display) is displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (first operation-related display) was hidden, and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first specific mode is displayed and multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means, the first operation-related display will always remain displayed for the first display time (a predetermined display time). However, if the first specific mode (first operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (first operation-related display) was hidden, and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first specific mode is displayed and multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means, the first operation-related display may either remain displayed for the first display time (a predetermined display time) or be hidden before the first display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed. With this configuration, the presentation will differ depending on how much time has passed since the first predetermined mode was hidden before the first specific mode appeared, which is expected to provide a suitable sense of tension. In particular, if the first specific mode is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden, there are two possibilities: the display state may be maintained for the first display time (a predetermined display time), or it may be hidden before the first display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the second specific mode (second operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode (second operation-related display) was hidden, and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second specific mode is displayed and multiple operation requests are received for the second operation means, the second operation-related display may be configured to either remain displayed for the second display time (a predetermined display time) or be hidden before the second display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed. This is expected to provide a suitable sense of tension while maintaining the enjoyment of the game when the second specific mode is displayed.

In this regard, if the first specific mode (first operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (first operation-related display) was hidden, regardless of whether the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple operation requests are received while the first specific mode is displayed, the first operation-related display may be displayed for the duration of the first display time (a predetermined display time), or it may be hidden before the duration of the first display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed. Furthermore, if the second specific mode (second operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode (second operation-related display) was hidden, and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple operation requests are received for the second operation means while the second specific mode is displayed, the second operation-related display may be displayed for the second display time (a predetermined display time) or hidden before the second display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed. However, if the second specific mode (second operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode (second operation-related display) was hidden, and the second operation means is not operated and no operation requests are received for the second operation means while the second specific mode is displayed, the second operation-related display may not be hidden before the second display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed, but may be displayed for the second display time (a predetermined display time). With this configuration, it becomes possible to provide a sense of tension when the first specific mode (first operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (first operation-related display) was hidden, and when the second specific mode (second operation-related display) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode (second operation-related display) was hidden, through different types of presentations, thereby maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the first specific mode (first operation-related display) is displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (first operation-related display) was hidden, regardless of whether the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple operation receptions are made while the first specific mode is displayed, the first operation-related display may not be hidden before the first display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed, but may remain displayed for the entire first display time (predetermined display time).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode, it is desirable that the mode of the first specific mode remains the same whether the display state continues for the first display time (a predetermined display time) or not. Similarly, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode, it is desirable that the mode of the second specific mode remains the same whether the display state continues for the second display time (a predetermined display time) or not.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed in a first specific mode, it is desirable that the same mode (the same change) appears as a post-reception change when an operation is received by the first operation means, regardless of whether the display state continues for the first display time (a predetermined display time) or not. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed in a second specific mode, it is desirable that even if the display state continues for the second display time (a predetermined display time) (i.e., no operation is received by the second operation means), the same mode (the same change) as the post-reception change that appears when the display state does not continue for the second display time (a predetermined display time) is executed.

[Configuration 6-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result has been obtained, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation on the first operating means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display that prompts operation on the second operating means, and a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operating means is operated and its operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the first operating means will execute the first operation-related display in response to the operation received by the first operating means The system is configured to allow for multiple post-reception changes, and at least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the second operation-related display. When the second operation means is operated and its operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the system is configured to allow for multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the second operation means. When the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the system is configured to prevent the second operation-related display from being newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden. When the second operation-related display is displayed, the system is configured to output a second operation-related sound related to the operation to the second operation means. Therefore, even if the second specific mode is not displayed for a long period of time after the second predetermined mode has been hidden, when the second specific mode appears, it can suitably suggest that the situation is such that the second specific mode should appear.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second predetermined mode," "second specific mode," "predetermined time," and "second operation-related sound" in relation to configuration 6-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 6-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, modes, time, and operation-related sound as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, modes, time, and operation-related sound. They may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," "modes," "time," and "operation-related sound" as other operating means, operation-related indicators, modes, time, and operation-related sound.

In this case, as will be described later, if the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined mode, even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be displayed again in a first specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden. Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed, it may be possible to output a first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operation means. Such a configuration is expected to suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game when the first predetermined mode is hidden.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is shown, regardless of whether it is shown in the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the second operation-related sound related to the operation on the second operating means may be output as a single sound that does not appear multiple times. Conversely, when the first operation-related display is shown in the first predetermined mode, the first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operating means is not output. However, when the first operation-related display is shown in the first specific mode, regardless of whether the first specific mode is displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden, the first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operating means may be output as a repeating sound that appears multiple times. With such a configuration, when the second operation-related display is shown, the operation on the second operating means is prompted through a single sound output, whereas when the first operation-related display is shown, the operation on the first operating means may not be prompted through a sound output. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension regarding forgetting to perform an operation can be suitably provided. However, if the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode, the operation of the first operating means is more strongly encouraged through multiple sound outputs, which is expected to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this case, if the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden, a specific sound will always be output multiple times as the first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operating means. However, if the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden, the first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operating means may be output either multiple times or only once. With such a configuration, even when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode, the operation on the first operating means will not necessarily be more strongly encouraged through multiple sound outputs. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained while appropriately adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the method for "outputting a specific sound so that it appears only once" can be achieved by pre-preparing such sound data and playing it back, or by stopping the playback of the sound data used in the method for "outputting a specific sound so that it appears multiple times," or by using any other method.

[Configuration 7-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result is obtained, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display prompting operation on the first operating means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display prompting operation on the second operating means, and a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operating means is operated and its operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-reception change in response to the operation received by the first operating means can be executed multiple times, and the second operation-related At least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the display, and when the second operation means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means may be executed multiple times. When the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation-related display will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden. When the second operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode and the second operation means is maintained in an operation state and the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means has been executed multiple times, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed. Therefore, it can be expected that the second specific mode will not be displayed for a long period of time, triggered by the second operation means changing from an operation state to a non-operation state.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second predetermined mode," "second specific mode," "predetermined time," and "post-operation indicator" in relation to configuration 7-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 7-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, modes, time, and post-operation indicator as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, modes, time, and post-operation indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," "modes," "time," and "post-operation indicators" as other configurations with different names.

In this case, as will be described later, if the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined mode, even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be redisplayed in a first specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden. Such a configuration is expected to suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game when the first predetermined mode is hidden.

Furthermore, in this case, when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined mode, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means have been executed, and the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operating display may be displayed. Conversely, when the first operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the first operation means have been executed, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined mode or a first specific mode (in any displayable mode), a corresponding post-non-operating display may not be displayed. With such a configuration, it is easier to recognize when the operating state of the second operation means is released, but it is harder to recognize when the operating state of the first operation means is released. Therefore, it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be added when using the so-called auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function).

Furthermore, while the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner, and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means have been executed, when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operating display may be shown. However, while the second operation-related display is not displayed, and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means have been executed, when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operating display may not be shown. With such a configuration, even if the operating state of the second operation means is released, if the auto-repeated button press function was enabled while the second operation-related display was not displayed, the post-non-operating display will not be shown. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-repeated button press function (long-press function) on the second operation means can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, when the second operation means is in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means have been executed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be shown when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. However, when the second operation means is in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in a second specific manner, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means have been executed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be shown when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. With such a configuration, even if the operating state of the second operation means is released while the second operation-related display is displayed, if the auto-repeated button function was enabled while the second operation-related display was displayed in a second specific manner, a post-non-operation display will not be shown. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) on the second operation means while the second operation-related display is displayed can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means have been executed, if the non-operation display is displayed as a result of the second operation means changing from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is possible to ensure that no new sound is output as a result of this change to a non-operating state.

[Configuration 8-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display prompting operation on the first operating means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display prompting operation on the second operating means, and a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and at least a first predetermined mode and a first specific mode are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operating means is operated and its operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-reception change in response to the operation received by the first operating means can be executed multiple times, and the mode for displaying the second operation-related display At least a second predetermined mode and a second specific mode are provided, and when the second operation means is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means can be executed multiple times. When the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation-related display will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden. When the second operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode and the second operation means is maintained in an operation state and the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means has been executed multiple times, this can trigger the de-input of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time. Therefore, it can be expected that the second specific mode will not be displayed for a long period of time as a trigger for the second operation means changing from an operation state to a non-operation state.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," "first predetermined mode," "first specific mode," "second predetermined mode," "second specific mode," and "predetermined time" in relation to configuration 8-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 8-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, modes, and times as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, modes, and times. They may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," "modes," and "times" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, if the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined mode, even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be displayed again in a first specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden. Such a configuration is expected to suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game when the first predetermined mode is hidden.

In this case, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means have been performed, and the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this triggers the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state. However, when the first operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operation means have been performed, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed in the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode (in any displayable mode), this triggers the system to not make any sound effects that were audible at that time in an inaudible state. With this configuration, the release of the second operating mechanism is easily recognizable, while the release of the first operating mechanism is difficult to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that this configuration will effectively create a sense of tension when using the so-called auto-repeated button press function (long-press function).

Furthermore, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means have been performed, and the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state. However, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is not displayed, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means have been performed, and the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may not trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state. With this configuration, even if the operation state of the second operating means is released, if the auto-repeated button press function was enabled while the second operation-related display was not shown, at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time will not become inaudible. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-repeated button press function (long-press function) on the second operating means will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means have been performed, and the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state. However, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed in a second specific manner, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means have been performed, and the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may not trigger the system to make any sound effects that were audible at that time in an inaudible state. With this configuration, even if the operation state of the second operating means is released while the second operation-related display is shown, at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time when the auto-repeated button function was enabled while the second operation-related display was shown in the second specific mode will not become inaudible. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) on the second operating means while the second operation-related display is shown will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means have been executed, if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is made inaudible when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is possible to ensure that no new sound is output as a result of this change to a non-operating state.

[Configuration 9-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the display is in the display state, the second operating means is kept in the operating state The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which, when maintained, allows for multiple operation requests to be received for the second operating means. When the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to an operation on the second operating means is output. When the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-reception change corresponding to an operation request to the second operating means is occurring, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but remains audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related sound is audible, the second operating means is put into an operating state, and thereafter, when the operating state is maintained, the interval between multiple post-reception changes corresponding to an operation request to the second operating means may be less than or equal to a specific time.

In other words, in this case, since the second operation-related sound is not rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, it is expected that a sense of tension can be appropriately maintained by making it difficult to recognize that multiple changes have occurred after reception at relatively short intervals (less than a specific time). Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," "specific time," and "second operation-related sound" in configuration 9-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 9-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means, operation-related indicator, time, and operation-related sound as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means, operation-related indicators, time, and operation-related sounds. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means," "operation-related indicator," "time," and "operation-related sound" as other operation means, operation-related indicators, time, and operation-related sounds with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operating means is made outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in the operating state, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed. When the second operation-related indicator is displayed, the second operation-related sound related to the operation on the second operating means is made outputtable, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in the operating state, the second operation-related sound will not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, and will remain audible for the predetermined output time. The following conditions may be met: When the first operation-related sound is audible, the first operating means is put into an operating state, and thereafter, if the operating state is maintained, the interval between multiple executions of post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the so-called auto-repeated function) is always set to be less than or equal to a specified time, regardless of whether the first operation-related sound is made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed; and when the second operation-related sound is audible, the second operating means is put into an operating state, and thereafter, if the operating state is maintained, the interval between multiple executions of post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the so-called auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specified time, or to be set to be longer than a specified time. With this configuration, if the first operation means is operated and maintained while the first operation-related sound is being output, regardless of whether the first operation-related sound becomes inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance by the so-called auto-repeated button press function is always short. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be able to easily recognize that the auto-repeated button press function is active, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, if the second operation means is operated and maintained while the second operation-related sound is being output, in addition to the second operation-related sound not becoming inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance by the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not necessarily short, and may be longer than a specific time. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be able to easily recognize that the auto-repeated button press function is active, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the first operation-related sound related to the operation of the first operating means is made outputtable. When the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, or it may remain audible for the predetermined output time.

In this case, it is desirable that the output sound (type of sound) be the same whether the first operation-related sound is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed or made audible over the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the display of the first operation-related indicator be the same whether the first operation-related sound becomes inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, or whether the first operation-related sound remains audible for the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, in realizing "Configuration 9-B," when the first operation means is maintained in an operated state while the first operation-related display is shown, and multiple operation requests are received for the first operation means, the interval until a new post-reception change in response to these operation requests appears may be less than or equal to a specific time, and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (a fixed time).

Furthermore, the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is shown (the interval until a new change appears after a new input), and the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is shown (the interval until a new change appears after a new input), may both be set to a specific time or less. However, even in this case, the respective times (intervals) may be set to different times (intervals).

For example, if the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed (the interval until a new change after reception appears) is set to be longer than the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode (the interval until a new change after reception appears), and shorter than the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode (the interval until a new change after reception appears), then the gap in the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed (the gap between the case of the second predetermined mode and the case of the second specific mode) can be made larger, and thus it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 9-B, the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

[Configuration 10-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the display is in the display state, the second operating means is kept in the operating state The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which, when maintained in an operating state, can receive multiple operation requests to the second operating means. When the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to the operation of the second operating means is output. When the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-reception change corresponding to an operation request to the second operating means is occurring, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but remains audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related sound is audible, the second operating means is put into an operating state, and thereafter, when that operating state is maintained, the interval between multiple post-reception changes corresponding to an operation request to the second operating means can be set to a fixed time.

In other words, in this case, since the second operation-related sound is not rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, it is expected that a sense of tension can be appropriately maintained by making it difficult to recognize that multiple operation requests are being received within a certain period of time. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related sound" in configuration 9-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 9-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means, operation-related indicator, and operation-related sound as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means, operation-related indicators, and operation-related sounds. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means," "operation-related indicator," and "operation-related sound" as other operation means, operation-related indicators, and operation-related sounds with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operating means is made outputtable, and the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the first operating means is occurring, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed. When the second operation-related indicator is displayed, the second operation-related sound related to the operation on the second operating means is made outputtable, and the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the second operating means is occurring, the second operation-related sound will not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, and the predetermined output time will be... The interval between multiple executions of post-reception changes when the first operation-related sound is made audible and the first operation means is put into an operating state while the first operation-related sound is audible, and the operating state is maintained thereafter (the interval between post-reception changes in the so-called auto-repeated function) is a fixed time (a predetermined time, but not an indefinite time), regardless of whether the first operation-related sound is made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed. The interval between multiple executions of post-reception changes when the second operation means is put into an operating state while the second operation-related sound is audible, and the operating state is maintained thereafter (the interval between post-reception changes in the so-called auto-repeated function) may be a fixed time (a predetermined time, but not an indefinite time) or an indefinite time. With this configuration, if the first operation means is operated and maintained while the first operation-related sound is being output, regardless of whether the first operation-related sound becomes inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance by the so-called auto-repeated button function will always be a predetermined time, not an indefinite time. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be able to easily recognize that the auto-repeated button function is active, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, if the second operation means is operated and maintained while the second operation-related sound is being output, in addition to the second operation-related sound not becoming inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance by the so-called auto-repeated button function is not necessarily a fixed time (a predetermined time, not an indefinite time), but may be an indefinite time. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be able to easily recognize that the auto-repeated button function is active, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to the operation of the first operating means is made outputtable. When this first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, or it may remain audible for the predetermined output time.

In this case, it is desirable that the output sound (type of sound) be the same whether the first operation-related sound is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed or made audible over the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the display of the first operation-related indicator be the same whether the first operation-related sound becomes inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, or whether the first operation-related sound remains audible for the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, in implementing configuration 10-B, as well as the configurations described above and below, "undefined time" refers to a time that is not predetermined. For example, this can be achieved by performing a performance judgment each time an operation is received while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, and then causing the change to occur only when a special judgment result is obtained. However, this is not the only method for implementing this configuration.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 10-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, nor on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 11-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the second operating means can be performed multiple times, and the second operation When the related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to the operation of the second operating means is made outputtable, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception of the second operating means is occurring, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but remains audible for the predetermined output time. Even if the first operating means is operated while the first operation-related display is displayed, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception of the first operating means may not be initiated. Similarly, even if the second operating means is operated while the second operation-related display is displayed, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception of the second operating means may not be initiated. This makes it possible to enable the auto-repeated button press function when the second operation-related display is displayed while maintaining a suitable sense of tension. Furthermore, it is expected that the sense of tension when the first operation-related display is displayed will also be maintained.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related sound" in relation to configuration 11-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 11-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, and operation-related sounds as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, and operation-related sounds. They may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," and "operation-related sounds" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even if the first operation means is operated while the first operation-related display is displayed, but the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operation means is not initiated, if the state in which the first operation means is operated is maintained (while the state is maintained, if the conditions for allowing operation reception to the first operation means (conditions for the occurrence of an allowable state) are met), a situation may arise in which the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operation means is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point. On the other hand, if the second operation means is operated while the second operation-related display is displayed, but the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means is not initiated, even if the state in which the second operation means is operated is maintained, a situation may arise in which the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state. With this configuration, even if the so-called auto-button function is not activated while the first operation-related display is shown, the auto-button function can be activated if the operation state is continued, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, with respect to the second operation means, if the so-called auto-button function is not activated while the second operation-related display is shown, there is no possibility of operation acceptance based on the detection of that operation state, even if the operation state is continued. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained in realizing the dramatic effect of the auto-button function.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operating means is made outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the first operating means is occurring, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, or it may remain audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related indicator is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to the operation on the second operating means is made outputtable, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the second operating means is occurring, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may remain audible for the predetermined output time. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means, and it becomes possible to create a sense of tension regarding whether the operating state should be maintained in such a situation. In response to this, the first operating means may be designed to be both easy and difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated button press function is enabled. In either case, since the auto-repeated button press function can be activated by continuing that operating state, it is expected that the game's enjoyment will be appropriately maintained while adding a sense of tension.

However, the process of making the first operation-related sound inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed does not necessarily have to be triggered by the reception of an operation to the first operation means (although it may be triggered by the reception of an operation to the first operation means). In other words, in this case, regardless of whether or not an operation is received by the first operation means, there are two possibilities: either the first operation-related sound is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, or the first operation-related sound is not made inaudible and is output for the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, even if the operation state is maintained after multiple post-reception changes have occurred in response to an operation received by the first operation means, there may be cases where no further post-reception changes occur while the first operation-related display is displayed (i.e., the so-called auto-repeated function is disabled). However, even in this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operation state (and the conditions for allowing operation reception to the first operation means are met while it is maintained), post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operation means may be executed again based on the operation state that was maintained up to that point.

[Configuration 12-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that displays a display prompting operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a second operation-related display that displays a display prompting operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the second operating means can be operated multiple times, The system is equipped with a second operation-related display means, and when the second operation-related display is shown, a second operation-related sound related to an operation on the second operation means is outputtable. When the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to an operation on the second operation means, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but remains audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation-related display is shown and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a post-non-operation display corresponding to this change can be shown. This makes it possible to suggest that the second operation-related sound will not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed as a result of the second operation means changing from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," "second operation-related sound," and "post-operation indicator" in relation to configuration 12-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 12-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, operation-related sounds, and post-operation indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, operation-related sounds, and post-operation indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," "operation-related sounds," and "post-operation indicators" as other configurations with different names.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, and the first operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation indicator may not be displayed. However, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation indicator may be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize when the operating state of the second operation means is released, but difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operation means is released. Therefore, it is expected that this will appropriately create a sense of tension when using the so-called auto-repeated button press function (long-press function).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is shown, a first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operating means is made outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the first operating means is occurring, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, or it may be made audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related display is shown, a second operation-related sound related to the operation on the second operating means is made outputtable, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the second operating means is occurring, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may be made audible for the predetermined output time. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means. In this regard, if a "post-operation" display is shown when the operation state for the second operation means is released, it is possible to confirm that the auto-repeated button function was enabled for the second operation means. This is expected to maintain a sense of tension while effectively preserving the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, for the first operation means, there are cases where it is easy to recognize whether the auto-repeated button function is enabled, and cases where it is difficult to recognize. In this regard, if a "post-operation" display is not shown even when the operation state for the first operation means is released, the game will either proceed with a sense of security or with a sense of unease. This provides a different kind of presentation than that of the second operation means, and is expected to effectively maintain tension and enjoyment of the game.

In this case, while the first operation-related indicator is displayed and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation reception to the first operating means, if the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, regardless of the mode in which the first operation-related indicator is displayed, a corresponding post-non-operation indicator may not be displayed.

Furthermore, it is desirable that no new sound is output as a result of the first operating means changing from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, there may be two possibilities: either a post-non-operating display is shown, or the post-non-operating display is not shown. With such a configuration, even when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, a post-non-operating display is not necessarily shown when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state can be suitably preserved.

Furthermore, even if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and the "non-operation" indicator is not displayed as a result, it is also possible to ensure that no new sound is output as a result of the "non-operation" state being reached.

[Configuration 13-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that displays a display prompting operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means that displays a display prompting operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the second operating means can be operated multiple times, The system is equipped with a stage, and when the second operation-related display is shown, a second operation-related sound related to the operation on the second operation means is outputtable, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of an operation on the second operation means, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but remains audible for the predetermined output time, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation-related display is shown and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state, thus suggesting that the second operation-related sound will not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed as a trigger for the second operation means changing from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related sound" in relation to configuration 13-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 13-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, operation-related sounds, and post-operation indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, and operation-related sounds. They may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," and "operation-related sounds" as other operating means, operation-related indicators, and operation-related sounds with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operation means is occurring, if the first operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may be used as a trigger to prevent at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time from becoming inaudible. However, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means is occurring, if the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may be used as a trigger to prevent at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time from becoming inaudible. With such a configuration, it may be easier to recognize when the operating state of the second operation means is released, but harder to recognize when the operating state of the first operation means is released, thus it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably added when using the so-called auto-repeated button press function (long-press function).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is shown, a first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operating means is made outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the first operating means is occurring, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, or it may be made audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related display is shown, a second operation-related sound related to the operation on the second operating means is made outputtable, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the second operating means is occurring, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may be made audible for the predetermined output time. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means. In this regard, if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at the time the operation state of the second operation means is released can be made inaudible, it becomes possible to confirm that the auto-repeated button function was activated for the second operation means. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained while providing a sense of tension. In contrast, for the first operation means, there are cases where it is easy to recognize whether the auto-repeated button function is activated, and cases where it is difficult to recognize. In this regard, if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at the time is not made inaudible even when the operation state of the first operation means is released, the game will either proceed with a sense of security or with a sense of unease. Therefore, it is expected that a different kind of presentation will be provided compared to the case of the second operation means, suitably maintaining a sense of tension and enjoyment of the game.

In this case, while the first operation-related indicator is displayed and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation reception to the first operating means, if the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, regardless of the mode in which the first operation-related indicator is displayed, at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time may not be made inaudible.

Furthermore, it is desirable that no new sound is output as a result of the first operating means changing from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, it may be possible to have both cases: either at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is made inaudible, or at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is not made inaudible. With such a configuration, even when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is not necessarily made inaudible when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state can be suitably preserved.

[Configuration 14-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with operation reception to the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, operation reception to the second operating means can be performed multiple times, and the second operation-related When the display is shown, a second operation-related sound related to the operation of the second operating means is made outputtable, and the second operation-related sound is audible, and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change is occurring in response to the operation reception of the second operating means, the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but remains audible for the predetermined output time. During the period when the second operation-related display is shown, if the second operating means is put into a non-operating state while the post-reception change in response to the operation reception of the second operating means is occurring, and then the second operating means is put back into the operating state, this can trigger the at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time to be made inaudible. This suggests that the second operation-related sound will not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed as a result of the second operating means being put into an operating state again.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related sound" in relation to configuration 14-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 14-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, operation-related sounds, and post-operation indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, and operation-related sounds. They may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," and "operation-related sounds" as other operating means, operation-related indicators, and operation-related sounds with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related display is shown and a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation received by the first operation means, and the first operation means is then put into a non-operated state, and then the first operation means is put back into the operating state from the non-operated state, this may be used as a trigger to prevent the sound effects that were audible at that time from being put into an inaudible state. However, when the second operation-related display is shown and a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation received by the second operation means, and the second operation means is then put into a non-operated state, and then the second operation means is put back into the operating state from the non-operated state, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time into an inaudible state. With this configuration, it is easier to recognize that the input has been properly received when the so-called auto-tap function (long-press function) is interrupted and the second operating means is operated again. However, it is more difficult to recognize that the input has been properly received when the so-called auto-tap function (long-press function) is interrupted and the first operating means is operated again. Therefore, it is expected that this configuration will appropriately create a sense of tension when interrupting or restarting the auto-tap function (long-press function).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is shown, a first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operating means is made outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the first operating means is occurring, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, or it may be made audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related display is shown, a second operation-related sound related to the operation on the second operating means is made outputtable, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the second operating means is occurring, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may be made audible for the predetermined output time. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means. In this regard, if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at the time of releasing the operation state of the second operation means and then re-operating the second operation means can be made inaudible, it is possible to confirm that the operation reception of the second operation means has been properly performed and that the auto-repeated button function has been activated. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained while providing a sense of tension. In contrast, for the first operation means, there are cases where it is easy to recognize whether the auto-repeated button function is activated, and cases where it is difficult to recognize. In this regard, if the sound effects that were audible at the time of releasing the operation state of the first operation means and then re-operating the first operation means are not made inaudible, then the game will proceed either with a sense of security or with a sense of unease. Therefore, it is expected that a different kind of presentation will be provided compared to the case of the second operation means, and that the sense of tension and enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and a post-operation change has occurred in response to an operation received by the first operation means, and then the first operation means is put into a non-operation state, and then put back into the operation state, regardless of the mode in which the first operation-related indicator is displayed, it may be possible to prevent the sound effect, which was audible at that time, from becoming inaudible as a result.

In this case, if the second operation-related display is shown and a post-operation change has occurred in response to the operation reception of the second operation means, and the second operation means is then deactivated, and then deactivated again, only if the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is audible at that time, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the post-operation output sound). In this case, a sound other than the post-operation output sound may also be deactivated.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is shown and a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation on the second operation means, and the second operation means is then deactivated, and then reactivated, even if the post-reception output sound (one of the post-reception changes) is audible at that point, the system may either trigger the deactivation of at least one of the audible sound effects at that point, or it may not deactivate any of the audible sound effects. With such a configuration, when the operation on the second operation means is released and then the second operation means is reactivated, at least one of the audible sound effects at that point will not necessarily be deactivated. Therefore, it is expected that the game's enjoyment will be suitably maintained while providing a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, it may be possible to have both cases: either at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is made inaudible, or at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is not made inaudible. With such a configuration, even when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is not necessarily made inaudible when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state can be suitably preserved.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is shown and a post-operation change has occurred in response to an operation reception for the second operation means, if the second operation means is then deactivated, and subsequently deactivated again, if this triggers the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time, a new sound will be output as a result of the deactivation. However, even if the sound effects that were audible at that time are not deactivated, a new sound may still be output as a result of the deactivation.

[Configuration 15-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result is obtained, a symbol variation means that can perform symbol variation in one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the result of the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can perform a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means when an operation is received, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operation state while the display is in the display state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the first operating means, a second post-reception change execution means that can perform a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the display is in the display state When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which allows for multiple operation receptions to be made to the second operating means. When the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to an operation on the first operating means is made outputtable. When the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-reception change corresponding to an operation reception on the first operating means is occurring, the first operation-related sound can be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed. The first operation-related display can be displayed before the second operation-related display is displayed, or after the second operation-related display is displayed. This makes it difficult to recognize the timing of the display of the first operation-related display or the timing of the inaudible first operation-related sound, thus allowing for a suitable maintenance of tension.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "first operation-related sound" in relation to configuration 15-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 15-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, operation-related sounds, and post-operation indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, and operation-related sounds. They may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," and "operation-related sounds" as other operating means, operation-related indicators, and operation-related sounds with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, the multiple variation patterns include a special variation pattern, and during the period when the symbol variation is performed using this special variation pattern, the first operation-related display may be displayed both before the second operation-related display and after the second operation-related display. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect the first operation-related display to be displayed regardless of whether the second operation-related display has already been displayed, and similarly, it is possible to expect the second operation-related display to be displayed regardless of whether the first operation-related display has already been displayed. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained.

In this case, it is desirable (though not mandatory) that the post-operation change when an operation is received by the first operation means while the first operation related display is displayed be the same, regardless of whether the first operation related display is displayed before the second operation related display within a specific variation pattern, or whether the first operation related display is displayed after the second operation related display.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operating means is made outputtable, and the first operation-related sound is audible, and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the first operating means is occurring, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, or it may be made audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related indicator is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to the operation on the second operating means is made outputtable, and the second operation-related sound is audible, and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the second operating means is occurring, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may be made audible for the predetermined output time. Furthermore, the multiple variation patterns include a special variation pattern, and during the period in which the symbol variation is performed using this special variation pattern, the first operation-related display may be displayed either before the second operation-related display or after the second operation-related display. When the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display, the proportion of times the first operation-related sound becomes inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed may be higher than when the first operation-related display is displayed before the second operation-related display. This proportion may include 100% or 0%. Such a configuration allows for the suggestion that the first operation-related sound may become inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, and is expected to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, within a specific fluctuation pattern, if the first operation-related display appears before the second operation-related display, the first operation-related display may be prevented from appearing after the second operation-related display. Conversely, if the first operation-related display appears after the second operation-related display, the first operation-related display may be prevented from appearing before the second operation-related display.

Furthermore, in certain fluctuation patterns, the second operation-related display will always be shown, but the first operation-related display may not necessarily be shown.

Furthermore, in certain variation patterns, the first operation-related display may be displayed again after the second operation-related display has been shown, even if it was displayed before the second operation-related display.

Furthermore, in a special variation pattern, even if the first operation-related indicator is displayed again after the second operation-related indicator has been hidden, the first operation-related sound may be made available for output again. The proportion of times the first operation-related sound becomes inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed may be higher than the proportion of times it becomes inaudible before the second operation-related indicator is displayed.

[Configuration 16-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a symbol variation means that can perform symbol variation in one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the result of the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can perform a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means when an operation is received, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, an operation reception to the first operating means can be received multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can perform a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, an operation reception to the second operating means can be received multiple times The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, and when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to an operation on the first operation means is output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operation means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to an operation reception on the first operation means, the first operation-related sound can be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, and the plurality of variation patterns include a variation pattern in which the second operation-related display is displayed and an opportunity for operation is given to the second operation means, and a variation pattern in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and an opportunity for operation is not given to the second operation means, but in any case when the pattern variation is performed in any of these types, the first operation-related display may be displayed during the period in which the pattern variation is performed, so that the expectation of the first operation-related display being displayed can be suitably maintained during the period in which the pattern variation is performed.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "first operation-related sound" in relation to configuration 16-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 16-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, operation-related sounds, and post-operation indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, and operation-related sounds. They may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," and "operation-related sounds" as other operating means, operation-related indicators, and operation-related sounds with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, a first operation-related sound related to the operation on the first operating means is made outputtable, and the first operation-related sound is audible, and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the first operating means is occurring, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, or it may be made audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related indicator is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to the operation on the second operating means is made outputtable, and the second operation-related sound is audible, and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception on the second operating means is occurring, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may be made audible for the predetermined output time. Furthermore, the multiple variation patterns include variation patterns in which a second operation-related indicator is displayed and an opportunity to operate the second operating means is provided, and variation patterns in which a second operation-related indicator is not displayed and an opportunity to operate the second operating means is not provided. However, in any of these variations, when a pattern variation is performed, the first operation-related indicator may be displayed (when the display conditions for the first operation-related indicator are met) during the period in which the pattern variation is performed. If the first operation-related indicator is displayed during a period in which a pattern variation is performed in a variation pattern in which a second operation-related indicator is displayed and an opportunity to operate the second operating means is provided, the proportion of the first operation-related sound becoming inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed may be higher than when the first operation-related indicator is displayed during a period in which a pattern variation is performed in a variation pattern in which a second operation-related indicator is not displayed and an opportunity to operate the second operating means is not provided. This proportion may include 100% or 0%. This configuration allows for the possibility that the first operation-related sound may be rendered inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, thus potentially maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, even if the first operation-related display is shown during a period in which a pattern variation is performed in a variation pattern of a type in which the second operation-related display is shown and an opportunity for operation is granted to the second operation means, if the first operation-related display is shown before the second operation-related display is shown, the proportion of the first operation-related sound becoming inaudible before the predetermined output time elapses may be lower than in cases where the first operation-related display is shown after the second operation-related display, or even in cases where the first operation-related display is shown during a period in which a pattern variation is performed in a variation pattern of a type in which the second operation-related display is not shown and an opportunity for operation is not granted to the second operation means. This proportion may include 100% or 0%.

However, in this case, if the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display is displayed within a period in which a pattern variation of the type in which the second operation-related display is displayed and an opportunity for operation is granted to the second operation means, the proportion of the first operation-related sound becoming inaudible before the predetermined output time elapses will be higher than in the case where the first operation-related display is displayed within a period in which the pattern variation of the type in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and an opportunity for operation is not granted to the second operation means. This proportion may include 100% or 0%.

Furthermore, in variation patterns where a second operation-related indicator is displayed and an operation opportunity is granted to the second operation means, the first operation-related indicator may be displayed again after the second operation-related indicator is displayed, even if it was displayed before the second operation-related indicator was displayed. In this case, it is desirable (though not mandatory) that the post-reception change when an operation is received by the first operation means while the first operation-related indicator is displayed be the same, regardless of whether the first operation-related indicator was displayed before the second operation-related indicator or after the second operation-related indicator was displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 16-B, the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

[Configuration 17-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result is obtained, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the first operating means, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and the second operating means The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which is a display prompting an operation, and when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the second operation means may receive multiple operation requests. Even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation request is made to the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation request to the second operation means may be executed multiple times. When the post-reception change corresponding to the operation request to the second operation means is executed multiple times while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the execution of the post-reception change may be set to a time less than or equal to a specific time.

In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function is enabled, the interval between multiple changes after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be more likely to notice that the auto-button rapid-fire function is secretly enabled when the second operation-related display is not shown, thereby maintaining the enjoyment of the game effectively. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," "second operation-related display," and "specific time" in this configuration 17-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 17-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means, operation-related display, and time as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means, operation-related display, and time. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means," "operation-related display," and "time" as other operation means, operation-related display, and time with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the first operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received by the first operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means may be executed multiple times.

In this regard, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means while it is maintained in an operating state is never longer than a specific time, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed or not, and is always less than or equal to a specific time. On the other hand, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means while it is maintained in an operating state is always less than or equal to a specific time when the second operation-related display is not displayed, but may be longer than a specific time when the second operation-related display is displayed. With such a configuration, the interval between post-reception changes when the so-called auto-repeated button function (long-press function) is activated for the first operating means is always short, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed, so it is expected that the player will be able to easily recognize that the auto-repeated button function is activated, thereby maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-press function (long-press function) is activated for the second operating means, the interval between inputs and subsequent changes is always short when the second operation-related display is not shown. However, when the second operation-related display is shown, the interval may be longer than a specific time. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be maintained by making it difficult to recognize that the auto-press function is activated.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is shown, the interval between the multiple executions of post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the second operation means while the second operation means is maintained in an operational state may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time, or to be longer than a specific time. With such a configuration, while it may be difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated button function is enabled when the second operation-related display is shown, it may also be easier to recognize, thus providing a sense of tension while maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in realizing "Configuration 17-B," when the first operation means is maintained in an operated state while the first operation-related display is shown, and multiple operation requests are received for the first operation means, the interval until a new post-reception change in response to these operation requests appears may be less than or equal to a specific time, and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (a fixed time).

Furthermore, the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is shown (the interval until a new change appears after a new input), and the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is shown (the interval until a new change appears after a new input), may both be set to a specific time or less. However, even in this case, the respective times (intervals) may be set to different times (intervals).

For example, if the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed (the interval until a new change after reception appears) is set to be longer than the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode (the interval until a new change after reception appears), and shorter than the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode (the interval until a new change after reception appears), then the gap in the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed (the gap between the case of the second predetermined mode and the case of the second specific mode) can be made larger, and thus it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 17-B, the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

[Configuration 18-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the first operating means, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and the second operating means The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which is a display prompting an operation, and when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, operation reception to the second operation means can be performed multiple times. Even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if operation reception is performed to the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operation means can be executed multiple times. When the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operation means is executed multiple times while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the execution of the post-reception change multiple times can be set to a fixed time.

In other words, in this case, since the interval at which operation is accepted when the so-called auto-button function is enabled is set to a fixed interval, it is expected that the player will be more likely to notice that the auto-button function is secretly enabled when the second operation-related display is not displayed, thereby maintaining the enjoyment of the game in a favorable manner. It should be noted that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related display," and "second operation-related display" in this configuration 18-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 18-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related display as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related displays. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related display" as other operation means or operation-related displays with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the first operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received by the first operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means may be executed multiple times.

In this regard, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means while it is maintained in an operating state is always a fixed, predetermined time, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is shown or not. On the other hand, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means while it is maintained in an operating state is always a fixed, predetermined time when the second operation-related display is not shown, but may be an undetermined time when the second operation-related display is shown. With such a configuration, the interval between post-reception changes when the so-called auto-repeated button function (long-press function) is activated for the first operating means is always a fixed time (a predetermined time), regardless of whether the first operation-related display is shown. This makes it easier to recognize when the auto-repeated button function is activated, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-press function (long-press function) is activated for the second operating means, the interval between inputs and subsequent changes is always a fixed time (a predetermined time) when the second operation-related display is not shown. However, when the second operation-related display is shown, it may be an unspecified time (a time not predetermined). Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be maintained by making it difficult to recognize that the auto-press function is activated.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is shown, the interval between the multiple executions of post-operation changes in response to the operation received by the second operation means while the second operation means is maintained in an operational state may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined). Such a configuration may make it difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated button press function is enabled when the second operation-related display is shown, but it may also make it easier to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the game's enjoyment will be suitably maintained while providing a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the interval between multiple post-reception changes, based on the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, may be the same whether the first operation-related display is displayed or not.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 72-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, nor on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 19-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result is obtained, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be made multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the display is in the display state, the The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which allows for multiple operation requests to be received from the second operation means when the second operation means is kept in an operating state, and when the first operation means is kept in an operating state when the first operation means is not displayed, there are cases where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the first operation means are performed, and cases where no multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the first operation means are performed. Similarly, when the second operation means is kept in an operating state when the second operation means is not displayed, there are cases where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the second operation means are performed, and cases where no multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the second operation means are performed. Thus, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained when the first operation-related display or the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 19-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 19-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even if the first operation means is operated while the first operation-related display is not displayed, and the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operation means is not initiated, if the state in which the first operation means is operated is maintained (while the state is maintained, if the conditions for allowing operation reception to the first operation means (conditions for the occurrence of an allowable state) are met), a situation may arise in which the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operation means is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point. On the other hand, if the second operation means is operated while the second operation-related display is not displayed, and the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means is not initiated, even if the state in which the second operation means is operated is maintained, a situation may arise in which the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state. With this configuration, even if the so-called auto-button function is not activated when the first operation-related display is not shown, the auto-button function can be activated by continuing the operation state, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, with respect to the second operation means, if the so-called auto-button function is not activated when the second operation-related display is not shown, there is no possibility of operation acceptance based on the detection of that operation state, even if the operation state is continued. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained in realizing the dramatic effect of the auto-button function.

Furthermore, even if the operation state is maintained after multiple post-reception changes have occurred in response to an operation received by the first operation means, there may be cases where no further post-reception changes occur while the first operation-related display is displayed (i.e., the so-called auto-repeated function is disabled). However, even in this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operation state (and the conditions for allowing operation reception to the first operation means are met while it is maintained), post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operation means may be executed again based on the operation state that was maintained up to that point.

[Configuration 20-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result has been obtained, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be made multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, the second The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which can receive multiple operation requests to the operating means. Even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation request is received for the second operating means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation request to the second operating means may be executed multiple times. When the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and the post-reception change corresponding to the operation request to the second operating means has been executed multiple times, a post-non-operation display may be displayed as a result of this change. This makes it possible to suggest that the auto-repeated button press function was activated when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "post-operation indicator" in relation to configuration 20-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 20-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, and post-operation indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, and post-operation indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," and "post-operation indicators" as other configurations with different names.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the first operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received by the first operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means may be executed multiple times.

In this regard, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, there is no display of a post-non-operating indicator triggered by this change. However, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation request to the second operating means, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a display of a post-non-operating indicator triggered by this change may be displayed.

Furthermore, in this case, in particular, if the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation reception to the first operating means have been performed, a post-non-operation display triggered by the change to a non-operating state will not be displayed, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed or not. If the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation reception to the second operating means have been performed, a post-non-operation display triggered by the change to a non-operating state may be displayed when the second operation-related display is displayed, but a post-non-operation display triggered by the change to a non-operating state may not be displayed when the second operation-related display is not displayed. With this configuration, when the operation state of the first operating means is released while the auto-repeated button press function is enabled, it becomes difficult to recognize that the first operating means has become inactive (that the auto-repeated button press function is no longer enabled), regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed or not. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension present when the auto-repeated button press function is enabled can be suitably maintained. Conversely, when the operation state of the second operating means is released while the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means, it can be either difficult or easy to recognize that the second operating means has become inactive (that the auto-repeated button press function is no longer enabled). Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension present when the auto-repeated button press function is enabled can be suitably maintained while also suitably preserving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in a situation where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation reception to the second operating means, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, when the second operation-related display is displayed, there are two possibilities: either a post-non-operation display triggered by the change to a non-operating state is displayed, or the post-non-operation display is not displayed. However, when the second operation-related display is not displayed, it may be configured so that a post-non-operation display triggered by the change to a non-operating state is not displayed. With this configuration, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed and the auto-repeated button function for the second operation means is enabled, it is difficult to recognize when the second operation means becomes inactive (when the auto-repeated button function is disabled). Conversely, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and the auto-repeated button function for the second operation means is enabled, it is sometimes difficult to recognize when the second operation means becomes inactive (when the auto-repeated button function is disabled), and sometimes it is easy to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension present when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and the auto-repeated button function is enabled will be suitably maintained while appropriately preserving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed and the auto-repeated button function is enabled, a sense of tension is inherently present, so it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained while providing an appropriate level of tension.

Furthermore, it is desirable that no new sound is output as a result of the first operating means changing from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, even if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and the "after non-operation" display is not displayed as a result, it is also possible to ensure that no new sound is output as a result of the non-operation state.

[Configuration 21-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be made multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the second operating means The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which can be performed multiple times. Even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means, a post-reception change corresponding to that operation may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means may be executed multiple times. When the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means has been executed multiple times, if the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is possible to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state as a trigger for changing the second operation means from an operating state to a non-operating state, thus indicating that the auto-repeated button press function was activated.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 21-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 21-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the first operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received by the first operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means may be executed multiple times.

In this regard, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means have been performed, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed or not, the system may not make any sound effects that were audible at that time in an unoperated state as a result of this change. If the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means have been performed, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, and the second operation-related display is displayed, the system may make at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time in an unoperated state in an unoperated state as a result of this change. However, if the second operation-related display is not displayed, the system may not make any sound effects that were audible at that time in an unoperated state as a result of this change. With this configuration, when the operation state of the first operating means is released while the auto-repeated button press function is enabled, it becomes difficult to recognize that the first operating means has become inactive (that the auto-repeated button press function is no longer enabled), regardless of whether the first operation-related display is displayed or not. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension present when the auto-repeated button press function is enabled can be suitably maintained. Conversely, when the operation state of the second operating means is released while the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means, it can be either difficult or easy to recognize that the second operating means has become inactive (that the auto-repeated button press function is no longer enabled). Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension present when the auto-repeated button press function is enabled can be suitably maintained while also suitably preserving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in a situation where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, when the second operation-related display is shown, there are two possibilities: either at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is made inaudible as a result of the non-operating state, or the sound effects that were audible at that time are not made inaudible. However, when the second operation-related display is not shown, it is possible to ensure that the sound effects that were audible at that time are not made inaudible as a result of the non-operating state. With this configuration, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed and the auto-repeated button function for the second operation means is enabled, it is difficult to recognize when the second operation means becomes inactive (when the auto-repeated button function is disabled). Conversely, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and the auto-repeated button function for the second operation means is enabled, it is sometimes difficult to recognize when the second operation means becomes inactive (when the auto-repeated button function is disabled), and sometimes it is easy to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension present when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and the auto-repeated button function is enabled will be suitably maintained while appropriately preserving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed and the auto-repeated button function is enabled, a sense of tension is inherently present, so it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained while providing an appropriate level of tension.

Furthermore, it is desirable that no new sound is output as a result of the first operating means changing from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, even if the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and the audible sound at that time is not made inaudible, or even if at least one of the audible sound effects is made inaudible, it is possible to ensure that no new sound is output as a result of the non-operating state.

[Configuration 22-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result has been obtained, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be made multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which can accept operation requests multiple times. Even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation request is made to the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation request to the second operation means may be executed multiple times. When the second operation means is deactivated while the post-reception change corresponding to the operation request is occurring when the second operation-related display is not displayed, and then the second operation means is returned to the operating state from the deactivated state, this can trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time. Therefore, when the second operation means is returned to an operating state, it can be suggested that the auto-repeated button-pressing function has been reactivated.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 22-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 22-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the first operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received by the first operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means may be executed multiple times.

In this regard, when the first operation-related display is not displayed and a post-reception change in response to an operation reception for the first operation means is occurring, and the first operation means is then put into a non-operated state, and then the first operation means is returned to the operating state from the non-operated state, this may be used as a trigger to make any sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible. However, when the second operation-related display is not displayed and a post-reception change in response to an operation reception for the second operation means is occurring, and the second operation means is then put into a non-operated state, and then the second operation means is returned to the operating state from the non-operated state, this may be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible. With this configuration, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means is interrupted while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, and then the second operating means is operated again, it becomes easier to recognize that the input has been properly received. However, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means is interrupted while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, and then the first operating means is operated again, it becomes more difficult to recognize that the input has been properly received. Therefore, it is expected that this configuration will appropriately create a sense of tension when interrupting or restarting the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function).

Furthermore, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, and a post-operation change has occurred in response to an operation reception to the second operation means, if the second operation means is then deactivated, and then deactivated again, only if the post-operation output sound (one of the post-operation changes) is audible at that time, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects (the post-operation output sound) that was audible at that time. In this case, a sound other than the post-operation output sound may also be deactivated.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is shown and a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation reception for the second operation means, if the second operation means is deactivated, and then the second operation means is returned to the operational state, even if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that point, there are two possibilities: either at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that point (the post-reception output sound) is made inaudible, or the sound effects that were audible at that point are not made inaudible. Similarly, when the second operation-related display is not shown and a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation reception for the second operation means, and then the second operation means is returned to the operational state (when an operation reception is performed), if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that point, at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that point (the post-reception output sound) may be made inaudible.

Furthermore, when the first operating means is deactivated while a post-operation change is occurring in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then the first operating means is returned to the operating state from the deactivated state (when an operation request is received), regardless of whether the first operation-related display is currently displayed, this may prevent the sound effect, which was audible at that time, from becoming inaudible.

Furthermore, if the second operating means is deactivated while a post-operation change has occurred in response to an operation request, and then reactivated, if this triggers the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time, a new sound may be output as a result of the activation. However, even if the sound effects that were audible at that time are not deactivated, a new sound may still be output as a result of the activation.

[Configuration 23-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, an effect display means that displays an effect related to the effect, an effect determination means that makes a determination, an effect granting means that can grant an effect to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that displays a display prompting operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, the first operation-related display means can display a first operation-related display, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and a display prompting operation to the second operating means, and when the display is in the display state The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which allows for multiple operation requests to be received for the second operation means when the second operation means is kept in an operating state, and when an operation request is received for the first operation means while the first operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-reception change. Similarly, when an operation request is received for the second operation means while the second operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-reception change. Therefore, regardless of whether an operation request is received for the first or second operation means while the operation-related display is not displayed, it is possible to suitably indicate that the operation request has been properly received.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 23-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 23-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, multiple operation receptions may be made to the first operation means. Similarly, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, multiple operation receptions may be made to the second operation means.

Furthermore, when an operation is received by the first operation means while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the post-reception change may include both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change, or no display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change occurs. Such a configuration is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when an operation is received by the first operation means while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, if an operation is received for the first operation means when the first operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as post-reception changes. In this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, the "change different from the display change" as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation received for the first operation means may be executed multiple times, whereas the "display change in the performance display means" as one of the post-reception changes may not be executed multiple times. Similarly, if an operation is received for the second operation means when the second operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as post-reception changes. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, both the "display change in the performance display means" and the "change different from the display change" as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation received for the second operation means may be executed multiple times. With this configuration, the presentation differs when the auto-button function is activated by the first and second operating means, which is expected to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game and suitably maintain the sense of tension when activating the auto-button function with the first operating means.

Furthermore, even if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state when the first operation-related display is not displayed, and the "display change in the performance display means" as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the first operation means is not executed multiple times, it is desirable (though not mandatory) that the "change different from the display change" be executed multiple times in the same manner as when the "display change in the performance display means" occurs as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the first operation means.

Furthermore, when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is not displayed, it is desirable (though not mandatory) that only one of the following changes in response to the operation reception to the second operation means—the "display change in the display means" and the "change other than the display change"—does not occur multiple times.

[Configuration 24-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the first promotion light-emitting means that can perform operation-promoting light to prompt operation to the first operating means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and an image display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the image display is in a display state, the The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which allows for multiple operation requests to be received for the second operation means when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and a second promotion light-emitting means capable of emitting operation-promoting light to encourage operation to the second operation means, separate from the second operation-related display, which is an image display prompting operation to the second operation means. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation request is received for the first operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation request to the first operation means may be executed multiple times. When the first operation-related display is not displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means, the operation-promoting light to encourage operation to the first operation means is not executed. Therefore, it is expected that confidentiality regarding operation permission can be suitably maintained when the first operation-related display is not displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 24-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 24-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means may be executed multiple times. When the second operation-related indicator is not displayed and multiple operation receptions are permitted for the second operation means, an operation-promoting light may be executed to encourage operation on the second operation means. With such a configuration, when multiple operation opportunities are secretly provided to the first operation means, the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, and the operation-promoting light to encourage operation on the first operation means is not executed. On the other hand, when multiple operation opportunities are secretly provided to the second operation means, the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, but the operation-promoting light to encourage operation on the second operation means can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, and it is expected that the dramatic effect will be enhanced while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the first operation means, there may be two possibilities: either an operation-prompting light to encourage operation on the first operation means is enabled (between the time the first operation-related indicator is displayed and then hidden), or an operation-prompting light to encourage operation on the first operation means is disabled (between the time the first operation-related indicator is displayed and then hidden). Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operation means, an operation-prompting light to encourage operation on the second operation means may be enabled (between the time the second operation-related indicator is displayed and then hidden). With such a configuration, even when the operation-related indicator is displayed while multiple operation attempts are permitted for the operation means, there may be both cases where the operation-prompting light is enabled and cases where it is not enabled for the first operation means. This provides a degree of secrecy, allowing for varying degrees of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, thus enhancing the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

[Configuration 25-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means, and when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation The system comprises: a first prompt sound output means capable of outputting a first prompt sound corresponding to an operation-related display; a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the second operation means; a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts operation to the second operation means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operation means can be operated multiple times if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state; and a second prompt sound output means capable of outputting a second prompt sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, the system can still perform operations on the first operation means. If this occurs, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in the operating state, a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the first operating means may be executed multiple times, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation reception is made to the second operating means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, if the second operating means is maintained in the operating state, a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operating means may be executed multiple times, and from a state in which the first operation-related display is not displayed and operation reception to the first operating means is not permitted, the first operation-related display remains undisplayed When transitioning to a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted, the first operation accelerating sound is not output. Similarly, when transitioning from a state in which the second operation-related indicator is not displayed and operation acceptance for the second operating means is not permitted to a state in which operation acceptance for the second operating means is permitted while the second operation-related indicator remains not displayed, the second operation accelerating sound is not output. Therefore, it is expected that confidentiality regarding operation acceptance can be suitably maintained when "the first operation-related indicator is not displayed and multiple operation acceptances for the first operating means are permitted" or "the second operation-related indicator is not displayed and multiple operation acceptances for the second operating means are permitted".

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 25-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 25-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed (while operation reception to the second operation means is permitted, or when operation reception to the second operation means is permitted), the second operation cues sound is always output. However, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, there may be cases where the first operation cues sound is output and cases where it is not. With such a configuration, even when the operation-related indicator is displayed while multiple operation receptions to the operation means are permitted, the first operation means may either output the first operation cues sound or not, thus providing a degree of secrecy. Therefore, it is possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which can enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this case, it is desirable (though not mandatory) that the form of the first operation-related display differs depending on whether or not the first operation-prompt sound is output when the first operation-related display is shown.

[Configuration 26-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, an effect display means that displays an effect related to the effect, an effect determination means that makes a determination, an effect granting means that can grant an effect to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be made multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the second operating means The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which can be performed multiple times. When an operation is received by the first operation means, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-reception change corresponding to the operation. When an operation is received by the second operation means, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-reception change corresponding to the operation. If the second operation means is operated but the post-reception change corresponding to the operation is not initiated, even if the second operation means is maintained in an operated state, an operation is not received by the second operation means based on the detection of the maintained operation state. Therefore, if the second operation means is operated but the post-reception change corresponding to the operation is not performed, it is expected that the operation state will not be maintained and the user will be prompted to perform the operation again.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 26-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 26-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, even if the first operating means is operated but the post-operation change corresponding to the operation reception to the first operating means does not start to be executed (i.e., the first operating means is put into an operating state when operation reception to the first operating means is not permitted), if the predetermined reception permission conditions are met while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (i.e., when operation reception to the first operating means becomes permitted), operation reception to the first operating means will be performed based on the detection of the maintained operating state. At this time, the post-operation change corresponding to the operation reception may include both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change, or it may not include a display change in the performance display means, and only a change different from the display change may occur. With such a configuration, based on the "operating state of the first operating means" maintained from the state when operation reception to the first operating means was not permitted, there are cases where it is easy to recognize that operation reception to the first operating means has been performed, and cases where it is difficult to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved while suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state even after both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change have occurred as a post-operation change in response to the operation reception of the first operating means, multiple operation receptions may be made to the first operating means. However, the display change in the performance display means may not occur multiple times as a post-operation change in response to the operation reception; instead, only changes different from the display change may occur multiple times. With such a configuration, even if it is easy to recognize that an operation reception has been made to the first operating means based on the "operating state of the first operating means" which has been maintained since the state in which operation reception to the first operating means is not permitted, it becomes difficult to recognize that multiple operation receptions have been made to the first operating means when the auto-repeated button function is activated thereafter. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

In this case, when an operation is received by the second operating means, both a display change in the display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, and multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means, it is desirable (though not essential) that both a display change in the display means and a change different from the display change occur multiple times as post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received.

[Configuration 27-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by the player, an effect display means that displays an effect related to the effect, an effect determination means that makes a determination, an effect granting means that can grant an effect to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, an effect related to the first operating means can make multiple operation receptions, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the second operating means, and the second operating means The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which is a display prompting operation, and when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in an operating state, operation reception to the second operation means may be made multiple times. Operation reception to the first operation means may also be made when neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed. In this case, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-reception change. However, even if an operation to the second operation means is started and the operating state is maintained at the time the post-reception change occurs, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operation means will not be executed multiple times. Therefore, it is expected that this will encourage concentration on the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the first operation means.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 27-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 27-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, when an operation is received by the first operation means while neither the first operation-related indicator nor the second operation-related indicator is displayed, the post-reception changes may include both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from said display change (a specific change), or only the "change different from said display change (a specific change)" among the display change in the performance display means and the change different from said display change (a specific change) may occur. In either case, if the first operation means is maintained in the operation state, it may be possible to execute only the "change different from said display change (a specific change)" among the display change in the performance display means multiple times as a post-reception change.

Furthermore, in this case, if both a display change and a specific change occur in the performance display means as a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, even if an operation is started on the second operating means at that time and the operation state is maintained, the post-reception change in response to the operation received by the second operating means will not be executed multiple times. However, if only the specific change among the display change and specific change in the performance display means occurs as a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, then if an operation is started on the second operating means at that time and the operation state is maintained, there may be cases where the post-reception change in response to the operation received by the second operating means is executed multiple times, and cases where the post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means is not executed multiple times. With this configuration, the nature of the post-operation change in response to the operation received by the first operating means (whether both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from that display change (a specific change) occur) can suggest whether or not the auto-repeated button function can be activated for the second operating means. However, when the auto-repeated button function is activated for the first operating means, no new "display changes in the performance display means" occur, making it difficult to distinguish between them, thus allowing for a desirable maintenance of tension.

[Configuration 28-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the display is in the display state, maintains the second operating means in the operating state The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which allows for multiple operation requests to be received from the second operation means. When the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation requests to the second operation means, and then, despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, no operation requests are made to the second operation means. In this case, even if the second operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received from the second operation means based on the detection of its operating state will not reappear. When the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation requests to the second operation means, the interval between the multiple executions of these post-reception changes may be set to a time less than or equal to a specific time.

In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after reception can be made relatively short. Therefore, if a situation arises where no operation is received by the second operating means, it is expected that this will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operating means. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "specific time" in this configuration 28-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 28-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, and times as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, and times. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," and "times" as other operating means, operation-related indicators, and times with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, within the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed, a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is made to the first operating means. However, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (and while it is maintained, a predetermined starting condition is met, allowing operation requests to be made to the first operating means), a situation where multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed ends.

Furthermore, in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period when the first operation-related display is displayed, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time. Similarly, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period when the second operation-related display is displayed, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the second operating means may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time, or to be longer than a specific time. With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval. Therefore, it is possible to recognize relatively quickly when the auto-repeated button function is disabled. Furthermore, simply by maintaining the first operating means in the operating state, a situation where multiple operations are received for the first operating means may reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends. Thus, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated button function is enabled for the first operating means can be suitably maintained. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after acceptance can be either relatively short or relatively long. Therefore, it is not guaranteed that the disabling of the auto-repeated button function will be recognized relatively quickly. Furthermore, simply by maintaining the second operating means in the operating state, a situation where multiple operations are received for the second operating means before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends will not reappear. Thus, it is expected that the sense of tension when the auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 28-B, when the first operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear after the period during which the first operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 28-B, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 29-B, the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

[Configuration 29-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the display is in the display state, the second operating means is kept in the operating state In this case, the system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which allows for multiple operation requests to be received from the second operating means. When the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation requests to the second operating means, and then, despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation requests are made to the second operating means. In this case, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received from the second operating means based on the detection of its operating state will not reappear. When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation requests to the second operating means, the interval between the multiple executions of these post-reception changes may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes occurring after reception can be set to a relatively constant interval (a predetermined time). Therefore, if a situation arises where no operation is received by the second operating means, it is expected that this will be relatively easy to recognize, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operating means. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 29-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 29-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operating means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, within the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed, a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is made to the first operating means. However, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (and while it is maintained, a predetermined starting condition is met, allowing operation requests to be made to the first operating means), a situation where multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed ends.

Furthermore, in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period when the first operation-related display is displayed, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). Similarly, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period when the second operation-related display is displayed, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the second operating means may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) or to an unspecified time (a time not predetermined). With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after reception is set to a certain time (a predetermined time). Therefore, when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, simply by keeping the first operating means in the operating state, a situation may reappear where multiple operation receptions are made for the first operating means before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends. Thus, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the first operating means can be suitably maintained. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after reception can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined). Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize relatively quickly when the auto-repeated function is disabled. In addition, simply maintaining the second operating means in an operating state prevents a situation from occurring again where multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means.

Furthermore, while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 29-B, when the first operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear after the period during which the first operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 29-B, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 29-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, nor on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 30-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be made multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the second The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which can receive multiple operation requests for the second operation means. When the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation requests for the second operation means, and then, despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, no operation requests are made to the second operation means, the system is configured such that even if the second operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are made to the second operation means based on the detection of its operating state will not reappear. Furthermore, when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation requests for the second operation means, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means has been released, and therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation is received for the second operating means. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 30-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 30-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operating means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, within the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed, a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is made to the first operating means. However, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (and while it is maintained, a predetermined starting condition is met, allowing operation requests to be made to the first operating means), a situation where multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed ends.

Furthermore, in this case, in particular, when the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation request to the first operating means are performed, no corresponding post-non-operation display is shown. On the other hand, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation request to the second operating means are performed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be shown. With such a configuration, simply by maintaining the first operating means in an operating state, a situation may reappear where multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means, simply maintaining the operating state will not prevent a situation from occurring again where multiple operations are requested to the second operating means before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends. However, since it is easier to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means is released, prompting the player to perform the operation again, it is expected that the excitement of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, it may be possible to have both a post-non-operation indicator displayed and a post-non-operation indicator not displayed. Such a configuration ensures that the release of the operating state of the second operating means is not necessarily easily recognizable, thus potentially providing a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 30-B, it is possible to ensure that, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reappear after the period during which the first operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 30-B, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended.

[Configuration 31-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be made multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the second operating means The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which can be performed multiple times. When the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a situation arises in which post-reception changes in response to an operation reception to the second operation means are performed multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operation reception is made to the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation receptions are made to the second operation means based on the detection of that operating state will not reappear. Furthermore, when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a situation in which post-reception changes in response to an operation reception to the second operation means are performed multiple times, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means has been released, and therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation is received for the second operating means. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 31-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 31-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operating means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, within the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed, a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is made to the first operating means. However, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (and while it is maintained, a predetermined starting condition is met, allowing operation requests to be made to the first operating means), a situation where multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed ends.

Furthermore, in this case, in particular, when the first operation-related display is shown and the first operation means has undergone multiple post-reception changes corresponding to its operation state, and the first operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state, this does not trigger the de-inaudibility of any sound effects that were audible at that time. However, when the second operation means changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the second operation means is maintained in an operation state and has undergone multiple post-reception changes corresponding to operation reception to the second operation means, this may trigger the de-inaudibility of at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time. With such a configuration, simply by maintaining the first operation means in an operation state, a situation may reappear where multiple operation receptions are made to the first operation means before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operation means is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means, simply maintaining the operating state will not prevent a situation from occurring again where multiple operations are requested to the second operating means before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends. However, since it is easier to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means is released, prompting the player to perform the operation again, it is expected that the excitement of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the second operating means are being executed, this may trigger either the de-inhibition of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time, or the de-inhibition of the sound effects that were audible at that time. Such a configuration ensures that the release of the operating state of the second operating means is not necessarily easily recognizable, thus potentially providing a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 31-B, it is possible to ensure that, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reappear after the period during which the first operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 31-B, it may be possible to ensure that, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended.

[Configuration 32-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result is obtained, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be made multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a second operation-related display that can display a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the second operating means can be made multiple times, The system includes a display means, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation reception to the second operation means are performed, and then a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation receptions are made to the second operation means based on the detection of that operating state will not occur again. Furthermore, if the second operation means is deactivated while the post-reception changes in response to an operation reception to the second operation means are occurring during the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed, and then the second operation means is returned to the operating state from the deactivated state, this can trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time, thus suggesting that the second operation means has been deactivated again and an operation reception has been made.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 32-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 32-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, within the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed, a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is made to the first operating means. However, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (and while it is maintained, a predetermined starting condition is met, allowing operation requests to be made to the first operating means), a situation where multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed ends.

Furthermore, in this case, in particular, when the first operation-related display is shown and the first operation means is undergoing a post-reception change corresponding to the operation state, and the first operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and then the first operation means is changed back from a non-operation state to an operation state, this does not trigger the change to make any sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible. On the other hand, when the second operation-related display is shown and the second operation means is undergoing a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception of the second operation means, and then the second operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and then the second operation means is changed back from a non-operation state to an operation state, this may trigger the change to make at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time inaudible. With this configuration, simply maintaining the first operating means in the operating state may again result in multiple operation requests being received for the first operating means before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends. However, when the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the first operating means is interrupted and the first operating means is operated again, it becomes difficult to recognize that the reception was properly completed. Therefore, maintaining the operating state of the first operating means becomes easier for the game to progress. In contrast, simply maintaining the second operating means in the operating state will not again result in multiple operation requests being received for the second operating means before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends. However, when the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the second operating means is interrupted and the second operating means is operated again, it becomes easier to recognize that the reception was properly completed. Therefore, resetting the operating state of the second operating means becomes easier for the game to progress properly.

Furthermore, during the period when the second operation-related display is shown, if a post-reception change occurs in response to an operation reception to the second operation means, and the second operation means is then deactivated, and then deactivated again, only if the post-reception output sound (one of the post-reception changes) is audible at that time, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects (the post-reception output sound) that was audible at that time. In this case, a sound other than the post-reception output sound may also be deactivated.

Furthermore, while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 32-B, it is possible to ensure that, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reappear after the period during which the first operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 32-B, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended.

[Configuration 33-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, and a first operation-related table which is an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times. A first operation-related display means capable of displaying an indication; a first promotion light-emitting means capable of performing operation-promoting light emission to prompt an operation to the first operation means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the first operation means; a second post-reception change execution means capable of performing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means; a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the second operation means, and which, when the image display is in a display state, allows the second operation means to be operated multiple times; and In addition to the second operation-related display, which is an image display prompting operation on the second operating means, the system also includes a second promotion light-emitting means capable of performing operation-promoting light to prompt operation on the second operating means. When the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a situation arises in which multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation reception on the second operating means, and then a situation arises in which no operation reception is performed on the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation receptions are performed on the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state will not reappear. When the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operation receptions are permitted for the first operating means, operation-promoting light to prompt operation on the first operating means is executable, and when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operation receptions are permitted for the second operating means, operation-promoting light to prompt operation on the second operating means is executable. As a result, it is expected that a situation in which multiple operation receptions are performed on the second operating means will be easily created, thereby providing a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 33-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 33-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, within the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed, a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is made to the first operating means. However, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (and while it is maintained, a predetermined starting condition is met, allowing operation requests to be made to the first operating means), a situation where multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed ends.

Furthermore, in this case, especially when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means (when there is a period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed), there may be two cases: one in which an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operation means (at least for a portion of the time from when the first operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden) (for example, the 4B operation permission state shown in Figure 170), and another in which the operation-prompting light is not emitted (at least for a portion of the time from when the first operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden) (for example, the 3B operation permission state shown in Figure 168). In addition, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means (when there is a period during which the second operation-related indicator is displayed), an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the second operation means (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even when multiple operation requests are permitted for the operating means and an operation-related indicator is displayed, the first operating means may either perform operation-prompt illumination or not. This provides a degree of secrecy. However, even if operation requests cease to be received for the first operating means, maintaining the first operating means in an operating state allows for the detection of this maintained operating state, potentially leading to multiple operation requests being received for the first operating means again. This is expected to maintain a sense of tension while effectively preserving the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means, operation-prompt illumination is always performed from the time the second operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden. However, if operation requests cease to be received for the second operating means, simply maintaining the second operating means in an operating state will not allow for multiple operation requests to be received for the second operating means again. This is expected to maintain a sense of tension while effectively preserving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 33-B, it is possible to ensure that, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reappear after the period during which the first operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 33-B, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended.

[Configuration 34-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result has been obtained, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the display is in the display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times, a first promotion sound output means that can output a first operation promotion sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the display is in the display state, the second operating means can be operated multiple times The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display in which operation reception can be performed multiple times, and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation accelerating sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed. When the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a situation arises in which post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means are performed multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operation reception is performed to the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state, the situation in which operation reception is performed to the second operation means multiple times based on the detection of that operating state will not reappear. Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation accelerating sound can be output, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operation accelerating sound can be output, so it is expected that a situation in which operation reception is performed to the second operation means multiple times will be created, thereby providing a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," "first operation-promoting sound," and "second operation-promoting sound" in relation to configuration 34-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 34-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, and operation-promoting sounds as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, and operation-promoting sounds. They may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," and "operation-promoting sounds" with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, within the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed, a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is made to the first operating means. However, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state (and while it is maintained, a predetermined starting condition is met, allowing operation requests to be made to the first operating means), a situation where multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed ends.

Furthermore, in this case, in particular, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed (while operation reception to the second operation means is permitted, or when operation reception to the second operation means is permitted), the second operation accelerating sound is always output. However, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, there may be cases where the first operation accelerating sound is output and cases where it is not. With such a configuration, even when multiple operation receptions are permitted for the operation means and the operation-related indicator is displayed, with respect to the first operation means, there may be cases where the first operation accelerating sound is executed and cases where it is not. This can provide a degree of secrecy, making it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, and it is expected that this can enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 34-B, when the first operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear after the period during which the first operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 34-B, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended.

[Configuration 35-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the first operating means, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a displayed state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the second operating means, and the second operation-related display means is displayed When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a situation arises in which multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation request to the second operating means are executed, if a situation arises in which no operation request is made to the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended and until the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after it has been displayed), no operation request will be made to the second operating means again based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is displayed. When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation request to the second operating means are executed, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes may be set to a time less than or equal to a specific time. Therefore, if a situation arises in which no operation request is made to the second operating means, it is expected that this will be relatively easy to recognize and prompt the user to release the operating state of the second operating means.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "specific time" in relation to configuration 35-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 35-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means, operation-related indicators, and times as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means, operation-related indicators, and times. They may also refer to the same "operating means," "operation-related indicators," and "times" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation reception is made to the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended, the first operation-related indicator may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. Furthermore, if predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and an operation reception to the first operating means becomes permissible, a situation may reappear where an operation reception is made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period when the first operation-related display is shown, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the first operating means may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time. Similarly, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period when the second operation-related display is shown, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the second operating means may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time, or to be longer than a specific time.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval. Therefore, when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, if the first operating means continues to be in an operating state even after the period during which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. When predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related display is displayed and operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted, the situation in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is made again based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up to that point can be expected to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the first operating means. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after reception can be either relatively short or relatively long. Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize the deactivation of the auto-repeated function relatively quickly. In addition, even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related indicator is displayed has ended, until the second operation-related indicator is displayed again (until a state occurs where operation reception to the second operating means is permitted), operation reception to the second operating means will not be performed again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related indicator is displayed. Therefore, it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be maintained when the auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or it may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 35-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 35-B, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 35-B, the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

[Configuration 36-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the machine includes a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the first operating means, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the second operating means, and the second operation-related display is displayed If, while the second operating means is in an operating state, a situation arises in which the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to an operation request to the second operating means is executed multiple times, and then, despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended and until the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after that), an operation request to the second operating means will not be made again based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is displayed. Furthermore, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to an operation request to the second operating means is executed multiple times, the interval between the execution of such post-reception changes can be set to a certain time. Therefore, if a situation arises in which an operation request to the second operating means is not made, it is expected that this will be relatively easy to recognize and prompt the user to release the operating state of the second operating means.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 36-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 36-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation reception is made to the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended, the first operation-related indicator may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. Furthermore, if predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and an operation reception to the first operating means becomes permissible, a situation may reappear where an operation reception is made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period when the first operation-related display is shown, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the first operating means may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). Similarly, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period when the second operation-related display is shown, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the second operating means may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-button function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after acceptance is set to a certain time (a predetermined time). Therefore, when the auto-button function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, if the first operating means is kept in an operating state even after the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. When predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related display is displayed and operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted, the situation in which operation acceptance for the first operating means is made again based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up to that point can be expected to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game when the auto-button function is enabled for the first operating means. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes occurring after reception can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined). Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize relatively quickly when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled. In addition, even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends, until the second operation-related display is shown again (until a state occurs where operation reception to the second operating means is permitted), operation reception to the second operating means will not be attempted again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is shown. Therefore, it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be maintained when the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or it may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 36-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 36-B, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 36-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, nor on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 37-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a second operation-related display that can display a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in the operating state while the display is in the display state, operation reception to the second operating means can be performed multiple times, The system includes related display means, and when the second operation related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a situation arises in which multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation reception to the second operation means are executed, and then a situation arises in which no operation reception is made to the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state after the period in which the second operation related display is displayed has ended and until the second operation related display is displayed again (and even after that), an operation reception to the second operation means will not be made again based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the second operation related display was displayed. Furthermore, when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation reception to the second operation means are executed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means has been released, and therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation is received for the second operating means. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in configuration 37-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 37-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operating means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation reception is made to the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended, the first operation-related indicator may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. Furthermore, if predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and an operation reception to the first operating means becomes permissible, a situation may reappear where an operation reception is made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, particularly when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the first operating means, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, no corresponding post-non-operating display may be shown. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operating display may be shown.

With this configuration, if the first operation means is kept in the operating state until the period during which the first operation-related display appears again (and even after it appears), a situation may recur where multiple operation requests are received for the first operation means based on the detection of that maintained operating state. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operation means is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operation means, simply keeping it in the operating state until the period during which the second operation-related display appears again (and even after it appears) will not cause a situation where multiple operation requests are received for the second operation means to recur. However, since it is easy to recognize when the operating state of the second operation means is released, prompting re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or it may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 37-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 37-B, when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not shown.

[Configuration 38-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to the first operating means, and which allows for multiple operation receptions to be made to the first operating means when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operating means, and which allows for multiple operation receptions to be made to the second operating means when the second operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, and If, while the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and a situation arises in which multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation reception to the second operation means are executed, and then, despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is made to the second operation means, even if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related display is displayed ends, until the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after it appears), no operation reception will be made to the second operation means again based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the second operation-related display was displayed. Furthermore, if the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation reception to the second operation means are executed, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means has been released, and therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation is received for the second operating means. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in configuration 38-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 38-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operating means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation reception is made to the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended, the first operation-related indicator may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. Furthermore, if predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and an operation reception to the first operating means becomes permissible, a situation may reappear where an operation reception is made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, particularly when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means are performed, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not trigger the system to make any sound effects that were audible at that time in an inaudible state. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means are performed, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time in an inaudible state.

With this configuration, if the first operation means is kept in the operating state until the period during which the first operation-related display appears again (and even after it appears), a situation may recur where multiple operation requests are received for the first operation means based on the detection of that maintained operating state. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operation means is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operation means, simply keeping it in the operating state until the period during which the second operation-related display appears again (and even after it appears) will not cause a situation where multiple operation requests are received for the second operation means to recur. However, since it is easy to recognize when the operating state of the second operation means is released, prompting re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or it may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 38-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 38-B, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not shown.

[Configuration 39-B]
Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the display is in the display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times, the first operation-related display means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the display is in the display state, the second operating means can be operated multiple times, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operating means is in the operation state If, after a situation has arisen in which the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to an operation reception has been performed multiple times, and then a situation arises in which no operation reception is made to the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended and until the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after it has appeared), an operation reception to the second operating means will not be made again based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is displayed. Furthermore, if, during the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operating means is deactivated while the post-reception change in response to an operation reception to the second operating means is occurring, and then the second operating means is returned to the operating state from the deactivated state, this can be used as an opportunity to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state, thus suggesting that the second operating means has been returned to an operating state and an operation reception has been made.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 39-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 39-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operation means, and then a situation arises where no operation reception is made to the first operation means despite it being maintained in an operating state, if the first operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended, the first operation-related indicator may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. Furthermore, if predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and an operation reception to the first operation means becomes permissible, a situation may reappear where an operation reception is made to the first operation means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, in particular, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and the first operation means is undergoing a post-reception change corresponding to the operation state, and the first operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and then the first operation means is changed back from a non-operation state to an operation state, this does not trigger the change to an inaudible state for any sound effects that were audible at that time. However, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and the second operation means is undergoing a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception, and the second operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and then the second operation means is changed back from a non-operation state to an operation state, this may trigger the change to an inaudible state for at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time.

With this configuration, if the first operation means is kept in the operating state until the period during which the first operation-related display appears again (and even after it appears), a situation may recur where multiple operation requests are received for the first operation means based on the detection of the maintained operating state. However, when the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the first operation means is interrupted and the first operation means is operated again, it becomes difficult to recognize that the reception was properly performed. Therefore, maintaining the operating state of the first operation means becomes easier for the game to progress. In contrast, with respect to the second operation means, simply keeping it in the operating state until the period during which the second operation-related display appears again (and even after it appears) does not result in multiple operation requests being received for the second operation means. However, when the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the second operation means is interrupted and the second operation means is operated again, it becomes easier to recognize that the reception was properly performed. Therefore, resetting the operating state of the second operation means becomes easier for the game to progress properly.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or it may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 39-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 39-B, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not shown.

[Configuration 40-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, and a first operation-related display means that can display an image display prompting an operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times, and Apart from the first operation-related display which is an image display prompting operation on the first operating means, there is a first prompting light-emitting means capable of performing operation-promoting light to prompt operation on the first operating means, a second post-reception change execution means capable of performing a post-reception change in response when an operation is received on the second operating means, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is an image display prompting operation on the second operating means, and which allows for multiple operation receptions on the second operating means when the second operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, and the second operation-related display which is an image display prompting operation on the second operating means is The system also includes a second prompting light-emitting means capable of emitting an operation prompting light to prompt an operation on the second operating means. If, while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation reception on the second operating means, then, despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is made on the second operating means. Even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related indicator is displayed has ended, until the second operation-related indicator is displayed again (and thereafter), the second operation-related indicator will not be displayed. While this is happening, the system is designed so that the second operating means will not be asked to accept an operation again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. When the first operation-related display is shown and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means, operation-promoting light emission to prompt an operation on the first operating means can be performed. When the second operation-related display is shown and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operating means, operation-promoting light emission to prompt an operation on the second operating means can be performed. Therefore, it can be expected that the second operating means will be put back into an operating state and an operation request will be made.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 40-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 40-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation reception is made to the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended, the first operation-related indicator may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. Furthermore, if predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and an operation reception to the first operating means becomes permissible, a situation may reappear where an operation reception is made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, especially when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means (when there is a period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed), there may be two cases: one in which an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operation means (at least for a portion of the time from when the first operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden) (for example, the 4B operation permission state shown in Figure 170), and another in which the operation-prompting light is not emitted (at least for a portion of the time from when the first operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden) (for example, the 3B operation permission state shown in Figure 168). In addition, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means (when there is a period during which the second operation-related indicator is displayed), an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the second operation means (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even when multiple operation requests are permitted for the operating means and an operation-related indicator is displayed, the first operating means may either perform operation-promoting light emission or not, thereby providing a degree of secrecy. However, even if operation requests to the first operating means cease, if the first operating means is kept in an operating state until (and even after) the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed reappears, the situation in which multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means may reappear based on the detection of that maintained operating state. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained while adding a sense of tension. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means, although the operation prompt illumination is always performed from the time the second operation-related display is shown until it is hidden, if no operation is received by the second operating means, simply maintaining the operating state until the period when the second operation-related display is shown again (and even after it appears) will prevent the situation in which multiple operation requests are received by the second operating means from recurring. Therefore, it is expected that the game's enjoyment will be suitably maintained while providing a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or it may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 39-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 39-B, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not shown.

[Configuration 41-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by the player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means is kept in the operation state, the operation request made to the first operating means is made multiple times. The system includes: a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display; a first cues sound output means capable of outputting a first operation cues sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed; a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received by the second operation means; and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts an operation to be performed on the second operation means, and which allows for multiple operation receptions to be performed on the second operation means when the second operation means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state. When a second operation-related display is displayed, the system includes a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation accelerating sound corresponding to the second operation-related display. If, while the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation reception to the second operation means. If, despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is performed to the second operation means, then even if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related display is displayed ends, until the second operation-related display is displayed again (and thereafter), an operation reception to the second operation means will not be performed again based on the detection of the operating state that was maintained while the second operation-related display was displayed. Since the system is capable of outputting the first operation accelerating sound when the first operation-related display is displayed, and the system is capable of outputting the second operation accelerating sound when the second operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that a situation will be easily created in which multiple operation receptions are performed to the second operation means, thereby providing a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 41-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 41-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation reception is made to the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, if the first operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state even after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended, the first operation-related indicator may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. Furthermore, if predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and an operation reception to the first operating means becomes permissible, a situation may reappear where an operation reception is made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, in particular, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed (while operation reception for the second operation means is permitted, or when operation reception for the second operation means is permitted), the second operation accelerating sound will always be output. However, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, there may be cases where the first operation accelerating sound is output and cases where it is not. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, regarding the first operating means, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, there are cases where the first operation cues are output and cases where they are not. This provides a degree of secrecy. However, even if operation reception to the first operating means ceases, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state until the period when the first operation-related indicator is displayed reappears (and even after that), the situation where operation reception to the first operating means is received multiple times may reappear based on the detection of that maintained operating state. Therefore, it is expected that the game's enjoyment will be suitably maintained while adding a sense of tension. In contrast, regarding the second operating means, although the second operation cues are always output when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if operation reception to the second operating means ceases, simply maintaining it in an operating state until the period when the second operation-related indicator is displayed reappears (and even after that) will not cause the situation where operation reception to the second operating means is received multiple times to reappear. Therefore, it is expected that the game's enjoyment will be suitably maintained while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the first operation-related display that was hidden, or it may be a different manner from the first operation-related display that was hidden.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 41-B, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 41-B, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not shown.

[Configuration 42-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by the player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, and a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the first operating means can receive operation requests multiple times. The system comprises: 1 Operation-related display means; 2 Post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the 2 operation means; and 3 Operation-related display means capable of displaying a 2 Operation-related display that prompts operation to the 2 operation means, and when the 2 operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the 2 Operation-related display means can display a 2 Operation-related display that prompts operation to the 2 operation means, and when the 2 Operation means is maintained in an operating state, the 1 post-reception change in response to an operation received by the 1 operation means. Multiple post-reception changes can be executed in response to an operation received for a stage, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, if the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, multiple post-reception changes can be executed in response to the operation received for the second operation means, and after a situation has occurred where the second operation means is maintained in the operating state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received for the second operation means while the second operation-related display is displayed, even if the second operation means is maintained in the operating state If a situation arises where no operation is received for the second operating means, even if the second operating means is kept in the operating state until after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended, the system is designed so that no operation is received again for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is hidden. Furthermore, if multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received for the second operating means while the second operating means is kept in the operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of such post-reception changes may be set to a time less than or equal to a specific time.

In other words, in this case, since the interval at which operation is received when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled is set to a relatively short interval, it is expected that the situation in which operation is not received by the second operation means will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operation means. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "specific time" in this configuration 42-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 42-B. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means, operation-related indicators, and times as "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means, operation-related indicators, and times. Furthermore, they may mean the same "operation means," "operation-related indicator," and "time" as other operation means, operation-related indicators, and times with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden, after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended. In this case, a situation may reappear where an operation is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period when the first operation-related display is shown, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the first operating means may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time. Similarly, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period when the second operation-related display is shown, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the second operating means may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time, or to be longer than a specific time.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval. Therefore, when the auto-repeated button function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, even after the period during which the first operation-related display is shown has ended, if the first operating means is kept in an operating state until predetermined permissible conditions are met while the first operation-related display is hidden, a situation may reappear where an operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated button function is enabled for the first operating means can be suitably maintained. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after reception can be either relatively short or relatively long. Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize the deactivation of the auto-repeated button press function relatively quickly. In addition, even if the second operating means remains in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended, the system will not attempt to receive another operation request from the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is not displayed. Therefore, it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be maintained when the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 42-B, even if the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, and the period during which the first operation-related display is shown occurs again, it is possible to ensure that the situation in which multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur while the first operation-related display is being shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 42-B, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operation requests are made to the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 42-B, the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

[Configuration 43-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means, and a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times. The system comprises a stage, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operating means may be subjected to operation multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, an operation received by the first operating means may trigger a post-reception change in response, and in this case, when the first operating means is subjected to operation, the system will perform an operation on the first operating means. Multiple post-reception changes can be executed in response to an operation reception, and even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation reception is made to the second operation means, a post-reception change can be executed in response to it, and in this case, if the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, multiple post-reception changes can be executed in response to the operation reception to the second operation means, and after a situation has occurred where the second operation means is maintained in the operating state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation reception to the second operation means while the second operation-related display is shown, even if the second operation means is maintained in the operating state If a situation arises where no operation is received for the second operating means, even if the second operating means is kept in the operating state until after the period in which the second operation-related display is shown has ended, the system is designed so that no operation is received again for the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is hidden. Furthermore, if multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received for the second operating means while the second operating means is kept in the operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of such post-reception changes can be set to a fixed time.

In other words, in this case, since the interval at which operation is received when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled is set to a fixed interval, it is expected that the situation in which operation is not received by the second operation means will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operation means. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 43-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 43-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operation means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden, after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended. In this case, a situation may reappear where an operation is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period when the first operation-related display is shown, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the first operating means may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). Similarly, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state during the period when the second operation-related display is shown, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the second operating means may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after acceptance is set to a certain time (a predetermined time). Therefore, when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, even after the period during which the first operation-related display is shown has ended, if the first operating means is kept in an operating state until predetermined permissible conditions are met while the first operation-related display is hidden, a situation may reappear where an operation is accepted for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the first operating means can be suitably maintained. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after reception can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undetermined time (a time not predetermined). Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize relatively quickly when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled. In addition, even if the second operating means remains in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended, operation reception to the second operating means will not be performed again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is not shown. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 43-B, even if the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 43-B, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operation requests are made to the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 43-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 44-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times, and the The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operating means may be kept in an operating state, allowing for multiple operation receptions to be made to the second operating means, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, an operation reception may be made to the first operating means, and in this case, when the first operating means is kept in an operating state, an operation reception in response to the operation reception to the first operating means is performed. The post-operation change can be performed multiple times, and even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received for the second operation means, a corresponding post-operation change may be performed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, the post-operation change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means can be performed multiple times. After a situation occurs where the second operation means is maintained in the operating state and the post-operation change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means is performed multiple times while the second operation-related display is shown, the operation to the second operation means may be performed multiple times despite the second operation means being maintained in the operating state. If a situation arises in which an operation is not accepted, even if the second operation means continues to be in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display is shown has ended, the second operation means will not be asked to accept an operation again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is hidden. Furthermore, if the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is in an operating state and multiple post-acceptance changes in response to an operation acceptance have been performed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be shown.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means has been released, and therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation is received for the second operating means. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in configuration 44-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 44-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operating means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden, after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended. In this case, a situation may reappear where an operation is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, particularly when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the first operating means, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, no corresponding post-non-operating display may be shown. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operating display may be shown.

With this configuration, if the first operating means, which ceases to accept operations while the first operation-related display is displayed, remains in an operating state even after the first operation-related display is hidden, the situation where operations are accepted for the first operating means may reappear even when the first operation-related display is hidden. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means, if operations cease to accept operations while the second operation-related display is displayed, even if it remains in an operating state even after the second operation-related display is hidden, the situation where operations are accepted for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is hidden will not reappear. However, since it is easy to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means is released, encouraging re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 44-B, even if the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, and the period during which the first operation-related display is shown occurs again, it is possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is shown, the situation in which multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 44-B, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operation requests are made to the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 45-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means, and the second operating means The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operation means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts operation on the second operation means, and when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation requests may be made to the second operation means. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-reception change may be executed in response to an operation request made to the first operation means, and in this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation requests made to the first operation means may be executed. The system is configured such that even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received for the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means may be executed multiple times. After a situation has occurred where the second operation means is maintained in the operating state and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display is shown, if a situation has occurred where the second operation means is maintained in the operating state but no operation is received for the second operation means, Even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state for an extended period after the period in which the second operation-related display is shown has ended, the system is designed so that no further operation requests are made to the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is hidden. Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to operation requests to the second operating means, this can trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means has been released, and therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation is received for the second operating means. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in configuration 45-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 45-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operating means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden, after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended. In this case, a situation may reappear where an operation is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, particularly when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means are performed, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not trigger the system to make any sound effects that were audible at that time in an inaudible state. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means are performed, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time in an inaudible state.

With this configuration, if the first operating means, which ceases to accept operations while the first operation-related display is displayed, remains in an operating state even after the first operation-related display is hidden, the situation where operations are accepted for the first operating means may reappear even when the first operation-related display is hidden. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means, if operations cease to accept operations while the second operation-related display is displayed, even if it remains in an operating state even after the second operation-related display is hidden, the situation where operations are accepted for the second operating means while the second operation-related display is hidden will not reappear. However, since it is easy to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means is released, encouraging re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 45-B, even if the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, and the period during which the first operation-related display is shown occurs again, it is possible to ensure that the situation in which multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur while the first operation-related display is being shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 45-B, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operation requests are made to the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 46-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times, and the second operation The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts operation to the second operation means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operation means may be kept in an operating state, allowing for multiple operation requests to be made to the second operation means. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-reception change may be executed in response to an operation request made to the first operation means, and in this case, if the first operation means is kept in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation requests to the first operation means may be executed. The system is configured to allow this to happen, and even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received for the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means may be executed multiple times. After a situation has occurred where the second operation means is maintained in the operating state and the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display is shown, a situation has occurred where the second operation means is maintained in the operating state but no operation is received for the second operation means. If this occurs, even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended, the second operating means will not be asked to accept an operation again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is hidden. If the second operating means is turned into a non-operating state while a post-acceptance change has occurred in response to the operation acceptance to the second operating means, and then the second operating means is turned back into the operating state from the non-operating state, this can trigger the change to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time inaudible.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 46-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 46-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden, after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended. In this case, a situation may reappear where an operation is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, in particular, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and the first operation means is undergoing a post-reception change corresponding to the operation state, and the first operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and then the first operation means is changed back from a non-operation state to an operation state, this does not trigger the change to an inaudible state for any sound effects that were audible at that time. However, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and the second operation means is undergoing a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception, and the second operation means is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and then the second operation means is changed back from a non-operation state to an operation state, this may trigger the change to an inaudible state for at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time.

With this configuration, if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is displayed, remains in the operating state even after the first operation-related display is hidden, a situation may reappear where operations are accepted for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is hidden. However, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means is interrupted and the first operating means is operated again, it becomes difficult to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted. Therefore, maintaining the operating state of the first operating means becomes easier in order to proceed with the game. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means, if operation reception ceases while the second operation-related display is displayed, even if the operation state is maintained after the second operation-related display is hidden, the situation where operation reception to the second operating means occurs again while the second operation-related display is hidden will not reappear. However, when the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) for the second operating means is interrupted and the second operating means is operated again, it becomes easier to recognize that the reception was properly performed. Therefore, it becomes easier to reset the operation state of the second operating means in order to proceed with the game properly.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 46-B, even if the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, and the period during which the first operation-related display is shown occurs again, it is possible to ensure that the situation in which multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur while the first operation-related display is being shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 46-B, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operation requests are made to the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 47-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, an effect display means that displays an effect related to the effect, an effect determination means that makes a determination, an effect granting means that can grant an effect to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that displays an effect prompting an operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, an effect allowing multiple operation receptions to be made to the first operating means, and a first operation-related display means that executes a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means. The system comprises a second post-reception change execution means capable of performing an operation, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which is a display prompting an operation on the second operation means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operation means can be operated multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received on the first operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operated state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received on the first operation means can be executed multiple times, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received on the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In some cases, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation reception to the second operating means may be executed. After a situation occurs where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation reception to the second operating means are executed while the second operation-related display is displayed, if a situation occurs where no operation reception is made to the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state until after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended, the operation reception to the second operating means will be performed based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is hidden. The system is designed so that an operation request will not be made again. When an operation request is made to the first operation means while the first operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-request change. Similarly, when an operation request is made to the second operation means while the second operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-request change. Therefore, regardless of whether an operation request is made to the first or second operation means while the operation-related display is not displayed, it is possible to appropriately indicate that the operation request has been made correctly.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 47-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 47-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden, after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended. In this case, a situation may reappear where an operation is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, especially after a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means despite it being kept in an operating state, and then, based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the first operation-related display is hidden, an operation is received again for the first operating means. In this case, one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation is whether or not a display change occurs in the display means. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult or easy to recognize that an operation has been received again for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the first operation-related display is hidden. This allows for the maintenance of a sense of tension when keeping the first operating means in an operating state while the first operation-related display is hidden, while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, even if, after a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, and then, based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the first operation-related display is hidden, an operation is received again for the first operating means, resulting in a "display change in the performance display means" as one of the post-reception changes in response to this operation, if the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, then, while a "change different from the display change in the performance display means," which is one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the first operating means, may be executed multiple times, it is possible to prevent the "display change in the performance display means," which is one of the post-reception changes, from being executed multiple times. With such a configuration, even if it is made easier to recognize that an operation has been received again for the first operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the first operation-related display is hidden, it becomes more difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated button-pressing function is also activated when the operating state is maintained, thus it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 47-B, even if the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 47-B, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operation requests are made to the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 48-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times, and separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, the first operation-prompting light can execute an operation prompting light to prompt operation to the first operating means. The system comprises a first prompting light-emitting means capable of performing a first prompting light-emitting means, a second post-reception change execution means capable of performing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the second operating means, and which, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, can receive multiple operations from the second operating means, and a second prompting light-emitting means capable of performing an operation-promoting light-emitting means to prompt an operation to the second operating means, separate from the second operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the second operating means, wherein even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means may be executed, in which case the first operating means is in an operating state When the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation request to the first operation means may be executed. Even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation request is made to the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation request to the second operation means may be executed. After a situation has occurred where the second operation means is maintained in the operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation request to the second operation means are executed while the second operation-related display is shown, if a situation has occurred where no operation request is made to the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in the operating state, the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends. Even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state from that point onward, the second operation-related indicator is not hidden, and the operation is not accepted again for the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. When the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the first operating means, operation-promoting light emission to encourage operation on the first operating means is possible. When the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the second operating means, operation-promoting light emission to encourage operation on the second operating means is possible. As a result, it is expected that situations in which multiple operation acceptances are made for the second operating means will be easily created, thereby providing a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 48-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 48-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden, after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended. In this case, a situation may reappear where an operation is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, especially when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means (when there is a period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed), there may be two cases: one in which an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operation means (at least for a portion of the time from when the first operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden) (for example, the 4B operation permission state shown in Figure 170), and another in which the operation-prompting light is not emitted (at least for a portion of the time from when the first operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden) (for example, the 3B operation permission state shown in Figure 168). In addition, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means (when there is a period during which the second operation-related indicator is displayed), an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the second operation means (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even when multiple operation requests are permitted for the operating means and an operation-related indicator is displayed, the first operating means may either perform operation-promoting illumination or not. This provides a degree of secrecy. However, if the first operating means, which ceases to receive operation requests while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, remains in an operating state even after the first operation-related indicator is hidden, then a situation may arise where operation requests are received for the first operating means while the first operation-related indicator is hidden. This allows for the maintenance of a sense of tension while effectively preserving the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means, although the operation prompt illumination is always performed from the time the second operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden, if operation reception ceases while the second operation-related display is displayed, even if the operation state is maintained after the second operation-related display is hidden, the situation in which operation reception is performed on the second operating means while the second operation-related display is hidden will not reappear. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 48-B, even if the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 48-B, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operation requests are made to the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 49-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result has been obtained, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to be made to the first operating means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the first operating means can make operation requests multiple times, and when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation corresponding to the first operation-related display The system comprises a first prompting sound output means capable of outputting an prompting sound, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts operation to the second operation means, and which, when the display is in a displayed state, allows for multiple operation receptions to be made to the second operation means if the second operation means is kept in an operating state, and a second prompting sound output means capable of outputting a second prompting sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, wherein even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operation means may be executed. In this case, if the first operating means is maintained in the operating state, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the first operating means may be executed, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operating means, a post-reception change in response thereto may be executed, and in this case, if the second operating means is maintained in the operating state, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the second operating means may be executed, and after a situation has occurred in which the second operating means is maintained in the operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the second operating means are executed while the second operation-related display is displayed, even though the second operating means is maintained in the operating state If a situation arises in which no operation is received for the second operating means, even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state until after the period in which the second operation-related display is displayed has ended, the second operating means will not be asked to perform an operation again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is not displayed. Furthermore, since the first operation prompt sound can be output when the first operation-related display is displayed, and the second operation prompt sound can be output when the second operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that a situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means will be easily created, thereby providing a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 49-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 49-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, after a situation arises where the first operating means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the first operating means, and then a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means despite it being maintained in an operating state, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden, after the period during which the first operation-related indicator is displayed has ended. In this case, a situation may reappear where an operation is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, in particular, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed (while operation reception for the second operation means is permitted, or when operation reception for the second operation means is permitted), the second operation accelerating sound will always be output. However, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, there may be cases where the first operation accelerating sound is output and cases where it is not. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, with respect to the first operating means, when the first operation-related display is shown, there are cases where the first operation-prompt sound is output and cases where the first operation-prompt sound is not output. This provides a degree of secrecy. However, if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display is shown, remains in an operating state even after the first operation-related display is hidden, then a situation may reappear where operations are accepted for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is hidden. This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of the game while adding a sense of tension. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means, while a second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if operation reception ceases while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, even if the operation state is maintained after the second operation-related indicator is hidden, the situation where operation reception is received by the second operating means while the second operation-related indicator is hidden will not reappear. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 49-B, even if the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 49-B, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operation requests are made to the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 50-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means, and a first operation related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the first operating means can receive operation reception multiple times. The system comprises an operation-related display means, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts operation to the second operation means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operation means may be kept in an operating state, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operation means may be executed, in which case the first operation means is kept in an operating state. In this configuration, a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means may be executed multiple times. Even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received by the second operating means, a post-reception change in response may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means may be executed multiple times. After a situation has occurred where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display is not shown, if a situation has occurred where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state but no operation is received by the second operating means, then even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, an operation will not be received again based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden. When a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the execution of the post-reception change multiple times may be set to a time less than or equal to a specific time.

In other words, in this case, since the interval at which operation is received when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled is set to a relatively short interval, it is expected that the situation in which operation is not received by the second operation means will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operation means. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "specific time" in this configuration 50-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 50-B. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means, operation-related indicators, and times as "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means, operation-related indicators, and times. Furthermore, they may mean the same "operation means," "operation-related indicator," and "time" as other operation means, operation-related indicators, and times with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation reception to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden. This may allow a situation to reappear where an operation reception is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

In this case, in particular, the interval between multiple executions of post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-reception changes occurring in the auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time. Furthermore, the interval between multiple executions of post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-reception changes occurring in the auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time, or to be longer than a specific time.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after reception is set to a relatively short interval. Therefore, when the auto-repeated button function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, even after a situation occurs where no operation is received for the first operating means despite the first operating means being kept in an operating state, if the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the first operation-related display is hidden and predetermined allowable conditions are met, a situation where an operation is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state may reappear. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained when the auto-repeated button function is enabled for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is not displayed. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after reception can be either relatively short or relatively long. Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize the deactivation of the auto-repeated button function relatively quickly. Additionally, after a situation arises where no operation is received for the second operating means despite it being kept in an operating state, even if the second operating means continues to be kept in an operating state, operation reception for the second operating means will not occur again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed. Therefore, it is expected that a suitable sense of tension can be maintained when the auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 50-B, even if the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, and the period during which the first operation-related display is shown occurs again, it is possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is shown, the situation in which multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 50-B, even if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, and the second operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, multiple operation requests are made to the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 50-B, the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

[Configuration 51-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, and a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times. The system comprises an operation-related display means, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts operation to the second operation means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operation means may be kept in an operating state, and in this case the first operation means is kept in an operating state. When this occurs, the post-reception change in response to the operation received by the first operating means may be executed multiple times. Even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operating means, a post-reception change in response may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change in response to the operation received by the second operating means may be executed multiple times. After a situation has occurred where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and the post-reception change in response to the operation received by the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display is not displayed, if a situation has occurred where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state but no operation is received by the second operating means, then even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, the operation will not be received again based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden. When the post-reception change in response to the operation received by the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the execution of the post-reception change multiple times may be set to a fixed time.

In other words, in this case, since the interval at which operation is received when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled is set to a fixed interval, it is expected that the situation in which operation is not received by the second operation means will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operation means. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 51-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 51-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operation means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation reception to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden. This may allow a situation to reappear where an operation reception is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

In this case, in particular, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-reception changes occurring in the auto-repeated function) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). The interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-reception changes occurring in the auto-repeated function) may be set to either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

Furthermore, with this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after reception is set to a certain time (a predetermined time). Therefore, it is possible to recognize relatively early when the auto-repeated button function is disabled. In addition, even after a situation occurs where no operation is received for the first operating means despite the first operating means being kept in an operating state, if the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the first operation-related display is hidden and predetermined allowable conditions are met, a situation where an operation is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state may reappear. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained when the auto-repeated button function is enabled for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is not displayed. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after reception can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined). Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize relatively quickly when the auto-repeated button function is disabled. Additionally, after a situation arises where no operation is received for the second operating means despite it being kept in an operating state, even if the second operating means continues to be kept in an operating state, operation reception for the second operating means will not occur again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 51-B, if the first operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the first operation-related indicator is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that the situation where multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 51-B, if the second operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the second operation-related indicator is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 51-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, nor on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 52-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, and a first operation-related table that can display a first operation-related display, which is a display prompting operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times. The system comprises a display means, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operation means, and which allows for multiple operation receptions to be made to the second operation means when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operation means may be executed, and in this case, when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, the first operation means Multiple post-reception changes may be executed in response to an operation received for a stage. Even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received for the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes may be executed in response to the operation received for the second operation means. After a situation has occurred where the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been executed in response to an operation received for the second operation means while the second operation-related display is not shown, if a situation has occurred where no operation is received for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, then even if the second operation means continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, no further operation reception will be made for the second operation means based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden. When the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been executed in response to an operation received for the second operation means, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be shown.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means has been released, and therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation is received for the second operating means. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in configuration 52-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 52-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operating means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation reception to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden. This may allow a situation to reappear where an operation reception is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, particularly when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the first operating means, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, no corresponding post-non-operating display may be shown. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operating display may be shown.

Furthermore, with this configuration, if the first operating means stops receiving input while the "first operation-related display is hidden," and the first operating means is kept in the operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the "first operation-related display is hidden," the situation where the first operating means receives input again while the "first operation-related display is hidden" may reappear. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means is deactivated, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Similarly, with regard to the second operating means, if the second operating means stops receiving input while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means is kept in the operating state thereafter, the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden will not result in the second operating means receiving input again. However, since it is easy to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means is deactivated, prompting re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 52-B, if the first operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the first operation-related indicator is displayed again, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed may be prevented from occurring again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 52-B, if the second operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the second operation-related indicator is displayed again, it may be possible to re-enact a situation where, while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 53-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means, and a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the first operating means, and The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operating means may be subjected to operation multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-reception change may be executed in response to an operation received by the first operating means, and in this case, when the first operating means is subjected to operation, the system will perform an operation in response to the operation received by the first operating means. Multiple post-reception changes may be executed, and even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received for the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means may be executed. After a situation occurs where the second operation means is maintained in the operating state and multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means are executed while the second operation-related display is not shown, the second operation continues even though the second operation means is maintained in the operating state. If a situation arises in which no operation is received for the means, even if the second operating means continues to be kept in an operating state thereafter, the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden will not result in another operation being received for the second operating means. Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is being kept in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation received for the second operating means have been performed, this can be used as an opportunity to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means has been released, and therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation is received for the second operating means. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in configuration 53-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 53-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operating means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation reception to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden. This may allow a situation to reappear where an operation reception is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, particularly when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means are performed, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not trigger the system to make any sound effects that were audible at that time in an inaudible state. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means are performed, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time in an inaudible state.

Furthermore, with this configuration, if the first operating means stops receiving input while the "first operation-related display is hidden," and the first operating means is kept in the operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the "first operation-related display is hidden," the situation where the first operating means receives input again while the "first operation-related display is hidden" may reappear. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means is deactivated, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Similarly, with regard to the second operating means, if the second operating means stops receiving input while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means is kept in the operating state thereafter, the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden will not result in the second operating means receiving input again. However, since it is easy to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means is deactivated, prompting re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 53-B, if the first operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the first operation-related indicator is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that the situation where multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 53-B, if the second operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the second operation-related indicator is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 54-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means, and the second operating means The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation request, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts operation on the second operation means, and when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation requests can be made to the second operation means. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-reception change may be executed in response to an operation request on the first operation means, and in this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation requests on the first operation means can be executed. In this configuration, even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received for the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means may be executed multiple times. After a situation has occurred where the second operation means is maintained in the operating state and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display is not shown, if a situation has occurred where no operation is received for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in the operating state, Even if the second operating means continues to be in the operating state thereafter, the system is designed so that no further operation requests will be made to the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state being maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden. If the second operating means is deactivated while a post-reception change has occurred in response to the operation request to the second operating means, and then the second operating means is returned to the operating state from the deactivated state, this can trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time, thus suggesting that the second operating means has been deactivated again and an operation request has been made.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 54-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 54-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation reception to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden. This may allow a situation to reappear where an operation reception is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, in particular, when the first operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state while a post-reception change corresponding to the operating state is occurring, and then the first operating means is changed back from the non-operating state to an operating state, this does not trigger the change in the sound effect that was audible at that time to an inaudible state. However, when the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state while a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception of the second operating means is occurring, and then the second operating means is changed back from the non-operating state to an operating state, this may trigger the change in the sound effect that was audible at that time to an inaudible state.

With this configuration, if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is kept in an operating state until a predetermined tolerance condition is met while the "first operation-related display is hidden," a situation may reappear where the first operating means is accepted for operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden." However, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means is interrupted and the first operating means is operated again, it becomes difficult to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted. Therefore, it becomes easier to maintain the operating state of the first operating means in order to proceed with the game. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means, if operation reception ceases while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means continues to be in an operating state, operation reception to the second operating means will not be resumed based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden. However, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means is interrupted and the second operating means is operated again, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation has been properly received. Therefore, it becomes easier to reset the operating state of the second operating means in order to ensure the game progresses properly.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 54-B, if the first operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the first operation-related indicator is displayed again, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed may be prevented from occurring again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 54-B, if the second operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the second operation-related indicator is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 55-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, an effect display means that displays an effect related to the effect, an effect determination means that makes a determination, an effect granting means that can grant an effect to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and in which case the operation reception to the first operating means can be made multiple times when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, and a post-reception change execution means that executes a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the second operating means The system comprises a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a change after reception, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts operation on the second operation means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operation means can be operated multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received on the first operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operated state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received on the first operation means can be executed multiple times, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received on the second operation means... In some cases, a post-reception change may be executed accordingly. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in the operating state, a post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operating means may be executed multiple times. After a situation occurs where the second operating means is maintained in the operating state and a post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display is not displayed, if a situation occurs where the second operating means is maintained in the operating state but no operation reception is made to the second operating means, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in the operating state thereafter, an operation reception to the second operating means will not be made again based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden. The system is designed so that there is no possibility of failure, and when an operation is received for the first operation means while the first operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-reception change. Similarly, when an operation is received for the second operation means while the second operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-reception change. Therefore, regardless of whether an operation is received for the first or second operation means while the operation-related display is not displayed, it is possible to suitably indicate that the operation has been received appropriately.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 55-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 55-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means and operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means and operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" and "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation reception to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden. This may allow a situation to reappear where an operation reception is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, especially after a situation occurs where no operation is received by the first operation means while the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received again by the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the first operation-related display is hidden, it may be possible to have both a display change in the display means as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation received, and no such display change. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult or easy to recognize that an operation has been received again by the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the first operation-related display is hidden. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the enjoyment of the game while suitably maintaining the sense of tension when maintaining the operation state of the first operation means while the first operation-related display is hidden.

Furthermore, even if, after a situation arises where no operation is received by the first operation means while the first operation-related display is not displayed, and then, based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the first operation-related display is hidden, an operation is received again by the first operation means, resulting in a "display change in the performance display means" as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation, if the first operation means is maintained in the operation state, then, while a "change different from the display change in the performance display means," which is one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the first operation means, may be executed multiple times, it is possible to prevent the "display change in the performance display means," which is one of the post-reception changes, from being executed multiple times. With such a configuration, even if it is made easier to recognize that an operation has been received again by the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the first operation-related display is hidden, it becomes more difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated button function is also activated when the operation state is maintained, thus it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 55-B, if the first operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the first operation-related indicator is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that the situation where multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 55-B, if the second operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the second operation-related indicator is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 56-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by the player, a determination means that makes a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times, and separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, an operation promotion generation that prompts operation to the first operating means The system comprises a first facilitating light-emitting means capable of emitting light, a second post-reception change-executing means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the second operating means, and which, when the image display is in a display state, allows for multiple operation receptions to be made to the second operating means, and a second facilitating light-emitting means capable of emitting operation-facilitating light to prompt an operation to the second operating means, separate from the second operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the second operating means, wherein even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means may be executed, in which case the When the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the first operating means may be executed. Even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received by the second operating means, a post-reception change corresponding to this may be executed. In this case, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the second operating means may be executed. After a situation has occurred where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the second operating means are executed while the second operation-related display is not shown, if a situation has occurred where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state but no operation is received by the second operating means, Even if the second operating means continues to be in an operating state thereafter, the system is designed so that no further operation requests are made to the second operating means based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed. When the first operation-related indicator is not displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means, operation-promoting light is not emitted to prompt an operation to the first operating means. When the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means, operation-promoting light can be emitted to prompt an operation to the first operating means. This is expected to provide a suitable sense of tension when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 56-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 56-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation reception to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden. This may allow a situation to reappear where an operation reception is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, particularly when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means, the operation-prompting light, which is an image display prompting operation on the first operation means, is not executed. When the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means, there may be cases where the operation-prompting light prompting operation on the first operation means is executed, and cases where it is not executed. This provides the first operation means with a degree of confidentiality by not executing the operation-prompting light, even when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and is expected to effectively create a sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even if the first operation-related indicator is hidden and the system becomes capable of accepting an operation to the first operation means, the operation-promoting light will not be activated. However, if the first operation means is kept in an operating state, the system can accept an operation again even when the first operation-related indicator is hidden. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Also, even if the system becomes capable of accepting an operation to the first operation means when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the operation-promoting light is not necessarily activated. Therefore, although the operation is prompted by the first operation-related indicator, a certain degree of secrecy is maintained. Thus, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game through a method different from when the first operation-related indicator is hidden.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operation means (i.e., when the second operation-related indicator is displayed for a period of time), operation-prompting illumination to encourage operation on the second operation means may be performed (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 56-B, if the first operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the first operation-related indicator is displayed again, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed may be prevented from occurring again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 56-B, if the second operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the second operation-related indicator is displayed again, it may be possible to re-enact a situation where, while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 57-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result has been obtained, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the first operating means, a first promotion sound output means that can output a first operation promotion sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and operation reception to the second operating means The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to the first operation means, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts operation on the second operation means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operation means can be operated multiple times, and a second cues sound output means capable of outputting a second operation cues sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received on the first operation means, a post-reception change in response may be executed, and in this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operated state, the post-reception change in response to the operation received on the first operation means can be executed multiple times, and the second operation Even when the related indicator is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operating means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operating means may be executed multiple times. After a situation occurs where the second operating means is maintained in the operating state and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operation related indicator is not displayed, if a situation occurs where no operation is received for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in the operating state, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in the operating state thereafter, the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation related indicator is hidden will be used to determine the operation. The system is designed so that there will be no further requests for operation to be received by the second operating means. When the system transitions from a state where the first operation-related indicator is not displayed and operation to the first operating means is not permitted to be received, to a state where operation to the first operating means is permitted, without the first operation-related indicator being displayed, the first operation accelerating sound is not output. Similarly, when the system transitions from a state where the second operation-related indicator is not displayed and operation to the second operating means is not permitted to be received, to a state where operation to the second operating means is permitted, without the second operation-related indicator being displayed, the second operation accelerating sound is not output. This is expected to effectively provide a sense of tension when the operation-related indicator is not displayed and multiple requests for operation to be received by the operating means are permitted.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 57-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 57-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation reception to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is hidden. This may allow a situation to reappear where an operation reception is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in this case, the first operation-related indicator can be displayed in any of a plurality of display modes, including the first and second modes. When the first operation-related indicator is displayed in the first mode, the first operation accelerating sound is not output, and when the first operation-related indicator is displayed in the second mode, the first operation accelerating sound is output. This allows for a degree of secrecy to be provided to the first operating means, even when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, by preventing the operation accelerating sound from being executed depending on the display mode, thus effectively creating a sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even if the first operation prompt sound is not output when the first operation-related indicator is hidden and the system is in a state where operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted, if the first operation means is kept in an operating state, operation acceptance for the first operation means can be made again even when the first operation-related indicator is hidden. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Also, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, even if the system is in a state where operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted, the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output. Therefore, although operation is prompted by the first operation-related indicator, a certain degree of secrecy is maintained, and it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game in this "method different from when the first operation-related indicator is hidden".

Furthermore, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed (while operation reception for the second operation means is permitted, or when operation reception for the second operation means is permitted), the second operation accelerating sound may always be output. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 57-B, if the first operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the first operation-related indicator is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that the situation where multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 57-B, if the second operating means, which ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related indicator was not displayed, is kept in an operating state, even if the second operation-related indicator is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 58-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by the player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, and a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the first operating means can receive operation requests multiple times, and the first operation-related display can be displayed The system comprises a display means, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operation means, and which allows for multiple operation receptions to be made to the second operation means when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operation means may be executed, and in this case, when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, the first operation Multiple operation requests can be made to the operating means, and even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation request is made to the second operating means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in the operating state, multiple operation requests can be made to the second operating means. After a situation occurs where the second operating means is maintained in the operating state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request to the second operating means while the second operation-related display is not shown, the second operating means is maintained in the operating state, but the second If a situation arises in which no operation is received for the operating means, even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state until the second operation-related display appears (and even after it appears), no further operation reception will be performed for the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed. Furthermore, if multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation reception for the second operating means while it is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of such post-reception changes may be set to a time less than or equal to a specific time.

In other words, in this case, since the interval at which operation is received when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled is set to a relatively short interval, it is expected that the situation in which operation is not received by the second operation means will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operation means. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "specific time" in this configuration 58-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 58-B. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means, operation-related indicators, and times as "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means, operation-related indicators, and times. Furthermore, they may mean the same "operation means," "operation-related indicator," and "time" as other operation means, operation-related indicators, and times with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation request to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) the first operation-related indicator is displayed. If predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the situation where an operation request is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state may reappear.

In this case, in particular, the interval between multiple executions of post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-reception changes occurring in the auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time. Furthermore, the interval between multiple executions of post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-reception changes occurring in the auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time, or to be longer than a specific time.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after reception is set to a relatively short interval. Therefore, when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, even after a situation occurs where no operation is received for the first operating means despite the first operating means being kept in an operating state while the first operation-related display is hidden, if the first operating means is kept in an operating state until the first operation-related display is displayed and predetermined allowable conditions are met, a situation where an operation is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state may occur again. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained when the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is not displayed. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after reception can be either relatively short or relatively long. Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize the deactivation of the auto-repeated button press function relatively quickly. Additionally, if, despite maintaining the second operating means in an operating state while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, no operation is received for the second operating means, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state until the second operation-related indicator is displayed (or even afterward), the system will not attempt to receive an operation again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related indicator is displayed. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of urgency when the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed can be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 58-B, when the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operations while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it is possible to ensure that the situation where multiple operations are received by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 58-B, if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, a situation may reappear where multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 58-B, the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

[Configuration 59-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means, and a first operation related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the first operating means can receive operation reception multiple times. The system comprises an operation-related display means, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts operation to the second operation means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operation means may be kept in an operating state, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operation means may be executed, in which case the first operation means is kept in an operating state. In this configuration, the first operating means may receive multiple operation requests, and even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation request is made to the second operating means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the second operating means may receive multiple operation requests. After a situation has occurred where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is not shown, and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation request to the second operating means is executed multiple times, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state but no operation requests are made to the second operating means, then even if the second operating means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until the second operation-related display is shown, the second operating means will not receive another operation request based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is shown. When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation request to the second operating means is executed multiple times, the interval between the execution of the post-reception change multiple times may be set to a fixed time.

In other words, in this case, since the interval at which operation is received when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled is set to a fixed interval, it is expected that the situation in which operation is not received by the second operation means will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operation means. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 59-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 59-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operation means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation request to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) the first operation-related indicator is displayed. If predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the situation where an operation request is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state may reappear.

In this case, in particular, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means while the first operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-reception changes occurring in the auto-repeated function) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). The interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means while the second operating means is maintained in an operating state (the interval between post-reception changes occurring in the auto-repeated function) may be set to either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-button function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after reception is set to a certain time (a predetermined time). Therefore, when the auto-button function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, even after a situation occurs where no operation is received for the first operating means despite the first operating means being kept in an operating state while the first operation-related display is hidden, if the first operating means is kept in an operating state until the first operation-related display is displayed and predetermined allowable conditions are met, a situation where an operation is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state may reappear. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained when the auto-button function is enabled for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is not displayed. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after reception can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined). Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize relatively quickly when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled. Additionally, if, despite maintaining the second operating means in an operating state while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, no operation is received for the second operating means, even if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state until the second operation-related indicator is displayed (or even afterward), no further operation reception will occur based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related indicator is displayed. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when the auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed can be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 59-B, when the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it is possible to ensure that the situation where multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 59-B, if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, a situation may reappear where multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 59-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, or the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 60-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, and a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the first operating means can receive operation requests multiple times, and the first operation-related display can display a first operation-related display. The system comprises a means, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operating means may be subjected to operation multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, an operation received by the first operating means may trigger a post-reception change in response. In this case, when the first operating means is subjected to operation, the system will perform an operation on the first operating means. Multiple operation requests may be received, and even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation request is received for the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, multiple operation requests may be received for the second operation means. After a situation has occurred where the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes corresponding to operation requests for the second operation means are executed while the second operation-related display is not shown, if a situation has occurred where no operation requests are received for the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in an operating state, then even if the second operation means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until the second operation-related display is shown, no further operation requests will be received for the second operation means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is shown. When the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes corresponding to operation requests for the second operation means are executed, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be shown.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means has been released, and therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation is received for the second operating means. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 60-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 60-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operating means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation request to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) the first operation-related indicator is displayed. If predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the situation where an operation request is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state may reappear.

Furthermore, in this case, particularly when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the first operating means, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, no corresponding post-non-operating display may be shown. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operating display may be shown.

Furthermore, with this configuration, if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is kept in an operating state until the first operation-related display is displayed and predetermined acceptable conditions are met, then a situation may reappear where the first operating means accepts operations while the first operation-related display is displayed. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means, if operation reception ceases while the "second operation-related indicator is hidden," even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state thereafter (for example, even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state until the second operation-related indicator is displayed and certain acceptable conditions are met), operation reception to the second operating means will not be resumed based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related indicator is displayed. However, since it is easier to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means is released, prompting re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 60-B, when the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operations while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it is possible to ensure that the situation where multiple operations are received by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 60-B, if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, a situation may reappear where multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 61-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times, and the The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the second operating means, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts operation on the second operating means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operating means may be subjected to operation requests multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, an operation request made to the first operating means may trigger a post-reception change in response, and in this case, if the first operating means is maintained in an operation state, the first operating means may be subjected to operation requests multiple times. The system is configured such that even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation is received by the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, multiple operation receptions may be received by the second operation means. After a situation occurs where the second operation means is maintained in the operating state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation reception by the second operation means while the second operation-related display is not shown, a situation may occur where no operation reception is received by the second operation means despite the second operation means being maintained in the operating state. Even if the second operating means is kept in the operating state until the state in which the second operation-related display appears appears, the system is designed so that no further operation requests are made to the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed. Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the second operating means have been performed, this can be used as an opportunity to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means has been released, and therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation is received for the second operating means. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 61-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 61-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operating means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation request to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) the first operation-related indicator is displayed. If predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the situation where an operation request is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state may reappear.

Furthermore, in this case, particularly when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means are performed, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not trigger the system to make any sound effects that were audible at that time in an inaudible state. However, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means are performed, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that were audible at that time in an inaudible state.

Furthermore, with this configuration, if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is kept in an operating state until the first operation-related display is displayed and predetermined acceptable conditions are met, then a situation may reappear where the first operating means accepts operations while the first operation-related display is displayed. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means, if operation reception ceases while the "second operation-related indicator is hidden," even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state thereafter (for example, even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state until the second operation-related indicator is displayed and certain acceptable conditions are met), operation reception to the second operating means will not be resumed based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related indicator is displayed. However, since it is easier to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means is released, prompting re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 61-B, when the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operations while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it is possible to ensure that the situation where multiple operations are received by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 61-B, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operations while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, a situation may reappear where multiple operations are received by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 62-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the first operating means, and the second operating means The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation request, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts operation on the second operation means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operation means may be allowed to be operated multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-reception change may be executed in response to an operation request on the first operation means, and in this case, if the first operation means is kept in an operated state, the first operation means may be allowed to be operated multiple times. Even when the linked display is not shown, if an operation is received by the second operating means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in the operating state, multiple operation receptions may be received by the second operating means. After a situation occurs where the second operating means is maintained in the operating state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to operation receptions to the second operating means while the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation reception is not received by the second operating means despite it being maintained in the operating state, then the second operation-related display will appear thereafter. Even if the second operating means is kept in the operating state until the time of operation, the second operation-related display will not be displayed and an operation request will not be made again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. If the second operating means is deactivated while a post-reception change in response to the operation request to the second operating means is occurring, and then the second operating means is returned to the operating state from the deactivated state, this can trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time, thus suggesting that the second operating means has been returned to the operating state and an operation request has been made.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 62-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 62-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation request to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) the first operation-related indicator is displayed. If predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the situation where an operation request is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state may reappear.

Furthermore, in this case, in particular, when the first operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state while a post-reception change corresponding to the operating state is occurring, and then the first operating means is changed back from the non-operating state to an operating state, this does not trigger the change in the sound effect that was audible at that time to an inaudible state. However, when the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state while a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception of the second operating means is occurring, and then the second operating means is changed back from the non-operating state to an operating state, this may trigger the change in the sound effect that was audible at that time to an inaudible state.

With this configuration, if the first operation means, which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is kept in an operating state until the first operation-related display is displayed and predetermined acceptable conditions are met, a situation may reappear where the first operation means is accepted while the first operation-related display is displayed. However, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operation means is interrupted and the first operation means is operated again, it becomes difficult to recognize that the operation has been properly accepted. Therefore, it becomes easier to maintain the operating state of the first operation means in order to proceed with the game. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means, if operation reception ceases while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state thereafter (for example, even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state until the second operation-related display is displayed and certain acceptable conditions are met), operation reception to the second operating means will not be performed again based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display was displayed. However, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means is interrupted and the second operating means is operated again, it becomes easier to recognize that the reception was properly performed. Therefore, it becomes easier to reset the operating state of the second operating means in order to proceed with the game properly.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 62-B, when the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it is possible to ensure that the situation where multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 62-B, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operations while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, a situation may reappear where multiple operations are received by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 63-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, an effect display means that displays an effect related to the effect, an effect determination means that makes a determination, an effect granting means that can grant an effect to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that displays an effect prompting an operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, an effect can be granted to the first operating means multiple times, and when an operation reception is made to the second operating means, an effect can be granted in response The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a change after application, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts operation on the second operation means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operation means can be operated multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received on the first operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, if the first operation means is maintained in an operated state, multiple operation receptions may be made on the first operation means, and even when the second operation-related display is not displayed, if an operation is received on the second operation means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In some cases, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple operation requests may be made to the second operating means. If, after a situation occurs in which the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation requests to the second operating means while the second operation-related display is not displayed, if a situation occurs in which no operation requests are made to the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, then even if the second operating means is continued to be maintained in an operating state until the second operation-related display is displayed, operation requests to the second operating means will be made again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed. The system is designed so that this does not occur, and if an operation is received for the first operation means when the first operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-reception change. Similarly, if an operation is received for the second operation means when the second operation-related display is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means and a change different from the display change may occur as a post-reception change. Therefore, regardless of whether an operation is received for the first or second operation means while the operation-related display is not displayed, it is possible to suitably indicate that the operation has been received properly.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 63-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 63-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation request to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) the first operation-related indicator is displayed. If predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the situation where an operation request is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state may reappear.

Furthermore, in this case, especially when a situation arises where no operation is received by the first operating means while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, and then, based on the detection of the operation state maintained until the first operation-related indicator is displayed and predetermined acceptable conditions are met, it is possible to have both a display change in the performance display means as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception, and no such display change. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult or easy to recognize that an operation has been received again by the first operating means based on the detection of the operation state maintained until the first operation-related indicator is displayed and predetermined acceptable conditions are met. Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension while keeping the first operating means in an operating state, while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, even if, after a situation occurs where no operation is received by the first operation means while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, and then, based on the detection of the operation state maintained until the first operation-related indicator is displayed and predetermined allowable conditions are met, an operation is received again by the first operation means as a result of one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation receiving, such as a "display change in the performance display means," if the first operation means is maintained in the operation state, then, while a "change different from the display change in the performance display means," which is one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation receiving by the first operation means, may be executed multiple times, it is possible to prevent the "display change in the performance display means," which is one of the post-reception changes, from being executed multiple times. With such a configuration, even if it is made easier to recognize that an operation has been received again by the first operation means based on the detection of the operation state maintained until the first operation-related indicator is displayed and predetermined allowable conditions are met, it is made more difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated button function is also activated when the operation state is maintained, thus it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 63-B, when the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operations while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it is possible to ensure that the situation where multiple operations are received by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 63-B, if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, a situation may reappear where multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 64-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be performed multiple times, and an operation-promoting light that prompts operation to the first operating means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means. The system comprises a first promotion light-emitting means capable of performing an operation, a second post-reception change execution means capable of performing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the second operation means, and which, when the image display is in a display state, allows the second operation means to be kept in an operating state, can receive multiple operation requests from the second operation means, and a second promotion light-emitting means capable of performing an operation-promoting light to prompt an operation to the second operation means, separate from the second operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the second operation means, wherein even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operation means may be performed, in which case the first When the operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means. Even when the second operation-related display is not shown, if an operation request is made to the second operating means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, when the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple operation requests can be made to the second operating means. After a situation has occurred where the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes corresponding to operation requests to the second operating means are executed while the second operation-related display is not shown, if a situation has occurred where no operation requests are made to the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, then the second operation-related display will be shown from that point onward. Even if the second operating means is kept in an operating state until it appears, the second operating means will not be asked to perform an operation again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operating related indicator is displayed. When the first operating related indicator is not displayed and multiple operation requests are allowed for the first operating means, operation prompting light is not performed to prompt an operation on the first operating means. When the first operating related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are allowed for the first operating means, operation prompting light may be performed to prompt an operation on the first operating means. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably provided when the first operating related indicator is not displayed and multiple operation requests are allowed for the first operating means.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 64-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 64-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation request to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) the first operation-related indicator is displayed. If predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the situation where an operation request is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state may reappear.

Furthermore, in this case, particularly when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means, the operation-prompting light, which is an image display prompting operation on the first operation means, is not executed. When the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means, there may be cases where the operation-prompting light prompting operation on the first operation means is executed, and cases where it is not executed. This provides the first operation means with a degree of confidentiality by not executing the operation-prompting light, even when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and is expected to effectively create a sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even if the first operation-related indicator is hidden and the system becomes capable of accepting an operation to the first operation means, the operation-promoting light will not be activated. However, if the first operation means is kept in an operating state, the system can accept an operation again even when the first operation-related indicator is hidden. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Also, even if the system becomes capable of accepting an operation to the first operation means when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the operation-promoting light is not necessarily activated. Therefore, although the operation is prompted by the first operation-related indicator, a certain degree of secrecy is maintained. Thus, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game through a method different from when the first operation-related indicator is hidden.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operation means (i.e., when the second operation-related indicator is displayed for a period of time), operation-prompting illumination to encourage operation on the second operation means may be performed (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 64-B, when the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it is possible to ensure that the situation where multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 64-B, if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, a situation may reappear where multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 65-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means, and separate from the first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, The system comprises: a first prompting light-emitting means capable of emitting an operation prompting light to prompt an operation on the first operating means; a second post-reception change-executing means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means; a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts an operation on the second operating means, and which, when the display is in a displayed state, allows the second operating means to be kept in an operating state, can receive multiple operation requests; and a second prompting light-emitting means capable of emitting an operation prompting light to prompt an operation on the second operating means, separate from the second operation-related display which prompts an operation on the second operating means, even when the first operation-related display is not displayed, the system can perform an operation prompting light on the first operating means. When an operation is received, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operating means is maintained in the operating state, multiple operation receptions may be made to the first operating means. Even when the second operation-related display is not shown, when an operation is received for the second operating means, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means is maintained in the operating state, multiple operation receptions may be made to the second operating means. After a situation occurs where the second operating means is maintained in the operating state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to operation receptions to the second operating means while the second operation-related display is not shown, the second operating means is returned to the operating state. If, despite being maintained, a situation arises in which no operation is received for the second operating means, even if the second operating means is kept in the operating state until the second operation-related display appears, the second operating means will not be asked to perform an operation again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed. Furthermore, since the first operation-prompt sound can be output when the first operation-related display is displayed, and the second operation-prompt sound can be output when the second operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that a situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means will be easily created, thereby providing a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 65-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 65-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and a situation arises where multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation request to the first operating means. Furthermore, even if, despite the first operating means being maintained in an operating state, no operation request is received for the first operating means, the first operating means may be maintained in an operating state until (and even after) the first operation-related indicator is displayed. If predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the situation where an operation request is received for the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state may reappear.

Furthermore, in this case, the first operation-related indicator can be displayed in any of a plurality of display modes, including the first and second modes. When the first operation-related indicator is displayed in the first mode, the first operation-prompting sound is not output, and when the first operation-related indicator is displayed in the second mode, the first operation-prompting sound is output. This allows for a degree of secrecy to be provided to the first operating means, even when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, by preventing the operation-prompting light emission from being performed depending on the display mode, thus effectively creating a sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even if the first operation prompt sound is not output when the first operation-related indicator is hidden and the system is in a state where operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted, if the first operation means is kept in an operating state until the first operation-related indicator is displayed and the predetermined acceptance conditions are met (and even after they are met), operation acceptance for the first operation means can be made again while the first operation-related indicator is displayed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Also, even if the system is in a state where operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output. Therefore, although operation is prompted by the first operation-related indicator, a certain degree of secrecy is maintained, and it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game in this "method different from when the first operation-related indicator is hidden."

Furthermore, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed (while operation reception for the second operation means is permitted, or when operation reception for the second operation means is permitted), the second operation accelerating sound may always be output. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the first operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a predetermined termination condition is met and further operation reception to the first operation means is no longer permitted, even when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed. Similarly, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may terminate when a specific termination condition is met and further operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted, even when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 65-B, when the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it is possible to ensure that the situation where multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related indicator is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 65-B, if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, a situation may reappear where multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

[Configuration 66-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the first operating means can be operated multiple times, a first promotion light emitting means that can perform operation promotion light to prompt operation to the first operating means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and an image display that prompts operation to the second operating means. Furthermore, when the image display is in a display state and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple operation requests can be made to the second operating means. The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, and a second promotion light-emitting means capable of performing operation-promoting light emission to encourage operation to the second operating means, separate from the second operation-related display which is an image display prompting operation to the second operating means. When the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted to the first operating means, operation-promoting light emission to encourage operation to the first operating means is possible. When the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted to the second operating means, operation-promoting light emission to encourage operation to the second operating means is possible. When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the second operating means are performed, the interval between the multiple executions of these post-reception changes may be less than or equal to a specific time.

In other words, in this case, when the operation-prompting light that encourages operation on the second operating means appears, there is a sense of expectation that the so-called auto-repeated button function will be suitably activated. Furthermore, when the auto-repeated button function is functioning, it becomes easier to recognize this, thus it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "specific time" in this configuration 66-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 66-B. Therefore, they may mean the same operating means, operation-related indicators, and times as "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may mean different operating means, operation-related indicators, and times. Also, they may mean the same "operating means," "operation-related indicator," and "time" as other operating means, operation-related indicators, and times with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means, there are two possibilities: either an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operation means (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance), or the operation-prompting light is not emitted (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance). However, in either situation, the interval between multiple operation requests to the first operation means while the first operation means is maintained in an operational state (the interval at which a change occurs after operation requests in the so-called auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time.

Furthermore, in this case, especially when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means, operation-prompting light emission to encourage operation on the second operation means is always possible (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the second operation-related indicator and its disappearance). However, while this operation-prompting light emission is being performed, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the second operation means (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) when the second operation means is maintained in an operational state may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time, or to be longer than a specific time.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-button function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval. Therefore, it is possible to relatively quickly recognize when the auto-button function is working or when it has stopped working. However, since the operation-promoting light is not necessarily executed when the first operation-related display is shown and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the first operating means, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-button function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after acceptance can be either relatively short or relatively long. This makes it relatively difficult to relatively quickly recognize when the auto-button function is working or when it has stopped working. However, since the operation-promoting light is always executed when the second operation-related display is shown and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the second operating means, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different kind of presentation than that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 66-B, the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

[Configuration 67-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the first operating means can receive operation requests multiple times, a first promotion light emitting means that can perform operation promotion light to prompt operation to the first operating means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and an image display that prompts operation to the second operating means The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, and when the image display is in a display state, the second operation means can be maintained in an operating state, allowing for multiple operation requests to be received from the second operation means; and a second promotion light-emitting means capable of emitting operation-promoting light to encourage operation to the second operation means, separate from the second operation-related display which is an image display prompting operation to the second operation means; wherein when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operation requests to the first operation means are permitted, operation-promoting light to encourage operation to the first operation means can be emitted; and when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operation requests to the second operation means are permitted, operation-promoting light to encourage operation to the second operation means can be emitted; and when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the second operation means are performed, the interval between the multiple executions of these post-reception changes can be set to a constant time.

In other words, in this case, when the operation-prompting light that encourages operation on the second operation means appears, there is a sense of expectation that the so-called auto-repeated button function will be suitably activated. Furthermore, when the auto-repeated button function is functioning, it becomes easier to recognize this, thus it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 67-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 67-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operation means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means, there are two possibilities: either an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operation means (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance), or the operation-prompting light is not emitted (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance). However, in either situation, the interval between multiple operation requests to the first operation means while the first operation means is maintained in an operating state (the interval at which a change occurs after operation requests in the so-called auto-repeated function) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

Furthermore, in this case, especially when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means, operation-prompting light emission to encourage operation on the second operation means is always possible (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the second operation-related indicator and its disappearance). However, while this operation-prompting light emission is being performed, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the second operation means (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) when the second operation means is maintained in an operational state may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after acceptance is set to a certain time (a predetermined time). Therefore, it is possible to recognize relatively early whether the auto-repeated button press function is working or has stopped working. However, since the operation-prompting light is not necessarily performed when the first operation-related display is shown and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the first operating means, it is expected that a sense of tension can be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after acceptance can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undetermined time (a time not predetermined). This makes it relatively difficult to recognize early on whether the auto-repeated button press function is working or has stopped working. However, since the operation-prompting light is always activated when the second operation-related display is shown and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the second operating means, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different visual presentation than that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 68-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, nor on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 68-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display, a first promotion light-emitting means that can perform operation-promoting light emission to prompt operation to the first operating means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and an image display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and the image display The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which allows for multiple operation requests to be received from the second operation means when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is in a display state, and a second promotion light-emitting means capable of emitting operation-promoting light to encourage operation to the second operation means, separate from the second operation-related display which is an image display prompting operation to the second operation means, wherein when the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operation requests to the first operation means are permitted, operation-promoting light to encourage operation to the first operation means can be emitted, and when the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operation requests to the second operation means are permitted, operation-promoting light to encourage operation to the second operation means can be emitted, and when the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operation means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the second operation means are performed, a corresponding post-non-operation display can be displayed.

In other words, in this case, even if the operation state is unintentionally released after the operation prompting light for the second operation means is activated and the second operation means is put into operation state, the player will be able to recognize this quickly, thus providing a sense of security. It should be noted that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 68-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 68-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operation means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means, there are two possibilities: either an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operation means (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance), or the operation-prompting light is not emitted (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance). However, in either situation, it is possible to ensure that a post-operation indicator is not displayed when the first operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the first operation means is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests have been executed.

Furthermore, in this case, especially when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means, an operation-prompting light to encourage operation on the second operation means is always performed. However, while the operation-prompting light is being performed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests have been performed, and then the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation indicator may be displayed.

With this configuration, regarding the first operating means, it is difficult to recognize early on when its operation state is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means ceases to function. Furthermore, since the operation-promoting light is not necessarily executed when the first operation-related display is shown and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the first operating means, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided both before and during operation of the first operating means. In contrast, regarding the second operating means, it is easy to recognize early on when its operation state is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means ceases to function. Furthermore, since the operation-promoting light is always executed when the second operation-related display is shown and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operating means, it is expected that a sense of tension can be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different kind of presentation than that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, there may be two possibilities: either a post-non-operation display is shown, or the post-non-operation display is not shown. With such a configuration, the second operating means may not necessarily be able to recognize early on when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means stops working, thus appropriately creating a sense of tension.

Furthermore, while configuration 68-B has been specified as the configuration when "the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means" and the configuration when "the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operating means," it is also possible to disregard the presence or absence of the first and second operation-related indicators and specify them in the same way as described above as the configuration when "multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means" and the configuration when "multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operating means." In other words, in this case, with respect to the first operating means, regardless of the presence or absence of the first operation-related indicator, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize early on when the operation state is canceled and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means stops working, and because operation-promoting light emission is not necessarily performed when multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means, it is possible to suitably provide a sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means. In contrast, regarding the second operating means, regardless of whether or not there is a second operation-related indicator, the system is designed to make it easier to recognize early on when the operation state is canceled and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means ceases to function. Furthermore, when the second operating means is allowed to accept multiple operations, the operation prompt illumination will always be performed.

[Configuration 69-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, operation reception to the first operating means can be performed multiple times, a first promotion light emitting means that can perform operation promotion light to prompt operation to the first operating means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and an image display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the image display is in a display state, When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which allows for multiple operation requests to be received for the second operating means, and a second promotion light-emitting means capable of performing operation-promoting light emission to encourage operation on the second operating means, separate from the second operation-related display, which is an image display prompting operation on the second operating means. When the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means, operation-promoting light emission to encourage operation on the first operating means is possible. When the second operating means is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operating means, operation-promoting light emission to encourage operation on the second operating means is possible. When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests are performed for the second operating means, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this can trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, even if the operation state is unintentionally released after the operation prompting light for the second operation means is activated and the second operation means is put into operation state, the player will be able to recognize this quickly, thus providing a sense of security. It should be noted that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in configuration 69-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 69-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operation means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means, there are two possibilities: either an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operation means (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance), or the operation-prompting light is not emitted (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance). However, in either situation, when the first operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while it is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests have been executed, it may be avoided that triggers the system to make the sound effect, which was audible at that time, inaudible.

Furthermore, in this case, especially when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means, an operation-prompting light is always emitted to encourage operation on the second operation means. However, while this operation-prompting light is being emitted, and the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests have been performed, if the second operation means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state.

With this configuration, regarding the first operating means, it is difficult to recognize early on when its operation state is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means ceases to function. Furthermore, since the operation-promoting light is not necessarily executed when the first operation-related display is shown and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the first operating means, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided both before and during operation of the first operating means. In contrast, regarding the second operating means, it is easy to recognize early on when its operation state is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means ceases to function. Furthermore, since the operation-promoting light is always executed when the second operation-related display is shown and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operating means, it is expected that a sense of tension can be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different kind of presentation than that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, this may trigger either the inability to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state, or the inability to make at least one of the sound effects in an inaudible state. With such a configuration, the second operating means may not necessarily be able to recognize early on when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means ceases to function, thus allowing for a more appropriate sense of tension to be created.

Furthermore, while configuration 69-B is specified as the configuration when "the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means" and the configuration when "the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operating means," alternatively, the configuration may be defined as the configuration when "multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means" and the configuration when "multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operating means," with the same content as described above, without regard to whether or not the first operation-related indicator or the second operation-related indicator is displayed. In other words, in this case, with respect to the first operating means, regardless of whether or not the first operation-related indicator is displayed, it is difficult to recognize early on when the operation state is canceled and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means stops working. In addition, since operation-promoting light emission is not necessarily performed when multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably provided both before and during operation of the first operating means. In contrast, regarding the second operating means, regardless of whether or not there is a second operation-related indicator, the system is designed to make it easier to recognize early on when the operation state is canceled and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means ceases to function. Furthermore, when the second operating means is allowed to accept multiple operations, the operation prompt illumination will always be performed.

[Configuration 70-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result is obtained, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the first operating means can receive operation multiple times, a first promotion light emitting means that can perform operation promotion light to prompt operation to the first operating means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means, a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and an image display that prompts operation to the second operating means, and when the second operating means is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which can accept multiple operations for the second operation means, and a second promotion light-emitting means capable of performing operation-promoting light emission to encourage operations for the second operation means, separate from the second operation-related display, which is an image display that prompts operations for the second operation means. When the first operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the first operation means, operation-promoting light emission to encourage operations for the first operation means can be performed. When the second operation-related display is displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the second operation means, operation-promoting light emission to encourage operations for the second operation means can be performed. When the second operation means is put into a non-operated state while a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation acceptance for the second operation means, and then the second operation means is put back into the operating state from the non-operated state, this can trigger the change to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time inaudible. This is expected to suggest that the second operation means has been put back into the operating state and an operation acceptance has been made.

Furthermore, the terms "first operating means," "second operating means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in relation to configuration 70-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of configuration 70-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operating means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operating means or operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operating means" or "operation-related indicators" as those with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means, there are two possibilities: either an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operation means (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance), or the operation-prompting light is not emitted (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance). However, in either situation, if the first operation means is deactivated while a post-reception change in response to an operation request is occurring, and then the first operation means is reactivated from that deactivated state, it may be avoided by not deactivating the sound effect that was audible at that point.

Furthermore, in this case, especially when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means, an operation-prompting light is always emitted to encourage operation on the second operation means. However, if the second operation means is deactivated while this operation-prompting light is being emitted and a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation request to the second operation means, and then the second operation means is deactivated again from the deactivated state, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time.

With this configuration, for the first operating means, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means is interrupted and then the first operating means is operated again, it is difficult to recognize that the input has been properly received. Furthermore, when the first operation-related display is shown and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the first operating means, the operation-prompting light is not necessarily executed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably provided when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means is activated. In contrast, for the second operating means, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means is interrupted and then the second operating means is operated again, it is easier to recognize that the input has been properly received. Furthermore, when the second operation-related display is shown and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operating means, the operation-prompting light is always executed. Therefore, it is expected that the decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means is interrupted will be suppressed.

Furthermore, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been executed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and then the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and then changed back to an operating state, only if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that time, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state. Such a configuration is expected to suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means is interrupted, while also suitably providing a sense of tension.

Furthermore, while configuration 70-B is specified as the configuration when "the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means" and the configuration when "the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means," alternatively, the configuration may be defined as the configuration when "multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means" and the configuration when "multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means," using the same content as described above, without regard to whether the first or second operation-related indicator is displayed.

[Configuration 71-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the first operating means, a first promotion sound output means that can output a first operation promotion sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means The system comprises a second post-reception change execution means capable of performing a change, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts operation on the second operation means, and which allows for multiple operation receptions to be made to the second operation means when the display is in a displayed state and the second operation means is maintained in an operated state, and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation accelerating sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, wherein the first operation accelerating sound can be output when the first operation-related display is displayed, and the second operation accelerating sound can be output when the second operation-related display is displayed, and when the post-reception change in response to an operation reception to the second operation means is performed multiple times while the second operation means is maintained in an operated state, the interval between the multiple executions of the post-reception change may be less than or equal to a specific time.

In other words, in this case, when the second operation prompt sound prompting operation on the second operation means is output, there is a sense of expectation that the so-called auto-repeated button function will be suitably activated. Furthermore, when the auto-repeated button function is functioning, it becomes easier to recognize this, thus it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "specific time" in this configuration 71-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 71-B. Therefore, they may mean the same operation means, operation-related indicators, and times as "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," "second operation-related indicator," and "specific time" in other configurations, or they may mean different operation means, operation-related indicators, and times. Also, they may mean the same "operation means," "operation-related indicator," and "time" as other operation means, operation-related indicators, and times with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is shown, there are cases where the first operation cues are output and cases where they are not. In either case, the interval between multiple operation requests to the first operation means while the first operation-related display is displayed and the first operation means is maintained in an operational state (the interval at which a change occurs after receiving an operation request in the so-called auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time.

Furthermore, in this case, especially when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, the second operation cues are always output. However, when the second operation means is maintained in an operated state while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the second operation means (the interval at which operation reception is performed automatically) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time, or to be longer than a specific time.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-button function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval. Therefore, it is possible to relatively quickly recognize when the auto-button function is working or when it has stopped working. However, when the first operation-related display is shown, the first operation accelerating sound is not necessarily output. This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of the game while providing a sense of tension. In contrast, when the so-called auto-button function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after acceptance can be either relatively short or relatively long. This makes it relatively difficult to relatively quickly recognize when the auto-button function is working or when it has stopped working. However, when the second operation-related display is shown, the second operation accelerating sound is always output. This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of the game while providing a sense of tension through a different presentation than that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 71-B, the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

[Configuration 72-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the first operating means, a first promotion sound output means that can output a first operation promotion sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and a reception in response to an operation reception made to the second operating means The system comprises a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-change, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display that prompts operation on the second operation means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operation means can be operated multiple times, and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation accelerating sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, wherein the first operation accelerating sound can be output when the first operation-related display is displayed, and the second operation accelerating sound can be output when the second operation-related display is displayed, and when the second operation means is operated and a post-reception change in response to an operation is executed multiple times, the interval between the execution of the post-reception change multiple times can be set to a constant time.

In other words, in this case, when the second operation prompt sound prompting operation on the second operation means is output, there is a sense of expectation that the so-called auto-repeated button function will be suitably activated. Furthermore, when the auto-repeated button function is functioning, it becomes easier to recognize this, thus it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained. Note that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 72-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 72-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related indicators. They may also refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operation means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related display is shown, there are two possibilities: that the first operation cues are output, and that the first operation cues are not output. However, in either situation, the interval between multiple operation requests to the first operation means while the first operation means is maintained in an operational state (the interval at which a change occurs after receiving an operation request in the so-called auto-repeated function) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

Furthermore, in this case, especially when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, the second operation cues are always output. However, when the second operation means is maintained in an operated state while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, the interval between multiple post-operation changes in response to the operation reception to the second operation means (the interval at which operation reception is performed automatically) may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-button function is enabled for the first operating means, the interval between changes after reception is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). Therefore, it is relatively easy to recognize when the auto-button function is working or has stopped working. However, when the first operation-related display is shown, the first operation accelerating sound is not necessarily output. This allows for maintaining a sense of tension while appropriately preserving the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-button function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between changes after reception can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an unspecified time (an unpredictable time). This makes it relatively difficult to recognize when the auto-button function is working or has stopped working. However, when the second operation-related display is shown, the second operation accelerating sound is always output. This allows for maintaining a sense of tension while appropriately preserving the enjoyment of the game through a different presentation than that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration 72-B, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, nor on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

[Configuration 73-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the first operating means, a first promotion sound output means that can output a first operation promotion sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and a second The system comprises a means for executing a change after receiving a request, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts operation on the second operation means, and which allows for multiple operation requests to be received on the second operation means when the display is in a displayed state and the second operation means is maintained in an operated state, and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation accelerating sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, wherein the first operation accelerating sound can be output when the first operation-related display is displayed, the second operation accelerating sound can be output when the second operation-related display is displayed, and when the second operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the second operation means is maintained in an operated state and multiple changes after receiving a request for operation on the second operation means are executed, a corresponding post-non-operation display can be displayed.

In other words, in this case, even if the second operation prompt sound prompting the player to operate the second operation means is output and the second operation means is put into operation state, the player will be able to quickly recognize this, thus providing a sense of security. It should be noted that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 73-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 73-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operation means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, there are cases where the first operation accelerating sound is output and cases where the first operation accelerating sound is not output. However, in either situation, it is possible to ensure that when the first operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, a corresponding non-operation display is not shown.

In this case, especially when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, the second operation accelerating sound is always output. However, if the second operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, a corresponding non-operation display may be shown.

With this configuration, the first operating means is designed to make it difficult to recognize early on when its operation state is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means ceases to function. Furthermore, since the first operation cues are not necessarily output when the first operation-related display is shown, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably provided both before and during operation of the first operating means. In contrast, the second operating means is designed to make it easier to recognize early on when its operation state is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means ceases to function. Furthermore, since the second operation cues are always output when the second operation-related display is shown, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different presentation than that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, it may be possible to have both a post-non-operation display shown and a post-non-operation display not shown. With such a configuration, the second operating means may not necessarily be able to recognize early when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means stops working, thus appropriately creating a sense of tension.

[Configuration 74-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display which prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the first operating means, a first promotion sound output means that can output a first operation promotion sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means, and The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display, which is a display prompting operation on the second operation means, and which allows for multiple operation requests to be received on the second operation means when the display is in a displayed state; and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation accelerating sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed. The system is configured such that when the first operation-related display is displayed, the first operation accelerating sound can be output, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operation accelerating sound can be output. Furthermore, when the second operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the second operation means is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes corresponding to operation requests to the second operation means are performed, this can trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state.

In other words, in this case, even if the second operation prompt sound prompting the player to operate the second operation means is output and the second operation means is put into operation state, the player will be able to quickly recognize this, thus providing a sense of security. It should be noted that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 74-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 74-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operation means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, there are two possibilities: that the first operation accelerating sound is output, and that the first operation accelerating sound is not output. However, in either situation, when the first operation means changes from an operational state to a non-operational state while the first operation-related indicator is displayed, it is possible to prevent the sound effect, which was audible at that time, from becoming inaudible as a result.

Furthermore, in this case, especially when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, the second operation accelerating sound is always output. However, if the second operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state.

With this configuration, the first operating means is designed to make it difficult to recognize early on when its operation state is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means ceases to function. Furthermore, since the first operation cues are not necessarily output when the first operation-related display is shown, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably provided both before and during operation of the first operating means. In contrast, the second operating means is designed to make it easier to recognize early on when its operation state is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means ceases to function. Furthermore, since the second operation cues are always output when the second operation-related display is shown, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different presentation than that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, this may trigger either the inability to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state, or the inability to make at least one of the sound effects in an inaudible state. With such a configuration, the second operating means may not necessarily be able to recognize early on when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means ceases to function, thus allowing for a more appropriate sense of tension to be created.

[Configuration 75-B]
Furthermore, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are first and second operating means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means, and when the first operating means is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation receptions can be made to the first operating means, a first promotion sound output means that can output a first operation promotion sound corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the second operating means. The system includes a stage, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which prompts operation on the second operation means, and when the display is in a displayed state, the second operation means can be kept in an operating state, allowing for multiple operation receptions to be made on the second operation means, and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation accelerating sound corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed, wherein the first operation accelerating sound can be output when the first operation-related display is displayed, and the second operation accelerating sound can be output when the second operation-related display is displayed, and if the second operation means is put into a non-operating state while the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception on the second operation means is occurring, and then the second operation means is put back into the operating state from the non-operating state, this can trigger the change to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time inaudible.

In other words, in this case, even if the second operation prompt sound prompting the player to operate the second operation means is output and the second operation means is put into operation state, the player will be able to quickly recognize this, thus providing a sense of security. It should be noted that the terms "first operation means," "second operation means," "first operation-related indicator," and "second operation-related indicator" in this configuration 75-B are merely designations used to explain the technical concept of this configuration 75-B. Therefore, they may refer to the same operation means or operation-related indicators as those in other configurations, or they may refer to different operation means or operation-related indicators. Furthermore, they may refer to the same "operation means" or "operation-related indicator" as other operation means or operation-related indicators with different names in other configurations.

In this case, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, there are two possibilities: that the first operation accelerating sound is output, and that the first operation accelerating sound is not output. However, in either situation, if the first operation-related indicator is displayed and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception of the first operation means has occurred, and the first operation means is then deactivated, and then the first operation means is deactivated again from the deactivated state, it may be possible to prevent the sound effect, which was audible at that time, from becoming inaudible as a result of this deactivation.

Furthermore, in this case, especially when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, the second operation accelerating sound is always output. However, if the second operation-related indicator is displayed and a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation reception to the second operation means, and the second operation means is then deactivated, and then the second operation means is deactivated again from the deactivated state, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time.

With this configuration, regarding the first operating means, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means is interrupted and then the first operating means is operated again, it is difficult to recognize that the input has been properly received. Furthermore, since the first operation accelerating sound is not necessarily output when the first operation-related display is shown, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably provided when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means is activated. In contrast, regarding the second operating means, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means is interrupted and then the second operating means is operated again, it is easier to recognize that the input has been properly received. Furthermore, since the second operation accelerating sound is always output when the second operation-related display is shown, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different presentation than that of the first operating means.

Furthermore, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been executed in response to an operation received by the second operating means, and then the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and then changed back to an operating state, only if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that time, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state. Such a configuration is expected to suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means is interrupted, while also suitably providing a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations (configurations 1-A to 40-A, configurations 1-B to 75-B), even during the period when the operation-related display (first predetermined mode and first specific mode) corresponding to the first operating means is displayed, there may be both a state where automatic rapid-fire is possible and a state where automatic rapid-fire is not possible. The state where automatic rapid-fire is not possible may be, for example, the state immediately after the operation-related display (first predetermined mode and first specific mode) corresponding to the first operating means is displayed (just before the state where operation acceptance is permitted), or the state immediately before the operation-related display (first predetermined mode and first specific mode) corresponding to the first operating means is hidden (immediately after the state where operation acceptance is permitted ends), or any other state.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, even during the period when the operation-related display (second predetermined mode and second specific mode) corresponding to the second operating means is displayed, there may be both a state where automatic rapid-fire is possible and a state where automatic rapid-fire is not possible. The state where automatic rapid-fire is not possible may be, for example, the state immediately after the operation-related display (second predetermined mode and second specific mode) corresponding to the second operating means is displayed (just before the state where operation acceptance is permitted), or the state immediately before the operation-related display (second predetermined mode and second specific mode) corresponding to the second operating means is hidden (immediately after the state where operation acceptance is permitted ends), or any other state.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, the first operation-related display (first predetermined mode, first specific mode, etc.) and the second operation-related display (second predetermined mode, second specific mode, etc.) may be displayed when no symbol changes are occurring (for example, during a jackpot game, or between the end of a symbol change and the start of the next symbol change), or they may be displayed over multiple symbol changes (for example, an image display indicating that a post-reception change (for example, a so-called hold change) that suggests the "expected probability of a jackpot symbol appearing in a symbol change that is in the hold state" is within an effective period).

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, even if the first operation-related display is hidden from its state in the first predetermined mode, it may not be redisplayed in the first specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, there may be multiple conditions for the display of the first operation-related display, and it may be displayed based on the fulfillment of any of these conditions. Similarly, there may be multiple conditions for the display of the second operation-related display, and it may be displayed based on the fulfillment of any of these conditions. There may also be multiple conditions for the hiding of the first operation-related display, and it may be hidden based on the fulfillment of any of these conditions. Similarly, there may be multiple conditions for the hiding of the second operation-related display, and it may be hidden based on the fulfillment of any of these conditions. Examples of conditions for displaying the first and second operation-related displays include obtaining a special result in the jackpot determination, selecting a special variation pattern for the symbol variation, obtaining a special result in the performance determination based on ball entry into the starting slot (such as a pre-read determination), or a predetermined time elapsed since the start of the jackpot game state. Examples of conditions for hiding the first and second operation-related displays include obtaining a special result in the performance determination corresponding to the operation reception, or the end of a predetermined display time.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, if the first operation-related display is newly displayed in the first specific mode before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first operation-related display displayed in the first predetermined mode was hidden, the "time from when the first operation-related display displayed in the first predetermined mode was hidden until the first operation-related display was newly displayed in the first specific mode" may be set to a predetermined time (always a constant time). In other words, in this case, it may be possible to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game during the period from when the first operation-related display displayed in the first predetermined mode was hidden until the predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, the post-reception change when an operation is received by the first operating means while the first operation-related indicator is displayed in a first predetermined manner, and the post-reception change when an operation is received by the first operating means while the first operation-related indicator is displayed in a first specific manner, may be the same change or different changes. Similarly, the post-reception change when an operation is received by the second operating means while the second operation-related indicator is displayed in a second predetermined manner, and the post-reception change when an operation is received by the second operating means while the second operation-related indicator is displayed in a second specific manner, may be the same change or different changes.

For example, if the post-operation change when an operation is received by the first operating means while the first operation-related indicator is displayed in a first predetermined manner is the same as the post-operation change when an operation is received by the first operating means while the first operation-related indicator is displayed in a first specific manner, but the post-operation change when an operation is received by the second operating means while the second operation-related indicator is displayed in a second predetermined manner is different from the post-operation change when an operation is received by the second operating means while the second operation-related indicator is displayed in a second specific manner, then it is desirable that when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, the user is encouraged to focus on the dramatic effect of whether the first operation-related indicator will reappear within a predetermined time, and when the second operation-related indicator is displayed, the user is encouraged to focus on the dramatic effect of what kind of post-operation change will appear depending on its display manner.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, it is desirable that the post-operation change when an operation is received by the first operating means and the post-operation change when an operation is received by the second operating means do not appear as the same change.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, the change after reception may or may not indicate the probability of winning a jackpot. In cases where the probability of winning a jackpot is not indicated, for example, it can be implemented by indicating the probability of transitioning to a high-probability game state where the probability of winning a jackpot is high during a jackpot game state, by showing the score in a mini-game, or by simply using it as a decorative element that repeatedly lights up.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined manner (the interval until a new change after reception appears), and the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the first operating means while the first operation-related display is displayed in a first specific manner (the interval until a new change after reception appears), may be the same time (interval).

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, as will be described later, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode, it is possible to have both a post-reception output sound that does not terminate the output state upon detection that the second operation means has become non-operated, and a post-reception output sound that terminates the output state upon detection that the second operation means has become non-operated, as one of the post-reception changes.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, it is possible to simultaneously output a "post-reception output sound that does not terminate upon detection of the second operating means becoming inactive" and a "post-reception output sound that terminates upon detection of the second operating means becoming inactive."

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, if the second operating means is detected to be in an operating state while the "reception output sound that does not terminate upon detection of the second operating means becoming inactive" is being output, the "reception output sound that does not terminate upon detection of the second operating means becoming inactive" may be made to continue without being made inaudible, or it may be made to be made inaudible.

For example, in each of the above configurations, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined manner, a post-reception output sound that does not terminate the output state can be output as one of the post-reception changes triggered by the detection that the second operation means has become inactive. However, if the second operation means is detected to have become active again while this post-reception output sound is being output, the post-reception output sound may be made inaudible as a result of this detection. On the other hand, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific manner, a post-reception output sound that does not terminate the output state can be output as one of the post-reception changes triggered by the detection that the second operation means has become inactive. However, if the second operation means is detected to have become active again while this post-reception output sound is being output, the post-reception output sound may not be made inaudible as a result of this detection.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined manner, it may be configured so that there is no case where a post-reception output sound, which terminates the output state upon detection that the second operation means has become non-operated, is output as one of the post-reception changes, and only cases where a post-operation output sound is output that does not terminate the output state upon detection that the second operation means has become non-operated.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined manner, a post-reception output sound, which does not terminate its output state upon detection that the second operation means has become non-operational, may be output as one of the post-reception changes. However, if detection occurs that the second operation means has become operational again while the post-reception output sound is being output, there may be two possibilities: either the post-reception output sound is made inaudible upon such detection, or it may not be made inaudible. It may also be possible for any of these types of sounds to be in an output state.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, the post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first or second operating means does not necessarily have to be the output of a post-reception sound or display; any change that occurs is sufficient.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operation means, there are two cases: one in which so-called auto-repeated pressing (long press) is enabled (multiple operation attempts are made simply by putting the second operation means into operation mode), and another in which so-called auto-repeated pressing (long press) is not enabled (multiple operation attempts are not made simply by putting the second operation means into operation mode). However, when the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the first operation means, there is no case in which so-called auto-repeated pressing (long press) is not enabled (multiple operation attempts are not made simply by putting the first operation means into operation mode); instead, so-called auto-repeated pressing (long press) is always enabled (multiple operation attempts are made simply by putting the first operation means into operation mode).

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode, the number of times the post-reception output sound can be generated multiple times by maintaining the second operation means in the operated state may be less than the number of times the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the second operation means without maintaining it in the operated state. Conversely, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode, the number of times the post-reception output sound can be generated multiple times by maintaining the second operation means in the operated state may be the same as, or greater than, the number of times the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the second operation means without maintaining it in the operated state. With such a configuration, the usefulness of the so-called auto-repeated button function will differ depending on whether the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, the maximum number of times a post-reception change can occur when the first operation means is maintained in the operating state during the period from when the first operation-related display is shown until it is hidden may be greater than the maximum number of times a post-reception change can occur when the second operation means is maintained in the operating state during the period from when the second operation-related display is shown until it is hidden.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, if the second operation-related display is displayed in a second predetermined manner, and the second operation means is in a non-operational state, and the post-reception output sound (one of the post-reception changes, which is the post-reception output sound) corresponding to the reception of an operation to the second operation means is in an output state, then when the second operation means changes from a non-operational state to an operational state, at least one of the sound effects that is in an output state at that time may be made inaudible (output terminated) as a result, or it may not be made inaudible (output terminated). Conversely, in each of the above configurations, if the second operation-related display is displayed in a second specific manner, and the second operation means is in a non-operational state, and the post-reception output sound (one of the post-reception changes, which is the post-reception output sound) corresponding to the reception of an operation to the second operation means is in an output state, then when the second operation means changes from a non-operational state to an operational state, at least one of the sound effects that is in an output state at that time may not be made inaudible (output terminated) as a result. With this configuration, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed in the second specific mode, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether a re-operation to the second operation means has been accepted. When the second operation-related indicator is displayed in the second predetermined mode, it is sometimes made easier to recognize whether a re-operation to the second operation means has been accepted, while still making it difficult to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained while maintaining a sense of tension. Note that "at least one of the sound effects" may be a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance, or it may be background music or other sound effects instead of a post-acceptance output sound.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, while the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, no display change occurs as a result. However, while the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, there may or may not be cases where a display change occurs as a result. With such a configuration, during the period when the first operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether the first operating means is being kept in an operating state. During the period when the second operation-related display is displayed, it is expected that the game's enjoyment can be suitably maintained while maintaining a sense of tension, as it is sometimes made easier to recognize whether the second operating means is being kept in an operating state, while still making it difficult to recognize.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, if the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode and the second operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, no display change may occur as a result. However, if the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode and the second operation means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, a display change may occur as a result. With such a configuration, when the second operation-related display is shown, the ease of recognizing whether or not the second operation means is maintained in an operated state will differ depending on the mode in which it is displayed, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, even if a display change occurs when the second operating means is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, it is possible to ensure that no new audible sound is output as a result of this non-operating state.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, the operation-related indicators (first operation-related indicator, second operation-related indicator, etc.) do not necessarily have to be displayed in conjunction with the occurrence of a state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the operation means. For example, they may be displayed during gameplay to explain the operation of the operation buttons, or to explain the meaning of the effects (such as the expected value), even though operation acceptance is not permitted, by displaying a mock image of the operation target. Alternatively, a state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the operation means may occur even when no operation-related indicators (first operation-related indicator, second operation-related indicator, etc.) are displayed.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, the operation-related indicators (first operation-related indicator, second operation-related indicator, etc.) may be hidden while the state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the operating means continues, or the operation-related indicators (first operation-related indicator, second operation-related indicator, etc.) may not be hidden when the state in which operation acceptance for the operating means ends, but may remain displayed.

In short, the operation-related indicators (first operation-related indicator, second operation-related indicator, etc.) only need to be such that when the operation-related indicator is displayed, it may be permissible to accept operation from the corresponding operation means (first operation means, second operation means).

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, the operation-related displays (first operation-related display, second operation-related display, etc.) may be imitation images of the target of operation (operating means), or they may be textual information prompting operation on the target of operation ("Press," "Pull," "Press repeatedly," etc.). Anything that prompts operation is acceptable.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described above and below, "a constant interval until a new post-reception change occurs" simply means that a new post-reception change occurs at a predetermined time interval; it does not necessarily have to occur at the same time interval every time. For example, the time between the first post-reception change (when the operating means is put into operation mode) and the second post-reception change (auto-repeated button press function) is set to 0.5 seconds, but thereafter, the post-reception changes (auto-repeated button press function) may be executed at 0.2-second intervals. In this way, "a constant interval until a new post-reception change occurs" can be achieved by including multiple "predetermined time intervals."

Furthermore, within each of the above configurations, there are descriptions of different means (configurations), such as "first post-reception change execution means" and "second post-reception change execution means." In realizing these means (configurations), each means may be configured separately as different hardware (or software), or as the same hardware (or software), or one of each means may be composed of multiple hardware (or software), with one of those hardware (or software) components also comprising the other means. In short, as long as a single gaming machine as a whole constructs each means (each configuration), there are no limitations on how those means (configurations) are constructed.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, unless otherwise specified, such as when it states "displayed after a certain amount of time has elapsed," the event may occur across multiple symbol changes, or it may only occur across multiple symbol changes. In fact, the symbol changes themselves do not necessarily have to occur.

Furthermore, the function that allows multiple operation receptions to occur simply by maintaining the target object in an operating state, thereby executing multiple post-reception changes in response to those receptions, is sometimes described as an "auto-repeated button function" or "long-press function" for convenience of explanation. However, this is not limited to push-button type targets. For example, with pull-type targets such as levers, "simply maintaining the pulled state allows multiple operation receptions to occur, thereby executing multiple post-reception changes in response to those receptions." For convenience of explanation, this may also be described as an "auto-repeated button function" or "long-press function." Various other types of targets can be used for this purpose, including proximity-type and contact-type targets (where the operating state corresponds to a "proximity state"), rotation-type and rotatable targets (where the operating state corresponds to a "rotated or rotatable state"), and pull-out type targets (where the operating state corresponds to a "pushed-out state").

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, the statement "If a situation arises in which no operation is received for the second operating means despite the second operating means being maintained in an operating state, even if the second operating means continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, no further operation reception will be performed for the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state" is intended to include "a single operation state in which only one operation reception for the second operating means is permitted." However, it is obvious that no further operation reception will be performed for the second operating means in such a single operation state. This is because, in a single operation reception state in which only one operation reception for the second operating means is permitted, an operation reception for the second operating means is usually performed only once, triggered by the detection that the second operating means has switched from an inoperable state (off) to an operating state (on). In other words, in an operation that "maintains the operating state," such detection from off to on does not occur, and it is clear that no operation reception will be performed for the second operating means. Furthermore, the same principle applies even in situations where "multiple inputs are allowed for the second control method, but the so-called auto-tap function (long-press function) is not enabled."

In this regard, the technical feature of the above configuration is that, "if a situation arises in which no operation is received for the second operating means despite the second operating means being kept in an operating state, even if the second operating means continues to be kept in an operating state thereafter, no further operation reception will be performed for the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state," includes "a state in which multiple operation receptions for the second operating means are permitted and the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled." In other words, in "a state in which multiple operation receptions for the second operating means are permitted and the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) can be enabled," multiple post-reception changes occur through the auto-repeated function (long-press function) based on the detection that the second operating means is kept in an operating state (more precisely, the detection that the second operating means is in an operating state (on) at predetermined processing unit time intervals). Therefore, even if a state occurs where "multiple operation requests to the second operating means are permitted and the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) can be activated," ensuring that "if an operation request to the second operating means is not received despite the second operating means being kept in an operating state, then even if the second operating means continues to be kept in an operating state thereafter, operation requests to the second operating means will not be received again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state" would involve ignoring detection results sufficient to determine it as a "valid operation" in the control system. This is different from the aforementioned "single operation reception state" where detection results sufficient to determine it as a "valid operation" (on → off) are not obtained, and therefore presents difficulties.

In fact, if a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means despite it being kept in an operating state, continuing to maintain the first operating means in that state will result in multiple post-reception changes corresponding to operation reception for the first operating means, based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. This means that in a state where "multiple operation receptions for the operating means are permitted and the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) can be activated," simply maintaining the operating means in an operating state is sufficient to obtain a detection result that determines it as a "valid operation."

Furthermore, even if a "single-operation reception state in which operation reception to the first operating means is permitted" occurs, a change after reception may occur only once based on the detection of the previously maintained operation state of the first operating means. However, it is desirable that this single change after reception does not occur based on the detection of the "previously maintained operation state of the first operating means." Alternatively, the only state in which operation reception to the first operating means is permitted may be "a state in which operation reception to the first operating means is permitted multiple times and the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) can be activated," thereby preventing a single change after reception from occurring based on the detection of the "previously maintained operation state of the first operating means."

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, the first post-reception change execution means is implemented as a means that "can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operation means." In short, it is sufficient if it is implemented as a means that, when an operation is performed on the first operation means, the operation is detected and a post-detection change (for example, a display change, a movable body movement, a light emission change, a sound output change (playback, stop), etc.) is produced in response to that detection. Similarly, the second post-reception change execution means is implemented as a means that "can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means." In short, it is sufficient if it is implemented as a means that, when an operation is performed on the second operation means, the operation is detected and a post-detection change (for example, a display change, a movable body movement, a light emission change, a sound output change (playback, stop), etc.) is produced in response to that detection.

Furthermore, in each of the above configurations, it is desirable that a display change after reception may occur as one of the post-reception changes in response to operation reception by the first operating means, and it is also desirable that a display change after reception may occur as one of the post-reception changes in response to operation reception by the second operating means. However, it is sufficient that a display change after reception may occur as one of the post-reception changes in response to operation reception by the first operating means, and that such a display change may not occur. Similarly, it is sufficient that a display change after reception may occur as one of the post-reception changes in response to operation reception by the second operating means, and that such a display change may not occur.

[Other configurations]
As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a period of acceptance (operation-permitted state) occurs in which an opportunity to operate the operation unit is granted, an operation-related display associated with the occurrence of the acceptance-permitted period is displayed (for example, a mock image display that mimics the operation receiving unit, or an image displayed when the valid period occurs (such as an ally character or an enemy character)). For example, the mock image display may be displayed as an integrated mock image display (see Figure 144) that is integrated with a peripheral decorative image that decorates its periphery. It is desirable that such an integrated mock image display be displayed in both the acceptance-permitted period (operation-permitted state) that occurs when the symbol performance progresses to a specific timing during an SP reach, and the acceptance-permitted period (operation-permitted state) that occurs as a result of a notification judgment in a variation pattern that does not develop into an SP reach, and it is also desirable that it be displayed in both low-expectancy non-suppressive acceptance performances and high-expectancy suppressive acceptance performances.

As explained with reference to Figures 144 and 145, or as described in other examples and modifications thereof, details of such operation-related displays will be omitted here. For example, a display area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decorative image.
Similarly, multiple modes with different levels of expectation are provided for operation-related displays (see Figure 144), and the display will be shown in one of these modes. However, such mock-image displays do not necessarily have to be displayed as integrated mock-image displays combined with the peripheral decorative images.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 described in this example, when a period of acceptance (operation-permitted state) occurs in which the control unit is given an opportunity to operate, an operation-related sound (e.g., an acceptance sound) associated with the occurrence of this acceptance period may be audibly output, thereby making it less likely for the user to forget to operate the unit. Here, an "acceptance sound" is a sound that, once output, will inevitably occur during the duration of the output (while the sound data is assigned), or indicates that an acceptance period (reception period) has already occurred. In other words, an "acceptance sound" indicates that an operation acceptance state has been reached, or that an operation acceptance state will be reached, and it can be said that this sound will not be output when an effect unrelated to the acceptance period (reception period) is being performed.

As mentioned above, this pachinko machine 1 provides multiple acceptance periods (operational acceptance states) with different types of post-acceptance changes (e.g., post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, etc.) that appear when a machine is activated. Each acceptance period (operational acceptance state) has defined conditions for occurrence, and when any one of these conditions is met, the acceptance period (operational acceptance state) of the type corresponding to the met condition becomes available.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple control units (for example, control buttons 410 and sword ornaments 5001) that receive input from the player. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is capable of generating a reception period (multiple operation allowance period) during which not just one control unit, but several (multiple) control units, can be allowed to accept input. However, this configuration is not mandatory.

The details of the pachinko machine 1, which includes the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" and "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 75-B," etc., will be described below with reference to the figures. However, when realizing these inventions, it is only necessary to appropriately select and partially include only the configurations necessary to obtain the desired effects from each of the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to include all of them. For example, depending on the type of problem to be solved (the intended effects) (the type of invention), it is not necessarily the case that there is no reception period during which several (multiple) operating parts can be allowed to accept operations (multiple operation allowance period) (it is also possible that there is no reception period during which only one operating part can accept operations), or that there is no operating part that can accept multiple operations, or that there is no operating part that can accept only one operation, or that the automatic button function and auto rapid-fire function are not activated. Furthermore, with reference to Figures 145 and above, the above-mentioned reception periods do not necessarily have to be included, or only the configurations necessary to obtain the desired effects are appropriately selected and partially included from each of those configurations. In other words, for each configuration described in the specification below, if you wish to obtain further effects from any one of the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" and "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 75-B", you can arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration corresponding to that effect. Furthermore, in the examples described below, for the convenience of explaining the gaming machine as having all of the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" and "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 75-B", we will illustrate the case where all configurations are present. However, each of the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" and "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 75-B" (technical concepts) does not necessarily have to have the "configurations present in the other configurations (technical concepts)" exemplified below. For example, it goes without saying that you can replace the "configurations present in the other configurations (technical concepts)" exemplified below with a different configuration, or you can omit the "configurations present in the other configurations (technical concepts)" exemplified below.

First, for the sake of clarity, we will begin by explaining the case where the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" from the above-mentioned "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" and "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 75-B".

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "First A Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state). Figure 146 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "First A Acceptance State" is generated based on the fulfillment of "Condition 1A" as the generation condition, and the player performs an operation. Figure 147 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "First A Acceptance State" is generated but the player does not perform an operation. Figure 148 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the "First A Acceptance State" is generated.

Now, assuming the starting conditions are met (holding is processed) and the "1st A variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement performance determination) corresponding to the "1st A variation pattern." After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ (such as performance depiction according to the 1st A variation pattern, or sound output of BGM according to the 1st A variation pattern (such as normal BGM playback when not reaching)), and within the execution period of this variation performance, it additionally executes a performance (pre-announcement performance) according to the result of the pre-announcement performance determination, in addition to the performance of the selected "1st A variation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 146(c), during the execution period of the variation effect related to the "1st A variation pattern," based on the arrival of timing tAa2, which is the 1st A time elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the fulfillment of "Condition 1A"), the above-mentioned 1st A reception permission state (valid period) is made possible, allowing for "reception of operations to the 1st A operation unit regarding changes after 1st A reception (such as the 1st A effect status indication display JA1, the 1st A rapid-fire display HA1, and the 1st A reception output sounds SA1, SB1, etc.)" (the situation shown in Figure 148(a)).

In this embodiment, the "first A operation unit" that allows operation reception in the first A reception-permitted state is set as the operation button 410, and multiple operation receptions are permitted before the first A reception-permitted state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figures 146(b) to (e), when the first A acceptance state occurs, a mock image display MG-A1 that mimics the target of the player's operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the first A operation unit), a message display MA1 related to the operation on the target of the operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the first A operation unit), and a status indication display JA1 that suggests the status of the operation are displayed at a timing tAa1 that occurs before the first A acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance to the first A operation unit is permitted).

However, the mock image display MG-A1, message display MA1, and status indication display JA1 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the first A acceptance state occurs. They may be displayed simultaneously with the occurrence of the first A acceptance state, or slightly later. In particular, the status indication display JA1 may not be displayed until the first operation is received by the first A operation unit in the first A acceptance state; that is, it may be implemented to appear and be displayed only after an operation is received by the first A operation unit. Furthermore, the timing of the display of the mock image display MG-A1 and the timing of the display of the message display MA1 may be different. For example, the message display MA1 may be displayed before the display of the mock image display MG-A1.

The image display MG-A1, message display MA1, and status indication display JA1 will continue to be displayed once they are started, regardless of the operating status of the 1A operation unit, at least until the 1A reception acceptance state ends.

Here, the "Image Display MG-A1" corresponding to the first A acceptance state is configured to selectively use either a "first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" or a "second color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme. For example, the color scheme determined based on the results of a performance judgment is used for display.

Furthermore, the "Mock Image Display MG-A1" corresponding to the 1A acceptance state is configured such that when the portion mimicking the "operation receiving unit" (the object of operation) is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α), and then sequentially displayed in the manners shown in Figures 144(β) to (σ), this periodic change repeats with a predetermined period of 1A time. As will be described later, this period of 1A time is set to be shorter (short cycle) than the period used in many other acceptance states. Therefore, in the 1A acceptance state, the "operation receiving unit" is depicted as rapidly moving up and down within its movable range.

Furthermore, the first A acceptance state, as shown in Figure 147(b), is intended to continue until timing tAa3 arrives when no operation is received by the first A operation unit, and terminates upon the arrival of timing tAa3. Therefore, while the first A acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock image display MG-A1) indicating the remaining time until timing tAa3 arrives, which terminates the first A acceptance state, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display is not necessarily required.

Furthermore, if the "Mock Image Display MG-A1" corresponding to the first A acceptance state is to be displayed before the timing tAa2 in which the first A acceptance state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAa2 before starting its periodic changes and gauge image changes. In other words, in this case, the "Mock Image Display MG-A1" corresponding to the first A acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α) until timing tAa2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the first A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 146(c), (d) and 148(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A1, a message related to the acceptance of operation to the first A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410) is displayed (in this case, the message display MA1, which reads "Defeat the bat! Press the button repeatedly!!").

Furthermore, in the first A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 146(e) and 148(a), a status indication display JA1 is shown to indicate the status of operation in the first A acceptance state. This display includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the first A acceptance state (here, ally character YS-A1), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the first A acceptance state (here, enemy character BOSS-A1 depicted as a giant bat), and a gauge image HP-A1 showing its remaining HP gauge. In the 1A acceptance state, the likelihood of a big win is suggested through a visual effect that indicates whether the ally character YS-A1 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A1 (whether the gauge image HP-A1 can be reduced to 0) through multiple inputs to the 1A control unit. In other words, each time an input (input) is received from the 1A control unit (in this case, the operation button 410), a visual effect may be triggered in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1. In this example, the situation indication display JA1 shows the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1. However, it is not necessary to display all of these; the display can indicate the status of the operation as long as at least one of the ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1 is displayed.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 146, it is assumed that the first operation request is received by the "First A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-A1 within the First A Acceptance State (the performance situation shown in Figure 148(b)).

In this example, if the first operation is received by the "first A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-A1 within the first A acceptance state, a "post-first A reception change (post-first A reception effect)" corresponding to that operation will occur, as shown in Figures 146(f) and (g) (the effect shown in Figure 148(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "First A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-A1 within the First A Acceptance State, as shown in Figures 146(f) and (g), a "First A Acceptance Post-Output Sound" corresponding to the operation received by the "First A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "First A Acceptance Post-Display" corresponding to the operation received by the "First A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed.

In other words, when an operation is received once for the "first A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" in the first A acceptance state, a video display is shown as the "display after first A acceptance" as shown in Figure 148(b), showing the "ally character YS-A1" attacking the "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice magic (including smoke effects and the generation of ice magic). However, as will be described later, in the first A acceptance state, based on the result of the performance judgment when the operation is received, there is a possibility that the "enemy character BOSS-A1" may be injured, the strength of the ice magic may increase, or the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-A1 may decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance judgment, etc.). If the animation progresses in this way, the state in which the operation was received by the 1A control unit afterward (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-A1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice magic) will appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed animation (see Figures 146(e), (f), and 148(f), etc.). After the animation progresses in this way, as long as the state in which the 1A control unit is allowed to receive the operation continues, the degree of progress of the animation will not revert to the state before progress. Therefore, even if the 1A control unit receives an operation request again after the single video display that has changed to the progressed animation has finished, the state in which the operation was received by the 1A control unit (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-A1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice magic) may appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed animation. The game's presentation could be designed to suggest a higher probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot as the story progresses.

Furthermore, in this example, when an operation is received once for the "first A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the first A acceptance state, in addition to the "first A reception display" described above, a first reception output sound SA1 may be output as the "first A reception output sound," as shown in Figure 146(g). The first reception output sound SA1 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (such as smoke effects and the generation of ice magic)" that appears as the "first A reception display." Also, as will be described later, there is a possibility that a second reception output sound SB1 will be output as the "first A reception output sound." The second reception output sound SB1 in this example is output when the content of the "first A reception display" progresses. In this document, the first post-reception output sound SA1 is implemented to function as a sound effect corresponding to the post-reception display. However, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that the player has performed an operation, and when the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it should suggest that the first A operation unit is being maintained in an operational state.

Thus, in the first A input acceptance state, each time an input is received by the "first A operation unit (in this case, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A1" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A1" and its sound effects are displayed. That is, through multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A1," the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A1" decreases (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-A1" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests a high level of expectation. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A1" is not defeated, it suggests a low level of expectation.

This example, as shown in Figure 146(a), assumes that the player's operation (the operating state of the first A operation unit), which began at timing tAa2-A1, continues until timing tAa2-A2.

In this regard, the 1A reception permission state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (1A operation unit) in an operating state, the corresponding post-reception changes (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light, post-reception mechanism operation, etc.) are executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated)." Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 146(a), during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 (the period during which the 1A operation unit is maintained in an operating state), multiple operation receptions are made to the 1A operation unit, and each time, the corresponding post-reception changes (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light, post-reception mechanism operation, etc.) are executed.

As described above, when an operation request is received by the 1A operation unit in the 1A reception-accepting state, the display shown after the 1A reception, as shown in Figure 148(b), displays an animation (one video) of the ally character YS-A1 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (including smoke effects and the generation of ice magic). Therefore, from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2, when the so-called auto-click function is activated, this "one video display" is played multiple times, corresponding to the number of times the operation request was received.

Furthermore, as described above, when an operation is received by the 1A operation unit in the 1A reception-accepting state, the 1A reception-after output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to the "display after 1A reception" which shows "ally character YS-A1 attacking enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (such as smoke effects and the generation of ice magic)." Therefore, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2, when the so-called auto-repeated function is activated, in addition to the "single video display," the sound effect corresponding to this "single video display" will be played multiple times, corresponding to the number of times an operation was received.

However, in the first A acceptance state, when the operation unit (first A operation unit) is maintained in operation state and the auto-repeated button function is activated, the sequence in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (one video display) and the corresponding sound effect (first A post-acceptance output sound) are newly executed as post-acceptance changes at regular intervals (predetermined times).

Furthermore, in the first A reception acceptance state, when the operation unit (first A operation unit) is maintained in operation state and the auto-repeated button function is activated, the sequence in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (one video display) and the corresponding sound effect (first A reception output sound) are made executable multiple times as the above-mentioned post-reception changes. However, in this case, the interval between the start of execution of the post-reception change in response to the above detection (the interval between the start of execution of the previous post-reception change and the start of execution of the next post-reception change) is always set to be less than or equal to a specific time.

In other words, in this case, from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 146, a "single video display" of the ally character YS-A1 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic is newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button function. This repeated display of a "single video display" is represented in the figure as "repeated button display HA1a".

Similarly, in the example shown in Figure 146, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (first A reception output sound) is newly output at regular intervals by the auto-repeated function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as "first reception output sound SA1a."

In this regard, the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 146 assumes a scenario where, although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the first A acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, neither the "Status Indication Display JA1 (see Figure 146(e))" which indicates the status of operation in the first A acceptance state, nor the "Second Post-Acceptance Output Sound (see Figure 146(h))" which indicates the status of operation in the first A acceptance state, will change or be initiated in response to operation acceptance.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 146, the display of elements such as "ice-based magic attacks" and "smoke effects" shown in Figure 148, along with the output of corresponding sound effects, are repeatedly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button-pressing function (repeated button-pressing display HA1a, first post-reception output sound SA1a). However, the "situation indication display JA1 (see Figure 146(e))" remains unchanged. This allows players to confirm the same visual effects as when they performed monotonous repetitive operations, or whether the visual effects progressed, without having to perform such operations. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, regarding the "Status Indication Display JA1 (see Figure 146(e))", at least one of the following may be changed in response to the input. However, in this case, it is necessary to change to a different form than the "form when the performance content progresses", and if the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 (the period during which the first A operation unit is maintained in operation state) ends without the performance content progressing (when the operation is interrupted), it will be returned to the "display form before the operation". Also, as mentioned above, the "Status Indication Display JA1 (see Figure 146(e))", such as the ally character YS-A1, enemy character BOSS-A1, and gauge image HP-A1, may not be displayed until the input is received, and may appear and be displayed only when the input is received (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2, neither the "Status Indication Display JA1 (see Figure 146(e))" which suggests the status of the operation in the first A acceptance state, nor the "Second Post-Acceptance Output Sound (see Figure 146(h))" which also suggests the status of the operation in the first A acceptance state, changes or starts execution in response to the operation acceptance. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the performance content has not progressed.

However, under the circumstances where the rapid-fire display HA1a is executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2), as shown in Figure 148(b), the rapid-fire display HA1a repeatedly shows "ally character YS-A1 attacking enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (smoke effect, generation of ice magic, etc.)" at regular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JA1" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the first A acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 146 and 148 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the first A acceptance state, temporarily interrupts operations on the first A operation unit at timing tAa2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated button function.

Here, in the first A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 146(f) and 148(c), even if the operation state of the first A control unit is temporarily interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) at timing tAa2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HA1a, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire button press indicator HA1a will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tAa2-A2 (even after the first A control unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the "single video display" that was in the execution state has finished for a predetermined display time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 1A control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) and the auto-repeated button press function is disabled, the rapid-fire button press indicator HA1a, which was previously active, will not immediately disappear. Therefore, it will take some time before the operation status in the 1A acceptance state becomes easily recognizable. This means that a significant amount of time is consumed in the remaining 1A acceptance state, thus creating a sense of tension that discourages the act of interrupting the operation state of the 1A control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in the 1A acceptance state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the first A control unit is interrupted and it is switched to a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HA1a is displayed, the time from the non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HA1a disappears is not set to a fixed time, but is made variable.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 1A control unit is temporarily interrupted (turned to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, before the rapid-fire indicator HA1a disappears and a situation arises where the operation status in the 1A acceptance state becomes easily recognizable. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 1A acceptance state will be consumed. Therefore, it is expected that this configuration will appropriately create a sense of tension when attempting to temporarily interrupt the operation of the 1A control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in the 1A acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the first A acceptance state, as shown in Figure 146(g), the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not become inaudible when the operation state of the first A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tAa2-A2 to disable the auto-repeating function, similar to the rapid-fire indicator HA1a. In other words, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a will continue to be output even after timing tAa2-A2 (even after the first A operation unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in the execution state has finished executing for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the first A control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, the first post-reception output sound SA1a, which was in the active state until then, will not immediately become non-output. In this case, it may appear as if the auto-repeated button function is still active, thus maintaining a desirable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the first A operation unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the first reception output sound SA1a is being output, the time from the time the unit is put into a non-operation state until the first reception output sound SA1a is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time, but is made variable.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 1A control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operational state) to disable the auto-repeated button function, and how long it will take for the first post-reception output sound SA1a to become non-output, that is, how long it will take to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated button function has been disabled. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 1A acceptance state will be consumed, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 1A control unit.

Furthermore, in the first A acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HA1a and the first post-reception output sound SA1a are both in the execution state, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA1a is hidden and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is turned off are made different, as shown in Figures 146(f), (g), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA1a is hidden is set to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is turned off, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state is hidden or turned off is indeterminate, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA1a is hidden may be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is turned off, or it may be after the timing at which it is turned off. Furthermore, it may be possible to allow for situations where their timings coincide.

With this configuration, in the first A acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HA1a and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a are both in operation state, a situation will occur where, as shown in Figures 146(f), (g) and 148(c), the rapid-fire indicator HA1a continues to be displayed and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a continues to be output, even though the first A operation unit is in a non-operation state. However, after this, as time elapses since the first A operation unit was left in a non-operation state, as shown in Figures 146(f), (g) and 148(d), the rapid-fire indicator HA1a, which had been displayed, will be hidden, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a will be left in a non-output state. This allows players to easily recognize when the auto-button function is disabled, and also to easily recognize the mode of the status indicator JA1 (in this case, mode JA1a), which indicates the status of operation, such as the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 (see Figure 148(d)).

However, as mentioned above, in the example shown in Figure 146, the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 assumes that although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the first A acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 148(d), although the appearance of the situation indication display JA1 (here, appearance JA1a), which suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1, can be easily recognized, these appearances are the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 148(a)), thus suggesting that the presentation content has not progressed. Note that the appearance of the situation indication display JA1, such as the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1, only needs to be able to suggest that the presentation content has not progressed; it does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 148(a)).

In this example, as shown in Figure 146(a), it is assumed that the "first A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is returned to the operation state at timing tAa2-B1 within the first A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 148(e)).

In this example, if the "first A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tAa2-B1 within the first A acceptance state, this triggers the "first A reception change (first A reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figures 146(f) and (g) (the effect shown in Figure 148(e)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "First A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-B1 within the First A Acceptance State, as shown in Figures 146(f) and (g), the "First Post-Acceptance Output Sound SA1 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "First A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "First A Post-Acceptance Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "First A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, even when operation on the 1A control unit is resumed at timing tAa2-B1 within the 1A acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 1A acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 148(e), the 1A acceptance change (such as the 1A acceptance display or 1A acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 1A acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation being accepted by the 1A control unit at timing tAa2-A1. Details of the performance are as described above, and will therefore be omitted here.

In this regard, the performance examples shown in Figures 146 and 148 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 1A operation unit) initiated at timing tAa2-B1 is maintained until timing tAa2-B3, thereby activating the auto-continuous pressing function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 (the period during which the first A operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the first A operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and each time, a post-reception change (for example, post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, post-reception mechanism operation, etc.) is executed in accordance with the received operation.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 (the period during which the first A operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HA1a and the first post-reception output sound SA1a) remains the same as in the case of the period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2 (see Figure 148(b)), unless the performance content progresses. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 146, the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3 assumes that, among the multiple operation receptions performed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the first A reception permission state progresses based on the operation reception performed at timing tAa2-B2 within that period (as shown in the performance status in Figure 148(f)).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 146, during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3, the "Post-First A Reception Change (Post-First A Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has not progressed, while during the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3, the "Post-First A Reception Change (Post-First A Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed.

More specifically, during the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3, at "timing tAa2-B2," which is the timing when the performance content progresses, as shown in Figures 146(e) and 148(f), a display change is performed based on the reception of an operation to the 1A operation unit, changing the form of the status indication display JA1, which indicates the status of the operation, from the previously displayed "form JA1a" to a different "form JA1b." Here, as shown in Figure 148(f), the enemy character BOSS-A1 changes to a form in which it is injured, the ice magic used by the ally character YS-A1 changes to a form of higher intensity, and the gauge image HP-A1 changes to a form in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased. With this configuration, the change in the state indication display JA1 suggests that the performance content corresponding to the first A acceptance state has progressed due to the operation reception (by the auto-repeated button function) performed at timing tAa2-B2 (and the result of the performance judgment based on that operation).

After the performance has progressed in this way, when an operation request is received by the 1A operation unit, the "Display after 1A reception" will show the "single video display" in an advanced state of the performance, as shown in Figure 148(f), such as "ally character YS-A1 attacks the injured enemy character BOSS-A1 using increased-strength ice magic."

Furthermore, in this example, once the performance content has progressed, as long as the state of acceptance of the 1A input remains in place, the degree of progress in the performance content will not revert to its previous state. Therefore, even when the 1A input unit receives another input request after the completion of one video display showing the progressed performance content, the behavior at the time of the initial input request (in this case, the behavior of "ally character YS-A1" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A1" with ice magic) will appear as the single video display showing the progressed performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3, when the so-called auto-button function is activated, the "single video display" in which such a change in appearance occurs will be played multiple times, corresponding to the number of times the auto-button function has received an input request.

Furthermore, even during the period after timing tAa2-B2, when the animation progresses, the sequence in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A1 with ice magic (one video display) is restarted at regular intervals (predetermined intervals) as a change after the input is received. Therefore, the "one video display" of the progressed animation sequence is also restarted at regular intervals by the auto-tap function. This repeated display of the "one video display" of the progressed animation sequence is represented in the diagram as "Tap-Tap Display HA1b".

Thus, in the performance display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tAa2-B2," which is the timing when the performance content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 146(e), (f) and 148(e), (f), the mode of the status indication display JA1 changes from "mode JA1a" to "mode JA1b," and the mode of the rapid-fire display HA1 also changes from "mode HA1a" to "mode HA1b." From this point onward, while the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled (timing tAa2-B2 to tAa2-B3), the status indication display JA1 is displayed in "mode JA1b," and the rapid-fire display HA1 is executed in "mode HA1b."

In this example, the appearance of the rapid-fire indicator HA1 is changed according to the progress of the performance, but it is also possible to keep it unchanged. That is, even if the rapid-fire indicator HA1 continues to run in a single appearance regardless of the progress of the performance, the player can still confirm through the rapid-fire indicator HA1 that the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) operations have been received. Furthermore, the player can also confirm the degree of progress of the performance through the appearance of the status indication indicator JA1.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is received once at the "first A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the first A acceptance state, in addition to the "first A acceptance display," a first acceptance output sound may be output as the "first A acceptance output sound," as shown in Figure 146(g). As also described above, in addition to the first acceptance output sound SA1, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," a second acceptance output sound SB1, which suggests that the performance content corresponding to the first A acceptance state has progressed, can also be output, as shown in Figure 146(h).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 146, during the period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3, when timing tAa2-B2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, as shown in Figure 146(h), the second post-reception output sound SB1 is output in mode SB1b-1 based on the fact that the operation was received (performance progress) at timing tAa2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the performance has progressed through the output mode of the post-reception output sound. It is desirable to set the output duration of the second post-reception output sound SB1 to be longer than that of the first post-reception output sound SA1, which corresponds to one instance of operation reception.

However, in this example, the first post-reception output sound SA1, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is implemented to be output in the same manner before and after the performance progresses. Therefore, when timing tAa2-B2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, the first post-reception output sound SA1, as a new "sound effect," begins outputting based on the operation being received. However, its manner of output is the same as when the operation was received before timing tAa2-B2 (the execution manner is the same whether or not performance progress occurs at timing tAa2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tAa2-B1 to timing tAa2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is activated, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (first post-reception output sound SA1) is newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the diagram as "first post-reception output sound SA1a." The output manner of the first post-reception output sound SA1a during this period is the same as in the case of the "period from timing tAa2-A1 to timing tAa2-A2" described above, so an explanation is omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-reception output sound SA1a was not changed according to the progression of the performance content, but it may be changed according to the progression of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HA1b is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3), as shown in Figure 148(f), the rapid-fire display HA1b repeatedly shows "ally character YS-A1 attacking wounded enemy character BOSS-A1 with high-intensity ice magic (smoke effect, generation of ice magic, etc.)" at regular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JA1" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the first A acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 146 and 148 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the first A acceptance state, interrupts operations on the first A operation unit again at timing tAa2-B3, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button function.

As described above, in the first A acceptance state, even if the operation state of the first A control unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the first A acceptance state is continuing, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HA1, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be hidden as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figures 146(f) and 148(g), even if the operation state of the first A control unit is interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the rapid-fire button press indicator HA1b will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tAa2-B3 (even after the first A control unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the "single video display" that was in the execution state is executed for a predetermined display time and finishes displaying, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, similar to the case of the rapid-fire indicator HA1a, if the operation on the 1A control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HA1b is displayed, the time from the non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HA1b disappears is not set to a fixed time, but is made variable.

Furthermore, as described above, in the first A acceptance state, even if the operation state of the first A control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the first A acceptance state is in effect, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, which was previously in an output state, will not be switched to a non-output state as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figure 146(g), even if the operation state of the first A control unit is interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a will continue to be output even after timing tAa2-B3 (even after the first A control unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has finished executing and outputting for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

However, the timing tAa2-B3 shown in Figure 146 assumes a scenario where the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted while the second post-reception output sound SB1, which started outputting at timing tAa2-B2, continues to output.

In this regard, in the first A acceptance state, the second post-reception output sound SB1, like the first post-reception output sound SA1, does not terminate its output state (become inaudible) when the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted (become non-operated). Therefore, as shown in Figure 146(h), even if the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted at timing tAa2-B3, the second post-reception output sound SB1b-1 will continue to be output for a predetermined duration after timing tAa2-B3 (even after the first A operation unit becomes non-operated), or for a predetermined duration from the non-operation state.

In this example, if the operation on the first A control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the first reception output sound SA1 is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the first reception output sound SA1a is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate. Similarly, for the second reception output sound SB1, if the operation on the first A control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the second reception output sound SB1 is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the second reception output sound SB1 is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 1A control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, so that the first post-reception output sound SA1 and the second post-reception output sound SB1 become inaudible, that is, when it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated button function has been disabled. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 1A acceptance state will be consumed, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 1A control unit.

Furthermore, in the first A acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, even if the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HA1b and the first post-reception output sound SA1a are both in the execution state, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA1b is hidden and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is turned off are different, as shown in Figures 146(f), (g), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA1b is hidden is shown to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is turned off, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state is hidden or turned off is indeterminate, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA1b is hidden may be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA1a is turned off, or it may be after that timing. Furthermore, it may be possible to allow the timing of each to be the same. Note that this relationship between the rapid-fire indicator HA1b and the first post-reception output sound SA1a also holds true between the rapid-fire indicator HA1b and the second post-reception output sound SB1, and between the first post-reception output sound SA1a and the second post-reception output sound SB1; the same applies to other examples.

With this configuration, in the first A acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the first A operation unit is interrupted (turned into a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HA1b, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1 are all in the execution state, then, as shown in Figures 146(f), (g), (h) and 148(g), the rapid-fire indicator HA1b continues to be displayed, the first post-acceptance output sound SA1a continues to be output, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1b-1 continues to be output, while the first A operation unit is in a non-operation state. However, after this, due to the passage of time since the first A operation unit was turned into a non-operation state (time elapsed from timing tAa2-B3), the rapid-fire indicator HA1b, which had been displayed, will be turned off, as shown in Figures 146(f) and 148(h). This allows players to easily recognize when the auto-button function is disabled, and also to easily recognize the state of the situation indication display JA1 (in this case, the state JA1b where the performance content has progressed), which indicates the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-A1, the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 (see Figure 148(h)).

Furthermore, under normal circumstances, both the first post-reception output sound SA1a and the second post-reception output sound SB1 would terminate (become inaudible) after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the first A operation unit was deactivated (time elapsed from timing tAa2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in Figure 146(a), it is assumed that the first A control unit is put back into operation at timing tAa2-B3 or later, and that both the first post-reception output sound SA1a and the second post-reception output sound SB1 are audible (before the output state ends), at timing tAa2-C1 (the performance situation shown in Figure 148(i)).

In this example, if the "first A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tAa2-C1 within the first A acceptance state, this will trigger the "first A acceptance change (first A acceptance effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figures 146(f) and (g) (the effect shown in Figure 148(i)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "First A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAa2-C1 within the First A Acceptance State, as shown in Figures 146(f) and (g), the "First Post-Acceptance Output Sound SA1 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "First A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "First A Post-Acceptance Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "First A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, when operation to the 1A control unit is resumed at timing tAa2-C1 within the 1A acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 1A acceptance state does not progress from the mode shown in Figure 148(h) (the first stage of progression). Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 148(i), the 1A acceptance change (such as the 1A acceptance display or 1A acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 1A acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation acceptance to the 1A control unit at timing tAa-B2. Details of the performance are as described above, so they will not be explained here.

However, as mentioned above, this example assumes that the timing tAa2-C1, when operation on the first A operation unit is restarted, occurs while both the first post-reception output sound SA1 and the second post-reception output sound SB1 are audible.

In this regard, the first post-reception output sound SA1 terminates its previous output state and initiates a new output triggered by the new operation reception, based on the fact that operation to the first A operation unit has resumed at timing tAa2-C1 (operation reception has been completed). In contrast, the second post-reception output sound SB1 continues its previous output state without any change, based on the fact that operation to the first A operation unit has resumed at timing tAa2-C1 (operation reception has been completed).

With this configuration, in the first A acceptance state, while the first A acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is being output, when an operation acceptance is made to the first A operation unit that was previously in a non-operational state, there are two possibilities: the first A acceptance output sound may end (first acceptance output sound SA1) or it may not end (second acceptance output sound SB1). This allows for a suitable sense of tension to be provided when the first A operation unit, which was in a non-operational state, is brought back into operation. Furthermore, in the first A acceptance state, in addition to cases where operation is accepted to the first A operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 is output and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is output, it goes without saying that operation may also be accepted to the first A operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 is output and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is not output, or when the first post-acceptance output sound SA1 is not output and the second post-acceptance output sound SB1 is output.

Furthermore, the continuous press indicator HA1 may also be configured to remain displayed at timing tAa2-C1. In this case, when an operation is received from the 1A operation unit, which had been in a non-operational state, it is desirable that the previous "single-shot video display" that was in progress is terminated prematurely, and a new display (single-shot video display) triggered by the new operation is started in its place.

Furthermore, the performance examples shown in Figures 146 and 148 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 1A operation unit), which began at timing tAa2-C1, is maintained until timing tAa2-C2, thereby activating the auto-repeated button press function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 (the period during which the first A operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the first A operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and each time, a post-reception change (for example, post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, post-reception mechanism operation, etc.) is executed in accordance with the received operation.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 (the period during which the first A operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HA1b and the first post-reception output sound SA1a) remains the same as in the case of the period from timing tAa2-B2 to timing tAa2-B3 (see Figure 148(f)), unless further development of the performance content occurs. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 146, the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2 assumes that, among the multiple operation receptions performed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the first A reception acceptance state progresses further based on the operation reception (such as the result of the performance judgment) performed at timing tAa2-C2 within that period (when a second stage of progress occurs) (as shown in the performance status in Figure 148(j)). In particular, timing tAa2-C2 in this example assumes that the performance content corresponding to the first A reception acceptance state progresses to the final stage of performance, and that the first A reception acceptance state also ends as a result of the operation reception performed at timing tAa2-C2 (see Figures 146(a) and 148(j)).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 146, during the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2, the "Post-First A Reception Change (Post-First A Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content progresses only once (see Figure 148(i)). However, from timing tAa2-C2 onward, under conditions where operation reception to the First A operation unit is not permitted, the "Post-First A Reception Change (Post-First A Reception Performance)" is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed further (the final stage performance manner) (see Figure 148(j)).

More specifically, at timing tAa2-C2, as shown in Figures 146(e) and 148(j), based on the operation reception to the first A operation unit, a display change is performed, changing the state of the status indication display JA1, which suggests the status of the operation, from the previously displayed "state JA1b" to a different "state JA1c". Here, as shown in Figure 148(j), the state changes to one where the enemy character BOSS-A1 has been defeated, the state changes to one where ice magic by the ally character YS-A1 is exploding around the enemy character BOSS-A1, and the gauge image HP-A1 changes to one where the remaining HP gauge has further decreased (in this case, "0"). With this configuration, through this change in the state of the status indication display JA1, it is suggested that the performance content corresponding to the first A reception acceptance state has progressed as a result of the operation reception (by the auto-repeated function) performed at timing tAa2-C2 (and the resulting performance judgment).

However, as stated above, "Pattern JA1c" as the status indication display JA1 corresponds to the "final stage of the performance" among the performance content corresponding to the first A acceptance state, and only appears when the first A acceptance state ends due to an operation acceptance. Therefore, "Pattern JA1c" as the status indication display JA1, after being started based on the operation acceptance made at timing tAa2-C1, will be executed for a predetermined amount of time regardless of whether or not the player performed an operation during its execution period, and then will be hidden. Here, only "Pattern JA1c" is provided as the final stage of the performance of the status indication display JA1, but it is also possible to provide multiple patterns with different expected levels of winning, and selectively display the pattern corresponding to that expected level (corresponding to the result of the performance judgment).

Furthermore, when an operation is received at timing tAa2-C2, the auto-repeating function, which was previously enabled, is disabled as the 1A acceptance state terminates. In this regard, when the auto-repeating function is disabled at timing tAa2-A2 or timing tAa2-B3, the repeating indicator HA1, which was previously displayed due to the auto-repeating function, is not automatically hidden (it is hidden after an indefinite time after the auto-repeating function is disabled). However, when the auto-repeating function is disabled at timing tAa2-C2, the repeating indicator HA1, which was previously displayed due to the auto-repeating function, is automatically hidden (after a certain time, e.g., 0 seconds, from the time the operation is received).

Furthermore, in this example, when the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timings tAa2-A2 and tAa2-B3, the first post-reception output sound SA1a, which had been output by the auto-repeated button function, is not made inaudible as a result (it is made inaudible after an indefinite time has passed since the auto-repeated button function was disabled). However, when the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timing tAa2-C2, the first post-reception output sound SA1a, which had been output by the auto-repeated button function, is made inaudible as a result (after a certain time has passed since the operation was received). With this configuration, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not the first A reception permission state has ended by observing the output status of the first post-reception output sound SA1a after the auto-repeated button function is disabled.

However, regarding the first post-reception output sound SA1a, when the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timing tAa2-C2, it may be possible to either make it inaudible (within a certain time from the time the operation is received) or not make it inaudible. For example, if it is made inaudible when the probability of winning a jackpot is high, but not made inaudible when the probability of winning a jackpot is low, then, combined with not making it inaudible at timings tAa2-A2 and tAa2-B3 where the final state has not yet appeared (and therefore high expectation cannot be suggested), the probability of winning a jackpot can be suggested through the output status of the first post-reception output sound SA1a after the auto-repeated button function is disabled.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the first post-reception output sound SA1, a second post-reception output sound SB1 can be output as a first post-reception output sound corresponding to the first A reception acceptance state, as shown in Figure 146(h), indicating that the performance content corresponding to the first A reception acceptance state has progressed.

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 146, during the period from timing tAa2-C1 to timing tAa2-C2, when timing tAa2-C2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, as shown in Figure 146(h), the second post-reception output sound SB1 is output in mode SB1b-2 based on the fact that the operation was received (performance progress) at timing tAa2-C2. This allows the player to recognize the degree of progress in the performance through the output mode of the post-reception output sound. It is desirable to set the output duration of the second post-reception output sound SB1 to be longer than that of the first post-reception output sound SA1, which corresponds to one instance of operation reception.

In this example, we assumed that timing tAa2-C2 occurs after the second post-reception output tone SB1b-1, which was started at timing tAa2-B2, has become inaudible. However, it is also possible that timing tAa2-C2 occurs while the second post-reception output tone SB1b-1 is still audible. In this case, the second post-reception output tone SB1 may change from "mode SB1b-1" to a different "mode SB1b-2" at timing tAa2-C2 (ending mode SB1b-1 and replacing it with mode SB1b-2).

As mentioned above, the first A acceptance state, as shown in Figure 147(b), continues until timing tAa3 arrives if no operation is received for the first A operation unit, and terminates upon the arrival of timing tAa3. In this respect, the first A acceptance state occurs as an acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is activated. Therefore, as shown in Figure 147, if no operation is received for the first A operation unit while in the first A acceptance state until timing tAa3 arrives, not only does the first A acceptance state terminate upon the arrival of timing tAa3, but the final stage of the performance content corresponding to the first A acceptance state (see Figures 147(e), (h), and Figure 148(j), etc.) is executed as a post-first A acceptance change that appears when an operation is performed on the first A operation unit.

Furthermore, the first A acceptance state may be generated as an acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. In other words, in this case, the first A acceptance state is terminated simply upon the arrival of timing tAa3, and the post-first A acceptance change that appears when an operation is performed on the first A operation unit will not be initiated.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "Second A Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state). Figure 149 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "Second A Acceptance State" is generated based on the fulfillment of "Condition 2A" as the generation condition, and the player performs an operation. Figure 150 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "Second A Acceptance State" is generated but the player does not perform an operation. Figure 151 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the "Second A Acceptance State" is generated.

Now, assuming the starting conditions are met (holding is processed) and the "2nd A variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement performance determination) corresponding to the "2nd A variation pattern." After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ (such as performance depiction according to the 2nd A variation pattern, or sound output of BGM according to the 2nd A variation pattern (such as normal BGM playback when not reaching)), and within the execution period of this variation performance, it additionally executes a performance (pre-announcement performance) according to the result of the pre-announcement performance determination, in addition to the performance of the selected "2nd A variation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 149(c), during the execution period of the variation effect related to the "2A variation pattern," based on the arrival of timing tAb2, which is the 2A time elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the fulfillment of "condition 2A"), the above-mentioned 2A acceptance permission state (valid period) is made possible, allowing "operation reception to the 2A operation unit regarding changes after 2A reception (such as the 2A effect status indication display JA2, the 2A rapid-fire display HA2, and the 2A reception output sounds SA2, SB2, etc.)" (the situation shown in Figure 151(a)).

In this embodiment, the "second A operation unit" that allows operation reception in the second A reception-accepting state is set as the same operation means (operation button 410) as in the first A reception-accepting state, and multiple operation receptions are allowed until the second A reception-accepting state ends. However, the second A operation unit may be set as an operation means different from that in the first A reception-accepting state.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figures 149(b) to (e), when the second A acceptance state occurs, a mock image display MG-A2 of the target of the player's operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the second A operation unit), a message display MA2 related to the operation on the target of the operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the second A operation unit), and a status indication display JA2 indicating the status of the operation are displayed at a timing tAb1 that occurs before the second A acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance to the second A operation unit is permitted).

However, the mock image display MG-A2, message display MA2, and status indication display JA2 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 2A reception-acceptance state occurs. They may be displayed simultaneously with the occurrence of the 2A reception-acceptance state, or slightly later. In particular, the status indication display JA2 may not be displayed until the first operation is received by the 2A operation unit in the 2A reception-acceptance state; that is, it may be implemented to appear and be displayed only after an operation is received by the 2A operation unit. Furthermore, the timing of the display of the mock image display MG-A2 and the timing of the display of the message display MA2 may be different. For example, the message display MA2 may be displayed before the display of the mock image display MG-A2.

The image display MG-A2, message display MA2, and status indication display JA2 will continue to be displayed once they are started, regardless of the operating status of the 2A operation unit, at least until the 2A reception acceptance state ends.

Here, the "Image Display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A acceptance state is configured to selectively use either the "first color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on white)" or the "second color scheme (e.g., a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme. For example, the color scheme determined based on the results of a performance judgment is used for display. However, these color schemes may differ from those of the 1A acceptance state described above.

Furthermore, the "Mock Image Display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A acceptance state is configured such that when the portion mimicking the "operation receiving section" (the object of operation) is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α), and then sequentially displayed in the manners shown in Figures 144(β) to (σ), this periodic change repeats over a predetermined period of 2A time. However, since this period of 2A time is set to be longer (longer cycle) than the period of 1A time that appears in the 1A acceptance state, the 2A acceptance state depicts the "operation receiving section" moving slowly up and down within its movable range compared to the 1A acceptance state described above.

Furthermore, the second A acceptance state, as shown in Figure 150(b), is intended to continue until timing tAb3 arrives when no operation is received by the second A operation unit, and terminates upon the arrival of timing tAb3. Therefore, while the second A acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the simulated image display MG-A2) indicating the remaining time until timing tAb3 arrives, which terminates the second A acceptance state, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display is not necessarily required.

Furthermore, if the "Mock Image Display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A acceptance state is to be displayed before the timing tAb2 in which the 2A acceptance state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAb2 before starting its periodic changes and gauge image changes. In other words, in this case, the "Mock Image Display MG-A2" corresponding to the 2A acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α) until timing tAb2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the second A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 149(c), (d) and 151(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A2, a message related to the acceptance of operation to the second A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410) is displayed (in this case, the message display MA2, which is displayed as "Defeat the tiger! Press the button repeatedly!!").

Furthermore, in the second A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 149(e) and 151(a), a status indication display JA2 is shown to indicate the status of operation in the second A acceptance state. This display includes an ally character corresponding to the type of the second A acceptance state (here, ally character YS-A2), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the second A acceptance state (here, enemy character BOSS-A2 depicted as a tiger), and a gauge image HP-A2 showing its remaining HP gauge. In the 2A acceptance state, the likelihood of a big win is suggested through a visual effect such as "whether or not the ally character YS-A2 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A2 (whether or not the gauge image HP-A2 can be reduced to 0)" by receiving multiple operations from the 2A operation unit. In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "2A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)", a visual effect may be executed in which "ally character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2". In this example, the situation indication display JA2 displays ally character YS-A2, enemy character BOSS-A2, and gauge image HP-A2, but it is not necessary to display all of these. It is possible to suggest the operation status as long as at least one of ally character YS-A2, enemy character BOSS-A2, and gauge image HP-A2 is displayed. Furthermore, the friendly character YS-A2 may be displayed with a different image than the friendly character YS-A1, which appears in the above-mentioned first A acceptance state.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 149, it is assumed that the first operation request is received by the "2A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-A1 within the 2A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 151(b)).

In this example, if the first operation is received by the "second A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-A1 within the second A acceptance state, a "second A acceptance change (second A acceptance effect)" corresponding to that operation will occur, as shown in Figures 149(f) and (g) (the effect shown in Figure 151(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "Second A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-A1 within the Second A reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 149(f) and (g), a "Second A reception post-output sound" corresponding to the operation received by the "Second A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "Second A reception post-display" corresponding to the operation received by the "Second A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed.

In other words, when an operation is received once for the "2A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" in the 2A reception-accepting state, a video display is shown once as the "2A reception display" as shown in Figure 151(b), depicting "ally character YS-A2" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire magic (including smoke effects and the generation of fire magic). However, as will be described later, in the 2A reception-accepting state, based on the result of the performance judgment when the operation is received, there is a possibility that "enemy character BOSS-A2" may be injured, the intensity of the fire magic may increase, or the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-A2 may decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance judgment, etc.). If the animation progresses in this way, the state in which the operation was received by the 2A control unit afterward (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire magic) will appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed animation (see Figures 149(e), (f) and Figure 151(e), etc.). After the animation progresses in this way, as long as the state in which the 2A control unit is allowed to receive input continues, the degree of progress in the animation will not revert to the state before progress. Therefore, even if the 2A control unit receives input again after the single video display that has changed to the progressed animation has finished, the state in which the operation was received by the 2A control unit (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-A2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire magic) may appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed animation. The game's presentation could be designed to suggest a higher probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot as the story progresses.

Furthermore, in this example, when an operation is received once for the "2A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 2A acceptance state, in addition to the "2A reception display" described above, the first reception output sound SA2 may be output as the "2A reception output sound," as shown in Figure 149(g). Note that the first reception output sound SA2 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-A2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (such as smoke effects and the generation of fire magic)" that appears as the "2A reception display," and is a different sound from the "first reception output sound SA1" described above. Also, as will be described later, there is a possibility that a second reception output sound SB2 will be output as the "2A reception output sound." The second reception output sound SB2 in this example is output when the content of the "2A reception display" progresses. In this document, the first post-reception output sound SA2 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-reception display. However, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that the player has performed an operation, and when the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it should suggest that the second A operation unit is being maintained in an operational state.

Thus, in the second A input acceptance state, each time an input is received by the "second A operation unit (in this case, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A2" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A2" and its sound effects are displayed. That is, through multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A2," the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A2" decreases (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-A2" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests a high level of expectation. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A2" is not defeated, it suggests a low level of expectation.

This example, as shown in Figure 149(a), assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 2A operation unit) initiated at timing tAb2-A1 continues until timing tAb2-A2.

In this regard, the 2A acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (2A operation unit) in an operating state, the corresponding post-operation changes (e.g., post-operation display, post-operation output sound, post-operation illumination, post-operation mechanism operation, etc.) are executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated)." Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 149(a), during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 (the period during which the 2A operation unit is maintained in an operating state), multiple operation receptions are made to the 2A operation unit, and each time, the corresponding post-operation changes (e.g., post-operation display, post-operation output sound, post-operation illumination, post-operation mechanism operation, etc.) are executed.

As described above, when an operation request is received by the 2A operation unit in the 2A reception-accepting state, the display shown after the 2A reception, as shown in Figure 151(b), displays an animation (one video) of the ally character YS-A2 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (including smoke effects and the generation of fire magic). Therefore, from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2, when the so-called auto-fire function is activated, this "one video display" is played multiple times, corresponding to the number of times the operation request was received.

Furthermore, as described above, when an operation is received by the 2A operation unit in the 2A reception-accepting state, the 2A reception-after output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to the "2A reception-after display" which shows "ally character YS-A2 attacking enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (such as smoke effects and the generation of fire magic)." Therefore, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2, when the so-called auto-repeated function is activated, in addition to the "single video display," the sound effect corresponding to this "single video display" will be played multiple times, corresponding to the number of times an operation was received.

However, in the second A acceptance state, if the operation unit (second A operation unit) is maintained in operation state and the auto-repeated function is activated, such post-acceptance changes (such as displaying one video, sound effects (second A post-acceptance output sound)) will be executed multiple times. However, the interval between these executions (the time between the start of the previous post-acceptance change and the start of the next post-acceptance change) will be set to an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

Furthermore, in the 2A reception-accepting state, when the operation unit (2A operation unit) is maintained in operation and the auto-repeated button function is activated, the sequence in which the ally character YS-A2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (one video display) and the corresponding sound effect (2A reception-after output sound) are made executable multiple times as the above-mentioned post-reception changes. However, in this case, the interval between the start of execution of the post-reception change in response to the above detection (the interval between the start of execution of the previous post-reception change and the start of execution of the next post-reception change) is always set to be longer than the specified time (the time used in the 1A reception-accepting state and the 3A reception-accepting state).

In other words, in this case, from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 149, a "single video display" of the ally character YS-A2 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic is newly executed at indefinite intervals by the auto-repeated button function. This repeated display of a "single video display" is represented in the figure as "repeated button display HA2a".

Similarly, in the example shown in Figure 149, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (second A post-reception output sound) is newly output at indefinite intervals by the auto-repeated function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as "first post-reception output sound SA2a."

In this regard, the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 149 assumes a scenario where, although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 2A acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, neither the "Status Indication Display JA2 (see Figure 149(e))" which indicates the status of operation in the second A reception-accepting state, nor the "Second Post-Reception Output Sound (see Figure 149(h))" which indicates the status of operation in the second A reception-accepting state, will change or be initiated (in a manner that progresses the performance) as a result of operation reception.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 149, the display of "fire-based magic attacks" and "smoke effects" shown in Figure 151, and the output of corresponding sound effects, are repeatedly executed at indefinite intervals by the auto-repeated button press function (repeated button press display HA2a, first post-reception output sound SA2a). However, the "situation indication display JA2 (see Figure 149(e))" remains unchanged. This allows the player to confirm the content of the performance in response to multiple operation receptions, or whether the performance content has not progressed, simply by maintaining the operation state, thus effectively maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, regarding the "Situation Indication Display JA2 (see Figure 149(e))", at least one of the following may be changed in response to the input. However, in this case, it is necessary to change to a different form than the "form when the performance content progresses", and if the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 (the period during which the second A operation unit is maintained in operation state) ends without the performance content progressing (when the operation is interrupted), it will be returned to the "display form before the operation" as a result. Also, as mentioned above, the "Situation Indication Display JA2 (see Figure 149(e))", such as the ally character YS-A2, enemy character BOSS-A2, and gauge image HP-A2, may not be displayed until the input is received, and may appear and be displayed only when the input is received (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2, neither the "Status Indication Display JA2 (see Figure 149(e))" which suggests the operation status in the second A reception-accepting state, nor the "Second Post-Reception Output Sound (see Figure 149(h))" which also suggests the operation status in the second A reception-accepting state, changes or starts execution in response to the operation reception. Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively indicate that the performance content has not progressed.

However, under conditions where the rapid-fire display HA2a is executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2), as shown in Figure 151(b), the rapid-fire display HA2a repeatedly shows "the ally character YS-A2 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (smoke effect, generation of fire magic, etc.)" at irregular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JA2" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the second A acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 149 and 151 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the second A acceptance state, temporarily interrupts operations on the second A operation unit at timing tAb2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated button function.

Here, in the second A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 149(f) and 151(c), when the operation state of the second A control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tAb2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HA2a, which was previously in an active state, is turned off as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire button press indicator HA2a terminates its operation when timing tAb2-A2 arrives (when the second A control unit is set to a non-operation state).

With this configuration, when the operation state of the 2A control unit is temporarily interrupted (returned to a non-operation state) and the auto-repeated button press function is disabled, the rapid-press indicator HA2a, which was previously in the active state, is immediately hidden. Therefore, the operation status in the 2A acceptance state is easily recognized early on. Furthermore, this means that the remaining time in the 2A acceptance state is not consumed significantly, thus facilitating the act of temporarily interrupting the operation state of the 2A control unit to more easily check the operation status in that state.

In this example, if the operation on the second A control unit is interrupted and the unit is switched to a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HA2a is displayed, the time elapsed from the time the unit is switched to a non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HA2a disappears is set to a fixed time (in this case, "0 seconds").

With this configuration, it becomes easier to predict how much time will pass after temporarily interrupting the operation state of the 2A control unit (setting it to a non-operational state) and disabling the auto-repeating function, before the rapid-fire indicator HA2a disappears and a situation arises where the operation status in the 2A acceptance state becomes easily recognizable. This also means that it becomes easier to predict how much of the remaining time in the 2A acceptance state will be consumed, thus facilitating the act of temporarily interrupting the operation state of the 2A control unit to more easily check the operation status in the 2A acceptance state. This effect can be obtained even when the above-mentioned fixed time is set to "1 second," so the time from setting it to a non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HA2a disappears does not necessarily have to be set to "0 seconds."

Furthermore, in the second A acceptance state, as shown in Figure 149(g), the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a, which was previously in an active state, is also rendered inaudible at timing tAb2-A2 when the operation state of the second A control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) to disable the auto-repeating function, similar to the rapid-fire indicator HA2a. In other words, in this case, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a ends when timing tAb2-A2 arrives (when the second A control unit is set to a non-operational state).

With this configuration, when the operation state of the second A control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, the first post-reception output sound SA2a, which was in the active state until then, is immediately switched to a non-output state. In this case, it is expected that this configuration will suitably indicate that the auto-repeated button function has been disabled.

In this example, if the operation on the second A control unit is interrupted and the unit is put into a non-operation state while the first post-reception output sound SA2a is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the first post-reception output sound SA2a is put into a non-output state is set to a fixed time (in this case, "0 seconds").

With this configuration, it becomes easier to predict how much time will pass after the operation state of the 2A control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled before the first post-reception output sound SA2a becomes non-output. This also means that it becomes easier to predict how much of the remaining time in the 2A acceptance state will be consumed, thus facilitating gameplay techniques that attempt to temporarily interrupt the operation state of the 2A control unit. This effect can be obtained even when, for example, the above-mentioned fixed time is set to "0.5 seconds," so the time from the non-operational state until the first post-reception output sound SA2a becomes non-output does not necessarily have to be set to "0 seconds."

Furthermore, in the second A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 149(f) and 151(c), when the operation state of the second A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tAb2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated function, a new display change is triggered.

Here, the display change triggered by the 2A operation unit being deactivated is not something like "the rapid-fire display HA2a, which was previously displayed, being hidden, making the display image originally shown behind it visible." Rather, it is a process triggered by the 2A operation unit being deactivated that causes some new display to appear. In this example, the display change appears by a process that newly starts displaying the "post-deactivation display HB2" as a cut-in image, as shown in Figure 151(c). With this configuration, it becomes possible to more reliably indicate that the 2A operation unit is deactivated and the auto-rapid-fire function is disabled.

In this example, the "Post-Operation Display HB2" has multiple modes depending on the progress of the performance, and at timing tAb2-A2, it is displayed in mode HB2a, which suggests that the performance has not progressed. However, it is not necessary to provide multiple modes for the "Post-Operation Display HB2" that suggest the progress of the performance. Alternatively, both a first type of post-operation display that is displayed in one of the multiple modes that suggest the progress of the performance, and a second type of post-operation display that is displayed in only one mode that does not suggest the progress of the performance, may be displayed as "Post-Operation Display HB2".

In this regard, in the second A acceptance state as described in this example, when the second A operation unit is deactivated, a new display (deactivation display HB2) is shown, but the corresponding sound is not newly output.

Furthermore, in the situation shown in Figure 151(c), the state of the situation indication display JA2 (here, state JA2a), which suggests the status of the operation, including the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2, is the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 151(a)), which also suggests that the presentation content has not progressed. Note that the state of the situation indication display JA2, which suggests the status of the operation, including the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2, only needs to be able to suggest that the presentation content has not progressed; it does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 151(a)).

In this example, the gauge image HP-A2 of the status indication display JA2 is not obscured by the "display after non-operation HB2," thereby making it easy to grasp the progress of the presentation content through the appearance of the status indication display JA2. The same applies to the ally character YS-A2 and the enemy character BOSS-A2; they may also be prevented from being obscured by the "display after non-operation HB2."

In this regard, regarding the "non-operation display HB2," regardless of its configuration, it may be configured to be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed since the 2A operation unit was left in a non-operation state. However, in this example, the display state is maintained as long as the 2A acceptance-allowed state continues, and is hidden when the timing tAb3 for the termination of the 2A acceptance-allowed state arrives, or when a new operation request is received from the player. With this configuration, even if the player loses the intention to continue operating during the 2A acceptance-allowed state, the display state of the non-operation display HB2 will continue until the timing tAb3 for the termination of the 2A acceptance-allowed state. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear as if the results of the operations performed up to that point have been displayed, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

In this example, as shown in Figure 149(a), it is assumed that the "second A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is returned to the operation state at timing tAb2-B1 within the second A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 151(d)).

In this example, if the "second A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tAb2-B1 within the second A acceptance state, this triggers the "second A reception change (second A reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figures 149(f) and (g) (the effect shown in Figure 151(d)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "Second A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-B1 within the Second A Acceptance State, as shown in Figures 149(f) and (g), the non-operation display HB2 (mode HB2a) is hidden, and as a Second A Acceptance Change, the "First Acceptance Output Sound SA2 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Second A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "Second A Acceptance Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Second A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, even when operation on the 2A control unit is resumed at timing tAb2-B1 within the 2A acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 2A acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 151(d), the 2A acceptance change (such as the 2A acceptance display or 2A acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 2A acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation being accepted by the 2A control unit at timing tAb2-A1. Details of the performance are as described above, so a further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the performance examples shown in Figures 149 and 151 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 2A operation unit), which began at timing tAb2-B1, is maintained until timing tAb2-B3, thereby activating the auto-continuous button-pressing function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 (the period during which the second A control unit is maintained in the operating state), the second A control unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and each time, a post-reception change (for example, post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, post-reception mechanism operation, etc.) is executed in accordance with the received operation.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 (the period during which the second A operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HA2a and the first post-reception output sound SA2a) remains the same as in the case of the period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2 (see Figure 151(b)), unless the performance content progresses. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 149, the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 assumes that, among the multiple operation receptions performed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the second A reception permission state progresses based on the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-B2 within that period (as shown in the performance status in Figure 151(e)).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 149, during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3, the "second A reception change (second A reception performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has not progressed, while during the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3, the "second A reception change (second A reception performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed.

More specifically, during the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3, at "timing tAb2-B2," which is the timing when the performance content progresses, a display change is performed based on the operation reception to the second A operation unit, as shown in Figures 149(e) and 151(e). This change changes the state of the status indication display JA2, which indicates the status of the operation, from the previously displayed "state JA2a" to a different "state JA2b." Here, as shown in Figure 151(e), the enemy character BOSS-A2 changes to a state in which it is injured, the fire magic used by the ally character YS-A2 changes to a state of higher intensity, and the gauge image HP-A2 changes to a state in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased. With this configuration, the change in the state indication display JA2 suggests that the performance content corresponding to the second A acceptance state has progressed due to the operation reception (by the auto-repeated button function) performed at timing tAb2-B2 (and the result of the performance judgment based on that operation).

After the performance has progressed in this way, when an operation request is received by the 2A operation unit, the "Display after 2A reception" will show the "single video display" in an advanced state of the performance, as shown in Figure 151(e), such as "ally character YS-A2 attacks the injured enemy character BOSS-A2 using a more powerful fire-based magic."

Furthermore, in this example, once the performance content has progressed, as long as the state of acceptance of the 2A input remains in place, the degree of progress in the performance content will not revert to its previous state. Therefore, even when the 2A input unit receives another input request after the completion of one video display showing the progressed performance content, the behavior at the time of the initial input request (in this case, the behavior of "ally character YS-A2" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A2" with fire magic) will appear as one video display showing the progressed performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3, when the so-called auto-button function is activated, the "single video display" in which such a change in appearance occurs will be played multiple times, corresponding to the number of times the auto-button function has received an input request.

Furthermore, even during the period after timing tAb2-B2, when the animation progresses, the sequence in which the ally character YS-A2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A2 with fire magic (one video display) is restarted at indefinite intervals (times not predetermined) as a post-reception change. Therefore, the "one video display" of the progressed animation sequence is also restarted at indefinite intervals by the auto-repeated button function. This repeated display of the "one video display" of the progressed sequence is represented in the diagram as "Repeated Button Display HA2b".

Thus, in the performance display device 1600 in this example, when the timing tAb2-B2, which is the timing when the performance content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 149(e), (f) and 151(d), (e), the mode of the status indication display JA2 changes from "mode JA2a" to "mode JA2b," and the mode of the rapid-fire display HA2 also changes from "mode HA2a" to "mode HA2b." From this point onward, while the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled (timing tAb2-B2 to tAb2-B3), the status indication display JA2 will be displayed in "mode JA2b," and the rapid-fire display HA2 will be executed in "mode HA2b."

In this example, the appearance of the rapid-fire indicator HA2 is changed according to the progress of the performance, but it is also possible to keep it unchanged. That is, even if the rapid-fire indicator HA2 continues to run in a single appearance regardless of the progress of the performance, the player can still confirm through the rapid-fire indicator HA2 that the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) operations have been received. Furthermore, the player can also confirm the degree of progress of the performance through the appearance of the status indication indicator JA2.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is received once at the "2A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 2A acceptance state, in addition to the "2A acceptance display" described above, a first acceptance output sound may be output as the "2A acceptance output sound," as shown in Figure 149(g). Furthermore, as described above, in addition to the first acceptance output sound SA2, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," a second acceptance output sound SB2, which suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 2A acceptance state has progressed, can also be output, as shown in Figure 149(h).

Therefore, in the period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3 in the example shown in Figure 149, when timing tAb2-B2, which is the timing when the performance content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figure 149(h), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is output in mode SB2b-1 based on the fact that the operation was received (performance progress) at timing tAb2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the performance content has progressed through the output mode of the post-reception output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-reception output sound SB2 to be longer than that of the first post-reception output sound SA2, which corresponds to one instance of operation reception.

However, in this example, the first post-reception output sound SA2, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is implemented to be output in the same manner before and after the performance progresses. Therefore, when timing tAb2-B2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, the first post-reception output sound SA2, as a new "sound effect," begins outputting based on the operation being received. However, its manner of output is the same as when the operation was received before timing tAb2-B2 (the execution manner is the same whether or not performance progress occurs at timing tAb2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tAb2-B1 to timing tAb2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is activated, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (first post-reception output sound SA2) is newly output in the same manner at indefinite intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented as "first post-reception output sound SA2a" in the diagram. The output manner of the first post-reception output sound SA2a during this period is the same as in the case of the "period from timing tAb2-A1 to timing tAb2-A2" described above, so an explanation is omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-reception output sound SA2a was not changed according to the progression of the performance content, but it may be changed according to the progression of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HA2b is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3), as shown in Figure 151(e), the rapid-fire display HA2b repeatedly shows "ally character YS-A2 attacking wounded enemy character BOSS-A2 with high-intensity fire magic (smoke effect, generation of fire magic, etc.)" at irregular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JA2" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the second A acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 149 and 151 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the second A acceptance state, interrupts operations on the second A operation unit again at timing tAb2-B3, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button function.

As described above, in the second A acceptance state, if the operation state of the second A control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the second A acceptance state is in effect, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HA2, which was previously in an active state, will be turned off. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire button press indicator HA2b will terminate its operation when timing tAb2-B3 arrives (when the second A control unit is set to a non-operation state).

Furthermore, similar to the case of the rapid-fire indicator HA2a, if the operation on the second A control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the rapid-fire indicator HA2b is displayed, the time from the non-operation state until the rapid-fire indicator HA2b disappears is set to a fixed time (in this case, "0 seconds").

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the second A acceptance state in this example, when the operation state of the second A control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, a new display change is triggered. Therefore, as shown in Figures 149(f) and 151(f), when the operation state of the second A control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timing tAb2-B3, this triggers a process to start displaying the "Post-Operation Display HB2" as a cut-in image shown in Figure 151(f). Also, as mentioned above, the "Post-Operation Display HB2" in this example has multiple modes depending on the progress of the performance, and at timing tAb2-B3, mode HB2b is displayed, suggesting that the performance has progressed one stage.

In the situation shown in Figure 151(f), the mode of the situation indication display JA2 (here, mode JA2b), which suggests the status of the operation, is also indicated by the appearance of the ally character YS-A2, the enemy character BOSS-A2, and the gauge image HP-A2, suggesting that the presentation content has progressed by one stage.

Furthermore, as described above, in the second A acceptance state, if the operation state of the second A control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the second A acceptance state is in effect, thereby disabling the auto-repeated function, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2, which was previously in an output state, will be rendered inaudible as a result. In other words, in this case, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a will end when timing tAb2-B3 arrives (triggered by the second A control unit being set to a non-operation state).

However, the timing tAb2-B3 shown in Figure 149 assumes a scenario where the operation state of the second A operation unit is interrupted while the second post-reception output sound SB2, which started outputting at timing tAb2-B2, continues to output.

In this regard, in the second A acceptance state, unlike the case of the first post-reception output sound SA2, the second post-reception output sound SB2 does not terminate its output state (become inaudible) when the operation state of the second A control unit is interrupted (turned into a non-operation state). Therefore, as shown in Figure 149(h), even if the operation state of the second A control unit is interrupted at timing tAb2-B3, the second post-reception output sound SB2b-1 will continue to be output for a predetermined duration, or for a predetermined duration from the non-operation state, even after timing tAb2-B3 (even after the second A control unit becomes non-operational).

In this example, if the operation on the second A control unit is interrupted and it is set to a non-operation state while the first reception output sound SA2a is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the first reception output sound SA2a is set to a fixed time (here, "0 seconds"). In contrast, for the second reception output sound SB2, if the operation on the second A control unit is interrupted and it is set to a non-operation state while the second reception output sound SB2 is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the second reception output sound SB2 is set to a non-operation state is not set to a fixed time, but is set to an indeterminate value. That is, in this case, if the operation on the second A control unit is interrupted, the first reception output sound SA2 and the second reception output sound SB2, which were previously in an output state, will provide different effects.

With this configuration, even in the second A acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the second A control unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the second A post-acceptance output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2b) is in the execution state, a situation will occur where the second A post-acceptance output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2b) continues to be in the execution state while the second A control unit is in a non-operation state, as shown in Figure 149(h). However, after this, due to the passage of time since the second A control unit was left in a non-operation state (time elapsed from timing tAb2-B3), the continuing second A post-acceptance output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2b) will be turned into a non-output state, as shown in Figure 149(h), etc.

In this example, as shown in Figure 149(a), it is assumed that the second A control unit is put back into operation at timing tAb2-B3 or later, and the second A post-reception output sound (second post-reception output sound SB2b) is audible (before the output state ends), at timing tAb2-C1 (the performance situation shown in Figure 151(g)).

In this example, if the "second A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tAb2-C1 within the second A acceptance state, this will trigger the "second A acceptance change (second A acceptance effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figures 149(f) and (g) (the effect shown in Figure 151(g)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "Second A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAb2-C1 within the Second A Acceptance State, as shown in Figures 149(f) and (g), the non-operation display HB2 (mode HB2b) is hidden, and as a Second A Acceptance Change, the "First Acceptance Output Sound SA2 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Second A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is audibly output again, and the "Second A Acceptance Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Second A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, when operation on the 2A control unit is resumed at timing tAb2-C1 within the 2A acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 2A acceptance state does not progress from the first stage of progression described above. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 151(g), the 2A acceptance change (such as the 2A acceptance display or 2A acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 2A acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation being accepted by the 2A control unit at timing tAb2-B2 (the mode shown in Figure 151(e)). Details of the performance are as described above, so a further explanation will be omitted here.

However, as mentioned above, this example assumes that the timing tAb2-C1, when operation on the second A control unit is restarted, occurs while the second post-reception output sound SB2 is audible.

In this case, the second post-reception output tone SB2 continues in its previous output state without any change, based on the fact that operation on the second A control unit has resumed at timing tAb2-C1 (that operation has been received). Furthermore, the first post-reception output tone SA2, corresponding to the second A acceptance state, is made inaudible when the second A control unit is deactivated; therefore, it is not audible when the second A control unit is reactivated.

With this configuration, in the second A reception-accepting state, while the second A reception-after output sound corresponding to the operation reception is being output, if an operation reception is made to the second A operation unit, which was previously in a non-operational state, this will not trigger the termination of the second A reception-after output sound; it will always continue (second reception-after output sound SB2).

Furthermore, the rapid-fire indicator HA2, like the first input response output sound SA2, is turned off when the second A control unit is left idle. Therefore, it is never displayed when the second A control unit is operated again.

Furthermore, the performance examples shown in Figures 149 and 151 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 2A operation unit), which began at timing tAb2-C1, is maintained until timing tAb2-C2, thereby activating the auto-repeated button press function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 (the period during which the second A control unit is maintained in the operating state), the second A control unit receives multiple inputs via the auto-repeated input function, and each time, a post-input change corresponding to the input is executed (for example, post-input display, post-input sound, post-input illumination, post-input mechanism operation, etc.).

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 (the period during which the second A operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HA2b and the first post-reception output sound SA2a) remains the same as in the case of the period from timing tAb2-B2 to timing tAb2-B3 (see Figure 151(e)), unless further development of the performance content occurs. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 149, the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2 assumes that, among the multiple operation receptions performed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the second A reception acceptance state progresses further based on the operation reception (such as the result of the performance judgment) performed at timing tAb2-C2 within that period (when the second stage of progress occurs) (as shown in the performance status in Figure 151(h)). In particular, timing tAb2-C2 in this example assumes that the performance content corresponding to the second A reception acceptance state progresses to the final stage of performance, and that the second A reception acceptance state also ends as a result of the operation reception performed at timing tAb2-C2 (see Figures 149(a) and 151(h)).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 149, during the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2, the "second A reception change (second A reception performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content progresses only once (see Figure 151(h)). However, from timing tAb2-C2 onward, under conditions where operation reception to the second A operation unit is not permitted, the "second A reception change (second A reception performance)" is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed further (the final stage performance manner) (see Figure 151(h)).

More specifically, at timing tAb2-C2, as shown in Figures 149(e) and 151(h), based on the operation received by the second A operation unit, a display change is performed to change the state indication display JA2, which suggests the operation status, from the previously displayed "state JA2b" to a different "state JA2c". Here, as shown in Figure 151(h), the display changes to show that the enemy character BOSS-A2 has been defeated, that the fire magic used by the ally character YS-A2 is exploding around the enemy character BOSS-A2, and that the gauge image HP-A2 has further decreased. With this configuration, through this change in the state indication display JA2, it is suggested that the performance content corresponding to the second A operation acceptance state has progressed as a result of the operation received (by the auto-button function) at timing tAb2-C2 (and the resulting performance judgment).

However, as stated above, "Pattern JA2c" as the status indication display JA2 corresponds to the "final stage of the performance" among the performance content corresponding to the 2A acceptance state, and only appears when the 2A acceptance state ends due to an operation reception. Therefore, "Pattern JA2c" as the status indication display JA2, after being started based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-C1, will be executed for a predetermined amount of time regardless of whether or not the player performed an operation during its execution period, and then will be hidden. Note that here, only "Pattern JA2c" is provided as the final stage of the performance of the status indication display JA2; multiple patterns with different expected outcomes of winning are not provided.

Furthermore, when an operation is received at timing tAb2-C2, the auto-repeated button press function, which had been enabled up to that point, is disabled as the second A acceptance state terminates. In this regard, when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled at timing tAb2-C2, the button-pressing indicator HA2, which was previously displayed due to the auto-repeated button press function, is also hidden at this point.

Furthermore, in this example, when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled at timing tAb2-C2, the first post-reception output sound SA2a, which had been output by the auto-repeated button press function, is made inaudible (a certain time after the operation is received) as a result.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the first post-reception output sound SA2, a second post-reception output sound SB2 is also possible as a second post-reception output sound corresponding to the second A reception acceptance state, as shown in Figure 149(h), which suggests that the performance content corresponding to the second A reception acceptance state has progressed.

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 149, during the period from timing tAb2-C1 to timing tAb2-C2, when timing tAb2-C2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, as shown in Figure 149(h), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is output in mode SB2b-2 based on the fact that the operation was received (performance progress) at timing tAb2-C2. This allows the player to recognize the degree of progress in the performance through the output mode of the post-reception output sound. It is desirable to set the output duration of the second post-reception output sound SB2 to be longer than that of the first post-reception output sound SA2.

In this example, we assumed that timing tAb2-C2 occurs after the second post-reception output tone SB2b-1, which began outputting at timing tAb2-B2, has become inaudible. However, it is also possible that timing tAb2-C2 occurs while the second post-reception output tone SB2b-1 is still audible. In this case, the second post-reception output tone SB2 may change from "mode SB2b-1" to a different "mode SB2b-2" at timing tAb2-C2 (ending mode SB2b-1 and replacing it with mode SB2b-2).

As mentioned above, the 2A acceptance state, as shown in Figure 150(b), continues until timing tAb3 arrives if no operation is received for the 2A operation unit, and terminates upon the arrival of timing tAb3. In this regard, the 2A acceptance state occurs as an acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is activated. Therefore, as shown in Figure 150, if no operation is received for the 2A operation unit while in the 2A acceptance state until timing tAb3 arrives, not only does the 2A acceptance state terminate upon the arrival of timing tAb3, but the final stage of the performance content corresponding to the 2A acceptance state (see Figures 150(e), (h), and Figure 151(h), etc.) is executed as a post-2A acceptance change that appears when an operation is performed on the 2A operation unit.

Furthermore, the second A acceptance state may be generated as an acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. In other words, in this case, the second A acceptance state is terminated simply upon the arrival of timing tAb3, and the second A post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is performed on the second A operation unit will not be initiated.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "Third A Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state). Figure 152 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "Third A Acceptance State" is generated based on the fulfillment of "Condition 3A" and the player performs an operation. Figure 153 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "Third A Acceptance State" is generated but the player does not perform an operation. Figure 154 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the "Third A Acceptance State" is generated.

Now, assuming the starting conditions are met (holding is processed) and the "Third A Variation Pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement performance determination) corresponding to the "Third A Variation Pattern." After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ (such as performance depiction according to the Third A Variation Pattern, or sound output of BGM according to the Third A Variation Pattern (such as normal BGM playback when not reaching)), and within the execution period of this variation performance, it additionally executes a performance (pre-announcement performance) according to the result of the pre-announcement performance determination, in addition to the performance of the selected "Third A Variation Pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 152(c), during the execution period of the variation effect related to the "3A variation pattern," based on the arrival of timing tAc2, which is the 3A time elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the fulfillment of "condition 3A"), the above-mentioned 3A acceptance permission state (valid period) is made possible, allowing "operation reception to the 3A operation unit regarding changes after 3A reception (such as the 3A effect status indication display JA3, the 3A rapid-fire display HA3, and the 3A reception output sounds SA3, SB3, etc.)" (the situation shown in Figure 154(a)).

In this embodiment, the "third A operation unit" that allows operation reception in the third A reception-permitted state is set as the operation button 410, and multiple operation receptions are permitted before the third A reception-permitted state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 shown in this example, as illustrated in Figures 152(b) to (e), when the 3A acceptance state occurs, a mock image display MG-A3, which mimics the target of the player's operation (in this case, the "operation button 410" as the 3A operation unit), and a status indication display JA3, which suggests the status of the operation, are displayed at a timing tAc1 that occurs before the 3A acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance to the 3A operation unit is permitted).

However, the mock image display MG-A3 and the status indication display JA3 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 3A acceptance state occurs. They may be displayed simultaneously with the occurrence of the 3A acceptance state, or slightly later. In particular, the status indication display JA3 may not be displayed until the first operation request is received from the 3A operation unit in the 3A acceptance state. That is, it may be implemented to appear and be displayed only after an operation request has been received from the 3A operation unit.

The mock image display MG-A3 and the status indication display JA3 will continue to be displayed once the display is initiated, regardless of the operating status of the 3A operation unit, until at least the 3A acceptance state ends.

Here, the "Mock Image Display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A acceptance state selectively uses either a "first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" or a "second color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme. For example, the color scheme determined based on the results of a performance judgment is used for display.

Furthermore, the "Mock Image Display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A acceptance state depicts a motion image in which the mock "operation receiving unit," which is the target of the operation, is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α), and then sequentially displayed in the manners shown in Figures 144(β) to (σ). This motion image is considered a single periodic change, and this periodic change repeats with a predetermined period of 3A time. This period of 3A time is set to be shorter than the above period of 2A time (short cycle), and may, for example, be set to the same time as the above period of 1A time. Therefore, in the 3A acceptance state, the motion of the "operation receiving unit" rapidly moving up and down within its movable range is depicted.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 153(b), the 3A acceptance state continues until timing tAc3 arrives when no operation is received by the 3A operation unit, and terminates upon the arrival of timing tAc3. Therefore, while the 3A acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock image display MG-A3) indicating the remaining time until timing tAc3 arrives, which terminates the 3A acceptance state, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display is not necessarily required.

Furthermore, if the "Mock Image Display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A acceptance state is to be displayed before the timing tAc2 in which the 3A acceptance state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAc2 arrives before starting its periodic changes and gauge image changes. In other words, in this case, the "Mock Image Display MG-A3" corresponding to the 3A acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α) until timing tAc2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the third A acceptance state in this example, unlike the first A acceptance state and the second A acceptance state, no message related to the acceptance of operation to the third A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410) is displayed, as shown in Figures 152(d) and 154(a).

Furthermore, in the third A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 152(e) and 154(a), a status indication display JA3 is shown to indicate the status of operation in the third A acceptance state. This display includes an ally character (here, ally character YS-A3) corresponding to the type of the third A acceptance state, an enemy character (here, enemy character BOSS-A3 depicted as a ghost) corresponding to the type of the third A acceptance state, and a gauge image HP-A3 showing its remaining HP gauge. In the 3A acceptance state, the likelihood of a big win is suggested through a visual effect that indicates whether the ally character YS-A3 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A3 (whether the gauge image HP-A3 can be reduced to 0) through multiple inputs to the 3A control unit. In other words, each time an input (input) is received from the 3A control unit (in this case, the operation button 410), a visual effect may be triggered in which the ally character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3. In this example, the situation indication display JA3 shows the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3. However, it is not necessary to display all of these; the display can indicate the status of the operation as long as at least one of the ally character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, and gauge image HP-A3 is displayed.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 152, it is assumed that the first operation request is received by the "Third A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-A1 within the Third A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 154(b)).

In this example, if the first operation is received by the "Third A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-A1 within the Third A reception permission state, a "Third A reception change (Third A reception effect)" corresponding to that operation will occur, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g) (the effect shown in Figure 154(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "Third A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-A1 within the Third A reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g), a "Third A Reception Post-Output Sound" corresponding to the operation reception to the "Third A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "Third A Reception Post-Display" corresponding to the operation reception to the "Third A Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed.

In other words, when an operation is received once for the "3A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" in the 3A reception-accepting state, a video display of one instance is shown as the "3A reception display" as shown in Figure 154(b), in which the "ally character YS-A3" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning magic. However, as will be described later, in the 3A reception-accepting state, based on the result of the performance judgment when the operation is received, there is a possibility that the "enemy character BOSS-A3" may be injured, the strength of the lightning magic may increase, or the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-A3 may decrease (the performance content may progress due to the performance judgment, etc.). If the animation progresses in this way, the state in which the operation was received by the 3A control unit afterward (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-A3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning magic) will appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed animation (see Figures 152(e), (f), and 154(f), etc.). After the animation progresses in this way, as long as the state in which the 3A control unit is allowed to receive input continues, the degree of progress in the animation will not revert to the state before the progress. Therefore, even if the 3A control unit receives input again after the single video display that has changed to the progressed animation has finished, the state in which the operation was received by the 3A control unit (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-A3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning magic) may appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed animation. The game's presentation could be designed to suggest a higher probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot as the story progresses.

Furthermore, in this example, when an operation is received once for the "Third A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the Third A reception-accepting state, in addition to the "Third A reception display" described above, a first reception output sound SA3 may be output as the "Third A reception output sound," as shown in Figure 152(g). The first reception output sound SA3 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic (such as the generation of lightning magic)" that appears as the "Third A reception display." Also, as will be described later, there is a possibility that a second reception output sound SB3 will be output as the "Third A reception output sound." The second reception output sound SB3 in this example is output when the content of the "Third A reception display" progresses. In this document, the first post-reception output sound SA3 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-reception display. However, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that the player has performed an operation, and when the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it should suggest that the 3A operation unit is maintained in an operational state.

Thus, in the 3A acceptance state, each time an operation is received by the "3A operation unit (in this case, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A3" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A3" and its sound effects are displayed. That is, through multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A3," the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A3" decreases (the animation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-A3" has been defeated, providing an animation that suggests a high probability of success. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A3" is not defeated, it suggests a low probability of success.

This example, as shown in Figure 152(a), assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 3A operation unit), initiated at timing tAc2-A1, continues until timing tAc2-A2.

In this regard, the 3A acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (3A operation unit) in an operating state, the corresponding post-operation changes (e.g., post-operation display, post-operation output sound, post-operation light, post-operation mechanism operation, etc.) are executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated)." Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 152(a), during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is maintained in an operating state), multiple operation receptions are made to the 3A operation unit, and each time, the corresponding post-operation changes (e.g., post-operation display, post-operation output sound, post-operation light, post-operation mechanism operation, etc.) are executed.

As described above, when an operation request is received by the 3A operation unit in the 3A reception-accepting state, the display shown after the 3A reception, as shown in Figure 154(b), displays an image (one video) of the ally character YS-A3 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic. Therefore, from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2, when the so-called auto-fire function is activated, this "one video display" is played multiple times, corresponding to the number of times the operation request was received.

Furthermore, as described above, when an operation is received by the 3A operation unit in the 3A reception-accepting state, the 3A reception output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic (such as smoke effects and the generation of lightning magic)" that appears as the "3A reception display." Therefore, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2, when the so-called auto-repeated function is activated, in addition to the "single video display," the sound effect corresponding to such a "single video display" will be played multiple times, corresponding to the number of times an operation was received.

However, in the state where the 3A input is accepted, if the control unit (3A control unit) is maintained in operation and the auto-repeated button function is activated, the sequence in which the ally character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic (one video display) and the corresponding sound effect (3A input output sound) will be newly executed at regular intervals (predetermined times) as a post-input change.

Furthermore, in the 3A reception-accepting state, when the operation unit (3A operation unit) is maintained in operation and the auto-repeated button function is activated, the sequence in which the ally character YS-A1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic (one video display) and the corresponding sound effect (3A reception output sound) are made executable multiple times as the above-mentioned post-reception changes. However, the interval between the start of execution of each post-reception change in response to the above detection (the interval between the start of execution of the previous post-reception change and the start of execution of the next post-reception change) is always set to be less than or equal to a specific time.

In other words, in this case, from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 152, a "single video display" of the ally character YS-A3 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic is newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button function. This repeated display of a "single video display" is represented in the figure as "repeated button display HA3a".

Similarly, in the example shown in Figure 152, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (the sound output after receiving the 3A signal) is newly output at regular intervals by the auto-repeated function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as "the first sound output after receiving the signal SA3a."

In this regard, the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 152 assumes a scenario where, although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, neither the "Status Indication Display JA3 (see Figure 152(e))" which indicates the status of operation in the 3A reception-accepting state, nor the "Second Post-Reception Output Sound (see Figure 152(h))" which indicates the status of operation in the 3A reception-accepting state, will change or be initiated in response to operation reception.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 152, the display of "lightning-type magic attacks" and the corresponding sound effect output shown in Figure 154 are repeatedly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button press function (repeated button press display HA3a, first post-reception output sound SA3a). However, no change occurs in the "situation indication display JA3 (see Figure 152(e))." This allows players to confirm the same performance content as when they performed monotonous repetitive operations, or whether the performance content has not progressed, without having to perform monotonous repetitive operations. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, regarding the "Status Indication Display JA3 (see Figure 152(e))", at least one of the following may be changed in response to the input. However, in this case, it is necessary to change to a different form than the "form when the performance content progresses", and if the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is maintained in operation state) ends without the performance content progressing (when the operation is interrupted), it will be returned to the "display form before the operation". Also, as mentioned above, the "Status Indication Display JA3 (see Figure 152(e))", such as the ally character YS-A3, enemy character BOSS-A3, and gauge image HP-A3, may not be displayed until the input is received, and may appear and be displayed only when the input is received (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2, neither the "Status Indication Display JA3 (see Figure 152(e))" which suggests the operation status in the third A acceptance state, nor the "Second Post-Acceptance Output Sound (see Figure 152(h))" which suggests the operation status in the third A acceptance state, changes or starts execution in response to the operation acceptance. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the performance content has not progressed.

However, under conditions where the rapid-fire display HA3a is executed by such an auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2), as shown in Figure 154(b), the rapid-fire display HA3a repeatedly shows "ally character YS-A3 attacking enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic" at regular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JA3" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the state where the 3A input is accepted (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 152 and 154 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the state where the 3A is accepted, temporarily interrupts operations on the 3A operation unit at timing tAc2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated button function.

Here, in the 3A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 152(f) and 154(c), even if the operation state of the 3A control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tAc2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HA3a, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire button press indicator HA3a will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tAc2-A2 (even after the 3A control unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the "single video display" that was in the execution state has finished for a predetermined display time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 3A control unit is temporarily interrupted (returned to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button press function is disabled, the rapid-press indicator HA3a, which was previously active, will not immediately disappear. Therefore, it will take some time before the operation status in the 3A acceptance state becomes easily recognizable. This means that a significant amount of time is consumed in the 3A acceptance state, thus creating a sense of caution against interrupting the operation state of the 3A control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in the 3A acceptance state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 3A control unit is interrupted and it is switched to a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HA3a is displayed, the time from the non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HA3a disappears is not set to a fixed time, but is made variable.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 3A control unit is temporarily interrupted (turned to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, before the rapid-fire indicator HA3a disappears and a situation arises where the operation status in the 3A acceptance state becomes easily recognizable. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 3A acceptance state will be consumed. Therefore, it is expected that this configuration will appropriately create a sense of tension when attempting to temporarily interrupt the operation of the 3A control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in the 3A acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the 3A acceptance state, as shown in Figure 152(g), the first post-reception output sound SA3a, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not become inaudible when the operation state of the 3A operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tAc2-A2 to disable the auto-repeating function, similar to the rapid-fire indicator HA3a. In other words, in this case, the first post-reception output sound SA3a will continue to be output even after timing tAc2-A2 (even after the 3A operation unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in the execution state has finished executing for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 3A control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, the first post-reception output sound SA3a, which was in the active state until then, will not immediately become non-output. In this case, it may appear as if the auto-repeated button function is still active, thus maintaining a desirable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 3A control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the first post-reception output sound SA3a is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the first post-reception output sound SA3a is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 3A control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) to disable the auto-repeated button function, and how long it will take for the first post-reception output sound SA3a to become non-output, that is, how long it will take to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated button function has been disabled. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 3A acceptance state will be consumed, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 3A control unit.

Furthermore, in the third A acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the third A operation unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HA3a and the first post-reception output sound SA3a are both in the execution state, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA3a is hidden and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is turned off are made different, as shown in Figures 152(f), (g), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA3a is hidden is set to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is turned off, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state is hidden or turned off is indeterminate, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA3a is hidden may be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is turned off, or it may be after the timing at which it is turned off. Additionally, it may be possible to allow for situations where their timings coincide.

With this configuration, in the third A acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the third A operation unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HA3a and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a are both in operation state, a situation will occur where, as shown in Figures 152(f), (g) and 154(c), the rapid-fire indicator HA3a continues to be displayed and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a continues to be output, even though the third A operation unit is in a non-operation state. However, after this, as time elapses since the third A operation unit was left in a non-operation state, as shown in Figures 152(f), (g) and 154(d), the rapid-fire indicator HA3a, which had been displayed, will be hidden, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a will be left in a non-output state. This allows players to easily recognize when the auto-button function is disabled, and also to easily recognize the mode of the status indication display JA3 (in this case, mode JA3a), which indicates the status of operation, such as the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 (see Figure 154(d)).

However, as mentioned above, in the example shown in Figure 152, the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 assumes that although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 154(d), although the appearance of the situation indication display JA3 (here, appearance JA3a), which suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3, can be easily recognized, these appearances are the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 154(a)), thus suggesting that the presentation content has not progressed. Note that the appearance of the situation indication display JA3, such as the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3, only needs to be able to suggest that the presentation content has not progressed; it does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 154(a)).

In this example, as shown in Figure 152(a), it is assumed that the "Third A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is returned to the operation state at timing tAc2-B1 within the Third A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 154(e)).

In this example, if the "Third A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tAc2-B1 within the Third A acceptance state, this triggers the "Third A reception change (Third A reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g) (the effect shown in Figure 154(e)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "Third A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-B1 within the Third A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g), the "First post-reception output sound SA3 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Third A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "Third A post-reception display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Third A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, even when operation on the 3A control unit is resumed at timing tAc2-B1 within the 3A acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 3A acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 154(e), the 3A acceptance change (such as the 3A acceptance display or 3A acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 3A acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation being accepted by the 3A control unit at timing tAc2-A1. Details of the performance are as described above, and will therefore be omitted here.

In this regard, the performance examples shown in Figures 152 and 154 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 3A operation unit), which began at timing tAc2-B1, is maintained until timing tAc2-B3, thereby activating the auto-repeated button press function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the 3A operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and each time, a post-reception change (for example, post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, post-reception mechanism operation, etc.) is executed in accordance with the received operation.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HA3a and the first post-reception output sound SA3a) remains the same as in the case of the period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2 (see Figure 154(b)), unless the performance content progresses. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 152, the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3 assumes that, among the multiple operation receptions performed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception permission state progresses based on the operation reception performed at timing tAc2-B2 within that period (as shown in the performance status in Figure 154(f)).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 152, during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3, the "3A Post-Reception Change (3A Post-Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has not progressed, whereas during the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3, the "3A Post-Reception Change (3A Post-Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed.

More specifically, during the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3, at "timing tAc2-B2," which is the timing when the performance content progresses, a display change is performed based on the operation reception to the 3A operation unit, as shown in Figures 152(e) and 154(f). This changes the state of the status indication display JA3, which indicates the status of the operation, from the previously displayed "state JA3a" to a different "state JA3b." Here, as shown in Figure 154(f), the enemy character BOSS-A3 changes to a state in which it is injured, the lightning magic used by the ally character YS-A3 changes to a state of higher intensity, and the gauge image HP-A3 changes to a state in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased. With this configuration, the change in the state indication display JA3 suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance state has progressed due to the operation reception (by the auto-repeated button function) performed at timing tAc2-B2 (and the result of the performance judgment based on that operation).

After the performance has progressed in this way, when an operation request is received by the 3A operation unit, the "Display after 3A reception" will show the "single video display" in an advanced form of the performance, as shown in Figure 154(f), such as "ally character YS-A3 attacks the injured enemy character BOSS-A3 using a powerful lightning-based magic."

Furthermore, in this example, once the performance content has progressed, as long as the state of acceptance of the 3A input remains in place, the degree of progress in the performance content will not revert to its previous state. Therefore, even when the 3A input unit receives another input request after the completion of one video display showing the progressed performance content, the behavior at the time of the initial input request (in this case, the behavior of "ally character YS-A3" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A3" with lightning magic) will appear as the one video display showing the progressed performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3, when the so-called auto-button function is activated, the "single video display" in which such a change in appearance occurs will be played multiple times, corresponding to the number of times the auto-button function has received an input.

Furthermore, even during the period after timing tAc2-B2, when the animation progresses, the sequence in which the ally character YS-A3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A3 with lightning magic (one video display) is restarted at regular intervals (predetermined intervals) as a change after the input is received. Therefore, the "one video display" of the progressed animation sequence is also restarted at regular intervals by the auto-tap function. This repeated display of the "one video display" of the progressed animation sequence is represented in the diagram as "Tap-Tap Display HA3b".

Thus, in the performance display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tAc2-B2," which is the timing when the performance content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 152(e), (f) and 154(e), (f), the mode of the status indication display JA3 changes from "mode JA3a" to "mode JA3b," and the mode of the rapid-fire display HA3 also changes from "mode HA3a" to "mode HA3b." From this point onward, while the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled (timing tAc2-B2 to tAc2-B3), the status indication display JA3 is displayed in "mode JA3b," and the rapid-fire display HA3 is executed in "mode HA3b."

In this example, the appearance of the rapid-fire indicator HA3 is changed according to the progress of the performance, but it is also possible to keep it unchanged. That is, even if the rapid-fire indicator HA3 continues to run in a single appearance regardless of the progress of the performance, the player can still confirm through the rapid-fire indicator HA3 that the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) operations have been received. Furthermore, the player can also confirm the degree of progress of the performance through the appearance of the status indication indicator JA3.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is received once at the "3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance state, in addition to the "3A acceptance display" described above, a first acceptance output sound may be output as the "3A acceptance output sound," as shown in Figure 152(g). Furthermore, as described above, in addition to the first acceptance output sound SA3, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," a second acceptance output sound SB3, which suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance state has progressed, can also be output, as shown in Figure 152(h).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 152, during the period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3, when timing tAc2-B2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, as shown in Figure 152(h), the second post-reception output sound SB3 is output in mode SB3b-1 based on the fact that the operation was received (performance progress) at timing tAc2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the performance has progressed through the output mode of the post-reception output sound. It is desirable to set the output duration of the second post-reception output sound SB3 to be longer than that of the first post-reception output sound SA3, which corresponds to one instance of operation reception.

However, in this example, the first post-reception output sound SA3, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is implemented to be output in the same manner before and after the performance progresses. Therefore, when timing tAc2-B2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, the first post-reception output sound SA3, as a new "sound effect," begins outputting based on the operation being received. However, its manner of output is the same as when the operation was received before timing tAc2-B2 (the execution manner is the same whether or not performance progress occurs at timing tAc2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tAc2-B1 to timing tAc2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is activated, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (first post-reception output sound SA3) is newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the diagram as "first post-reception output sound SA3a." The output manner of the first post-reception output sound SA3a during this period is the same as in the case of the "period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2" described above, so an explanation is omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-reception output sound SA3a was not changed according to the progression of the performance content, but it may be changed according to the progression of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HA3b is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3), as shown in Figure 154(f), the rapid-fire display HA3b repeatedly shows "ally character YS-A3 attacking the injured enemy character BOSS-A3 with high-intensity lightning magic" at regular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JA3" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the 3A acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 152 and 154 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the state where the 3A is accepted, interrupts operations on the 3A operation unit again at timing tAc2-B3 and disables the auto-repeated button function.

As described above, in the 3A acceptance state, even if the operation state of the 3A control unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the 3A acceptance state is continuing, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HA3, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be hidden as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figures 152(f) and 154(g), even if the operation state of the 3A control unit is interrupted at timing tAc2-B3, the rapid-fire button press indicator HA3b will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tAc2-B3 (even after the 3A control unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the "single video display" that was in the execution state is executed for a predetermined display time and finishes displaying, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, similar to the case of the rapid-fire indicator HA3a, if the operation on the 3A control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the rapid-fire indicator HA3b is displayed, the time from the non-operation state until the rapid-fire indicator HA3b disappears is not set to a fixed time, but is set to be variable.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 3A acceptance-allowed state, even if the operation state of the 3A control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the 3A acceptance-allowed state is continuing, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, which was in an output state until then, will not be switched to a non-output state as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figure 152(g), even if the operation state of the 3A control unit is interrupted at timing tAc2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a will continue to be output even after timing tAc2-B3 (even after the 3A control unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has finished executing and outputting for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

However, the timing tAc2-B3 shown in Figure 152 assumes a scenario where the operation state of the 3A operation unit is interrupted while the second post-reception output sound SB3, which started outputting at timing tAc2-B2, continues to output.

In this regard, in the third A acceptance state, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3, like the first post-acceptance output sound SA3, does not terminate its output state (become inaudible) when the operation state of the third A control unit is interrupted (turned into a non-operation state). Therefore, as shown in Figure 152(h), even if the operation state of the third A control unit is interrupted at timing tAc2-B3, the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 will continue to be output for a predetermined duration after timing tAc2-B3 (even after the third A control unit becomes non-operational), or for a predetermined duration from the non-operational state.

In this example, if the operation on the 3A control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the first post-reception output sound SA3 is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the first post-reception output sound SA3a is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time, but is made variable. Similarly, for the second post-reception output sound SB3, if the operation on the 3A control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the second post-reception output sound SB3 is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the second post-reception output sound SB3 is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time, but is made variable.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 3A control unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operational state) to disable the auto-repeating function, before the first post-reception output sound SA3 and the second post-reception output sound SB3 become inaudible, that is, before it can be more reliably confirmed that the auto-repeating function has been disabled. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 3A acceptance state will be consumed, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 3A control unit.

Furthermore, in the third A acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, even if the operation state of the third A operation unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HA3b and the first post-reception output sound SA3a are both in the execution state, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA3b is hidden and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is turned off are different, as shown in Figures 152(f), (g), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA3b is hidden is shown to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is turned off, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state is hidden or turned off is indeterminate, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA3b is hidden may be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA3a is turned off, or it may be after that timing. Furthermore, it may be possible to allow the timing of each to be the same. Note that this relationship between the rapid-fire indicator HA3b and the first post-reception output sound SA3a also holds true between the rapid-fire indicator HA3b and the second post-reception output sound SB3, and between the first post-reception output sound SA3a and the second post-reception output sound SB3; the same applies to other examples.

With this configuration, in the third A acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the third A operation unit is interrupted (turned into a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HA3b, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 are all in the execution state, a situation will occur where, as shown in Figures 152(f), (g), (h) and 154(g), the rapid-fire indicator HA3b continues to be displayed, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a continues to be output, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-1 continues to be output, even though the third A operation unit is in a non-operation state. However, after this, due to the passage of time since the third A operation unit was turned into a non-operation state (time elapsed from timing tAc2-B3), the rapid-fire indicator HA3b, which had been displayed, will be turned off, as shown in Figures 152(f) and 154(h). This allows players to easily recognize when the auto-button function is disabled, and also to easily recognize the state of the situation indication display JA3 (in this case, the state JA3b where the performance content has progressed), which indicates the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-A3, the enemy character BOSS-A3, and the gauge image HP-A3 (see Figure 154(h)).

Furthermore, under normal circumstances, both the first post-reception output sound SA3a and the second post-reception output sound SB3 would terminate (become inaudible) after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the 3A operation unit was deactivated (time elapsed from timing tAc2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in Figure 152(a), it is assumed that the 3A operation unit is put back into operation at timing tAc2-B3 or later, and that both the first post-reception output sound SA3a and the second post-reception output sound SB3 are audible (before the output state ends), at timing tAc2-C1 (the performance situation shown in Figure 154(i)).

In this example, if the "Third A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tAc2-C1 within the Third A acceptance state, similar to the case of timing tAc2-B1 described above, this will trigger the "Third A reception change (Third A reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g) (the effect shown in Figure 154(i)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "Third A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAc2-C1 within the Third A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 152(f) and (g), the "First post-reception output sound SA3 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Third A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "Third A post-reception display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Third A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, when operation on the 3A control unit is resumed at timing tAc2-C1 within the 3A acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 3A acceptance state does not progress from the mode shown in Figure 154(h) (the first stage of progression). Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 154(i), the 3A acceptance change (such as the 3A acceptance display or 3A acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 3A acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation acceptance to the 3A control unit at timing tAc-B2. Details of the performance are as described above, so they will not be explained here.

However, as mentioned above, this example assumes that the timing tAc2-C1, when operation on the 3A operation unit is restarted, occurs while both the first post-reception output sound SA3 and the second post-reception output sound SB3 are audible.

In this regard, the first post-reception output sound SA3 terminates its previous output state and initiates a new output triggered by the new operation reception, based on the fact that operation to the 3A control unit has resumed at timing tAc2-C1 (operation reception has been completed). In contrast, the second post-reception output sound SB3 continues its previous output state without any change, based on the fact that operation to the 3A control unit has resumed at timing tAc2-C1 (operation reception has been completed).

With this configuration, in the state where the 3A is accepting input, while the 3A post-input sound corresponding to the input input is being output, if an input input is received for the 3A operation unit which was previously in a non-operational state, there are two possibilities: the 3A post-input sound may end (first post-input sound SA3) or it may not end (second post-input sound SB3). This allows for a suitable sense of tension to be provided when the 3A operation unit, which was in a non-operational state, is brought back into operation. Furthermore, in the 3A acceptance state, in addition to cases where operation is accepted to the 3A operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is output and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is output, it goes without saying that operation may also be accepted to the 3A operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is output and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is not output, or when the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 is not output and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 is output.

Furthermore, the continuous press indicator HA3 may also be configured to remain displayed at timing tAc2-C1. In this case, when an operation is received from the 3A operation unit, which had been in a non-operational state, it is desirable that the previous "single video display" that was in progress is terminated prematurely, and a new display (single video display) triggered by the new operation is started in its place.

Furthermore, the performance examples shown in Figures 152 and 154 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 3A operation unit), which began at timing tAc2-C1, is maintained until timing tAc3, when the 3A acceptance state ends, thereby activating the auto-repeated button press function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the 3A operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and each time, a post-reception change (for example, post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, post-reception mechanism operation, etc.) is executed in accordance with the received operation.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 (the period during which the 3A operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HA3b and the first post-reception output sound SA3a) remains the same as in the case of the period from timing tAc2-B2 to timing tAc2-B3 (see Figure 154(f)), unless further development of the performance content occurs. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 152, the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3 assumes that, among the multiple operation receptions performed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception acceptance state has further progressed (a second stage of progress has occurred) based on the operation reception (such as the result of the performance judgment) performed at timing tAc2-C2 within that period (as shown in the performance situation in Figure 154(j)). In particular, timing tAc2-C2 in this example assumes that the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception acceptance state has progressed to the final stage of performance.

In this respect, unlike the first and second acceptance states described above, the third A acceptance state is designed so that even if the performance content corresponding to the third A acceptance state progresses to the final stage of performance, the validity period will not be terminated prematurely. It is a type of validity period that is guaranteed to continue until timing tAc3 (see Figures 152(a), (e) and 154(j), etc.).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 152, during the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc2-C2, the "3A Reception Change (3A Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content progresses only once (see Figure 154(i)). In contrast, during the period from timing tAc2-C2 to timing tAc3, while the state in which operation reception to the 3A operation unit is permitted continues, the "3A Reception Change (3A Reception Performance)" is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed further (the final stage performance manner) (see Figure 154(j)).

More specifically, at timings tAc2-C2, as shown in Figures 152(e) and 154(j), based on the operation received by the 3A operation unit, a display change is performed to change the state indication display JA3, which suggests the operation status, from the previously displayed "state JA3b" to a different "state JA3c". Here, as shown in Figure 154(j), the display changes to show that the enemy character BOSS-A3 has been defeated, that the lightning magic used by the ally character YS-A3 is exploding around the enemy character BOSS-A3, and that the gauge image HP-A3 changes to show that the remaining HP gauge has further decreased (in this case, to "0"). With this configuration, through this change in the state indication display JA3, it is suggested that the performance content corresponding to the 3A reception permission state has progressed as a result of the operation received (by the auto-repeated function) at timing tAc2-C2 (and the resulting performance judgment).

As mentioned above, "Pattern JA3c," which serves as a situation indication JA3, corresponds to the "final stage of presentation" among the presentation content that corresponds to the acceptance state of the 3A.

After further development of the performance content, when an operation request is received by the 3A operation unit, the "Display after 3A reception" will show the "single video display" in a further developed form, as shown in Figure 154(j), such as "ally character YS-A3 defeats enemy character BOSS-A3 using a lightning-based magic with even greater strength."

Furthermore, in this example, once the performance content has progressed further, as long as the state of acceptance of the 3A input remains in place, the degree of progress in the performance content will not revert to its previous state. Therefore, even when the 3A input unit receives another input request after the completion of the video display showing the further progressed performance content, the behavior at the time of the initial input request (in this case, the behavior in which the allied character YS-A3 defeats the enemy character BOSS-A3 using an even stronger lightning-based magic) will appear as the video display showing the further progressed performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3, when the so-called auto-button function is activated, the "single video display" with further changes in its appearance will be played multiple times, corresponding to the number of times the auto-button function has received an input.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tAc2-C2 onward, the sequence in which the allied character YS-A3 defeats the enemy character BOSS-A3 using even stronger lightning magic (one video display) is restarted at regular intervals (predetermined times) as a change after the initial input. Therefore, the "one video display" with further advanced animation content is also restarted at regular intervals by the auto-tap function. This repeated display of the "one video display" with advanced animation content is represented in the diagram as "Tap-Tap Display HA3c".

Thus, in the performance display device 1600 of this example, when "timing tAc2-C2," which is the timing when the performance content further progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 152(e), (f) and 154(i), (j), the mode of the status indication display JA3 changes from "mode JA3b" to "mode JA3c," and the mode of the rapid-fire display HA3 also changes from "mode HA3b" to "mode HA3c." From this point onward, while the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled (timing tAc2-C2 to tAc3), the status indication display JA3 is displayed in "mode JA3c," and the rapid-fire display HA3 is executed in "mode HA3c."

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is received once at the "3A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 3A acceptance state, in addition to the "3A acceptance display" described above, a first acceptance output sound may be output as the "3A acceptance output sound," as shown in Figure 152(g). Furthermore, as described above, in addition to the first acceptance output sound SA3, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," a second acceptance output sound SB3, which suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance state has progressed, can also be output, as shown in Figure 152(h).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 152, during the period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3, when timing tAc2-C2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, as shown in Figure 152(h), the second post-reception output sound SB3 is output in mode SB3b-2 based on the fact that the operation was received (performance progress) at timing tAc2-C2. This allows the player to recognize that the performance has progressed through the output mode of the post-reception output sound.

However, in this example, the first post-reception output sound SA3, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is implemented to be output in the same manner before and after the performance progresses. Therefore, when timing tAc2-C2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, the first post-reception output sound SA3, as a new "sound effect," begins outputting based on the operation being received. However, its manner of output is the same as when the operation was received before timing tAc2-C2 (the execution manner is the same whether or not performance progress occurs at timing tAc2-C2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tAc2-C1 to timing tAc3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is activated, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (first post-reception output sound SA3) is newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the diagram as "first post-reception output sound SA3a." The output manner of the first post-reception output sound SA3a during this period is the same as in the case of the "period from timing tAc2-A1 to timing tAc2-A2" described above, so an explanation is omitted here.

In this regard, the performance examples shown in Figures 152 and 154 assume a scenario where the auto-repeated button-pressing function, activated at timing tAc2-C1, continues, and then timing tAc3 arrives, ending the 3A acceptance state.

In other words, in this case, the 3A acceptance state ends while the status indication JA3 and the rapid-fire indication HA3 are displayed, as shown in Figures 152(e) to (h), and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3 and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3 are being output. At this point, the auto-rapid-fire function is also disabled.

Here, the status indication display JA3 is hidden based on the termination of the 3A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 152(e) and 154(k). In the examples shown in Figures 152(e) and 154(k), the display is hidden at the time the 3A acceptance state terminates, but this is not the only option. For example, if the display is hidden after a certain amount of time (more than 0 seconds) has elapsed since the termination of the 3A acceptance state (tAc3), then sufficient time can be appropriately secured to confirm the progress of the animation even if it occurs just before the termination of the 3A acceptance state. In this case, it is desirable that the timing at which the status indication display JA3 is hidden is always later than the timing at which the rapid-fire display HA3 (described later) is hidden.

Furthermore, unlike the first A acceptance state (rapid-press display HA1) and the second A acceptance state (rapid-press display HA2), the rapid-press display HA3 is not hidden when the third A acceptance state ends. Therefore, as shown in Figures 152(f) and 154(k), the rapid-press display HA3b continues to be in operation even after timing tAc3 (after the third A acceptance state ends), for example, until the "single video display" that was in the execution state has finished for a predetermined display time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, if the 3rd A acceptance state ends while the rapid-fire indicator HA3 is displayed, unlike the 1st A acceptance state (rapid-fire indicator HA1) and the 2nd A acceptance state (rapid-fire indicator HA2), the time between the end of the 3rd A acceptance state and the disappearance of the rapid-fire indicator HA3 is not set as a fixed time, but is instead made variable.

Furthermore, unlike the cases of the first reception-to-output sound SA3a (indicated by the rapid-fire display HA1) and the second reception-to-output state (indicated by the rapid-fire display HA2), the first reception-to-output sound SA3a is not deactivated when the third reception-to-output state ends. Therefore, as shown in Figure 152(g), the first reception-to-output sound SA3a continues to be output even after timing tAc3 (even after the third reception-to-output state ends), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in output state has finished executing for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, regarding the second post-reception output sound SB3, similar to the cases of the first A reception-accepting state (indicated by rapid button press HA1) and the second A reception-accepting state (indicated by rapid button press HA2), it is designed not to become non-output when the third A reception-accepting state ends. Therefore, as shown in Figure 152(h), the second post-reception output sound SB3 continues to output for a predetermined duration even after timing tAc3 (even after the third A reception-accepting state ends), or for a predetermined duration from the non-operation state.

In this example, if the third A acceptance state ends while the first post-reception output sound SA3 is being output, the time from the end of the third A acceptance state until the first post-reception output sound SA3a becomes non-output is not set to a fixed time, but is made indefinite. Similarly, for the second post-reception output sound SB3, if the third A acceptance state ends while the second post-reception output sound SB3 is being output, the time from the end of the third A acceptance state until the first post-reception output sound SA3a becomes non-output is not set to a fixed time, but is made indefinite.

Furthermore, in the third A acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, even when the third A acceptance-allowing state ends while the rapid-fire indicator HA3 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a are both in the execution state, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA3 is hidden and the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is turned off are different, as shown in Figures 152(f), (g), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA3 is hidden is set to before the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is turned off, but the relationship may be set to the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state is hidden or turned off is indeterminate, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HA3 is hidden may be before the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a is turned off, or it may be after that timing. Also, there may be cases where the timings are the same. Furthermore, the relationship between the rapid-fire indicator HA3 and the first post-reception output sound SA3a also holds true between the rapid-fire indicator HA3 and the second post-reception output sound SB3, and between the first post-reception output sound SA3a and the second post-reception output sound SB3; the same applies to other examples.

With this configuration, in the third A acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the third A operation unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HA3c, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-2 are all in the execution state, then, as shown in Figures 152(f), (g), (h) and 154(k), the rapid-fire indicator HA3c continues to be displayed, the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a continues to be output, and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-2 continues to be output. However, after this, due to the passage of time since the end of the third A acceptance-allowing state (time elapsed from timing tAc3), the rapid-fire indicator HA3b, which had been displayed, will be hidden, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA3a and the second post-acceptance output sound SB3b-2 will be de-outputted.

In this example, we assumed that timing tAc2-C2 occurs after the second post-reception output tone SB3b-1, which was started at timing tAc2-B2, has become inaudible. However, it is also possible that timing tAc2-C2 occurs while the second post-reception output tone SB3b-1 is still audible. In this case, the second post-reception output tone SB3 may be output at timing tAc2-C2 in a way that changes from "mode SB3b-1" to a different "mode SB3b-2" (ending mode SB3b-1 and replacing it with mode SB3b-2).

Furthermore, the 3A acceptance state occurs as an acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in Figure 153, if no operation is received by the 3A operation unit by the time timing tAc3 arrives in the 3A acceptance state, the 3A acceptance state simply ends based on the arrival of timing tAc3, and the 3A post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is performed on the 3A operation unit does not begin to execute.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "4A Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state). Figure 155 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "4A Acceptance State" is generated based on the fulfillment of "Condition 4A" and the player performs an operation. Figure 156 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "4A Acceptance State" is generated but the player does not perform an operation. Figure 157 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the "4A Acceptance State" is generated.

Now, assuming the starting conditions are met (holding is completed) and the "Fourth A Variation Pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement performance determination) corresponding to the "Fourth A Variation Pattern." After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ (such as performance depiction according to the Fourth A Variation Pattern, or sound output of BGM according to the Fourth A Variation Pattern (such as normal BGM playback when not reaching)), and within the execution period of this variation performance, it additionally executes a performance (pre-announcement performance) according to the result of the pre-announcement performance determination, in addition to the performance of the selected "Fourth A Variation Pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 155(c), during the execution period of the variation effect related to the "4A variation pattern," based on the arrival of timing tAd2, which is the elapsed time of the 4A time since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the fulfillment of "condition 4A"), the above-mentioned 4A reception permission state (valid period) is made possible, allowing for "reception of operations to the 4A operation unit regarding changes after 4A reception (such as the 4A effect status indication display JA4, the 4A single display TA4, and the 4A reception output sounds SA4, SB4, etc.)" (as shown in Figure 157(a)).

In this embodiment, the "4A operation unit" that allows operation reception in the 4A reception-permitted state is set as the operation button 410, and multiple operation receptions are permitted before the 4A reception-permitted state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figures 155(b) to (e), when the 4A acceptance state occurs, a mock image display MG-A4 that mimics the target of the player's operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the 4A operation unit), a message display MA4 related to the operation on the target of the operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the 4A operation unit), and a status indication display JA4 that suggests the status of the operation are displayed when the timing tAd1 arrives, which is before the 4A acceptance state occurs (before the operation reception to the 4A operation unit is permitted).

However, the mock image display MG-A4, message display MA4, and status indication display JA4 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 4A acceptance state occurs; they may be displayed simultaneously with the occurrence of the 4A acceptance state, or slightly delayed thereafter. However, in this example, it is particularly desirable that the status indication display JA4 be displayed before the first operation reception to the 4A operation unit occurs in the 4A acceptance state. Furthermore, the timing of the display of the mock image display MG-A4 and the timing of the display of the message display MA4 may be different. For example, the message display MA4 may be displayed before the display of the mock image display MG-A4.

The image display MG-A4, message display MA4, and status indication display JA4 will continue to be displayed once they are started, regardless of the operating status of the 4A operation unit, until at least the 4A acceptance state ends.

Here, the "Mock Image Display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A acceptance state uses only the "first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme.

Furthermore, the "Mock Image Display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A acceptance state depicts a motion image in which the mock "operation receiving unit," which is the target of the operation, is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α), and then sequentially displayed in the manners shown in Figures 144(β) to (σ). This motion image is considered a single periodic change, and this periodic change repeats with a predetermined period of 5A time. However, this period of 5A time is set to be longer than the period of 1A time that appears in the 1A acceptance state (long cycle), and may, for example, be set to the same time as the above-mentioned period of 2A time. Therefore, in the 4A acceptance state, the "operation receiving unit" is depicted slowly moving up and down within its movable range.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 156(b), the 4A acceptance state continues until timing tAd3 arrives when no operation is received by the 4A operation unit, and terminates upon the arrival of timing tAd3. Therefore, while the 4A acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock image display MG-A4) indicating the remaining time until timing tAd3 arrives, which terminates the 4A acceptance state, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display is not necessarily required.

Furthermore, if the "Mock Image Display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A acceptance state is to be displayed before the timing tAd2 in which the 4A acceptance state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAd2 arrives before starting its periodic changes and gauge image changes. In other words, in this case, the "Mock Image Display MG-A4" corresponding to the 4A acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α) until timing tAd2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the fourth A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 155(c), (d) and 157(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A4, a message related to the acceptance of operation to the fourth A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410) is displayed (in this case, the message display MA4, which is displayed as "Defeat the demon! Press the button repeatedly!!").

Furthermore, in the 4A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 155(e) and 157(a), a status indication display JA4 is shown to indicate the status of operation in the 4A acceptance state. This display shows an ally character corresponding to the type of the 4A acceptance state (here, ally character YS-A4), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 4A acceptance state (here, enemy character BOSS-A4 depicted as a demon), and a gauge image HP-A4 showing its remaining HP gauge. In the 4A acceptance state, the likelihood of a big win is suggested through a visual effect that indicates whether the ally character YS-A4 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A4 (whether the gauge image HP-A4 can be reduced to 0) through multiple inputs to the 4A control unit. In other words, each time an input (input) is received from the 4A control unit (in this case, the operation button 410), a visual effect may be triggered in which the ally character YS-A4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A4. In this example, the situation indication display JA4 shows the ally character YS-A4, the enemy character BOSS-A4, and the gauge image HP-A4. However, it is not necessary to display all of these; the display can indicate the status of the operation as long as at least one of the ally character YS-A4, enemy character BOSS-A4, and gauge image HP-A4 is displayed.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 155, it is assumed that the first operation request is received by the "4A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAd2-A1 within the 4A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 157(b)).

In this example, if the first operation is received by the "4A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAd2-A1 within the 4A acceptance state, a "4A post-reception change (4A post-reception effect)" corresponding to that operation will occur, as shown in Figures 155(e), (g), and (h) (the effect shown in Figure 157(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "4A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAd2-A1 within the 4A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 155(f) and (g), a "4A reception post-output sound" corresponding to the operation received by the "4A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "4A reception post-display" corresponding to the operation received by the "4A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed.

In other words, when an operation is received once for the "4A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" in the 4A reception-accepting state, a video display is shown once as the "4A reception display" as shown in Figure 157(b), depicting "ally character YS-A4" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A4" with wind-based magic (including smoke effects and the generation of wind-based magic). However, as will be described later, in the 4A reception-accepting state, each time an operation is received, "enemy character BOSS-A4" takes damage, the strength of the wind-based magic increases, and the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-A4 decreases (the presentation progresses). If the animation progresses in this way, the state in which the operation was received by the 4A control unit afterward (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-A4" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A4" with wind-based magic) will appear as a single video display showing the progressed animation (see Figures 155(e), (f) and 157(d), (f), (h), etc.).

However, as will be discussed later, the 4A reception-permitted state in this example, like the 3rd reception-permitted state described above, is a type of validity period in which no early termination triggered by an operation reception occurs (before the timing tAd3, when the 4A reception-permitted state ends due to the passage of time). In other words, in this case, if the performance content corresponding to the 4A reception-permitted state is changed (advanced) each time an operation reception is made during this type of validity period (4A reception-permitted state), then the processing when the performance content progresses to its final form becomes problematic.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned 3A acceptance state, when an operation request is made again after the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance state has progressed to its final form, the post-reception changes related to the final form are repeatedly generated each time such operation requests are made. In contrast, in the 4A acceptance state in this example, when an operation request is made again after the performance content corresponding to the 4A acceptance state has progressed to its final form, the first performance form (a predetermined performance form) is brought to life as a result of the operation request, and the performance is restarted from the state in which the first performance form (a predetermined performance form) is displayed. The first performance form (a predetermined performance form) may be the form that appears when the 3A acceptance state occurs, or it may be the form that appears based on the first operation request being made after the 3A acceptance state occurs. With such a configuration, even after the performance content has progressed to its final form, it becomes possible to repeatedly enjoy the progression of the performance from the first performance form to the final form. Each time the performance content progresses, it may be suggested that there is a high probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot. In this case, if a jackpot has not been achieved, the initial presentation sequence (a predetermined presentation sequence) will appear before progressing to the final sequence, triggered by the input of the user. The presentation will then restart from the state where this initial presentation sequence (the predetermined presentation sequence) is displayed.

Furthermore, in this example, when an operation is received once for the "4A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" in the 4A reception-accepting state, in addition to the "4A reception display" described above, a first reception output sound SA4 may be output as the "4A reception output sound," as shown in Figure 155(g). The first reception output sound SA4 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-A4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind-based magic (such as smoke effects and the generation of wind-based magic)" that appears as the "4A reception display." Also, as will be described later, there is a possibility that a second reception output sound SB4 will be output as the "4A reception output sound." The second reception output sound SB4 in this example is output when the content of the "4A reception display" progresses. In this example, the first post-reception output sound SA4 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-reception display. However, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that the player has performed an operation.

Thus, in the 4A input acceptance state, each time an input is received by the "4A operation unit (in this case, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A4" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A4" and its sound effects are displayed. That is, through multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A4," the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A4" decreases (the animation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-A4" has been defeated, providing an animation that suggests a high level of expectation. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A4" is not defeated, it suggests a low level of expectation.

This example, as shown in Figure 155(a), assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 4A operation unit), initiated at timing tAd2-A1, continues until timing tAd2-A2.

However, unlike the 1A, 2A, and 3A acceptance states, the 4A acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state where, even if the operation unit (4A operation unit) is maintained in operation state, the corresponding post-reception changes (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, post-reception mechanism operation, etc.) are not executed multiple times (a type where the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated)." Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 155(a), during the period from timing tAd2-A1 to timing tAd2-A2 (the period during which the 4A operation unit is maintained in operation state), operation reception to the 4A operation unit is performed only once at timing tAd2-A1, and only one post-reception change (e.g., post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, post-reception mechanism operation, etc.) corresponding to the operation reception at timing tAd2-A1 is executed.

Therefore, in this example, at timing tAd2-A1, as a display after receiving the 4A command, the sequence of events shown in Figure 157(b), where the ally character YS-A4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind-based magic (including smoke effects and the generation of wind-based magic), will begin to be displayed (a single video display).

More specifically, in the example shown in Figure 157(b), after receiving the 4A input, the enemy character BOSS-A4 changes to a state where it has sustained the first stage of injury, the wind-based magic used by the ally character YS-A4 is displayed as a single-shot TA4 (mode TA4a), and the gauge image HP-A4 changes to a state where the remaining HP gauge has decreased by one stage. That is, in this case, the situation indication display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "mode JA4a" to "mode JA4b" before the operation, thereby indicating that the performance content corresponding to the 4A input acceptance state has progressed based on the operation received at timing tAd2-A1.

Furthermore, as described above, the status indication display JA4, which has undergone this change in appearance, will continue to be displayed at least until the 4A acceptance state ends. Therefore, while the 4A acceptance state continues, the player can easily recognize what the current operating status is.

In contrast, the single-shot display TA4, which is depicted as a wind-based magic spell cast by the ally character YS-A4, is hidden after a predetermined time (a certain amount of time) has elapsed. The examples of presentations shown in Figures 155 and 157 assume a scenario where the time elapses before timing tAd2-A2 arrives, causing the single-shot display TA4 (mode TA4a) to become hidden. In this example, the single-shot display TA4 is shown in different modes depending on the progress of the presentation; however, it may be displayed in a single mode (the same mode) regardless of the progress of the presentation. Alternatively, considering that the 4A acceptance state in this example always results in a change in the mode of the situation indication display JA4 when an operation is received, and that this can indicate that an operation has been received, the single-shot display TA4 may not necessarily be displayed.

Furthermore, at timing tAd2-A1, the first post-reception output sound SA4 (post-reception output sound for 4A) is started to function as a sound effect corresponding to this post-reception display for 4A (attack mode), and the second post-reception output sound SB4 (post-reception output sound for 4A) is started to be output in mode SB4b-1 to suggest that the performance content corresponding to the 4A reception acceptance state has progressed to the first mode.

In this regard, the second post-reception output sound SB4, corresponding to the 4A reception-accepting state, is output continuously at least until the 4A reception-accepting state ends. This allows the player to easily recognize the current operating status through its characteristics while the 4A reception-accepting state continues. However, the output state of the second post-reception output sound SB4 does not necessarily have to continue while the 4A reception-accepting state continues. For example, it may be output for a predetermined output time (shorter than the timing tAd2 to tAd3) before being turned off.

In contrast, the first post-reception output sound SA4 is deactivated after a predetermined time (a certain period of time) has elapsed. The example shown in Figure 155 assumes that the first post-reception output sound SA4 is deactivated after the time tAd2-A2 has arrived and the predetermined time has elapsed.

In other words, in this case, timing tAd2-A2 arrives while both the first post-reception output sound SA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4 are in the output state. However, in this example, neither the first post-reception output sound SA4 nor the second post-reception output sound SB4 undergoes any change when the 4A operation unit is deactivated (i.e., timing tAd2-A2 arrives).

In this example, the first post-reception output sound SA4 is implemented to function as a sound effect corresponding to the post-reception display. However, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that the player has performed an operation. Furthermore, the first post-reception output sound SA4 is output in one manner (the same manner) regardless of the progress of the performance content. However, it may be output in different manners depending on the progress of the performance content. Alternatively, considering that the 4A reception permission state in this example always outputs the second post-reception output sound SA4 when an operation is received, and that this can suggest that an operation has been received, the first post-reception output sound SA4 may not necessarily be output.

Here, in the 4A acceptance state, it is possible that the player may perform operations to deactivate the 4A operation unit and then to deactivate it again before the time required for the "single video display (single display TA4)" corresponding to the operation reception has elapsed (while the single display TA4 is being displayed). In this case, the "single display TA4" will be executed in a manner such that the "certain amount of time" elapses before the "single video display" corresponding to the operation reception has finished, and a new "single video display" begins execution. However, the new "single video display" may be executed by prematurely terminating the previous "single video display" that was in the middle of execution and replacing it with the new one.

Similarly, in the 4A acceptance state, it is possible that the player may perform operations to deactivate the 4A operation unit and then deactivate it again before the time required for the "sound effect corresponding to one video display (first post-reception output sound SA4)" corresponding to the operation reception has elapsed (while the first post-reception output sound SA4 is being output). In this case, the "first post-reception output sound SA4" will be executed in such a manner that a "certain amount of time" elapses between the start and completion of the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" corresponding to the operation reception, and a new "sound effect" begins to be executed. However, the new "sound effect" may be executed by prematurely terminating the previous "sound effect" that was in the middle of execution and replacing it.

As mentioned above, the "situation indicator JA4 (see Figure 155(e))" such as the ally character YS-A4, the enemy character BOSS-A4, and the gauge image HP-A4 may be implemented as not being displayed until an operation is received, and only appearing and being displayed upon the receipt of the operation (for the duration of the validity period, or for a predetermined time).

In the pachinko machine 1, which is an example of such a presentation, at the timing tAd2-A2 when the 4A operation unit is put into a non-operational state, the presentation situation shown in Figure 157(c) appears. However, this presentation situation does not appear as a result of the 4A operation unit being put into a non-operational state. Rather, among the 4A reception post-display and 4A reception post-output sounds (situation indication display JA4, single display TA4, first reception post-output sound SA4, second reception post-output sound SB4) that are started to be executed at timing tAd2-A1, those for which the conditions for terminating their execution state have not yet been met at the time timing tAd2-A2 arrives continue their execution state (situation indication display JA4, first reception post-output sound SA4, second reception post-output sound SB4), while those for which the conditions for terminating their execution state have been met before timing tAd2-A2 arrives terminate their execution state at that time (a time before timing tAd2-A2).

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 4A control unit is interrupted and the unit is put into a non-operational state while the single-shot display TA4 is displayed, the time from the non-operational state until the single-shot display TA4 becomes invisible is not set to a fixed time, but is made variable.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 4A control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the first post-reception output sound SA4 is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the first post-reception output sound SA4 is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate.

Furthermore, in the 4A reception-accepting state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 4A operation unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the single-shot display TA4 and the first reception-post-output sound SA4 are both in the execution state, the timing at which the single-shot display TA4 is hidden and the timing at which the first reception-post-output sound SA4 is turned off are different. In this example, the relationship between which of the single-shot display TA4 and the first reception-post-output sound SA4 terminates first is never reversed; for example, the single-shot display TA4 is always terminated before the first reception-post-output sound SA4.

With this configuration, in the fourth A acceptance state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the fourth A operation unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the single-shot display TA4 and the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 are both in operation state, the single-shot display TA4 will continue to display, and the first post-acceptance output sound SA4 will continue to output, even though the fourth A operation unit is in a non-operation state.

In this example, as shown in Figure 155(a), it is assumed that at timing tAd2-B1 within the 4A acceptance state (the performance state shown in Figure 157(d)), the "4A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is again put into the operation state, and this operation state continues until timing tAd2-B2.

In this example, if the "4A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and an operation is received at timing tAd2-B1 within the 4A acceptance state, this triggers the "4A post-reception change (4A post-reception effect)" corresponding to that operation to occur again, as shown in Figures 155(e) to (h) (the effect shown in Figure 157(d)).

However, as described above, in this example, even when operation to the 4A control unit is resumed at timing tAd2-B1 within the 4A acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 4A acceptance state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 157(d), the post-4A acceptance change (such as the display after 4A acceptance or the output sound after 4A acceptance) will begin to be executed in the manner in which the second stage of progress occurs based on the acceptance of operation to the 4A control unit.

Therefore, in this example, at timing tAd2-B1, as a display after receiving the 4A command, as shown in Figure 157(d), the second stage of progression will begin, displaying (one video clip) the ally character YS-A4 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind magic (including smoke effects and the generation of wind magic).

More specifically, in the example shown in Figure 157(d), as a display after receiving the 4A input, the enemy character BOSS-A4 changes to a state where it has sustained the second stage of injury, the wind-based magic used by the ally character YS-A4 is displayed as a single-shot display TA4 in the second stage state TA4b, and the gauge image HP-A4 changes to a state where the remaining HP gauge has decreased by two stages. That is, in this case, the situation indication display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "state JA4b" to "state JA4c" before the re-operation, thereby indicating that the performance content corresponding to the 4A input acceptance state has progressed based on the operation received at timing tAd2-B1.

Furthermore, at timing tAd2-B1, the first post-reception output sound SA4 (post-reception output sound for 4A) is started to function as a sound effect corresponding to this post-reception display for 4A (attack mode), and the second post-reception output sound SB4 (post-reception output sound for 4A) is started to be output in mode SB4b-2 to suggest that the performance content corresponding to the 4A reception acceptance state has progressed to the second stage.

In this example, timing tAd2-B1 occurs while the second post-reception output sound SB4 (4A post-reception output sound), which began outputting at timing tAd2-A1, is still in the output state. At this point, at timing tAd2-B1, the second post-reception output sound SB4 (4A post-reception output sound) terminates its first-stage mode SB4b-1, which was in the output state, and begins outputting in its second-stage mode SB4b-2.

Furthermore, timing tAd2-B2 assumes a scenario where operation on the 4A control unit is interrupted and the unit is put into a non-operational state while the single-shot display TA4 is displayed. As mentioned above, the time from the non-operational state until the single-shot display TA4 disappears is not set as a fixed time, but is instead set to an undefined value.

Then, at timing tAd2-B2, when the 4A operation unit is returned to a non-operational state, the display shown in Figure 157(e) appears. However, this display does not appear as a result of the 4A operation unit being returned to a non-operational state. It simply means that the 4A reception display and 4A reception output sounds (status indication display JA4, single-shot display TA4, first reception output sound SA4, second reception output sound SB4), which were started at timing tAd2-B1, continue to run because the conditions for terminating their execution state have not yet been met at the time timing tAd2-B2 arrives.

Furthermore, in this example, as shown in Figure 155(a), it is assumed that at timing tAd2-C1 within the 4A acceptance state (the performance state shown in Figure 157(f)), the "4A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is set to the operation state again, and this operation state continues until timing tAd2-C2.

In this example, if the "4A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated and an operation is received at timing tAd2-C1 within the 4A acceptance state, this triggers the "4A post-reception change (4A post-reception effect)" corresponding to that operation to occur again, as shown in Figures 155(e) to (h) (the effect shown in Figure 157(f)).

However, as described above, in this example, even if an operation to the 4A control unit is initiated again at timing tAd2-C1 within the 4A acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 4A acceptance state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 157(f), the post-4A acceptance change (such as the post-4A acceptance display or post-4A acceptance output sound) will begin to be executed in the manner in which the third stage of progress occurs based on the acceptance of an operation to the 4A control unit.

Therefore, in this example, at timing tAd2-C1, as a display after receiving the 4A command, as shown in Figure 157(f), the third stage of progression will begin, displaying (one video display) the scene in which the ally character YS-A4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind magic (including smoke effects and the generation of wind magic).

More specifically, in the example shown in Figure 157(f), as a display after receiving the 4A input, the enemy character BOSS-A4 changes to a state where it has sustained the third stage of injury, the wind-based magic used by the ally character YS-A4 is displayed as a single-shot TA4 in the third stage state TA4c, and the gauge image HP-A4 changes to a state where the remaining HP gauge has decreased by three stages. That is, in this case, the situation indication display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "state JA4c" to "state JA4d" before the re-operation, thereby indicating that the performance content corresponding to the 4A input acceptance state has progressed based on the operation received at timing tAd2-C1.

Furthermore, at timing tAd2-C1, the first post-reception output sound SA4 (post-reception output sound for 4A) is started to function as a sound effect corresponding to this post-reception display for 4A (attack mode), and the second post-reception output sound SB4 (post-reception output sound for 4A) is started to be output in mode SB4b-3 to suggest that the performance content corresponding to the 4A reception acceptance state has progressed to the third stage.

In this example, timing tAd2-C1 arrives while both the first post-reception output sound SA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4, which began outputting at timing tAd2-B1, are in the output state. At this point, at timing tAd2-C1, the second post-reception output sound SB4 (4A post-reception output sound) terminates its second-stage mode SB4b-2, which was in the output state, and begins outputting in the second-stage mode SB4b-3. Similarly, the first post-reception output sound SA4 (4A post-reception output sound) terminates its output state and restarts outputting from the beginning.

Then, at timing tAd2-C2, when the 4A operation unit is again deactivated, the display shown in Figure 157(g) appears. However, this display does not appear because the 4A operation unit is deactivated. It simply means that among the 4A reception display and 4A reception output sounds (status indication display JA4, single display TA4, first reception output sound SA4, second reception output sound SB4) that started execution at timing tAd2-C1, those whose conditions for terminating their execution state have not yet been met by the time timing tAd2-C2 arrives continue their execution state (status indication display JA4, first reception output sound SA4, second reception output sound SB4). Those whose conditions for terminating their execution state were met before timing tAd2-C2 arrived terminated their execution state at that point (a point before timing tAd2-C2).

Furthermore, in this example, as shown in Figure 155(a), it is assumed that at timing tAd2-D1 within the 4A acceptance state (the performance state shown in Figure 157(h)), the "4A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again, and this activated state continues at least until timing tAd3.

In this example, if the "4A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated and an operation is received at timing tAd2-D1 within the 4A acceptance state, this triggers the "4A post-reception change (4A post-reception effect)" corresponding to that operation to occur again, as shown in Figures 155(e) to (h) (the effect shown in Figure 157(h)).

However, as described above, in this example, even if an operation to the 4A control unit is initiated again at timing tAd2-D1 within the 4A acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 4A acceptance state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 157(h), the post-4A acceptance change (such as the display after 4A acceptance or the output sound after 4A acceptance) will begin to be executed in the manner in which the fourth stage of progress occurs based on the acceptance of an operation to the 4A control unit.

In this example, at timing tAd2-D1, as a display after receiving the 4A above, as shown in Figure 157(h), the final (fourth stage) progression mode will begin, displaying (one video display) the ally character YS-A4 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A4 with wind magic (including smoke effects and the generation of wind magic).

More specifically, in the example shown in Figure 157(h), after receiving the 4A input, the display changes to show the enemy character BOSS-A4 being defeated, the wind-based magic used by the ally character YS-A4 is displayed as a single-shot TA4 in its final state TA4d, and the gauge image HP-A4 changes to show the remaining HP gauge as 0. That is, in this case, the situation indication display JA4 (enemy character BOSS-A4, ally character YS-A4, gauge image HP-A4) changes from "state JA4d" to "state JA4e" before the re-operation, thereby indicating that the performance content corresponding to the 4A input acceptance state has progressed based on the operation received at timing tAd2-D1.

Furthermore, at timing tAd2-D1, the first post-reception output sound SA4 (post-reception output sound for 4A) is started to function as a sound effect corresponding to this post-reception display for 4A (attack mode), and the second post-reception output sound SB4 (post-reception output sound for 4A) is started to be output in mode SB4b-4 to suggest that the performance content corresponding to the 4A reception acceptance state has progressed to the final stage (4th stage).

In this example, timing tAd2-D1 occurs while the second post-reception output sound SB4, which began outputting at timing tAd2-C1, is still in output mode. At this point, at timing tAd2-D1, the second post-reception output sound SB4 (the 4th A post-reception output sound) terminates its third mode SB4b-3, which was in output mode, and replaces it by starting output in the final (fourth) mode SB4b-4.

Furthermore, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 155 and 157 assume a scenario where, among the 4A reception post-display and 4A reception post-output sounds (status indication display JA4, single display TA4, first reception post-output sound SA4, and second reception post-output sound SB4) that were started at timing tAd2-D1, the status indication display JA4, the first reception post-output sound SA4, and the second reception post-output sound SB4 are all in the execution state, and timing tAd3, when the 4A reception permission state ends, arrives.

In other words, in this case, the 4A acceptance state will be terminated while the status indication JA4 is displayed and the first post-reception output sound SA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4 are being output, as shown in Figures 155(e) to (h).

Here, regarding the status indication indicator JA4, as shown in Figures 155(e) and 157(i), when the 4A reception acceptance state ends, the previously displayed mode JA4e is turned off.

However, regarding the status indication indicator JA4, as shown in Figures 155 and 157(i), based on the arrival of timing tAd3, the previously displayed state may be changed (developed) to state JA4L, and state JA4L may be displayed for a predetermined time even after the 4A acceptance state has ended.

Furthermore, regarding the mode JA4L of the status indication indicator JA4, multiple types (JA4La to JA4Le) are prepared in sufficient numbers to correspond to the modes (JA4a to JA4e) of the status indication indicator JA4 that can be displayed at timing tAd3. When timing tAd3 arrives, mode JA4L corresponding to the mode that was displayed at that time may be selectively executed. Incidentally, the examples shown in Figures 155 and 157 assume a case where, corresponding to mode JA4e of the status indication indicator JA that was displayed at timing tAd3, the "mode JA4e" of the status indication indicator JA4 is changed (developed) to "mode JA4Le" as a result of the arrival of timing tAd3.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in Figures 155 and 157(i), the single-shot display TA4 is hidden. However, if timing tAd3 occurs while the single-shot display TA4 is displayed, it will not be hidden when the 4A acceptance state ends. In other words, in this case, the single-shot display TA4 will continue to be in its execution state even after timing tAd3 (even after the 4A acceptance state ends), for example, until the "single video display" that was in the execution state has finished for a predetermined display time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, if the 4A reception acceptance state ends while the single-shot display TA4 is displayed, the time between the end of the 4A reception acceptance state and the disappearance of the single-shot display TA4 is not set to a fixed time, but is instead made variable.

Furthermore, the first post-reception output sound SA4 is designed not to be switched to a non-output state when the 4A reception-accepting state ends. Therefore, as shown in Figure 155(g), the first post-reception output sound SA4 will continue to be output even after timing tAd3 (even after the 4A reception-accepting state ends), until the aforementioned "sound effect corresponding to one video display" has finished executing for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, the second post-reception output sound SB4 is designed not to be switched to a non-output state when the fourth A reception-accepting state ends. Therefore, as shown in Figure 155(h), the second post-reception output sound SB4 continues to be output for a predetermined duration even after timing tAd3 (after the fourth A reception-accepting state ends), or for a predetermined duration from the non-operation state.

In this example, if the 4A acceptance state ends while the first post-reception output sound SA4 is being output, the time from the end of the 4A acceptance state until the first post-reception output sound SA4 becomes non-output is not set to a fixed time, but is made indefinite. Similarly, for the second post-reception output sound SB4, if the 4A acceptance state ends while the second post-reception output sound SB4 is being output, the time from the end of the 4A acceptance state until the first post-reception output sound SA4 becomes non-output is not set to a fixed time, but is made indefinite.

Furthermore, in the 4A reception-allowing state according to this embodiment, even when the 4A reception-allowing state ends while the single-shot display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 are both in the execution state, the timing at which the single-shot display TA4 is hidden and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound SA4 is de-outputted are different. In this example, the relationship between which of the single-shot display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 ends first is never reversed; for example, the single-shot display TA4 is always terminated before the first post-reception output sound SA4. This relationship between the single-shot display TA4 and the first post-reception output sound SA4 also applies between the single-shot display TA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4, and between the first post-reception output sound SA4 and the second post-reception output sound SB4, and the same applies to other examples.

Furthermore, the 4A acceptance state occurs as an acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in Figure 156, if no operation is received by the 4A operation unit by the time timing tAd3 arrives in the 4A acceptance state, the 4A acceptance state simply ends based on the arrival of timing tAd3, and the 4A post-reception change that appears when an operation is performed on the 4A operation unit does not begin.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "5A Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state). Figure 158 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "5A Acceptance State" is generated based on the fulfillment of "Condition 5A" and the player performs an operation. Figure 159 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "5A Acceptance State" is generated but the player does not perform an operation. Figure 160 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the "5A Acceptance State" is generated.

Now, assuming the starting conditions are met (holding is processed) and the "5A Variation Pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement performance determination) corresponding to the "5A Variation Pattern." After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ (such as performance depiction according to the 5A Variation Pattern, or sound output of BGM according to the 5A Variation Pattern (such as normal BGM playback when not reaching)), and within the execution period of this variation performance, it additionally executes a performance (pre-announcement performance) according to the result of the pre-announcement performance determination, in addition to the performance of the selected "5A Variation Pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 158(c), during the execution period of the variation effect related to the "5A variation pattern," based on the arrival of timing tAe2, which is the elapsed time of 5A since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the fulfillment of "condition 5A"), the above-mentioned 5A acceptance permission state (valid period) is made possible, allowing for "operation reception to the 5A operation unit regarding changes after 5A reception (such as the 5A effect status indication display JA5, the 5A single display TA5, and the 5A reception output sounds SA5, SB5, etc.)" (as shown in Figure 160(a)).

In this embodiment, the "5A operation unit" that allows multiple operation requests in the 5A acceptance state is set as the sword ornament 5001, rather than the operation button 410, and multiple operation requests are allowed before the 5A acceptance state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figures 158(b) to (e), when the 5A acceptance state occurs, a imitation image display MG-A5 of the target of the player's operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 5A operation unit), a message display MA5 related to the operation on the target of the operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 5A operation unit), and a status indication display JA5 indicating the status of the operation are displayed at a timing tAe1 that occurs before the 5A acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance to the 5A operation unit is permitted).

However, the mock image display MG-A5, message display MA5, and status indication display JA5 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 5A acceptance state occurs. They may be displayed simultaneously with the 5A acceptance state, or slightly after its occurrence. Furthermore, the timing of the display of the mock image display MG-A5 and the timing of the display of the message display MA5 may be different. For example, the message display MA5 may be displayed before the mock image display MG-A5.

In this example, the mock image display MG-A5 and the message display MA5 will continue to be displayed after they are started, regardless of the operating status of the 5A operation unit, until the 5A acceptance state ends. However, the status indication display JA5 will be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed.

Here, the "Mock Image Display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A acceptance state uses only a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme.

Furthermore, the "Mock Image Display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A acceptance state depicts a motion image in which the mock "operation receiving section," which is the target of the operation, is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α), and then sequentially displayed in the manners shown in Figures 144(β) to (σ). This motion image is considered a single periodic change, and this periodic change repeats over a predetermined period of 5A time. This period of 5A time is set to be longer (longer cycle) than the period of 1A time that appears in the 1A acceptance state; for example, it may be set to the same time as the above-mentioned period of 2A time. Therefore, in the 5A acceptance state, the "operation receiving section" is depicted slowly moving up and down within its movable range.

However, as described above, in the 5A acceptance state, instead of the operation button 410, an image resembling the sword ornament 5001 is displayed as "Replica Image Display MG-A5". Therefore, "Replica Image Display MG-A5" is not actually displayed in the manner shown in "Figure 144(α)", but rather appears as a state in which the manner shown in "Figure 144(α)" is replaced with an image resembling the sword ornament 5001 instead of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 159(b), the 5A acceptance state continues until timing tAe3 arrives when no operation is received by the 5A operation unit, and terminates upon the arrival of timing tAe3. Therefore, while the 5A acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock image display MG-A5) indicating the remaining time until timing tAe3 arrives, which terminates the 5A acceptance state, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display is not necessarily required.

Furthermore, if the "Mock Image Display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A acceptance state is to be displayed before the timing tAe2 in which the 5A acceptance state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAe2 before starting its periodic changes and gauge image changes. In other words, in this case, the "Mock Image Display MG-A5" corresponding to the 5A acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α) (actually, a manner in which the image is replaced with a mock-up of the sword ornament 5001) until timing tAe2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the 5A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 158(c), (d) and 160(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A5, a message related to the acceptance of operation to the 5A operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed (in this case, the message display MA5, which reads "Defeat the goblins! Strike the sword repeatedly!!").

Furthermore, in the 5A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 158(e) and 160(a), a status indication display JA5 is shown to indicate the status of operation in the 5A acceptance state. This display shows an ally character corresponding to the type of the 5A acceptance state (here, ally character YS-A5), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 5A acceptance state (here, enemy character BOSS-A5 depicted as a goblin), and a gauge image HP-A5 showing its remaining HP gauge. In the 5A reception-accepting state, the likelihood of a big win is suggested through a visual effect that indicates whether the ally character YS-A5 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A5 (whether the gauge image HP-A5 can be reduced to 0) through multiple operation receptions to the 5A operation unit. In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)," a visual effect may be executed in which "ally character YS-A5" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A5." In this example, the situation indication display JA5 shows ally character YS-A5, enemy character BOSS-A5, and gauge image HP-A5. However, it is not necessary to display all of these; the display can indicate the operation status as long as at least one of ally character YS-A5, enemy character BOSS-A5, or gauge image HP-A5 is displayed.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 158, it is assumed that the first operation request is received for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tAe2-A1 within the 5A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 160(b)).

In this example, if the first operation request is received for the "5A operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tAe2-A1 within the 5A acceptance state, a "5A post-reception change (5A post-reception effect)" corresponding to that operation request will occur, as shown in Figures 158(e) to (h) (the effect shown in Figure 160(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is received for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tAe2-A1 within the 5A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 158(f) and (g), a "5A reception post-output sound" corresponding to the operation received for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is audibly output, and a "5A reception post-display" corresponding to the operation received for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is displayed.

In other words, when an operation request is received once for the "5A operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 5A reception-accepting state, a video display is shown as the "5A reception post-display" as shown in Figure 160(b), showing "ally character YS-A5" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A5" using swordsmanship (including the generation of smoke effects and slashing effects). However, as will be described later, in the 5A reception-accepting state, each time an operation request is received, "enemy character BOSS-A5" takes damage, the strength of the swordsmanship increases, and the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-A5 decreases (the performance progresses). If the performance progresses in this way, the state in which the operation was received by the 5A control unit afterward (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-A5" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A5" using swordsmanship) will appear as a single video display showing the progressed performance (see Figures 158(e), (f) and 160(d), (f), (h), etc.).

However, as will be discussed later, the 5A acceptance state in this example, like the 3rd and 4th acceptance states mentioned above, is a type of validity period that does not result in early termination triggered by an operation request (before the timing tAe3 when the 5A acceptance state ends due to the passage of time). In other words, in this case, if the performance content corresponding to the 5A acceptance state is changed (advanced) each time an operation request is made during this type of validity period (5A acceptance state), then the processing when the performance content has progressed to its final form becomes problematic.

In this regard, in the above-mentioned 3A acceptance state, when an operation is received again while the performance content corresponding to the 3A acceptance state has progressed to its final form, the post-reception change relating to the final form is repeatedly generated each time such operation is received. In contrast, in the 5A acceptance state in this example, when an operation is received again while the performance content corresponding to the 5A acceptance state has progressed to its final form, the post-reception change relating to the final form can be repeatedly generated each time such operation is received. However, as will be described later, in the 5A acceptance state in this example, when an operation is received again while the post-reception display (5A post-reception display) is being displayed due to the post-reception change relating to the final form, the post-reception display relating to the final form is not redisplayed, and the display state of the displayed post-reception display is maintained and continued. Furthermore, regarding the post-reception output sound (5A post-reception output sound), once it has been output in the final mode, regardless of the output status of the post-reception output sound related to the final mode, it will not be output again even if further operation requests are received. With this configuration, after the performance content has progressed to the final mode, even if further operation requests are received, changes after reception related to the final mode are less likely to occur, or the execution mode is restricted (at least the post-reception output sound will not be output), thus preventing the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" from being handled haphazardly.

Furthermore, in this example, when an operation is received once for the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 5A reception-accepting state, in addition to the "5A reception display" described above, a first reception output sound SA5 may be output as the "5A reception output sound," as shown in Figure 158(g). The first reception output sound SA5 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-A5 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A5 using swordsmanship (such as the generation of smoke effects or slashing effects)" that appears as the "5A reception display." Also, as will be described later, there is a possibility that a second reception output sound SB5 will be output as the "5A reception output sound." The second reception output sound SB5 in this example is output when the content of the "5A reception display" progresses. In this example, the first post-reception output sound SA5 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-reception display. However, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that the player's operation has been accepted.

Thus, in the 5A reception-accepting state, each time an operation is received by the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A5" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A5" and its sound effects are displayed. That is, through multiple attacks by "ally character YS-A5," the HP of "enemy character BOSS-A5" decreases (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-A5" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests a high level of expectation. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-A5" is not defeated, it suggests a low level of expectation.

This example, as shown in Figure 158(a), assumes that the player's operation (the operating state of the 5A operation unit), which began at timing tAe2-A1, continues until timing tAe2-A2.

However, unlike the 1A, 2A, and 3A acceptance states, the 5A acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state where, even if the operation unit (5A operation unit) is maintained in operation state, the corresponding post-acceptance changes (e.g., post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance illumination, post-acceptance mechanism operation, etc.) are not executed multiple times (a type where the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated)." Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 158(a), during the period from timing tAe2-A1 to timing tAe2-A2 (the period during which the 5A operation unit is maintained in operation state), operation reception to the 5A operation unit is performed only once at timing tAe2-A1, and only one post-acceptance change (e.g., post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance illumination, post-acceptance mechanism operation, etc.) corresponding to the operation reception at timing tAe2-A1 is executed.

Therefore, in this example, at timing tAe2-A1, as a display following the reception of the 5A mentioned above, the display (one video clip) of the ally character YS-A5 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A5 using swordsmanship (including the generation of smoke and slashing effects) will begin, as shown in Figure 160(b).

More specifically, in the example shown in Figure 160(b), after receiving the 5A input, the enemy character BOSS-A5 changes to a state where it has sustained the first stage of injury, the sword attack by the ally character YS-A5 is displayed as a single-hit display TA5 (mode TA5a), and the gauge image HP-A5 changes to a state where the remaining HP gauge has decreased by one stage. That is, in this case, the situation indication display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) changes from "mode JA5a" to "mode JA5b" before the operation, thereby indicating that the performance content corresponding to the 5A input acceptance state has progressed based on the operation received at timing tAe2-A1.

However, as described above, the status indication JA5, which has undergone such a change in appearance, is not necessarily displayed continuously until the 5A acceptance state ends. Rather, it is displayed for a predetermined period of time (a certain amount of time) from the time of the change in appearance (from the time the operation is accepted) before being hidden.

Furthermore, the single-shot display TA5, which depicts a sword attack by the allied character YS-A5, is also hidden after a predetermined time (a certain amount of time) has elapsed. The performance examples shown in Figures 158 and 160 assume a scenario where the time elapses before timing tAe2-A2 arrives, causing the single-shot display TA5 (mode TA5a) to become hidden. In this example, the single-shot display TA5 is shown in different modes depending on the progress of the performance; however, it may be displayed in a single mode (the same mode) regardless of the progress of the performance. Alternatively, considering that the 5A acceptance state in this example always results in a change in the mode of the situation indication display JA5 when an operation is received, thus indicating that an operation has been received, the single-shot display TA5 may not necessarily be displayed.

Furthermore, at timing tAe2-A1, the first post-reception output sound SA5 (5A post-reception output sound) is started to function as a sound effect corresponding to this 5A post-reception display (attack mode), and the second post-reception output sound SB5 (5A post-reception output sound) is started to be output in mode SB5b-1 to suggest that the performance content corresponding to the 5A reception acceptance state has progressed to the first mode.

In this regard, the second post-reception output sound SB5, corresponding to the 5A reception acceptance state, is output for a predetermined time (a fixed time shorter than the timing tAe2 to tAe3) from the time the performance progresses (when the operation that causes the performance progress is received) until it is turned off. Similarly, the first post-reception output sound SA5 is also turned off after a predetermined time (a fixed time) has elapsed.

The example shown in Figure 158 assumes that after timing tAe2-A2 arrives, the first post-reception output sound SA5 and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are in a non-output state.

In other words, in this case, timing tAe2-A2 arrives while both the first post-reception output sound SA5 and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are in the output state. However, in this example, neither the first post-reception output sound SA5 nor the second post-reception output sound SB5 undergoes any change when the 5A operation unit is deactivated (i.e., timing tAe2-A2 arrives).

In this example, the first post-reception output sound SA5 is implemented to function as a sound effect corresponding to the post-reception display. However, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that the player has performed an operation. Furthermore, the first post-reception output sound SA5 is output in a single manner (the same manner) regardless of the progress of the performance content. However, it may be output in different manners depending on the progress of the performance content. Alternatively, considering that the 5A reception permission state in this example always outputs the second post-reception output sound SA5 when an operation is received, and that this can suggest that an operation has been received, the first post-reception output sound SA5 may not necessarily be output.

Here, in the 5A acceptance state, it is possible that the player may perform operations to deactivate the 5A operation unit and then to deactivate it again before the time required for the "single video display (single display TA5)" corresponding to the operation reception has elapsed (while the single display TA5 is being displayed). In this case, the "single display TA5" will be executed in such a manner that the "certain amount of time" elapses before the "single video display" corresponding to the operation reception has finished, and a new "single video display" begins execution. However, the new "single video display" may be executed by prematurely terminating the previous "single video display" that was in the middle of execution and replacing it with the new one.

Similarly, in the 5A acceptance state, it is possible that the player may perform operations to deactivate the 5A operation unit and then deactivate it again before the time required for the "sound effect corresponding to one video display (first post-reception output sound SA5)" corresponding to the operation reception has elapsed (while the first post-reception output sound SA5 is being output). In this case, the "first post-reception output sound SA5" will be executed in such a manner that a "certain amount of time" elapses between the start and completion of the "sound effect corresponding to one session" corresponding to the operation reception, and a new "sound effect" begins to be executed. However, the new "sound effect" may be executed by prematurely terminating the previous "sound effect" that was in the middle of execution and replacing it.

As mentioned above, the "situation indicator JA5 (see Figure 158(e))," such as the ally character YS-A5, the enemy character BOSS-A5, and the gauge image HP-A5, may be implemented as not being displayed until an operation is received, and only appearing and being displayed upon the receipt of the operation (for the duration of the validity period, or for a predetermined time).

In the pachinko machine 1, which is an example of such a presentation, at the timing tAe2-A2 when the 5A operation unit is put into a non-operational state, the presentation situation shown in Figure 160(c) appears. However, this presentation situation does not appear as a result of the 5A operation unit being put into a non-operational state. Rather, among the 5A reception post-display and 5A reception post-output sounds (situation indication display JA5, single display TA5, first reception post-output sound SA5, second reception post-output sound SB5) that were started to be executed at timing tAe2-A1, those whose conditions for terminating their execution state have not yet been met by the time timing tAe2-A2 arrives continue to execute (situation indication display JA5, first reception post-output sound SA5, second reception post-output sound SB5), while those whose conditions for terminating their execution state have been met before timing tAe2-A2 arrives have terminated their execution state at that point (a point before timing tAe2-A2).

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 5A operation unit is interrupted and the unit is put into a non-operational state while the single-shot display TA5 or the status indication display JA5 is displayed, the time from the time the unit is put into a non-operational state until the single-shot display TA5 or the status indication display JA5 becomes invisible is not set to a fixed time, but is made variable.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 5A control unit is interrupted and it is set to a non-operational state while the first post-reception output sound SA5 or the second post-reception output sound SB5 is being output, the time from the non-operational state until the first post-reception output sound SA5 or the second post-reception output sound SB5 is no longer output is not set to a fixed time, but is made variable.

Furthermore, in the 5A reception-accepting state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 5A operation unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the single-shot display TA5, status indication display JA5, first post-reception output sound SA5, and second post-reception output sound SB5 are all in the execution state, the timing at which the single-shot display TA5, status indication display JA5, first post-reception output sound SA5, and second post-reception output sound SB5 are de-executed (hidden, no output) will be different for each. In this example, the order in which they are terminated will not change; for example, the single-shot display TA5 is terminated first among them.

With this configuration, in the 5A acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 5A operation unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the single-shot display TA5, the status indication display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are all in the execution state, a situation will occur where the single-shot display TA5, the status indication display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 continue to be in the execution state, even though the 5A operation unit is in a non-operation state.

However, in this example, as shown in Figures 158(a) and 160(d), it is assumed that no new operation request is received by the 5A operation unit even when the single-shot display TA5, the status indication display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 have all finished their execution state.

In this example, while the single-shot display TA5, the status indication display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are all in a non-execution state, as shown in Figure 158(a), the "5A operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" is put into operation again at timing tAe2-B1 within the 5A reception-acceptable state (the performance situation shown in Figure 160(e)), and this operation state continues until timing tAe2-B2.

In this example, if the "5A operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tAe2-B1 within the 5A acceptance state, this triggers the "5A post-reception change (5A post-reception effect)" corresponding to that operation reception, as shown in Figures 158(e) to (h), for the same amount as one operation reception (the effect shown in Figure 160(e)).

However, as described above, in this example, even when operation on the 5A control unit is resumed at timing tAe2-B1 within the 5A acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 5A acceptance state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 160(e), the post-5A acceptance change (such as the 5A acceptance display or 5A acceptance output sound) will begin to be executed in the manner in which the second stage of progress occurs based on the acceptance of operation to the 5A control unit.

Therefore, in this example, at timing tAe2-B1, as a display after receiving the 5A command, as shown in Figure 160(e), the second stage of progression begins, displaying (one video display) the ally character YS-A5 attacking the enemy character BOSS-A5 using swordsmanship (including the generation of smoke and slashing effects).

More specifically, in the example shown in Figure 160(e), after receiving the 5A input, the enemy character BOSS-A5 changes to a state where it has sustained the second stage of injury, the sword attack by the ally character YS-A5 is displayed as a single-hit display TA5 in the second stage state TA5b, and the gauge image HP-A5 changes to a state where the remaining HP gauge has decreased by two stages. That is, in this case, the situation indication display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) changes from "state JA5b" to "state JA5c" before the re-operation, thereby indicating that the performance content corresponding to the 5A input acceptance state has progressed based on the operation received at timing tAe2-B1.

Furthermore, at timing tAe2-B1, the first post-reception output sound SA5 (5A post-reception output sound) is started to function as a sound effect corresponding to this 5A post-reception display (attack mode), and the second post-reception output sound SB5 (5A post-reception output sound) is started to be output in mode SB5b-2 to suggest that the performance content corresponding to the 5A reception acceptance state has progressed to the second stage.

Here, timing tAe2-B1 may occur while the second post-reception output sound SB5 (5A post-reception output sound), which started outputting at timing tAe2-A1, is still in the output state. In this case, at timing tAe2-B1, the second post-reception output sound SB5 (5A post-reception output sound) may terminate its first-stage mode SB5b-1, which was in the output state, and instead begin outputting in its second-stage mode SB5b-2.

Furthermore, timing tAe2-B2 assumes a scenario where operation on the 5A operation unit is interrupted and the unit is left in a non-operational state while the single-shot display TA5 is displayed. As mentioned above, the time from the non-operational state until the single-shot display TA5 disappears is not set as a fixed time, but is instead set to an undefined value.

Furthermore, at timing tAe2-B2, when the 5A operation unit is returned to a non-operational state, the 5A reception display and 5A reception output sounds (status indication display JA5, single display TA5, first reception output sound SA5, second reception output sound SB5), which were started at timing tAe2-B1, continue their execution state because the conditions for terminating their execution state have not yet been met. Therefore, no changes occur at timing tAe2-B2.

Furthermore, in this example, as shown in Figure 158(a), it is assumed that at timing tAe2-C1 within the 5A acceptance state (the performance state shown in Figure 160(f)), the "5A operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" is put into operation again, and this operation state continues until timing tAe2-C2.

In this example, if the "5A operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" is activated and operation is received at timing tAe2-C1 within the 5A acceptance state, this triggers the "5A post-reception change (5A post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception to occur again, as shown in Figures 158(e) to (h) (the effect shown in Figure 160(f)).

However, as described above, in this example, even if an operation to the 5A control unit is initiated again at timing tAe2-C1 within the 5A acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 5A acceptance state will progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 160(f), the post-5A acceptance change (such as the 5A acceptance display or 5A acceptance output sound) will begin to be executed in the manner of the third stage of progression (in this case, the final stage of progression) based on the operation being accepted by the 5A control unit.

Therefore, in this example, at timing tAe2-C1, as a display after receiving the 5A above, as shown in Figure 160(f), the final (third stage) progression mode will begin to be displayed (one video display) showing the ally character YS-A5 defeating the enemy character BOSS-A5 using swordsmanship (including the generation of smoke effects and slashing effects).

More specifically, in the example shown in Figure 160(f), after receiving the 5A input, the display changes to show the enemy character BOSS-A5 being defeated, the sword attack by the ally character YS-A5 is displayed as a single-shot display TA5 in the third stage, mode TA5c, and the gauge image HP-A5 changes to show the remaining HP gauge reduced to 0. That is, in this case, the situation indication display JA5 (enemy character BOSS-A5, ally character YS-A5, gauge image HP-A5) changes from "mode JA5c" to "mode JA5d" before the re-operation, thereby indicating that the performance content corresponding to the 5A input acceptance state has progressed based on the operation received at timing tAe2-C1.

Furthermore, at timing tAe2-C1, the first post-reception output sound SA5 (5A post-reception output sound) is started to function as a sound effect corresponding to this 5A post-reception display (attack mode), and the second post-reception output sound SB5 (5A post-reception output sound) is started to be output in mode SB5b-3 to suggest that the performance content corresponding to the 5A reception acceptance state has progressed to the third stage.

In this example, timing tAe2-C1 arrives while both the first post-reception output sound SA5 and the second post-reception output sound SB5, which began outputting at timing tAe2-B1, are in the output state. At this point, at timing tAe2-C1, the second post-reception output sound SB5 (5A post-reception output sound) terminates its second-stage mode SB5b-2, which was in the output state, and begins outputting in the second-stage mode SB5b-3. Similarly, the first post-reception output sound SA5 (5A post-reception output sound) terminates its output state and restarts outputting from the beginning.

Then, at timing tAe2-C2, when the 5A operation unit is again deactivated, the display shown in Figure 160(g) appears. However, this display does not appear as a result of the 5A operation unit being deactivated. It simply means that among the 5A reception display and 5A reception output sounds (status indication display JA5, single display TA5, first reception output sound SA5, second reception output sound SB5) that started execution at timing tAe2-C1, those whose conditions for terminating their execution state have not yet been met by the time timing tAe2-C2 arrives continue their execution state (status indication display JA5, first reception output sound SA5, second reception output sound SB5). Those whose conditions for terminating their execution state were met before timing tAe2-C2 arrived terminated their execution state at that point (a point before timing tAe2-C2).

However, in this example, as shown in Figures 158(a) and 160(h), it is assumed that no new operation request is received by the 5A operation unit even when the single-shot display TA5, the status indication display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 have all finished their execution state.

In this example, while the single-shot display TA5, the status indication display JA5, the first post-reception output sound SA5, and the second post-reception output sound SB5 are all in a non-execution state, as shown in Figure 158(a), at timing tAe2-D1 within the 5A reception-acceptable state (the performance situation shown in Figure 160(i)), the "5A operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is set to an operation state once more, and this operation state is assumed to continue at least until timing tAe3.

As described above, the display content corresponding to the 5A acceptance state has already progressed to its final form due to the operation reception at timing tAe2-C1. In this example, even if further operation reception is performed at timing tAe2-D1 under these circumstances, as shown in Figures 158(a) and 160(i), the status indication display JA5 and the single display TA5 will start execution in the same form (final form) as when they were started at timing tAe2-C1, corresponding to one operation reception.

However, as also mentioned above, in this example, the 5A post-reception output sounds (first post-reception output sound SA5, second post-reception output sound SB5) will not be output again after being output once in the final mode, regardless of the output status of the post-reception output sounds related to the final mode, even if further operation reception occurs. Therefore, when operation reception occurs at timing tAe2-D1, the 5A post-reception display (single display TA5, status indication display JA5) will start execution as a result of the operation reception, but the 5A post-reception output sounds (first post-reception output sound SA5, second post-reception output sound SB5) will not be executed.

In this example, we assumed that the situation indication display JA5d (final form), which was displayed starting at timing tAe2-C1, was hidden before timing tAe2-D1 arrived. However, it is also possible that timing tAe2-D1 arrives (operation reception occurs) while the situation indication display JA5d (final form), which was displayed starting at timing tAe2-C1, is still displayed. In this case, at timing tAe2-D1, the situation indication display JA5d (final form), which was previously displayed, may not be hidden and then redisplayed; instead, its display state may be maintained. Furthermore, in this case, the duration for which the display state is maintained and continued may be reset based on timing tAe2-D1 rather than timing tAe2-C1. In this case, at timing tAe2-D1, not only will no new output sound be emitted after receiving the 5A, but the situation indication display JA5d (final form) will not be redisplayed.

Furthermore, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 158 and 160 assume a scenario where the display after receiving the 5A, which was initiated at timing tAe2-D1, is deactivated, and then timing tAe3 arrives, at which point the 5A acceptance state ends.

However, there may be cases where timing tAe3 arrives while the "5A Reception" indicator is displayed. In this case, based on the arrival of timing tAe3, the "5A Reception" indicator, which was previously displayed, may be turned off.

Furthermore, it is possible that timing tAe3 may arrive while the 5A reception output sound is in the output state. In this case, based on the arrival of timing tAe3, the 5A reception output sound, which was previously in the output state, may be de-outputted. However, based on the arrival of timing tAe3, the 5A reception display, which was previously in the display state, may be hidden, but the 5A reception output sound, which was previously in the output state, may be kept active rather than de-outputted.

Furthermore, the 5A acceptance state occurs as an acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in Figure 159, if no operation is received for the 5A operation unit by the time timing tAe3 arrives while the 5A acceptance state is in effect, the 5A acceptance state simply ends based on the arrival of timing tAe3, and the post-5A acceptance change that occurs when an operation is performed on the 5A operation unit does not begin.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "6A Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state). Figure 161 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "6A Acceptance State" is generated based on the fulfillment of "Condition 6A" and the player performs an operation. Figure 162 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "6A Acceptance State" is generated but the player does not perform an operation. Figure 163 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the "6A Acceptance State" is generated.

Now, assuming the starting conditions are met (holding is completed) and the "6A Variation Pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement performance determination) corresponding to the "6A Variation Pattern." After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ (such as performance depiction according to the 6A Variation Pattern, or sound output of BGM according to the 6A Variation Pattern (such as normal BGM playback when not reaching)), and within the execution period of this variation performance, it additionally executes a performance (pre-announcement performance) according to the result of the pre-announcement performance determination, in addition to the performance of the selected "6A Variation Pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 161(c), during the execution period of the variation effect related to the "6A variation pattern," based on the arrival of timing tAf2, which is the 6A time elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the fulfillment of "condition 6A"), the above-mentioned 6A reception permission state (valid period) is made possible, allowing for "reception of operations to the 6A operation unit regarding changes after 6A reception (such as the 6A effect status indication display JA6, the 6A single display TA6, and the 6A reception output sounds SA6, SB6, etc.)" (the situation shown in Figure 163(a)).

In this embodiment, the 6A acceptance state allows only one operation request to the "6A operation unit" before the 6A acceptance state ends, and the operation button 410 is set as the "6A operation unit".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figures 161(b) to (e), when the 6A acceptance state occurs, a mock image display MG-A6 that mimics the target of the player's operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6A operation unit), a message display MA6 related to the operation on the target of the operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6A operation unit), and a status indication display JA6 that suggests the status of the operation are displayed at a timing tAf1 that occurs before the 6A acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance to the 6A operation unit is permitted).

However, the mock image display MG-A6, message display MA6, and status indication display JA6 do not necessarily have to be displayed before the 6A acceptance state occurs. They may be displayed simultaneously with the 6A acceptance state, or slightly after its occurrence. Furthermore, the timing of the display of the mock image display MG-A6 and the timing of the display of the message display MA6 may be different. For example, the message display MA6 may be displayed before the mock image display MG-A6.

Here, the "Image Display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A acceptance state is configured to selectively use either a "first color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" or a "second color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme.

Furthermore, the "Mock Image Display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A acceptance state depicts a motion image in which the mock "operation receiving unit," which is the target of the operation, is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α), and then sequentially displayed in the manners shown in Figures 144(β) to (σ). This motion image is considered a single periodic change, and this periodic change repeats over a predetermined period of 6A time. This period of 6A time is set to be longer (longer cycle) than the period of 1A time that appears in the 1A acceptance state; for example, it may be set to the same time as the above-mentioned period of 2A time. Therefore, in the 6A acceptance state, the "operation receiving unit" is depicted slowly moving up and down within its movable range.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 162(b), the 6A acceptance state continues until timing tAf3 arrives when no operation is received by the 6A operation unit, and terminates upon the arrival of timing tAf3. Therefore, while the 6A acceptance state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock image display MG-A6) indicating the remaining time until timing tAf3 arrives, which terminates the 6A acceptance state, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display is not necessarily required.

Furthermore, if the "Mock Image Display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A acceptance state is to be displayed before the timing tAf2 in which the 6A acceptance state occurs, it is desirable to wait until timing tAf2 before starting its periodic changes and gauge image changes. In other words, in this case, the "Mock Image Display MG-A6" corresponding to the 6A acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α) (actually, the manner in which the image is replaced with a mock image of the operation button 410) until timing tAf2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the 6A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 161(c), (d) and 163(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-A6, a message related to the acceptance of operation to the 6A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410) is displayed (in this case, the message display MA6, which reads "Defeat the wizard! Hit him with the hammer in one blow!!").

Furthermore, in the 6A acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 161(e) and 163(a), a status indication display JA6 is shown to indicate the status of operation in the 6A acceptance state. This display shows an ally character corresponding to the type of the 6A acceptance state (here, ally character YS-A6), an enemy character corresponding to the type of the 6A acceptance state (here, enemy character BOSS-A6 depicted as a wizard), and a gauge image HP-A6 showing its remaining HP gauge. In the 6A acceptance state, the likelihood of a big win is suggested through a visual effect that indicates whether the ally character YS-A6 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-A6 (whether the gauge image HP-A6 can be reduced to 0) with a single operation to the 6A operation unit. In other words, when an operation (operation acceptance) is performed to the "6A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)," this may trigger a visual effect where "ally character YS-A6" attacks "enemy character BOSS-A6." In this example, the situation indication display JA6 shows ally character YS-A6, enemy character BOSS-A6, and gauge image HP-A6. However, it is not necessary to display all of these; at least one of ally character YS-A6, enemy character BOSS-A6, or gauge image HP-A6 is displayed to indicate the operation status.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 161, it is assumed that the first operation request is received for the "6A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAf2-A1 within the 6A acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 163(b)).

In this example, if an operation is received by the "6A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAf2-A1 within the 6A acceptance state, a "6A reception change (6A reception effect)" corresponding to that operation will occur, as shown in Figures 161(e) to (h) (the effect shown in Figure 163(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "6A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tAf2-A1 within the 6A acceptance state, as shown in Figures 161(e) to (h), a "6A reception post-output sound" corresponding to the operation received by the "6A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is audibly output, and the "6A reception post-display (single display TA6, status indication display JA6)" corresponding to the operation received by the "6A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed.

In other words, when an operation is received once for the "6A operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" in the 6A reception-accepting state, a video display is shown as the "6A reception display" as shown in Figure 163(b), depicting "ally character YS-A6" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A6" with a hammer (including the occurrence of an impact effect).

In this example, the single video display first shows an attack by the allied character YS-A6 using a hammer, displayed as a single hit TA6. As a result, two scenarios are provided: one where the enemy character BOSS-A6 is defeated, and another where BOSS-A6 is not defeated. Figure 163(b) shows the scenario where BOSS-A6 is defeated.

More specifically, in the examples shown in Figures 161 and 163, the enemy character BOSS-A6 is defeated, the hammer's strength increases, and the remaining HP gauge in the gauge image HP-A6 changes to 0. That is, in this case, the situation indication display JA6 (enemy character BOSS-A6, ally character YS-A6, gauge image HP-A6) changes from "Pattern JA6a" to "Pattern JA6b," indicating that the player has successfully defeated the enemy character BOSS-A6 (suggesting a high probability of a jackpot).

Although not illustrated, if an attack by the ally character YS-A6 using a hammer is displayed as a single hit (TA6), and the result is that the enemy character BOSS-A6 is not defeated, the enemy character BOSS-A6 will survive, the hammer's strength will decrease, and the remaining HP gauge in the gauge image HP-A6 will change to a partially remaining state. In other words, in this case, the situation indication display JA6 (enemy character BOSS-A6, ally character YS-A6, gauge image HP-A6) will change from the "state JA6a" before the operation to a different state from "state JA6b," indicating that the operation was in a state where the enemy character BOSS-A6 was not defeated (indicating a low probability of a jackpot).

Furthermore, in this example, when an operation is received by the "6A operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 6A reception-accepting state, in addition to the "6A reception display" described above, the first reception output sound SA6 may be output as the "6A reception output sound," as shown in Figure 161(g). In this example, the first reception output sound SA6 functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-A6 attacks the enemy character BOSS-A6 using a hammer (single display TA6)" that appears as the "6A reception display." In this example, the first reception output sound SA6 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the reception display, but it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that an operation has been received by the player.

Furthermore, at this point, a second post-reception output sound, SB6, is output as the "6A Post-Reception Output Sound." In this example, the second post-reception output sound SB6 has different modes depending on whether the enemy character BOSS-A6 is defeated (high expectation) or not (low expectation). The sound is output in one of these modes.

Thus, in the 6A reception-accepting state, when an operation is received by the "6A operation unit (in this case, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-A6" attacking "enemy character BOSS-A6" and its sound effects are displayed. In other words, if "ally character YS-A6" reduces "enemy character BOSS-A6's" HP to 0 with a single attack, it means that "enemy character BOSS-A6" has been defeated, providing a visual effect that suggests a high probability of success. However, if, despite multiple attacks, the HP does not reach 0 and "enemy character BOSS-A6" is not defeated, it suggests a low probability of success.

This example, as shown in Figure 161(a), assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 6A operation unit), initiated at timing tAf2-A1, continues until timing tAf2-A2.

However, the 6A acceptance state means that only one operation request is permitted for the 6A operation unit. Therefore, a second operation request will not be made during the period from timing tAf2-A1 to timing tAf2-A2, nor will any change occur in the execution state triggered by timing tAf2-A2.

Furthermore, the single-shot display TA6, the status indication display JA6, the first post-reception output sound SA6, and the second post-reception output sound SB6, which are initiated at timing tAf2-A1, are each executed for a predetermined duration before being deactivated. These effects are executed for different durations, and the timing of their termination differs for each.

Furthermore, the execution states of the single-shot display TA6, the status indication display JA6, the first post-reception output sound SA6, and the second post-reception output sound SB6, which are initiated at timing tAf2-A1, are terminated at an unspecified time from timing tAf2-A2.

In this example, the single-shot display TA6 is displayed in the same manner whether the enemy character BOSS-A6 is defeated or not. However, the single-shot display TA6 does not necessarily have to be displayed. Similarly, the first post-reception output sound SA6 is output in the same manner whether the enemy character BOSS-A6 is defeated or not. However, the first post-reception output sound SA6 does not necessarily have to be output.

Furthermore, the 6A acceptance state occurs as an acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is activated. Therefore, as shown in Figure 162, if no operation is received by the 6A operation unit by the time timing tAf3 arrives in the 6A acceptance state, not only does the 6A acceptance state end upon the arrival of timing tAf3, but the 6A post-acceptance change is also initiated in the manner that appears when an operation is performed on the 6A operation unit.

Furthermore, the 6A acceptance state may be generated as an acceptance state in which the automatic button function described above is not activated. In other words, in this case, the 6A acceptance state is terminated simply upon the arrival of timing tAb3, and the 6A post-acceptance change that appears when an operation is performed on the 6A operation unit will not be initiated.

Furthermore, while the "1st A Operation Unit," "2nd A Operation Unit," "3rd A Operation Unit," "4th A Operation Unit," and "6th A Operation Unit" in the above-mentioned example of presentation are all implemented as "operation buttons 410," some of these operation units may be implemented as operation units different from "operation buttons 410." For example, the configuration may be replaced with the configuration when an operation unit represented as a mock image display is operated in each acceptance state. That is, for "1st A Operation Unit," "2nd A Operation Unit," "3rd A Operation Unit," and "4th A Operation Unit," it is sufficient if they are displayed as mock image displays and allow multiple operation acceptances, and for "6th A Operation Unit," it is sufficient if they are displayed as mock image displays and allow only one operation acceptance. However, "1st A Operation Unit," "2nd A Operation Unit," "3rd A Operation Unit," "4th A Operation Unit," and "6th A Operation Unit" will all be provided as operation units different from "5th A Operation Unit."

Furthermore, the "post-reception change (post-reception display)" corresponding to the operation reception during each reception period (reception-allowed state) in the above-mentioned examples of presentations does not necessarily have to indicate the probability of winning a jackpot. For example, it may occur as a reception period for determining whether or not the probability variation function is activated within the execution period of a jackpot game, and the display may be executed as a post-reception display. Alternatively, it may occur as a reception period within a simple mini-game unrelated to any indication of the probability of winning the game, and the display may be executed as a post-reception display. Or, it may occur based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions during various interval periods, and the display may be executed as a post-reception display. Therefore, the reception period in the above-mentioned examples of presentations does not necessarily have to occur within the period in which the symbol variation is being executed. Also, even when a post-reception display that does not indicate the probability of winning is displayed, multiple modes of display for the post-reception display may be provided, and the display may be shown in one of these modes.

Furthermore, the model image display can be displayed in the same form (or similar form) whether the periodic changes of the model image display occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" or in units of "a predetermined time". However, when the periodic changes of the model image display occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the model image display can be displayed in at least one form and one form. When the periodic changes of the model image display occur in units of "a predetermined time", it may be possible to have no instances of display in the second form (or similar form) and only instances of display in the first form (or similar form).

Incidentally, the periodic changes in the display of mock images, unlike color schemes or illumination, are phenomena that occur over time. Therefore, distinguishing between long and short cycles inherently requires a relatively long period of time. Furthermore, it is difficult to reliably determine whether the currently displayed mock image is a long or short cycle (since both long and short cycles are not displayed simultaneously). However, if players can distinguish between them, they can enjoy its value as a new source of information. Thus, the difficulty of distinguishing between them, combined with its value as a source of information, allows for the provision of new and engaging presentation elements.

Furthermore, in the second A acceptance state described in the above example, when the auto-repeated button function is enabled, the first post-acceptance output sound SA2a is configured to start outputting a new "sound effect" when timing tAb2-B2, which is the timing when the performance content progresses, arrives. However, instead of starting to output a new "sound effect" when timing tAb2-B2 arrives, the output (sound effect) in the manner that has been performed up to that point may be continued.

In other words, the first post-reception output sound SA2a does not necessarily have to be implemented as a repeated output of a sound effect. For example, it may be implemented as an output that "continues on the condition that the operation state is maintained (conditional on the auto-repeated function being enabled) when an operation is received, and terminates when the operation state is no longer maintained." In this case, even if the timing tAb2-B2, which is the timing when the performance content progresses by the so-called auto-repeated function, arrives while the first post-reception output sound SA2a is being output, this may trigger no change in the output mode of the first post-reception output sound SA2a (performance sound based on one data), and its playback state may continue. In this sense, the auto-repeated function in this performance example can be said to be a function that simply maintains the operation state and periodically determines whether the operation state is maintained. Even if the second A acceptance state is implemented with this configuration, a new post-acceptance change (second post-acceptance output sound SB2) will occur multiple times at indefinite intervals and at intervals longer than a specific time, at least for the number of times the performance has progressed.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the interval at which the auto-repeated button function determines whether or not the system is in an operational state when the system is in an operational state (acceptance state) be set to be shorter than any of the cycles 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 5A, and 6A. However, the interval at which the auto-repeated button function determines whether or not the system is in an operational state (acceptance state) may differ depending on the type of acceptance state. For example, the interval at which the auto-repeated button function determines whether or not the system is in an operational state (operation acceptance) when the system is in a 2A acceptance state may differ from the interval at which the auto-repeated button function determines whether or not the system is in an operational state (operation acceptance) when the system is in a 1A acceptance state or 3A acceptance state. Alternatively, the interval at which the auto-repeated button function determines whether or not the system is in an operational state (operation acceptance) may be the same for the 1A acceptance state and the 3A acceptance state.

Furthermore, when maintaining an operation target for which the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled, it is desirable that, in types of acceptance states where the post-reception change is newly executed at fixed intervals (predetermined intervals) (such as the 1A acceptance state or the 3A acceptance state), the number of times the post-reception change occurs within that acceptance state is greater than in types of acceptance states where the post-reception change is newly executed at irregular intervals (not predetermined intervals) (such as the 2A acceptance state).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 described in the above example of presentation, the post-reception display on the presentation display device 1600 is shown as one of the post-reception changes. However, this post-reception display is not an essential component of the post-reception changes. For example, it is possible to achieve the same presentation patterns as the post-reception changes caused by the post-reception display through changes in the illumination pattern of the presentation lamps or changes in the drive of movable parts.

As mentioned above, the 1A acceptance state and the 2A acceptance state are provided as "a type of acceptance state in which the acceptance state can be terminated early based on the fact that an operation has been received (when the final performance mode appears)." However, in the 1A acceptance state and the 2A acceptance state, for example, if a predetermined judgment result is not obtained as a result of a jackpot judgment or performance judgment, the acceptance state may not be terminated early regardless of how many operations are received (when the final performance mode does not appear). The acceptance state may be terminated early only when a predetermined judgment result is obtained as a result of a jackpot judgment or performance judgment, triggered by the operation being received (when the final performance mode appears). Even with such a configuration, it can be said that it is realized as "a type of acceptance state in which the acceptance state can be terminated early based on the fact that an operation has been received (when the final performance mode appears)."

Furthermore, the intervals at which the auto-repeated button function determines whether or not an operation state is in progress (operation reception) (the interval at which a new change occurs after reception when the operation state is maintained) may be different between the 1A acceptance state and the 3A acceptance state.

Furthermore, the number of times the post-second A reception output sound can be generated within the second A reception-acceptable state when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state may be set to be less than the number of times the post-first A reception output sound can be generated within the first A reception-acceptable state when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state.

Furthermore, the number of times the post-2A reception output sound can be generated within the 2A reception-acceptable state when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state may be set to be less than the number of times the post-3A reception output sound can be generated within the 3A reception-acceptable state when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state.

Furthermore, in the second A acceptance state, the upper limit of the number of times the second A acceptance output sound can be generated by maintaining the specific operating means (operating button 410) in the operated state may be set to be less than the upper limit of the number of times the second A acceptance output sound can be generated by repeatedly operating the operating button 410 without maintaining it in the operated state.

Furthermore, in the first A reception acceptance state, the maximum number of times the output sound after first A reception can be generated by maintaining the operation button 410 in the operated state may be set to be the same as, or greater than, the maximum number of times the output sound after first A reception can be generated by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining it in the operated state.

Furthermore, in the state where the 3A reception is permitted, the maximum number of times the post-3A reception output sound can be generated by maintaining the operation button 410 in the operated state may be set to be the same as, or greater than, the maximum number of times the post-3A reception output sound can be generated by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining it in the operated state.

Furthermore, in the above-described example of the performance, the type of post-operation output sound that changes (ends) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) can be started to output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (end) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) is in an output state or not. The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (terminate) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) may not be started independently when the post-operation output sound of a type that does change (terminate) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) is not in an output state, but may be started only when it is in an output state (or simultaneously).

Furthermore, in the second A acceptance state described in the above-mentioned example, even if the output conditions for the second post-reception output sound SB2 are met while the operation button 410 remains in the operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. However, the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect), which was in the output state up to that point, may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect), which was in the output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived, simply continues; its playback state is not terminated prematurely, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, in the first A acceptance state described in the above-mentioned example, if the output conditions for the first post-reception output sound SB1 are met while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in Figure 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 will start outputting based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. Conversely, the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect), which was in the output state up to that point, may terminate its output state based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2 and start a new output. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect), which was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived, is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to be output.

Furthermore, in the third A acceptance state described in the above-mentioned example, if the output conditions for the third post-reception output sound SB3 are met while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state (timing tAc2-B2 shown in Figure 152), the second post-reception output sound SB3 will start outputting based on the operation reception made at timing tAc2-B2. Meanwhile, the third post-reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect), which had been in output state until then, may terminate its output state and start new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAc2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect), which was in output state when timing tAc2-B2 arrived, is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to be output.

Furthermore, "multiple post-operation sound occurrences" means that simply maintaining the operation state triggers multiple instances where the post-operation sound is newly output. In other words, while maintaining the operation state, if the playback state of the post-operation sound based on a single data point continues, it can be said that the post-operation sound occurs only once.

Furthermore, the display of the mock image is not necessarily required in the acceptance state. For example, the display of the mock image may be disabled in at least one of the acceptance states described above (1A acceptance state to 6A acceptance state). For example, the display of the mock image may be disabled in the 1A acceptance state. Alternatively, the display of the mock image may be disabled in the 3A acceptance state instead of the 1A acceptance state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described acceptance states (1st A acceptance state to 6th A acceptance state), based on the acceptance of an operation, both types of sounds (first post-acceptance output sound and second post-acceptance output sound) can be output simultaneously. However, it is not necessary for both types of sounds (first post-acceptance output sound and second post-acceptance output sound) to be output simultaneously. When an operation is accepted, only one of these sounds may be selectively output, or only one of these sounds may be output, with the other not necessarily provided.

Furthermore, in the second A acceptance state, the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is not processed to be a fixed time, but only to be processed to be an indefinite time. However, in the first A acceptance state and the third A acceptance state, it is sufficient that at least the process of setting the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated to be a fixed time is performed, and both the process of setting the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated to be a fixed time (first post-operation output sound) and the process of setting the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated to be an indefinite time (second post-operation output sound) may be performed.

In the above-mentioned acceptance state, the "rapid-fire" and "single-shot" indicators may not necessarily be displayed.

Furthermore, the aforementioned "time less than or equal to a specific time" may include the specific time itself, or it may be the case that only the specific time is provided as "time less than or equal to a specific time." Alternatively, it may be the case that only one time period is provided as "time longer than or equal to a specific time."

Furthermore, the aforementioned "time less than or equal to the specified time" includes the specified time itself, and it is also possible that only the specified time is provided as "time less than or equal to the specified time." Alternatively, it is also possible that only one time period is provided as "time longer than the specified time."

Furthermore, the specified time is a time shorter than the prescribed time, and it is desirable that "time less than or equal to the specified time" be shorter than "time less than or equal to the prescribed time." Conversely, it is desirable that "time longer than the specified time" be longer than "time longer than the prescribed time." Alternatively, if "time longer than the specified time" is set as an indefinite time, its indefiniteness may allow it to be both "time longer than the prescribed time" and "time longer than the prescribed time."

In the example shown in Figure 149(g), when the operation button 410 is detected to have changed from an operated state to an unoperated state while the second A post-reception output sound is being output, the second A post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2) is terminated upon this detection. However, instead of terminating the output, it may be changed to a different output mode (such as a change in volume/quality or a change in the output sound's characteristics).

Furthermore, the post-operation output sound (post-reception output sound) may or may not indicate a level of expectation. In fact, the first post-reception output sound SA, for example, is a sound that does not indicate a level of expectation.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 may also include additional acceptance states different from the first A to sixth A acceptance states described above. For example, it may include a different acceptance state where the performance aspects related to operation and non-operation are the same as in the first A acceptance state, but the type of enemy character that appears is different; another acceptance state where the performance aspects related to operation and non-operation are the same as in the second A acceptance state, but the type of enemy character that appears is different; or another acceptance state where the performance aspects related to operation and non-operation are the same as in the third A acceptance state, but the type of enemy character that appears is different.

Furthermore, while this pachinko machine 1 is designed to include all of the above-mentioned acceptance states 1A through 6A, it is not necessary to include all of these acceptance states. Rather, it is desirable to include only some of these acceptance states in appropriate combinations, taking into account the desired effects and benefits. By including them in the "appropriate combinations" described separately in the configurations below, excellent effects and benefits will be achieved. Note that in each configuration below, examples of combinations of acceptance states that should be included in order to achieve the effects and benefits shown in the above-mentioned performance examples are provided. However, the combinations are not limited to those exemplified; any combination that achieves the desired effects and benefits is acceptable, even if not exemplified. Also, other configurations adopted by acceptance states unrelated to the desired effects and benefits may be included as appropriate, provided they do not negatively affect the achievement of those effects and benefits.

For example, if the first configuration A1 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation requests to a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted, and this multiple operation valid state includes a type of multiple operation valid state in which a message prompting operation to the specific operation means (operation button 410) is displayed (the first A acceptance permitted state shown in Figure 146, the second A acceptance permitted state shown in Figure 149, and the fourth A acceptance permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a type of multiple operation valid state in which no message is displayed (the third A acceptance permitted state shown in Figure 152), then in the type of multiple operation valid state in which the message is displayed (the first A acceptance permitted state, the second A acceptance permitted state, and the fourth A acceptance permitted state), it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound, and fourth A post-reception output sound) is played. When the post-operation output sound is output, if it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state may change as a result of this detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g)). On the other hand, if the specific operating means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state in a multiple operation valid state of the type in which no message is displayed (third A reception-allowed state), and a corresponding post-operation output sound (third A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound in the output state will not change as a result of this detection (third A post-reception output sound shown in Figures 152(g), (h)). In the example described above, the post-reception output sound of the third A, shown in Figures 152(g) and (h), is output for a predetermined duration and then terminates, without being triggered by the detection. With this configuration, in the multiple-operation valid state, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, through the display of a message. This is expected to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the first configuration A1 relating to the above-described example of performance, in particular, in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which no message is displayed (3A reception-accepting state), if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state and a post-operation output sound (3A reception-accepting output sound) corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound (3A reception-accepting output sound) is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound (3A reception-accepting output sound) in that output state is not triggered by the detection, but occurs independently of the detection (for example, it is output for a predetermined output time and then ends), whereas in the multiple operation valid state of the type in which no message is displayed ( In a multiple-operation enabled state (1st A reception-allowed state, 2nd A reception-allowed state, 4th A reception-allowed state) of the type in which message displays MA1, MA2, MA4) are displayed, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (1st A reception-after output sound, 2nd A reception-after output sound, 4th A reception-after output sound) is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state can be triggered by the detection (2nd A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 149(g)) or it can be triggered without the detection (1st A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 146, 4th A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 155). With this configuration, when no message is displayed during multiple operation activations, it suitably suggests that there is no change in the output sound after operation when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is switched from the activated state to the deactivated state. Conversely, when a message is displayed during multiple operation activations, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not there is a change in the output sound after operation when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is switched from the activated state to the deactivated state. This is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the first configuration A1 of the above-described example of presentation, when one form of message display (message display MA2) is displayed, there are cases in which the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) changes when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) and cases in which the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) does not change (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)). As a result, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not the post-operation output sound changes when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state after the message display has been displayed multiple times in an operationally valid state" is more favorably achieved. However, this configuration is not necessarily required. For example, if the message display appears in different forms—such as different sizes, colors, or display styles—and the output sound after the operation changes depending on the form, it can be expected that, compared to a situation where no message is displayed at all, it will be more difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the output sound after the operation has changed. However, for messages prompting multiple operations, it is desirable (though not a mandatory configuration) that they be displayed in a form that cannot appear when only one operation is accepted.

Furthermore, in the eighth configuration A8, among the multiple operation valid states, the types of multiple operation valid states where a message is displayed (first A reception-accepting state, second A reception-accepting state) and the types of multiple operation valid states where a message is not displayed (third A reception-accepting state) may both be provided as "multiple operation valid states in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operating state." That is, in this case, even though it is a "multiple operation valid state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operating state," if no message is displayed, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will occur independently. If a message is displayed, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in the output state will occur both when triggered by the detection and when it occurs independently.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the above-mentioned specific operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, as described above, among the multiple operation valid states of the type in which a message is displayed, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance-allowed state), even though it is a single valid period, there are two cases: one in which a post-operation output sound (second acceptance-allowed output sound SB2) is output, where the output state does not terminate upon detection of a non-operation state, and another in which a post-operation output sound (first acceptance-allowed output sound SA2) is output, where the output state terminates upon detection of a non-operation state. Therefore, in the second A acceptance-allowed state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state" is more favorably achieved.

Furthermore, in the first A acceptance state, the third A acceptance state, and the fourth A acceptance state as described in the above-mentioned performance examples, there are no cases where the post-operation output sound is output when the detection of a non-operation state is triggered, and only cases where the post-operation output sound is output without being terminated when the detection of a non-operation state is triggered.

Furthermore, the first configuration A1 may be implemented as an "operating means that is the target of the mock image display and allows for multiple operation requests."

Furthermore, in order to realize the first configuration A1, the fourth A acceptance state is not necessarily required; even in this case, it is still possible to obtain the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, for example, the second configuration A2 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted, and this multiple operation valid state includes a type of multiple operation valid state in which, simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times (the fourth A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a type of multiple operation valid state in which, simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times (Figure 14 If the system includes a first A acceptance state shown in Figure 6, a second A acceptance state shown in Figure 149, and a third A acceptance state shown in Figure 152, then in a multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state, second A acceptance state, third A acceptance state) in which multiple post-operation output sounds are output simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operating state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in the operating state and a post-operation output sound corresponding thereto is output (first A post-operation output sound, second A post-operation output sound, third If the 3A Post-Reception Output Sound is output, and while the post-operation output sound is being output, it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state, the post-operation output sound in that output state may change as a result of this detection (as shown in Figure 149(g) for the 2A Post-Reception Output Sound), however, simply maintaining the specific operating means (operation button 410) in an operated state will not result in the corresponding post-operation output sound being output multiple times, thus creating a type of multiple operation valid state (4A Reception Allowed State). When the above-mentioned specific operating means (operating button 410) is detected to be in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (4A reception post-output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operating means (operating button 410) has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the output sound (4A reception post-output sound) will not be changed as a result of this detection (4A reception post-output sound shown in Figures 155(g) and (h)). In the example described above, the 4A reception post-output sound shown in Figures 155(g) and (h) is output for a predetermined duration and then terminates, without being triggered by this detection. With this configuration, in the multiple-operation enabled state, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not a change in the post-operation output sound occurs when the above-mentioned specific operating means changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, through whether or not the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the second configuration A2 relating to the above-described example of performance, in particular, among the multiple operation valid states, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state and the corresponding post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) is output in a type of multiple operation valid state (4A reception-allowed state) where simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state does not result in the output of multiple post-operation output sounds, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will occur independently of the detection (for example, it will be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated), whereas among the multiple operation valid states, the specific operation means In a multiple operation valid state (1st A reception-acceptable state, 2nd A reception-acceptable state, 3rd A reception-acceptable state) of the type in which multiple post-operation output sounds are output simply by maintaining the operation button 410 in an operated state, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (1st A reception-accepted output sound, 2nd A reception-accepted output sound, 3rd A reception-accepted output sound) is output, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state can be triggered by the detection (2nd A reception-accepted output sound shown in Figure 149(g)) or it can be triggered without the detection (1st A reception-accepted output sound shown in Figure 146, 3rd A reception-accepted output sound shown in Figure 152). With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated in the multiple-operation enabled state, it is suitably indicated that there is no change in the output sound after operation when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state. Conversely, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated in the multiple-operation enabled state, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after operation when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the second configuration A2 of the above-described performance example, in the multiple operation valid states (first A acceptance state, second A acceptance state, third A acceptance state) where the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the mock image display may be displayed in both the first color scheme and the second color scheme (see Figures 146(c), 149(c), 152(c), etc.). However, in the multiple operation valid states (fourth A acceptance state) where the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the mock image display may be displayed in the first color scheme at least once (it may always be the first color scheme), but it may be omitted if it is not displayed in the second color scheme.

In this case, in the multiple operation enabled states (first A reception-allowed state, second A reception-allowed state, third A reception-allowed state) of the type in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operating means (operation button 410) in an operated state, it is sufficient to have both cases where the mock image is displayed in the first color scheme and cases where it is displayed in the second color scheme. For example, this type of multiple operation enabled state may include a predetermined multiple operation enabled state in which the mock image is displayed only in the first color scheme, or it may include a specific multiple operation enabled state in which the mock image is not displayed in either the first or second color scheme.

Furthermore, as described above, among the types of multiple operation valid states in which multiple post-operation output sounds are generated simply by maintaining a specific operating means (operation button 410) in an operated state, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance-allowed state), even though it is a single valid period, there are cases where a post-operation output sound (second acceptance-allowed output sound SB2) is generated in which the output state does not end upon detection of a non-operated state, and cases where a post-operation output sound (first acceptance-allowed output sound SA2) is generated in which the output state ends upon detection of a non-operated state. Therefore, in the second A acceptance-allowed state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state" is more favorably achieved.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, among the types of multiple operation valid states in which multiple post-operation output sounds are generated simply by maintaining the above-mentioned specific operating means (operation button 410) in an operated state, in a special multiple operation valid state (first A reception-accepting state or third A reception-accepting state), there are no cases where a post-operation output sound is output that terminates upon detection of a non-operated state; rather, there are only cases where a post-operation output sound is output that does not terminate upon detection of a non-operated state.

Furthermore, in the second configuration A2 of the above-described performance example, the multiple operation valid state, which generates multiple post-operation output sounds simply by maintaining a specific operating means (operation button 410) in an operated state, includes a type of multiple operation valid state (second A reception-allowed state) that, while having a single valid period, generates both a post-operation output sound (second A reception-allowed state) in which the output state does not change (end) triggered by detection of non-operation (second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149(h)) and a post-operation output sound (second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149(g)) in which the output state changes (ends) triggered by detection of non-operation (second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149(g)). In addition, the system includes a type of multiple operation valid state (first A reception-allowed state, third A reception-allowed state) in which only post-operation output sounds (first A reception-allowed state, third A reception-allowed state) are generated in which the output state does not end triggered by detection of non-operation (first A reception-allowed state, third A reception-allowed state). However, this feature is not included for the type of multiple-operation valid state in which only a post-operation output sound is generated, triggered by the detection that a specific operating means (operation button 410) has become inactive.

Furthermore, the second configuration A2 may be implemented as an "operating means that is the target of the simulated image display and allows for multiple operation requests."

Furthermore, in realizing the second configuration A2, it is also possible to provide only one of the first A acceptance state and the third A acceptance state. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, for example, the third configuration A3 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation reception for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and the multiple operation valid state includes a type of multiple operation valid state in which the periodic changes of the mock image display appear in time units longer than a predetermined time (the second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149, the fourth A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a type of multiple operation valid state in which the periodic changes of the mock image display appear in time units less than or equal to the predetermined time (Figure 149). If the system includes a first A acceptance state shown in 6 and a third A acceptance state shown in Figure 152, and in a multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state, fourth A acceptance state) of the type in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound, fourth A post-acceptance output sound) is output, then while the post-operation output sound is being output, When it is detected that the above-mentioned specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state, the post-operation output sound in that output state may change as a result of this detection (as shown in Figure 149(g) for the 2A post-reception output sound), whereas in a multiple-operation valid state (1A reception-allowed state, 3A reception-allowed state) of a type in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units of the above-mentioned predetermined time or less, when it is detected that the above-mentioned specific operating means (operation button 410) is in the operated state If a signal is received and a corresponding post-operation output sound (1st A reception output sound, 3rd A reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that a specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound (4th A reception output sound) that is currently outputting will not be changed as a result of this detection (1st A reception output sound shown in Figure 146, 3rd A reception output sound shown in Figure 152). In the example described above, the 1st A reception output sound shown in Figure 146 and the 3rd A reception output sound shown in Figure 152 are output for a predetermined duration and then terminate, without being triggered by the detection. With this configuration, in a state where multiple operations are enabled, the length of time required for the periodic change in the display of the simulated image can indicate whether or not a change occurs in the output sound after the operation when the specific operation means is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state. This is expected to effectively maintain the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the third configuration A3 of the above-described example of presentation, in particular, in the multiple operation valid states of the type in which the periodic change of the mock image display occurs in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time (first A reception-acceptable state, third A reception-acceptable state), if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operation state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (first A reception-post-output sound, third A reception-post-output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will occur independently of the detection (for example, it will be output for a predetermined output time and then end). In contrast, in the above-mentioned multiple operation valid states, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operational state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound, fourth A post-reception output sound) is output in a type of multiple operation valid state (second A reception-acceptable state, fourth A reception-acceptable state) in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operational state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state can be triggered by the detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g)) or it can be done without being triggered by the detection (fourth A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 155). With this configuration, when the time required for the periodic change of the mock image display is relatively short in the multiple-operation enabled state, it is suitably suggested that there is no change in the output sound after operation when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state. Conversely, when the time required for the periodic change of the mock image display is relatively long in the multiple-operation enabled state, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after operation when the specific operation means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state, thus suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the third configuration A3 relating to the above-described example of performance, among the multiple operation valid states, the type of multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance-allowed state, third A acceptance-allowed state) in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time occurs as a "multiple operation valid state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound, third A post-acceptance output sound) is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state." However, the type of multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance-allowed state, fourth A acceptance-allowed state) in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time occurs as a "specific operation means (operation button 4 10) is set to occur in two ways: when maintaining the specified operating means (operation button 410) in the operating state results in multiple post-operation output sounds (2A acceptance-permitted state), and when maintaining the specified operating means (operation button 410) in the operating state does not result in multiple post-operation output sounds (4A acceptance-permitted state). Therefore, when the time required for the periodic change of the mock image display is short, it suggests that the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated. Conversely, when the time required for the periodic change of the mock image display is long, it becomes difficult to determine whether the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated or not. In this regard, even when the time required for the periodic change of the mock image display is long, if a change (end) occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specified operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the operating state to the non-operating state, it suggests that the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated, thus allowing for a favorable maintenance of the game's enjoyment.

Furthermore, as described above, among the multiple operation valid states (second A acceptance-permitted state, fourth A acceptance-permitted state) of the type in which the periodic changes in the mock image display appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance-permitted state), even though it is a single valid period, there are cases where a post-operation output sound (second post-acceptance output sound SB2) is generated without the output state ending upon detection of a non-operation state, and cases where a post-operation output sound (first post-acceptance output sound SA2) is generated upon detection of a non-operation state. Therefore, in the second A acceptance-permitted state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state" is more favorably achieved.

Furthermore, among the multiple operation valid states (2A reception-permitted state, 4A reception-permitted state) of the type in which the periodic changes in the mock image display appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, in the special multiple operation valid state (4A reception-permitted state), there are no cases where a post-operation output sound is generated that terminates the output state upon detection of a non-operation state, and only cases where a post-operation output sound is generated that does not terminate the output state upon detection of a non-operation state.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, the third configuration A3 may be implemented as an "operating means that is the target of the simulated image display and allows for multiple operation requests."

Furthermore, in the third configuration A3, multiple time periods may be provided as "time periods less than or equal to the specified time," or only one time period (for example, "the specified time") may be provided. Similarly, multiple time periods may be provided as "time periods longer than the specified time," or only one time period may be provided.

Furthermore, in order to realize the third configuration A3, the third A acceptance state is not necessarily required; even in this case, it is still possible to obtain the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, for example, the fourth configuration A4 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation reception is permitted multiple times for the operation means that is the target of the mock image display, and the operation means provided are a first operation means (operation button 410) and a second operation means (sword ornament 5001), and the multiple operation valid state is of a type in which a mock image display that mimics the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146, second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149, third A reception permitted state, fourth A reception permitted state). If the system includes a type of multiple operation valid state (the 5A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 158) in which at least a replica image display of the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed, then in the type of multiple operation valid state (the 1A reception-accepting state, the 2A reception-accepting state, the 3A reception-accepting state, the 4A reception-accepting state) in which at least a replica image display of the first operating means (operating button 410) is displayed, the system will detect that the first operating means (operating button 410) is in an operating state and will output a corresponding post-operation sound (the 1A post-reception state). When an output sound (output sound after 2A reception, output sound after 3A reception, output sound after 4A reception) is output, if it is detected that the first operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state while the output sound is being output, the output sound in the output state may change as a result of this detection (as shown in Figure 149(g) for the 2A reception output sound), and a multiple operation valid state (5A) of the type in which at least a mock image display of the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed may be activated. In the reception-allowed state, if the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is detected to be in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) has changed from the operating state to the non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the output sound (5A post-reception output sound) will not be changed as a result of this detection (5A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 158). In the example described above, the 5A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 158 is output for a predetermined duration and then terminates, without being triggered by the detection. With this configuration, in the multiple-operation enabled state, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not a change in the post-operation output sound occurs when the operating means is changed from the operating state to the non-operated state, based on the type of operating means that is allowed to be operated multiple times and is the target of the mock image display, thereby maintaining the enjoyment of the game in a suitable manner.

Furthermore, in the fourth configuration A4 relating to the above-described example of performance, in particular, among the multiple operation valid states, if at least one type of multiple operation valid state (5A reception-acceptable state) in which a mock image display of the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed is detected and a post-operation output sound (5A post-reception output sound) corresponding to this is output, even if it is detected that the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in that output state is not triggered by the detection, but occurs independently of the detection (for example, it is output for a predetermined output time and then ends), whereas among the multiple operation valid states, if at least one type of mock image display of the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed Even if not displayed, if the first operating means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state in a multiple operation valid state of the type (1st A reception allowed state, 2nd A reception allowed state, 3rd A reception allowed state, 4th A reception allowed state) and a corresponding post-operation output sound (1st A reception output sound, 2nd A reception output sound, 3rd A reception output sound, 4th A reception output sound) is output, then while the post-operation output sound is being output, if it is detected that the first operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in that output state can occur both when triggered by the detection (2nd A reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g)) and when not triggered by the detection (1st A reception output sound shown in Figure 146, 3rd A reception output sound shown in Figure 152, 4th A reception output sound shown in Figure 155). With this configuration, when the second operating means is the target of the simulated image display and the second operating means is operated, it is suitably suggested that there is no change in the output sound after operation when the second operating means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state. Conversely, when the first operating means is the target of the simulated image display and the first operating means is operated, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the output sound after operation when the first operating means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, as described above, among the multiple operation valid states (first A acceptance state, second A acceptance state, third A acceptance state, fourth A acceptance state) of the type in which at least one imitation image display of the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), even though it is a single valid period, there are cases where an operation-post-output sound (second acceptance-post-output sound SB2) is generated in which the output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operation state, and cases where an operation-post-output sound (first acceptance-post-output sound SA2) is generated in which the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operation state. Therefore, in the second A acceptance-post-output state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the operation-post-output sound when the first operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state" is more favorably achieved.

Furthermore, in the multiple operation valid state (5A reception-permitted state) of the type in which at least one imitation image display of the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed, there are no cases where a post-operation output sound is generated that terminates the output state upon detection of a non-operation state; rather, there are only cases where a post-operation output sound is generated that does not terminate the output state upon detection of a non-operation state.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, in order to realize the fourth configuration A4, the fourth A acceptance state is not necessarily required; even in this case, it is still possible to obtain the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, in realizing the fourth configuration A4, it is possible to provide only one of the first A acceptance state and the third A acceptance state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-described configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, the fifth configuration A5 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146). In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state. However, the interval between the start of execution of the post-operation change in response to the detection is set to an indefinite time. In the effective state (4A reception-allowed state), the post-operation change in response to the detection is not made possible multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means (operation button 410) in the operating state, and in the third multiple operation effective state (1A reception-allowed state), the post-operation change in response to the detection is made possible to start execution anew at regular intervals simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operating state. In the first multiple operation effective state (2A reception-allowed state), when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in the operating state and a post-operation output sound (2A reception-after output sound) is output accordingly, if the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, When this is detected, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state can be triggered by the detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g)). In the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state), if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and the corresponding post-operation output sound (fourth A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will be triggered independently (for example, for a predetermined output time). The system is designed so that only a specific sound is output and then the process ends (as shown in Figure 155, the 4th A post-reception output sound). When the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operational state during the 3rd multiple operation valid state (1st A reception-permitted state), and the corresponding post-operation output sound (1st A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operational state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will occur independently of the detection (for example, it will be output for a predetermined duration and then terminated) (as shown in Figure 146, the 1st A post-reception output sound).

With this configuration, firstly, if simply maintaining the specific operating means (operating button 410) in an operated state does not enable the generation of multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the above detection, then it becomes possible to suitably suggest that there is no change in the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) when the specific operating means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. In this regard, when the operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means (operation button 410) in an operated state, there are two possibilities when the operation output sound changes when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state: one is a change in the operation output sound (second A reception output sound), and the other is no change in the operation output sound (first A reception output sound). However, by observing whether or not the operation output sound is output at regular intervals when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not a change in the operation output sound occurs when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, thereby effectively maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the above-mentioned specific operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

In the fifth configuration A5, it is assumed that the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, and the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, are both the same "specific operating means," but this is not necessarily limited to this. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operating means targeted for operation in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in realizing the fifth configuration A5, the multiple operation valid state may include the third A acceptance state instead of the first A acceptance state, and the third A acceptance state may be realized as the third multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the first A acceptance state and the third A acceptance state.

Furthermore, for example, the sixth configuration A6 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146). In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the post-operation change in response to the detection can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operating state. In this case, the interval until the post-operation change is newly initiated in response to the detection is always longer than a specific time. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), the post-operation change in response to the detection is not made possible multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, and in the third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state), the post-operation change in response to the detection is made possible multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation change is newly started in response to the detection is always less than or equal to a specified time, and in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), when it is detected that the specified operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state and a post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is output accordingly, while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specified operation means (operation button When it is detected that the button 410 has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in that output state can be triggered by this detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g)). In the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state), if it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (fourth A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (end) of the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be triggered by this detection, but will be triggered independently of this detection (e.g., For example, the sound is output for a predetermined duration and then terminated (as shown in Figure 155, the 4th A post-reception output sound). In the third multiple-operation valid state (1st A reception-permitted state), if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operational state and the corresponding post-operation output sound (1st A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operational state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in that output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will occur independently (for example, it will be output for a predetermined duration and then terminated) (as shown in Figure 146, the 1st A post-reception output sound).

With this configuration, firstly, if simply maintaining the specific operating means (operating button 410) in an operated state does not enable the generation of multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the above detection, then it becomes possible to suitably suggest that there is no change in the post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) when the specific operating means is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state. In this regard, when the operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means (operation button 410) in the operated state, there are two possibilities when the operation output sound changes when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state: one is a change in the operation output sound (second A reception output sound), and the other is no change in the operation output sound (first A reception output sound). However, by determining whether the interval between the output of the operation output sound when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state and the next output is longer than a specific time, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not a change in the operation output sound occurs when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed from the operated state to the non-operated state, thereby maintaining the enjoyment of the game effectively.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

In the sixth configuration A6, it is assumed that the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, and the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, are both the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operating means targeted in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a mock image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in realizing the sixth configuration A6, the multiple operation valid state may include the third A acceptance state instead of the first A acceptance state, and the third A acceptance state may be realized as the third multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the first A acceptance state and the third A acceptance state.

Furthermore, for example, the seventh configuration A7 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation reception for a specific operating means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and as such a multiple operation valid state, there are types of multiple operation valid states (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146, second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, and If the system includes a type of multiple operation valid state (third A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 152, fourth A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 155) in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, then in a type of multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance-allowed state, second A acceptance-allowed state) in which the operation valid state may be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, the system may include a post-operation output sound corresponding to this (first A post-reception output sound, second A acceptance output sound) If a post-operation output sound is output, and while the post-operation output sound is being output, it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state, the post-operation output sound in that output state may change as a result of this detection (as shown in Figure 149(g) for the 2A post-reception output sound), whereas if it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before the predetermined termination timing arrives, the operation valid state will not be terminated, resulting in a type of multiple operation valid state (3A reception-allowed state, 4A reception-allowed state) where the operation valid state is not terminated. If the above-mentioned specific operating means (operating button 410) is detected to be in the operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (third A reception output sound, fourth A reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operating means (operating button 410) has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the end of the post-operation output sound (third A reception output sound, fourth A reception output sound) that is in the output state will not be changed as a result of the detection (third A reception output sound shown in Figure 152, fourth A reception output sound shown in Figure 155). In the above example, the third A reception output sound shown in Figure 152 and the fourth A reception output sound shown in Figure 155 are output for a predetermined amount of time and then terminate, without being triggered by the detection. With this configuration, in a state where multiple operations are active, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not a change occurs in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means is returned to a non-operational state, based on whether or not the operation is terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state. This is expected to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the seventh configuration A7 of the above-described example of performance, in particular, in a type of multiple operation valid state (third A acceptance-allowed state, fourth A acceptance-allowed state) where the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operated state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (third A post-reception output sound, fourth A post-reception output sound) is output, even if it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will occur independently of the detection (for example, it will be output for a predetermined output time and then terminated). In contrast, in the multiple operation valid states described above, if, in a type of multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance-allowed state, second A acceptance-allowed state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, and the operation post-output sound (first A acceptance post-output sound, second A acceptance post-output sound) corresponding to this is output, if, while the operation post-output sound is being output, it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to an unoperated state, then the change (termination) of the operation post-output sound in the output state can occur both when triggered by the detection (second A acceptance post-output sound shown in Figure 149(g)) and when not triggered by the detection (first A acceptance post-output sound shown in Figure 146). With this configuration, in a type of multiple-operation valid state where the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, it is suitably suggested that there is no change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. On the other hand, in a type of multiple-operation valid state where the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operating means is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a change in the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, thus suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

In the seventh configuration A7, it is assumed that the "specific operating means" is the same operating means, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the seventh configuration A7 may be identified by whether or not the "operating means" represented as a simulated image display is operated, triggering the termination of the operation valid state in a multiple-operation valid state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the seventh configuration A7 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in the seventh configuration A7 of the above-described example of performance, among the multiple operation valid states, the type of multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance-allowed state, second A acceptance-allowed state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before a predetermined termination timing arrives occurs as a "multiple operation valid state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound, second A post-reception output sound) is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state," but before a predetermined termination timing arrives The multiple operation valid states (3A reception-acceptable states, 4A reception-acceptable states) of the type in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the above-mentioned specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state, are designed to occur in two ways: as a "multiple operation valid state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state" (3A reception-acceptable state), and as a "multiple operation valid state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state" (4A reception-acceptable state).

Furthermore, as described above, among the multiple operation valid states (first A acceptance-allowed state, second A acceptance-allowed state) of the type in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance-allowed state), even though it is a single valid period, there are cases where an operation-post-output sound (second acceptance-post-output sound SB2) is generated in which the output state is not terminated upon detection of a non-operated state, and cases where an operation-post-output sound (first acceptance-post-output sound SA2) is generated in which the output state is terminated upon detection of a non-operated state. Therefore, in the second A acceptance-allowed state, the effect of "making it difficult to recognize whether or not a change occurs in the operation-post-output sound when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state" is more favorably achieved.

In contrast, among the types of multiple operation valid states (first A acceptance-permitted state, second A acceptance-permitted state) where the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, in the special multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance-permitted state), there are no cases where a post-operation output sound is generated that terminates the output state upon detection of a non-operation state; rather, there are only cases where a post-operation output sound is generated that does not terminate the output state upon detection of a non-operation state.

Furthermore, in the seventh configuration A7, in the type of multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state, second A acceptance state) where the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, the message display MA is always displayed (message display MA1, MA2). However, in the type of multiple operation valid state (third A acceptance state, fourth A acceptance state) where the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, the message display MA may be displayed (fourth A acceptance state) or not displayed (third A acceptance state).

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, the seventh configuration A7 may be implemented as an "operating means that is the target of the mock image display and allows for multiple operation requests."

Furthermore, in realizing the seventh configuration A7, it is possible to have only one of the third A acceptance state and the fourth A acceptance state. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain at least some of the above-described configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, the eighth configuration A8 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation requests to a specific operating means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state includes a type of multiple operation valid state in which a message prompting an operation to the specific operating means (operation button 410) is displayed (the first A acceptance permitted state shown in Figure 146, the second A acceptance permitted state shown in Figure 149, and the fourth A acceptance permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a type of multiple operation valid state in which the message is not displayed (the third A acceptance permitted state shown in Figure 152). If the above message is provided, in the case of a multiple operation valid state (3A reception-accepting state) of the type in which the above message display is not shown, when it is detected that the above specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound will be "a sound that is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time but is an indefinite time) when the above specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output." While only the 3A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 152 is allowed to be output, in the multiple operation valid states of the type in which the above message display is shown (1A reception allowed state, 2A reception allowed state, 4A reception allowed state), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound will be output, and if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the post-operation output sound will become inaudible from the moment the specific operation means becomes unoperated. The system is designed to handle both cases: when a sound is output where the time until the operation is completed is treated as a fixed time (as shown in Figure 149(g) for the second A post-reception output sound); and when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound may be output where the time from the moment the specific operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of an indeterminate time) (as shown in Figure 146 for the first A post-reception output sound and Figure 155 for the fourth A post-reception output sound). In the example described above, the second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the moment the specific operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible.

With this configuration, when the operation is active multiple times, if the post-operation output sound is output and no message is displayed, it becomes difficult to predict how long after the operation is deactivated the specific operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated it will stop. For example, it can suitably suggest that the performance is not noteworthy in situations where the specific operation means (operation button 410) has just been deactivated. In contrast, when the operation is active multiple times, and the post-operation output sound is output and a message is displayed, it may or may not be possible to predict how long it will take for the post-operation output sound to end when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is switched from the operation state to the non-operation state. Therefore, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of switching the specific operation means (operation button 410) from the operation state to the non-operation state may be noteworthy, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound will end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operation state was established. This allows for the appropriate maintenance of a sense of tension when switching to the non-operation state.

Furthermore, in the first configuration A1 of the above-described example of presentation, when one form of message display (message display MA2) is displayed, there are two cases in which the post-operation output sound is output: one in which "when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes to the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a constant time" (second post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)); and another in which "when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes to the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time" (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)). In this configuration, for example, even when one form of message display (message display MA2) is displayed, the presentation after switching the specific operating means (operation button 410) from an operated state to a non-operated state may have noteworthy value. Furthermore, the post-operation output sound, which is present in the output state, does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operated state was established. This configuration is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when switching to a non-operated state.

Furthermore, in the eighth configuration A8, among the multiple operation valid states, both the type of multiple operation valid state in which a message is displayed (first A reception-accepting state, second A reception-accepting state) and the type of multiple operation valid state in which a message is not displayed (third A reception-accepting state) can be provided as "a multiple operation valid state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operating state." That is, in this case, even though it is a "multiple operation valid state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means in the operating state," if no message is displayed, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in the output state will not be triggered by the detection, but will occur independently. If a message is displayed, the change (termination) of the post-operation output sound in the output state may occur both triggered by the detection and independently.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the above-mentioned specific operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, as described above, among the multiple operation valid states of the type in which a message is displayed, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance-allowed state), even though it is a single valid period, when the post-operation output sound is output, "a sound is output in which, when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is processed as a fixed time" (second acceptance-allowed output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)), and "when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output" When the device enters a non-operated state, both the case where a sound is output that is not a fixed time from the moment the specific operating means (operation button 410) enters the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible and the case where a sound is not output at a fixed time (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) are possible. Therefore, for example, in the second A reception-acceptable state, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of switching the specific operating means (operation button 410) from the operated state to the non-operated state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is output after a fixed time has elapsed since the device entered the non-operated state, does not necessarily end. This is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the device enters the non-operated state.

Furthermore, in the first A acceptance state, the third A acceptance state, and the fourth A acceptance state as described in the above-mentioned performance examples, there are no cases where the post-operation output sound is output when the detection of a non-operation state is triggered, and only cases where the post-operation output sound is output without being terminated when the detection of a non-operation state is triggered.

Furthermore, the "time from the moment the specified operating means (operating button 410) enters the non-operating state until the output sound after the operation becomes inaudible" may be set to any time, and may even be "0 seconds."

Furthermore, the eighth configuration A8 may be implemented as an "operating means that is the target of the mock image display and allows for multiple operation requests."

Furthermore, in order to realize the eighth configuration A8, the fourth A acceptance state is not necessarily required; even in this case, it is still possible to obtain the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, for example, the ninth configuration A9 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state includes a type of multiple operation valid state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state (the first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146, the second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149, and the third A reception permitted state shown in Figure 152), and a type of multiple operation valid state in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means in the operated state (the fourth A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155). If the above-mentioned specific operating means (operation button 410) is provided, then in a type of multiple operation valid state (4A reception-permitted state) where simply maintaining the specific operating means (operation button 410) in an operated state does not result in the output of the corresponding post-operation output sound multiple times, when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an operated state, the post-operation output sound will be "If the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operating means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time (and is not processed as a constant time)." In contrast to the 4A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 155, where only a sound of an indefinite duration is output, in the multiple operation valid state (1A reception-allowed state, 2A reception-allowed state, 3A reception-allowed state) in which multiple post-operation output sounds are output simply by maintaining the specified operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, when it is detected that the specified operation means (operation button 410) is in the operated state, the post-operation output sound will be output as follows: If the specified operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specified operation means has entered an unoperated state. The system is designed to handle both cases: when a sound is output where the time from the timing until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a constant time (as shown in Figure 149(g) for the second A post-reception output sound); and when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound may be output where the time from the moment the specific operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time (a sound of an indeterminate time) (as shown in Figure 146 for the first A post-reception output sound and Figure 152 for the third A post-reception output sound). In the example described above, the second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the constant time from the moment the specific operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible.

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated in a state where multiple operations are enabled, it becomes difficult to predict how long after the specified operation means (operation button 410) is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state the post-operation output sound will end. For example, it can be suitably suggested that the performance is not noteworthy in situations where the specified operation means (operation button 410) has just been switched from the operated state to the non-operated state. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated in a state where multiple operations are enabled, it is possible to predict, and difficult to predict, how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is output when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is switched from the operational state to the non-operation state, to end. Therefore, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of switching the specific operation means from the operational state to the non-operation state may be noteworthy, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound, which is output when the system is switched to the non-operation state, to end after a certain amount of time has elapsed. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when switching to the non-operation state.

Furthermore, in the ninth configuration A9 of the above-described performance example, in the multiple operation valid states (first A reception-acceptable state, second A reception-acceptable state, third A reception-acceptable state) where the corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the mock image display may be displayed in both the first and second color schemes (see Figures 146(c), 149(c), 152(c), etc.). However, in the multiple operation valid states (fourth A reception-acceptable state) where the corresponding post-operation output sound is not output multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the mock image display may be displayed in the first color scheme at least once (it may always be the first color scheme), but it may be omitted if it is not displayed in the second color scheme.

In this case, in the multiple operation enabled states (first A reception-allowed state, second A reception-allowed state, third A reception-allowed state) of the type in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is output multiple times simply by maintaining a specific operating means (operation button 410) in an operated state, it is sufficient to have both cases where the mock image is displayed in the first color scheme and cases where it is displayed in the second color scheme. For example, this type of multiple operation enabled state may include a predetermined multiple operation enabled state in which the mock image is displayed only in the first color scheme, or it may include a specific multiple operation enabled state in which the mock image is not displayed in either the first or second color scheme.

Furthermore, as described above, in the ninth configuration A9 of the above-described performance example, among the multiple operation valid states of the type in which multiple post-operation output sounds are generated simply by maintaining a specific operating means (operation button 410) in an operated state, in a special multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance-allowed state), even though it is a single valid period, when the post-operation output sound is output, "a sound is output in which, when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operating means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is processed as a certain period of time" (first acceptance-allowed output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)), and "when the specific operating means When the (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, there are two possibilities: one where a sound is output that is not of a fixed duration (an indeterminate duration) from the moment the specific operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible (as shown in the second post-reception output sound SB2 in Figure 149(h)); and another where a sound with an indeterminate duration is output. Therefore, in the special multiple-operation valid state (second A reception-permitted state), while suggesting that the dramatic effect of changing the specific operating means from an operated state to an unoperated state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is output in the output state, does not necessarily end after a fixed duration has elapsed since the state was changed to an unoperated state. This allows for the appropriate maintenance of the sense of tension when the state is changed to an unoperated state.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the above-mentioned specific operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, in the ninth configuration A9 of the above-described performance example, among the multiple operation valid states of the type in which a corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, in a special multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state or third A acceptance state), there are no cases where the post-operation output sound is output in which "a sound is output in which, when the specified operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, the time from when the specified operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a constant time." Instead, there are only cases where "a sound is output in which, when the specified operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, the time from when the specified operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time (a sound of an indeterminate time)."

Furthermore, the "time from the moment the specified operating means (operating button 410) enters the non-operating state until the output sound after the operation becomes inaudible" may be set to any time, and may even be "0 seconds."

Furthermore, the ninth configuration A9 may be implemented as an "operating means that is the target of the mock image display and allows for multiple operation requests."

Furthermore, in realizing the ninth configuration A9, it is also possible to provide only one of the first A acceptance state and the third A acceptance state, and even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-described configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, the 10th configuration A10 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation reception for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is permitted multiple times, and this multiple operation valid state includes a type of multiple operation valid state in which the periodic changes of the mock image display appear in time units longer than a predetermined time (the second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149, the fourth A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a type of multiple operation valid state in which the periodic changes of the mock image display appear in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time (the first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146, the third A reception permitted state shown in Figure 152). In the case of a multiple operation valid state (1A reception-acceptable state, 3A reception-acceptable state) of the type in which the periodic change of the mock image display appears in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound will be output as follows: "If the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time (it will not be processed as a constant time)." While only a sound of an indefinite duration is output (as shown in Figure 146 for the first A post-reception output sound and in Figure 152 for the third A post-reception output sound), in the type of multiple operation valid state (second A reception-allowed state, fourth A reception-allowed state) in which the periodic changes in the mock image display appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound is output as "If the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means The system is designed to handle both cases: first, when a sound is output where the time from the moment the signal is received until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a fixed time (as shown in Figure 149(g) for the second A post-reception output sound); and second, when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound may be output where the time from the moment the specific operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound of an indeterminate time) (as shown in Figure 155) for the second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the moment the specific operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible.

With this configuration, when the time required for the periodic change of the mock image display is relatively short in the multiple-operation enabled state, it becomes difficult to predict how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state when the specific operating means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state, to end. For example, it can suitably suggest that the performance is of low noteworthy quality in the immediate aftermath of switching the specific operating means from the operated state to the non-operated state. Conversely, when the time required for the periodic change of the mock image display is relatively long in the multiple-operation enabled state, there are cases where it is possible to predict how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state when the specific operating means is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state, to end, and cases where it is difficult to predict. Therefore, while suggesting that the performance after switching the specific operating means from the operated state to the non-operated state may have noteworthy value, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, to end after a certain amount of time has passed since the non-operated state was established. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when switching to the non-operated state.

Furthermore, in the 10th configuration A10 relating to the above-described example of performance, among the multiple operation valid states, the type of multiple operation valid state (1st A acceptance-allowed state, 3rd A acceptance-allowed state) in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time occurs as a "multiple operation valid state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound (1st A post-acceptance output sound, 3rd A post-acceptance output sound) is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state." However, the type of multiple operation valid state (2nd A acceptance-allowed state, 4th A acceptance-allowed state) in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time occurs as a "specific operation means (operation button 410)." In this way, there are two possible scenarios: one where the system is in a "multiple operation enabled state" where simply maintaining the operation button 410 in the operating state generates multiple post-operation sound outputs (2A acceptance-permitted state), and another where the system is in a "multiple operation enabled state" where simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operating state does not generate multiple post-operation sound outputs (4A acceptance-permitted state). This suggests that when the time required for the periodic change of the mock image display is short, the system is likely to activate the so-called auto-repeated button press function, while when the time required for the periodic change of the mock image display is long, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the auto-repeated button press function is activated. In this regard, even when the periodic change in the display of the simulated image takes a long time, if the post-operation output sound is "a sound that, when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, is processed as a constant time from the moment the specific operating means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible," then it is suggested that the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function is activated, and thus it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in the 10th configuration A10 of the above-described performance example, in the type of multiple operation enabled state where the periodic change in the mock image display occurs in time units longer than the predetermined time, the mock image display may be displayed in both the first and second color schemes. However, in the type of multiple operation enabled state where simply maintaining the specified operation means in the operation state does not generate the corresponding post-operation output sound multiple times, the mock image display may be displayed in the first color scheme at least (it may always be the first color scheme), but not in the second color scheme.

Furthermore, as described above, among the types of multiple operation valid states (second A acceptance-allowed state, fourth A acceptance-allowed state) in which the periodic changes in the display of the simulated image appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance-allowed state), even though it is a single valid period, when the post-operation output sound is output, "a sound is output in which, when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operating means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is processed as a constant time" (first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)), and "when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, 0) When the specific operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, there are two possibilities: one where a sound is output that is not of a fixed duration (a sound of an indeterminate duration) from the moment the specific operating means enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible (as shown in Figure 149(h) for the second post-reception output sound SB2). Therefore, in the special multiple-operation valid state (second A reception-permitted state), for example, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of changing the specific operating means from an operating state to an unoperated state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, does not necessarily end after a fixed time has elapsed since the unoperated state was established. This allows for the appropriate maintenance of the sense of tension when the device is changed to an unoperated state.

Furthermore, among the multiple operation valid states (2A reception-acceptable state, 4A reception-acceptable state) of the type in which the periodic changes in the mock image display appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, in the special multiple operation valid state (4A reception-acceptable state), there are no cases where the output sound after operation is "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operation means becomes unoperated until the output sound after operation becomes inaudible is treated as a constant time." Instead, there are only cases where "a sound in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operation means becomes unoperated until the output sound after operation becomes inaudible is not a constant time (a sound of an indeterminate time)" is output.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, the tenth configuration A10 may be implemented as an "operating means that is the target of the mock image display and allows for multiple operation requests."

Furthermore, in the tenth configuration A10, multiple time periods may be provided as "time periods less than or equal to the predetermined time," or only one time period (for example, "the predetermined time") may be provided. Similarly, multiple time periods may be provided as "time periods longer than the predetermined time," or only one time period may be provided.

Furthermore, in realizing the tenth configuration A10, the third A acceptance state is not necessarily required; even in this case, it is still possible to obtain the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, for example, the 11th configuration A11 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation reception is permitted multiple times for the operation means that is the target of the mock image display, and the operation means provided are a first operation means (operation button 410) and a second operation means (sword ornament 5001), and the multiple operation valid state includes a type of multiple operation valid state in which a mock image display of the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed at least once (1st A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146, 2nd A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149, 3rd A reception permitted state shown in Figure 152, 4th A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a type in which a mock image display of the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed at least once If the system includes a multiple operation valid state (the 5A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 158), and if it is detected that the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is in an operation state in a multiple operation valid state (5A reception-accepting state) of the type in which at least a replica image display of the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed, then the system will output a post-operation sound, which will be used to indicate that if the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation sound is being output, the system will output a sound that is not a constant time from the moment the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operation state to an unoperated state, the system will output a post-operation sound which will indicate that the time from the moment the second operation means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operation state to an unoperated state to a sound that is not a constant time (as a constant time). While only a sound that is unprocessed for an indefinite period of time can be output (as shown in Figure 158 for the 5A post-reception output sound), in a multiple operation valid state of the type in which at least a mock image display of the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed (1A reception allowed state, 2A reception allowed state, 3A reception allowed state, 4A reception allowed state), if it is detected that the first operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound will be output as follows: "If the first operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the operation will start from the moment the first operation means (operation button 410) enters the unoperated state." The system is designed to handle both cases: when a sound is output where the time until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a fixed time (as shown in Figure 149(g) for the second A post-reception output sound); and when the first operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, a sound may be output where the time from the moment the first operating means (operation button 410) enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (an indeterminate time) (as shown in Figure 146 for the first A post-reception output sound, Figure 152 for the third A post-reception output sound, and Figure 155 for the fourth A post-reception output sound). In the example described above, the second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the moment the first operating means (operation button 410) enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible.

With this configuration, when the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is the target of the image display while multiple operations are active, and the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated, it becomes difficult to predict how long after the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state the post-operation output sound will end. For example, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the performance is of low noteworthy quality in situations where the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) has just been switched from the operated state to the non-operated state. In contrast, the first operating means (operation button 410) is the target of the simulated image display, and when the first operating means (operation button 410) is operated, it is possible to predict, and difficult to predict, how long it will take for the post-operation output sound, which is output when the first operating means (operation button 410) is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state, to end. Therefore, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of switching the first operating means (operation button 410) from the operated state to the non-operated state may be noteworthy, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound, which is output when the button is switched to the non-operated state, will end after a certain amount of time has elapsed. This allows for the appropriate maintenance of the sense of tension when the button is switched to the non-operated state.

Furthermore, as described above, among the multiple operation valid states (1st A reception-acceptable state, 2nd A reception-acceptable state, 3rd A reception-acceptable state, 4th A reception-acceptable state) of the type in which a mock image display of the first operation means (operation button 410) is displayed, in the special multiple operation valid state (2nd A reception-acceptable state), even though it is a single valid period, when the first operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the first operation means (operation button 410) becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is processed as a constant time (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)), and when the first operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the first operation means (operation button 410) When button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, there are two possibilities: one where a sound is output that is not of a fixed duration (an indeterminate duration) from the moment the first operating means (operating button 410) enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible (as shown in Figure 149(h) for the second post-reception output sound SB2). Therefore, in the special multiple-operation valid state (second A reception-allowed state), for example, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of changing the first operating means (operating button 410) from an operated state to an unoperated state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is output in the output state, does not necessarily end after a fixed duration has elapsed since the state was changed to an unoperated state. This allows for the appropriate maintenance of the sense of tension when the button is changed to an unoperated state.

Furthermore, in the multiple operation valid state (5A reception-permitted state) of the type in which at least one imitation image display of the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) is displayed, there are no cases where the output sound after operation is "a sound in which, when the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the output sound is being output, the time from the moment the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) enters the unoperated state until the output sound after operation becomes inaudible is treated as a constant time." Instead, there are only cases where the output sound is "a sound in which, when the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the output sound is being output, the time from the moment the second operating means (sword ornament 5001) enters the unoperated state until the output sound after operation becomes inaudible is not a constant time (a sound of an indeterminate time)."

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, in realizing the 11th configuration A11, the 4th A acceptance state is not necessarily required; even in this case, it is possible to obtain the configurations and effects described above.

Furthermore, in realizing the 11th configuration A11, it is also possible to provide only one of the 1st A acceptance state and the 3rd A acceptance state. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-described configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, the 12th configuration A12 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (the first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146). In the second multiple operation valid state (the first A reception permitted state), simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, a predetermined post-operation output sound (first A reception post-output sound) corresponding to the detection is generated. Although it is possible to generate it at intervals, the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound that is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indeterminate) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output" (first A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 146), whereas in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operating means Simply by maintaining the operation button 410 in the operated state, the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is set to an indefinite time, but the post-operation output sound is a sound in which, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is a fixed time (a fixed time). The system is designed to output two types of sounds: one as "the sound processed by the system" (as shown in Figure 149(g) as the second A post-reception output sound), and another as "a sound whose duration is not fixed (an indeterminate duration) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output" (as shown in Figure 149(h) as the second post-reception output sound SB2). In the example described above, the second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed duration from the moment the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes to the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes indeterminate.

With this configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception-accepting state) among the multiple operation valid states, it becomes difficult to predict how long after the non-operation state the post-operation output sound (first A reception-accepting output sound) that is in the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state will end. For example, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the performance is of little note in the situation immediately after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepted state) among the multiple operation valid states, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, there are cases where it is possible to predict how long it will take for the post-operation output sound (second A reception-accepted output sound), which is in the output state, to end, and cases where it is difficult to predict. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of changing the specific operation means (operation button 410) from an operated state to a non-operated state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operated state was established. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when the operation is changed to a non-operated state.

Furthermore, in the 12th configuration A12, a third multiple operation valid state (4th A reception-accepting state) is provided as a multiple operation valid state. In this third multiple operation valid state (4th A reception-accepting state), the post-operation output sound (4th A reception-accepting output sound) corresponding to the detection is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state. The post-operation output sound may be output as "a sound in which the time from the moment the specific operation means (operation button 410) enters the non-operated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not treated as a fixed time, but is indefinite, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output." With this configuration, if simply maintaining the specific operating means (operating button 410) in an operated state does not enable the generation of multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the detection, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound where, if the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from when the specific operating means (operating button 410) becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not treated as a fixed time but is indefinite."

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, when a specific operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in the operating state during the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), the interval between multiple occurrences of the post-operation output sound (second A acceptance output sound) is indefinite. However, it will not occur at intervals shorter than a predetermined time (a fixed time) that is the interval between multiple occurrences of the post-operation output sound (first A acceptance output sound) when the specific operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in the operating state during the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state). Instead, it will only occur at intervals longer than this predetermined time. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (post-operation output sound after 2A reception) corresponding to the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-accepting state) differs from the post-operation output sound (post-operation output sound after 1A reception) corresponding to the second multiple-operation valid state (1A reception-accepting state). Because the interval between repeated outputs due to the auto-repeated function is indefinite, and the time required for that interval (minimum time) is also extended, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated function is active. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-accepting state) and the third multiple-operation valid state (4A reception-accepting state), thereby effectively maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the number of times the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) can be generated multiple times within the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-accepting state) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state is set to be less than the number of times the post-operation output sound (1A post-reception output sound) can be generated multiple times within the second multiple-operation valid state (1A reception-accepting state) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state. In other words, in this case, it becomes even more difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated button function is enabled in the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-accepting state), making it difficult to distinguish between the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-accepting state) and the third multiple-operation valid state (4A reception-accepting state), thereby maintaining a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state), the maximum number of times the post-operation output sound (second A acceptance output sound) can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operating means (operation button 410) in the operated state is set to be less than the maximum number of times the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operating means (operation button 410) without maintaining the operated state. With this configuration, the characteristics of the presentation in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state) become closer to the third multiple-operation enabled state (fourth A acceptance state) where the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state) and the third multiple-operation enabled state (fourth A acceptance state), thereby effectively maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permission state), the upper limit of the number of times the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state is set to be the same as, or greater than, the upper limit of the number of times the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining the operated state.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state) and the third multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state), the post-operation output sound will not be output as "a sound that represents a fixed time (a sound processed as a fixed time) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output."

Furthermore, while the 12th configuration A12 assumes that the operating means targeted for operation in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 12th configuration A12, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3rd A acceptance state instead of the 1st A acceptance state, and the 3rd A acceptance state may be realized as the 2nd multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1st A acceptance state and the 3rd A acceptance state.

Furthermore, for example, the 13th configuration A13 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146). In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149), simply maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state allows for the generation of multiple post-operation output sounds (second A reception post-output sounds) corresponding to the detection. However, when these post-operation output sounds are newly generated... The interval until occurrence is always longer than a specific time, and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) can be output as "a sound that is processed as a certain time (a sound that is processed as a certain time) from the moment the specific operating means (operation button 410) goes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output" (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g)). In the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state), the specific operating means (operation button 410) is only maintained in the operated state. The post-operation output sound (4A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the detection is not allowed to be generated multiple times, and the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) may be output as "a sound that is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indeterminate) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output" (4A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 155), and in the third multiple operation valid state (1A reception allowable state), the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an operated state Simply by maintaining the above detection, the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times. However, the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated is set to be less than or equal to a specific time, and the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) may be output as a sound where, if the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operating means (operation button 410) enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indeterminate) (first A reception output sound shown in Figure 146). In the example described above, the second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed time from the moment the first operating means (operation button 410) enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible.

With this configuration, firstly, if simply maintaining the specific operating means (operating button 410) in an operated state does not enable the generation of multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the above detection, it is suggested that the post-operation output sound will be output as "a sound whose duration is not fixed (a sound that is not processed as a fixed duration and is indeterminate) when the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output." In this regard, when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, it is possible to generate multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the above detection, and the post-operation output sound is output as "a sound that is processed as a certain amount of time (a sound that is processed as a certain amount of time) from the moment the specific operating means (operation button 410) becomes non-operated when it changes from an operating state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output" (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g)), and "when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound is being output When the device enters an unoperated state, there are two possibilities: the time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time (the sound is not processed as a fixed time and is indeterminate) (as shown in Figure 146, the first A post-reception output sound). However, by determining whether the interval between the output of the post-operation output sound and the new output is longer than a specific time when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, it becomes possible to indicate which type of sound the post-operation output sound will be, thereby maintaining the enjoyment of the game effectively.

Furthermore, in the 13th configuration A13, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple operation valid state (2A acceptance-accepting state) is output in two ways: one is output as "a sound that is processed as a constant time (a sound that is treated as a constant time) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output" (2A acceptance-accepting output sound shown in Figure 149(g)); and the other is output as "a sound that is not a constant time (a sound that is treated as a constant time) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output" (2A acceptance-accepting output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)). In other words, in this case, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, there are cases where it is possible to predict how long it will take for the post-operation output sound (second A reception-accepted output sound), which is in the output state, to end, and cases where it is difficult to predict. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of changing the specific operation means (operation button 410) from the operation state to the non-operation state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is in the output state, does not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operation state was established. This allows for the appropriate maintenance of the sense of tension when the operation is changed to the non-operation state.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, in the 13th configuration A13, the interval between multiple occurrences of the post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state during the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-accepting state) is an indefinite time, while the interval between multiple occurrences of the post-operation output sound when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state during the third multiple-operation valid state (1A reception-accepting state) is a constant time. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (post-operation output sound after 2A reception) corresponding to the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-accepted state) differs from the post-operation output sound (post-operation output sound after 1A reception) corresponding to the third multiple-operation valid state (1A reception-accepted state). Because the interval between repeated outputs due to the auto-repeated function is indefinite, and the time required for that interval (minimum time) is also extended, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated function is active. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-accepted state) and the second multiple-operation valid state (4A reception-accepted state), thereby effectively maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the specific operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state), the number of times the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) can be generated multiple times within that first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state) is set to be less than the number of times the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) can be generated multiple times within the third multiple-operation enabled state (first A acceptance state) when the specific operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in the operation state. In other words, in this case, it becomes even more difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated button function is enabled in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state), making it difficult to distinguish between the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state) and the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth A acceptance state), thereby effectively maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state), the maximum number of times the post-operation output sound (second A acceptance output sound) can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operating means (operation button 410) in the operated state is set to be less than the maximum number of times the post-operation output sound can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operating means (operation button 410) without maintaining the operated state. With this configuration, the characteristics of the presentation in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state) become closer to the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth A acceptance state) where the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state) and the second multiple-operation enabled state (fourth A acceptance state), thereby effectively maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permission state), the upper limit of the number of times the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state is set to be the same as, or greater than, the upper limit of the number of times the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times by repeatedly operating the specific operation means (operation button 410) without maintaining the operated state.

Furthermore, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state) and the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state), the post-operation output sound will not be output as "a sound that represents a fixed time (a sound processed as a fixed time) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output."

Furthermore, while the 13th configuration A13 assumes that the operating means targeted for operation in the first multiple operation enabled state, the second multiple operation enabled state, and the third multiple operation enabled state are the same, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 13th configuration A13, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3rd A acceptance state instead of the 1st A acceptance state, and this 3rd A acceptance state may be realized as the 3rd multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1st A acceptance state and the 3rd A acceptance state.

Furthermore, for example, the 14th configuration A14 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operational state before a predetermined termination timing arrives (the first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146, the second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149), or it can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operational state before a predetermined termination timing arrives (the third A reception permitted state shown in Figure 152). If the system includes an A-acceptance state (the 4th A-acceptance state shown in Figure 155), then in a type of multiple-operation valid state (3rd A-acceptance state, 4th A-acceptance state) in which the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, the system outputs the following post-operation sound: "If the specific operation means changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed time." While a sound (a sound that is not processed as a fixed time and is indefinite) is output (the 3A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 152, the 4A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 155), in the type of multiple operation valid state (1A reception-allowed state, 2A reception-allowed state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, the post-operation output sound is output as follows: If the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the specific operation means The system is designed to output two types of sounds: one where the time from the moment the operation button (operation button 410) is pressed until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is a fixed duration (a sound processed as a fixed duration) (as shown in Figure 149(g) as the second A post-reception output sound); and another where, as the post-operation output sound, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operation means (operation button 410) enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a fixed duration (a sound that is not processed as a fixed duration and is indeterminate) (as shown in Figure 146 as the first A post-reception output sound). In the example described above, the second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g) is set to "0 seconds" as the fixed duration from the moment the first operation means (operation button 410) enters the unoperated state until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible.

With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state of the type that is not terminated (3A reception-allowed state, 4A reception-allowed state), it is difficult to predict how long after the operation output sound, which is in the output state when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state, will terminate. For example, it is possible to suitably suggest that there is little noteworthy performance in the situation immediately after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from the operation state to the non-operation state. In contrast, in the multiple operation valid state of the type that can be terminated (1A reception-allowed state, 2A reception-allowed state), the specific operation means When the operation button 410 is switched from an operated state to a non-operated state, the post-operation output sound, which is currently in the output state, may or may not be able to predict how long it will take for it to end. Therefore, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of switching the specific operation means (operation button 410) from an operated state to a non-operated state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is currently in the output state, will not necessarily end after a fixed amount of time has elapsed since the non-operated state was established. This allows for the appropriate maintenance of the sense of tension when switching to a non-operated state.

Furthermore, as described above, among the types of multiple operation valid states (first A acceptance-allowed state, second A acceptance-allowed state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, in the special multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance-allowed state), even though it is a single valid period, there are cases where, as the post-operation output sound, "a sound is output in which, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the post-operation output sound is being output, the time from the moment the specific operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is processed as a certain period of time" (first acceptance-allowed sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)), and "when the post-operation output sound is output In the event that the specified operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, there are two possibilities: one where a sound is output that is not of a fixed duration (an indeterminate duration) from the moment the specified operating means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible (as shown in Figure 149(h) for the second post-reception output sound SB2). Therefore, in the special multiple-operation valid state (second A reception-permitted state), for example, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of changing the specified operating means from an operated state to an unoperated state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is output in the output state, does not necessarily end after a fixed duration has elapsed since the unoperated state was established. This allows for the appropriate maintenance of the sense of tension when the unit is changed to an unoperated state.

Furthermore, among the types of multiple operation valid states (first A acceptance-permitted state, second A acceptance-permitted state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specified operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before the predetermined termination timing arrives, in the special multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance-permitted state), there are no cases where the post-operation output sound is output in which "a sound is output in which, when the specified operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, the time from when the specified operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is treated as a constant time." Instead, there are only cases where "a sound is output in which, when the specified operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, the time from when the specified operation means becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound becomes inaudible is not a constant time (a sound of an indeterminate time)."

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, in the 14th configuration A14, among the multiple operation valid states, the type of multiple operation valid state (1st A acceptance-allowed state, 2nd A acceptance-allowed state) in which the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before a predetermined termination timing arrives occurs as a "multiple operation valid state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state," but the type of multiple operation valid state (3rd The A-acceptance state and the 4A-acceptance state can occur in two ways: as a "multiple operation enabled state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state," and as a "multiple operation enabled state in which the corresponding post-operation output sound is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state." Therefore, in the type of multiple operation enabled state in which the operation enabled state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operated state before the predetermined termination timing arrives, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated button press function is enabled or not.

Furthermore, in the 14th configuration A14, in the type of multiple operation valid state (1st A reception-accepting state, 2nd A reception-accepting state) where the operation valid state can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, the message display MA is always displayed (message display MA1, MA2). However, in the type of multiple operation valid state (3rd A reception-accepting state, 4th A reception-accepting state) where the operation valid state is not terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, the message display MA may be displayed (4th A reception-accepting state) or not (3rd A reception-accepting state). Therefore, when the message display MA is displayed, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize which type of multiple operation valid state is occurring, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the 14th configuration A14 may be implemented as an "operating means that is the target of the simulated image display and allows for multiple operation requests."

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 14th configuration A14 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 14th configuration A14, it is also possible to provide only one of the 3A acceptance-permitting state and the 4A acceptance-permitting state. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-described configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, the 15th configuration A15 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operating means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146) and a second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149), both with different occurrence conditions. In both the first multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state) and the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound (first A reception post-output sound shown in Figure 146, second A reception post-output sound shown in Figure 149) is in an output state (for example, during the period from timing tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 in Figure 146, or the timing in Figure 149). It is possible to play the game in such a way that a period of tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 appears, and in the above-mentioned first multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state), when the above-mentioned specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A acceptance post-output sound) is in an output state, the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A acceptance post-output sound) may include both a sound that can cause a change (termination) in its output state when the above-mentioned specific operation means (operation button 410) temporarily changes from an unoperated state to an operated state (first acceptance post-output sound SA1 (timing tAa2-C1) shown in Figure 146(g) and a sound that does not cause a change in its output state (second acceptance post-output sound SB1 shown in Figure 146(h)), but when the above-mentioned specific operation means is in an operated state Furthermore, while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound is in the output state, if the above-mentioned specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, regardless of the type of sound output as the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A reception post-output sound), the output state will not change as a result (see, for example, timings tAa2-A2 and tAa2-B3 in Figures 146(g) and (h)). However, in the above-mentioned second multiple operation valid state (second A reception allowable state), while the above-mentioned specific operating means (operation button 410) is in the non-operated state and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A reception post-output sound) is in the output state, the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (second A reception post-output sound) will be used when the above-mentioned specific operating means (operation button 410) is assumed to have changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (for example, the timing shown in Figure 149) (See timing tAb-C1, etc.) While a sound that does not cause a change in the output state (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) is output (no sound that could cause a change in the output state is output as the post-operation output sound), if the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state while the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is output, this triggers either a change in the type of sound output as the post-operation output sound (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) or no change (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3, etc.).

With this configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state (first A reception permission state), even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in the operation state is deactivated, the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) that was previously in the output state does not change (end) as a result. Therefore, it is expected that users will feel more comfortable interrupting operations. However, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is deactivated is activated, there are cases where the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) that was previously in the output state changes (ends) and cases where it does not change (end). Therefore, while encouraging users to perform operations again, the possibility of a change in the post-operation output sound is also expected to appropriately provide a sense of tension regarding performing operations again. In contrast, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in the operation state is changed to the non-operation state, there are two possibilities: either a change occurs in the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) that was previously in the output state, or no change (termination) occurs. Therefore, while encouraging interruption of operation, the possibility of a change in the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) appropriately provides a sense of tension regarding interruption of operation. On the other hand, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in the non-operation state is changed to the operation state, there is no change (termination) in the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) that was previously in the output state, thus encouraging users to perform the operation again with a sense of ease.

Furthermore, in the second multiple-operation valid state (second A acceptance state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in operation is changed to a non-operation state, this triggers a change (termination) of the post-operation display (continuous press display HA2) that was previously displayed. However, a different display (non-operation display HB2) appears at this time (see Figures 151(c), (f), etc.), thus more actively encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), when the specified operation means (operation button 410) that is in operation is deactivated, the deactivation display HB2 is displayed as a result. However, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the deactivation display HB2 is not output again. Therefore, it can be suggested that the deactivation display HB2 was displayed not as a result of being deactivated, but as a result of being deactivated.

Furthermore, in the 15th configuration A15, two types of post-operation output sounds (2A reception-accepted output sounds) corresponding to the second multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-accepted state) are provided: a type of post-operation output sound whose output state changes when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the first reception-accepted output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)); and a type of post-operation output sound whose output state does not change (terminate) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the second reception-accepted output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)). This allows for situations where both types of post-operation output sounds are in the output state. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sounds (2A reception-accepted output sounds) that were in the output state up to that point will change (terminate), thus providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

Furthermore, in the 15th configuration A15, the type of post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that changes (terminates) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state can be started to output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not change (terminate) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is in an output state or not. The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (terminate) when the operation state changes to a non-operation state (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) is not output when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) is not outputting. However, it can be output when the first post-operation output sound is outputting (or simultaneously with) the first post-reception output sound SA2, which does change (terminate) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state. This allows for a moderate level of tension while encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state) of the 15th configuration A15, even if the output conditions for the second post-reception output sound SB2 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated midway, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (first A reception-accepting state) of the 15th configuration A15, if the output conditions for the first reception-after output sound SB1 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in Figure 146), the second reception-after output sound SB1 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. Conversely, the first reception-after output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state up to that point may terminate its output state based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2 and start a new output. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first reception-after output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to output.

Furthermore, the 15th configuration A15 may be implemented as an "operating means that is the target of the mock image display and allows for multiple operation requests."

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 15th configuration A15 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 15th configuration A15, the 3A acceptance-permitted state may be provided as the 1st multiple-operation valid state instead of the 1A acceptance-permitted state. Alternatively, both the 1A acceptance-permitted state and the 3A acceptance-permitted state may be provided.

Furthermore, for example, the 16th configuration A16 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation reception is permitted multiple times for the operating means that is the target of the mock image display, and provides a first multiple operation valid state (the 5A reception permitted state shown in Figure 158) and a second multiple operation valid state (the 2A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149) which have different occurrence conditions for each, and the first multiple operation valid state (5A reception permitted state) occurs as an operation valid state in which a mock image display that mimics the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) of the operating means is displayed, and the first side post-operation output sound (the 5A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 158) is output in response to the detection that the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) has entered an operation state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) has been operated It is possible to play the game in a way that creates a non-operational state where the device is not being operated (for example, the period from timing tAe2-B2 to tAe2-C1 shown in Figure 158). The second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state) occurs as an operation valid state where at least one mock image display is shown that mimics the second operation means (operation button 410). It is possible to play the game in a way that creates a non-operational state where the second operation means (operation button 410) is not being operated, while the second operation post-output sound (second A acceptance post-output sound shown in Figure 149) is output in response to the detection that the second operation means (operation button 410) has entered an operation state.

In this regard, in the 16th configuration A16, in the first multiple operation valid state (5A reception permitted state), when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in a non-operation state and the first side post-operation output sound (5A reception post-output sound) is in an output state, the first side post-operation output sound is output only the sound that causes a change (termination) in its output state when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is assumed to have temporarily changed from a non-operation state to an operation state (for example, when timing tAe-C1 arrives) (the 5A reception post-output sound shown in Figures 158(g) and (h)). While it may be possible to perform a process that causes a change in the sound that is in the output state, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in the operated state and the output sound after the first side operation (output sound after receiving 5A) is in the output state, the output state of the output sound after the first side operation (sword ornament 5001) does not change as a result (it is not possible to perform a process that causes a change in the sound that is in the output state) (see, for example, the timing tAe2-A2 shown in Figures 158(g) and (h)).

With this configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state (5A reception-permitted state), even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which is in the operating state, is deactivated, the post-operation output sound (5A reception-post output sound), which was previously in the output state, does not change (terminate). Therefore, it is expected that users will be able to interrupt operations more easily. However, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which is in the deactivated state, is deactivated, the post-operation output sound (5A reception-post output sound), which was previously in the output state, may change (terminate). Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately provided when reactivating the device.

Furthermore, in the 16th configuration A16, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the second side post-operation output sound (second A reception post-output sound) is in an output state, the second side post-operation output sound is output only a sound (second A reception post-output sound shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not cause a change (termination) in the output state when the second operating means (operation button 410) is assumed to have temporarily changed from a non-operated state to an operated state (for example, when timing tAb-C1 arrives), but (a sound that could cause a change in the output state is output above (Note: The second side operation output sound is never output.) If the second operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and the second side operation output sound (second A reception output sound) is outputting, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, this may trigger a change (termination) of the sound output as the second side operation output sound (second A reception output sound), depending on the type of sound being output (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) or a change (termination) of the sound not occurring (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)).

With this configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permission state), while encouraging interruption of operation, the possibility of a change (termination) in the post-operation output sound (second A reception post-output sound) is appropriately provided, creating a sense of tension regarding interruption of operation. On the other hand, when the second operation means (operation button 410), which is in a non-operation state, is put into operation state, the post-operation output sound (second A reception post-output sound), which was previously in an output state, does not change (terminate). Therefore, it is expected that users will be more likely to perform the operation again with ease.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), when the second operation means (operation button 410), which is in the operation state, is changed to a non-operation state, this triggers a change (termination) of the post-operation display (continuous press display HA2) that was previously displayed. However, a different display (non-operation display HB2) appears at this time (see Figures 151(c), (f), etc.), thus more actively encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), when the second operation means (operation button 410) that is in the operation state is deactivated, the deactivation display HB2 is displayed as a result. However, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the deactivation display HB2 is not output again. Therefore, it can be suggested that the deactivation display HB2 was displayed as a result of being deactivated, not as a result of being activated.

Furthermore, in the 16th configuration A16, two types of post-operation output sounds (2A reception-accepted output sounds) corresponding to the second multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-accepted state) are provided: a type of post-operation output sound whose output state changes when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the first reception-accepted output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)); and a type of post-operation output sound whose output state does not change (terminate) when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the second reception-accepted output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)). This allows for situations where both types of post-operation output sounds are in the output state. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sounds (2A reception-accepted output sounds) that were in the output state up to that point will change (terminate), thus providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state) relating to the 16th configuration A16, the type of post-operation output sound (first acceptance output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that changes (terminates) when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state can be started to output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (second acceptance output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not change (terminate) when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is in an output state or not in an output state. The post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) of a type that does not change (terminate) when the operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state is designed so that it does not start outputting independently when the post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) of a type that does change (terminate) when the second operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state is not in an output state, but can start outputting when it is in an output state (or simultaneously). This allows for a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state) of the 16th configuration A16, even if the output conditions for the second post-reception output sound SB2 are met while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated midway, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, for example, the 17th configuration A17 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (third A reception permitted state shown in Figure 152) and a second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149), both with different occurrence conditions. The second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state) may be terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives. However, the first multiple operation valid state (third A reception permitted state) is not terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned first multiple operation valid state (third A acceptance-permitted state), if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound (third A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an unoperated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change (end) as a result (the first post-reception output sound SA3 shown at timing tAc2-C1 in Figure 152(g)), and the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and If the specified operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the post-operation output sound (third A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound will not change (end) as a result (see, for example, the first post-reception output sound SA3, the second post-reception output sound SB3, etc. shown at timing tAc2-B3 in Figures 152(g) and (h)). However, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception allowable state), if the specified operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound In a situation where the force sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in output state, the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in output state, and when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is assumed to have temporarily changed from an unoperated state to an operated state (see, for example, timing tAb-C1 shown in Figure 149), the sound that does not cause a change (termination) in the output state (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) is in output state (although a sound that could cause a change (termination) in the output state is not output as the post-operation output sound), the specific When the operating means (operating button 410) is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, this triggers either a change (termination) of the sound output as the post-operation output sound (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) or no change (second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3).

With this configuration, when the "first multiple-operation valid state (third A acceptance state)," which cannot be terminated by player action, occurs, it becomes possible to more actively encourage the player to change the specified operating means from a non-operated state to an operating state. Furthermore, when the "second multiple-operation valid state (second A acceptance state)," which can be terminated by player action, occurs, while more actively encouraging the player to change the specified operating means from an operating state to a non-operated state, it is also possible that a sound is output that does not cause a change (termination) as a result of the non-operated state, thus maintaining a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the second multiple-operation valid state (second A acceptance state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in operation is changed to a non-operation state, this triggers a change (termination) of the post-operation display (continuous press display HA2) that was previously displayed. However, a different display (non-operation display HB2) appears at this time (see Figures 151(c), (f), etc.), thus more actively encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), when the specified operation means (operation button 410) that is in operation is deactivated, the deactivation display HB2 is displayed as a result. However, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the deactivation display HB2 is not output again. Therefore, it can be suggested that the deactivation display HB2 was displayed not as a result of being deactivated, but as a result of being deactivated.

Furthermore, in the 17th configuration A17, two types of post-operation output sounds (2A reception-accepted output sounds) corresponding to the second multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-accepted state) are provided: a type of post-operation output sound whose output state changes when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the first reception-accepted output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)); and a type of post-operation output sound whose output state does not change (terminate) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the second reception-accepted output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)). This allows for situations where both types of post-operation output sounds are in the output state. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sounds (2A reception-accepted output sounds) that were in the output state up to that point will change (terminate), thus providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

Furthermore, in the 17th configuration A17, the type of post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that changes (terminates) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state can be started to output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not change (terminate) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is in an output state or not. The post-operation output sound of a type that does not change (terminate) when the operation state changes to a non-operation state (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) is not output when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) is not outputting. However, it can be output when the first post-operation output sound is outputting (or simultaneously with) the first post-reception output sound SA2, which does change (terminate) when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state. This allows for a moderate level of tension while encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state) of the 17th configuration A17, even if the output conditions for the second post-reception output sound SB2 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated midway, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (third A reception-accepting state) of the 17th configuration A17, if the output conditions for the first reception-based output sound SB3 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAc2-B2 shown in Figure 152), the second reception-based output sound SB3 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAc2-B2. Conversely, the first reception-based output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state up to that point may terminate its output state based on the operation reception made at timing tAc2-B2 and start a new output. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first reception-based output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAc2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to output.

Furthermore, the 17th configuration A17 may be implemented as an "operating means that is the target of the mock image display and allows for multiple operation requests."

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 17th configuration A17 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, for example, the 18th configuration A18 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operating means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146) and a second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149), both having different conditions for occurrence. In both the first multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state) and the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound (first A reception post-output sound shown in Figure 146, second A reception post-output sound shown in Figure 149) is in an output state (for example, the timings tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 in Figure 146). It is possible to play the game in a way that brings about certain periods, such as the period from timing tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 in Figure 149. In the first multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance permitted state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an unoperated state to an operated state, the time from when it becomes an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-acceptance output sound) ends can be fixed (first post-acceptance output sound SA1 shown in Figure 146(g)) or undefined (second post-acceptance output sound SB1 shown in Figure 146(h)) depending on the type of post-operation output sound in the output state. (See timing tAa2-C1), when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, the time from when it becomes unoperated until the post-operation output sound ends is indeterminate (see timing tAa2-B3 shown in Figures 146(g) and (h)), in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception allowable state), when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an unoperated state to an operating state, the time from when it becomes an operating state until the operation The time until the output state of the post-output sound (second A post-reception output sound) ends is undefined (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figure 149(h)). However, when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an operated state and the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the time from when it becomes non-operated until the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) ends can be either constant (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) or undefined (first post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) depending on the type of post-operation output sound in the output state (see timing tAa2-B3 shown in Figures 149(g) and (h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time.

With this configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state (first A reception-accepting state), it becomes difficult to predict how long after the specified operating means is in the output state it will end when it is switched from the operated state to the non-operated state it will end. For example, it can suitably suggest that the performance is of little noteworthy significance in the immediate aftermath of switching the specified operating means from the operated state to the non-operated state. Conversely, when switching the specified operating means from the non-operated state to the operated state it will end, there are cases where it is possible to predict how long after it is in the output state it will end, and cases where it is difficult to predict. Therefore, for example, it can suggest that the performance after switching the specified operating means back to the operated state may have noteworthy value, while the performance after switching back to the operated state will not necessarily end after a certain amount of time has elapsed. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when switching back to the operated state.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state), it becomes difficult to predict how long after the specified operating means is in the output state that the post-operation output sound will end when the specified operating means is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state. For example, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the dramatic effect is low in the immediate aftermath of switching the specified operating means from a non-operated state to an operated state. In contrast, when switching the specified operating means from an operated state to a non-operated state, there are cases where it is possible to predict how long after the specified operating means is in the output state that the post-operation output sound will end, and cases where it is difficult to predict. For example, while suggesting that the dramatic effect after switching the specified operating means to a non-operated state may be noteworthy, it is not necessarily the case that the post-operation output sound will end after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the non-operated state was established. This allows for the suitable maintenance of the sense of tension when switching to a non-operated state.

Furthermore, in the second multiple-operation valid state (second A acceptance state), when the specific operation means (operation button 410) that is in operation is changed to a non-operation state, this triggers a change (termination) of the post-operation display (continuous press display HA2) that was previously displayed. However, a different display (non-operation display HB2) appears at this time (see Figures 151(c), (f), etc.), thus more actively encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), when the specified operation means (operation button 410) that is in operation is deactivated, the deactivation display HB2 is displayed as a result. However, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the deactivation display HB2 is not output again. Therefore, it can be suggested that the deactivation display HB2 was displayed not as a result of being deactivated, but as a result of being deactivated.

Furthermore, in the 18th configuration A18, two types of post-operation output sounds (2A reception-accepting output sounds) corresponding to the second multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-accepting state) are provided: a type of post-operation output sound (first reception-accepting output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) whose output state ends a certain time after the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second reception-accepting output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) whose output state ends after an indefinite time, rather than a fixed time, after the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. This configuration allows for situations where both types of post-operation output sounds are in the output state. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sounds (2A reception-accepting output sounds) that were in the output state will end after a certain time, thus providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

Furthermore, in the 18th configuration A18, the post-operation output sound of a type that ends after a certain time has elapsed since the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) can be started to be output in either the case where the post-operation output sound of a type that ends after an indefinite time, rather than a certain time, since the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) is in the output state or where it is not in the output state. The post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) which ends after an indefinite time, rather than a fixed time, after the operation state changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, is designed so that it does not start outputting independently when the post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) of the specific operating means (operation button 410) that ends after a fixed time has passed since the operation state changed from an operating state to a non-operating state is not in an output state, but can start outputting when it is in an output state (or simultaneously). This allows for a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state) of the 18th configuration A18, even if the output conditions for the second post-reception output sound SB2 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated midway, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (first A reception-accepting state) of the 18th configuration A18, if the output conditions for the first reception-after output sound SB1 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in Figure 146), the second reception-after output sound SB1 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. Conversely, the first reception-after output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state up to that point may terminate its output state based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2 and start a new output. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first reception-after output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to output.

Furthermore, the 18th configuration A18 may be implemented as an "operating means that is the target of the mock image display and allows for multiple operation requests."

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 18th configuration A18 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 18th configuration A18, the 3A acceptance-permitted state may be provided as the 1st multiple-operation valid state instead of the 1A acceptance-permitted state. Alternatively, both the 1A acceptance-permitted state and the 3A acceptance-permitted state may be provided.

Furthermore, for example, the 19th configuration A19 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation reception is permitted multiple times for the operating means that is the target of the mock image display, and provides a first multiple operation valid state (the 5A reception permitted state shown in Figure 158) and a second multiple operation valid state (the 2A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149) which have different occurrence conditions for each, and the first multiple operation valid state (5A reception permitted state) occurs as an operation valid state in which a mock image display that mimics the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) of the operating means is displayed, and the first side post-operation output sound (the 5A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 158) is output in response to the detection that the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) has entered an operation state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) has been operated It is possible to play the game in a way that creates a non-operational state where the device is not being operated (for example, the period from timing tAe2-B2 to tAe2-C1 shown in Figure 158). The second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state) occurs as an operation valid state where at least one mock image display is shown that mimics the second operation means (operation button 410). It is possible to play the game in a way that creates a non-operational state where the second operation means (operation button 410) is not being operated, while the second operation post-output sound (second A acceptance post-output sound shown in Figure 149) is output in response to the detection that the second operation means (operation button 410) has entered an operation state.

In this regard, in the 19th configuration A19, in the first multiple operation valid state (5A reception allowable state), when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in a non-operation state and the first side post-operation output sound (5A reception post-output sound) is in an output state, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from a non-operation state to an operation state, the time from when it becomes an operation state until the output state of the first side post-operation output sound (5A reception post-output sound) ends can be processed as a constant time, however, When the output sound after operation on side 1 (output sound after receiving 5A) is in the output state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in the operating state, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, the time from when it becomes non-operating until the output state of the output sound after operation on side 1 (output sound after receiving 5A) ends is undefined (not treated as a fixed time) (see, for example, timing tAe2-A2 shown in Figures 158(g) and (h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time.

With this configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state (5A reception-accepting state), the post-operation output sound (5A reception-after output sound), which is output when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, allows for estimation of how much time has elapsed since the state was changed to the operated state before it ends. For example, this suitably suggests that there is a noteworthy performance even in the immediate vicinity of changing the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) from a non-operated state to an operated state. Conversely, the post-operation output sound (5A reception-after output sound), which is output when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, makes it difficult to estimate how much time has elapsed since the state was changed to the non-operated state before it ends. For example, this suitably suggests that there is little noteworthy performance in the immediate vicinity of changing the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) from an operated state to a non-operated state.

Furthermore, in the 19th configuration A19, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception allowable state), if the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from the non-operation state to the operation state while the second operation means (operation button 410) is in an output state and the second operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state, the time from when it changes to the operation state until the output state of the second operation output sound (second A reception output sound) ends is indeterminate, but the second operation output sound (second A reception output sound) When the second operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state while the system is in an output state and the second operating means (operating button 410) is in an operated state, the time from the time it changes to a non-operated state until the output state of the second side post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) ends can be either constant (first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) or undefined (first post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)), depending on the type of second side post-operation output sound in that output state.

With this configuration, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state), when the second operating means (operation button 410) is switched from a non-operated state to an operated state, it is difficult to predict how long after the operation state is reached the end of the post-operation output sound (second A reception-accepted output sound) that is in the output state. For example, it is possible to suitably suggest that the performance is not noteworthy in situations that have just occurred since the second operating means (operation button 410) was switched from a non-operated state to an operated state. In this case, the post-operation output sound (operation button 410) in the output state may or may not be predictable in terms of how long it takes for the output sound to end after the non-operation state is reached. Therefore, for example, while suggesting that the dramatic effect after the second operation means is put into a non-operation state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound in the output state does not necessarily end after a fixed amount of time has elapsed since the non-operation state was reached. This allows for the appropriate maintenance of the sense of tension when the operation state is put into a non-operation state.

Furthermore, in the second multiple-operation valid state (second A acceptance state), when the second operating means (operation button 410), which is in the operating state, is changed to a non-operating state, this triggers the termination of the post-operation display (continuous press display HA2) that was previously displayed. However, a different display (non-operation display HB2) is shown at this time (see Figures 151(c), (f), etc.), thus more actively encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), when the second operation means (operation button 410) that is in the operation state is deactivated, the deactivation display HB2 is displayed as a result. However, in this case, the sound effect corresponding to the deactivation display HB2 is not output again. Therefore, it can be suggested that the deactivation display HB2 was displayed as a result of being deactivated, not as a result of being activated.

Furthermore, in the 19th configuration A19, two types of post-operation output sounds (2A reception-accepting output sounds) corresponding to the second multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-accepting state) are provided: a type of post-operation output sound (first reception-accepting output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) whose output state ends a certain time after the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second reception-accepting output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) whose output state ends after an indefinite time, rather than a fixed time, after the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. This allows for situations where both types of post-operation output sounds are in the output state. In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sounds (2A reception-accepting output sounds) that were in the output state will end after a certain time, thus providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance acceptance state) relating to the 19th configuration A19, the post-operation output sound of a type that ends after a certain time has elapsed since the second operating means (operation button 410) went from an operating state to a non-operating state (the first post-acceptance output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) can be started to be output regardless of whether the post-operation output sound of a type that ends after an indefinite time, rather than a certain time, since the second operating means (operation button 410) went from an operating state to a non-operating state (the second post-acceptance output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) is in an output state or not in an output state. The post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) of a type that ends after an indefinite time, rather than a fixed time, after the operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, is designed so that it does not start outputting independently when the post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) of a type that ends after a fixed time after the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state is not in an output state, but can start outputting when it is in an output state (or simultaneously). This allows for a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state) of the 19th configuration A19, even if the output conditions for the second post-reception output sound SB2 are met while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated midway, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, for example, the 20th configuration A20 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146). In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in a state where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is output. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is simply maintained in the operated state. The second A post-reception output sound (shown in Figure 149) can be generated multiple times, but the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is set to an indefinite time (not treated as a fixed time). In the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (shown in Figure 155) is not made to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state. In the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (shown in Figure 146) is made to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, but the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is processed to be a fixed time. Furthermore, in the multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is an indefinite time, when the specified operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception-accepting output sound) is in an output state, if the specified operation means (operation button 410) changes from an unoperated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A reception-accepting output sound) does not change (terminate) as a result (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figures 149(g) and (h)), whereas in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception-accepting state) in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is a fixed time, when the specified operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and If the specified operating means (operation button 410) changes from an unoperated state to an operated state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) may change (terminate) as a result (see, for example, the timing tAa2-C1 shown in Figure 146(g)), and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operating means (operation button 410) in an operated state. In the second multiple operation valid state (4A reception-accepting state) described above, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A reception-accepting output sound) is in an output state, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change (terminate) as a result (see, for example, the timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155(g) and (h)).

With this configuration, whether the player performs another operation in the second multiple operation valid state (4A acceptance state) where the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated, or whether the player performs another operation in the third multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance state) where the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated at regular intervals, the output state of the post-operation output sound can change (terminate) as a result. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be less likely to recognize whether or not they are in a situation where the auto-repeated button function is to be activated, thereby maintaining a sense of tension effectively. In contrast, in the first multiple-operation valid state (second A acceptance state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the output sound after the operation is in the output state, it becomes possible to recognize that the situation is not one in which the so-called auto-repeated function is not activated (second multiple-operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state)), that is, that the situation is one in which the auto-repeated function is to be activated. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated function is to be activated because it is not activated at regular intervals, the decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to this configuration can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149), there are two cases: one in which a post-operation output sound (the second A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 149(h)) is output, in which the output state does not change (terminate) upon detection of the non-operation state; and another in which a post-operation output sound (the second A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 149(g)) is output, in which the output state changes (terminates) upon detection of the non-operation state. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g)), whose output state changes (terminates) upon detection of a non-operation state, will no longer be in the output state even if the operation is repeated. Only the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149(h)), whose output state does not change (terminate) upon detection of a non-operation state, can be made to be in the output state as a sound that does not change (terminate) upon repeated operation.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, for the second multiple-operation valid state (the fourth A acceptance state shown in Figure 155) and the third multiple-operation valid state (the first A acceptance state shown in Figure 146), there is no post-operation output sound of the type that changes (terminates) the output state when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, instead of maintaining the output state. Only a post-operation output sound of the type that does not change (terminate) the output state when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is provided.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

In the 20th configuration A20, it is assumed that the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, and the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, are both the same operating means, referred to as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily limited to this. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operating means targeted for operation in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same operating means. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 20th configuration A20, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3rd A acceptance state instead of the 1st A acceptance state, and the 3rd A acceptance state may be realized as the 3rd multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1st A acceptance state and the 3rd A acceptance state.

Furthermore, for example, the 21st configuration A21 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted, and a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146) are provided as such multiple operation valid states, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in a state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is output, and in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation In the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception-allowed state), simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection (second A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 149) can be generated multiple times. However, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception-allowed state), simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection (first A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 146) can be generated multiple times. However, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception-allowed state), the system is designed to process the system so that the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated a fixed time. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 149), where the interval until the output sound after the operation is newly generated is an indefinite time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the output sound after the operation (second A reception-posted output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the output sound after the operation (second A reception-posted output sound) is not changed (terminated) as a result (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figures 149(g) and (h)), and the output sound after the operation is newly generated. In the second multiple operation valid state (the first A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 146), where the interval until the occurrence is a fixed time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, this triggers either a change in the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) depending on the type of sound being output (first A reception output sound shown in Figure 146(g)) or a change without change (first A reception output sound shown in Figure 146(h)).

With this configuration, in the first multiple-operation enabled state (the second A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 149), where the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated at regular intervals, even if the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an unoperated state to an operated state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A acceptance-after output sound) does not change (end) as a result. Combined with the fact that the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is an indefinite time, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly accepted, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension. In contrast, in the second multiple-operation enabled state (the first A acceptance state shown in Figure 146), where the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated at regular intervals, for example, while suggesting that the dramatic effect after the specific operation means (operation button 410) is put back into operation is of noteworthy value, the post-operation output sound (first A acceptance output sound), which is in the output state, is not necessarily changed (terminated) when the device is put back into operation. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when the device is put back into operation.

Furthermore, as post-operation output sounds (second A reception-accepting output sounds) corresponding to the first multiple-operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 149), two types of post-operation output sounds are provided: one type whose output state changes (terminates) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second A reception-accepting output sound shown in Figure 149(g)), and another type whose output state does not change (terminate) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second A reception-accepting output sound shown in Figure 149(h)). This allows for situations where both types of post-operation output sounds are in the output state. In this case, if the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sounds (second A reception-accepting output sounds) that were previously in the output state will change (terminate), thus providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 149), the type of post-operation output sound that changes (terminates) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the first acceptance-allowed output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) is output, regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (terminate) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the second acceptance-allowed output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) is output or not output. While output may also be initiated, the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (terminate) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) may not be initiated independently when the type of post-operation output sound that does change (terminate) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) is not in an output state, but may be initiated only when it is in an output state (or simultaneously).

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state) of the 21st configuration A21, even if the output conditions for the second reception-after output sound SB2 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second reception-after output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first reception-after output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first reception-after output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated midway, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception-accepting state) of the 21st configuration A21, if the output conditions for the first reception-after output sound SB1 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in Figure 146), the second reception-after output sound SB1 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. Conversely, the first reception-after output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state up to that point may terminate its output state based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2 and start a new output. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first reception-after output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to output.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, while the 21st configuration A21 assumes that the operating means targeted for operation is the same in both the first and second multiple-operation enabled states, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows for multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 21st configuration A21 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 21st configuration A21, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception-allowed state instead of the 1A reception-allowed state, and the 3A reception-allowed state may be realized as the 2nd multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception-allowed state and the 3A reception-allowed state.

Furthermore, for example, the 22nd configuration A22 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146). In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in a state where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is output. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is only required to maintain the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state. The second A post-reception output sound (shown in Figure 149) can be generated multiple times, but the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is set to an indefinite time (not treated as a fixed time). In the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (shown in Figure 155) is not made to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state. In the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (shown in Figure 146) is made to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, but the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is processed to be a fixed time. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), in which the interval until the next occurrence of the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is an indefinite time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound (second A acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the specific operation means (operation button 410) 0) When the device changes from an inoperable state to an operational state, the time from when it changes to an operational state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) ends is indeterminate (see, for example, the timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figure 149(h)). In contrast, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), where the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is a fixed time, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an inoperable state and the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) When the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an inactive state to an active state while in an output state, the time from when it changes to an active state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) ends can be processed as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time (see, for example, the timing tAa2-C1 shown in Figure 146(g)), and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is not generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means (operating button 410) in an active state. In the state where multiple operations are valid (4A reception-accepting state), if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A reception-accepted output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when it becomes an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output ends can be processed as a constant time (see, for example, the timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155(g) and (h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time from when it becomes an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends.

With this configuration, whether the player performs another operation in the second multiple operation valid state (4A acceptance state) where the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated, or whether the player performs another operation in the third multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance state) where the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated at regular intervals, the time from when the player performs another operation until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is constant in both cases. Therefore, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the situation is one in which the auto-repeated button function is to be activated, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension. In contrast, in the first multiple-operation valid state (second A acceptance state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the output sound after the operation is in the output state, it can be recognized that the situation is not one in which the so-called auto-repeated function is not activated (second multiple-operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state)), that is, that the situation is one in which the auto-repeated function is to be activated. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated function is to be activated by not activating it at regular intervals, the decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to having this configuration can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation valid state (the second A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 149), where the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is indefinite, when a specific operating means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (second A reception-post-output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is processed in two ways: either the time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends is indefinite (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3 shown in Figure 149(h)), or the time until the output state ends is processed as a fixed time (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3 shown in Figure 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (second A reception-post-output sound) that was previously output will end after a fixed time, thus providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

Furthermore, in the above-described examples of effects, for the second multiple-operation valid state (the fourth A acceptance state shown in Figure 155) and the third multiple-operation valid state (the first A acceptance state shown in Figure 146), no post-operation output sound of a type where the time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state ends is indefinite is provided. Instead, only post-operation output sounds of a type where the time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state ends can be treated as a fixed time are provided.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

In the 22nd configuration A22, it is assumed that the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, and the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, are both the same operating means, referred to as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily limited to this. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operating means targeted for operation in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same operating means. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a mock image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 22nd configuration A22, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3rd A acceptance state instead of the 1st A acceptance state, and the 3rd A acceptance state may be realized as the 3rd multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1st A acceptance state and the 3rd A acceptance state.

Furthermore, for example, the 23rd configuration A23 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted, and a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146) are provided as such, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in a state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated and the post-operation output sound is output, and in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means In the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception-allowed state), simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection (second A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 149) can be generated multiple times. However, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception-allowed state), simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection (first A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 146) can be generated multiple times. However, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception-allowed state), the system is designed to process the system so that the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated a fixed time. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 149), where the interval until the output sound after the operation is newly generated is an indefinite time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the output sound after the operation (second A reception-posted output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when it becomes an operated state until the output state of the output sound after the operation (second A reception-posted output sound) ends is indefinite (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figures 149(g) and (h)), and the output sound after the operation In the second multiple operation valid state (the first A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 146), where the interval until a new occurrence is a fixed time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first A reception-post-output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when the operation state is reached until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A reception-post-output sound) ends can be either an indefinite time (first A reception-post-output sound shown in Figure 146(h)) or a fixed time (first A reception-post-output sound shown in Figure 146(g)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the operation state is reached until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends.

With this configuration, in the first multiple-operation enabled state (second A acceptance state), where the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated at regular intervals, even if the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, the time from when it enters the operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is indefinite. Combined with the fact that the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is also indefinite, it is expected that the tension will be suitably maintained by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether their operation has been properly accepted. In contrast, in the second multiple-operation enabled state (first A acceptance state), where the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated at regular intervals, for example, while suggesting that the performance after the specific operating means (operation button 410) is changed back to an operated state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound, which is in output state, does not necessarily end at a fixed time after it is changed back to an operated state. Therefore, it is expected that the tension when changing back to an operated state will also be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, as a post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple-operation valid state (the second A acceptance-permitted state shown in Figure 149), a situation may occur where both a type of post-operation output sound (the second acceptance-permitted output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) is output, where the time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends is not treated as a fixed time but is indefinite, and a type of post-operation output sound (the first acceptance-permitted output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) is output, where the time until the output state ends is treated as a fixed time (0 seconds in the above example).

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 149), the type of post-operation output sound (the first acceptance-allowed output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that ends after a certain time (0 seconds in the example above) after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state is output, regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (the second acceptance-allowed output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not end after a certain time but ends at an indefinite time after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state is output or not output. While output may also be initiated, the type of post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not end after a fixed time has elapsed since the operation button 410 has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state, but rather ends after an indefinite time, may not be initiated independently when the type of post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that ends after a fixed time has elapsed since the operation button 410 has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state (0 seconds in the above example) is not in an output state, but may be initiated only when it is in an output state (or simultaneously).

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state) of the 23rd configuration A23, even if the output conditions for the second reception-after output sound SB2 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second reception-after output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first reception-after output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first reception-after output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated midway, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception-accepting state) of the 23rd configuration A23, if the output conditions for the first reception-after output sound SB1 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in Figure 146), the second reception-after output sound SB1 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. Conversely, the first reception-after output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state up to that point may terminate its output state based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2 and start a new output. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first reception-after output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to output.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, while the 23rd configuration A23 assumes that the operating means targeted for operation is the same in both the first and second multiple-operation enabled states, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows for multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 23rd configuration A23 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 23rd configuration A23, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception-allowed state instead of the 1A reception-allowed state, and the 3A reception-allowed state may be realized as the 2nd multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception-allowed state and the 3A reception-allowed state.

Furthermore, for example, the 24th configuration A24 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted, and as this multiple operation valid state, an undefined change multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149) is provided in which, simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again can be processed to be an undefined time, and a constant change multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146, third A reception permitted state shown in Figure 152) is provided in which, simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operation state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection can be generated multiple times, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again can be processed to be a constant time, and the undefined change multiple operation valid state The operation-enabled state (second A acceptance state) occurs as a multiple operation-enabled state of the type that can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives. In contrast, the constant-change multiple operation-enabled states (first A acceptance state, third A acceptance state) can occur as a multiple operation-enabled state of the type that does not terminate based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives (third A acceptance state), or as a multiple operation-enabled state of the type that can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives (third A acceptance state).

With this configuration, if the interval between maintaining the specified operating means (operating button 410) in the operating state and the generation of a new post-operation output sound is an indefinite time, it is possible to suitably suggest that the state may be terminated upon detection of the operating state of the specified operating means (operating button 410). Conversely, if the interval between maintaining the specified operating means (operating button 410) in the operating state and the generation of a new post-operation output sound is a fixed time, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the state may be terminated upon detection of the operating state of the specified operating means (operating button 410) or whether the state cannot be terminated upon detection of the operating state of the specified operating means (operating button 410), thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

In the state where multiple operations with variable changes are enabled (second A acceptance state), the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is not processed to be a fixed time, but only to be processed to be a variable time. However, in the state where multiple operations with fixed changes are enabled (first A acceptance state, third A acceptance state), it is sufficient that at least the process of setting the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation to be a fixed time is executed. It is also possible that both the process of setting the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation to be a fixed time (first post-acceptance output sound) and the process of setting the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation to be a variable time (second post-acceptance output sound) are executed.

In the state where multiple operations are enabled with variable changes (second A reception-permitted state), when a specific operating means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the post-operation output sound can either maintain its output state when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second A reception-permitted output sound shown in Figure 149(h)) or terminate its output state without maintaining it (second A reception-permitted output sound shown in Figure 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (second A reception-permitted output sound) that was previously in an output state will change (terminate), thus providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

In the state where multiple operations are valid due to a certain change (first A acceptance state, third A acceptance state), the post-operation output sound does not terminate when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, thus making it easier to interrupt the operation.

Furthermore, in the state where multiple operations of variable change are enabled (second A acceptance state), a message is always displayed; there is no case where the message is not displayed. However, in the state where multiple operations of constant change are enabled (first A acceptance state, third A acceptance state), there are cases where the message is displayed and cases where it is not. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the above-mentioned specific operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, while the 24th configuration A24 assumes that the operating means targeted for operation is the same in both the state where multiple operations are enabled for a fixed change (1st A reception-allowed state, 3rd A reception-allowed state) and the state where multiple operations are enabled for an undefined change (2nd A reception-allowed state), it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each state where multiple operations are enabled.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 24th configuration A24 may be defined as the valid period that occurs during the symbol variation based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, for example, the 25th configuration A25 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146). In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in a state where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is output. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and the detection is responded to simply by maintaining the operation state. The post-operation output sound (the second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149) can be generated multiple times, and the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than a specific time. In the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception-allowed state), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (the fourth A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 155) is not made to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state. In the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception-allowed state), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (the first A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 146) is made to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, and the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always set to be less than or equal to the specific time. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), in which the interval until the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection is generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state is always longer than a specified time, if the specified operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an operated state while the specified operation means (operation button 410) is in an inoperable state and the post-operation output sound (second A acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A acceptance output sound) does not change (terminate) as a result (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figures 149(g) and (h)), whereas in the third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state), in which the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated is always less than or equal to the specified time, if the specified operation means (operation button 410) is in an inoperable state When the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an inactive state to an active state while the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) is in an active state, the output state of the above-mentioned post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) may change (terminate) as a result (see, for example, the timing tAa2-C1 shown in Figure 146(g)), and the above-mentioned post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection will be emitted multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means (operation button 410) in an active state. In the second multiple operation valid state (4A reception-permitted state) described above, which is not considered to be viable, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A reception-permitted output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change (terminate) as a result (see, for example, the timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155(g) and (h)).

With this configuration, whether the player performs another operation in the second multiple operation valid state (4A acceptance state) where the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated, or whether the player performs another operation in the third multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance state) where the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated and a new post-operation output starts simply by a certain amount of time having elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, in both cases, the post-operation output sound that was in the output state changes (ends) as a result of the player's re-operation. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be less likely to recognize whether or not they are in a situation where the auto-repeated button function is activated, thereby maintaining a suitable sense of tension. In contrast, in the first multiple-operation valid state (second A acceptance state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the post-operation output sound is still being output, it becomes clear that the situation is not one where the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated (second multiple-operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state)), meaning that the situation is one in which the auto-repeated button press function is eligible for activation. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated button press function is eligible for activation by ensuring that the auto-repeated button press function is not activated until a certain amount of time has elapsed since the previous post-operation output began, the reduction in the enjoyment of the game due to this configuration can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149), there are two cases: one in which a post-operation output sound (the second A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 149(h)) is output, in which the output state does not change (terminate) upon detection of the non-operation state; and another in which a post-operation output sound (the second A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 149(g)) is output, in which the output state changes (terminates) upon detection of the non-operation state. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g)), whose output state changes (terminates) upon detection of a non-operation state, will no longer be in the output state even if the operation is repeated. Only the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149(h)), whose output state does not change (terminate) upon detection of a non-operation state, can be made to be in the output state as a sound that does not change (terminate) upon repeated operation.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, for the second multiple-operation valid state (the fourth A acceptance state shown in Figure 155) and the third multiple-operation valid state (the first A acceptance state shown in Figure 146), there is no post-operation output sound of the type that changes (terminates) the output state when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, instead of maintaining the output state. Only a post-operation output sound of the type that does not change (terminate) the output state when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is provided.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

In the 25th configuration A25, it is assumed that the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, and the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, are both the same operating means, referred to as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily limited to this. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operating means targeted for operation in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same operating means. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 25th configuration A25, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3rd A acceptance state instead of the 1st A acceptance state, and this 3rd A acceptance state may be realized as the 3rd multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1st A acceptance state and the 3rd A acceptance state.

Furthermore, for example, the 26th configuration A26 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted, and a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146) are provided as such multiple operation valid states, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in a state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is output, and in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), Simply by maintaining the specified operating means (operating button 410) in the operating state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149) can be generated multiple times, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than the specified time. In the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), simply by maintaining the specified operating means (operating button 410) in the operating state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 146) can be generated multiple times, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always less than or equal to the specified time. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 149), where the interval until the output sound after the above operation is newly generated is always longer than a specific time, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the output sound after the operation (second A reception-posted output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the output sound after the operation (second A reception-posted output sound) is not changed (terminated) as a result (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figures 149(g) and (h)), and the output sound after the operation is newly generated. In the second multiple operation valid state (the first A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 146), where the interval until the occurrence is always less than or equal to the specified time, when the specified operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) is in an output state, and the specified operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, this triggers either a change in the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) depending on the type of sound being output (first A reception output sound shown in Figure 146(g)) or a change without change (first A reception output sound shown in Figure 146(h)).

With this configuration, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A acceptance state shown in Figure 149), where a new operation output is not started by the so-called auto-repeated button function unless a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the previous operation output, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an unoperated state to an operated state again, the output state of the operation output sound (second A acceptance output sound) does not change (end) as a result. Combined with the fact that the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated (operated) unless a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the previous operation output, it is expected that the player's operation will be difficult to recognize whether it has been properly accepted, thereby maintaining a suitable sense of tension. In contrast, in the second multiple-operation valid state (the first A acceptance state shown in Figure 146), where the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated and a new post-operation output is initiated simply by a certain amount of time having elapsed since the previous post-operation output began, for example, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of returning the specific operation means (operation button 410) to the operation state may be noteworthy, the post-operation output sound (first A acceptance output sound) in the output state is not necessarily changed (terminated) upon returning to the operation state. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when returning to the operation state.

Furthermore, as post-operation output sounds (second A reception-accepting output sounds) corresponding to the first multiple-operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 149), two types of post-operation output sounds are provided: one type whose output state changes (terminates) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second A reception-accepting output sound shown in Figure 149(g)), and another type whose output state does not change (terminate) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (second A reception-accepting output sound shown in Figure 149(h)). This allows for situations where both types of post-operation output sounds are in the output state. In this case, if the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sounds (second A reception-accepting output sounds) that were previously in the output state will change (terminate), thus providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 149), the type of post-operation output sound that changes (terminates) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the first acceptance-allowed output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) is output, regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (terminate) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the second acceptance-allowed output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) is output or not output. While output may also be initiated, the type of post-operation output sound that does not change (terminate) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) may not be initiated independently when the type of post-operation output sound that does change (terminate) when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) is not in an output state, but may be initiated only when it is in an output state (or simultaneously).

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state) of the 26th configuration A26, even if the output conditions for the second reception-after output sound SB2 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second reception-after output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first reception-after output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first reception-after output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated midway, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception-accepting state) of the 26th configuration A26, if the output conditions for the first reception-after output sound SB1 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in Figure 146), the second reception-after output sound SB1 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. Conversely, the first reception-after output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state up to that point may terminate its output state based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2 and start a new output. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first reception-after output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to output.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, while the 26th configuration A26 assumes that the operating means targeted for operation is the same in both the first and second multiple-operation enabled states, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows for multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 26th configuration A26 may be defined as the valid period that occurs during the symbol variation based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 26th configuration A26, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception-allowed state instead of the 1A reception-allowed state, and the 3A reception-allowed state may be realized as the 2nd multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception-allowed state and the 3A reception-allowed state.

Furthermore, for example, the 27th configuration A27 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146). In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in a state where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is output. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state in response to the detection. The post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149) can be generated multiple times, and the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than a specified time. In the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception-allowed state), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (fourth A reception output sound shown in Figure 155) is not made to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state. In the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception-allowed state), the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (first A reception output sound shown in Figure 146) is made to be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state, and the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always less than or equal to the specified time. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state), which is a multiple operation valid state in which the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than a specified time, and in the situation where the specified operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound (second A acceptance output sound) is in an output state, the specified operation means (operation button 410) When the ton 410) changes from an inoperable state to an operated state, the time from when it changes to an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) ends is indeterminate (see, for example, the timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figure 149(h)). However, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), where the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always less than or equal to the specified time, the specified operating means (operation button 410) is in an inoperable state and the post-operation output sound (first A When the specified operating means (operation button 410) changes from an inactive state to an active state while the post-reception output sound is in an output state, the time from when it becomes active until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A post-reception output sound) ends can be processed as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time (see, for example, the timing tAa2-C1 shown in Figure 146(g)), and the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operating means (operation button 410) in an active state. In the second multiple operation valid state (4A reception-accepting state) described above, if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A reception-accepted output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when it becomes an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output ends can be processed as a constant time (see, for example, the timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155(g) and (h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time from when it becomes an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends.

With this configuration, whether the player performs another operation in the second multiple operation valid state (4A acceptance state) where the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated, or whether the player performs another operation in the third multiple operation valid state (1A acceptance state) where the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated at regular intervals, the time from when the player performs another operation until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is constant. Therefore, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the situation is one in which the auto-repeated button function is to be activated, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension. In contrast, in the first multiple-operation valid state (second A acceptance state), if the specific operation means is operated again while the output sound after the operation is in the output state, it can be recognized that the situation is not one in which the so-called auto-repeated function is not activated (second multiple-operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state)), that is, that the situation is one in which the auto-repeated function is to be activated. Therefore, while making it difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated function is to be activated by not activating it at regular intervals, the decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to having this configuration can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation valid state (the second A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 149), where the interval until a new post-operation output sound is generated is always longer than a specific time, when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound (second A reception-post-output sound) is output, the post-operation output sound is processed in two ways: either the time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends is indefinite (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3 shown in Figure 149(h)), or the time until the output state ends is processed as a fixed time (see, for example, timing tAb2-B3 shown in Figure 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (second A reception-post-output sound) that was previously in output state will end after a fixed time, thus providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, for the second multiple-operation valid state (the fourth A acceptance state shown in Figure 155) and the third multiple-operation valid state (the first A acceptance state shown in Figure 146), no post-operation output sound of a type where the time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state ends is indefinite is provided. Instead, only post-operation output sounds of a type where the time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until the output state ends can be treated as a fixed time are provided.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

In the 27th configuration A27, it is assumed that the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is not enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, and the operating means used when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled in the multiple-operation enabled state, are both the same operating means, referred to as the "specific operating means." However, this is not necessarily limited to this. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operating means targeted for operation in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same operating means. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 27th configuration A27, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3rd A acceptance state instead of the 1st A acceptance state, and this 3rd A acceptance state may be realized as the 3rd multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1st A acceptance state and the 3rd A acceptance state.

Furthermore, for example, the 28th configuration A28 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted, and a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146) are provided as such multiple operation valid states, and in both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in a state in which the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state, and in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), Simply by maintaining the specified operating means (operating button 410) in the operating state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149) can be generated multiple times, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than the specified time. In the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), simply by maintaining the specified operating means (operating button 410) in the operating state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the above detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 146) can be generated multiple times, and in this case, the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always less than or equal to the specified time. Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation valid state (second A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 149), where the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated unless a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound (second A acceptance-after output sound) is in an output state, the time from when it becomes an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A acceptance-after output sound) ends is indeterminate (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figures 149(g) and (h)), and the previous post-operation output starts In the second multiple-operation enabled state (the first A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 146), where the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated and a new post-operation output is initiated simply by the passage of a certain amount of time, when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an inactive state and the post-operation output sound (first A acceptance-after output sound) is in an output state, and the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an inactive state to an active state, the time from when the operation state is reached until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A acceptance-after output sound) ends can be either an indefinite time (first A acceptance-after output sound shown in Figure 146(h)) or a fixed time (first A acceptance-after output sound shown in Figure 146(g)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the fixed time from when the operation state is reached until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends.

With this configuration, in the first multiple-operation valid state (second A acceptance state), where the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated unless a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an unoperated state to an operated state again, the time from when it enters the operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is indefinite. Combined with the fact that the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is also indefinite, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the player's operation has been properly accepted, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension. In contrast, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state), where the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated and a new operation output is initiated simply by a certain amount of time having elapsed since the start of the previous operation output, for example, while suggesting that the dramatic effect of returning the specific operation means (operation button 410) to the operation state may be noteworthy, the operation output sound, which is currently in the output state, is not necessarily terminated after a fixed amount of time has elapsed since returning to the operation state. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when returning to the operation state.

Furthermore, as a post-operation output sound corresponding to the first multiple-operation valid state (the second A acceptance-permitted state shown in Figure 149), a situation may occur where both a type of post-operation output sound (the second acceptance-permitted output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) is output, where the time from when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state until the output state ends is not treated as a fixed time but is indefinite, and a type of post-operation output sound (the first acceptance-permitted output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) is output, where the time until the output state ends is treated as a fixed time (0 seconds in the above example).

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 149), the type of post-operation output sound (the first acceptance-allowed output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that ends after a certain time (0 seconds in the example above) after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state is output, regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (the second acceptance-allowed output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not end after a certain time but ends at an indefinite time after the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state is output or not output. While output may also be initiated, the type of post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not end after a fixed time has elapsed since the operation button 410 has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state, but rather ends after an indefinite time, may not be initiated independently when the type of post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that ends after a fixed time has elapsed since the operation button 410 has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state (0 seconds in the above example) is not in an output state, but may be initiated only when it is in an output state (or simultaneously).

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state) of the 28th configuration A28, even if the output conditions for the second reception-after output sound SB2 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second reception-after output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first reception-after output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first reception-after output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated midway, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception-accepting state) of the 28th configuration A28, if the output conditions for the first reception-after output sound SB1 are met while the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in Figure 146), the second reception-after output sound SB1 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. Conversely, the first reception-after output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state up to that point may terminate its output state based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2 and start a new output. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first reception-after output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to output.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the above-mentioned specific operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, while the 28th configuration A28 assumes that the operating means targeted for operation is the same in both the first and second multiple-operation enabled states, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows for multiple operations" in each multiple-operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 28th configuration A28 may be defined as the valid period that occurs during the symbol variation based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 28th configuration A28, the multiple operation valid state may include the 3A reception-allowed state instead of the 1A reception-allowed state, and the 3A reception-allowed state may be realized as the 2nd multiple operation valid state. Alternatively, the multiple operation valid state may include both the 1A reception-allowed state and the 3A reception-allowed state.

Furthermore, for example, the 29th configuration A29 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operating means (operation button 410) are permitted, and in this multiple operation valid state, the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state so that multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the detection can be generated, and in this case the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always longer than a specific time, and a long-change multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149) is provided in which the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state so that multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the detection can be generated, and in this case the interval until the post-operation output sound is generated again is always less than or equal to the specific time, and the long-change multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146, third A reception permitted state shown in Figure 152) is provided, and the long-change multiple The operation-enabled state (second A acceptance state) occurs as a multiple operation-enabled state of the type that can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives. In contrast, the short-change multiple operation-enabled states (first A acceptance state, third A acceptance state) can occur as a multiple operation-enabled state of the type that does not terminate based on the detection that the specific operation means is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives (third A acceptance state), or as a multiple operation-enabled state of the type that can be terminated based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state before a predetermined termination timing arrives (third A acceptance state).

With this configuration, although the auto-repeated button function is enabled, if the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated until a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it is possible to suitably suggest that the state may be terminated upon detection that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state. On the other hand, if the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated and a new post-operation output starts after only a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the previous post-operation output, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the state may be terminated upon detection that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, or whether the state cannot be terminated upon detection that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

In the long-change multiple operation enabled state (second A acceptance state), the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation is not processed to be a fixed time, but only to be processed to be an indefinite time. However, in the short-change multiple operation enabled state (first A acceptance state, third A acceptance state), it is sufficient that at least the process of setting the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation to be a fixed time is performed, and both the process of setting the interval until a new output sound is generated after an operation to be a fixed time (first post-acceptance output sound) and the process of setting the interval until a new post-acceptance output sound is generated to be an indefinite time (second post-acceptance output sound) may be performed.

In the state where multiple long-change operations are enabled (second A reception-permitted state), when a specific operating means (operation button 410) is detected to be in an operating state and a corresponding post-operation output sound is output, the post-operation output sound can either maintain its output state when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state (second A reception-permitted output sound shown in Figure 149(h)) or terminate its output state without maintaining it (second A reception-permitted output sound shown in Figure 149(g)). In other words, in this case, when the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (second A reception-permitted output sound) that was previously in an output state will change (terminate), thus providing a moderate sense of tension while encouraging the interruption of the operation.

In the state where multiple short-change operations are enabled (first A acceptance state, third A acceptance state), the post-operation output sound does not terminate when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, thus making it easier to interrupt the operation.

Furthermore, in the state where multiple long-change operations are enabled (second A acceptance state), a message is always displayed; there is no case where the message is not displayed. However, in the state where multiple short-change operations are enabled (first A acceptance state, third A acceptance state), there are cases where the message is displayed and cases where it is not. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the specified operating means (operating button 410) is switched from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when switching from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, while the 29th configuration A29 assumes that the operating means targeted for operation is the same in both the short-change multiple operation enabled state (1st A reception-allowed state, 3rd A reception-allowed state) and the long-change multiple operation enabled state (2nd A reception-allowed state), it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 29th configuration A29 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, for example, the 30th configuration A30 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions are permitted for the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146). In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play in a state where the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed in time units longer than a predetermined time. Simply by maintaining the button 410 in the operating state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149) can be generated multiple times. In the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception-allowed state), the periodic changes in the mock image display can be displayed in time units longer than the predetermined time, but simply by maintaining the operating means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display in the operating state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (fourth A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 155) cannot be generated multiple times. In the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception-allowed state), the periodic changes in the mock image display can be displayed in time units shorter than the predetermined time, and simply by maintaining the operating means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display in the operating state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 146) can be generated multiple times. Furthermore, in the multiple operation valid state in which the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operated state, the operation can be performed multiple times in response to the detection, and in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-permitted state) in which the periodic changes in the mock image display can be displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, the operation can be performed while the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state and the operation-permitted sound (second A reception-permitted sound) is in an output state. When the means (operation button 410) changes from an unoperated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) does not change (terminate) as a result (see, for example, the timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figures 149(g) and (h)). However, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image can be displayed in time units of less than the predetermined time, the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the display of the mock image is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output When the operating means (operating button 410) changes from an inactive state to an active state while the sound (first A reception output sound) is in an output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) may change (terminate) as a result (see, for example, the timing tAa2-C1 shown in Figure 146(g)), and the periodic change in the display of the mock image can be displayed in time units longer than the predetermined time. However, if the operating means (operating button 410) that is the target of the display of the mock image is kept in an active state, the above detection will not be possible. In the second multiple operation valid state (4A reception-permitted state) described above, where the corresponding post-operation output sound is not allowed to be generated multiple times, if the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in an inactive state and the post-operation output sound (4A reception-permitted output sound) is in an output state, and the operation means (operation button 410) changes from an inactive state to an active state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change (terminate) as a result (see, for example, the timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155(g) and (h)).

With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid states in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the operating means that is the target of the mock image display, the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state) is configured such that the periodic changes in the mock image display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and is the same configuration as the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state) in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated. This makes it difficult to recognize whether it is the target of the auto-repeated button function and maintains a sense of tension. However, unlike the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state) (see timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155(g) and (h)), if a second operation is performed while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound does not change as a result (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figure 149(h)). Therefore, by indicating whether or not there is a change during such a second operation, it is possible to suitably suggest that the situation is one in which the auto-repeated button function is activated, thereby suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, regarding the multiple operation valid states in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the operating means that is the target of the mock image display, the third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state) is configured such that if an operation is performed again while the post-operation output sound is in the output state, the output state of the post-operation output sound may change as a result. This configuration is the same as the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state) in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated, making it difficult to recognize whether the operation is subject to the auto-repeated button function and thus maintaining a sense of tension (see timing tAa2-C1 shown in Figure 146(g)). However, unlike the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state), the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed in time units of less than the predetermined time. Therefore, by appropriately suggesting that the situation is subject to the activation of the auto-repeated button function through the length of these periodic changes in the mock image display, it is expected that a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 149), where the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, there are two cases: one in which a post-operation output sound (second A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 149(h)) is output, in which the output state does not change (terminate) upon detection of a non-operation state; and another in which a post-operation output sound (second A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 149(g)) is output, in which the output state changes (terminates) upon detection of a non-operation state. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g)), whose output state changes (terminates) upon detection of a non-operation state, will already be in a non-output state even if the operation is repeated, meaning it will no longer be in an output state. Only the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149(h)), whose output state does not change (terminate) upon detection of a non-operation state, can be made to be in an output state as a sound that does not change (terminate) upon repeated operation.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance examples, for the second multiple operation valid state (the fourth A acceptance state shown in Figure 155) and the third multiple operation valid state (the first A acceptance state shown in Figure 146), there are no post-operation output sounds that maintain the output state when the operating means targeted for the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and instead trigger a change (termination) of the output state. Only post-operation output sounds that do not change (terminate) the output state when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state are provided.

Furthermore, in the 30th configuration A30, two types of post-operation output sounds (second A post-reception output sounds) are provided, corresponding to the first multiple-operation valid state (second A reception-acceptable state shown in Figure 149) in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. These include a type of post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) whose output state changes (terminates) when the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) whose output state does not change (terminate) when the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. This configuration allows for situations in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state. In other words, in this case, if the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (the output sound after receiving the second A signal), which was in an output state up to that point, will terminate upon the transition to a non-operation state. This allows for encouraging interruption of the operation while maintaining a moderate level of tension.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149) relating to the 30th configuration A30, the type of post-operation output sound (first reception-allowed output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that changes (terminates) when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state may be started to be output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (second reception-allowed output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not change (terminate) when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is in an output state or not. The post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) of a type that does not change (terminate) when the operating means targeted by the display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not started to output independently when the post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) of a type that changes (terminates) when the operating means targeted by the display of the simulated image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not in an output state. Instead, it can be started to output when it is in an output state (or simultaneously). This allows for a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruption of the operation.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149) relating to the 30th configuration A30, even if the output conditions for the second post-reception output sound SB2 are met while the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operating state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 will start outputting based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, a sound effect for one instance) that was in an output state up to that point may not end its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, when timing tAb2-B2 arrives, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (in this case, one sound effect) that was in output state simply continues. The playback state is not terminated prematurely, nor is a new sound (one sound effect) based on new data started, nor is playback restarted.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 30th configuration A30 may be defined as the valid period that occurs during the symbol variation based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for whether or not a change occurs when the operating means (operating button 410) targeted for displaying the simulated image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not a change occurs when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

In the 30th configuration A30, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated function is not activated in the multiple-operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated function is activated in the multiple-operation enabled state are both the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operating means targeted in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in realizing the 30th configuration A30, instead of the 4A acceptance-allowed state, the 5A acceptance-allowed state (see Figures 158 to 160) may be included as the multiple-operation enabled state, and the 5A acceptance-allowed state may be realized as the second multiple-operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in the second multiple-operation valid state (4A reception-allowed state, or 5A reception-allowed state) where the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the so-called auto-repeated function is not activated, a specific type of output sound may be provided as the post-operation output sound corresponding to this second multiple-operation valid state. This specific type of output sound may, while being a single type, have both cases: one where the output state changes (ends) triggered by the operation means, which is the target of the mock image display, changing from a non-operated state to an operated state, and another where the output state does not change (end). In this case, whether or not such a change (end) in the output state occurs may be determined based on a judgment (performance judgment) corresponding to the operation reception, based on the number of times the operation reception has been performed, or determined according to the type of display mode that appears as the post-reception display.

Furthermore, for example, the 31st configuration A31 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions are permitted for the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (the first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146). In both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in a state where the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first state, the periodic changes in the display of the mock image are made to appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, and the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the display of the mock image is maintained in an operating state, so that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149) can be generated multiple times. In the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), the periodic changes in the display of the mock image are made to appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, and the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the display of the mock image is maintained in an operating state, so that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 146) can be generated multiple times. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149), the periodic changes in the display of the mock image are made to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the operating means (operation button 410) that is the target of the display of the mock image is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception-after output sound) is in an output state. When the operating means (operation button 410) changes from an unoperated state to an operated state, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A reception-after output sound) is not changed (terminated) as a result (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figures 149(g) and (h)), and in the second multiple operation valid state (Figure 146 In the first A acceptance state shown in Figure 146(g), the display of the mock image is made possible such that the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units of less than the predetermined time, and the operating means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state, and the post-operation output sound (first A acceptance output sound) is in an output state. When the operating means (operation button 410) changes from an unoperated state to an operated state, this triggers a change (termination) of the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A acceptance output sound), depending on the type of sound being output (first A acceptance output sound), resulting in both cases: the first A acceptance output sound shown in Figure 146(h) and the first A acceptance output sound not changing (terminating).

With this configuration, in the first multiple-operation valid state (second A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 149), where the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, even if the operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state again, the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) does not change (end) as a result. Therefore, it is expected that it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether the operation by the player has been properly accepted, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension. In contrast, in the second multiple-operation valid state (the first A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 146), where the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units of less than the predetermined time, for example, while suggesting that the performance after the operation means (operation button 410) is put back into operation is of noteworthy value, the post-operation output sound (first A reception-after output sound), which is in the output state, is not necessarily changed (terminated) when the system is put back into operation. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when the system is put back into operation.

Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 149), where the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, there are two cases: one in which a post-operation output sound (second A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 149(h)) is output, in which the output state does not change (terminate) upon detection of a non-operation state; and another in which a post-operation output sound (second A reception-after output sound shown in Figure 149(g)) is output, in which the output state changes (terminates) upon detection of a non-operation state. In other words, in this case, the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g)), whose output state changes (terminates) upon detection of a non-operation state, will no longer be in the output state even if the operation is repeated. Only the post-operation output sound (the second A reception output sound shown in Figure 149(h)), whose output state does not change (terminate) upon detection of a non-operation state, can be made to be in the output state as a sound that does not change (terminate) upon repeated operation.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, for the second multiple-operation valid state (the first A acceptance state shown in Figure 146), no post-operation output sound is provided that maintains the output state when the operating means targeted for the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and instead triggers a change (termination) of the output state. Only a post-operation output sound that does not change (terminate) the output state when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is provided.

Furthermore, in the 31st configuration A31, two types of post-operation output sounds (2A post-reception output sounds) are provided, corresponding to the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-acceptable state shown in Figure 149) in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. These include a type of post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) whose output state changes (terminates) when the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, and a type of post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) whose output state does not change (terminate) when the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state. This configuration allows for situations in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state. In other words, in this case, if the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (the output sound after receiving the second A signal), which was previously in an output state, will change (terminate) as a result of the output state becoming non-operational. This allows for encouraging the interruption of the operation while maintaining a moderate level of tension.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149) relating to the 31st configuration A31, the type of post-operation output sound (first reception-allowed sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that changes (terminates) when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state may be started to output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (second reception-allowed sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not change (terminate) when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is in an output state or not. The post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) of a type that does not change (terminate) when the operating means targeted by the display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not started to output independently when the post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) of a type that changes (terminates) when the operating means targeted by the display of the simulated image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is not in an output state. Instead, it can be started to output when it is in an output state (or simultaneously). This allows for a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruption of the operation.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149) relating to the 31st configuration A31, even if the output conditions for the second post-reception output sound SB2 are met while the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operating state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 will start outputting based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not end its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, when timing tAb2-B2 arrives, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (in this case, one sound effect) that was in output state simply continues. The playback state is not terminated prematurely, nor is a new sound (one sound effect) based on new data started, nor is playback restarted.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception-accepting state) of the 31st configuration A31, while the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operation state, if the output conditions for the first post-reception output sound SB1 are met (timing tAa2-B2 shown in Figure 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. Conversely, the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may terminate its output state based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2 and start a new output. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to output.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the operating means (operating button 410) targeted for displaying the simulated image is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when it is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 31st configuration A31 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

In the 31st configuration A31, it is assumed that the operating means targeted for operation is the same in both the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state, but this is not necessarily the only case.

Furthermore, for example, the 32nd configuration A32 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions are permitted for the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display. The multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149), a second multiple operation valid state (fourth A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155), and a third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146). In all of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in a state where the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is displayed In the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance-allowed state), the periodic changes in the mock image display are made to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, but the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is made to appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound (fourth A acceptance-allowed sound shown in Figure 155) corresponding to the detection is not made to appear multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display in an operation state. In the third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance-allowed state), the periodic changes in the mock image display are made to appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, and the post-operation output sound (first A acceptance-allowed sound shown in Figure 146) corresponding to the detection is made to appear multiple times simply by maintaining the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display in an operation state. Furthermore, in the multiple operation valid state in which the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operated state, the operation can be performed multiple times in response to the detection, and in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-permitted state) in which the periodic changes in the mock image display can be displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, the operation can be performed while the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state and the operation-permitted sound (second A reception-permitted sound) is in an output state. When the means (operation button 410) changes from an unoperated state to an operated state, the time from when it changes to an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-reception output sound) ends is indeterminate (see, for example, the timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figure 149(h)). However, in the third multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image can be displayed in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the display of the mock image is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output When the operating means (operating button 410) changes from an inactive state to an active state while the force sound (first A reception output sound) is in an output state, the time from when it becomes active until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound) ends can be processed as a fixed time rather than an indefinite time (see, for example, the timing tAa2-C1 shown in Figure 146(g)). As long as the operating means (operating button 410) that is the target of the simulated image display remains in an active state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times. In the second multiple operation valid state (4A reception-accepting state) described above, when the operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operated state and the post-operation output sound (4A reception-accepted output sound) is in an output state, if the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the time from when it becomes an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output ends can be processed as a constant time (see, for example, the timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155(g) and (h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time from when it becomes an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends.

With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the operating means that is the target of the mock image display, the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance state) is configured such that the periodic changes in the mock image display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and is the same configuration as the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state) in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated. This makes it difficult to recognize whether it is the target of the auto-repeated button function, thereby maintaining a sense of tension, while allowing for further operation while the output sound after operation is still being output. In this case, unlike the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance acceptable state) (see timing tAd2-C1 shown in Figures 155(g) and (h)), the time from the re-operation until the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A post-acceptance output sound) ends is not treated as a fixed time but as an indefinite time (see timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figure 149(h)). Therefore, through this processing method during re-operation, it is expected that the situation in which the auto-repeated button function is to be activated will be suitably indicated, thereby suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, in the multiple operation valid states in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated for the operating means that is the target of the mock image display, the third multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state) is configured such that if an operation is performed again while the post-operation output sound is still being output, the time from the re-operation until the post-operation output sound ends can be processed as a fixed time. This configuration is the same as the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state) in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated. While maintaining a sense of tension by making it difficult to recognize whether the operation is subject to the auto-repeated button function (see timing tAa2-C1 shown in Figure 146(g)), the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed in time units of less than the predetermined time, unlike in the second multiple operation valid state (fourth A acceptance state). Therefore, it is expected that the length of these periodic changes in the mock image display can suitably suggest that the situation is subject to the activation of the auto-repeated button function, thereby suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation valid state (the second A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 149), where the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, there are two types of post-operation output sounds (the second A reception-accepting output sound shown in Figure 149(h)) where the time from the non-operation state until the end of the output state is treated as a constant time, and where a post-operation output sound (the second A reception-accepting output sound shown in Figure 149(g)) is output where the time from the non-operation state until the end of the output state is not treated as a constant time but is indeterminate. In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time from the non-operation state until the end of the output state of the post-operation output sound.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, for the second multiple operation valid state (the fourth A acceptance state shown in Figure 155) and the third multiple operation valid state (the first A acceptance state shown in Figure 146), the post-operation output sound corresponding to these states is not of a type where, when the operating means targeted for the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, the time from when it becomes a non-operating state until the output state ends is treated as a fixed time. Instead, only post-operation output sounds of a type where the time from when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state ends is not treated as a fixed time are provided.

Furthermore, in the 32nd configuration A32, two types of post-operation output sounds (2A post-reception output sounds) are provided, corresponding to the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-acceptable state shown in Figure 149) in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. These include a type of post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) in which the time from when the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state ends is a constant time, and a type of post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) in which the time from when the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state ends is not processed to be a constant time, and a situation in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state can occur. In other words, in this case, if the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (the output sound after receiving the second A signal), which was in the output state up to that point, will terminate after a certain period of time. This allows for encouraging the interruption of the operation while providing a moderate sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149) relating to the 32nd configuration A32, a post-operation output sound of a type that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display goes from an operating state to a non-operating state until its output state ends is a constant time (first reception-after output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) can be started to be output in either the case when a post-operation output sound of a type that cannot be processed so that the time from when the operating means goes from an operating state to a non-operating state until its output state ends is a constant time (second reception-after output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) is in the output state or when it is not in the output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that is not processed so that the time from when the operating means targeted for display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state ends is constant will not be output independently when the type of post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that is processed so that the time from when the operating means targeted for displaying the simulated image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state ends is constant will not start outputting on its own, but will only start outputting when it is in an output state (or simultaneously). This allows for a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 32nd configuration A32 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration regarding whether or not processing related to the change (termination) is executed when the operating means (operation button 410) targeted for displaying the simulated image is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether or not processing related to the change (termination) is executed when changing from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

In the 32nd configuration A32, it is assumed that the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated function is not activated in the multiple-operation enabled state and the operating means when the so-called auto-repeated function is activated in the multiple-operation enabled state are both the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Furthermore, it is assumed that the operating means targeted in the first multiple-operation enabled state, the second multiple-operation enabled state, and the third multiple-operation enabled state are the same operating means, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in realizing the 32nd configuration A32, instead of the 4A acceptance-allowed state, the 5A acceptance-allowed state (see Figures 158 to 160) may be included as the multiple-operation enabled state, and the 5A acceptance-allowed state may be realized as the second multiple-operation enabled state.

Furthermore, in a second multiple-operation enabled state (4A reception-allowed state, or 5A reception-allowed state) where the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the so-called auto-repeated function is not activated, a specific type of output sound may be provided as the post-operation output sound corresponding to this second multiple-operation enabled state. This specific type of output sound may, while being a single type, be processed so that the time from when the operating means, which is the target of the mock image display, changes from a non-operated state to an operated state until its output state ends is a fixed time, and also may be processed so that the time until its output state ends is not a fixed time. In this case, whether or not to execute the processing related to such changes (ends) in the output state may be determined based on a judgment (performance judgment) corresponding to the operation reception, based on the number of times the operation reception has been performed, or determined according to the type of display mode that appears as the post-reception display.

Furthermore, for example, the 33rd configuration A33 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions are permitted for the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display. This multiple operation valid state includes a first multiple operation valid state (the second A reception permitted state shown in Figure 149) and a second multiple operation valid state (the first A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146). In both of these multiple operation valid states, it is possible to play the game in a state where the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound is in an output state. In the first state, the periodic changes in the display of the mock image are made to appear in time units longer than a predetermined time, and the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the display of the mock image is maintained in an operating state, so that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149) can be generated multiple times. In the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception permitted state), the periodic changes in the display of the mock image are made to appear in time units shorter than the predetermined time, and the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the display of the mock image is maintained in an operating state, so that the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection (first A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 146) can be generated multiple times. Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 149), the periodic changes in the mock image display are made to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, and the operating means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state and the post-operation output sound (second A reception-after output sound) is in an output state. When the operating means (operation button 410) changes from an unoperated state to an operated state, the time from when it becomes an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound (second A reception-after output sound) ends is made indeterminate (not processed as a fixed time) (see, for example, timing tAb2-C1 shown in Figures 149(g) and (h)), and in the second multiple operation valid state In the state (the first A acceptance-permitted state shown in Figure 146), the periodic changes in the mock image display are made to occur in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, and the operating means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is in an unoperated state, and the post-operation output sound (first A acceptance-post-output sound) is in an output state. When the operating means (operation button 410) changes from an unoperated state to an operated state, there are two cases: one where the time from when it becomes operated until the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A acceptance-post-output sound) ends is treated as a fixed time (first A acceptance-post-output sound shown in Figure 146(g)); and another where this time is not treated as a fixed time but as an indefinite time (first A acceptance-post-output sound shown in Figure 146(h)).

With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid state in which the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is kept in an operated state, the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times. In the first multiple operation valid state (second A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 149), in which the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed in time units longer than the predetermined time, even if the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is changed from an unoperated state to an operated state again, the time from when it becomes an operated state until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends is indefinite. Therefore, it is expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the operation by the player has been properly accepted, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension. In contrast, in the second multiple-operation valid state (the first A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 146), where the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units of less than the predetermined time, for example, while suggesting that the performance after the operation means (operation button 410) is put back into operation is of noteworthy value, the post-operation output sound (first A reception-after output sound), which is in the output state, is not necessarily terminated after a fixed time has elapsed since the system was put back into operation. This is expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when the system is put back into operation.

Furthermore, in the first multiple-operation valid state (the second A reception-acceptable state shown in Figure 149), where the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, there are two cases: one in which a post-operation output sound (the second A reception-accepted output sound shown in Figure 149(h)) is output without processing so that the time from the non-operation state to the end of the output state is a constant time; and another in which a post-operation output sound (the second A reception-accepted output sound shown in Figure 149(g)) is output that can be processed so that the time from the non-operation state to the end of the output state is a constant time.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, for the second multiple-operation valid state (the first A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 146), no post-operation output sound of a type that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means targeted for the mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state ends is a constant time is provided. Instead, only post-operation output sounds of a type that is not processed so that the time from when the operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state ends is a constant time are provided.

Furthermore, in the 33rd configuration A33, as a post-operation output sound (2A post-reception output sound) corresponding to the first multiple-operation valid state (2A reception-acceptable state shown in Figure 149) in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, there is a type of post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state ends is a constant time, and a type of post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that is not processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the target of the display of the mock image changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state ends is a constant time, and a situation can occur in which both of these post-operation output sounds are in the output state. In other words, in this case, if the operation is interrupted, only a portion of the post-operation output sound (the output sound after receiving the second A signal), which was in the output state up to that point, will terminate after a certain period of time. This allows for encouraging the interruption of the operation while providing a moderate sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149) relating to the 33rd configuration A33, a post-operation output sound of a type that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display goes from an operating state to a non-operating state until its output state ends is a constant time (first reception-after output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) can be started to be output in both situations, whether or not a post-operation output sound of a type that is not processed so that the time from when the operating means goes from an operating state to a non-operating state until its output state ends is a constant time (second reception-after output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) is in the output state. The type of post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that is not processed so that the time from when the target operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state ends is constant is not started to output independently when the type of post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that is processed so that the time from when the target operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until the output state ends is constant is not in an output state, but can be started to output when it is in an output state (or simultaneously). This allows for a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the first multiple operation valid state (second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149) relating to the 33rd configuration A33, even if the output conditions for the second post-reception output sound SB2 are met while the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operating state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 will start outputting based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, a sound effect for one instance) that was in an output state up to that point may not end its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, when timing tAb2-B2 arrives, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (in this case, one sound effect) that was in output state simply continues. The playback state is not terminated prematurely, nor is a new sound (one sound effect) based on new data started, nor is playback restarted.

Furthermore, in the second multiple operation valid state (first A reception-accepting state) of the 33rd configuration A33, while the operation means (operation button 410) that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operation state, if the output conditions for the first post-reception output sound SB1 are met (timing tAa2-B2 shown in Figure 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. Conversely, the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may terminate its output state based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2 and start a new output. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to output.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the operating means (operating button 410) targeted for displaying the simulated image is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when it is changed from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 33rd configuration A33 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, while the 33rd configuration A33 assumes that the operating means targeted for operation is the same in both the first multiple operation valid state and the second multiple operation valid state, it is not necessarily limited to this case.

Furthermore, for example, the 34th configuration A34 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation reception is permitted multiple times for the operating means that is the target of the mock image display. Among these multiple operation valid states, in a type of multiple operation valid state in which the periodic changes of the mock image display appear in time units of a predetermined time or less (for example, the 1A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146), the post-operation output sound (the 1A reception output sound shown in Figure 146) can be output multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the mock image display in an operating state, and the post-operation output sound (1A reception output sound) can be output multiple times in such a way that the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is set to a certain time. In contrast, among the multiple operation valid states, in which the periodic changes of the mock image display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, In the multiple operation enabled states of the specified type (for example, the 2A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149, the 4A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 155, the 5A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 158, etc.), if the operating means that is the target of the simulated image display is maintained in the operating state, the post-operation output sound (the 1A reception-after-output sound shown in Figure 146) can be output multiple times. However, the interval between the occurrence of the post-operation output sound is not processed to be a fixed time, but rather an indefinite time, resulting in the post-operation output sound (2A reception-after-output sound) being output multiple times (2A reception-allowed state). Furthermore, there are two cases where simply maintaining the operating state does not allow the post-operation output sound (4A reception-after-output sound, 5A reception-after-output sound) to be output multiple times (4A reception-allowed state, 5A reception-allowed state).

With this configuration, if the periodic changes in the mock-up display occur in time intervals shorter than the predetermined time, it can suitably suggest that the so-called auto-button function is activated. Furthermore, since the post-reception output sound is emitted at regular intervals when the auto-button function is activated, it becomes easier to feel that the auto-button function is activated, thus suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game. Conversely, if the periodic changes in the mock-up display occur in time intervals longer than the predetermined time, there are cases where the auto-button function is activated and cases where it is not. In addition, even if the auto-button function is activated, the post-reception output sound is only emitted at irregular intervals, making it difficult to recognize that the auto-button function is activated, thus suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in a multiple-operation enabled state of a type where the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, if the operation means that is the target of the mock image display is kept in an operating state, and the post-operation output sound is being output, which is not output multiple times if the operation means is kept in an operating state, then the time from when the operation means is put into a non-operating state is not processed to be a fixed time, but is always set to an indefinite time (4A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 155, 5A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 158). In contrast, in a multiple-operation enabled state where the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, if the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operating state, and as a result the post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 146) is output multiple times at indefinite intervals, when the operating means that is in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, there are two cases: one in which the time from when it becomes non-operating until the post-operation output sound that was previously outputting ends becomes a constant time (the second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(g)); and another in which the time from when it becomes non-operating until the post-operation output sound that was previously outputting ends is not processed to be a constant time, but becomes an indefinite time (the second A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 149(h)). In the example described above, "0 seconds" is set as the constant time from when it becomes non-operating until the output state of the post-operation output sound ends.

With this configuration, if, while an operation output sound is being emitted, the operating means is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and the time from when it becomes non-operating until the operation output sound that was previously being emitted ends is processed to be a certain time (a predetermined time), it can be indicated that the so-called auto-repeated function is to be activated. However, even if the so-called auto-repeated function is to be activated (the second A acceptance-allowing state shown in Figure 149), the time from when it becomes non-operating until the operation output sound that was previously being emitted ends is not necessarily processed to be a certain time, thus allowing for a suitable maintenance of tension when the unit is changed to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, in a multiple-operation enabled state of a type in which the periodic changes in the display of the mock image appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, if the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operating state, and as a result the post-operation output sound (the first A post-reception output sound shown in Figure 146) is output multiple times at indefinite intervals, and the operating means that is in an operating state is changed to a non-operating state, the post-operation output sound of a type that can be processed so that the time from when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display goes from an operating state to a non-operating state until its output state ends becomes a constant time (the first post-reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) is not processed so that the time from when the operating means goes from an operating state to a non-operating state until its output state ends becomes a constant time (Figure 1 The second post-reception output sound SB2) shown in 49(h) can be started to output under both circumstances, whether it is in an output state or not. However, a type of post-reception output sound (the second post-reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that is not processed so that the time from when the operating means targeted for mock image display changes from an operating state to a non-operating state until its output state ends is constant will not be started to output independently when the first post-reception output sound (SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) is not in an output state, but may be started to output when it is in an output state (or simultaneously).

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the configuration for determining whether a change occurs when the operating means targeted for displaying the simulated image is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and whether a change occurs when changing it from a non-operating state to an operating state, is based on the premise that the reception valid state is maintained.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 34th configuration A34 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 34th configuration A34, it is also possible to provide only one of the 4A acceptance-permitting state and the 5A acceptance-permitting state. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-described configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, the 35th configuration A35 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation reception is permitted multiple times for the operating means that is the target of the mock image display. Among these multiple operation valid states, in a type of multiple operation valid state in which the periodic changes of the mock image display appear in time units of a predetermined time or less (for example, the 1A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146), the operation output sound corresponding to the detection (1A reception output sound) can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operating means that is the target of the mock image display in an operating state. In this case, the interval until the operation output sound is generated again is always set to be less than or equal to a specific time, whereas the periodic changes of the mock image display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. In the multiple operation enabled state of the type displayed, there are two cases: one where the operation means that is the target of the simulated image display can generate the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state (for example, the second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149), and another where the post-operation output sound cannot be output multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state (for example, the fourth A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 155, and the fifth A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 158). However, in the case where the post-operation output sound corresponding to the detection can be generated multiple times simply by maintaining the operation state (second A reception-allowed state), the interval until the post-operation output sound is newly generated is always set to be longer than the specified time.

With this configuration, if the periodic changes in the mock-up display occur in time units shorter than the predetermined time, it can suitably suggest that the so-called auto-button function is activated. Furthermore, when the auto-button function is activated, new post-reception output sounds are output one after another in a relatively short time, making it easier to feel that the auto-button function is activated, thus suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game. Conversely, if the periodic changes in the mock-up display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, there are cases where the auto-button function is activated and cases where it is not. In addition, even if the auto-button function is activated, new post-reception output sounds are not output until a relatively long time has passed, making it difficult to recognize that the auto-button function is activated, thus suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in the 35th configuration A35, when the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operating state in a type of multiple operation enabled state (for example, the 1A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 146) where the periodic changes in the mock image display appear in time units of the predetermined time or less, the interval until a new output sound is generated after the operation may be made shorter than the time required for the periodic changes in the mock image display that appear in time units of the predetermined time or less. In other words, in this case, under operating conditions, repeated changes will appear in shorter time units than under non-operating conditions, thus providing a visual benefit that makes it easier to recognize that the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled.

Furthermore, in the 35th configuration A35, in a multiple-operation enabled state where the periodic changes in the mock image display appear in time units longer than the predetermined time, if the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operating state, it is possible to generate multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the detection (the 2A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149), the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated may be set to be longer than the time required for the periodic changes in the mock image display that appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. In other words, in this case, even when an operation is performed, only repeating changes in time units longer than when no operation is performed will appear, thus allowing the system to suggest that the so-called auto-repeated function is activated while maintaining a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in a multiple-operation enabled state where the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, if the operation means that is the target of the mock image display is maintained in an operation state, and multiple post-operation output sounds corresponding to the detection can be generated (the second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149), the interval until the new post-operation output sound is generated may be both "longer than the predetermined time" and "longer than the predetermined time". Such a configuration makes it possible to make it both easy and difficult to recognize that the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 35th configuration A35 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 35th configuration A35, it is also possible to provide only one of the 4A acceptance-permitting state and the 5A acceptance-permitting state. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-described configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, the 36th configuration A36 includes a multiple operation valid state in which operation reception is permitted multiple times for the operating means that is the target of the mock image display, and in this multiple operation valid state, if the periodic changes in the mock image display are displayed in time units of a predetermined time or less, then a situation is created in which a "multiple operation valid state of the type in which the state can be terminated when it is detected that the operating means that is the target of the mock image display is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives (for example, the 1A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146)" occurs (there is no situation in which a multiple operation valid state of the type that does not terminate occurs), and in the multiple operation valid state In this case, if the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, there may be two possible scenarios: one where a "multiple operation valid state (e.g., the second A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 149)" occurs, triggered by the detection that the operating means, which is the target of the mock image display, is in an operating state before the predetermined termination timing arrives; and another where a "multiple operation valid state (e.g., the fourth A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 155, or the fifth A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 158)" occurs, triggered by the detection of an operating state.

With this configuration, if the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units shorter than the predetermined time while the operation is active multiple times, it is possible to suitably suggest that the operation state, which is the target of the mock image display, may be terminated upon detection of operation. Conversely, if the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time while the operation is active multiple times, it becomes difficult to determine whether the operation state, which is the target of the mock image display, may be terminated upon detection of operation, or whether the operation state will not be terminated upon detection of operation, thereby suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, if the 36th configuration A36 is provided, it goes without saying that the 3A acceptance state will basically not be provided. However, regarding the 3A acceptance state, it is possible to provide it by, for example, modifying the periodic changes in the mock image display so that they appear in time units longer than the predetermined time. Alternatively, the 3A acceptance state may be provided as an acceptance state in which the mock image display itself does not appear.

Furthermore, in the above-described example of presentation, when the state of multiple successful operations occurs, a confirmation tone indicating that operation acceptance is permitted may be output. The confirmation tone may be output in the same manner whether the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time, or whether the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time. However, when the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units longer than the predetermined time, the confirmation tone may be output in a manner that is not possible when the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in time units of less than or equal to the predetermined time. Alternatively, conversely, if the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in intervals shorter than a predetermined time while the multiple operation is enabled, the acceptance tone may be output in a manner that prevents output when the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in intervals longer than the predetermined time while the multiple operation is enabled. Furthermore, if the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in intervals shorter than the predetermined time while the multiple operation is enabled, the acceptance tone is always output. However, if the periodic changes in the mock image display occur in intervals longer than the predetermined time while the multiple operation is enabled, the acceptance tone may or may not be output.

Furthermore, in the above-described examples of presentations, whether the periodic changes in the mock-up display appear in time intervals shorter than the predetermined time while the multiple-operation enabled state is active, or whether the periodic changes in the mock-up display appear in time intervals longer than the predetermined time while the multiple-operation enabled state is active, the same post-reception changes as when an operation was received may occur even if no operation is received before the multiple-operation enabled state ends (see, for example, Figures 147 and 150). In this regard, when the periodic changes in the mock-up display appear in time intervals shorter than the predetermined time while the multiple-operation enabled state is active, the same post-reception changes as when an operation was received will always occur even if no operation is received before the multiple-operation enabled state ends. However, when the periodic changes in the mock-up display appear in time intervals longer than the predetermined time while the multiple-operation enabled state is active, it is possible to have both cases where the same post-reception changes as when an operation was received occur, and cases where the same post-reception changes as when an operation was received do not occur, even if no operation is received before the multiple-operation enabled state ends.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 36th configuration A36 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 36th configuration A36, it is also possible to provide only one of the 4A acceptance-permitting state and the 5A acceptance-permitting state. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-described configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, in configuration A37, there is a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted multiple times. Among these multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (4A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155) in which the post-operation change in response to the detection of the operation state is not possible multiple times simply by the specific operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operation state, but the specific operation means (operation button 410) has not been operated from the operation state. In contrast to preventing the display of a post-operation indicator when the device becomes inactive (see Figures 155(e), (f) and 157(c), (e), (g), etc.), in certain types of multiple-operation enabled states (such as the first A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 146, the second A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 149, and the third A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 152) where the post-operation indicator, one of the post-operation indicators, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operational state. Furthermore, when the specified operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-operation display HB2 (see Figure 149(f), Figure 151(c), (f), etc.) may be displayed. In addition, in specific types of multiple operation valid states (first A acceptance allowed state, second A acceptance allowed state, third A acceptance allowed state), the specified operating means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state, and the post-operation display (post-operation display HB2) corresponding to the detection of this unoperated state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound (second A acceptance after output sound) among the post-operation changes maintains its output state (for example, as shown in Figure 149). The timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1, etc., can occur as a result of the player's gameplay. In this situation, when it is detected that a specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an inactive state to an active state, this detection triggers a change (termination) in the previously displayed inactive display (inactive display HB2). However, the previously outputted inactive sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) does not change (terminate), and its output state is maintained (see timings tAb2-C1 shown in Figures 149(f) and (h), and Figure 151(g), etc.).

With this configuration, in specific types of multiple-operation valid states (such as the first A acceptance state shown in Figure 146, the second A acceptance state shown in Figure 149, and the third A acceptance state shown in Figure 152), where the post-operation change can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means (operation button 410) in an operated state, if the player performs another operation while the post-operation change is being executed, the mode of execution of the previous post-operation change will be partially continued, while a change (termination) may occur in some parts. This provides a sense of tension when performing another operation, while also appropriately creating a sense of anticipation for the start of a new performance.

Furthermore, in the specific multiple-operation valid states of the 37th configuration A37 (such as the 1st A reception-accepting state, the 2nd A reception-accepting state, and the 3rd A reception-accepting state), when the specific operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, there are two possibilities: when a corresponding post-non-operation display is shown (2nd A reception-accepting state) and when the post-non-operation display is not shown (1st A reception-accepting state and 3rd A reception-accepting state). This allows for a suitable sense of tension when the device is switched to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, in the 37th configuration A37, in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state among specific types of multiple operation valid states (1st A reception-allowed state, 2nd A reception-allowed state, 3rd A reception-allowed state), and the non-operation display (non-operation display HB2) is displayed in response to the detection of this non-operation state, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains its output state (for example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in Figure 149), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operation state to an operation state, the non-operation display (non-operation display HB2) that was previously displayed will definitely change (end), while the post-operation output sound (2nd A reception-allowed output sound shown in Figure 149(h)) that was previously output will not change. The force state is maintained without any change, but in a situation where the specific operating means (operating button 410) is in an unoperated state, and the post-operation display corresponding to the detection of this unoperated state is not displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains its output state (for example, timings tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 shown in Figure 146), when it is detected that the specific operating means (operating button 410) has changed from an unoperated state to an operated state, this detection triggers a change in the output state of the post-operation output sound (the first A reception output sound shown in Figure 146), depending on its type (the first A reception output sound shown in Figure 146(g)), or it maintains its output state without any change (the first A reception output sound shown in Figure 146(h)).

With this configuration, even in the case of the multiple-operation valid states of a specific type (such as the first A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 146, the second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149, and the third A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 152) where the post-operation change can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operating means (operation button 410) in an operated state, if the player performs another operation while the post-operation change is being executed, the mode of the post-operation change up to that point will be partially continued, while a change may occur in some parts. This provides a sense of tension when performing another operation, while also appropriately creating a sense of anticipation for the start of a new effect.

Furthermore, in the above-described example of presentation, the first A acceptance state may be generated as an acceptance state in which a corresponding post-operation display is shown when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, similar to the second A acceptance state. In this case, the conditions for displaying the post-operation display and the conditions for hiding it may be the same as the post-operation display HB2 described in the second A acceptance state. However, even in this case, it is desirable that the third A acceptance state be generated as an acceptance state in which a corresponding post-operation display is not shown when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned example, by not outputting a corresponding sound when displaying the "no operation" indicator, it becomes possible to suggest that the "no operation" indicator was displayed not because the device was in an operational state, but because it was in a non-operational state.

Furthermore, in the above-described example of the performance, the specific type of multiple-operation valid state (the first A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 146, the second A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 149, and the third A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 152), which allows the post-operation change to be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specific operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state, includes a first reception-accepting state (first A reception-accepting state or third A reception-accepting state) and a second reception-accepting state (second A reception-accepting state).

Furthermore, in the second acceptance state (second A acceptance state), the type of post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that changes (terminates) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state can be started to output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not change (terminate) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is in an output state or not. The post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) of a type that does not change (terminate) when the operation button (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state is designed so that it does not start outputting independently when the post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) of a type that terminates when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state is not in output state, but can start outputting when it is in output state (or simultaneously). This allows for a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the second acceptance-permitting state (second A acceptance-permitting state) of the 37th configuration A37, even if the output conditions for the second post-reception output sound SB2 are met while the specific operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operating state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated midway, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, if the first acceptance state of the 37th configuration A37 is the "first A acceptance state," then in this first acceptance state (first A acceptance state), while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state, if the output conditions for the first post-reception output sound SB1 are met (timing tAa2-B2 shown in Figure 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 will start outputting based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. On the other hand, the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state up to that point may end its output state based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2 and start a new output. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to be output.

Furthermore, if the first acceptance state of the 37th configuration A37 is the "3A acceptance state," then in the first acceptance state (3A acceptance state), while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state, if the output conditions for the third post-reception output sound SB3 are met (timing tAc2-B2 shown in Figure 152), the second post-reception output sound SB3 will start outputting based on the operation reception made at timing tAc2-B2. On the other hand, the third post-reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state up to that point may end its output state based on the operation reception made at timing tAc2-B2 and start a new output. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA3 (here, one sound effect) that was in the output state when timing tAc2-B2 arrived is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to be output.

Furthermore, while the 37th configuration A37 assumes that the operating means targeted for operation in the multiple operation enabled state is the same operating means, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 37th configuration A37 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 37th configuration A37, it is also possible to provide only one of the 1st A acceptance state and the 3rd A acceptance state. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-described configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, the 38th configuration A38 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted multiple times. Among these multiple operation valid states, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (the 3A reception permitted state shown in Figure 152, the 4A reception permitted state shown in Figure 155) in which the state is not terminated when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state before a predetermined termination timing arrives, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operating state. In contrast to preventing the display of a post-operation indicator when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state (see Figures 152(e), (f) and 154(c), (g), and Figures 155(e), (f) and 157(c), (e), (g), etc.), in a specific type of multiple-operation valid state (first A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 146, second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149) in which the state can be terminated when the detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in an operated state occurs before a predetermined termination timing arrives, the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in an operated state. Based on the detection of the above, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, is made available, and when the specific operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding non-operation display HB2 may be displayed. Furthermore, in the specific type of multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 146, second A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 149), the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in a non-operating state, and the non-operation display (non-operation display HB2) corresponding to the detection of this non-operating state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound (second A acceptance-after output sound) among the post-operation changes maintains its output state (for example, as shown in Figure 149) The timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1, etc., can occur as a result of the player's gameplay. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an inactive state to an active state, this detection triggers a change (termination) in the previously displayed inactive display (inactive display HB2). However, the previously outputted inactive sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) does not change (terminate), and its output state is maintained (see timings tAb2-C1 shown in Figures 149(f) and (h), and Figure 151(g), etc.).

With this configuration, in specific types of multiple-operation valid states (the first A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 146, and the second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149) where the state can be terminated when the detection of the operation state of the specific operation means (operation button 410) before the predetermined termination timing arrives, if the player performs another operation while a post-operation change is being executed, the system will continue to execute some of the previous post-operation changes while also causing some changes (termination). This provides a sense of tension when performing another operation, while also appropriately creating anticipation for the start of a new performance.

Furthermore, in the specific type of multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state or second A acceptance state) related to the 38th configuration A38, when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, there are two possibilities: when a corresponding post-operation display is shown (second A acceptance state) and when the post-operation display is not shown (first A acceptance state). This allows for a suitable sense of tension when the device is set to an unoperated state.

Furthermore, in the 38th configuration A38, in a situation where the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in a non-operation state among specific types of multiple operation valid states (such as the 1st A reception-allowed state or the 2nd A reception-allowed state), and the non-operation display (non-operation display HB2) is displayed in response to the detection of this non-operation state, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains its output state (for example, timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in Figure 149), when it is detected that the specific operation means (operation button 410) has changed from a non-operation state to an operation state, this detection triggers a change (termination) in the non-operation display (non-operation display HB2) that was previously displayed, while the post-operation output sound (2nd A reception-allowed output sound shown in Figure 149(h)) that was previously output changes to its output state. While ensuring that no changes occur and that this state is always maintained, in situations where the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state, and the post-operation display corresponding to the detection of this unoperated state is not displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains its output state (for example, timings tAa2-B3 to tAa2-C1 shown in Figure 146), when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an unoperated state to an operated state, this detection triggers a change in the output state of the post-operation output sound (first A reception output sound shown in Figure 146) according to its type (first A reception output sound shown in Figure 146(g)), or it maintains its output state without change (first A reception output sound shown in Figure 146(h)).

With this configuration, even in the case of a specific type of multiple-operation enabled state (such as the first A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 146 or the second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149) where the post-operation change can be executed multiple times simply by maintaining the specified operating means (operation button 410) in an operated state, if the player performs another operation while the post-operation change is being executed, the mode of the post-operation change up to that point will be partially continued, while a change may occur in some parts. This provides a sense of tension when performing another operation, while also appropriately creating a sense of anticipation for the start of a new effect.

Furthermore, in the above-described example of presentation, the first A acceptance state may be generated as an acceptance state in which a corresponding post-operation display is shown when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, similar to the second A acceptance state. In this case, the conditions for displaying the post-operation display and the conditions for hiding it may be the same as those for the post-operation display HB2 described in the second A acceptance state. In the specific type of multiple operation valid state (first A acceptance state and second A acceptance state) of the third A configuration A38 employing this modified example, a corresponding post-operation display will always be shown when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, eliminating cases where the post-operation display is not shown. However, even in this case, it is desirable that the third A acceptance state and fourth A acceptance state be generated as an acceptance state in which a corresponding post-operation display is not shown when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned example, by not outputting a corresponding sound when displaying the "no operation" indicator, it becomes possible to suggest that the "no operation" indicator was displayed not because the device was in an operational state, but because it was in a non-operational state.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, the specific type of multiple-operation valid state (the first A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 146 and the second A acceptance-allowed state shown in Figure 149) that can be terminated when the detection of the specific operation means (operation button 410) being in an operated state occurs before a predetermined termination timing arrives includes both a first acceptance-allowed state (first A acceptance-allowed state) and a second acceptance-allowed state (second A acceptance-allowed state).

Furthermore, in the second acceptance state (second A acceptance state), the type of post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that changes (terminates) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state can be started to output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not change (terminate) when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is in an output state or not. The post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) of a type that does not change (terminate) when the operation button (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state is designed so that it does not start outputting independently when the post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) of a type that terminates when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state is not in output state, but can start outputting when it is in output state (or simultaneously). This allows for a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the second acceptance-permitting state (second A acceptance-permitting state) of the 38th configuration A38, even if the output conditions for the second post-reception output sound SB2 are met while the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated midway, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, in the first acceptance-permitted state (first A acceptance-permitted state) of the 38th configuration A38, if the output conditions for the first post-reception output sound SB1 are met while the operation button 410 is maintained in the operation state (timing tAa2-B2 shown in Figure 146), the second post-reception output sound SB1 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2. Conversely, the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect), which was in the output state up to that point, may terminate its output state based on the operation reception made at timing tAa2-B2 and start a new output. That is, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA1 (here, one sound effect), which was in the output state when timing tAa2-B2 arrived, is interrupted, and a sound (one sound effect) based on new data (here, data for one sound effect) is started to output.

Furthermore, while the 38th configuration A38 assumes that the operating means targeted for operation in the multiple operation enabled state is the same operating means, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 38th configuration A38 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 38th configuration A38, it is also possible to provide only one of the 3A acceptance-permitting state and the 4A acceptance-permitting state. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain the above-described configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, the 39th configuration A39 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted multiple times. In this multiple operation valid state, a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (such as the 1A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146 or the 3A reception permitted state shown in Figure 152) allows the post-operation change to be executed multiple times, such that the interval between the start of output of a post-operation sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state is set to a certain time. Based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed. However, even if the specified operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, there are at least cases in which a corresponding post-operation display is not shown (see Figures 146(e), (f) and 148(c), (g), etc.). In a specific type of multiple operation enabled state (second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, such that the interval until the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, is newly outputted is set to an indefinite time when the specified operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, the detection of the specified operating means (operation button 410) being in an operated state triggers the operation of one of the post-operation changes. Not only is the post-operation display made displayable, but when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state, the post-operation display HB2 corresponding to the detection of the change to an unoperated state (see Figure 149(f) and Figures 151(c), (f), etc.) is also made displayable. Furthermore, in the specific type of multiple operation valid state (second A reception permitted state), the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state, and the post-operation display (post-operation display HB2) corresponding to the detection of the change to an unoperated state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound (second A reception output sound) among the post-operation changes maintains its output state (for example, Figure 1 The timings shown in 49 (tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1, etc.) can occur as a result of the player's gameplay. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an unoperated state to an operated state, this detection triggers a change (termination) in the previously displayed post-operation display (post-operation display HB2). However, the previously outputted post-operation sound (second post-reception output sound SB2, shown in Figure 149(h)) does not change (terminate) and maintains its output state (see timings tAb2-C1 shown in Figures 149(f) and (h), and Figure 151(g), etc.).

With this configuration, in a specific type of multiple-operation enabled state (the second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149), where the interval between the start of output of the post-operation sound, one of the post-operation changes, when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state is set to an indefinite time, allowing the post-operation change to be executed multiple times, if the player performs another operation while the post-operation change is being executed, the mode of the post-operation change up to that point will be partially continued, while a change (termination) may occur in some parts. This provides a sense of tension when performing another operation, while also appropriately creating a sense of anticipation for the start of a new effect.

Furthermore, in the above-described example of presentation, the first A acceptance state may be generated as an acceptance state in which a corresponding post-operation display is shown when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, similar to the second A acceptance state. In this case, the conditions for displaying the post-operation display and the conditions for hiding it may be the same as the post-operation display HB2 described in the second A acceptance state. However, even in this case, it is desirable that the third A acceptance state be generated as an acceptance state in which a corresponding post-operation display is not shown when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state.

With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid states of the 39th configuration A39, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (such as the 1A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 146 or the 3A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 152) in which the post-operation change can be performed multiple times, the interval between when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state and when the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output is set to a certain time, the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state is used to determine the post-operation change, which is one of the post-operation changes. Although the display is made available, there are two cases: one in which the display after non-operation is not displayed even if the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (3A reception-acceptable state); and another in which, based on the detection that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an operated state, the display after operation, which is one of the changes after operation, is made available, and when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, the display after non-operation is also made available in response to the detection of the change to a non-operated state. In this case, even in the predetermined multiple operation valid state of the 39th configuration A39 (the 1A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 146 and the 3A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 152), a situation may occur through gameplay where the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state, a post-operation display corresponding to the detection of this unoperated state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains its output state. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an unoperated state to an operated state, this detection triggers a change in the post-operation display, which was previously in a displayed state. Conversely, the post-operation output sound, which was previously in an output state, may either change its output state according to its type (the 1A reception-accepting output sound shown in Figure 146(g)) or maintain its output state without change (the 1A reception-accepting output sound shown in Figure 146(h)).

Furthermore, in the aforementioned example, by not outputting a corresponding sound when displaying the "no operation" indicator, it becomes possible to suggest that the "no operation" indicator was displayed not because the device was in an operational state, but because it was in a non-operational state.

Furthermore, in the above-described example, when the specific operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, is newly output is set to an indefinite time. This specific type of multiple-operation enabled state, in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, includes a special acceptance-allowed state (second A acceptance-allowed state).

Furthermore, in a special acceptance-permitting state (second A acceptance-permitting state), the type of post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that changes (terminates) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state can be started to output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not change (terminate) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is in an output state or not. The post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) of a type that does not change (terminate) when the operation button (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state is designed so that it does not start outputting independently when the post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) of a type that terminates when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state is not in output state, but can start outputting when it is in output state (or simultaneously). This allows for a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the special acceptance-allowing state (second A acceptance-allowing state) of the 39th configuration A39, even if the output conditions for the second post-reception output sound SB2 are met while the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated midway, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, while the 39th configuration A39 assumes that the operating means targeted for operation in the multiple operation enabled state is the same operating means, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 39th configuration A39 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 39th configuration A39, it is possible to have only one of the 1st A acceptance state and the 3rd A acceptance state. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain at least some of the above-described configurations and effects.

Furthermore, for example, the 40th configuration A40 includes a multiple operation valid state in which multiple operation receptions for a specific operation means (operation button 410) are permitted multiple times, and in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (such as the 1A reception permitted state shown in Figure 146 or the 3A reception permitted state shown in Figure 152) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times in such a way that the interval until the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, is newly outputted when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state is always less than or equal to a specific time, the post-operation display, one of the post-operation changes, can be displayed based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operation state. However, even if the specified operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, there are at least cases in which the corresponding post-operation display is not shown (see Figures 146(e), (f) and 148(c), (g), etc.). In a specific type of multiple operation valid state (second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149) in which the post-operation change can be performed multiple times, such that the interval until the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, is newly output when the specified operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state is always longer than the specified time, the operation after Not only is the post-operation display, which is one of the changes, made displayable, but when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state, the post-operation display HB2 (see Figure 149(f) and Figures 151(c), (f), etc.) corresponding to the detection of the change to an unoperated state is also made displayable. Furthermore, in the specific type of multiple operation valid state (2A reception-allowed state), the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state, and the post-operation display (post-operation display HB2) corresponding to the detection of the change to an unoperated state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound (2A reception-after output sound) among the post-operation changes maintains its output state (for example) For example, the timings tAb2-B3 to tAb2-C1 shown in Figure 149 can occur as a result of the player's gameplay. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an inactive state to an active state, this detection triggers a change (termination) in the previously displayed non-operation display (non-operation display HB2). However, the previously outputted operation sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) does not change (terminate), and its output state is maintained (see timings tAb2-C1 shown in Figures 149(f) and (h), and Figure 151(g), etc.).

With this configuration, in a specific type of multiple-operation enabled state (the second A reception-allowed state shown in Figure 149) where the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, such that the interval until the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, is newly outputted when the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state is always longer than the specific time, if the player performs another operation while the post-operation change is being executed, the mode of the post-operation change up to that point will be partially continued, while a change (termination) may occur in some parts. This provides a sense of tension when performing another operation, while also suitably creating a sense of anticipation for the start of a new effect.

Furthermore, in the above-described example of presentation, the first A acceptance state may be generated as an acceptance state in which a corresponding post-operation display is shown when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, similar to the second A acceptance state. In this case, the conditions for displaying the post-operation display and the conditions for hiding it may be the same as the post-operation display HB2 described in the second A acceptance state. However, even in this case, it is desirable that the third A acceptance state be generated as an acceptance state in which a corresponding post-operation display is not shown when the specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state.

With this configuration, in the multiple operation valid states of the 40th configuration A40, in a predetermined type of multiple operation valid state (such as the 1A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 146 or the 3A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 152) in which the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, the interval until the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-operation changes, is newly output when the specific operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state is always less than or equal to a specific time, and the post-operation change can be executed multiple times, based on the detection that the specific operation means (operation button 410) is in the operating state, Although a post-operation display is made available, there are two cases: one in which a post-operation display is not displayed even if a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state (3A reception-acceptable state); and another in which, based on the detection that the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an operated state, a post-operation display, which is one of the post-operation changes, is made available, and when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an operated state to an unoperated state, a post-operation display corresponding to the detection of the change to an unoperated state is also made available. In this case, even in the predetermined multiple operation valid state of the 40th configuration A40 (the 1A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 146 or the 3A reception-accepting state shown in Figure 152), a situation may occur through gameplay where the specific operating means (operation button 410) is in an unoperated state, a post-operation display corresponding to the detection of this unoperated state is displayed, and the post-operation output sound among the post-operation changes maintains its output state. In this situation, when it is detected that the specific operating means (operation button 410) has changed from an unoperated state to an operated state, this detection triggers a change in the post-operation display, which was previously in a displayed state. Conversely, the post-operation output sound, which was previously in an output state, may either change its output state according to its type (the 1A reception-accepting output sound shown in Figure 146(g)) or maintain its output state without change (the 1A reception-accepting output sound shown in Figure 146(h)).

Furthermore, in the aforementioned example, by not outputting a corresponding sound when displaying the "no operation" indicator, it becomes possible to suggest that the "no operation" indicator was displayed not because the device was in an operational state, but because it was in a non-operational state.

Furthermore, in the above-described performance example, when the specific operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the interval until the post-operation output sound, one of the post-operation changes, is newly output is always longer than the specific time, allowing the post-operation change to be executed multiple times. This specific type of multiple-operation enabled state includes a special acceptance-allowed state (second A acceptance-allowed state).

Furthermore, in a special acceptance-permitting state (second A acceptance-permitting state), the type of post-operation output sound (first post-operation output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) that changes (terminates) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state can be started to output regardless of whether the type of post-operation output sound (second post-operation output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) that does not change (terminate) when a specific operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state is in an output state or not. The post-operation output sound (second reception output sound SB2 shown in Figure 149(h)) of a type that does not change (terminate) when the operation button (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state is designed so that it does not start outputting independently when the post-operation output sound (first reception output sound SA2 shown in Figure 149(g)) of a type that terminates when the specific operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state is not in output state, but can start outputting when it is in output state (or simultaneously). This allows for a moderate sense of tension while encouraging interruption of operation.

Furthermore, in the special acceptance-allowing state (second A acceptance-allowing state) of the 40th configuration A40, even if the output conditions for the second post-reception output sound SB2 are met while the specific operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state (timing tAb2-B2 shown in Figure 149), the second post-reception output sound SB2 is started to output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2, whereas the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state up to that point may not terminate its output state or start a new output based on the operation reception made at timing tAb2-B2. In other words, in this case, the playback state of the first post-reception output sound SA2 (here, one sound effect) that was in an output state when timing tAb2-B2 arrived is simply continued, and the playback state is not terminated midway, nor is a sound (one sound effect) based on new data started to output or restarted.

Furthermore, while the 40th configuration A40 assumes that the operating means targeted for operation in the multiple operation enabled state is the same operating means, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the "specific operating means" may be replaced with "an operating means that is represented as a simulated image display and allows multiple operations" in each multiple operation enabled state.

Furthermore, the "multiple operation valid state" related to the 40th configuration A40 may be defined as a valid period that occurs during symbol changes based on the jackpot determination.

Furthermore, in realizing the 40th configuration A40, it is also possible to provide only one of the 1st A acceptance state and the 3rd A acceptance state. Even in this case, it is possible to obtain at least some of the above-described configurations and effects.

Incidentally, some of the above configurations A1 through A40 mention "the suggestion that the presentation has noteworthy value" as an effect, but it is not essential that the presentation actually possesses noteworthy value. It is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be maintained simply by providing a presentation that suggests "a valuable presentation may be executed."

Furthermore, configurations A1 through A40 described above may be partially adapted from each other.

Next, we will explain the case where the pachinko machine 1 includes "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A" and "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 75-B" as well as a portion of "Configuration 1-A" to "Configuration 40-A".

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "First B Acceptance Permitted State" as the acceptance period (operation permitted state). Figure 164 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "First B Acceptance Permitted State" is generated based on the fulfillment of "Condition 1B" as the generation condition, and the player performs an operation. Figure 165 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the "First B Acceptance Permitted State" is generated.

In this example, for the sake of clarity, although the names of the acceptance states differ, it is assumed that the "First B Acceptance State" is implemented as the "First A Acceptance State (see Figures 146-148)" described above. Therefore, in describing the configuration of the "First B Acceptance State" below, the component numbers such as "B," "Sα," and "Sβ" are described as representing the same configuration as the component numbers such as "A," "SA," and "SB" described above for the "Second A Acceptance State."

In other words, while the "First A Acceptance State" described above assumes a case where a special mode (mode JA1c) appears as a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance, the "First B Acceptance State" assumes a case where the state in which operation acceptance is permitted ends without any special mode appearing as a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance. The post-acceptance changes and other performance details related to the "First B Acceptance State" are basically the same as those described in the "First A Acceptance State" above. However, as will be discussed later, this example assumes a case where no special mode (for example, a mode corresponding to mode JA1c described above) appears as a post-acceptance change, and the First A operation unit (referred to as the "First B operation unit" in this example) continues to be in operation even after the state in which operation acceptance is permitted ends.

Furthermore, the "First B Acceptance State" does not necessarily have to occur as the "First A Acceptance State" described above. For example, it may occur as a different type of acceptance state from the "First A Acceptance State" (a different type of acceptance state with different effects corresponding to the acceptance state, such as a status indication display or a change after acceptance, or with a different progression of effects). In this case, when describing the configuration of the "First B Acceptance State" below, it goes without saying that the component numbers, etc., expressed as "B," "Sα," and "Sβ" will be described as indicating a completely different configuration from the component numbers, etc., expressed as "A," "SA," and "SB" when describing the configuration of the "First A Acceptance State" described above.

In other words, if the starting conditions are met (holding is completed) and the "1st B variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement performance determination) corresponding to the "1st B variation pattern". After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ (such as performance depiction according to the 1st B variation pattern, or sound output of BGM according to the 1st B variation pattern (such as normal BGM playback when not in a reach)), and within the execution period of this variation performance, it additionally executes a performance (pre-announcement performance) according to the result of the pre-announcement performance determination, in addition to the performance of the selected "1st B variation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 164(b), during the execution period of the variation effect related to the "1st B variation pattern," based on the arrival of timing tBa2, which is 1B time elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the fulfillment of "Condition 1B"), the above-mentioned 1st B reception permission state (valid period) is made possible, allowing for "reception of operations to the 1st B operation unit regarding changes after 1st B reception (such as the 1st B effect status indication display JB1, the 1st B rapid-fire display HB1, and the 1st B reception output sounds Sα1, Sβ1, etc.)" (the situation shown in Figure 165(a)).

In this embodiment, the "first B operation unit" that allows operation reception in the first B reception acceptance state is set as the operation button 410, and multiple operation receptions are permitted before the first B reception acceptance state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in Figures 164(b) to (e), when the first B acceptance state occurs, a mock image display MG-B1 that mimics the target of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the first B operation unit), a message display MB1 related to the operation on the target of operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the first B operation unit), and a status indication display JB1 that can suggest the degree of progress of the performance over the entire period after the operation is accepted are displayed when a timing tBa1 arrives that is before the first B acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance to the first B operation unit is accepted). In addition, at the timing tBa1 in this example, the audible output of the first B operation-related output sound OB1 that prompts the player to take action is also started. Therefore, during the period from timing tBa1 to tBa2 in this example, even though operation-related displays prompting multiple operation attempts to the operation button 410 (such as the "Press Button Repeatedly!" message displayed in Figure 165) are shown, and the first B operation-related output sound OB1 is audibly output, the operation to the operation button 410 will not be judged as a valid operation (the operation will not be accepted).

However, the mock image display MG-B1, message display MB1, status indication display JB1, and first B operation-related output sound OB1 do not necessarily have to appear before the first B reception-acceptance state occurs. They may be displayed simultaneously with the occurrence of the first B reception-acceptance state, or slightly delayed thereafter. In particular, the status indication display JB1 may not be displayed until the first operation reception is made to the first B operation unit in the first B reception-acceptance state; that is, it may be implemented to appear and be displayed only after an operation reception is made to the first B operation unit. Furthermore, the timing of the display of the mock image display MG-B1, the timing of the display of the message display MB1, and the timing of the start of the audible output of the first B operation-related output sound OB1 may be different from each other. For example, the message display MB1 may be displayed before the mock image display MG-B1.

The image display MG-B1, message display MB1, and status indication display JB1 will continue to be displayed after the start of display, regardless of the operating status of the 1B operation unit, until at least the 1B acceptance state ends. In contrast, the 1B operation-related output sound OB1 is made inaudible during the 1B acceptance state, but it may be stipulated that it not necessarily terminate midway.

Furthermore, in the first B acceptance state in this example, when it occurs (in this example, at timing tBa2, but there may be a slight delay before or after), the first B operation prompt light LB1 is illuminated to prompt the player to take action. In this example, the first B operation prompt light LB1 is the light-emitting part of the first B operation unit (operation button 410), but the first B operation prompt light LB1 may be the light-emitting part located in a different part of the first B operation unit (operation button 410), as long as it prompts the player to take action on the operation button 410 (for example, a mode that only appears when operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is permitted). In this case, it goes without saying that the first B operation unit (operation button 410) does not necessarily need to have a light-emitting part.

The first B operation-promoting light-emitting LB1 continues to emit light regardless of the operating status of the first B operation unit, at least until the first B acceptance state ends.

Here, the "Mock Image Display MG-B1" corresponding to the first B acceptance state uses a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme. However, it is also possible to selectively use and display a color scheme determined based on the results of, for example, performance judgment, from among multiple color schemes.

Furthermore, the "Mock Image Display MG-B1" corresponding to the first B acceptance state displays a motion image that simulates the "operation receiving section," which is the target of the operation. This motion image is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α), followed sequentially in the manners shown in Figures 144(β) to (σ). This motion image is considered a single periodic change, and this periodic change repeats with a predetermined period of 1B time. As will be described later, this period of 1B time is set to a shorter time (short cycle) than the period used in many other acceptance states. Therefore, in this first B acceptance state, the "operation receiving section" is depicted as rapidly moving up and down within its movable range.

Furthermore, in the first B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 164(c), (d) and 165(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-B1, a message related to the acceptance of operation to the first B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410) is displayed (in this case, the message display MB1, which displays "Defeat the bat! Press the button repeatedly!!").

However, in the first B acceptance state, it is sufficient that an operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operation requests to the first B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410) is displayed. For example, if at least one of a mock image display and a message display is displayed as the operation-related display, it is not necessary to perform both.

Furthermore, in the first B reception-accepting state, as shown in Figures 164(c) and (d), if no operation is received from the first B operation unit, the mock image display and message display will continue to be displayed until timing tBa3 arrives, at which point they will be hidden. Therefore, while the first B reception-accepting state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock image display MG-B1) indicating the remaining time until timing tBa3 arrives, when the first B reception-accepting state ends, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display is not necessarily required.

Furthermore, if the "Mock Image Display MG-B1" corresponding to the first B acceptance state is to be displayed before the timing tBa2 in which the first B acceptance state occurs, the periodic changes and gauge image changes may be delayed until timing tBa2 arrives. In other words, in this case, the "Mock Image Display MG-B1" corresponding to the first B acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α) until timing tBa2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the first B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 164(e) and 165(a), the status indication display JB1 corresponding to the first B acceptance state displays an ally character (here, ally character YS-B1) corresponding to the type of the first B acceptance state, an enemy character (here, enemy character BOSS-B1 depicted as a giant bat) corresponding to the type of the first B acceptance state, and a gauge image HP-B1 showing its remaining HP gauge. In the 1B input acceptance state, the likelihood of a big win is suggested through a visual effect that indicates whether the ally character YS-B1 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-B1 (whether the gauge image HP-B1 can be reduced to 0) through multiple inputs to the 1B control unit. In other words, each time an input (input acceptance) is made to the 1B control unit (in this case, the operation button 410), a visual effect may be triggered in which the ally character YS-B1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B1. In this example, the situation indication display JB1 shows the ally character YS-B1, the enemy character BOSS-B1, and the gauge image HP-B1. However, it is not necessary to display all of these; the display can indicate the status of the operation as long as at least one of the ally character YS-B1, enemy character BOSS-B1, and gauge image HP-B1 is displayed.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 164, it is assumed that the first operation request is received by the "First B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBa2-A1 within the First B Acceptance State (the performance situation shown in Figure 165(b)).

In this example, if the first operation is received by the "First B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBa2-A1 within the First B Acceptance State, a "Post-First B Acceptance Change (Post-First B Acceptance Performance)" corresponding to that operation will occur, as shown in Figures 164(f) and (h) (the performance situation shown in Figure 165(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "First B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBa2-A1 within the First B Acceptance Acceptance state, as shown in Figures 164(f) and (h), a "First B Acceptance Post-Output Sound" corresponding to the operation received by the "First B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "First B Acceptance Post-Display" corresponding to the operation received by the "First B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed.

In other words, when an operation is received once for the "first B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" in the first B acceptance state, a video display is shown once as the "display after first B acceptance" as shown in Figure 165(b), showing "ally character YS-B1" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B1" with ice magic (smoke effect, generation of ice magic, etc.). However, as will be described later, in the first B acceptance state, based on the result of the performance judgment when the operation is received, there is a possibility that "enemy character BOSS-B1" may be injured, the strength of the ice magic may increase, or the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-B1 may decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance judgment, etc.). If the animation progresses in this way, the state in which the operation was received by the 1B control unit afterward (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-B1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B1" with ice magic) will appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed animation (see Figures 164(e), (f), and 165(f), etc.). After the animation progresses in this way, as long as the 1B input acceptance state continues, the degree of progression of the animation will not revert to the state before progression. Therefore, even if the 1B control unit is received again after the single video display that has changed to the progressed animation has finished, the state in which the operation was received by the 1B control unit (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-B1" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B1" with ice magic) may appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed animation. The game's presentation could be designed to suggest a higher probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot as the story progresses.

However, in the first B reception-accepting state, the degree of performance may not be set for the performance content as a post-reception change in response to an operation reception to the first B operation unit. Instead, each time an operation reception is made to the first B operation unit, the first B event (which may be just a display, just a sound, just light, or just a movable part movement) as a post-reception change may be repeatedly executed (occurred). In this case, it goes without saying that the status indication display JB1 will no longer be displayed.

Furthermore, in this example, when an operation is received once for the "first B operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the first B acceptance state, in addition to the "first B acceptance display" described above, a first acceptance output sound Sα1 may be output as the "first B acceptance output sound," as shown in Figure 164(h). The first acceptance output sound Sα1 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-B1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic (such as smoke effects and the generation of ice magic)" that appears as the "first B acceptance display." Also, as will be described later, there is a possibility that a second acceptance output sound Sβ1 will be output as the "first B acceptance output sound." The second acceptance output sound Sβ1 in this example is output when the content of the "first B acceptance display" progresses. In this document, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-reception display. However, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that the player has performed an operation, and when the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it should suggest that the first B operation unit is being maintained in an operational state.

Furthermore, in this example, the above-mentioned timing tBa2-A1 is assumed to occur when the first B operation-related output sound OB1 is in the output state and the first B operation-promoting light LB1 is in the illumination state, as shown in Figures 164(g) and (j). However, at timing tBa2-A1, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 is not made inaudible, nor is the first B operation-promoting light LB1 made non-illuminating, triggered by the reception of an operation to the "first B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)".

In other words, in this example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 is such that, regardless of how many operations are received for the "first B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" while the first B operation-related output sound OB1 is being audibly output, and regardless of what judgment result is obtained (even if the first B acceptance state is terminated early), the audible state will not end as a result of the operation reception (it will be output for a predetermined amount of time regardless of the operation reception). In contrast, the first B operation-promoting light LB1 in this example is configured such that when an operation is received from the "first B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" while the first B operation-promoting light LB1 is in the illumination state, the illumination state of the first B operation-promoting light LB1 may or may not terminate upon receiving the operation. In this case, the illumination state of the first B operation-promoting light LB1 is terminated prematurely only when the "state in which operation reception to the first B operation unit is permitted (first B reception permitted state)" is terminated prematurely (before timing tBa2-C2) upon receiving an operation from the "first B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)".

Thus, in the first B input acceptance state, each time an input is received by the "first B operation unit (in this case, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-B1" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B1" and its sound effects are displayed. That is, through multiple attacks by "ally character YS-B1," the HP of "enemy character BOSS-B1" decreases (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-B1" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests a high level of expectation. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-B1" is not defeated, it suggests a low level of expectation.

However, the presentation content for the first B acceptance state is merely an example, and it may be implemented by substituting other content. For example, as a post-acceptance change corresponding to the first B acceptance state, if there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to the operation acceptance (e.g., the start or end of lamp illumination, or the termination of audible output of a sound that is in output state), it is not necessary to necessarily execute "post-acceptance display" or "post-acceptance output sound." Even with such a configuration, the player can understand that the operation acceptance has been properly performed.

This example, as shown in Figure 164(a), assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the first B operation unit), initiated at timing tBa2-A1, continues until timing tBa2-A2.

In this regard, the first B acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (first B operation unit) in an operating state, a corresponding post-acceptance change (for example, at least one such as a post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance illumination, or post-acceptance mechanism operation) is executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated)." Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 164(a), during the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 (the period during which the first B operation unit is maintained in an operating state), multiple operation acceptances are made to the first B operation unit, and a corresponding post-acceptance change (for example, at least one such as a post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, post-acceptance illumination, or post-acceptance mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

As described above, when an operation request is received by the 1B operation unit in the 1B reception-accepting state, the display shown after the 1B reception, as shown in Figure 165(b), displays an animation (one video) of the ally character YS-B1 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic (including smoke effects and the generation of ice magic). Therefore, from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2, when the so-called auto-click function is activated, this "one video" will be played multiple times.

Furthermore, as described above, when an operation is received by the 1B operation unit in the 1B reception-accepting state, the 1B reception-after output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to the "1B reception-after display" which shows "ally character YS-B1 attacking enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic (such as smoke effects and the generation of ice magic)." Therefore, during the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated, in addition to the "single video display," the sound effect corresponding to such a "single video display" will be played multiple times.

Here, in the first B acceptance state, when the operation unit (first B operation unit) is maintained in operation state and the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) is activated, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic (one video display) and the corresponding sound effect (first B post-acceptance output sound) are newly executed as post-acceptance changes at regular intervals (predetermined times).

Furthermore, in the first B reception permission state in this example, when the operation unit (first B operation unit) is maintained in operation state and the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) is activated, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic (one video display) and the sound effect corresponding to this "one video display" (first B reception output sound) can be executed multiple times as the above-mentioned post-reception changes. However, in this case, the interval until the execution of the post-reception change in response to the above detection (the interval from when the previous post-reception change is executed until the execution of the next post-reception change) is always set to be less than or equal to a specific time (for example, 1 second).

In other words, in this case, from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 164, a "single video display (one of the changes after acceptance)" of the ally character YS-B1 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic is newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button function. This repeated display of a "single video display" is represented in the figure as "repeated button display HB1a".

Similarly, in the example shown in Figure 164, during the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (the first B post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes) is newly output at regular intervals by the auto-repeated function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as "first post-reception output sound Sα1a".

In this regard, the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 164 assumes a scenario where, although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the first B acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, neither the "Status Indication Display JB1 (see Figure 164(e))" which indicates the status of operation in the first B acceptance state, nor the "Second Post-Acceptance Output Sound (see Figure 164(i))" which indicates the status of operation in the first B acceptance state, will change or be initiated in response to operation acceptance. Furthermore, during this period, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 will not be terminated prematurely and will maintain its output state, nor will the first B operation-promoting light emission LB1 be terminated and will maintain its emission state.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 164, the display of elements such as the "ice-based magic attack" and "smoke effect" shown in Figure 165, and the output of corresponding sound effects, are repeatedly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button-pressing function (the changes after reception are repeatedly executed at regular intervals) (repeated button-pressing display HB1a, first reception-after output sound Sα1a). However, no change occurs in the "situation indication display JB1 (see Figure 164(e))." This allows the player to confirm the same performance content as when performing monotonous repetitive operations, or whether the performance content has not progressed, without having to perform monotonous repetitive operations, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game effectively.

Furthermore, regarding the "Status Indication Display JB1 (see Figure 164(e))", at least one of the following may be changed in response to the input. However, in this case, it is necessary to change to a different form than the "form when the performance content progresses", and if the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 (the period during which the first B operation unit is maintained in operation state) ends without the performance content progressing (when the operation is interrupted), it will be returned to the "display form before the operation". Also, as mentioned above, the "Status Indication Display JB1 (see Figure 164(e))", such as the ally character YS-B1, enemy character BOSS-B1, and gauge image HP-B1, may not be displayed until the input is received, and may appear and be displayed only when the input is received (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2, neither the "Status Indication Display JB1 (see Figure 164(e))" which indicates the status of the operation in the first B reception-accepting state, nor the "Second Post-Reception Output Sound (see Figure 164(i))" which also indicates the status of the operation in the first B reception-accepting state, changes or starts execution in response to the operation reception. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the performance content has not progressed.

However, under conditions where the rapid-fire display HB1a is executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2), as shown in Figure 165(b), the rapid-fire display HB1a repeatedly shows "the state in which the ally character YS-B1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic (smoke effect, generation of ice magic, etc.)" at regular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JB1" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the first B acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 164 and 165 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the first B acceptance state, temporarily interrupts operations on the first B operation unit at timing tBa2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated button function.

Here, in the first B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 164(f) and 165(c), even if the operation state of the first B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tBa2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB1a, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB1a will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tBa2-A2 (even after the first B operation unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the "single video display" that was in the execution state has finished executing for a predetermined display time (or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 1B control unit is temporarily interrupted (returned to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button press function is disabled, the rapid-press indicator HB1a, which was previously active, will not immediately disappear. Therefore, it will take some time before the operation status in the 1B acceptance state becomes easily recognizable. This means that a significant amount of time is consumed in the remaining 1B acceptance state, which is expected to create a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation state of the 1B control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in the 1B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 1B control unit is interrupted and it is switched to a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HB1a is displayed, the time from the non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HB1a disappears is not set to a fixed time, but is made variable.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 1B control unit is temporarily interrupted (turned to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, before the rapid-fire indicator HB1a disappears and a situation arises where the operation status in the 1B acceptance state becomes easily recognizable. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 1B acceptance state will be consumed. Therefore, it is expected that this configuration will appropriately create a sense of tension when attempting to temporarily interrupt the operation of the 1B control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in the 1B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the first B acceptance-accepting state, as shown in Figure 164(h), the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be rendered inaudible when the operation state of the first B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tBa2-A2 to disable the auto-repeating function, similar to the rapid-fire display HB1a. In other words, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a will continue to be output even after timing tBa2-A2 (even after the first B operation unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in the execution state has finished executing and outputting for a predetermined output time (or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the first B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, the first post-reception output sound Sα1a, which was in the active state until then, will not immediately become non-output. In this case, it may appear as if the auto-repeated button function is still active, thus maintaining a desirable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the first B operation unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the first reception output sound Sα1a (first B event) is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the first reception output sound Sα1a is no longer output is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 1B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) to disable the auto-repeating function, and how long it will take for the first post-reception output sound Sα1a (1B event) to become non-output, that is, how long it will take to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeating function has been disabled. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 1B acceptance state will be consumed, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 1B control unit.

Furthermore, in the first B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the first B operation unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB1a and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a are both in the execution state, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB1a is hidden and the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a is turned off are made different, as shown in Figures 164(f), (h), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB1a is hidden is set to be before the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a is turned off, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state is hidden or turned off is indeterminate, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB1a is hidden may be before the timing at which the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a is turned off, or it may be after that timing. Furthermore, it may be possible to allow for situations where their timings coincide.

With this configuration, in the first B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the first B operation unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB1a and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a are both in operation state, a situation will occur where, as shown in Figures 164(f), (h) and 165(c), the rapid-fire indicator HB1a continues to be displayed and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a continues to be output, even though the first B operation unit is in a non-operation state. However, after this, as time elapses since the first B operation unit was left in a non-operation state, as shown in Figures 164(f), (h) and 165(d), the rapid-fire indicator HB1a, which had been displayed, will be hidden, and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a will be left in a non-output state. This allows players to easily recognize when the auto-button function is disabled, and also to easily recognize the mode of the status indicator JB1 (in this case, mode JB1a), which indicates the status of operation, such as the ally character YS-B1, the enemy character BOSS-B1, and the gauge image HP-B1 (see Figure 165(d)).

However, as described above, in the example shown in Figure 164, the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 is assumed to be a case where, although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function and multiple post-reception changes are executed, the performance content corresponding to the 1B acceptance state does not progress. Note that the 1B acceptance state does not necessarily have to occur as an acceptance state in which the performance content may progress; for example, it may be generated as an acceptance state in which only one aspect of the post-reception change is executed multiple times.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 165(d), although the mode of the situation indication display JB1 (here, mode JB1a) that suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B1, the enemy character BOSS-B1, and the gauge image HP-B1, can be easily recognized, these modes are the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 165(a)), thus suggesting that the presentation content has not progressed. Note that the modes of the situation indication display JB1 that suggest the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B1, the enemy character BOSS-B1, and the gauge image HP-B1, only need to be able to suggest that the presentation content has not progressed, and do not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 165(a)).

In this example, as shown in Figure 164(a), it is assumed that the "first B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is returned to the operation state at timing tBa2-B1 within the first B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 165(e)).

In this example, if the "first B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tBa2-B1 within the first B acceptance state, this triggers the "first B acceptance change (first B acceptance effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figures 164(f) and (h) (the effect status shown in Figure 165(e)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "First B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBa2-B1 within the First B Acceptance Acceptance State, as shown in Figures 164(f) and (h), the "First Post-Acceptance Output Sound Sα1 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "First B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "First B Post-Acceptance Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "First B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, even when operation on the 1B control unit is resumed at timing tBa2-B1 within the 1B acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 1B acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 165(e), the 1B acceptance change (such as the 1B acceptance display or 1B acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 1B acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation being accepted by the 1B control unit at timing tBa2-A1. Details of the performance are as described above, so they will not be explained here.

In this regard, the performance examples shown in Figures 164 and 165 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 1B operation unit), which began at timing tBa2-B1, is maintained until timing tBa2-B3, thereby activating the auto-continuous pressing function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3 (the period during which the first B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the first B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change corresponding to these requests (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3 (the period during which the first B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HB1a and the first post-reception output sound Sα1a) remains the same as in the case of the period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2 (see Figure 165(b)), unless the performance content progresses. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 165, the period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3 assumes that, among the multiple operation receptions performed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the first B reception permission state progresses based on the operation reception performed at timing tBa2-B2 within that period (as shown in the performance status in Figure 165(f)).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 164, during the period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3, the "change after 1B reception (performance after 1B reception)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has not progressed, whereas during the period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3, the "change after 1B reception (performance after 1B reception)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed.

More specifically, during the period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3, at "timing tBa2-B2," which is the timing when the performance content progresses, as shown in Figures 164(e) and 165(f), a display change is performed based on the reception of an operation to the first B operation unit, changing the state of the status indication display JB1, which indicates the status of the operation, from the previously displayed "state JB1a" to a different "state JB1b." Here, as shown in Figure 165(f), the enemy character BOSS-B1 changes to a state in which it is injured, the ice magic used by the ally character YS-B1 changes to a state of higher intensity, and the gauge image HP-B1 changes to a state in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased. With this configuration, the change in the state indication JB1 suggests that the performance content corresponding to the first B acceptance state has progressed due to the operation reception (by the auto-repeated button function) performed at timing tBa2-B2 (and the result of the performance judgment based on that operation).

After the performance has progressed in this way, when an operation request is received by the 1B operation unit, the "Display after 1B reception" will show the "single video display" in an advanced state of the performance, as shown in Figure 165(f), such as "ally character YS-B1 attacks the injured enemy character BOSS-B1 using increased-strength ice magic."

In this example, once the animation progresses, as long as the 1B input acceptance state remains active, the degree of animation progress will not revert to its pre-progress state. Therefore, even when the 1B input unit receives another input request after the completion of the animation display showing the advanced animation, the animation will still appear as the animation display showing the advanced animation (in this case, "ally character YS-B1" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B1" with ice magic).

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3, when the so-called auto-click function is activated, the "single video display" in which such a change in appearance occurs will be played multiple times by the auto-click function during the period from timing tBa2-B2 onward, when the performance content has progressed.

Furthermore, even during the period after timing tBa2-B2, when the animation progresses, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B1 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B1 with ice magic (one video display) is restarted at regular intervals (a predetermined time, the same time as before the change) as a post-reception change. Therefore, the "one video display" of the progressed animation sequence is also restarted at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button function. This repeated display (multiple post-reception changes) of the "one video display (one post-reception change)" of the progressed sequence is represented in the diagram as "Repeated Button Display HB1b".

Thus, in the performance display device 1600 according to this example, when "timing tBa2-B2," which is the timing when the performance content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 164(e), (f) and 165(e), (f), the mode of the status indication display JB1 changes from "mode JB1a" to "mode JB1b," and the mode of the rapid-fire display HB1 also changes from "mode HB1a" to "mode HB1b." From this point onward, while the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled (timing tBa2-B2 to tBa2-B3), the status indication display JB1 will be displayed in "mode JB1b," and the rapid-fire display HB1 will be executed in "mode HB1b."

In this example, the mode of the rapid-fire indicator HB1 is changed according to the progress of the performance content, but it is also possible to keep it constant. That is, even if the rapid-fire indicator HB1 continues to run in a single mode regardless of the progress of the performance content, the player can still confirm through the rapid-fire indicator HB1 that the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) operations have been accepted. Furthermore, the player can also confirm the degree of progress of the performance content through the mode of the status indication indicator JB1. As mentioned above, the first B acceptance state may be implemented as an acceptance state of a type where the progress of the performance content itself cannot occur.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is received once at the "first B operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the first B acceptance state, in addition to the "first B acceptance display," a first acceptance output sound may be output as the "first B acceptance output sound," as shown in Figure 164(h). Furthermore, as described above, in addition to the first acceptance output sound Sα1, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," a second acceptance output sound Sβ1, which suggests that the performance content corresponding to the first B acceptance state has progressed, can also be output, as shown in Figure 164(i).

Therefore, in the period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3 in the example shown in Figure 164, when timing tBa2-B2, which is the timing when the performance content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figure 164(i), the second post-reception output sound Sβ1 is output in mode Sβ1b-1 based on the fact that the operation was received (performance progress) at timing tBa2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the performance content has progressed through the output mode of the post-reception output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-reception output sound Sβ1 to be longer than that of the first post-reception output sound Sα1, which corresponds to one instance of operation reception.

However, in this example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is implemented to be output in the same manner before and after the performance progresses. Therefore, when timing tBa2-B2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, the first post-reception output sound Sα1, as a new "sound effect," begins outputting based on the operation being received. However, its manner of output is the same as when the operation was received before timing tBa2-B2 (the execution manner is the same whether or not the performance progresses at timing tBa2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tBa2-B1 to timing tBa2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is activated, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (first post-reception output sound Sα1) will be newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the diagram as "first post-reception output sound Sα1a." The output manner of the first post-reception output sound Sα1a during this period is the same as in the case of the "period from timing tBa2-A1 to timing tBa2-A2" described above, so an explanation will be omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-reception output sound Sα1a was not changed according to the progression of the performance content, but it may be changed according to the progression of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HB1b is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3), as shown in Figure 165(f), the rapid-fire display HB1b repeatedly shows "ally character YS-B1 attacking wounded enemy character BOSS-B1 with high-intensity ice magic (smoke effect, generation of ice magic, etc.)" at regular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JB1" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the first B acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 164 and 165 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the first B acceptance state, interrupts operations on the first B operation unit again at timing tBa2-B3 and disables the auto-repeated button function.

As described above, in the first B acceptance state, even if the operation state of the first B control unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the first B acceptance state is continuing, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB1, which was in an execution state up to that point, will not be hidden as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figures 164(f) and 165(g), even if the operation state of the first B control unit is interrupted at timing tBa2-B3, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB1b will continue to be in execution state even after timing tBa2-B3 (even after the first B control unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the "single video display" that was in an execution state is executed for a predetermined display time and finishes displaying, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, similar to the case of the rapid-fire indicator HB1a, if the operation on the 1B control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HB1b is displayed, the time from the non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HB1b is hidden is not set to a fixed time, but is made variable.

Furthermore, as described above, in the first B acceptance-allowed state, even if the operation state of the first B control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the first B acceptance-allowed state is continuing, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a, which was in an output state until then, will not be switched to a non-output state as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figure 164(h), even if the operation state of the first B control unit is interrupted at timing tBa2-B3, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a will continue to be output even after timing tBa2-B3 (even after the first B control unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has finished executing and outputting for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

However, the timing tBa2-B3 shown in Figure 164 assumes a scenario where the operation state of the first B operation unit is interrupted while the second post-reception output sound Sβ1, which was started to output at timing tBa2-B2, continues to output.

In this regard, in the first B reception acceptance state, the second post-reception output sound Sβ1, like the first post-reception output sound Sα1, does not terminate its output state (become inaudible) when the operation state of the first B operation unit is interrupted (become non-operated). Therefore, as shown in Figure 164(i), even if the operation state of the first B operation unit is interrupted at timing tBa2-B3, the second post-reception output sound Sβ1b-1 will continue to be output for a predetermined duration after timing tBa2-B3 (even after the first B operation unit becomes non-operated), or for a predetermined duration from the non-operation state.

In this example, if the operation on the first B control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the first reception output sound Sα1 is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the first reception output sound Sα1a is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate. Similarly, for the second reception output sound Sβ1, if the operation on the first B control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the second reception output sound Sβ1 is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the second reception output sound Sβ1 is put into a non-output state is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 1B control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, before the first post-reception output sound Sα1 (1B event) and the second post-reception output sound Sβ1 (1B event) become inaudible, that is, before it can be more reliably confirmed that the auto-repeated button function has been disabled. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 1B reception-acceptable state will be consumed, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 1B control unit.

Furthermore, in the first B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, even if the operation state of the first B operation unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB1b and the first post-reception output sound Sα1a are both in operation, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB1b is hidden and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα1a is turned off are different, as shown in Figures 164(f), (h), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB1b is hidden is shown to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα1a is turned off, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state is hidden or turned off is indeterminate, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB1b is hidden may be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα1a is turned off, or it may be after that timing. Furthermore, it may be possible to allow the timing of each to be the same. Note that this relationship between the rapid-fire indicator HB1b and the first post-reception output sound Sα1a also holds true between the rapid-fire indicator HB1b and the second post-reception output sound Sβ1, and between the first post-reception output sound Sα1a and the second post-reception output sound Sβ1; the same applies to other examples.

With this configuration, in the first B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the first B operation unit is interrupted (turned into a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB1b, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a, and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1b-1 are all in the execution state, then, as shown in Figures 164(f), (h), (i) and 165(g), the rapid-fire indicator HB1b continues to be displayed, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1a continues to be output, and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1b-1 continues to be output, while the first B operation unit is in a non-operation state. However, after this, due to the passage of time since the first B operation unit was turned into a non-operation state (time elapsed from timing tBa2-B3), the rapid-fire indicator HB1b, which had been displayed, will be turned off, as shown in Figures 164(f) and 165(h). This allows players to easily recognize when the auto-button function is disabled, and also to easily recognize the state of the situation indication display JB1 (in this case, the state JB1b where the performance content has progressed), which indicates the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B1, the enemy character BOSS-B1, and the gauge image HP-B1 (see Figure 165(h)).

Furthermore, under normal circumstances, both the first post-reception output sound Sα1a and the second post-reception output sound Sβ1 would terminate (become inaudible) after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the first B operation unit was deactivated (time elapsed from timing tBa2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in Figure 164(a), it is assumed that the first B control unit is activated again at timing tBa2-B3 or later, and both the first post-reception output sound Sα1a and the second post-reception output sound Sβ1 are audible (before the output state ends), at timing tBa2-C1 (the performance situation shown in Figure 165(i)).

In this example, if the "first B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tBa2-C1 within the first B acceptance state, this will trigger the "first B acceptance change (first B acceptance effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figures 164(f) and (h), similar to the case of timing tBa2-B1 described above (the effect shown in Figure 165(i)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "First B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBa2-C1 within the First B Acceptance Acceptance State, as shown in Figures 164(f) and (h), the "First Post-Acceptance Output Sound Sα1 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "First B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "First B Post-Acceptance Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "First B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, when operation to the 1B control unit is resumed at timing tBa2-C1 within the 1B acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 1B acceptance state does not progress from the mode shown in Figure 165(h) (the first stage of progression). Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 165(i), the 1B acceptance change (such as the 1B acceptance display or 1B acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 1B acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation acceptance to the 1B control unit at timing tBa-B2. Details of the performance are as described above, so they will not be explained here.

However, as mentioned above, this example assumes that the timing tBa2-C1, when operation on the first B control unit is restarted, occurs while both the first post-reception output sound Sα1 and the second post-reception output sound Sβ1 are audible.

In this regard, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 terminates its previous output state and initiates a new output triggered by the new operation reception, based on the fact that the operation on the first B control unit has resumed at timing tBa2-C1 (the operation has been received). In contrast, the second post-reception output sound Sβ1 continues its previous output state without any change, based on the fact that the operation on the first B control unit has resumed at timing tBa2-C1 (the operation has been received).

With this configuration, in the first B reception-accepting state, while the first B reception-post-output sound corresponding to the operation reception is being output, when an operation reception is made for the first B operation unit that was previously in a non-operational state, there are two possibilities: the first B reception-post-output sound may end (first reception-post-output sound Sα1) or it may not end (second reception-post-output sound Sβ1). This allows for a suitable sense of tension to be provided when the first B operation unit, which was in a non-operational state, is brought back into operation. Furthermore, in the first B acceptance-permitted state, in addition to cases where operation is accepted to the first B operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 is output and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 is output, it goes without saying that operation may also be accepted to the first B operation unit when the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 is output and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 is not output, or when the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 is not output and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 is output.

Furthermore, the continuous press indicator HB1 may also be configured to remain in a continuous press state at timing tBa2-C1. In this case, when an operation is received from the 1B operation unit, which had been in a non-operational state until then, it is desirable that the previous "single video display" that was in progress is terminated prematurely, and a new display (single video display) triggered by the new operation is started in its place.

Furthermore, the performance examples shown in Figures 164 and 165 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 1st B operation unit), which began at timing tBa2-C1, continues even after timing tBa2-C2 (the timing when the 1st B operation unit's acceptance state ends), thus enabling the auto-repeated button press function until timing tBa2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBa2-C1 to timing tBa2-C2 (the period during which the first B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the first B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change corresponding to these requests (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBa2-C1 to timing tBa2-C2 (the period during which the first B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HB1b and the first post-reception output sound Sα1a) will be the same as in the case of the period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3 (see Figure 165(f)) as described above, unless further development of the performance content occurs. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 164, during the period from timing tBa2-C1 to timing tBa2-C2, if the performance content corresponding to the first B acceptance state progresses further (a second stage of progress occurs) based on the operation reception (such as the result of the performance judgment) performed at a predetermined timing within that period, based on the operation reception performed at a predetermined timing within that period, the performance progress described above will appear, referring to Figures 146 and 148. However, since the details of that performance are also described above, we will omit the explanation here.

However, as stated above, the first B acceptance state in this example is based on the assumption that it is realized as the "first A acceptance state" described above. Unlike the case of the "first A acceptance state" described above (Figures 146 and 148), it assumes that no special characteristics (for example, characteristics corresponding to the above-mentioned characteristic JA1c) appear as post-acceptance changes.

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 164, during the period from timing tBa2-C1 to timing tBa2-C2, the "First B Reception Change (First B Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception will be executed multiple times in a manner in which the performance content progresses only once (see Figure 165(i)). When timing tBa2-C2 arrives, the auto-repeated button function, which had been enabled up to that point, will be disabled.

In this regard, when the auto-button rapid-fire function is disabled at timings tBa2-A2 and tBa2-B3, the rapid-fire indicator HB1, which was previously displayed due to the auto-button rapid-fire function, is not automatically hidden as a result (it is hidden after an indefinite period of time after the auto-button rapid-fire function is disabled). However, when the auto-button rapid-fire function is disabled at timing tBa2-C2, the rapid-fire indicator HB1, which was previously displayed due to the auto-button rapid-fire function, is automatically hidden (after a certain period of time, e.g., 0 seconds, from the time the operation is received).

Furthermore, in this example, when the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timings tBa2-A2 and tBa2-B3, the first post-reception output sound Sα1a, which had been output by the auto-repeated button function, is not made inaudible as a result (it is made inaudible after an indefinite time has passed since the auto-repeated button function was disabled). However, when the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timing tBa2-C2, the first post-reception output sound Sα1a, which had been output by the auto-repeated button function, is made inaudible as a result (after a certain time has passed since the operation was received). With this configuration, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not the first B reception permission state has ended by observing the output status of the first post-reception output sound Sα1a after the auto-repeated button function is disabled.

Furthermore, in this example, we assumed that timing tBa2-C2 occurs after the second post-reception output sound Sβ1b-1, which began outputting at timing tBa2-B2, has become inaudible. However, it is also possible to consider cases where timing tBa2-C2 occurs while the second post-reception output sound Sβ1b-1 is still being output audibly. In this case, however, unlike the "first post-reception output sound Sα1a," it is desirable that the output state of the "second post-reception output sound Sβ1," which is in the middle of execution, is not terminated when timing tBa2-C2 occurs, but rather maintained until its remaining execution time is consumed.

Furthermore, regarding the first post-reception output sound Sα1a, when the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timing tBa2-C2, it may be possible to either make it inaudible (within a certain time from the time the operation is received) or not make it inaudible. For example, if it is made inaudible when the probability of winning a jackpot is high, but not made inaudible when the probability of winning a jackpot is low, it becomes possible to indicate the probability of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, regarding "Constant Press Indicator HB1" and "First Input Output Sound Sα1," if timing tBa2-C2 arrives while they are in the middle of execution, they may be kept running until the remaining execution time is consumed.

In this example, when timing tBa2-C2 arrives, the 1B operation prompt light LB1, which prompts the player to take action, is deactivated. That is, the 1B operation prompt light LB1 starts illuminating when the 1B acceptance state occurs and stops illuminating when the 1B acceptance state ends. This indicates whether the state allows or disallows operation.

In other words, in this case, the "change after reception of the first B (performance after reception of the first B)" in this example suggests that the reception of the first B has ended without the "final performance mode (for example, mode corresponding to mode JA1c described above)" among the performance content corresponding to the reception of the first B being permitted state appearing (this is not a necessary configuration for the configuration described below).

In this regard, the image display MG-B1, message display MB1, and status indication display JB1 are not hidden when timing tBa2-C2 arrives. Instead, they remain displayed for a predetermined time (a set period) even after timing tBa2-C2 arrives and operation reception to the 1B operation unit is no longer permitted. This gives the player a sense of expectation that even after timing tBa2-C2, there may still be a chance for operation reception to the 1B operation unit to occur and for a new change to be created.

In this example, the mock image display MG-B1 and message display MB1 are displayed starting at timing tBa1, then after timings tBa2-C2 where operation acceptance is no longer permitted, they are hidden at timing tBa3. The status indication display JB1 is not hidden at timing tBa3, but is hidden at an appropriate timing thereafter. However, as mentioned above, the display timing and hiding timing of the mock image display MG-B1 and message display MB1 may differ from each other, or only one of them may be displayed as an operation-related indicator. Furthermore, the status indication display JB1 may be hidden at the same timing as the mock image display MG-B1 and message display MB1.

In this example, the operation state of the "First B Operation Unit," which started at timing tBa2-C1, is assumed to continue even when the player continues to operate it at timing tBa3, when the mock image display MG-B1 and message display MB1 are hidden, and even when the situation indication display JB1 is hidden.

However, once the system transitions from the "1B operation unit acceptance state" to the "1B operation unit operation unit is not permitted state" (after timing tBa2-C2), the "1B operation unit operation unit is permitted state" will not occur again until timing tBa3 (and furthermore, the timing when the status indication display JB1 is hidden) arrives, when the mock image display MG-B1 and message display MB1 are hidden.

Therefore, even if the "First B Operation Unit" is maintained in an operational state from timing tBa2-C1 to timing tBa3 (and furthermore, to the timing when the status indication display JB1 is hidden), it is impossible for the auto-repeated button press function to be activated, for operation requests to be received multiple times, or for post-reception changes in response to operation requests to be executed multiple times during that period.

In the example shown in Figure 165(j), a message such as "Failure!!" is displayed upon the arrival of timing tBa2-C2. However, it is also possible to have no new message appear upon the arrival of timing tBa2-C2.

Furthermore, if the first B acceptance state is implemented as the first A acceptance state described above, the configuration described in the first A acceptance state description will be present even if it is not described in the first B acceptance state description. In this case, it goes without saying that the configurations described as applicable to the first A acceptance state, as described in other examples, are also applicable to the first B acceptance state. For example, the first B acceptance state is prepared as "a type of acceptance state in which the acceptance state can be terminated early based on the fact that an operation has been received."

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "Second B Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state). Figure 166 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "Second B Acceptance State" is generated based on the fulfillment of "Condition 2B" as the generation condition, and the player performs an operation. Figure 167 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the "Second B Acceptance State" is generated.

In this example, for the sake of clarity, although the names of the acceptance states differ, it is assumed that the "Second B Acceptance State" is implemented as the "Second A Acceptance State (see Figures 149-151)" described above. Therefore, in describing the configuration of the "Second B Acceptance State" below, the component numbers such as "B," "Sα," and "Sβ" are described as representing the same configuration as the component numbers such as "A," "SA," and "SB" used when describing the configuration of the "Second A Acceptance State" described above.

In other words, while the "First A Acceptance State" described above assumes a case where a special mode (mode JA2c) appears as a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance, the "Second B Acceptance State" assumes a case where the state in which operation acceptance is permitted ends without any special mode appearing as a post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance. The post-acceptance changes and other performance details related to the "Second B Acceptance State" are basically the same as those described in the "Second A Acceptance State" described above. However, as will be discussed later, this example assumes a case where no special mode (for example, a mode corresponding to mode JA2c described above) appears as a post-acceptance change, and the Second A operation unit (referred to as the "Second B operation unit" in this example) continues to be in operation even after the state in which operation acceptance is permitted ends.

Furthermore, the "Second B Acceptance State" does not necessarily have to occur as the "Second A Acceptance State" described above. For example, it may occur as a different type of acceptance state from the "Second A Acceptance State" (a different type of acceptance state with different effects corresponding to the acceptance state, such as a status indication display or a change after acceptance, or a different development of the effects). In this case, when describing the configuration of the "Second B Acceptance State" below, it goes without saying that the component numbers etc. expressed as "B," "Sα," and "Sβ" will be described as indicating a completely different configuration from the component numbers etc. expressed as "A," "SA," and "SB" when describing the configuration of the "First A Acceptance State" described above.

In other words, if the starting conditions are met (the pending state is cleared) and the "2nd B variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement performance determination) corresponding to the "2nd B variation pattern." After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ (such as performance depiction according to the 2nd B variation pattern, or sound output of BGM according to the 2nd B variation pattern (such as normal BGM playback when not in a reach)), and within the execution period of this variation performance, it additionally executes a performance (pre-announcement performance) according to the result of the pre-announcement performance determination, in addition to the performance of the selected "2nd B variation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 166(b), during the execution period of the variation effect related to the "2B variation pattern," based on the arrival of timing tBb2, which is 2B time elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the fulfillment of "condition 2B"), the above-mentioned 2B acceptance permission state (valid period) is made possible, allowing "operation reception to the 2B operation unit regarding changes after 2B reception (such as the 2B effect status indication display JB2, the 2B rapid-fire display HB2, and the 2B post-reception output sounds Sα2, Sβ2, etc.)" (the situation shown in Figure 167(a)).

In this embodiment, the "second B operation unit" that allows operation reception in the second B reception-accepting state is set as the same operation means (operation button 410) as in the first B reception-accepting state, and multiple operation receptions are allowed until the second B reception-accepting state ends. However, the second B operation unit may be set as an operation means different from that in the first B reception-accepting state.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in Figures 166(b) to (e), when the second B acceptance state occurs, a mock image display MG-B2 that mimics the target of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the second B operation unit), a message display MB2 related to the operation on the target of operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the second B operation unit), and a status indication display JB2 that can suggest the degree of progress of the performance over the entire period after the operation is accepted are displayed when a timing tBb1 arrives that is before the second B acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance to the second B operation unit is accepted). In addition, at the timing tBb1 in this example, the audible output of the second B operation-related output sound OB2 that prompts the player to take action is also started. Therefore, during the period from timing tBb1 to tBb2 in this example, even though operation-related displays prompting multiple operation attempts to the operation button 410 (such as the "Button Spamming!" message displayed in Figure 167) are shown, and the second B operation-related output sound OB2 is audibly output, the operation to the operation button 410 will not be judged as a valid operation (operation will not be accepted).

However, the mock image display MG-B2, message display MB2, status indication display JB2, and 2B operation-related output sound OB2 do not necessarily have to appear before the 2B reception-acceptance state occurs. They may be displayed simultaneously with the occurrence of the 2B reception-acceptance state, or slightly delayed thereafter. In particular, the status indication display JB2 may not be displayed until the first operation reception is made to the 2B operation unit in the 2B reception-acceptance state; that is, it may be implemented to appear and be displayed only after an operation reception is made to the 2B operation unit. Furthermore, the timing of the display of the mock image display MG-B2, the timing of the display of the message display MB2, and the timing of the start of the audible output of the 2B operation-related output sound OB2 may be different from each other. For example, the message display MB2 may be displayed before the display of the mock image display MG-B2.

The image display MG-B2, message display MB2, and status indication display JB2 will continue to be displayed after the start of display, regardless of the operating status of the 2B operation unit, until at least the 2B acceptance state ends. In contrast, the 2B operation-related output sound OB2 is made inaudible during the 2B acceptance state, but it may be stipulated that it not necessarily terminate midway.

Furthermore, in the second B acceptance state in this example, when it occurs (in this example, at timing tBb2, but there may be a slight delay before or after), the second B operation prompt light LB2 is illuminated to prompt the player to take action. In this example, the second B operation prompt light LB2 is the light-emitting part of the second B operation unit (operation button 410), but the second B operation prompt light LB2 may be the light-emitting part located in a different part of the second B operation unit (operation button 410), as long as it prompts the player to take action on the operation button 410 (for example, a mode that only appears when operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is permitted). In this case, it goes without saying that the second B operation unit (operation button 410) does not necessarily need to have a light-emitting part.

The second B operation-promoting light LB2, once activated, continues to emit light regardless of the operating status of the second B operation unit, at least until the second B acceptance state ends.

Here, the "Image Display MG-B2" corresponding to the 2B Acceptance State uses a "specific color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on white)" as its color scheme. However, it is also possible to selectively use and display a color scheme determined based on the results of, for example, the performance judgment, from among multiple color schemes. However, this color scheme may differ from that of the 1B Acceptance State described above.

Furthermore, the "Mock Image Display MG-B2" corresponding to the 2B acceptance state is configured such that when the portion mimicking the "operation receiving section" (the object of operation) is displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α), and then sequentially displayed in the manners shown in Figures 144(β) to (σ), this periodic change repeats with a predetermined period of 2B time. However, since this period of 2B time is set to be longer (longer cycle) than the period of 1B time that appears in the 1B acceptance state, the 2B acceptance state depicts the "operation receiving section" moving slowly up and down within its movable range compared to the 1B acceptance state described above.

Furthermore, in the second B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 166(c), (d) and 167(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-B2, a message related to the acceptance of operation to the second B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410) is displayed (in this case, the message display MB2, which displays "Defeat the tiger! Press the button 'Rapidly'!!").

However, in the second B acceptance state, it is sufficient that an operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operation requests to the second B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410) is displayed. For example, if at least one of a mock image display and a message display is displayed as the operation-related display, it is not necessary to perform both.

Furthermore, in the second B reception-accepting state, as shown in Figures 166(c) and (d), if no operation is received from the second B operation unit, the mock image display and message display will continue to be displayed until timing tBb3 arrives, at which point they will be hidden. Therefore, while the second B reception-accepting state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock image display MG-B2) indicating the remaining time until timing tBb3, when the second B reception-accepting state ends, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display is not necessarily required.

Furthermore, if the "Mock Image Display MG-B2" corresponding to the second B acceptance state is to be displayed before the timing tBb2 in which the second B acceptance state occurs, the periodic changes and gauge image changes may be delayed until timing tBb2 occurs. In other words, in this case, the "Mock Image Display MG-B2" corresponding to the second B acceptance state will be displayed in the manner shown in Figure 144(α) until timing tBb2 arrives.

Furthermore, in the second B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 166(e) and 167(a), the situation indication display JB2 corresponding to the second B acceptance state displays an ally character (here, ally character YS-B2) corresponding to the type of the second B acceptance state, an enemy character (here, enemy character BOSS-B2 depicted as a tiger) corresponding to the type of the second B acceptance state, and a gauge image HP-B2 showing its remaining HP gauge. In the 2B acceptance state, the likelihood of a big win is suggested through a visual effect such as "whether or not the ally character YS-B2 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-B2 (whether or not the gauge image HP-B2 can be reduced to 0)" by receiving multiple operations from the 2B operation unit. In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "2B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)", a visual effect may be executed in which "ally character YS-B2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B2". In this example, the situation indication display JB2 displays ally character YS-B2, enemy character BOSS-B2, and gauge image HP-B2, but it is not necessary to display all of these. It is possible to suggest the operation status as long as at least one of ally character YS-B2, enemy character BOSS-B2, and gauge image HP-B2 is displayed. Furthermore, the friendly character YS-B2 may be displayed with a different image than the friendly character YS-B1, which appears in the above-mentioned first B acceptance state.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 166, it is assumed that the first operation request is received by the "2B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBb2-A1 within the 2B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 167(b)).

In this example, if the first operation is received by the "second B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBb2-A1 within the second B acceptance state, a "second B acceptance change (second B acceptance effect)" corresponding to that operation will occur, as shown in Figures 166(f) and (h) (the effect shown in Figure 167(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "second B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBb2-A1 within the second B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 166(f) and (h), a "second B acceptance post-output sound" corresponding to the operation received by the "second B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is audibly output, and a "second B acceptance post-display" corresponding to the operation received by the "second B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed.

In other words, when an operation is received once for the "2B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" in the 2B reception-accepting state, a video display is shown once as the "2B reception display" as shown in Figure 167(b), depicting "ally character YS-B2" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B2" with fire magic (including smoke effects and the generation of fire magic). However, as will be described later, in the 2B reception-accepting state, based on the result of the performance judgment when the operation is received, there is a possibility that "enemy character BOSS-B2" may be injured, the intensity of the fire magic may increase, or the remaining HP gauge of gauge image HP-B2 may decrease (the performance content may progress depending on the performance judgment, etc.). If the animation progresses in this way, the state in which the operation was received by the 2B control unit afterward (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-B2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B2" with fire magic) will appear as a single video display showing the progressed animation (see Figures 166(e), (f), and 167(e), etc.). After the animation progresses in this way, as long as the 2B input acceptance state continues, the degree of the animation's progress will not revert to its pre-progress state. Therefore, even if the 2B control unit receives an operation request again after the single video display showing the progressed animation has finished, the state in which the operation was received by the 2B control unit (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-B2" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B2" with fire magic) may appear as a single video display showing the progressed animation. The game's presentation could be designed to suggest a higher probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot as the story progresses.

However, in the second B reception-accepting state, the degree of performance may not be set for the performance content as a post-reception change in response to an operation reception to the second B operation unit. Instead, each time an operation reception is made to the second B operation unit, the second B event (which may be just a display, just a sound, just light, or just a movable part) as a post-reception change may be repeatedly executed (occurred). In this case, it goes without saying that the status indication display JB2 will no longer be displayed.

Furthermore, in this example, when an operation is received once for the "2B operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 2B acceptance state, in addition to the "2B reception display" described above, the first reception output sound Sα2 may be output as the "2B reception output sound," as shown in Figure 166(h). Note that the first reception output sound Sα2 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-B2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire magic (such as smoke effects and the generation of fire magic)" that appears as the "2B reception display," and is a different sound from the "first reception output sound Sα1" described above. Also, as will be described later, there is a possibility that a second reception output sound Sβ2 will be output as the "2B reception output sound." The second reception output sound Sβ2 in this example is output when the content of the "2B reception display" progresses. In this document, the first post-reception output sound Sα2 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-reception display. However, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that the player has performed an operation, and when the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it should be output as a sound that suggests that the second B operation unit is being maintained in an operational state.

Furthermore, in this example, the above-mentioned timing tBb2-A1 is assumed to occur when the second B operation-related output sound OB2 is in the output state and the second B operation-promoting light LB2 is in the illumination state, as shown in Figures 166(g) and (j). However, at this timing tBb2-A1, the second B operation-related output sound OB2 is not made inaudible, nor is the second B operation-promoting light LB2 made non-illuminating, triggered by the reception of an operation to the "second B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)".

In other words, in this example, the second B operation-related output sound OB2 is such that, regardless of how many operations are received for the "second B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" while the second B operation-related output sound OB2 is being audibly output, and regardless of what judgment result is obtained (even if the second B acceptance state is terminated early), the audible state will not end as a result of the operation reception (it will be output for a predetermined amount of time regardless of the operation reception). In contrast, in this example, the second B operation-promoting light LB2, when an operation is received for the "second B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" while the second B operation-promoting light LB2 is in the illumination state, may either not terminate or terminate upon receiving the operation. In this case, only when the "state in which operation reception for the second B operation unit is permitted (second B reception permitted state)" terminates prematurely (before timing tBb2-C2), the illumination state of the second B operation-promoting light LB2 also terminates prematurely.

Thus, in the 2B input acceptance state, each time an input is received by the "2B operation unit (in this case, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-B2" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B2" and its sound effects are displayed. That is, through multiple attacks by "ally character YS-B2," the HP of "enemy character BOSS-B2" decreases (the animation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-B2" has been defeated, providing an animation that suggests a high probability of success. However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-B2" is not defeated, it suggests a low probability of success.

However, the presentation content for the second B acceptance state is merely an example, and it may be implemented by substituting other content. For example, as a post-acceptance change corresponding to the second B acceptance state, if there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to the operation acceptance (e.g., the start or end of lamp illumination, or the termination of audible output of a sound that is in output state), it is not necessary to necessarily execute "post-acceptance display" or "post-acceptance output sound." Even with such a configuration, the player can understand that the operation acceptance has been properly performed.

This example, as shown in Figure 166(a), assumes that the player's operation (the operating state of the second B control unit), initiated at timing tBb2-A1, continues until timing tBb2-A2.

In this regard, the second B acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (second B operation unit) in an operating state, the corresponding post-reception changes (for example, at least one of post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, or post-reception mechanism operation) are executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated)." Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 166(a), during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2 (the period during which the second B operation unit is maintained in an operating state), multiple operation receptions are made to the second B operation unit, and the corresponding post-reception changes (for example, at least one of post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, or post-reception mechanism operation) are executed multiple times.

As described above, when an operation request is received by the 2B operation unit in the 2B reception-accepting state, the display shown after the 2B reception, as shown in Figure 167(b), shows the ally character YS-B2 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire magic (including smoke effects and the generation of fire magic). Therefore, during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2, when the so-called auto-click function is activated, this "single-episode video display" will be played multiple times.

Furthermore, as described above, when an operation is received by the 2B operation unit in the 2B reception-accepting state, the 2B reception-after output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to the "2B reception-after display" which shows "ally character YS-B2 attacking enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire magic (such as smoke effects and the generation of fire magic)." Therefore, during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated, in addition to the "single video display," the sound effect corresponding to this "single video display" will be played multiple times.

However, in the second B acceptance state, if the operation unit (second B operation unit) is maintained in operation state and the auto-repeated function (long-press function) is activated, such post-acceptance changes (one video display, sound effect (second B post-acceptance output sound), etc.) will be executed multiple times. However, the interval between these executions (the time between the start of the previous post-acceptance change and the start of the next post-acceptance change) will be set to an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

Furthermore, in the 2B reception-accepting state, when the operation unit (2B operation unit) is maintained in operation and the auto-repeated button function is activated, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire magic (one video display) and the corresponding sound effect (2B reception-output sound) are made executable multiple times as the above-mentioned post-reception changes. However, in this case, the interval between the start of execution of the post-reception change in response to the above detection (the interval between the start of execution of the previous post-reception change and the start of execution of the next post-reception change) may be set to be longer than the specified time (the time used in the 1B reception-accepting state and the 3A reception-accepting state).

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 166, a "single video display (one of the changes after acceptance)" of the ally character YS-B2 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire magic is newly executed at indefinite intervals by the auto-repeated button function. This repeated display of a "single video display" is represented in the figure as "repeated button display HB2a".

Similarly, in the example shown in Figure 166, during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (the second B post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes) is newly output at indefinite intervals by the auto-repeating function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as the "first post-reception output sound Sα2a."

In this regard, the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 166 assumes a scenario where, although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the second B acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, neither the "Status Indication Display JB2 (see Figure 166(e))" which indicates the status of operation in the second B reception-accepting state, nor the "Second Post-Reception Output Sound (see Figure 166(h))" which indicates the status of operation in the second B reception-accepting state, will change or be initiated (in a manner that progresses the performance) as a result of operation reception. Furthermore, during this period, the second B operation-related output sound OB2 will not be terminated prematurely and will maintain its output state, nor will the second B operation-promoting light emission LB2 be terminated and will maintain its illumination state.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 166, the display of "fire-based magic attacks" and "smoke effects" shown in Figure 167, and the output of corresponding sound effects, are repeatedly executed at indefinite intervals by the auto-repeated button press function (the changes after reception are repeatedly executed at indefinite time intervals) (repeated button press display HB2a, first reception output sound Sα2a). However, no change occurs in the "situation indication display JB2 (see Figure 166(e))." This allows the player to confirm the content of the performance in response to multiple operation receptions, or whether the performance content has not progressed, simply by maintaining the operation state, thus effectively maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, regarding the "Status Indication Display JB2 (see Figure 166(e))", at least one of the following may be changed in response to the input: the ally character YS-B2, the enemy character BOSS-B2, or the gauge image HP-B2. However, in this case, it is necessary to change to a different form than the "form when the performance content progresses," and if the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2 (the period during which the second B operation unit is maintained in operation state) ends without the performance content progressing (when the operation is interrupted), this will trigger a return to the "display form before the operation." Also, as mentioned above, the "Status Indication Display JB2 (see Figure 166(e))", such as the ally character YS-B2, the enemy character BOSS-B2, or the gauge image HP-B2, may not be displayed until the input is received, and may appear and be displayed only when the input is received (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2, neither the "Status Indication Display JB2 (see Figure 166(e))" which suggests the operation status in the second B reception-accepting state, nor the "Second Post-Reception Output Sound (see Figure 166(h))" which also suggests the operation status in the second B reception-accepting state, changes or starts execution in response to the operation reception. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the performance content has not progressed.

However, under conditions where the rapid-fire display HB2a is executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2), as shown in Figure 167(b), the rapid-fire display HB2a repeatedly shows "the ally character YS-B2 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire magic (smoke effect, generation of fire magic, etc.)" at irregular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JB2" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the second B acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 166 and 167 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the second B acceptance state, temporarily interrupts operations on the second B operation unit at timing tBb2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated button function.

Here, in the second B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 166(f) and 167(c), when the operation state of the second B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tBb2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB2a, which was previously in an active state, is turned off as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB2a terminates its operation when timing tBb2-A2 arrives (when the second B operation unit is set to a non-operation state).

With this configuration, when the operation state of the 2B control unit is temporarily interrupted (returned to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button press function is disabled, the rapid-press indicator HB2a, which was previously in the active state, is immediately hidden. Therefore, the operation status in the 2B acceptance state is easily recognized early on. Furthermore, this means that the remaining time in the 2B acceptance state is not consumed significantly, thus facilitating the act of temporarily interrupting the operation state of the 2B control unit to more easily check the operation status in that state.

In this example, if the operation on the second B control unit is interrupted and the unit is switched to a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HB2a is displayed, the time elapsed from the time the unit is switched to a non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HB2a disappears is set to a fixed time (in this case, "0 seconds").

With this configuration, it becomes easier to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 2B control unit is temporarily interrupted (turned into a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, before the rapid-fire indicator HB2a disappears and a situation arises where the operation status in the 2B acceptance state becomes easily recognizable. This also means that it becomes easier to predict how much of the remaining time in the 2B acceptance state will be consumed, thus facilitating the act of temporarily interrupting the operation of the 2B control unit to more easily check the operation status in the 2B acceptance state. This effect can be obtained even when the above-mentioned fixed time is set to "1 second," so the time from the non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HB2a disappears does not necessarily have to be set to "0 seconds."

Furthermore, in the second B acceptance-accepting state, as shown in Figure 166(g), the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a, which had been in the execution state, is also rendered inaudible when the operation state of the second B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tBb2-A2, thereby disabling the auto-repeated-press function, similar to the rapid-pressing indicator HB2a. In other words, in this case, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a ends when timing tBb2-A2 arrives (when the second B operation unit is set to a non-operation state). At this time, all sounds other than the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a that are in an audible state are not rendered inaudible when the second B operation unit is set to a non-operation state. This applies not only to timing tBb2-A2 but also to timing tBb2-B3, etc., as described later. In the second B acceptance state in this example, sounds other than the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2 will not become inaudible as a result of the second B operation unit being deactivated.

With this configuration, when the operation state of the second B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, the first post-reception output sound Sα2a, which was in the active state until then, is immediately switched to a non-output state. In this case, it is expected that this can suitably indicate that the auto-repeated button function has been disabled.

In this example, if the operation on the second B control unit is interrupted and the unit is put into a non-operation state while the first post-reception output sound Sα2a is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the first post-reception output sound Sα2a is put into a non-output state is set to a fixed time (in this case, "0 seconds").

With this configuration, it becomes easier to predict how much time will pass after the operation state of the 2B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled before the first post-reception output sound Sα2a becomes non-output. This also means that it becomes easier to predict how much of the remaining time in the 2B acceptance state will be consumed, thus facilitating gameplay techniques that attempt to temporarily interrupt the operation state of the 2B control unit. This effect can be obtained even when, for example, the above-mentioned fixed time is set to "0.5 seconds," so the time from the non-operational state until the first post-reception output sound Sα2a becomes non-output does not necessarily have to be set to "0 seconds."

Furthermore, in the second B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 166(f) and 167(c), when the operation state of the second B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) at timing tBb2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated button function, a new display change is generated as a result.

Here, the display change triggered by the 2B operation unit being deactivated is not simply a matter of "the previously displayed rapid-fire display HB2a being hidden, making the previously displayed image visible behind it." Rather, it involves performing a process triggered by the 2B operation unit being deactivated to bring forth some new display. In this example, the display change is brought forth by a process that newly starts displaying the "post-deactivation display HB2" as a cut-in image, as shown in Figure 167(c). This configuration makes it possible to more reliably indicate that the 2B operation unit is deactivated and the auto-rapid-fire function is disabled. In addition to the method of bringing forth a new display, other methods such as changing the display of the previously displayed image to a different display are also possible.

In this example, the "Post-Operation Display HB2" has multiple modes depending on the progress of the performance, and at timing tBb2-A2, it is displayed in mode HB2a, which suggests that the performance has not progressed. However, it is not necessary to provide multiple modes for the "Post-Operation Display HB2" that suggest the progress of the performance. Alternatively, both a first type of post-operation display, which is displayed in one of the multiple modes that suggest the progress of the performance, and a second type of post-operation display, which is displayed in only one mode that does not suggest the progress of the performance, may be displayed as "Post-Operation Display HB2".

In this regard, in the second B acceptance state as described in this example, when the second B operation unit is deactivated, a new display mode (post-deactivation display HB2) is displayed as a result, but the corresponding sound is not newly output.

Furthermore, in the situation shown in Figure 167(c), the state of the situation indication display JB2 (here, state JB2a), which suggests the status of the operation, including the ally character YS-B2, the enemy character BOSS-B2, and the gauge image HP-B2, is the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 167(a)), which also suggests that the presentation content has not progressed. Note that the state of the situation indication display JB2, including the ally character YS-B2, the enemy character BOSS-B2, and the gauge image HP-B2, only needs to be able to suggest that the presentation content has not progressed; it does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 167(a)).

In this example, the gauge image HP-B2 of the status indication display JB2 is designed so that it is not obscured by the "display after non-operation HB2," thereby making it easy to grasp the progress of the presentation content through the appearance of the status indication display JB2. The friendly character YS-B2 and the enemy character BOSS-B2 may also be designed so that they are not obscured by the "display after non-operation HB2."

Regarding this point, the "Post-Operation Display HB2," regardless of its configuration, may be made invisible after a predetermined time has elapsed since the 2B operation unit was left in an inactive state. However, in this example, the display state is maintained as long as the 2B acceptance-allowed state continues, and is made invisible when the timing tBb3 for the termination of the 2B acceptance-allowed state arrives, or when a new operation request is received from the player. With this configuration, even if the player loses the intention to continue operating during the 2B acceptance-allowed state, the display state of the Post-Operation Display HB2 will continue until the timing tBb3 for the termination of the 2B acceptance-allowed state. This makes it possible to make it appear as if the results of the operations performed up to that point have been displayed, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game effectively. Furthermore, this invisible display can be achieved by changing the previously displayed display mode to a different display mode.

In this example, as shown in Figure 166(a), it is assumed that the "second B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is returned to the operation state at timing tBb2-B1 within the second B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 167(d)).

In this example, if the "second B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and an operation is received at timing tBb2-B1 within the second B acceptance state, this triggers the "second B post-reception change (second B post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation received, as shown in Figures 166(f) and (h) (the effect shown in Figure 167(d)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "Second B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBb2-B1 within the Second B Acceptance State, as shown in Figures 166(f) and (h), the non-operation display HB2 (mode HB2a) is hidden, and as a Second B reception change, the "First Reception Output Sound Sα2 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Second B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is audibly output again, and the "Second B Reception Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Second B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, even when operation on the 2B control unit is resumed at timing tBb2-B1 within the 2B acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 2B acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 167(d), the 2B acceptance change (such as the 2B acceptance display or 2B acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 2B acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation being accepted by the 2B control unit at timing tBb2-A1. Details of the performance are as described above, so a further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the performance examples shown in Figures 166 and 167 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 2B operation unit), which began at timing tBb2-B1, is maintained until timing tBb2-B3, thereby activating the auto-continuous button-pressing function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3 (the period during which the second B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the second B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change corresponding to these requests (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3 (the period during which the second B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HB2a and the first post-reception output sound Sα2a) remains the same as in the case of the period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2 (see Figure 167(b)), unless the performance content progresses. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 166, the period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3 assumes that, among the multiple operation receptions performed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the second B reception permission state progresses based on the operation reception performed at timing tBb2-B2 within that period (as shown in the performance status in Figure 167(e)).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 166, during the period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3, the "second B reception change (second B reception effect)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has not progressed, whereas during the period from timing tBb2-B2 to timing tBb2-B3, the "second B reception change (second B reception effect)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has progressed.

More specifically, during the period from timing tBb2-B2 to timing tBb2-B3, at "timing tBb2-B2," which is the timing when the performance content progresses, as shown in Figures 166(e) and 167(e), a display change is performed based on the operation reception to the second B operation unit, changing the state of the status indication display JB2, which indicates the status of the operation, from the previously displayed "state JB2a" to a different "state JB2b." Here, as shown in Figure 167(e), the enemy character BOSS-B2 changes to a state in which it is injured, the fire magic used by the ally character YS-B2 changes to a state of higher intensity, and the gauge image HP-B2 changes to a state in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased. With this configuration, the change in the state indication JB2 suggests that the performance content corresponding to the second B acceptance state has progressed due to the operation reception (by the auto-repeated button function) performed at timing tBb2-B2 (and the result of the performance judgment based on that operation).

After the performance has progressed in this way, when an operation request is received by the 2B control unit, the "Display after 2B reception" will show the "single video display" in an advanced form of the performance, as shown in Figure 167(e), such as "ally character YS-B2 attacks the injured enemy character BOSS-B2 using a more powerful fire-based magic."

In this example, once the animation progresses, as long as the 2B input acceptance state remains active, the degree of animation progression will not revert to its pre-progress state. Therefore, even when the 2B input unit receives another input request after the completion of the animation display showing the evolved animation, the animation will still display the animation as it did when the input request was received (in this case, the animation showing "ally character YS-B2" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B2" with fire magic).

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3, when the so-called auto-click function is activated, the "single video display" in which such a change in appearance occurs will be played multiple times by the auto-click function during the period from timing tBb2-B2 onwards, when the performance content has progressed.

Furthermore, even during the period after timing tBb2-B2, when the animation progresses, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B2 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B2 with fire magic (one video display) is restarted at indefinite intervals (times not predetermined) as a change after the input is received. Therefore, the "one video display" of the progressed animation sequence is also restarted at indefinite intervals by the auto-tap function. This repeated display of the "one video display" of the progressed animation sequence is represented in the diagram as "Tap-Tap Display HB2b".

Thus, in the performance display device 1600 of this example, when the timing tBb2-B2, which is the timing when the performance content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 166(e), (f) and 167(d), (e), the mode of the status indication display JB2 changes from "mode JB2a" to "mode JB2b," and the mode of the rapid-fire display HB2 also changes from "mode HB2a" to "mode HB2b." From this point onward, while the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled (timing tBb2-B2 to tBb2-B3), the status indication display JB2 will be displayed in "mode JB2b," and the rapid-fire display HB2 will be executed in "mode HB2b."

In this example, the mode of the rapid-fire indicator HB2 is changed according to the progress of the performance content, but it is also possible to keep it constant. That is, even if the rapid-fire indicator HB2 continues to run in a single mode regardless of the progress of the performance content, the player can still confirm through the rapid-fire indicator HB2 that the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) operations have been accepted. Furthermore, the player can also confirm the degree of progress of the performance content through the mode of the status indication indicator JB2. As mentioned above, the 2B acceptance permission state may be implemented as a type of acceptance permission state in which the progress of the performance content itself cannot occur.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is received once at the "second B operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the second B acceptance state, in addition to the "second B acceptance display" described above, a first acceptance output sound may be output as the "second B acceptance output sound," as shown in Figure 166(h). Furthermore, as described above, in addition to the first acceptance output sound Sα2, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," a second acceptance output sound Sβ2, which suggests that the performance content corresponding to the second B acceptance state has progressed, can also be output, as shown in Figure 166(i).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 166, during the period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3, when timing tBb2-B2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, as shown in Figure 166(i), the second post-reception output sound Sβ2 is output in mode Sβ2b-1 based on the fact that the operation was received (performance progress) at timing tBb2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the performance has progressed through the output mode of the post-reception output sound. It is desirable to set the output duration of the second post-reception output sound Sβ2 to be longer than that of the first post-reception output sound Sα2, which corresponds to one instance of operation reception.

However, in this example, the first post-reception output sound Sα2, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is implemented to be output in the same manner before and after the performance progresses. Therefore, when timing tBb2-B2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, the first post-reception output sound Sα2, as a new "sound effect," begins outputting based on the operation being received. However, its manner of output is the same as when the operation was received before timing tBb2-B2 (the execution manner is the same whether or not performance progress occurs at timing tBb2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tBb2-B1 to timing tBb2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is activated, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (first post-reception output sound Sα2) is newly output in the same manner at indefinite intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the diagram as "first post-reception output sound Sα2a." The output manner of the first post-reception output sound Sα2a during this period is the same as in the case of the "period from timing tBb2-A1 to timing tBb2-A2" described above, so an explanation is omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-reception output sound Sα2a was not changed according to the progression of the performance content, but it may be changed according to the progression of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HB2b is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tBb2-B2 to timing tBb2-B3), as shown in Figure 167(e), the rapid-fire display HB2b repeatedly shows "ally character YS-B2 attacking wounded enemy character BOSS-B2 with high-intensity fire magic (smoke effect, generation of fire magic, etc.)" at irregular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JB2" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the second B acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 166 and 167 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the second B acceptance state, interrupts operations on the second B operation unit again at timing tBb2-B3, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button function.

As described above, in the second B acceptance state, if the operation state of the second B control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the second B acceptance state is in effect, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB2, which was previously in an active state, will be turned off. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB2b will terminate its operation when timing tBb2-B3 arrives (when the second B control unit is set to a non-operation state).

Furthermore, similar to the case of the rapid-fire indicator HB2a, if the operation on the second B control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the rapid-fire indicator HB2b is displayed, the time from the non-operation state until the rapid-fire indicator HB2b is hidden is set to a fixed time (in this case, "0 seconds").

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the second B acceptance state in this example, when the operation state of the second B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, a new display change is triggered. Therefore, as shown in Figures 166(f) and 167(f), when the operation state of the second B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timing tBb2-B3, this triggers the start of a new display of the "Post-Operation Display HB2" as a cut-in image shown in Figure 167(f). Also, as mentioned above, the "Post-Operation Display HB2" in this example has multiple modes depending on the progress of the performance, and at timing tBb2-B3, mode HB2b is displayed, suggesting that the performance has progressed one stage.

In the situation shown in Figure 167(f), the mode of the situation indication display JB2 (here, mode JB2b), which suggests the status of the operation, is also indicated by the appearance of the ally character YS-B2, the enemy character BOSS-B2, and the gauge image HP-B2, suggesting that the presentation content has progressed by one stage.

Furthermore, as described above, in the second B acceptance state, if the operation state of the second B control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the second B acceptance state is in effect, thereby disabling the auto-repeated function, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2, which was previously in an output state, will be rendered inaudible as a result. In other words, in this case, the output state of the first post-acceptance output sound Sα2a will end when timing tBb2-B3 arrives (when the second B control unit is set to a non-operation state).

However, the timing tBb2-B3 shown in Figure 166 assumes a scenario where the operation state of the second B operation unit is interrupted while the second post-reception output sound Sβ2, which started outputting at timing tBb2-B2, continues to output.

In this regard, in the second B reception-accepting state, unlike the case of the first reception-output sound Sα2, the output state of the second reception-after output sound Sβ2 does not terminate (become inaudible) when the operation state of the second B operation unit is interrupted (turned into a non-operation state). Therefore, as shown in Figure 166(h), even if the operation state of the second B operation unit is interrupted at timing tBb2-B3, the second reception-after output sound Sβ2b-1 will continue to be output for a predetermined duration, or for a predetermined duration from the non-operation state, even after timing tBb2-B3 (even after the second B operation unit becomes non-operational).

In this example, if the operation on the second B control unit is interrupted and it is set to a non-operated state while the first post-reception output sound Sα2a is being output, the time from the non-operated state until the first post-reception output sound Sα2a is set to a fixed time (in this case, "0 seconds"). In contrast, for the second post-reception output sound Sβ2, if the operation on the second B control unit is interrupted and it is set to a non-operated state while the second post-reception output sound Sβ2 is being output, the time from the non-operated state until the second post-reception output sound Sβ2 is set to a non-operated state is not set to a fixed time, but is set to an indeterminate state. That is, in this case, interrupting the operation on the second B control unit results in different effects being provided by the first post-reception output sound Sα2 and the second post-reception output sound Sβ2, which were previously in an output state.

With this configuration, even in the second B reception permission state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the second B operation unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the second B reception output sound (second reception output sound Sβ2b) is in the execution state, a situation will occur where the second B reception output sound (second reception output sound Sβ2b) continues to be in the execution state while the second B operation unit is in a non-operation state, as shown in Figure 166(i). However, after this, due to the passage of time since the second B operation unit was left in a non-operation state (time elapsed from timing tBb2-B3), the continuing second B reception output sound (second reception output sound Sβ2b) will be turned into a non-output state, as shown in Figure 166(i), etc.

In this example, as shown in Figure 166(a), it is assumed that the second B control unit is activated again at timing tBb2-B3 or later, and the second B post-reception output sound (second post-reception output sound Sβ2b) is audible (before the output state ends), at timing tBb2-C1 (the performance situation shown in Figure 167(g)).

In this example, if the "second B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tBb2-C1 within the second B acceptance state, this will trigger the "second B post-reception change (second B post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figures 166(f) and (h), similar to the case of timing tBb2-B1 described above (the effect shown in Figure 167(g)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "Second B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBb2-C1 within the Second B Acceptance State, as shown in Figures 166(f) and (h), the non-operation display HB2 (mode HB2b) is hidden, and as a Second B Acceptance Change, the "First Acceptance Output Sound Sα2 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Second B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is audibly output again, and the "Second B Acceptance Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Second B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, when operation on the 2B control unit is resumed at timing tBb2-C1 within the 2B acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 2B acceptance state does not progress from the first stage of progression described above. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 167(g), the 2B post-reception change (such as the 2B post-reception display or 2B post-reception output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 2B post-reception change was first initiated based on the operation being accepted by the 2B control unit at timing tBb2-B2 (the mode shown in Figure 167(e)). Details of the performance are as described above, so a further explanation will be omitted here.

However, as mentioned above, this example assumes that the timing tBb2-C1, when operation on the second B control unit is restarted, occurs while the second post-reception output sound Sβ2 is audible.

In this case, the second post-reception output tone Sβ2 continues in its previous output state without any change, based on the fact that operation on the second B control unit has resumed at timing tBb2-C1 (that operation has been received). Furthermore, the first post-reception output tone Sα2, corresponding to the second B control unit acceptance state, is made inaudible when the second B control unit is deactivated; therefore, it is not audible when the second B control unit is reactivated.

With this configuration, in the second B reception-allowed state, while the second B reception-after output sound corresponding to the operation reception is being output, if an operation reception is made to the second B operation unit, which was previously in a non-operated state, this will not trigger the termination of the second B reception-after output sound; it will always continue (second reception-after output sound Sβ2). Furthermore, in this case, all sounds other than the second reception-after output sound Sβ2 that are audible at that point will not be rendered inaudible as a result of the operation reception being made to the second B operation unit, which was previously in a non-operated state. This applies not only to the timing tBb2-C1 but also to timing tBb2-B1, etc. In other words, in the second B reception-allowed state in this example, sounds that were previously audible will not be rendered inaudible as a result of the second B operation unit being put into an operational state again.

Furthermore, the HB2 indicator during rapid button presses, like the Sα2 output sound after the first input is received, is also hidden when the 2B control unit is left idle. Therefore, it is never displayed when the 2B control unit is operated again.

Furthermore, the performance examples shown in Figures 166 and 167 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 2B operation unit), which began at timing tBb2-C1, continues even after timing tBb2-C2 (the timing when the 2B operation unit's acceptance state ends), thus enabling the auto-repeated button press function until timing tBb2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBb2-C1 to timing tBb2-C2 (the period during which the second B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the second B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change corresponding to these requests (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBb2-C1 to timing tBb2-C2 (the period during which the second B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HB2b and the first post-reception output sound Sα2a) remains the same as in the case of the period from timing tBb2-B2 to timing tBb2-B3 (see Figure 167(e)), unless further development of the performance content occurs. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 166, during the period from timing tBb2-C1 to timing tBb2-C2, if the performance content corresponding to the second B acceptance state progresses further (a second stage of progress occurs) based on the operation reception (such as the result of the performance judgment) performed at a predetermined timing within that period, based on the operation reception performed at a predetermined timing within that period, the performance progress described above will appear, referring to Figures 149 and 151, etc. However, since the details of that performance are also described above, we will omit the explanation here.

However, as stated above, the second B acceptance state in this example is based on the assumption that it is realized as the "second A acceptance state" described above. Unlike the case of the "second A acceptance state" described above (Figures 149 and 151), it assumes that no special characteristics (for example, characteristics corresponding to the above-mentioned characteristic JB1c) appear as post-acceptance changes.

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 166, during the period from timing tBb2-C1 to timing tBb2-C2, the "First B Reception Change (First B Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception will be executed multiple times in a manner in which the performance content progresses only once (see Figure 167(g)). When timing tBb2-C2 arrives, the auto-repeated button function, which had been enabled up to that point, will be disabled.

In this regard, even when the auto-button rapid-fire function is disabled at timing tBb2-C2, the rapid-fire indicator HB2, which was previously displayed due to the auto-button rapid-fire function, is turned off (after a certain period of time, e.g., 0 seconds, from the time the operation is received) as a result. However, when the auto-button rapid-fire function is disabled at timing tBb2-C2, unlike when the auto-button rapid-fire function is disabled at timing tBb2-A2 or timing tBb2-B3, the rapid-fire indicator HB2, which was previously displayed due to the auto-button rapid-fire function, may not be turned off as a result. With this configuration, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not the second B acceptance state has ended by looking at the display status of the rapid-fire indicator HB2 after the auto-button rapid-fire function is disabled.

Furthermore, when the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timing tBb2-C2, the first post-reception output sound Sα2a, which had been outputting due to the auto-repeated button function, is made inaudible (a certain time after the operation is received) as a result. However, when the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timing tBb2-C2, unlike when the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timing tBb2-A2 or timing tBb2-B3, the first post-reception output sound Sα2a, which had been outputting due to the auto-repeated button function, may not be made inaudible as a result. With this configuration, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not the second B reception permission state has ended by observing the output status of the first post-reception output sound Sα2a after the auto-repeated button function is disabled.

Furthermore, in this example, we assumed that timing tBb2-C2 occurs after the second post-reception output sound Sβ2b-1, which began outputting at timing tBb2-B2, has become inaudible. However, it is also possible to consider cases where timing tBb2-C2 occurs while the second post-reception output sound Sβ2b-1 is still being output audibly. In this case, however, unlike the "first post-reception output sound Sα2a," it is desirable that the output state of the "second post-reception output sound Sβ2," which is in the middle of execution, is not terminated when timing tBb2-C2 occurs, but rather maintained until the remaining execution time is consumed.

Furthermore, regarding the first post-reception output sound Sα2a, when the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timing tBb2-C2, it may be possible to either make it inaudible (within a certain time from the time the operation is received) or not make it inaudible. For example, if it is made inaudible when the probability of winning a jackpot is high, but not made inaudible when the probability of winning a jackpot is low, it becomes possible to indicate the probability of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, regarding the "continuous press indicator HB2" and the "first input output sound Sα2," if timing tBb2-C2 arrives while they are in the middle of execution, they may be kept running until the remaining execution time is consumed.

In this example, when timing tBb2-C2 arrives, the 2B operation prompt light LB2, which prompts the player to take action, is deactivated. That is, the 2B operation prompt light LB2 starts illuminating when the 2B acceptance state occurs and stops illuminating when the 2B acceptance state ends. This indicates whether the state allows or disallows operation.

In other words, in this case, the "change after reception of the second B (performance after reception of the second B)" in this example suggests that the second B reception permission state has ended without the "final performance mode (for example, mode corresponding to mode JB2c described above)" among the performance content corresponding to the second B reception permission state appearing (this is not a necessary configuration for the configuration described below).

In this regard, the image display MG-B2, message display MB2, and status indication display JB2 are not hidden when timing tBb2-C2 arrives. Instead, they remain displayed for a predetermined time (a set period) even after timing tBb2-C2 arrives and operation reception to the 2B operation unit is no longer permitted. This gives the player a sense of expectation that even after timing tBb2-C2, there may still be a chance to receive operation reception to the 2B operation unit and create a new change.

In this example, the mock image display MG-B2 and message display MB2 are displayed starting at timing tBb1, then after timings tBb2-C2 where operation acceptance is no longer permitted, they are hidden at timing tBb3. The status indication display JB2 is not hidden at timing tBb3, but is hidden at an appropriate timing thereafter. However, as mentioned above, the display timing and hiding timing of the mock image display MG-B2 and message display MB2 may be different from each other, or only one of them may be displayed as an operation-related indicator. Furthermore, the status indication display JB2 may be hidden at the same timing as the mock image display MG-B2 and message display MB2.

In this example, the operation state of the "First B Operation Unit," which began at timing tBb2-C1, is assumed to continue even when the player maintains the operation state until timing tBb3 arrives, when the mock image display MG-B2 and message display MB2 are hidden, and even when the situation indication display JB2 is hidden.

However, once the system transitions from the "2B operation acceptance state" to the "1B operation unit operation acceptance state" (after timing tBb2-C2), the "2B operation unit operation acceptance state" will not occur again until timing tBb3 (and furthermore, the timing when the status indication display JB2 is hidden) arrives, when the mock image display MG-B2 and message display MB2 are hidden.

Therefore, even if the "Second B Operation Unit" is maintained in an operational state from timing tBb2-C1 to timing tBb3 (and furthermore, to the timing when the status indication display JB2 is hidden), it is impossible for the auto-repeated button press function to be activated, for operation requests to be received multiple times, or for post-reception changes in response to operation requests to be executed multiple times during that period.

In the example shown in Figure 167(h), the message "Fail!!" is displayed upon the arrival of timing tBb2-C2. However, it is also possible to have no new display appear upon the arrival of timing tBb2-C2.

Furthermore, if the second B acceptance state is implemented as the second A acceptance state described above, the configuration described in the second A acceptance state description will be present even if it is not described in the second B acceptance state description. In this case, it goes without saying that the configurations described as applicable to the second A acceptance state description are also applicable to the second B acceptance state. For example, the second B acceptance state is prepared as "a type of acceptance state in which the acceptance state can be terminated early based on the fact that an operation has been received."

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "Third B Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state). Figure 168 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "Third B Acceptance State" is generated based on the fulfillment of "Condition 3B" as the generation condition, and the player performs an operation. Figure 169 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the "Third B Acceptance State" is generated.

Now, assuming the starting conditions are met (holdings are processed) and the "Third B Variation Pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement performance determination) corresponding to the "Third B Variation Pattern." After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ (such as performance depiction according to the Third B Variation Pattern, or sound output of BGM according to the Third B Variation Pattern (such as normal BGM playback when not reaching)), and within the execution period of this variation performance, it additionally executes a performance (pre-announcement performance) according to the result of the pre-announcement performance determination, in addition to the performance of the selected "Third B Variation Pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 168(b), during the execution period of the variation effect related to the "3B variation pattern," based on the arrival of timing tBc2, which is the 3B time elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the fulfillment of "condition 3B"), the above-mentioned 3B acceptance permission state (valid period) is made possible, allowing "operation reception to the 3B operation unit regarding changes after 3B reception (such as the 3B effect status indication display JB3, the 3B rapid-fire display HB3, and the 3B post-reception output sound Sα3)" (the situation shown in Figure 169(a)).

In this embodiment, the "third B operation unit" that allows operation reception in the third B reception-permitted state is not the "operation button 410" which allows multiple operation receptions in the first B reception-permitted state and the second B reception-permitted state, but rather the "sword ornament 5001". Therefore, multiple operation receptions are permitted until the third B reception-permitted state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in Figures 168(b) to (e), when the third B acceptance state occurs, a imitation image display MG-B3 that imitates the target of operation by the player (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the third B operation unit), a message display MB3 related to the operation on the target of operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the third B operation unit), and a status indication display JB3 that can suggest the degree of progress of the performance over the entire period after the operation is accepted are displayed when a timing tBc1 arrives that is before the third B acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance to the third B operation unit is accepted). In addition, at the timing tBc1 in this example, the audible output of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 that prompts the player to take action is also started. Therefore, during the period from timing tBc1 to tBc2 in this example, even though operation-related displays prompting multiple operation requests to be accepted for the sword ornament 5001, such as the image display MG-B3 and the message display MB3, are displayed, and the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is audibly output, no operation on the sword ornament 5001 is judged as a valid operation (operation is accepted).

As will be discussed later, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 in this example, unlike the first B operation-related output sound OB1 and the second B operation-related output sound OB2, is audibly output in the form of a "specific type of output sound" being played back multiple times, as shown in Figure 168(g). As for the method of repeated playback, any method that makes it sound like repeated playback can be adopted, such as preparing sound data containing one instance of the "specific type of output sound" and playing this data multiple times, or preparing sound data containing multiple instances of the "specific type of output sound" and playing this data only once. With such a configuration, when the operation-related output sound is played back repeatedly, it can be indicated that operation acceptance is permitted for the "sword ornament 5001" rather than the "operation button 410," and it is expected that operational errors by the player can be effectively suppressed.

Here, the mock image display MG-B3, message display MB3, status indication display JB3, and 3B operation-related output sound OB3 do not necessarily have to appear before the 3B acceptance state occurs. They may be displayed simultaneously with the occurrence of the 3B acceptance state, or slightly delayed thereafter. In particular, the status indication display JB3 may not be displayed until the first operation is received for the 3B operation unit in the 3B acceptance state; that is, it may be implemented to appear and be displayed only after an operation is received for the 3B operation unit. Furthermore, the timing of the display of the mock image display MG-B3, the timing of the display of the message display MB3, and the timing of the start of the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 may be different from each other. For example, the message display MB3 may be displayed before the display of the mock image display MG-B3.

Furthermore, regarding "Condition 3B," which is the condition under which operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 becomes permissible in the state of the third B reception acceptance, unlike "Condition 1B" and "Condition 2B" described above, it may be possible to have both cases: one where it is met before the timing when an operation-related display (such as a mock image display or message display) prompting operation to be performed multiple times on the third B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed, or before the timing when the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is audibly output; and another where it is met after the timing when an operation-related display (such as a mock image display or message display) prompting operation to be performed multiple times on the third B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed, or when the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is audibly output.

When this configuration is adopted, in the third B acceptance state, there are two possibilities: one where operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted before the timing of the display of operation-related indicators (such as the display of a model image or message) or the timing of the audible output of the third B operation-related sound OB3 (when timing tBc2 shown in Figure 168 occurs before timing tBc1); and another where operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted after the timing of the display of operation-related indicators (such as the display of a model image or message) or the timing of the audible output of the third B operation-related sound OB3 (when timing tBc2 shown in Figure 168 occurs after timing tBc1). This allows for the appropriate maintenance of a sense of tension.

However, it is important that the same post-reception change in response to the reception occurs whether the operation reception for the third B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is performed when timing tBc2, as shown in Figure 168, arrives before timing tBc1, or when the operation reception for the third B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is performed when timing tBc2, as shown in Figure 168, arrives after timing tBc1. This makes it difficult to recognize the timing at which operation reception is permitted, even within a single valid period, and is expected to effectively maintain a sense of tension.

Furthermore, regarding the "Condition 3B" described above, which is the condition under which operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 become permissible when the 3B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is in the permissible state, it may be satisfied at the same timing as when operation-related displays (such as mock image displays or message displays) prompting operation to be made multiple times to the 3B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) are displayed, or when the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is audibly output. However, it goes without saying that even in this case, it is important that the same characteristics appear as post-reception changes in response to operation requests.

Furthermore, when adopting these configurations, the method for setting timing tBc1 and timing tBc2 (condition 3B) may be adopted as appropriate. Examples of implementation are listed below, but these are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other methods are also possible.

For example, if the elapsed time since the start of the symbol change is set as the "timing tBc2 (condition 3B)", it is possible to prepare multiple elapsed times and then selectively use one of them through a performance judgment (lottery). Alternatively, if the remaining time until the symbol change ends is set as the "timing tBc2 (condition 3B)", it is possible to prepare multiple remaining times and then selectively use one of them through a performance judgment (lottery). Furthermore, if the timing tBc2 (condition 3B) is set within a period when the symbol change is not being performed, for example, the elapsed time since the symbol change was put into a non-executing state, or the elapsed time since the start of the jackpot game, can be set as the "timing tBc2 (condition 3B)", and multiple elapsed times can be prepared and then selectively use one of them through a performance judgment (lottery). Furthermore, when employing any of these methods, timing tBc1 will occur only at predetermined timings.

Conversely, by replacing timing tBc2 (condition 3B) with timing tBc1, using one of the aforementioned timing tBc2 (condition 3B) setting methods, and ensuring that timing tBc2 (condition 3B) occurs only at predetermined timings, a similar configuration can be achieved.

Alternatively, the conditions for the occurrence of "Timing tBc1" and "Timing tBc2" may be determined by random selection with a predetermined probability each time. If the conditions for "Timing tBc1" are met first, "Timing tBc2" may occur afterward. Conversely, if the conditions for "Timing tBc2" are met first, "Timing tBc1" may occur afterward.

In this example, the mock image display MG-B3, message display MB3, and status indication display JB3 are designed to continue displaying after the start of display, regardless of the operating status of the 3B operation unit, at least until the 3B acceptance state ends (this configuration is not mandatory). In contrast, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible during the 3B acceptance state, but it is not necessarily required that it not be terminated midway.

Furthermore, regarding the conditions under which operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 becomes inaccessible while the third B reception is in the permitted state, there may be two cases: one where the condition is met before the timing tBc3 when the operation-related display (such as a mock image display or message display) prompting operation to be performed multiple times on the third B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is hidden, or before the timing when the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible; and another where the condition is met after the timing tBc3 when the operation-related display (such as a mock image display or message display) prompting operation to be performed multiple times on the third B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is hidden, or before the timing when the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible.

When this configuration is adopted, in the third B acceptance state, there are two possibilities: one where operation acceptance to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted before the timing when operation-related displays (such as the display of the model image or message) are hidden, or before the timing when the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible; and another where operation acceptance to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted after the timing when the operation-related displays (such as the display of the model image or message) are hidden, or before the timing when the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible. This configuration is expected to effectively maintain a sense of tension.

However, it is important that the same post-reception change in response to the operation reception occurs in both cases: when an operation reception is made to the sword ornament 5001 in the state where operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted before the timing when operation-related displays (such as mock image displays and message displays) are hidden or the timing when the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible; and when an operation reception is made to the third B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) in the state where operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted after the timing when operation-related displays (such as mock image displays and message displays) are hidden or the timing when the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible. This makes it difficult to recognize the timing when operation reception becomes unpermitted, even though it is a single valid period, and is expected to effectively maintain a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the conditions under which operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are no longer permitted while the third B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) are in the permitted state may be met at the same time as the operation-related displays (such as mock image displays or message displays) that prompt the user to perform multiple operation requests to the third B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) are hidden, or the operation-related output sound OB3 of the third B operation unit is made inaudible. However, it goes without saying that even in this case, it is important that the same behavior appears as a post-reception change in response to the operation request.

Furthermore, when adopting these configurations, the setting methods for each of the above timings may be adopted as appropriate. The setting methods for the periods before and after these two timings can be set, for example, by following the setting methods for the periods before and after "timing tBc1" and "timing tBc2 (condition 3B)" described above.

In this example, in the third B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 168(b) and (j), when this occurs (in this example, at timing tBc2, but it may be slightly off before or after this timing), the operation-prompting light that encourages the player to take action is not emitted. In this case, it goes without saying that the third B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) does not necessarily need to have a light-emitting unit.

With this configuration, unlike in the cases of the 1B acceptance state and the 2B acceptance state, operation-related indicators (such as mock image displays and message displays) are shown, but operation-prompting illumination is not performed. In other words, compared to the case where operation-prompting illumination is performed, it becomes relatively more difficult to recognize that operation acceptance is permitted. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be maintained while still indicating that operation acceptance is permitted through operation-related indicators.

Here, the "Image Display MG-B3" corresponding to the 3B acceptance state uses a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme. However, it is also possible to selectively use and display a color scheme determined based on the results of, for example, performance judgment, from among multiple color schemes.

Furthermore, the "Mock Image Display MG-B3" corresponding to the 3B acceptance state is configured such that when a predetermined moving image of the portion mimicking the "operation receiving section" (the object of operation) is considered as a single periodic change, this periodic change repeats in a predetermined cycle of 3B time. However, since this cycle of 3B time is set to be longer (longer cycle) than the cycle of 1B time that appears in the 1B acceptance state, the 3B acceptance state depicts the "operation receiving section" moving slowly up and down within its movable range compared to the 1B acceptance state described above.

Furthermore, in the third B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 168(c), (d) and 169(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-B3, a message related to the acceptance of operation to the third B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed (in this case, the message display MB3, which displays "Attack the demon! Strike with the sword repeatedly!!").

However, in the third B acceptance state, it is sufficient that an operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operation requests to the third B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed. For example, if at least one of a mock image display and a message display is displayed as the operation-related display, it is not necessary to perform both.

Furthermore, in the third B reception-accepting state, as shown in Figures 168(c) and (d), if no operation is received for the third B operation unit, the mock image display and message display will continue to be displayed until timing tBc3 arrives, at which point they will be hidden. Therefore, while the third B reception-accepting state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock image display MG-B3) indicating the remaining time until timing tBc3 arrives, when the third B reception-accepting state ends, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display is not necessarily required.

Furthermore, if the "Mock Image Display MG-B3" corresponding to the 3B acceptance state is to be displayed before the timing tBc2 in which the 3B acceptance state occurs, the periodic changes and gauge image changes may be delayed until timing tBc2 occurs before starting.

Furthermore, in the third B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 168(e) and 169(a), the situation indication display JB3 corresponding to the third B acceptance state displays an ally character (here, ally character YS-B3) corresponding to the type of the third B acceptance state, an enemy character (here, enemy character BOSS-B3 depicted as a demon) corresponding to the type of the third B acceptance state, and a gauge image HP-B3 showing its remaining HP gauge. In the 3B reception-accepting state, the likelihood of a big win is suggested through a performance that indicates whether the ally character YS-B3 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-B3 (whether the gauge image HP-B3 can be reduced to 0) through multiple operation receptions to the 3B operation unit. In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)", a performance may be executed in which "ally character YS-B3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B3". In this example, the situation indication display JB3 displays ally character YS-B3, enemy character BOSS-B3, and gauge image HP-B3, but it is not necessary to display all of these. It is possible to suggest the operation status as long as at least one of ally character YS-B3, enemy character BOSS-B3, and gauge image HP-B3 is displayed. Furthermore, the friendly character YS-B3 may be displayed with a different image than the friendly characters YS-B1 and YS-B2 that appear in the first B acceptance state and the second B acceptance state. Also, in the third B acceptance state, the status indication display JB3 may not necessarily be displayed.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 168, it is assumed that the first operation request is received for the "Third B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBc2-A1 within the Third B Acceptance State (the performance situation shown in Figure 169(b)).

In this example, if the first operation request is received for the "Third B Operation Unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBc2-A1 within the Third B reception acceptance state, a "Third B reception change (Third B reception effect)" corresponding to that operation request will occur, as shown in Figures 168(f) and (h) (the effect shown in Figure 169(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is received for the "Third B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBc2-A1 within the Third B reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 168(f) and (h), a "Third B reception post-output sound" corresponding to the operation received for the "Third B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is audibly output, and a "Third B reception post-display" corresponding to the operation received for the "Third B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is displayed.

In other words, when an operation request is received once for the "Third B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the Third B reception-accepting state, a video display of one instance is shown as the "Display after Third B reception," as shown in Figure 169(b), showing the "ally character YS-B3" attacking the "enemy character BOSS-B3" with sword techniques (including sword movements and slashing effects). However, as will be described later, in the Third B reception-accepting state, based on the result of the performance judgment when the operation request is received, there is a possibility that the "enemy character BOSS-B3" may be injured, the intensity of the sword technique may increase, or the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-B3 may decrease (the performance content may progress due to the performance judgment, etc.). If the animation progresses in this way, the state in which the operation was received by the 3B control unit afterward (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-B3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B3" with sword techniques) will appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed animation (see Figures 168(e), (f), and 169(e), etc.). After the animation progresses in this way, as long as the state in which the 3B control unit is allowed to receive input continues, the degree of progress in the animation will not revert to the state before the progress. Therefore, even if the 3B control unit receives input again after the single video display that has changed to the progressed animation has finished, the state in which the operation was received by the 3B control unit (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-B3" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B3" with sword techniques) may appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed animation. The game's presentation could be designed to suggest a higher probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot as the story progresses.

However, in the 3B reception-accepting state, unlike the 1B reception-accepting state and the 2B reception-accepting state (reception-accepting states where the degree of performance is set for the performance content), the degree of performance is not set for the performance content as a change after reception in response to the operation reception of the 3B operation unit. Instead, each time an operation reception is made to the 3B operation unit, the 3B event as a change after reception (which may be just a display, just a sound, just light, or just a movable part movement) is repeatedly executed (occurs). Needless to say, in this case, the status indication display JB3 will no longer be displayed.

Furthermore, in this example, when an operation is received once for the "third B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the third B reception-accepting state, in addition to the "third B reception display" described above, the first reception-after output sound Sα3 may be output as the "third B reception-after output sound," as shown in Figure 168(h). Note that the first reception-after output sound Sα3 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-B3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B3 with sword techniques (such as sword movements and slashing effects)" that appears as the "third B reception display." However, as will be described later, in this third B reception-accepting state, unlike the first B reception-accepting state and the second B reception-accepting state, there is no possibility of further output sounds different from the first reception-after output sound Sα3 being output as the "third B reception-after output sound." In this document, the first post-reception output sound Sα3 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-reception display. However, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that the player has performed an operation, and when the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it should be output as a sound that suggests that the 3B operation unit is being maintained in an operational state.

However, in the third B acceptance state, unlike the first B acceptance state and the second B acceptance state, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation received by the third B operation unit does not necessarily have to display the post-acceptance display, nor does it necessarily have to output the post-acceptance sound. For example, in the third B acceptance state, the post-acceptance change in response to the operation received by the third B operation unit may be such that only a predetermined light emission from a predetermined light emission unit appears, or only a specific operation from a specific movable body appears. In short, when an operation is received by the third B operation unit, it is sufficient that the third B event (which may be just a display, just a sound, just light emission, or just a movable body operation) as a post-acceptance change in response to the operation is executed (occurs) at least multiple times.

Furthermore, in this example, the above timing tBc2-A1 is assumed to occur while the output sound OB3 related to the third B operation is in the output state, as shown in Figures 168(g) and (j). However, at timing tBc2-A1, the output sound OB3 related to the third B operation is not made inaudible as a result of receiving an operation request to the "third B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In other words, in this example, the output sound OB3 related to the 3B operation will not be audible regardless of how many operations are received for the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" while the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is audibly output, or what judgment result is obtained (even if the 3B operation acceptance state is terminated early). The audible state will not end as a result of such operation reception (it will be output for a predetermined amount of time regardless of operation reception).

However, as will be described later, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 in this example may be output for a predetermined duration, or its audible output may be terminated prematurely at any point within the time range TBc shown in Figure 168(g). Methods for realizing this configuration include, for example, a method in which, at the start of a symbol variation, one of the performance judgments separate from the judgment regarding the type of symbol variation pattern, determines whether or not to terminate the audible output prematurely at any point within the time range TBc, or determines at which point it should be terminated prematurely. Alternatively, when outputting the 3B operation-related output sound OB3, one of the performance judgments may include determining whether or not to terminate the audible output prematurely at any point within the time range TBc, or determining at which point it should be terminated prematurely. Alternatively, it is possible to adopt a method in which the output sound OB3 related to operation 3B can be started at several timings within the "3B variation pattern," and depending on which of these timings the output starts, it is predetermined whether the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 will be terminated early (or not terminated early) within the time range TBc, and at what timing within that range it will be terminated early. Alternatively, it is also possible to simply perform a performance judgment regarding early termination at predetermined time intervals while the audible output is present, and terminate it early when a special result is obtained in this performance judgment. In short, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 only needs to be such that its audible output may be terminated early at any timing within the time range TBc shown in Figure 168(g), and the method of implementation is not particularly limited. Note that this configuration functions at least when the game is progressing properly while the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is being audibly output.

In this regard, if the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is not output for a predetermined amount of time during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed in the "3B variation pattern," the conditions for the early termination of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 may be set so that the proportion of times a jackpot is obtained as a result of the jackpot determination is higher than when the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is not terminated early. With such a configuration, when the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is output, not only is the situation regarding the reception of the operation to the 3B operation unit and the changes after reception in response to said operation reception interesting, but the performance aspect related to the "early termination of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3" unrelated to said operation reception is also provided, thus it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

Alternatively, if the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is not output for a predetermined amount of time and terminates prematurely, the conditions for the early termination of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 may be set such that the probability of the operation-related display corresponding to the 4B acceptance-accepting state described later, or the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 (see Figure 170), appearing within a special time (e.g., 10 seconds) from the time the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 becomes inaudible, is higher than in the case where the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is not terminated prematurely. This probability may be 0% or 100%. Even with such a configuration, if the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is output, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be appropriately maintained, as it will provide a theatrical effect related to the "early termination of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3" that is unrelated to the operation reception, as well as providing interest in the situation regarding operation reception to the 3B operation unit and the changes after reception in response to said operation reception.

As described above, in the 1st B acceptance-permitted state and the 2nd B acceptance-permitted state, if the game is progressing properly while the 1st B operation-related output sound OB1 and the 2nd B operation-related output sound OB2 are audibly outputted, these operation-related output sounds will always be output for a predetermined playback time, and will not be turned off during playback. However, in this case, the rate at which operation-related displays and operation-related output sounds corresponding to the "acceptance-permitted state in which the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is activated for the 1st B operation unit (operation button 410) and multiple operation acceptances are permitted" appear within a special time (for example, 10 seconds) from the time the 3rd B operation-related output sound OB3 is turned off is lower than the rate at which operation-related displays and 4th B operation-related output sound OB4 (see Figure 170) corresponding to the 4th B acceptance-permitted state described later appear within a special time (for example, 10 seconds) from the time the 3rd B operation-related output sound OB3 is turned off. Furthermore, the rate at which operation-related displays and operation-related output sounds appear within a special time (e.g., 10 seconds) from the point at which the 2B operation-related output sound OB2 is rendered inaudible, corresponding to the "acceptable state in which the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is activated for the 2B operation unit (operation button 410) and multiple operation acceptances are permitted," is lower than the rate at which operation-related displays and 4B operation-related output sounds OB4 (see Figure 170) appear within a special time (e.g., 10 seconds) from the point at which the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is rendered inaudible, corresponding to the 4B acceptance-permitted state described later. This rate may be 0% or 100%.

Thus, in the 3B input acceptance state, each time an input is received by the "3B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)," a depiction and sound effect of "ally character YS-B3" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B3" appears (change after one input). That is, the HP of "enemy character BOSS-B3" decreases through multiple attacks by "ally character YS-B3" (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-B3" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests a high level of expectation (change after multiple inputs). However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-B3" is not defeated, it suggests a low level of expectation.

However, the presentation content for the 3B acceptance state described above is merely an example, and it may be implemented using other content. For example, as a post-acceptance change corresponding to the 3B acceptance state, if there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to the operation acceptance (e.g., the start or end of lamp illumination, or the termination of audible output of a sound that is in output state), it is not necessary to necessarily execute "post-acceptance display" or "post-acceptance output sound." Even with such a configuration, the player can understand that the operation acceptance has been properly performed.

This example, as shown in Figure 168(a), assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 3B operation unit) initiated at timing tBc2-A1 continues until timing tBc2-A2.

In this regard, the 3B acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (3B operation unit) in an operating state, the corresponding post-reception changes (for example, at least one of post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, or post-reception mechanism operation) are executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated)." Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 168(a), during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 (the period during which the 3B operation unit is maintained in an operating state), multiple operation receptions are made to the 3B operation unit, and the corresponding post-reception changes (for example, at least one of post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, or post-reception mechanism operation) are executed multiple times.

As described above, when an operation request is received by the 3B operation unit in the 3B reception-accepting state, the display shown after the 3B reception, as shown in Figure 169(b), displays the actions of the ally character YS-B3 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B3 with sword techniques (including sword movements and slashing effects). Therefore, during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2, when the so-called auto-fire function is activated, this "single-session video display" will be played multiple times.

Furthermore, as described above, when an operation is received by the 3B operation unit in the 3B reception-accepting state, the 3B reception-after output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-B3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B3 with sword techniques (such as the generation of sword movement and slashing effects)" that appears as the "3B reception-after display." Therefore, during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated, in addition to the "single video display," the sound effect corresponding to such a "single video display" will be played multiple times.

In this state, when the 3B reception permission state is reached, and the operation unit (3B operation unit) is maintained in operation mode and the auto-repeated function is activated, the following post-reception changes (such as displaying one video, sound effects (3B post-reception output sound)) are executed multiple times. However, the interval between these executions (the time between the start of the previous post-reception change and the start of the next post-reception change) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

Furthermore, in the third B reception-accepting state described in this example, when the operation unit (third B operation unit) is maintained in operation and the auto-repeated button function is activated, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B3 with sword techniques (one video display) and the sound effect corresponding to this "one video display" (third B reception output sound) can be executed multiple times as the post-reception change. However, the interval between the start of execution of the post-reception change in response to the detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-reception change to the start of execution of the next post-reception change) is always set to a specific time (e.g., 1 second) or less. However, it is desirable that this interval in the third B reception-accepting state be set to a different length than the interval when the auto-repeated button function is activated in the first B reception-accepting state described above. For example, it may be set to be longer than the interval when the auto-repeated button function is activated in the first B reception-accepting state described above, and also to a specific time (e.g., 1 second) or less.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 168, a "single video display (one of the changes after acceptance)" of the ally character YS-B3 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B3 with a sword technique is newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button-pressing function. This repeated display of a "single video display" is represented in the figure as "repeated button-pressing display HB3a".

Similarly, in the example shown in Figure 168, during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (the third B post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes) is newly output at regular intervals by the auto-repeated function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as the "first post-reception output sound Sα3a."

In this regard, the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 168 assumes a scenario where, although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 3B acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, the "Status Indication Display JB3 (see Figure 168(e))," which indicates the status of the operation in the state where the 3B operation is permitted, will not change or be initiated (in a manner that progresses the performance) in response to the operation being received. Furthermore, this example assumes that during this period, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is not terminated prematurely and maintains its output state.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 168, the display of "sword technique attacks" and "slashing effects" shown in Figure 169, and the output of corresponding sound effects, are repeatedly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button-pressing function (the changes after reception are repeatedly executed at regular time intervals) (repeated button-pressing display HB3a, first reception-after output sound Sα3a). However, no change occurs in the "situation indication display JB3 (see Figure 168(e))." This allows the player to confirm the content of the performance in response to multiple operation receptions, or whether the performance content has not progressed, simply by maintaining the operation state, thus effectively maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, regarding the "Status Indication Display JB3 (see Figure 168(e))", at least one of the following may be changed in response to the input. However, in this case, it is necessary to change to a different form than the "form when the performance content progresses", and if the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 (the period during which the 3B operation unit is maintained in operation state) ends without the performance content progressing (when the operation is interrupted), it will be returned to the "display form before the operation". Also, as mentioned above, the "Status Indication Display JB3 (see Figure 168(e))", such as the ally character YS-B3, enemy character BOSS-B3, and gauge image HP-B3, may not be displayed until the input is received, and may appear and be displayed only when the input is received (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2, the "Status Indication Display JB3 (see Figure 168(e))," which indicates the status of the operation in the third B reception-acceptable state, does not change or start execution in response to the operation reception. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the performance content has not progressed.

However, under conditions where the rapid-fire display HB3a is executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2), as shown in Figure 169(b), the rapid-fire display HB3a repeatedly shows "the ally character YS-B3 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B3 with a sword technique (such as the appearance of sword movements and slashing effects)" at regular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JB3" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the third B acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 168 and 169 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the state where the 3B input is accepted, temporarily interrupts operations on the 3B input unit at timing tBc2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated input function.

Here, in the third B acceptance state, as shown in Figure 168(f), even if the operation state of the third B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tBc2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB3a (change after acceptance), which was in the execution state until then, will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB1a will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tBc2-A2 (even after the third B control unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the "single video display" that was in the execution state has finished executing for the predetermined display time (until the execution of one change after acceptance is complete).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 3B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button press function is disabled, the rapid-fire indicator HB3a, which was previously in the active state, does not immediately disappear (the change after reception is not terminated midway through one execution). Therefore, it takes time before the operation status in the 3B reception-allowed state becomes easily recognizable. This means that a significant amount of time is consumed in the remaining 3B reception-allowed state, which is expected to create a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation state of the 3B control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in the 3B reception-allowed state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 3B control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HB3a is displayed, the time from when it is put into a non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HB3a is hidden (the time until the change after one reception, which was in the middle of execution, is completed) is not set as a fixed time, but is made variable.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 3B control unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, before the rapid-fire indicator HB3a disappears and a situation arises where the operation status in the 3B acceptance state becomes easily recognizable. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 3B acceptance state will be consumed. Therefore, it is expected that this configuration will appropriately create a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 3B control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in the 3B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the third B acceptance-accepting state, as shown in Figure 168(h), the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be rendered inaudible when the operation state of the third B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) at timing tBc2-A2 to disable the auto-repeating function, similar to the rapid-fire indicator HB3a. In other words, in this case, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a will continue to be output even after timing tBc2-A2 (even after the third B operation unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in the execution state has finished executing for a predetermined output time (or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 3B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, the first post-reception output sound Sα3a, which was in the active state until then, will not immediately become non-output. In this case, it may appear as if the auto-repeated button function is still active, thus maintaining a desirable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 3B operation unit is interrupted and it is set to a non-operation state while the first post-reception output sound Sα3a (3B event) is being output, the time from the time the unit is set to a non-operation state until the first post-reception output sound Sα3a is no longer output is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 3B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) to disable the auto-repeating function, and how long it will take for the first post-reception output sound Sα3a (3B event) to become non-output, that is, how long it will take to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeating function has been disabled. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 3B acceptance state will be consumed, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 3B control unit.

Furthermore, in the third B acceptance state, as shown in Figure 168(g), the output sound OB3 related to the third B operation, which was previously in an active state, will not become inaudible when the operation state of the third B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tBc2-A2 to disable the auto-repeating function.

Furthermore, in the third B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the third B operation unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB3a and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a are both in operation state, a situation will occur where, as shown in Figures 168(f), (h), etc., the rapid-fire indicator HB3a continues to be displayed and the first post-acceptance output sound SB3a continues to be output, even though the third B operation unit is in a non-operation state. However, after this, as time elapses since the third B operation unit was left in a non-operation state, as shown in Figures 168(f), (h) and Figure 169(c), etc., the rapid-fire indicator HB3a, which had been displayed, will be hidden, and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a will be left in a non-output state. This allows players to easily recognize when the auto-button function is disabled, and also to easily recognize the mode of the status indicator JB3 (in this case, mode JB3a), which indicates the status of operation, such as the ally character YS-B3, the enemy character BOSS-B3, and the gauge image HP-B3 (see Figure 169(c)).

However, as mentioned above, in the example shown in Figure 168, the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 assumes that although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function and multiple post-reception changes are executed, the performance content corresponding to the 3B acceptance state does not progress. Note that the 3B acceptance state does not necessarily have to occur as an acceptance state in which the performance content may progress; for example, it may occur as an acceptance state in which only one aspect of the post-reception change is executed multiple times.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 169(c), although the appearance of the situation indication display JB3 (here, appearance JB3a), which suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B3, the enemy character BOSS-B3, and the gauge image HP-B3, can be easily recognized, these appearances are the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 169(a)), thus suggesting that the presentation content has not progressed. Note that the appearance of the situation indication display JB3, such as the ally character YS-B3, the enemy character BOSS-B3, and the gauge image HP-B3, only needs to be able to suggest that the presentation content has not progressed; it does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 169(a)).

In this example, as shown in Figure 168(a), it is assumed that the "third B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is returned to the operation state at timing tBc2-B1 within the third B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 169(d)).

In this example, if the "Third B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tBc2-B1 within the Third B acceptance state, this triggers the "Third B reception change (Third B reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figure 168(f) (the effect situation shown in Figure 169(d)).

In this example, the scenario assumes that the "Third B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is put back into operation mode and an operation is received at timing tBc2-B1, before the time required for the audible output of the Third B operation-related output sound OB3 (a predetermined playback time) has elapsed. However, as mentioned above, the Third B operation-related output sound OB3 is not affected by the status of operation reception to the Third B operation unit, etc. Therefore, the state related to its audible output does not end as a result of operation reception at timing tBc2-B1.

However, as stated above, the output sound OB3 related to the operation of the 3B unit in this example is not affected by the status of operation reception to the 3B unit, etc., and is intended to maintain an audible output state over the time range TBc shown in Figure 168(g) (over a predetermined playback time). However, there may be cases where the audible output is terminated prematurely at some point within the interval of the time range TBc.

In this example, as shown in Figure 168(g), the scenario is assumed where the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated prematurely at timing tBc2-X, which lies between timing tBc2-A2 and timing tBc2-B1.

Therefore, in this example, at the timing tBc2-X shown in Figure 168(g), the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 will be terminated prematurely. However, in this case, regarding the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the 3B operation unit, even if it is in the middle of one execution cycle, its execution state will not be terminated prematurely at the timing when the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated prematurely.

For example, as shown in Figure 168(h), at timing tBc2-X in this example, the 3B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα3a), which is one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the 3B operation unit, is being audibly output. However, the output state of this 3B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα3a) is not terminated prematurely at timing tBc2-X, when the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated prematurely; instead, the audible output continues.

Furthermore, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168(g) is designed so that even during the period from timing tBc-A1 to timing tBc-A2, when the 3B operation unit is maintained in an operating state and the auto-repeated button function has resulted in "multiple operation receptions and multiple post-reception changes corresponding to these receptions being executed (the rapid-fire display HB3a and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a appearing)," the conditions for its audible output to be terminated prematurely may be met. However, even if the conditions for the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 to be terminated prematurely are met under these performance conditions, this does not trigger any change in the situation where "multiple operation receptions are made by the auto-repeated button press function, and multiple post-reception changes corresponding to these receptions are executed (the rapid-fire display HB3a and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a are displayed)." In other words, the manner of the post-reception changes is the same as when the conditions for the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 to be terminated prematurely are not met.

Furthermore, as described above, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 in this example differs from the first B operation-related output sound OB1 and the second B operation-related output sound OB2 in that the "specific type of output sound" is played audibly multiple times (in this case, twice) repeatedly, as shown in Figure 168(g). In other words, in this case, the conditions for the audible output of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 to be terminated prematurely may be met between the end of the first output of the "specific type of output sound" as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 and the start of the second output of the "specific type of output sound" as the third B operation-related output sound OB3. In this case, although it may be difficult for the player to recognize that the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 has been terminated prematurely, the "specific type of output sound" as the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 will not be output multiple times, but only once. Therefore, someone paying attention to the number of outputs can recognize that the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 has been terminated prematurely, and this is expected to effectively maintain a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is made inaudible, the operation-related displays such as the mock image display MG-B3 and the message display MB3 may also be hidden. When this configuration is adopted, the following performance progression from timing tBc2-X onwards will occur while the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 remains inaudible and the operation-related displays such as the mock image display MG-B3 and the message display MB3 remain hidden.

In this example, if an operation is received for the "Third B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBc2-B1 within the Third B reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 168(f) and (h), the "First Reception Output Sound Sα3 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received for the "Third B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is again audibly output, and the "Third B Reception Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received for the "Third B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, even when operation on the 3B control unit is resumed at timing tBc2-B1 within the 3B acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 3B acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 169(d), the 3B acceptance change (such as the 3B acceptance display or 3B acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 3B acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation being accepted by the 3B control unit at timing tBc2-A1. Details of the performance are as described above, so a further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the performance examples shown in Figures 168 and 169 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 3B operation unit), which began at timing tBc2-B1, is maintained until timing tBc2-B3, thereby activating the auto-repeated button press function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3 (the period during which the 3B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the 3B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change corresponding to these requests (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3 (the period during which the third B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HB3a and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a) remains the same as in the case of the period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2 (see Figure 169(b)), unless the performance content progresses. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 168, the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3 assumes that, among the multiple operation receptions performed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 3B reception permission state progresses based on the operation reception performed at timing tBc2-B2 within that period (as shown in the performance status in Figure 169(e)).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 168, during the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3, the "third B reception change (third B reception effect)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has not progressed, whereas during the period from timing tBc2-B2 to timing tBc2-B3, the "third B reception change (third B reception effect)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the effect content has progressed.

More specifically, during the period from timing tBc2-B2 to timing tBc2-B3, at "timing tBc2-B2," which is the timing when the performance content progresses, as shown in Figures 168(e) and 169(e), a display change is performed based on the operation reception to the 3B operation unit, changing the state of the status indication display JB3, which indicates the status of the operation, from the previously displayed "state JB3a" to a different "state JB3b." Here, as shown in Figure 169(e), the enemy character BOSS-B3 changes to a state in which it is injured, the sword technique performed by the ally character YS-B3 changes to a state of higher intensity, and the gauge image HP-B3 changes to a state in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased. With this configuration, the change in the state indication JB3 suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 3B acceptance state has progressed due to the operation reception (by the auto-repeated button function) performed at timing tBc2-B2 (and the result of the performance judgment based on that operation).

After the performance has progressed in this way, when an operation request is received by the 3B control unit, the "single video display" shown above will be displayed as the "3B reception display," as shown in Figure 169(e), depicting an advanced version of the performance, such as "ally character YS-B3 attacking the injured enemy character BOSS-B3 using enhanced sword techniques."

Furthermore, in this example, once the performance content has progressed, as long as the state of acceptance of the 3B input remains in place, the degree of progress in the performance content will not revert to its previous state. Therefore, even when the 3B input input unit receives another input request after the completion of one video display showing the progressed performance content, the behavior at the time of the initial input request (in this case, the behavior of "ally character YS-B3" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B3" with a sword technique) will appear as one video display showing the progressed performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3, when the so-called auto-click function is activated, the "single video display" in which such a change in appearance occurs will be played multiple times by the auto-click function during the period from timing tBc2-B2 onward, when the performance content has progressed.

Furthermore, even during the period after timing tBc2-B2, when the performance progresses, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B3 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B3 with sword techniques (one video display) is restarted at regular intervals (a predetermined time, the same time as before the change) as a post-reception change. Therefore, the "one video display" of the progressed performance is also restarted at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button function. This repeated display (multiple post-reception changes) of the "one video display (one post-reception change)" of the progressed sequence is represented in the diagram as "Repeated Button Display HB3b".

Thus, in the performance display device 1600 according to this example, when the timing tBc2-B2, which is the timing when the performance content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 168(e), (f) and 169(d), (e), the mode of the status indication display JB3 changes from "mode JB3a" to "mode JB3b," and the mode of the rapid-fire display HB3 also changes from "mode HB3a" to "mode HB3b." From this point onward, while the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled (timing tBc2-B2 to tBc2-B3), the status indication display JB3 will be displayed in "mode JB3b," and the rapid-fire display HB3 will be executed in "mode HB3b."

In this example, the mode of the rapid-fire display HB3 is changed according to the progress of the performance content, but it is also possible to keep it constant. That is, even if the rapid-fire display HB3 continues to run in a single mode regardless of the progress of the performance content, the player can still confirm through the rapid-fire display HB3 that the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) operations have been accepted. Furthermore, the player can also confirm the degree of progress of the performance content through the mode of the status indication display JB3. Also, as mentioned above, the 3B acceptance-allowed state may be implemented as a type of acceptance-allowed state where the progress of the performance content itself cannot occur, unlike the 1B and 2B acceptance-allowed states. In this case, it goes without saying that the status indication display will not be shown, and the post-acceptance change will be executed multiple times in only one mode.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is received once by the "third B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the third B reception-accepting state, in addition to the "third B reception display" described above, a first reception output sound Sα3, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," may be output as the "third B reception output sound," as shown in Figure 168(h). However, as described above, as shown in Figure 168(i), in the third B reception-accepting state, the second reception output sound is not output as the "third B reception output sound."

Furthermore, the first post-reception output sound Sα3 in this example is implemented to be output in the same manner before and after the performance progresses. Therefore, when timing tBc2-B2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, the first post-reception output sound Sα3, as a new "sound effect," begins outputting based on the operation being received. However, its manner of output is the same as when the operation was received before timing tBc2-B2 (the execution manner is the same whether or not performance progress occurs at timing tBc2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is activated, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (first post-reception output sound Sα3) is newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the diagram as "first post-reception output sound Sα3a." The output manner of the first post-reception output sound Sα3a during this period is the same as in the case of the "period from timing tBc2-A1 to timing tBc2-A2" described above, so an explanation is omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-reception output sound Sα3a was not changed according to the progression of the performance content, but it may be changed according to the progression of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HB3b is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tBc2-B2 to timing tBc2-B3), as shown in Figure 169(e), the rapid-fire display HB3b repeatedly shows "ally character YS-B3 attacking wounded enemy character BOSS-B3 with a high-intensity sword technique (such as the appearance of sword movements and slashing effects)" at regular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JB3" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the third B acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 168 and 169 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the state where the 3B input is accepted, interrupts operations on the 3B input unit again at timing tBc2-B3, thereby disabling the auto-repeated input function.

As described above, in the 3B acceptance state, even if the operation state of the 3B control unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the 3B acceptance state is continuing, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB3, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be hidden as a result (the post-acceptance change that was in the middle of execution will not be terminated prematurely due to the non-operation). Therefore, as shown in Figure 168(f), even if the operation state of the 3B control unit is interrupted at timing tBc2-B3, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB3b will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tBc2-B3 (even after the 3B control unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the above-mentioned "one video display (one post-acceptance change)" that was in the execution state has been executed for a predetermined display time (execution time) and finished displaying (executing), or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, similar to the case of the rapid-fire indicator HB3a, if the operation on the 3B control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HB3b is displayed, the time from the time it is put into a non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HB3b is hidden (the time until the change after one input is completed) is not set to a fixed time, but is set to be variable.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 3B reception-accepting state, even if the operation state of the 3B control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the 3B reception-accepting state is continuing, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the first post-reception output sound Sα3a, which was in an output state until then, will not be switched to a non-output state as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figure 168(h), even if the operation state of the 3B control unit is interrupted at timing tBc2-B3, the first post-reception output sound Sα3a will continue to be output even after timing tBc2-B3 (even after the 3B control unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has finished executing and outputting for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 3B control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operational state while the first reception output sound Sα3 (3B event) is being output, the time from the non-operational state until the first reception output sound Sα3a becomes non-output is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will have passed since the operation state of the 3B control unit was interrupted (put into a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated function was disabled, before the first reception output sound Sα3 (3B event) becomes inaudible, that is, before it can be more reliably confirmed that the auto-repeated function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time as the 3B reception-allowed state will be consumed, which is expected to create a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation state of the 3B control unit.

Furthermore, in the third B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, even if the operation state of the third B operation unit is interrupted (turned into a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB3b and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a are both in operation, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB3b is hidden and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα3a is turned off are different, as shown in Figures 168(f), (h), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB3b is hidden is shown to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα3a is turned off, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state is hidden or turned off is indeterminate, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB3b is hidden may be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα3a is turned off, or it may be after that timing. Additionally, it may be possible to allow for situations where their timings coincide.

With this configuration, in the third B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the third B operation unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB3b and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a are both in operation state, a situation will occur where the rapid-fire indicator HB3b continues to be displayed and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα3a continues to be output, while the third B operation unit is in a non-operation state, as shown in Figures 168(f) and (h). However, after this, as time elapses since the third B operation unit was left in a non-operation state (time elapsed from timing tBc2-B3), the rapid-fire indicator HB3b, which had been displayed, will be hidden, as shown in Figures 168(f) and 169(f). This allows players to easily recognize when the auto-button function is disabled, and also to easily recognize the state of the situation indication display JB3 (in this case, the state JB3b where the performance content has progressed), which indicates the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B3, the enemy character BOSS-B3, and the gauge image HP-B3 (see Figure 169(f)).

Furthermore, the output sound Sα3a, which was originally generated after the first reception, would normally cease to be output (become inaudible) after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the third B control unit was deactivated (time elapsed from timing tBa2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in Figure 168(a), it is assumed that the third B control unit is activated again at timing tBa2-B3 or later, and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a is audible (before the output state ends), at timing tBc2-C1 (the performance situation shown in Figure 169(g)).

In this example, if the "Third B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tBc2-C1 within the Third B acceptance state, this will trigger the "Third B post-reception change (Third B post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation received, as shown in Figure 168(f), similar to the case of timing tBc2-B1 described above (the effect shown in Figure 169(g)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "Third B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBc2-C1 within the Third B reception acceptance state, as shown in Figure 168(f), the "Third B Reception Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Third B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" will be displayed again as a Third B reception change.

This example assumes a scenario where, when operation on the 3B control unit is resumed at timing tBc2-C1 within the 3B acceptance state, the display content corresponding to that 3B acceptance state does not progress from the mode shown in Figure 169(g) (the first stage of progression). Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 169(g), the 3B acceptance change (3B acceptance display) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 3B acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation acceptance to the 3B control unit at timing tBc-B2. Details of the display are as described above, so they will not be explained here.

However, the timing tBc2-C1 in this example assumes that it occurs while the audible output of the third B reception output sound (first reception output sound Sα3), which started outputting within the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3, is still being emitted.

In this regard, the third B acceptance-accepting state in this example is implemented in such a way that it does not terminate the "previous post-acceptance change" that is in the process of being executed, thereby not initiating a new post-acceptance change. Therefore, not only at timing tBc2-C1, but even after timing tBc2-C1 has arrived, unless the audible output of the third B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3) that was started to be output during the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3 has ended, the third B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα3) will not be newly outputted. In other words, in this case, under the third B acceptance-accepting state in this example, as shown in Figure 168(h), after the audible output (a predetermined output time) of one instance of the third B acceptance-after output sound (first acceptance-after output sound Sα3), which is audibly output across timings tBc2-B3, has finished, a new third B acceptance-after output sound (first acceptance-after output sound Sα3) corresponding to the operation acceptance will begin output at the timing when the operation acceptance to the third B operation unit is first made. At this time, after the audible output (a predetermined output time) of one instance of the third B acceptance-after output sound (first acceptance-after output sound Sα3), which is audibly output across timings tBc2-B3, has finished, there is no need to redo the operation to the third B operation unit; the operation acceptance is performed simply by maintaining the third B operation unit in the operating state from timing tBc2-C1.

Furthermore, regarding the rapid-fire display HB3, it is also possible to allow a single display of the 3B reception after execution, which began within the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3, to continue displaying at timing tBa2-C1. However, in this case, similar to the case of the 3B reception after output sound (first reception after output sound Sα3), after the single 3B reception after display that spans timing tBc2-B3 is hidden (displayed for a predetermined display time before being hidden), a new 3B reception after display corresponding to the initial operation reception to the 3B operation unit will begin to be displayed at the timing of the first operation reception.

Alternatively, if at least one of the post-reception changes that was initiated within the period from timing tBc2-B1 to timing tBc2-B3 is in the execution state when timing tBc2-C1 arrives, the post-reception change may not be newly outputted unless all of the post-reception changes are de-executed. If this method is adopted, in the example shown in Figure 168, the 3B post-reception display will not be displayed for a new period until the audible output of the 3B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα3) has finished. In other words, in this case, the 3B post-reception display will not be newly displayed at timing tBc2-C1, and a new display will be displayed at the timing when the operation reception to the 3B operation unit is first made, after the audible output of one period of the 3B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα3), which is being output audibly across timing tBc2-B3, has finished.

Furthermore, the performance examples shown in Figures 168 and 169 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 3B control unit), which began at timing tBc2-C1, continues even after timing tBc2-C2 arrives (when the conditions for not being able to accept operations from the 3B control unit are met). This assumes that the auto-continuous pressing function remains active until timing tBc2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBc2-C1 to timing tBc2-C2 (the period during which the 3B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the 3B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change corresponding to these requests (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBc2-C1 to timing tBc2-C2 (the period during which the third B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HB3b and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a) will be the same as in the case of the period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3 (see Figure 169(e)) as described above, unless further development of the performance content occurs. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

Here, the third B acceptance state in this example assumes that no special mode (final mode) appears as a post-acceptance change. Therefore, in the period from timing tBc2-C1 to timing tBc2-C2 in the example shown in Figure 168, the "third B post-acceptance change (third B post-acceptance performance)" in response to the operation acceptance will be executed multiple times in a mode where the performance content progresses only once (see Figure 169(g)). When timing tBa2-C2 arrives, the auto-repeated button function, which had been enabled up to that point, is disabled.

In this regard, when the auto-button function is disabled at timings tBc2-A2 and tBc2-B3, the post-reception changes, such as the button-mashing indicator HB3 (which was displayed by the auto-button function) and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a (which was output by the auto-button function), are not terminated prematurely due to the cessation of operation reception. Similarly, when the auto-button function is disabled at timing tBc2-C2, as shown in Figures 168(f) and (h), the post-reception changes, such as the button-mashing indicator HB3 (which was displayed by the auto-button function) and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a (which was output by the auto-button function), are not terminated prematurely due to the cessation of operation reception (they are maintained in their execution state until the remaining execution time is consumed).

With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions for preventing operation of the third B control unit have been met at timing tBc2-C2 (i.e., that the third B control unit is no longer receiving operation requests). Therefore, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to maintain the state in which the third B control unit is being operated.

In this regard, the image display MG-B3, message display MB3, and status indication display JB3 are not hidden when timing tBc2-C2 arrives, but remain displayed even after timing tBc2-C2 arrives and operation reception to the 3B operation unit is no longer permitted. This gives the player a sense of expectation that even after timing tBc2-C2, there may still be a chance for operation reception to the 3B operation unit to occur and create a new change.

In this example, the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 are displayed starting at timing tBc1, then, after timings tBc2-C2 where operation acceptance is no longer permitted, they are hidden at timing tBc3. The status indication display JB3 is not hidden at timing tBc3, but is hidden at an appropriate timing thereafter. However, as mentioned above, the display timing and hiding timing of the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 may differ from each other, or only one of them may be displayed as an operation-related indicator. Furthermore, the status indication display JB3 may be hidden at the same timing as the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3.

In this example, the operation state of the "Third B Operation Unit," which started at timing tBc2-C1, is assumed to continue even when the player maintains the state when the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 are hidden (timing tBc3), and even when the situation indication display JB3 is hidden.

In this regard, in the state where the 3B input is permitted, after transitioning to a state where "operation input to the 3B operation unit is not permitted" (after timing tBc2-C2), there are cases (and cases where the conditions for the "state where operation input to the 3B operation unit is permitted" are met again before timing tBc3 arrives (and further, the timing when the status indication display JB3 is hidden), when the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 are hidden. If the conditions for the "state where operation input to the 3B operation unit is permitted" are not met again, the auto-repeated input function will remain disabled from timing tBc2-C2 until timing tBc3 arrives, and operation-related displays such as the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 will be hidden.

Furthermore, whether the conditions for the "state in which operation reception to the 3B operation unit is permitted" are met between timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc3, and the timing at which this state occurs, may be determined, for example, based on operation reception during the period from timing tBc2 to timing tBc2-C2, or based on the results of a performance judgment performed during the period from timing tBc2-C2 to timing tBc3, or based on the type of pattern variation of the symbol variation, or the result of the jackpot judgment. In short, it is sufficient that the conditions for the "state in which operation reception to the 3B operation unit is permitted" may be met between timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc3, and the method of implementation is not limited.

Alternatively, the 3B acceptance state may be generated at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBc2-C2 to timing tBc3, as a type of acceptance state that re-establishes the "state in which operation acceptance to the 3B operation unit is permitted."

In this example, as shown in Figure 168(b), the scenario where the "state in which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is permitted" occurs again at timing tBc2-C3 (i.e., when the conditions for occurrence are met) is assumed to occur within the period from timing tBc2-C2 to timing tBc3.

In this regard, at timing tBc3 in this example, as shown in Figures 168(a), (b) and 169(g), (h), and (i), operation reception to the third B operation unit is properly performed based on the detection of the operation state of the "third B operation unit" maintained from timing tBc2-C1, with a period in between during which operation reception to the third B operation unit is not permitted (the period from timing tBc2-C2 to timing tBc2-C3, the situation shown in Figure 169(h)). This allows for the commencement of post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception (the performance situation shown in Figure 169(i)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "Third B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBc2-C3, as shown in Figures 168(f) and (h), the "First Post-Operation Sound Sα3 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Third B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is again audibly output, and the "Post-Operation Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Third B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, even when operation on the 3B control unit is resumed at timing tBc2-C3, the animation content corresponding to the 3B acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 169(i), the 3B acceptance change (such as the 3B acceptance display or 3B acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 3B acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation acceptance of the 3B control unit at timing tBc2-B2. Details of the animation are as described above, so they will not be explained here.

In this regard, in the third B acceptance state, if the conditions for the "state in which operation acceptance to the third B operation unit is permitted" are met again between timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc3 (and furthermore, the timing in which the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 are hidden) (and the timing in which the status indication display JB3 is hidden), then the "state in which operation acceptance to the third B operation unit is permitted" may have its termination conditions met (and not met) before timing tBc3 arrives.

Furthermore, regarding whether the termination conditions for the "state in which operation acceptance to the 3B operation unit is permitted" that occurs at timings tBc2-C2 and tBc2-C3 are met before timing tBc3 arrives, and the timing at which this state ends, these can be determined, for example, based on the operation acceptance during the period from timing tBc2 to timing tBc2-C2, or based on the results of a performance judgment performed during the period from timing tBc2-C2 to timing tBc3, or based on the type of pattern variation of the symbol variation, or the result of the jackpot judgment. In short, it is sufficient that the termination conditions for the "state in which operation acceptance to the 3B operation unit is permitted" that occurs at timing tBc2-C3 may be met before timing tBc3 arrives; the method of implementation is not limited.

Alternatively, the 3B acceptance state may be configured such that, at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBc2-C2 to timing tBc3, the "state in which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is permitted" is re-established, and this "state in which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is permitted" is terminated at a predetermined timing within the period up to timing tBc3.

Furthermore, the performance examples shown in Figures 168 and 169 assume that the "state in which operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit is permitted," which began at timing tBc2-C3, continues until timing tBc2-C4, which is before timing tBc3, and that the termination condition is met.

In this regard, at timing tBc2-C4, similar to when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled at timing tBc2-C2 as described above, as shown in Figures 168(f) and (h), the post-reception changes such as the continuous button press display HB3, which was previously displayed by the auto-repeated button press function, and the first post-reception output sound Sα3a, which was previously output by the auto-repeated button press function, are not terminated prematurely when no further operation is received (they are maintained in their execution state until the remaining execution time is consumed).

With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions for preventing operation of the 3B control unit are met at timings tBc2-C4 (i.e., that the 3B control unit is no longer receiving operation signals). Therefore, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to maintain the state in which the 3B control unit is being operated.

In this example, after the condition for disallowing operation to the 3B operation unit is met at timings tBc2-C4, the state in which "operation to the 3B operation unit is permitted" will not occur again until timing tBc3 (and further, the timing when the status indication display JB3 is hidden) arrives, when the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3 are hidden. Therefore, even if the "3B operation unit" remains in operation until timing tBc3 (and further, the timing when the status indication display JB3 is hidden), it will not occur during that period for the auto-repeated function to be activated, operation requests to be received multiple times, or post-reception changes in response to operation requests to be executed multiple times (see Figure 169(j)).

However, it is also possible to allow the conditions for the "state in which operation acceptance to the 3B operation unit is permitted" to be met again (and not met) between timings tBc2-C4 and tBc3. In this case, it goes without saying that, based on the detection of the operation state of the "3B operation unit" maintained from timing tBc2-C1, with multiple periods in between during which operation acceptance to the 3B operation unit is not permitted, operation acceptance to the 3B operation unit will be performed again, and the post-acceptance change (auto-repeated button press function) corresponding to this operation acceptance will begin execution.

In the examples shown in Figures 169(h) and (j), a message such as "Miss!!" is displayed based on the arrival of timings tBc2-C2 and tBc2-C4. However, it is also possible to have no new message appear based on the arrival of timings tBc2-C2 and tBc2-C4.

Furthermore, in order to suitably maintain the visual appeal of the third B input acceptance state, it is desirable that, if no operation is performed by the player until the timing tBc2-C2 (or timing tBc2-C4) arrives when operation acceptance to the third B operation unit is no longer permitted, the same post-acceptance changes as when such operation is performed do not occur (the automatic button function is not activated).

Furthermore, the 3B reception permission state is not provided as a "type of reception permission state in which the reception permission state can be terminated early based on the fact that an operation has been received," and the state will not be terminated based on an operation received for the "3B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)."

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "4th B Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state). Figure 170 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "4th B Acceptance State" is generated based on the fulfillment of the above-mentioned conditions "Condition 4B" and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 171 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the "4th B Acceptance State" is generated.

Now, assuming the starting conditions are met (holdings are processed) and the "Fourth B Variation Pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement performance determination) corresponding to the "Fourth B Variation Pattern." After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ (such as performance depiction according to the Fourth B Variation Pattern, or sound output of BGM according to the Fourth B Variation Pattern (such as normal BGM playback when not reaching)), and within the execution period of this variation performance, it additionally executes a performance (pre-announcement performance) according to the result of the pre-announcement performance determination, in addition to the performance of the selected "Fourth B Variation Pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 170(b), during the execution period of the variation effect related to the "4B variation pattern," based on the arrival of timing tBd2, which is the 4B time elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the fulfillment of "condition 4B"), the above-mentioned 4B acceptance permission state (valid period) is made possible, allowing "operation reception to the 4B operation unit regarding changes after 4B reception (such as the 4B effect status indication display JB4, the 4B rapid-fire display HB4, and the 4B post-reception output sound Sα4)" (the situation shown in Figure 171(a)).

In this embodiment, the "fourth B operation unit" that allows operation reception in the fourth B reception-permitted state is not the "operation button 410" that allows multiple operation receptions in the first B reception-permitted state and the second B reception-permitted state, but rather the "sword ornament 5001" that also allows multiple operation receptions in the third B reception-permitted state, thus allowing multiple operation receptions until the fourth B reception-permitted state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in Figures 170(b) to (e), when the 4B acceptance state occurs, a imitation image display MG-B4 that imitates the target of operation by the player (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 4B operation unit), a message display MB4 related to the operation on the target of operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 4B operation unit), and a status indication display JB4 that can suggest the degree of progress of the performance over the entire period after the operation is accepted are displayed when a timing tBd1 arrives that is before the 4B acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance to the 4B operation unit is accepted). In addition, at the timing tBd1 in this example, the audible output of the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 that prompts the player to take action is also started. Therefore, during the period from timing tBd1 to tBd2 in this example, even though operation-related displays prompting multiple operation requests to be accepted for the sword ornament 5001, such as the image display MG-B4 and the message display MB4, are displayed, and the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is audibly output, no operation to the sword ornament 5001 is judged as a valid operation (operation is accepted).

As will be discussed later, the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 in this example, unlike the 3B operation-related output sound OB3, is audibly output as a "predetermined type of output sound" played only once, as shown in Figure 170(g). However, the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 does not necessarily have to be a "predetermined type of output sound" played only once; the point is that it should be audibly output as an output sound of a different type from the 3B operation-related output sound OB3. Therefore, if it is an output sound of a different type from the 3B operation-related output sound OB3, it may be audibly output using a method that allows it to be played repeatedly.

Here, the mock image display MG-B4, message display MB4, status indication display JB4, and 4B operation-related output sound OB4 do not necessarily have to appear before the 4B reception-acceptance state occurs. They may be displayed simultaneously with the occurrence of the 4B reception-acceptance state, or slightly delayed thereafter. In particular, the status indication display JB4 may not be displayed until the first operation reception is made to the 4B operation unit in the 4B reception-acceptance state; that is, it may be implemented to appear and be displayed only when an operation reception is made to the 4B operation unit. Furthermore, the timing of the display of the mock image display MG-B4, the timing of the display of the message display MB4, and the timing of the start of the audible output of the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 may be different from each other. For example, the message display MB4 may be displayed before the display of the mock image display MG-B4.

Furthermore, regarding "Condition 4B," which is the condition under which operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 becomes permissible in the aforementioned 4B reception-permissible state, unlike "Condition 1B" and "Condition 2B" described above, it may be possible to have both cases: the condition is met before the timing of the display of an operation-related indicator (such as a mock image or message) prompting the user to perform multiple operation receptions for the 4B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) or before the timing of the audible output of the 4B operation-related sound OB4; and the condition is met after the timing of the display of an operation-related indicator (such as a mock image or message) prompting the user to perform multiple operation receptions for the 4B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) or before the audible output of the 4B operation-related sound OB4.

When this configuration is adopted, in the 4B acceptance state, there are two possibilities: one where operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted before the timing of the display of operation-related indicators (such as the display of a model image or message) or the timing of the audible output of the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 (when timing tBd2 shown in Figure 170 occurs before timing tBd1); and another where operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted after the timing of the display of operation-related indicators (such as the display of a model image or message) or the timing of the audible output of the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 (when timing tBd2 shown in Figure 170 occurs after timing tBd1). This allows for the appropriate maintenance of a sense of tension.

However, it is important that the same post-reception change in response to the reception occurs whether the reception of the 4B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is performed in the 4B reception-permitted state where timing tBd2, as shown in Figure 170, arrives before timing tBd1, or whether the reception of the 4B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is performed in the 4B reception-permitted state where timing tBd2, as shown in Figure 170, arrives after timing tBd1. This makes it difficult to recognize the timing at which reception is permitted, even within a single valid period, and is expected to effectively maintain a sense of tension.

Furthermore, regarding the "Condition 4B" described above, which is the condition under which operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 become permissible when the 4B reception-permissible state is reached, it may be satisfied at the same timing as when operation-related displays (such as mock image displays or message displays) prompting multiple operation requests for the 4B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) are displayed, or when the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is audibly output. However, it goes without saying that even in this case, it is important that the same characteristics appear as post-reception changes in response to operation requests.

Furthermore, when adopting these configurations, the method for setting timings tBd1 and tBd2 (condition 4B) may be adopted as appropriate. Examples of implementation are listed below, but these are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other methods are also possible.

For example, if the elapsed time since the symbol change began is set as the "timing tBd2 (condition 4B)," it is possible to prepare multiple elapsed times and then selectively use one of them through a performance judgment (lottery). Alternatively, if the remaining time until the symbol change ends is set as the "timing tBd2 (condition 4B)," it is possible to prepare multiple remaining times and then selectively use one of them through a performance judgment (lottery). Furthermore, if the timing tBd2 (condition 4B) is set within a period when the symbol change is not being performed, for example, the elapsed time since the symbol change was put into a non-performance state, or the elapsed time since the jackpot game began, can be set as the "timing tBd2 (condition 4B)," and multiple elapsed times can be prepared and then selectively use one of them through a performance judgment (lottery). Furthermore, when employing any of these methods, timing tBd1 will occur only at predetermined timings.

Conversely, by replacing timing tBd2 (condition 4B) with timing tBd1, using one of the aforementioned timing tBd2 (condition 4B) setting methods, and ensuring that timing tBd2 (condition 4B) occurs only at predetermined timings, a similar configuration can be achieved.

Alternatively, the conditions for the occurrence of "Timing tBd1" and "Timing tBd2" may be determined by random selection with a predetermined probability each time. If the conditions for "Timing tBd1" are met first, "Timing tBd2" may occur afterward; conversely, if the conditions for "Timing tBd2" are met first, "Timing tBd1" may occur afterward.

In this example, the mock image display MG-B4, message display MB4, and status indication display JB4 are designed to continue displaying after the start of display, regardless of the operating status of the 4B operation unit, at least until the 4B reception acceptance state ends (this configuration is not mandatory). In contrast, the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible during the 4B reception acceptance state, but it is not necessarily required that it not be terminated midway.

Furthermore, regarding the conditions under which operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 becomes inaccessible while the 4B reception-permitted state is in effect, there may be two cases: one where the conditions are met before the timing tBd3 when the operation-related indicators (such as the display of a model image or a message) prompting the user to perform multiple operation receptions for the 4B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) are hidden, or before the timing when the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible; and another where the conditions are met after the timing tBd3 when the operation-related indicators (such as the display of a model image or a message) prompting the user to perform multiple operation receptions for the 4B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) are hidden, or before the timing when the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible.

When this configuration is adopted, in the 4B acceptance state, there are two possibilities: one where operation acceptance to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted before the timing when operation-related displays (such as the display of the model image or message) are hidden, or before the timing when the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible; and another where operation acceptance to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted after the timing when the operation-related displays (such as the display of the model image or message) are hidden, or before the timing when the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible. This configuration is expected to effectively maintain a sense of tension.

However, it is important that the same post-reception change in response to the operation reception occurs in both cases: when an operation reception is made to the sword ornament 5001 in the 4B reception-permitted state, before the timing when operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is permitted, or when an operation reception is made to the 4B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) in the 4B reception-permitted state, before the timing when operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is permitted, or after the timing when operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is permitted, before the timing when operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is permitted, the same pattern appears as a post-reception change in response to the operation reception. This makes it difficult to recognize the timing when operation reception becomes unpermitted, even though it is a single valid period, and is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the conditions under which operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are no longer permitted in the state of the fourth B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) may be met at the same timing as when operation-related displays (such as mock image displays or message displays) prompting multiple operation requests to the fourth B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) are hidden, or when the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 is made inaudible. However, it goes without saying that even in this case, it is important that the same behavior appears as a post-reception change in response to the operation request.

Furthermore, when adopting these configurations, the setting methods for each of the above timings may be adopted as appropriate. For example, the setting methods for the periods before and after these two timings can be set by following the setting methods for the periods before and after "timing tBd1" and "timing tBd2 (condition 4B)" described above.

Furthermore, in the fourth B acceptance state in this example, when it occurs (in this example, at timing tBd2, but there may be a slight delay before or after this), the fourth B operation-promoting light LB4 is illuminated to prompt the player to take action. In this example, the fourth B operation-promoting light LB4 is the light-emitting part of the fourth B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001), but the fourth B operation-promoting light LB4 may be the light-emitting part located in a different part of the fourth B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001), as long as it is a way to prompt the player to take action on the sword ornament 5001 (for example, a way that only appears when acceptance of action on the sword ornament 5001 is permitted). In this case, it goes without saying that the fourth B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001) does not necessarily need to have a light-emitting part.

In this example, the 4B operation-promoting light-emitting LB4 continues to emit light from the time it is activated, regardless of the operating state of the 4B operation unit, until at least the 4B acceptance state ends (this is not a mandatory configuration).

Here, the "Image Display MG-B4" corresponding to the 4B Acceptance State uses a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme. However, it is also possible to selectively use and display a color scheme determined based on the results of, for example, performance judgment, from among multiple color schemes.

Furthermore, the "Mock Image Display MG-B4" corresponding to the 4B acceptance state is configured such that when a predetermined moving image of the "operation receiving section" (the object of operation) is considered as a single periodic change, this periodic change repeats for a predetermined period of 4B time. However, since this period of 4B time is set to be longer (longer cycle) than the period of 1B time that appears in the 1B acceptance state, the 4B acceptance state depicts the "operation receiving section" moving slowly up and down within its movable range compared to the 1B acceptance state described above.

Furthermore, in the fourth B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 170(c), (d) and 171(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-B4, a message display related to the acceptance of operation to the fourth B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed (here, the message display MB4, which displays "Attack the goblin! 'Super Rapid Strike' with the sword!!"). The message display shown in this fourth B acceptance state (here, the message display MB4, which displays "Attack the goblin! 'Super Rapid Strike' with the sword!!") differs in its form (display content) from the message display shown in the third B acceptance state (the message display MB3, which displays "Attack the demon! 'Rapid Strike' with the sword!!").

However, in the 4B acceptance state, it is sufficient that an operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operation requests to the 4B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed. For example, if at least one of a mock image display and a message display is displayed as the operation-related display, it is not necessary to perform both.

Furthermore, in the 4B reception-accepting state, as shown in Figures 170(c) and (d), if no operation is received for the 4B operation unit, the mock image display and message display will continue to be displayed until timing tBd3 arrives, at which point they will be hidden. Therefore, while the 4B reception-accepting state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock image display MG-B4) indicating the remaining time until timing tBd3 arrives, when the 4B reception-accepting state ends, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display is not necessarily required.

Furthermore, if the "Mock Image Display MG-B4" corresponding to the 4B acceptance state is to be displayed before the timing tBd2 in which the 4B acceptance state occurs, the periodic changes and gauge image changes may be delayed until timing tBd2 occurs before starting.

Furthermore, in the fourth B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 170(e) and 171(a), the situation indication display JB4 corresponding to the fourth B acceptance state displays an ally character (here, ally character YS-B4) corresponding to the type of the fourth B acceptance state, an enemy character (here, enemy character BOSS-B4 depicted as a goblin) corresponding to the type of the fourth B acceptance state, and a gauge image HP-B4 showing its remaining HP gauge. In the 4B reception-accepting state, the likelihood of a big win is suggested through a performance that indicates whether the ally character YS-B4 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-B4 (whether the gauge image HP-B4 can be reduced to 0) through multiple operation receptions to the 4B operation unit. In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)", a performance may be executed in which the "ally character YS-B4" attacks the "enemy character BOSS-B4". In this example, the situation indication display JB4 displays the ally character YS-B4, the enemy character BOSS-B4, and the gauge image HP-B4, but it is not necessary to display all of these. It is possible to suggest the operation status as long as at least one of the ally character YS-B4, the enemy character BOSS-B4, and the gauge image HP-B4 is displayed. Furthermore, the friendly character YS-B4 may be displayed with a different image than the friendly character YS-B1 that appears in the first B acceptance state and the second B acceptance state. Also, in the fourth B acceptance state, the status indication display JB4 may not necessarily be displayed.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 170, it is assumed that the first operation request is received for the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBd2-A1 within the 4B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 171(b)).

In this example, if the first operation request is received for the "Fourth B Operation Unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBd2-A1 within the Fourth B Acceptance State, a "Fourth B Reception Change (Fourth B Reception Performance)" corresponding to that operation request will occur, as shown in Figures 170(f) and (h) (the performance situation shown in Figure 171(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is received for the "Fourth B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBd2-A1 within the Fourth B Acceptance Permitted State, as shown in Figures 170(f) and (h), a "Fourth B Acceptance Post-Output Sound" corresponding to the operation received for the "Fourth B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is audibly output, and a "Fourth B Acceptance Post-Display" corresponding to the operation received for the "Fourth B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is displayed.

In other words, when an operation request is received once for the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 4B reception-accepting state, a video display of one instance is shown as the "4B reception post-display," as shown in Figure 171(b), depicting "ally character YS-B4" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B4" with sword techniques (including sword movements and slashing effects). However, as will be described later, in the 4B reception-accepting state, based on the result of the performance judgment when the operation request is received, there is a possibility that "enemy character BOSS-B4" may be injured, the intensity of the sword technique may increase, or the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-B4 may decrease (the performance content may progress due to the performance judgment, etc.). If the performance content progresses in this way, the state in which the operation was received by the 4B control unit afterward (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-B4" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B4" with sword techniques) will appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed performance content (see Figures 170(e), (f), and Figure 171(e), etc.). After the performance content has progressed in this way, as long as the state in which the 4B control unit is allowed to receive input continues, the degree of progress of the performance content will not revert to the state before progress. Therefore, even if the 4B control unit receives input again after the single video display that has changed to the progressed performance content has finished, the state in which the operation was received by the 4B control unit (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-B4" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B4" with sword techniques) may appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed performance content. The game's presentation could be designed to suggest a higher probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot as the story progresses.

However, in the 4B reception-accepting state, unlike the 1B reception-accepting state and the 2B reception-accepting state (reception-accepting states where the degree of performance is set for the performance content), the degree of performance is not set for the performance content as a change after reception in response to the operation reception of the 4B operation unit. Instead, each time an operation reception is made to the 4B operation unit, the 4B event as a change after reception (which may be just a display, just a sound, just light, or just a movable part movement) is repeatedly executed (occurs). Needless to say, in this case, the status indication display JB4 will no longer be displayed.

Furthermore, the 4B acceptance state differs from the 3B acceptance state described above in at least one of the following: the configuration regarding whether or not an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage the player to take action, the manner of operation-related displays (such as message displays) (type of display), and the manner of operation-related output sounds (type of sound, conditions for non-output, etc.) (in this example, all are different). However, the post-acceptance change when an operation is received by the 4B operation unit in the 4B acceptance state may be the same as the post-acceptance change when an operation is received by the 3B operation unit in the 3B acceptance state described above. Alternatively, the differences between the 4B acceptance state and the 3B acceptance state described above may be limited to three points: the configuration regarding whether or not an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage the player to take action, the manner of operation-related displays (such as message displays) (type of display), and the manner of operation-related output sounds (type of sound, conditions for non-output, etc.), with all other configurations being the same. As stated above, it is not necessarily required that multiple changes occur as a post-reception change. In this case, for example, if we decide to generate only the 4B specific event (e.g., the 4B post-reception output sound) as a post-reception change when an operation is received for the 4B operation unit in the 4B reception-permitted state (the operation to the 4B operation unit is determined to be valid), then the post-reception change when an operation is received for the 3B operation unit in the 3B reception-permitted state (the operation to the 3B operation unit is determined to be valid) will be the 3B specific event (e.g., the 3B post-reception output sound), which will be the same event (same output sound) as the 4B specific event.

Furthermore, in this example, when an operation is received once for the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 4B reception-accepting state, in addition to the "4B reception display" described above, the first reception-after output sound Sα4 may be output as the "4B reception-after output sound," as shown in Figure 170(h). The first reception-after output sound Sα4 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-B4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B4 with sword techniques (such as sword movements and slashing effects)" that appears as the "4B reception display." However, as will be described later, in this 4B reception-accepting state, unlike the 1B reception-accepting state and the 2B reception-accepting state, there is no possibility of further output sounds different from the first reception-after output sound Sα4 being output as the "4B reception-after output sound." In this document, the first post-reception output sound Sα4 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-reception display. However, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that the player has performed an operation, and when the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it should be output as a sound that suggests that the 4B operation unit is being maintained in an operational state.

However, in the 4B reception-accepting state, unlike the 1B reception-accepting state and the 2B reception-accepting state, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception of the 4B operation unit does not necessarily have to display a post-reception indicator, nor does it necessarily have to output a post-reception sound. For example, in the 4B reception-accepting state, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception of the 4B operation unit may be such that only a predetermined light emission from a predetermined light emission unit appears, or only a specific operation from a specific movable body appears. In short, when an operation reception is made to the 4B operation unit, it is sufficient that the 4B event (which may be just a display, just a sound, just light emission, or just a movable body operation) as a post-reception change in response to the operation reception is executed (occurs) at least multiple times.

Furthermore, in this example, the above timing tBd2-A1 is assumed to occur while the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is in an output state, as shown in Figures 170(g) and (j). However, at timing tBd2-A1, the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is not rendered inaudible as a result of receiving an operation request to the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)".

In other words, in this example, the output sound OB4 related to the 4B operation will not be audible regardless of how many operations are received for the "4B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" while the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is audibly output, or what judgment result is obtained (even if the 4B acceptance state is terminated early). The audible state will not end as a result of such operation reception (it will be output for a predetermined amount of time regardless of operation reception).

In this respect, the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 in this example differs from the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 (see Figure 168) described above in that its audible output is never terminated prematurely. That is, in this case, the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 in this example is always output for a predetermined playback time. However, the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 may also be implemented in such a way that, like the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 described above, it may be rendered inaudible before the predetermined playback time has elapsed, based on the fulfillment of conditions other than the acceptance of operation to the 4B operation unit.

Thus, in the 4B input acceptance state, each time an input is received by the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)," a depiction and sound effect of "ally character YS-B4" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B4" appears (change after one input). That is, the HP of "enemy character BOSS-B4" decreases through multiple attacks by "ally character YS-B4" (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-B4" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests a high level of expectation (change after multiple inputs). However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-B4" is not defeated, it suggests a low level of expectation.

However, the presentation content for the 4B acceptance state described above is merely an example, and it may be implemented using other content. For example, as a post-acceptance change corresponding to the 4B acceptance state, if there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to the operation reception (e.g., the start or end of lamp illumination, or the termination of audible output of a sound that is in output state), it is not necessary to necessarily execute "post-acceptance display" or "post-acceptance output sound." Even with such a configuration, the player can understand that the operation reception has been properly performed.

This example, as shown in Figure 170(a), assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 4B operation unit), initiated at timing tBd2-A1, continues until timing tBd2-A2.

In this regard, the 4B acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (4B operation unit) in an operating state, the corresponding post-reception changes (for example, at least one of post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, or post-reception mechanism operation) are executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated)." Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 170(a), during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 (the period during which the 4B operation unit is maintained in an operating state), multiple operation receptions are made to the 4B operation unit, and the corresponding post-reception changes (for example, at least one of post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, or post-reception mechanism operation) are executed multiple times.

As described above, when an operation request is received by the 4B operation unit in the 4B reception-accepting state, the display shown after the 4B reception, as shown in Figure 171(b), displays the actions of the ally character YS-B4 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B4 with sword techniques (including sword movements and slashing effects). Therefore, during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2, when the so-called auto-fire function is activated, this "single-session video display" will be played multiple times.

Furthermore, as described above, when an operation is received by the 4B operation unit in the 4B reception-accepting state, the 4B reception-after output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-B4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B4 with sword techniques (such as the generation of sword movement and slashing effects)" that appears as the "4B reception-after display." Therefore, during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated, in addition to the "single video display," the sound effect corresponding to such a "single video display" will be played multiple times.

In the 4B acceptance state, when the operation unit (4B operation unit) is maintained in operation and the auto-repeated function is activated, these post-acceptance changes (such as displaying one video and a sound effect (4B post-acceptance output sound)) are executed multiple times. However, the interval between these executions (the time between the start of the previous post-acceptance change and the start of the next post-acceptance change) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). It is desirable to set this "fixed time" to the same time as in the 3B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the 4B reception-enabled state described in this example, when the operation unit (4B operation unit) is maintained in operation and the auto-repeated button function is activated, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B4 with sword techniques (one video display) and the corresponding sound effect (4B reception-output sound) are made executable multiple times as the post-reception changes. However, the interval between the start of execution of each post-reception change in response to the detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-reception change to the start of execution of the next post-reception change) is always set to be less than or equal to a specific time (e.g., 1 second). However, it is desirable that this interval in the 4B reception-enabled state be set to a different length than the interval when the auto-repeated button function is activated in the 1B reception-enabled state described above. For example, it may be set to be longer than the interval when the auto-repeated button function is activated in the 1B reception-enabled state described above, and less than or equal to a specific time (e.g., 1 second).

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 170, a "single video display (one of the changes after acceptance)" of the ally character YS-B4 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B4 with a sword technique is newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button-pressing function. This repeated display of a "single video display" is represented in the figure as "repeated button-pressing display HB4a".

Similarly, in the example shown in Figure 170, during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (the 4th B post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes) is newly output at regular intervals by the auto-repeated function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as the "first post-reception output sound Sα4a."

In this regard, the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 170 assumes a scenario where, although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 4B acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, the "Status Indication Display JB4 (see Figure 170(e))," which indicates the status of the operation in the 4B reception-accepting state, will not change or be initiated (in a manner that progresses the performance) in response to the operation reception. Furthermore, this example assumes that during this period, the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is not terminated prematurely and maintains its output state.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 170, the display of "sword technique attacks" and "slashing effects" shown in Figure 171, and the output of corresponding sound effects, are repeatedly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button press function (the changes after reception are repeatedly executed at regular time intervals) (repeated button press display HB4a, first reception output sound Sα4a). However, no change occurs in the "situation indication display JB4 (see Figure 170(e))." This allows the player to confirm the content of the performance in response to multiple operation receptions, or whether the performance content has not progressed, simply by maintaining the operation state, thus effectively maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, regarding the "Status Indication Display JB4 (see Figure 170(e))", at least one of the following may be changed in response to the input. However, in this case, it is necessary to change to a different form than the "form when the performance content progresses", and if the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 (the period during which the 4B operation unit is maintained in operation state) ends without the performance content progressing (when the operation is interrupted), it will be returned to the "display form before the operation". Also, as mentioned above, the "Status Indication Display JB4 (see Figure 170(e))", such as the ally character YS-B4, enemy character BOSS-B4, and gauge image HP-B4, may not be displayed until the input is received, and may appear and be displayed only when the input is received (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2, the "Status Indication Display JB4 (see Figure 170(e))," which indicates the status of the operation in the fourth B acceptance state, does not change or start execution in response to the operation reception. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the performance content has not progressed.

However, under conditions where the rapid-fire display HB4a is executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2), as shown in Figure 171(b), the rapid-fire display HB4a repeatedly shows "the state in which the ally character YS-B4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B4 with sword techniques (such as the appearance of sword movements and slashing effects)" at regular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JB4" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the 4B acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 170 and 171 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the 4B acceptance state, temporarily interrupts operations on the 4B operation unit at timing tBd2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated button function.

Here, in the 4B acceptance state, as shown in Figure 170(f), even if the operation state of the 4B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tBd2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB4a (change after acceptance), which was in the execution state until then, will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB1a will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tBd2-A2 (even after the 4B operation unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the "single video display" that was in the execution state has finished executing for the predetermined display time (until the execution of one change after acceptance is complete).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 4B control unit is temporarily interrupted (returned to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button press function is disabled, the rapid-fire indicator HB4a, which was previously in an active state, does not immediately disappear (the change after reception is not terminated midway through one execution). Therefore, it takes time for the operation status in the 4B reception-allowed state to be easily recognized. This means that a significant amount of time is consumed in the remaining 4B reception-allowed state, which is expected to create a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation state of the 4B control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in the 4B reception-allowed state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 4B control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HB4a is displayed, the time from when it is put into a non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HB4a is hidden (the time until the change after one reception while the execution was in progress is completed) is not set as a fixed time, but is made variable.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 4B control unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, before the rapid-fire indicator HB4a disappears and a situation arises where the operation status in the 4B acceptance state becomes easily recognizable. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 4B acceptance state will be consumed. Therefore, it is expected that this configuration will appropriately create a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 4B control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in the 4B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the 4B acceptance state, as shown in Figure 170(h), the first post-reception output sound Sα4a, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be rendered inaudible when the operation state of the 4B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) at timing tBd2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated function, similar to the rapid-fire indicator HB4a. In other words, in this case, the first post-reception output sound Sα4a will continue to be output even after timing tBd2-A2 (even after the 4B operation unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in the execution state has finished executing for a predetermined output time (or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 4B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, the first post-reception output sound Sα4a, which was in the active state until then, will not immediately become non-output. In this case, it may appear as if the auto-repeated button function is still active, thus maintaining a desirable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 4B operation unit is interrupted and it is set to a non-operation state while the first reception output sound Sα4a (4B event) is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the first reception output sound Sα4a is no longer output is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 4B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) to disable the auto-repeating function, and how long it will take for the first post-reception output sound Sα4a (4B event) to become non-output, that is, how long it will take to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeating function has been disabled. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 4B acceptance state will be consumed, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 4B control unit.

Furthermore, in the 4B acceptance state, as shown in Figure 170(g), the 4B operation-related output sound OB4, which was previously in an active state, will not become inaudible when the operation state of the 4B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tBd2-A2 to disable the auto-repeating function.

Furthermore, in the fourth B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the fourth B operation unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB4a and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a are both in operation state, a situation will occur where, as shown in Figures 170(f), (h), etc., the rapid-fire indicator HB4a continues to be displayed and the first post-acceptance output sound SB4a continues to be output, even though the fourth B operation unit is in a non-operation state. However, after this, as time elapses since the fourth B operation unit was left in a non-operation state, as shown in Figures 170(f), (h) and Figure 171(c), etc., the rapid-fire indicator HB4a, which had been displayed, will be hidden, and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a will be left in a non-output state. This allows players to easily recognize when the auto-button function is disabled, and also to easily recognize the mode of the status indicator JB4 (in this case, mode JB4a) that suggests the current operation status, such as the ally character YS-B4, the enemy character BOSS-B4, and the gauge image HP-B4 (see Figure 171(c)).

However, as described above, in the example shown in Figure 170, the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 assumes that although multiple operations are received and multiple post-reception changes are executed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 4B acceptance state does not progress. Note that the 4B acceptance state does not necessarily have to occur as an acceptance state in which the performance content may progress; for example, it may occur as an acceptance state in which only one aspect of the post-reception change is executed multiple times.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 171(c), although the mode of the situation indication display JB4 (here, mode JB4a) that suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B4, the enemy character BOSS-B4, and the gauge image HP-B4, can be easily recognized, these modes are the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 171(a)), thus suggesting that the presentation content has not progressed. Note that the modes of the situation indication display JB4 that suggest the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B4, the enemy character BOSS-B4, and the gauge image HP-B4, only need to be able to suggest that the presentation content has not progressed; they do not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 171(a)).

In this example, as shown in Figure 170(a), it is assumed that the "4B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is returned to the operation state at timing tBd2-B1 within the 4B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 171(d)).

In this example, if the "4B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and an operation is received at timing tBd2-B1 within the 4B acceptance state, this triggers the "4B post-reception change (4B post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation received, as shown in Figure 170(f) (the effect shown in Figure 171(d)).

Here, in this example, the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is assumed to have been output for its playback duration and rendered inaudible before the timing tBd2-B1. Furthermore, the 4B operation-related output sound OB4, like the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 described above, is not affected by the status of operation reception to the 4B operation unit. Therefore, even if the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 becomes audible when the timing tBd2-B1 arrives, the state related to its audible output will not terminate due to operation reception at timing tBd2-B1.

Furthermore, the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 in this example differs from the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 described above in that, at least as long as the game is progressing properly, its audible output will not be terminated prematurely under conditions other than those for which the operation was received (this is not a mandatory configuration). As mentioned above, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 may have its audible output terminated prematurely under conditions other than those for which the operation was received, even while the game is progressing properly.

In this example, if an operation is received for the "Fourth B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBd2-B1 within the Fourth B Acceptance Allowed State, as shown in Figures 170(f) and (h), the "First Post-Acceptance Output Sound Sα4 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received for the "Fourth B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is again audibly output, and the "Fourth B Post-Acceptance Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received for the "Fourth B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, even when operation on the 4B control unit is resumed at timing tBd2-B1 within the 4B acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 4B acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 171(d), the 4B acceptance change (such as the 4B acceptance display or 4B acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 4B acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation being accepted by the 4B control unit at timing tBd2-A1. Details of the performance are as described above, so a further explanation will be omitted here.

In this regard, the performance examples shown in Figures 170 and 171 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 4B operation unit), which began at timing tBd2-B1, is maintained until timing tBd2-B3, thereby activating the auto-continuous button-pressing function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3 (the period during which the 4B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the 4B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change corresponding to these requests (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3 (the period during which the 4B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HB4a and the first post-reception output sound Sα4a) remains the same as in the case of the period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2 (see Figure 171(b)), unless the performance content progresses. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 170, the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3 assumes that, among the multiple operation receptions performed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 4th B reception permission state progresses based on the operation reception performed at timing tBd2-B2 within that period (as shown in the performance status in Figure 171(e)).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 170, during the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3, the "4th B Reception Change (4th B Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has not progressed, while during the period from timing tBd2-B2 to timing tBd2-B3, the "4th B Reception Change (4th B Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed.

More specifically, during the period from timing tBd2-B2 to timing tBd2-B3, at "timing tBd2-B2," which is the timing when the performance content progresses, as shown in Figures 170(e) and 171(e), a display change is performed based on the operation reception to the 4B operation unit, changing the state of the status indication display JB4, which indicates the status of the operation, from the previously displayed "state JB4a" to a different "state JB4b." Here, as shown in Figure 171(e), the enemy character BOSS-B4 changes to a state in which it is injured, the sword technique performed by the ally character YS-B4 changes to a state of higher intensity, and the gauge image HP-B4 changes to a state in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased. With this configuration, the change in the state indication JB4 suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 4B acceptance state has progressed due to the operation reception (by the auto-repeated button function) performed at timing tBd2-B2 (and the result of the performance judgment based on that operation).

After the performance has progressed in this way, when an operation request is received by the 4B operation unit, the "Display after 4B reception" will show the "single video display" in an advanced form of the performance, as shown in Figure 171(e), such as "ally character YS-B4 attacks the injured enemy character BOSS-B4 using enhanced sword techniques."

In this example, once the animation progresses, as long as the 4B input acceptance state remains active, the degree of animation progression will not revert to its pre-progress state. Therefore, even when the 4B input unit receives another input request after the completion of the animation display showing the evolved animation, the animation will still display the animation as it did when the input request was received (in this case, the animation showing "ally character YS-B4" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B4" with a sword technique).

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3, when the so-called auto-click function is activated, the "single video display" in which such a change in appearance occurs will be played multiple times by the auto-click function during the period from timing tBd2-B2 onward, when the performance content has progressed.

Furthermore, even during the period after timing tBd2-B2, when the performance progresses, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B4 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B4 with sword techniques (one video display) is restarted at regular intervals (a predetermined time, the same time as before the change) as a post-reception change. Therefore, the "one video display" of the progressed performance is also restarted at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button function. This repeated display (multiple post-reception changes) of the "one video display (one post-reception change)" of the progressed sequence is represented in the diagram as "Repeated Button Display HB4b".

Thus, in the performance display device 1600 according to this example, when the timing tBd2-B2, which is the timing when the performance content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 170(e), (f) and 171(d), (e), the mode of the status indication display JB4 changes from "mode JB4a" to "mode JB4b," and the mode of the rapid-fire display HB4 also changes from "mode HB4a" to "mode HB4b." From this point onward, while the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled (timing tBd2-B2 to tBd2-B3), the status indication display JB4 will be displayed in "mode JB4b," and the rapid-fire display HB4 will be executed in "mode HB4b."

In this example, the mode of the rapid-fire display HB4 is changed according to the progress of the performance content, but it is also possible to keep it constant. That is, even if the rapid-fire display HB4 continues to run in a single mode regardless of the progress of the performance content, the player can still confirm through the rapid-fire display HB4 that the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) operations have been accepted. Furthermore, the player can also confirm the degree of progress of the performance content through the mode of the status indication display JB4. Also, as mentioned above, the 4B acceptance-allowed state may be implemented as a type of acceptance-allowed state where the progress of the performance content itself cannot occur, unlike the 1B and 2B acceptance-allowed states. In this case, it goes without saying that the status indication display will not be shown, and the post-acceptance change will be executed multiple times in only one mode.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is received once by the "4B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 4B reception-accepting state, in addition to the "4B reception display" described above, a first reception output sound Sα4, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," may be output as the "4B reception output sound," as shown in Figure 170(h). However, as described above, as shown in Figure 170(i), in the 4B reception-accepting state, the second reception output sound is not output as the "4B reception output sound."

Furthermore, the first post-reception output sound Sα4 in this example is implemented to be output in the same manner before and after the performance progresses. Therefore, when the timing tBd2-B2, which is the timing when the performance progresses, arrives, the first post-reception output sound Sα4, as a new "sound effect," begins outputting based on the fact that the operation has been received. However, its manner of output is the same as when the operation was received before timing tBd2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not the performance progresses at timing tBd2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is activated, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (first post-reception output sound Sα4) is newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the diagram as "first post-reception output sound Sα4a." The output manner of the first post-reception output sound Sα4a during this period is the same as in the case of the "period from timing tBd2-A1 to timing tBd2-A2" described above, so an explanation is omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-reception output sound Sα4a was not changed according to the progression of the performance content, but it may be changed according to the progression of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HB4b is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tBd2-B2 to timing tBd2-B3), as shown in Figure 171(e), the rapid-fire display HB4b repeatedly shows "ally character YS-B4 attacking wounded enemy character BOSS-B4 with a high-intensity sword technique (such as the appearance of sword movements and slashing effects)" at regular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JB4" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the 4B acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 170 and 171 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the 4B acceptance state, interrupts operations on the 4B operation unit again at timing tBd2-B3, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button function.

As described above, in the 4B acceptance state, even if the operation state of the 4B control unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the 4B acceptance state is continuing, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB4, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be hidden as a result (the post-acceptance change that was in the middle of execution will not be terminated prematurely due to the non-operation). Therefore, as shown in Figure 170(f), even if the operation state of the 4B control unit is interrupted at timing tBd2-B3, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB4b will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tBd2-B3 (even after the 4B control unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the above-mentioned "one video display (one post-acceptance change)" that was in the execution state has been executed for a predetermined display time (execution time) and finished displaying (executing), or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, similar to the case of the rapid-fire indicator HB4a, if the operation on the 4B control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HB4b is displayed, the time from the time it is put into a non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HB4b is hidden (the time until the change after one input is received is completed) is not set to a fixed time, but is set to be variable.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 4B reception-accepting state, even if the operation state of the 4B control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the 4B reception-accepting state is continuing, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the first post-reception output sound Sα4a, which was in an output state until then, will not be switched to a non-output state as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figure 170(h), even if the operation state of the 4B control unit is interrupted at timing tBd2-B3, the first post-reception output sound Sα4a will continue to be output even after timing tBd2-B3 (even after the 4B control unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has finished executing and outputting for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 4B control unit is interrupted and it is set to a non-operated state while the first reception output sound Sα4 (4B event) is being output, the time from the non-operated state until the first reception output sound Sα4a becomes non-output is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will have passed since the operation state of the 4B control unit was interrupted (set to a non-operated state) and the auto-repeated function was disabled, before the first reception output sound Sα4 (4B event) becomes inaudible, that is, when it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time as the 4B reception-acceptable state will be consumed, which is expected to create a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation state of the 4B control unit.

Furthermore, in the fourth B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, even if the operation state of the fourth B operation unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB4b and the first post-reception output sound Sα4a are both in operation, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB4b is hidden and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα4a is turned off are different, as shown in Figures 170(f), (h), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB4b is hidden is shown to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα4a is turned off, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state is hidden or turned off is indeterminate, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB4b is hidden may be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα4a is turned off, or it may be after that timing. Furthermore, it may be possible to allow for situations where their timings coincide.

With this configuration, in the fourth B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the fourth B operation unit is interrupted (brought to a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB4b and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a are both in operation state, a situation will occur where the rapid-fire indicator HB4b continues to be displayed and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα4a continues to be output, while the fourth B operation unit is in a non-operation state, as shown in Figures 170(f) and (h). However, after this, as time elapses since the fourth B operation unit was put into a non-operation state (time elapsed from timing tBd2-B3), the rapid-fire indicator HB4b, which had been displayed, will be turned off, as shown in Figures 170(f) and 171(f). This allows players to easily recognize when the auto-button function is disabled, and also to easily recognize the state of the situation indication display JB4 (in this case, the state JB4b where the performance content has progressed), which indicates the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B3, the enemy character BOSS-B4, and the gauge image HP-B4 (see Figure 171(f)).

Furthermore, the output sound Sα4a, which was originally generated after the first reception, would normally cease to be output (become inaudible) after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the 4B control unit was deactivated (time elapsed from timing tBa2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in Figure 170(a), it is assumed that the 4B operation unit is put back into operation at timing tBa2-B3 or later, and at timing tBd2-C1 (the performance situation shown in Figure 171(g)), while the first post-reception output sound Sα4a is audible (before the output state ends).

In this example, if the "4B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tBd2-C1 within the 4B acceptance state, this will trigger the "4B post-reception change (4B post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figure 170(f), similar to the case of timing tBd2-B1 described above (the effect shown in Figure 171(g)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "Fourth B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBd2-C1 within the Fourth B Acceptance State, as shown in Figure 170(f), the "Fourth B Acceptance Post-Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "Fourth B Operation Unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" will be displayed again as a Fourth B Acceptance Post-Change.

This example assumes a scenario where, when operation on the 4B control unit is resumed at timing tBd2-C1 within the 4B acceptance state, the display content corresponding to that 4B acceptance state does not progress from the mode shown in Figure 171(g) (the first stage of progression). Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 171(g), the 4B acceptance change (4B acceptance display) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 4B acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation acceptance to the 4B control unit at timing tBd-B2. Details of the display are as described above, so they will not be explained here.

However, the timing tBd2-C1 in this example assumes that it occurs while the audible output of the 4th B post-reception output sound (the first post-reception output sound Sα4), which started outputting within the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3, is still being emitted.

In this regard, the fourth B acceptance-permitting state in this example is implemented in such a way that it does not terminate the "previous post-acceptance change" that is in the process of being executed, thereby not initiating a new post-acceptance change. Therefore, not only at timing tBd2-C1, but even after timing tBd2-C1 has arrived, unless the audible output of the fourth B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα4) that was started to be output during the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3 has ended, the fourth B post-acceptance output sound (first post-acceptance output sound Sα4) will not be newly outputted. In other words, in this case, under the fourth B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figure 170(h), after the audible output (a predetermined output time) of one instance of the fourth B acceptance output sound (first acceptance output sound Sα4), which is audibly output across timings tBd2-B3, has finished, a new fourth B acceptance output sound (first acceptance output sound Sα4) corresponding to the operation acceptance will begin output at the timing when the operation acceptance to the fourth B operation unit is first made. At this time, after the audible output (a predetermined output time) of one instance of the fourth B acceptance output sound (first acceptance output sound Sα4), which is audibly output across timings tBd2-B3, has finished, there is no need to redo the operation to the fourth B operation unit; the fourth B operation unit only needs to be maintained in the operation state from timing tBd2-C1 for the operation acceptance to be completed.

Furthermore, regarding the rapid-fire display HB4, it is possible that the display state of one instance of the 4th B reception display, which was started within the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3, may continue at timing tBa2-C1. However, in this case, similar to the case of the 4th B reception output sound (first reception output sound Sα4), after the one instance of the 4th B reception display displayed across timing tBd2-B3 is hidden (displayed for a predetermined display time before being hidden), a new 4th B reception display corresponding to the operation reception will be displayed at the timing when the first operation reception is received for the 4th B operation unit.

Alternatively, if at least one of the post-reception changes that was initiated within the period from timing tBd2-B1 to timing tBd2-B3 is in the execution state when timing tBd2-C1 arrives, the post-reception change may not be newly outputted unless all of the post-reception changes are de-executed. If this method is adopted, in the example shown in Figure 170, the 4B post-reception display will not be displayed for a new period until the audible output of the 4B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα4) has finished. In other words, in this case, the 4B post-reception display will not be newly displayed at timing tBd2-C1, and a new display will be started at the timing when the operation reception to the 4B operation unit is first made, after the audible output of one period of the 4B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα4), which is being output audibly across timing tBd2-B3, has finished.

Furthermore, the performance examples shown in Figures 170 and 171 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 4B control unit), which began at timing tBd2-C1, continues even after timing tBd2-C2 arrives (when the conditions for not being able to accept operations from the 4B control unit are met). This assumes that the auto-continuous pressing function remains active until timing tBd2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBd2-C1 to timing tBd2-C2 (the period during which the 4B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the 4B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change corresponding to these requests (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBd2-C1 to timing tBd2-C2 (the period during which the 4B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HB4b and the first post-reception output sound Sα4a) will be the same as in the case of the period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3 (see Figure 171(e)) as described above, unless further development of the performance content occurs. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

Here, the 4B acceptance state in this example assumes that no special mode (final mode) appears as a post-reception change. Therefore, in the period from timing tBd2-C1 to timing tBd2-C2 in the example shown in Figure 170, the "4B post-reception change (4B post-reception performance)" in response to the operation reception will be executed multiple times in a mode where the performance content progresses only once (see Figure 171(g)). When timing tBa2-C2 arrives, the auto-repeated button function, which had been enabled up to that point, is disabled.

In this regard, when the auto-button function is disabled at timings tBd2-A2 and tBd2-B3, the post-reception changes, such as the button-mashing indicator HB4 (which was displayed by the auto-button function) and the first post-reception output sound Sα4a (which was output by the auto-button function), are not terminated prematurely because no further operation is being received. Similarly, when the auto-button function is disabled at timing tBd2-C2, as shown in Figures 170(f) and (h), the post-reception changes, such as the button-mashing indicator HB4 (which was displayed by the auto-button function) and the first post-reception output sound Sα4a (which was output by the auto-button function), are not terminated prematurely because no further operation is being received (they are maintained in their execution state until the remaining execution time is consumed).

With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions for preventing operation of the 4B control unit have been met at timing tBd2-C2 (i.e., that the 4B control unit is no longer receiving operation requests). Therefore, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to maintain the state in which the 4B control unit is being operated.

In this regard, the image display MG-B4, message display MB4, and status indication display JB4 are not hidden when timing tBd2-C2 arrives, but remain displayed even after timing tBd2-C2 arrives and operation reception to the 4B operation unit is no longer permitted. This gives the player a sense of expectation that even after timing tBd2-C2, there may still be a chance for operation reception to the 4B operation unit to occur and create a new change.

In this example, the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are displayed starting at timing tBd1, then, after timings tBd2-C2 where operation acceptance is no longer permitted, they are hidden at timing tBd3. The status indication display JB4 is not hidden at timing tBd3, but is hidden at an appropriate timing thereafter. However, as mentioned above, the display timing and hiding timing of the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 may be different from each other, or only one of them may be displayed as an operation-related indicator. Furthermore, the status indication display JB4 may be hidden at the same timing as the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4.

In this example, the operation state of the "Fourth B Operation Unit," which started at timing tBd2-C1, is assumed to continue even when the player maintains the operation state until timing tBd3 arrives, when the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are hidden, and even when the situation indication display JB4 is hidden.

In this regard, in the 4B reception-allowed state, after transitioning to a state where "operation reception to the 4B operation unit is not permitted" (from timing tBd2-C2 onwards), there are cases (and cases where) between the arrival of timing tBd3 (and further, the timing when the status indication display JB4 is hidden) when the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are hidden, the conditions for the "state where operation reception to the 4B operation unit is permitted" are met again. If the conditions for the "state where operation reception to the 4B operation unit is permitted" are not met again, the auto-repeated button function remains disabled from timing tBd2-C2 onwards, and timing tBd3 arrives, resulting in the hiding of operation-related displays such as the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4.

Furthermore, whether the conditions for the "state in which operation reception to the 4B operation unit is permitted" are met between timing tBd2-C2 and timing tBd3, and the timing at which this state occurs, may be determined, for example, based on operation reception during the period from timing tBd2 to timing tBd2-C2, or based on the results of a performance judgment performed during the period from timing tBd2-C2 to timing tBd3, or based on the type of pattern variation of the symbol variation, or the result of the jackpot judgment. In short, it is sufficient that the conditions for the "state in which operation reception to the 4B operation unit is permitted" may be met between timing tBd2-C2 and timing tBd3, and the method of implementation is not limited.

Alternatively, the 4B acceptance state may be generated at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBd2-C2 to timing tBd3, as an acceptance state of the type that re-establishes the "state in which operation acceptance to the 4B operation unit is permitted."

In this example, as shown in Figure 170(b), the scenario is assumed where, within the period from timing tBd2-C2 to timing tBd3, the "state in which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is permitted" occurs again at timing tBd2-C3 (i.e., the conditions for occurrence are met).

In this regard, at timing tBd3 in this example, as shown in Figures 170(a), (b) and 171(g), (h), and (i), operation reception to the 4B operation unit is properly performed based on the detection of the operation state of the "4B operation unit" maintained from timing tBd2-C1, with a period in between during which operation reception to the 4B operation unit is not permitted (the period from timing tBd2-C2 to timing tBd2-C3, the situation shown in Figure 171(h)). This allows for the commencement of post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception (the performance situation shown in Figure 171(i)).

More specifically, if an operation is received for the "Fourth B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBd2-C3, as shown in Figures 170(f) and (h), the "First Post-Operation Sound Sα4 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received for the "Fourth B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is again audibly output, and the "Fourth B Post-Operation Display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received for the "Fourth B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, even when operation on the 4B control unit is resumed at timing tBd2-C3, the performance content corresponding to the 4B acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 171(i), the 4B acceptance change (such as the 4B acceptance display or 4B acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 4B acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation acceptance of the 4B control unit at timing tBd2-B2. Details of the performance are as described above, so they will not be explained here.

In this regard, in the 4B acceptance state, if the conditions for the "state in which operation acceptance to the 4B operation unit is permitted" are met again between timing tBd2-C3 and timing tBd3 (and furthermore, the timing in which the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are hidden) (and the timing in which the status indication display JB4 is hidden), then the "state in which operation acceptance to the 4B operation unit is permitted" may have its termination conditions met (and not met) before timing tBd3 arrives.

Furthermore, regarding whether the "state in which operation acceptance to the 4B operation unit is permitted" that occurred at timings tBd2-C2 and tBd2-C3 will have its termination conditions met before timing tBd3 arrives, and the timing at which this state ends, these can be determined, for example, based on the operation acceptance during the period from timing tBd2 to timing tBd2-C2, or based on the results of a performance judgment performed during the period from timing tBd2-C2 to timing tBd3, or based on the type of variation pattern of the symbol variation, or the result of the jackpot judgment. In short, it is sufficient that the "state in which operation acceptance to the 4B operation unit is permitted" that occurred at timing tBd2-C3 may have its termination conditions met before timing tBd3 arrives; the method of implementation is not limited.

Alternatively, the 4B acceptance state may be configured such that, at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBd2-C2 to timing tBd3, the "state in which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is permitted" is re-established, and this "state in which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is permitted" is terminated at a predetermined timing within the period up to timing tBd3.

Furthermore, the performance examples shown in Figures 170 and 171 assume that the "state in which operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit is permitted," which began at timing tBd2-C3, continues until timing tBd2-C4, which is before timing tBd3, and that the termination condition is met.

In this regard, at timing tBd2-C4, similar to when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled at timing tBd2-C2 as described above, as shown in Figures 170(f) and (h), the post-reception changes such as the continuous button press display HB4, which was previously displayed by the auto-repeated button press function, and the first post-reception output sound Sα4a, which was previously output by the auto-repeated button press function, are not terminated prematurely when operation reception ceases (they are maintained in their execution state until the remaining execution time is consumed).

With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions for preventing operation of the 4B control unit have been met at timing tBd2-C4 (i.e., that the 4B control unit is no longer receiving operation requests). Therefore, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to maintain the state in which the 4B control unit is being operated.

In this example, when timing tBa2-C4 arrives, the 4B operation prompt light LB4, which prompts the player to take action, is deactivated. That is, the 4B operation prompt light LB4 is enabled to emit light when operation-related displays such as the image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are displayed (4B acceptance-permitted state), and it stops emitting light when this state ends. This is intended to indicate whether the state has become one in which operation acceptance is permitted or one in which operation acceptance is not permitted. However, the 4B operation prompt light LB4 may be deactivated at the same time as the operation-related displays such as the image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are hidden, or it may be deactivated after the operation-related displays such as the image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are hidden. Furthermore, the 4B operation-promoting light LB4 may be configured to start emitting light at the same time as the operation-related displays such as the image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 begin to be displayed, or it may be configured to start emitting light before the operation-related displays such as the image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 begin to be displayed.

In this example, after the condition for disallowing operation to the 4B operation unit is met at timing tBd2-C4, the state in which "operation to the 4B operation unit is permitted" will not occur again until timing tBd3 (and further, the timing when the status indication display JB4 is hidden) arrives, when the mock image display MG-B4 and message display MB4 are hidden. Therefore, even if the "4B operation unit" remains in operation until timing tBd3 (and further, the timing when the status indication display JB4 is hidden), it will not occur during that period for the auto-repeated function to be activated, operation requests to be received multiple times, or post-reception changes in response to operation requests to be executed multiple times (see Figure 171(j)).

However, it is also possible to allow the conditions for the "state in which operation acceptance to the 4B operation unit is permitted" to be met again (and not met) between timings tBd2-C4 and tBd3. In this case, it goes without saying that, based on the detection of the operation state of the "4B operation unit" maintained from timing tBd2-C1, with multiple periods in between during which operation acceptance to the 4B operation unit is not permitted, operation acceptance to the 4B operation unit will be performed again, and the post-acceptance change (auto-repeated button press function) corresponding to this operation acceptance will begin execution.

In the examples shown in Figures 171(h) and (j), a message such as "Miss!!" is displayed when timings tBd2-C2 and tBd2-C4 arrive. However, it is also possible to have no new message appear when timings tBd2-C2 and tBd2-C4 arrive.

Furthermore, in order to suitably maintain the visual appeal of the 4B acceptance state, it is desirable that, if no operation is performed by the player until the timing tBd2-C2 (or timing tBd2-C4) arrives when operation acceptance to the 4B operation unit is no longer permitted, the same post-acceptance changes as when such operation is performed do not occur (the automatic button function is not activated).

Furthermore, the 4B reception permission state is not provided as a "type of reception permission state in which the reception permission state can be terminated early based on the fact that an operation has been received," and the state will not be terminated based on an operation received for the "4B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)."

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "5th B Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state). Figure 172 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "5th B Acceptance State" is generated based on the fulfillment of the above-mentioned conditions "Condition 5B" and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 173 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the "5th B Acceptance State" is generated.

Now, assuming the starting conditions are met (holdings are processed) and the "5th B variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement performance determination) corresponding to the "5th B variation pattern." After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ (such as performance depiction according to the 5th B variation pattern, or sound output of BGM according to the 5th B variation pattern (such as normal BGM playback when not reaching)), and within the execution period of this variation performance, it additionally executes a performance (pre-announcement performance) according to the result of the pre-announcement performance determination, in addition to the performance of the selected "5th B variation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 172(b), during the execution period of the variation effect related to the "5B variation pattern," based on the arrival of timing tBe2, which is 5B time elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the fulfillment of "condition 5B"), the above-mentioned 5B acceptance permission state (valid period) is made possible, allowing "operation reception to the 5B operation unit regarding changes after 5B reception (such as the 5B effect status indication display JB5, the 5B rapid-fire display HB5, and the 5B post-reception output sound Sα5)" (the situation shown in Figure 173(a)).

In this embodiment, the "5B operation unit" that allows operation in the 5B reception-permitted state is not the "operation button 410" which allows multiple operation requests in the 1B reception-permitted state and the 2B reception-permitted state, but rather the "sword ornament 5001" which also allows multiple operation requests in the 3B reception-permitted state and the 4B reception-permitted state, thus allowing multiple operation requests until the 5B reception-permitted state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figures 172(b) to (e), when the 5B acceptance state occurs, a imitation image display MG-B5 of the target of the player's operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 5B operation unit), a message display MB5 related to the operation on the target of the operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 5B operation unit), and a status indication display JB5 capable of indicating the degree of progress of the performance throughout the entire period after the operation is accepted are displayed when timing tBe1 arrives, which is before the 5B acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance to the 5B operation unit is permitted).

However, in the fifth B acceptance state in this example, while operation-related displays prompting the player to take action (such as the imitation image display MG-B5 and the message display MB5) are displayed, similar to the third B and fourth B acceptance states described above, it differs from the third B and fourth B acceptance states in that operation-related sound prompting the player to take action is not output. Therefore, during the period from timing tBe1 to tBe2 in this example, operation-related displays prompting the player to take action multiple times for the sword ornament 5001, such as the imitation image display MG-B5 and the message display MB5, are displayed, and operation-related sound is not output audibly. Under these circumstances, no action on the sword ornament 5001 will be judged as a valid action (no action will be accepted).

Here, the mock image display MG-B5, message display MB5, and status indication display JB5 do not necessarily have to appear before the 5B reception-acceptance state occurs. They may be displayed simultaneously with the occurrence of the 5B reception-acceptance state, or slightly later. In particular, the status indication display JB5 may not be displayed until the first operation reception is made to the 5B operation unit in the 5B reception-acceptance state; that is, it may be implemented to appear and be displayed only after an operation reception is made to the 5B operation unit. Furthermore, the timing of the display of the mock image display MG-B5 and the timing of the display of the message display MB5 may be different. For example, the message display MB5 may be displayed before the display of the mock image display MG-B5.

Furthermore, regarding "Condition 5B," which is the condition under which operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 become permissible when the 5B reception is permitted, unlike "Condition 1B" and "Condition 2B" mentioned above, it may be possible to have both cases: one where it is satisfied before the timing when an operation-related display (such as a mock image display or message display) prompting the user to perform multiple operation requests to the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed; and another where it is satisfied after the timing when an operation-related display (such as a mock image display or message display) prompting the user to perform multiple operation requests to the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed.

When this configuration is adopted, in the 5B acceptance state, there are two possibilities: when operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted before the timing for displaying operation-related indicators (such as mock image display or message display) arrives (when timing tBe2 shown in Figure 172 arrives before timing tBe1); and when operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted after the timing for displaying operation-related indicators (such as mock image display or message display) arrives (when timing tBe2 shown in Figure 172 arrives after timing tBe1). This is expected to effectively maintain a sense of tension.

However, it is important that the same post-reception change in response to the reception occurs whether the reception of the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is permitted when timing tBe2, as shown in Figure 172, arrives before timing tBe1, or when the reception of the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is permitted when timing tBe2, as shown in Figure 172, arrives after timing tBe1. This makes it difficult to recognize the timing at which reception is permitted, even within a single valid period, and is expected to effectively maintain a sense of tension.

Furthermore, regarding the "Condition 5B" described above, which is the condition under which operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 become permissible when the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is in the permissible state, it may be satisfied at the same time as the timing at which operation-related displays (such as a mock image display or a message display) prompting the user to perform multiple operation requests for the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) are displayed. However, it goes without saying that even in this case, it is important that the same characteristics appear as post-reception changes in response to the operation requests.

Furthermore, when adopting these configurations, the method for setting timing tBe1 and timing tBe2 (condition 5B) may be adopted as appropriate. Examples of implementation are listed below, but these are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other methods are also possible.

For example, if the elapsed time since the start of the symbol change is set as the "timing tBe2 (condition 5B)", it is possible to prepare multiple elapsed times and then selectively use one of them through a performance judgment (lottery). Alternatively, if the remaining time until the symbol change ends is set as the "timing tBe2 (condition 5B)", it is possible to prepare multiple remaining times and then selectively use one of them through a performance judgment (lottery). Furthermore, if the timing tBe2 (condition 5B) is set within a period when the symbol change is not being performed, for example, the elapsed time since the symbol change was put into a non-performance state, or the elapsed time since the start of the jackpot game, can be set as the "timing tBe2 (condition 5B)", and multiple elapsed times can be prepared and then selectively use one of them through a performance judgment (lottery). Furthermore, when employing any of these methods, timing tBe1 will occur only at predetermined timings.

Conversely, by replacing timing tBe2 (condition 5B) with timing tBe1, using one of the aforementioned timing tBe2 (condition 5B) setting methods, and ensuring that timing tBe2 (condition 5B) occurs only at predetermined timings, a similar configuration can be achieved.

Alternatively, the conditions for the occurrence of "Timing tBe1" and "Timing tBe2" may be determined by random selection with a predetermined probability each time. If the conditions for "Timing tBe1" are met first, "Timing tBe2" may occur afterward. Conversely, if the conditions for "Timing tBe2" are met first, "Timing tBe1" may occur afterward.

In this example, the mock image display MG-B5, message display MB5, and status indication display JB5 will continue to be displayed after the display starts, regardless of the operating status of the 5B operation unit, at least until the 5B reception acceptance state ends (this is not a mandatory configuration).

Furthermore, regarding the conditions under which operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are no longer permitted while the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) are in a state where operation requests are permitted, there may be two possibilities: one where the condition is met before the timing tBe3 in which the operation-related indicators (such as the display of a model image or a message) prompting the user to make multiple operation requests to the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) are hidden; and another where the condition is met after the timing tBe3 in which the operation-related indicators (such as the display of a model image or a message) prompting the user to make multiple operation requests to the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) are hidden.

When this configuration is adopted, in the 5B acceptance state, there are two possibilities: one where operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted before the operation-related displays (such as the display of the model image or message) are hidden, and another where operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted after the operation-related displays (such as the display of the model image or message) are hidden. This is expected to effectively maintain a sense of tension.

However, it is important that the same post-reception change in response to the operation reception occurs in both cases: when an operation is received for the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) in the 5B reception-permitted state, where operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted before the timing when operation-related displays (such as the display of a model image or message) are hidden; and when an operation is received for the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) in the 5B reception-permitted state, where operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted after the timing when the operation-related displays (such as the display of a model image or message) are hidden. This makes it difficult to recognize the timing at which operation reception becomes unpermitted, even though it is a single valid period, and is expected to effectively maintain a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the conditions under which operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 are no longer permitted in the state of the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) may be met at the same time as the operation-related displays (such as mock-up displays or message displays) that prompt the user to perform multiple operation requests to the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) are hidden. However, it goes without saying that even in this case, it is important that the same behavior appears as a post-reception change in response to the operation request.

Furthermore, when adopting these configurations, the setting methods for each of the above timings may be adopted as appropriate. The setting methods for the periods before and after these two timings can be set, for example, by following the setting methods for the periods before and after "timing tBe1" and "timing tBe2 (condition 5B)" described above.

In this example, in the fifth B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 172(b) and (j), when this occurs (in this example, at timing tBe2, but it may be slightly off before or after this), the operation-prompting light that encourages the player to take action is not emitted. In this case, it goes without saying that the fifth B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) does not necessarily need to have a light-emitting unit.

With this configuration, unlike the cases of the 1st B reception acceptance state, the 2nd B reception acceptance state, and the 4th B reception acceptance state, operation-related indicators (such as mock image displays and message displays) are shown, but operation-prompting illumination is not performed. In other words, in this case, compared to when operation-prompting illumination is performed, it becomes relatively more difficult to recognize that operation acceptance is permitted. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be maintained while still indicating that operation acceptance is permitted through operation-related indicators.

In particular, since the 5th B acceptance state employs a configuration in which no operation-related output sounds prompting the player to take action are emitted, it is possible to make it relatively more difficult for the player to recognize that operation acceptance is permitted, compared to the 3rd B acceptance state described above, which also shares the characteristic of not performing operation-prompting light emission.

Here, the "Mock Image Display MG-B5" corresponding to the 5B acceptance state uses a "predetermined color scheme (for example, a color scheme based on red)" as its color scheme. However, it is also possible to selectively use and display a color scheme determined based on the results of, for example, performance judgment, from among multiple color schemes.

Furthermore, the "Mock Image Display MG-B5" corresponding to the 5B acceptance state is configured such that when a predetermined moving image of the "operation receiving section" (the object of operation) is considered as a single periodic change, this periodic change repeats for a predetermined period of 5B time. However, since this period of 5B time is set to be longer (longer cycle) than the period of 1B time that appears in the 1B acceptance state, the 5B acceptance state depicts the "operation receiving section" moving slowly up and down within its movable range compared to the 1B acceptance state described above.

Furthermore, in the fifth B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 172(c), (d) and 173(a), in addition to the mock image display MG-B5, a message display related to the acceptance of operation to the fifth B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed (here, the message display MB5, which displays "Attack the ghost tree! Strike with the sword in rapid succession!!"). The message display shown in this fifth B acceptance state (here, the message display MB5, which displays "Attack the ghost tree! Strike with the sword in rapid succession!!") differs in its form (display content) from both the message display shown in the third B acceptance state ("Attack the demon! Strike with the sword in rapid succession!!" message display MB3) and the message display shown in the fourth B acceptance state ("Attack the goblin! Strike with the sword in super rapid succession!!" message display MB4).

However, in the 5B acceptance state, it is sufficient that an operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operation requests to the 5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001) is displayed. For example, if at least one of a mock image display and a message display is displayed as the operation-related display, it is not necessary to perform both.

Furthermore, in the 5B reception-accepting state, as shown in Figures 172(c) and (d), if no operation is received for the 5B operation unit, the mock image display and message display will continue to be displayed until timing tBe3 arrives, at which point they will be hidden. Therefore, while the 5B reception-accepting state continues, a gauge image (in this example, the image within the mock image display MG-B5) indicating the remaining time until timing tBe3 arrives, when the 5B reception-accepting state ends, is displayed decreasing over time. However, this display is not necessarily required.

Furthermore, if the "mock image display MG-B5" corresponding to the 5B acceptance state is to be displayed before the timing tBe2 in which the 5B acceptance state occurs, the periodic changes and gauge image changes may be delayed until timing tBe2 occurs before starting.

Furthermore, in the fifth B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 172(e) and 173(a), the situation indication display JB5 corresponding to the fifth B acceptance state displays an ally character (here, ally character YS-B5) corresponding to the type of the fifth B acceptance state, an enemy character (here, enemy character BOSS-B5 depicted as a ghost tree) corresponding to the type of the fifth B acceptance state, and a gauge image HP-B5 showing its remaining HP gauge. In the 5B reception-accepting state, the likelihood of a big win is suggested through a performance that indicates whether the ally character YS-B5 can defeat the enemy character BOSS-B5 (whether the gauge image HP-B5 can be reduced to 0) through multiple operation receptions to the 5B operation unit. In other words, each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)", a performance may be executed in which "ally character YS-B5" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B5". In this example, the situation indication display JB5 displays ally character YS-B5, enemy character BOSS-B5, and gauge image HP-B5, but it is not necessary to display all of these. It is possible to suggest the operation status as long as at least one of ally character YS-B5, enemy character BOSS-B5, and gauge image HP-B5 is displayed. Furthermore, the friendly character YS-B5 may be displayed with a different image than the friendly character YS-B1 that appears in the first B acceptance state and the second B acceptance state. Also, in the fifth B acceptance state, the situation indication display JB5 may not necessarily be displayed.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 172, it is assumed that the first operation request is received for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBe2-A1 within the 5B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 173(b)).

In this example, if the first operation request is received for the "5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBe2-A1 within the 5B acceptance state, a "5B post-reception change (5B post-reception effect)" corresponding to that operation request will occur, as shown in Figures 172(f) and (h) (the effect shown in Figure 173(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is received for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBe2-A1 within the 5B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 172(f) and (h), a "5B reception post-output sound" corresponding to the operation received for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is audibly output, and a "5B reception post-display" corresponding to the operation received for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is displayed.

In other words, when an operation request is received once for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 5B reception-accepting state, a video display of one instance is shown as the "5B reception post-display," as shown in Figure 173(b), showing the "ally character YS-B5" attacking the "enemy character BOSS-B5" with sword techniques (including sword movements and slashing effects). However, as will be described later, in the 5B reception-accepting state, based on the result of the performance judgment when the operation request is received, there is a possibility that the "enemy character BOSS-B5" may be injured, the intensity of the sword technique may increase, or the remaining HP gauge of the gauge image HP-B5 may decrease (the performance content may progress due to the performance judgment, etc.). If the performance content progresses in this way, the state in which the operation was received by the 5B control unit afterward (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-B5" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B5" with sword techniques) will appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed performance content (see Figures 172(e), (f), and 173(e), etc.). After the performance content has progressed in this way, as long as the state in which the 5B control unit is allowed to receive input continues, the degree of progress of the performance content will not revert to the state before progress. Therefore, even if the 5B control unit receives input again after the single video display that has changed to the progressed performance content has finished, the state in which the operation was received by the 5B control unit (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-B5" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B5" with sword techniques) may appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed performance content. The game's presentation could be designed to suggest a higher probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot as the story progresses.

However, in the 5B reception-accepting state, unlike the 1B reception-accepting state and the 2B reception-accepting state (reception-accepting states where the degree of performance is set for the performance content), the degree of performance is not set for the performance content as a change after reception in response to the operation reception of the 5B operation unit. Instead, each time an operation reception is made to the 5B operation unit, the 5B event as a change after reception (which may be just a display, just a sound, just light, or just a movable part movement) is repeatedly executed (occurs). Needless to say, in this case, the status indication display JB5 will no longer be displayed.

Furthermore, the 5B acceptance state differs from the 3B acceptance state described above in at least one of the following: the manner (type of display) related to operation-related displays (such as message displays) and the configuration regarding whether or not operation-related output sounds are output (in this example, all are different). However, the post-acceptance changes that occur when an operation is received by the 5B operation unit in the 5B acceptance state may be the same as the post-acceptance changes that occur when an operation is received by the 3B operation unit in the 3B acceptance state described above. Alternatively, the differences between the 5B acceptance state and the 3B acceptance state described above may be limited to only two points: the manner (type of display) related to operation-related displays (such as message displays) and the configuration regarding whether or not operation-related output sounds are output, with all other configurations being the same. As stated above, it is not necessary for multiple changes to occur as a post-reception change. In this case, for example, if we decide to cause only the 5B specific event (e.g., the 5B post-reception output sound) to occur as a post-reception change when an operation is received for the 5B operation unit in the 5B reception-permitted state (the operation to the 5B operation unit is determined to be valid), then the post-reception change when an operation is received for the 3B operation unit in the 3B reception-permitted state (the operation to the 3B operation unit is determined to be valid) will be the 3B specific event (e.g., the 3B post-reception output sound), which will occur as the same event (same output sound) as the 5B specific event.

Furthermore, the 5B acceptance-allowed state differs from the 4B acceptance-allowed state described above in at least one of the following: whether or not an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage the player to take action, the manner of operation-related displays (such as message displays) (type of display), and whether or not an operation-related output sound is output (in this example, all are different). However, the post-acceptance changes that occur when an operation is received by the 5B operation unit in the 5B acceptance-allowed state may be the same as the post-acceptance changes that occur when an operation is received by the 4B operation unit in the 4B acceptance-allowed state described above. Alternatively, the differences between the 5B acceptance-allowed state and the 4B acceptance-allowed state described above may be limited to three points: whether or not an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage the player to take action, the manner of operation-related displays (such as message displays) (type of display), and whether or not an operation-related output sound is output. All other configurations may be set to be the same. As stated above, it is not necessarily required that multiple changes occur as a post-reception change. In this case, for example, if we decide to generate only the 5B specific event (e.g., the 5B post-reception output sound) as a post-reception change when an operation is received for the 5B operation unit in the 5B reception-permitted state (the operation to the 5B operation unit is determined to be valid), then the post-reception change when an operation is received for the 4B operation unit in the 4B reception-permitted state (the operation to the 4B operation unit is determined to be valid) will be the 4B specific event (e.g., the 4B post-reception output sound), which will be the same event (same output sound) as the 5B specific event.

Furthermore, in this example, when an operation is received once for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 5B reception-accepting state, in addition to the "5B reception display" described above, the first reception-after output sound Sα5 may be output as the "5B reception-after output sound," as shown in Figure 172(h). The first reception-after output sound Sα5 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-B5 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B5 with sword techniques (such as sword movements and slashing effects)" that appears as the "5B reception display." However, as will be described later, in this 5B reception-accepting state, unlike the 1B reception-accepting state and the 2B reception-accepting state, there is no possibility of further output sounds different from the first reception-after output sound Sα5 being output as the "5B reception-after output sound." In this document, the first post-reception output sound Sα5 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-reception display. However, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that the player has performed an operation, and when the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it should be output as a sound that suggests that the 5B operation unit is being maintained in an operational state.

However, in the 5B reception-accepting state, unlike the 1B reception-accepting state and the 2B reception-accepting state, the post-reception display may not necessarily be displayed, nor may the post-reception output sound necessarily be output, as a post-reception change in response to the operation reception of the 5B operation unit. For example, in the 5B reception-accepting state, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception of the 5B operation unit may be such that only a predetermined light emission from a predetermined light emission unit appears, or only a specific operation from a specific movable body appears. In short, when an operation reception is made to the 5B operation unit, it is sufficient that the 5B event (which may be just a display, just a sound, just light emission, or just a movable body operation) as a post-reception change in response to the operation reception is executed (occurs) at least multiple times.

In this example, in the 5B acceptance state, each time an operation is received by the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)," a depiction and sound effect of "ally character YS-B5" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B5" appears (change after one operation). That is, the HP of "enemy character BOSS-B5" decreases through multiple attacks by "ally character YS-B5" (the presentation progresses), and when the HP reaches 0, it means that "enemy character BOSS-B5" has been defeated, providing a presentation that suggests a high level of expectation (change after multiple operations). However, in this case, if the HP does not reach 0 despite multiple attacks and "enemy character BOSS-B5" is not defeated, it suggests a low level of expectation.

However, the presentation content for the 5B acceptance state described above is merely an example, and it may be implemented using other content. For example, as a post-acceptance change corresponding to the 5B acceptance state, if there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to the operation reception (e.g., the start or end of lamp illumination, or the termination of audible output of a sound that is in output state), it is not necessary to necessarily execute "post-acceptance display" or "post-acceptance output sound." Even with such a configuration, the player can understand that the operation reception has been properly performed.

This example, as shown in Figure 172(a), assumes that the player's operation (the operating state of the 5B operation unit), which began at timing tBe2-A1, continues until timing tBe2-A2.

In this regard, the 5B acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (5B operation unit) in an operating state, the corresponding post-reception changes (for example, at least one of post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, or post-reception mechanism operation) are executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated)." Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 172(a), during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 (the period during which the 5B operation unit is maintained in an operating state), multiple operation receptions are made to the 5B operation unit, and the corresponding post-reception changes (for example, at least one of post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, or post-reception mechanism operation) are executed multiple times.

As described above, when an operation request is received by the 5B operation unit in the 5B reception-accepting state, the display shown after the 5B reception, as shown in Figure 173(b), displays the actions of the ally character YS-B5 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B5 with sword techniques (including sword movements and slashing effects). Therefore, during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2, when the so-called auto-fire function is activated, this "single-session video display" will be played multiple times.

Furthermore, as described above, when an operation is received by the 5B operation unit while the 5B reception is enabled, the 5B reception output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to the "appearance of the ally character YS-B5 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B5 with sword techniques (such as the generation of sword movement and slashing effects)" that appears as the "5B reception display." Therefore, during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated, in addition to the "single video display," the sound effect corresponding to such a "single video display" will be played multiple times.

In the 5B acceptance state, when the operation unit (5B operation unit) is maintained in operation and the auto-repeated function is activated, these post-acceptance changes (such as displaying one video, or sound effects (5B post-acceptance output sound)) are executed multiple times. However, the interval between these executions (the time between the start of the previous post-acceptance change and the start of the next post-acceptance change) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). It is desirable to set this "fixed time" to the same time as in the 3B and 4B acceptance states, which target the same operation unit.

Furthermore, in the 5B reception-accepting state described in this example, when the operation unit (5B operation unit) is maintained in operation and the auto-repeated button function is activated, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B5 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B5 with sword techniques (one video display) and the sound effect corresponding to this "one video display" (5B reception-after output sound) can be executed multiple times as the above-mentioned post-reception changes. However, the interval between the start of execution of the post-reception change in response to the above-mentioned detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous post-reception change to the start of execution of the next post-reception change) is always set to a specific time (e.g., 1 second) or less. However, it is desirable that this interval in the 5B reception-accepting state be set to a different length than the interval when the auto-repeated button function is activated in the 1B reception-accepting state described above. For example, it may be set to be longer than the interval when the auto-repeated button function is activated in the 1B reception-accepting state described above, and also to a specific time (e.g., 1 second) or less.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 172, a "single video display (one of the changes after acceptance)" of the ally character YS-B5 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B5 with a sword technique is newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button-mashing function. This repeated display of a "single video display" is represented in the figure as "repeated button-mashing display HB5a".

Similarly, in the example shown in Figure 172, during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (the 5th post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes) is newly output at regular intervals by the auto-repeated function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as the "first post-reception output sound Sα5a."

In this regard, the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 172 assumes a scenario where, although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 5B acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, the "Status Indication Display JB5 (see Figure 172(e))," which indicates the status of the operation in the 5B reception-accepting state, will not change or be initiated (in a manner that progresses the presentation) as a result of receiving an operation.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 172, the display of "sword technique attacks" and "slashing effects" shown in Figure 173, and the output of corresponding sound effects, are repeatedly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button press function (the changes after reception are repeatedly executed at regular time intervals) (repeated button press display HB5a, first reception output sound Sα5a). However, no change occurs in the "situation indication display JB5 (see Figure 172(e))." This allows the player to confirm the content of the performance in response to multiple operation receptions, or whether the performance content has not progressed, simply by maintaining the operation state, thus effectively maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, regarding the "Status Indication Display JB5 (see Figure 172(e))", at least one of the following may be changed in response to the input of an operation: the friendly character YS-B5, the enemy character BOSS-B5, or the gauge image HP-B5. However, in this case, it is necessary to change to a different form than the "form when the performance content progresses," and if the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 (the period during which the 5B operation unit is maintained in operation state) ends without the performance content progressing (when the operation is interrupted), it will be returned to the "display form before the operation." Also, as mentioned above, the "Status Indication Display JB5 (see Figure 172(e))", such as the friendly character YS-B5, the enemy character BOSS-B5, or the gauge image HP-B5, may not be displayed until an operation is received, and may appear and be displayed only when an operation is received (until the effective period ends, or for a predetermined time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2, the "Status Indication Display JB5 (see Figure 172(e))," which indicates the status of the operation in the 5B reception-acceptable state, does not change or start execution in response to the operation reception. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the performance content has not progressed.

However, under conditions where the rapid-fire display HB5a is executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2), as shown in Figure 173(b), the rapid-fire display HB5a repeatedly shows "the ally character YS-B5 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B5 with sword techniques (such as the appearance of sword movements and slashing effects)" at regular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JB5" difficult to see or to stand out, making it difficult to recognize the status of operations in the 5B acceptance state (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 172 and 173 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the state where the 5B is accepting input, temporarily interrupts operations on the 5B operation unit at timing tBe2-A2 and disables the auto-repeated button function.

Here, in the 5B acceptance state, as shown in Figure 172(f), even if the operation state of the 5B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tBe2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB5a (change after acceptance), which was in the execution state until then, will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB1a will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tBe2-A2 (even after the 5B control unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the "single video display" that was in the execution state has finished executing for the predetermined display time (until the execution of one change after acceptance is complete).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 5B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button press function is disabled, the rapid-fire indicator HB5a, which was previously in an active state, does not immediately disappear (the change after reception is not terminated midway through one execution). Therefore, it takes time before the operation status in the 5B reception-allowed state becomes easily recognizable. This means that a significant amount of time is consumed in the remaining 5B reception-allowed state, which is expected to create a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation state of the 5B control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in the 5B reception-allowed state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 5B control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HB5a is displayed, the time from when it is put into a non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HB5a is hidden (the time until the change after one reception, which was in the middle of execution, is completed) is not set as a fixed time, but is made variable.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 5B control unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, before the rapid-fire indicator HB5a disappears and a situation arises where the operation status in the 5B acceptance state becomes easily recognizable. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 5B acceptance state will be consumed. Therefore, it is expected that this configuration will appropriately create a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 5B control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in the 5B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the 5B acceptance state, as shown in Figure 172(h), the first post-reception output sound Sα5a, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not become inaudible when the operation state of the 5B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tBe2-A2 to disable the auto-repeating function, similar to the rapid-fire indicator HB5a. In other words, in this case, the first post-reception output sound Sα5a will continue to be output even after timing tBe2-A2 (even after the 5B operation unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in the execution state has finished executing for a predetermined output time (or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 5B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, the first post-reception output sound Sα5a, which was in the active state until then, will not immediately become non-output. In this case, it may appear as if the auto-repeated button function is still active, thus maintaining a desirable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 5B operation unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operation state while the first post-reception output sound Sα5a (5B event) is being output, the time from the non-operation state until the first post-reception output sound Sα5a is no longer output is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 5B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) to disable the auto-repeating function, and how long it will take for the first post-reception output sound Sα5a (5B event) to become non-output, that is, how long it will take to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeating function has been disabled. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 5B acceptance state will be consumed, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 5B control unit.

Furthermore, in the fifth B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the fifth B operation unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB5a and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a are both in operation state, a situation will occur where, as shown in Figures 172(f), (h), etc., the rapid-fire indicator HB5a continues to be displayed and the first post-acceptance output sound SB5a continues to be output, even though the fifth B operation unit is in a non-operation state. However, after this, as time elapses since the fifth B operation unit was left in a non-operation state, as shown in Figures 172(f), (h) and Figure 173(c), etc., the rapid-fire indicator HB5a, which had been displayed, will be hidden, and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a will be left in a non-output state. This allows players to easily recognize when the auto-button function is disabled, and also to easily recognize the mode of the status indicator JB5 (in this case, mode JB5a), which indicates the status of operation, such as the ally character YS-B5, the enemy character BOSS-B5, and the gauge image HP-B5 (see Figure 173(c)).

However, as described above, in the example shown in Figure 172, the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 is assumed to be a case where, although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function and multiple post-reception changes are executed, the performance content corresponding to the 5B acceptance state does not progress. Note that the 5B acceptance state does not necessarily have to occur as an acceptance state in which the performance content may progress; for example, it may be generated as an acceptance state in which only one aspect of the post-reception change is executed multiple times.

Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 173(c), although the appearance of the situation indication display JB5 (here, appearance JB5a), which suggests the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B5, the enemy character BOSS-B5, and the gauge image HP-B5, can be easily recognized, these appearances are the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 173(a)), thus suggesting that the presentation content has not progressed. Note that the appearance of the situation indication display JB5, such as the ally character YS-B5, the enemy character BOSS-B5, and the gauge image HP-B5, only needs to be able to suggest that the presentation content has not progressed; it does not necessarily have to be the same as the state before the operation (see Figure 173(a)).

In this example, as shown in Figure 172(a), it is assumed that the "5B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is returned to the operation state at timing tBe2-B1 within the 5B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 173(d)).

In this example, if the "5B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and an operation is received at timing tBe2-B1 within the 5B acceptance state, this triggers the "5B post-reception change (5B post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation received, as shown in Figure 172(f) (the effect shown in Figure 173(d)).

In this example, if an operation is received for the "5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBe2-B1 within the 5B reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 172(f) and (h), the "first post-reception output sound Sα5 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received for the "5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" is again audibly output, and the "5B post-reception display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received for the "5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, even when operation on the 5B control unit is resumed at timing tBe2-B1 within the 5B acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 5B acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 173(d), the 5B acceptance change (such as the 5B acceptance display or 5B acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 5B acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation being accepted by the 5B control unit at timing tBe2-A1. Details of the performance are as described above, and will therefore be omitted here.

In this regard, the performance examples shown in Figures 172 and 173 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 5B operation unit), which began at timing tBe2-B1, is maintained until timing tBe2-B3, thereby activating the auto-continuous pressing function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3 (the period during which the 5B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the 5B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change corresponding to these requests (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3 (the period during which the 5B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HB5a and the first post-reception output sound Sα5a) remains the same as in the case of the period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2 (see Figure 173(b)), unless the performance content progresses. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 172, the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3 assumes that, among the multiple operation receptions performed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 5B reception permission state progresses based on the operation reception performed at timing tBe2-B2 within that period (as shown in the performance status in Figure 173(e)).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 172, during the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3, the "5B Post-Reception Change (5B Post-Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has not progressed, whereas during the period from timing tBe2-B2 to timing tBe2-B3, the "5B Post-Reception Change (5B Post-Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed.

More specifically, during the period from timing tBe2-B2 to timing tBe2-B3, at "timing tBe2-B2," which is the timing when the performance content progresses, as shown in Figures 172(e) and 173(e), a display change is performed based on the operation reception to the 5B operation unit, changing the state of the status indication display JB5, which indicates the status of the operation, from the previously displayed "state JB5a" to a different "state JB5B." Here, as shown in Figure 173(e), the enemy character BOSS-B5 changes to a state in which it is injured, the sword technique performed by the ally character YS-B5 changes to a state of higher intensity, and the gauge image HP-B5 changes to a state in which the remaining HP gauge has decreased. With this configuration, the change in the state indication JB5 suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 5B acceptance state has progressed due to the operation reception (by the auto-repeated button function) performed at timing tBe2-B2 (and the result of the performance judgment based on that operation).

After the performance has progressed in this way, when an operation request is received by the 5B control unit, the "Display after 5B reception" will show the "single video display" in an advanced form of the performance, as shown in Figure 173(e), such as "ally character YS-B5 attacks the injured enemy character BOSS-B5 using enhanced sword techniques."

In this example, once the performance content has progressed, as long as the state of acceptance of the 5B input remains in place, the degree of progress in the performance content will not revert to its previous state. Therefore, even when the 5B input input unit receives another input request after the completion of one video display showing the progressed performance content, the behavior at the time of the initial input request to the 5B input unit (in this case, the behavior of "ally character YS-B5" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B5" with a sword technique) will appear as one video display showing the progressed performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3, when the so-called auto-click function is activated, the "single video display" in which such a change in appearance occurs will be played multiple times by the auto-click function during the period from timing tBe2-B2 onwards, when the performance content has progressed.

Furthermore, even during the period after timing tBe2-B2, when the performance progresses, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B5 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B5 with sword techniques (one video display) is restarted at regular intervals (a predetermined time, the same time as before the change) as a post-reception change. Therefore, the "one video display" of the progressed performance is also restarted at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button function. This repeated display (multiple post-reception changes) of the "one video display (one post-reception change)" of the progressed sequence is represented in the diagram as "Repeated Button Display HB5B".

Thus, in the performance display device 1600 according to this example, when "timing tBe2-B2," which is the timing when the performance content progresses, arrives, as shown in Figures 172(e), (f) and 173(d), (e), the mode of the status indication display JB5 changes from "mode JB5a" to "mode JB5B," and the mode of the rapid-fire display HB5 also changes from "mode HB5a" to "mode HB5B." From this point onward, while the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled (timing tBe2-B2 to tBe2-B3), the status indication display JB5 is displayed in "mode JB5B," and the rapid-fire display HB5 is executed in "mode HB5B."

In this example, the mode of the rapid-fire indicator HB5 is changed according to the progress of the performance content, but it is also possible to keep it constant. That is, even if the rapid-fire indicator HB5 continues to run in a single mode regardless of the progress of the performance content, the player can still confirm through the rapid-fire indicator HB5 that the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) operations have been accepted. Furthermore, the player can also confirm the degree of progress of the performance content through the mode of the status indication indicator JB5. Also, as mentioned above, the 5B acceptance-allowed state may be implemented as a type of acceptance-allowed state where the progress of the performance content itself cannot occur, unlike the 1B and 2B acceptance-allowed states. In this case, it goes without saying that the status indication indicator will not be displayed, and the post-acceptance change will be executed multiple times in only one mode.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is received once by the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 5B reception-accepting state, in addition to the "5B reception display" described above, a first reception output sound Sα5, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," may be output as the "5B reception output sound," as shown in Figure 172(h). However, as described above, as shown in Figure 172(i), in the 5B reception-accepting state, the second reception output sound is not output as the "5B reception output sound."

Furthermore, the first post-reception output sound Sα5 in this example is implemented to be output in the same manner before and after the performance progresses. Therefore, when timing tBe2-B2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, the first post-reception output sound Sα5, as a new "sound effect," begins outputting based on the operation being received. However, its manner of output is the same as when the operation was received before timing tBe2-B2 (the manner of execution is the same whether or not performance progress occurs at timing tBe2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is activated, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (first post-reception output sound Sα5) is newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the diagram as "first post-reception output sound Sα5a." The output manner of the first post-reception output sound Sα5a during this period is the same as in the case of the "period from timing tBe2-A1 to timing tBe2-A2" described above, so an explanation is omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-reception output sound Sα5a was not changed according to the progression of the performance content, but it may be changed according to the progression of the performance content.

However, even when the rapid-fire display HB5B is being executed by this auto-rapid-fire function (during the period from timing tBe2-B2 to timing tBe2-B3), as shown in Figure 173(e), the rapid-fire display HB5B repeatedly shows "ally character YS-B5 attacking wounded enemy character BOSS-B5 with a high-intensity sword technique (such as the appearance of sword movements and slashing effects)" at regular intervals. This can make the "situation indication display JB5" difficult to see or stand out, making it difficult to recognize the operation status in the state where the 5B input is accepted (this configuration is not essential).

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 172 and 173 assume a scenario where the player, in order to more actively confirm the status of operations in the state where the 5B is accepting input, interrupts operations on the 5B operation unit again at timing tBe2-B3, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button function.

As described above, in the 5B acceptance state, even if the operation state of the 5B control unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the 5B acceptance state is continuing, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB5, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be hidden as a result (the post-acceptance change that was in the middle of execution will not be terminated prematurely due to the non-operation). Therefore, as shown in Figure 172(f), even if the operation state of the 5B control unit is interrupted at timing tBe2-B3, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB5B will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tBe2-B3 (even after the 5B control unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the above-mentioned "one video display (one post-acceptance change)" that was in the execution state has been executed for a predetermined display time (execution time) and finished displaying (executing), or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, similar to the case of the rapid-fire indicator HB5a, if the operation on the 5B control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HB5B is displayed, the time from the time it is put into a non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HB5B is hidden (the time until the change after one input is completed) is not set to a fixed time, but is set to be variable.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 5B reception-accepting state, even if the operation state of the 5B control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the 5B reception-accepting state is continuing, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the first post-reception output sound Sα5a, which was in an output state until then, will not be switched to a non-output state as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figure 172(h), even if the operation state of the 5B control unit is interrupted at timing tBe2-B3, the first post-reception output sound Sα5a will continue to be output even after timing tBe2-B3 (even after the 5B control unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has finished executing and outputting for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 5B control unit is interrupted and it is set to a non-operated state while the first reception output sound Sα5 (5B event) is being output, the time from the non-operated state until the first reception output sound Sα5a (5B event) becomes non-output is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will have passed since the operation state of the 5B control unit was interrupted (set to a non-operated state) and the auto-repeated function was disabled, before the first reception output sound Sα5 becomes inaudible, that is, before it can be more reliably confirmed that the auto-repeated function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 5B reception-acceptable state will be consumed, which is expected to create a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation state of the 5B control unit.

Furthermore, in the fifth B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, even if the operation state of the fifth B operation unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB5B and the first post-reception output sound Sα5a are both in operation, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB5B is hidden and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα5a is turned off are different, as shown in Figures 172(f), (h), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB5B is hidden is shown to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα5a is turned off, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state is hidden or turned off is indeterminate, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB5B is hidden may be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα5a is turned off, or it may be after the timing at which it is turned off. Furthermore, it may be possible to allow for situations where their timings coincide.

With this configuration, in the fifth B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the fifth B operation unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB5B and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a are both in operation, a situation will occur where the rapid-fire indicator HB5B continues to be displayed and the first post-acceptance output sound Sα5a continues to be output, while the fifth B operation unit is in a non-operation state, as shown in Figures 172(f) and (h). However, after this, as time elapses since the fifth B operation unit was left in a non-operation state (time elapsed from timing tBe2-B3), the rapid-fire indicator HB5B, which had been displayed, will be hidden, as shown in Figures 172(f) and 173(f). This allows players to easily recognize when the auto-button function is disabled, and also to easily recognize the state of the situation indication display JB5 (in this case, the state JB5B where the performance content has progressed), which indicates the status of the operation, such as the ally character YS-B3, the enemy character BOSS-B5, and the gauge image HP-B5 (see Figure 173(f)).

Furthermore, the output sound Sα5a, which was originally present after the first reception, would also terminate (become inaudible) after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the 5B control unit was deactivated (time elapsed from timing tBa2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in Figure 172(a), it is assumed that the 5B operation unit is put back into operation at timing tBa2-B3 or later, and at timing tBe2-C1 (the performance situation shown in Figure 173(g)), while the first post-reception output sound Sα5a is audible (before the output state ends).

In this example, if the "5B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tBe2-C1 within the 5B acceptance state, this will trigger the "5B post-reception change (5B post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figure 172(f), similar to the case of timing tBe2-B1 described above (the effect shown in Figure 173(g)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "5B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBe2-C1 within the 5B acceptance state, as shown in Figure 172(f), the "5B post-reception display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "5B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" will start displaying again as a change after the 5B reception.

This example assumes a scenario where, when operation on the 5B control unit is resumed at timing tBe2-C1 within the 5B acceptance state, the display content corresponding to that 5B acceptance state does not progress from the mode shown in Figure 173(g) (the first stage of progression). Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 173(g), the 5B acceptance change (5B acceptance display) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 5B acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation acceptance to the 5B control unit at timing tBe-B2. Details of the display are as described above, so they will not be explained here.

However, the timing tBe2-C1 in this example assumes that it occurs while the audible output of the 5th B reception output sound (the first reception output sound Sα5), which started outputting within the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3, is still being emitted.

In this regard, the 5B acceptance state in this example is implemented in such a way that it does not terminate the "previous post-reception change" that is in the process of being executed, thereby not starting a new post-reception change. Therefore, not only at timing tBe2-C1, but even after timing tBe2-C1 has arrived, unless the audible output of the 5B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα5) that was started to be output during the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3 has ended, the 5B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα5) will not be newly output. In other words, in this case, under the 5B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figure 172(h), after the audible output (a predetermined output time) of one instance of the 5B acceptance output sound (first acceptance output sound Sα5), which is audibly output across timings tBe2-B3, has finished, a new 5B acceptance output sound (first acceptance output sound Sα5) corresponding to the operation acceptance will begin output at the timing when the operation acceptance to the 5B operation unit is first made. At this time, after the audible output (a predetermined output time) of one instance of the 5B acceptance output sound (first acceptance output sound Sα5), which is audibly output across timings tBe2-B3, has finished, there is no need to redo the operation to the 5B operation unit; the operation acceptance to the 5B operation unit is completed simply by maintaining it in the operation state from timing tBe2-C1.

Furthermore, regarding the rapid-fire display HB5, it is possible that the display state of one instance of the 5B reception display, which was started within the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3, may continue at timing tBa2-C1. However, in this case, similar to the case of the 5B reception output sound (first reception output sound Sα5), after the one instance of the 5B reception display displayed across timing tBe2-B3 is hidden (displayed for a predetermined display time before being hidden), a new 5B reception display corresponding to the operation reception will be displayed at the timing when the first operation reception is received for the 5B operation unit.

Alternatively, if at least one of the post-reception changes that was initiated within the period from timing tBe2-B1 to timing tBe2-B3 is in the execution state when timing tBe2-C1 arrives, the post-reception change may not be newly outputted unless all of the post-reception changes are de-executed. If this method is adopted, in the example shown in Figure 172, the 5B post-reception display will not be displayed for a new period until the audible output of the 5B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα5) has finished. In other words, in this case, the 5B post-reception display will not be newly displayed at timing tBe2-C1, and a new display will be started at the timing when the operation reception to the 5B operation unit is first made, after the audible output of one period of the 5B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα5), which is being output audibly across timing tBe2-B3, has finished.

Furthermore, the performance examples shown in Figures 172 and 173 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 5B control unit), which began at timing tBe2-C1, continues even after timing tBe2-C2 arrives (when the conditions for not being able to accept operations from the 5B control unit are met). This assumes that the auto-continuous pressing function remains active until timing tBe2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBe2-C1 to timing tBe2-C2 (the period during which the 5B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the 5B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change corresponding to these requests (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBe2-C1 to timing tBe2-C2 (the period during which the 5B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HB5B and the first post-reception output sound Sα5a) will be the same as in the case of the period from timing tBa2-B2 to timing tBa2-B3 (see Figure 173(e)) as described above, unless further development of the performance content occurs. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

Here, the 5B acceptance state in this example assumes that no special mode (final mode) appears as a post-acceptance change. Therefore, in the period from timing tBe2-C1 to timing tBe2-C2 in the example shown in Figure 172, the "5B post-acceptance change (5B post-acceptance performance)" corresponding to the operation acceptance will be executed multiple times in a mode where the performance content progresses only once (see Figure 173(g)). When timing tBa2-C2 arrives, the auto-repeated button function, which had been enabled up to that point, is disabled.

In this regard, when the auto-button function is disabled at timings tBe2-A2 and tBe2-B3, the post-reception changes, such as the button-mashing indicator HB5 (which was displayed by the auto-button function) and the first post-reception output sound Sα5a (which was output by the auto-button function), are not terminated prematurely because no further operation is being received. Similarly, when the auto-button function is disabled at timing tBe2-C2, as shown in Figures 172(f) and (h), the post-reception changes, such as the button-mashing indicator HB5 (which was displayed by the auto-button function) and the first post-reception output sound Sα5a (which was output by the auto-button function), are not terminated prematurely because no further operation is being received (they are maintained in their execution state until the remaining execution time is consumed).

With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions for preventing operation of the 5B control unit are met at timing tBe2-C2 (i.e., that the situation has become such that operation of the 5B control unit is not being received). Therefore, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to continue operating the 5B control unit.

In this regard, the image display MG-B5, message display MB5, and status indication display JB5 are not hidden when timing tBe2-C2 arrives, but remain displayed even after timing tBe2-C2 arrives and operation reception to the 5B operation unit is no longer permitted. This gives the player a sense of expectation that "there may still be a chance to receive an operation from the 5B operation unit and create a new change after reception," even after timing tBe2-C2.

In this example, the mock image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 are displayed starting at timing tBe1, then after timings tBe2-C2 where operation acceptance is no longer permitted, they are hidden at timing tBe3. The status indication display JB5 is not hidden at timing tBe3, but is hidden at an appropriate timing thereafter. However, as mentioned above, the display timing and hiding timing of the mock image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 may differ from each other, or only one of them may be displayed as an operation-related indicator. Furthermore, the status indication display JB5 may be hidden at the same timing as the mock image display MG-B5 and message display MB5.

In this example, the operation state of the "5th B operation unit," which started at timing tBe2-C1, is assumed to continue even when the player continues to operate it at timing tBe3, when the mock image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 are hidden, and even when the situation indication display JB5 is hidden.

In this regard, in the state where the 5B input is permitted, after transitioning to a state where "input to the 5B input unit is not permitted" (from timing tBe2-C2 onwards), there are cases (and cases where) where the conditions for the "state where input to the 5B input unit is permitted" occur again before timing tBe3 (and further, the timing when the status indication display JB5 is hidden) arrives, when the mock image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 are hidden. If the conditions for the "state where input to the 5B input unit is permitted" are not met again, the auto-repeated input function remains disabled from timing tBe2-C2 onwards, and timing tBe3 arrives, resulting in the hiding of operation-related displays such as the mock image display MG-B5 and message display MB5.

Furthermore, whether the conditions for the "state in which operation reception to the 5B operation unit is permitted" are met between timing tBe2-C2 and timing tBe3, and the timing at which this state occurs, may be determined, for example, based on operation reception during the period from timing tBe2 to timing tBe2-C2, or based on the results of a performance judgment performed during the period from timing tBe2-C2 to timing tBe3, or based on the type of pattern of the symbol variation or the result of the jackpot judgment. In short, it is sufficient that the conditions for the "state in which operation reception to the 5B operation unit is permitted" may be met between timing tBe2-C2 and timing tBe3, and the method of implementation is not limited.

Alternatively, the 5B acceptance state may be generated at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBe2-C2 to timing tBe3, as an acceptance state of the type that re-establishes the "state in which operation acceptance to the 5B operation unit is permitted."

In this example, as shown in Figure 172(b), the scenario where the "state in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is permitted" occurs again at timing tBe2-C3 within the period from timing tBe2-C2 to timing tBe3 (i.e., when the conditions for occurrence are met) is assumed.

In this regard, at timing tBe3 in this example, as shown in Figures 172(a), (b) and 173(g), (h), and (i), operation reception to the 5B operation unit is properly performed based on the detection of the operation state of the "5B operation unit" maintained from timing tBe2-C1, with a period in between during which operation reception to the 5B operation unit is not permitted (the period from timing tBe2-C2 to timing tBe2-C3, the situation shown in Figure 173(h)). This allows for the commencement of post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception (the performance situation shown in Figure 173(i)).

More specifically, at timing tBe2-C3, if an operation is received for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)," as shown in Figures 172(f) and (h), the "first post-reception output sound Sα5 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is again audibly output, and the "5B post-reception display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received for the "5B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, even when operation on the 5B control unit is resumed at timing tBe2-C3, the animation content corresponding to the 5B acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 173(i), the 5B acceptance change (such as the 5B acceptance display or 5B acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 5B acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation acceptance of the 5B control unit at timing tBe2-B2. Details of the animation are as described above, and will therefore be omitted here.

In this regard, in the 5B acceptance state, if the conditions for the "state in which operation acceptance to the 5B operation unit is permitted" are met again between timing tBe2-C3 and timing tBe3 (and furthermore, the timing in which the mock image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 are hidden), then the "state in which operation acceptance to the 5B operation unit is permitted" may have its termination conditions met (and not met) before timing tBe3 arrives.

Furthermore, regarding whether the "state in which operation acceptance to the 5B operation unit is permitted" that occurs at timings tBe2-C2 and tBe2-C3 will have its termination conditions met before timing tBe3 arrives, and the timing at which this state ends, these can be determined, for example, based on the operation acceptance during the period from timing tBe2 to timing tBe2-C2, or based on the results of a performance judgment performed during the period from timing tBe2-C2 to timing tBe3, or based on the type of variation pattern of the symbol variation, or the result of the jackpot judgment. In short, it is sufficient that the "state in which operation acceptance to the 5B operation unit is permitted" that occurs at timing tBe2-C3 may have its termination conditions met before timing tBe3 arrives, and the method of implementation is not limited.

Alternatively, the 5B acceptance state may be configured such that, at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBe2-C2 to timing tBe3, the "state in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is permitted" is re-established, and this "state in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is permitted" is terminated at a predetermined timing within the period up to timing tBe3.

Furthermore, the performance examples shown in Figures 172 and 173 assume that the "state in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is permitted," which began at timing tBe2-C3, continues until timing tBe2-C4, which is before timing tBe3, and that the termination condition is met.

In this regard, timing tBe2-C4, similar to when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled in timing tBe2-C2 as described above, prevents the post-reception changes, such as the continuous button press display HB5 (which was previously displayed by the auto-repeated button press function) and the first post-reception output sound Sα5a (which was previously output by the auto-repeated button press function), from being prematurely terminated when no further operation is received (they are maintained in their execution state until the remaining execution time is consumed).

With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions for preventing operation of the 5B control unit are met at timing tBe2-C4 (i.e., that the situation has become such that operation of the 5B control unit is not being received). Therefore, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to continue operating the 5B control unit.

In this example, after the condition for disallowing operation to the 5B operation unit is met at timing tBe2-C4, the state in which operation to the 5B operation unit is permitted will not occur again until timing tBe3 (and further, the timing when the status indication display JB5 is hidden), when the mock image display MG-B5 and message display MB5 are hidden. Therefore, even if the "5B operation unit" remains in an operational state until timing tBe3 (and further, the timing when the status indication display JB5 is hidden), it will not occur during that period for the auto-repeated function to be activated, operation to be received multiple times, or post-reception changes in response to operation to be executed multiple times (see Figure 173(j)).

However, it is also possible to allow the conditions for the "state in which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is permitted" to be met again (and not met) between timing tBe2-C4 and timing tBe3. In this case, it goes without saying that, based on the detection of the operation state of the "5B operation unit" maintained from timing tBe2-C1, with multiple periods in between during which operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit is not permitted, operation acceptance for the 5B operation unit will be made again, and the post-acceptance change (auto-repeated button press function) corresponding to the operation acceptance will be initiated.

In the examples shown in Figures 173(h) and (j), a message such as "Miss!!" is displayed based on the arrival of timings tBe2-C2 and tBe2-C4. However, it is also possible to have no new message appear based on the arrival of timings tBe2-C2 and tBe2-C4.

Furthermore, in order to suitably maintain the visual appeal of the 5B acceptance state, it is desirable that, if no operation is performed by the player until the timing tBe2-C2 (or timing tBe2-C4) arrives when operation acceptance to the 5B operation unit is no longer permitted, the same post-acceptance changes as when such operation is performed do not occur (the automatic button function is not activated).

Furthermore, the 5B reception permission state is not provided as a "type of reception permission state in which the reception permission state can be terminated early based on the fact that an operation has been received," and the state will not be terminated based on an operation received for the "5B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)."

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "6th B Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state). Figure 174 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "6th B Acceptance State" is generated based on the fulfillment of the above-mentioned conditions "Condition 6B" and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 175 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the "6th B Acceptance State" is generated.

Now, assuming the starting conditions are met (holding is processed) and the "6th B variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement performance determination) corresponding to the "6th B variation pattern." After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ (such as performance depiction according to the 6th B variation pattern, or sound output of BGM according to the 6th B variation pattern (such as normal BGM playback when not reaching)), and within the execution period of this variation performance, it additionally executes a performance (pre-announcement performance) according to the result of the pre-announcement performance determination, in addition to the performance of the selected "6th B variation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 174(b), during the execution period of the variation effect related to the "6B variation pattern," based on the arrival of timing tBf2, which is 6B time elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the fulfillment of "condition 6B"), the above-mentioned 6B acceptance permission state (valid period) is made possible, allowing "operation acceptance to the 6B operation unit regarding changes after 6B acceptance (6B rapid-fire display HB6, output sounds Sα6, Sβ6, etc. after 6B acceptance)" (the situation shown in Figure 175(a)).

In this embodiment, the "6B operation unit" that allows operation reception in the 6B reception-permitted state is set as the operation button 410, similar to the 1B reception-permitted state and the 2B reception-permitted state, and multiple operation receptions are permitted until the 6B reception-permitted state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figures 174(b) to (e), when the 6B acceptance state occurs, no operation-related displays are shown, such as a mock image of the target of the player's operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6B operation unit), messages related to the operation of the target of the operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the 6B operation unit), or status indication displays that could suggest the progress of the performance throughout the entire period after the operation is accepted. Furthermore, in this example, no audible operation-related output sound prompting the player to perform an operation is emitted. Thus, the 6B acceptance state in this example makes it difficult to recognize that an operation to the "6B operation unit" has been accepted.

However, in the 6B acceptance state in this example, when it occurs (in this example, at timing tBf2, but there may be a slight delay before or after), the 6B operation prompt light LB6 is illuminated to prompt the player to take action. In this example, the 6B operation prompt light LB6 is the light-emitting part of the 6B operation unit (operation button 410), but the 6B operation prompt light LB6 may be the light-emitting part located in a different part of the 6B operation unit (operation button 410), as long as it prompts the player to take action on the operation button 410 (for example, a mode that only appears when operation acceptance to the operation button 410 is permitted). In this case, it goes without saying that the 6B operation unit (operation button 410) does not necessarily need to have a light-emitting part. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that operation acceptance to the "6B operation unit" has been permitted, while still providing a hint that operation acceptance has been permitted, thereby suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In this example, the 6B operation-promoting light emission LB6 continues to emit light regardless of the operating state of the 6B operation unit, at least until the 6B acceptance state ends. However, the 6B operation-promoting light emission LB6 may not necessarily be executed during the 6B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the 6B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figure 175(a), an ally character (here, ally character YS-B6) corresponding to the type of the 6B acceptance state, and an enemy character (here, enemy character BOSS-B6 depicted as a shadow) corresponding to the type of the 6B acceptance state, are displayed. Each time an operation (operation acceptance) is performed on the "6B operation unit (here, operation button 410)", an animation may be executed in which "ally character YS-B6" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B6". However, in this example, ally character YS-B6 and enemy character BOSS-B6 do not function as the aforementioned "situation indication display" that can suggest the degree of progress of the animation even when the 6B operation unit (operation button 410) is not in an operation state. Also, in the 6B acceptance state, ally character YS-B6 and enemy character BOSS-B6 do not necessarily have to be displayed.

Furthermore, in the 6B reception-accepting state, a status indication display may be shown, similar to the 1B reception-accepting state and the 2B reception-accepting state. However, in this case, considering the confidentiality of the 6B reception-accepting state, it is desirable that the status indication display not be shown while no operation has been received, and only be displayed upon confirmation that an operation has been received, and that the display state continues thereafter.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 174, it is assumed that the first operation request is received for the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBf2-A1 within the 6B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 175(b)).

In this example, if the first operation is received by the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBf2-A1 within the 6B acceptance state, a "6B post-reception change (6B post-reception effect)" corresponding to that operation will occur, as shown in Figures 174(f) and (h) (the effect shown in Figure 175(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBf2-A1 within the 6B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 174(f) and (h), a "6B reception post-output sound" corresponding to the operation received by the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is audibly output, and the "6B reception post-display" corresponding to the operation received by the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed.

In other words, when an operation is received once for the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" in the 6B reception-accepting state, a video display of one instance is shown as the "6B reception display" as shown in Figure 175(b), depicting "ally character YS-B6" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B6" with light-based magic (including light effects and the generation of light-based magic). However, as will be described later, in the 6B reception-accepting state, the intensity of the light-based magic may increase or the size of the light effect may differ based on the result of the performance judgment when the operation is received (the performance content may progress depending on the performance judgment, etc.). If the animation progresses in this way, the state in which the operation was received by the 6B control unit afterward (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-B6" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B6" with light-based magic) will appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed animation (see Figures 174(f) and 175(e), etc.). After the animation progresses in this way, as long as the 6B control unit's acceptance state continues, the degree of progression of the animation will not revert to the state before progression. Therefore, even if the 6B control unit is requested to perform an operation again after the single video display that has changed to the progressed animation has finished, the state in which the operation was received by the 6B control unit (in this case, the state in which "ally character YS-B6" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B6" with light-based magic) may appear as a single video display that has changed to the progressed animation. The game's presentation could be designed to suggest a higher probability (expected value) of winning a jackpot as the story progresses.

However, in the state where the 6B input is accepted, the degree of performance may not be set for the performance content as a post-input change in response to the input received by the 6B control unit. Instead, each time an input is received by the 6B control unit, the 6B event (which may be just a display, just a sound, just light, or just a movable part) may be repeatedly executed (occurred) as a post-input change.

Furthermore, in this example, when an operation is received once for the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" in the 6B reception-accepting state, in addition to the "6B reception display" described above, a first reception output sound Sα6 may be output as the "6B reception output sound," as shown in Figure 174(h). The first reception output sound Sα6 in this example functions as a sound effect corresponding to the "mode in which the ally character YS-B6 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic (such as light effects or the generation of light-based magic)" that appears as the "6B reception display." Also, as will be described later, there is a possibility that a second reception output sound Sβ6 will be output as the "6B reception output sound." The second reception output sound Sβ6 in this example is output when the content of the "6B reception display" progresses. In this document, the first post-reception output sound Sα6 is implemented as a sound effect corresponding to the post-reception display. However, it does not necessarily have to function as a sound effect; the important thing is that it can suggest that the player has performed an operation, and when the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it should suggest that the 6B operation unit is in an operational state.

Furthermore, in this example, the above-mentioned timing tBf2-A1 is assumed to occur while the 6B operation-promoting light LB6 is in the illumination state, as shown in Figure 174(j). However, at this timing tBf2-A1, the 6B operation-promoting light LB6 is not deactivated upon receiving an operation request to the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)".

In other words, in this example, when an operation is received for the "6B operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" while the 6B operation-promoting light LB6 is in the illuminated state, the illuminated state may or may not terminate as a result of the operation. Here, the illuminated state of the 6B operation-promoting light LB6 is terminated prematurely only when the "state in which operation reception for the 6B operation unit is permitted (6B reception permitted state)" is terminated prematurely (before timing tBf2-C2) as a result of the operation reception for the 6B operation unit (here, the operation button 410)). However, unlike the 1B reception permitted state and the 2B reception permitted state, the 6B reception permitted state may be configured so that the "state in which operation reception for the 6B operation unit is permitted (6B reception permitted state)" is not terminated prematurely as a result of the operation reception for the 6B operation unit (here, the operation button 410)

Thus, in the 6B input acceptance state, each time an input is received by the "6B operation unit (in this case, operation button 410)," a depiction of "ally character YS-B6" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B6" and its sound effects are displayed. As a result, when the attack reaches its highest intensity, it provides a visual effect that suggests a high level of expectation. However, in this case, if the attack does not reach its highest intensity despite multiple attacks, it suggests a low level of expectation.

However, the presentation content for the 6B acceptance state described above is merely an example, and it may be implemented using other content. For example, as a post-acceptance change corresponding to the 6B acceptance state, if there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to the operation acceptance (e.g., the start or end of lamp illumination, or the termination of audible output of a sound that is in output state), it is not necessary to necessarily execute the "post-acceptance display" or "post-acceptance output sound." Even with such a configuration, the player can understand that the operation acceptance has been properly performed. Therefore, the post-acceptance display does not necessarily have to be executed as a post-acceptance change, and even in this case, it is possible to suggest the progress of the presentation by, for example, the pattern of lamp illumination or the pattern of output sound.

This example, as shown in Figure 174(a), assumes that the player's operation (operation state of the 6B operation unit), initiated at timing tBf2-A1, continues until timing tBf2-A2.

In this regard, the 6B acceptance state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (6B operation unit) in an operating state, a corresponding post-reception change (for example, at least one such as a post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated)." Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 174(a), during the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2 (the period during which the 6B operation unit is maintained in an operating state), multiple operation receptions are made to the 6B operation unit, and a corresponding post-reception change (for example, at least one such as a post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

As described above, when an operation request is received by the 6B operation unit in the 6B reception-accepting state, the display shown after the 6B reception, as shown in Figure 175(b), shows the ally character YS-B6 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic (including light effects and the generation of light-based magic). Therefore, from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2, when the so-called auto-click function is activated, this "single-time video display" will be played multiple times.

Furthermore, as described above, when an operation is received by the 6B operation unit in the 6B reception-accepting state, the 6B reception-after output sound is output to function as a sound effect corresponding to the "6B reception-after display" which shows "ally character YS-B6 attacking enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic (such as light effects or the generation of light-based magic)." Therefore, during the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated, in addition to the "single video display," the sound effect corresponding to such a "single video display" will be played multiple times.

Here, in the 6B reception-accepting state, when the operation unit (6B operation unit) is maintained in operation state and the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) is activated, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B6 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic (one video display) and the corresponding sound effect (6B reception-output sound) are newly executed as a post-reception change at regular intervals (predetermined times).

Furthermore, in the 6B reception-accepting state described in this example, when the operation unit (6B operation unit) is maintained in operation and the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) is activated, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B6 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic (one video display) and the sound effect corresponding to this "one video display" (6B reception-after output sound) can be executed multiple times as the above-mentioned post-reception changes. However, in this case, the interval until the execution of the post-reception change in response to the above-mentioned detection (the interval from the start of the previous post-reception change to the start of the next post-reception change) is always set to a specific time (e.g., 1 second) or less, as in the case of the 1B reception-accepting state described above.

In other words, in this case, from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 174, a "single video display (one of the changes after acceptance)" of the ally character YS-B6 attacking the enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic is newly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button function. This repeated display of a "single video display" is represented in the figure as "repeated button display HB6a".

Similarly, in the example shown in Figure 174, during the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (the 6th B post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes) is newly output at regular intervals by the auto-repeated function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the figure as the "first post-reception output sound Sα6a."

In this regard, the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 174 assumes a scenario where, although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 6B acceptance state does not progress.

Therefore, during this period, the "second post-reception output sound (see Figure 174(i))," which indicates that the performance has progressed in the 6B reception-accepting state, will not be initiated upon receiving the operation request. Furthermore, during this period, the 6B operation-promoting light LB6 will not be terminated and will maintain its illumination state.

With this configuration, during the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 174, the display of "light-based magic attacks" and "light effects" shown in Figure 175, and the output of corresponding sound effects, are repeatedly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button-pressing function (the change after reception is repeatedly executed at regular intervals) (repeated button-pressing display HB6a, first reception-after output sound Sα6a). However, the manner of the attack does not change. This allows the player to confirm that the same performance content is displayed, or that the performance content has not progressed, without having to perform monotonous repetitive operations, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game effectively.

Furthermore, the friendly character YS-B6 and the enemy character BOSS-B6 may be implemented in such a way that they are not displayed until the input is received, and only appear and are displayed upon receiving the input (for the duration of the validity period, or for a predetermined time).

Furthermore, during the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2, the "second post-reception output sound (see Figure 174(i))," which suggests that the performance content in the 6B reception-acceptable state has progressed, is not executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the performance content has not progressed.

In this regard, the examples of gameplay shown in Figures 174 and 175 assume a scenario where the player, frustrated by the lack of progress in the gameplay, temporarily interrupts their operation on the 6B control unit at timing tBf2-A2 to check the situation during non-operation, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function.

Here, in the 6B acceptance state, as shown in Figure 174(f), even if the operation state of the 6B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tBf2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB6a, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB6a will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tBf2-A2 (even after the 6B operation unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the "single video display" that was in the execution state has finished executing for a predetermined display time (or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 6B control unit is interrupted (returned to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button press function is disabled, the rapid-press indicator HB1a, which was previously active, will not immediately disappear. Therefore, it will take time to recognize the non-operational state while the 6B is in the 6B acceptance-enabled state. This significantly consumes the remaining time in the 6B acceptance-enabled state, thus creating a sense of caution when attempting to interrupt the operation state of the 6B control unit to more easily confirm the non-operational state while the 6B is in the 6B acceptance-enabled state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 6B control unit is interrupted and it is switched to a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HB6a is displayed, the time from the time it is switched to a non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HB6a is hidden is not set to a fixed time, but is made variable.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 6B control unit is interrupted (turned into a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, before the rapid-fire indicator HB6a disappears and a situation arises where it is easy to recognize the non-operational state in the 6B acceptance-allowed state. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much remaining time will be consumed in the 6B acceptance-allowed state, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 6B control unit to more easily confirm the non-operational state in the 6B acceptance-allowed state.

Furthermore, in the 6B acceptance state, as shown in Figure 174(h), the first post-reception output sound Sα6a, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be rendered inaudible when the operation state of the 6B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) at timing tBf2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated function, similar to the rapid-fire display HB6a. In other words, in this case, the first post-reception output sound Sα6a will continue to be output even after timing tBf2-A2 (even after the 6B operation unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in the execution state has finished executing for a predetermined output time (or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 6B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, the first post-reception output sound Sα6a, which was in the active state until then, will not immediately become non-output. In this case, it may appear as if the auto-repeated button function is still active, thus maintaining a desirable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 6B operation unit is interrupted and it is set to a non-operation state while the first post-reception output sound Sα6a (6B event) is being output, the time from the time the unit is set to a non-operation state until the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is no longer output is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 6B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) to disable the auto-repeating function, and how long it will take for the first post-reception output sound Sα6a (6B event) to become non-output, that is, how long it will take to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeating function has been disabled. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 6B acceptance state will be consumed, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 6B control unit.

Furthermore, in the 6B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 6B operation unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB6a and the first post-reception output sound Sα6a are both in the execution state, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB6a is hidden and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is turned off are different, as shown in Figures 174(f), (h), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB6a is hidden is set to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is turned off, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state is hidden or turned off is indeterminate, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB6a is hidden may be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is turned off, or it may be after the timing at which it is turned off. Furthermore, it may be possible to allow for situations where their timings coincide.

With this configuration, in the 6B reception-allowed state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 6B operation unit is interrupted (i.e., the unit is left in a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB6a and the first reception-after output sound Sα6a are both in operation, a situation will occur where, as shown in Figures 174(f), (h), etc., the rapid-fire indicator HB6a continues to be displayed and the first reception-after output sound Sα6a continues to be output, even though the 6B operation unit is in a non-operation state. However, after this, as time elapses since the 6B operation unit was left in a non-operation state, as shown in Figures 174(f), (h) and Figure 175(c), etc., the rapid-fire indicator HB6a, which had been displayed, will be hidden, and the first reception-after output sound Sα6a will be left in a non-output state. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the auto-rapid-fire function is disabled (see Figure 175(d)).

As described above, in the example shown in Figure 174, the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2 is assumed to be a case where, although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function and multiple post-reception changes are executed, the performance content corresponding to the 6B reception-acceptable state does not progress. Note that the 6B reception-acceptable state does not necessarily have to occur as a reception-acceptable state in which the performance content may progress; for example, it may occur as a reception-acceptable state in which only one aspect of the post-reception change is executed multiple times.

However, as mentioned above, in the 6B reception-accepting state in this example, the status indication display is not shown, so it is not possible to confirm the progress of the performance under those circumstances (as shown in Figure 175(c)). Also, as mentioned above, it is possible to display the status indication display even in the 6B reception-accepting state, or to provide status indication under those circumstances (as shown in Figure 175(c)) using a method other than display (e.g., lamp illumination).

In this example, as shown in Figure 174(a), it is assumed that the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is returned to the operation state at timing tBf2-B1 within the 6B acceptance state (the performance situation shown in Figure 175(d)).

In this example, if the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and an operation is received at timing tBf2-B1 within the 6B acceptance state, this triggers the "6B post-reception change (6B post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation received, as shown in Figures 174(f) and (h) (the effect shown in Figure 175(d)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBf2-B1 within the 6B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 174(f) and (h), the "first post-reception output sound Sα6 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "6B post-reception display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, even when operation on the 6B control unit is resumed at timing tBf2-B1 within the 6B acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 6B acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 175(d), the 6B acceptance change (such as the 6B acceptance display or 6B acceptance output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 6B acceptance change was first initiated based on the operation being accepted by the 6B control unit at timing tBf2-A1. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

In this regard, the performance examples shown in Figures 174 and 175 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 6B operation unit), which began at timing tBf2-B1, is maintained until timing tBf2-B3, thereby activating the auto-continuous pressing function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3 (the period during which the 6B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the 6B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times in response to these requests.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3 (the period during which the 6B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HB6a and the first post-reception output sound Sα6a) remains the same as in the case of the period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2 (see Figure 175(b)), unless the performance content progresses. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 175, the period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3 assumes that, among the multiple operation receptions performed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 6th B reception permission state progresses based on the operation reception performed at timing tBf2-B2 within that period (as shown in the performance status in Figure 175(e)).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 174, during the period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3, the "6th B Reception Change (6th B Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has not progressed, while during the period from timing tBf2-B2 to timing tBf2-B3, the "6th B Reception Change (6th B Reception Performance)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed.

More specifically, after the performance has progressed in this way, when an operation request is received by the 6B operation unit, the "single video display" will be shown as the "6B reception display," as shown in Figure 175(e), depicting an advanced version of the performance, such as "ally character YS-B6 attacking the injured enemy character BOSS-B6 using a high-intensity light-based magic."

Furthermore, in this example, once the performance content has progressed, as long as the state of acceptance of the 6B input remains in place, the degree of progress in the performance content will not revert to its previous state. Therefore, even when the 6B input input unit receives another input request after the completion of one video display showing the progressed performance content, the behavior at the time of the initial input request (in this case, the behavior of "ally character YS-B6" attacking "enemy character BOSS-B6" with light-based magic) will appear as one video display showing the progressed performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3, when the so-called auto-click function is activated, the "single video display" in which such a change in appearance occurs will be played multiple times by the auto-click function during the period from timing tBf2-B2 onwards, when the performance content has progressed.

Furthermore, even during the period after timing tBf2-B2, when the performance progresses, the sequence in which the ally character YS-B6 attacks the enemy character BOSS-B6 with light-based magic (one video display) is restarted at regular intervals (a predetermined time, the same time as before the change) as a post-reception change. Therefore, the "one video display" of the progressed performance is also restarted at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button function. This repeated display (multiple post-reception changes) of the "one video display (one post-reception change)" of the progressed sequence is represented in the diagram as "Repeated Button Display HB6b".

Thus, in the performance display device 1600 of this example, when the timing tBf2-B2, which is the timing when the performance content progresses, arrives, the mode of the rapid-fire display HB6 changes from "mode HB6a" to "mode HB6b," as shown in Figures 174(f) and 175(e). From this point onward, while the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled (timing tBf2-B2 to tBf2-B3), the rapid-fire display HB6 will be executed in "mode HB6b."

In this example, the mode of the rapid-fire indicator HB6 is changed according to the progress of the performance content, but it is also possible to keep it constant. That is, even if the rapid-fire indicator HB6 continues to run in a single mode regardless of the progress of the performance content, the player can still confirm through the rapid-fire indicator HB6 that the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) operations have been accepted. Furthermore, the player can also confirm the degree of progress of the performance content through the output of the 6B acceptance output sound Sβ6. As mentioned above, the 6B acceptance permission state may also be implemented as a type of acceptance permission state where the progress of the performance content itself cannot occur.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an operation is received once at the "6B operation unit (here, the operation button 410)" in the 6B reception-accepting state, in addition to the "6B reception display" described above, a first reception output sound may be output as the "6B reception output sound," as shown in Figure 174(h). As also described above, in addition to the first reception output sound Sα6, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," a second reception output sound Sβ6, which suggests that the performance content corresponding to the 6B reception-accepting state has progressed, can also be output as shown in Figure 174(i).

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 174, during the period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3, when timing tBf2-B2, which is the timing when the performance progresses, arrives, as shown in Figure 174(i), the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 is output in mode Sβ6b-1 based on the fact that the operation was received (performance progressed) at timing tBf2-B2. This allows the player to recognize that the performance has progressed through the output mode of the post-reception output sound. It is desirable to set the output time of the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 to be longer than that of the first post-reception output sound Sα6, which corresponds to one instance of operation reception.

However, in this example, the first post-reception output sound Sα6, which functions as a sound effect corresponding to "one video display," is implemented to be output in the same manner before and after the performance progresses. Therefore, when timing tBf2-B2, the timing at which the performance progresses, arrives, the first post-reception output sound Sα6, as a new "sound effect," begins outputting based on the operation being received. However, its manner of output is the same as when the operation was received before timing tBf2-B2 (the execution manner is the same whether or not performance progress occurs at timing tBf2-B2).

In other words, in this case, throughout the entire period from timing tBf2-B1 to timing tBf2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated tapping function is activated, the sound effect corresponding to the aforementioned "single video display" (first post-reception output sound Sα6) is newly output in the same manner at regular intervals by the auto-repeated tapping function. This repeated output of the "sound effect" is represented in the diagram as "first post-reception output sound Sα6a." The output manner of the first post-reception output sound Sα6a during this period is the same as in the case of the "period from timing tBf2-A1 to timing tBf2-A2" described above, so an explanation is omitted here.

In this example, the mode of the first post-reception output sound Sα6a was not changed according to the progression of the performance content, but it may be changed according to the progression of the performance content.

In this regard, the examples of gameplay shown in Figures 174 and 175 assume a scenario where the player again interrupts their operation on the 6B control unit at timing tBf2-B3, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function.

As described above, in the 6B acceptance state, even if the operation state of the 6B control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the 6B acceptance state is continuing, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB6, which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be hidden as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figure 174(f), even if the operation state of the 6B control unit is interrupted at timing tBf2-B3, the rapid-fire button press indicator HB6b will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tBf2-B3 (even after the 6B control unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the "single video display" that was in the execution state is executed for a predetermined display time and finishes displaying, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

Furthermore, similar to the case of the rapid-fire indicator HB6a, if the operation on the 6B control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operational state while the rapid-fire indicator HB6b is displayed, the time from the non-operational state until the rapid-fire indicator HB6b is hidden is not set to a fixed time, but is made variable.

Furthermore, as described above, in the 6B reception-accepting state, even if the operation state of the 6B control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operation state) while the 6B reception-accepting state is continuing, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button press function, the first post-reception output sound Sα6a, which was in an output state until then, will not be switched to a non-output state as a result. Therefore, as shown in Figure 174(h), even if the operation state of the 6B control unit is interrupted at timing tBf2-B3, the first post-reception output sound Sα6a will continue to be output even after timing tBf2-B3 (even after the 6B control unit becomes non-operational), until the "sound effect corresponding to one video display" that was in an execution state has finished executing and outputting for a predetermined output time, or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state.

However, the timing tBf2-B3 shown in Figure 174 assumes a scenario where the operation state of the 6B operation unit is interrupted while the second post-reception output sound Sβ6, which started outputting at timing tBf2-B2, continues to output.

In this regard, in the 6B reception-accepting state, the second post-reception output sound Sβ6, like the first post-reception output sound Sα6, does not terminate its output state (become inaudible) when the operation state of the 6B operation unit is interrupted (turned into a non-operation state). Therefore, as shown in Figure 174(i), even if the operation state of the 6B operation unit is interrupted at timing tBf2-B3, the second post-reception output sound Sβ6b-1 will continue to be output for a predetermined duration, or for a predetermined duration from the non-operation state, even after timing tBf2-B3 (even after the 6B operation unit becomes non-operational).

In this example, if the operation on the 6B control unit is interrupted and it is set to a non-operated state while the first post-reception output sound Sα6 (6B event) is being output, the time from the non-operated state until the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is set to a non-output state is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate. Similarly, for the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 (6B event), if the operation on the 6B control unit is interrupted and it is set to a non-operated state while the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 is being output, the time from the non-operated state until the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 is set to a non-output state is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after the operation of the 6B control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, before the first post-reception output sound Sα6 (6B event) and the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 (6B event) become inaudible, that is, before it can be more reliably confirmed that the auto-repeated button function has been disabled. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 6B acceptance state will be consumed, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 6B control unit.

Furthermore, in the 6B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, even if the operation state of the 6B operation unit is interrupted (turned into a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB6b and the first post-reception output sound Sα6a are both in operation, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB6b is hidden and the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is turned off are different, as shown in Figures 174(f), (h), etc. In the same figure, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB6b is hidden is shown to be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is turned off, but the relationship may be set to be the opposite. Alternatively, due to the above-mentioned property that the time until the state is hidden or turned off is indeterminate, the timing at which the rapid-fire indicator HB6b is hidden may be before the timing at which the first post-reception output sound Sα6a is turned off, or it may be after that timing. Furthermore, it may be possible to allow the timing of each to be the same. Note that this relationship between the rapid-fire indicator HB6b and the first post-reception output sound Sα6a also holds true between the rapid-fire indicator HB6b and the second post-reception output sound Sβ6, and between the first post-reception output sound Sα6a and the second post-reception output sound Sβ6; the same applies to other examples.

With this configuration, in the 6B acceptance-allowing state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 6B operation unit is interrupted (brought to a non-operation state) while the rapid-fire indicator HB6b, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a, and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6b-1 are all in the execution state, then, as shown in Figures 174(f), (h), (i), etc., the rapid-fire indicator HB6b continues to be displayed, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα6a continues to be output, and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ6b-1 continues to be output, while the 6B operation unit is in a non-operation state. However, after this, as time elapses since the 6B operation unit was put into a non-operation state (time elapsed from timing tBf2-B3), the rapid-fire indicator HB6b, which had been displayed, will be turned off, as shown in Figures 174(f) and 175(f). This makes it easy for players to recognize when the auto-repeated button-pressing function is disabled (see Figure 175(f)).

Furthermore, under normal circumstances, both the first post-reception output tone Sα6a and the second post-reception output tone Sβ6 would terminate (become inaudible) after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the 6B operation unit was deactivated (time elapsed from timing tBf2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in Figure 174(a), it is assumed that the 6B operation unit is activated again at timing tBf2-B3 or later, and both the first post-reception output sound Sα6a and the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 are audible (before the output state ends), at timing tBf2-C1 (the performance situation shown in Figure 175(g)).

In this example, if the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tBf2-C1 within the 6B acceptance state, this will trigger the "6B post-reception change (6B post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figures 174(f) and (h), similar to the case of timing tBf2-B1 described above (the effect shown in Figure 175(g)).

More specifically, if an operation is received by the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tBf2-C1 within the 6B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 174(f) and (h), the "first post-reception output sound Sα6 (sound effect corresponding to one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is again audibly output, and the "6B post-reception display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, when operation on the 6B control unit is resumed at timing tBf2-C1 within the 6B acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 6B acceptance state does not progress from the mode shown in Figure 175(e) (the first stage of progression). Therefore, in the situation shown in Figure 175(g), the 6B post-reception change (such as the 6B post-reception display or 6B post-reception output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 6B post-reception change was first initiated based on the operation acceptance to the 6B control unit at timing tBf-B2. Details of the performance are as described above, so a further explanation will be omitted here.

However, as mentioned above, this example assumes that the timing tBf2-C1, when operation on the 6B control unit is restarted, occurs while both the first post-reception output sound Sα6 and the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 are audible.

In this regard, the first post-reception output sound Sα6 terminates its previous output state and initiates a new output triggered by the new operation reception, based on the fact that operation on the 6B control unit has resumed at timing tBf2-C1 (operation reception has been completed). In contrast, the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 continues its previous output state without any change, based on the fact that operation on the 6B control unit has resumed at timing tBf2-C1 (operation reception has been completed).

With this configuration, in the state where the 6B is accepting input, while the 6B post-input output sound corresponding to the input input is being output, if an input input is received for the 6B operation unit which was previously in a non-operational state, there are two possibilities: the 6B post-input output sound may end (first post-input output sound Sα6) or it may not end (second post-input output sound Sβ6). This allows for a suitable sense of tension to be provided when the 6B operation unit, which was in a non-operational state, is brought back into operation. Furthermore, in the 6B reception-permitted state, in addition to cases where operation reception to the 6B operation unit is performed when the first post-reception output sound Sα6 and the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 are both outputting, it goes without saying that operation reception to the 6B operation unit may also be performed when the first post-reception output sound Sα6 is outputting and the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 is not outputting, or when the first post-reception output sound Sα6 is not outputting and the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 is outputting.

Furthermore, the continuous press indicator HB6 may also be configured to remain in a continuous press state at timing tBf2-C1. In this case, when an operation is received from the 6B operation unit, which had been in a non-operational state until then, it is desirable that the previous "single-shot video display" that was in progress is terminated prematurely, and a new display (single-shot video display) triggered by the new operation is started in its place.

Furthermore, the performance examples shown in Figures 174 and 175 assume that the player's operation (operation state of the 6B control unit), which began at timing tBf2-C1, continues even after timing tBf2-C2 (the timing when the 6B control unit's operation acceptance state ends), thus enabling the auto-continuous pressing function until timing tBf2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBf2-C1 to timing tBf2-C2 (the period during which the 6B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the 6B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change corresponding to these requests (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBf2-C1 to timing tBf2-C2 (the period during which the 6B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the rapid-fire display HB6b and the first post-reception output sound Sα6a) will be the same as in the case of the period from timing tBf2-B2 to timing tBf2-B3 (see Figure 175(e)) as shown in Figure 175(g), unless further development of the performance content occurs. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

In this example, during the period from timing tBf2-C1 to timing tBf2-C2 as shown in Figure 174, if the performance content corresponding to the 6B reception permission state progresses further (a second stage of progress occurs) based on the operation reception (such as the result of the performance judgment) performed at a predetermined timing within that period, the final form of the post-reception change will appear. However, unlike the 1B reception permission state and the 2B reception permission state, the 6B reception permission state in this example will not terminate prematurely even if the final form of the post-reception change appears. Therefore, if the operation state is maintained thereafter, the post-reception change will be executed multiple times in its final form until timing tBf2-C2 arrives.

As described above, the 6B acceptance state in this example assumes that the final form of the post-reception change does not appear. Therefore, in the period from timing tBf2-C1 to timing tBf2-C2 in the example shown in Figure 174, the "6B post-reception change (6B post-reception performance)" in response to the operation reception will be executed multiple times in a form where the performance content progresses only once (see Figure 175(g)). When timing tBf2-C2 arrives, the auto-repeated button function, which had been enabled up to that point, is disabled.

In this regard, when the auto-button rapid-fire function is disabled at timings tBf2-A2 and tBf2-B3, the rapid-fire indicator HB6, which was previously displayed due to the auto-button rapid-fire function, is not automatically hidden as a result (it is hidden after an indefinite period of time after the auto-button rapid-fire function is disabled). However, when the auto-button rapid-fire function is disabled at timing tBf2-C2, the rapid-fire indicator HB6, which was previously displayed due to the auto-button rapid-fire function, is automatically hidden (after a certain period of time, e.g., 0 seconds, from the time the operation is received).

Furthermore, in this example, when the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timings tBf2-A2 and tBf2-B3, the first post-reception output sound Sα6a, which had been output by the auto-repeated button function, is not made inaudible as a result (it is made inaudible after an indefinite time has passed since the auto-repeated button function was disabled). However, when the auto-repeated button function is disabled at timing tBf2-C2, the first post-reception output sound Sα6a, which had been output by the auto-repeated button function, is made inaudible as a result (after a certain time has passed since the operation was received). With this configuration, it becomes possible to indicate whether or not the 6B reception permission state has ended by observing the output status of the first post-reception output sound Sα6a after the auto-repeated button function is disabled.

Furthermore, in this example, we assumed that timing tBf2-C2 occurs after the second post-reception output sound Sβ6b-1, which began outputting at timing tBf2-B2, has become inaudible. However, it is also possible to consider cases where timing tBf2-C2 occurs while the second post-reception output sound Sβ6b-1 is still being output audibly. In this case, however, unlike the "first post-reception output sound Sα6a," it is desirable that the output state of the "second post-reception output sound Sβ6," which is in the middle of execution, is not terminated when timing tBf2-C2 occurs, but rather maintained until the remaining execution time is consumed.

Furthermore, regarding "Constant Button Press Indicator HB6" and "First Input Output Sound Sα6," if timing tBf2-C2 arrives while they are in the middle of execution, they may be kept running until the remaining execution time is consumed.

In this example, when timing tBf2-C2 arrives, the 6B operation prompt light LB6, which prompts the player to take action, is deactivated. That is, the 6B operation prompt light LB6 starts illuminating when the 6B acceptance state occurs and stops illuminating when the 6B acceptance state ends. This indicates whether the state allows or disallows operation.

In other words, in this case, the "change after reception of 6B (performance after reception of 6B)" in this example suggests that the reception of 6B has ended without the "final performance mode (for example, mode corresponding to mode JA1c described above)" among the performance content corresponding to the reception of 6B being permitted state appearing (this is not a necessary configuration for the configuration described below).

In this example, as shown in Figures 174(a), (b) and 175(h), it is assumed that the player continues the operation of the "6th B operation unit," which started at timing tBf2-C1, even after timing tBf2-C2 has arrived.

However, once the system transitions from the "6B acceptance permitted state" to the "state where operation acceptance to the 6B operation unit is not permitted" (after timing tBf2-C2), operation acceptance to the 6B operation unit will not be performed based on the detection of the operation state maintained from before timing tBf2-C2 (6B acceptance permitted state) while the "operation-related display" that suggests operation acceptance to the 6B operation unit is permitted is not displayed. This configuration may be achieved by ensuring that, after transitioning from the "6B reception permitted state" to the "state where operation reception to the 6B operation unit is not permitted" (after timing tBf2-C2), the "operation-related indicator" suggesting that operation reception to the 6B operation unit is permitted is not displayed, and that a state where operation reception to the 6B operation unit is permitted does not secretly occur. Alternatively, even if a state where operation reception to the 6B operation unit is permitted secretly occurs, this can be achieved by invalidating (not accepting the operation) the detection of an operation state maintained from before timing tBf2-C2 (6B reception permitted state) instead of determining it as a valid operation.

Therefore, even if the "6B operation unit" is kept in an operating state for an extended period while the "operation-related indicator," which suggests that operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted, is not displayed from timing tBf2-C1 onward, it is impossible for the auto-repeated operation function to be activated, for operation acceptance to be performed multiple times, or for post-acceptance changes to be executed multiple times during that period.

Furthermore, even if, after timing tBf2-C1, an "operation-related indicator" suggesting that operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted is displayed and a state in which operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted occurs, and then, while the "operation-related indicator" suggesting that operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted is not displayed, if a state in which operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted secretly occurs, this can be achieved by not determining the detection of an operation state maintained from before timing tBf2-C2 (6B acceptance permitted state) as a valid operation, but rather invalidating it (not accepting the operation). In this case, it is desirable that, even when an "operation-related indicator" suggesting that operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted is displayed and operation acceptance for the 6B operation unit is permitted, the detection of an operation state maintained from before timing tBf2-C2 (6B acceptance permitted state) as a valid operation, but rather invalidating it (not accepting the operation). Furthermore, even if, while the operation state for the 6B operation unit is maintained over multiple symbol changes from timing tBf2-C1 onward, and while no "operation-related indicator" suggesting that operation reception for the 6B operation unit is permitted is displayed, it is desirable to invalidate (not accept) the detection of the operation state maintained before timing tBf2-C2 (the 6B reception permitted state) rather than determining it as a valid operation.

Furthermore, in order to suitably maintain the visual appeal of the 6B acceptance state, it is desirable that, if no operation is performed by the player until the timing tBf2-C2 arrives when operation acceptance to the 6B operation unit is no longer permitted, the same post-acceptance changes as when such operation is performed do not occur (the automatic button function is not activated).

Furthermore, the 6B reception permission state is not provided as a "type of reception permission state that can be terminated early based on the receipt of an operation," and therefore, this state will not be terminated based on an operation receipt to the "6B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)."

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of generating the "7th B Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state). Figure 176 is a time chart showing an example of the performance content when the "7th B Acceptance State" is generated based on the fulfillment of the above-mentioned conditions "Condition 7B" and an operation is performed by the player. Figure 177 is a diagram showing an example of the performance when the "7th B Acceptance State" is generated.

Now, assuming the starting conditions are met (holdings are processed) and the "7th B variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (such as a pre-announcement performance determination) corresponding to the "7th B variation pattern." After this, it starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ (such as performance depiction according to the 7th B variation pattern, or sound output of BGM according to the 7th B variation pattern (such as normal BGM playback when not reaching)), and within the execution period of this variation performance, it additionally executes a performance (pre-announcement performance) according to the result of the pre-announcement performance determination, in addition to the performance of the selected "7th B variation pattern" itself.

As shown in Figure 176(b), during the execution period of the variation effect related to the "7B variation pattern," based on the arrival of timing tBg2, which is 7B time elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the fulfillment of "condition 7B"), the above-mentioned 7B acceptance permission state (valid period) is made possible, allowing for "reception of operations to the 7B operation unit regarding changes after 7B reception (such as the display HB7 after 7B reception, the output sound Sα7 after 7B reception, etc.)" (the situation shown in Figure 177(a)).

In this embodiment, the "7B operation unit" that allows operation in the 7B reception-permitted state is not the "operation button 410" that allows multiple operation requests in the 1B reception-permitted state and the 2B reception-permitted state, but rather the "sword ornament 5001" that also allows multiple operation requests in the 3B reception-permitted state, the 4B reception-permitted state, and the 5B reception-permitted state, thus allowing multiple operation requests until the 7B reception-permitted state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figures 176(b) to (e), when the 7B acceptance state occurs, no operation-related displays are shown, such as a mock image of the target of the player's operation (in this case, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 7B operation unit), messages related to the operation of the target of the operation (in this case, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 7B operation unit), or status indication displays that could suggest the progress of the performance throughout the entire period after the operation is accepted. Furthermore, in this example, no audible operation-related output sound prompting the player to perform an operation is emitted. Thus, the 7B acceptance state in this example makes it difficult to recognize that operation acceptance for the "7B operation unit" has been accepted.

Furthermore, in the 7B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 176(b) and (j), the operation-prompting light that encourages the player to take action is not emitted when this state occurs. In this case, it goes without saying that the 7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) does not necessarily need to have a light-emitting unit.

In the 7th B reception-accepting state with this configuration, none of the operation-related indicators prompting operation, operation-related output sounds prompting operation, or operation-promoting light prompting operation are performed upon its occurrence. Therefore, the 7th B reception-accepting state is not only more confidential than the 4th B reception-accepting state in which all of these are performed, but is also more confidential than the 3rd B reception-accepting state in which operation-promoting light is not performed, and the 5th B reception-accepting state in which operation-related output sounds and operation-promoting light are not performed, allowing for the provision of an operation opportunity under greater tension. Furthermore, although the target of operation differs, the 7th B reception-accepting state is also more confidential than the 6th B reception-accepting state in which operation-related indicators and operation-related output sounds are not performed.

Furthermore, in the 7B acceptance state in this example, as shown in Figures 176(e) and 177(a), an ally character (here, ally character YS-B7) corresponding to the type of the 7B acceptance state, and an enemy character (here, enemy character BOSS-B7 depicted as a ghost) corresponding to the type of the 7B acceptance state, are displayed. Each time an operation (operation reception) is performed on the "7B operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)", an action may be performed in which "ally character YS-B7" attacks "enemy character BOSS-B7". However, in this example, ally character YS-B7 and enemy character BOSS-B7 do not function as the aforementioned "situation indication display" that can suggest the degree of progress of the performance even when the 7B operation unit (operation button 410) is not in an operation state. Furthermore, in the state of acceptance of the 7th B input, the friendly character YS-B7 and the enemy character BOSS-B7 may not necessarily be displayed.

Furthermore, even in the 7B reception-accepting state, a status indication display may be provided. However, in this case, considering the confidentiality of the 7B reception-accepting state, it is desirable that the status indication display not be shown while no operation has been received, and only be displayed upon confirmation that an operation has been received, and that the display state continues thereafter.

For example, in the example shown in Figure 176, it is assumed that the first operation request is made to the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBg2-A1 within the 7B acceptance state.

In this example, if the first operation request is received for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBg2-A1 within the 7B reception permission state, a "7B reception change (7B reception effect)" corresponding to that operation request will occur, as shown in Figures 176(f) and (h) (the effect shown in Figure 177(b)).

More specifically, if an operation is received for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBg2-A1 within the 7B reception acceptance state, as shown in Figures 176(f) and (h), a "7B reception post-output sound" corresponding to the operation received for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is audibly output, and a "7B reception post-display" corresponding to the operation received for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is displayed.

In other words, when an operation request is received once for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 7B reception-allowed state, a "7B reception-posted display HB7" corresponding to the operation request appears, as shown in Figure 177(b), in which the faces of the "ally character YS-B7" and the "enemy character BOSS-B7" are zoomed in on, suggesting a confrontation (7B reception-posted display HB7). This allows the player to recognize through the display on the performance display device 1600 that an operation request has been received for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)". However, in the 7B reception-allowed state in this example, even if the performance content progresses based on the result of the performance judgment at the time the operation request was received, the appearance of the "7B reception-posted display HB7" does not change. Furthermore, as will be discussed later, in the 7B reception-accepting state, even if the so-called auto-repeated button function (long-press function) is enabled, the display change on the performance display device 1600 will not occur multiple times as a post-reception change. That is, in this case, in the 7B reception-accepting state, "7B post-reception display HB7" is executed only when the first operation is received by the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to that operation. However, thereafter, "7B post-reception display HB7" will not be executed again (multiple times) while the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) is enabled (the auto-repeated button function is not applied to "display changes" as one of the post-reception changes).

With this configuration, the aforementioned strong confidentiality of the 7B acceptance state is temporarily lost upon the appearance of "HB7 displayed after 7B acceptance (see Figure 177(b))." However, from that point onward, confidentiality is granted (made difficult to recognize) regarding a different object (auto-repeated button function) than the previously confidential object (valid period), such as "whether or not the so-called auto-repeated button function (long-press function) is enabled." Therefore, it is expected that the game's enjoyment will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. It goes without saying that in the 1B acceptance state to the 6B acceptance state described above, there are no "performance elements" that are not subject to such auto-repeated button function as one of the post-acceptance changes.

Furthermore, in this example, when an operation request is received once for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" in the 7B reception-accepting state, in addition to the "7B reception-after display HB7" mentioned above, a first reception-after output sound Sα7 may be output as the "7B reception-after output sound," as shown in Figure 176(h). However, as will be described later, in this 7B reception-accepting state, unlike the 1B reception-accepting state and the 2B reception-accepting state, there is no possibility of further output sounds other than the first reception-after output sound Sα7 being output as the "7B reception-after output sound." The first reception-after output sound Sα7 only needs to be a sound that can suggest that an operation request has been received by the player, and when the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it only needs to be a sound that can suggest that the 7B operation unit is being maintained in an operating state.

In the 7B reception-accepting state in this example, when the performance content, which is a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the 7B operation unit, progresses, the mode (type of sound) of the output of the first post-reception output sound Sα7 is changed. Once the performance content has progressed in this way, as long as the 7B reception-accepting state continues, the degree of progress of the performance content will not revert to its pre-progress state. Each time an operation is received, the first post-reception output sound Sα7 will be output in the progressed mode. In other words, in this case, while it is not possible to confirm whether the performance content, which is a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the 7B operation unit, has progressed through the display on the performance display device 1600 in the 7B reception-accepting state, it is possible to confirm whether the performance content, which is a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the 7B operation unit, has progressed through the output mode of the first post-reception output sound Sα7.

Furthermore, in the 7B reception-accepting state, unlike the 6B reception-accepting state (a reception-accepting state where the degree of performance is set for the performance content), the degree of performance is not set for the performance content as a change after receiving an operation to the 7B control unit. Instead, each time an operation is received to the 7B control unit, the 7B event (which may be just a display, just a sound, just light, or just a movable part) is repeatedly executed (occurs) as a change after receiving the operation.

Furthermore, while the 7th B reception-accepting state differs from the 3rd B reception-accepting state, the 4th B reception-accepting state, and the 5th B reception-accepting state in that the "7th B reception-post display HB7" is executed as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception, other changes as post-reception changes (here, corresponding to the "first post-reception output sound Sα7," but not necessarily a sound) may be executed as the same changes (here, sounds of the same nature) as in the 3rd B reception-accepting state, the 4th B reception-accepting state, and the 5th B reception-accepting state (first post-reception output sounds Sα3, Sα4, Sα5). For example, in the 7B reception-accepting state, the following post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the 7B operation unit are made executable: "7B reception display HB7" and "7B event (which may be sound only, light only, or movable body movement only)." Of these, only the "7B event" can be executed multiple times. In contrast, in the 3B reception-accepting state, the 4B reception-accepting state, and the 5B reception-accepting state described above, the following post-reception changes in response to the operation reception may be made: for example, only the same event as the "7B event" can be executed, and only this same event can be executed multiple times.

In this example, under the 7B reception-accepting state, when the first operation is received by the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)," the depiction shown in Figure 177(b) and the first post-reception output sound Sα7 appear (one post-reception change). However, for subsequent operation receptions, while the depiction shown in Figure 177(b) remains unchanged, the first post-reception output sound Sα7 is newly audibly output each time an operation is received. As the performance progresses through multiple operation receptions, the mode of output of the first post-reception output sound Sα7 changes. When the "final mode" appears, it suggests a high level of anticipation. However, in this case, if the "final mode" does not appear as the mode of the first post-reception output sound Sα7, it suggests a low level of anticipation.

However, the presentation content for the 7B acceptance state described above is merely an example, and it may be implemented using other content. For example, as a post-acceptance change corresponding to the 7B acceptance state, in addition to the "7B acceptance display HB7" mentioned above, if there is at least one presentation element that causes some kind of change in response to the operation acceptance (e.g., lamp illumination or movable part movement), the "post-acceptance output sound" does not necessarily have to be executed. Even with such a configuration, the player can understand that the operation acceptance has been properly performed.

This example, as shown in Figure 176(a), assumes that the player's operation (the operating state of the 7B operation unit), which began at timing tBg2-A1, continues until timing tBg2-A2.

In this regard, the 7B reception permission state is classified as a "multiple operation enabled state in which, simply by maintaining the operation unit (7B operation unit) in an operating state, the corresponding post-reception changes (for example, at least one of post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, or post-reception mechanism operation) are executed multiple times (a type in which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated)." Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 176(a), during the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2 (the period during which the 7B operation unit is maintained in an operating state), multiple operation receptions are made to the 7B operation unit, and the corresponding post-reception changes (for example, at least one of post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception light emission, or post-reception mechanism operation) are executed multiple times.

As described above, when an operation request is received by the 7B operation unit in the 7B reception-accepting state, the "7B reception post-display HB7" is displayed as shown in Figure 177(b), in which the faces of the "ally character YS-B7" and the "enemy character BOSS-B7" are zoomed in, suggesting a confrontation (7B reception post-display HB7).

However, as also mentioned above, the display change as one of the post-reception changes occurs only once between timing tBg2-A1 and timing tBg2-A2, and no further display changes will occur as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception, regardless of how many operations are received thereafter by the auto-repeated function (long-press function). Furthermore, the "7B post-reception display HB7" in this example maintains its display state even at timing tBe2-C2, when the state in which operation reception is permitted for the 7B operation unit ends, and is assumed to subsequently become invisible.

Furthermore, as described above, when an operation is received by the 7B operation unit in the 7B reception-accepting state, the 7B reception-after output sound (first reception-after output sound Sα7) is output. Therefore, during the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated, the "7B reception-after display HB7" occurs only once, and this 7B reception-after output sound (first reception-after output sound Sα7) is played multiple times.

In the 7B reception-accepting state, when the operation unit (7B operation unit) is maintained in operation and the auto-repeated function is activated, the 7B reception-post-output sound (first reception-post-output sound Sα7), which is one of the post-reception changes, is executed multiple times. However, the execution interval (the interval from the start of the previous reception-post-change to the start of the next reception-post-change) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time). It is desirable to set this "fixed time" to the same time as in the 3B reception-accepting state and 4B reception-accepting state, which target the same operation unit.

Furthermore, in the 7B reception-accepting state described in this example, when the operation unit (7B operation unit) is maintained in operation and the auto-repeated button function is activated, the 7B reception-post-output sound (first reception-post-output sound Sα7), which is one of the post-reception changes, is executed multiple times. However, the interval between the start of execution of this reception-post-change in response to the above detection (the interval from the start of execution of the previous reception-post-change to the start of execution of the next reception-post-change) is always set to be less than or equal to a specific time (e.g., 1 second). However, it is desirable that this interval in the 7B reception-accepting state be set to a different length than the interval when the auto-repeated button function is activated in the 1B reception-accepting state described above. For example, it may be set to be longer than the interval when the auto-repeated button function is activated in the 1B reception-accepting state described above, and less than or equal to a specific time (e.g., 1 second).

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 176, the 7th B post-reception output sound (the first post-reception output sound Sα7) is newly output at regular intervals by the auto-repeated function, and this repeated output of "sound" is represented as "first post-reception output sound Sα7a" in the figure.

In this regard, the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2 in the example shown in Figure 176 assumes a scenario where, although multiple operations are received by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 7B acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, within this period, the output sound after the 7B acceptance (the manner of output as the first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) does not change.

With this configuration, in the example shown in Figure 176, during the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2, while the "7th B Reception Display HB7" shown in Figure 177(b) appears as a post-reception change, the output of the 7th B reception output sound (first reception output sound Sα7) is repeatedly executed at regular intervals by the auto-repeated button function (the post-reception change is repeatedly executed at regular time intervals) (first reception output sound Sα7a). However, the manner in which the 7th B reception output sound (first reception output sound Sα7) is output does not change. This allows for confirmation of the performance content corresponding to multiple operation receptions, or whether the performance content has not progressed, simply by maintaining the operation state, thus effectively maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the friendly character YS-B7 and the enemy character BOSS-B7 may be implemented so that they are not displayed until the input is received, and then appear and are displayed as "HB7 (Displayed after 7B input)" once the input is received.

In this regard, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 176 and 177 assume a scenario where, for example, the player temporarily interrupts their operation on the 7B control unit at timing tBf2-A2 to check the situation when no operation is being performed, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button function.

Here, in the 7B reception-accepting state, as shown in Figure 176(f), even if the operation state of the 7B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) at timing tBg2-A2 to disable the auto-repeated function, the "7B reception-after display HB7" (reception-after change), which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be hidden as a result. In other words, in this case, the "7B reception-after display HB7" will continue to be in the execution state even after timing tBg2-A2 (even after the 7B control unit becomes non-operational), for example, until the "single video display" that was in the execution state has finished executing for the predetermined display time (until the execution of one reception-after change is complete).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 7B control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated function is disabled, the "7B Reception Display HB7," which was in an active state until then, is not immediately hidden (the post-reception change is not terminated midway through one execution). Therefore, it takes time before the operation status in the 7B reception-allowed state becomes easily recognizable. This means that a significant amount of time is consumed in the remaining time of the 7B reception-allowed state, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation state of the 7B control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in that state. This is especially true because, in this example, the "7B Reception Display HB7" maintains its display state even at the timing tBe2-C2 when the state in which operation reception is permitted for the 7B control unit ends, and is subsequently hidden.

Furthermore, the "Display HB7 after 7B reception" may not necessarily maintain its display state at timing tBe2-C2, when the state in which operation reception is permitted for the 7B operation unit ends. Alternatively, the "Display HB7 after 7B reception" may either maintain its display state at timing tBe2-C2, when the state in which operation reception is permitted for the 7B operation unit ends, or be hidden while the state in which operation reception is permitted for the 7B operation unit continues.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 7B operation unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operational state while "7B Reception Display HB7" is displayed, the time from when it is put into a non-operational state until "7B Reception Display HB7" is hidden (the time until one reception change that was in progress is completed) is not set as a fixed time, but is set to be variable.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will pass after temporarily interrupting the operation of the 7B control unit (setting it to a non-operational state) and disabling the auto-repeated function before the "7B Reception After Display HB7" becomes hidden, and a situation arises where the operation status in the 7B reception-allowed state becomes easily recognizable. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much time will be consumed in the 7B reception-allowed state, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to temporarily interrupt the operation of the 7B control unit to more easily confirm the operation status in the 7B reception-allowed state.

Furthermore, in the 7B reception-accepting state, as shown in Figure 176(h), the first post-reception output sound Sα7a (7B event), which was in the execution state up to that point, will not be rendered inaudible when the operation state of the 7B operation unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operation state) at timing tBg2-A2 to disable the auto-repeating function, similar to the "7B post-reception display HB7". In other words, in this case, the first post-reception output sound Sα7a will continue to be output even after timing tBg2-A2 (even after the 7B operation unit becomes non-operational), until the "single output sound" that was in the execution state has finished executing for the predetermined output time (or for a predetermined time from the non-operation state).

With this configuration, even if the operation state of the 7B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, the first post-reception output sound Sα7a, which was in the active state until then, will not immediately become non-output. In this case, it may appear as if the auto-repeated button function is still active, thus maintaining a desirable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this example, if the operation on the 7B operation unit is interrupted and it is set to a non-operation state while the first post-reception output sound Sα7a (7B event) is being output, the time from the time the unit is set to a non-operation state until the first post-reception output sound Sα7a is no longer output is not set to a fixed time, but is made indeterminate.

With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will elapse after the operation of the 7B control unit is temporarily interrupted (set to a non-operational state) to disable the auto-repeating function, and how long it will take for the first post-reception output sound Sα7a (7B event) to become non-output, that is, how long it will take to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeating function has been disabled. This also means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time in the 7B acceptance state will be consumed, thus creating a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation of the 7B control unit.

Furthermore, in the 7B reception-accepting state according to this embodiment, if the operation state of the 7B operation unit is interrupted (brought to a non-operation state) while the "7B reception display HB7" and the first reception output sound Sα7a are both in the execution state, a situation will occur where, as shown in Figures 176(f), (h), etc., the 7B operation unit is in a non-operation state, the "7B reception display HB7" continues to display, and the first reception output sound SB7a continues to output. However, after this, as time elapses since the 7B operation unit was put into a non-operation state, the first reception output sound Sα7a will be brought to a non-output state, as shown in Figures 176(f), (h), etc. However, the "7B Reception Display HB7" in this example is configured not to be hidden before the first reception output sound SB7a is rendered inaudible, nor to be hidden while the 7B reception permission state continues (this configuration is not mandatory). Even with such a configuration, if the player notices the cessation of periodic sound output from the first reception output sound Sα7a, they can relatively quickly recognize that the auto-repeated button press function has been disabled. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained while improving the enjoyment of the game.

As described above, in the example shown in Figure 176, the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2 assumes that although multiple operations are received and multiple post-reception changes are executed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 7B reception-accepting state does not progress. Therefore, in the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2, after the depiction shown in Figure 177(b) appears, only the first post-reception output sound Sα7 (7B event) is executed multiple times in the same manner, suggesting that the performance content has not progressed. Note that the 7B reception-accepting state does not necessarily have to occur as a reception-accepting state in which the performance content may progress; for example, it may be generated as a reception-accepting state in which only one manner of post-reception change is executed multiple times.

In this example, as shown in Figure 176(a), we assume that the "7B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is returned to the operation state at timing tBg2-B1 within the 7B acceptance state.

In this example, if the "7B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and an operation is received at timing tBg2-B1 within the 7B acceptance state, this triggers the "7B post-reception change (7B post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation received, as shown in Figure 176(h) (the effect shown in Figure 177(b)).

However, the 7B acceptance state in this example is implemented in such a way that it does not terminate the "previous post-acceptance change" that is in the middle of execution and does not start the execution of a new post-acceptance change. Therefore, if an operation is received for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at the timing tBg2-B1 of the 7B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 176(f) and (h), the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα7" corresponding to the operation received for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is again audibly output as a 7B post-acceptance change, but the "7B post-acceptance display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is not started to be displayed again. In other words, in this case, while the "7B Reception Post-Display (One Video Display)" shown in Figure 177(b) continues to display, the "1st Reception Post-Output Sound Sα7," corresponding to the operation reception to the "7B Operation Unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)," is again audibly output as a 7B reception post-change.

Furthermore, this example assumes a scenario where, even when operation on the 7B control unit is resumed at timing tBg2-B1 within the 7B acceptance state, the performance content corresponding to that 7B acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, the "first post-reception output sound Sα7," which is again audibly output at timing tBg2-B1, will be output in the same manner as when the 7B post-reception change was first executed based on the operation reception to the 7B control unit at timing tBg2-A1. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

In this regard, the performance examples shown in Figures 176 and 177 assume that the player's operation (the operating state of the 7B operation unit), which began at timing tBg2-B1, is maintained until timing tBg2-B3, thereby activating the auto-continuous pressing function.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBg2-B1 to timing tBg2-B3 (the period during which the 7B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the 7B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times in response to these requests.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBg2-B1 to timing tBg2-B3 (the period during which the 7B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the manner of the first post-reception output sound Sα7a) is the same as in the case of the period from timing tBg2-A1 to timing tBg2-A2, unless the performance content progresses. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

However, in the example shown in Figure 176, the period from timing tBg2-B1 to timing tBg2-B3 assumes that, among the multiple operation receptions performed by the auto-repeated button function, the performance content corresponding to the 7th B reception permission state progresses based on the operation reception performed at timing tBg2-B2 within that period.

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 176, during the period from timing tBg2-B1 to timing tBg2-B3, the "7th B Post-Reception Change (in this example, the first post-reception output sound Sα7)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has not progressed, whereas during the period from timing tBg2-B2 to timing tBg2-B3, the "7th B Post-Reception Change (in this example, the first post-reception output sound Sα7)" in response to the operation reception is executed in a manner in which the performance content has progressed.

More specifically, within the period from timing tBg2-B2 to timing tBg2-B3, at "timing tBg2-B2," which is the timing when the performance content progresses, the mode (type of sound) of the first post-reception output sound Sα7 changes to a mode in which the performance content has progressed one stage, as shown in Figure 176(h). In contrast, no change occurs in "7th B post-reception display HB7" as a result of the progress of the performance content. With this configuration, it becomes apparent through the mode (type of sound) of the first post-reception output sound Sα7 that the performance content corresponding to the 7th B reception acceptance state has progressed due to the operation reception (by the auto-repeated function) performed at timing tBg2-B2 (as a result of the performance judgment based on it).

In this example, once the performance content has progressed, as long as the 7B reception-accepting state remains in place, the degree of progress in the performance content will not revert to its pre-progress state. Therefore, even when another operation request is made to the 7B operation unit after the completion of one audible output (the first post-reception output sound Sα7) that has changed to the progressed performance content, the first post-reception output sound Sα7 will be audibly output in the manner that has changed to the progressed performance content.

In other words, in this case, during the period from timing tBg2-B1 to timing tBg2-B3, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is activated, the "single audible output" that exhibits such a change in characteristics will be played multiple times by the auto-repeated button function during the period from timing tBg2-B2 onward, when the performance content has progressed.

Furthermore, even during the period after timing tBg2-B2, when the performance content has progressed, the audible output of the first post-reception output sound Sα7 (one audible output) is restarted at regular intervals (a predetermined time (the same time as before the change)) as a post-reception change. Therefore, the "one audible output" in the progressed form of the performance content is also restarted at regular intervals by the auto-repeated function. This repeated output (multiple post-reception changes) of the "one audible output (one post-reception change)" in this progressed form is represented as "first post-reception output sound Sα7b" in the diagram.

Thus, in the performance display device 1600 in this example, when the timing tBg2-B2, which is the timing when the performance content progresses, arrives, the display mode shown in Figure 177(b) remains unchanged and continues as is, while the first post-reception output sound Sα7 changes from "mode Sα7a" to "mode Sα7b". From this point onward, while the auto-repeated button function is enabled (timing tBg2-B2 to tBg2-B3), the first post-reception output sound Sα7 will be executed multiple times as "mode Sα7b".

In this example, the mode of the first post-reception output sound Sα7 (7B specific event) is changed according to the progress of the performance content, but it is also possible to keep it constant. For example, even if the first post-reception output sound Sα7 is continuously executed in a single mode regardless of the progress of the performance content, if other performance elements (e.g., light emission) indicate the progress of the performance content, the player can confirm through the first post-reception output sound Sα7 that the auto-repeated button function is enabled and the number of times (frequency) operations have been received, and can also confirm the degree of progress of the performance content through the mode of other performance elements (e.g., light emission). Furthermore, as mentioned above, the 7B reception-accepting state may be implemented as a type of reception-accepting state in which the progress of the performance content itself cannot occur, unlike the 6B reception-accepting state. In this case, it goes without saying that the post-reception change will be executed multiple times in only one mode.

In this regard, the examples of gameplay shown in Figures 176 and 177 assume a scenario where the player again interrupts their operation on the 7B control unit at timing tBg2-B3, thereby disabling the auto-repeated button-pressing function.

As described above, in the 7B reception-accepting state, even if the operation state of the 7B control unit is interrupted (set to a non-operational state) while the 7B reception-accepting state is continuing, and the auto-repeated button function is disabled, the "7B reception-post display HB7" and "first reception-post output sound Sα7," which were in an execution state up to that point, will not terminate their execution state as a result (reception-post changes that were in the middle of execution will not be terminated prematurely due to non-operation). Therefore, as shown in Figures 176(f) and (h), even if the operation state of the 7B control unit is interrupted at timing tBg2-B3, the "7B reception-post display HB7" and "first reception-post output sound Sα7b" will continue to display and output even after timing tBg2-B3 (even after the 7B control unit becomes non-operational).

Furthermore, similar to the case of the first post-reception output sound Sα7a, if the operation of the 7B control unit is interrupted and it is put into a non-operational state while the first post-reception output sound Sα7b is being output, the time from the non-operational state until the first post-reception output sound Sα7b becomes inaudible (the time until one post-reception change is completed) is not set as a fixed time, but is made variable. With this configuration, it becomes difficult to predict how much time will have passed since the operation state of the 7B control unit was interrupted (put into a non-operational state) and the auto-repeated function was disabled, before the first post-reception output sound Sα7 becomes inaudible, that is, when it becomes possible to more reliably confirm that the auto-repeated function has been disabled. This means that it becomes difficult to predict how much of the remaining time as the 7B reception-allowed state will be consumed, which is expected to create a sense of tension when attempting to interrupt the operation state of the 7B control unit.

Furthermore, in the 7B reception-accepting state according to this embodiment, even if the operation state of the 7B operation unit is interrupted (turned to a non-operation state) while the "7B reception-post display HB7" and the "first reception-post output sound Sα7b" are both in the execution state, the timing at which the "7B reception-post display HB7" is hidden and the timing at which the "first reception-post output sound Sα7b" is turned off are different, as shown in Figures 176(f), (h), etc. However, in this example, the timing at which the "7B reception-post display HB7" is hidden never occurs before the timing at which the "first reception-post output sound Sα7" is turned off; it is always set to occur after that timing.

Here, the output sound Sα7b, which was originally present after the first reception, would normally cease to be output (become inaudible) after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the 7B control unit was deactivated (time elapsed from timing tBg2-B3).

However, in this example, as shown in Figure 176(a), it is assumed that the 7B control unit is activated again at timing tBg2-C1, after the 7B control unit was in the deactivated state, and while the first post-reception output sound Sα7b is audible (before the output state ends).

In this regard, even if the "7B operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410)" is activated again and operation is received at timing tBg2-C1 within the 7B acceptance state, ideally, as with the case of timing tBg2-B1 described above, this should trigger the "7B post-reception change (7B post-reception effect)" corresponding to the operation reception, as shown in Figure 176(h).

However, as described above, the 7th B acceptance-allowing state in this example is implemented in such a way that it does not terminate the "previous post-reception change" that is in the process of being executed, and does not initiate a new post-reception change. Therefore, not only at timing tBg2-C1, but even after timing tBg2-C1 has arrived, unless the audible output of the 7th B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα7) that was started to be output during the period from timing tBg2-B2 to timing tBg2-B3 has ended, the 7th B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα7) will not be newly started to be output. In other words, in this case, under the 7B reception-accepting state described in this example, as shown in Figure 176(h), after the audible output (a predetermined output time) of one instance of the 7B reception-after output sound (first reception-after output sound Sα7), which is audibly output across timings tBg2-B3, has finished, a new 7B reception-after output sound (first reception-after output sound Sα7) corresponding to the operation reception will begin output at the timing when the operation reception to the 7B operation unit is first received. At this time, after the audible output (a predetermined output time) of one instance of the 7B reception-after output sound (first reception-after output sound Sα7), which is audibly output across timings tBg2-B3, has finished, there is no need to redo the operation to the 7B operation unit; the 7B operation unit only needs to be maintained in the operating state from timing tBg2-C1 for operation reception to be accepted.

Furthermore, in this example, even if an operation is received by the "7th B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the period after timing tBg2-C2, the "7th B reception display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received by the "7th B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" will not be displayed again. That is, in this case, while the "7th B reception display (one video display)" shown in Figure 177(b) continues to display, the "first reception output sound Sα7" corresponding to the operation received by the "7th B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" will be audibly output again as a 7th B reception change.

Furthermore, in this example, if operation to the 7B operation unit is resumed within the period after timing tBg2-C1, it is assumed that the performance content corresponding to the 7B acceptance state did not progress from the "first stage progression mode" described above. Therefore, if operation to the 7B operation unit is resumed within the period after timing tBg2-C1 within the 7B acceptance state, the 7B acceptance change (7B acceptance display) will be executed in the same manner as when the 7B acceptance change (first acceptance output sound Sα7) was executed based on the operation acceptance to the 7B operation unit at timing tBg2-B2. Details of the performance are as described above, so an explanation will be omitted here.

Furthermore, the performance examples shown in Figures 176 and 177 assume that the player's operation (the operating state of the 7B control unit), which began at timing tBg2-C1, continues even after timing tBg2-C2 arrives (the point at which the conditions for not being able to accept operations from the 7B control unit are met). This assumes that the auto-continuous pressing function remains active until timing tBg2-C2.

Therefore, even during the period from timing tBg2-C1 to timing tBg2-C2 (the period during which the 7B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the 7B operation unit receives multiple requests for operation via the auto-repeated button function, and a post-reception change corresponding to these requests (for example, at least one of the following: post-reception display, post-reception output sound, post-reception illumination, or post-reception mechanism operation) is executed multiple times.

Furthermore, even during the period from timing tBg2-C1 to timing tBg2-C2 (the period during which the 7B operation unit is maintained in the operating state), the manner in which such post-reception changes are executed multiple times by the auto-repeated button function (such as the manner of the first post-reception output sound Sα7b) is the same as in the case of the period from timing tBg2-B2 to timing tBg2-B3, unless further development of the performance content occurs. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

Here, the 7B acceptance state in this example assumes that no special mode (final mode) appears as a post-reception change. Therefore, in the period from timing tBg2-C1 to timing tBg2-C2 in the example shown in Figure 176, the "7B post-reception change (7B post-reception performance)" in response to the operation reception will be executed multiple times in a mode where the performance content progresses only once. When timing tBa2-C2 arrives, this triggers the deactivation of the auto-repeated button function that had been enabled up to that point.

In this regard, when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled at timings tBg2-A2 and tBg2-B3, the post-reception changes, such as the "7th B Reception Display HB7" which was previously displayed, and the first reception output sound Sα7b which was previously output by the auto-repeated button press function, are not terminated prematurely due to the cessation of operation reception. Similarly, when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled at timing tBg2-C2 (when the conditions for the termination of the permissible state are met), as shown in Figures 176(f) and (h), the post-reception changes, such as the "7th B Reception Display HB7" which was previously displayed, and the first reception output sound Sα7b which was previously output by the auto-repeated button press function, are not terminated prematurely due to the cessation of operation reception (they are maintained in their execution state until the remaining execution time is consumed).

With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions for preventing operation of the 7B control unit have been met at timing tBg2-C2 (i.e., that the 7B control unit is no longer receiving operation requests). Therefore, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to maintain the state in which the 7B control unit is being operated.

This example assumes that the player continues the operation of the "7th B operation unit," which started at timing tBg2-C1, from that point onward.

In this regard, in the state where operation acceptance for the 7B control unit is permitted, even after transitioning to a state where operation acceptance for the 7B control unit is not permitted (after timing tBg2-C2), there are cases (and cases where the conditions for the state where operation acceptance for the 7B control unit is permitted) to occur again may be met, even when no operation-related indicators for the 7B control unit are displayed (or when "7B Acceptance Post-Display HB7" is displayed).

Furthermore, regarding whether the conditions for the "state in which operation reception to the 7B operation unit is permitted" are met, and the timing of such a state, after timing tBg2-C2 has arrived and no operation-related indicators for the 7B operation unit are displayed (or while "Display HB7 after 7B reception" is displayed), may be determined based on, for example, operation reception during the period from timing tBg2 to timing tBg2-C2; or based on the results of a performance judgment performed after timing tBg2-C2 has arrived and no operation-related indicators for the 7B operation unit are displayed; or based on the type of pattern of symbol variation or the result of a jackpot judgment. In short, it is sufficient that the conditions for the "state in which operation reception to the 7B operation unit is permitted" may be met after timing tBg2-C2 has arrived and no operation-related indicators for the 7B operation unit are displayed; the method of implementation is not limited.

Alternatively, the 7B acceptance state may be set to a type of acceptance state that re-establishes the "state in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is permitted" at a predetermined timing after timing tBg2-C2 has arrived and no operation-related indication for the 7B operation unit is displayed.

In this example, as shown in Figure 176(b), it is assumed that during the period after timing tBg2-C2 when no operation-related indications for the 7B operation unit are displayed, the "state in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is permitted" occurs again at timing tBg2-C3 (i.e., when the conditions for occurrence are met).

In this regard, in the timing tBg2-C3 of this example, as shown in Figures 176(a) and (b), the operation of the 7B operation unit is properly accepted based on the detection of the operating state of the "7B operation unit" which has been maintained since timing tBg2-C1, with a period in between during which operation acceptance to the 7B operation unit is not permitted (the period from timing tBg2-C2 to timing tBg2-C3). This allows for the commencement of post-acceptance changes corresponding to the accepted operation.

More specifically, if an operation request is received by the "7th B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBg2-C3, this will trigger the "7th B operation change (7th B operation change effect)" corresponding to the operation request, as shown in Figure 176(h), similar to the cases of timings tBg2-B1 and tBg2-C1 described above.

However, as described above, the 7B acceptance state in this example is implemented in such a way that it does not terminate the "previous post-acceptance change" that is in progress and initiate a new post-acceptance change. Therefore, if an operation is received for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing tBg2-C3 within the 7B acceptance state, as shown in Figures 176(f) and (h), the "first post-acceptance output sound Sα7" corresponding to the operation received for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is again audibly output as a 7B post-acceptance change, but the "7B post-acceptance display (one video display)" corresponding to the operation received for the "7B operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is not displayed again.

This example assumes a scenario where, even when the 7B control unit receives another operation request at timing tBg2-C3, the performance content corresponding to the 7B reception acceptance state does not progress. Therefore, the 7B reception change (7B reception output sound) will begin execution in the same manner as when the 7B reception change was first initiated based on the operation request received at timing tBg2-B2. Details of the performance are as described above, so we will omit further explanation here.

In this regard, in the state where operation-related indicators for the 7B operation unit are permitted, if the conditions for the "state where operation reception for the 7B operation unit is permitted" are met again while no operation-related indicators for the 7B operation unit are displayed after timing tBg2-C2 (or while "Display HB7 after 7B reception" is displayed), then the "state where operation reception for the 7B operation unit is permitted" may have its termination conditions met (and may not be met) while "Display HB7 after 7B reception" is displayed.

Furthermore, the "state in which operation acceptance to the 7B operation unit is permitted" that occurs at timing tBg2-C3, and whether its termination condition is met while "HB7 displayed after 7B acceptance" is displayed, as well as the timing of its termination, may be determined, for example, based on operation acceptance during the period from timing tBg2 to timing tBg2-C2, or based on the results of a performance judgment performed within a predetermined period after timing tBg2-C2 (for example, during the period when "HB7 displayed after 7B acceptance" is displayed), or based on the type of pattern variation of the symbol variation, the result of the jackpot judgment, etc. In short, it is sufficient that the "state in which operation acceptance to the 7B operation unit is permitted" that occurs at timing tBg2-C3 may have its termination condition met while "HB7 displayed after 7B acceptance" is displayed, and the method of implementation is not limited.

Alternatively, the 7B reception permission state may be generated as a type of reception permission state in which the "state in which operation reception to the 7B operation unit is permitted" is always generated again at a predetermined timing within the period from timing tBg2-C2 until the timing when "7B reception after display HB7" is hidden, and this generated "state in which operation reception to the 7B operation unit is permitted" is always terminated at a predetermined timing within the period up to timing tBg3.

Furthermore, the examples of presentations shown in Figures 176 and 177 assume that the "state in which operation acceptance for the 7B operation unit is permitted," which began at timing tBg2-C3, continues until timing tBg2-C4, before the timing at which the "HB7 display after 7B acceptance" is hidden, thus fulfilling the termination condition.

In this regard, in timing tBg2-C4, similar to when the auto-repeated button press function is disabled in timing tBg2-C2 as described above, as shown in Figures 176(f) and (h), the post-reception changes such as "7th B reception display HB7," which was previously displayed by the auto-repeated button press function, and the first reception output sound Sα7a, which was previously output by the auto-repeated button press function, are not terminated prematurely when operation reception ceases (they are maintained in their execution state until the remaining execution time is consumed).

With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the conditions for preventing operation of the 7B control unit have been met at timing tBg2-C4 (i.e., that the 7B control unit is no longer receiving operation signals). Therefore, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to maintain the state in which the 7B control unit is being operated.

In this example, after the condition for disallowing operation to the 7B operation unit is met at timing tBg2-C4, the state in which operation to be permitted to the 7B operation unit will not occur again until the timing when the "7B Reception Display HB7" is hidden. Therefore, even if the 7B operation unit remains in operation until the timing when the "7B Reception Display HB7" is hidden, it is impossible for the auto-repeated function to be activated, for operation to be received multiple times, or for post-reception changes in response to operation to be executed multiple times during that period.

However, between timing tBg2-C4 and the time when "HB7 displayed after 7B reception" is hidden, the conditions for "a state in which operation reception to the 7B operation unit is permitted" may be met again (and may not be met). In this case, it goes without saying that, based on the detection of the operation state of the "7B operation unit" maintained from timing tBg2-C1, with multiple periods in between during which operation reception to the 7B operation unit is not permitted, operation reception to the 7B operation unit will be performed again, and the post-reception change (auto-repeated button press function) corresponding to this operation reception will be initiated.

In the example shown in Figure 177, after "Display HB7 after receiving the 7th B request" is displayed at timing tBg2-A1, the display device 1600 does not produce any display changes triggered by the detection of the operation status or non-operation status of the 7th B operation unit. Therefore, each process from timing tBg2-A1 onward is executed while the display shown in Figure 177(b) is displayed.

Furthermore, in order to suitably maintain the performance characteristics of the 7B acceptance state, it is desirable that, if no operation is performed by the player until the timing tBg2-C2 (or timing tBg2-C4) arrives when operation acceptance to the 7B operation unit is no longer permitted, the same post-acceptance changes as when such operation is performed do not occur (the automatic button function is not activated).

Furthermore, timings tBg2-B1 and tBg2-C3 may occur in two ways: either while a display change (7B post-reception display HB7) is displayed in response to an operation received by the 7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001), or after the display change (7B post-reception display HB7) has been hidden. If the timing tBg2-C3 occurs after the display change (7B post-reception display HB7) has been hidden, the display change (7B post-reception display HB7) may reappear, similar to the case of timing tBg2-A1.

Furthermore, timing tBg2-C1 is assumed to occur while "Specific Event 7B (here, the first post-reception output sound Sα7)" is being executed as one of the post-reception changes. That is, as mentioned above, the post-reception display HB7 of 7B cannot be hidden before "Specific Event 7B (here, the first post-reception output sound Sα7)," so the post-reception display HB7 of 7B cannot be hidden at the time timing tBg2-C1 occurs, and therefore, the display change (post-reception display HB7 of 7B) as one of the post-reception changes will not appear at timing tBg2-C1. Also, as mentioned above, the post-reception display HB7 of 7B cannot occur as one of several post-reception changes occurring through the auto-repeated function (it can only appear as one of the first post-reception changes), and therefore will not occur within the valid period after timing tBg2-C1.

However, the 7B Reception Post-Display HB7 may only appear when the 7B operation unit is changed from a non-operated state to an operated state, while the "state in which operation reception to the 7B operation unit is permitted" has already occurred. If such a configuration is adopted, at timing tBg2-C3, the "state in which operation reception to the 7B operation unit is permitted" occurs while the 7B operation unit is already maintained in an operated state. As a result, the above-mentioned post-reception change is executed based on the detection of the previously maintained operated state. Therefore, even if the 7B Reception Post-Display HB7 is hidden when this occurs, the display change (7B Reception Post-Display HB7) as one of the post-reception changes will not appear.

Furthermore, in the 7B reception-accepting state, even if the 7B operation unit is changed from an unoperated state to an operated state while the display change (7B reception-post display HB7) as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception of the 7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) has not appeared, there may be both cases in which the display change (7B reception-post display HB7) occurs as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception of the 7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) (see Figure 176) and cases in which the display change (7B reception-post display HB7) does not occur (see Figure 178). In other words, in this case, as shown in Figure 178 together with Figure 176, even at timing tBg2-A1, there are cases in which a display change (7B reception post-display HB7) occurs as one of the post-reception changes in response to the reception of operation to the 7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) (see Figure 176), and cases in which the display change (7B reception post-display HB7) does not occur (see Figure 178). Note that in the case where "no display change occurs as one of the post-reception changes in response to the reception of operation to the 7B operation unit at timing tBg2-A1" (see Figure 178), all configurations other than the configuration relating to the 7B reception post-display HB7 are the same as in the case described above as an example of "a display change occurs as one of the post-reception changes in response to the reception of operation to the 7B operation unit at timing tBg2-A1" (see Figure 176), so for the sake of explanation, a detailed explanation will be omitted. Furthermore, regarding the implementation method for this configuration, the display change (HB7 displayed after 7B reception) may be triggered (or not triggered) based on the performance judgment when the operation is received, or the display change (HB7 displayed after 7B reception) may be triggered (or not triggered) based on the type of variation pattern or the result of the jackpot judgment, or other methods may be adopted.

Furthermore, in the performance examples shown in Figures 176 and 178, after the state in which "multiple operation requests to the 7th B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) are permitted" occurs at timing tBg2, a display change (7th B operation unit reception display HB7) may occur as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation request to the 7th B operation unit, specifically at timing tBg2-A1, which is the earliest in the time series among the timings in which operation requests to the 7th B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) are received.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned 3B reception-accepting states, 4B reception-accepting states, and 5B reception-accepting states, where the target of operation is considered to be the same, it is possible to ensure that no display change occurs as one of the post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the operation unit. In this case, only events different from the display change (for example, the same event as the 7B specific event) can be executed as post-reception changes.

Furthermore, the 7B reception permission state is not provided as a "type of reception permission state in which the reception permission state can be terminated early based on the fact that an operation has been received," and the state will not be terminated based on an operation received for the "7B operation unit (in this case, the sword ornament 5001)."

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "first B acceptance state" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 164 and 165, etc.). In this regard, Figure 179 is a time chart showing an example of a case where the operation state for the first B operation unit (operation button 410), which was started while the "first B acceptance state" was in effect, continues even after the "first B acceptance state" has ended, and while this operation state continues, an "operation-related display prompting operation to receive multiple operation requests for the operation button 410" is displayed again, and an acceptance state occurs in which the "operation button 410 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)."

In this example, for the sake of explanation, the operation state of the 1B operation unit (operation button 410), which was started when the system was in the "1B reception-accepting state," is described as continuing even after the "1B reception-accepting state" has ended. However, in the examples described below, a reception-accepting state of a different type than the "1B reception-accepting state" may be implemented. In this case, however, a different post-reception change will occur in the reception-accepting state compared to the "1B reception-accepting state."

In other words, as shown in Figure 179, the details of each configuration and presentation during the period from when the operation-related displays (such as the mock image display MG-B1 and the message display MB1) start to be displayed at timing tBa1 until they are hidden at timing tBa3 are as described above, referring to Figures 164 and 165, so we will omit further explanation here.

In this example, the operation state of the "First B operation unit (operation button 410)," which has been maintained since the "First B acceptance state" (here, from timing tBa2-C1), is assumed to continue even after the "First B acceptance state" ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, when the "operation-related display prompting the player to perform multiple operation requests for the operation button 410, which is the target of the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) activation and is the same operation target as the First B acceptance state" is displayed again (and even beyond).

In this example, we assume that the "acceptable reception state" described above (see Figures 166 and 167) occurs while the operation state of the first B operation unit (operation button 410) is being maintained.

In this example, in the pachinko machine 1, from the time tBa3 when the above-mentioned first B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the operation button 410, which is the target of the activation of the auto-rapid-press function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the above-mentioned first B acceptance state, in the second form (such as the "Button Spamming!" message displayed in Figure 167)" will not be displayed.

Therefore, in this example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned second B acceptance-permitted state (valid period) occurs when, based on the arrival of timing tBa5A, which is longer than a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after timing tBa3, when the first B acceptance-permitted state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden (based on the fulfillment of "condition 2B" at timing tBa5A), the above-mentioned second B acceptance-permitted state (valid period) occurs, in which "operation reception to the second B operation section (operation button 410) regarding changes after second B acceptance (such as the second B performance status indication display JB2, the second B rapid-fire display HB2, and the second B post-reception output sounds Sα2, Sβ2, etc.)" is permitted (the situation shown in Figure 167(a)).

In this example, the "second B operation unit" that allows operation acceptance in the second B acceptance-accepting state is set as the same operation means as in the first B acceptance-accepting state, that is, as the "operation button 410" whose operation state has been maintained since the first B acceptance-accepting state was in place. Multiple operation acceptances are permitted during the period before the second B acceptance-accepting state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the second B acceptance permission state occurs, a mock image display MG-B2 that mimics the target of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the second B operation unit), a message display MB2 related to the operation on the target of operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the second B operation unit), and a status indication display JB2 that can suggest the degree of progress of the performance over the entire period after the operation is accepted are displayed when timing tBa4A arrives, which is before the second B acceptance permission state occurs (before operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is permitted) (see Figures 179(b) to (e), etc.). In addition, at timing tBa4A in this example, the audible output of the second B operation-related output sound OB2 that prompts the player to take action is also started. Therefore, during the period from timing tBa4A to tBa5A in this example, even though operation-related displays prompting multiple operation attempts to the operation button 410 (such as the "Button Spamming!" message displayed in Figure 167) are shown, and the second B operation-related output sound OB2 is audibly output, the operation to the operation button 410 will not be judged as a valid operation (operation will not be accepted).

The configuration for this second B acceptance state is as described above with reference to Figures 166 and 167, so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other examples of configurations applicable to the second B acceptance state.

However, in the second B acceptance state shown in Figure 179, at timing tBa 5A, a state occurs where "operation reception is permitted in a way that makes the operation button 410 eligible for activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)." However, in this state, the auto-repeated function (long-press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the first B acceptance state (multiple operation receptions are made, and no changes are executed after multiple receptions). In other words, in this case, unless the operation state of "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the first B acceptance state is released (terminated) (more precisely, unless the operation button 410, which is in an inactive state in the second B acceptance state, is made operational), the auto-repeated function (long-press function) will not be activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410." Therefore, it becomes possible to prompt the player to release (terminate) the operation state of "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the first B acceptance state.

In this case, if the operation state of "operation button 410," which has been maintained since the first B acceptance state, is released (terminated), it goes without saying that by putting "operation button 410" back into operation state in the second B acceptance state shown in Figure 179, operation reception for "operation button 410" will be performed, and consequently, the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) will be activated. The configurations when operation reception is performed in the second B acceptance state have already been described above with reference to Figures 166 and 167, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

Furthermore, even if, while the operation state of "operation button 410" continues from the state of the first B acceptance state, a different operation-related display is shown instead of the operation-related display corresponding to the "second B acceptance state"—that is, an operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the operation button 410, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the first B acceptance state (for example, the operation-related display corresponding to the first B acceptance state (such as the "Press Button Repeatedly!" message shown in Figure 165))—the auto-repeated function (long-press function) may not be activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410" while the operation-related display is shown, unless the operation state of "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the first B acceptance state is released (terminated).

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 179, between the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 1B acceptance state is hidden and the time the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the operation button 410, which is the target of the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 1B acceptance state" is displayed, other acceptance states may occur or end (or may not occur), the variation animation of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the next variation animation of the decorative pattern SZ may begin.

Furthermore, the second B acceptance state is intended to display the post-operation display HB2 when the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state. However, in the example shown in Figure 179, it is desirable that the post-operation display HB2 not be displayed when the second operating means (operation button 410), which was in an operating state when the first B acceptance state was in effect, is changed to a non-operating state when the second B acceptance state is in effect.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 179, even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is set to the operating state after the first B acceptance state has ended and before the second B acceptance state has started, and then the second operating means (operation button 410) is set to the non-operating state during the second B acceptance state, the non-operation display HB2, triggered by the change to the non-operating state, may not be displayed.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that in the first B acceptance state and the sixth B acceptance state, even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to an unoperated state, the "post-operation" display will not be shown as a result.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "second B acceptance state" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 166 and 167, etc.). In this regard, Figure 180 is a time chart showing an example of a case where the operation state for the second B operation unit (operation button 410), which was started while the "second B acceptance state" was in effect, continues even after the "second B acceptance state" has ended, and while this operation state continues, an "operation-related display prompting operation to receive multiple operation requests for the operation button 410" is displayed again, and an acceptance state occurs in which the "operation button 410 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)."

In this example, for the sake of explanation, the operation state of the 2B operation unit (operation button 410), which was started while in the "2B reception-accepting state," is described as continuing even after the "2B reception-accepting state" has ended. However, in the examples described below, a reception-accepting state of a different type may be implemented. In this case, however, a different post-reception change will occur in that reception-accepting state compared to the "2B reception-accepting state."

In other words, as shown in Figure 180, the details of each configuration and presentation during the period from when the operation-related displays (such as the mock image display MG-B2 and the message display MB2) start to be displayed at timing tBb1 until when the operation-related displays (such as the mock image display MG-B2 and the message display MB2) become invisible at timing tBb3 are as described above, referring to Figures 166 and 167, so we will omit the explanation here.

In this example, the operation state of the "2B operation unit (operation button 410)," which has been maintained since the 2B acceptance state (here, from timing tBb2-C1), is assumed to continue even after the player has entered the 2B acceptance state and the corresponding operation-related display has been hidden, and the "operation-related display prompting the player to perform multiple operation requests for the operation button 410, which is the target of the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) activation and is the same operation target as the 2B acceptance state" has been displayed again (and even beyond).

In this example, we assume that the "acceptable reception state" described above (see Figures 164 and 165) occurs while the operation state of the second B operation unit (operation button 410) is being maintained.

In this example, in the pachinko machine 1, from the time tBb3 when the above-mentioned second B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the operation button 410, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the above-mentioned second B acceptance state, in the first form (such as the "Press Button Repeatedly!" message displayed in Figure 165)" will not be displayed.

Therefore, in this example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned first B acceptance permission state (valid period) occurs when, based on the arrival of timing tBb5A, which is longer than a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after timing tBb3, when the second B acceptance permission state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden (based on the fulfillment of "condition 1B" at timing tBb5A), the above-mentioned first B acceptance permission state (valid period) occurs, in which "operation acceptance to the first B operation unit (operation button 410) regarding changes after first B acceptance (such as the first B performance status indication display JB1, the first B rapid-fire display HB1, and the first B post-acceptance output sounds Sα1, Sβ1, etc.)" is permitted (as shown in Figure 165(a)).

In this example, the "first B operation unit" that allows operation acceptance in the first B acceptance acceptance state is set as the same operation means as in the second B acceptance acceptance state, that is, as the "operation button 410" whose operation state has been maintained since the second B acceptance acceptance state was in place, and multiple operation acceptances are permitted until the first B acceptance acceptance state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first B acceptance state occurs, a mock image display MG-B1 that mimics the target of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the first B operation unit), a message display MB1 related to the operation on the target of operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the first B operation unit), and a status indication display JB1 that can suggest the degree of progress of the performance over the entire period after the operation is accepted are displayed when the timing tBb4A arrives, which is before the first B acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is accepted) (see Figures 180(b) to (e), etc.). In addition, at the timing tBb4A in this example, the audible output of the first B operation-related output sound OB1 that prompts the player to take action is also started. Therefore, during the period from timing tBb4A to tBb5A in this example, even though operation-related displays prompting multiple operations to be accepted for the operation button 410 in the first manner (such as the "Press Button Repeatedly!" message displayed in Figure 165), such as the mock image display MG-B1 and the message display MB1, are displayed, and the first B operation-related output sound OB1 is audibly output, the operation to the operation button 410 will not be judged as a valid operation (the operation will not be accepted).

The configuration for this first B acceptance state is as described above with reference to Figures 164 and 165, so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other examples of configurations applicable to the first B acceptance state.

However, in the first B acceptance state shown in Figure 180, although at timing tBa5A, a state occurs where "operation button 410 is accepted in a way that makes it eligible for activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)," in this state, the auto-repeated function (long-press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the second B acceptance state (multiple operation acceptances are not made, and changes are not executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, in this case, unless the operation state of "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the second B acceptance state is released (terminated) (more precisely, unless the operation button 410, which is in an inactive state in the first B acceptance state, is made operational), the auto-repeated function (long-press function) will not be activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410." Therefore, it becomes possible to prompt the player to release (terminus) the operation state of "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the second B acceptance state.

In this case, if the operation state of "operation button 410," which has been maintained since the second B acceptance state, is released (terminated), it goes without saying that by putting "operation button 410" back into operation state in the first B acceptance state shown in Figure 180, operation reception for "operation button 410" will be performed, and consequently, the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) will be activated. The configurations when operation reception is performed in the first B acceptance state have already been described above with reference to Figures 164 and 165, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

Furthermore, even if, while the operation state of "operation button 410" continues from the state of "second B acceptance," a different operation-related display is shown instead of the operation-related display corresponding to the "first B acceptance state." This display, specifically an operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the operation button 410 (which is the target of the auto-repeated function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the second B acceptance state), is displayed (for example, an operation-related display corresponding to the second B acceptance state, such as the "Button spamming!" message shown in Figure 167), the auto-repeated function (long-press function) may not be activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410" while the operation-related display is displayed, unless the operation state of "operation button 410," which has been maintained since the second B acceptance state, is terminated.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 180, between the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 2B acceptance state is hidden and the time the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the operation button 410, which is the target of the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 2B acceptance state" is displayed, other acceptance states may occur or end (or not), the variation animation of the decorative symbol SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the next variation animation of the decorative symbol SZ may begin.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "third B acceptance state" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 168 and 169, etc.). In this regard, Figure 181 is a time chart showing an example of a case where the operation state for the third B operation unit (sword ornament 5001), which was started while the "third B acceptance state" was in effect, continues even after the "third B acceptance state" has ended, and while this operation state continues, an "operation-related display prompting operation to receive multiple operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 (operation-related display corresponding to the fourth B acceptance state)" is displayed again, and an acceptance state occurs in which the "sword ornament 5001 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)."

In other words, as shown in Figure 181, the details of each configuration and presentation during the period from when the operation-related display (such as the mock image display MG-B3 and the message display MB3) starts to be displayed at timing tBc1 until when the operation-related display (such as the mock image display MG-B3 and the message display MB3) becomes invisible at timing tBc3 are basically as described above, referring to Figures 168 and 169, so we will omit the explanation here. For the sake of explanation, this example assumes that the state in which multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted does not recur between timings tBc2-C2 and tBc3. However, even in the above example (see Figures 168 and 169) where the state in which multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted recurs between timings tBc2-C2 and tBc3, a similar configuration may be applied when the following events occur after timing tBc3.

In this example, the operation state of the "Third B Operation Unit (Sword Ornament 5001)," which has been maintained since the Third B Acceptance State (here, from timing tBc2-C1), is assumed to continue even after the Third B Acceptance State ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, when the "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the Fourth B Acceptance State)" is displayed again, prompting the player to perform multiple operation requests to the Sword Ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the Auto Rapid-Fire Function (Long-Press Function) and is the same operation target as in the Third B Acceptance State, in a specific manner (such as the message display "Rapidly Hit the Sword" shown in Figure 171) (and even beyond).

In other words, this example assumes that the "acceptable reception state" described above ("4B acceptable reception state" - see Figures 170 and 171) occurs while the operation state of the 3B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) is being maintained.

Here, when the third B acceptance state in this example ends, unlike the first B and second B acceptance states, where the target of the operation-related display (the target for which the auto-repeated button function is activated) is different from the third B acceptance state, an operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operation requests on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) and is the same target as the third B acceptance state, may be displayed (or not displayed) during the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) elapsed from the timing tBc3 when the operation-related display corresponding to the third B acceptance state is hidden.

For example, the third B acceptance state in this example assumes that the "condition 3B," which allows multiple operation acceptances to the "third B operation unit (sword ornament 5001)," is met while the third B operation-related output sound OB3 (see Figure 181(g)) is being audibly outputted. However, as mentioned above, the audible output of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 may be terminated prematurely at some point within the time range TBc shown in Figure 181(g).

In this regard, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 may be configured such that its audible output is either terminated early or not at any point within the time range TBc shown in Figure 181(g). Furthermore, only when the audible output is terminated early, an operation-related display prompting an operation on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the activation of the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function), in a specific manner (such as the message "Tap the sword rapidly" shown in Figure 171) may be displayed (or not displayed) during the period from the timing tBc3 when the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state is hidden until a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed.

In other words, in this case, if the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is not terminated prematurely and is audible for a predetermined time, then during the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) elapsed from the timing tBc3 when the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance-permitted state is hidden, there will be no display of the "operation-related display prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the activation of the auto-rapid-hit function (long-press function), in a specific manner (such as the message display of "rapidly hit the sword" shown in Figure 171)" (i.e., the 4B acceptance-permitted state will not occur). As a result, the player can recognize that the 4B acceptance-permitted state will not occur until at least a predetermined time has elapsed after the 3B acceptance-permitted state has ended, and can recognize that there is little benefit in maintaining the sword ornament 5001 in an operation state.

In contrast, when the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated prematurely, an operation-related display prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the activation of the auto-repeated button function (long-press function), in a specific manner (such as the message "Repeatedly press the sword" shown in Figure 171) may be displayed during a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) from the timing tBc3 when the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance-permitted state is hidden (the 4B acceptance-permitted state may occur). This allows the player to recognize the possibility of the 4B acceptance-permitted state occurring even before the predetermined time has elapsed, even if the 3B acceptance-permitted state has ended, and to recognize the benefit of maintaining the sword ornament 5001 in an operational state.

Furthermore, if the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated prematurely, it may be necessary to ensure that an operation-related display prompting an operation on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the activation of the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function), is displayed in a specific manner (such as the message "Tap the sword rapidly" shown in Figure 171) during a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) from the timing tBc3 when the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance-accepting state is hidden.

In this example, it is assumed that when timing tBc5A arrives before a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBc3, when the 3B acceptance acceptance state has ended and the corresponding operation-related display has been hidden (based on the fulfillment of "condition 4B" at timing tBc5A), the above-mentioned 4B acceptance acceptance state (valid period) occurs, allowing "operation acceptance for the 4B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) regarding changes after 4B acceptance (such as the 4B performance status indication display JB4, the 4B rapid-fire display HB4, and the 4B post-acceptance output sound Sα4)" (as shown in Figure 171(a)).

In this example, the "fourth B operation unit" that is permitted to accept operations in the fourth B acceptance state is set as the same operation means as in the third B acceptance state, that is, as the "sword ornament 5001" whose operation state has been maintained since the third B acceptance state was in place, and multiple operations are permitted until the fourth B acceptance state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the 4B acceptance state occurs, a imitation image display MG-B4 that imitates the target of the player's operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 4B operation unit), a message display MB4 related to the operation on the target of the operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 4B operation unit), and a status indication display JB4 that can suggest the degree of progress of the performance over the entire period after the operation is accepted are displayed when timing tBc4A arrives, which is before the 4B acceptance state occurs (before the operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted) (see Figures 181(b) to (e), etc.). In addition, at timing tBc4A in this example, the audible output of the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 that prompts the player to take action is also started. Therefore, during the period from timing tBc4A to tBc5A in this example, even though operation-related displays prompting multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001, such as the image display MG-B4 and the message display MB4, are displayed, and the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is audibly output, no operation on the sword ornament 5001 is judged as a valid operation (operation is accepted).

The configuration for this 4B acceptance state is as described above with reference to Figures 170 and 171, so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other examples of configurations applicable to the 4B acceptance state.

In this regard, in the fourth B acceptance state shown in Figure 181, at timing tBc5A, a state occurs in which "operation acceptance is permitted in such a way that the sword ornament 5001 is subject to activation of the auto rapid-fire function (long-press function)." In addition, in this state, the auto rapid-fire function (long-press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" which has been maintained since the third B acceptance state (multiple operation acceptances are made and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, after the 3B acceptance state ends, when an operation-related display (an operation-related display corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) appears that prompts the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as in the 3B acceptance state, unlike the examples shown in Figures 179 and 180, the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) can be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 (because the operation is accepted at timing tBc5A) without releasing (ending) the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 3B acceptance state (more precisely, without re-operating the sword ornament 5001). Therefore, the game can proceed properly simply by continuing the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 3B acceptance state.

In particular, if the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated prematurely at any point within the time range TBc shown in Figure 181(g), there is a possibility (even if the display rate is 100%) that an "operation-related display prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the activation of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function)" in a specific manner (such as the message "Press the sword rapidly" shown in Figure 171) will be displayed relatively quickly from the timing tBc3 when the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance-acceptable state is hidden until a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, it is expected that the user will be encouraged to maintain the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" even after the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance-acceptable state has been hidden.

Furthermore, regarding the configuration when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in the operational state (when the auto-repeated button press function is activated) in the 4B acceptance state, it is as described above with reference to Figures 170 and 171, so the explanation will be omitted here.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 181, between the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state is hidden and the time the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 3B acceptance state" is displayed, other acceptance states may occur or end (or may not occur), the variation animation of the ornament pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the next variation animation of the ornament pattern SZ may begin.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 181, after the 3B acceptance state has ended, when an operation-related display (an operation-related display corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) appears that prompts the user to perform multiple operation requests on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 3B acceptance state, the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) is always activated (multiple operation requests are made and changes are executed after multiple requests) based on the detection of the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 3B acceptance state was in effect, while the operation-related display is displayed. However, instead, after the 3B acceptance state has ended, when an operation-related display (an operation-related display corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) appears that prompts the user to perform multiple operation requests on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 3B acceptance state described above, the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) may be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 3B acceptance state was in effect, while the operation-related display is displayed. In this case, there may be two possibilities: the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) may be activated (multiple operation requests are made and changes are executed after multiple requests), or the activation may not be performed (multiple operation requests are not made, and no changes are executed after multiple requests). In other words, if the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" which has been maintained since the state of acceptance of the 3B input, the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" from the state of acceptance of the 3B input will remain maintained, and the timing will arrive when the "operation-related display" that started to be displayed at timing tBc5A will be hidden, without any operation reception or post-reception changes being executed. Furthermore, a method for realizing the case where the "auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) is not activated (multiple operation receptions are not made, and no post-reception changes are executed)" while the operation-related display is displayed may be to "create a state where operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted while the operation-related display is displayed, but disable the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function)," or it may be to "not allow operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 at all."

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate the "5th B Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 172 and 173, etc.). In this regard, Figure 182 is a time chart showing an example of a case where the operation state for the 5th B operation unit (sword ornament 5001), which was started while the "5th B Acceptance State" was in effect, continues even after the "5th B Acceptance State" has ended, and while this operation state continues, an "operation-related display prompting operation to receive multiple operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 (operation-related display corresponding to the 3rd B Acceptance State)" is displayed again, and an acceptance state occurs in which the "sword ornament 5001 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)."

In other words, as shown in Figure 182, the details of each configuration and presentation during the period from when the operation-related display (such as the mock image display MG-B5 and the message display MB5) is displayed at timing tBe1 until it is hidden at timing tBe3 are basically as described above, referring to Figures 172 and 173, so we will omit the explanation here. For the sake of explanation, this example assumes that the state in which multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted does not recur between timing tBe2-C2 and timing tBe3. However, even in the above example (see Figures 172 and 173) where the state in which multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted recurs between timing tBe2-C2 and timing tBe3, a similar configuration may be applied when the following events occur after timing tBe3.

In this example, the operation state of the "5B operation unit (sword ornament 5001)," which has been maintained since the 5B acceptance state (here, from timing tBe2-C1), is assumed to continue even after the player has entered the 5B acceptance state and the corresponding operation-related display has been hidden, and the operation-related display (the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state) that prompts the player to perform multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as in the 5B acceptance state, is displayed again in a predetermined manner (such as the message display of "repeatedly press the sword" shown in Figure 169) (and even beyond).

In other words, this example assumes that the "acceptable reception state" described above (see Figures 168 and 169) occurs while the operation state of the 5B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) is being maintained.

Here, when the 5B acceptance state in this example ends, unlike the 1B and 2B acceptance states, where the target of the operation-related display (the target for which the auto-repeated button function is activated) is different from the 5B acceptance state, an operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target for activating the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) and is the same target as the 5B acceptance state, may be displayed (or not displayed) during the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) elapsed from the timing tBe3 when the operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state is hidden.

In this example, it is assumed that when timing tBe5A-1 arrives before a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBe3, when the 5B acceptance acceptance state has ended and the corresponding operation-related display has been hidden (based on the fact that "condition 3B" has been met at timing tBe5A-1), the above-mentioned 3B acceptance acceptance state (valid period) occurs in which "operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) regarding changes after 3B acceptance (such as the 3B performance status indication display JB3, the 3B rapid-fire display HB3, and the 3B post-acceptance output sound Sα3)" is permitted (as shown in Figure 169(a)).

In this example, the "third B operation unit" that allows operation reception in the third B reception-permitted state is set as the same operation means as in the fifth B reception-permitted state, that is, as the "sword ornament 5001" whose operation state has been maintained since the fifth B reception-permitted state was in place, and multiple operation receptions are permitted during the period before the third B reception-permitted state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the third B acceptance state occurs, a mock image display MG-B3 that mimics the target of the player's operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the third B operation unit), a message display MB3 related to the operation on the target of the operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the third B operation unit), and a status indication display JB3 that can suggest the degree of progress of the performance over the entire period after the operation is accepted are displayed when timing tBe4A-1 arrives, which is before the third B acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted) (see Figures 182(b) to (e), etc.). In addition, at timing tBe4A-1 in this example, the audible output of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 that prompts the player to take action is also started. Therefore, during the period from timing tBe4A-1 to tBe5A-1 in this example, even though operation-related displays prompting multiple operation requests to be accepted for the sword ornament 5001, such as the image display MG-B3 and message display MB3, are displayed, and the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is audibly output, no operation on the sword ornament 5001 is judged as a valid operation (operation is accepted).

The configuration for this third B acceptance state is as described above with reference to Figures 168 and 169, so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other configurations applicable to the third B acceptance state.

In this regard, in the third B acceptance state shown in Figure 182, at timing tBe 5A-1, a state occurs in which "operation acceptance is permitted in such a way that the sword ornament 5001 is subject to activation of the auto rapid-fire function (long-press function)." In addition, in this state, the auto rapid-fire function (long-press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" which has been maintained since the fifth B acceptance state (multiple operation acceptances are made and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, after the 5B acceptance state ends, when an operation-related display (an operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state) appears that prompts the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as in the 5B acceptance state, unlike the examples shown in Figures 179 and 180, the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) can be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 (because the operation is accepted at timing tBe 5A) without releasing (ending) the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 5B acceptance state (more precisely, without re-operating the sword ornament 5001). Therefore, the game can proceed properly simply by continuing the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 5B acceptance state.

Furthermore, regarding the configuration when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in the operational state (when the auto-repeated button press function is activated) in the 3B acceptance state, it is as described above with reference to Figures 168 and 169, so we will omit the explanation here.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 182, between the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state is hidden and the time the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 5B acceptance state" is displayed, other acceptance states may occur or end (or not), the variation animation of the ornament pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation animation of the next ornament pattern SZ may begin.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 182, after the 5B acceptance state has ended, when an operation-related display (an operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state) appears that prompts the user to perform multiple operation requests on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 5B acceptance state, the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) is always activated (multiple operation requests are made and changes are executed after multiple requests) based on the detection of the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 5B acceptance state was in effect, while the operation-related display is displayed. However, instead, after the 5B acceptance state has ended, when an operation-related display (an operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state) appears that prompts the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 5B acceptance state described above, then, while the operation-related display is displayed, the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) may be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 5B acceptance state was in effect (multiple operations are performed and changes are executed after multiple operations are performed), or the activation may not occur (multiple operations are not performed and no changes are executed after multiple operations are performed). In other words, if the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" which has been maintained since the 5B acceptance state was reached, the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" from the 5B acceptance state will remain maintained, and the timing will arrive when the "operation-related display" that started to be displayed at timing tBe5A-1 will be hidden, without any operation reception or post-reception changes being executed. Furthermore, a method for realizing the configuration in the case where "the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) is not activated (multiple operation receptions are not made, and no post-reception changes are executed)" while the operation-related display is displayed may be to "create a state where operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted while the operation-related display is displayed, but disable the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function)," or it may be to "not allow operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 at all."

As mentioned above, the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 (the operation-related output sound corresponding to the 3B acceptance state) may be terminated prematurely at some point within the time range TBc shown in Figure 168(g).

In this regard, if, before a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed from timing tBe3, when the operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance-allowed state) prompting the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function), to be hidden in a specific manner (such as the "repeatedly strike the sword" message shown in Figure 173), is displayed, the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 at that time may be prevented from being prematurely terminated at any point within the time range TBc shown in Figure 168(g) (corresponding to the example shown in Figure 182).

In contrast, when, after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing tBe3, an operation-related display (an operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state) is displayed prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function), in a predetermined manner (such as the message "repeatedly press the sword" shown in Figure 169), the audible 3B operation-related output sound OB3 may be terminated early at any point within the time range TBc shown in Figure 168(g) (and may not be terminated early).

Figure 183 is a time chart showing an example of a case where the output sound OB3 related to the 3B operation, which started outputting after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing tBe3, terminates its audible output prematurely at any point within the time range TBc shown in Figure 168(g).

The example shown in Figure 183 is basically the same as the example described above with reference to Figure 182, so the explanation of the same configuration will be omitted. However, unlike the example described above with reference to Figure 182, the example shown in Figure 183 assumes that, rather than before a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed from timing tBe3, an operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance-allowed state) prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 5B acceptance-allowed state described above, in a predetermined manner (such as the "repeatedly press the sword" message shown in Figure 169).

More specifically, this assumes that when timing tBe5A-2 arrives after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBe3, when the 5B acceptance acceptance state has ended and the corresponding operation-related display has been hidden (based on the fact that "condition 3B" has been met at timing tBe5A-2), the above-mentioned 3B acceptance acceptance state (valid period) occurs, in which "operation acceptance for the 3B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) regarding changes after 3B acceptance (such as the 3B performance status indication display JB3, the 3B rapid-fire display HB3, and the 3B post-acceptance output sound Sα3)" is permitted (as shown in Figure 169(a)).

In the pachinko machine 1 used in this example, when the third B acceptance state occurs, a mock image display MG-B3 that mimics the target of the player's operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the third B operation unit), a message display MB3 related to the operation on the target of the operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the third B operation unit), and a status indication display JB3 that can suggest the degree of progress of the performance over the entire period after the operation is accepted are displayed when timing tBe4A-2 arrives, which is before the third B acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted) (see Figures 183(b) to (e), etc.). Also, at timing tBe4A-2 in this example, the audible output of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 that prompts the player to take action is also started. Therefore, during the period from timing tBe4A-2 to tBe5A-2 in this example, even though operation-related displays prompting multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001, such as the mock image display MG-B3 and the message display MB3, are displayed, and the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is audibly output, no operation on the sword ornament 5001 is judged as a valid operation (operation is accepted).

The configuration for this third B acceptance state is as described above with reference to Figures 168 and 169, so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other configurations applicable to the third B acceptance state.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 183, between the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state is hidden and the time the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 5B acceptance state" is displayed, other acceptance states may occur or end (or may not occur), the variation animation of the ornament pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the next variation animation of the ornament pattern SZ may begin.

In this regard, when a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBe3, when the operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance-allowed state) that prompts the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function), to be hidden in a special manner (such as the "repeatedly strike the sword" message shown in Figure 173), is displayed, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 that is audibly output at that time may either be terminated early or not at any point within the time range TBc shown in Figure 168(g).

The example shown in Figure 183 is a time chart illustrating the case where the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated prematurely at timing tBe6. However, the timing of the premature termination is not limited to this; it will occur at any timing within the time range TBc shown in Figure 168(g). The configuration for the premature termination of such 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is as described above with reference to Figure 168, so a further explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in the examples in Figures 182 and 183, the timing at which the operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state) that prompts the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function), in a predetermined manner (such as the "repeatedly press the sword" message displayed in Figure 169), is displayed, differs depending on whether this timing is before a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing tBe3, when the operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state) that prompts the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function), in a special manner (such as the "randomly press the sword" message displayed in Figure 173), becomes invisible, or after that predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "first B acceptance state" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 164 and 165, etc.). In this regard, Figure 184 is a time chart showing an example of a case where the operation state for the first B operation unit (operation button 410), which was started while the "first B acceptance state" was in effect, continues even after the "first B acceptance state" has ended, and while the operation state continues, no "operation-related display prompting operation to be accepted multiple times for the operation button 410" is displayed, and an acceptance state occurs where the "operation button 410 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)".

In this example, for the sake of explanation, the operation state of the 1B operation unit (operation button 410), which was started when the system was in the "1B reception-accepting state," is described as continuing even after the "1B reception-accepting state" has ended. However, in the examples described below, a reception-accepting state of a different type than the "1B reception-accepting state" may be implemented. In this case, however, a different post-reception change will occur in the reception-accepting state compared to the "1B reception-accepting state."

In other words, as shown in Figure 184, the details of each configuration and presentation during the period from when the operation-related displays (such as the mock image display MG-B1 and the message display MB1) start to be displayed at timing tBa1 until they are hidden at timing tBa3 are as described above, referring to Figures 164 and 165, so we will omit further explanation here.

In this example, the operation state of the "First B Operation Unit (operation button 410)," which has been maintained since the First B acceptance state (here, from timing tBa2-C1), is assumed to continue even after the First B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, without displaying any operation-related displays prompting the player to perform multiple operation requests to the same operation target, operation button 410, and even after a state occurs where operation requests are accepted in a way that enables the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) (and even beyond).

In this example, we assume that the "acceptable reception state" described above ("6B acceptable reception state" - see Figures 174 and 175) occurs while the operation state of the 1B operation unit (operation button 410) is being maintained.

In this example, it is assumed that, after timing tBa3, when the 1B acceptance acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, timing tBa5B shown in Figure 184 arrives (based on the fulfillment of "condition 6B" at timing tBa5B), the above 6B acceptance acceptance state (valid period) occurs, allowing "operation acceptance for the 6B operation section (operation button 410) regarding changes after 6B acceptance (6B rapid press display HB6, 6B post-acceptance output sounds Sα6, Sβ6, etc.)" (the situation shown in Figure 175(a)).

In this example, the "6B operation unit" that allows operation reception in the 6B reception-permitted state is set as the same operation means as in the 1B reception-permitted state, that is, as the "operation button 410" whose operation state has been maintained since the 1B reception-permitted state was in place. Multiple operation receptions are permitted during the period before the 6B reception-permitted state ends.

However, as mentioned above, in the 6B acceptance state, no operation-related display prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is shown (see Figures 184(b) to (d), etc.). Furthermore, no audible operation-related sound prompting the player to operate is emitted. Therefore, after the 1B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden at timing tBa3, the player will continue playing the game while it is difficult to recognize the occurrence of the 6B acceptance state, even if it occurs.

The configuration for this 6B acceptance state is as described above with reference to Figures 174 and 175, so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other examples of configurations applicable to the 6B acceptance state.

In this regard, in the 6B acceptance state shown in Figure 184 (an acceptance state in which no operation-related indicators are displayed), at timing tBa5B, a state occurs in which "operation reception is permitted in such a way that the operation button 410 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)." However, in this state, the auto-repeated function (long-press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410" which has been maintained since the 1B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which operation-related indicators are displayed) (multiple operation receptions are made, but no changes are executed after multiple receptions). In other words, in this case, unless the operation state of "operation button 410," which has been maintained since the 1B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which operation-related displays are shown), is released (terminated) (more precisely, unless the operation button 410, which is in an unoperated state in the 6B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which operation-related displays are not shown), is changed to an operated state), the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) will not be activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410." Therefore, it can be expected that the gameplay will be suitably maintained even when it is difficult to recognize the 6B acceptance state occurring after timing tBa3.

In this case, if the operation state of "operation button 410," which has been maintained since the 1B acceptance state, is released (terminated), it goes without saying that by putting "operation button 410" back into operation state in the 6B acceptance state shown in Figure 184, operation reception for "operation button 410" will be performed, and consequently, the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) will be activated. The configurations when operation reception is performed in the 6B acceptance state have already been described above with reference to Figures 174 and 175, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 184, between the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 1B acceptance state is hidden and the time the 6B acceptance state occurs, other acceptance states may occur or end (or not occur), and the variation animation of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation animation of the next decorative pattern SZ may begin.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "second B acceptance state" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 166 and 167, etc.). In this regard, Figure 185 is a time chart showing an example of a case where the operation state for the second B operation unit (operation button 410), which was started while the "second B acceptance state" was in effect, continues even after the "second B acceptance state" has ended, and while the operation state continues, no "operation-related display prompting operation to be accepted multiple times for the operation button 410" is displayed, and an acceptance state occurs where the "operation button 410 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)".

In this example, for the sake of explanation, the operation state of the 2B operation unit (operation button 410), which was started while the system was in the "2B reception-accepting state," is described as continuing even after the "2B reception-accepting state" has ended. However, in the examples described below, a reception-accepting state of a different type may be implemented. In this case, however, a different post-reception change will occur in this reception-accepting state compared to the "2B reception-accepting state."

In other words, as shown in Figure 185, the details of each configuration and presentation during the period from when the operation-related displays (such as the mock image display MG-B2 and the message display MB2) start to be displayed at timing tBb1 until when the operation-related displays (such as the mock image display MG-B2 and the message display MB2) become invisible at timing tBb3 are as described above, referring to Figures 166 and 167, and therefore will be omitted here.

In this example, the scenario assumes that the operation state of the "2B operation unit (operation button 410)," which has been maintained since the 2B acceptance state (here, from timing tBb2-C1), continues even after the 2B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, without any operation-related display prompting the player to perform multiple operation requests to the same operation target, operation button 410, and even after the operation button 410 becomes eligible for automatic rapid-fire function (long-press function) activation (and even beyond).

In this example, we assume that the "acceptable reception state" described above ("6B acceptable reception state" - see Figures 174 and 175) occurs while the operation state of the 2B operation unit (operation button 410) is being maintained.

In this example, it is assumed that, after timing tBb3, when the 2B acceptance acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, timing tBb5B shown in Figure 185 arrives (based on the fulfillment of "condition 6B" at timing tBb5B), the above 6B acceptance acceptance state (valid period) occurs, allowing "operation acceptance for the 6B operation section (operation button 410) regarding changes after 6B acceptance (6B rapid-fire display HB6, 6B post-acceptance output sounds Sα6, Sβ6, etc.)" (the situation shown in Figure 175(a)).

In this example, the "6B operation unit" that allows operation reception in the 6B reception-permitted state is set as the same operation means as in the 2B reception-permitted state, namely the "operation button 410" whose operation state has been maintained since the 2B reception-permitted state was in place. Multiple operation receptions are permitted during the period before the 6B reception-permitted state ends.

However, as mentioned above, in the 6B acceptance state, no operation-related display prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is shown when it occurs (see Figures 185(b) to (d), etc.). Furthermore, no audible operation-related sound prompting the player to operate is emitted. Therefore, after the 2B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden at timing tBb3, the player will continue playing the game while it is difficult to recognize the occurrence of the 6B acceptance state, even if it occurs.

The configuration for this 6B acceptance state is as described above with reference to Figures 174 and 175, so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other examples of configurations applicable to the 6B acceptance state.

In this regard, in the 6B acceptance state shown in Figure 185, at timing tBb 5B, a state occurs where "operation reception is permitted in a way that makes the operation button 410 eligible for activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)." However, in this state, the auto-repeated function (long-press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 2B acceptance state (multiple operation receptions are made, and no changes are executed after multiple receptions). That is, in this case, unless the operation state of "operation button 410" that has been maintained since the 2B acceptance state is released (terminated) (more precisely, unless the operation button 410, which is in an inactive state in the 6B acceptance state, is made operational), the auto-repeated function (long-press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410." Therefore, it can be expected that the gameplay, such as "continuing the game even when it is difficult to recognize the 6B acceptance state occurring after timing tBb 3," can be suitably maintained.

In this case, if the operation state of "operation button 410," which has been maintained since the second B acceptance state, is released (terminated), it goes without saying that by putting "operation button 410" back into operation state in the sixth B acceptance state shown in Figure 185, operation reception for "operation button 410" will be performed, and consequently, the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) will be activated. The configurations when operation reception is performed in the sixth B acceptance state have already been described above with reference to Figures 174 and 175, so we will omit further explanation here.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 185, between the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 2B acceptance state is hidden and the time the 6B acceptance state occurs, other acceptance states may occur or end (or not occur), and the variation animation of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the next variation animation of the decorative pattern SZ may begin.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate a "third B acceptance acceptance state" as the acceptance acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 168 and 169, etc.). In this regard, Figure 186 is a time chart showing an example of a case where the operation state for the third B operation unit (sword ornament 5001), which was started while the "third B acceptance acceptance state" was in effect, continues even after the "third B acceptance acceptance state" has ended, and while the operation state continues, no "operation-related display prompting operation to be performed multiple times for the sword ornament 5001" is displayed, and an acceptance acceptance state occurs in which the "sword ornament 5001 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)".

In other words, as shown in Figure 186, the details of each configuration and presentation during the period from when the operation-related display (such as the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3) starts to be displayed at timing tBc1 until when the operation-related display (such as the mock image display MG-B3 and message display MB3) becomes invisible at timing tBc3 are basically as described above, referring to Figures 168 and 169, so we will omit the explanation here. For the sake of explanation, this example assumes that the state in which multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted does not recur between timings tBc2-C2 and tBc3. However, even in the above example (see Figures 168 and 169) where the state in which multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted recurs between timings tBc2-C2 and tBc3, a similar configuration may be applied when the following events occur after timing tBc3.

In this example, the operation state of the "Third B Operation Unit (Sword Ornament 5001)," which has been maintained since the Third B Acceptance State (here, from timing tBc2-C1), is assumed to continue even after the Third B Acceptance State ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden, without displaying any operation-related displays prompting the player to perform multiple operation requests on the same target, the Sword Ornament 5001, and even after the Sword Ornament 5001 becomes eligible for automatic rapid-fire function (long-press function) activation (and even beyond).

In other words, this example assumes that the "reception-permitted state" described above, the "7th B reception-permitted state (see Figures 176-178)," occurs while the operation state of the 3B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) is continuing. More specifically, it assumes that the above-mentioned 7th B reception-permitted state (valid period) occurs when timing tBc5B, shown in Figure 186, arrives after timing tBc3, when the 3B reception-permitted state ends and the corresponding operation-related display is hidden (based on the fact that "condition 7B" is met at timing tBc5B), allowing "operation reception for the 7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) regarding changes after 7B reception (such as the display HB7 after 7B reception, the output sound Sα7 after 7B reception, etc.)" (the situation shown in Figure 177(a)).

In this example, the "7B operation unit" that allows operation reception in the 7B reception-permitted state is set as the same operation means as in the 3B reception-permitted state, that is, as the "sword ornament 5001" whose operation state has been maintained since the 3B reception-permitted state was in place, and multiple operation receptions are permitted during the period until the 7B reception-permitted state ends.

However, as mentioned above, in the 7B acceptance state, no operation-related indicator prompting action on the sword ornament 5001 is displayed when it occurs (see Figures 186(b) to (d), etc.). Furthermore, no audible operation-related sound prompting action is output to the player. Therefore, after the 3B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related indicator is hidden (timing tBc3), the player will proceed with the game while it is difficult to recognize the occurrence of the 7B acceptance state, even if it occurs.

The configuration for this 7B acceptance state is as described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other examples of configurations applicable to the 7B acceptance state.

In this regard, in the 7th B acceptance state shown in Figure 186, at timing tBc5B, a state occurs in which "operation acceptance is permitted in such a way that the sword ornament 5001 is subject to activation of the auto rapid-fire function (long-press function)." In addition, in this state, the auto rapid-fire function (long-press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" which has been maintained since the 3rd B acceptance state (multiple operation acceptances are made and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, after the 3B acceptance state ends, and without displaying any operation-related indicators prompting operation on the same operating means (sword ornament 5001) as in the 3B acceptance state, when a state occurs in which operation acceptance is permitted (7B acceptance state) in which the operating means (sword ornament 5001) is eligible for activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function), unlike the examples shown in Figures 184 and 185, the auto-repeated function (long-press function) can be activated based on the detection of the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" (because operation acceptance occurs at timing tBc5B) without releasing (ending) the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained since the 3B acceptance state (more precisely, without re-operating the sword ornament 5001). Therefore, the game can proceed appropriately simply by continuing the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained since the 3B acceptance state.

Furthermore, regarding the configuration when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in the operating state (when the auto-repeated button press function is activated) in the 7B acceptance state, the details have been described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so we will omit the explanation here.

However, the following relationship may be established between "Operation-related output sound OB3" and "Reception display HB7" shown in Figure 186.

For example, the third B acceptance state in this example assumes that the "condition 3B," which allows multiple operation acceptances to the "third B operation unit (sword ornament 5001)," is met while the third B operation-related output sound OB3 (see Figure 186(g)) is being audibly outputted. However, as mentioned above, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 may either terminate prematurely or not at any point within the time range TBc shown in Figure 186(g).

Furthermore, in the 7B reception-accepting state, when the first operation reception is performed on the sword ornament 5001, "7B reception-post display HB7" may be displayed as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception. As mentioned above, "7B reception-post display HB7" may be displayed based on the first operation reception (see Figure 176(f)) or not displayed (see Figure 178(f)).

In this regard, if the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated prematurely, the "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" may be displayed as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception of the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBc5B, only if a time longer than the special time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBc3 before timing tBc5B (the timing when "Condition 7B" is satisfied). Conversely, if the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is not terminated prematurely, the "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" may be displayed as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception of the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBc5B, even if a time longer than the special time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBc3 before timing tBc5B (the timing when "Condition 7B" is satisfied).

With this configuration, the possibility of displaying "7th B Acceptance Display HB7" at timing tBc5B (the possibility that the 7th B acceptance-acceptance state has secretly occurred, making it easy to recognize that the operation acceptance was properly performed) will differ depending on whether the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is terminated early or not. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be favorably maintained.

Furthermore, if the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 terminates prematurely, and timing tBc5B (the timing when "Condition 7B" is satisfied) arrives after a time longer than the special time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBc3, then as one of the post-reception changes in response to operation reception at timing tBc5B, there may be cases where "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" is displayed and cases where it is not displayed. Such a configuration is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension. However, if the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 terminates prematurely, and timing tBc5B (the timing when "Condition 7B" is satisfied) arrives before a time longer than the special time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBc3, then it goes without saying that "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" will not be displayed as one of the post-reception changes in response to operation reception at timing tBc5B.

Furthermore, if the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is not terminated prematurely, the "7B Reception Display HB7" may be displayed as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception of the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBc5B, regardless of whether timing tBc5B (the timing when "Condition 7B" is satisfied) arrives after a time longer than the special time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBc3, or before the special time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since timing tBc3. However, in either case, the "7B Reception Display HB7" may be displayed as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception at timing tBc5B, or it may not be displayed. Such a configuration is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

In the example shown in Figure 186, between the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 3B acceptance state is hidden and the time the 7B acceptance state occurs, other acceptance states may occur or end (or not occur), and the variation animation of the decorative symbol SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the next variation animation of the decorative symbol SZ may begin.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 186, after the 3B acceptance state has ended, it is assumed that a state occurs where the sword ornament 5001, which is the same operation target as in the 3B acceptance state, is allowed to accept operation without any operation-related display prompting the user to accept operation multiple times. In this case, the sword ornament 5001 becomes eligible for activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function). However, if the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained from the 3B acceptance state until this state occurs, the auto-repeated function (long-press function) will always be activated based on this detection (multiple operation acceptances will occur, and changes will be executed after multiple acceptances).

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate the "5th B Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 172 and 173, etc.). In this regard, Figure 187 is a time chart showing an example of a case where the operation state for the 5th B operation unit (sword ornament 5001), which was started while the "5th B Acceptance State" was in effect, continues even after the "5th B Acceptance State" has ended, and while the operation state continues, no "operation-related display prompting operation to be performed multiple times for the sword ornament 5001" is displayed, and an acceptance state occurs in which the "sword ornament 5001 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)".

In other words, as shown in Figure 187, the details of each configuration and presentation during the period from when the operation-related display (such as the mock image display MG-B5 and the message display MB5) is displayed at timing tBe1 until it is hidden at timing tBe3 are basically as described above, referring to Figures 172 and 173, so we will omit the explanation here. For the sake of explanation, this example assumes that the state in which multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted does not recur between timing tBe2-C2 and timing tBe3. However, even in the above example (see Figures 172 and 173) where the state in which multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted recurs between timing tBe2-C2 and timing tBe3, a similar configuration may be applied when the following events occur after timing tBe3.

In this example, the operation state of the "5B operation unit (sword ornament 5001)," which has been maintained since the 5B acceptance state (here, from timing tBe2-C1), is assumed to continue even after the player has entered the 5B acceptance state and the corresponding operation-related display has been hidden, without displaying any operation-related displays prompting the player to perform multiple operation requests on the same sword ornament 5001 that is the target of the 5B acceptance state, and even after the sword ornament 5001 becomes eligible for automatic rapid-fire function (long-press function) activation, thus allowing operation requests (and even beyond).

In other words, this example assumes that the "reception-permitted state" described above, the "7B reception-permitted state (see Figures 176-178)," occurs while the operation state of the 5B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) is continuing. More specifically, it assumes that the above-mentioned 7B reception-permitted state (valid period) occurs when timing tBe5B, shown in Figure 187, arrives (based on the "condition 7B" being met at timing tBe5B), allowing "operation reception for the 7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) regarding changes after 7B reception (such as the display HB7 after 7B reception, or the output sound Sα7 after 7B reception)" (as shown in Figure 177(a)).

In this example, the "7B operation unit" that allows operation reception in the 7B reception-permitted state is set as the same operation means as in the 5B reception-permitted state, that is, as the "sword ornament 5001" whose operation state has been maintained since the 5B reception-permitted state was in place, and multiple operation receptions are permitted during the period until the 7B reception-permitted state ends.

However, as mentioned above, in the 7B acceptance state, no operation-related indicator prompting action on the sword ornament 5001 is displayed when it occurs (see Figures 187(b) to (d), etc.). Furthermore, no audible operation-related sound prompting action is output to the player. Therefore, after the 5B acceptance state ends and the corresponding operation-related indicator is hidden at timing tBe3, the player will continue playing the game while it is difficult to recognize the occurrence of the 7B acceptance state, even if it occurs.

The configuration for this 7B acceptance state is as described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other examples of configurations applicable to the 7B acceptance state.

In this regard, in the 7th B acceptance state shown in Figure 187, at timing tBe5B, a state occurs in which "operation acceptance is permitted in such a way that the sword ornament 5001 is subject to activation of the auto rapid-fire function (long-press function)." In addition, in this state, the auto rapid-fire function (long-press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" which has been maintained since the 5th B acceptance state (multiple operation acceptances are made and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, after the 5B acceptance state ends, and without displaying any operation-related indicators prompting operation on the same operating means (sword ornament 5001) as in the 5B acceptance state, when a state occurs in which operation acceptance is permitted (7B acceptance state) in which the operating means (sword ornament 5001) is eligible for activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function), unlike the examples shown in Figures 184 and 185, the auto-repeated function (long-press function) can be activated based on the detection of the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" (because operation acceptance occurs at timing tBe5B), without releasing (ending) the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained since the 5B acceptance state (more precisely, without re-operating the sword ornament 5001). Therefore, the game can proceed appropriately simply by continuing the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained since the 5B acceptance state.

Furthermore, regarding the configuration when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in the operating state (when the auto-repeated button press function is activated) in the 7B acceptance state, the details have been described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so we will omit the explanation here.

Furthermore, in the 7B reception-accepting state shown in the example in Figure 187, when the first operation reception is performed on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBe 5B, "7B Reception Post-Display HB7" may be displayed as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception. As mentioned above, "7B Reception Post-Display HB7" may be displayed based on the first operation reception (see Figure 176(f)) or not displayed (see Figure 178(f)).

In the example shown in Figure 187, between the time the operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state is hidden and the time the 7B acceptance state occurs, other acceptance states may occur or end (or not occur), and the variation animation of the decorative symbol SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the next variation animation of the decorative symbol SZ may begin.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 187, after the 5B acceptance state has ended, it is assumed that a state occurs where the sword ornament 5001, which is the same target of operation as in the 5B acceptance state, becomes eligible for operation acceptance in a way that enables the auto-repeated function (long-press function), without any operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operation requests. However, if the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained from the 5B acceptance state until this state occurs, the auto-repeated function (long-press function) will always be activated based on this detection (multiple operation requests will be made, and changes will be executed after multiple requests).

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate the "6th B Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 174 and 175, etc.). In this regard, Figure 188 is a time chart showing an example of a case where the operation state for the 6th B operation unit (operation button 410), which was started while the "6th B Acceptance State" was in effect, continues even after the "6th B Acceptance State" ends, and while this operation state continues, an "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operation requests to the operation button 410" is displayed, and an acceptance state occurs where the "operation button 410 is eligible for activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)."

In other words, as shown in Figure 188, the "6B Acceptance State" is a state in which no operation-related displays (such as mock image displays or message displays) are shown. Details of the various configurations and effects during the period from when the state allowing operation of the operation button 410 occurs (timing tBf2) until it ends (timing tBf2-C2) are as described above, referring to Figures 174 and 175; therefore, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In this example, the scenario assumes that the operation state of the "6B operation unit (operation button 410)," which has been maintained since the 6B acceptance state (here, from timing tBf2-C1), continues even after the 6B acceptance state ends, when the "operation-related display prompting the player to perform multiple operations on the operation button 410, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 6B acceptance state" is displayed (and even beyond).

In this example, we assume that the "reception-accepting state" described above, the "first B reception-accepting state (see Figures 164 and 165)," occurs while the operation state of the operation button 410 is being maintained. More specifically, we assume that when timing tBf4A, shown in Figure 188, arrives after timing tBf2-C2, when the sixth B reception-accepting state has ended (based on the fulfillment of "condition 1B" at timing tBf4A), the above-mentioned first B reception-accepting state (valid period) occurs, allowing "operation reception to the first B operation unit (operation button 410) regarding changes after first B reception (such as the first B performance status indication display JB1, the first B rapid-fire display HB1, and the first B post-reception output sounds Sα1, Sβ1, etc.)" (the situation shown in Figure 165(a)).

In this example, the "first B operation unit" that allows operation reception in the first B reception-permitted state is set as the same operation means as in the sixth B reception-permitted state, that is, as the "operation button 410" whose operation state has been maintained since the sixth B reception-permitted state was in place, and multiple operation receptions are permitted until the first B reception-permitted state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first B acceptance state occurs, a mock image display MG-B1 that mimics the target of operation by the player (here, the "operation button 410" as the first B operation unit), a message display MB1 related to the operation on the target of operation (here, the "operation button 410" as the first B operation unit), and a status indication display JB1 that can suggest the degree of progress of the performance over the entire period after the operation is accepted are displayed when the timing tBf3A arrives, which is before the first B acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is accepted) (see Figures 188(b) to (e), etc.). In addition, at the timing tBf3A in this example, the audible output of the first B operation-related output sound OB1 that prompts the player to take action is also started. Therefore, during the period from timing tBf4A to tBf5A in this example, even though operation-related displays prompting multiple operations to be accepted for the operation button 410 (such as the "Press Button Repeatedly!" message displayed in Figure 165) are shown, and the first B operation-related output sound OB1 is audibly output, the operation to the operation button 410 will not be judged as a valid operation (operation will not be accepted).

The configuration for this first B acceptance state is as described above with reference to Figures 164 and 165, so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other examples of configurations applicable to the first B acceptance state.

However, in the first B acceptance state shown in Figure 188 (an acceptance state in which operation-related displays are shown), at timing tBf4A, a state occurs in which "operation reception is permitted in such a way that operation button 410 is targeted for activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)." However, in this state, the auto-repeated function (long-press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410" which has been maintained since the sixth B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which operation-related displays are not shown) (multiple operation receptions are made, and changes are not executed after multiple receptions). In other words, in this case, unless the operation state of "operation button 410," which has been maintained since the 6B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which no operation-related indicators are displayed), is released (or more precisely, unless the operation button 410, which is in an inactive state in the 1B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which operation-related indicators are displayed), is set to an operational state, the auto-repeated button-pressing function (long-press function) will not be activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410." Therefore, it becomes possible to prompt the player to release (end) the operation state of "operation button 410," which has been maintained since the 6B acceptance state.

In this case, if the operation state of "operation button 410," which has been maintained since the 6B acceptance state, is released (terminated), it goes without saying that by putting "operation button 410" back into operation state in the 1B acceptance state shown in Figure 188, operation reception for "operation button 410" will be performed, and consequently, the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) will be activated. The configurations when operation reception is performed in the 1B acceptance state have already been described above with reference to Figures 164 and 165, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

Furthermore, even if, while the operation state of "operation button 410" continues from the state of "6B acceptance," a different operation-related display is shown instead of the operation-related display corresponding to "1B acceptance state." This display, specifically an operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the operation button 410 (which is the target of the auto-repeated function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 6B acceptance state described above) (for example, an operation-related display corresponding to the 2B acceptance state (such as the "Button spamming!" message shown in Figure 167)), the auto-repeated function (long-press function) may not be activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410" while the operation-related display is displayed, unless the operation state of "operation button 410," which has been maintained since the state of "6B acceptance state," is terminated.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 188, between the end of the 6B acceptance state and the display of the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the operation button 410, which is the target of the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) activation and is the same operation target as the 6B acceptance state," other acceptance states may occur or end (or may not occur), the variation animation of the decorative symbol SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the next variation animation of the decorative symbol SZ may begin.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate the "7th B Acceptance Allowed State" as the acceptance allowance period (operation allowable state) (see Figures 176 and 177, etc.). In this regard, Figure 189 is a time chart showing an example of a case where the operation state for the 7th B operation unit (sword ornament 5001), which was started while the "7th B Acceptance Allowed State" was in effect, continues even after the "7th B Acceptance Allowed State" has ended, and while the operation state continues, an "operation-related display prompting operation to be performed multiple times for the sword ornament 5001" is displayed, and an acceptance allowable state occurs in which the "sword ornament 5001 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)."

In other words, as shown in Figure 189, the "7th B Acceptance State" is a state in which no operation-related displays (such as mock image displays or message displays) are shown. Details of each configuration and presentation during the period from when the state in which operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted occurs (timing tBg2) until it ends (timing tBg2-C2) are as described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so we will omit the explanation here. For the sake of explanation, in this example, it is assumed that the state in which operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted multiple times does not occur again between timing tBg2-C2 and timing tBg2-C4. However, even in the above-mentioned example (see Figures 176-178) where multiple operation requests to the blade ornament 5001 are permitted between timing tBg2-C2 and timing tBg2-C4, the same configuration can be applied when the following events occur after timing tBg3A while the operation state to the blade ornament 5001 is maintained. Furthermore, the example shown in Figure 189 assumes that the "7th B Reception Display HB7" corresponding to the operation request is not displayed at timing tBg2-A1, etc. (corresponding to the case in Figure 178). However, as mentioned above, there are also cases where the 7th B Reception Display HB7 is displayed (corresponding to the case in Figure 176), and in this case as well, the configuration described below will appear.

In this example, the scenario assumes that the operation state of the "7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001)," which has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (here, from timing tBg2-C1), continues even after the 7B acceptance state ends, when the player prompts for multiple operation requests to be made to the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state, in a specific manner (such as the message display "Press the sword rapidly" shown in Figure 171) (an operation-related display corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) is displayed again (and even beyond).

In other words, this example assumes that the "reception-permitted state" described above, the "4th B reception-permitted state (see Figures 170 and 171)," occurs while the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 continues. More specifically, it assumes that when timing tBg4A, shown in Figure 189, arrives after timing tBg2-C2, when the 7th B reception-permitted state has ended (based on the fulfillment of "condition 4B" at timing tBg4A), the above-mentioned 4th B reception-permitted state (valid period) occurs, allowing "reception of operations to the 4th B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) regarding changes after 4th B reception (such as the 4th B performance status indication display JB4, the 4th B rapid-fire display HB4, and the 4th B post-reception output sound Sα4)" (the situation shown in Figure 171(a)).

In this example, the "4B operation unit" that allows operation reception in the 4B reception-permitted state is set as the same operation means as in the 7B reception-permitted state, that is, as the "sword ornament 5001" whose operation state has been maintained since the 7B reception-permitted state was in place, and multiple operation receptions are permitted during the period before the 4B reception-permitted state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the 4B acceptance-permitted state occurs, a imitation image display MG-B4 that imitates the target of the player's operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 4B operation unit), a message display MB4 related to the operation on the target of the operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 4B operation unit), and a status indication display JB4 that can suggest the degree of progress of the performance over the entire period after the operation is accepted are displayed when timing tBg3A arrives, which is before the 4B acceptance-permitted state occurs (before the operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted) (see Figures 189(b) to (e), etc.). In addition, at timing tBg3A in this example, the audible output of the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 that prompts the player to take action is also started. Therefore, during the period from timing tBg3A to tBg4A in this example, even though operation-related displays prompting multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001, such as the image display MG-B4 and the message display MB4, are displayed, and the 4B operation-related output sound OB4 is audibly output, no operation on the sword ornament 5001 is judged as a valid operation (operation is not accepted).

The configuration for this 4B acceptance state is as described above with reference to Figures 170 and 171, so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other examples of configurations applicable to the 4B acceptance state.

In this regard, in the fourth B acceptance state shown in Figure 189, at timing tBg4A, a state occurs in which "operation acceptance is permitted in such a way that the sword ornament 5001 is subject to activation of the auto rapid-fire function (long-press function)." In addition, in this state, the auto rapid-fire function (long-press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" which has been maintained since the seventh B acceptance state (multiple operation acceptances are made and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, after the 7B acceptance state ends, when an operation-related display (an operation-related display corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) appears that prompts the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as in the 7B acceptance state, unlike the example shown in Figure 188, the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) can be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 (because the operation is accepted at timing tBg4A) without releasing (ending) the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (the acceptance state in which the operation-related display is not displayed) (more precisely, without re-operating the sword ornament 5001). Therefore, the game can proceed appropriately simply by continuing the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state.

Furthermore, regarding the configuration when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in the operational state (when the auto-repeated button press function is activated) in the 4B acceptance state, it is as described above with reference to Figures 170 and 171, so we will omit the explanation here.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 189, between the end of the 7B acceptance state and the display of the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state," other acceptance states may occur or end (or may not occur), the variation animation of the ornament pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation animation of the next ornament pattern SZ may begin.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 189, after the 7B acceptance state has ended, when an operation-related display (an operation-related display corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) appears that prompts the user to perform multiple operation requests on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state, the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) is always activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which no operation-related display is shown) (multiple operation requests are made and changes are executed after multiple requests). However, instead, after the 7B acceptance state has ended, when an operation-related display (an operation-related display corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) appears that prompts the user to perform multiple operation requests on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state described above, there may be two cases in which the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) is activated (multiple operation requests are made and changes are executed after multiple requests), or the activation is not performed (multiple operation requests are not made and no changes are executed after multiple requests). In other words, if the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" which has been maintained since the state of acceptance of 7B, the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" from the state of acceptance of 7B will remain maintained, and the timing will arrive when the "operation-related display" that started to be displayed at timing tBg4A will be hidden, without any operation reception or post-reception changes being executed. Furthermore, a method for realizing the case where the "auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) is not activated (multiple operation receptions are not made, and no post-reception changes are executed)" while the operation-related display is displayed may be to "create a state where operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted while the operation-related display is displayed, but disable the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function)," or it may be to "not allow operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 at all."

Figure 189 illustrates the case where the "reception-accepting state" described above, "the 4th B reception-accepting state (see Figures 170 and 171)," occurs while the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 continues from the 7th B reception-accepting state. However, the "reception-accepting state" that occurs while the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 continues from the 7th B reception-accepting state is not limited to the "4th B reception-accepting state (see Figures 170 and 171)" described above; for example, the "5th B reception-accepting state (see Figures 172 and 173)" described above may also occur.

Figure 190 illustrates a scenario where, after timing tBg2-C2, when the 7B acceptance acceptance state has ended, timing tBg4B arrives (based on the fulfillment of "Condition 5B" at timing tBg4B), the above-mentioned 5B acceptance acceptance state (valid period) occurs, allowing for "reception of operations to the 5B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) regarding changes after 5B acceptance (such as the 5B performance status indication display JB5, the 5B rapid-fire display HB5, and the 5B post-acceptance output sound Sα5)" (as shown in Figure 173(a)).

In other words, as described above, the "7B Acceptance State" is one in which no operation-related displays (such as mock image displays or message displays) are shown. Details of each configuration and presentation during the period from when the state in which operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted occurs (timing tBg2) until it ends (timing tBg2-C2) are as described above, referring to Figures 176 to 178, so we will omit the explanation here. For the sake of explanation, in this example, it is assumed that the state in which operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted multiple times does not occur again between timing tBg2-C2 and timing tBg2-C4. However, even in the above-mentioned example (see Figures 176-178) where multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted between timing tBg2-C2 and timing tBg2-C4, the same configuration can be applied when the following events occur after timing tBg3A while the operation state to the sword ornament 5001 is maintained. Furthermore, the example shown in Figure 190 assumes that the "7th B Reception Display HB7" corresponding to the operation request is not displayed at timing tBg2-A1, etc. (corresponding to the case in Figure 178). However, as mentioned above, there are also cases where the 7th B Reception Display HB7 is displayed (corresponding to the case in Figure 176), and in this case as well, the configuration described below will appear.

In this example, the scenario assumes that the operation state of the "7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001)," which has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (here, from timing tBg2-C1), continues even after the 7B acceptance state has ended, when the "operation-related display (operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state)" is displayed again, prompting the player to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state described above (such as the "repeatedly strike the sword" message shown in Figure 173).

In other words, this example assumes that the "reception-permitted state" described above, the "5th B reception-permitted state (see Figures 172 and 173)," occurs while the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 continues. More specifically, it assumes that when timing tBg4B shown in Figure 190 arrives after timing tBg2-C2, when the 7th B reception-permitted state has ended (based on the fulfillment of "condition 5B" at timing tBg4B), the above-mentioned 5th B reception-permitted state (valid period) occurs, in which "reception of operation to the 5th B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) regarding changes after 5B reception (such as the 5th B performance status indication display JB5, the 5th B rapid-fire display HB5, and the 5th B post-reception output sound Sα5)" is permitted (the situation shown in Figure 173(a)).

In this example, the "5B operation unit" that allows operation reception in the 5B reception-permitted state is set as the same operation means as in the 7B reception-permitted state, that is, as the "sword ornament 5001" whose operation state has been maintained since the 7B reception-permitted state was in place, and multiple operation receptions are permitted until the 5B reception-permitted state ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the 5B acceptance state occurs, a imitation image display MG-B5 that imitates the target of operation by the player (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 5B operation unit), a message display MB5 related to the operation on the target of operation (here, the "sword ornament 5001" as the 5B operation unit), and a status indication display JB5 that can suggest the degree of progress of the performance over the entire period after the operation is accepted are displayed when timing tBg3B arrives, which is before the 5B acceptance state occurs (before operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted) (see Figures 190(b) to (e), etc.). Therefore, during the period from timing tBg3B to tBg4B in this example, even though operation-related displays prompting multiple operation requests for the sword ornament 5001, such as the image display MG-B4 and the message display MB4, are displayed, no operation on the sword ornament 5001 is judged as a valid operation (operation is not accepted).

The configuration for this 5B acceptance state is as described above with reference to Figures 172 and 173, so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other examples of configurations applicable to the 5B acceptance state.

In this regard, in the fifth B acceptance state shown in Figure 190, at timing tBg4B, a state occurs in which "operation acceptance is permitted in such a way that the sword ornament 5001 is subject to activation of the auto rapid-fire function (long-press function)." In addition, in this state, the auto rapid-fire function (long-press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" which has been maintained since the seventh B acceptance state (multiple operation acceptances are made and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, after the 7B acceptance state ends, when an operation-related display (an operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state) appears that prompts the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as in the 7B acceptance state, unlike the example shown in Figure 188, the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) can be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 (because the operation is accepted at timing tBg4B) without releasing (ending) the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (the acceptance state in which the operation-related display is not shown) (more precisely, without re-operating the sword ornament 5001). Therefore, the game can proceed properly simply by continuing the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state.

Furthermore, regarding the configuration when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in the operational state (when the auto-repeated button press function is activated) in the 5B acceptance state, it is as described above with reference to Figures 172 and 173, so the explanation will be omitted here.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 190, between the end of the 7B acceptance state and the display of the "operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state," other acceptance states may occur or end (or may not occur), the variation animation of the ornament pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the variation animation of the next ornament pattern SZ may begin.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 190, after the 7B acceptance state has ended, when an operation-related display (an operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state) appears that prompts the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state described above, the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) is always activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which no operation-related display is shown) (multiple operations are performed and changes are executed after multiple operations are performed). However, instead, after the 7B acceptance state has ended, if an operation-related display (an operation-related display corresponding to the 5B acceptance state) appears that prompts the user to perform multiple operations on the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) and is the same operation target as the 7B acceptance state described above, then the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) may be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 that has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (an acceptance state in which the operation-related display is not shown), and there may be two cases in which the activation is not performed (no multiple operations are performed, and no changes are performed after multiple operations). In other words, if the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" which has been maintained since the state of acceptance of input in step 7B, the operating state of the "sword ornament 5001" from the state of acceptance of input in step 7B will remain maintained, and the timing will arrive when the "operation-related display" that started to be displayed at timing tBg4B will be hidden, without any operation reception or post-reception changes being executed. Furthermore, a method for realizing the case where the "auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function) is not activated (multiple operation receptions are not made, and no post-reception changes are executed)" while the operation-related display is displayed may be to "create a state where operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted while the operation-related display is displayed, but disable the auto-repeated tapping function (long-press function)," or it may be to "not allow operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 at all."

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate the "6th B Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 174 and 175, etc.). In this regard, Figure 191 is a time chart showing an example of a case where the operation state for the 6th B operation unit (operation button 410), which was started while the "6th B Acceptance State" was in effect, continues even after the "6th B Acceptance State" has ended, and while the operation state continues, no "operation-related display prompting operation to be accepted multiple times for the operation button 410" is displayed, and an acceptance acceptance state occurs where the "operation button 410 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)".

In other words, as shown in Figure 188, the "6B Acceptance State" is a state in which no operation-related displays (such as mock image displays or message displays) are shown. Details of the various configurations and effects during the period from when the state allowing operation of the operation button 410 occurs (timing tBf2) until it ends (timing tBf2-C2) are as described above, referring to Figures 174 and 175; therefore, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In this example, the scenario assumes that the operation state of the "6B operation unit (operation button 410)," which has been maintained since the 6B acceptance state (here, from timing tBf2-C1), continues even after the 6B acceptance state ends, without any operation-related displays prompting the player to perform multiple operations on the same operation target, operation button 410, and even after the operation button 410 becomes eligible for automatic rapid-fire function (long-press function) activation, thus allowing operation (and even beyond).

In this example, we assume that the "acceptable reception state" that occurs while the operation state of the operation button 410 is being maintained is the aforementioned "6B acceptance reception state (see Figures 174 and 175)" occurring again. More specifically, we assume that when timing tBf4B shown in Figure 191 arrives after timing tBf2-C2, when the 6B acceptance reception state has ended (based on the fact that "condition 6B" is met at timing tBf4B), the above 6B acceptance reception state (valid period) that allows "operation reception to the 6B operation unit (operation button 410) regarding changes after 6B reception (6B rapid press display HB6, 6B post-reception output sounds Sα6, Sβ6, etc.)" occurs again (the situation shown in Figure 165(a)).

Furthermore, the acceptance state that occurs at timing tBf4B is sufficient if it is a state in which operation acceptance is permitted in a way that enables the auto-repeated function (long-press function) of the operation button 410, which is the same operation target as the 6B acceptance state, without displaying an operation-related indicator prompting the user to accept multiple operations. It does not necessarily have to be the 6B acceptance state. If a different type of acceptance state occurs than the 6B acceptance state, a different change will appear as a post-acceptance change, but the following configurations are similarly applicable.

As described above, in the 6B acceptance state, no operation-related display prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is shown (see Figures 191(b) to (d), etc.). Furthermore, no audible operation-related output sound prompting the player to operate is emitted. Therefore, after the timing tBf2-C2, when the 6B acceptance state ends, the player will continue playing the game without being able to recognize if the 6B acceptance state occurs again.

The configuration for this 6B acceptance state is as described above with reference to Figures 174 and 175, so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other examples of configurations applicable to the 6B acceptance state.

In this regard, in the example shown in Figure 191, at timing tBf4B, the state in which "operation acceptance is permitted in such a way that operation button 410 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)" (6th B acceptance state) occurs again. However, in this state, the auto-repeated function (long-press function) is not activated based on the detection of the operation state of "operation button 410" which has been maintained since before timing tBf2-C2 (multiple operation acceptances are made, but no changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, in this case, unless the operation state of the "operation button 410," which has been maintained since the 6th B acceptance-permitted state (an acceptable state in which no operation-related indicators are displayed) occurred at timing tBf2, is released (or more precisely, unless the operation button 410, which is in an unoperated state in the newly occurring 6th B acceptance-permitted state (an acceptable state in which no operation-related indicators are displayed), is set to an operated state, the auto-repeated button-pressing function (long-press function) will not be activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "operation button 410." Therefore, it can be expected that the gameplay will be suitably maintained even when it is difficult to recognize the occurrence of the 6th B acceptance-permitted state after timing tBf2-C2.

In this case, if the operation state of "operation button 410," which has been maintained since the 6B acceptance state occurred at timing tBf2, is released (terminated), then, by re-entering the operation state of "operation button 410" in the 6B acceptance state that occurs again at timing tBf4B, operation reception for "operation button 410" will be performed, and consequently, the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) will be activated. The configurations when operation reception occurs in the 6B acceptance state have already been described above with reference to Figures 174 and 175, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 191, between the end of the 6B acceptance state and the recurrence of the state where "operation acceptance is permitted in a way that enables the auto-repeated press function (long-press function) of the operation button 410, which is the same operation target as the 6B acceptance state, without any operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operation acceptances," other acceptance states may occur or end (or not), and the variation animation of the decorative pattern SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the next variation animation of the decorative pattern SZ may begin.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment can generate the "7th B Acceptance State" as the acceptance period (operation acceptance state) (see Figures 176 to 178, etc.). In this regard, Figure 192 is a time chart showing an example of a case where the operation state for the 7th B operation unit (sword ornament 5001), which was started while the "7th B Acceptance State" was in effect, continues even after the "7th B Acceptance State" has ended, and while the operation state continues, no "operation-related display prompting operation to be performed multiple times for the sword ornament 5001" is displayed, and an acceptance state occurs in which the "sword ornament 5001 is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)".

In other words, as shown in Figure 192, the "7th B Acceptance State" is a state in which no operation-related displays (such as mock image displays or message displays) are shown. Details of each configuration and presentation during the period from when the state in which operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted occurs (timing tBg2) until it ends (timing tBg2-C2) are as described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so we will omit the explanation here. For the sake of explanation, in this example, it is assumed that the state in which operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted does not occur again between timing tBg2-C2 and timing tBg2-C4. However, even in the above-mentioned example (see Figures 176-178) where multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted between timing tBg2-C2 and timing tBg2-C4, the same configuration can be applied when the following events occur after timing tBg4C while the operation state for the sword ornament 5001 is maintained. Furthermore, the example shown in Figure 192 assumes that the "7th B Reception Display HB7" corresponding to the operation request is not displayed at timing tBg2-A1, etc. (corresponding to the case in Figure 178). However, as mentioned above, there are also cases where the 7th B Reception Display HB7 is displayed (corresponding to the case in Figure 176), and in this case as well, the configuration described below will appear. However, in this case, it is assumed that the 7th B Reception Display HB7 was hidden before timing tBg4C.

In this example, the scenario assumes that the operating state of the "7B operation unit (sword ornament 5001)," which has been maintained since the 7B acceptance state (here, from timing tBg2-C1), continues even after the 7B acceptance state ends, without any operation-related displays prompting the player to perform multiple operations on the same target, the sword ornament 5001, and even after the state in which operation acceptance is permitted again, making the sword ornament 5001 eligible for the auto-repeated function (long-press function), occurs (and continues beyond).

In other words, this example assumes that the "reception-permitted state" described above, "the 7th B reception-permitted state (see Figures 176-178)," occurs again as a "reception-permitted state" that arises while the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 continues. More specifically, it assumes that when timing tBg4C, shown in Figure 192, arrives after timing tBg2-C2, when the 7th B reception-permitted state has ended (based on the fact that "condition 7B" is met at timing tBg4C), the above 7th B reception-permitted state (valid period) occurs, in which "reception of operation to the 7th B operation unit (sword ornament 5001) regarding changes after 7th B reception (such as the display HB7 after 7th B reception, the output sound Sα7 after 7th B reception, etc.)" is permitted (the situation shown in Figure 177(a)).

Furthermore, the acceptance state that occurs at timing tBg4C only needs to be "a state in which operation acceptance is permitted in which the sword ornament 5001 is the target of the auto-repeated function (long-press function), without any operation-related display prompting the user to accept multiple operations for the sword ornament 5001, which is the same operation target as in the 7B acceptance state," and does not necessarily have to be the 7B acceptance state. Even if it occurs as an acceptance state of a different type than the 7B acceptance state, the configurations described below are similarly applicable.

As described above, in the 7B acceptance state, no operation-related indicator prompting action on the sword ornament 5001 is displayed when it occurs (see Figures 192(b) to (d), etc.). Furthermore, no audible operation-related sound prompting action is emitted to the player. Therefore, after the 7B acceptance state ends at timing tBg4C, the player will continue playing the game while it is difficult to recognize if the 7B acceptance state occurs again.

The configuration for this 7B acceptance state is as described above (see Figures 176-178), so we will omit further explanation here. The same applies to other examples of configurations applicable to the 7B acceptance state.

In this regard, in the example shown in Figure 192, at timing tBg4C, the state in which "the sword ornament 5001 is allowed to accept operation in a way that makes it eligible for activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function)" (7th B acceptance state) occurs again. In addition, in this state, the auto-repeated function (long-press function) is activated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" which has been maintained since before timing tBg2-C2 (multiple operation acceptances are made and changes are executed after multiple acceptances). In other words, after the 7th B acceptance acceptance state ends at timing tBg2-C2, if an operation-related display prompting operation on the same operating means (sword ornament 5001) as in the 7th B acceptance acceptance state occurs again in a state where operation acceptance is permitted in a way that the operating means (sword ornament 5001) is subject to activation of the auto-repeated function (long-press function), unlike the example shown in Figure 191, the operation-related display is not shown, and the operation acceptance state occurs from before timing tBg2-C2. Even without releasing (terminating) the maintained operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" (more precisely, without re-operating the sword ornament 5001), the auto-repeated button press function (long-press function) can be reactivated based on the detection of the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" (because the operation is accepted at timing tBg4C). Therefore, simply by continuing the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" that has been maintained since the above-mentioned 7B acceptance-allowed state occurred at timing tBg2, the game can proceed appropriately.

Furthermore, regarding the configuration when the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained in the operating state (when the auto-repeated button press function is activated) in the 7B acceptance state, the details have been described above with reference to Figures 176 to 178, so we will omit the explanation here.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 192, between the arrival of timing tBg2-C2 and the recurrence of the 7th B acceptance state, other acceptance states may occur or end (or not occur), the variation animation of the decorative symbol SZ that was in the execution state may end, or the next variation animation of the decorative symbol SZ may begin.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 192, when the first operation request is received for the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg4C, "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" may be displayed as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation request. As mentioned above, "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" may be displayed based on the first operation request (see Figure 176(f)) or not displayed (see Figure 178(f)).

Figure 193 is a time chart showing an example where, at timing tBg4C, the first operation request is received for the sword ornament 5001, and "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" is not displayed as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation request.

As shown in Figure 193, this example differs from the example in Figure 192 in that when the first operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg4C, "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" is not displayed as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received. However, the other configurations are as described above with reference to Figure 192, so we will omit the explanation here. Furthermore, the configuration regarding whether or not "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" is displayed as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received is also as described above.

In the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, after the end of the 7B acceptance state, no operation-related display prompting the user to perform multiple operation requests on the same target object, the sword ornament 5001, occurs again, allowing the sword ornament 5001 to be activated for the auto-repeated function (long-press function). However, if the operation state of the "sword ornament 5001" is maintained from the time of the 7B acceptance state until this state occurs again, the auto-repeated function (long-press function) will always be activated based on this detection (multiple operation requests will be made, and changes will be executed after multiple requests).

Furthermore, the structure of each of the above-mentioned performance examples may be modified as follows:

For example, the first B acceptance state, the second B acceptance state, and the sixth B acceptance state all occur and terminate as states in which operation reception for the operation button 410 is permitted. However, in these states, operation reception for other operating means such as the sword ornament 5001 may also be permitted. Conversely, the third B acceptance state, the fourth B acceptance state, the fifth B acceptance state, and the seventh B acceptance state all occur and terminate as states in which operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted. However, in these states, operation reception for other operating means such as the operation button 410 may also be permitted.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned examples of performances, the names "1B" to "7B" for each configuration are intended to correspond to "1B Acceptance State" to "7B Acceptance State," respectively, and do not specify the sameness or difference in type of the configuration. For example, although "1B Operation Unit" and "2B Operation Unit" have different names, both use "operation button 410" as their operation units, and it is clear that the sameness or difference in type of operation unit is not specified. Moreover, the names "1B" to "7B" do not necessarily specify the sameness or difference in type (the manner of change after acceptance) of the "acceptance states." For example, "1B Acceptance State" and "6B Acceptance State" may differ only in the performance environment at the time of occurrence and termination, but their occurrence conditions and termination conditions may be set to be the same, or the same change may appear as a change after acceptance in response to operation acceptance. In other words, in this case, only the timing at which operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is permitted and the presentation environment during the period until the termination conditions are met (for example, the manner of operation-related displays, the manner and presence or absence of operation-promoting light emission, the manner and presence or absence of operation-related output sounds, etc.) differ, while the manner of post-acceptance changes that appear when operation acceptance is made remains the same. In this case, the "1st B Acceptance Permitted State" and the "6th B Acceptance Permitted State" can be viewed not as separate acceptance permitted states, but rather as having at least two presentation manners prepared as "states in which operation acceptance is permitted for the operation button 410." However, as mentioned above, it is not necessary to have all two of these presentation manners as "states in which operation acceptance is permitted for the operation button 410." Furthermore, the conditions for occurrence and termination of the 3rd B Acceptance Permitted State to the 5th B Acceptance Permitted State and the 7th B Acceptance Permitted State may also be the same, or the same changes may appear as post-acceptance changes in response to operation acceptance. In other words, in this case, only the timing at which operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted and the performance environment during the period until the termination conditions are met (for example, the manner of operation-related displays, the manner and presence or absence of operation-promoting light emission, the manner and presence or absence of operation-related output sounds, etc.) differ; however, the manner of post-acceptance changes that appear when operation acceptance is made remains the same. In this case, regarding the 3B acceptance-permitted state to the 5B acceptance-permitted state and the 7B acceptance-permitted state, it is possible to consider them not as separate acceptance-permitted states, but rather as at least four performance modes being provided as "states in which operation acceptance is permitted for the sword ornament 5001." However, as mentioned above, it is not necessarily required that all four of these performance modes be present as "states in which operation acceptance is permitted for the sword ornament 5001."

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, states "1B Acceptance State" through "7B Acceptance State" may all be made possible within the same fluctuation pattern. In this case, all states "1B Acceptance State" through "7B Acceptance State" will occur within a single fluctuation pattern. Alternatively, several of the acceptance states from "1B Acceptance State" through "7B Acceptance State" may be made possible within the same fluctuation pattern.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned examples of performances, the "1st B Acceptance State" through the "7th B Acceptance State" do not necessarily have to occur or end within the execution period of the symbol change, nor do they necessarily have to occur across multiple symbol changes.

Furthermore, the "post-reception changes (post-reception displays)" corresponding to the acceptance status of operations in each of the above-mentioned performance examples and their variations do not necessarily have to suggest the probability of winning a jackpot. For example, they may occur as an acceptance status regarding whether or not the probability variation function is activated during the execution period of a jackpot game, and then be executed as a post-reception change. Alternatively, they may occur as an acceptance status within a simple mini-game unrelated to any indication of the game's expected outcome, and then be executed as a post-reception change. Or, they may occur based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions during various interval periods, and then be executed as a post-reception change. Therefore, the acceptance status in each of the above-mentioned performance examples and their variations does not necessarily have to occur during the period in which symbol variations are being executed. Also, even when such post-reception changes that do not suggest an expected outcome are executed, multiple modes of execution for these post-reception changes may be provided, and the display may be shown in one of these modes.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described examples of presentations, when an opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is provided, it is possible to ensure that at least one of the operation-related display prompts operation through a visual display, the operation-related output sound prompts operation through a sound, and the operation-promoting illumination prompts operation through light, is always performed. Conversely, when an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is provided, it is possible to ensure that none of the operation-related display prompts operation through a visual display, the operation-related output sound prompts operation through a sound, or the operation-promoting illumination prompts operation through light are performed (7B Acceptance Allowed State).

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the "start conditions (for example, timing tBc2-C3, timing tBd2-C3, timing tBe2-C3, timing tBg2-C3, timing tBe5A-1, timing tBe5A-2, timing tBc5B, timing tBe5B, timing tBg4A, timing tBg4B, timing tBg4C, timing tBg4D, etc.)" and the "situation in which multiple operations can be received for the sword ornament 5001 (situation in which multiple operations can be received)" appear, as well as the "situation in which multiple operations can be received for the sword ornament 5001 (situation in which multiple operations can be received)" The "termination conditions" for the termination of the process (e.g., timings tBc2-C2, tBd2-C2, tBe2-C2, tBg2-C2, etc.) may be met based on, for example, the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the result of a performance judgment when operation acceptance to the sword ornament 5001 is permitted, or based on an operation or release of an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001, as a result of a performance judgment based on operation acceptance to the sword ornament 5001. These conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, in pachinko machine 1, the only acceptance states for which the auto-repeated button press function (long-press function) is activated may be "State 1B Acceptance State" to "State 7B Acceptance State." Alternatively, only some of the states from "State 1B Acceptance State" to "State 7B Acceptance State" may be provided.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described performance examples, either the "First B Acceptance State" or the "Second B Acceptance State" may maintain the output of sound as one of the post-acceptance changes only for the duration that the operation button 410 remains in the operated state.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned examples of effects, while the auto-repeated button function may ensure a "constant interval until a new post-input change appears" when the target is kept in an operational state, this configuration only requires that new post-input changes occur at predetermined time intervals triggered by the target being in an operational state; it does not necessarily have to be at the same time interval every time. For example, the time between the first post-input change (executed by the auto-repeated button function) and the second post-input change (executed by the auto-repeated button function) is set to 0.5 seconds, but thereafter, post-input changes (auto-repeated button function) may be executed at 0.2-second intervals. In this way, the configuration that ensures a "constant interval until a new post-input change appears" can be achieved by including multiple "predetermined time intervals."

Furthermore, in each of the above-described performance examples, among the post-reception changes that occur in the state of 7B reception permission, in response to operation reception based on a specific operation on the sword ornament 5001, the "7B reception post-display HB7" and the "7B event (7B reception post-output sound Sα7)" may be implemented as being executed based on different operation detections. However, in this case, if the "7B event (7B reception post-output sound Sα7)" is to be executed based on the detection of a "specific operation (for example, a push operation or a pull operation)" on the sword ornament 5001, then the "7B reception post-display HB7" will be implemented as being executed based on the detection of an operation that is essential for performing a specific operation on the sword ornament 5001 (for example, a proximity operation on the sword ornament 5001 or a touch operation on the sword ornament 5001). Even with this configuration, when an operation based on a specific operation is received for the sword ornament 5001, the following changes will be executed as post-reception changes: "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" and "7B Event (7B Post-Reception Output Sound Sα7)".

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned examples of presentations, the "Conditions 1B" to "Conditions 7B" that result in "State 1B Acceptance" to "State 7B Acceptance" do not necessarily have to be met by the passage of time since the symbol change began. Any predetermined conditions are acceptable.

Furthermore, unless otherwise specified, the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples represent the configurations used when the game is being played properly, that is, the configurations used when error handling due to fraudulent activity is not being performed.

Furthermore, while the "1st B operation unit," "2nd B operation unit," and "6th B operation unit" in the above-described performance example are all implemented as "operation buttons 410," all or part of these operation units may be implemented as operation units different from "operation buttons 410" (sword ornament 5001, or operation means different from both operation buttons 410 and sword ornament 5001). Similarly, while the "3rd B operation unit," "4th B operation unit," "5th B operation unit," and "7th B operation unit" in the above-described performance example are all implemented as "sword ornament 5001," all or part of these operation units may be implemented as operation units different from "sword ornament 5001" (operation buttons 410, or operation means different from both operation buttons 410 and sword ornament 5001).

Furthermore, in "State 1B Acceptance Mode" through "State 5B Acceptance Mode," a mock image of the operation unit for which the auto-repeated function is to be activated is displayed. However, any operation-related display is acceptable, and the mock image display does not necessarily have to be displayed. Also, for "State 1B Acceptance Mode," "State 2B Acceptance Mode," and "State 6B Acceptance Mode," the configuration regarding the type and presence or absence of operation-related displays may differ, and the same pattern may appear as a change after acceptance. Similarly, for "State 3B Acceptance Mode" through "State 5B Acceptance Mode," and "State 7B Acceptance Mode," the configuration regarding the type and presence or absence of operation-related displays may differ, and the same pattern may appear as a change after acceptance.

Furthermore, the model image display can be displayed in the same form (or similar form) whether the periodic changes of the model image display occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time" or in units of "a predetermined time". However, when the periodic changes of the model image display occur in units of "longer than a predetermined time", the model image display can be displayed in at least one form and one form. When the periodic changes of the model image display occur in units of "a predetermined time", it may be possible to have no instances of display in the second form (or similar form) and only instances of display in the first form (or similar form).

Incidentally, the periodic changes in the display of mock images, unlike color schemes or illumination, are phenomena that occur over time. Therefore, distinguishing between long and short cycles inherently requires a relatively long period of time. Furthermore, it is difficult to reliably determine whether the currently displayed mock image is a long or short cycle (since both long and short cycles are not displayed simultaneously). However, if players can distinguish between them, they can enjoy its value as a new source of information. Thus, the difficulty of distinguishing between them, combined with its value as a source of information, allows for the provision of new and engaging presentation elements.

Furthermore, the 1st B acceptance state and the 2nd B acceptance state are provided as "a type of acceptance state in which the acceptance state can be terminated early based on the fact that an operation has been received." However, in the 1st B acceptance state and the 2nd B acceptance state, for example, if a predetermined judgment result is not obtained as a result of a jackpot judgment or performance judgment, the acceptance state may not be terminated early regardless of how many operations are received (because the final performance mode does not appear). The acceptance state may only be terminated early when a predetermined judgment result is obtained as a result of a jackpot judgment or performance judgment, triggered by the fact that an operation has been received. Even with such a configuration, it can be said that it is realized as "a type of acceptance state in which the acceptance state can be terminated early based on the fact that an operation has been received (because the final performance mode appears)." However, the 1st B acceptance state and the 2nd B acceptance state may also be provided as "a type of acceptance state in which the acceptance state does not terminate early based on the fact that an operation has been received."

Furthermore, in the 1st B acceptance state and the 6th B acceptance state, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance due to the auto-repeated button function (the interval at which a new change occurs after acceptance when the operation state is maintained) is the same for both states. In this regard, the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance due to the auto-repeated button function (the interval at which a new change occurs after acceptance when the operation state is maintained) is also the same for the 3rd B to 5th B acceptance states and the 7th B acceptance states, but the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance due to the auto-repeated button function may be shorter than in the 1st B and 6th B acceptance states. With such a configuration, it becomes relatively difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated button function is enabled in the 3rd B to 5th B acceptance states and the 7th B acceptance states, thereby appropriately conveying a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the interval at which a change occurs after reception due to the auto-repeated button press function (the interval at which a new change occurs after reception when the operation state is maintained) does not necessarily have to be the same for the 1st B reception acceptance state and the 6th B reception acceptance state. Similarly, the interval at which a change occurs after reception due to the auto-repeated button press function (the interval at which a new change occurs after reception when the operation state is maintained) does not necessarily have to be the same for the 3rd B reception acceptance state through the 5th B reception acceptance state, and the 7th B reception acceptance state.

Furthermore, the number of times post-reception changes can occur within the second B reception-acceptable state when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state may be set to be less than the number of times post-reception changes can occur within the first B reception-acceptable state when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state.

Furthermore, when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state in the 3B or 4B acceptance-permitted state, the number of times post-reception changes can occur in those states may be set to be less than the number of times post-reception changes can occur in the 5B acceptance-permitted state when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state in that state.

Furthermore, in the second B acceptance state, the maximum number of times a post-reception change can be generated by maintaining the operation button 410 in the operated state may be set to be less than the maximum number of times a post-reception change can be generated by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining it in the operated state.

Furthermore, in the first B acceptance state, the maximum number of times a post-reception change can be generated by maintaining the operation button 410 in the operated state may be set to be the same as, or greater than, the maximum number of times a post-reception change can be generated by repeatedly operating the operation button 410 without maintaining it in the operated state.

Furthermore, the aforementioned "time less than or equal to a specific time" may include the specific time itself, or it may be the case that only the specific time is provided as "time less than or equal to a specific time." Alternatively, it may be the case that only one time period is provided as "time longer than or equal to a specific time."

Furthermore, the aforementioned "time less than or equal to the specified time" includes the specified time itself, and it is also possible that only the specified time is provided as "time less than or equal to the specified time." Alternatively, it is also possible that only one time period is provided as "time longer than the specified time."

Furthermore, in the second B acceptance state, when the operation button 410 is in the operation state and this operation state is maintained, the interval between multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the so-called auto-repeated button press function) may be set to either a specific time (e.g., 1 second) or longer than that specific time, depending on its uncertainty.

Furthermore, regarding the "Message Display MB1" and "Message Display MB2" mentioned above, it is desirable that they be implemented as a type (mode) that is only displayed when multiple operation requests are allowed for the operation button 410 in a manner that makes it eligible for the activation of the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function). In other words, they are not displayed when "multiple operation requests are allowed for the operation button 410, but it is not eligible for the activation of the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function)." Similarly, regarding the "Message Display MB3," "Message Display MB4," and "Message Display MB5" mentioned above, they are only displayed when multiple operation requests are allowed for the sword ornament 5001 in a manner that makes it eligible for the activation of the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function). However, for the sword ornament 5001, it may be possible to ensure that there are no cases where "multiple operation requests are allowed, but it is not eligible for the activation of the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function)."

Furthermore, the specified time is a time shorter than the prescribed time, and it is desirable that "time less than or equal to the specified time" be shorter than "time less than or equal to the prescribed time." Conversely, it is desirable that "time longer than the specified time" be longer than "time longer than the prescribed time." Alternatively, if "time longer than the specified time" is set as an indefinite time, its indefiniteness may allow it to be both "time longer than the prescribed time" and "time longer than the prescribed time."

Furthermore, if the conditions for the audible output of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 to terminate prematurely are met at any point within the time range TBc shown in Figure 168(g), the operation-related displays (such as the mock image display MG-B3 and the message display MB3) may also be made invisible based on the fulfillment of the same conditions (premature termination of operation-related displays such as the message display MB3).

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while it is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-operation changes have been executed in response to an operation received by the operation button 410, a corresponding post-operation display (e.g., post-operation display HB2) may be displayed. In this regard, in the above-described example, the corresponding post-operation display (e.g., post-operation display HB2) may be displayed only when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button function" is displayed. However, alternatively, the corresponding post-operation display may also be displayed when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, as described above, in the second B acceptance state shown in Figure 166, if the operation button 410 is deactivated while a post-acceptance change is occurring in response to an operation on the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is returned to the operation state from the deactivated state, this does not trigger the sound effect, which was audible at that time, to become inaudible. In this regard, while the second B acceptance state shown in Figure 166 is designed so that the second B post-acceptance output sound Sα2 is never audible when the operation button 410 is reactivated from the deactivated state, alternatively, the second B post-acceptance output sound Sα2 may be audible when the operation button 410 is reactivated from the deactivated state, and even in this case, the audible second B post-acceptance output sound Sα2 may not become inaudible as a result of reactivating the operation button 410.

In the example shown in Figure 166(h), when the operation button 410 is detected to have changed from an operated state to an unoperated state while the second B post-reception output sound is being output, the second B post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα2a) is terminated upon this detection. However, instead of terminating, the output mode may be changed to a different mode (such as a change in volume/quality or a change in the output sound mode).

Furthermore, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, this situation should be terminated when the sword ornament 5001 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, or when a predetermined termination condition is met while the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state. Similarly, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state and multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410, this situation should be terminated when the operation button 410 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, or when a specific termination condition is met while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance examples, as shown in Figures 168, 170, 172, and 176, if a situation arises where the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, this situation is terminated when the sword ornament 5001 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, or when a predetermined termination condition is met while the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state. However, this predetermined termination condition may be, for example, predetermined based on the result of a jackpot determination, predetermined depending on the type of variation pattern, predetermined based on the passage of time, predetermined based on the performance determination when operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, predetermined based on the performance determination based on operation requests for the sword ornament 5001, predetermined based on operation or deactivation of an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001, and the content of the condition is not particularly limited.

Furthermore, in the above example, during the period when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed, if operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state, a situation may occur where operation requests are received multiple times for operation button 410. This situation ends when operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state, or when a specific termination condition is met while operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state, without the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function" being hidden. However, this condition may also be met in advance based on, for example, the result of a jackpot judgment, or depending on the type of variation pattern, or based on the passage of time, or based on the performance judgment when operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, or the result of a performance judgment based on operation requests to the sword ornament 5001, or based on operations on or cancellation of operations on a different operation means than the sword ornament 5001. The content of this condition is not particularly limited.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, after a situation has occurred where the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state (specific operation) and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for the sword ornament 5001, even if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state (the specific operation is being continuously performed), and no operation reception is received for the sword ornament 5001, the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is kept in an operating state. If this state is maintained (and while it is maintained, a predetermined starting condition is met and a state is reached where operation to the sword ornament 5001 is permitted), the situation in which operation to the sword ornament 5001 is accepted multiple times based on the detection of that operation state (specific operation) may reappear (for example, timings tBg2-C3 shown in Figure 178, timing tBc5B shown in Figure 186, timing tBe5B shown in Figure 187, timing tBg4C shown in Figure 192, timing tBg4D shown in Figure 193, etc.). In this regard, in the above-mentioned examples of performances, while the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, the "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" and the "7B Event (7B Post-Reception Output Sound Sα7)" can be executed as post-reception changes based on the detection of the previously maintained operation state (specific operation). Alternatively, the "7B Event (7B Post-Reception Output Sound Sα7)" may be executed as a post-reception change, but the "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" may not be displayed. In other words, in this case, when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, and a specific operation is newly performed on the sword ornament 5001, changing it from an inoperable state to an operational state, the following can occur as a post-reception change triggered by this: "7B Post-reception Display HB7" and "7B Event (7B Post-reception Output Sound Sα7)" are executed respectively (see, for example, Figure 176); or "7B Post-reception Display HB7" is not executed and "7B Event (7B Post-reception Output Sound Sα7)" is executed (see, for example). While both (see Figure 178, etc.) exist, if the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, and the above post-reception change is executed based on the detection of the previously maintained operation state (specific operation), then neither "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" nor "7B Event (7B Post-Reception Output Sound Sα7)" will be executed as the post-reception change. Instead, "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" will not be displayed, and "7B Event (7B Post-Reception Output Sound Sα7)" will be executed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in this case, among the post-reception changes in response to an operation reception based on a specific operation on the sword ornament 5001, "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" and "7B Event (7B Post-Reception Output Sound Sα7)" may be implemented as being executed based on different operation detections.

Furthermore, in the above-described examples of performances, when a specific operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001, the following post-reception changes may be executed according to the detection information obtained: "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" and "7B Event (7B Post-Reception Output Sound Sα7)." However, these post-reception changes are not limited to "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" and "7B Event (7B Post-Reception Output Sound Sα7)," and other changes may also occur.

Furthermore, in the above-described examples of performances, when a specific operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001, the "7B Post-Reception Display HB7" and the "7B Event (7B Post-Reception Output Sound Sα7)" may be executed as post-reception changes corresponding to the detection information obtained therefrom. However, the changes that may occur in conjunction with the "7B Event (7B Post-Reception Output Sound Sα7)" as post-reception changes do not necessarily have to be display changes (7B Post-Reception Display HB7), but may be, for example, changes in light emission or changes in the movement of a movable body. In other words, in this case, if the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, and a post-reception change is executed in response to a specific operation performed on the sword ornament 5001, then there are two possible outcomes: a "first event (e.g., the 7B post-reception display HB7, but other changes may also occur)" and a "second event (e.g., the 7B post-reception output sound Sα7, but other changes may also occur)" may occur, while a "second event (e.g., the 7B post-reception output sound Sα7, but other changes may also occur)" may not occur.

However, even in this case, it is desirable that the "first event (for example, the display HB7 after receiving the 7B, but other changes may also occur)" not be subject to the so-called auto-repeated function. That is, in this case, the "first event (for example, the display HB7 after receiving the 7B, but other changes may also occur)" will not occur again after it has occurred once as one of the post-reception changes, as long as the sword ornament 5001 remains in the operating state (see, for example, Figure 176(f)). In contrast, the "second event (for example, the output sound Sα7 after receiving the 7B, but other changes may also occur)" is subject to the so-called auto-repeated function, and therefore, even after it has occurred once as one of the post-reception changes, it can occur multiple times based on the fact that the sword ornament 5001 remains in the operating state (see, for example, Figure 176(h)).

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when a specific operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001 in a reception-accepting state (such as the 3B reception-accepting state, the 4B reception-accepting state, or the 5B reception-accepting state) in which the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, the following post-reception changes occur: "a first event (for example, the 7B post-reception display HB7, but other changes may also occur)" and "a second event (for example, the 7B post-reception output sound Sα7, but other changes may also occur)." However, instead, in a reception-accepting state (such as the 3B reception-accepting state, the 4B reception-accepting state, or the 5B reception-accepting state) where the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, if a specific operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001, the corresponding post-reception change may be such that the "first event (for example, the 7B post-reception display HB7, but other changes may also occur)" does not occur, and the "second event (for example, the 7B post-reception output sound Sα7, but other changes may also occur)" can occur.

Furthermore, in the above-described examples of sound effects, two operation-related output sounds, OB3 and OB4, are provided as first operation-prompting sounds to encourage operation on the sword ornament 5001. It is desirable that these output sounds be output as sounds of different characteristics (types). Conversely, two operation-related output sounds, OB1 and OB2, are provided as second operation-prompting sounds to encourage operation on the operation button 410. These output sounds may be output as sounds of the same characteristic (type).

Furthermore, in this case, even though the output sounds differ when operation-related output sound OB3 is output and when operation-related output sound OB4 is output, the post-reception change in response to the operation on the sword ornament 5001 may appear in the same manner. Conversely, even though operation-related output sound OB1 and operation-related output sound OB2 are output as the same sound, the post-reception change in response to the operation button 410 may appear in different manner.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described examples of effects, the first B operation-promoting light LB1 shown in Figure 164 and the second B operation-promoting light LB2 shown in Figure 166 may have the same light emission mode.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described performance examples, in the first B acceptance-permitted state and the sixth B acceptance-permitted state, even if the operation button 410 is operated again while the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is being output, there may be both cases in which at least one of the performance sounds that are audible at that time is interrupted as a result of this, and cases in which at least one of the performance sounds that are audible at that time is not interrupted. For example, in the first B acceptance-permitted state, if the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 is audible as one of the post-acceptance changes, at least one of the performance sounds that are audible at that time is interrupted as a result of the operation button 410 being operated again. However, if the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 is not audible as one of the post-acceptance changes, and the second post-acceptance output sound Sβ1 is audible, at least one of the performance sounds that are audible at that time may not be interrupted as a result of the operation button 410 being operated again. Furthermore, in the 6B reception-accepting state, if the first post-reception output sound Sα6 is audible as one of the post-reception changes, at least one of the sound effects that are audible at that time will be interrupted when the operation button 410 is pressed again. However, if the first post-reception output sound Sα6 is not audible as one of the post-reception changes, and the second post-reception output sound Sβ6 is audible, at least one of the sound effects that are audible at that time will not be interrupted when the operation button 410 is pressed again.

Furthermore, the post-operation output sound (post-reception output sound) may or may not indicate a level of expectation.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in each of the above-described examples of presentations, the "Operation-Related Display Regarding the Sword Ornament 5001" may be displayed when operation reception (reception of a specific operation) for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted. In this regard, even if the "Operation-Related Display Regarding the Sword Ornament 5001" is displayed when operation reception (reception of a specific operation) for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted, the "Operation-Related Display Regarding the Sword Ornament 5001" may be hidden if operation reception (reception of a specific operation) for the sword ornament 5001 is never permitted (i.e., the conditions for permitting operation reception (reception of a specific operation) for the sword ornament 5001 are not met while the "Operation-Related Display Regarding the Sword Ornament 5001" is displayed). Such a configuration is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the "Operation-Related Display Regarding the Sword Ornament 5001" is displayed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in each of the above-described examples of presentations, the "operation-related display for operation button 410" may be displayed when operation reception (reception of a predetermined operation) for operation button 410 is not permitted. In this regard, even if the "operation-related display for operation button 410" is displayed when operation reception (reception of a predetermined operation) for operation button 410 is not permitted, the "operation-related display for operation button 410" may be hidden if operation reception (reception of a predetermined operation) for operation button 410 is never permitted (i.e., the conditions for permitting operation reception (reception of a predetermined operation) for operation button 410 are not met while the "operation-related display for operation button 410" is displayed). Such a configuration is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when the "operation-related display for operation button 410" is displayed.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 may also have additional acceptance states different from the first B acceptance acceptance states to the seventh B acceptance acceptance states described above.

Furthermore, while this pachinko machine 1 is designed to include all of the above-mentioned acceptance states 1B through 7B, it is not necessary to include all of these acceptance states. Rather, it is desirable to include only some of these acceptance states in appropriate combinations, taking into account the desired effects and benefits. By including them in the "appropriate combinations" described separately in the configurations below, excellent effects and benefits will be achieved. Note that in each configuration below, examples of combinations of acceptance states that should be included in order to achieve the effects and benefits shown in the above-mentioned performance examples are provided. However, the combinations are not limited to those exemplified; any combination that achieves the desired effects and benefits is acceptable, even if not exemplified. Also, other configurations adopted by acceptance states unrelated to the desired effects and benefits may be included as appropriate, provided they do not negatively affect the achievement of those effects and benefits.

For example, the first configuration B1 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) that prompts operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and when an operation is received on the second operating means (operation button 410)... The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the reception, and at least a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as a first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "Message Display MB5" as a second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) and a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as a first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "Message Display MB3" as a second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-reception change in accordance with the reception of the operation to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is performed. The operation can be performed multiple times (see Figures 168, 170, 172, etc.), and at least two predetermined modes (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) and two specific modes (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) are provided as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) can be performed multiple times (see Figures 164, 166, etc.), and the second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) can be performed in the second predetermined mode (for example When the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165), the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden (see, for example, Figure 179). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple operation requests are made to the second operation means (operation button 410), the interval until a new post-reception change in response to the operation request appears may be less than or equal to a specific time (for example, 1 second) (see Figures 164 and 179, etc.). In other words, in this case, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display for the operation button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined manner (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165), the interval between activation of the "auto-repeated button press function" for the second operation means (operation button 410) and the appearance of a new change after reception is made relatively short. Therefore, it is expected that this will make it easier to recognize whether or not the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated, thereby providing a sense of security.

In this case, if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, or "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.), even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden. With this configuration, in the case of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), even if the instruction mode for automatic rapid pressing (the mode of the first operation-related display) is hidden, there is a possibility that another instruction mode for automatic rapid pressing (another mode of the first operation-related display) will appear within a predetermined time, thus suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, in the case of the second operating means (operation button 410), when the instruction mode for automatic rapid pressing (the mode of the second operation-related display) is hidden, there is no possibility that another instruction mode for automatic rapid pressing (another mode of the second operation-related display) will appear within a predetermined time, thus suitably maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this case, whether the first operation-related display is displayed in a first predetermined manner or in a first specific manner, the interval between multiple operation requests to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) and the appearance of a new post-reception change corresponding to those requests, while the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, may always be set to be less than or equal to a specific time (e.g., 1 second). That is, in this case, when the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), the interval until a new post-reception change appears will always be relatively short, making it easier to recognize whether or not the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated, thereby providing a sense of security.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) (see Figures 164 and 165), and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in a second specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) (see Figures 166 and 167), only when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) (see Figure 164), the interval between multiple operation requests being received for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and the appearance of a new post-reception change corresponding to such operation requests may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time. In other words, in this case, even when the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated for the second operating means (operating button 410), when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display for the operating button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165), the interval until a new change appears after receiving a request is always relatively short. Therefore, it is expected that this will make it easier to recognize whether the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated, thus providing a sense of security. On the other hand, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display for the operating button 410) is displayed in a second specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167), the interval between changes when the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated for the second operating means (operating button 410) may be longer than the specific time (a relatively long interval). Therefore, it is expected that this will make it difficult to recognize whether the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated, thus appropriately maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display for the operation button 410) is displayed in a second specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, if multiple changes are executed after acceptance (see Figures 166 and 167), the interval between these changes may never be less than the specified time, but always be longer than the specified time. In other words, in this case, when the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode, it is expected that it will be more difficult to recognize whether or not the "auto-repeated button press function" is enabled, thereby more effectively maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display for the operation button 410) is displayed in a second specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the interval between multiple post-reception changes may appear as an undetermined time (an indefinite time) (see Figures 166 and 167). For example, this can be achieved by performing a performance judgment on whether or not to trigger a post-reception change each time an operation is received while the second operation means is maintained in the operated state, and triggering the post-reception change only when a special judgment result is obtained. However, the method for realizing this configuration is not limited to this.

In this case, it is preferable (though not essential) to ensure that the specified time is shorter than the shortest possible time (interval) among the "indefinite time" options, in order to make it more difficult to recognize whether or not the "auto-click function" is enabled.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations related to the first configuration B1 and the above-described examples of presentations, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state while the "operation-related display of the operation button 410" is displayed in a second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165), and multiple operation requests are made to the operation button 410, the interval until a new post-reception change in response to the operation request appears may be less than or equal to a specific time, and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (a fixed time). Also, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state while the operation-related display of the operation button 410 is displayed in a second specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167), and multiple operation requests are made to the operation button 410, the interval until a new post-reception change in response to the operation request appears may be longer than a specific time, and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (a fixed time) (an indefinite time). Furthermore, when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state while the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed in a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, or "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) or a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.), and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, the interval until a new post-reception change corresponding to the operation request appears may be less than or equal to a specific time, and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (a fixed time).

Furthermore, in realizing the first configuration B1 and the configurations related to each of the above-described performance examples, the "operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001" is displayed in a first predetermined manner (for example, corresponding to "message display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, or "message display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) or a first specific manner (for example, corresponding to "message display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "message display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.), while the sword ornament is displayed. The interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated for the decorative element 5001 (the interval until a new change appears after a new input is received) and the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated for the operation button 410 while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed in a second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) (the interval until a new change appears after a new input is received) are both set to be less than or equal to a specific time; however, these intervals may be set to be different from each other.

For example, the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated for the sword ornament 5001 (the interval until a new change appears after a new input) while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001" is displayed in a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, or "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) or a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) is defined as "operation of the operation button 410". If the "Related Display" is displayed in a second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165), and the interval at which the so-called auto-press function is activated for the operation button 410 is set to be longer than the interval at which a new change appears after a new input, then the gap in the interval at which the so-called auto-press function is activated for the operation button 410 while the "Operation Related Display for Operation Button 410" is displayed (the gap between the second predetermined mode and the second specific mode) can be made larger, thus potentially maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the first configuration B1 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, and the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the operation button 410, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even during the period when the "operation-related display corresponding to the sword ornament 5001" is displayed, there are both cases in which the sword ornament 5001 is in a state where it can be automatically pressed repeatedly and cases in which it is not in a state where it can be automatically pressed repeatedly. For example, during the period when the operation-related display corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, the period in which "the sword ornament 5001 is not in a state where automatic rapid-fire is possible" corresponds to the periods of timing tBc1 to tBc2, timing tBc2-C2 to tBc2-C3, and timing tBc2-C4 to tBc3 shown in Figure 168, or the periods of timing tBd1 to tBd2, timing tBd2-C2 to tBd2-C3, and timing tBd2-C4 to tBd3 shown in Figure 170, or the periods of timing tBe1 to tBe2, timing tBe2-C2 to tBe2-C3, and timing tBe2-C4 to tBe3 shown in Figure 172.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even during the period when the "operation-related display corresponding to the operation button 410" is displayed, there are cases where the operation button 410 is in a state where it can be automatically pressed repeatedly, and cases where it is not in a state where it can be automatically pressed repeatedly. For example, the period during which the "operation button 410 is not in a state where it can be automatically pressed repeatedly" corresponds to the periods of timing tBa1 to tBa2 and timing tBa2-C2 to tBa3 shown in Figure 164, and the periods of timing tBb1 to tBb2 and timing tBb2-C2 to tBb3 shown in Figure 166. However, during the period when the operation-related display corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, unlike the period when the "operation-related display corresponding to the sword ornament 5001" is displayed, it is possible to ensure that the state where auto-continuous pressing is possible does not reappear after the state where auto-continuous pressing is no longer possible while the operation-related display is displayed (such as the timings tBc2-C3 shown in Figure 168, tBd2-C3 shown in Figure 170, and tBe2-C3 shown in Figure 172).

Furthermore, in realizing the first configuration B1 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the configurations related to "means for executing post-reception changes in response to operation reception on the sword ornament 5001" and "means for executing post-reception changes in response to operation reception on the operation button 410" may be implemented on a single circuit board or on multiple different circuit boards. For example, the post-reception changes in response to operation reception on the sword ornament 5001 may include a first change that appears through processing by the main control board and a second change that appears through processing by the peripheral control board. This configuration is not limited to "means for executing post-reception changes in response to operation reception on the sword ornament 5001," but is similarly applicable to "means" related to other configurations.

Furthermore, in realizing the first configuration B1 and the configurations related to each of the above-described performance examples, if the "operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001" in a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "message display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, or "message display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) is hidden, it may be possible to ensure that the "operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001" is not newly displayed in a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "message display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "message display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) before a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since it was hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the first configuration B1 and the various performance examples above, if the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001" in the "message display MB3" is hidden and then redisplayed in the "message display MB4" before a predetermined time has elapsed, it is desirable that the time between the hiding of the "message display MB3" and the redisplay in the "message display MB4" be kept constant (as shown in the example in Figure 181).

Furthermore, in realizing the first configuration B1 and the configurations related to each of the above-described performance examples, the "post-reception change in response to operation reception on the sword ornament 5001" performed while the first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, or "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) is displayed, and the "post-reception change in response to operation reception on the sword ornament 5001" performed while the first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) is displayed, may be the same change or may be different changes. However, it is desirable that the "post-reception change in response to operation reception on the sword ornament 5001" and the "post-reception change in response to operation reception on the operation button 410" are not the same change.

Furthermore, in realizing the first configuration B1 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the "post-reception change in response to operation reception on the sword ornament 5001" and the "post-reception change in response to operation reception on the operation button 410" may or may not produce a post-reception output sound.

Furthermore, in the above-described examples of effects, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the sword ornament 5001, the operation-prompting light prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not executed. However, when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the operation button 410, the operation-prompting light prompting operation on the operation button 410 is always executed. Alternatively, when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed and multiple operations are permitted for the operation button 410, there may be cases where the operation-prompting light prompting operation on the operation button 410 is executed, and cases where it is not executed. This allows for varying degrees of concealment depending on the type of operation means when the operation-related display is not displayed, and a suitable sense of tension can be created regardless of which operation means is given an opportunity to operate.

Furthermore, in realizing the first configuration B1 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, it is possible to ensure that the following conditions are met: the operation-related display for the operation button 410 is shown, multiple operation attempts for the operation button 410 are permitted, and simply setting the operation button 410 to the operational state does not result in multiple operation attempts. However, it is also possible to ensure that the following conditions are not met: the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is shown, multiple operation attempts for the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, and simply setting the sword ornament 5001 to the operational state does not result in multiple operation attempts.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described performance examples, when the message display MB1 is displayed as an operation-related display for the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 is in a non-operated state, and the "First B Reception Output Sound Sα" corresponding to the operation reception of the operation button 410 is in an output state (see Figure 164), if the operation button 410 changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the "First B Reception Output Sound" may change as a result (First B Reception Output Sound Sα1 at timing tBa2-C1) or may not change (at timing tBa2-C1 There is a first B reception output sound (Sβ1), but when the message display MB2 is displayed as the operation-related indicator for the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 is in a non-operated state, and the "second B reception output sound" corresponding to the operation button 410 is in the output state (see Figure 166), if the operation button 410 changes from a non-operated state to an operated state, the output state of the "second B reception output sound" will not change as a result, and will always remain unchanged (second B reception output sound Sβ2 at timing tBb2-C1).

Furthermore, in each of the above-described examples of presentations, when the sword ornament 5001 is changed from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to a non-operated state during the period in which the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, no display change occurs as a result (see Figures 168(f), 170(f), 172(f), and 176(f)). However, when the operation button 410 is changed from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to a non-operated state during the period in which the operation-related display for the operation button 410 is displayed, there are cases where a display change occurs as a result (see Figure 166(f)) and cases where it does not occur (see Figures 164(f) and 174(f)).

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, if the operation button 410 is changed from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to a non-operated state during the period in which the operation-related display for the operation button 410 is displayed, and this triggers a display change, then no new sound is output in conjunction with this change.

Furthermore, in the above-described examples of presentations, the operation-related displays do not necessarily have to be displayed in conjunction with the occurrence of a state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the operation means (sword ornament 5001, operation button 410). For example, during gameplay, operation-related displays may be displayed as explanations of the presentation, and during the period in which these displays are displayed, operation acceptance for the operation means may not be permitted, or there may be both cases in which operation acceptance is permitted and cases in which it is not permitted during the period in which these displays are displayed. Also, a state in which operation acceptance is permitted for the operation means may occur even when the operation-related displays are not displayed. Furthermore, the operation-related displays may be hidden even while the acceptance state is continuing, or the display of the operation-related displays may continue when the operation acceptance state ends. In short, it is sufficient if operation acceptance is permitted when the operation-related displays are displayed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned examples of presentations, the operation-related displays may be imitation images of the target (operating means) or textual information prompting action on the target (such as "Press"). Any indication that prompts action is acceptable.

Furthermore, for example, as a second configuration B2, a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result is obtained, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) that prompts operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and when an operation is received on the second operating means (operation button 410) The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to the reception, and at least a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as a first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "Message Display MB5" as a second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) and a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as a first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "Message Display MB3" as a second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to the reception of the operation to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001). The post-reception change can be executed multiple times (see Figures 168, 170, 172, etc.), and at least a second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) and a second specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) are provided as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see Figures 164, 166, etc.), and the second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) is the 2. When the second predetermined mode is displayed (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165), the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden (see, for example, Figure 179). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, if multiple operation requests are received for the second operation means (operation button 410), the interval until a new post-reception change corresponding to the operation request appears may be a fixed time (see Figures 164 and 179, etc.). In other words, in this case, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display for the operation button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined manner (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165), the interval between activation of the "auto-repeated button press function" for the second operation means (operation button 410) and the appearance of a new change after reception is set to a certain time. Therefore, it is expected that this will make it easier to recognize whether or not the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated, thereby providing a sense of security.

In this case, if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, or "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.), even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden. With this configuration, in the case of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), even if the instruction mode for automatic rapid pressing (the mode of the first operation-related display) is hidden, there is a possibility that another instruction mode for automatic rapid pressing (another mode of the first operation-related display) will appear within a predetermined time, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, in the case of the second operating means (operation button 410), when the instruction mode for automatic rapid pressing (the mode of the second operation-related display) is hidden, there is no possibility that another instruction mode for automatic rapid pressing (another mode of the second operation-related display) will appear within a predetermined time, thus effectively maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this case, whether the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined manner or in a first specific manner, the interval between multiple operation requests being received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) while the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and the appearance of a new post-reception change corresponding to those requests, may always be set to a predetermined time (a fixed time). That is, in this case, when the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), the interval until a new post-reception change appears is fixed, making it easier to recognize whether the "auto-repeated button press function" is activated or not, thereby providing a sense of security.

Furthermore, in realizing the second configuration B2 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the interval between multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 while the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operated state, and the appearance of a new post-reception change corresponding to those operation requests, may be set to a predetermined time (a fixed time), regardless of the type or presence of the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001."

Furthermore, in realizing the second configuration B2 and the configurations described above for each example of presentation, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the operation button 410 when the operation button 410 is operated and its operation state is maintained while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed, for example, by the "message display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165, may be made shorter than the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the sword ornament 5001 when the sword ornament 5001 is operated and its operation state is maintained while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001" is displayed, for example, by the "message display MB3" or "message display MB5".

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of presentations, when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed on the "message display MB1," the interval between multiple post-reception changes is constant. However, when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed on the "message display MB2," the interval between multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which the auto-repeated button press function accepts an operation) may be variable rather than constant. In other words, in this case, the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" can either make it easier to recognize that the "auto-repeated button press function" is enabled, or make it difficult to recognize that the "auto-repeated button press function" is enabled. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained through improved presentation.

Furthermore, in realizing the second configuration B2 and the configurations related to each of the above-described performance examples, the interval between multiple post-reception changes when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed on the "message display MB2" is an indefinite time, and may appear as an interval longer than a specific time (e.g., 1 second). In contrast, the interval between multiple post-reception changes when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operated state (a fixed interval), and the interval between multiple post-reception changes when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed on the "message display MB1" (a fixed interval), may be made so that they do not appear as an interval longer than a specific time (e.g., 1 second). In other words, in this case, the gap as the interval when the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function is activated for the operation button 410 while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed (the gap between the case of message display MB1 and the case of message display MB2) can be made to appear larger, and thus it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of effects, "a constant interval until a new post-reception change occurs" simply means that a new post-reception change occurs at a predetermined time interval; it does not necessarily have to be at the same time interval every time. For example, the time between the first post-reception change (when the control device is activated) and the second post-reception change (auto-repeated button press function) is set to 0.5 seconds, but thereafter, the post-reception changes (auto-repeated button press function) may be executed at 0.2-second intervals. In this way, "a constant interval until a new post-reception change occurs" can be achieved by including multiple "predetermined time intervals."

Furthermore, in realizing the second configuration B2 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-press function (long-press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, or the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-press function (long-press function) is enabled for the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the second configuration B2 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, it may be possible to ensure that the "operation-related display for operation button 410" is displayed, that multiple operation attempts for operation button 410 are permitted, and that simply putting operation button 410 into an operational state does not result in multiple operation attempts. However, it may also be possible to ensure that the "operation-related display for sword ornament 5001" is displayed, that multiple operation attempts for sword ornament 5001 are permitted, and that simply putting sword ornament 5001 into an operational state does not result in multiple operation attempts.

Furthermore, in realizing the second configuration B2 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, the interval between multiple executions of the post-reception change when the sword ornament 5001 is in the operational state is constant, but it may be set to be longer than the time when the interval between multiple executions of the post-reception change when the operational state of the operation button 410 is maintained is constant.

Furthermore, for example, the third configuration B3 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result is obtained, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a means that receives operation requests for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). The system includes a first post-reception change execution means capable of executing a corresponding post-reception change, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a corresponding post-reception change when an operation is received on the second operation means (operation button 410), wherein at least a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, or "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) and a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, wherein the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, and the system executes a corresponding post-reception change when an operation is received on the second operation means (sword ornament 5001). If the operation state is maintained after the post-attachment change is initiated, the post-attachment change corresponding to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figures 168, 170, 172, etc.), and at least a second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) and a second specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) are provided as modes for displaying the second operation-related display. Furthermore, if the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception is started, the operation state is maintained, and the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see Figures 164, 166, etc.), and the second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (for example, Figure 1 When the second predetermined mode is displayed (corresponding to the "Message Display MB1" shown in Figure 165), the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden (see, for example, Figure 179), and the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) will not be displayed in the first predetermined mode (for example, as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc. Even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated while the first specific mode (for example, the first example shown in Figure 181, or the second example shown in Figure 182, etc., "Message Display MB5") is displayed, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may not be initiated. Similarly, even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is operated while the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in either the second predetermined mode (for example, the "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) or the second specific mode (for example, the "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167), the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operating means may not be initiated. In other words, in this case, while the auto-click function can be activated when the first or second operation-related indicators are displayed, it becomes possible to maintain a suitable level of tension.

In this case, if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, or "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.), even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden. With this configuration, in the case of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), even if the instruction mode for automatic rapid pressing (the mode of the first operation-related display) is hidden, there is a possibility that another instruction mode for automatic rapid pressing (another mode of the first operation-related display) will appear within a predetermined time, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, in the case of the second operating means (operation button 410), when the instruction mode for automatic rapid pressing (the mode of the second operation-related display) is hidden, there is no possibility that another instruction mode for automatic rapid pressing (another mode of the second operation-related display) will appear within a predetermined time, thus effectively maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, even if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated while the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in either a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as the first example shown in Figure 181, or "Message Display MB5" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) or a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as the first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "Message Display MB3" as the second example shown in Figure 182, etc.), it is possible that the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operation means will not be initiated. For example, during the period when the operation-related display corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, the "state in which the sword ornament 5001 is not capable of automatic rapid-fire" corresponds to the periods of timing tBc1 to tBc2, timing tBc2-C2 to tBc2-C3, and timing tBc2-C4 to tBc3 shown in Figure 168, or the periods of timing tBd1 to tBd2, timing tBd2-C2 to tBd2-C3, and timing tBd2-C4 to tBd3 shown in Figure 170, or the periods of timing tBe1 to tBe2, timing tBe2-C2 to tBe2-C3, and timing tBe2-C4 to tBe3 shown in Figure 172. In other words, in this case, the sense of tension when the first operation-related display is displayed can be suitably maintained.

In this case, even if the first operation means is operated while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in either a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" as a first example shown in Figure 181, or "Message Display MB5" as a second example shown in Figure 182, etc.) or a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB4" as a first example shown in Figure 181, etc., or "Message Display MB3" as a second example shown in Figure 182, etc.), and the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operation means is not initiated, if the state in which the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated is maintained (while the state is maintained, if the conditions for allowing operation reception to the first operation means (conditions for the occurrence of an allowable state) are met), a situation may occur in which the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point. For example, the phrase "...when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state (and while it is maintained, the conditions for allowing operation reception to the first operating means (conditions for the occurrence of an allowed state) are met), the situation in which multiple post-reception changes corresponding to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state" corresponds to timings tBc2-C3 shown in Figure 168, timings tBd2-C3 shown in Figure 170, and timings tBe2-C3 shown in Figure 172. In other words, in this case, even if the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the auto-repeated button press function can be activated by continuing that operating state, thus allowing for the desirable maintenance of the game's enjoyment.

In this case, even if the operation state is maintained after multiple post-reception changes have occurred in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) while the first operation-related indicator (operation-related indicator of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, there may be cases where no further post-reception changes occur while the first operation-related indicator (operation-related indicator of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed (i.e., the so-called auto-repeated button press function is disabled) (for example, this corresponds to the timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168, the timing tBd2-C2 shown in Figure 170, or the timing tBe2-C2 shown in Figure 172). However, even in this case, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state (and the conditions for allowing operation reception to the first operating means are met while it is maintained), the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed again based on the previously maintained operating state (corresponding to timings tBc2-C3 shown in Figure 168, timings tBd2-C3 shown in Figure 170, and timings tBe2-C3 shown in Figure 172, etc.).

Furthermore, if the second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) is displayed in either a second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) or a second specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated, but the post-reception change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not executed, even if the state in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated is maintained, the system may be configured so that a situation does not occur where the post-reception change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state. In other words, in this case, with respect to the second operating means, if the so-called auto-repeated button press function is not activated while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, there is no possibility of operation acceptance being made based on the detection of that operation state, even if the operation state is continued. Therefore, in realizing the dramatic effect of the auto-repeated button press function, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained.

As mentioned above, in implementing the third configuration B3 and the configurations described in the various performance examples, the "Message Display MB3" may be hidden during its display (before the predetermined display time has elapsed) (early termination of operation-related displays such as the Message Display MB3). However, in this case, it is desirable that the "Message Display MB4" is always displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since the "Message Display MB3" was hidden. Furthermore, it is desirable that the time between the hiding of the "Message Display MB3" and the display of the "Message Display MB4" be set to a predetermined time (a fixed time).

Furthermore, for example, the fourth configuration B4 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) that prompts operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operation The system includes a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the operation means (operation button 410), and at least a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183, etc.) and a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB3" shown in Figures 182 and 183, etc.) are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-reception change in response to the operation received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times (Figures 168, 17 0, see Figure 172, etc.) At least two predetermined modes (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) and two specific modes (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) are provided as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see Figures 164, 166, etc.), and the second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) is the second predetermined mode (for example, Figure 1 When the second operation-related display (the operation-related display for the operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (for example, the "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden (see, for example, Figure 179). When the second operation-related display (the operation-related display for the operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (for example, the "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167), it is possible to output a second operation-related sound (for example, the "Operation-Related Output Sound OB2" shown in Figures 166 and 179) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410).

In this case, if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183), even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB3" shown in Figures 182 and 183) before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden. Furthermore, in this case, it may be possible to output a first operation-related sound (corresponding to the "operation-related output sound OB3") related to the operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). With such a configuration, it is expected that the decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183) is hidden can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when at least the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB3" shown in Figures 182 and 183), it may be possible to output a first operation-related sound (operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). Furthermore, with respect to the first operation-related sound, if it is output before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183) was hidden (if the first operation-related display was shown in the first specific mode before the predetermined time had elapsed), the output state is always maintained for a first time (a predetermined output time) (see Figure 182(g)). On the other hand, if it is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (corresponding to the "message display MB5") was hidden (if the first operation-related display was shown in the first specific mode after the predetermined time had elapsed), the output state may be maintained for a first time (a predetermined output time), or it may be made inaudible (not output) before the first time (a predetermined output time) has elapsed (see Figure 183(g)). With this configuration, the presentation will differ depending on how much time has passed since the first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183) was hidden before the first operation-related sound (for example, corresponding to the "operation-related output sound OB3" shown in Figure 168) was output, which is expected to provide a suitable sense of tension. In particular, if the first operation-related sound is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode was hidden (if the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode after the predetermined time has elapsed), the output state may be maintained for a first hour (a predetermined output time), or it may become inaudible (no output) before the first hour (a predetermined output time) has elapsed. Therefore, it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be provided while maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when at least the second operation-related display (the operation-related display for the operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (message display MB2), a second operation-related sound (corresponding to, for example, the "operation-related output sound OB2" shown in Figures 166 and 179) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) may be output. In particular, the output state of this second operation-related sound may be maintained for a second period (a predetermined output time). With this configuration, although a relatively long time is required between the display of the second operation-related display in the second predetermined mode (message display MB1) and the appearance of the second specific mode (message display MB2) (see Figure 179), when the second specific mode appears, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the situation in which the second specific mode is displayed is present.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the fourth configuration B4 and the various performance examples above, for example, if the operation-related output sound OB3 is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the message display MB5 was hidden (see Figure 183), there are two possibilities: the output state is maintained for a first time (a predetermined output time), or it is made inaudible (no output) before the first time (a predetermined output time) has elapsed. In either case, it is desirable that the manner (type of sound) of the operation-related output sound OB3 be the same (for example, a special manner).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the fourth configuration B4 and the various performance examples above, it is desirable that, when an operation request is received for the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related output sound OB3 is being output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the message display MB5 was hidden, the post-reception change in response to the operation request be performed in the same manner (the same change) whether the output state of the operation-related output sound OB3 is maintained for the first time (a predetermined output time) or whether it is made inaudible (non-output) before the first time (a predetermined output time) has elapsed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the fourth configuration B4 and the various performance examples above, the operation-related output sound OB3 (see Figure 168, etc.) may be made inaudible (non-output) before a predetermined output time has elapsed. This may be triggered by an operation on the sword ornament 5001, or it may be made inaudible without an operation on the sword ornament 5001 (based on the fulfillment of predetermined inaudible conditions).

Furthermore, in realizing the fourth configuration B4 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001" is displayed by the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183, for example, operation-related sounds (acceptable sounds) related to operations on the sword ornament 5001 may be suppressed (see Figures 172 and 183, etc.).

Furthermore, for example, the fifth configuration B5 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result has been obtained, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is received, and a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) that prompts operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410), and at least a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183, etc.) and a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB3" shown in Figures 182 and 183, etc.) are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-reception change in response to the operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times. (See Figures 168, 170, 172, etc.) At least two predetermined modes (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) and two specific modes (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) are provided as modes for displaying the second operation-related display, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see Figures 164, 166, etc.), and the second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) When the second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) is displayed, the second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden (see, for example, Figure 179). Furthermore, if the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode after the predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden, the display state can be maintained for a second display time (a predetermined display time). Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the second specific mode is currently displayed.

In this case, if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183), even if the first predetermined mode is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB3" shown in Figures 182 and 183) before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden. Furthermore, in this case, it may be possible to output a first operation-related sound (corresponding to the "operation-related output sound OB3") related to the operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). With such a configuration, it is expected that the decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183) is hidden can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this case, especially if the first specific mode (message display MB3) is displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) was hidden, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the first specific mode is displayed and multiple operation requests have been received for the first operating means, the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) will always remain displayed for the first display time (a predetermined display time) (see Figure 182), but after the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) is hidden If a first specific mode (message display MB3) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the first specific mode is displayed, and multiple operation requests have been received for the first operating means, the first operation-related display (such as the message display MB3, an operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) may either remain displayed for the duration of the first display time (a predetermined display time) or be hidden before the duration of the first display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed (see Figure 183). In other words, in the example shown in Figure 183, from timing tBe4A-2 onward, the first operation-related display (such as the message display MB3, an operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is made to remain displayed for a predetermined duration. However, instead, the first operation-related display (such as the message display MB3, an operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) may either remain displayed for the duration of the first display duration (a predetermined duration) or be made invisible before the first display duration (a predetermined duration) has elapsed. It should be noted that this configuration for "early termination of the first operation-related display (such as the message display MB3, an operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001)" is an example of applying the above-mentioned "early termination of operation-related displays such as the message display MB3," that is, when the condition for early termination of the audible output of the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is met at any timing within the time range TBc shown in Figure 168(g), the operation-related displays (such as the mock image display MG-B3 and the message display MB3) will also be hidden based on the fact that the same condition has been met. With this configuration, the dramatic effect will differ depending on how much time has passed since the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) was hidden before the first specific mode (message display MB3) appeared, and it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided. In particular, if the first specified mode (message display MB5) is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first specified mode (message display MB3) was hidden, there are two possibilities: that the display state is maintained for the first display time (a predetermined display time), or that it is hidden before the first display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be appropriately provided while maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the fifth configuration B5 and the configurations described above for each example of presentation, if "Message Display MB2" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB1" was hidden, and if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state while "Message Display MB2" is displayed and multiple operations are received for the operation button 410, then "Message Display MB2" may be configured to either maintain its display state for a second display time (a predetermined display time) or be hidden before the second display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed.

In this regard, the second B acceptance state shown in Figure 166, as described above, includes both cases: one in which the "state in which operation acceptance for operation button 410 is permitted" is terminated early (before timing tBb2-C2) when operation acceptance for operation button 410 is triggered; and another in which the "state in which operation acceptance for operation button 410 is permitted" is not terminated early (before timing tBb2-C2) regardless of how many times operation acceptance for operation button 410 is performed. In other words, in a situation where the operation button 410 is kept in an operational state while the "Message Display MB2" is displayed and multiple operations are accepted for the operation button 410, if the "Message Display MB2" is hidden before the second display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed, this corresponds to the "state in which operations are accepted for the operation button 410" being terminated early before timing tBb2-C2. In this case, the "Message Display MB2" is hidden because the condition for early termination of the "state in which operations are accepted for the operation button 410" has been met. In contrast, in a situation where the "Message Display MB2" is displayed and the operation button 410 remains in an operational state, and multiple operations are received for the operation button 410, if the "Message Display MB2" is not hidden before the second display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed, this corresponds to not prematurely ending the "state in which operation reception for the operation button 410 is permitted" before timing tBb2-C2. In this case, since the condition for prematurely ending the "state in which operation reception for the operation button 410 is permitted" is not met, the "Message Display MB2" will remain displayed for the predetermined display time.

Furthermore, in the configurations for each of the above-described performance examples, if "Message Display MB3" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB5" was hidden, regardless of whether or not operations are accepted (multiple times) for the sword ornament 5001 while "Message Display MB3" is displayed, there are two possibilities: that "Message Display MB3" is displayed for the first display time (a predetermined display time), or that it is hidden before the first display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed (see Figure 183). In this regard, if "Message Display MB2" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB1" was hidden, and while "Message Display MB2" is displayed, the operation button 410 remains in an operated state and multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410, then "Message Display MB2" may be displayed for the duration of the second display time (a predetermined display time), or it may be hidden before the duration of the second display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed (it may be terminated early). However, if "Message Display MB2" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB1" was hidden, and while "Message Display MB2" is displayed, the operation button 410 is not operated and no operation requests are received for the operation button 410, then "Message Display MB2" may not be hidden before the duration of the second display time (a predetermined display time) has elapsed, and it may be set to always be displayed for the duration of the second display time (a predetermined display time). With this configuration, it becomes possible to provide a sense of tension when "Message Display MB3" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB5" was hidden, and a sense of tension when "Message Display MB2" is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB1" was hidden, through different visual effects, thereby maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the fifth configuration B5 and the configurations described above for each example of presentation, if "Message Display MB3" is displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB5" was hidden, regardless of whether the sword ornament 5001 remains in an operational state and multiple operation receptions are performed while "Message Display MB3" is displayed, "Message Display MB3" may not be hidden before the first display time (predetermined display time) has elapsed, but rather displayed for the entire first display time (predetermined display time) (see Figure 182).

Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001" is displayed in message display MB3, it is desirable that the form of message display MB3 be the same whether or not the display state continues over the first display time (a predetermined display time). Similarly, when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed in message display MB2, it is desirable that the form of "message display MB2" be the same whether or not the display state continues over the second display time (a predetermined display time).

Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001" is displayed in message display MB3, it is desirable that the same change (the same behavior) appears as a post-operation change when an operation is received for the sword ornament 5001, regardless of whether the display state continues for the first display time (a predetermined display time) or not. Similarly, when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410" is displayed in message display MB2, it is desirable that even if the display state continues for the second display time (a predetermined display time) (i.e., no operation is received for the operation button 410), the same change (the same behavior) as the post-operation change that appears when the display state does not continue for the second display time (a predetermined display time) is executed.

Furthermore, for example, the sixth configuration B6 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result is obtained, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) that prompts operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and an operation on the second operating means (operation button 410). The system includes a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation being received, and at least a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183, etc.) and a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB3" shown in Figures 182 and 183, etc.) are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-reception change in response to the operation received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figures 168, 170, 172, etc.), and the mode for displaying the second operation-related display is the At least two predetermined modes (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) and a second specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) are provided, and when the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see Figures 164, 166, etc.), and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165), the second predetermined mode is hidden and then The second operation-related display (the operation-related display for the operation button 410) will not be newly displayed in the second specific mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) before a fixed time has elapsed (see, for example, Figure 179). When the second operation-related display is displayed, it is possible to output a second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound shown in Figure 164 or the second B operation-related output sound shown in Figure 166) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410). Therefore, even if the second specific mode (message display MB2) is not displayed for a long period after the second predetermined mode (message display MB1) has been hidden, when the second specific mode appears, it can suitably suggest that the conditions for the second specific mode to appear are in place.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183), even if the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (message display MB3) before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden (see Figure 182). Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed, a first operation-related sound (third B operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be output (see Figure 182(g)). Such a configuration is expected to suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game when the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) is hidden.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) is displayed, regardless of whether it is displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB1) or the second specific mode (message display MB2), the second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound shown in Figure 164 or the second B operation-related output sound shown in Figure 166) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) may be output as a single sound that does not appear multiple times. In contrast, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in the first predetermined mode (message display MB5), the first operation-related sound related to the operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is not output (see Figures 172(g), 182(g), 183(g), etc.). However, when the first operation-related display is displayed in the first specific mode (message display MB3), regardless of whether the first specific mode (message display MB3) is displayed before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) was hidden, the first operation-related sound (thirdB operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be output as a repeating sound in which the same sound appears multiple times (see Figures 168(g), 182(g), 183(g), etc.). With this configuration, when the second operation-related indicator (operation-related indicator for the operation button 410) is displayed, the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) is prompted through a single sound output, whereas when the first operation-related indicator (operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001) is displayed, the operation of the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) may not be prompted through a sound output. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension regarding the possibility of forgetting to perform an operation will be appropriately created. However, conversely, when the first operation-related indicator (operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in the first specific mode (message display MB3), the operation of the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is prompted more strongly through multiple sound outputs, thus it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be appropriately maintained.

In this case, in particular, if the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in the first specific mode (message display MB3) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) was hidden, a specific sound is output as the first operation-related sound (third B operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) in such a way that it always appears multiple times (see Figure 182(g)). However, if the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in the first specific mode (message display MB3) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) was hidden, there may be at least cases where the specific sound appears multiple times as the first operation-related sound (third B operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and cases where the specific sound appears only once (see Figure 183(g)). With this configuration, even when the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in the first specific mode (message display MB3), the operation of the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is not necessarily strongly prompted through multiple sound outputs. Therefore, it is expected that the game's enjoyment will be suitably maintained while appropriately conveying a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the method for "outputting a specific sound so that it appears only once" can be achieved by pre-preparing such sound data and playing it back, or by stopping the playback of the sound data used in the method for "outputting a specific sound so that it appears multiple times," or by stopping playback midway in response to an operation on the first operation means, or by any other method.

Furthermore, in realizing the sixth configuration B6 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the first B operation-related output sound shown in Figure 164 and the second B operation-related output sound shown in Figure 166 may be output as the same sound.

Furthermore, in implementing the configuration B6 described above and the various performance examples, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410" is displayed, regardless of whether it is displayed on "message display MB1" or "message display MB2," the operation-related output sounds (1B operation-related output sound, 2B operation-related output sound) may be made audible at least once (not terminated prematurely).

Furthermore, in each of the above-described performance examples, under the circumstances shown in Figure 182, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 is output in a manner that always repeats the "specific sound" multiple times. That is, regardless of whether or not an operation is received by the sword ornament 5001, it is repeatedly audible a predetermined number of times. Also, under the circumstances shown in Figure 183, although the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 may terminate playback midway through, whether or not playback is terminated midway is determined based on conditions unrelated to the operation received by the sword ornament 5001.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the sixth configuration B6 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable that, when an operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 while the third B operation-related output sound OB3, which is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the message display MB1 was hidden, is in an audible state, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception be executed in the same manner (in the same way) whether the "specific sound" as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 is audible multiple times or only once.

Furthermore, the method for making the "specific sound" (OB3, the output sound related to operation 3B) audible multiple times can be set as appropriate. For example, this can be achieved by repeatedly reading a single data point, or by storing multiple repetitions of the sound within a single data point and outputting the repetition by playing back that data. However, in this case, interrupting the playback of the data will result in only one repetition being audible.

Furthermore, for example, the seventh configuration B7 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) that prompts operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and a post-reception change execution means that executes a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the second operating means (operation button 410). The system includes a second possible post-reception change execution means, and at least a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183, etc.) and a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" shown in Figures 182 and 183, etc.) are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figures 168, 170, 172, etc.), and a second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) and At least two specific modes (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) are provided, and when the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see Figures 164, 166, etc.), and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167), the second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) can be changed to the second specific mode (for example, shown in Figures 164 and 165) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden. There are no new displays in the "Message Display MB1" (see, for example, Figure 180). While the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode (Message Display MB2), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and the post-reception change in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) has been executed multiple times. When the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, a corresponding post-non-operation display (Post-non-operation display HB2) may be displayed (see Figures 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.). Therefore, it can be expected that the second specific mode (Message Display MB1) will not be displayed for a long period of time, triggered by the second operation means (operation button 410) changing from an operated state to a non-operated state.

In this case, if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183), even if the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (message display MB3) before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden (see Figure 182). Such a configuration is expected to suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game when the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) is hidden.

Furthermore, in this case, while the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined mode (message display MB2), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-unoperated display (post-unoperated display HB2) may be displayed, and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is in an operated state. When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the operation state is maintained and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), it is possible to ensure that no corresponding post-unoperated display is shown, regardless of whether the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (message display MB5) or a first specific mode (message display MB3) (or any displayable mode). With such a configuration, it is easier to recognize when the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released, but it is harder to recognize when the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released. Therefore, it is expected that this will appropriately enhance the sense of tension when using the so-called auto-repeated button function.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined mode (message display MB2), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-unoperated display (post-unoperated display HB2) may be displayed (see Figure 166(f)). However, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) is not displayed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-unoperated display may not be displayed (see Figure 174(f)). With this configuration, even if the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released, if the auto-repeated button press function was enabled while the second operation-related display was not displayed, the display after non-operation will not be shown. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-repeated button press function (long-press function) on the second operating means (operation button 410) can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined mode (message display MB2), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-unoperated display (post-unoperated display HB2) may be displayed (see Figure 166(f)). However, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410) is displayed in a second specific mode (message display MB1), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-unoperated display may not be displayed. With this configuration, even if the operation state of the second operating means is released while the second operation-related display is displayed, if the auto-repeated button press function was enabled while the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) was displayed in the second specific mode (message display MB1), the display after non-operation will not be shown. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-repeated button press function (long-press function) on the second operating means while the second operation-related display is displayed can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display for operation button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined mode (message display MB2), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, if the non-operation display (non-operation display HB2) is displayed as a result of the second operation means (operation button 410) changing from an operated state to a non-operated state, it is possible to prevent the output of a new sound as a result of this non-operation state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in each of the above-described examples of presentations, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410" is displayed on "Message Display MB1," the "operation-related display for operation button 410" will not be newly displayed on "Message Display MB2" before a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB1" was hidden (see Figure 179). Similarly, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410" is displayed on "Message Display MB2," the "operation-related display for operation button 410" will not be newly displayed on "Message Display MB1" before a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB2" was hidden (see Figure 180).

Furthermore, for example, the eighth configuration B8 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a second operation-related display means that can display a second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) that prompts operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received on the second operating means (operation button 410). The system includes a means for executing changes after receiving a notification, and at least a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183, etc.) and a first specific mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB3" shown in Figures 182 and 183, etc.) are provided as modes for displaying the first operation-related display, and when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated and the operation state is maintained while the first operation-related display is displayed in either the first predetermined mode or the first specific mode, the changes after receiving a notification in response to the operation notification to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figures 168, 170, 172, etc.), and a second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167) and a second specific mode (for example, At least one of the following is provided: (corresponding to the "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165), and when the second operation-related display is displayed in either the second predetermined mode or the second specific mode, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated and the operation state is maintained, the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times (see Figures 164, 166, etc.). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "Message Display MB2" shown in Figures 166 and 167), the second operation-related display (operation-related display of the operation button 410) is displayed in the second specific mode (for example, the "Message Display MB1" shown in Figures 164 and 165) before a predetermined time has elapsed since the second predetermined mode was hidden. There are no cases where a new display (e.g., see Figure 180), and while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB2), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and the post-reception change in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) has been executed multiple times. When the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this can trigger the de-inhibition of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figures 166(h) and 180(h)). Therefore, it can be expected that the change in the second operation means (operation button 410) from an operated state to a non-operated state will suggest that the second specific mode (message display MB1) will not be displayed for a long period of time.

In this case, if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (for example, corresponding to the "message display MB5" shown in Figures 182 and 183), even if the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) is hidden, the first operation-related display may be newly displayed in a first specific mode (message display MB3) before a predetermined time has elapsed since it was hidden (see Figure 182). Such a configuration is expected to suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game when the first predetermined mode (message display MB5) is hidden.

Furthermore, in this case, while the second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) is displayed in the second predetermined mode (message display MB2), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this triggers the deafening of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figures 166(h) and 180(h)), while the first operation means (sword decoration) When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, regardless of whether the first operation-related display (operation-related display of the sword ornament 5001) is displayed in a first predetermined mode (message display MB5) or a first specific mode (message display MB3) (or any displayable mode), this may prevent the sound effect that was audible at that time from becoming inaudible. With such a configuration, the release of the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is easily recognizable, while the release of the operating state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is difficult to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be created when using the so-called auto-repeated button function.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display for operation button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined mode (message display MB2), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this triggers at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the second B shown in Figures 166(h) and 180(h)). While the post-reception output sound Sα2) is made inaudible, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display for operation button 410) is not displayed, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an inoperable state, it may be possible to prevent at least one of the sound effects that was in an audible state at that time from being made inaudible as a result. With such a configuration, even if the operated state of the second operation means (operation button 410) is released, if the auto-repeated button function was enabled while the second operation-related display was not displayed, at least one of the sound effects that was in an audible state at that time will not be made inaudible. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) on the second operation means (operation button 410) can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined mode (message display MB2), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this triggers at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figures 166(h) and 180(h)). The sound is made inaudible, but when the second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) is displayed in a second specific mode (message display MB1), the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) have been performed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an inoperable state, this may be used as a trigger to prevent the sound effect that was in an audible state at that time from being made inaudible (see Figure 164). With this configuration, even if the operation state of the second operation means is released while the second operation-related display is displayed, if the auto-repeated button function was enabled while the second operation-related display (operation-related display of operation button 410) was displayed in the second specific mode (message display MB1), at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time will not become inaudible. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when using the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) on the second operation means while the second operation-related display is displayed will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display for operation button 410) is displayed in a second predetermined mode (message display MB2), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is made inaudible when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, it is possible to ensure that no new sound is output as a result of this non-operated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in each of the above-described examples of presentations, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410" is displayed on "Message Display MB1," the "operation-related display for operation button 410" will not be newly displayed on "Message Display MB2" before a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB1" was hidden (see Figure 179). Similarly, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410" is displayed on "Message Display MB2," the "operation-related display for operation button 410" will not be newly displayed on "Message Display MB1" before a predetermined time has elapsed since "Message Display MB2" was hidden (see Figure 180).

Furthermore, for example, the ninth configuration B9 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operation A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) in which multiple operation requests can be received for the operating means (sword ornament 5001), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the operation request received for the second operating means (operation button 410), and a display prompting operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and when the display is in the display state and the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, multiple operation requests can be received for the second operating means (operation button 410). The system is further equipped with a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) is output, and the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410). When the situation is as described above, the second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) is not rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, but remains audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related sound is audible, the second operation means is put into an operational state, and if this operational state is maintained thereafter, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) can be set to a time of a specific duration or less (see Figure 164). In other words, in this case, since the second operation-related sound is not rendered inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, it is expected that the situation in which multiple post-reception changes occur at relatively short intervals (a time of a specific duration or less) can be made less noticeable, thereby effectively maintaining a sense of tension.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168 or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170) related to the operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made available for output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of the operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound will be output after a predetermined output time has elapsed. In some cases, the system may be made inaudible beforehand (see Figure 168(g)), and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) related to the operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) is made available for output, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of the operation on the second operation means, 2. Operation-related sounds are not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but remain audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 164(g) and 166(g)). When the first operation-related sound (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168 or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170) is audible, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is put into an operating state, and thereafter, if this operating state is maintained, the interval between multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the so-called auto-repeated function) is the predetermined output time of the first operation-related sound. Regardless of whether the system was made inaudible beforehand, the interval between operations is always set to be less than or equal to a specific time. When the second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) is audible, the second operation means (operation button 410) is put into an operational state, and the operational state is maintained thereafter, the interval between multiple post-reception changes (the interval between post-reception changes in the so-called auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time (see Figure 164) or longer than a specific time (see Figure 166). With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated and maintained while the first operation-related sound is being output, regardless of whether the first operation-related sound becomes inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance by the so-called auto-repeated button function is always short. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be able to easily recognize that the auto-repeated button function is activated, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, if the second operating means (operating button 410) is operated and maintained while the second operation-related sound is being output, in addition to the second operation-related sound not becoming inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance by the so-called auto-repeated button function is not necessarily short, and may be longer than a specific time. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be able to easily recognize that the auto-repeated button function is activated, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168 or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made available for output. When the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see Figure 168(g) or Figure 183(g), etc.) or may remain audible for the predetermined output time (see Figure 182(g), etc.).

In this case, it is desirable that the output sound (type of sound) of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 be the same whether it is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed or made audible over the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the message display MB3 be displayed in the same manner whether the output sound OB3 related to the 3B operation becomes inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, or whether the output sound OB3 related to the 3B operation remains audible for the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, in realizing the ninth configuration B9 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operated state while the message display MB3 (see Figure 168) is displayed, and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, the interval until a new post-reception change appears in response to these operation requests may be less than or equal to a specific time, and does not necessarily have to be set as a predetermined time (a fixed time).

Furthermore, the interval at which the so-called auto-button function is activated for the operation button 410 while the message display MB1 (see Figure 164) is displayed (the interval until a new change appears after a new input), and the interval at which the so-called auto-button function is activated for the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related displays (message displays MB3, MB4, MB5) for the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the so-called auto-button function, are displayed (the interval until a new change appears after a new input), may both be less than or equal to a specific time. However, even in this case, the times (intervals) for each may be set to be different times (intervals).

For example, the interval at which the so-called auto-click function is activated for the sword ornament 5001 (the interval until a new change appears after a new input) while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-click function (message display MB3, MB4, MB5)" is displayed is set to be longer than the interval at which the so-called auto-click function is activated for the operation button 410 (the interval until a new change appears after a new input) while the message display MB1 (see Figure 164) is displayed as the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-click function," and If the message display MB2 (see Figure 166) is shown as "Operation-related display regarding operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-button function," and the interval for when the so-called auto-button function is activated for operation button 410 is set to a shorter time than the interval until a change appears after a new input, then the gap in the interval when the so-called auto-button function is activated for operation button 410 while the "Operation-related display regarding operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-button function" is shown can be made to appear larger, which is expected to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the ninth configuration B9 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, and the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the operation button 410, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

Furthermore, in realizing the ninth configuration B9 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the interval between the execution of multiple post-reception changes when the sword ornament 5001 is put into an operational state while the operation-related display (message display MB3, MB4, MB5) for the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function, and the corresponding operation-related sound are being played, and this operational state is maintained thereafter, may be set to a fixed time rather than an indefinite time.

Furthermore, in realizing the ninth configuration B9 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, the interval between multiple post-reception changes when the operation button 410 is put into an operational state while the operation-related display (message display MB1, message display MB2) for the operation button 410, which is the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function, and the corresponding operation-related sound are being played, and this operational state is maintained thereafter, may be set to a fixed time (see Figure 164) or to an indefinite time (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the ninth configuration B9 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, the interval between multiple executions of post-reception changes when the operation button 410 is activated while the operation-related display (message display MB1, message display MB2) and its corresponding operation-related sound are being played, and this operation state is maintained, may be an indefinite time (see Figure 166). However, the shortest possible indefinite time may be longer than the specified time mentioned above.

Furthermore, in realizing the ninth configuration B9 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the post-reception change when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operational state is the same whether the "operation-related sound for the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed or remains audible for the predetermined output time. However, when the "operation-related sound for the operation button 410, which is the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is made audible for the predetermined output time, the post-reception change when the operation button 410 is maintained in the operational state may be executed as a specific change or as a change different from the specific change.

Furthermore, for example, the tenth configuration B10 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in the operation state, A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which allows for multiple operation requests to be received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001); a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation request received for the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display prompting operation of the second operation means (operation button 410), which, when the display is in the display state, allows for multiple operation requests to be received for the second operation means (operation button 410). The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) can be output, and the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a post-reception change in response to the reception of an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410) is performed. When the situation is occurring, the second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) is not made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, but remains audible for the predetermined output time. When the second operation-related sound is audible, the second operation means is put into an operating state, and if this operating state is maintained thereafter, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) can be set to a fixed time (see Figure 164). In other words, in this case, since the second operation-related sound is not made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, it is expected that a sense of tension can be appropriately maintained by making it difficult to recognize that multiple operation receptions are occurring within a fixed time.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168 or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170) related to the operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made available for output, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of the operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound becomes inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed. In some cases, this may occur (see Figure 168(g)), and when a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a second operation-related sound related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) is made available for output. When the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of an operation to the second operation means, the second operation-related sound is output for a predetermined duration. The first operation-related sound (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168 or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170) is made audible when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is put into an operating state, and when this operating state is maintained thereafter, the interval between multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the so-called auto-repeated function) is constant, regardless of whether the first operation-related sound is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed or not. The interval between multiple post-reception changes (the interval between post-reception changes in the so-called auto-repeated pressing function) when the second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164 or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) is made audible, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is put into an operating state, and the operating state is maintained thereafter, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time, but not an indefinite time) (see Figure 164), or an indefinite time (see Figure 166). With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated and maintained while the first operation-related sound is being output, regardless of whether the first operation-related sound becomes inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance by the so-called auto-button function is always a predetermined time, not an indefinite time. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be able to easily recognize that the auto-button function is activated, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, if the second operating means (operating button 410) is operated and maintained while the second operation-related sound is being output, in addition to the second operation-related sound not becoming inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, the interval at which changes occur after acceptance by the so-called auto-button function is not necessarily a fixed time (a predetermined time, not an indefinite time), but may be an indefinite time. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be able to easily recognize that the auto-button function is activated, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168 or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made available for output. When the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see Figure 168(g) or Figure 183(g), etc.) or may remain audible for the predetermined output time (see Figure 182(g), etc.).

In this case, it is desirable that the output sound (type of sound) of the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 be the same whether it is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed or made audible over the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the message display MB3 be displayed in the same manner whether the 3B operation-related output sound OB3 becomes inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, or remains audible for the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B10 described above and the various performance examples, "undefined time" refers to a time that is not predetermined. For example, this can be achieved by performing a performance judgment each time an operation is received while the operation button 410 is in an operational state, determining whether or not to trigger a change after the operation is received, and then triggering the change only when a special judgment result is obtained. However, this is not the only method for realizing this configuration.

Furthermore, in realizing the tenth configuration B10 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, or the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 10th configuration B10 and the various performance examples above, if the operation button 410 is put into an operational state when the "operation-related sound associated with the operation of the operation button 410" is audible, and the operation state is maintained thereafter, the interval between multiple executions of post-reception changes (the interval between operation receptions by the so-called auto-repeated function) is set to an indefinite time (see Figure 166). Even the shortest possible indefinite time may be set to be longer than the time when the interval between multiple executions of post-reception changes is constant when the operation state of the operation button 410 is maintained (see Figure 164).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 10th configuration B10 and the various performance examples above, if the operation button 410 is put into an operational state when the "operation-related sound associated with the operation of the operation button 410" is audible, and the operation state is maintained thereafter, and the interval between multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which operation is received by the so-called auto-repeated function) is set to an indefinite time, then even the shortest of the times that can be adopted as this indefinite time may be longer than the interval (a fixed interval) between multiple post-reception changes when the operation state of the sword ornament 5001 is maintained (see Figures 168, 170, 172, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 10th configuration B10 and the various performance examples above, when the "operation-related sound associated with the operation of the sword ornament 5001" is audible, the sword ornament 5001 is put into an operating state, and then this operating state is maintained, the interval between multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which operation is received by the so-called auto-repeated function) is constant. However, it may be set to be longer than the time when the interval between multiple post-reception changes is performed while the operating state of the operation button 410 is maintained (see Figure 164).

Furthermore, for example, the 11th configuration B11 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operation-related display (sword ornament as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) can receive operation reception multiple times. The system comprises a first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the operation button 410) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), wherein when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound (Figure 1) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) is played. When the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 64 and the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166 are available for output, and the second operation-related sound is audible, and the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operation button 410), the second operation-related sound (the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164 and the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but remains audible for the predetermined output time, and the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. Even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated while the operation is in progress, the post-operation change corresponding to the operation received by the first operating means may not be initiated (see Figures 168, 182, 183, etc.). Similarly, even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is operated while the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the post-operation change corresponding to the operation received by the second operating means may not be initiated (see Figures 164, 166, 179, 180, etc.). Therefore, while the auto-repeated function can be activated when the second operation-related display is displayed, the sense of tension can be suitably maintained. Furthermore, it is expected that the sense of tension will also be maintained when the first operation-related display is displayed.

In this case, even if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operation means is not executed, if the state in which the first operation means is operated is maintained (while the state is maintained, the conditions for allowing operation reception to the first operation means (conditions for the occurrence of an allowable state) are met), the system will respond to the operation reception to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point. If a situation arises in which the post-reception change is executed multiple times, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated while the second operation related display (operation related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, but the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operation means is not started, even if the state in which the second operation means is operated is maintained, the system may be configured so that a situation arises in which the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state. With this configuration, regarding the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), even if the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, the auto-repeated button function can be activated if the operation state is continued, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game appropriately. On the other hand, regarding the second operating means (operation button 410), if the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated while the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, even if the operation state is continued, there is no possibility of operation acceptance based on the detection of that operation state. Therefore, in realizing the dramatic effect of the auto-repeated button function, it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (third B operation-related output sound OB3 or fourth B operation-related output sound OB4) related to the operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound (third B operation-related output sound OB3) is audible and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see Figures 168 and 183), or it may be made audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 170 and 182). Furthermore, when a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, a second operation-related sound (first B operation-related output sound OB1 or second B operation-related output sound OB2) related to the operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) is made available for output. When the second operation-related sound (first B operation-related output sound OB1 or second B operation-related output sound OB2) is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception on the second operation means, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may remain audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 164 and 166). With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated button function is activated for the second operation means (operation button 410), and a sense of tension regarding whether the operating state should be maintained in such a situation can be added. In contrast, for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), there are cases where it is easy to recognize whether the auto-repeated button press function is enabled, and cases where it is difficult to recognize. In either case, since the auto-repeated button press function can be activated by continuing that operating state, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained while adding a sense of tension.

However, the process of making the first operation-related sound inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed does not necessarily have to be triggered by the reception of an operation to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) (although it may be triggered by the reception of an operation to the first operation means). In other words, in this case, regardless of whether or not an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), there are two possibilities: the first operation-related sound is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed, and the first operation-related sound is not made inaudible and is output for the predetermined output time.

Furthermore, even if the operation state is maintained after multiple post-reception changes have occurred in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), there may be cases where no further post-reception changes occur while the first operation-related display is displayed (i.e., the so-called auto-repeated function is disabled) (see Figures 168 and 170). However, even in this case, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operation state (and the conditions for allowing operation reception to the first operating means are met while it is maintained), post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means may be executed again based on the operation state that was maintained up to that point (see Figures 168 and 170).

Furthermore, the situation in which "multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state" may appear while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see Figure 168). Alternatively, it may appear after the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, while the first operation-related display is hidden (see Figure 186). Alternatively, it may appear after the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, while the first operation-related display is hidden (see Figure 181). In any case, it is desirable that the post-reception changes that appear in a situation where "multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state" be the same as the initial changes that appeared (before new post-reception changes ceased to occur).

Furthermore, for example, the 12th configuration B12 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is received multiple times A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which prompts operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, allows for multiple operation receptions on the second operation means (operation button 410). The system includes a displayable second operation-related display means, and when the second operation-related display is shown, a second operation-related sound (such as the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) is outputtable, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), the second operation-related sound (such as the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, and remains audible for the predetermined output time. This configuration allows for the display of a corresponding post-operation display (post-operation display HB2) when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and the second operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (see Figures 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.). Therefore, it can be suggested that the second operation-related sound will not become inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, triggered by the second operation means changing from an operated state to a non-operated state.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may not be displayed (see Figures 164 and 166, etc.). However, when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display (post-non-operation display HB2) may be displayed (see Figure 166(f), etc.). With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize when the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released, but it is difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released. Therefore, it is expected that this will suitably provide a sense of tension when using the so-called auto-repeated button function (long-press function).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (third B operation-related output sound OB3 or fourth B operation-related output sound OB4) related to the operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound (third B operation-related output sound OB3) is audible and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see Figures 168 and 183), or it may be made audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 170 and 182). Furthermore, when a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a second operation-related sound (first B operation-related output sound OB1 or second B operation-related output sound OB2) related to the operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) is made available for output, and when the second operation-related sound (first B operation-related output sound OB1 or second B operation-related output sound OB2) is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of an operation on the second operation means, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may remain audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 164 and 166). In this regard, if the "non-operation display" (non-operation display HB2) is displayed when the operation state for the second operation means (operation button 410) is released, it is possible to confirm that the auto-repeated button-pressing function was activated for the second operation means. This is expected to maintain a sense of tension while effectively preserving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, if the "non-operation display" is not displayed even when the operation state for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is released, it is expected to provide a different kind of presentation than that of the second operation means (operation button 410), effectively preserving tension and the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of presentations, when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, and a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation received by the sword ornament 5001, it may be stipulated that when the sword ornament 5001 changes from an operational state to a non-operational state, regardless of the mode in which the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, the corresponding post-non-operation display will not be shown.

Furthermore, it is desirable that no new sound is output when the sword ornament 5001 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 12th configuration B12 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation to the operation button 410, it may be possible to have both a corresponding post-unoperated display (see Figure 166) and a post-unoperated display not be displayed (see Figure 164). With such a configuration, even when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation to the operation button 410, a corresponding post-unoperated display is not necessarily displayed when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, even if the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, the display after the unoperation is not necessarily omitted. Even if the display after the unoperation is omitted, the system may be designed so that no new sound is output as a result of the unoperation.

Furthermore, for example, the 13th configuration B13 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means for making a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display prompting operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be made multiple times. A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), wherein if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state while the display is in the display state, the second operation means (operation button 410) may be operated multiple times. The system is equipped with a display means, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation-related sound (such as the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) related to the operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) is made outputtable, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), the second operation-related sound (such as the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but remains audible for the predetermined output time, and the second When an operation-related indicator (an operation-related indicator concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, if the second operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this can trigger the deaudibility of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figures 166(h) and 180(h)). Therefore, it can be suggested that the second operation-related sound will not be deaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, triggered by the second operation means changing from an operated state to a non-operated state.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change has occurred in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), if the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this should not trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state, and the second operation-related display When the operation-related display for the operation button 410 (the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and a post-reception change has occurred in response to the operation reception of the second operation means, if the second operation means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this may trigger the de-initiated state of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figures 166(h) and 180(h)). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize when the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410) is released, but to make it difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is released. Therefore, it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be added when using the so-called auto-repeated button function (long-press function).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (third B operation-related output sound OB3 or fourth B operation-related output sound OB4) related to the operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound (third B operation-related output sound OB3) is audible and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see Figures 168 and 183), or it may be made audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 170 and 182). Furthermore, when a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a second operation-related sound (first B operation-related output sound OB1 or second B operation-related output sound OB2) related to the operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) is made available for output, and when the second operation-related sound (first B operation-related output sound OB1 or second B operation-related output sound OB2) is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of an operation on the second operation means, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may remain audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 164 and 166). In this regard, if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at the time the operation state for the second operating means (operation button 410) is released can be made inaudible, it is possible to confirm that the auto-repeated button function was activated for the second operating means, thereby maintaining a sense of tension while also suitably preserving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, if at least one of the sound effects that was audible at the time the operation state for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released is not made inaudible, it is possible to provide a different kind of presentation than that of the second operating means (operation button 410), thereby suitably preserving tension and the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 13th configuration B13 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, and a post-reception change occurs in response to an operation received by the sword ornament 5001, when the sword ornament 5001 changes from an operational state to a non-operational state, regardless of the mode in which the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time may not be made inaudible.

Furthermore, it is desirable that no new sound is output when the sword ornament 5001 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 13th configuration B13 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation to the operation button 410, it may be possible to either make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see Figure 166) or not make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see Figure 164). With such a configuration, even when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation to the operation button 410, at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time will not necessarily be made inaudible when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state can be suitably preserved.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 13th configuration B13 and the various performance examples described above, if the configuration is set to "make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to an inactive state," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be one of the sounds that appeared as a change after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, for example, the 14th configuration B14 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operation related display (so-called auto-repeated button activation) can be made multiple times. The system comprises a first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the display is in the display state, the second operation means (operation button 410) can be operated multiple times, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) When a second operation-related sound (such as the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) related to the operation is available for output, and the second operation-related sound is audible, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410), the second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164) is not made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but remains audible for the predetermined output time, and during the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation means (operation When the second operating means (operating button 410) is deactivated while the post-operation change in response to the operation of button 410 is occurring, and then the second operating means (operating button 410) is returned to the operating state from the deactivated state (timing tBa2-C1 shown in Figure 164), this can trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the first post-operation output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)). Therefore, it can be suggested that the second operation-related sound (such as the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164) will not be deactivated before a predetermined output time has elapsed, triggered by the second operating means (operating button 410) being returned to the operating state.

In this case, if the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and a post-reception change corresponding to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is occurring, and the first operation means is then deactivated, and then the first operation means is returned to the operating state from the deactivated state, this may be used as a trigger to deactivate at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time. However, if the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) is occurring, and the second operation means is then deactivated, and then the second operation means is returned to the operating state from the deactivated state, this may be used as a trigger to deactivate at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)). With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function (long-press function) is interrupted and the second operating means (operating button 410) is operated again, it is easier to recognize that the input has been properly received. However, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function (long-press function) is interrupted and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated again, it is difficult to recognize that the input has been properly received. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably provided when interrupting or restarting the auto-repeated button press function (long-press function).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (third B operation-related output sound OB3 or fourth B operation-related output sound OB4) related to the operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound (third B operation-related output sound OB3) is audible and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see Figures 168 and 183), or it may be made audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 170 and 182). Furthermore, when a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, a second operation-related sound (first B operation-related output sound OB1 or second B operation-related output sound OB2) related to the operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) is made available for output. When the second operation-related sound (first B operation-related output sound OB1 or second B operation-related output sound OB2) is audible and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operational state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception on the second operation means, the second operation-related sound may not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may remain audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 164 and 166). With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the auto-repeated button function is activated for the second operation means (operation button 410). In this regard, if the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released and then the second operating means is operated again, at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time can be made inaudible. This allows for confirmation that the operation of the second operating means has been properly received and the auto-repeated button function has been activated, thus maintaining a sense of tension while effectively preserving the enjoyment of the game. Conversely, if the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released and then the first operating means is operated again, and the sound effects that were audible at that time are not made inaudible, then a different kind of presentation can be provided compared to the case of the second operating means (operation button 410), thus effectively preserving tension and the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 14th configuration B14 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, and a post-reception change occurs in response to an operation received by the sword ornament 5001, and then the sword ornament 5001 is put into a non-operational state, and then the sword ornament 5001 is put back into the operational state from the non-operational state, regardless of the mode in which the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, it may be stipulated that this may not trigger the change from an audible performance sound to an inaudible state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 14th configuration B14 and the various performance examples described above, if the "operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed and a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation on the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated again from the deactivated state, and only if the post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα1), which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that time, then at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164) may be made inaudible. In this case, a sound other than the post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα1) may be made inaudible.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 14th configuration B14 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed and a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation on the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated again from the deactivated state, even if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that point, it may be possible to either deactivate at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that point (see Figure 164) or not deactivate the performance sound that was audible at that point (see Figure 166). With such a configuration, when the operation state of the operation button 410 is released and then the operation button 410 is operated again, at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that point will not necessarily be deactivated, thus it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained while providing a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 14th configuration B14 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation to the operation button 410, it may be possible to either make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see Figure 166(h)) or not make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see Figure 164). With such a configuration, even when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation to the operation button 410, at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time will not necessarily be made inaudible when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state can be suitably preserved.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 14th configuration B14 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed and a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation on the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated, if this triggers the deactivation of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time to become inaudible, a new sound is output as a trigger for the deactivation (timing tBa2-C1 shown in Figure 164). However, even if the performance sound that was audible at that time is not deactivated, a new sound may still be output as a trigger for the deactivation (timing tBa2-B1 shown in Figure 164).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 14th configuration B14 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 is changed from an inactive state to an active state, if this triggers the deaudibility of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time, the performance sound that is deaudible does not have to be a sound that appeared as one of the post-reception changes, and any type of sound different from the second operation-related sound is acceptable. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be one of several performance sounds that are audible at that time.

Furthermore, for example, the 15th configuration B15 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the display When the indicator is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in the operating state, multiple operation receptions can be made for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and the second post-reception change execution means is capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made for the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operating means (operation button 410) The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the display is in an displayed state, operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be made multiple times, and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation A first operation-related sound (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168) related to the operation of the operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound (third B operation-related output sound OB3) is audible and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of an operation to the first operating means, the first operation-related sound can be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see Figure 168(g)). In this regard, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function, for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) may be displayed before the timing when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function, for example, the message display MB1 shown in Figure 164) is displayed (it may be displayed before the timing and then hidden), and it may be displayed after the timing when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function, for example, the message display MB1 shown in Figure 164) is displayed (after it has been hidden). With this configuration, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably maintained by making it difficult to perceive the timing of the display of the first operation-related indicator (an operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function; for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) and the timing of the inaudible first operation-related sound (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168).

In this case, a special variation pattern may be provided as one of several variation patterns available for the pattern variation. During the period in which the pattern variation is performed using this special variation pattern, the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) may be displayed both before the second operation-related display (for example, the message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or the message display MB2 shown in Figure 166) is displayed, and after the second operation-related display (for example, the message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or the message display MB2 shown in Figure 166) is displayed. With this configuration, it is expected that the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) will be displayed regardless of whether the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or message display MB2 shown in Figure 166) has already been displayed. Furthermore, it is expected that the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or message display MB2 shown in Figure 166) will be displayed regardless of whether the first operation-related display has already been displayed. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

In this case, it is desirable that the change after receiving an operation request to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) while the first operation related display is displayed be the same whether the first operation related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed before the second operation related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or message display MB2 shown in Figure 166) is displayed, or whether the first operation related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed after the second operation related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or message display MB2 shown in Figure 166) is displayed, during the period in which the pattern change is being executed with a special variation pattern.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change is occurring in response to the reception of the operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3) may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see Figure 168 and Figure 183), or it may be made audible for the predetermined output time (see Figure 182), and the second operation-related display (for example, shown in Figure 164) When the message display MB1 (shown in Figure 166) or the message display MB2 (shown in Figure 166) is displayed, a second operation-related sound (for example, a first B operation-related output sound OB1 or a second B operation-related output sound OB2) related to the operation of the second operating means (operation button 410) is made available for output, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of the operation to the second operating means, the second operation-related sound (for example, a first B operation-related output sound OB1 or a second B operation-related output sound OB2) may not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may remain audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 164 and 166, etc.). Furthermore, during the period in which the pattern changes are performed in a special variation pattern, the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) may be displayed before the second operation-related display (for example, the message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or the message display MB2 shown in Figure 166), or after the second operation-related display (for example, the message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or the message display MB2 shown in Figure 166). In the case where the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display, the proportion of the first operation-related sound becoming inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed may be higher than in the case where the first operation-related display is displayed before the second operation-related display. This proportion may include 100% or 0%. With this configuration, it becomes possible to suggest that the first operation-related sound (for example, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3) may be rendered inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, during the period in which the symbol changes according to a special variation pattern, if the first operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed before the second operation-related display (for example, message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or message display MB2 shown in Figure 166), the first operation-related display may be prevented from being displayed after the second operation-related display. Conversely, if the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display, the first operation-related display may be prevented from being displayed before the second operation-related display.

Furthermore, during the period in which the symbol changes according to a special variation pattern, the second operation-related display (for example, message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or message display MB2 shown in Figure 166) will always be displayed, but the first operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) may not necessarily be displayed (it may or may not be displayed).

Furthermore, during the period in which the symbol changes according to a special variation pattern, the first operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) may be displayed before the second operation-related display (for example, message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or message display MB2 shown in Figure 166), and may be displayed again after the second operation-related display is shown.

Furthermore, during the period in which the symbol changes according to a special variation pattern, even if the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed again after the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or message display MB2 shown in Figure 166) has been hidden, the first operation-related sound (e.g., third B operation-related output sound OB3) may be made available for output again. The proportion of times the first operation-related sound (e.g., third B operation-related output sound OB3) becomes inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed may be higher than the proportion of times it is inaudible before the second operation-related display is shown.

Furthermore, during the period in which the symbol changes according to a special variation pattern, the first operation-related display may be the form shown in Figures 168 and 169 (message display MB3), but other forms (such as the forms shown in Figures 170 and 171 (message display MB4) or Figures 172 and 173 (message display MB5)) may not be displayed.

Furthermore, during the period in which the symbol variation is performed with a special variation pattern, if the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed before the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or message display MB2 shown in Figure 166), the first operation-related sound (e.g., the 3B operation-related output sound OB3) may not be rendered inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed. Also, if the first operation-related display (e.g., message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed after the second operation-related display (e.g., message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or message display MB2 shown in Figure 166), the first operation-related sound (e.g., the 3B operation-related output sound OB3) may be rendered inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, or it may not be rendered inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed.

Furthermore, not limited to specific variation patterns, if the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, the probability of obtaining a jackpot (expected outcome) may be higher than in cases where it is not made inaudible before the predetermined output time has elapsed.

Furthermore, for example, the 16th configuration B16 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result is obtained, a symbol change means that can perform a symbol change in one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the result of the determination by the determination means, and a first post-reception change execution means that can perform a post-reception change in accordance with the operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). , a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, operation reception for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be received multiple times, and a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a corresponding post-reception change when operation reception is received for the second operating means (operation button 410) The system includes a means and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the display is in the displayed state, operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be made multiple times, and the system includes a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) When indicated, a first operation-related sound (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168) related to the operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound (third B operation-related output sound OB3) is audible and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of an operation to the first operating means, the first operation-related sound can be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see Figure 168(g)). In this regard, the aforementioned multiple variation patterns include "variation patterns in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and an opportunity for operation is granted to the second operation means (operation button 410)" and "variation patterns in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and an opportunity for operation is not granted to the second operation means." However, regardless of which of these types the pattern variation is performed in, the first operation-related display (such as the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168) may be displayed during the period in which the pattern variation is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably maintain the expectation that the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) will be displayed during the period in which the pattern variation is being performed.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed, the first operation-related sound (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3) related to the operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made outputtable, and when the first operation-related sound is audible and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of the operation on the first operating means, the first operation-related sound (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3) may be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed (see Figures 168 and 183), or it may be made audible for the predetermined output time (see Figure 182), and the second operation-related display (for example, Figure 164) When the message display MB1 shown in Figure 164 or the message display MB2 shown in Figure 166 is displayed, a second operation-related sound (for example, a first B operation-related output sound OB1 or a second B operation-related output sound OB2) related to the operation of the second operating means (operation button 410) is made available for output, and when the second operation-related sound is audible and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change occurs in response to the reception of an operation to the second operating means, the second operation-related sound (for example, a first B operation-related output sound OB1 or a second B operation-related output sound OB2) may not be made inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, but may remain audible for the predetermined output time (see Figures 164 and 166, etc.). Furthermore, the multiple variation patterns include "a variation pattern in which a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and an opportunity for operation is given to the second operation means (operation button 410)" and "a variation pattern in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed and an opportunity for operation is not given to the second operation means (operation button 410)". However, in any of these variations in which the pattern variation occurs, the first operation-related display may be displayed (the display conditions for the first operation-related display are met) during the period in which the pattern variation is being performed. Furthermore, if the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed during the period in which the symbol variation is performed in a variation pattern of the type in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and an opportunity for operation is given to the second operation means (operation button 410), the proportion of the first operation-related sound (for example, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3) becoming inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed may be higher than the proportion in which the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed during the period in which the symbol variation is performed in a variation pattern of the type in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and an opportunity for operation is not given to the second operation means. This proportion may include 100% or 0%. With this configuration, it becomes possible to suggest that the first operation-related sound (for example, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3) may be rendered inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, even if the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed within the period during which the symbol variation is performed in a variation pattern of a type in which a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and an opportunity for operation is given to the second operation means (operation button 410), if the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed before the second operation-related display (for example, the message display MB1 shown in Figure 164, or the message display MB2 shown in Figure 166), the proportion of the first operation-related sound (for example, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3) becoming inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed may be lower than in the case where the first operation-related display is displayed after the second operation-related display, or even in the case where the first operation-related display is displayed within the period during which the symbol variation is performed in a variation pattern of a type in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and an opportunity for operation is not given to the second operation means. This percentage may include 100% or 0%.

Furthermore, if the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed after the second operation-related display is shown within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in a variation pattern of the type in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the proportion in which the first operation-related sound (for example, the 3B operation-related output sound OB3) becomes inaudible before a predetermined output time has elapsed may be higher than in the case in which the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in a variation pattern of the type in which the second operation-related display is not displayed and the second operation means is not given an opportunity to operate. This proportion may include 100% or 0%.

Furthermore, in the "variation pattern of the type in which a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and an operation opportunity is granted to the second operation means (operation button 410)," the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) may be displayed before the second operation-related display is displayed, or it may be displayed again after the second operation-related display is displayed. In this case, it is desirable (though not mandatory) that the post-reception change when an operation is received by the first operation means while the first operation-related display is displayed be the same, whether the first operation-related display is displayed before the second operation-related display or after the second operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, the "variation pattern of the type in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and an operation opportunity is granted to the second operation means (operation button 410)" may include the "special variation pattern" described in the 15th configuration B15 above.

Furthermore, for example, the 17th configuration B17 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display prompting operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state... When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can receive multiple operation requests, and the first operation related display means is capable of displaying a first operation related display (an operation related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), the second post-reception change execution means is capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the second operating means (operation button 410), and the display prompts operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), and the display state When the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in the operating state, multiple operation requests can be received for the second operating means (operation button 410), and the system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function), and even when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, operation requests can be received for the second operating means (operation button 410). In some cases, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed (see Figures 174 and 175). In this case, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operating means may be executed multiple times. When the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the interval between the execution of the post-reception change multiple times may be set to a time less than or equal to a specific time (6B Reception Allowed State). That is, in this case, since the interval between the execution of the post-reception change multiple times when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled is set to a relatively short interval, it is expected that the player will be more likely to notice that the auto-repeated button function is secretly enabled when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of the activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed, thereby suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

In this case, even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means may be executed multiple times (see Figures 176 and 177).

In this regard, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state is determined by the situation when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function, such as message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, message display MB4 shown in Figure 170, or message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) is displayed (see Figures 168, 170, 172, etc.) and when the first operation-related display is not displayed (see Figure 176). Even if this is the case, the interval is never longer than a specified time, and is always less than or equal to a specified time. However, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval is always less than or equal to a specified time when the second operation-related display is not displayed (see Figure 174, etc.), but when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see Figure 166, for example), it may be made longer than a specified time. With such a configuration, the interval at which post-reception changes occur when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is activated for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is always short, regardless of whether the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, so it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be maintained by making it easier to recognize that the auto-repeated function is activated. In contrast, when the so-called auto-press function (long-press function) is activated for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between activations is always short when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-press function activation) is not displayed. However, when the second operation-related display is displayed, the interval may be longer than a specific time (for example, the second B acceptance state). Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be maintained by making it difficult to recognize that the auto-press function (long-press function) is activated.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, the interval between the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state and the subsequent changes in response to the operation reception to the second operation means being executed multiple times may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time (for example, the first B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 164) or to be longer than a specific time (for example, the second B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 166). With such a configuration, while it may be difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated button function is activated when the second operation-related display is displayed, it may also be easier to recognize, thus allowing for a suitable maintenance of the game's enjoyment while providing a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the interval (the interval until a new change appears after a new input) at which the so-called auto-repeated function is activated for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and the interval (the interval until a new change appears after a new input) at which the so-called auto-repeated function is activated for the second operating means (operating button 410) while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed in a second predetermined form (message display MB1 shown in Figure 164) By setting the time to be longer than the specified time, and also setting it to be shorter than the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation-related display is displayed in the second specific mode (message display MB2 shown in Figure 166) (the interval until a new change appears after a new input), the gap in the interval at which the so-called auto-repeated button press function is activated for the second operation means while the second operation-related display is displayed (the gap between the second predetermined mode and the second specific mode) can be made larger, thus allowing for a favorable maintenance of the game's appeal.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 17th configuration B17 and the various performance examples above, the operation button 410 may be configured so that operation is accepted even when the display image does not suggest that operation acceptance is permitted (no operation-related display is shown), and in this case, the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) may be activated or deactivated. Conversely, the sword ornament 5001 may be configured so that operation is accepted even when the display image does not suggest that operation acceptance is permitted (no operation-related display is shown), and in this case, the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) may always be activated, without any cases where it is deactivated. With such a configuration, when operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001 while the display is concealed, it is possible to enjoy the changes after acceptance with a sense of security, while when operation is accepted for the operation button 410 while the display is concealed, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, for example, the 18th configuration B18 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state... When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can receive multiple operation requests, and When the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state while in the state, multiple operation receptions for the second operating means (operation button 410) may be made, and the system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and even when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, operation receptions for the second operating means (operation button 410) may be made. When this occurs, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed (see Figures 174 and 175). In this case, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operating means may be executed multiple times. When the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operating means is executed multiple times while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the interval between the execution of the post-reception change multiple times may be set to a fixed time (6B Reception Allowed State). That is, in this case, since the interval between operation receptions when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled is set to a fixed interval, it is expected that the player will be more likely to notice that the auto-repeated button function is secretly enabled when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of the so-called auto-repeated button function activation) is not displayed, thereby suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

In this case, even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means may be executed multiple times (see Figures 176 and 177).

In this regard, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state is not set to an indefinite time that is not predetermined, regardless of whether the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function, such as message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, message display MB4 shown in Figure 170, or message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) is displayed (see Figures 168, 170, 172, etc.) or whether the first operation-related display is not displayed (see Figure 176). While the interval between operations is set to a predetermined time, the interval between operations performed multiple times in response to an operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410) while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operational state is always set to a predetermined time when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed (see Figure 174, etc.), but when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see, for example, Figure 166), it may be set to an indefinite time that is not predetermined. With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function (long-press function) is activated for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is always a fixed time (a predetermined time), regardless of whether the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be able to easily recognize that the auto-repeated button press function is activated, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function (long-press function) is activated for the second operating means (operation button 410), the interval at which a change occurs after acceptance is always a fixed time when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is not displayed. However, when the second operation-related display is displayed, it may be an indefinite time (a time not predetermined) (for example, the 2B acceptance-allowed state). Therefore, it is expected that the player will be able to easily recognize that the auto-repeated button press function (long-press function) is activated, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, the interval between the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state and the subsequent changes in response to the operation reception to the second operation means being executed multiple times may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 164) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined) (for example, the second B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 166). With such a configuration, while it may be difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated button function is activated when the second operation-related display is displayed, it may also be easier to recognize, thus providing a sense of tension while maintaining the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, for example, the 19th configuration B19 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which can be attached multiple times; a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display prompting operation of the second operation means (operation button 410), which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the display is in the displayed state, can receive operation requests for the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times, a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying operation-related displays (operation-related displays relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is not displayed, there are two cases in which the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operation means are executed multiple times (for example, during the period from timing tBg2-C1 to tBg2-C2 shown in Figure 176), and there are two cases in which the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operation means are not executed multiple times (for example, during the period from timing tBg2-C2 to tBg2-C3 shown in Figure 176), and the second operation-related display means (so-called When the operation-related display for the operation button 410 (which is the target of the auto-repeated button press function) is not displayed, maintaining the second operation means (operation button 410) in the operated state allows for both cases: multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the second operation means (for example, during the period from timing tBa2-C1 to tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 164) and no multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the second operation means (for example, during the period from timing tBa2-C2 to tBa3 shown in Figure 164). Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the first and second operation-related displays are not shown.

In this case, even if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated while the first operation related display (operation related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is not executed, if the state in which the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated is maintained (while the state is maintained, if the conditions for allowing operation reception to the first operation means (conditions for occurrence of an allowable state) are met), a situation may occur in which the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state that was maintained up to that point (see, for example, timing tBg2-C3 in Figure 176, timing tBg4A in Figure 189, and timing tBg4C in Figure 192). In contrast, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated while the second operation related display (operation related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, but the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means is not executed, even if the state in which the second operation means is operated is maintained, the system may be configured so that a situation does not occur where the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means is executed multiple times based on the detection of the operation state (see, for example, Figure 174, Figure 188, and the timing tBf2-C2 onwards in Figure 191). With this configuration, regarding the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), even if the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated when the first operation-related display is not shown, the auto-repeated button function can be activated if the operation state is continued, thus maintaining the enjoyment of the game appropriately. On the other hand, regarding the second operating means (operation button 410), if the so-called auto-repeated button function is not activated when the second operation-related display is not shown, even if the operation state is continued, there is no possibility of operation acceptance based on the detection of that operation state. Therefore, in realizing the dramatic effect of the auto-repeated button function, it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, the situation in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the maintained operation state may occur while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see Figures 189 and 190, etc.). Alternatively, the situation in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the maintained operation state may occur even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed (when the first operation-related display has not been displayed even once since the operation state was maintained) (see Figure 192, etc.).

Furthermore, in the configurations for each of the above-described performance examples, even if the sword ornament 5001 is changed from an inoperable state to an operable state within the period from timing tBG2-C2 to tBG2-C3, and that operable state is continued beyond timing tBg-C3, the same configuration as described above may still appear. Similarly, even if the operation button 410 is changed from an inoperable state to an operable state within the period from timing tBf2-C2 onwards in Figures 174, 188, and 191, and that operable state is continued beyond timing tBf4A and tBf4B, the same configuration as described above may still appear.

Furthermore, for example, the 20th configuration B20 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operating means A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) in which multiple operation requests can be received for the tier (sword ornament 5001), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the operation request received for the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation that prompts operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and in which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the display is in the displayed state, multiple operation requests can be received for the second operation means (operation button 410). The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying related information (operation-related information regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and even when the second operation-related display (operation-related information regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed (see Figures 174 and 175). In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means may be executed multiple times. Therefore, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and the post-reception change in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been executed multiple times, if the second operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, a non-operation display (non-operation display HB2) can be displayed as a trigger for this change to a non-operated state (see Figures 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.). Thus, when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, it becomes possible to suggest that the auto-repeated button function was activated.

In this case, even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means may be executed multiple times (see Figures 176 and 177).

In this regard, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) have been performed, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, there is no display of a post-operation indicator triggered by this change to an unoperated state. However, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means have been performed, and the second operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, a post-operation indicator (post-operation indicator HB2) triggered by this change to an unoperated state may be displayed (see Figures 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.).

Furthermore, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) have been executed, and the first operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, regardless of whether the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed or not, no post-unoperated display is displayed as a result of the change to an unoperated state, and the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operating means have been executed. Under the given circumstances, if the second operating means changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, if the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a post-operation display (post-operation display HB2) triggered by the change to an unoperated state may be displayed (see Figures 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.). However, if the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, it may be configured so that a post-operation display triggered by the change to an unoperated state is not displayed (see Figure 174, etc.). With this configuration, when the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released while the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it becomes difficult to recognize that the first operating means has become inactive (that the auto-repeated button function is no longer enabled), regardless of whether the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of the auto-repeated button function activation) is displayed or not. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when the auto-repeated button function is enabled will be suitably maintained. Conversely, when the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released while the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it is possible to either make it difficult or easy to recognize that the second operating means has become inactive (that the auto-repeated button function is no longer enabled). Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when the auto-repeated button function is enabled will be suitably maintained while also suitably preserving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to the operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410), if the second operating means changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, there are two possibilities: when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a post-unoperated display (post-unoperated display HB2) is displayed as a result of the change to an unoperated state (see Figures 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.), and the post-unoperated display is not displayed (see Figures 164(f), 179(f), etc.). However, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, the post-unoperated display triggered by the change to an unoperated state may not be displayed (see Figure 174, etc.). With this configuration, when the second operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed and the auto-repeated button function for the second operation means (operation button 410) is activated, it is difficult to recognize when the second operation means becomes inactive (when the auto-repeated button function is not activated). On the other hand, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and the auto-repeated button function for the second operation means is activated, when the second operation means becomes inactive (when the auto-repeated button function is not activated), it may be difficult or easy to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and the auto-repeated button function is activated can be suitably maintained while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed and the auto-repeated button function is activated, a sense of tension is inherently present, so it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained while providing an appropriate level of tension.

Furthermore, in implementing the 20th configuration B20 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated while the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, but the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operation means does not start to be executed, the operation state of the second operation means may be maintained until a "state in which operation reception to the second operation means is permitted" occurs. Even if the operation is then released at that point (for example, in the 2B reception-permitted state shown in Figure 179, the second operation means that was in an operation state prior to that is de-operated), the post-de-operation display triggered by the de-operation state may not be displayed.

Furthermore, for example, the 21st configuration B21 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operating means ( A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which allows for multiple operation requests to be received for the sword ornament 5001), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation request to the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display which prompts operation to be received for the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the display is in the displayed state, allows for multiple operation requests to be received for the second operation means (operation button 410). The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function), and even when the second operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed (see Figures 174 and 175), and in this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means may be executed multiple times, and the When the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operated state and the post-reception change in response to the operation received by the second operating means (operating button 410) has been executed multiple times, if the second operating means changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this change to a non-operated state can trigger the de-indication of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figures 166(h) and 180(h)). Therefore, the change in the second operating means from an operated state to a non-operated state can be used to suggest that the auto-repeated button function was activated.

In this case, even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means may be executed multiple times (see Figures 176 and 177).

In this regard, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) have been performed, if the first operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, regardless of whether the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed or not, the effect sound that was audible at that time will not be made inaudible as a result of the change to a non-operating state (see Figures 168 to 173 and Figures 176 to 178, etc.), and when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operating means have been performed If the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state under the circumstances in which the operation is being performed, and the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeating function) is displayed, then at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the output sound Sα2 after receiving the second B, as shown in Figures 166(h) and 180(h)) may be made inaudible as a result of the change to the non-operating state. However, if the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeating function) is not displayed, then the change to the non-operating state may not trigger the making of any sound effects that were audible at that time to become inaudible (see Figure 174, etc.). With this configuration, when the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released while the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it becomes difficult to recognize that the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) has become unoperated (that the auto-repeated button function is no longer enabled), regardless of whether the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of the auto-repeated button function activation) is displayed or not. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when the auto-repeated button function is enabled can be suitably maintained. Conversely, when the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) is released while the auto-repeated button function is enabled, it is possible to either make it difficult or easy to recognize that the second operating means has become unoperated (that the auto-repeated button function is no longer enabled). Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when the auto-repeated button function is enabled can be suitably maintained while suitably preserving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operation button 410), if the second operating means changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there are two possibilities: either at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time is made inaudible as a result of the unoperated state (see Figure 166(h) and Figure 180(h), etc.), or the sound effects that were audible at that time are not made inaudible (see Figure 164(h) and Figure 179(h), etc.). However, when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, it is possible to ensure that the sound effects that were audible at that time are not made inaudible as a result of the unoperated state (see Figure 174, etc.). With this configuration, when the second operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed and the auto-repeated button function for the second operation means (operation button 410) is activated, it is difficult to recognize when the second operation means becomes inactive (when the auto-repeated button function is not activated). On the other hand, when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and the auto-repeated button function for the second operation means is activated, when the second operation means becomes inactive (when the auto-repeated button function is not activated), it may be difficult or easy to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and the auto-repeated button function is activated can be suitably maintained while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when the second operation-related indicator is not displayed and the auto-repeated button function is activated, a sense of tension is inherently present, so it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained while providing an appropriate level of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 21st configuration B21 and the various performance examples described above, if the configuration is set to "make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to an inactive state," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be one of the sounds that appeared as a change after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, for example, the 22nd configuration B22 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) in which operation reception can be received multiple times; a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation reception is received for the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display prompting operation for the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state while the display is in the display state, an operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying operation-related displays (operation-related displays concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed (see Figures 174 and 175). In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means may be executed multiple times. When the operation-related display for 410 is not displayed, and while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410), if the second operating means (operation button 410) is then deactivated, and then the second operating means (operation button 410) is returned to the operating state, this can trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the first post-reception output sound Sα6 shown in Figure 174(h)). Therefore, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is returned to the operating state, it can be indicated that the auto-repeated button-pressing function has been reactivated.

In this case, even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means may be executed multiple times (see Figures 176 and 177).

In this regard, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is not displayed, and a post-reception change occurs in response to the operation reception of the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is set to a non-operational state, and then the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is set back to the operational state from the non-operational state, this does not trigger the sound effect that was audible at that time to become inaudible (see Figures 176 to 178, etc.), and the second operation-related display (the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is not displayed. When the operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target of function activation is not displayed, and a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410), the second operation means (operation button 410) is set to a non-operated state, and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is set to an operated state again from the non-operated state, this may trigger the setting to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the first post-reception output sound Sα6 shown in Figure 174(h)) inaudible (see timing tBf2-C1 in Figure 174, etc.). With this configuration, when the second operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the second operation means (operation button 410) is interrupted and then the second operation means is operated again, it is easier to recognize that the input has been properly received. However, when the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is interrupted and then the first operation means is operated again, it is difficult to recognize that the input has been properly received. Therefore, it is expected that this configuration will appropriately create a sense of tension when interrupting or restarting the auto-repeated function (long-press function).

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is not displayed, and a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and the second operation means is then deactivated, and then the second operation means is deactivated again, only if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that time, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time. In this case, a sound other than the post-reception output sound may be deactivated.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is then deactivated, and then the second operation means is deactivated again, even if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that time, this may trigger the system to deactivate at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)) (the first B reception-acceptable state shown in Figure 164), or to not deactivate the sound effects that were audible at that time (Figure 1 Both the second B reception-allowed state (shown in 66) and the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) are present. When the second operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410), and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated again (when an operation reception occurs), if the post-reception output sound, as one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that time, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects (post-reception output sound) that was audible at that time (sixth B reception-allowed state shown in Figure 174).

Furthermore, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is deactivated while a post-operation change is occurring in response to an operation request to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and then the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is returned to the operating state from the deactivated state (when an operation request is received), regardless of whether the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, this may prevent the sound effect, which was audible at that time, from becoming inaudible.

Furthermore, if, while a post-operation change has occurred in response to an operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410), the second operating means (operation button 410) is deactivated, and then the second operating means is returned to the operating state, if this triggers the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time, a new sound will be output as a result of the return to the operating state. However, even if the sound effects that were audible at that time are not deactivated, a new sound may still be output as a result of the return to the operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 22nd configuration B22 and the various performance examples described above, when "at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible when the operation button 410 is operated again," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appeared as one of the changes after reception; for example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, for example, the 23rd configuration B23 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, an effect display means (effect display device 1600) that displays information related to the effects, an effect determination means that makes a determination, an effect granting means that can grant an effect to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state, the first operating means ( When the sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state, the first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which allows for multiple operation requests to be received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the second post-reception change execution means is capable of executing a post-reception change in response when an operation request is received for the second operating means (operation button 410), and the display prompts operation of the second operating means (operation button 410), and when the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state while the display is in the display state, the second operating means (operation button 41) The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function), which allows for multiple operation requests to be received for 0), and when an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, both a display change on the performance display means (performance display device 1600) and a change different from the display change may occur as a result of this reception change (see Figure 176). Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and an operation (a predetermined operation) is performed on the second operation means (operation button 410), both a display change on the performance display means (performance display device 1600) and a change different from the display change may occur as a result of this reception change (see Figure 174). Therefore, regardless of whether the operation-related display is displayed and an operation is performed on either the first or second operation means, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the operation has been properly received.

In this case, even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operating state, multiple operation receptions may be made to the first operation means (see Figure 176). Similarly, even when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in the operating state, multiple operation receptions may be made to the second operation means (see Figure 174).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) (i.e., when it is changed from a non-operational state to an operational state), the post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time may result in both a display change on the performance display means (performance display device 1600) and a change different from the display change (see Figure 176), or no display change on the performance display means (performance display device 1600) occurs, and only a change different from the display change occurs (see Figure 178). Such a configuration is expected to suitably maintain a sense of tension when an operation is received on the first operation means while the first operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, when an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) and a change different from the display change may occur as post-reception changes corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time (see Figure 176). In this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the above-mentioned "change different from the display change" as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception of the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed multiple times, whereas the above-mentioned "change different from the display change" as one of the post-reception changes may occur multiple times. The "display change in the display device 1600" is not executed multiple times (see Figure 176). When an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410) while the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed, both a display change in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) and a change different from the said display change may occur as post-reception changes (see Figure 174). In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operational state, both the "display change in the performance display means" and the "change different from the said display change" may be executed multiple times as one of the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means. With such a configuration, the performance aspects when activating the auto-repeated button function differ between the first and second operation means, which is expected to suitably maintain the enjoyment of the game, and is also expected to suitably maintain the sense of tension when activating the auto-repeated button function for the first operation means.

Furthermore, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is not displayed, and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operation state, and the "display change in the performance display means" as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the first operation means is not executed multiple times, it is desirable that the "change different from the display change (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα7)" be executed multiple times in the same manner as when the "display change in the performance display means" occurs as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the first operation means (see Figure 176(h)).

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, it is desirable to ensure that only one of the following changes in response to the operation reception of the second operation means—the "display change in the performance display means (post-reception display HB6)" and the "change different from the display change (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα6)"—is not executed multiple times (see Figures 174(f) and (h)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of effects, even if, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is operated (specifically, if certain conditions are met while it is being operated), the operation may not be accepted and the corresponding post-acceptance changes may not be initiated. However, if the state in which the sword ornament 5001 was operated is maintained (and specific conditions are met while it is maintained), a situation may arise where post-acceptance changes are executed multiple times based on the detection (acceptance) of operations (specific operations) on the sword ornament 5001, based on the detection of the previously maintained operation state.

However, in this case, if multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the sword ornament 5001 based on the detection of the previously maintained operation state, it is possible to ensure that no display changes occur (even once) on the performance display device 1600 as a post-reception change, and that only changes different from the display change are executed multiple times. In such a configuration, even if the sword ornament 5001 is operated (specific operation) and the operation is not accepted and the corresponding post-reception change is not initiated, simply maintaining the sword ornament 5001 in an operated state will cause a post-reception change to appear. However, as a trade-off, the display change on the performance display device 1600 will not appear as a post-reception change, thus it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained. However, even in this case, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in a non-operated state and the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if a new operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), it is desirable that both the post-reception change be executed in the manner shown in Figure 176 and the post-reception change be executed in the manner shown in Figure 178.

Furthermore, for example, the 24th configuration B24 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in the operation state, the first operation-related display (sword ornament as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) can receive multiple operation receptions from the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). A first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display related to 5001; a first promotion light-emitting means capable of executing an operation-promoting light (for example, the 4B operation-promoting light LB4 shown in Figure 170) that prompts operation on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display prompting operation on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001); a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation, which is a display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the display is in the display state, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in the operation state, the second operation can be accessed multiple times. A second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), a second promotion light-emitting means capable of performing operation-promoting light (for example, the first B operation-promoting light LB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-promoting light LB2 shown in Figure 166, etc.) to prompt operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), separate from the second operation-related display which is an image display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and a case in which, even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change is performed (as shown in Figure 176). There is a state (such as the 7B reception-permitted state), and in this case, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times. Since the operation-prompting light that prompts operation to the first operating means is not executed when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed and multiple operation receptions are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (see Figure 176(j)), it is expected that the confidentiality regarding operation permission can be suitably maintained when the first operation-related display is not displayed and multiple operation receptions are permitted for the first operating means.

In this case, even when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed (for example, the 6B reception-allowed state shown in Figure 174). In this case, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means may be executed multiple times. When the second operation-related display is not displayed and multiple operation receptions are allowed for the second operation means, an operation-promoting light (for example, the 6B operation-promoting light LB6) that prompts operation on the second operation means may be executed (see Figure 174(j)). With this configuration, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is secretly given multiple opportunities to be operated, the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, and the operation-promoting light that encourages operation on the first operating means is not activated. Conversely, when the second operating means is secretly given multiple opportunities to be operated, the second operation-related indicator is not displayed, but the operation-promoting light that encourages operation on the second operating means can be activated. Therefore, it is possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operating means, and it is expected that this will enhance the dramatic effect while creating a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), operation prompting illumination to prompt an operation to the first operating means is possible (for example, the 4B reception permission state shown in Figure 170), and operation prompting an operation to the first operating means is possible (for example, the 4B reception permission state shown in Figure 170). The system may be configured so that there are both cases where the facilitative illumination is not possible (for example, the third B acceptance state shown in Figure 168, or the fifth B acceptance state shown in Figure 172), and so that when the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the second operation means, the operation-facilitative illumination prompting operation on the second operation means is always made possible (between the time the second operation-related indicator is displayed and when it is hidden) (for example, the first B acceptance state shown in Figure 164, or the second B acceptance state shown in Figure 166). With such a configuration, even when the operation-related indicator is displayed while multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the operation means, there are cases where the operation-facilitative illumination is performed and cases where it is not performed for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001). This provides a degree of secrecy, allowing the degree of secrecy to vary depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 24th configuration B24 and the various performance examples described above, the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" may be displayed, and when multiple operations are permitted for the sword ornament 5001, the operation-prompting light that encourages operation on the sword ornament 5001 is executed, or when the operation-prompting light that encourages operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not executed, the form of the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" (such as message display MB3 or message display MB4) may differ.

However, even if the form of the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-click function" (such as message display MB3 or message display MB4) and the presence or absence of operation-promoting illumination differ, the changes after receiving an operation request for the sword ornament 5001 may be the same.

Furthermore, in implementing the 24th configuration B24 and the configurations described above for each example of the effects, when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is not displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the operation button 410, the operation prompting light to prompt operation of the operation button 410 may not be executed. Alternatively, there may be cases where the operation prompting light to prompt operation of the operation button 410 is executed and cases where it is not executed.

Furthermore, for example, the 25th configuration B25 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the display is in a display state When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state while in a certain state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and when the first operation-related display is displayed, a first operation-prompt sound corresponding to the first operation-related display (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168, or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170, etc.) A first accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a sound, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display (operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which prompts operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the display is in the displayed state, operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) can be received multiple times. The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function), and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation accelerating sound corresponding to the second operation-related display (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) when the second operation-related display is displayed, and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed, the system also includes an operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function), and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation accelerating sound corresponding to the second operation-related display (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166), and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed, the system also includes an operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the sword ornament 5001), and when the second operation-related display is displayed, the system also includes an operation-related display means capable of outputting a second operation accelerating sound corresponding to the second operation-related display (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166). When an operation is received, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed (such as the 7B reception-allowed state shown in Figure 176), in which case, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 176), even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, when an operation is received by the second operating means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, in which case, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operating means operation button 410 may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174), from a state where the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed and operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is not permitted Furthermore, when transitioning to a state in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted without the first operation-related display being shown, the first operation accelerating sound is not output (see Figure 176(g)). In addition, when transitioning from a state in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not shown and operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) is not permitted, to a state in which operation acceptance for the second operating means (operation button 410) is permitted without the second operation-related display being shown, the second operation accelerating sound is not output (see Figure 174(g)). Therefore, it is expected that confidentiality regarding operation acceptance can be suitably maintained when "the first operation-related display is not shown and multiple operation acceptances for the first operating means are permitted (the 7th B acceptance acceptance state shown in Figure 176)" or "the second operation-related display is not shown and multiple operation acceptances for the second operating means are permitted (the 6th B acceptance acceptance state shown in Figure 174)".

In this case, when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed while operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, a second operation accelerating sound (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) is always output. However, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there may be cases where the first operation accelerating sound is output (see Figures 168(g) and 170(g)) and cases where the first operation accelerating sound is not output (see Figure 172(g), etc.). With this configuration, even when operation-related indicators are displayed while multiple operation attempts are permitted for the operating means, the first operating means may either emit a first operation prompt sound or not emit an operation prompt light. This provides a degree of secrecy, allowing the degree of secrecy to vary depending on the type of operating means, thus enhancing the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in this case, it is desirable that the form of the first operation-related display (message display MB3, message display MB4, message display MB5, etc.) differs depending on whether the first operation accelerating sound is output when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed (see Figure 168(g) and Figure 170(g)) or when the first operation accelerating sound is not output (see Figure 172(g), etc.).

However, even if the form of the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" (such as message display MB3, message display MB4, message display MB5, etc.) and the presence or absence of operation-related output sounds differ, the changes after receiving an operation request for the sword ornament 5001 may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, the 26th configuration B26 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, an effect display means (effect display device 1600) that displays information related to the effects, an effect determination means that makes a determination, an effect granting means that can grant an effect to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operation A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) in which multiple operation requests can be received for the means (sword ornament 5001), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response when an operation request is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display (an operation button as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) that prompts operation of the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, multiple operation requests can be received for the second operation means (operation button 410) The system is equipped with a second operation-related display means capable of displaying operation-related displays for the 410, and when an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), both a display change in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) (for example, a post-reception display HB7) and a change different from the display change (such as the first post-reception output sound Sα7) may occur as a post-reception change triggered by this operation (see Figure 176). When an operation (predetermined operation) is performed on the second operation means (operation button 410), both a display change in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) (for example, a post-reception display HB1, HB2, HB6) and a change different from the display change (such as the first post-reception output sound Sα7) may occur as a post-reception change triggered by this operation (see Figure 176). Both the first and second reception output sounds (Sα1, Sα2, Sα6, etc.) can occur (see Figures 164, 166, 174, etc.). If, despite operating the second operating means (operation button 410) (a predetermined operation), the post-reception change corresponding to the detected information obtained at that time does not begin, even if the second operating means is maintained in the operated state (the state of continuing the predetermined operation), operation reception to the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be performed based on the detection of the maintained operation state. Therefore, if, despite operating the second operating means, no post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operating means appears, the operation state will not be maintained, and a prompt for further operation can be expected.

In this case, even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated (specifically operated), if the post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated (when the first operating means is put into an operating state in a state where operation reception to the first operating means is not permitted), if the predetermined reception permission conditions are met while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state (when the state in which operation reception to the first operating means is permitted), operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) will be performed based on the detection of the maintained operating state. However, in this case, it is possible to ensure that no display change occurs (even once) in the performance display device 1600 as a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception, and that only changes different from the display change are executed multiple times. In this configuration, even if an operation (specific operation) of the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted and the corresponding post-operation change is not initiated, simply maintaining the sword ornament 5001 in an operated state will cause the post-operation change to appear. However, as a trade-off, the display change on the performance display device 1600 will not appear as the post-operation change, thus maintaining a suitable sense of tension. However, even in this case, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in an inactive state and the first operation-related display is not shown, it is desirable to have both the post-operation change being executed in the manner shown in Figure 176 and the post-operation change being executed in the manner shown in Figure 178.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 26th configuration B26 and the above-described examples of performances, even if the sword ornament 5001 is operated (specifically operated), if the post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated (when the sword ornament 5001 is put into an operated state when operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted), if the predetermined reception permission conditions are met while the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operated state (when operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 becomes permitted), operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 will be performed based on the detection of the maintained operated state. In this case, as a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception, both a display change on the performance display device 1600 and a change different from the display change may occur (see Figure 192), and there may be cases where no display change occurs on the performance display device 1600, and only a change different from the display change occurs (see Figure 193). With this configuration, based on the "operational state of the sword ornament 5001" maintained from a state where operation to the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted, there are cases where it is easy to recognize that operation to the sword ornament 5001 has been received, and cases where it is difficult to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 26th configuration B26 and the various performance examples described above, if the sword ornament 5001 is kept in an operated state even after both a display change on the performance display device 1600 and a change different from the display change occur as post-reception changes as a result of an operation (specific operation) on the sword ornament 5001, the operation (specific operation) on the sword ornament 5001 may be detected multiple times and accepted multiple times. However, in this case, the post-reception changes corresponding to the acceptance may not include multiple display changes on the performance display device 1600, but rather only changes different from the display change may occur multiple times (see, for example, Figures 176(f) and (h)). With such a configuration, it is initially easy to recognize that an operation has been accepted for the sword ornament 5001, but under conditions where the auto-repeated function is activated thereafter, it becomes difficult to recognize that an operation has been accepted for the sword ornament 5001 multiple times, thus it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained.

However, when an operation (a predetermined operation) is performed on the operation button 410, both a display change on the performance display device 1600 and a change different from the said display change may occur as a post-reception change corresponding to this operation (see, for example, Figures 164, 166, and 174). In this case, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state and multiple operation receptions are made to the operation button 410, it is desirable that both a display change on the performance display means and a change different from the said display change occur multiple times as a post-reception change corresponding to these operation receptions.

Furthermore, for example, the 27th configuration B27 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, an effect display means (effect display device 1600) that displays information related to the effects, an effect determination means that makes a determination, an effect granting means that can grant an effect to the player based on the determination by the effect determination means that a predetermined result has been obtained, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operation A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) in which multiple operation requests can be received for the means (sword ornament 5001), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response when an operation request is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display (an operation button as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) that prompts operation of the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, multiple operation requests can be received for the second operation means (operation button 410) The system is equipped with a second operation-related display means capable of displaying operation-related displays for the 410, and when an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), both a display change in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) (for example, a post-reception display HB7) and a change different from the display change (such as the first post-reception output sound Sα7) may occur as a post-reception change triggered by this operation (see Figure 176). When an operation (predetermined operation) is performed on the second operation means (operation button 410), both a display change in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) (for example, a post-reception display HB1, HB2, HB6) and a change different from the display change (such as the first post-reception output sound Sα7) may occur as a post-reception change triggered by this operation (see Figure 176). Both the first and second reception output sounds (Sα1, Sα2, Sα6, etc.) can occur (see Figures 164, 166, 174, etc.). If the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated (predetermined operation) but the post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated, even if the second operation means is maintained in the operated state (state of continuing the predetermined operation), operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) will not be performed based on the detection of the maintained operation state. Therefore, if the second operation means is operated but no post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception to the second operation means appears, it is expected that the operation state will not be maintained and the user will be prompted to operate again. Even when neither the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) nor the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if an operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), the operation may be accepted based on the detected information (see Figures 176 to 178, etc.). In this case, as a post-acceptance change, both a display change on the performance display means (performance display device 1600) (post-acceptance display HB7) and a change different from the display change (first post-acceptance output sound Sα7) may occur. However, even if an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) is started and the operation state is maintained at the time the post-acceptance change occurs, the post-acceptance change corresponding to the operation acceptance on the second operation means may not be executed multiple times (the so-called auto-repeated function may not be activated). In other words, in this case, it can be expected that the system will concentrate on the post-operation changes that occur in response to the operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B27 of the 27th configuration and the configurations of each of the above-described performance examples, if an operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 when neither the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" nor the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed (the 7th B reception-permitted state shown in Figure 176), then as a post-reception change, both a display change in the performance display device 1600 (post-reception display HB7) and a change different from the said display change (specific change) may occur ( (See Figure 176) There are two cases: one where only the "changes different from the display changes (specific changes)" occur among the display changes and changes different from the display changes (specific changes, such as the first post-reception output sound Sα7) in the performance display device 1600 (see Figure 178). In either case, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state, the "changes different from the display changes (specific changes)" among the display changes and changes different from the display changes (specific changes) in the performance display device 1600 may be executed multiple times as post-reception changes (see Figures 176 and 178).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 27th configuration B27 and the above-described examples of performances, when both a display change and a change different from the display change (specific change) occur in the performance display device 1600 as post-reception changes in response to an operation on the sword ornament 5001, even if an operation on the operation button 410 is started and that operation state is maintained at that point, the post-reception changes in response to the operation button 410 will not be executed multiple times. However, when only the specific change among the display change and the change different from the display change (specific change) occurs in the performance display device 1600 as post-reception changes in response to an operation on the sword ornament 5001, if an operation on the operation button 410 is started and that operation state is maintained at that point, there may be cases where the post-reception changes in response to the operation button 410 are executed multiple times, and cases where the post-reception changes in response to the operation button 410 are not executed multiple times. With this configuration, the nature of the post-operation change in response to the operation of the sword ornament 5001 (whether both a display change on the performance display device 1600 and a change different from that display change (a specific change) occur) can suggest whether or not the auto-repeated button press function for the operation button 410 is in a state where it can be activated. However, when the auto-repeated button press function is activated for the sword ornament 5001, no new "display change on the performance display device 1600" occurs, making it difficult to distinguish between the two, thus allowing for a desirable maintenance of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 27th configuration B27 and the above-described examples of performances, even if the sword ornament 5001 is operated (specifically operated), if the post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated, when the predetermined acceptance conditions are met while the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operated state (when the state in which operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted), operation acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 is performed based on the detection of the maintained operation state. However, in this case, it is possible to ensure that no display change occurs (even once) in the performance display device 1600 as a post-reception change corresponding to the operation acceptance, and that only changes different from the display change are executed multiple times. In this configuration, even if an operation (specific operation) of the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted and the corresponding post-operation change is not initiated, simply maintaining the sword ornament 5001 in an operated state will cause the post-operation change to appear. However, as a trade-off, the display change on the performance display device 1600 will not appear as the post-operation change, thus maintaining a suitable sense of tension. However, even in this case, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in an inactive state and the first operation-related display is not shown, it is desirable to have both the post-operation change being executed in the manner shown in Figure 176 and the post-operation change being executed in the manner shown in Figure 178.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B27 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 is kept in an operated state, resulting in multiple executions of corresponding post-reception changes, it is possible to have both situations where multiple operation receptions to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted and situations where multiple operation receptions to the sword ornament 5001 are not permitted.

Furthermore, for example, the 28th configuration B28 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) in which multiple operation requests can be received for the second operation means (operation button 410), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the operation when an operation request is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display (an activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) in which multiple operation requests can be received for the second operation means (operation button 410) when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which a post-reception change in response to an operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then, despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state, a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at timing tBa2 shown in Figure 164). -C2, or timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 166, etc., ensures that even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means (operating button 410) based on the detection of that operating state will not reappear (see, for example, Figures 164 and 166). When the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to the operation requests for the second operating means, the interval between the multiple executions of these post-reception changes may be set to a time less than or equal to a specific time (first B reception-allowing state shown in Figure 164, etc.). In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes after reception can be made relatively short. Therefore, if a situation arises where no operation is received by the second operating means (operating button 410), it is expected that this will be recognized relatively quickly, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operating means (operating button 410).

In this case, if, during the period in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then, despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state, a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, the timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168), However, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state (and while it is being maintained, a predetermined start condition is met and operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted), the situation in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made multiple times based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends (for example, timing tBc2-C3 shown in Figure 168).

Furthermore, in this case, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state during the period when the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed. However, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) is set to be less than or equal to a specific time (for example, the 3B reception-allowed state to the 5B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 168 to 173, etc.), and the second operation-related display (so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. When the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operated state during the period in which the operation-related display for the operation button 410 (which is the target for enabling the auto-repeated button function) is displayed, multiple post-reception changes may be executed in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operating button 410). In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated button function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time (for example, the first B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 164) or longer than a specific time (for example, the second B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after reception is set to a relatively short interval. Therefore, when the auto-repeated button-pressing function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, simply by keeping the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) in the operating state, a situation may reappear where multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) before the period during which the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function) is displayed ends. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated button-pressing function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be suitably maintained. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes after reception can be either relatively short or relatively long. Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize the deactivation of the auto-repeated button function relatively quickly. Additionally, simply maintaining the operating state of the second operating means (operating button 410) prevents a situation from occurring again where multiple operations are received for the second operating means (operating button 410) before the period during which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-repeated button function activation) is displayed ends. Therefore, it is expected that a suitable sense of tension can be maintained when the auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 28th configuration B28 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met (for example, timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168) and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation received by operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 164) and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 28th configuration B28 and the various performance examples described above, it is possible to ensure that when the sword ornament 5001 is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001 based on the detection of that operating state does not reappear after the period during which the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in implementing the configuration B28 described above and the various performance examples, it is possible to ensure that when the operation button 410 is kept in an activated state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410 based on the detection of that activated state may reappear after the period during which the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed in "Message Display MB1," the interval between multiple operation requests to the operation button 410 (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) may be set to never be longer than a specified time, but always to be less than or equal to a specified time.

Furthermore, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed in the "message display MB2," the interval between multiple operation requests to the operation button 410 (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) may be longer than a specified time or shorter than a specified time, due to the aforementioned uncertainty.

Furthermore, during the period when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001. However, there may be cases where a predetermined condition is met (for example, timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168) before the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function (for example, message display MB3)" becomes hidden, and cases where the predetermined condition is not met. In other words, the case where the predetermined condition is not met before the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" becomes hidden means that the state in which operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted ends after the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is hidden. In contrast, during the period when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in the operated state, a situation may occur where operation requests for operation button 410 are received multiple times. However, the conditions for ending this situation may always be met before the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function" becomes invisible (for example, timings tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 164 or tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 166).

Furthermore, for example, the 29th configuration B29 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) in which multiple operation requests can be received for the second operation means (operation button 410), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the operation when an operation request is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display (an activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) in which multiple operation requests can be received for the second operation means (operation button 410) when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state while the display is in a display state The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which a post-reception change in response to an operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then, despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state, a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at timing tBa2 shown in Figure 164). -C2, or timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 166, etc., ensures that even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means (operating button 410) based on the detection of that operating state will not reappear (see, for example, Figures 164 and 166). When the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to the operation requests for the second operating means, the interval between the multiple executions of these post-reception changes may be set to a time less than or equal to a specific time (first B reception-allowing state shown in Figure 164, etc.). In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes after reception can be made relatively short. Therefore, if a situation arises where no operation is received for the second operating means (operating button 410), it is expected that this will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operating state of the second operating means (operating button 410). When the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed, if a situation arises where the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple changes after reception are performed in response to operation reception for the second operating means (operating button 410), and then a situation arises where no operation is received for the second operating means (operating button 410) despite the second operating means (operating button 410) being maintained in an operating state (for example, at the timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 164), the second operating Even if the operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operated state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means (operating button 410) based on the detection of that operated state will not reappear (see, for example, Figure 164). When the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to operation requests for the second operating means, the interval between these multiple executions can be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) (as shown in Figure 164, etc., the first B reception-allowed state). In other words, in this case, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the second operating means, the interval between post-reception changes can be set to a relatively fixed interval (a predetermined time). Therefore, if a situation arises where no operation requests are received for the second operating means, it is expected that this will be relatively easy to recognize, prompting the user to release the operating state of the second operating means.

In this case, if, during the period in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then, despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state, a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, the timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168), However, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state (and while it is being maintained, a predetermined start condition is met and operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted), the situation in which operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made multiple times based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends (for example, timing tBc2-C3 shown in Figure 168).

Furthermore, in this case, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state during the period when the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed. However, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the 3B reception-allowed state to the 5B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 168 to 173, etc.), and the second operation-related display (so-called auto-repeated function) When the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operated state during the period in which the operation-related display for the operation button 410 (which is the target of function activation) is displayed, multiple post-reception changes may be executed in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operating button 410). In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated button function) may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B reception-allowed state shown in Figure 164) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined) (for example, the second B reception-allowed state shown in Figure 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after reception is set to a certain time (a predetermined time). Therefore, when the auto-repeated button-pressing function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, simply by keeping the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) in an operating state, a situation may reappear where multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) before the period during which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function) is displayed ends. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated button-pressing function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be suitably maintained. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes after reception can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined). Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize relatively quickly when the auto-repeated button function is disabled. In addition, simply maintaining the second operating means (operating button 410) in an operating state prevents a situation from occurring again where multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means (operating button 410) before the period during which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-repeated button function activation) is displayed ends. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 29th configuration B29 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met (for example, timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168) and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation received by operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 164) and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 29th configuration B29 and the various performance examples described above, it is possible to ensure that when the sword ornament 5001 is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001 based on the detection of that operating state does not reappear after the period during which the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 29th configuration B29 and the various performance examples described above, it is possible to ensure that when the operation button 410 is kept in an operated state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410 based on the detection of that operated state may reappear after the period in which the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, if the operation button 410 remains in an operational state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in "Message Display MB1," the interval between multiple operation requests to the operation button 410 (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

Furthermore, if the operation button 410 remains in an operational state while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed in "Message Display MB2," the interval between multiple operation requests to the operation button 410 (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) may always be set to an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

Furthermore, during the period when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001. However, there may be cases where a predetermined condition is met (for example, timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168) before the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function (for example, message display MB3)" becomes hidden, and cases where the predetermined condition is not met. In other words, the case where the predetermined condition is not met before the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" becomes hidden means that the state in which operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted ends after the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is hidden. In contrast, during the period when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in the operated state, a situation may occur where operation requests for operation button 410 are received multiple times. However, the conditions for ending this situation may always be met before the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function" becomes invisible (for example, timings tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 164 or tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 166).

Furthermore, for example, the 30th configuration B30 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, multiple operation receptions for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which can be performed multiple times; a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which is a display prompting an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, an operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which can be performed multiple times. The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying the following: When the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a situation occurs in which a post-reception change in response to an operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then, despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state, a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, the timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 164 or the timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 166), the Even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of that operated state will not reappear (see, for example, Figures 164 and 166). Furthermore, when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while it is in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to operation requests to the second operating means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-unoperated display (post-unoperated display HB2) may be displayed (see Figures 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operated state of the second operating means has been released, thus allowing for a favorable maintenance of the game's enjoyment after a situation arises where no operation requests are received for the second operating means despite it being in an operated state.

Furthermore, during the period when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). However, this situation may be terminated when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, or when a predetermined termination condition is met while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, without the first operation-related display being hidden.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and then a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, at timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168), if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is continued to be maintained in an operating state (while the predetermined start condition is met and a state in which operation reception to the first operating means is permitted), the situation in which multiple operation receptions are made to the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends (for example, at timing tBc2-C3 shown in Figure 168).

In this case, in particular, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are performed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, no corresponding post-operation display is shown (see Figures 168 to 173 and Figures 176 to 178, etc.). However, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410) are performed, and the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-operation display (post-operation display HB2) may be shown (see Figures 166 and 167, etc.). With this configuration, simply maintaining the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) in the operating state may again result in multiple operation requests being received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) before the period during which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is deactivated, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Similarly, regarding the second operating means (operation button 410), simply maintaining the operating state will not again result in multiple operation requests being received for the second operating means before the period during which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends. However, since it is easy to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means is deactivated, prompting re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the second operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operating button 410) have been executed, there may be two cases: one in which an unoperated display is shown (see, for example, Figure 166), and another in which the unoperated display is not shown (see, for example, Figure 164). Such a configuration makes it less likely that the unoperated state of the second operating means (operating button 410) will be easily recognized, thus potentially providing a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is no longer permitted, while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is not hidden but is still displayed (see, for example, timings tBc2-C2 and tBc2-C4 shown in Figure 168). Furthermore, while the second operation-related indicator is displayed, if the second operation means remains in an operating state, a situation may arise where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related indicator is still displayed (not hidden) when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the 30th configuration B30 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is possible to ensure that, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received from the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reappear after the period during which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the 30th configuration B30 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is possible to ensure that when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received from the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the 30th configuration B30 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, during the period when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur in which multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001. However, there may be cases where a predetermined condition is met that ends this situation before the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes invisible (for example, see timing tBc2-C2 and timing tBc2-C4 shown in Figure 168), and cases where the predetermined condition is not met. In this case, for example, if the "case where the predetermined conditions are not met" described above is applied to the example shown in Figure 168, then in the same figure, the 3B acceptance state may continue to allow operation to be received by the sword ornament 5001 even at timings tBc2-C2 and tBc2-C4. In other words, the state in which operation to be received by the sword ornament 5001 is allowed may end after timing tBc2-C2, when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function," such as message display MB3, is hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the 30th configuration B30 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, during the period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where the operation button 410 is received multiple times. However, it is also possible to ensure that the condition is always met such that this situation ends before the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" becomes invisible.

Furthermore, if the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of presentations are implemented, it goes without saying that if a situation occurs where the operation button 410 is not receiving input despite being kept in the operated state, and then the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the unoperated state, the corresponding post-unoperated display will not be shown.

Furthermore, for example, the 31st configuration B31 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made multiple times. The system includes a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and a display prompting operation of the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the display is in the displayed state, the second operation means (operation button 410) can receive operation multiple times, and the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is capable of displaying a second operation-related display The system is equipped with two operation-related display means, and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a situation occurs in which a post-reception change in response to an operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, then if a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 164 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 166), then the second operation means (operation button 410 Even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of that operating state will not reappear (see, for example, Figures 164 and 166). When the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the second operating means (operation button 410) are being performed, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (such as the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166(h)) inaudible. In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained after the situation in which no operation requests are received for the second operating means (operation button 410) despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being kept in an operating state.

In this case, even if, during the period in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and then, despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state, a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, at the timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168), if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is continued to be maintained in an operating state (when a predetermined start condition is met while it is maintained and a state in which operation reception to the first operating means is permitted), a situation in which multiple operation receptions are made to the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may occur again before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends (for example, at the timing tBc2-C3 shown in Figure 168).

In this case, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) has undergone multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation reception, and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, the sound effect that was audible at that time is not made inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, etc.). However, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and the second operation means (operation button 410) has undergone multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation reception, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this may trigger the making of at least one of the sound effect that was audible at that time (such as the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166(h)) into an inaudible state (see Figures 166 and 167, etc.). With this configuration, simply maintaining the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) in the operating state may again result in multiple operation requests being received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) before the period during which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is deactivated, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Similarly, regarding the second operating means (operation button 410), simply maintaining the operating state will not again result in multiple operation requests being received for the second operating means before the period during which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends. However, since it is easy to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means is deactivated, prompting re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, when the second operating means changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while it is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means have been executed, this may trigger either the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (see, for example, Figure 166), or the deactivation of any sound effects that were audible at that time (see, for example, Figure 164). Such a configuration ensures that the release of the operating state of the second operating means (operating button 410) is not necessarily easily recognizable, thus potentially providing a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the 31st configuration B31 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operation state, a situation may occur in which post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) are executed multiple times. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is no longer permitted, while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is not hidden but is still displayed (see, for example, timings tBc2-C2 and tBc2-C4 shown in Figure 168). Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410). However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is still displayed and not hidden when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) is no longer permitted (see, for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 164, or timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the 31st configuration B31 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is possible to ensure that, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received from the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reappear after the period during which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the 31st configuration B31 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is possible to ensure that when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received from the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the instruction is "when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to a non-operated state, at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible," then the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be one of the sounds that appeared as a change after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the 31st configuration B31 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, during the period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 remains in the operated state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410. However, it is also possible to ensure that the condition is always met such that this situation ends before the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" becomes invisible.

Furthermore, if the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of effects are implemented, it goes without saying that if, after a situation occurs where the operation button 410 is not receiving input despite being kept in the activated state, and then the operation button 410 changes from the activated state to the deactivated state, this will not trigger a change in the effect sound, which was audible at that point, to an inaudible state.

Furthermore, for example, the 32nd configuration B32 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in the operation state, the first operation related display (sword ornament 5 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) can receive operation reception multiple times. The system comprises a first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to 001, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), wherein if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state while the display is in the display state, multiple operation receptions for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be made, and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, If, after a situation has occurred in which the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a post-reception change corresponding to the reception of an operation to the second operating means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then a situation has occurred in which no operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410) despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 164 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 166), then even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operated state, the situation in which multiple operation receptions are received for the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of that operated state will not occur again (see, for example, Figures 164 and 166), and the second operation During the period in which the related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410), and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is returned to the operation state from the deactivated state, this can trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)), thus suggesting that the second operation means (operation button 410) has been returned to the operation state and an operation reception has been performed (see, for example, timing tBa2-C1 shown in Figure 164).

In this case, even if, during the period in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a situation arises in which the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed multiple times, and then, despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the situation may reappear before the period in which the first operation-related display is displayed ends, in which, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state (while maintaining it, a predetermined start condition is met and a state is reached in which operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted), multiple operation receptions to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are made based on the detection of that operating state (see timing tBa2-C3 shown in Figure 168, etc.).

Furthermore, in this case, while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is undergoing a post-reception change according to the operation state, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and then the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from a non-operation state back to an operation state, this does not trigger the sound effect that was audible at that time to become inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, etc.), whereas the second operation-related display When an operation-related display (regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from a non-operated state back to an operated state, this may trigger the change to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)) inaudible. With this configuration, simply by maintaining the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) in an operating state, a situation may reappear where multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) before the period during which the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends. However, when the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is interrupted and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated again, it becomes difficult to recognize that the reception was properly performed. Therefore, maintaining the operating state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) becomes easier in order to advance the game. In contrast, regarding the second operating means (operating button 410), simply maintaining the operating state does not prevent a situation from occurring again where multiple operations are received for the second operating means (operating button 410) before the period during which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends. However, when the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the second operating means is interrupted and the second operating means is operated again, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation has been properly received. Therefore, it becomes easier to reset the operating state of the second operating means in order to ensure the game progresses properly.

Furthermore, during the period when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if a post-reception change occurs in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is then deactivated, and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated again, only if the post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα1), which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that time, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164). In this case, a sound other than the post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα1) may be deactivated.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is still displayed and not hidden when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is no longer permitted (see, for example, timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168).

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410). However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is still displayed, rather than hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception to the second operation means is no longer permitted (see, for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 164).

Furthermore, in realizing the 32nd configuration B32 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is possible to ensure that, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received from the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reappear after the period during which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the 32nd configuration B32 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is possible to ensure that when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received from the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 32nd configuration B32 and the various performance examples described above, during the period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation reception to the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated again from the deactivated state, even if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that point, it may be possible to either deactivate at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that point (see, for example, timing tBa2-C1 shown in Figure 164), or not deactivate the performance sound that was audible at that point (see, for example, Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B32 described above and the various performance examples, when "when the operation button 410 is operated again, at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time is made inaudible," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appeared as one of the changes after reception; for example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be all performance sounds that were audible at that time.

Furthermore, for example, the 33rd configuration B33 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a prompt for operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is an image display, and when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in an operating state, the first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display prompting operation on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), the first operation means ( The system comprises: a first prompting light-emitting means capable of emitting an operation prompting light (e.g., a 4B operation prompting light LB4) to prompt an operation on the sword ornament 5001); a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410); a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is an image display prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and which, when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the image display is in the display state, can allow for multiple operation receptions on the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second prompting light-emitting means capable of emitting an operation prompting light (e.g., a 1B operation prompting light LB1, a 2B operation prompting light LB2, a 6B operation prompting light LB6, etc.) to prompt an operation on the second operation means, separate from the second operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410); The device is equipped with a light-emitting means, and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410), then if a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 164 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 166), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation receptions are made to the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of that operating state will not occur again (see, for example, Figures 164 and 166), and the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) When the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, the 4B operation request permission state shown in Figure 170), operation prompting light (for example, the 4B operation prompting light LB4) to prompt operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is enabled, and the second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the second operation In states where multiple operation requests are permitted for the operation means (operation button 410) (for example, the first B operation permission state shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation permission state shown in Figure 166), operation-promoting light emission (for example, the first B operation-promoting light emission LB1 or the second B operation-promoting light emission LB2) can be activated to prompt operation on the second operation means (operation button 410). Therefore, it is expected that situations where multiple operation requests are received for the operation means will be more easily created, thereby providing a suitable sense of tension.

In this case, even if, during the period in which the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB4 corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) is displayed, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and a situation arises in which multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then a situation arises in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (timing tB shown in Figure 170) (See d2-C2) If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state (while it is being maintained, a predetermined starting condition is met and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) becomes permissible to accept operations), the situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period in which the first operation-related display (for example, the message display MB4 corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) is displayed ends (see Figure 170).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) (when there is a period when the first operation-related display is displayed), operation-prompting light is activated (at least for a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) to encourage operation on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) (see, for example, Figure 170), and the operation-prompting light is activated (at least for a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden). The system may have both states where the indicator is not displayed (see, for example, Figures 168 and 172), and when the second operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (i.e., when the second operation-related indicator is displayed), the operation-prompting light that encourages operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) may always be executed (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden) (see, for example, Figures 164 and 166). This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even when multiple operation requests are permitted for the operating means and an operation-related display is shown, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may either have operation-promoting light emission or not. This provides a degree of secrecy. However, even if operation requests to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) cease, maintaining the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) in an operating state allows for the detection of this maintained operating state, potentially leading to multiple operation requests to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being made again. Thus, it is expected that the game's appeal will be appropriately maintained while adding a sense of tension. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means (operating button 410), although the operation prompt illumination is always performed from the time the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed until it is hidden, if no operation is received for the second operating means (operating button 410), simply maintaining the second operating means (operating button 410) in an operated state will not cause the situation in which multiple operation receptions for the second operating means (operating button 410) occur again. Therefore, it is expected that the game's enjoyment will be suitably maintained while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B33 described above and the various performance examples, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed rather than hidden. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the 33rd configuration B33 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is possible to ensure that, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received from the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reappear after the period during which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the 33rd configuration B33 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is possible to ensure that when the second operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received from the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the 33rd configuration B33 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is desirable that the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" be made displayable in any of multiple display modes, including the first mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) and the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170). When the first mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed and multiple operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, operation-promoting light emission prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not performed. When the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) is displayed and multiple operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, operation-promoting light emission prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001 (for example, the 4B operation-promoting light emission LB4) is performed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B33 described above and the configurations of each of the performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, and then, despite the sword ornament 5001 being maintained in an operating state, no operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, then the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is changed to the first form (Figure Regardless of whether the message is displayed in the second form (MB3 shown in Figure 168) or the second form (MB4 shown in Figure 170), it is desirable that, if the sword ornament 5001 is kept in an operating state (or if a predetermined start condition is met while it is being maintained), the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001 based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period in which the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed ends (see Figures 168 and 170, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the 33rd configuration B33 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the "predetermined starting conditions" for the "situation in which multiple operations are received for the sword ornament 5001" to reappear may, for example, be satisfied based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be satisfied in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be satisfied based on the performance judgment when operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted, or based on the result of a performance judgment based on operation reception for the sword ornament 5001, or based on operations on or release of operations on an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, in realizing the 33rd configuration B33 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed and multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, the form of the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" differs depending on whether an operation prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the sword ornament 5001 (see Figure 170, etc.) or whether an operation prompting light to encourage operation on the first operation means is not emitted (see Figures 168 and 172, etc.). However, the post-reception changes when an operation is received may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, the 34th configuration B34 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and an image display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the image display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in the operation state When maintained, the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can receive operation requests multiple times, and the system includes a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), a first cuessential sound output means capable of outputting a first operation cuessential sound (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168 or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170) corresponding to the first operation-related display when the first operation-related display is displayed, and a system capable of executing post-reception changes in response to operation requests made to the second operation means (operation button 410). A second means for executing changes after receiving a request, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function), which is an image display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the image display is in the displayed state, operation requests to the second operation means (operation button 410) can be received multiple times, and when the second operation-related display is displayed, a second operation prompt sound corresponding to the second operation-related display (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB shown in Figure 164) The system includes a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting (such as the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166), and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation accelerating sound can be output, and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation accelerating sound can be output. Therefore, it is expected that a situation will be easily created where the operation means receives multiple operation requests, thereby providing a suitable sense of tension.

In this case, even if, during the period in which the first operation-related display (for example, message display MB3 corresponding to the 3B acceptance state, or message display MB4 corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) is displayed, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operating state and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in the operating state (timing tBc2-C2 shown in Figure 168, (Refer to the timing tBd2-C2 shown in Figure 170.) If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state (while it is being maintained, a predetermined start condition is met and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) becomes permissible to accept operations), the situation in which multiple operations are accepted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period in which the first operation-related indicators (for example, message display MB3 corresponding to the 3B acceptance state, message display MB4 corresponding to the 4B acceptance state) are displayed ends.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed (while operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, or when operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted), the second operation cues are always output (see, for example, Figures 164 and 166). However, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, there may be cases where the first operation cues are output (see Figures 168 and 170) and cases where the first operation cues are not output (see Figure 172). With this configuration, even when multiple operation requests are permitted for the control device and operation-related indicators are displayed, the first control device may either have the first operation cues sound played or not. This provides a degree of secrecy, allowing the level of secrecy to vary depending on the type of control device, thus enhancing the dramatic effect while creating a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the 34th configuration B34 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is possible to ensure that, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received from the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state does not reappear after the period during which the first operation-related display is displayed has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the 34th configuration B34 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is possible to ensure that when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received from the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear after the period during which the second operation-related display is shown has ended.

Furthermore, in realizing the 34th configuration B34 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" may be made displayable in one of several display modes, including a first mode (message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) and a second mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170). When the first mode (message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) is displayed, the first operation cues corresponding to the first operation-related display are not output, and when the second mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) is displayed, the first operation cues corresponding to the first operation-related display are output.

Furthermore, in realizing the 34th configuration B34 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, and then, despite the sword ornament 5001 being maintained in an operating state, no operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, then the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" will change to the first form (the message table shown in Figure 172). Regardless of whether the message is displayed in the first embodiment (MB5) or the second embodiment (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170), it is desirable that, if the sword ornament 5001 is kept in an operating state (or if a predetermined start condition is met while it is being maintained), the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001 based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period in which the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed ends (see Figures 168, 170, 172, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 34th configuration B34 and the various performance examples above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, the appearance of the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs depending on whether a first operation cues corresponding to the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is output (see Figure 168 or Figure 170, etc.) or whether the first operation cues are not output (see Figure 172, etc.). However, the changes after operation reception are the same.

Furthermore, for example, the 35th configuration B35 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operation-related display (operation related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) can be used to receive operation reception multiple times. The system comprises a first operation-related display means capable of displaying operation-related displays, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), wherein when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) If, after a situation has occurred in which the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to an operation reception to the second operating means (operating button 410) is executed multiple times, and then a situation has occurred in which the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operating state but no operation reception is received for the second operating means (operating button 410) (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 179 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 180), even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed has ended, until the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after it has been displayed), the second operation-related display will not be displayed. While the system is in operation, based on the detection of the previously maintained operation state, the system is designed so that operation requests to the second operation means (operation button 410) will not be received again (see Figures 179(f), (h) and 180(f), (h), etc.). When the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operational state, and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation requests to the second operation means (operation button 410), the interval between these multiple post-reception changes can be set to a specific time or less (see the first B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 164 and 179). Therefore, if a situation arises where operation requests to the second operation means (operation button 410) are not received, this can be recognized relatively quickly, and it is expected that the system will prompt the user to release the operational state of the second operation means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then, despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state, a situation occurs where no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, at timings tBc2-C2 and tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 181 to 183), the period during which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends. If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state after the operation has been performed, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. If, while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, predetermined tolerance conditions are met and an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted, then a situation may reappear where an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBc5A and tBe5A shown in Figures 181 to 183).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B35 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or on operations on or release of operations on operating means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state during the period when the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) is set to be less than or equal to a specific time (the third B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 168 and 181, the fourth B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 170 and 181, and the fifth B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 172, 182, and 183), and the second operation When the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operated state during the period in which the operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, multiple post-reception changes may be executed in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operating button 410). In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time (for example, the first B reception-accepting state shown in Figures 164 and 179) or to be longer than a specific time (for example, the second B reception-accepting state shown in Figures 166 and 180).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after reception is made relatively short. Therefore, when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in operation state even after the period during which the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display (sword ornament 5001 as the target of enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) will continue to be displayed while the operation state is maintained. The operation-related display for the decorative body 5001 may be displayed again, and when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display for the sword decorative body 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed and predetermined tolerance conditions are met, allowing the acceptance of an operation to the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001), the situation in which an operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point may reappear. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated button function is activated for the first operating means (sword decorative body 5001) can be suitably maintained. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes after acceptance can be either relatively short or relatively long. Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize the deactivation of the auto-repeated button function relatively quickly. In addition, even if the second operating means (operating button 410) remains in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-repeated button function activation) is displayed ends, and until the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-repeated button activation) is displayed again (until a state occurs where operation acceptance for the second operating means is permitted), operation acceptance for the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be attempted again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed. Therefore, it is expected that a suitable sense of tension will be maintained when the auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410).

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-click function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden first operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden first operation-related display.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations related to the 35th configuration B35 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the 35th configuration B35, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the 35th configuration B35, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is displayed ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the 35th configuration B35, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may be such that the second operation-related display appears when the second operation-related display is hidden, such as after the second operation-related display has been displayed again and then hidden, or before the second operation-related display is displayed again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B35 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state during a period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed in a special manner (message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B acceptance state), it is desirable that the interval between multiple operation requests to the operation button 410 (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) never be longer than a specific time, and always be less than or equal to a specific time (see Figures 164 and 179, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B35 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state during a period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed in a special manner (message display MB2 corresponding to the second B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval at which operation reception is performed automatically) may be set to be longer than a specified time or to be less than or equal to a specified time (see Figures 166 and 180, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 35th configuration B35 and the various performance examples described above, during the period when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001. However, it is possible to ensure that there are both cases where a predetermined condition is met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden, and cases where this predetermined condition is not met. Conversely, during the period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410. However, it is possible to ensure that a condition is always met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, for example, the 36th configuration B36 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operation-related display (related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) can be made multiple times. The system comprises: a first operation-related display means capable of displaying operation-related displays; a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the display is in the display state, the second operation means (operation button 410) can be operated multiple times, and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) If, after a situation has occurred in which the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change in response to an operation reception to the second operating means (operating button 410) is executed multiple times, and then a situation has occurred in which the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operating state but no operation reception is received for the second operating means (operating button 410) (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 179 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 180), even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operating state after the period in which the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends, until the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after it is displayed), the second operation-related display will not be displayed. While this is happening, based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state, the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be asked to accept an operation again (see Figures 179(f), (h) and 180(f), (h), etc.). When the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operating state, and multiple post-acceptance changes are performed in response to the operation acceptance of the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between these multiple post-acceptance changes can be set to a fixed time (see the first B acceptance-allowed state shown in Figures 164 and 179). Therefore, if a situation arises where the second operating means (operating button 410) is not being asked to accept an operation, it is expected that this will be relatively easy to recognize, prompting the user to release the operating state of the second operating means (operating button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then, despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state, a situation occurs where no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, at timings tBc2-C2 and tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 181 to 183), the period during which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends. If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state after the operation has been performed, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. If, while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, predetermined tolerance conditions are met and an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted, then a situation may reappear where an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBc5A and tBe5A shown in Figures 181 to 183).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B36 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) (such as the third B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 168 and 181, the fourth B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 170 and 181, and the fifth B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 172, 182, and 183), and the second operation-related table When the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operated state during the period in which the indication (operation-related indication regarding the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, multiple post-reception changes may be executed in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operating button 410). In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated button function) may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 164 and 179) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined) (for example, the second B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 166 and 180).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after reception is set to a certain time (a predetermined time). Therefore, when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in operation even after the period during which the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed has ended, the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) will remain displayed while the operation state is maintained. The operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 may be displayed again, and when the predetermined allowable conditions are met and an operation to be accepted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, a situation may reappear in which an operation to be accepted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point. Therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained when the auto-repeated function is activated for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). In contrast, when the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes occurring after acceptance can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined). This ensures that it is not always possible to recognize relatively quickly when the auto-button rapid-fire function is disabled. Furthermore, even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function) is displayed ends, until the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function) is displayed again (until a state occurs in which operation acceptance for the second operating means is permitted), operation acceptance for the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be performed again based on the detection of the operation state maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is displayed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the auto-button rapid-fire function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410).

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-click function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden first operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden first operation-related display.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 36th configuration B36 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the 36th configuration B36, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the 36th configuration B36, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the 36th configuration B36, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may be such that the second operation-related display appears when the second operation-related display is hidden, such as after the second operation-related display has been displayed again and then hidden, or before the second operation-related display is displayed again.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 36th configuration B36 and the various performance examples mentioned above, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state during a period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed in a special manner (message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B acceptance state), it is desirable that the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) not be an indefinite period, but always a fixed period (see Figures 164 and 179, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 36th configuration B36 and the various performance examples described above, during the period when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001. However, it is possible to ensure that there are both cases where a predetermined condition is met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden, and cases where this predetermined condition is not met. Conversely, during the period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410. However, it is possible to ensure that a condition is always met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, for example, the 37th configuration B37 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display (a target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function) which prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state while the display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be operated multiple times. The system comprises a first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), wherein if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the display is in the displayed state, the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) When the second operation means (operation button 410) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410), and then a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 179 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 180), then the second operation means (operation related display concerning operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) will remain in operation until the second operation related display is displayed again (and thereafter) after the period in which the second operation related display is displayed has ended. Even if the operation button 410 is kept in an operated state, the system is designed so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) will not be asked to accept an operation again based on the detection of the previously maintained operated state (see Figures 179(f), (h) and 180(f), (h), etc.). When the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation acceptance to the second operation means (operation button 410) are performed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-unoperated display (post-unoperated display HB2) may be displayed (see Figures 166(f), 167, 180(f), etc.). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state, no operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then, despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state, a situation occurs where no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, at timings tBc2-C2 and tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 181 to 183), the period during which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends. If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state after the operation has been performed, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. If, while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, predetermined tolerance conditions are met and an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted, then a situation may reappear where an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBc5A and tBe5A shown in Figures 181 to 183).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B37 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, no corresponding post-operation display is shown (see Figures 168-173, 176, 177, etc.). However, while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operating means (operation button 410) are executed, when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-operation display (post-operation display HB2) may be shown (see Figures 166, 167, etc.).

With this configuration, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed reappears (and even after it reappears), a situation may reappear where multiple operation requests are received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the maintained operating state. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means (operating button 410), simply maintaining the operating state until the period during which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed reappears (and even after it appears) will not result in a situation where the second operating means (operating button 410) is repeatedly activated. However, by making it easier to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means (operating button 410) is deactivated, and encouraging re-operation, it is expected that the game's enjoyment will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-click function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden first operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden first operation-related display.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations related to the 37th configuration B37 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur in which multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the 37th configuration B37, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the 37th configuration B37, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 37th configuration B37 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable that when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple operation requests have been received for the operation button 410, there are two possibilities: either a post-operation display is shown (see Figure 166), or the post-operation display is not shown (see Figure 164).

In this case, even if the "no operation" indicator is displayed (see Figure 166), it is desirable that no new sound is output as a result of the operation button 410 changing from an operated state to a non-operated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 37th configuration B37 and the various performance examples described above, during the period when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001. However, it is possible to ensure that there are both cases where a predetermined condition is met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden, and cases where this predetermined condition is not met. Conversely, during the period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410. However, it is possible to ensure that a condition is always met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, if, despite the operation button 410 being maintained in the operated state, no operation is received for the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the unoperated state, it goes without saying that the "after unoperated" display will not be shown as a result.

Furthermore, for example, the 38th configuration B38 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in a displayed state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related display (related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) can be used to receive operation reception multiple times. The system comprises: a first operation-related display means capable of displaying operation-related displays; a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the display is in the display state, the second operation means (operation button 410) can be operated multiple times, and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) can be operated. If, after a situation has occurred in which the operation button 410 is maintained in the operated state and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then a situation has occurred in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state but no operation reception is received for the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 179 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 180), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state from the end of the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed until the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after it has been displayed), the second operation-related display While the above is displayed, the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be asked to accept an operation again based on the detection of the operation state that has been maintained up to that point (see Figures 179(f), (h) and 180(f), (h), etc.). When the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operation state to a non-operation state while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operation state and multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation acceptance of the second operating means (operation button 410) have been performed, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figures 166(h) and 180(h)) inaudible (see Figures 166(h) and 180(h), etc.). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state, no operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and then, despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the period during which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends. If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) continues to be in an operating state, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. If, while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, predetermined tolerance conditions are met and an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted, then a situation may reappear where an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B38 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are being performed, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not trigger the deafening sound that was audible at that time to be deafened (see Figures 168 to 173, Figures 176, 177, etc.). However, while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operating means (operation button 410) are being performed, when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger the deafening of at least one of the deafening sound that was audible at that time (for example, the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166(h) and Figure 180(h)).

With this configuration, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed reappears (and even after it reappears), a situation may reappear where multiple operation requests are received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the maintained operating state. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means (operating button 410), simply maintaining the operating state until the period during which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed reappears (and even after it appears) will not result in a situation where the second operating means (operating button 410) is repeatedly activated. However, by making it easier to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means (operating button 410) is deactivated, and encouraging re-operation, it is expected that the game's enjoyment will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-click function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden first operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden first operation-related display.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 38th configuration B38 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur in which multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the 38th configuration B38, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the 38th configuration B38, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B38 described above and the various performance examples, it is desirable that when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple operation requests have been received for the operation button 410, this triggers either the following: making at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see Figure 166), or not making at least one of the performance sounds in an inaudible state (see Figure 164).

Furthermore, even if the change in the operation button 410 from an operated state to an unoperated state triggers the de-operation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time, it is desirable that no new sound is output as a result of the de-operation state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 38th configuration B38 and the various performance examples described above, if the configuration is set to "make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to an inactive state," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be one of the sounds that appeared as a change after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 38th configuration B38 and the various performance examples described above, during the period when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001. However, it is possible to ensure that there are both cases where a predetermined condition is met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden, and cases where this predetermined condition is not met. Also, during the period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410. However, it is possible to ensure that a condition is always met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, if the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of effects are implemented, it goes without saying that if, after a situation occurs where the operation button 410 is not receiving input despite being kept in the activated state, and then the operation button 410 changes from the activated state to the deactivated state, this will not trigger a change in the effect sound, which was audible at that point, to an inaudible state.

Furthermore, for example, the 39th configuration B39 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state while the display is in the display state, the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) can be displayed, which allows for multiple operation receptions to be made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). The system comprises a display means, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), wherein when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, the second operation means (operation button 410) can be operated multiple times, and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and the second operation means (operation button 410) If, after a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation request, and then, despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being kept in an operating state, no operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at timings tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 179 or tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 180), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state from the end of the period in which the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed until the second operation-related display is displayed again (and even after it is displayed), the second operation means (operation button 410) will not receive an operation request based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up to that point while the second operation-related display is displayed. The system is designed so that the operation is not repeated (see Figures 179(f), (h) and 180(f), (h), etc.). During the period in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated while the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) is occurring, and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is returned to the operation state from the deactivated state, this can trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)), thus suggesting that the second operation means (operation button 410) has been returned to the operation state and an operation reception has been performed.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and then, despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the period during which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends. If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) continues to be in an operating state, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. If, while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, predetermined tolerance conditions are met and an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted, then a situation may reappear where an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B39 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is undergoing a post-reception change according to the operation state, and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and then the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from a non-operation state back to an operation state, this does not trigger the sound effect that was audible at that time to become inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, Figures 176, 177, etc.), whereas the second operation When an operation-related indicator (an operation-related indicator concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, and then changed back from a non-operated state to an operated state, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)) inaudible.

With this configuration, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed reappears (and even after it reappears), a situation may reappear where multiple operation requests are received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the maintained operating state. However, when the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is interrupted and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is operated again, it becomes difficult to recognize that the reception was properly performed. Therefore, it becomes easier to maintain the operating state of the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) in order to proceed with the game. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means (operating button 410), simply maintaining the operating state until the period during which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed reappears (and even after it reappears) will not result in a situation where the second operating means (operating button 410) is accepted multiple times again. However, when the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operating button 410) is interrupted and the second operating means (operating button 410) is operated again, it becomes easier to recognize that the acceptance was properly performed. Therefore, it becomes easier to reset the operating state of the second operating means (operating button 410) in order to ensure the game progresses properly.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-click function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden first operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden first operation-related display.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 39th configuration B39 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operation state, a situation may occur in which multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the 39th configuration B39, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the 39th configuration B39, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is displayed ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 39th configuration B39 and the various performance examples described above, if, during the period in which the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-button function" is displayed, the operation button 410 is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation received by the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is returned to the operation state from the deactivated state, and only if the post-reception output sound (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)) is audible at that time, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time. However, the performance sound that is deactivated does not have to be the sound that appeared as one of the post-reception changes; it may be any type of sound as long as it is different from the second operation-related sound. For example, it may be another performance sound such as BGM, or it may be one of several performance sounds that are audible at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B39 described above and the various performance examples, it is possible to have both the following options: when the operation button 410 is deactivated (during the period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed) and the operation button 410 is deactivated, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated again, even if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that point, this may trigger either the deactivation of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that point (see, for example, timing tBa2-C1 shown in Figure 164(h)), or the deactivation of the performance sound that was audible at that point (see, for example, Figure 166).

Furthermore, for example, the 40th configuration B40 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and an image display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the image display When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in a display state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and separate from the first operation-related display, which is an image display prompting operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), an operation-promoting light (for example, Figure 17) is provided to prompt operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). A first promotion light-emitting means capable of performing the fourth B operation promotion light-emitting LB4 shown in 0, a second post-reception change execution means capable of performing a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display (so-called auto-reception) which is an image display prompting operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the image display is in the displayed state, the second operation means (operation button 410) may be requested to perform operation reception multiple times. The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the pressing function), and a second promotion light-emitting means capable of performing operation-promoting light (for example, the first B operation-promoting light-emitting LB1 shown in Figure 164 or the second B operation-promoting light-emitting LB2 shown in Figure 166) that prompts operation on the second operation means, in addition to the second operation-related display, which is an image display prompting operation on the second operation means, and the second operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-pressing function) is displayed. When the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operating button 410), if a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the second operating means (operating button 410) despite the second operating means (operating button 410) being maintained in an operating state (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 179 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 180), the second operation-related display (iwa Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state until the second operation related display appears again (and even after it appears) after the period in which the operation related display for operation button 410 as the target for activation of the relaxed auto-button rapid-fire function has ended, the operation acceptance for the second operation means (operation button 410) will not be accepted again based on the detection of the operating state that has been maintained up to that point while the second operation related display is displayed (Figures 179(f), (h) and 180( See f), (h), etc.) when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, the 4B reception permission state shown in Figure 170), operation-promoting light emission (for example, the 4B operation-promoting light emission LB4) prompting an operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is possible, and the second operation-related display (an operation button as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) When an operation-related display for button 410 is shown and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operating means (operation button 410) (for example, the first B operation permission state shown in Figure 164 or the second B operation permission state shown in Figure 166), operation-prompting light (for example, the first B operation-prompting light LB1 or the second B operation-prompting light LB2) prompting operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) can be activated. Therefore, it can be expected that the second operating means will be put back into operation mode, indicating that an operation request has been received.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and then, despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the period during which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends. If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) continues to be in an operating state, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. If, while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, predetermined tolerance conditions are met and an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted, then a situation may reappear where an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B40 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) (when there is a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed), operation-prompting light to encourage operation on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is performed (at least for a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) (see Figure 170(j)), and when said operation-prompting light is not performed (at least for a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) Both scenarios (see Figures 168(j) and 172(j)) are possible. When the second operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (i.e., when the second operation-related indicator is displayed), operation-prompting illumination to encourage operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) may be performed (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden) (see Figures 164(j) and 166(j), etc.). This makes it possible to vary the degree of concealment depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

With this configuration, even when multiple operation requests are allowed for the operating means and an operation-related indicator is displayed, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may either have operation-promoting illumination performed or not, which provides a degree of secrecy. However, even if operation requests are not made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until (and even after) the period in which the first operation-related indicator (an operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed reappears, the situation in which multiple operation requests are made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may reappear based on the detection of that maintained operating state. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained while adding a sense of tension. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means (operating button 410), although the operation prompt illumination is always performed from the time the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed until it disappears, if no operation is received by the second operating means (operating button 410), simply maintaining the operating state until the period in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed again (and even after it reappears) will prevent the situation in which multiple operation requests are received by the second operating means (operating button 410) from reappearing. Therefore, it is expected that the game's enjoyment will be suitably maintained while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-click function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden first operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden first operation-related display.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 40th configuration B40 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the 40th configuration B40, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the 40th configuration B40, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is displayed ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the 40th configuration B40 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is desirable that the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" be made displayable in one of several display modes, including a first mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 172) and a second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170). When the first mode (for example, message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed and multiple operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, operation-promoting light emission prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not performed. When the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) is displayed and multiple operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, operation-promoting light emission prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001 (for example, 4B operation-promoting light emission LB4) is performed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 40th configuration B40 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, and then, despite the sword ornament 5001 being maintained in an operating state, no operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, then the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is changed to the first form (the message shown in Figure 168). Regardless of whether the message is displayed in the second mode (MB3, or MB4 as shown in Figure 172) or the second mode (MB4 as shown in Figure 170), it is desirable that, if the sword ornament 5001 is kept in an operating state (or if a predetermined start condition is met while it is being maintained), the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001 based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period in which the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed ends (see Figures 168 and 170, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the 40th configuration B40 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the "predetermined starting conditions" for the "situation in which multiple operations are received for the sword ornament 5001" to reappear may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted, or based on the result of a performance judgment based on operation reception for the sword ornament 5001, such as operations on or release of operations on an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, in realizing the 40th configuration B40 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed and multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, the form of the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" differs depending on whether an operation prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the sword ornament 5001 (see Figure 170, etc.) or whether an operation prompting light to encourage operation on the first operation means is not emitted (see Figures 168 and 172, etc.). However, the post-reception changes when an operation is received may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, the 41st configuration B41 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a table that prompts the player to perform an operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function), wherein if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first : A first cuesound output means capable of outputting a first cuesound corresponding to an operation-related display (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168, or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170); a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410); a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which prompts operation of the second operation means (operation button 410), and which allows for multiple operation receptions of the second operation means (operation button 410) when the display is in the displayed state; and a second cuesound output means capable of displaying a second cuesound corresponding to the second operation-related display (for example, the first B operation-related display shown in Figure 164) when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. The system includes a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting output sound OB1, or the second operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166, and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410), then, despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state, a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 179, or timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 180), then, after the period in which the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends, the second operation means will continue to be displayed until (and even after) the second operation means Even if the button (operation button 410) is kept in the operating state, the second operation-related display is not displayed, and the operation is not accepted again for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (see Figures 179(f), (h) and 180(f), (h), etc.). When the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation prompt Since the system is capable of outputting a progression sound (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168, or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170), and when the second operation-related display is shown, the second operation acceleration sound (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) is also capable of outputting, it is expected that situations where multiple operation requests are received from the operating means will be easily created, thereby providing a suitable sense of tension.

In this case, even if, while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and then, despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state, no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the period during which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends. If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) continues to be in an operating state, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) may be displayed again while the operating state is maintained. If, while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, predetermined tolerance conditions are met and an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted, then a situation may reappear where an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B41 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or on operations on or release of operations on operating means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed (while operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, or when operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted), a second operation accelerating sound (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) is always output. However, when a first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, there may be cases where a first operation accelerating sound (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168, or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170) is output (see Figures 168 and 170, etc.) and cases where the first operation accelerating sound is not output (see Figure 172). This allows for varying degrees of secrecy depending on the type of operation, potentially enhancing the sense of tension and improving the dramatic effect.

With this configuration, with respect to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), when the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there are cases where the first operation cues are output and cases where the first operation cues are not output. This provides a degree of secrecy. However, even if operation is no longer accepted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until the period in which the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed again (and even after it appears), the situation in which operation is accepted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) multiple times may reappear based on the detection of that maintained operating state. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained while adding a sense of tension. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means (operating button 410), while a second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the second operating means (operating button 410) stops receiving input, simply maintaining the operating state until the period in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed again (and even after it reappears) will prevent the situation in which the second operating means (operating button 410) receives input multiple times from reappearing. Therefore, it is expected that the game's enjoyment will be suitably maintained while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, the manner in which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-click function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden first operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden first operation-related display.

Furthermore, the manner in which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function) is displayed again may be the same as the hidden second operation-related display, or it may be a different manner from the hidden second operation-related display.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 41st configuration B41 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the 41st configuration B41, when the first operating means is continuously maintained in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the first operating means based on the detection of that operating state may not reappear before the period during which the first operation-related display is shown ends, or when the first operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the 41st configuration B41, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the second operating means based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period during which the second operation-related display is shown ends, or even when the second operation-related display is not shown.

Furthermore, in realizing the 41st configuration B41 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is desirable that the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" be made displayable in one of several display modes, including a first mode (for example, the message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) and a second mode (the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or the message display MB4 shown in Figure 170). When the first mode (for example, the message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) is displayed, no operation prompting sound is output to encourage operation on the sword ornament 5001. When the second mode (the message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or the message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) is displayed, an operation prompting sound is output to encourage operation on the sword ornament 5001.

Furthermore, in realizing the 41st configuration B41 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, and then, despite the sword ornament 5001 being maintained in an operating state, no operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, then the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is changed to the first form (for example, as shown in Figure 172) Regardless of whether the message display MB5) or the second mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) is displayed, it is desirable that, if the sword ornament 5001 is kept in an operating state (or if a predetermined start condition is met while it is being maintained), the situation in which multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001 based on the detection of that operating state may reappear before the period in which the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed ends (see Figures 181 and 182, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the 41st configuration B41 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the "predetermined starting conditions" for the "situation in which multiple operations are received for the sword ornament 5001" to reappear may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is permitted, or based on the result of a performance judgment based on operation reception for the sword ornament 5001, such as operations on or release of operations on an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 41st configuration B41 and the various performance examples above, the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" may differ in appearance depending on whether an operation prompting sound is output when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see Figures 168 and 170, etc.) or whether the operation prompting sound is not output (see Figure 172, etc.). However, the changes after operation reception may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, the 42nd configuration B42 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a table that prompts the player to perform an operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function), which, when the display is in a display state, maintains the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) in an operating state, can receive multiple operation requests for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001); a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation request for the second operating means (operation button 410); and The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be received multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be received and a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figure 176), and the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) Even when the operation-related display for the operation button 410 is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, then if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state but no operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 184, or in Figure 1 The timing tBb2-C2 shown in 85 (etc.) ensures that even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state even after the period during which the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed has ended, the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be again accepted for operation based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden (see Figures 184 and 185, etc.). If the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state and multiple post-acceptance changes are performed in response to the acceptance of operation by the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between the multiple executions of such post-acceptance changes may be less than or equal to a specific time (see the first B acceptance-acceptance state shown in Figures 164 and 184). In other words, in this case, since the interval between operation receptions when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled is set to a relatively short interval, it is expected that the situation in which operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not received will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state but no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, at the timings tBc2-C2 and tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, After the period during which the display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, a situation may reappear in which an operation request is received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBc5B and tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B42 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or on operations on or cancellation of operations on operating means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state during the period when the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) is set to be less than or equal to a specific time (the third B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 168 and 186, the fourth B reception-allowed state shown in Figure 170, and the fifth B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 172 and 187), and the second operation-related display When the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operated state during the period in which the operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, multiple post-reception changes may be executed in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operating button 410). In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated button function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time (for example, the first B reception-accepting state shown in Figures 164 and 184) or longer than a specific time (for example, the second B reception-accepting state shown in Figures 166 and 185).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after reception is set to a relatively short interval. Therefore, when the auto-repeated button-pressing function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, even after the period during which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function) is displayed has ended, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function) is hidden, a situation in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state may reappear. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated button-pressing function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be suitably maintained. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes after reception can be either relatively short or relatively long. Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize the deactivation of the auto-repeated button function relatively quickly. In addition, even if the second operating means (operating button 410) remains in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-repeated button function activation) is displayed ends, the system will not attempt to receive another operation request from the second operating means (operating button 410) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-repeated button activation) is not displayed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 42nd configuration B42 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 42 and configuration B42, even if the first operating means, which has stopped receiving operations, is kept in an operating state, and the period during which the first operation-related display is shown occurs again, it is possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is shown, the situation in which multiple operations are received by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 42 and configuration B42, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operation requests, is kept in an operating state, and a period of time when the second operation-related display is shown occurs again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operation requests are made to the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing configuration 42 and configuration B42, the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 42nd configuration B42 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state during a period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed in a special manner (message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B acceptance state), it is desirable that the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) never be longer than a specific time, and always be less than or equal to a specific time (see Figures 164 and 184, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 42nd configuration B42 and the various performance examples above, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state during a period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed in a special manner (message display MB2 corresponding to the 2B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval at which operation receptions are performed automatically) may be set to be longer than a specific time, or to be shorter than a specific time (see Figures 166 and 185, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B42 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between multiple operation requests to the operation button 410 (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operated state when no operation-related display for the operation button 410 (the target of the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed may be set to never be longer than a specific time, but always to be less than or equal to a specific time (see Figure 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 42nd configuration B42 and the various performance examples described above, during the period when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001. However, it is possible to ensure that there are both cases where a predetermined condition is met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden, and cases where this predetermined condition is not met. Conversely, during the period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410. However, it is possible to ensure that a condition is always met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B42 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between operations being accepted for the sword ornament 5001 based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is hidden may be set to the same manner (interval) as when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operation state and operations are accepted for the sword ornament 5001 multiple times while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed.

Furthermore, for example, the 43rd configuration B43 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a prompt for operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). A first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display and, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state while the display is in a display state, allows for multiple operation receptions to be made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001); and a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the operation reception made to the second operating means (operation button 410). The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be received multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be received and a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figure 176), and the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) Even when the operation-related display for the operation button 410 is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, then if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state but no operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at the timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 184) The timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 185, etc., ensures that even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state for an extended period after the period during which the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends, the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be again accepted for operation based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden (see Figures 184 and 185, etc.). If the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state and multiple post-acceptance changes are performed in response to the acceptance of operation, the interval between the multiple executions of these post-acceptance changes can be set to a constant time (see the first B acceptance-acceptance state shown in Figures 164 and 184). In other words, in this case, since the interval between operation receptions when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled is set to a fixed time, it is expected that the situation in which operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not received will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state but no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, at the timings tBc2-C2 and tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, After the period during which the display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, a situation may reappear in which an operation request is received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBc5B and tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B43 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or on operations on or cancellation of operations on operating means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operation state, multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed. In this case, the interval between the execution of multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated function) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) (such as the third B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 168 and 186, the fourth B reception-allowed state shown in Figure 170, and the fifth B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 172 and 187), and the second operation-related display (so-called When the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operated state during the period in which the operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated button function) is displayed, multiple post-reception changes may be executed in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operating button 410). In this case, the interval between the execution of these multiple post-reception changes (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated button function) may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 164 and 184) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined) (for example, the second B reception-allowed state shown in Figures 166 and 185).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after reception is set to a certain time (a predetermined time). Therefore, when the auto-repeated button-pressing function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, even after the period during which the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function) is displayed has ended, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function) is hidden, a situation may reappear where an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated button-pressing function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be suitably maintained. In contrast, when the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes after reception can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undetermined time (a time not predetermined). Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize relatively quickly when the auto-button rapid-fire function is disabled. In addition, even if the second operating means (operating button 410) remains in an operating state after the period during which the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-button rapid-fire function) is displayed has ended, the system will not attempt to receive another operation request from the second operating means (operating button 410) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-button rapid-fire function) is not displayed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained when the auto-button rapid-fire function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 43rd configuration B43 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur in which multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in configuration 43, configuration B43, and the various performance examples described above, even if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations, is kept in an operating state, and the period during which the first operation-related display is shown occurs again, it is possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is shown, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in configuration 43, configuration B43, and the various performance examples described above, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operations, is kept in an operating state, and a period of time when the second operation-related display is shown occurs again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operations are received by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in configuration 43, configuration B43, and the various performance examples described above, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, nor on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B43 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state during a period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed in a special manner (message display MB1 corresponding to the 1B acceptance state), it is desirable that the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) not be an indefinite period, but always a fixed period (see Figures 164 and 184, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B43 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between multiple operation requests to the operation button 410 (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operated state when no operation-related display for the operation button 410 (the target of the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed may be set to a fixed time, rather than being an indefinite time (see Figure 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 43rd configuration B43 and the various performance examples described above, during the period when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001. However, it is possible to ensure that there are both cases where a predetermined condition is met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden, and cases where this predetermined condition is not met. Conversely, during the period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410. However, it is possible to ensure that a condition is always met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B43 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between operations being accepted for the sword ornament 5001 based on the detection of the operation state maintained while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is hidden may be set to the same manner (interval) as when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operation state and operations are accepted for the sword ornament 5001 multiple times while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed.

Furthermore, for example, the 44th configuration B44 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display prompting operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). Furthermore, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state while the display is in the display state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and the second post-reception change execution means is capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the operation request made to the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operating means (operation The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation on button 410, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be received multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be received and a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figure 176), and the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) Even when the second operation-related display (operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-button function) is displayed, if an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-button function) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, then if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state but no operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at timings tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 184 or tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 185), then the second Even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operated state for an extended period after the period during which the operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed has ended, the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be subjected to operation reception again based on the detection of the previously maintained operated state while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden (see Figures 184 and 185, etc.). Furthermore, when the second operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception have been performed, a corresponding post-unoperated display (post-unoperated display HB2) may be displayed (see Figures 166(f), 167, 185(f), etc.). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state, no operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state but no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, at the timings tBc2-C2 and tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, After the period during which the display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, a situation may reappear in which an operation request is received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBc5B and tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

Furthermore, in realizing the 44th configuration B44 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, no corresponding post-operation display is shown (see Figures 168 to 173 and Figure 176, etc.). However, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410) are executed, and the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-operation display (post-operation display HB2) may be shown (see Figures 166(f), 167, 185(f), etc.).

With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, remains in an operating state even after the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, then a situation may reappear where the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted for operations even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means (operating button 410), if operation reception ceases while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, even if the operating state is maintained after the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, the situation in which operation reception is received for the second operating means while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden will not reappear. However, since it is possible to easily recognize when the operating state of the second operating means (operating button 410) has been released and encourage re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the 44th configuration B44 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in configuration 44, configuration B44, and the various performance examples described above, even if the first operating means, which has stopped accepting operations, is kept in an operating state, and the period during which the first operation-related display is shown occurs again, it is possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is shown, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in configuration 44, configuration B44, and the various performance examples described above, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operations, is kept in an operating state, and a period of time when the second operation-related display is shown occurs again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operations are received by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in implementing the configurations described in Configuration 44, Configuration B44, and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple operation requests have been received for the operation button 410, it may be possible to have both cases: one where a corresponding post-operation display is shown (see Figures 166(f), 167, 185(f), etc.), and another where the post-operation display is not shown (see Figures 164(f), 165, 184(f), etc.).

In this case, even if the "no operation" indicator is displayed (see Figure 166), it is desirable that no new sound is output as a result of the operation button 410 changing from an operated state to a non-operated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 44th configuration B44 and the various performance examples described above, during the period when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001. However, it is possible to ensure that there are both cases where a predetermined condition is met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden, and cases where this predetermined condition is not met. Conversely, during the period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410. However, it is possible to ensure that a condition is always met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, if, despite the operation button 410 being maintained in the operated state, no operation is received for the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the unoperated state, it goes without saying that the "after unoperated" display will not be shown as a result.

Furthermore, for example, the 45th configuration B45 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the display When the indicator is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in the operating state, multiple operation receptions can be made for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and the second post-reception change execution means is capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made for the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operating means (operation button 410) The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the display is in an displayed state, operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be performed multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be performed in accordance with the reception, and in this case, when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be performed multiple times (see Figure 176), and even when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, the second operation When an operation is received for the means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). When the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and after the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state but no operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at timings tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 184 or tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 185), the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) Even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in the operating state until after the period in which the operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed has ended, the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be accepted again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden (see Figures 184 and 185, etc.), and the second operation When the operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means (operating button 410) are performed, and the second operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, this can trigger the de-inhibition of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figures 166(h) and 180(h)) (see Figures 166(h) and 185(h), etc.). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operating state of the second operating means (operating button 410) has been released, thus allowing for the favorable maintenance of the game's enjoyment after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means (operating button 410) being maintained in an operated state, no operation is received by the second operating means (operating button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state but no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, at the timings tBc2-C2 and tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, After the period during which the display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, a situation may reappear in which an operation request is received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBc5B and tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B45 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or on operations on or cancellation of operations on operating means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are being executed, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to an inoperable state, this does not trigger the change from an audible sound to an inaudible state (see Figures 168 to 173 and Figure 176, etc.), whereas the second operating means (operation button 410) is in an operating state While the system is maintained in a state where multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410), if the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figures 166(h) and 185(h)) inaudible (see Figures 166(h), 185(h), etc.).

With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, remains in an operating state even after the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, then a situation may reappear where the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted for operations even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operating state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means (operating button 410), if operation reception ceases while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, even if the operating state is maintained after the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, the situation in which operation reception is received for the second operating means while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden will not reappear. However, since it is possible to easily recognize when the operating state of the second operating means (operating button 410) has been released and encourage re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 45th configuration B45 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in configuration 45, configuration B45, and the various performance examples described above, even if the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, and the period during which the first operation-related display is shown occurs again, it is possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is shown, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in configuration 45, configuration B45, and the various performance examples described above, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operations, is kept in an operating state, and a period of time when the second operation-related display is shown occurs again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operations are received by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in configuration 45, configuration B45, and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple operation requests have been received for the operation button 410, it may be possible to either, as a result, make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see Figures 166(h), 185(h), etc.), or not make at least one of the performance sounds in an inaudible state (see Figures 164(h), 184(h), etc.).

In this case, even if the "no operation" indicator is displayed (see Figure 166), it is desirable that no new sound is output as a result of the operation button 410 changing from an operated state to an unoperated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 44th configuration B44 and the various performance examples described above, during the period when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001. However, it is possible to ensure that there are both cases where a predetermined condition is met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden, and cases where this predetermined condition is not met. Conversely, during the period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410. However, it is possible to ensure that a condition is always met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to an unoperated state, even if this triggers the deaudibility of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time, it is desirable that no new sound is output as a result of the unoperated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B45 described above and the various performance examples, if the configuration is set to "make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to an inactive state," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be one of the sounds that appeared as a change after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 45th configuration B45 and the various performance examples described above, during the period when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001. However, it is possible to ensure that there are both cases where a predetermined condition is met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden, and cases where this predetermined condition is not met. Also, during the period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple operation requests are received for the operation button 410. However, it is possible to ensure that a condition is always met for this situation to end before the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" becomes hidden.

Furthermore, if the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of effects are implemented, it goes without saying that if, after a situation occurs where the operation button 410 is not receiving input despite being kept in the activated state, and then the operation button 410 changes from the activated state to the deactivated state, this will not trigger a change in the effect sound, which was audible at that point, to an inaudible state.

Furthermore, for example, the 46th configuration B46 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the display is When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operating state while in the display state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the second operating means (operation button 410), and prompting an operation to the second operating means (operation button 410). The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function), and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operating state, a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 176), and even when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operating state, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed multiple times (see Figure 176), and even when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, the second operation means (operation button 41 0) When an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state and a situation occurs in which the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, then if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state but no operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at timings tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 184 or tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 185), the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. Even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state after the indicated period has ended, the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, and no further operation acceptance is made to the second operating means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the previously maintained operated state (see Figures 184 and 185, etc.). If the second operating means (operation button 410) is deactivated while the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance to the second operating means (operation button 410) is occurring, and then the second operating means (operation button 410) is returned to the operated state from the deactivated state, this can trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-acceptance output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)), making it possible to easily recognize that the re-operation to the second operating means (operation button 410) has been properly accepted.

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state but no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, at the timings tBc2-C2 and tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, After the period during which the display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, a situation may reappear in which an operation request is received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBc5B and tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B46 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or on operations on or cancellation of operations on operating means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is undergoing a post-reception change according to the operation state, and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from an operation state to a non-operation state, and then the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from a non-operation state back to an operation state, this does not trigger the effect sound, which was audible at that time, to become inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, etc.), whereas the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the so-called auto-repeated button press function) When an operation-related display for the operation button 410 (as the target of activation) is displayed, and a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is then changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, and then changed back from a non-operated state to an operated state, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)) inaudible (see Figures 164(h), 184(h), etc.).

With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, is kept in the operating state even after the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, then a situation may reappear where the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted for operations while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden. However, when the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is interrupted and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated again, it becomes difficult to recognize that the acceptance was properly performed. Therefore, it becomes easier to maintain the operating state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) in order to proceed with the game. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means (operating button 410), if operation reception ceases while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, even if the operating state is maintained after the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, the situation in which operation reception for the second operating means (operating button 410) occurs while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden will not reappear. However, when the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operating button 410) is interrupted and the second operating means (operating button 410) is operated again, it will be easier to recognize that the reception was properly performed. Therefore, it will be easier to reset the operating state of the second operating means (operating button 410) in order to proceed with the game properly.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 46th configuration B46 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B46 described above and the various performance examples, even if the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B46 described above and the various performance examples, if the second operating means, which has stopped accepting operations, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 46th configuration B46 and the various performance examples described above, if the operation button 410 is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation on the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated again, and only if the post-reception output sound (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1) is audible at that time, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164). In this case, a sound other than the post-reception output sound (first post-reception output sound Sα1) may be deactivated.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 46th configuration B46 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated again, even if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that point, it may be possible to either use this as a trigger to deactivate at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that point (the post-reception output sound) (see timing tBa2-C1 in Figure 164, etc.), or not deactivate the performance sound that was audible at that point (see timing tBb2-C1 in Figure 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the instruction is to "make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state when the operation button 410 is operated again," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appeared as one of the changes after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, for example, the 47th configuration B47 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, an effect display means (effect display device 1600) that displays information related to the effects, an effect determination means that makes a determination, an effect granting means that can grant an effect to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state, the first operation When the means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response when an operation request is made to the second operating means (operation button 410), and a display prompting operation to the second operating means (operation button 410), and when the display is in an operating state, the second operating means (operation The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function), which allows for multiple operation requests to be received for the button 410, and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation request is received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the operation request to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) will be interpreted as follows: The system is configured to execute multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation (see Figure 176). Even when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-reception change corresponding to this may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) remains in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). When the operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410), and then a situation occurs in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state but no operation reception is made to the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at the timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 184 or the timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 185), then the second operation-related display (the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed. Even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state for a period after the period during which the operation-related display for the first operating button 410 is displayed has ended, the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be accepted again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden (see Figures 184 and 185, etc.), and the first operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is kept in an operating state. When the operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) while the continuous display is not displayed, both a display change on the performance display means (performance display device 1600) (for example, the post-reception display HB7 shown in Figure 176) and a change different from the display change (for example, the 7B post-reception output sound Sα7 shown in Figure 176) may occur as the post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time. When the operation related display (operation related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-continuous pressing function) is not displayed, the second operating means (operation When an operation (predetermined operation) is performed on button 410, both a display change on the performance display means (performance display device 1600) (for example, the post-reception display HB6 shown in Figure 174) and a change different from the display change (for example, the 6B post-reception output sound Sα6 shown in Figure 174) can occur as a post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time. Therefore, even when an operation is received on either the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) or the second operation means (operation button 410) while no operation-related display is shown, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the operation has been received correctly.

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state but no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, at the timings tBc2-C2 and tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, After the period during which the display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, a situation may reappear in which an operation request is received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBc5B and tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B47 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or on operations on or cancellation of operations on operating means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B47 described above and the configurations of each of the performance examples, even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated (specifically operated), if the post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated (when the first operating means is put into an operating state in a state where operation reception to the first operating means is not permitted), if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state (when operation reception to the first operating means becomes permitted), operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is performed based on the detection of the maintained operating state. However, in this case, it is possible to ensure that no display change occurs (not even once) in the performance display device 1600 as a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception, and that only changes different from the display change are executed multiple times. In other words, in this case, in the examples shown in Figures 186 and 187, the possibility of the post-reception display HB7 being displayed at timing tBc5B is eliminated. In this configuration, even if an operation (specific operation) of the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted and the corresponding post-operation change is not initiated, simply maintaining the sword ornament 5001 in an operated state will cause the post-operation change to appear. However, as a trade-off, the display change on the performance display device 1600 will not appear as the post-operation change, thus maintaining a suitable sense of tension. However, even in this case, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in an inactive state and the first operation-related display is not shown, it is desirable to have both the post-operation change being executed in the manner shown in Figure 176 and the post-operation change being executed in the manner shown in Figure 178.

Furthermore, in realizing the 47th configuration B47 and the configurations described above for each of the performance examples, even if the sword ornament 5001 is operated (specifically operated), if the post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated (when the sword ornament 5001 is put into an operated state when operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted), if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operated state (when operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 becomes permitted), operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is performed based on the detection of the maintained operated state. In this case, as a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception, there may be cases where both a display change on the performance display device 1600 and a change different from the display change occur, and cases where no display change occurs on the performance display device 1600, and only a change different from the display change occurs (configuration described with reference to Figures 186 and 187). With this configuration, based on the "operational state of the sword ornament 5001" maintained from a state where operation to the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted, there are cases where it is easy to recognize that operation to the sword ornament 5001 has been received, and cases where it is difficult to recognize. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a suitable sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the 47th configuration B47 and the configurations related to each of the above-described performance examples, even if a situation arises where no operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 despite the sword ornament 5001 being kept in an operating state, and then, based on the detection of the above-mentioned operating state which is maintained while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is hidden, and as a result of receiving an operation (specific operation) for the sword ornament 5001 again, and as one of the post-reception changes in response to said reception is a "display change in the performance display device 1600", if the sword ornament 5001 is kept in an operating state, then "a change different from the display change in the performance display device 1600", which is one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation received for the sword ornament 5001, may be executed multiple times, whereas "a display change in the performance display device 1600", which is one of the post-reception changes, may not be executed multiple times (see Figures 186 and 187). With this configuration, even if the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is hidden, and the detection of the aforementioned operation state is maintained, making it easier to recognize that an operation has been received again for the sword ornament 5001, it becomes more difficult to recognize that the auto-repeated button press function will also be activated when the operation state is maintained. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 47th configuration B47 and the various performance examples described above, when the first operation-related display is displayed, if the first operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the first operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the first operation-related display is still displayed, rather than hidden, when a predetermined termination condition is met and no further operation reception is permitted for the first operation means. Similarly, when the second operation-related display is displayed, if the second operation means is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to an operation received by the second operation means. However, this situation may be terminated while the second operation-related display is still displayed, rather than hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and no further operation reception is permitted for the second operation means.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B47 described above and the various performance examples, even if the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B47 described above and the various performance examples, it is possible to ensure that, even if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, remains in an operating state, and the second operation-related display is displayed again, multiple operations may be accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display is displayed.

Furthermore, for example, configuration B48 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and an image display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the image display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is put into the operation state. If maintained, the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can receive operation requests multiple times, and the first operation related display means is capable of displaying a first operation related display (an operation related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and the first promotion light emitting means is capable of performing operation promotion light (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) to encourage operation on the first operation means, separate from the first operation related display which is an image display that prompts operation on the first operation means, and the second post-reception change execution means is capable of performing a post-reception change in accordance with the operation request made to the second operation means (operation button 410), and the second A second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function), which is an image display prompting operation on the operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the image display is in the displayed state, the operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be received multiple times; and separate from the second operation-related display, which is an image display prompting operation on the second operation means, an operation-promoting light (see, for example, Figure 164(j) or Figure 166(j)) is provided to prompt operation on the second operation means. The system includes a second facilitating light-emitting means capable of performing the following actions: Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be performed. In this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) may be performed multiple times (see Figure 176). Even when the operation-related display for the operation button 410 is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation means (operation button If, after a situation has occurred in which the 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change corresponding to the reception of an operation to the second operating means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then a situation has occurred in which, despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state, no operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410) (for example, at timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 184 or timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 185), then the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) will be displayed until after the period in which it is displayed has ended. Even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state, the second operation-related display (operating display relating to the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, and the operation acceptance for the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be accepted again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (see Figures 184 and 185, etc.). The first operation-related display (operating display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is... When multiple operation attempts are permitted, operation-promoting light can be emitted to encourage operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operating means (operation button 410), operation-promoting light can be emitted to encourage operation on the second operating means (operation button 410). Therefore, it is expected that situations where multiple operation attempts are made to the operating means will be more easily created, thereby providing a suitable sense of tension.

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state but no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, at the timings tBc2-C2 and tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, After the period during which the display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, a situation may reappear in which an operation request is received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBc5B and tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B48 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or on operations on or cancellation of operations on operating means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (when there is a period in which the first operation-related display is displayed), operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (at least for a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) (for example, the 4B reception permission state shown in Figure 170), and the operation-prompting light is emitted (from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) The system may be configured so that the operation is not performed (at least partially) and is not performed (for example, in the third B acceptance state shown in Figure 168). When the second operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (i.e., when the second operation-related indicator is displayed), the operation-prompting light illuminating prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) may always be performed (at least partially from the time the second operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of concealment depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, with this configuration, even when multiple operation requests are permitted for the operating means and an operation-related display is shown, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may either perform operation-promoting illumination or not, thus providing a degree of secrecy. However, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which has stopped receiving operation requests while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, remains in an operating state even after the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, then a situation may reappear where operation requests are received for the first operating means while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden. This allows for the maintenance of a sense of tension while effectively preserving the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means (operating button 410), although the operation prompt illumination is always performed from the time the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed until it is hidden, if operation reception ceases while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, even if the operation state is maintained after the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, the situation in which operation reception is received by the second operating means (operating button 410) while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden will not reappear. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 48th configuration B48 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B48 described above and the various performance examples, even if the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B48 described above and the various performance examples, if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 48th configuration B48 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable that the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" be made displayable in one of several display modes, including the first mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) and the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170). When the first mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed and multiple operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, operation-promoting light emission prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not performed. When the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) is displayed and multiple operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, operation-promoting light emission prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001 (for example, the 4B operation-promoting light emission LB4) is performed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B48 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, and then, despite the sword ornament 5001 being maintained in an operational state, no operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, then the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" will be... Regardless of whether the message is displayed in the first mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) or the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170), it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 be kept in an operational state even after the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is hidden. Furthermore, if a predetermined start condition is met under these circumstances, it is desirable that the game be played in such a way that operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are accepted again based on the detection of the previously maintained operational state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B48 described above and the various performance examples, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed and multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, the form of the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" differs depending on whether an operation prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the sword ornament 5001 (see Figure 170, etc.) or whether an operation prompting light to encourage operation on the first operation means is not emitted (see Figures 168 and 172, etc.). However, the post-reception changes when an operation is received may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, the 49th configuration B49 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5 When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operating state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can receive multiple operations, and the first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and the first cues output means capable of outputting a first operation cues corresponding to the first operation-related display (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168, or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170, etc.), and the second operating means (operation button 410) can receive operations multiple times. A second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the attachment made, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which is a display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in the operated state while the display is in the displayed state, operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be made multiple times, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display is displayed The system includes a second prompt sound output means capable of outputting an operation prompt sound (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166), and even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) Multiple post-reception changes can be executed in response to the operation received (see Figure 176). Even when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-reception change can be executed in response. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) remains in the operating state, multiple post-reception changes can be executed in response to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410). (See Figure 174) When the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410), then a situation occurs in which the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state but no operation reception is made to the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at the timing tBa2-C2 shown in Figure 184) Even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state until after the period in which the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed has ended, the operation acceptance for the second operating means (operating button 410) is based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, the timing tBb2-C2 shown in Figure 185 may indicate that the operation acceptance for the second operating means (operating button 410) is based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. The system is designed so that this will not happen again (see Figures 184 and 185, etc.). When the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation cues can be output. When the second operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the operation button 410, which is the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation cues can be output. Therefore, it is expected that situations in which the operation means is received multiple times will be easily created, thereby providing a suitable sense of tension.

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state but no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, at the timings tBc2-C2 and tBe2-C2 shown in Figures 186 and 187), the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, then the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated function) is maintained in an operating state, After the period during which the display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed ends, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until predetermined allowable conditions are met while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, a situation may reappear in which an operation request is received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBc5B and tBe5B shown in Figures 186 and 187).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B49 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or on operations on or cancellation of operations on operating means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed (while operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, or when operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted), the second operation cues are always output (see, for example, Figures 164 and 166). However, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, there may be cases where the first operation cues are output (see Figures 168 and 170) and cases where the first operation cues are not output (see Figure 172). With this configuration, even when multiple operation requests are permitted for the control device and operation-related indicators are displayed, the first control device may either have the first operation cues sound played or not. This provides a degree of secrecy, allowing the level of secrecy to vary depending on the type of control device, thus enhancing the dramatic effect while creating a sense of tension.

With this configuration, with respect to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), when the first operation-related display is shown, there are cases where the first operation cues are output and cases where the first operation cues are not output, which provides a degree of secrecy. However, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, remains in an operating state even after the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, then a situation may reappear where the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted for operations even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden. This is expected to maintain the enjoyment of the game while adding a sense of tension. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means (operating button 410), while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is always displayed, if operation reception ceases while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, even if the operation state is maintained after the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, the situation in which operation reception is received by the second operating means (operating button 410) while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden will not reappear. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 49th configuration B49 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, this situation may be terminated when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not hidden but is still displayed. Furthermore, when the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, if operation button 410 remains in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception for operation button 410. However, this situation may be terminated while the "operation-related display for operation button 410 as a target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is still displayed, rather than being hidden, when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for operation button 410 is no longer permitted.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B49 described above and the various performance examples, even if the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it is possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B49 described above and the various performance examples, if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 49th configuration B49 and the various performance examples described above, the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" may be made displayable in one of several display modes, including a first mode (message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) and a second mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170). When the first mode (message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) is displayed, the first operation cues corresponding to the first operation-related display are not output, and when the second mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) is displayed, the first operation cues corresponding to the first operation-related display are output.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B49 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, and then, despite the sword ornament 5001 being maintained in an operating state, no operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001, then the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is changed to the first form (as shown in Figure 172). Regardless of whether the message is displayed in the first form (MB5) or the second form (MB3 shown in Figure 168, or MB4 shown in Figure 170), it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 be kept in an operational state even after the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is hidden. Furthermore, if a predetermined start condition is met under these circumstances, it is desirable that the game be played in such a way that operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are accepted again based on the detection of the previously maintained operational state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, the appearance of the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs depending on whether a first operation cues corresponding to the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is output (see Figure 168 or Figure 170, etc.) or whether the first operation cues are not output (see Figure 172, etc.). However, the changes after the operation is received may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, the 50th configuration B50 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be operated multiple times, and a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and when an operation reception is made to the second operating means (operation button 410) The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a change after reception, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, the operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be performed multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation reception is made on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed multiple times. It is possible (see Figure 176) that even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). After a situation occurs where the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state and the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state. If, despite being maintained in the operating state, a situation arises where no operation is received for the second operating means (operating button 410) (for example, at the timing tBf2-C2 shown in Figure 191), even if the second operating means (operating button 410) continues to be maintained in the operating state thereafter, the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden will not result in another operation being received for the second operating means (operating button 410) (see Figure 191). If multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation reception for the second operating means (operating button 410) while the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of these post-reception changes may be set to a time less than or equal to a specific time (for example, the 6B reception-allowing state shown in Figure 191). In other words, in this case, since the interval between operation receptions when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled is set to a relatively short interval, it is expected that the situation in which operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not received will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), then even if a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, in Figure 192 or Figure 192) (For example, timings tBg2-C2 shown in Figure 3) If the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until a predetermined allowable condition is met, then a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

Furthermore, in realizing the 50th configuration B50 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (the interval between post-reception changes in the auto-repeated button function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time (such as the third B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 168, the fourth B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 170, the fifth B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 172, the seventh B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 176, etc.). Similarly, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410) (the interval between post-reception changes in the auto-repeated button function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time (for example, the first B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 164, the sixth B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 174, etc.) or to be set to be longer than a specific time (for example, the second B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 166, etc.).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after reception is set to a relatively short interval. Therefore, when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, even after a situation occurs where no operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) remains... If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state while it is hidden until predetermined permissible conditions are met, a situation may reappear where an operation request is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. Therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained when the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-rapid-fire function) is not displayed. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes after reception can be either relatively short or relatively long. Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize relatively quickly when the auto-repeated button function is disabled. In addition, even if the second operating means (operating button 410) remains in an operating state, if no operation is received for it, and the second operating means (operating button 410) continues to be in an operating state, the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-repeated button function activation) is not displayed. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension when the auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410) will be suitably maintained when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-repeated button function activation) is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B50 described above and the various performance examples, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the 50th configuration B50 and the configurations described in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, and the period during which the first operation-related display is shown occurs again, it is possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is shown, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B50 described above and the various performance examples, if the second operating means, which has stopped accepting operations, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 50th configuration B50 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-tap function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, and the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-tap function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

Furthermore, in implementing the 50th configuration B50 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the interval between multiple operation requests (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed may be set to never be longer than a specific time, but always to be less than or equal to a specific time (see Figure 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B50 described above and the various performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, the message display MB1 corresponding to the first B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may be set to never be longer than a specific time, but always to be less than or equal to a specific time (see Figure 164, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B50 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state during a period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in a special manner (for example, the message display MB2 corresponding to the second B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval at which operation receptions are performed automatically) may be set to be longer than a specific time or shorter than a specific time (see Figure 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the 50th configuration B50 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the interval between operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001 while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, and the interval between operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 being received again based on the detection of the operational state maintained while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is hidden, may be set to the same manner (interval).

Furthermore, for example, the 51st configuration B51 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be operated multiple times, and a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and when an operation reception is made to the second operating means (operation button 410) The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a change after reception, and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, the operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be performed multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation reception is made on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) may be performed multiple times. This can be done (see Figure 176), and even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). After a situation occurs where the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state and the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is operated If a situation arises where no operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410) despite it being maintained in an operating state (for example, at the timing tBf2-C2 shown in Figure 191), even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in an operating state thereafter, the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden will not result in another operation being received for the second operating means (operation button 410) (see Figure 191). If multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation reception for the second operating means (operation button 410) while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between the multiple executions of these post-reception changes can be set to a fixed time (for example, the 6B reception-allowing state shown in Figure 191). In other words, in this case, since the interval between operation receptions when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled is set to a fixed time, it is expected that the situation in which operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not received will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), then even if a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, in Figure 192 or Figure 192) (For example, timings tBg2-C2 shown in Figure 3) If the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until a predetermined allowable condition is met, then a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B51 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of a performance judgment based on operation reception to the sword ornament 5001, or based on operations on or release of operations on an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for allowing operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (the interval between post-reception changes occurring in the auto-repeated pressing function) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) (such as the third B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 168, the fourth B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 170, the fifth B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 172, the seventh B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 176, etc.), and the second operating means (operation button 4 When (10) is maintained in the operating state, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410) (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated pressing function) may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 164, etc., or the sixth B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 174, etc.) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined) (for example, the second B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 166, etc.).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after reception is set to a certain time (a predetermined time). Therefore, when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, even after a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state, the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until predetermined permissible conditions are met while the display is hidden, a situation may reappear where an operation request is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. Therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained when the auto-rapid-fire function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-rapid-fire function) is not displayed. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes occurring after reception can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undetermined time (a time not predetermined). Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize relatively quickly when the auto-repeated button function is disabled. In addition, after a situation arises where no operation is received for the second operating means (operating button 410) despite the second operating means (operating button 410) being kept in the operating state, the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in the operating state. Even if the state is maintained, the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the system is designed so that the operation is not again accepted by the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the previously maintained operation state. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension that occurs when the auto-repeated function is activated for the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed can be suitably maintained.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 51st configuration B51 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the 51st configuration B51 and the configurations described in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, even if the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, and the period during which the first operation-related display is shown occurs again, it is possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is shown, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B51 described above and the various performance examples, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operations, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operations are received by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 51st configuration B51 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, nor on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B51 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between multiple operation requests (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) to the operation button 410, based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operated state when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) rather than an indefinite time (a time not predetermined) (see Figure 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B51 described above and the various performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, the message display MB1 corresponding to the first B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may not be an indefinite time (a time not predetermined), but always a fixed time (a predetermined time) (see Figure 164, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B51 described above and the various performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in a special manner (for example, the message display MB2 corresponding to the second B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may be set to an unspecified time (not predetermined) rather than a fixed time (predetermined time) (see Figure 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 51st configuration B51 and the various performance examples described above, the interval between operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001 while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, and the interval between operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 being received again based on the detection of the operational state maintained while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is hidden, may be set to the same manner (interval).

Furthermore, for example, the 52nd configuration B52 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be operated multiple times, and a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and a second operating means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the second operating means (operation button 410). The system includes a second post-reception change execution means and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be performed multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if operation reception is made on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a post-reception change corresponding to this may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figure 176). Even when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). After a situation occurs where the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state and the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, even though the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, but the second operation means (operation button 410) is not activated. If a situation arises where no operation is received (for example, at the timing tBf2-C2 shown in Figure 191), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) continues to be in the operated state, the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, and based on the detection of the maintained operated state, no further operation reception is performed on the second operation means (operation button 410) (see Figure 191). Furthermore, when the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from the operated state to the non-operated state while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception are performed on the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-non-operation display (for example, post-non-operation display HB2) may be displayed (see, for example, Figures 166(f) and 167). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state, no operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), then even if a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, in Figure 192 or Figure 192) (For example, timings tBg2-C2 shown in Figure 3) If the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until a predetermined allowable condition is met, then a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B52 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or based on the result of a performance judgment based on operation reception to the sword ornament 5001, or based on operations on or release of operations on an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for allowing operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, no corresponding post-operation display is shown (see Figures 168 to 173, Figure 176, etc.). However, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-operation display (e.g., post-operation display HB2) may be shown (see, for example, Figure 166(f), Figure 167, etc.).

With this configuration, if the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is maintained until predetermined permissible conditions are met while the "first operation-related display is hidden," then a situation may reappear where the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden." However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means (operation button 410), if operation reception ceases while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be in the operating state, operation reception to the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be resumed based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden. However, since it is easier to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released, prompting the user to resume operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 52nd configuration B52 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur in which post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B52 described above and the various performance examples, even if the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B52 described above and the various performance examples, if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 52nd configuration B52 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple operation requests have been received for the operation button 410, it may be possible to have both a display corresponding to the unoperated state (see Figures 166(f), 167, etc.) and a display that does not show the unoperated state (see Figures 164(f), 165, 174, etc.).

In this case, even if the "no operation" indicator is displayed (see Figure 166), it is desirable that the device not output a new sound as a result of the operation button 410 changing from an operated state to an unoperated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, if, despite the operation button 410 being maintained in the operated state, no operation is received for the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the unoperated state, it goes without saying that the "after unoperated" display will not be shown as a result.

Furthermore, if, despite the operation button 410 being maintained in the operated state, no operation is received for the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the unoperated state, it goes without saying that the "after unoperated" display will not be shown as a result.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 52nd configuration B52 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, a corresponding post-unoperated display may be shown. However, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, a corresponding post-unoperated display may not be shown.

Furthermore, in implementing the configurations described in the 52nd configuration B52 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, there may be two cases: one where a corresponding post-operation display is displayed (see Figure 166, etc.), and another where the post-operation display is not displayed (see Figure 164, etc.).

Furthermore, for example, the 53rd configuration B53 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be operated multiple times, a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and a second post-reception change that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the second operating means (operation button 410). The system includes an execution means and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be performed multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be performed in accordance with the reception, and in this case, when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be performed multiple times (see Figure 176), and the second operation-related display (a so-called auto-repeated function) can be performed multiple times. Even when the operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the auto-rapid-button function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). After a situation occurs where the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-rapid-button function) is not displayed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state but no operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example) For example, even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state thereafter (at timing tBf2-C2 as shown in Figure 191), the second operation means (operating button 410) will not be again accepted for operation based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden (see Figure 191). When the second operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state while the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state and multiple post-acceptance changes in response to the acceptance of operation to the second operating means (operating button 410) have been performed, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (such as the second B post-acceptance output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166(h)) inaudible (see, for example, Figure 166(h)). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state, no operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), then even if a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, in Figure 192 or Figure 192) (For example, timings tBg2-C2 shown in Figure 3) If the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until a predetermined allowable condition is met, then a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B53 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are being executed, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not trigger the deafening sound that was audible at that time to become inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, Figure 176, etc.). However, while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operating means (operation button 410) are being executed, when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger the deafening of at least one of the deafening sound elements that was audible at that time (such as the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166(h)) (see, for example, Figure 166(h), etc.).

With this configuration, if the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is maintained until predetermined permissible conditions are met while the "first operation-related display is hidden," then a situation may reappear where the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden." However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means (operation button 410), if operation reception ceases while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be in the operating state, operation reception to the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be resumed based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden. However, since it is easier to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released, prompting the user to resume operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B53 described above and the various performance examples, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B53 described above and the various performance examples, even if the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B53 described above and the various performance examples, if the second operating means, which has stopped receiving operations, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operations are received by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 53rd configuration B53 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple operation requests have been received for the operation button 410, it is possible to either make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time (such as the output sound Sα2 after the second B reception shown in Figure 166(h)) inaudible (see Figure 166(h), etc.), or not make any of the performance sounds that were audible at that time inaudible (see Figures 164(h) and 174(h), etc.).

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to an unoperated state, even if this triggers the deaudibility of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time, it is desirable that no new sound is output as a result of the unoperated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B53 described above and the various performance examples, if the configuration is set to "make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to an inactive state," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be one of the sounds that appeared as a change after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, if the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of effects are implemented, it goes without saying that if, after a situation occurs where the operation button 410 is not receiving input despite being kept in the activated state, and then the operation button 410 changes from the activated state to the deactivated state, this will not trigger a change in the effect sound, which was audible at that point, to an inaudible state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 53rd configuration B53 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, this may trigger the de-audibility of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time. However, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, this may not trigger the de-audibility of any performance sounds that were audible at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B53 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an inoperable state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed, it may be possible to either, as a result, make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see Figure 166, etc.), or not make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see Figure 164, etc.).

Furthermore, for example, the 54th configuration B54 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display prompting operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the When the display is in a display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operating means (operation button 410) The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting the user to perform an operation, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the display is in an displayed state, the second operation means (operation button 410) may be registered multiple times. Even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is registered to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-registration change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, the post-registration change corresponding to the operation registration to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 176). When an operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operating means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). After a situation occurs where the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state and the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operating means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is not received for the second operating means (operation button 410) despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in the operating state (for example, at the timing tBf2-C2 shown in Figure 191), even if the second operating means (operation button 410) continues to be maintained in the operating state thereafter, the second operation-related display (iwa While the operation-related display for the operation button 410, which is the target for enabling the "loose auto-repeated button" function, is hidden, the detection of the operation state maintained in this state prevents the second operation means (operation button 410) from receiving an operation again (see Figure 191). After the second operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated while the post-reception change in response to the operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is occurring, the second operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated. When the device is returned to the operating state from the previous state, this can trigger the deaudibility of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h) or the first post-reception output sound Sα6 shown in Figure 174(h)). Therefore, it can be expected that the second operating means (operating button 410) will be returned to the operating state, indicating that an operation has been received.

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), then even if a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, in Figure 192 or Figure 192) (For example, timings tBg2-C2 shown in Figure 3) If the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until a predetermined allowable condition is met, then a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B54 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation reception to the sword ornament 5001, or based on operations on or release of operations on operating means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for allowing operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is undergoing a post-reception change corresponding to the operating state, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and then changed back from a non-operating state to an operating state, this does not trigger the sound effect that was audible at that time to become inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173 and Figure 176, etc.), whereas while the second operating means (operating button 410) is undergoing a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception, the second operating means When the operating means (operating button 410) is changed from an operated state to an unoperated state, and then the second operating means (operating button 410) is changed from an unoperated state back to an operated state, this may trigger the deaudibility of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h) or the first post-reception output sound Sα6 shown in Figure 174(h)) (see, for example, timing tBa2-C1 in Figure 164 or timing tBf2-C1 in Figure 174).

With this configuration, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is kept in an operating state until predetermined tolerance conditions are met while the "first operation-related display is hidden," a situation may reappear where the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted for operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden." However, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is interrupted and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated again, it becomes difficult to recognize that the acceptance was properly performed. Therefore, it becomes easier to maintain the operating state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) in order to proceed with the game. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means (operating button 410), if operation reception ceases while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in the operating state thereafter, operation reception to the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be resumed based on the detection of the operating state maintained while the second operation-related display is hidden. However, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operating button 410) is interrupted and the second operating means (operating button 410) is operated again, it becomes easier to recognize that the reception was properly performed. Therefore, it becomes easier to reset the operating state of the second operating means (operating button 410) in order to ensure proper gameplay.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 54th configuration B54 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B54 described above and the various performance examples, even if the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B54 described above and the various performance examples, if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 54th configuration B54 and the various performance examples described above, if the operation button 410 is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation on the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated again, and only if the post-reception output sound (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 or the first post-reception output sound Sα7) is audible at that time, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 or the first post-reception output sound Sα7). In this case, a sound other than the post-reception output sound may be deactivated.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B54 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated again, even if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that point, it may be possible to either trigger the deactivation of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that point (see timing tBa2-C1 in Figure 164, timing tBf2-C1 in Figure 174, etc.) or not deactivate the performance sound that was audible at that point (see timing tBb2-C1 in Figure 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the instruction is to "make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state when the operation button 410 is operated again," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appeared as one of the changes after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, for example, the 55th configuration B55 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, an effect display means (effect display device 1600) that displays information related to the effects, a determination means that makes a determination, a benefit granting means that can grant a benefit to the player based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result has been obtained, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display prompting operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the display state When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operating state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response when an operation request is made to the second operating means (operation button 410), and a display prompting operation to the second operating means (operation button 410), and when the display is in the display state, the second operating means (operation button 41 When state 0) is maintained in operation state, the second operation means (operation button 410) may be accepted multiple times, and the system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is accepted for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-acceptance change may be executed, in which case the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) When the operation state is maintained, the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figure 176). Even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operating means (operation button 410), a post-reception change corresponding to this may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410) can be executed multiple times. This can be performed several times (see Figure 174), and when the second operation-related display (operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, and after a situation occurs in which the post-reception change in response to the operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) is performed multiple times, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state but no operation reception is made to the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, the timing shown in Figure 191) Even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state thereafter, the second operation-related display (operating-related display relating to the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, and the detection of the operating state maintained in this state will not result in the second operating means (operating button 410) being accepted again (see Figure 191). When the first operation-related display (operating-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, the first operating means When an operation (specific operation) is performed on the operation means (operation button 410), both a display change on the performance display means (performance display device 1600) (for example, the post-reception display HB7 shown in Figure 176) and a change different from the display change (for example, the 7B post-reception output sound Sα7 shown in Figure 176) may occur as the post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time. When the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) may occur. When a (predetermined operation) is performed, both a display change in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time (for example, the post-reception display HB6 shown in Figure 174) and a change different from the display change (for example, the 6B post-reception output sound Sα6 shown in Figure 174) can occur. Therefore, even when an operation is received for either the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) or the second operation means (operation button 410) while no operation-related display is shown, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the operation was received correctly.

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), then even if a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, in Figure 192 or Figure 192) (For example, timings tBg2-C2 shown in Figure 3) If the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until a predetermined allowable condition is met, then a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B55 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B55 described above and the various performance examples, even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated (specifically operated), if the post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated (when the first operating means is put into an operating state in a state where operation reception to the first operating means is not permitted), if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state and a predetermined permissible condition is met (when operation reception to the first operating means becomes permitted), operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is performed based on the detection of the maintained operating state. However, in this case, it is possible to ensure that no display change occurs (not even once) in the performance display device 1600 as a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception, and that only changes different from the display change are executed multiple times. In other words, in this case, the presentation mode shown in Figure 192 will not appear (the possibility of the post-reception display HB7 being displayed at timing tBg4C will be eliminated), and the presentation mode shown in Figure 193 will always appear. In this configuration, even if the operation (specific operation) of the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted and the corresponding post-reception change is not initiated, simply maintaining the sword ornament 5001 in the operated state will cause the post-reception change to appear. However, as a trade-off, the display change on the presentation display device 1600 will not appear as the post-reception change, thus maintaining a suitable sense of tension. However, even in this case, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in an inactive state and the first operation-related display is not displayed, it is desirable to have both the post-reception change being executed in the manner shown in Figure 176 and the post-reception change being executed in the manner shown in Figure 178.

Alternatively, in realizing the configuration B55 described above and the various performance examples, if a situation arises where no operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, and then, based on the detection of the above operation state maintained while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is hidden, then an operation is received again for the sword ornament 5001 based on the detection of the above operation state, then as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation received, there may be both cases where a display change occurs on the performance display device 1600 (see Figure 192) and cases where no such display change occurs (see Figure 193). With this configuration, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is hidden, the detection of the aforementioned operation state makes it difficult to recognize, and sometimes easy to recognize, when an operation request has been received for the sword ornament 5001 again. Therefore, while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when keeping the sword ornament 5001 in an operation state while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 55th configuration B55 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur in which post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B55 described above and the various performance examples, even if the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B55 described above and the various performance examples, if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, even if the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, and the "display change in the performance display device 1600" as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is not executed, it is desirable that the "change different from the display change (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα7)" be executed multiple times in the same manner as when the "display change in the performance display device 1600" occurs as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception for the sword ornament 5001.

Furthermore, for example, the 56th configuration B56 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and an image display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the image display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 50 When 01) is maintained in operation state, the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can receive operation requests multiple times, and the first operation related display means is capable of displaying a first operation related display (an operation related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and the first promotion light-emitting means is capable of performing operation promotion light (for example, the 4B operation promotion light LB4, etc.) to encourage operation on the first operation means, separate from the first operation related display which is an image display that prompts operation on the first operation means, and when operation requests are received on the second operation means (operation button 410), the system performs a post-reception change in accordance with this request. A second execution means for executing a change after receiving an execution, an image display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state while the image display is in the display state, the second operation means (operation button 410) may be received multiple times, a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function), and a second operation-related display means that prompts operation on the second operation means separately from the second operation-related display which is an image display prompting operation on the second operation means, The system includes a second acceleration light-emitting means capable of performing operation acceleration light-emitting (for example, a first B operation acceleration light-emitting LB1 or a second B operation acceleration light-emitting LB2), and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed multiple times. (See Figure 176) Even when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (See Figure 174), and the second operation-related display (the so-called auto-repeated button function) If, while the operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation is not displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, and a situation occurs where multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410), then, despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in the operated state, a situation occurs where no operation reception is received for the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at the timing tBf2-C2 shown in Figure 191), the second operation means (operation button 410) will remain in the operated state thereafter. Even if the state is maintained, the second operation-related display (the operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, and based on the detection of the operation state being maintained, the second operation means (operation button 410) will not be accepted again (see Figure 191). The first operation-related display (the operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, Figure 1 In the seventh B reception-accepting state shown in Figures 76 to 178, the operation-promoting light that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is not performed. However, in the state where the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation receptions are permitted for the first operating means (for example, the fourth B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 170), the operation-promoting light that prompts operation on the first operating means (for example, the fourth B operation-promoting light LB4) may be performed. Therefore, it is expected that this will suitably provide a sense of tension when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed and multiple operation receptions are permitted for the first operating means.

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), then even if a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, in Figure 192 or Figure 192) (For example, timings tBg2-C2 shown in Figure 3) If the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until a predetermined allowable condition is met, then a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B56 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, the 7B reception permission state shown in Figure 176), the operation-prompting illumination, which is an image display prompting operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), is not performed. In situations where multiple operation requests are permitted (i.e., when the first operation-related indicator is displayed), there may be two possibilities: the operation-promoting light that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be activated (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden) (for example, the 4B operation permission state shown in Figure 170); or the operation-promoting light may not be activated (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden) (for example, the 3B operation permission state shown in Figure 168). This provides the first operating means with a degree of secrecy due to the absence of the operation-promoting light, even when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and is expected to effectively create a sense of tension.

With this configuration, when the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is hidden, even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) becomes available for operation, the operation-promoting light emission will not be performed. However, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state, operation can be received again from the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) even when the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is hidden, thus it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, even if the system becomes capable of accepting an operation on the first operating means (the sword ornament 5001), the operation-prompting illumination is not necessarily performed. Therefore, although the operation is prompted by the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function), a certain degree of secrecy is maintained. This "different method from when the first operation-related indicator is hidden" is expected to effectively create a sense of tension while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (i.e., when the second operation-related display is displayed for a period of time), the operation-prompting illumination prompting the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) may be activated (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of concealment depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, even when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), the operation-prompting illumination that encourages operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) may always be executed (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of concealment depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 56th configuration B56 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B56 described above and the various performance examples, even if the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B56 described above and the various performance examples, if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 56th configuration B56 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable that the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" be made displayable in one of several display modes, including the first mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) and the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170). When the first mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed and multiple operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, operation-promoting light emission prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not performed. When the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) is displayed and multiple operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, operation-promoting light emission prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001 (for example, the 4B operation-promoting light emission LB4) is performed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 56th configuration B56 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable to ensure that even after the period during which the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed ends, the sword ornament 5001 is kept in an operational state. Even if the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed in either the first mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) or the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) while the operational state is maintained, it is desirable to enable gameplay such that, while the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (or maintained), operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are re-accepted based on the detection of the previously maintained operational state once the predetermined start conditions are met.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B56 described above and the various performance examples, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed and multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, the form of the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" differs depending on whether an operation prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the sword ornament 5001 (see Figure 170, etc.) or whether an operation prompting light to encourage operation on the first operation means is not emitted (see Figures 168 and 172, etc.). However, the post-reception changes when an operation is received may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, the 57th configuration B57 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state, the When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation-prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168, or Figure 17 A first prompting sound output means capable of outputting a 4B operation-related output sound OB4 (shown as 0), a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display (target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) which prompts operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), and which, when the display is in the display state, allows for multiple operation receptions to be made to the second operation means (operation button 410). The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function), and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation-related sound (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, and the system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function), and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation-related sound (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166), and the first operation-related display (related to the operation-related display (related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) Even when the continuous display is not shown, if an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 176). Even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-continuous function) is not shown, When an operation is received by the second operating means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). The first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed and an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted. When transitioning from a state where none exists to a state where operation acceptance for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted without the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) being displayed, no sound (including the first operation prompt sound, etc.) is output as a trigger (see, for example, Figures 192 and 193), the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed and the second operating means (operation button 41 When transitioning from a state where operation to the second operation means (operation button 410) is not permitted to a state where operation to the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted without the second operation-related indicator (operation-related indicator regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) being displayed, no sound (including the second operation prompt sound, etc.) is output to trigger this transition (see, for example, Figure 191). Therefore, it is expected that this will effectively provide a sense of tension when multiple operation attempts are permitted to the operation means without the operation-related indicator being displayed.

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), then even if a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, in Figure 192 or Figure 192) (For example, timings tBg2-C2 shown in Figure 3) If the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until a predetermined allowable condition is met, then a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (for example, timings tBg4C, tBg4D shown in Figures 192 and 193).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B57 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is hidden may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 192 and 193, the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4C and tBg4D may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 57th configuration B57 and the various performance examples described above, the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) can be displayed in any of a plurality of display modes, including the first mode (message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) and the second mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170). When the first mode (message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) is displayed, the first operation cues are not output, and when the second mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) is displayed, the first operation cues corresponding to the first operation-related display are output. This provides a sense of secrecy to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) by preventing the operation cues from being executed, depending on the display mode, even when the first operation-related display is shown, thus effectively creating a sense of tension.

With this configuration, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is hidden, the first operation prompt sound is not output even if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) becomes available for operation. However, if the first operation means is kept in an operating state, operation can be received again from the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is hidden. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be appropriately added while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, even if the system becomes ready to accept an operation from the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output. Therefore, although the operation is prompted by the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function), a certain degree of secrecy is maintained. This "different method from when the first operation-related indicator is hidden" is expected to effectively create a sense of tension while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed (while operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, or when operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted), the second operation cues sound may always be output. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 57th configuration B57 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur in which post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B57 described above and the various performance examples, even if the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, and the first operation-related display is displayed again, it may be possible to ensure that, while the first operation-related display is displayed, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B57 described above and the various performance examples, if the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations, is kept in an operating state, even if a period occurs again during which the second operation-related display is shown, it may be possible to ensure that, while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple operations are accepted by the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 57th configuration B57 and the various performance examples mentioned above, it is desirable to ensure that even after the period during which the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed ends, the sword ornament 5001 is kept in an operational state. Even if the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed in either the first mode (message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) or the second mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) while the operational state is maintained, it is desirable to enable gameplay such that, while the first operation-related display "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (or maintained), operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are re-accepted based on the detection of the previously maintained operational state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, the appearance of the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs depending on whether a first operation cues corresponding to the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is output (see Figure 168 or Figure 170, etc.) or whether the first operation cues are not output (see Figure 172, etc.). However, the changes after the operation is received may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, configuration B58 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be operated multiple times, and a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the second operating means (operation button 410). The system includes an execution means and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be performed multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be performed, and in this case, when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be performed multiple times (see Figure 176), and the second operation-related display (so-called auto-repeated function) can be performed multiple times. Even when the operation-related display (operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the auto-rapid-button function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). After a situation occurs where the second operation-related display (operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-rapid-button function) is not displayed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state but no operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), then ( For example, even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state until (and even after) the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be asked to accept an operation again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see Figure 188). If the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to the acceptance of an operation, the interval between the multiple executions of these post-reception changes may be set to a time less than or equal to a specific time (e.g., the 6B acceptance-allowing state shown in Figure 189). In other words, in this case, since the interval between operation receptions when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled is set to a relatively short interval, it is expected that the situation in which operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is not received will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, the timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be kept in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. If a predetermined allowable condition is met while the first operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, timings tBg4A, tBg4B, etc., shown in Figures 189 and 190), a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B58 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (the interval between post-reception changes in the auto-repeated button function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time (such as the third B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 168, the fourth B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 170, the fifth B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 172, the seventh B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 176, etc.). Similarly, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410) (the interval between post-reception changes in the auto-repeated button function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time (for example, the first B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 164, the sixth B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 174, etc.) or to be set to be longer than a specific time (for example, the second B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 166, etc.).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after reception is set to a relatively short interval. Therefore, when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, if a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the first operation-related display If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state until the operation-related display (indicating the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed and predetermined allowable conditions are met, then a situation may reappear in which an operation request is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. Therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained when the auto-repeated button press function is activated for the first operating means while the first operation-related display (indicating the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is not displayed. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes after reception can be either relatively short or relatively long. Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize relatively quickly when the auto-repeated button function is disabled. In addition, when the second operating means is kept in an operating state but no operation is received for the second operating means (operating button 410) while the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed, from that point onward, Even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state until the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (or even after it is displayed), the system is designed so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, the system will not attempt to accept an operation again for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension that is present when the auto-repeated function is activated for the second operation means (operation button 410) when the second operation-related display is not displayed can be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 58th configuration B58 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur in which post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B58 described above and the various performance examples, it is possible to ensure that when the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B58 described above and the various performance examples, it may be possible to ensure that, when the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, remains in an operating state, a situation may reappear where, while the second operation-related display is not displayed, operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B58 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-button function (long-press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, and the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-button function (long-press function) is enabled for the operation button 410, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

Furthermore, in implementing the configuration B58 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between multiple operation requests (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed may be set to never be longer than a specific time, but always to be less than or equal to a specific time (see Figure 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B58 described above and the various performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, the message display MB1 corresponding to the first B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may be set to never be longer than a specific time, but always to be less than or equal to a specific time (see Figure 164, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B58 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state during a period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in a special manner (for example, the message display MB2 corresponding to the second B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval at which operation receptions are performed automatically) may be set to be longer than a specific time or to be less than or equal to a specific time (see Figure 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B58 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between changes occurring (by the auto-repeated button press function) when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001 while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, and the interval between changes occurring (by the auto-repeated button press function) after the operation request is received again based on the detection of the operational state maintained until the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, may be made the same.

Alternatively, in realizing the configuration B58 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between changes occurring (by the auto-repeated button press function) when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001 while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, and the interval between changes occurring (by the auto-repeated button press function) after the operation request is received again based on the detection of the operational state maintained until the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, may be the same or different.

Furthermore, for example, the 59th configuration B59 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be operated multiple times, and a first operation-related display means that can display a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and a second post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the second operating means (operation button 410). The system includes a change execution means and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be performed multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be performed in accordance with the reception, and in this case, when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be performed multiple times (see Figure 176), and the second operation-related display (so-called Even when the operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated button function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). After a situation occurs where the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state but no operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), In the event that (for example, timing tBf2-C2 shown in Figure 188), the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in the operating state until (and even after) the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be asked to accept an operation again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see Figure 188). If the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in the operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to the acceptance of an operation, the interval between the multiple executions of these post-reception changes can be set to a constant time (e.g., the 6B acceptance-allowing state shown in Figure 189). In other words, in this case, since the interval at which operation is received when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled is set to a fixed interval, it is expected that the situation in which operation is not received by the second operation means (operation button 410) will be recognized relatively early, prompting the user to release the operation state of the second operation means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, the timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be kept in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. If a predetermined allowable condition is met while the first operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, timings tBg4A, tBg4B, etc., shown in Figures 189 and 190), a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B59 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (the interval between post-reception changes occurring in the auto-repeated pressing function) is set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) (such as the third B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 168, the fourth B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 170, the fifth B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 172, the seventh B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 176, etc.), and the second operating means (operation button 4 When (10) is maintained in the operating state, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410) (the interval at which post-reception changes occur in the auto-repeated pressing function) may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 164, etc., or the sixth B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 174, etc.) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined) (for example, the second B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 166, etc.).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after reception is set to a certain time (a predetermined time). Therefore, when the auto-repeated function is disabled, it is possible to recognize this relatively early. In addition, even when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, if a situation arises where no operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the first operation If the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in the operating state until a related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed and predetermined allowable conditions are met, then a situation may reappear in which an operation request is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. Therefore, it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained when the auto-repeated button function is activated for the first operating means while the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes occurring after reception can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined). Furthermore, it is not always possible to recognize relatively quickly when the auto-repeated button function is disabled. In addition, there is a situation where, even though the second operating means is kept in an operating state while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed, no operation is received for the second operating means (operating button 410). When this occurs, even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in the operating state until the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (or even after it is displayed), the system is designed so that, while the second operation-related display is displayed, the system will not attempt to accept an operation again for the second operation means (operation button 410) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension that is present when the auto-repeated function is activated for the second operation means (operation button 410) when the second operation-related display is not displayed can be appropriately maintained.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 59th configuration B59 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur in which post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B59 described above and the various performance examples, it is possible to ensure that when the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B59 described above and the various performance examples, it may be possible to ensure that, when the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, remains in an operating state, a situation may reappear where, while the second operation-related display is not displayed, operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B59 described above and the various performance examples, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-tap function (long-press function) is enabled for the first operating means, nor on the length of the interval between inputs and changes occurring when the so-called auto-tap function (long-press function) is enabled for the second operating means.

Furthermore, in implementing the configuration B59 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between multiple operation requests (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) to the operation button 410, based on the operation button 410 remaining in an operated state when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) rather than an indefinite time (a time not predetermined) (see Figure 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B59 described above and the various performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, the message display MB1 corresponding to the first B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may not be an indefinite time (a time not predetermined), but always a fixed time (a predetermined time) (see Figure 164, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B59 described above and the various performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed in a special manner (for example, the message display MB2 corresponding to the second B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may be set to an unspecified time (not predetermined time) rather than a fixed time (predetermined time) (see Figure 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 59th configuration B59 and the various performance examples described above, the interval between changes occurring (by the auto-repeated button press function) when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001 while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, and the interval between changes occurring (by the auto-repeated button press function) after the operation request is received again based on the detection of the operational state maintained until the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, may be made the same.

Alternatively, in realizing the configuration B59 and the various performance examples described above, the interval between changes occurring (by the auto-repeated button press function) when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state and multiple operation requests are received for the sword ornament 5001 while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, and the interval between changes occurring (by the auto-repeated button press function) after the operation request is received again based on the detection of the operational state maintained until the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, may be the same or different.

Furthermore, for example, the 60th configuration B60 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display prompting operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). The first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which allows for multiple operation requests to be received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) when the display is in the display state, and the second post-reception change execution means is capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation request received for the second operation means (operation button 410), and the second The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation of the operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be received multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be received and a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figure 176), and the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function 4 Even when the operation-related display for 10 is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). After a situation occurs where the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display (operation-related display for operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is not received by the second operation means (operation button 410) despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in the operating state (for example, at the timing tBf2-C2 shown in Figure 188), thereafter... Even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state until (and even after) the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be asked to accept an operation again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see Figure 188). When the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to an operation acceptance have been performed on the second operating means (operating button 410), and the second operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, a corresponding post-non-operation display (for example, post-non-operation display HB2) may be displayed (see, for example, Figure 166(f) or Figure 167). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state, no operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, the timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be kept in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. If a predetermined allowable condition is met while the first operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, timings tBg4A, tBg4B, etc., shown in Figures 189 and 190), a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 60th configuration B60 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, no corresponding post-operation display is shown (see Figures 168 to 173, Figure 176, etc.). However, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-operation display (e.g., post-operation display HB2) may be shown (see, for example, Figure 166(f), Figure 167, etc.).

With this configuration, if the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is maintained until the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and predetermined permissible conditions are met, then a situation may reappear where the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) accepts operations while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) has been released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means (operation button 410), if operation reception ceases while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in the operating state thereafter (for example, even if the second operating means is kept in the operating state until the second operation-related display is displayed and certain acceptable conditions are met), operation reception to the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be resumed based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. However, since it is easier to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released, and to encourage re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 60th configuration B60 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the 60th configuration B60 and the configurations described in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, it is possible to ensure that when the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the 60th configuration B60 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, it may be possible to ensure that, when the second operation means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, remains in an operating state, a situation may reappear where, while the second operation-related display is not displayed, operations are accepted multiple times for the second operation means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 60th configuration B60 and the configurations described above for each example of presentation, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple operation requests have been received for the operation button 410, it may be possible to have both a display corresponding to the unoperated state (see Figures 166(f), 167, etc.) and a display that does not show the unoperated state (see Figures 164(f), 165, 174, etc.).

In this case, even if the "no operation" indicator is displayed (see Figure 166), it is desirable that no new sound is output as a result of the operation button 410 changing from an operated state to a non-operated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, if, despite the operation button 410 being held in the operated state, no operation is received for the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the unoperated state, it goes without saying that the "after unoperated" display will not be shown as a result.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B60 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, a corresponding post-unoperated display may be shown. However, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, a corresponding post-unoperated display may not be shown.

Furthermore, in implementing the 60th configuration B60 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function" is displayed, there may be two cases: one where a corresponding post-operation display is displayed (see Figure 166, etc.), and another where the post-operation display is not displayed (see Figure 164, etc.).

Furthermore, for example, the 61st configuration B61 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display prompting operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). Furthermore, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state while the display is in the display state, multiple operation requests can be made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation request made to the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operating means (operation button The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which is a display prompting operation on the tan 410, and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the display is in a displayed state, operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) can be received multiple times, and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be received and a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, when the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, post-reception changes corresponding to operation reception for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be executed multiple times (see Figure 176), and the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed Even when not in operation, if an operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operating means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). After a situation occurs where the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state and a post-reception change corresponding to the operation received for the second operating means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times while the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if a situation occurs where no operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410) despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in the operation state (for example, at timing tBf2-C2 shown in Figure 188), the second operation-related display (the so-called auto-repeated function) may be executed multiple times. Even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in the operating state until (and even after) the state in which the operation-related display for the operating button 410 as the target for activation appears appears, the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be asked to accept an operation again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see Figure 188). When the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in the operating state and the post-reception changes in response to the operation acceptance of the second operating means (operating button 410) have been performed multiple times, and the second operating means (operating button 410) changes from the operating state to the non-operating state, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (such as the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166(h)) inaudible (see, for example, Figure 166(h), etc.). In other words, in this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the operation state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released. Therefore, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game can be suitably maintained after a situation arises where, despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operation state, no operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410).

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, the timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be kept in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. If a predetermined allowable condition is met while the first operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, timings tBg4A, tBg4B, etc., shown in Figures 189 and 190), a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 61st configuration B61 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are being executed, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this does not trigger the deafening sound that was audible at that time to become inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173, Figure 176, etc.). However, while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operating means (operation button 410) are being executed, when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, this may trigger the deafening of at least one of the deafening sound elements that was audible at that time (such as the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166(h)) (see, for example, Figure 166(h), etc.).

With this configuration, if the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is maintained until the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and predetermined permissible conditions are met, then a situation may reappear where the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) accepts operations while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. However, since it is difficult to recognize when the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) has been released, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means (operation button 410), if operation reception ceases while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in the operating state thereafter (for example, even if the second operating means is kept in the operating state until the second operation-related display is displayed and certain acceptable conditions are met), operation reception to the second operating means (operation button 410) will not be resumed based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. However, since it is easier to recognize when the operating state of the second operating means (operation button 410) has been released, and to encourage re-operation, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be enhanced while maintaining a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 61st configuration B61 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the 61st configuration B61 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, it is possible to ensure that when the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B61 described above and the various performance examples, it may be possible to ensure that, when the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related display is not shown, remains in an operating state, a situation may reappear where, while the second operation-related display is not shown, operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 61st configuration B61 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple operation requests have been received for the operation button 410, it is possible to either make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time (such as the output sound Sα2 after the second B reception shown in Figure 166(h)) inaudible (see Figure 166(h), etc.), or not make any of the performance sounds that were audible at that time inaudible (see Figures 164(h) and 174(h), etc.).

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to an unoperated state, even if this triggers the deaudibility of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time, it is desirable that no new sound is output as a result of the unoperated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 61st configuration B61 and the various performance examples described above, if the configuration is set to "make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to an inactive state," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be one of the sounds that appeared as a change after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, if the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of effects are implemented, it goes without saying that if, after a situation occurs where the operation button 410 is not receiving input despite being kept in the activated state, and then the operation button 410 changes from the activated state to the deactivated state, this will not trigger a change in the effect sound, which was audible at that point, to an inaudible state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 61st configuration B61 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, this may trigger the de-inhibition of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time. However, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, this may not trigger the de-inhibition of any performance sounds that were audible at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 61st configuration B61 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an inoperable state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, it may be possible to either trigger at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time to become inaudible (see Figure 166, etc.) or not trigger at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time to become inaudible (see Figure 164, etc.).

Furthermore, for example, the 62nd configuration B62 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on the determination obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and the display is in a displayed state. When the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be subject to operation reception multiple times, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be subject to operation reception multiple times, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be subject to operation reception multiple times, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be subject to operation reception multiple times, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be subject to operation reception multiple times, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be subject to operation reception multiple times, and the second operating means (operation button 410) may be subject to operation reception multiple times, and the second operating means (operation button 410) may be subject to operation reception multiple times, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001 When the second operating means (operation button 410) is kept in the operating state while the first operating means (operation button 410) is in the display state, the second operation-related display means is capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function), and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, the second operation-related display means is capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function). When an operation is received, a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 176). Even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, when an operation is received by the second operating means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. There are cases where a post-operation change is performed, and in this case, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state, multiple post-operation changes in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operation button 410) may be performed (see Figure 174). If, after a situation occurs in which the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state and multiple post-operation changes in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operation button 410) are performed while the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and then a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the second operating means (operation button 410) despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in the operated state (for example, at timing tBf2-C2 shown in Figure 188), the second operating means (operation button 410) will continue to be maintained in the operated state until (and thereafter) the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. Even if this occurs, the second operation-related display (the operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, and the operation acceptance to the second operation means (operation button 410) is not accepted again based on the detection of the operation state that has been maintained up to that point (see Figure 188). After the second operation means (operation button 410) is set to a non-operation state while the post-acceptance change in response to the operation acceptance to the second operation means (operation button 410) is occurring, the second operation means (operation button When the 410) is returned from the non-operational state to the operational state, this can trigger the deaudibility of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h) or the first post-reception output sound Sα6 shown in Figure 174(h)). Therefore, it can be expected that the second operation means (operation button 410) will be returned to the operational state, indicating that an operation has been received.

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, the timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be kept in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. If a predetermined allowable condition is met while the first operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, timings tBg4A, tBg4B, etc., shown in Figures 189 and 190), a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B62 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is undergoing a post-reception change corresponding to the operating state, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is changed from an operating state to a non-operating state, and then changed back from a non-operating state to an operating state, this does not trigger the sound effect that was audible at that time to become inaudible (see Figures 168 to 173 and Figure 176, etc.), whereas while the second operating means (operating button 410) is undergoing a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception, the second operating means When the operating means (operating button 410) is changed from an operated state to an unoperated state, and then the second operating means (operating button 410) is changed from an unoperated state back to an operated state, this may trigger the deaudibility of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h) or the first post-reception output sound Sα6 shown in Figure 174(h)) (see, for example, timing tBa2-C1 in Figure 164 or timing tBf2-C1 in Figure 174).

With this configuration, if the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is maintained until the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and predetermined acceptable conditions are met, then a situation may reappear where the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is accepted for operations while the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. However, when the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is interrupted and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated again, it becomes difficult to recognize that the acceptance was properly performed. Therefore, maintaining the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is made easier for progressing the game. Furthermore, regarding the second operating means (operating button 410), if operation reception ceases while the "second operation-related display is hidden," even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in the operating state thereafter (for example, even if the second operating means is kept in the operating state until the second operation-related display is displayed and certain acceptable conditions are met), operation reception to the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be performed again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. However, when the auto-repeated function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operating button 410) is interrupted and the second operating means (operating button 410) is operated again, it becomes easier to recognize that the reception was properly performed. Therefore, it becomes easier to reset the operating state of the second operating means (operating button 410) in order to properly proceed with the game.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations related to the 62nd configuration B62 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B62 described above and the various performance examples, it is possible to ensure that when the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B62 described above and the various performance examples, it may be possible to ensure that when the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, remains in an operating state, a situation may reappear where, while the second operation-related display is not displayed, operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 62nd configuration B62 and the various performance examples described above, if the operation button 410 is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation on the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated again, and only if the post-reception output sound (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 or the first post-reception output sound Sα7) is audible at that time, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 or the first post-reception output sound Sα7). In this case, a sound other than the post-reception output sound may be deactivated.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B62 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is returned to the activated state from the deactivated state, even if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that point, it may be possible to either trigger the system to deactivate at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that point (see timing tBa2-C1 in Figure 164, timing tBf2-C1 in Figure 174, etc.), or to not deactivate the performance sound that was audible at that point (see timing tBb2-C1 in Figure 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B62 described above and the various performance examples, if the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, and while a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation on the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is then deactivated, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated again. If, at that point, the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible, this may trigger a mechanism to deactivate the performance sound that was audible at that time (see timing tBf2-C1 in Figure 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the instruction is to "make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state when the operation button 410 is operated again," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appeared as one of the changes after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, for example, the 63rd configuration B63 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, an effect display means (effect display device 1600) that displays information related to the effects, an effect determination means that makes a determination, an effect granting means that can grant an effect to the player based on the determination by the effect determination means that a predetermined result has been obtained, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state, the 1. When the operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can receive multiple operation requests, and the first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and the second post-reception change execution means is capable of executing a post-reception change in response when an operation request is received for the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state when the display is in an operating state, The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which can receive multiple operation requests for the operation means (operation button 410), and even when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation request is received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed, and in this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) Multiple post-reception changes can be executed in response to an operation reception for the second operation means (see Figure 176), and even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation reception is made for the second operation means (operation button 410), a post-reception change can be executed in response thereto, and in this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, multiple post-reception changes can be executed in response to an operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) (see Figure 174), and the second operation-related display ( If, while the operation-related display (for operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410), then, despite the second operation means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operated state, a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the second operation means (operation button 410) (for example, at the timing tBf2-C2 shown in Figure 188), then from thereafter, the second operation-related display (for operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function and Even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state until (and even after) the operation-related display for the operation button 410 is displayed, the second operating means (operating button 410) will not be accepted again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (see Figure 188), and the first operation-related display (operating body 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed When the first operating means (operation button 410) is operated (specific operation) while it is not in the activated state, both a display change on the performance display means (performance display device 1600) (for example, the post-reception display HB7 shown in Figure 176) and a change different from the display change (for example, the 7B post-reception output sound Sα7 shown in Figure 176) may occur as the post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time. When the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, the second operating means (operation button When an operation (predetermined operation) is performed on 410), both a display change in the performance display means (performance display device 1600) (for example, the post-reception display HB6 shown in Figure 174) and a change different from the display change (for example, the 6B post-reception output sound Sα6 shown in Figure 174) may occur as a post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time. Therefore, even when an operation is received for either the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) or the second operation means (operation button 410) while no operation-related display is shown, it becomes possible to suitably indicate that the operation has been received correctly.

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, the timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be kept in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. If a predetermined allowable condition is met while the first operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, timings tBg4A, tBg4B, etc., shown in Figures 189 and 190), a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B63 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B63 described above and the various performance examples, even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated (specifically operated), if the post-reception change corresponding to the detection information obtained at that time is not initiated (when the first operating means is put into an operating state in a state where operation reception to the first operating means is not permitted), if a predetermined permissible condition is met while the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state (when operation reception to the first operating means becomes permitted), operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is performed based on the detection of the maintained operating state. However, in this case, it is possible to ensure that no display change occurs (not even once) in the performance display device 1600 as a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception, and that only changes different from the display change are executed multiple times. In other words, in this case, the performance mode shown in Figure 192 will not appear (there will be no possibility of the post-reception display HB7 being displayed at timing tBg4C), and the performance mode shown in Figure 193 will always appear. Also, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the display change on the performance display device 1600 will not occur (even once) as a post-reception change corresponding to the operation reception of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) in the fourth B reception acceptance state that occurred at timing tBg4A, or the fifth B reception acceptance state that occurred at timing tBg4B. With such a configuration, even if the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is not accepted and the corresponding post-reception change is not initiated as a result of operating the sword ornament 5001, the post-reception change will appear simply by maintaining the sword ornament 5001 in the operated state. However, as a trade-off, the display change on the performance display device 1600 will not appear as the post-reception change, so it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably maintained. However, even in this case, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is in a non-operated state and the first operation-related indicator is not displayed, if a new operation (specific operation) is performed on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), it is desirable that both the post-reception change be executed in the manner shown in Figure 176 and the post-reception change be executed in the manner shown in Figure 178.

Alternatively, in realizing the configuration B63 described above and the various performance examples, if a situation arises in which no operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, and then a predetermined allowable condition is met (a state in which operation reception for the first operation means is permitted) while the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operated state, then an operation is received for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the maintained operation state. In this case, as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception, there may be cases in which a display change occurs on the performance display device 1600 (see, for example, Figure 192), and cases in which no such display change occurs (see, for example, Figure 193). With this configuration, while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is hidden, the detection of the aforementioned operation state makes it difficult to recognize, and sometimes easy to recognize, when an operation request has been received for the sword ornament 5001 again. Therefore, while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game, it is possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension when keeping the sword ornament 5001 in an operation state while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is hidden.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations related to the 63rd configuration B63 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B63 described above and the various performance examples, it is possible to ensure that when the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B63 described above and the various performance examples, it may be possible to ensure that when the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, remains in an operating state, a situation may reappear where, while the second operation-related display is not displayed, operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, even if the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, and the "display change in the performance display device 1600" as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is not executed, it is desirable that the "change different from the display change (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα7)" be executed multiple times in the same manner as when the "display change in the performance display device 1600" occurs as one of the post-reception changes in response to the operation reception for the sword ornament 5001.

Furthermore, for example, the 64th configuration B64 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and an image display that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and maintains the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) in an operating state when the image display is in the display state. When this is done, the first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which allows for multiple operation requests to be made to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), and a first promotion light-emitting means capable of emitting an operation-promoting light (for example, a 4B operation-promoting light LB4, etc.) which is separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display that prompts operation to the first operation means, and a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the operation request made to the second operation means (operation button 410), and The second operation-related display means is capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function), which is an image display prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operated state while the image display is in the displayed state, operation-promoting lights (for example, the first B operation-promoting lights LB1 and the second B The system includes a second accelerating light-emitting means capable of performing operation-promoting light emission LB2, etc., and even when the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto rapid-fire function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a post-reception change corresponding to that operation may be performed, and in this case, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) may be performed multiple times (see Figure 176), and the second operation-related display (so-called auto Even when the operation-related display (operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the rapid-fire function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operation means (operation button 410), a corresponding post-reception change may be executed. In this case, if the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the post-reception change corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 174). If, after a situation has occurred in which the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and a post-reception change corresponding to the reception of an operation to the second operating means (operation button 410) is executed multiple times, and then a situation has occurred in which no operation is received for the second operating means (operation button 410) despite the second operating means (operation button 410) being maintained in an operating state (for example, at the timing tBf2-C2 shown in Figure 188), then the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (and thereafter) Even if the second operating means (operating button 410) is kept in an operating state, the second operation-related display (operating-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and the operation acceptance for the second operating means (operating button 410) is not accepted again based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state (see Figure 188). The first operation-related display (operating-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed and multiple operation acceptances for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are permitted. In the state shown (for example, the 7th B reception-accepting state shown in Figures 176 to 178), the operation-promoting light that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is not performed. However, in the state shown (for example, the 4th B reception-accepting state shown in Figure 170) where the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation receptions are permitted for the first operating means, the operation-promoting light that prompts operation on the first operating means (for example, the 4th B operation-promoting light LB4) can be performed. Therefore, it is expected that this will suitably provide a sense of tension when the first operation-related indicator is not displayed and multiple operation receptions are permitted for the first operating means.

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, the timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be kept in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. If a predetermined allowable condition is met while the first operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, timings tBg4A, tBg4B, etc., shown in Figures 189 and 190), a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 64th configuration B64 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001, and the conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (for example, the 7B reception permission state shown in Figure 176), the operation-prompting illumination, which is an image display prompting operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), is not performed. In situations where multiple operation requests are permitted (i.e., when the first operation-related indicator is displayed), there may be two possibilities: the operation-promoting light that prompts operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be activated (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden) (for example, the 4B operation permission state shown in Figure 170); or the operation-promoting light may not be activated (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related indicator is displayed until it is hidden) (for example, the 3B operation permission state shown in Figure 168). This provides the first operating means with a degree of secrecy due to the absence of the operation-promoting light, even when the first operation-related indicator is displayed, and is expected to effectively create a sense of tension.

With this configuration, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is hidden, even if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) becomes permissible to accept an operation, the operation-promoting light emission will not be performed. However, if the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is maintained until the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and predetermined permissible conditions are met, then a situation may reappear where the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and an operation is accepted by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, even if the system becomes capable of accepting an operation on the first operating means (the sword ornament 5001), the operation-prompting illumination is not necessarily performed. Therefore, although the operation is prompted by the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function), a certain degree of secrecy is maintained. This "different method from when the first operation-related indicator is hidden" is expected to effectively create a sense of tension while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410) (i.e., when the second operation-related display is displayed for a period of time), the operation-prompting illumination prompting the user to operate the second operation means (operation button 410) may be activated (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of concealment depending on the type of operation means, which is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, even when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), the operation-prompting illumination that encourages operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) may always be executed (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden). This makes it possible to vary the degree of concealment depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 64th configuration B64 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B64 described above and the various performance examples, it is possible to ensure that when the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related display is not displayed, is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related display is not displayed does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B64 described above and the various performance examples, it may be possible to ensure that when the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, remains in an operating state, a situation may reappear where, while the second operation-related display is not displayed, operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the 64th configuration B64 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is desirable that the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" be made displayable in any of multiple display modes, including the first mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) and the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170). When the first mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) is displayed and multiple operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, operation-promoting light emission prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not performed. When the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) is displayed and multiple operation requests for the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, operation-promoting light emission prompting operation on the sword ornament 5001 (for example, the 4B operation-promoting light emission LB4) is performed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 64th configuration B64 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable to maintain the sword ornament 5001 in an operational state even after the period during which the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed has ended. Even if the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed in either the first mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168) or the second mode (message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) while the operational state is maintained, it is desirable to enable gameplay such that, while the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (or maintained), operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are re-accepted based on the detection of the previously maintained operational state once the predetermined start conditions are met.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B64 described above and the various performance examples, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed and multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, the form of the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" differs depending on whether an operation prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the sword ornament 5001 (see Figure 170, etc.) or whether an operation prompting light to encourage operation on the first operation means is not emitted (see Figures 168 and 172, etc.). However, the post-reception changes when an operation is received may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, the 65th configuration B65 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated When maintained in this state, the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can receive operation requests multiple times, and the first operation-related display means is capable of displaying a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and the first accelerating sound output means is capable of outputting a first operation-related sound (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168, or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170) corresponding to the first operation-related display. The system includes a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), which prompts operation to the second operating means (operation button 410), and which, when the display is in the display state, allows for multiple operation receptions to be made to the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operation-related display (so-called When the operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated button function) is displayed, the system is equipped with a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second accelerating sound corresponding to the second operation-related display (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166), and even when the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), a post-reception change corresponding to that operation may be executed. In this case, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operating state, the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be executed multiple times (see Figure 176). Even when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, if an operation is received by the second operating means (operation button 410), a post-reception change corresponding to this may be executed. In this case, if the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operating state, the second operation Multiple post-reception changes can be performed in response to an operation received by the operation means (operation button 410) (see Figure 174). When the second operation-related display (operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operated state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410). If a situation arises where no operation is received (for example, at the timing tBf2-C2 shown in Figure 188), even if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in the operating state until the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) appears (and even after it appears), the second operation means (operation button 410) will continue to be operated based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. The system is designed so that operation requests to the control button (410) will not be received again (see Figure 188). When the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001, which is the target of the so-called auto-repeated function activation) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound can be output. When the second operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the operation button 410, which is the target of the so-called auto-repeated function activation) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound can be output. Therefore, it is expected that situations where operation requests to the control means are received multiple times will be easily created, thereby providing a suitable sense of tension.

In this case, even if the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is not displayed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, and a situation occurs in which multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are executed, and then a situation occurs in which no operation reception is made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) despite the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) being maintained in an operating state (for example, the timing tBg2-C2 shown in Figures 189 and 190), the first operation-related display ( The first operating means (sword ornament 5001) may be kept in an operating state until (and even after) a state appears in which an operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. If a predetermined allowable condition is met while the first operation-related display (regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed (for example, timings tBg4A, tBg4B, etc., shown in Figures 189 and 190), a situation may reappear in which an operation is received for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B65 described above and the various performance examples, the conditions (predetermined allowable conditions) for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 while the operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 is displayed may, for example, be met based on the result of a jackpot judgment, or they may be met in advance depending on the type of variation pattern, or they may be met based on the performance judgment when operation to the sword ornament 5001 is allowed, or the result of the performance judgment based on operation to the sword ornament 5001, or operation to or release of operation to an operation means other than the sword ornament 5001. The conditions are not particularly limited. Also, for example, in the examples shown in Figures 189 and 190, the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timing tBg2 and the conditions for allowing operation to be received on the sword ornament 5001 at timings tBg4A and tBg4B may be set as the same conditions (predetermined allowable conditions).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 65th configuration B65 and the various performance examples described above, the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function) can be displayed in any of a plurality of display modes, including the first mode (message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) and the second mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170). When the first mode (message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) is displayed, the first operation cues are not output, and when the second mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) is displayed, the first operation cues corresponding to the first operation-related display are output. This provides a sense of secrecy to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) by preventing the operation cues from being executed, depending on the display mode, even when the first operation-related display is shown, thus effectively creating a sense of tension.

With this configuration, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is hidden, even if the first operation prompt sound is output when operation acceptance to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted, if the operation state of the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), which has stopped accepting operations while the "first operation-related display is hidden," is maintained until the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed and predetermined permissible conditions are met, then a situation may reappear where operation acceptance to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is permitted while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, thus it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, even if the system becomes ready to accept an operation from the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output. Therefore, although the operation is prompted by the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function), a certain degree of secrecy is maintained. This "different method from when the first operation-related indicator is hidden" is expected to effectively create a sense of tension while suppressing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed (while operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted, or when operation reception for the second operation means (operation button 410) is permitted), the second operation cues sound may always be output. This makes it possible to vary the degree of secrecy depending on the type of operation means, and is expected to enhance the dramatic effect while adding a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 65th configuration B65 and the various performance examples described above, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, if the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operating state, a situation may occur where the post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 are executed multiple times. However, when a predetermined termination condition is met and operation reception to the sword ornament 5001 is no longer permitted, the situation may end when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed (see Figure 176, etc.), or when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (for example). In the example shown in Figure 168, both situations can occur, such as when timing tBc1 arrives after timing tBc2, and the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the operating state before timing tBc2. However, when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, if the operation button 410 is maintained in the operating state, a situation may occur where multiple post-reception changes are executed in response to the operation button 410. This situation may be terminated automatically when a specific termination condition is met and operation reception for the operation button 410 is no longer permitted, even when the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B65 described above and the various performance examples, it is possible to ensure that when the first operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the first operation-related display is not shown, is kept in an operating state, the situation in which multiple operations are accepted by the first operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state while the first operation-related display is not shown does not recur.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B65 described above and the various performance examples, it may be possible to ensure that when the second operating means, which has ceased to accept operations while the second operation-related display is not displayed, remains in an operating state, a situation may reappear where, while the second operation-related display is not displayed, operations are accepted multiple times for the second operating means based on the detection of the previously maintained operating state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 65th configuration B65 and the various performance examples mentioned above, it is desirable that the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" be made displayable in one of several display modes, including a first mode (message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) and a second mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170). When the first mode (message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not output, and when the first operation-related display is displayed in the second mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170), the first operation prompt sound is output.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 65th configuration B65 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable to maintain the sword ornament 5001 in an operational state even after the period during which the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed has ended. Even if the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed in either the first mode (message display MB5 shown in Figure 172) or the second mode (message display MB3 shown in Figure 168, or message display MB4 shown in Figure 170) while the operational state is maintained, it is desirable to enable gameplay such that, while the first operation-related display "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (or maintained), operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are re-accepted based on the detection of the previously maintained operational state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B65 described above and the various performance examples, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed and multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, the manner of the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" differs depending on whether the first operation prompt sound is output (see Figures 168 and 170, etc.) or whether the operation prompt light prompting operation to the first operation means is not performed (see Figure 172, etc.). However, the post-reception changes when an operation is received may be the same.

Furthermore, for example, the 66th configuration B66 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display (so-called auto) that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be made multiple times. A first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the rapid-fire function), a first promotion light-emitting means capable of executing an operation-promoting light (for example, a 4B operation-promoting light-emitting LB4, etc.) that prompts an operation to the first operation means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the first operation means, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response when an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), and an image display prompting an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the second operation means (operation button 410) receives multiple operation requests. The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and a second promotion light-emitting means capable of executing operation-promoting light (for example, a first B operation-promoting light LB1 or a second B operation-promoting light LB2, etc.) to prompt an operation on the second operation means, and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), operation-promoting light can be executed to prompt an operation on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001). When the second operation-related display (for example, see Figure 170(j), etc.) is displayed and multiple operation requests are allowed for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation-prompting light emission prompting operation to the second operation means can be performed (for example, see Figure 164(j) or Figure 166(j), etc.), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation requests to the second operation means (operation button 410), the interval between the multiple executions of these post-reception changes can be set to a time less than or equal to a specific time (for example, the first B reception-allowed state shown in Figure 164). In other words, in this case, when the operation prompting light appears to prompt operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), there is a sense of expectation that the so-called auto-repeated button function will be suitably activated. Furthermore, when the auto-repeated button function is functioning, it becomes easier to recognize this (because the interval between operation receptions is made relatively short), thus it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

In this case, when the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), there are two possibilities: (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance) an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (see, for example, Figure 170(j)); and (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance) the operation-prompting light is not emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)). In either situation, the interval between multiple operation requests to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) while it is in an operational state (the interval at which a change occurs after operation reception in response to an operation request in the so-called auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation-prompting illumination prompting operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) is always possible (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the second operation-related display and its subsequent disappearance). However, while this operation-prompting illumination is being performed, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the second operation means (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time (for example, the first B reception permission state shown in Figure 164) or to be longer than a specific time (for example, the second B reception permission state shown in Figure 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after acceptance is set to a relatively short interval. This makes it relatively easy to recognize when the auto-repeated button-pressing function is working or when it has stopped working. However, since the operation-promoting light emission is not necessarily performed when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function) is displayed and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), it is expected that a sense of tension can be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes after acceptance can be either relatively short or relatively long. This makes it difficult to recognize relatively early whether the auto-repeated button function is active or has stopped functioning. However, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-repeated button function activation) is displayed and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the second operating means (operating button 410), operation-prompting illumination is always performed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different kind of presentation than that of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B66 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-button function (long-press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, and the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-button function (long-press function) is enabled for the operation button 410, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 66th configuration B66 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable that the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs depending on whether operation-prompting illumination is performed when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) or when operation-prompting illumination is not performed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations of the 66th configuration B66 and the various performance examples described above, the operation-prompting illumination may differ in appearance depending on whether the operation-prompting illumination is performed when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) or when the operation-prompting illumination is not performed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)). However, the changes after receiving an operation request may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the 66th configuration B66 and the configurations described above for each of the performance examples, the interval between receiving an operation request for the sword ornament 5001 may be the same in both cases: when an operation prompting light is emitted to encourage operation of the sword ornament 5001 (see, for example, Figure 170(j)), and when the operation prompting light is not emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B66 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between multiple operation requests (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) to the operation button 410, based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operated state when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, may be set to never be longer than a specific time, but always to be less than or equal to a specific time (such as the 6B reception permission state shown in Figure 174).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B66 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between multiple operation requests (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) to the sword ornament 5001, based on the fact that the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, may be set to never be longer than a specific time, but always to be less than or equal to a specific time (such as the 7B reception permission state shown in Figure 176).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B66 described above and the various performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, the message display MB1 corresponding to the first B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may be set to never be longer than a specific time, but always to be less than or equal to a specific time (such as the first B acceptance state shown in Figure 164).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B66 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state during a period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in a special manner (for example, the message display MB2 corresponding to the second B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may be set to be longer than a specified time or shorter than a specified time (as shown in the second B acceptance state in Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B66 described above and the various performance examples, the first light-emitting means may be used to enable illumination in the operation-promoting light emission that encourages operation of the sword ornament 5001, and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means may be used to enable illumination in the operation-promoting light emission that encourages operation of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B66 described above and the various performance examples, the second light-emitting means may not be illuminated during the period in which the operation-promoting light-emitting function prompting operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. However, the first light-emitting means may be illuminated during the period in which the operation-promoting light-emitting function prompting operation of the operation button 410 is performed (even if operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted).

Furthermore, for example, the 67th configuration B67 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display (so-called auto-repeated button press) that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state while the image display is in the display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be operated multiple times. A first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target of function activation; a first promotion light-emitting means capable of executing an operation-promoting light (e.g., 4B operation-promoting light-emitting LB4, etc.) that prompts an operation to the first operation means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the first operation means; a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410); and an image display prompting an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), and if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the second operation means (operation button 410) may be operated multiple times. The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and a second promotion light-emitting means capable of performing operation-promoting light (for example, a first B operation-promoting light LB1 or a second B operation-promoting light LB2, etc.) to prompt an operation on the second operation means, and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), operation-promoting light can be performed to prompt an operation on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) (for example (See Figure 170(j), etc.) When the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation-prompting light emission prompting operation to the second operation means can be performed (see, for example, Figure 164(j) or Figure 166(j), etc.), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation requests to the second operation means (operation button 410), the interval between the multiple executions of these post-reception changes can be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B reception permission state shown in Figure 164). In other words, in this case, when the operation prompting light appears to prompt operation on the second operating means (operation button 410), there is a sense of expectation that the so-called auto-repeated button function will be suitably activated. Furthermore, when the auto-repeated button function is functioning, it becomes easier to recognize this (because the interval between operation receptions is set to a fixed time), thus it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

In this case, when the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), there are two possibilities: (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance) an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (see, for example, Figure 170(j)); and (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the first operation-related indicator and its disappearance) the operation-prompting light is not emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)). In either situation, the interval between multiple operation requests to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) while it is in an operational state (the interval at which a change occurs after operation requests in response to an operation request in the so-called auto-repeated function) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation-prompting illumination prompting operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) is always possible (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the second operation-related display and its disappearance). However, while this operation-prompting illumination is being performed, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the second operation means (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state may be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B reception permission state shown in Figure 164) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined) (for example, the second B reception permission state shown in Figure 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button press function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after acceptance is set to a certain time (a predetermined time). Therefore, it is possible to recognize relatively early whether the auto-repeated button press function is working or has stopped working. However, since the operation-promoting light is not necessarily performed when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), it is expected that a sense of tension can be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes after acceptance can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined). This makes it difficult to recognize relatively early whether the auto-button rapid-fire function is active or has stopped functioning. However, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-button rapid-fire function activation) is displayed and multiple operation acceptances are permitted for the second operating means (operating button 410), operation-prompting illumination is always performed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different kind of presentation than that of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B67 described above and the various performance examples, there are no particular limitations on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, nor on the length of the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 67th configuration B67 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable that the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs in appearance depending on whether operation-prompting illumination is performed when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j), etc.) or when operation-prompting illumination is not performed (see, for example, Figure 168(j), Figure 172(j), etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 67th configuration B67 and the various performance examples above, the operation-prompting illumination may differ in appearance depending on whether the operation-prompting illumination is performed when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) or when the operation-prompting illumination is not performed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)). However, the changes after operation reception may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 67th configuration B67 and the various performance examples described above, the interval between receiving an operation request for the sword ornament 5001 may be the same in both cases: when an operation prompting light is emitted to encourage operation of the sword ornament 5001 (see, for example, Figure 170(j)), and when the operation prompting light is not emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B67 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between multiple operation requests (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) to the operation button 410, based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operated state when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time), rather than being an indefinite time (a time not predetermined) (such as the 6B reception permission state shown in Figure 174).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 67th configuration B67 and the various performance examples described above, the interval between multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operated state while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time), rather than being an indefinite time (a time not predetermined) (for example, the 7B reception permission state shown in Figure 176).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B67 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state during a period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, the message display MB1 corresponding to the first B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may not be an indefinite time (a time not predetermined), but always a fixed time (a predetermined time) (such as the first B acceptance state shown in Figure 164).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B67 described above and the various performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in a special manner (for example, the message display MB2 corresponding to the second B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may always be set to an undefined time (a time not predetermined) (such as the second B acceptance state shown in Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B67 described above and the various performance examples, the first light-emitting means may be used to enable illumination in the operation-promoting light emission that encourages operation of the sword ornament 5001, and a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means may be used to enable illumination in the operation-promoting light emission that encourages operation of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B67 described above and the various performance examples, the second light-emitting means may not be illuminated during the period in which the operation-prompting light-emitting function prompting operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. However, the first light-emitting means may be illuminated during the period in which the operation-prompting light-emitting function prompting operation of the operation button 410 is performed (even if operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted).

Furthermore, for example, the 68th configuration B68 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display (target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button function) which prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be operated multiple times. A first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as an image display prompting an operation on the first operation means, a first promotion light-emitting means capable of executing an operation-promoting light (e.g., 4B operation-promoting light-emitting LB4, etc.) that prompts an operation on the first operation means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation on the first operation means, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response when an operation is received on the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related display (so-called auto) which is an image display prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the second operation means (operation button 410) can receive multiple operation requests. The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the rapid-fire function), and a second promotion light-emitting means capable of performing operation-promoting light (for example, a first B operation-promoting light LB1 or a second B operation-promoting light LB2, etc.) to prompt an operation on the second operation means, in addition to the second operation-related display, which is an image display prompting an operation on the second operation means. When the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-rapid-fire function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), operation-promoting light can be performed to prompt an operation on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) (see, for example, Figure 170(j), etc.), and the second operation-related display When an operation-related display (regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation-prompting light emission prompting operation to the second operation means can be performed (see, for example, Figure 164(j) and Figure 166(j)). When the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the second operation means (operation button 410) are performed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, a corresponding post-non-operation display (for example, post-non-operation display HB2) can be displayed (see, for example, Figure 166(f) and Figure 167). In other words, in this case, even if the operation state is unintentionally released after the operation prompt light for the second operating means (operation button 410) is activated and the second operating means (operation button 410) is put into the operating state, the player will be able to quickly recognize this, thus providing a sense of security.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), there are two possibilities: (at least for a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (see, for example, Figure 170(j)); and (at least for a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it is hidden) the operation-prompting light is not emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)). However, in either situation, when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) have been executed, there may be no display of a post-non-operation display corresponding to the change in the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) from an operating state to a non-operation state.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation-prompting illumination to encourage operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) is always possible (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the second operation-related display and its disappearance). However, while this operation-prompting illumination is being performed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) remains in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests have been performed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, a corresponding post-non-operation display may be displayed (see, for example, Figure 166(f) or Figure 167).

With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately create a sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). This is because, in addition to making it difficult to recognize early on when the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) ceases to function, the operation-promoting light emission is not necessarily performed when the first operation-related display (the so-called operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated pressing function) is displayed and multiple operation requests to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are permitted. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means (operating button 410), in addition to making it easier to recognize early on when its operation state is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operating button 410) ceases to function, the operation-promoting illumination is always performed when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated pressing function) is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operating means (operating button 410). Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different kind of presentation than that of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001).

Furthermore, when the second operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while it is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to the operation received by the second operating means (operating button 410), there may be two possibilities: either a post-unoperated display is shown (see, for example, Figure 166(f) or Figure 167), or the post-unoperated display is not shown (see, for example, Figure 164(f) or Figure 165). With such a configuration, even with respect to the second operating means (operating button 410), it is not always possible to recognize early when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operating button 410) stops working, thus appropriately creating a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in identifying the 68th configuration B68, we have specified it as the configuration when "the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means" and the configuration when "the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means." However, instead, the configuration may be defined as not requiring the display of the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) or the second operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and as the configuration when "multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means" and the configuration when "multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means," using the same content as described above.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 68th configuration B68 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable that the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs depending on whether operation-prompting illumination is performed when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j), etc.) or when operation-prompting illumination is not performed (see, for example, Figure 168(j), Figure 172(j), etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 68th configuration B68 and the various performance examples above, the operation-prompting illumination differs depending on whether the operation-prompting illumination is performed when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) or when the operation-prompting illumination is not performed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)). However, the changes after receiving an operation request may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 68th configuration B68 and the various performance examples described above, the interval between operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 may be the same in both cases: when an operation prompting light is emitted to prompt an operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)), and when the operation prompting light is emitted is not emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B68 described above and the various performance examples, the first light-emitting means may be used to enable operation of the sword ornament 5001, while the second light-emitting means, different from the first light-emitting means, may be used to enable operation of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B68 described above and the various performance examples, the second light-emitting means may not be illuminated during the period in which the operation-promoting light-emitting signal prompting operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. However, the first light-emitting means may be illuminated during the period in which the operation-promoting light-emitting signal prompting operation of the operation button 410 is performed (even if operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted).

Furthermore, even when the "no operation" indicator is displayed (see Figure 166), it is desirable that the device not emit a new sound simply because the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, if, despite the operation button 410 being held in the operated state, no operation is received for the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the unoperated state, it goes without saying that the "after unoperated" display will not be shown as a result.

Furthermore, in implementing the configurations described in the 68th configuration B68 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, a corresponding post-unoperated display may be shown. However, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, a corresponding post-unoperated display may not be shown.

Furthermore, for example, the 69th configuration B69 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display (sword ornament as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state while the image display is in the display state, operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be made multiple times. A first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to body 5001; a first promotion light-emitting means capable of performing an operation-promoting light (e.g., 4B operation-promoting light-emitting LB4, etc.) that prompts an operation to the first operation means, separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation to the first operation means; a second post-reception change execution means capable of performing a post-reception change in response when an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display (as a target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which is an image display prompting an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the second operation means (operation button 410) may be received multiple times. The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the operation button 410), and a second promotion light-emitting means capable of emitting an operation-promoting light (for example, a first B operation-promoting light LB1 or a second B operation-promoting light LB2, etc.) that prompts an operation to the second operation means, separate from the second operation-related display, which is an image display prompting an operation to the second operation means. When the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are allowed for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), the operation-promoting light to prompt an operation to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) can be emitted (see, for example, Figure 170(j), etc.). When an operation-related display for the operation button 410 is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation-promoting light emission to prompt operation on the second operation means can be performed (see, for example, Figure 164(j) and Figure 166(j)). When the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation requests to the second operation means (operation button 410) are performed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this can trigger the de-input of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (such as the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166(h)) (see, for example, Figure 166). In other words, in this case, even if the operation state is unintentionally released after the operation prompt light for the second operating means (operation button 410) is activated and the second operating means (operation button 410) is put into the operating state, the player will be able to quickly recognize this, thus providing a sense of security.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are allowed for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (see, for example, Figure 170(j)), and (at least for the duration from when the first operation-related display is displayed until when it is hidden) While there are cases where the operation-promoting light emission is not performed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) and Figure 172(j)), in either situation, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) have been performed, and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, it may be avoided by not triggering the change in the sound effect that was audible at that time to an inaudible state.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation-prompting light emission prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) is always possible (at least for a portion of the time between the display of the second operation-related display and its disappearance). However, while this operation-prompting light emission is being performed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) remains in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation attempts on the second operation means (operation button 410) are performed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see, for example, Figure 166(h)).

With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately create a sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). This is because, in addition to making it difficult to recognize early on when the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) ceases to function, the operation-promoting light emission is not necessarily performed when the first operation-related display (the so-called operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the auto-repeated pressing function) is displayed and multiple operation requests to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are permitted. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means (operating button 410), in addition to making it easier to recognize early on when its operation state is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operating button 410) ceases to function, the operation-promoting illumination is always performed when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated pressing function) is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operating means (operating button 410). Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different kind of presentation than that of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001).

Furthermore, when the second operating means (operating button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to the operation received by the second operating means (operating button 410), and the second operating means (operating button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, this may trigger either the inability to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see, for example, Figure 166(h)), or the inability to make at least one of the sound effects in an inaudible state (see, for example, Figure 164(h)). With such a configuration, the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operating button 410) may not necessarily be recognized early when it stops working, thus allowing for a more appropriate sense of tension to be created.

Furthermore, in identifying the 69th configuration B69, we have specified it as the configuration when "the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means" and the configuration when "the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means." However, instead, the configuration may be defined as not requiring the display of the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) or the second operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and as the configuration when "multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means" and the configuration when "multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means," using the same content as described above.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 69th configuration B69 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable that the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs depending on whether operation-prompting illumination is performed when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) or when operation-prompting illumination is not performed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 69th configuration B69 and the various performance examples above, the operation-prompting illumination differs depending on whether the operation-prompting illumination is performed when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)) or when the operation-prompting illumination is not performed (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)). However, the changes after operation reception are the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B69 described above and the various performance examples, the first light-emitting means may be used to enable operation of the sword ornament 5001, and the second light-emitting means, different from the first light-emitting means, may be used to enable operation of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B69 described above and the various performance examples, the second light-emitting means may not be illuminated during the period in which the operation-promoting light-emitting signal prompting operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. However, the first light-emitting means may be illuminated during the period in which the operation-promoting light-emitting signal prompting operation of the operation button 410 is performed (even if operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted).

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to an unoperated state, even if this triggers the deafening of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time, it is desirable that no new sound is output as a result of the unoperated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B69 described above and the various performance examples, if the configuration is set to "make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to an inactive state," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be one of the sounds that appeared as a change after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, if the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of effects are implemented, it goes without saying that if, after a situation occurs where the operation button 410 is not receiving input despite being kept in the activated state, and then the operation button 410 changes from the activated state to the deactivated state, this will not trigger a change in the effect sound, which was audible at that point, to an inaudible state.

Furthermore, in implementing the configurations described in the 69th configuration B69 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, this may trigger the de-audibility of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time. However, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, this may not trigger the de-audibility of any performance sounds that were audible at that time.

Furthermore, for example, the 70th configuration B70 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is kept in an operating state while the image display is in a display state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be operated multiple times. A first operation-related display means capable of displaying an image prompting an operation on the first operation means, a first prompting light-emitting means capable of performing an operation prompting an operation on the first operation means (e.g., a fourth B operation prompting light-emitting LB4, etc.), separate from the first operation-related display which is an image display prompting an operation on the first operation means, a second prompting light-emitting means capable of performing an operation prompting an operation on the first operation means (e.g., a fourth B operation prompting light-emitting LB4, etc.), a second post-reception change execution means capable of performing a post-reception change in response when an operation is received on the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second operation-related table capable of displaying an image display prompting an operation on the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in an operating state while the image display is in the display state, the second operation means (operation button 410) may be received multiple times, and the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) The system includes a display means and a second promotion light-emitting means capable of emitting operation-promoting light (for example, a first B operation-promoting light LB1 or a second B operation-promoting light LB2, etc.) to prompt an operation on the second operating means, in addition to the second operation-related display, which is an image display prompting an operation on the second operating means. When the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are accepted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), operation-promoting light can be emitted to prompt an operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (see, for example, Figure 170(j), etc.), and when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are accepted for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), operation-promoting light can be emitted to prompt an operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (see, for example, Figure 170(j), etc.), operation-promoting light can be emitted to prompt an operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) When multiple operation requests are permitted, operation prompting light emission can be performed to encourage operation on the second operation means (see, for example, Figures 164(j) and 166(j)). If the second operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation request to the second operation means (operation button 410), and then deactivated again, this can trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)). Therefore, it can be expected that the second operation means (operation button 410) has been deactivated again, indicating that an operation request has been received (see, for example, timing tBa2-C1 in Figure 164).

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), operation prompting illumination is performed (for at least a portion of the time from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it disappears) to prompt operation on the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) (see, for example, Figure 170(j)), and (from when the first operation-related display is displayed until it disappears) While there are cases where the operation-promoting light emission is not performed (at least partially) (see, for example, Figure 168(j) and Figure 172(j)), in either situation, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation reception, and then the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is returned to an operating state from the deactivated state, it may be avoided by not deactivating the sound effect that was audible at that time.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation-prompting light emission prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) is always possible (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until it disappears). However, if the operation-prompting light emission is being performed and a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation attempt on the second operation means (operation button 410), and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated, and then deactivated again, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)).

With this configuration, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is interrupted and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated again, it is difficult to recognize that the input has been properly received. In addition, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated pressing function) is displayed and multiple operation acceptances for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) are permitted, operation-promoting illumination is not necessarily performed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be suitably provided when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is activated. In contrast, with respect to the second operating means, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operating button 410) is interrupted and then the second operating means is operated again, it is made easier to recognize that the input has been properly received. Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated pressing function) is displayed and multiple operation acceptances for the second operating means (operating button 410) are permitted, operation-prompting illumination is always performed. Therefore, it is expected that the decline in the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operating button 410) is interrupted will be suppressed.

Furthermore, in realizing the 70th configuration B70 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to an operation to the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 is then changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, and then changed back to an operated state from the non-operated state, and only if the post-reception output sound (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 or the first post-reception output sound Sα7) as one of the post-reception changes is audible at that time, then at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 or the first post-reception output sound Sα7) may be made inaudible. In this case, a sound other than the post-reception output sound may be made inaudible. With this configuration, it is expected that the decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the automatic rapid-fire function (long-press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is interrupted will be suppressed, while also effectively providing a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in identifying the 70th configuration B70, we have specified it as the configuration when "the first operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means" and the configuration when "the second operation-related indicator is displayed and multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means." However, instead, the configuration may be defined as not requiring the display of the first operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) or the second operation-related indicator (the operation-related indicator for the operation button 410 as the target of activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and as the configuration when "multiple operation requests are permitted for the first operation means" and the configuration when "multiple operation requests are permitted for the second operation means," using the same content as described above.

Furthermore, in realizing the 70th configuration B70 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, when the operation button 410 is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation on the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated again, even if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that point, it is possible to either trigger the deactivation of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that point (see timing tBa2-C1 in Figure 164, timing tBf2-C1 in Figure 174, etc.) or not deactivate the performance sound that was audible at that point (see timing tBb2-C1 in Figure 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the 70th configuration B70 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, if the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, and while a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation received by the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is returned to the operation state from the non-operation state, and at that point the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible, this may be used as a trigger to make the performance sound that was audible at that point in an inaudible state (see timing tBf2-C1 in Figure 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the instruction is to "make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state when the operation button 410 is operated again," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appeared as one of the changes after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B70 described above and the various performance examples, the first light-emitting means may be used to enable operation of the sword ornament 5001, while the second light-emitting means, different from the first light-emitting means, may be used to enable operation of the operation button 410.

Furthermore, in realizing the 70th configuration B70 and the configurations described above for each of the performance examples, the second light-emitting means may not be illuminated during the period in which the operation-promoting light-emitting function prompting operation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed. However, the first light-emitting means may be illuminated during the period in which the operation-promoting light-emitting function prompting operation of the operation button 410 is performed (even if operation reception for the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted).

Furthermore, in realizing the 70th configuration B70 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, it is desirable that the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs depending on whether an operation-prompting light is emitted to encourage operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j), etc.) or whether the operation-prompting light is emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j), Figure 172(j), etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B70 described above and the various performance examples, when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed, the form of the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs depending on whether an operation prompting illumination is performed to prompt operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (see, for example, Figure 170(j), etc.) or whether the operation prompting illumination is not performed (see, for example, Figure 168(j), Figure 172(j), etc.). However, the post-reception changes when an operation is received may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the 70th configuration B70 and the configurations described above for each example of the performance, the interval at which an operation is received for the sword ornament 5001 may be the same in both cases: when an operation prompting light is emitted to prompt an operation on the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) when the "operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 170(j)), and when the operation prompting light is emitted is not emitted (see, for example, Figure 168(j) or Figure 172(j)).

Furthermore, for example, the 71st configuration B71 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operation can be performed multiple times. A first operation-related display means capable of displaying related displays (operation-related displays relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), a first prompting sound output means capable of outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168, or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170) when the first operation-related display is displayed, a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410), and a display prompting an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410), and maintaining the second operation means (operation button 410) in an operated state when the display is in the displayed state. If the second operation means (operation button 410) is held, the operation can be accepted multiple times, and the second operation related display means is capable of displaying a second operation related display (an operation related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and the second promotion sound output means is capable of outputting a second operation promotion sound (for example, the first B operation related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166, etc.) corresponding to the second operation related display, and the first operation related display (an operation related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is provided, and the operation can be accepted multiple times for the second operation means (operation button 410), and the second operation related display means is capable of displaying a second operation related display (an operation related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function). When the display is shown, the first operation cues can be output (see, for example, Figure 168(g) and Figure 170(g)), when the second operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is shown, the second operation cues can be output (see, for example, Figure 164(g) and Figure 166(g)), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410), the interval between the multiple executions of such post-reception changes may be set to a time less than or equal to a specific time (for example, the first B reception-allowing state shown in Figure 164). In other words, in this case, when the second operation prompt sound prompting operation of the second operating means (operation button 410) is output, there is a sense of expectation that the so-called auto-repeated button function will be suitably activated. Furthermore, when the auto-repeated button function is functioning, it becomes easier to recognize this (by making the interval between operation receptions relatively short), thus allowing for the suitable maintenance of the game's enjoyment.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there are two possibilities: either the first operation cues are output (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)), or the first operation cues are not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). In either case, while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple operation requests to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (the interval at which a change occurs after receiving an operation request in response to the operation request in the so-called auto-repeated function) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed, the second operation cues are always output. However, while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) (the interval at which operation reception is automatically performed) may be set to be less than or equal to a specific time (for example, the first B reception-allowed state shown in Figure 164) or to be longer than a specific time (for example, the second B reception-allowed state shown in Figure 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function is enabled for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after reception is made relatively short. This makes it possible to recognize relatively early whether the auto-repeated button-pressing function is working or has stopped working. However, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-repeated button function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes after acceptance can be either relatively short or relatively long. This makes it difficult to recognize relatively early whether the auto-repeated button function is active or has stopped functioning. However, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-repeated button function activation) is displayed, a second operation cues sound is always output. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different kind of presentation than that of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001).

Furthermore, in realizing the 71st configuration B71 and the configurations described above for each example of performance, the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, and the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the operation button 410, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 71st configuration B71 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable that the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs depending on whether the first operation cues are output when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) or when the first operation cues are not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 71st configuration B71 and the various performance examples above, the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" may differ in appearance depending on whether the first operation cues are output when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) or when the first operation cues are not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). However, the changes after operation reception may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the 71st configuration B71 and the configurations described above for each of the performance examples, the interval between receiving an operation request for the sword ornament 5001 may be the same in both cases: when a first operation prompting sound is output (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)), and when the first operation prompting sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the 71st configuration B71 and the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of effects, the interval between multiple operation requests to the operation button 410 (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is not displayed may be set to never be longer than a specific time, but always to be less than or equal to a specific time (such as the 6B reception permission state shown in Figure 174).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B71 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between multiple operation requests (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) to the sword ornament 5001, based on the fact that the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operational state when the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, may be set to never be longer than a specific time, but always to be less than or equal to a specific time (such as the 7B reception permission state shown in Figure 176).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B71 described above and the various performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, the message display MB1 corresponding to the first B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may be set to never be longer than a specific time, but always to be less than or equal to a specific time (such as the first B acceptance state shown in Figure 164).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B71 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state during a period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in a special manner (for example, the message display MB2 corresponding to the second B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may be set to be longer than a specified time or shorter than a specified time (as shown in the second B acceptance state in Figure 166).

Furthermore, for example, the 72nd configuration B72 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operation related A first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function; a first prompting sound output means capable of outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168, or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170, etc.) when the first operation-related display is displayed; a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display prompting an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the display is in the display state, the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in the operation state. In addition, the system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which allows for multiple operation receptions for the second operation means (operation button 410), and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation-related sound (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) corresponding to the second operation-related display when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. When indicated, the first operation cues can be output (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)), and when the second operation-related indicator (an operation-related indicator relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation cues can be output (see, for example, Figure 164(g) or Figure 166(g)), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple post-reception changes are performed in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410), the interval between the multiple executions of the post-reception changes can be set to a certain time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B reception-allowed state shown in Figure 164). In other words, in this case, when the second operation prompt sound prompting operation on the second operating means (operation button 410) is output, there is a sense of expectation that the so-called auto-repeated button function will be suitably activated. Furthermore, when the auto-repeated button function is functioning, it becomes easier to recognize this (because the interval between operation receptions is set to a fixed time), thus it can be expected that the enjoyment of the game will be suitably maintained.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there are two possibilities: either the first operation accelerating sound is output (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)), or the first operation accelerating sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). In either case, while the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state, the interval between multiple operation requests to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) (the interval at which a change occurs after receiving an operation request in response to the operation request in the so-called auto-repeated function) may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time).

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation cues are always output. However, while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the interval between multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) (for example, the first B reception-allowed state shown in Figure 164) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined) (for example, the second B reception-allowed state shown in Figure 166).

With this configuration, when the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function is activated for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), the interval between changes after reception is set to a certain time (a predetermined time). Therefore, it is possible to recognize relatively early whether the auto-repeated button-pressing function is functioning or whether the auto-repeated button-pressing function has stopped functioning. However, when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button-pressing function) is displayed, the first operation prompt sound is not necessarily output. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game. In contrast, when the so-called auto-button rapid-fire function is enabled for the second operating means (operating button 410), the interval between changes after acceptance can be either a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined). This makes it difficult to recognize relatively early whether the auto-button rapid-fire function is active or has stopped functioning. However, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target of the auto-button rapid-fire function activation) is displayed, a second operation cues sound is always output. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different kind of presentation than that of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B72 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the sword ornament 5001, and the interval between inputs and changes when the so-called auto-repeated function (long-press function) is enabled for the operation button 410, may be a fixed time (a predetermined time) or an undefined time (a time not predetermined).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 72nd configuration B72 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable that the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs depending on whether the first operation cues are output when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) or when the first operation cues are not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 72nd configuration B72 and the various performance examples above, the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" may differ in appearance depending on whether the first operation cues are output when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) or when the first operation cues are not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). However, the changes after operation reception are the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B72 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between operations being received for the sword ornament 5001 may be the same in both cases: when a first operation prompting sound is output (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)), and when the first operation prompting sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B72 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between multiple operation requests (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) to the operation button 410, based on the operation button 410 being maintained in an operated state when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time) rather than an indefinite time (a time not predetermined) (such as the 6B reception permission state shown in Figure 174).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 72nd configuration B72 and the various performance examples described above, the interval between multiple operation requests to the sword ornament 5001 (the interval at which operation requests are automatically received) when the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in an operated state while the "operation-related display for the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed may be set to a fixed time (a predetermined time), rather than being an indefinite time (a time not predetermined) (for example, the 7B reception permission state shown in Figure 176).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B72 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state during a period when the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in a specific manner (for example, the message display MB1 corresponding to the first B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may not be an indefinite time (a time not predetermined), but always a fixed time (a predetermined time) (such as the first B acceptance state shown in Figure 164).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B72 described above and the various performance examples, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operational state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function" is displayed in a special manner (for example, the message display MB2 corresponding to the second B acceptance state), the interval between multiple operation receptions for the operation button 410 (the interval between automatic operation receptions) may always be set to an undefined time (a time not predetermined) (such as the second B acceptance state shown in Figure 166).

Furthermore, for example, the 73rd configuration B73 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display (so-called O) that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be made multiple times. A first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the rapid-fire button function; a first accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a first operation accelerating sound corresponding to the first operation-related display (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168 or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170) when the first operation-related display is displayed; a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in accordance with the reception when an operation is received for the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display prompting an operation for the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the display is in the display state and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the second operation means (operation button 4 10) The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation accelerating sound corresponding to the second operation-related display (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and the first operation accelerating sound can be output when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. (See, for example, Figure 168(g) and Figure 170(g)), when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation cues can be output (see, for example, Figure 164(g) and Figure 166(g)), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) are performed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-unoperation display (for example, post-unoperation display HB2) may be displayed (see, for example, Figure 166(f) and Figure 167). In other words, in this case, even if the second operation prompt sound (operation button 410) is output to encourage operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) and the operation state is entered, the player can quickly recognize this, thus providing a sense of security.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, there are two possibilities: the first operation accelerating sound may be output (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)), and the first operation accelerating sound may not be output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). However, in either situation, if the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) have been executed, it may be necessary to avoid displaying a post-non-operation display corresponding to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) changing from an operating state to a non-operating state.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed, the second operation cues are always output. However, while the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed, and multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, a corresponding post-unoperated display may be displayed (see, for example, Figure 166(f) or Figure 167).

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize early on when the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) ceases to function. In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated pressing function) is displayed, the first operation cues are not necessarily output. Therefore, it is possible to suitably provide a sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). In contrast, with respect to the second operating means (operating button 410), in addition to making it easier to recognize early on when its operation state is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operating button 410) ceases to function, a second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated pressing function) is displayed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different kind of presentation than that of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 73rd configuration B73 and the various performance examples described above, when the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operating state to an unoperated state while the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the second operating means (operation button 410) have been executed, it may be possible to have both a post-unoperation display corresponding to this change (see, for example, Figure 166(f) or Figure 167) and a post-unoperation display not be displayed (see, for example, Figure 164(f) or Figure 165). With such a configuration, even with respect to the second operating means (operation button 410), it is not always possible to recognize early when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) stops working, thus allowing for a suitable sense of tension to be created.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 73rd configuration B73 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable that the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs depending on whether the first operation cues are output when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) or when the first operation cues are not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 73rd configuration B73 and the various performance examples above, the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" may differ in appearance depending on whether the first operation cues are output when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) or when the first operation cues are not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). However, the changes after operation reception may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B73 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between operations being received for the sword ornament 5001 may be the same in both cases: when a first operation prompting sound is output (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)), and when the first operation prompting sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 73rd configuration B73 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, a corresponding post-unoperated display may be shown. However, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, a corresponding post-unoperated display may not be shown.

Furthermore, in implementing the 73rd configuration B73 and the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of effects, it is desirable that, when the "no operation" display is shown (see Figure 166), the operation button 410 does not output a new sound as a result of changing from an operated state to a non-operated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, if, despite the operation button 410 being maintained in the operated state, no operation is received for the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 changes from the operated state to the unoperated state, it goes without saying that the "after unoperated" display will not be shown as a result.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 73rd configuration B73 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, a corresponding post-unoperated display may be shown. However, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, a corresponding post-unoperated display may not be shown.

Furthermore, for example, the 74th configuration B74 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a first operation-related display (a so-called auto-repeated button function) that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) can be operated multiple times. A first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display relating to the sword ornament 5001 as the target of activation; a first accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a first operation accelerating sound corresponding to the first operation-related display (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168, or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170) when the first operation-related display is displayed; a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410); and a display prompting operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the display is in the display state and the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state, the operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410) multiple times The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to an operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation-related sound corresponding to the second operation-related display (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to a sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and the first operation-related sound can be output when the first operation-related display (for example, Figures 168(g) and 170(g), etc.) is displayed, and the first operation-related sound can be output when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to a sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and the first operation-related sound can be output (for example, Figures 168(g) and 170(g), etc.) (See Figure 164(g) and Figure 166(g), etc.) When the second operation-related display (an operation-related display relating to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation-prompting sound can be output (see, for example, Figure 164(g) and Figure 166(g)), and when the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the second operation means (operation button 410) are performed, and the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to a non-operated state, this can be used as a trigger to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (such as the second B post-reception output sound Sα2 shown in Figure 166(h)) inaudible (see, for example, Figure 166, etc.). In other words, in this case, even if the second operation prompt sound (operation button 410) is output to encourage operation of the second operation means (operation button 410) and the operation state is entered, the player can quickly recognize this, thus providing a sense of security.

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed, there are two possibilities: the first operation accelerating sound may be output (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)), and the first operation accelerating sound may not be output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). However, in either situation, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in an operating state and multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception to the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) have been executed, and the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) changes from an operating state to a non-operating state, it may be avoided in order to use this as a trigger to make the sound effect, which was audible at that time, inaudible.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound is always output. However, while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, if the second operation means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, this may trigger the system to make at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see, for example, Figure 166(h)).

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize early on when the operation state of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) ceases to function. In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated pressing function) is displayed, the first operation cues are not necessarily output. Therefore, it is possible to suitably provide a sense of tension both before and during operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). In contrast, with respect to the second operating means (operating button 410), in addition to making it easier to recognize early on when its operation state is released and the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operating button 410) ceases to function, a second operation prompt sound is always output when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated pressing function) is displayed. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension will be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different kind of presentation than that of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 74th configuration B74 and the various performance examples described above, when the second operating means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes have been performed in response to the operation received by the second operating means (operation button 410), and the second operating means (operation button 410) changes from an operated state to an unoperated state, this can trigger either the inability to make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state (see, for example, Figure 166(h), etc.), or the non-inaudible state of at least one of the performance sounds (see, for example, Figure 164(h), etc.). With such a configuration, the second operating means (operation button 410) may not necessarily be able to recognize early when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operation button 410) stops working, thus allowing for a suitable sense of tension to be created.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 74th configuration B74 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable that the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs depending on whether the first operation cues are output when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) or when the first operation cues are not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 74th configuration B74 and the various performance examples above, the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" may differ in appearance depending on whether the first operation cues are output when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) or when the first operation cues are not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). However, the changes after operation reception may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the 74th configuration B74 and the configurations described above for each of the performance examples, the interval between receiving an operation request for the sword ornament 5001 may be the same in both cases: when a first operation prompting sound is output (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)), and when the first operation prompting sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in implementing the configurations described in the 74th configuration B74 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, this may trigger the deaudibility of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time (see, for example, Figure 166(h)). However, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, this may not trigger the deaudibility of the performance sound that was audible at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B74 described above and the various performance examples, it is desirable that when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to an unoperated state, and this triggers the inability to output any new sound that was audible at that time, even if it is necessary to make at least one of the performance sounds in an inaudible state, no new sound is output as a result of the unoperated state (see Figure 166).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B74 described above and the various performance examples, if the configuration is set to "make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state (a state in which a change has occurred after reception) to an inactive state," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be one of the sounds that appeared as a change after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, if the configurations described in the above-mentioned examples of effects are implemented, it goes without saying that if, after a situation occurs where the operation button 410 is not receiving input despite being kept in the activated state, and then the operation button 410 changes from the activated state to the deactivated state, this will not trigger a change in the effect sound, which was audible at that point, to an inaudible state.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 74th configuration B74 and the various performance examples described above, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is displayed, this may trigger the de-audibility of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time. However, when the operation button 410 changes from an operated state to an unoperated state while the "operation-related display regarding the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function" is not displayed, this may not trigger the de-audibility of any performance sounds that were audible at that time.

Furthermore, for example, the 75th configuration B75 includes a first operating means (sword ornament 5001) and a second operating means (operation button 410) that can be operated by the player, a determination means that performs a determination, a reward granting means that can grant a reward to the player based on a predetermined result obtained by the determination means, a first post-reception change execution means that can execute a post-reception change in response to an operation reception made to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and a display that prompts operation to the first operating means (sword ornament 5001), and when the display is in the display state and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is maintained in the operation state, the first operation-related display (sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) can receive multiple operation receptions from the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). A first operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display related to the first operation-related display; a first prompting sound output means capable of outputting a first operation prompting sound corresponding to the first operation-related display (for example, the third B operation-related output sound OB3 shown in Figure 168, or the fourth B operation-related output sound OB4 shown in Figure 170) when the first operation-related display is displayed; a second post-reception change execution means capable of executing a post-reception change in response to an operation received by the second operation means (operation button 410); and a second operation-related display (target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) which is a display prompting an operation to the second operation means (operation button 410), and when the display is in the display state, the second operation means (operation button 410) may be operated multiple times if the second operation means (operation button 410) is kept in the operated state. The system includes a second operation-related display means capable of displaying an operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function), and a second accelerating sound output means capable of outputting a second operation accelerating sound corresponding to the second operation-related display (for example, the first B operation-related output sound OB1 shown in Figure 164, or the second B operation-related output sound OB2 shown in Figure 166) when the second operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, and when the first operation-related display (an operation-related display related to the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the first operation accelerating sound can be output (for example, see Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g), etc.), and the second operation-related display (related to the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed. When the operation-related display is shown, the second operation cues can be output (see, for example, Figure 164(g) and Figure 166(g)). If the second operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated while the post-operation change corresponding to the operation reception is occurring, and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is returned to the operation state, this can trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-operation output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)). Therefore, it can be expected that the second operation means (operation button 410) has been returned to the operation state and that operation reception has occurred (see, for example, timing tBa2-C1 in Figure 164).

In this case, when the first operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button function) is displayed, there are two possibilities: the first operation cues are output (see, for example, Figure 168(g) and Figure 170(g)), and the first operation cues are not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). However, in either situation, if the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation received by the first operation means (sword ornament 5001), and then the first operation means (sword ornament 5001) is returned to an operational state from the deactivated state, it may be avoided by not deactivating the sound effect that was audible at that time.

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed and multiple operation attempts are permitted for the second operation means (operation button 410), operation-prompting light emission prompting operation on the second operation means (operation button 410) is always possible (at least for a portion of the time from when the second operation-related display is displayed until it disappears). However, if the operation-prompting light emission is being performed and a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation attempt on the second operation means (operation button 410), and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated, and then deactivated again, this may trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)).

Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation prompt sound is always output. However, while the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operation button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated function) is displayed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is maintained in an operated state, and while multiple post-reception changes in response to the operation reception of the second operation means (operation button 410) have been executed, the second operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated, and then the second operation means (operation button 410) is deactivated again. This can trigger the deactivation of at least one of the sound effects that was audible at that time (for example, the first post-reception output sound Sα1 shown in Figure 164(h)).

With this configuration, when the auto-repeated pressing function (long-press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is interrupted and the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is operated again, it is difficult to recognize that the input has been properly received. In addition, when the first operation-related display (operation-related display concerning the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated pressing function) is displayed, the first operation cues are not necessarily output. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be suitably provided both before and during operation of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001). In contrast, with respect to the second operating means, when the auto-repeated button press function (long-press function) for the second operating means (operating button 410) is interrupted and then the second operating means is operated again, it is easier to recognize that the input has been properly received. Furthermore, when the second operation-related display (the operation-related display concerning the operating button 410 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function) is displayed, a second operation-prompting sound is always output. Therefore, it is expected that a sense of tension can be provided while suitably maintaining the enjoyment of the game through a different kind of presentation than that of the first operating means (sword ornament 5001).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 75th configuration B75 and the various performance examples described above, if the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state and multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation button 410 have been executed, and then the operation button 410 is changed from an operated state to a non-operated state, and then changed back to an operated state from the non-operated state, only if the post-reception output sound (e.g., the first post-reception output sound Sα1, etc.) as one of the post-reception changes is audible at that time, this may trigger the deafening of at least one of the performance sounds (e.g., the first post-reception output sound Sα1, etc.) that was audible at that time. In this case, a sound other than the post-reception output sound may be deafened. With such a configuration, it is expected that the decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the auto-repeated button function (long-press function) for the first operating means (sword ornament 5001) is interrupted will be suppressed, while also suitably providing a sense of tension.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B75 described above and the various performance examples, when the operation button 410 is deactivated while a post-reception change is occurring in response to an operation on the operation button 410, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated again, even if the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible at that point, it may be possible to either trigger the deactivation of at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that point (see timing tBa2-C1 in Figure 164, timing tBf2-C1 in Figure 174, etc.) or not deactivate the performance sound that was audible at that point (see timing tBb2-C1 in Figure 166, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B75 described above and the various performance examples, if the "operation-related display for the operation button 410 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is not displayed, and while a post-reception change has occurred in response to an operation on the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is then deactivated, and then the operation button 410 is deactivated again. If, at that point, the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes, is audible, this may be used as a trigger to deactivate the performance sound that was audible at that point (see timing tBf2-C1 in Figure 174, etc.).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, if the instruction is to "make at least one of the performance sounds that was audible at that time in an inaudible state when the operation button 410 is operated again," the performance sound to be made inaudible does not have to be a sound that appeared as one of the changes after reception. For example, it could be another performance sound such as background music, or it could be any performance sound that is audible at that time.

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 75th configuration B75 and the various performance examples described above, it is desirable that the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" differs depending on whether the first operation cues are output when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for enabling the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) or when the first operation cues are not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Furthermore, in realizing the configurations described in the 75th configuration B75 and the various performance examples above, the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" may differ in appearance depending on whether the first operation cues are output when the "operation-related display regarding the sword ornament 5001 as the target for activation of the so-called auto-repeated button press function" is displayed (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)) or when the first operation cues are not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)). However, the changes after operation reception may be the same.

Furthermore, in realizing the configuration B75 described above and the various performance examples, the interval between operations being received for the sword ornament 5001 may be the same in both cases: when a first operation prompting sound is output (see, for example, Figure 168(g) or Figure 170(g)), and when the first operation prompting sound is not output (see, for example, Figure 172(g)).

Although the present invention has been described with reference to several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. Various improvements and design modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention, as described below.

In the reception period described in the above-mentioned example of presentation, the method for preventing the display of the same post-reception display as when an operation is received (i.e., preventing the same post-reception change from occurring) when no operation is received on the control unit may involve not only "preventing the presentation itself related to the reception period," but also "not displaying the same post-reception display as when an operation is received (i.e., preventing the same post-reception change from occurring), but displaying a different post-reception display (i.e., causing a different post-reception change)."

In the reception period described in the above-mentioned example of performance, if multiple operating parts are provided for which operation reception is permitted, these operating parts may be provided as separate operating units, or as different parts within a single operating unit.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned examples of presentations, the display that mimics the control panel only needs to be an image display in which the relevant part is represented as an image; other parts besides the control panel may also be represented within the same image display.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example of presentation, depending on the type of reception period, when the reception period begins, a reception permission sound may be output in one of several different ways, each indicating a different level of expectation (the expectation of receiving a bonus such as a big win). In reception periods where the reception permission sound is output in such ways, it may be possible (though not mandatory) to ensure that the reception permission sound becomes inaudible if an operation is performed on a specific control unit while the reception permission sound is being output. In other words, in this case, performing an operation early after the reception period begins would risk failing to recognize the expectation level information provided by the reception permission sound early on. Therefore, it is expected that this could discourage careless gameplay, such as rapid button presses, before the reception period begins.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned examples of presentations, depending on the type of reception period, the reception permission sound may always be output in the same manner when the reception period begins. However, in reception periods where the reception permission sound is output in this manner, it may be possible to configure the system so that, if an operation is performed on a specific control unit while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound may be rendered inaudible, or it may not be rendered inaudible (this is not a mandatory configuration). That is, in this case, if the reception permission sound is not rendered inaudible, the player can recognize that the reception permission sound was not of the type that suggests a high probability of winning, thus potentially preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Also, if the reception permission sound is rendered inaudible, there is no disadvantage to operating it early since it is not of the type that suggests a high probability of winning. However, the player will be aware of the possibility that it was a reception permission sound that suggests a high probability of winning, so it is possible that this will discourage the aforementioned careless gameplay even with this type of reception permission sound.

For example, in the above-mentioned examples of automatic performance functions, a message such as "Auto button set" may be displayed, but this display is not necessarily required. In particular, if the pachinko machine 1 is not designed to be set to automatic performance mode, but rather is implemented as a machine where the automatic performance function can always be enabled and the process of "setting to performance state" itself is not implemented, it is desirable that the message "Auto button set" is not displayed. In a pachinko machine 1 that does not have the process of "setting to performance state," the automatic performance function may be enabled for a period of time and disabled for a period of time, depending on the type of performance that allows player intervention.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned examples of presentations, the "operation-related display (e.g., display of a mock image)" can only appear when the system is in a state where operation reception to the control unit is permitted (reception permission period), or when such operation reception is permitted (reception permission period). Therefore, it is sufficient that, at the very least, the reception permission period must occur when the "operation-related display" is shown, or that the system is in a permitted state at the time of its display. Consequently, it is also possible that the reception permission period may end before the "operation-related display" disappears while it is displayed.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned examples of presentations, the "imitation image" only needs to be an image that prompts the player to take action; it does not necessarily have to be an image that mimics the control device being operated, such as an arrow image that points downwards and moves up and down.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned examples of gameplay, the term "player operation (action)" to be detected is not limited to actions directly performed by the player, such as pressing buttons or drawing swords, as described above. It also includes "player contact actions on specific parts" detected by touch sensors, and "player actions within a specific space" detected by non-contact sensors. In short, any device equipped with one or more receiving means (operation units) that accept player actions (pressing actions, drawing swords, touch actions, non-contact actions, etc.) is sufficient.

Furthermore, when employing the automatic performance function in each of the above-mentioned performance examples, the timing for automatically generating (automatically receiving) an operation request within the operation validity period may be set to any timing within the operation validity period. In order to appropriately provide the player with an opportunity to perform an operation, it is desirable that an operation request be automatically generated (automatically receiving) when no operation is detected until a predetermined timing that occurs after more than half of the operation validity period has elapsed since it began, and that the post-operation performance be started based on this automatically generated operation request. In this sense, it is most desirable that an operation request be automatically generated (automatically receiving) when no operation is detected until the remaining time within the operation validity period becomes 1 frame, and that the post-operation performance be started based on this automatically generated operation request. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned performance examples related to the automatic performance function, if the bar display is not hidden but maintained even after the validity period has ended, it is desirable to perform an effect that changes the manner of the operation means that is the target of the operation (for example, vibration or turning off the LED) in accordance with the timing when the validity period ends. This is expected to prevent players from mistakenly believing that the validity period is still ongoing, even if the bar display is not hidden but continues to be shown.

In the above-mentioned examples of effects, when "period," "time," or "state" is mentioned, these may refer to the smallest controllable unit of "period," "time," or "state," including, for example, the period, time, or state of one frame.

Furthermore, the "post-reception change (post-reception display)" corresponding to the acceptance period (operation-permitted state) for each of the above-mentioned examples of presentations and their variations does not necessarily have to suggest the probability of winning a jackpot. For example, it may occur as an acceptance period for determining whether or not the probability variation function is activated within the execution period of a jackpot game, and be executed as the post-reception display, or it may occur as a simple acceptance period within a mini-game that has nothing to do with suggesting the probability of winning a jackpot, and be executed as the post-reception display. Alternatively, it may occur based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions during various interval periods, and be executed as the post-reception display. Therefore, the acceptance period for the above-mentioned examples of presentations and their variations does not necessarily have to occur within the period in which the symbol variation is being executed. Also, even when such a post-reception display that does not suggest the probability of winning is displayed, multiple modes of display for the post-reception display may be prepared, and it may be displayed in one of these multiple modes. Furthermore, the acceptance periods (operational permission states) in the above-mentioned examples of presentations and their variations may not be finite periods with predetermined set times, but may include types of acceptance periods (operational permission states) that continue indefinitely unless predetermined conditions unrelated to the passage of time are met.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned examples of effects, "BGM effect sound" and "BGM playback sound" refer to sounds that can be audibly output based on the start of a winning combination, and that can be output in a way that maintains their audible state across multiple symbol changes.

The image representing the control-receiving part and the surrounding decorative image for its periphery may be prepared separately as image data, and then displayed as a combined, integrated image.

In the example shown in Figure 144, when an opportunity to operate is granted to one operating means, there are two cases: when the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed (Figures 144(a) and (c)), and when a "special button image BMGb" with a different shape is displayed (Figures 144(b) and (d)). However, when the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed (Figures 144(a) and (c)), an opportunity to operate is granted to the first operating means (first operating receiver), and when the "special button image BMGb" is displayed (Figures 144(b) and (d)), an opportunity to operate is granted to a second operating means (second operating receiver) that is different from the first operating means (first operating receiver).

In the examples described above, the components (operating means) provided as the target of operation may be those requiring a pressing operation (pressing motion) (such as buttons), those requiring an insertion/removal operation (inserting/removing motion) (such as sword decorations), or those requiring non-contact or touch-based player actions (such as proximity sensors).

The peripheral decoration image SSG is intended not to mimic the peripheral decoration actually provided on the periphery of the "operation receiving part that is the object to which the opportunity for operation is granted." However, it is sufficient if at least a part of it does not mimic the peripheral decoration, and it is acceptable if there are parts that mimic the peripheral decoration.

If a specific image TG is displayed within the validity period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily need to be displayed.

Regarding the "automatic reception animation (reception period during which the automatic button function is activated)" described in Figure 144 and subsequent figures, any of the implementation methods for the "automatic reception animation" exemplified earlier may be adopted. Similarly, any of the aforementioned implementation methods may be adopted for how the mock images and gauge images are displayed during the automatic reception animation. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception animation occurs, depending on the type of animation state at the time of occurrence, the type of the reception animation (post-operation animation) itself, or the conditions under which the reception animation occurred, there are cases where the same post-operation animation is executed even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period (the "automatic animation function" is activated), and cases where the post-operation animation is not executed if there is no operation by the player within the valid period (the "automatic animation function" is not activated). The timing of activation of the automatic animation function may be a predetermined timing within the valid period, the timing of the end of the valid period, or a timing a short time after the end of the valid period.

The acceptance period (operation permission state) exemplified in each of the above performance examples does not necessarily have to occur within the performance pattern corresponding to the result of the jackpot judgment (performance judgment). For example, it may occur not during the period in which the symbols are changing, but during a period in which the symbols are not changing (for example, during the period in which a jackpot game is being played, or during various interval periods, etc.) (based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions).

Furthermore, the acceptance period exemplified in each of the above-mentioned performance examples does not necessarily have to be defined as "the expiration of a predetermined time value." The acceptance period may end when a predetermined termination condition is met (for example, when 10 game balls are received into the grand prize slot).

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects, the disappearance EF effect (disappearance effect image, duplicate effect display, etc.) can be used in common (executed in the same effect manner) for multiple reception periods with different types of post-reception effects (conversation announcements that suggest the level of expectation depending on which conversation appears, movable effects that suggest the level of expectation depending on whether or not a movable object moves, cut-in announcements that suggest the level of expectation depending on which form of cut-in display appears, etc.), thereby making it possible to recognize that the operation reception (operation reception) has been properly performed (the state in which the reception period has ended). In other words, since post-reception effects differ depending on the type of reception period, it is difficult to recognize whether the content of the effect is being performed within the reception period or as a result of the reception period ending. In this regard, by providing a disappearance EF effect that can appear in a common (same) effect manner when the reception period ends, regardless of the type of reception period, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the operation reception (operation reception) has been properly performed and that the post-reception effect is being executed. However, as a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), it is sufficient if a common disappearance EF effect (disappearance effect image, duplicate effect display, etc.) is executed in multiple types of post-reception effects. For example, a dedicated disappearance EF effect (duplicate effect display) that can only be executed when a specific type of post-reception effect occurs may be prepared.

The above-mentioned examples of gameplay sequences, unless otherwise specified, describe gameplay under normal conditions and do not represent situations where any abnormal conditions occur.

The acceptance status for each of the above-mentioned examples of presentations does not necessarily have to be determined by a judgment, such as occurring after a certain amount of time has passed. Furthermore, the display after acceptance does not necessarily have to indicate the result of the judgment, such as a mini-game during a jackpot.

The term "摸 (摸画像)" used in explaining the various examples of visual effects described above is synonymous with "模 (模画像)."

The "multiple operation allowed state" mentioned above may also refer to a state where the selected object (e.g., a character) changes each time an operation is performed.

Furthermore, the aforementioned "auto-tap function" can be implemented as a rapid-fire mode where new post-reception changes occur at regular intervals simply by maintaining the operation state, or as a long-press mode where, if the operation state is maintained, one post-reception change corresponding to the operation is not terminated but continues (the execution time is extended).

Furthermore, the items described as "desirable" in the above-mentioned examples of presentation, variations, and notes merely describe the additional effects and benefits that may arise when such a configuration is included; it goes without saying that such a configuration is not necessarily required.

In other words, although the embodiment shows the application to a pachinko machine 1 as the gaming machine, it is not limited to this. It may also be applied to pachislot machines or gaming machines that combine a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, and in this case as well, the same effects and advantages can be achieved.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special reserved number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special reserved number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General prize entry 2002 First start 2003 Gate section 2004 Second start 2005 Large prize entry

Claims (1)

A first operating means and a second operating means that can be operated by the player,
A determination means for making a determination,
A reward granting means that can grant a reward to a player based on the determination obtained by the determination means,
A first operation- related display means capable of displaying a first operation-related display which is an operation instruction for the first operating means ,
A second operation- related display means capable of displaying a second operation-related display which is an operation instruction for the second operating means ,
Equipped with ,
In a gaming machine in which, when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is shown, multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the first operation means may occur, and when the second operation means is maintained in an operating state while the second operation-related display is shown, multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation received by the second operation means may occur,
If the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception will occur and the second operation-related display will be displayed. If the second operation-related display is then hidden, there will be no new situation where, within a predetermined time or less after the second operation-related display is hidden, the situation will be reverted to one where, if the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes in response to operation reception will occur and the second operation-related display will be displayed.
If the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, and multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception occur and the first operation-related display is displayed, then the first operation-related display may be hidden within a predetermined time or less after the first operation-related display is hidden, in which case the situation will be renewed in which multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception occur and the first operation-related display is displayed when the first operating means is maintained in an operating state.
When the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception occur and the first operation-related display is displayed, and the first operating means is maintained in an operating state, there is a first post-reception change that can occur at time intervals of a specific time or less as one of the multiple post-reception changes that can occur in response to the operation reception of the first operating means,
When the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, multiple post-reception changes corresponding to the operation reception occur and the second operation-related display is displayed, and the second operating means is maintained in an operating state, the post-reception changes that can occur multiple times in response to the operation reception to the second operating means include a second post-reception change that can occur at time intervals of less than or equal to the specified time, and a third post-reception change that can occur at time intervals longer than the specified time.
moreover,
Even when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state without the first operation-related display being shown, the first post-reception change may occur multiple times as a post-reception change in response to an operation being received by the first operation means. The interval at which the first post-reception change occurs when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state without the first operation-related display being shown is the same as when the first post-reception change occurs multiple times when the first operation means is maintained in an operating state while the first operation-related display is shown.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.